Dell PowerConnect 5524 Manuels -> Accéder au site Dell -> Accéder aux CODES PROMO et Bons de réduction Dell -> Voir d'autres manuels Dell Revenir à l'accueil

ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->

 

 

 

PowerConnect 5524
 
 
 
 
 
CLI Reference Guide    
 
 
 
 
Command Line Interface Reference Guide    
 
 
 
 
Command Line Interface Transition Guide    
 
 
 
 
Dell PowerConnect RPS720, MPS600, MPS1000, and MPS 1U Shelf Getting Started Guide    
 
 
 
 
Getting Started Guide    
 
 More Languages
 
 
 
Release notes    
 
 
 
 
Systems User’s Guide    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CLI Transition Guide    
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici

 

Autres manuels :

Dell

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 10-May-2013 11:17  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-690-M..> 10-May-2013 11:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 11:16  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-360-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 10-May-2013 11:14  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-450-M..> 10-May-2013 11:13  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:13  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:12  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 10-May-2013 11:12  5.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 10-May-2013 11:10  6.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 10-May-2013 11:10  6.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:30  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M 

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 08-May-2013 10:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:54  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42  3.1M

Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage

Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel

Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation

Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1

Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes

Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme

Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213

Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation

Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL

Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn

Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400

Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n

Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up

Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620

Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION

Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel

Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels

Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel

Dell-Client-Management-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue

Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel

Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel

Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Mobile-Jamz

Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels

Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route

DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK

Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580

Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L

Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu

Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais

Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide

Dell-Inspiron-Manuels

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700

Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280

Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Acceder-au-site-Dell

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais

Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX

Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3

AlienwareAurora-R4

lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2

Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair

Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

DellDimension1100Series

Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire

alienwareX51

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Code-Promo-Dell.htm     04-Feb-2013 09:17  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Sony-NV-U83N-Manuels..> 02-Feb-2013 09:00  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12   92K  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm    29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51  3.3M  

[TXT]

 DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06   12M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R3.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R4.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 alienwareX51.htm        18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  906K 

FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGCover.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 – FOR PROOF ONLY Template Last Updated -03/06/2010 Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series System User Guide Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548PNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your system. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, KACE™, FlexAddress™ and Vostro™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™ and Celeron® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD® is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, and AMD Sempron™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, MS-DOS® and Windows Vista® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat Enterprise Linux® and Enterprise Linux® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Novell® is a registered trademark and SUSE ™ is a trademark of Novell Inc. in the United States and other countries. Oracle® is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® and XenMotion® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter®, and vSphere® are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMWare, Inc. in the United States or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Models PC5524, PC5524P, PC5548 and PC5548P March 2013 A07FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 3 Contents 1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Stack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Power over Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Green Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Head of Line Blocking Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Back Pressure Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Auto-Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 MDI/MDIX Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 MAC Address Supported Features . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Layer 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Broadcast Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 4 Contents VLAN Supported Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Spanning Tree Protocol Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Quality of Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Device Management Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Port Profile (CLI Macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Protected Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 iSCSI Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Proprietary Protocol Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Device Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Device Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 4 Stacking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Stack Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Stack Members and Unit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 5 5 Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Configuration Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting the Switch to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . 59 Booting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuring the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Configuration Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . 61 6 Advanced Switch Configuration . . . . . . . 67 Using the CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Accessing the Device Through the CLI . . . . . . . . . 71 Retrieving an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Security Management and Password Configuration . . 75 Configuring Login Banners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Startup Menu Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7 Using Dell OpenManage Administrator. . 87 Starting the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Understanding the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Using the Switch Administrator Buttons . . . . . . . . 91 Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Common GUI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 6 Contents GUI Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 8 Network Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ACL Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Proprietary Protocol Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Time Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Dot1x Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 9 Configuring System Information . . . . . . 155 General Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 IP Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Management Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 File Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Stack Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 7 sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 10 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Green Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Protected Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Port Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 LAG Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 11 Address Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Static Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Dynamic Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 12 GARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GARP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 GARP Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 8 Contents 13 Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 435 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 STP Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 STP LAG Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Rapid Spanning Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Multiple Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 14 VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Virtual LAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 LAGs Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Protocol Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Protocol Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 GVRP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Private VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Voice VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 15 Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Link Aggregation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 LACP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 9 LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 16 Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Multicast Support Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Global Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Bridge Multicast Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Bridge Multicast Forward All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Unregistered Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Multicast TV VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 17 LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 LLDP Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 LLDP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 LLDP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 LLDP MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Neighbors Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 18 Dynamic ARP Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 561 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 10 Contents Dynamic ARP Inspection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries . . . . . . . . . . . 566 VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Trusted Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 19 DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 DHCP Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 20 iSCSI Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Optimizing iSCSI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 iSCSI Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Configuring iSCSI Using CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 21 Statistics/RMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Table Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 RMON Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 11 22 Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 QoS Features and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 QoS Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 QoS Advanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 QoS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 12 ContentsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 13 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 1 Preface PowerConnect 5524/5548 and PowerConnect 5524P/5548P are stackable, advanced multi-layer devices. This guide contains the information needed for installing, configuring, and maintaining the device through the web-based management system, called the OpenManage Switch Administrator. This guide describes how to configure each system through the web-based management system and through CLI commands. The CLI Reference Guide, which is available on the Documentation CD, provides additional information about the CLI commands. 14 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGPrefix.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 15 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Features This section describes the features of the PowerConnect 5524/P and 5548/P switches. For a complete list of all updated device features, see the latest software version Release Notes. This section contains the following topics: • IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support • Stack Support • Power over Ethernet • Green Ethernet • Head of Line Blocking Prevention • Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) • Back Pressure Support • Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) • Auto-Negotiation • MDI/MDIX Support • MAC Address Supported Features • Layer 2 Features • IGMP Snooping • Port Mirroring • Broadcast Storm Control • VLAN Supported Features • Spanning Tree Protocol Features • Link Aggregation • Quality of Service Features • Quality of Service Features • Device Management Features16 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Security Features • DHCP Server • Protected Ports • iSCSI Optimization • Proprietary Protocol Filtering IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support The device functions as an IPv6-compliant host, as well as an IPv4 host (also known as dual stack). This enables device operation in a pure IPv6 network as well as in a combined IPv4/IPv6 network. For more information, see "IP Addressing" on page 209. Stack Support The system supports up to eight units with two fixed HDMI stacking ports. The HDMI ports are 1.3a specification, Category 2 High Speed cables, 340 MHz (10.2 Gbit/s). it is recommended to use HDMI cable version 1.4 The stacking feature supports the following features: • Fast-link failover • Software auto-synch. • Improved response time to events, such as master failover • Auto-numbering algorithm when choosing unit number For more information, see "Stacking Overview" on page 45 Power over Ethernet Power over Ethernet (PoE) provides power to devices over existing LAN cabling, without updating or modifying the network infrastructure. When PoE is used, the network devices do not have to be placed next to a power source. PoE can be used in the following applications: • IP Phones • Wireless Access PointsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 17 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • IP Gateways • PDAs • Audio and video remote monitoring For more information, see "Power over Ethernet" on page 162. Green Ethernet Green Ethernet, also known as Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE), is an effort to make networking equipment environmentally friendly, by reducing the power usage of Ethernet connections. The Short-Reach method, which reduces power over Ethernet cables shorter than 40m, is supported by the device. For more information, see "Green Ethernet Configuration" on page 390. Head of Line Blocking Prevention Head of Line (HOL) blocking results in traffic delays and frame loss caused by traffic competing for the same egress port resources. To prevent HOL blocking, the device queues packets, and packets at the head of the queue are forwarded before packets at the end of the queue. Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) Flow control enables lower-speed devices to communicate with higher-speed devices, by requesting that the higher-speed device refrain from sending packets. Transmissions are temporarily halted to prevent buffer overflows. For more information, see "Flow Control" on page 386. Back Pressure Support On half-duplex links, the receiving port prevents buffer overflows by occupying the link so that it is unavailable for additional traffic. For more information, see "Protected Ports" on page 394.18 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) VCTdetects and reports copper link cabling faults, such as open cables and cable shorts. For more information, see "Diagnostics" on page 255. Auto-Negotiation Auto-negotiation enables the device to advertise modes of operation. The auto-negotiation function enables an exchange of information between two devices that share a point-to-point link segment, and automatically configures both devices to take maximum advantage of their transmission capabilities. The PowerConnect 5500 series enhances auto-negotiation by providing port advertisement. Port advertisement enables the system administrator to configure the port speeds that are advertised. For more information, see "Port Configuration" on page 403 or "LAG Configuration" on page 409. MDI/MDIX Support Standard wiring for end stations is known as Media-Dependent Interface (MDI), and standard wiring for hubs and switches is known as MediaDependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX). If auto-negotiation is enabled, the device automatically detects whether the cable connected to an RJ-45 port is MDIX (crossed) or MDI (straight). This enables both types to be used interchangeably. If auto-negotiation is not enabled, only MDI (straight) cables can be used. For more information, see "Port Configuration" on page 403 or "LAG Configuration" on page 409. MAC Address Supported Features MAC Address Capacity Support The device supports up to 16K MAC addresses and it reserves specific MAC addresses for system use.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 19 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Static MAC Entries MAC entries can be manually entered in the Bridging Table, as an alternative to learning them from incoming frames. These user-defined entries are not subject to aging, and are preserved across resets and reboots. For more information, see "Static Addresses" on page 424. Self-Learning MAC Addresses The device enables controlled MAC address learning from incoming packets. The MAC addresses are stored in the Bridging Table. For more information, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427. Automatic Aging for MAC Addresses MAC addresses from which no traffic is received for a given period, are aged out. This prevents the Bridging Table from overflowing. For more information, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427. VLAN-Aware MAC-Based Switching The device always performs VLAN-aware bridging. Classic bridging (IEEE802.1D), in which frames are forwarded based only on their destination MAC address, is not performed. However, a similar functionality can be configured for untagged frames. Frames addressed to a destination MAC address that is not associated with any port are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN. MAC Multicast Support Multicast service is a limited Broadcast service that enables one-to-many and many-to-many connections for information distribution. In Layer 2 Multicast service, a single frame is addressed to a specific Multicast address, from which copies of the frame are transmitted to the relevant ports. When Multicast groups are statically enabled, you can set the destination port of registered groups, as well as define the behavior of unregistered Multicast frames. For more information, see "Multicast" on page 516.20 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Layer 2 Features IGMP Snooping Internet Group Membership Protocol (IGMP) Snooping examines IGMP frame contents, when they are forwarded by the device from work stations to an upstream Multicast router. From the frame, the device identifies work stations configured for Multicast sessions, and which Multicast routers are sending Multicast frames. The IGMP Querier simulates the behavior of a Multicast router. This enables snooping of the Layer 2 Multicast domain even if there is no Multicast router. For more information, see "IGMP Snooping" on page 527. Port Mirroring Port mirroring monitors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from a monitored port to a monitoring port. Users specify which target port receives copies of all traffic passing through a specified source port. For more information, see "Port Mirroring" on page 417. Broadcast Storm Control Storm Control enables limiting the number of Multicast and Broadcast frames accepted by and forwarded by the device. When Layer 2 frames are forwarded, Broadcast and Multicast frames are flooded to all ports on the relevant VLAN. This occupies bandwidth, and loads all nodes connected on all ports. For more information, see "Storm Control" on page 414.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 21 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Supported Features VLAN Support VLANs are collections of switching ports that comprise a single Broadcast domain. Packets are classified as belonging to a VLAN, based on either the VLAN tag or on a combination of the ingress port and packet contents. Packets sharing common attributes can be grouped in the same VLAN. For more information, see "VLANs" on page 466. Port-Based Virtual LANs (VLANs) Port-based VLANs classify incoming packets to VLANs, based on their ingress port. For more information, see "Defining VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands" on page 473. Full 802.1Q VLAN Tagging Compliance IEEE 802.1Q defines an architecture for virtual, bridged LANs, the services provided in VLANs, and the protocols and algorithms involved in the provision of these services. For more information, see "Virtual LAN Overview" on page 467. GVRP Support GARP VLAN Registration Protocol(GVRP) provides IEEE 802.1Qcompliant VLAN pruning and dynamic VLAN creation. When GVRP is enabled, the device registers and propagates VLAN membership on all ports that are part of the active underlying Spanning Tree Protocol topology. For more information, see "GVRP Parameters" on page 490. Voice VLAN Voice VLAN enables network administrators to enhance VoIP service by configuring ports to carry IP voice traffic from IP phones on a specific VLAN. VoIP traffic has a preconfigured OUI prefix in the source MAC address. Network administrators can configure VLANs from which voice IP traffic is 22 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY forwarded. Non-VoIP traffic is dropped from the Voice VLAN in Auto-Voice VLAN Secure mode. Voice VLAN also provides QoS to VoIP, ensuring that the quality of voice does not deteriorate if the IP traffic is received unevenly. For more information, see "Voice VLAN" on page 498. Guest VLAN Guest VLAN provides limited network access to unauthorized ports. If a port is denied network access via port-based authorization, but the Guest VLAN is enabled, the port receives limited network access through the Guest VLAN. For more information, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132. Private VLAN The Private VLAN feature provides Layer 2 isolation between ports that share the same Broadcast domain, or in other words, it creates a point-tomultipoint Broadcast domain. The ports can be located anywhere in the Layer 2 network (compared to the Protected Ports feature, where the ports must be in the same stack). For more information, see "Private VLAN" on page 494. Multicast TV VLAN The Multicast TV VLAN feature provides the ability to supply multicast transmissions to Layer 2-isolated subscribers, without replicating the multicast transmissions for each subscriber VLAN. The subscribers are the only receivers of the multicast transmissions. For more information, see "Multicast TV VLAN" on page 535. Spanning Tree Protocol Features Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802.1d Spanning tree is a standard Layer 2 switch requirement that enables bridges to automatically prevent and resolve Layer 2 forwarding loops. Switches exchange configuration messages using specifically-formatted frames, and selectively enable and disable forwarding on ports. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 23 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Fast Link STP can take 30–60 seconds to converge. During this time, STP detects possible loops, enabling time for status changes to propagate and for relevant devices to respond. This period of 30-60 seconds is considered too long a response time for many applications. The Fast Link option bypasses this delay, and can be used in network topologies, where forwarding loops do not occur. For more information on enabling Fast Link for ports and LAGs, see "STP Port Settings" on page 442 or "Static Addresses" on page 424. IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree takes 30–60 seconds for each host to decide whether its ports are actively forwarding traffic. Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) detects uses of network topologies to enable faster convergence, without creating forwarding loops. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) operation maps VLANs into STP instances. MSTP provides a different load balancing scenario. Packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along different paths within MSTP Regions (MST Regions). Regions are one or more MSTP bridges by which frames can be transmitted. The standard lets administrators assign VLAN traffic to unique paths. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. STP BPDU Guard BPDU Guard is used as a security mechanism, to protect the network from invalid configurations. BPDU Guard is usually used either when fast link ports (ports connected to clients) are enabled or when the STP feature is disabled. When it is enabled on a port, the port is shut down if a BPDU message is received and an appropriate SNMP trap is generated. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434.24 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Link Aggregation Up to 32 Aggregated Links may be defined, each with up to eight member ports, to form a single Link Aggregated Group (LAG). This enables: • Fault tolerance protection from physical link disruption • Higher bandwidth connections • Improved bandwidth granularity • High bandwidth server connectivity A LAG is composed of ports with the same speed, set to full-duplex operation. For more information, see "LAG Configuration" on page 409. Link Aggregation and LACP LACP uses peer exchanges across links to determine, on an ongoing basis, the aggregation capability of various links, and continuously provides the maximum level of aggregation capability achievable between a given pair of devices. LACP automatically determines, configures, binds, and monitors the port binding within the system. For more information, see "Link Aggregation" on page 508. BootP and DHCP Clients DHCP enables additional setup parameters to be received from a network server upon system startup. DHCP service is an on-going process. DHCP is an extension of BootP. For more information, see "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. Quality of Service Features Class of Service 802.1p Support The IEEE 802.1p signaling technique is an OSI Layer 2 standard for marking and prioritizing network traffic at the data link/MAC sub-layer. 802.1p traffic is classified and sent to the destination. No bandwidth reservations or limits Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 25 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY are established or enforced. 802.1p is a spin-off of the 802.1Q (VLANs) standard. 802.1p establishes eight levels of priority, similar to the IP Precedence IP Header bit-field. Advanced QoS Frames that match an ACL and were permitted entrance are implicitly labeled with the name of the ACL that permitted their entrance. Advanced mode QoS actions defined in network policies can then be applied to these flows. The switch can set DSCP values and map IPv6 DSCP to egress queues in the same way it does for IPv4. The switch detects IPv6 frames by the IPv6 ethertype. For more information about Advanced QoS, see "QoS Advanced Mode" on page 678. TCP Congestion Avoidance The TCP Congestion Avoidance feature activates an algorithm that breaks up or prevents TCP global synchronization on a congested node, where the congestion is due to multiple sources sending packets with the same byte count. For more information, see "The following is an example of the CLI commands:" on page 666. Device Management Features SNMP Alarms and Trap Logs The system logs events with severity codes and timestamps. Events are sent as SNMP traps to a Trap Recipient List. For more information, see "SNMP" on page 314.26 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP Versions 1, 2, and 3 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) over the UDP/IP protocol controls access to the system. A list of community entries is defined, each consisting of a community string and its access privileges. There are three levels of SNMP security: read-only, read-write, and super. Only a super user can access the Community table. For more information, see "SNMP" on page 314. Web-Based Management Web-based management enables managing the system from any web browser. The system contains an Embedded Web Server (EWS) that serves HTML pages, through which the system can be monitored and configured. The system internally converts web-based input into configuration commands, MIB variable settings, and other management-related settings. Management IP Address Conflict Notification This feature validates the uniqueness of the switch's IP address, whether it is assigned manually or through DHCP. If the IP address is not unique, the switch performs actions according to the address type. If the IP address is static, see more information about this in "IPv4 Interface Parameters" on page 210. If the IP address is dynamic, see more information about this in"DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. Flow Monitoring (sflow) The switch supports statistics collection, using a sampling technology called sFlow that is based on RFC 3176. The sFlow sampling technology is embedded within the switch, and provides the ability to continuously monitor traffic flows on some or all the interfaces simultaneously. For more information, see "sFlow" on page 375. Configuration File Download and Upload The device configuration is stored in a configuration file. The configuration file includes both system-wide and port-specific device configuration. The system can display configuration files as a collection of CLI commands that are stored and manipulated as text files.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 27 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Auto-Update of Configuration/Image File This feature facilitates installation of new devices. When you enable the various auto-update options, the device automatically downloads a new image or configuration file when it receives its IP address from a TFTP server, and automatically reboots, using the image or configuration file it received. For more information, see "Auto-Update/Configuration Feature" on page 338. TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol The device supports boot image, software, and configuration upload/download via TFTP. USB File Transfer Protocol The device supports boot image, software, and configuration upload/download via USB. Remote Monitoring Remote Monitoring (RMON) is an extension to SNMP that provides comprehensive network traffic monitoring capabilities. RMON is a standard MIB that defines MAC-layer statistics and control objects, enabling real-time information to be captured across the entire network. For more information, see "Statistics/RMON" on page 606. Command Line Interface Command Line Interface (CLI) syntax and semantics conform as much as possible to common, industry standards. CLI is composed of mandatory and optional elements. The CLI interpreter provides command and keyword completion to assist users and save typing. Syslog Syslog is a protocol that enables event notifications to be sent to a set of remote servers, where they can be stored, examined, and acted upon. The system sends notifications of significant events in real time, and keeps a record of these events for after-the-fact usage. For more information on Syslog, see "Logs" on page 195.28 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNTP The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) assures accurate network Ethernet Switch clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. Time sources are prioritized by strata. Strata define the distance from the reference clock. The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. For more information, see "Time Synchronization" on page 169. Domain Name System Domain Name System (DNS) converts user-defined domain names into IP addresses. Each time a domain name is assigned, the DNS service translates the name into a numeric IP address. For example, www.ipexample.com is translated into 192.87.56.2. DNS servers maintain domain name databases containing their corresponding IP addresses. For more information, see "Domain Name System" on page 242. 802.1ab (LLDP-MED) The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables network managers to troubleshoot, and enhances network management by discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. LLDP discovers network neighbors by standardizing methods for network devices to advertise themselves to other systems, and to store discovered information. The multiple advertisement sets are sent in the packet Type Length Value (TLV) field. LLDP devices must support chassis and port ID advertisement, as well as system name, system ID, system description, and system capability advertisements. LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) increases network flexibility by enabling various IP systems to co-exist on a single network LLDP. It provides detailed network topology information, emergency call service via IP phone location information, and troubleshooting information. For more information, see "LLDP" on page 540.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 29 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Security Features SSL Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure transactions of data through privacy, authentication, and data integrity. It relies upon certificates and public and private keys. Port-Based Authentication (Dot1x) Port-based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port basis via an external server. Only authenticated and approved system users can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) enables network administrators to automatically assign users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication. For more information, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132. Locked Port Support Locked Port increases network security by limiting access on a specific port to users with specific MAC addresses. These addresses are either manually defined or learned on that port. When a frame is seen on a locked port, and the frame source MAC address is not tied to that port, the protection mechanism is invoked. For more information, see "Port Security" on page 98. RADIUS Client RADIUS is a client/server-based protocol. A RADIUS server maintains a user database that contains per-user authentication information, such as user name, password, and accounting information. RADIUS Accounting This feature enables recording device management sessions (Telnet, serial, and WEB but not SNMP) and/or 802.1x authentication sessions.30 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Due to the complexity of 802.1x setup and configuration, many mistakes can be made that might cause loss of connectivity or incorrect behavior. The 802.1x Monitor mode enables applying 802.1x functionality to the switch, with all necessary RADIUS and/or domain servers active, without actually taking any action that may cause unexpected behavior. In this way, the user can test the 802.1x setup before actually applying it. For more information, see "RADIUS" on page 291. SSH Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to a device. SSH version 2 is currently supported. The SSH server feature enables an SSH client to establish a secure, encrypted connection with a device. This connection provides functionality that is similar to an inbound telnet connection. SSH uses RSA and DSA Public Key cryptography for device connections and authentication. For more information, see "Security Management and Password Configuration" on page 75. TACACS+ TACACS+ provides centralized security for validation of users accessing the device. TACACS+ provides a centralized, user management system, while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes. For more information, see "TACACS+" on page 282. Password Management Password management provides increased network security and improved password control. Passwords for SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, and SNMP access are assigned security features. For more information, see "Password Management" on page 286. The switch provides the ability to demand strong passwords, meaning that they must contain both upper and lower-case letters, numbers, and punctuation marks. For more information, see "Password Management" on page 286.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 31 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Access Control Lists (ACL) Access Control Lists (ACL) enable network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress ports. Packets entering an ingress port with an active ACL, are either admitted or denied entry and the ingress port is disabled. If they are denied entry, the user can disable the port. Dynamic ACL/Dynamic Policy Assignment (DACL/DPA) The network administrator can specify the user's ACL in the RADIUS server. After successful authentication, the user is assigned that ACL. For more information, see "Network Security" on page 97. DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping expands network security by providing firewall security between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. By enabling DHCP Snooping, network administrators can differentiate between trusted interfaces connected to end-users or DHCP servers and untrusted interfaces located beyond the network firewall. For more information, see "DHCP Snooping" on page 573. ARP Inspection Dynamic ARP inspection is a security feature that validates ARP packets in a network. It intercepts, logs, and discards ARP packets with invalid IP-to-MAC address bindings. This capability protects the network from certain man-inthe-middle attacks. Port Profile (CLI Macro) Macros provide a convenient way to save and share a common configuration. A macro is a set of CLI commands with a unique name. When a macro is applied to a port, the CLI commands contained within it are executed and added to the Running Configuration file. For more information, see "Dynamic ARP Inspection" on page 560.32 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Server Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides a means of passing configuration information (including the IP address of a TFTP server and a configuration file name) to hosts on a TCP/IP network. The switch can serve as a DHCP server or client. For more information on the device serving as a DHCP server, see "DHCP Server" on page 297. For more information on the device serving as a DHCP client, see "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. Protected Ports The Protected Ports feature provides Layer 2 isolation between interfaces (Ethernet ports and LAGs) that share the same Broadcast domain (VLAN) with other interfaces. For more information, see "Protected Ports" on page 394. iSCSI Optimization iSCSI optimization provides the iSCSI flows with specific priority over other network traffic. In addition, the feature provides monitoring of iSCSI sessions. For more information, see "iSCSI Optimization" on page 594. Proprietary Protocol Filtering This feature enables user control over the filtering of packets with proprietary protocols such as CDP, VTP, DTP, UDLD, PaGP, and SSTP. The user can select any combination of the protocols to be filtered, for example: CDP and VTP and UDLD. For more information, see "Network Security" on page 97. DHCP Relay and Option 82 A DHCP relay agent detects DHCP Broadcasts from DHCP clients and relays them to DHCP servers that may reside on different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 33 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The relay agent information option (Option 82) in the DHCP protocol enables a DHCP relay agent to send additional client information, upon requesting an IP address. Option 82 specifies the relaying switch's MAC address, the port identifier, and the VLAN that forwarded the packet. For more information, see "DHCP Relay" on page 586. Identifying a Switch via LED The switch provides the ability to turn on a LED (through the GUI interface) on a specific unit or on all units in a stack for a specific length of time. For more information, see Unit Identification (Location).34 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 35 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Hardware Description This section describes PowerConnect 5500 hardware. It contains the following topics: • Device Models • Device Structure • LED Definitions • Power Supplies36 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Device Models The PowerConnect 5500 switches combine versatility with minimal management requirements. This series includes the following device types: • PowerConnect 5524 — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports • PowerConnect 5524P (with PoE) — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports, along with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) support • PowerConnect 5548 — Provides 48 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports • PowerConnect 5548P (with PoE) — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports, along with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) support Each of these devices provides, in addition to the above ports, two HDMI ports, two SPF+ ports, an RS-232 console port, and a USB port, as shown in Figure 3-1. NOTE: 10/100/1000Mbps Baset-T ports are also known as Gigabit ports or G ports. Device Structure This section describes the structure of the devices. It contains the following topics: • Front Panel • Buttons and LEDs • Back Panel • Ventilation System • System LEDs • Port LEDsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 37 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Front Panel Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the PowerConnect 5548 device with its various ports labelled. The PowerConnect 5524 device from the PowerConnect 5548 device in that there are 24 G ports and not 48. Figure 3-2 shows the buttons/LEDs on the right side in greater detail. Figure 3-1. PowerConnect 5548 Ports The following ports are found on the devices. • 24/48 G Ports • Two XG Ports (also known as Small Form Factor Plugable (SFP)+ Ports) These are 10 Gigabit ports, designated as 1000Base-X-SFP+. The SFP+ ports are fiber transceivers designated as 10000 Base-SX or LX. They include TWSI (Two-Wire Serial Interface) and internal EPROM. • RS-232 Console Port This port is used for a terminal connection for debugging and software downloads. The default baud rate is 9,600 bps. The baud rate can be configured from 2400 bps up to 115,200 bps. • Two HDMI Ports The HDMI ports are 1.3a specification, category 2 high-speed cables, 340 MHz (10.2 Gbit/s). They are used for stacking purposes. Console SPF+ Ports USB Port HDMI Ports Giga Ports (even numbered) Port Giga Ports (odd numbered)38 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY NOTE: it is recommended to use HDMI cable version 1.4 • Single USB Port This port is used for firmware upgrade from a USB device. Buttons and LEDs LEDs on Front Panel Figure 3-2 shows the extreme, right-hand part of the front panel, which contains buttons and LEDs, in addition to ports. Figure 3-2. Button/LED Panel These LEDs are described in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. Reset Button The PowerConnect 5500 switches have a reset button, located on the front panel that is used for manual reset (reboot) of the device. The single reset circuit of the switch is activated by power-up or low-voltage conditions. Power Status Fan RPS Reset Stacking Unit ID Master Port LEDs Console PortDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 39 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The Reset button does not extend beyond the unit’s front, and it must be activated with a pin. Back Panel The back panel of the non-PoE models, shown in Figure 3-3, contains a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) connector, Location LED, and power connector. The back panel of the PoE models, shown in Figure 3-4, contains a Modular Power Supply (MPS) connector, Location LED, power connector, and two fan outlets. Figure 3-3. PowerConnect 5524/48 Back Panel Figure 3-4. PowerConnect 5524/48/P Back Panel The elements on the back panel are used as follows: • Locator LED — This LED is lit when the Unit Identification feature is selected. See "Unit Identification (Location)" on page 373 for more information about this feature. • RPS/MPS — Connector for auxiliary power supply. See "Power Supplies" on page 44 for more information. RPS A/C Power Supply Locator Locator MPS Fan Fan A/C Power Supply40 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • A/C Power Supply — Connector for AC power supply. See "Power Supplies" on page 44 for more information. • Fans — Fan outlets. See "Ventilation System" on page 40 for more information. Ventilation System The PowerConnect 5500/P switches have two built-in fans. Operation can be verified by observing the LED that indicates if one or more fans are faulty (see Table 3-1). The fan outlets are shown in Figure 3-4. LED Definitions The front panel contains light emitting diodes(LEDs) that indicate the status of links, power supplies, fans, and system diagnostics. These are described below. System LEDs The system LEDs of the PowerConnect 5500 devices provide information about the power supplies, fans, thermal conditions, and diagnostics. Figure 3-2 shows the location of the system LEDS on the device. Table 3-1 describes the meaning of the colors of the system LEDs. Table 3-1. System LED Indicators LED Color Description Power Supply (PWR) Green Static The switch is turned on. Green Flashing The Locator function is enabled. Off The switch is turned off. Status Green Static The switch is operating normally. Green Flashing The switch is booting. Red Static A critical system error has occurred. Red Flashing A non-critical system error has occurred.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 41 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stacking No. Indicates the unit ID of the device in the stack. Modular/Redundan cy Power Supply (MPS/RPS) Green Static The MPS/RPS is currently operating. Red Static The MPS/RPS failed. Off The MPS/RPS is not plugged in. Locator Green Flashing Locator function is enabled. Green Static Locator function is disabled. Master Green Static The device is a master unit. Off The device is not a master unit. Fan (FAN) Green Static All device fans are operating normally. Red Static One or more of the device fans are not operating. Table 3-1. System LED Indicators (Continued) LED Color Description 42 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port LEDs Gigabit Ports Each Giga port has two LEDs associated with it. The speed/link (LNK) LED is located on the left side of the port, while the activity/PoE LED is located on the right side of the port. The activity/PoE LED is labelled ACT in non-PoE devices, and is labelled PoE in PoE-enabled devices, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5. Giga Port LEDs Table 3-2 describes the LED indications for the Gigabit ports: Table 3-2. Giga Port s on non-PoE-enabled Devices LEDs LED Color Description LNK Green Flashing Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving at 1000 Mbs. Yellow Flashing Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps. Solid green Solid amber Link is up high speed. Link is up at lower speeds. OFF The port is currently not operating. ACT Green Flashing There is activity on the port. Off There is no activity on the port. LNK ACT/PoE LNK ACT/PoEDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 43 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Table 3-3 describes the LED indications for Gigabit ports on PoE-enabled devices. HDMI Port LEDs The HDMI ports have a Speed/link (LNK) LED on their left side and an activity (ACT) LED on their right side. Table 3-4 describes the HDMP port LEDs: Table 3-3. Giga Port s on PoE-enabled Devices LEDs LED Color Description LNK Flashing green Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving at 1000 Mbs. Flashing amber Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps. Solid green Solid amber Link is up high speed. Link is up at lower speeds. Off Port is currently not operating. PoE Flashing green There is activity on the port and the PoE is off. Flashing amber There is activity on the port and the PoE is on. Amber solid There is no activity on the port and the PoE power is on. Off There is no activity on the port and the PoE is off. Table 3-4. HDMI (Stacking) Port LEDs LED Color Description Speed/Link Solid green Port is linked to device. Off Port is currently not operating. ACT Flashing green Port is either transmitting or receiving. Off Port is not transmitting or receiving.44 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SFP LEDs The SFP+ ports each have two LEDs, marked as LNK and ACT, associated with them. Figure 3-5 describes these LEDs. Stack ID LED The front panel of the device contains a Stack ID panel used to display the Unit ID for the Stack Master and members, as shown in Figure 3-2. Power Supplies The device has an internal power supply unit (AC unit) and a connector to connect PowerConnect 5500/P devices to a PowerConnect EPS-470 unit, or to a PowerConnect MPS-600 unit. The PowerConnect 5500/P devices have the following internal power supplies: • 24 Port non-PoE devices — 54 Watt. • 48 Port non-PoE devices — 100 Watt. • 24/48 Port PoE devices — 600 Watt. Operation with both power supply units is regulated through load sharing. Power supply LEDs indicate the status of the power supply. The AC power supply unit operates from 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz. The AC power supply unit uses a standard connector. A LED, shown in Figure 3-3, indicates whether the AC unit is connected. When the device is connected to a supplementary power source, the probability of failure in the event of a power outage decreases. Table 3-5. SFP Port LEDs LED Color Description LNK Solid green Link is at highest speed. Solid amber Link is at lowest speed. Off Port is currently not linked. ACT Flashing green Port is either transmitting or receiving.Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 45 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 Stacking Overview This section describes how the Stacking feature of the PowerConnect 5500 series functions. It contains the following topics: • Stack Overview • Stack Members and Unit IDs46 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stack Overview The PowerConnect 5500 Stacking feature provides multiple switch management through a single switch, so that all units in the stack are treated as if they were a single switch. All stack members are accessed through the management IP address, through which the stack is managed. Each switch is a member in a stack, although the stack may consist of only a single switch. Up to eight units can be stacked. This section covers the following topics: • Stack Operation Modes • Stacking Units • Stack Topology Stack Operation Modes All stacks must have a Master unit, and may have a Master Backup unit. All other units are connected to the stack as members (slaves). A unit in the stack can be in one of the following modes: • Stack Master — Runs the fully operational software of a switch. In addition, it runs configures and manages all other units in the stack. All protocols run in the context of the Master unit. It is responsible for updating and synchronizing the Master Backup. The Stack Master detects and reconfigures the ports with minimal operational impact in the event of: Unit failure Inter-unit stacking link failure Unit insertion Unit removal When the Master unit boots, or when inserting or removing a stack member, the Master unit initiates a stacking discovering process. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 47 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Slave Unit — Runs a slave version of the software that enables the applications running on the Master’s CPU to control and manage the resources of the slave unit. • Master Backup — Runs as a slave unit, as described above, and in addition, continuously monitors the existence and operation of the stack master. If the master unit fails, the master-backup unit assumes the Master Backup role. Stacking Units PowerConnect 5500 series switches use two HDMI 10G ports for stacking. To connect the units in the stack: 1 Insert one end of an HDMI cable into the left-hand HDMI port on the unit at the top of the stack and the other end into the right-hand HDMI port of the unit immediately below it (this is called crossover). 2 Repeat this process until all units are connected. 3 (Optional) Connect the left-hand HDMI port of the unit at the bottom of the stack to the right-hand HDMI port of the unit at the top of the stack. This step provides increased bandwidth and redundancy.48 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The results of this process are shown in Figure . Figure 4-1. Stacking Ring Topology HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel Front Panel HDMI PortsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 49 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stack Topology The PowerConnect 5500 series systems operates in a ring or chain topology. Ring Topology In a ring topology all units in the stack are connected to each other, forming a circle. Each unit in the stack accepts data and sends it to the unit to which it is attached. The packet continues through the stack until it reaches its destination. The system discovers the optimal path on which to send traffic. Figure 4-1 shows units of a stack connected in a ring topology. Stacking Failover Topology - Chain Topology Difficulties occur when a unit in the ring becomes non-functional, or a link is severed. In this case, the system automatically switches to a chain topology, without any system downtime. In chain topology, each unit in the stack is connected to neighboring unit except for the last unit, which is not connected to any other unit. In the chain topology, the stack continues to function as long as there is a master- or backup-enabled unit in each segment of the stack. When the ring topology is switched to chain topology, an SNMP message is automatically generated, but no stack management action is required. The unit that failed must be repaired to restore full stacking operation in the ring topology. After the stacking issues are resolved, the units can be reconnected without interruption, and the ring topology is restored. Stack Members and Unit IDs This section describes how to configure the stack. It contains the following topics: • Adding a Unit to the Stack • Assigning Unit IDs • Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units • Switching from the Master to the Master Backup • Replacing Stacking Members50 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Loading Software onto Stack Members • Rebooting the Stack • Managing Configuration Files on the Stack Adding a Unit to the Stack The recommended procedure to add a unit to a stack is as follows: 1 Place the powered-off unit in its physical place in the stack, and insert the stacking link in the unit (but do not connect it to the rest of the stack). 2 Power up the unit, and set the correct Unit ID, as described below. 3 Reboot the unit and connect it to the rest of the stack through the stack link. Assigning Unit IDs Each unit in the stack has a unique ID that defines the unit’s position and function in the stack, as shown in Figure 3-2. The unit that is assigned Unit ID 1 is the Master unit, by default. The unit that is assigned Unit ID 2 is the Master Backup unit. When you power-up the stack, each unit is assigned a unique Unit ID. This is displayed on the front panel of the unit, as shown in Figure 3-2. The Unit ID of each unit can be either automatically assigned or manually assigned, as described in step 1 to step 4 below. To assign IDs to the units in the stack, do the following for each unit in the stack: 1 Connect the unit to the terminal.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 51 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Turn on the unit to begin auto boot and press Return or Esc to abort and enter the Start Up menu. 3 Select Stack Menu to open the Stack Menu. 4 Select Set Unit Stack ID. Enter either a Unit ID for manual assignment or 0 to indicate that the unit ID will be assigned automatically. NOTE: The entire stack should be connected, as shown in Figure 4-1, before powering up the units. Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units A unit is master-enabled if it assigned Unit ID 1 and Unit 2. All other units in the stack (slaves) have unit IDs of 3-8. The stack master assignment is performed during the configuration boot process. One master-enabled stack member is elected as Master, and the other master-enabled stack member is selected as Master Backup, according to the following decision process: • A master is selected from the set of the two Master-enabled units. Priority is given to the lowest unit ID, but also takes into account the amount of time the unit is UP (Up Time) as follows: Startup Menu [1]Download Software [2]Erase Flash File [3]Password Recovery Procedure [4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate [5]Stack Menu [6]Back [1]Show Unit Stack ID [2]Set Unit Stack ID [3]Back52 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – When a master-enabled unit is inserted to a running stack, (or when Master and Backup master both start at the same time), they exchange each other’s UP TIME (the time since they powered up). If the time difference is smaller than 10 minutes, the unit with the lowest unit ID is elected; otherwise, the unit with the longest UP time is elected. – If a Master-enabled unit (with ID 1 or 2) is inserted into an operational stack, it will be elected as a backup master. – If a Master unit and/or a backup Master unit is removed from the stack and the user wishes to configure one of the slave units (numbered 3-8) to be a Master backup, the user must reset the unit’s ID. This can be done as follows: • If there is a Master-enabled unit in the stack: Do -switch n renumber 2 (through CLI or GUI). This makes the nth unit a master-enabled unit. • If there is no Master-enabled unit in the stack: Press the reset button on the unit to be master-enabled, and assign it a unit ID= 1 using the boot menu. • The user can force a master-enabled unit to be the master unit of the stack, even if the master election process did not select it. This is done by switching over to the backup unit. NOTE: Two stacking member are considered the same age if they were inserted within a ten minute interval, for example, if Unit 2 is inserted in the first minute of a ten-minute cycle, and Unit 1 is inserted in fifth minute of the same cycle, the units are considered to be the same age. NOTE: If two stack members are discovered to have the same Unit ID, only the older unit is included in the stack. The stack continues to function and a message is sent notifying that a unit failed to join the stack. The Stack Master and the Master Backup maintain a Warm Standby. The Warm Standby ensures that the Master Backup takes over for the Stack Master if a failover occurs, so that the stack continues to operate normally. During the Warm Standby, the Master and the Master Backup are synchronized with the static configuration. When the Stacking Master is configured, it must synchronize the Master Backup. The dynamic Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 53 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY configuration is not saved, for example, dynamically-learned MAC addresses are not saved, but dynamic information is learned quickly and automatically by network traffic. Switching from the Master to the Master Backup The Master Backup replaces the Stack Master if one or more of the following events occur: • The Stack Master fails or is removed from the stack. • Links from the Stack Master to the stacking members fails. • User performs soft switchover via the Web interface or the CLI. Switching between the Stack Master and the Master Backup results in limited service loss. Dynamic tables are relearned if a failure occurs. The Running Configuration file is synchronized between Stack Master and the Master Backup, and continues running on the Master Backup. Replacing Stacking Members If a unit is removed from the stack, and replaced with a unit with the same unit ID, the stack member is configured with the original unit configuration. Otherwise, if the new unit has either more or fewer ports than the previous unit, the results depend on the device type of the new and original units, as defined in Table 4-1: Table 4-1. Port Configurations when Replacing Units New Unit Original Unit New Port Configuration 5548P or 5548 5548P or 5548 Port configurations remain the same. 5524 or 5524P The first 24 Giga (GE) ports receive the respective 5524/P 24 GE port configurations. The 10 G port configurations remain the same. 54 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Loading Software onto Stack Members Software can be downloaded to all units simultaneously, or to the master unit alone. If software is only loaded to the master unit, when new software is selected, and the Master is rebooted, the Master updates the software on the remaining units. In this way, all units in the stack run the same software version. Rebooting the Stack Whenever a reboot occurs, topology discovery is performed, and the Master learns all units IDs in the stack. Configuration files are changed only through explicit user configuration, and are not automatically modified when units are added, removed or reassigned unit IDs. Each time the system reboots, the Startup Configuration file in the Master unit is used to configure the stack. Managing Configuration Files on the Stack The Startup Configuration and Running Configuration file are stored on the stack master. Each port in the stack is referenced in the configuration files by its port type and unit ID/0/port number, for example "gi1/0/24", which means Giga port 24 on unit 1 (the middle 0 is reserved for future use). Configuration files are managed from the Stack Master, including: • Saving to flash memory 5524P or 5524 5548P or 5548 The PowerConnect 5524/P 24 Gigabit ports receives the first 24 Giga 5548/P port configurations. The 10 Giga port configurations remain the same. The remaining ports receive the default port configuration. 5524P or 5524 Port configurations remain the same. Table 4-1. Port Configurations when Replacing Units (Continued) New Unit Original Unit New Port ConfigurationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 55 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Uploading configuration files to an external TFTP server/HTTP client • Downloading configuration files from an external TFTP server/HTTP client • Download/upload through the USB port NOTE: Stack configuration for all configured ports is saved, even if the stack is reset and/or the ports are no longer present.56 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYTemplate Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 57 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 5 Configuring the Switch This section describes the configuration that must be performed after the switch is installed and connected to power supplies. Additional advanced functions are described in "Advanced Switch Configuration" on page 67. NOTE: Before proceeding further, read the release notes for this product. You can download the release notes from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. NOTE: We recommend that you obtain the most recent revision of the user documentation from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. It contains the following topics: • Configuration Work Flow • Connecting the Switch to the Terminal • Booting the Switch • Configuring the Stack • Configuration Using the Setup Wizard58 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuration Work Flow To configure the switches: 1 For each switch in the stack: a Connect it to a terminal, as described in the "Connecting the Switch to the Terminal" on page 59. b Boot the switch, as described in the "Booting the Switch" on page 60. c Assign a unit ID to the switch, as described in "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50. 2 Connect the units in the stack to each other, as described in "Configuring the Stack" on page 61. 3 Connect the Master unit to the terminal, reboot the unit and the Setup Wizard is run automatically, as described in "Configuration Using the Setup Wizard" on page 61. 4 Respond to the Setup Wizard prompts. 5 Continue managing the switch, either through the console or Telnet, using the CLI or the web GUI.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 59 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Connecting the Switch to the Terminal The switch is configured and monitored through a terminal desktop system that runs terminal emulation software. The switch connects to the terminal through the console port. To connect the switch to a terminal: 1 Connect an RS-232 cable to a VT100-compatible terminal or the serial connector of a desktop system running terminal emulation software. 2 Connect the RS-232 cable to the switch console port on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 5-1) using an 8-pin RJ-45 male connector. Figure 5-1. Front-Panel Console Port 3 Set the terminal emulation software as follows: a Select the appropriate serial port to connect to the switch. b Set the data rate to 9600 baud. c Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. d Set Flow Control to none. e Select VT100 for Emulation mode within your communication software. f Select Terminal keys for Function, Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that the setting is for Terminal keys (not Windows keys). NOTE: You can connect a console to the console port on any unit in the stack, but stack management is performed only from the stack master (Unit ID 1 or 2). Console Port60 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Booting the Switch After the local terminal is connected, turn on power. The switch then goes through power-on self-test (POST). POST runs every time the switch is started and checks hardware components, to determine if the switch is operational before completely booting. If the system detects a critical problem, the boot process stops. If POST passes successfully, a valid executable image is loaded into RAM. POST messages are displayed on the terminal and indicate test success or failure. The boot process runs for approximately 40-45seconds. When the boot process completes, the following LEDs are lit, as shown in Figure 5-2: • Power • Status • Fan (should be green) • RPS (if it is being used) Figure 5-2. Initial LEDs Power Status Fan RPSDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 61 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring the Stack The switch is always considered to be a stack of switches even if the stack only contains a single switch. If there is more than one switch in the stack, each switch must be configured individually. See "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50 for instructions on how to configure the stack. Configuration Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration to get the system up and running as quickly as possible. Note that you can skip the Setup Wizard and configure the switch manually through the CLI. The Setup Wizard configures the following fields: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password • Management switch IP address • IP subnet mask • Default gateway IP address NOTE: The Setup Wizard assumes the following: • The PowerConnect switch was never configured before and is in the same state as when you received it. • The PowerConnect switch booted successfully. • The console connection is established and the console prompt is displayed on the screen of a VT100 terminal switch. Connect the Master unit to a terminal. You can identify the Master unit by the illuminated Master LED on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 3-2). To configure the system using the Setup Wizard: 1 Obtain the following information from the network administrator: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password62 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • The IP address to be assigned to the VLAN 1 interface through which the switch is to be managed (by default, every external and internal port is a member of the VLAN 1) • The IP subnet mask for the network • The default gateway (next hop router) IP address for configuring the default route 2 Boot the Master unit. The system automatically prompts you to use the Setup Wizard. The Setup Wizard displays the following information: Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration and gets you up and running easily and quickly. You can skip the Setup Wizard and enter CLI mode to manually configure the switch. The system will prompt you with a default answer; by pressing Enter, you accept the default value. You must respond to the next question to run the Setup Wizard within 60 seconds, otherwise the system will continue with normal operation using the default system configuration. Would you like to enter the Setup Wizard (you must answer this question within 60 seconds)? (Y/N) 3 Enter [Y] to run the wizard. If you enter [N] or if you do not respond within 60 seconds, the Setup Wizard automatically exits and the CLI console prompt appears. If you enter [Y] the wizard provides interactive guidance through the initial switch configuration. The following information is displayed: You can exit the Setup Wizard at any time by entering [ctrl+Z]. The system is not set up for SNMP management by default. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 63 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To manage the switch using SNMP (required for Dell Network Manager) you can: • Setup the initial SNMP version 2 account now. • Return later and set up the SNMP version account. For more information on setting up a SNMP version 2 account, see the user documentation. Would you like to set up the SNMP management interface now? [Y/N] 4 Enter [N] to skip to Step 7 or enter [Y] to continue the Setup Wizard. If you enter [Y] the following information is displayed: To set up the SNMP management account you must specify the management system IP address and the "community string" or password that the particular management system uses to access the switch. The wizard automatically assigns the highest access level [Privilege Level 15] to this account. You can use Dell Network Manager or other management interfaces to change this setting later and to add additional management system later. For more information on adding management systems, see the user documentation. To add a management station: Please enter the SNMP community string to be used: 5 Enter the SNMP community string. You can use the default name "public" Please enter the IP address of the Management System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage from any Management Station:[0.0.0.0]. 6 Enter the SNMP Management System IP. 7 Set up user account privilege level, as follows: The following information is displayed: Now we need to set up your initial privilege (Level 15) user account. This account is used to login to the CLI and Web interface. You may set up 64 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY other accounts and change privilege levels later. For more information on setting up user accounts and changing privilege levels, see the user documentation. To set up a user account: Enter the user name: Please enter the user password: Please reenter the user password: 8 Enter the following: • User name, for example "admin" • Password and password confirmation. 9 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Next, an IP address is setup. The IP address is defined on the default VLAN (VLAN 1). This is the IP address you use to access the Telnet, Web interface, or SNMP interface for the switch. To set up an IP address: Please enter the IP address of the device (A.B.C.D): Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or nn): 10 Enter the management IP address and IP subnet mask, for example 192.168.2.100 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the IP subnet mask. 11 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Finally, set up the default gateway. Please enter the IP address of the gateway from which this network is reachable (e.g. 192.168.2.1).Default gateway (A.B.C.D):[0.0.0.0] Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 65 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 12 Enter the default gateway. 13 Press Enter. The following is displayed (example): This is the configuration information that has been collected: SNMP Interface = "Dell Network Manager"@192.168.2.10 User Account setup = admin Password = ********** Management IP address = 192.168.2.100 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.2.1 The following information is displayed: If the information is correct, please select (Y) to save the configuration and copy to the start-up configuration file. If the information is incorrect, select (N) to discard configuration and restart the wizard: [Y/N] 14 Enter [N] to restart the wizard or enter [Y] to complete the Setup Wizard. If you enter [Y] the following is displayed: Configuring SNMP management interface. Configuring user account....... Configuring IP and subnet...... Thank you for using Dell Easy Setup Wizard. You will now enter CLI mode. The CLI prompt is displayed. You have finished the initial configuration. After the initial configuration is complete, you can manage the switch from the connected console port using the CLI or remotely through the management interface, using Telnet or the Web GUI. See the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide found on the Documentation CD.66 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 67 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 6 Advanced Switch Configuration This section describes how to perform various configuration operations through the CLI. It includes the following topics: • Using the CLI • Accessing the Device Through the CLI • Retrieving an IP Address • Security Management and Password Configuration • Configuring Login Banners • Startup Menu Procedures • Software Download68 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Using the CLI This section provides some general information for using the CLI. For a complete description of CLI commands, refer to the Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems CLI Reference Guide. Command Mode Overview The CLI is divided into command modes, each with a specific command set. Entering a question mark at the terminal prompt displays a list of commands available for that particular command mode. In each mode, a specific command is used to navigate from one mode to another. These modes are described below. User EXEC Mode During CLI session initialization, the CLI is in User EXEC mode. Only a limited subset of commands is available in User EXEC mode. This level is reserved for tasks that do not change the terminal configuration and is used to access configuration sub-systems. After logging into the device, User EXEC command mode is enabled. The user-level prompt consists of the host name followed by the angle bracket (>). For example: console> NOTE: The default host name is console unless it has been modified during initial configuration. The User EXEC commands enable connecting to remote devices, changing terminal settings on a temporary basis, performing basic tests, and listing system information. To list the User EXEC commands, enter a question mark at the command prompt. To enter the next level, Privileged EXEC mode, a password is required (if configured). Privileged EXEC Mode Privileged EXEC mode provides access to the device global configuration. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 69 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Privileged access can be protected, to prevent unauthorized access and to secure operating parameters. Passwords are displayed on the screen, and are case-sensitive. NOTE: The enable command is only necessary if you login with privilege level less than 15. To access and list the Privileged EXEC mode commands: 1 At the prompt type enable and press . 2 When a password prompt displays, enter the password and press . The Privileged EXEC mode prompt displays as the device host name followed by #. For example: console# To list the Privileged EXEC commands, type a question mark at the command prompt. To return from Privileged EXEC mode to User EXEC mode, type disable and press . The following example illustrates accessing privileged EXEC mode and then returning to the User EXEC mode: Use the exit command to return to a previous mode. To configure the device, enter the next level, Global Configuration mode. Global Configuration Mode The Global Configuration mode manages device configuration on a global level. Global Configuration commands apply to system features, rather than a specific protocol or interface. console> enable Enter Password: ****** console# console# disable console>70 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To access Global Configuration mode, at the Privileged EXEC Mode prompt, type configure and press . The Global Configuration mode displays as the device host name followed by (config) and the pound sign #. To list the Global Configuration commands, enter a question mark at the command prompt. The following example illustrates how to access Global Configuration mode and return back to the Privileged EXEC mode: Interface Configuration Mode The Interface Configuration mode configures the device at the physical interface level (port, VLAN, or LAG). Interface commands that require subcommands have another level, called the Subinterface Configuration mode. A password is not required to access this level. The following example, places the CLI in Interface Configuration mode on port 1/0/1. The sntp command is then applied to that port. To run a command in a mode, which does not contain it, use do before the command, as in the following example: console# configure console(configure)# console# console# configure console(config)# exit console# console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# sntp client enable console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# sntp client enable console(config-if)# do show sntp configurationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 71 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Accessing the Device Through the CLI You can manage the device using CLI commands, over a direct connection to the terminal console, or via a Telnet connection. Direct Connection Connect the device to the console and enter the CLI commands upon receiving a prompt. Telnet Connection Telnet is a terminal emulation TCP/IP protocol. RS-232 terminals can be virtually connected to the local device through a TCP/IP protocol network. Telnet is an alternative to a local login terminal, where a remote login is required. The device supports up to four simultaneous Telnet sessions. All CLI commands can be used over a Telnet session. If access is via a Telnet connection, ensure that the device has an IP address and that software has been downloaded to the device. To start a Telnet session: 1 Select Start > Run. The Run window opens. 2 Type cmd. The cmd window opens. 3 In the cmd window, type Telnet . The Telnet session begins.72 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Retrieving an IP Address Receiving an IP Address from a DHCP Server When using the DHCP protocol to retrieve an IP address, the device acts as a DHCP client. When the device is reset, the DHCP command is saved in the configuration file, but the IP address is not. To retrieve an IP address from a DHCP server, perform the following steps: 1 Select and connect any port to a DHCP server or to a subnet that has a DHCP server on it. 2 Type the following commands to use the selected port for receiving the IP address. a Assigning dynamic IP Addresses on a port: b Assigning a dynamic IP Addresses on a VLAN: The interface receives the IP address automatically. console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# ip address dhcp console# configure console(config)# interface vlan 1 console(config-if)# ip address dhcpDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 73 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 To verify the IP address, type show ip interface at the system prompt, as shown in the following example. When configuring/receiving IP addresses through DHCP and BOOTP (an older version of DHCP), the configuration received from these servers includes the IP address and may include the subnet mask and default gateway. NOTE: It is not necessary to delete the device configuration to retrieve an IP address from the DHCP server. NOTE: When copying configuration files, avoid using a configuration file that contains an instruction to enable DHCP on an interface that connects to the same DHCP server, or to one with an identical configuration. In this instance, the device retrieves the new configuration file and boots from it. The device then enables DHCP, as instructed in the new configuration file, and the DHCP instructs it to reload the same file. NOTE: If you configure a DHCP IP address, this address is dynamically retrieved, and the ip address dhcp command is saved in the configuration file. In the event of master failure, the backup will again attempt to retrieve a DHCP address. This could result in one of the following: • The same IP address may be assigned. • A different IP address may be assigned, which could result in loss of connectivity to the management station. • The DHCP server may be down, which would result in IP address retrieval failure, and possible loss of connectivity to the management station. Receiving an IP Address From a BOOTP Server The standard BOOTP protocol is supported and enables the device to automatically download its IP host configuration from any standard BOOTP server in the network. In this case, the device acts as a BOOTP client. console# show ip interface IP Address I/F Type Directed Precedence Status Broadcast ----------------- --------- -------- -------- -------- ----- 0.0.0.0/32 gi2/0/1 DHCP disable No Valid 10.5.234.232/24 vlan 1 Static disable No Valid74 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To retrieve an IP address from a BOOTP server: 1 Select and connect any port to a BOOTP server or subnet containing such a server. 2 At the system prompt, enter the delete startup configuration command to delete the Startup Configuration from flash. The device reboots with no configuration and in 60 seconds starts sending BOOTP requests. The device receives the IP address automatically. NOTE: When the device reboot begins, any input at the ASCII terminal or keyboard automatically cancels the BOOTP process before completion and the device does not receive an IP address from the BOOTP server. The following example illustrates the process: To display the IP address, enter the show ip interface command. The device is now configured with an IP address. console> enable console# delete startup-config Startup file was deleted console# reload You haven’t saved your changes. Are you sure you want to continue (Y/N) [N]? This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue (Y/N) [N]? ************************************************ /* the device reboots */Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 75 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Security Management and Password Configuration System security is handled through the Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) mechanism that manages user access rights, privileges, and management methods. AAA uses both local and remote user databases. Data encryption is handled through the SSH mechanism. Passwords can be configured for the following services: • Terminal • Telnet • SSH • HTTP • HTTPS NOTE: When creating a user name, the default priority is 1, which provides access but not configuration rights. A priority of 15 must be set to enable access and configuration rights to the device. Although user names can be assigned privilege level 15 without a password, it is recommended to always assign a password. If there is no specified password, privileged users can access the Web interface with any password. NOTE: Passwords can be secured by using password management commands to force aging out of passwords, or expiration of passwords. For more information, see "Management Security" on page 261. Initial Configuration and Password Recovery The system is delivered without a default password, and all passwords must be defined by the user. If a user-defined password is lost, a password recovery procedure can be invoked from the Startup menu. This procedure is applicable for the local terminal only and enables a single access to the device from the local terminal with no password entered. The full mode of password recovery mechanism can be enabled/disabled through the CLI (service password-recovery command). This affects password recovery in the following way: • Enabled: When the password-recovery mechanism is invoked, one-time access to the device without a password is enabled and all configuration and user files are retained.76 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Disabled: When the password-recovery mechanism is invoked, one-time access to the device without a password is stilled enabled, however all configuration files (startup and backups) are removed and the following log message is generated to the terminal after boot process completed: “All configuration and user files were removed” Configuring an Initial Terminal Password To configure an initial terminal password, enter the following commands: Configuring an Initial Telnet Password To configure an initial Telnet password, enter the following commands: console(config)# aaa authentication login default line console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line console(config)# line console console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# password george console(config)# aaa authentication login default line console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line console(config)# line telnet console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# password bobDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 77 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring an Initial SSH Password To configure an initial SSH password, enter the following commands: Configuring an Initial HTTP Password To configure an initial HTTP password, enter the following commands: Configuring an Initial HTTPS Password To configure an initial HTTPS password, enter the following commands: Enter the following commands once when configuring use of a terminal, a Telnet, or an SSH session, for an HTTPS session. NOTE: In the Web browser, enable SSL 2.0 or greater for the page content to be displayed. NOTE: HTTP and HTTPS services require privilege level 15 access and connect directly to the configuration level access. console(config)# aaa authentication login default line console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line console(config)# line ssh console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# password jones console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication local console(config)# username admin password user1 privilege 15 console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication local console(config)# username admin password user1 privilege 15 console(config)# crypto certificate 1 generate keygenerate console(config)# ip http secure-server78 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Login Banners Banners can be defined for each line, such as console and telnet) or for all lines. They are disabled by default. The following types of banners can be defined: • Message-of-the-Day Banner (motd) — Displayed when the user connects to the device, before login. The following defines a message-of-the-day for the console: console# configure console(config)# line console console(config-line)# motd-banner console(config-line)# exit console (config)# banner motd * Welcome* console# do show banner motd Welcome Would you like to enable this banner to all lines? (Y/N)[Y] Y console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 79 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Login Banner— Displayed after the Message-of-the-Day Banner, and before the user has logged in. The following defines a login banner for the console: • Exec Banner — Displayed after successful login (in all privileged levels and in all authentication methods). The following defines an exec banner for the console: console# configure console(config)# line console console(config-line)# login-banner console(config-line)# exit console (config)# banner login * Please log in* console# do show banner login Would you like to enable this banner to all lines? (Y/N)[Y] Y Please log in console# configure console(config)# line console console(config-line)# exec-banner console(config-line)# exit console (config)# banner exec * Successfully logged in* Would you like to enable this banner to all lines? (Y/N)[Y] Y console# do show banner exec Successfully logged in80 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Startup Menu Procedures The Startup menu enables performing various tasks, such as software download, flash handling and password recovery. You can enter the Startup menu when booting the device. User input must be entered immediately after the POST test. To enter the Startup menu: • Turn the power on. After the auto-boot messages appear, the following menu is displayed: The following sections describe the available Startup menu options. NOTE: When selecting an option from the Startup menu, take time-out into account. If no selection is made within 10 seconds (default), the device times out. This default value can be changed through the CLI. Download Software - Option[1] The software download procedure is used to replace corrupted files or upgrade system software, when the device does not have IP connectivity or when both software images of the device are corrupted and therefore you cannot use the web-based management system. NOTE: it is highly recommended that, before loading via xmodem, the baud rate of the device and terminal be set to 115200. Startup Menu [1]Download Software [2]Erase Flash File [3]Password Recovery Procedure [4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate [5]Stack menu [6]BackDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 81 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To download software through the Startup menu: 1 From the Startup menu, press [1]. The following prompt is displayed: 2 When using the HyperTerminal, click Transfer on the HyperTerminal Menu Bar and select Send File. 3 In the Filename field, enter the file path for the file to be downloaded. 4 Ensure that the Xmodem protocol is selected in the Protocol field. 5 Press Send. The software is downloaded. NOTE: After software download, the device reboots automatically. Erase FLASH File - Option[2] In some cases, the device Startup Configuration file must be erased. If the configuration is erased, all parameters configured via CLI, web-management or SNMP must be reconfigured. To erase the device configuration in the Startup Configuration file: 1 From the Startup menu, select [2]. The following message is displayed: Warning! About to erase a Flash file. Are you sure (Y/N)? 2 Press Y. The following message is displayed. Write Flash file name (Up to 8 characters, Enter for none.): 3 Enter config ("config" is the standard name for the Startup configuration file although you can use any name). The following is displayed: Downloading code using XMODEM !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! File config (if present) will be erased after system initialization ======== Press Enter To Continue ========82 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The configuration is erased when the system is reset. Password Recovery - Option[3] If a password is lost, the Password Recovery procedure can be called from the Startup menu. The procedure enables entry to the device a single time without entering a password. To recover a lost password when entering the local terminal only: 1 From the Startup menu, select [3]. 2 Continue the regular startup by logging in without a password. 3 Enter a new password or press 'ESC' to exit. NOTE: To ensure device security, reconfigure passwords for applicable management methods. Set Terminal Baud-Rate - Option[4] To set the terminal baud-rate: 1 Type [4] and press . 2 Enter the new baud rate. The following is displayed: Note that after this step, your terminal will no longer respond. Adjust your terminal speed to the configured one. Stack Menu - Option[5] To configure the stack, type [5] and press . For more information, see "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50. Set new device baud-rate: 38,400Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 83 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Software Download This section contains instructions for downloading device software (system and boot images) through a TFTP server or USB port. The TFTP server must be configured before downloading the software. Software Auto Synch in Stack When several units are stacked, they must all run the same software version. When a new slave device is inserted into the stack, it is first checked for compatibility (meaning that the master can run firmware upgrade/downgrade to the slave unit), and if found compatible, its boot and image software versions are automatically updated with the Master’s. If the slave is found not compatible, it is shutdown. A SYSLOG message is sent when a master synchronizes a slave's software. System Image Download When the device boots, it decompresses the system image from the flash memory area and runs it. When a new image is downloaded, it is saved in the other area allocated for the other system image copy. On the next boot, the device decompresses and runs the image from the currently active system image. A system image can be downloaded through a USB port or a TFTP server. To download the system image from a TFTP server, ensure that an IP address is configured on one of the device ports and pings can be sent to the TFTP server. In addition, ensure that the file to be downloaded is saved on the TFTP server. To download a system image through the USB port or TFTP server: 1 Enter the show version command, to verify which software version is currently running on the device. The following is an example of the information that appears: Unit SW version Boot version HW version ------ ------------------- ------------------- -------- 2 1.0.0.24 1.0.0.11 console#84 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the show bootvar command, to verify which system image is currently active. The following is an example of the information that is displayed: 3 Enter the one of the following commands to copy a new system image to the current unit: – copy {tftp://|usb://}{tftp address}/{file name} image (current unit) or To copy a new system image to all units in the stack: – copy tftp://{tftp address}/{file name} unit://*/image 4 When the new image is downloaded, it is saved in the area allocated for the other copy of system image (image-2, as shown in the example). The following is an example of the information that appears: Exclamation symbols indicate that a copying process is in progress. Each symbol (!) corresponds to 512 bytes transferred successfully. A period indicates that the copying process is timed out. Many periods in a row indicate that the copying process failed. console# show bootvar Unit Image Filename Version Date Status ---- ----- --------- --------- --------------------- --------- 2 1 image-1 1.0.0.13 04-Aug-2010 08:27:30 Active* 2 2 image-2 1.0.0.12 29-Jul-2010 17:02:26 Not active console# console# copy tftp://176.215.31.3/file1.ros image Accessing file ‘file1’ on 176.215.31.3Ö Loading file1 from 176.215.31.3: !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Copy took 00:01:11 [hh:mm:ss]Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 85 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 5 Select the image for the next boot by entering the boot system command. After this command, enter the show bootvar command to verify that the copy indicated as a parameter in the boot system command is selected for the next boot. The following is an example of the information that appears: If the image for the next boot is not selected by entering the boot system command, the system boots from the currently active image. 6 Enter the reload command. The following message is displayed: 7 Enter Y. The device reboots. Boot Image Download Loading a new boot image from the TFTP server or USB port, updates the boot image. The boot image is loaded when the device is powered on. A user has no control over the boot image copies. To download a boot image through the TFTP server: console# boot system image-2 console# show bootvar Images currently available on the Flash Image-1 active Image-2 not active (selected for next boot) console# reload This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue (y/n) [n]?86 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 1 Enter the show version command to verify which software version is currently running on the device. The following is an example of the information that appears: 2 Enter the copy {tftp://|usb://}{tftp address}/{file name} boot command to copy the boot image to the device. The following is an example of the information that appears: 3 Enter the reload command. The following message is displayed: 4 Enter Y. The device reboots. console# show version Unit SW version Boot version HW version ----- -------------- ----------------- ---------- 2 1.0.0.24 1.0.0.11 console# console# copy tftp://50.1.1.7/contax-10014.ros image 01-Oct-2006 11:57:35 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL tftp://50.1.1.7/contax-10014.ros destination URL flash://image !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 01-Sep-2010 11:57:38 %INIT-I-Startup: Cold Startup !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 01-Sep-2010 11:59:05 %COPY-N-: The copy operation was completed successfully! Copy: 5954757 bytes copied in 00:01:30 [hh:mm:ss] console# reload This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue (Y/N) [N]?Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 87 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 7 Using Dell OpenManage Administrator This section provides an introduction to the Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator user interface. It contains the following topics: • Starting the Application • Understanding the Interface • Using the Switch Administrator Buttons • Field Definitions • Common GUI Features • CLI Commands88 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Starting the Application NOTE: Before starting the application the IP address must be defined. For more information, see "Accessing the Device Through the CLI" on page 71. 1 Open a web browser. 2 Enter the device’s IP address in the address bar and press . 3 When the Log In window displays, enter a user name and password. NOTE: Passwords are both case sensitive and alpha-numeric. 4 Click OK. The Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator home page displays. Understanding the Interface The home page contains the following views: • Tree view — Located on the left side of the home page, the tree view provides an expandable view of the features and their components. The branches in the tree view can be expanded to view all the components under a specific feature, or retracted to hide the feature's components. By dragging the vertical bar to the right, the tree area can be expanded to display the full name of a component. • Device View — Located in on the top center of the home page, the device view provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, table information, and feature components. For further information, see "Device Representation" on page 89 • Components List — Located in the bottom center of the home page, contains a list of the feature components. When a feature is expanded, the GUI page for that feature is displayed. • Information Buttons— Located at the top of the home page, provide access to information about the device and access to Dell Support. For more information, see "Information Buttons" on page 91.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 89 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Device Representation The home page contains a graphical representation of the units in the stack’s front panels. Figure 7-1 displays the 5548 model, but the display for the other models are similar. Figure 7-1. PowerConnect Device Port Indicators The graphic display on the home page displays the Unit ID and port indicators that specify whether a specific port is currently active. Table 7-1 describes the port colors that are displayed and their meaning: Table 7-1. Port Colors NOTE: For more information about LEDs, see "LED Definitions" on page 40. To configure a port double-click on its icon. Only ports that are physically present are displayed in the PowerConnect OpenManage Switch Administrator home page, and can be configured through the web management system. Non-present ports can be configured through the CLI or SNMP interfaces. Port Representation Ports are referred to in the notation: [gi/te]x/0/z, where: Component Description Amber The port is currently connected at 100 Mbps. Green The port is currently connected at 1000 Mbps Grey The port is currently disconnected Stacking Unit ID Giga Ports (odd numbered) Giga Ports (even numbered)90 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • gi—Giga port • te —Ten Giga port • x — Unit ID • z — Port numberDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 91 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Using the Switch Administrator Buttons This section describes the buttons found on the OpenManage Switch Administrator interface. Information Buttons Table 7-2 describes the information buttons that provide access to online support and online help, as well as information about the OpenManage Switch Administrator interfaces. These are displayed at the top of each page. Device Management Icons Table 7-3 describes the device management buttons. Table 7-2. Information Buttons Button Description Support Opens the Dell Support page at support.dell.com About Contains the version and build number and Dell copyright information. Logout Opens the Log Out window. Table 7-3. Device Management Icons Button Icon Description Apply&Save Saves changes to the Running and Startup Configuration files. Help Open online help. The online help pages are context-sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing page is open, the help topic for that page is displayed when Help is clicked. Print Prints the Network Management System page and/or table information.92 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Refresh Refreshes device information from the Running Configuration file. Table 7-3. Device Management Icons (Continued)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 93 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Field Definitions Fields that are user-defined can contain between 1–159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the OpenManage Switch Administrator web page. All letters or characters can be used, except the following: "\ / : * ? < >" Common GUI Features Table 7-4 describes the common functions that can be performed on many GUI pages. Table 7-4. Common GUI Elements Button Description Apply Save changes entered in GUI page to the Running Configuration file. Back Go to previous page. Cancel Cancel changes entered in GUI page. Clear All Counters Delete counters. Clear Counters Delete selected counters. Clear Log Delete entries from log. Clear Statistics Delete statistics. Copy parameters from Copy the parameters from a selected row to the selected target rows. Copy parameters from port Copy the parameters from a selected port to the selected target ports. Details Shows further details relevant to the current page. Next Go to next page. Query Run a query after query criteria have been entered. Remove Remove checked elements in the page. If Select All is selected, all elements are removed. Reset All Counters Delete all counters. Restore Defaults Restores parameters entered in page to default values.94 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GUI Terms Each GUI page in the tree view is described in the following sections. A brief introduction is provided along with steps specifying how to enter information in the page. The following terms are used: • Enter — Indicates that information may be entered in the field. It does not imply that the field is mandatory. • Select —Indicates that information may be selected from a drop-down list or from radio buttons. • Displays —Indicates that the field is display only. CLI Commands There are certain command entry conventions that apply to all commands. The following table describes these conventions. Table 7-5. Common GUI Elements Telnet Opens a Telnet window. This only works in the Explorer 6 and Firefox browsers. Button Description [ ] In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional entry.. { } In a command line, curly brackets indicate a selection of compulsory parameters separated by the | character. One option must be selected. For example: flowcontrol {auto|on|off} means that for the flowcontrol command either auto, on, or off must be selected. Italic Font Indicates a parameter value. Bold Italic Font Indicates a parameter key word. Any individual key on the keyboard. For example click . Table 7-4. Common GUI Elements (Continued) Button DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 95 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Ctrl+F4 Any combination of keys clicked simultaneously, for example: Ctrl and F4. Screen Display Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the console. all When a parameter is required to define a range of ports or parameters and all is an option, the default for the command is all when no parameters are defined. For example, the command interface range port-channel has the option of either entering a range of channels, or selecting all. When the command is entered without a parameter, it automatically defaults to all. Button Description96 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 97 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 8 Network Security This section describes the various mechanisms for providing security on the switch. It contains the following topics: • Port Security • ACLs • ACL Binding • Proprietary Protocol Filtering • Absolute Time Range • Time Range Recurrence • Dot1x Authentication98 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Security Network security can be enhanced by limiting access on a port to users with specific MAC addresses. The MAC addresses can be dynamically learned, or they can be statically configured. Port security has the following modes: • Classic Lock — Locked port security monitors both received and learned packets that are received on specific ports. Access to the locked port is limited to users with specific MAC addresses. These addresses are either manually defined on the port, or learned on that port before it was locked. • Limited Dynamic Lock — When a packet is received on a locked port, and the packet’s source MAC address is not tied to that port (either it was learned on a different port, or it is unknown to the system), a protection mechanism, which provides various options is invoked. Unauthorized packets arriving to a locked port are either: – Forwarded – Discarded with no trap – Discarded with a trap – The port is shutdown Locked port security enables storing a list of MAC addresses in the configuration file. The MAC addresses are restored when the device is reset. Disabled ports can be activated from the Port Configuration page. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 99 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure port security: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Port Security to display the Port Security: Summary page. Figure 8-1. Port Security: Summary Security parameters are displayed for all ports or LAGs, depending on the selected interface type. 2 To modify the security parameters for a port, select it, and click Edit. 3 Enter the following fields: – Interface — Select the interface to be configured. – Current Port Status — Displays the current port status. – Set Port — Select to either lock or unlock the port. – Learning Mode — Set the locked port type. The Learning Mode field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Set Port field. The possible options are: • Classic Lock — Locks the port using the classic lock mechanism. The port is immediately locked, regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned. 100 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Limited Dynamic Lock — Locks the port by deleting the dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled. – Max Entries (0-128) — Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The Max Entries field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Set Port field, and the Limited Dynamic Lock mode is selected in Learning Mode field. – Action on Violation — Select the action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port. The possible options are: • Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source. • Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source, without learning the MAC address. • Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source, and shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are reactivated, or the device is reset. – Trap — Enable/disable traps being sent when a packet is received on a locked port. – Trap Frequency (1-1000000) — Enter the amount of time (in seconds) between traps. Configuring Port Security Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring port security. . Table 8-1. Port Security CLI Commands CLI Command Description set interface active {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] interface|port-channel LAGnumber} Reactivates an interface that is shutdown due to port security reasons.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 101 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY port security max {max-addr} no port security max Specifies the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. Use the no form of this command to restore the default port security mode {lock | maxaddresses } no port security mode Configures the port security learning mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. port security [forward | discard | discard-shutdown] [trap seconds] no port security Enables port security on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable port security on an interface. port security [forward|discard|discard-shutdown] [trap seconds] no port security Configures port security on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable port security. show ports security [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-number ]|port-channel LAG-number] Displays lock status of specified interface or of all interfaces. Table 8-1. Port Security CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description102 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console # show ports security Port Status Learning Action Maximum Trap Frequency ------- -------- -------- -------- ------- ---- --------- gi1/0/1 Disabled Max-Addresses - 10 - - gi1/0/2 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/3 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/4 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/5 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/6 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/7 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/8 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/9 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/10Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/11Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/12Disabled Lock - 1 - -Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 103 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ACLs This section describes Access Control Lists (ACLs), which enable defining classification actions and rules for specific ingress or egress ports. It contains the following topics: • ACL Overview • MAC-Based ACLs • MAC-Based ACEs • IPv4-Based ACLs • IPv4-Based ACEs • IPv6-Based ACLs • IPv6-Based ACEs ACL Overview Access Control Lists (ACLs) enable network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress or egress ports. Packets entering an ingress or egress port, with an active ACL, are either admitted or denied entry. If entry is denied, the ingress or egress port may be disabled, for example, a network administrator defines an ACL rule that states that port number 20 can receive TCP packets, however, if a UDP packet is received, the packet is dropped. ACLs are composed of Access Control Entries (ACEs) that are rules that determine traffic classifications. Each ACE is a single rule, and up to 256 rules may be defined on each ACL, and up to 3000 rules globally. Rules are not only used for user configuration purposes, they are also used for features like DHCP Snooping, Protocol Group VLAN and iSCSI, so that not all 3000 rules are available for ACEs. It is expected that there will be at least 2000 rules available. If there are fewer rules available, this may be due to DHCP Snooping or iSCSI optimization. Reduce the number of entries in DHCP Snooping or reduce the max number of TCP connections in the iSCSI configuration in order to free rules for ACEs. The following types of ACLs can be defined: • MAC-based ACL — Examines Layer 2 fields only • IPv4-based ACL —Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv4 frames104 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • IPv6-based ACL —Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv6 frames MAC-Based ACLs To define a MAC-based ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > MAC Based ACL to display the MAC Based ACL: Summary page. Figure 8-2. MAC Based ACL: Summary The currently-defined MAC-based ACLs are displayed. 2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL, and enter the name of the new ACL.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 105 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring MAC-Based ACLs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MAC-based ACLs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-2. MAC Based ACL CLI Commands CLI Command Description mac access-list extended aclname no mac access-list extended aclname Defines an ACL and places the device in MAC-extended ACL configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the ACL. show interfaces access-lists Displays access lists applied on interfaces. console# show access-lists Extended IP access list ACL1 permit 234 172.30.40.1 0.0.0.0 any permit 234 172.30.8.8 0.0.0.0 any106 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MAC-Based ACEs To add rules to an ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > MAC Based ACE to display the MAC Based ACE: Summary page. Figure 8-3. MAC Based ACE: Summary The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed. 2 To add a rule click Add ACE. 3 Select the ACL for which a rule is being created. 4 Enter the fields: – New Rule Priority — Enter the priority of the ACE. ACEs with higher priority are processed first. One is the highest priority – Source MAC Address — Match the source MAC address from which packets have arrived to this source address. In addition to the Source MAC address, you can enter a Wildcard Mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 00:00:00:00:00:00 means the bits must be matched exactly; ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. – Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 107 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Dest. MAC Address — Match the destination MAC address to which packets are addressed to this address. In addition to the Destination MAC address, you can enter a Wildcard Mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 00:00:00:00:00:00 means the bits must be matched exactly; ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. – Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched. – VLAN ID — Match the packet’s VLAN ID to this VLAN ID. The possible VLAN IDs are 1 to 4095. – CoS — Match the packet’s CoS value to this CoS value. – Cos Mask — Match the packet’s CoS value to one of these CoS values. – Ether type — Match the packet’s Ethertype to this one. – Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE. Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page. – Action — Select the action taken upon a match. The following options are available: • Permit — Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria. • Deny — Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria. • Shutdown — Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria, and disable the port to which the packet was addressed. – Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped packets. 108 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring MAC-Based ACEs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MACbased ACEs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-3. MAC Based ACE CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit {any|source-ip-address source-wildcard} {any|destination destinationwildcard} [eth-type 0|aarp|amber|decspanning|decnetiv|diagnostic|dsm|etype-6000] [vlan vlan-id] [cos cos coswildcard] [time-range timerange-name] Sets permit conditions for an MAC access list (in MAC ACL configuration mode). deny {any|source sourcewildcard} {any|destination destination-wildcard} [eth-type 0|aarp|amber|decspanning|decnet-iv | diagnostic |dsm|etype-6000] [vlan vlan-id] [cos cos cos-wildcard] [timerange time-range-name][disableport|log-input] Sets deny conditions for an MAC access list. console(config)# mac access-list extended server1 console(config-mac-al)# permit 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:00:00:00:00:ff anyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 109 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv4-Based ACLs To define an IPv4-based ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv4 Based ACL to display the IPv4 Based ACL: Summary page. Figure 8-4. IPv4 Based ACL: Summary The previously-defined IPv4 ACLs are displayed. 2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL. 3 Enter the name of the new ACL. Names are case-sensitive.110 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring IP-based ACLs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based ACLs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: IPv4-Based ACEs To add a rule to an ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv4 Based ACE to display the IPv4 Based ACE page. Figure 8-5. IPv4 Based ACE: Summary Table 8-4. IP-Based ACL CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip access-list extended aclname no ip access-list extended aclname Defines an IPv4 access list and places the device in IPv4 access list configuration mode Use the no form of this command to remove the access list. console(config)# ip access-list extended server-aclDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 111 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed. 2 To add a rule, click Add ACE. 3 Select a user-defined ACL, and enter the following fields: – New ACE Priority (1-2147483647) —Enter the priority of the ACE. ACEs with higher priority are processed first. One is the highest priority. – Protocol Select From List — Select to create an ACE, based on a specific protocol. The following options are available: • ICMP — Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). The ICMP enables the gateway or destination host to communicate with the source host, for example, to report a processing error. • IGMP — Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). Enables hosts to notify their local switch or router that they want to receive transmissions assigned to a specific multicast group. • IPinIP — IP in IP. Encapsulates IP packets to create tunnels between two routers. This ensures that IPIP tunnel appears as a single interface, rather than several separate interfaces. IPIP enables tunnel intranets occur the internet, and provides an alternative to source routing. • TCP — Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees that packets are transmitted and received in the order they are sent. • EGP — Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP). Permits exchanging routing information between two neighboring gateway hosts in an autonomous systems network. • IGP — Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). Enables for routing information exchange between gateways in an autonomous network. • UDP — User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Communication protocol that transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery.112 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • HMP — Host Mapping Protocol (HMP). Collects network information from various networks hosts. HMP monitors hosts spread over the internet as well as hosts in a single network. • RDP — Reliable Data Protocol (RDP). provide a reliable data transport service for packet-based applications. • IDPR— Matches the packet to the IDPR protocol. • IDRP— Matches the packet to the Inter-Domain Routing Protocol (IDRP). • RVSP — Matches the packet to the ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP). • AH — Authentication Header (AH). Provides source host authentication and data integrity. • EIGRP — Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP). Provides fast convergence, support for variable-length subnet mask, and supports multiple network layer protocols. • OSPF — The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol is a link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing Layer Two (2) Tunneling Protocol, an extension to the PPP protocol that enables ISPs to operate Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). • IPIP — IP over IP (IPinIP). Encapsulates IP packets to create tunnels between two routers. This ensures that IPIP tunnel appears as a single interface, rather than several separate interfaces. IPIP enables tunnel intranets occur the internet, and provides an alternative to source routing. • PIM — Matches the packet to Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM). • L2TP— Matches the packet to Internet Protocol (L2IP). • ISIS — Intermediate System - Intermediate System (ISIS). Distributes IP routing information throughout a single autonomous system in IP networks. – Protocol ID To Match— Enter a protocol number if you did not select a protocol by name. – Any(IP) — Check to use any protocol. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 113 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Source Port (0 - 65535) — Enter the TCP/UDP source port. Enter either Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – Destination Port (0 - 65535) — Enter the TCP/UDP destination port. Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – Source IP Address — Enter the source IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. • Wildcard Mask —In addition to the Source MAC address, you can enter a mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 means the bits must be matched exactly in addition to the IP source address; ff.ff.ff.ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. • Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched. – Dest. IP Address — Enter the destination IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. • Wildcard Mask —In addition to the Destination MAC address, you can enter a mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 means the bits must be matched exactly in addition to the IP destination address; ff.ff.ff.ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. • Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched. – TCP Flags — To use TCP flags, check the TCP Flag checkbox and then check the desired flag(s). – ICMP — Specifies an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • Select from List — Select an ICMP type from the list. • ICMP Type — Enter the ICMP type. • Any — Check to use all ICMP types.114 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP packets that are filtered by ICMP message type or ICMP message code. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP code. • Any — Check to use all ICMP codes. – IGMP — IGMP packets can be filtered by IGMP message type. This field is available only when IGMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • Select from List — Select an IGMP message type from the list. • IGMP Type — Enter the IGMP message type. • Any — Check to use all IGMP message types. – Classification — Select one of the following matching options: • Match DSCP(0-63) — Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACL. • Match IP Precedence(0-7) — Check to enable matching IP-precedence with the packet IP-precedence value. IPprecedence enables marking frames that exceed the CIR threshold. In a congested network, frames containing a higher DP value are discarded before frames with a lower DP value. If this field is checked, enter a value to be matched. – Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE. Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page. – Action — Select the ACL forwarding action. The following options are available: • Permit — Forward packets which meet the ACL criteria. • Deny — Drop packets which meet the ACL criteria. • Shutdown — Drop packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disable the port to which the packet was addressed. – Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped packets. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 115 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring IP-based ACEs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based ACLs. Table 8-5. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit protocol {any|source-ip-address source-wildcard} {any|destination-ipaddress destination-wildcard} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit icmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard} [any|icmptype][any|icmp-code]] [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit igmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard}[igmp-type] [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit tcp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port/portrange}{any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard} {any|destinationport/port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all list-of-flags] [timerange time-range-name] permit udp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|port-range} {any|destination-ip-address destinationwildcard} {any|destination-port/port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [matchall time-range-name] [time-range timerange-name] Sets conditions to allow a packet to pass a named IP access list ( in access list configuration mode). The list of protocols is found above.116 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: deny protocol {any|source-ip-address source-wildcard} {any|destination-ipaddress destination-wildcard} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny icmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard{any|icmp-type} {any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny igmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard}[igmp-type] [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny tcp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|portrange}{any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard} {any|destinationport/port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all list-of-flags] [timerange time-range-name] [disable-port|loginput] deny udp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|port-range} {any|destination-ip-address destinationwildcard} {any|destination-port|port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [matchall time-range-name] [time-range timerange-name] [disable-port|log-input] Sets deny conditions for IPv4 access list (in access list configuration mode). console(config)# ip access-list extended server console(config-ip-al)# permit ip 1.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 1.1.2.0 0.0.0.0 Table 8-5. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 117 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6-Based ACLs The IPv6 Based ACL Page displays and enables the creation of IPv6 ACLs, which check pure IPv6-based traffic. IPv6 ACLs do not check IPv6-over-IPv4 or ARP packets. To define IPv6-based ACLs: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv6 Based ACL to display the IPv6 Based ACL: Summary page. Figure 8-6. IPv6 Based ACL: Summary A list of all of the currently defined IPv6-based ACLs is displayed. 2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL. 3 Enter the name of the new ACL. Names are case-sensitive.118 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring IPv6-based ACLs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IPv6-based ACLs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: IPv6-Based ACEs To add a rule to an IPv6-based ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv6 Based ACE to display the IPv6 ACE: Summary page. Figure 8-7. IPv6 Based ACE: Summary Table 8-6. IP-Based ACL CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 access-list [access-listname] no ipv6 access-list [accesslist-name] Defines an IPv6 access list and places the device in IPv6 access list configuration mode Use the no form of this command to remove the access list. console(config)# ipv6 access-list server-aclDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 119 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed. 2 To add a rule click Add ACE. 3 Select a user-defined ACL for which a rule is being created. 4 Enter the following fields: – New Rule Priority — Enter the ACE priority that determines which ACE is matched to a packet, based on a first match. – Protocol Select from List — Select to create an ACE, based on a specific protocol. The following options are available: • TCP — Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees packets are transmitted and received in the order the are sent. • UDP — User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Communication protocol that transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery. • ICMP — Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). The ICMP allows the gateway or destination host to communicate with the source host. For example, to report a processing error. • IPV6 — Matches the packet to the IPV6 protocol. – Protocol ID To Match — Enter a protocol. – Any — Check to use any protocol. – Source Port — Enter the TCP/UDP source port. Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – Destination Port — Enter the TCP/UDP destination port. Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – TCP Flags — To use TCP flags, check the TCP Flag checkbox and then check the desired flag(s). – ICMP — Specifies an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • Select from List — Select an ICMP type from the list. • ICMP Type — Enter the ICMP type.120 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Any — Check to use all ICMP types. – ICMP Code — Specifies an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP packets that are filtered by ICMP message type or ICMP message code. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP code. • Any — Check to use all ICMP codes. – Source IP Address — Enter the source IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. The following options are available: • Prefix Length —The number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix of the subnetwork. • Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched. – Dest. IP Address — Enter the destination IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. The following options are available: • Prefix Length —The number of bits that comprise the destination IP address prefix of the subnetwork. • Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched. – Traffic Class — Select one of the following options: • Match DSCP — Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACL. • Match IP Precedence — Matches the IP-precedence with the packet IP-precedence value. IP-precedence enables marking frames that exceed CIR threshold. In a congested network, frames containing a higher DP value are discarded before frames with a lower DP value. – Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE. Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page. – Action — The ACL forwarding action. The following options are available: • Permit — Forwards packets that meet the ACL criteria. • Deny — Drops packets that meet the ACL criteria.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 121 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Shutdown — Drops packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disables the port to which the packet was addressed. – Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped packets. Configuring IP-based ACEs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based ACLs. Table 8-7. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit protocol {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination- prefix/length } [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit icmp {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination-prefix/length } {any|icmp-type}{any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit tcp {any|{source-prefix/length } {any|source-port/port-range} }{any|destination prefix/length } {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all listof-flags] [time-range time-range-name] permit udp {any|{source-prefix/length }} {any|source-port|port-range} }{any|destination prefix/length } {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] Sets permit conditions for IPv6 access list.122 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: deny protocol {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination-prefix|length} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny icmp {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination-prefix/length } {any|icmp-type} {any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny tcp {any|{source-prefix/length } {any|source-port/port-range} }{any|destination-prefix/length} {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all listof-flags] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny udp {any|{source-prefix/length }} {any|source-port/port-range} }{any|destination-prefix|length} {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] Sets deny conditions for IPv4 access list (in Access List Configuration mode). console(config)# ipv6 access-list server console(config-ipv6-al)# permit tcp 3001::2/64 any any 80 Table 8-7. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 123 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ACL Binding When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that have been defined for the ACL are applied to that interface. Whenever an ACL is assigned on a port or LAG, flows from that ingress or egress interface that do not match the ACL, are matched to the default rule, which is to Drop unmatched packets. To change the default action for unmatched packets to an action other than Drop, do the following: • Add an additional ACE to the ACL with "Any" in all fields • Set its action other than Drop • Set the priority to the lowest in the ACL. To bind ACLs to interfaces: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > ACL Binding to display the ACL Binding: Summary page. Figure 8-8. ACL Binding: Summary The ports on the selected unit are displayed along with their associated ACLs.124 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 To bind an ACL to an interface, select an interface and click Edit. 3 Select an ACL(s). You can select one of each type (MAC-based ACL, IPv4-based ACL or IPv6-based ACL) or one IPv4-based ACL and one IPv6-based ACL. Configuring ACL Bindings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring ACL Bindings. . The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-8. ACL Bindings CLI Commands CLI Command Description service-acl input acl-name1 [acl-name2] no service-acl input Controls access to an interface Use the no form of the command to remove access control. show access-lists [acl-name] Displays access control lists (ACLs) configured on the switch. console(config)# mac access-list extended server console(config-mac-al)# permit 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:00:00:00:00:ff any console(config-mac-al)# exit console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# service-acl input serverDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 125 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Proprietary Protocol Filtering Protocol filters are used to disallow receiving specific proprietary protocol packets through an interface. These can be enabled for specific ports. If a protocol filter is enabled on a port, you cannot enable a QoS ACL on this port. To configure Proprietary Protocol Filtering: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Proprietary Protocol Filtering to display the Proprietary Protocol Filtering: Summary page. Figure 8-9. Proprietary Protocol Filtering: Summary A list of the ports and their filtered protocols is displayed. 2 Click Edit to modify the filtered protocols for a specific port. 3 Select a unit and an interface.126 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 Move the required protocols from the Available Protocols list to the Filtered Protocols list. The following displays the protocols and the addresses that are blocked: Configuring Proprietary Protocol Filtering Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Proprietary Protocol Filtering pages. Only one of the following CLI commands can be active on a port at the same time. To add other protocol filters, the command must be negated and then run again with all the required protocol names. . The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-9. Protocol Filtering Protocol Destination Address Protocol Type blockcdp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2000 blockvtp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2003 blockdtp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2004 blockudld 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x0111 blockpagp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x0104 blocksstp 0100.0ccc.cccd - blockall 0100.0ccc.ccc0 - 0100.0ccc.cccf - Table 8-10. Proprietary Protocol Filtering CLI Commands CLI Command Description service-acl input protocol1 [protocol2 … protocol6] no service-acl input Discards packets that are classified to specific protocols. Use the no form of those commands to disable discarding of the packets. console (Config-if)# service-acl input blockcdp blockvtpDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 127 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Time Range Time ranges can be defined and associated with an QoS ACL, so that it is applied only during that time range. There are two types of time ranges: • Absolute —This type of time range begins on a specific date or immediately and ends on a specific date or extends infinitely. It is created in the Time Range pages. A recurring element can be added to it. • Recurring — This is a time range element that is added to an absolute range, and begins and ends on a recurring basis. It is defined in the Time Range Recurrence pages. If a time range includes both absolute and recurring ranges, the ACL is activated only if both absolute start time and the recurring time range have been reached. The ACL is deactivated when either of the time ranges is reached. The switch supports a maximum of 10 absolute time ranges. All time specifications are interpreted as local time (Daylight Savings Time does not affect this). To ensure that the time range entries take effect at the desired times, the system time must be set. For more information on setting the system time, see "Time Synchronization" on page 169. A possible use for this feature is to limit access of computers to the network only during business hours, after which they are locked, and access to the rest of the network is blocked.128 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Absolute Time Range To define an absolute time range: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Time Range to display the Time Range: Summary page. Figure 8-10. Time Range: Summary The existing Time Ranges are displayed. 2 To add a new time range, click Add. 3 Enter the name of the time range in the Time Range Name field. 4 Define the Absolute Start time. – To begin the Time Range immediately, click Immediate. – To determine at what time in the future the Time Range will begin, enter values in the Date and Time fields.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 129 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 5 Define the Absolute End time. – To indicate that the Time Range should not end, click Infinite. – To determine the time at which the Time Range ends, enter values in the Date and Time fields. See "Configuring Time Ranges Using CLI Commands" on page 130 for the CLI commands for creating time ranges. Time Range Recurrence To add a recurring time range element to an absolute time range: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Time Range Recurrence to display the Recurring Time Range: Summary page. Figure 8-11. Recurring Time Range: Summary A daily and weekly recurring element of the time range that is selected is displayed if they exist.130 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 To add a recurring time range element to a time range, click Add. 3 Select the Time Range Name to which you want to add the Time Range Recurrence. The Absolute Start and Absolute End fields are displayed. 4 Check if the recurrence is Daily or Weekly in Recurrence type. 5 If the recurrence is Daily, enter: – Start Time — Select the time on which the time range starts. – End Time— Select the time on which the time range ends. – Weekday — Select the day of the week on which the time range occurs. 6 If the recurrence is Weekly, enter: • Start — Select the Day of the Week and Time on which the time range starts. • End —Select the Day of the Week and Time on which the time range ends. Configuring Time Ranges Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring time ranges. Table 8-11. Time Range CLI Commands CLI Command Description time-range time-range-name no time-range time-range-name Enables time-range configuration mode, and defines time ranges for functions (such as access lists). Use the no form of this command to remove the time range configuration. absolute start hh:mm day month year no absolute start absolute end hh:mm day month year no absolute end Adds start and end times to the time range. Use the no form of the commands to remove the start and end times from the time range.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 131 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm to day-of-the-week hh:mm no periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm to day-of-the-week hh:mm periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm day-of-theweek1 [day-of-the-week2… day-ofthe-week7] no periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm day-of-the-week1 [day-of-theweek2… day-of-the-week7] periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm all no periodic list all hh:mm to hh:mm all Adds a recurring time range to the time range. Use the no form of the commands to remove the recurring time range. console (config)# time-range http-allowed console (config-time-range)# absolute start 12:00 1 jan 2005 end 12:00 31 dec 2005 console (config-time-range)# periodic monday 8:00 to friday 20:00 Table 8-11. Time Range CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description132 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dot1x Authentication This section describes Dot1x authentication. It contains the following topics: • Port-Based Authentication Overview • Dot1x Overview • Port-Based Authentication Global • Port-Based Authentication Interface Settings • Monitoring Users • Host Authentication • Port Authentication Users Port-Based Authentication Overview Port-based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port basis via an external server. Only authenticated and approved system users can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the RADIUS server using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Port Authentication includes: • Authenticators — Specifies the device port that is authenticated before permitting system access. • Supplicants — Specifies the host connected to the authenticated port hat is requesting to access the system services. • Authentication Server — Specifies the external server, for example, a RADIUS server, which performs authentication on behalf of the authenticator, and indicates whether the supplicant is authorized to access system services. Port-based authentication creates two access states: • Controlled Access — Permits communication between the supplicant and the system, if the supplicant is authorized. • Uncontrolled Access — Permits uncontrolled communication, regardless of the port authorization state.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 133 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The device supports Port Based Authentication via RADIUS servers. Dot1x Overview Dot1x is an IEEE standard for port-based network access control. The Dot1x framework enables a device (the supplicant) to request port access from a remote device (authenticator) to which it is connected. The supplicant is permitted to send data to the port only after it is authenticated and authorized. If it is not authenticated and authorized, the authenticator discards the supplicant data, unless the data is sent to a Guest VLAN and/or non-authenticated VLANs. Authentication of the supplicant is performed by an external RADIUS server through the authenticator. The authenticator monitors the results of the authentication. In the Dot1x standard, a device can be a supplicant and an authenticator at a port, simultaneously requesting and granting port access. However, this device can only act as an authenticator, and does not take on the role of a supplicant. The following varieties of Dot1x exist: • Single session Dot1x: – A1—Single-session/Single Host — In this mode, the switch, as an authenticator, supports a single Dot1x session, and grants permission to use the port to an authorized supplicant. All other access requests, made by other devices received from the same port, are denied until the authorized supplicant is no longer using the port, or the access request is to an unauthenticated or guest VLAN. – Single-session/Multiple Hosts—This follows the Dot1x standard. In this mode, the switch, as an authenticator, enables any device to use a port, as long as it has been granted permission as a supplicant at the port. • Multi-Session Dot1x—Every device (supplicant) connecting to a port must be authenticated and authorized by the switch (authenticator), separately in a different Dot1x session. This is the only mode that supports Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA).134 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) is also referred to as RADIUS VLAN Assignment in this guide. When a port is in Multiple Session mode and is DVA-enabled, the switch automatically adds the port as an untagged member of the VLAN that is assigned by the RADIUS server during the authentication process. The switch classifies untagged packets to the assigned VLAN if the packets originated from the devices or ports that are authenticated and authorized. For a device to be authenticated and authorized at a DVA-enabled port: • The RADIUS server must authenticate the device and dynamically assign a VLAN to the device. • The assigned VLAN must not be the default VLAN and must have been created on the switch. • The switch must not be configured to use both a DVA and a MAC-based VLAN group. • A RADIUS server must support DVA with RADIUS attributes tunnel-type (64) = VLAN (13), tunnel-media-type (65) = 802 (6), and tunnel-privategroup-id = a VLAN ID. Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment The Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment feature enables specifying a userdefined ACL or policy in the RADIUS server. After a successful authentication, the user is assigned that ACL. Authentication Methods The possible authentication methods are: • Dot1x — The switch supports this authentication mechanism, as described in the standard, to authenticate and authorize Dot1x supplicants. • MAC-based — The switch can be configured to use this method to authenticate and authorize devices that do not support Dot1x. The switch emulates the supplicant role on behalf of the non-Dot1x-capable devices, and uses the MAC address of the devices as the username and password, when communicating with the RADIUS servers. MAC addresses for Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 135 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY username and password must be entered in lower case and with no delimiting characters (for example: aaccbb55ccff). To use MAC-based authentication at a port: – A Guest VLAN must be defined. – The port must be Guest-VLAN-enabled. – The packets from the first supplicant, at the port before it is authorized, must be untagged. You can configure a port to use Dot1x only, MAC-based only, or Dot1x and MAC-based authentication. If a port is configured to use both Dot1x and MAC-based authentication, a Dot1x supplicant has precedence over a non-Dot1x device. The Dot1x supplicant preempts an authorized, but non-Dot1x device, at a port that is configured with a single session. Unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLANs Unauthenticated VLANs and Guest VLANs provide access to services that do not require the subscribing devices or ports to be Dot1x or MAC-Based authenticated and authorized. An unauthenticated VLAN is a VLAN that allows access by authorized and unauthorized devices or ports. You can configure one or more VLAN to be unauthenticated in the VLAN Membership pages in "VLANs" on page 466. An unauthenticated VLAN has the following characteristics: • It must be a static VLAN, and cannot be the Guest VLAN or the default VLAN. • The VLAN’s member ports must be manually configured as tagged members. • The member ports must be trunk and/or general ports. An access port cannot be member of an unauthenticated VLAN. The Guest VLAN, if configured, is a static VLAN with the following characteristics. • It must be manually defined from an existing, static VLAN. • It is automatically available only to unauthorized devices, or to ports of devices that are connected and Guest VLAN enabled. 136 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If a port is Guest-VLAN-enabled, the switch automatically adds the port as an untagged member of the Guest VLAN when the port is not authorized, and removes the port from the Guest VLAN when the first supplicant of the port is authorized. • The Guest VLAN cannot be used as both the Voice VLAN and an unauthenticated VLAN. The switch also uses the Guest VLAN for authentication at ports configured with Multiple Session mode and MAC-based authentication. Therefore, you must configure a Guest VLAN before you can use the MAC-based authentication mode. For authentication to function, it must be activated both globally, in the PortBased Authentication Global page and individually on each port, in the PortBased Authentication Interface Settings pages. Monitoring Mode Monitoring mode enables providing users who fail authentication with limited network access. This enables these users to correct the reason that the authentication failed. The following are the main aspects of this feature: • Enables successful authentications using the returned RADIUS information • Provides a mechanism to report unsuccessful authentications without negative repercussions to the user due to administrator errors • Accurately reports the data received from the successful and nonsuccessful operations so that appropriate changes to problem areas may be made. The Dot1x monitoring activation command includes a special VLAN that is used when there is no access interface configuration present and the client(s) unsuccessfully authenticates. These clients are placed in the special VLAN. For users that unsuccessfully authenticate during re-authentication process, but already have existing VLANs configured, the failure to authenticate does not put them in a disabled state but places them back to the existing configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 137 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port-Based Authentication Global To globally configure authentication: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port Based Authentication Global to display the Port Based Authentication Global page. Figure 8-12. Port Based Authentication Global 2 Enter the following fields: – Port Based Authentication State — Enable/disable port-based authentication. – Authentication Method — Select an authentication method. The possible options are: 138 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • RADIUS, None — Perform port authentication first by using the RADIUS server. If no response is received from RADIUS (for example, if the server is down), then no authentication is performed, and the session is permitted. • RADIUS — Authenticate the user on the RADIUS server. If no authentication is performed, the session is not permitted. • None — Do not authenticate the user. Permit the session. – Guest VLAN — Enable/disable the use of a Guest VLAN for unauthorized ports. If a Guest VLAN is enabled, all unauthorized ports automatically join the VLAN selected in the Guest VLAN ID field. If a port is later authorized, it is removed from the Guest VLAN. – VLAN List — Select the Guest VLAN from the VLAN list. – Monitoring Mode — Enable/disable logging authentication attempts. – Monitoring VLAN — Enter the ID of the VLAN to which traffic being monitored is routed after unsuccessful Dot1x authentication. – Accept Supplicant when Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment Has No Resources — If no resources remain in the TCAM, the system can either reject (disable) or allow (enable) successful authentication. Enabling Port-Based Authentication Globally Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling the port based authentication as displayed in the Port Based Authentication Global page. Table 8-12. Port-Based Authentication Global CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa authentication dot1x default method1 [method2] no aaa authentication dot1x default Specifies one or more AAA methods for use on interfaces running IEEE 802.1X. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x system-auth-control no dot1x system-auth-control Enables 802.1x globally. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 139 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: dot1x system-auth-control monitor [vlan vlan-id] no dot1x system-auth-control monitor Enables 802.1x globally the 802.1x Monitoring mode and define the Monitor VLAN. Use the no format of the command to return to default. dot1x guest-vlan no dot1x guest-vlan Contains a list of VLANs. The guest VLAN is selected from the VLAN List. Use the no form of this command to disable access. show dot1x Displays 802.1X status for the device. console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none console(config)# interface vlan 5 console# show dot1x 802.1x is disabled Admin Oper Reauth Reauth Username Port Mode Mode Control Period -------- ------------------ ------------- -------- ------- -------- gi1/0/1 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a gi1/0/2 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a gi1/0/3 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a gi1/0/4 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a Table 8-12. Port-Based Authentication Global CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description140 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port-Based Authentication Interface Settings To configure 802.1x authentication on an interface: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port Based Authentication Interface Settings to display the Port Based Authentication Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 8-13. Port Based Authentication Interface Settings Port parameters for the selected unit are displayed. 2 Click Edit. 3 Select a port for which the authentication parameters apply in the Interface drop-down list. 4 Enter the parameters: – User Name — Displays the username of the port. – Admin Interface Control — Select the port authorization state. The possible options are: • Auto — Enables port-based authentication on the interface. The interface moves between an authorized or unauthorized state, based on the authentication exchange between the device and the client.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 141 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Authorized — Places the interface into an authorized state without being authenticated. The interface resends and receives normal traffic without client port-based authentication. • Unauthorized — Denies the selected interface system access by moving the interface into unauthorized state. The device cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface. – Current Interface Control — Displays the current port authorization state. – Authentication Type — Select the type of authentication on the port. The possible options are: • 802.1x Only — 802.1X authentication is the only authentication method performed on the port. • MAC Only — Port is authenticated, based on the supplicant MAC address. Only eight MAC-based authentications can be used on the port. • 802.1x & MAC — Both 802.1X and MAC-based authentication are performed on the switch. The 802.1X authentication takes precedence. NOTE: For MAC authentication to succeed, the RADIUS server supplicant username and password must be the supplicant MAC address. The MAC address must be in lower case letters and entered without the “:” or “-” separators; for example: 0020aa00bbcc. – Dynamic VLAN Assignment — Enable/disable dynamic VLAN assignment for this port. This feature enables you to automatically assign users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication. When a user is authenticated by the RADIUS server, the user is automatically joined to the VLAN configured on a RADIUS server. • Port Lock and Port Monitor should be disabled when DVA is enabled. • Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) can occur only if a RADIUS server is configured, and port authentication is enabled and set to 802.1x multi-session mode. • If the RADIUS Accept Message does not contain the supplicant’s VLAN, the supplicant is rejected.142 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Authenticated ports are added to the supplicant VLAN as untagged. • Authenticated ports remain unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLAN members. Static VLAN configuration is not applied to the port. • The following list of VLANs cannot participate in DVA: an Unauthenticated VLAN, a Dynamic VLAN that was created by GVRP, a Voice VLAN, a Default VLAN and a Guest VLAN. • Delete the supplicant VLAN while the supplicant is logged in. The supplicant is authorized during the next re-authentication if this supplicant VLAN is re-created, or a new VLAN is configured on the RADIUS server. NOTE: DVA provides the same functionality as the MAC to VLAN Assignment feature, but does so in a standard way. Therefore, when DVA is available, MAC to VLAN Assignment is not available. – Guest VLAN — Enable/disable port access to the Guest VLAN. If enabled, unauthorized users, connected to this interface, can access the Guest VLAN. – Dynamic Policy / ACL Assignment — Enable/disable this feature. – Periodic Reauthentication — Select to enable port re-authentication attempts after the specified Reauthentication Period. – Reauthentication Period (300-4294967295) — Enter the number of seconds after which the selected port is reauthenticated. – Reauthenticate Now — Select to enable immediate port re-authentication. – Authentication Server Timeout (1-65535) — Enter the time interval that lapses before the device resends a request to the authentication server. The field value is specified in seconds. – Resending EAP Identity Request (1-65535) — Enter the amount of time that lapses before EAP request are resent. – Quiet Period (0-65535) — Enter the number of seconds that the device remains in the quiet state, following a failed authentication exchange.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 143 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Supplicant Timeout (1-65535) — Enter the amount of time that lapses before EAP requests are resent to the supplicant. The field value is in seconds. – Max EAP Requests (1-10) — Enter the maximum number of EAP requests that can be sent. If a response is not received after the defined period (supplicant timeout), the authentication process is restarted. Enabling Port-Based Authentication on Interfaces Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling the port based authentication as displayed in the Port Based Authentication Global page. Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | forceunauthorized} no dot1x port-control Enables manual control of the port authorization state. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x mac-authentication {mac-only|mac-and-802.1x} no dot1x mac-authentication Enables authentication based on the station’s MAC address. Use the no form of this command to disable access. dot1x radius-attributes vlan no dot1x radius-attributes vlan Enables user-based VLAN assignment. Use the no form of this command to disable user-based VLAN assignment. dot1x guest-vlan enable no dot1x guest-vlan enable Enables unauthorized users on the interface access to the guest VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable access. dot1x max-req count no dot1x max-req Sets the maximum number of times that the device sends an EAP to the client, before restarting the authentication process. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.144 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY dot1x re-authentication no dot1x re-authentication Enables periodic re-authentication of the client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout supp-timeout Sets the number of seconds between reauthentication attempts. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x re-authenticate [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number] Manually initiates a re-authentication of all 802.1X-enabled ports or the specified 802.1X-enabled port. dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet-period Sets the number of seconds that the device remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout server-timeout seconds no dot1x timeout servertimeout Sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout supp-timeout seconds no dot1x timeout supp-timeout Sets the time for the retransmission of an EAP request frame to the client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout tx-period seconds no dot1x timeout tx-period Sets the number of seconds that the device waits for a response to an EAP - request/identity frame, from the client, before resending the request. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show dot1x [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number] Displays 802.1X status for the device or for the specified interface. Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 145 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show dot1x advanced Displays 802.1X advanced features for the switch or specified interface. show dot1x users [username username] Displays 802.1X users for the device. dot1x guest-vlan enable no dot1x guest-vlan enable Enables using a guest VLAN for unauthorized ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none console(config)# interface vlan 5 console(config-if)# dot1x auth-not-req console(config)# vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan 2 console(config-vlan)# exit console(config)# interface vlan 2 console(config-if)# dot1x guest-vlan console# show dot1x Interface Admin Mode Oper Mode Reauth Control Reauth Period Username -------- ------- ---------- -------- ------ -------- gi1/0/1 Auto Authorized Enabled 3600 Bob gi1/0/2 Auto Authorized Enabled 3600 John gi1/0/3 Auto Unauthoriz ed Enabled 3600 Clark gi1/0/4 Forceauth Authorized Disabled 3600 n/a Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description146 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Monitoring Users Use the Monitoring Users page to view rejected users. 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Monitoring Users to display the Monitoring Users page. Figure 8-14. Monitoring Users 2 Select a supplicant that was authenticated on the port. The supplicant’s information is displayed. – User Name — Name assigned to this port. – Port — Number of port. – VLAN — Port belongs to this VLAN. – MAC Address — Source of traffic. – Reject Reason — Reason that traffic was rejected. See Table 8-14 for a list of the possible reject reasons. – Time — Time that traffic was rejected.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 147 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Table 8-14. Reject Reason Description Abbreviation Description ACL-DEL ACL was deleted by a user. ACL-NOTEXST ACL sent by the RADIUS server does not exist on the device. ACL-OVRFL ACL sent by the RADIUS server cannot be applied because of TCAM overflow. AUTH-ERR Rejected by RADIUS due to wrong user name or password in the RADIUS server. FLTR-ERR RADIUS accept message contains more than two filter IDs. FRS-MTH-DENY First method is deny. IPv6WithMAC RADIUS accept message contains filter with IPv6 DIP and MAC addresses. IPV6WithNotIP RADIUS accept message contains IPv6 and not IP simultaneously. POL-BasicMode Policy is not supported in the QoS basic mode. POL-DEL Policy was deleted by a user. POL-OVRFL Policy sent by radius server can not be applied because of TCAM overflow. RAD-APIERR RADIUS API returned error (e.g. No RADIUS server is configured). RAD_INVLRES RADIUS server returned invalid packet (e.g. EAP attribute is missing). RAD-NORESP RADIUS server is not responding. VLAN-DFLT VLAN sent by a RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is the default VLAN. VLAN-DYNAM VLAN sent by RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is a dynamic VLAN. VLAN-GUEST VLAN sent by RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is the Guest VLAN.148 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Monitoring Users Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for monitoring users: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 8-15. Monitoring Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description show dot1x monitoring result [username username] Displays the captured information of each interface/host on the switch/stack. console# show dot1x monitoring Tom Username: Tom Port g1 Quiet period: 60 Seconds Tx period: 30 Seconds Max req: 2 Supplicant timeout: 30 Seconds Server timeout: 30 Seconds Session Time (HH:MM:SS): 08:19:17 MAC Address: 00:08:78:32:98:78 Authentication Method: Remote Assigned VLAN: 207 Reason for Failure:VLAN was not defined on SwitchDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 149 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Host Authentication Use the Host Authentication page to define the authentication mode on the port, and the action to perform if a violation is detected. To view ports and their authentication information: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Host Authentication to display the Host Authentication: Summary page. Figure 8-15. Host Authentication: Summary A list of the ports and their authentication modes is displayed. The fields are defined on the Edit page with the exception of the following field: – Single Host Status — Displays the host status. The possible options are: • Unauthorized — The port control is Force Unauthorized, the port link is down or the port control is Auto, but a client has not been authenticated via the port.150 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Not in Auto Mode — The port control is Forced Authorized, and clients have full port access. • Single-host Lock — The port control is Auto and a single client has been authenticated via the port. • No Single Host — Multiple Host is enabled. – Number of Violations — Displays the number of packets that arrive on the interface in single-host mode, from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address. 2 Click Edit. 3 In the Port drop-down list, select the port to which you want to apply the authentication mode. 4 Enter the fields: – Host Authentication — Define the host authentication type. The options are: • Single — Only a single authorized host can access the port. (Port Security cannot be enabled on a port in single-host mode.) • Multiple Host — Multiple hosts can be attached to a single 802.1x-enabled port. Only the first host must be authorized, and then the port is wide-open for all who want to access the network. If the host authentication fails, or an EAPOL-logoff message is received, all attached clients are denied access to the network. • Multiple Session — A number of specific authorized hosts may access the port. Each host is treated as if it was the first and only user and must be authenticated. Filtering is based on the source MAC address. – Action on Single Host Violation — Select the action to be applied to packets arriving in Single Session/Single Host mode, from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address. The options are: • Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source. • Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source, however, the MAC address is not learned.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 151 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source and shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are activated, or the switch is reset. Host Authentication pages: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 8-16. Host Authentication CLI Commands CLI Command Description dot1x host-mode {multihost|single-host|multisessions} Allows a single host (client) or multiple hosts on an IEEE 802.1x-authorized port. dot1x traps macauthentication failure no dot1x traps macauthentication failure Enables sending traps when a MAC address is successfully authenticated by the 802.1X mac-authentication access control. Use the no form of this command to disable the traps. dot1x traps macauthentication success no dot1x traps macauthentication success Enables sending traps when MAC address was failed in authentication of the 802.1X MAC authentication access control. Use the no form of this command to disable the traps. dot1x violation-mode {restrict | protect | shutdown} no dot1x violation-mode Configures the action to be taken, when a station whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address, attempts to access the interface. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show dot1x advanced [gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number] Displays 802.1x advanced features for the device or specified interface. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-host console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode single-host console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-sessions152 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Authentication Users The Port Authentication Users page enables you to view users that attempted to be authenticated. To view ports and their authentication definitions: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port Authentication Users to display the Port Authentication Users page. Figure 8-16. Port Authentication Users The ports and their authentication definitions are displayed. – User Name — Supplicant names that were authenticated on each port. – Port — Number of port. – Session Time — Amount of time (in seconds) that the supplicant was logged on the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 153 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Authentication Method — Method by which the last session was authenticated. The options are: • None—No authentication is applied; it is automatically authorized. • RADIUS—Supplicant was authenticated by a RADIUS server. • MAC Address—Displays the supplicant MAC address. – MAC Address — MAC address of user who attempted to be authenticated. – VLAN — VLAN assigned to the user. – Filter — Filter that was applied to the user by receiving the policy/ACL name from the RADIUS server (Dynamic ACL Assignment). 2 Click Details to view the names of the VLAN filters (Filter #1 and Filter #2) defined on the port, in addition to the above fields.154 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Display Port Authentication Users Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for displaying port authentication users: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 8-17. Display Port Authentication Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description show dot1x users Displays active 802.1x authenticated users for the device. console# show dot1x users Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter Name Time Method Address ------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------ gi1/0/1 Bob 1d 03:08:58 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter Name Time Method Address ------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------ gi1/01 Bob 1d 09:07:38 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 OK gi1/01 Tim 03:08:58 Remote 0008.3b79.3232 9 OK gi1/03 Paul 02:12:48 Remote 0008.3b89.8237 8 Warning console# show dot1x users username Bob Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter Name Time Method Address ------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------ gi1/01 Bob 1d 09:07:38 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 OKTemplate Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 155 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 9 Configuring System Information This section describes how to set system parameters, such as security features, switch software, system time, logging parameters and more. It contains the following topics: • General Switch Information • Time Synchronization • Logs • IP Addressing • Diagnostics • Management Security • DHCP Server • DHCP Server • File Management • Stack Management • sFlow156 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY General Switch Information This section describes how to view and set general switch parameters. It contains the following topics: • Asset Information • System Health • Power over Ethernet Asset Information Use the Asset page to view and configure general device information, including the system name, location, contact, system MAC Address, System Object ID, date, time, and system up time. To configure general device parameters: 1 Click System > General > Asset in the tree view to display the Asset page. Figure 9-1. AssetDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 157 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter/view the parameters: – System Name (0-159 Characters) — Enter the user-defined device name. – System Contact (0-159 Characters) — Enter the name of the contact person. – System Location (0-159 Characters) — Enter the location where the system is currently running. – MAC Address — Displays the device MAC address. – Sys Object ID — Displays the vendor's authoritative identification of the network management subsystem contained in the entity. – Date — Enter the current date (mandatory). This date can also be entered in the Manual Time Settings page. If SNTP has been defined, but the SNTP server is not available, the switch uses the date and time in this field and the Time field. – Time — Enter the current time (mandatory). This time can also be entered in the Manual Time Settings page. If SNTP has been defined, but the SNTP server is not available, the switch uses the date and time in this field and the Date field. – System Up Time — Displays the amount of time since the last device reset. 3 For each unit in the stack (displayed in Unit No.), the following information is displayed: – Service Tag — Displays the service reference number used when servicing the device. – Asset Tag — Enter the device asset tag. – Serial No. — Displays the device serial number. 4 Enter the Asset Tag (0-16 Characters) for each unit in the stack. This is the user-defined reference for the unit.158 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Entering Asset Information Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for entering fields displayed on the Asset page. The following is an example of the CLI commands Table 9-1. Asset CLI Command CLI Command Description snmp-server contact text no snmp-server contact Configures the system contact (sysContact) name. Use the no form of the command to remove the system contact information. snmp-server location text no snmp-server location Configures the system location string. Use the no form of this command to remove the location string. hostname name no hostname Specifies the device host name. Use the no form of the command to remove the existing host name. clock set hh:mm:ss {month|day} year Sets the system clock to this time. asset-tag [unit unit] tag no asset-tag [unit unit] Assigns the asset tag to the unit. Removes the asset tag from the unit. console (config)# asset-tag 2365491870Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 159 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY System Health To view the device’s power information and set fan administration state: 1 Click System > General > System Health in the tree view to display the System Health page. Figure 9-2. System Health The System Health page displays the following fields: – Unit No. — The unit in the stack for which information is displayed. Power Supply Status —Displays the following columns: – PS — The power status of the internal power unit. The possible options are: • Checked — The power supply is operating normally. • Unchecked — The power supply is not operating normally. • Not Present — The power supply is currently not present.160 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – RPS — The device has one of two auxiliary power supplies: Redundant Power Supply (RPS) for non-PoE devices and Modular Power Supply (MPS) for PoE devices. Only one of these may be present at one time. For each type of power supply, the possible options are: • Checked — The power supply is operating normally. • Unchecked — The power supply is not operating normally. • Not Present — The power supply is currently not present. – Temperature — Displays the temperature on the device. – Fan Status — The device has two fans. The device constantly measures the internal temperature, and powers the fans on/off according to the temperature. The user can set the fans to be constantly on. The possible options are: • Checked — The fans are operating normally. • Unchecked — At least one of the fans is not operating normally. – Fan Admin State — On/Auto status that user configured in the Edit page. – Fan Current Level — Specifies whether the fan is actually on or off. 2 The lower block displays the condition under which a fan will be turned on or off. – Fan Level — The on or off level. – Condition — The temperature at which the fans will be turned on or off. The device temperature is displayed in Celsius. The device temperature threshold is 40 C (104 F).Table 9-2 displays the temperature in Fahrenheit in increments of 5. NOTE: It is recommended to leave Fan User Level at Auto so that the fans operate according to the temperature of the switch. 3 To control the fans on a unit, or set the default value, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Unit ID — Select the unit ID whose fan will be adjusted.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 161 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Fan Admin State — Set one of the options: • Auto — Fans are turned on when the internal temperature of the switch is higher than the threshold displayed on the Summary page in the Condition field. • ON — Turns fan on under all conditions Table 9-2. Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table Viewing System Health Information Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed on the System Health page. Celsius Fahrenheit 0 32 5 41 10 50 15 59 20 68 25 77 30 86 35 95 40 104 Table 9-3. System Health CLI Command CLI Command Description show system [unit unit] Displays system information. system fans always-on [unit unit] no system fans always-on Sets the system fans to On regardless of device temperature. Use the no form of the command to return to default show system fans Displays the fans’ status.162 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Power over Ethernet A Power over Ethernet (PoE) switch is a type of PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment) that delivers electrical power to connected Powered Devices (PDs) over existing copper cables, without interfering with the network traffic, updating the physical network or modifying the network infrastructure. Using PoE eliminates the need to: • Place all network devices next to power sources. • Deploy double-cabling systems, significantly decreasing installation costs. PoE can be used in any network that deploys relatively low-powered devices connected to the Ethernet LAN. PDs are devices that receive power from the PowerConnect power supplies, such as: • IP phones console# show system Unit Type ---- ---------------------- 2 PowerConnect 5548 Unit Main Power Supply Redundant Power Supply ---- ----------------- ---------------------- 2 OK Unit Fans Status ---- ------------- 2 OK Unit Temperature (Celsius) Temperature Sensor Status ---- ------------------------- --------------------- 2 41 OK Unit Up time ---- --------------- 2 02,00:03:32Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 163 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Wireless access points • IP gateways • Audio and video remote monitoring devices PDs are connected to the device via the Gigabit ports. Error Conditions Traps are generated when the following occur: • Status change to port delivering/not delivering power to PD. • Indication that power usage is above the defined threshold. • Indication that power usage is below the threshold.164 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring PoE To configure PoE parameters on devices equipped with PoE: 1 Click System > General > Power over Ethernetin the tree view to display the Power Over Ethernet: Summary page. Figure 9-3. Power Over Ethernet: Summary 2 The PoE global parameters are displayed: – Power Status — The inline power source status. • On — The power supply unit is functioning. • Off — The power supply unit is not functioning. • Faulty — The power supply unit is functioning, but an error has occurred, for example, a power overload or a short circuit. – Nominal Power — The actual amount of power the device can supply, in watts.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 165 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Consumed Power — The amount of the power used by the device, in watts. 3 Enter the following parameters: – Power Limit Mode — Enter one of the following options for the system power limit mode. • Port — The power limit of the port depends on port configuration. • Max Port Power — In this mode, each port can get up to the maximum power, which is 15.4W. – System Usage Threshold (1-99 Percent) — Enter the percentage of power consumed before a trap is generated. – Traps — Enable/disable PoE traps on the device. If enabled, traps are generated if one of the following situations occurs: • Status change to port delivering/not delivering power to PD • Indication that power usage is above the defined threshold • Indication that power usage is below the threshold NOTE: If traps are enabled, you must also enable SNMP, and configure at least one SNMP notification recipient. 4 To view PoE port settings for a unit in the stack, select its Unit ID. The port PoE parameters are displayed for all ports on the unit. The fields displayed in this block are described in the Edit page. 5 To set PoE settings for a port, click Edit. 6 Select a port in the Port field, and enter the following PoE parameters for the PDs connected to this port. – PoE Admin Status — Select the device PoE mode. The possible options are: • Auto — Enables the Device Discovery protocol, and provides power to the device using the PoE unit. The Device Discovery Protocol enables the device to discover Powered Devices attached to the device interfaces, and to learn their classification. • Never — Disables the Device Discovery protocol, and stops the power supply to the device using the PoE module.166 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Power Priority Level— Enter the priority that determines the power that is used if the power supply is from Critical to Low. If, for example, the power supply is running at 99% usage, and port 1 is prioritized as Critical, but port 3 is prioritized as Low, port 1 is will receive power before port 3. – Power Limit (0-15.4) — Enter the maximum amount of power that the PoE unit may deliver to this port. – Powered Device (0-24 characters) — Enter a user-defined description of the PD connected to the port, such as: "Bob Smith’s telephone". The following fields are displayed on this page: – PoE Operational Status — Whether the port is currently providing power. If it is not providing power, the reason is displayed. – Power Consumption — The amount of power being consumed by the powered device. – Overload Counter — Total power overload occurrences. – Short Counter — Total power shortage occurrences. – Denied Counter — Number of times the powered device was denied power. – Absent Counter— Number of times the power supply was stopped to the PD because it was no longer detected. – Invalid Signature Counter — Number of times an invalid signature was received. Signatures are the means by which the powered device identifies itself to the PSE. Signatures are generated during powered device detection, classification, or maintenance.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 167 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Managing PoE Using the CLI Commands The following table describes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed on the Power Over Ethernet pages. Table 9-4. Power Over Ethernet CLI Commands CLI Command Description power inline {auto|never} Configures the administrative status of the inline power on an interface. power inline powered-device pdtype no power inline powered-device Adds a description of the powered device type. Use the no version of the command to remove the description. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. power inline priority {critical|high|low} no power inline priority Configures the priority of the interface from the point of view of inline power management. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. power inline usage-threshold no power inline usage-threshold Configures the threshold for triggering alarms. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. power inline traps enable no power inline traps enable Enables PoE device traps. Use the no form of this command to disable traps. power inline limit-mode {maxport-power|port} no power inline limit-mode Sets the power limit mode of the system. Use the no form of this command to return to default.168 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show power inline [[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet]port-number]|module stackmember-number] Displays PoE configuration information for all interfaces or for a unit in the stack. console# show power inline Unit Power Nominal Power Consumed Power Usage Threshold Traps ---- ------- ------------- ------------------ --------------- ----- 1 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable 2 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable 3 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable 4 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable Table 9-4. Power Over Ethernet CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 169 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Time Synchronization The system clock runs from the moment the system starts up, and keeps track of the date and time. The date and time may be either set manually, or it may be received from an SNTP server. This section describes how to set system time, and contains the following sections: • Manual Time Settings – Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time – CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time • System Time from an SNTP Server – Global Settings (Clock Source) – SNTP Global Settings – SNTP Authentication – SNTP Servers – SNTP Interfaces – CLI Script for Receiving Time from an SNTP Server Manual Time Settings This section describes how to set the system time manually on the device. It contains the following topics: • Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time • CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time170 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time Use the Manual Time Settings page to set system date/time manually (as opposed to receiving them from an external SNTP server). For more information on SNTP, see "System Time from an SNTP Server" on page 177. If system time is kept using an external SNTP clock, and the external SNTP clock fails, the system time reverts to the time set here or in the Asset page. In addition to setting the local clock, you can use this page to enable Daylight Savings Time (DST) on the device. The following is a list of DST start and end times in various countries: • Albania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Australia — From the end of October until the end of March. • Australia - Tasmania — From beginning of October until the end of March. • Armenia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Austria — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Bahamas — From April to October, in conjunction with U.S. summer hours. • Belarus — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Belgium — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Brazil — From the 3rd Sunday in October until the 3rd Saturday in March. During the period of Daylight Saving Time, Brazilian clocks go forward one hour in most of the Brazilian southeast. • Chile — Easter Island 9th March 12th October. The first Sunday in March or after 9th March. • China — China does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Canada — From the first Sunday in April until the last Sunday of October. Daylight Saving Time is usually regulated by provincial and territorial governments. Exceptions may exist in certain municipalities. • Cuba — From the last Sunday of March to the last Sunday of October. • Cyprus — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Denmark — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Egypt — Last Friday in April until the last Thursday in September. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 171 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Estonia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Finland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • France — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Germany — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Greece — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Hungary — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • India — India does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Iran — From 1st Farvardin until the 1st Mehr. • Iraq — From 1st April until 1st October. • Ireland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Israel — Varies year-to-year. • Italy — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Japan — Japan does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Jordan — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Latvia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Lebanon — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Lithuania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Luxembourg — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Macedonia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Mexico — From the first Sunday in April at 02:00 to the last Sunday in October at 02:00. • Moldova — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Montenegro — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Netherlands — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • New Zealand — From the first Sunday in October until the first Sunday on or after 15th March. • Norway — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Paraguay — From 6th April until 7th September. • Poland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Portugal — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.172 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Romania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Russia — From the 29th March until the 25th October. • Serbia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Slovak Republic — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • South Africa — South Africa does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Spain — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Sweden — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Switzerland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Syria — From 31st March until 30th October. • Taiwan — Taiwan does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Turkey — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • United Kingdom — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • United States of America — From the second Sunday of March at 02:00 to the first Sunday of November at 02:00.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 173 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To manually set the device time: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > Manual Time Settingsin the tree view to display the Manual Time Settings page. Figure 9-4. Manual Time Settings 2 Enter the following local settings: – Date — The system date. – Local Time — The system time. – Time Zone Offset — The difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and local time. For example, the Time Zone Offset for Paris is GMT +1:00, while the local time in New York is GMT –5:00. 3 To set Daylight Savings Time (DST), select the Daylight Savings field and select one of the possible options: – USA — The device switches to DST at 2 a.m. on the second Sunday of March, and reverts to standard time at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of November. 174 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – European — The device switches to DST at 1:00 am on the last Sunday in March, and reverts to standard time at 1:00 am on the last Sunday in October. The European option applies to EU members, and other European countries using the EU standard. – Other — Specifies that you will set DST manually in the fields described below. If you selected USA or European you are finished. If you selected Other, proceed to the next step. There are two types of DST possible when Others is selected. You can set a specific date in a particular year, or you can set a recurring setting, irrespective of the year. For a specific setting in a particular year, complete the Daylight Savings area, and for a recurring setting, complete the Recurring area. If Other is selected, the From and To fields must be defined either in the Non-recurring or Recurring section. 4 To enter non-recurring DST parameters, enter the following fields: – From — The time that DST begins. The possible options are: • DD/MMM/YY — The date, month, and year at which DST begins. • HH/MM — The time (hour and minutes) at which DST begins. – To — The time that DST ends. The possible options are: • DD/MMM/YY — The date, month, and year at which DST ends. • HH/MM — The time (hour and minutes) at which DST ends. 5 To enter recurring DST parameters, select Recurring and enter the following fields: – From — The time that DST begins each year, for example, DST begins locally every second Sunday in April at 5:00 am. The possible options are: • Day — The day of the week from which DST begins every year. • Week — The week within the month from which DST begins every year. • Month — The month of the year in which DST begins every year. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 175 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Time — The time at which DST begins every year. – To — The recurring time that DST ends each year, for example, DST ends locally every fourth Friday in October at 5:00 am. The possible options are: • Day — The day of the week at which DST ends every year. • Week — The week within the month at which DST ends every year. • Month — The month of the year in which DST ends every year. • Time — The time at which DST ends every year. CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time The following steps (in any order) must be completed before setting time manually: • Set system time • Define the time zone in relation to GMT. • Configure Daylight Savings Time. The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Manual Time Setting pages when the clock source is Local. Table 9-5. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands CLI Description clock set hh:mm:ss {[day month]|[month day]} year Set the system clock to this time. clock summer-time zone recurring {usa|eu|{week day month hh:mm week day month hh:mm}}[offset] Configures the system to automatically switch to summer time (according to the USA and European standards) every year on a recurring basis. 176 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY clock summer-time zone date date month year hh:mm date month year hh:mm [offset] clock summer-time zone date month date year hh:mm month date year hh:mm [offset] no clock summer-time Configures the system to automatically switch to summer time (Daylight Savings Time) for a specific period - date/month/year format. Use the no form of the command to configure the system not to switch to summer time (Daylight Savings Time). clock timezone zone hoursoffset [minutes offset] Sets the time zone and names it "zone" for display purposes. show clock Displays the time and date from the system clock. Table 9-5. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands (Continued) CLI DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 177 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY A sample script to set system time manually is shown below System Time from an SNTP Server This section describes how to receive date/time from an SNTP server. It contains the following topics: • SNTP Overview • SNTP Global Settings • SNTP Authentication • SNTP Servers • SNTP Interfaces Table 9-6. CLI Script to Set Manual System Time CLI Description Console# clock set 13:32:00 7 Nov 2010 Set the system time. console# configure console(config)# clock timezone Ohio +2 Set the time zone to GMT plus 2 hours. The name of the zone "Ohio" is purely for documentation purposes. This is not mandatory for manual time, but is recommended. It enables anyone seeing the time to know what that time is in respect to their timezone. console(config)# clock summer-time Ohio_Summer recurring usa Set Daylight Savings Time such that it recurs every year and is based on the summer time schedule of the USA. The name of the zone "Ohio_Summer" is for documentation purposes only. console(config)# exit console# show clock Display the system time.178 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNTP Overview The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), which provides accurate network switch clock time synchronization of up to 100 milliseconds. The implementation of SNTP is based on SNTPv4 (RFC 2030). SNTP is a simple and lighter version of NTP, and can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation, described in RFC-1305, is not required. SNTP operates with NTP, thus an SNTP client can work with both SNTP and NTP servers. The switch operates only as a client, and cannot provide time services to other systems. SNTP Server Types The switch can accept time information from the following server types: • Unicast Polling for Unicast information is used for polling a server whose IP address is known. This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time, as it is most secure. Up to eight SNTP servers can be defined. If this method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined in the SNTP Servers page. Time levels T1 - T4 (see the "Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server" on page 180 section) are used to determine from which server time information is accepted. If Unicast polling is not enabled or if no servers are defined on the device, the device accepts time information from any SNTP server of the type that is enabled, which responds. • Anycast Polling for Anycast information is used when the SNTP server’s IP address is not defined or it cannot be reached. If this method is enabled, time information can be received from any SNTP server on the network. The Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 179 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY device time and date are synchronized when it proactively requests synchronization information. Anycast polling to get time information is preferable to Broadcast polling, because it is more secure. Time levels T3 and T4 are used to determine from which server time information is accepted. • Broadcast Broadcast information is used if receiving Broadcast packets has been enabled, and one of the following situations occurs: – The SNTP server IP address has not been defined. – Several time-information packets are received and the Broadcast time is best according to the algorithm defined in "Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server" on page 180. Broadcast is the least secure method of receiving time, because it is both unsecured and the time information was not specifically requested by the device. Anycast is also unsecured, but time-information packets are only accepted if they were requested. Stratums Each SNTP server is characterized by stratums, which define the accuracy of its clock. The stratum is the distance, in terms of NTP hops, from the most authoritative time server. The lower the stratum (where zero is the lowest), the more accurate the clock. The switch accepts time from stratum 1 and above. The following provides examples of clocks from various stratums: • Stratum 0 — A real time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system. • Stratum 1 — A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. • Stratum 2 — The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path, for example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, via NTP, from a Stratum 1 server.180 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server Messages received from SNTP servers are logged, until there are three responding servers, or the timer expires. In any event, when the third message is received, the timer expires. A server is selected to be the “designated server” according to the following criteria: • The stratum (the distance in terms of NTP hops from the best authoritative time servers) is considered, and the server with the best (lowest) stratum is selected. • If there is a tie in stratums, packets from servers defined on the device are preferred to Anycast packets, which in turn are preferred to Broadcast packets. • If multiple servers pass the above criteria, then the server that sent the first (earliest) time packet is chosen. If a better server is discovered later, it is selected to be the “designated server” at that time. Polling You can configure the system to acquire time information in the following ways: • Enable polling — Time information is requested every polling interval. • Do not enable polling — Time information is received when the system is brought up and every time that a topological change is made to the Running Configuration file, for example when an SNTP Unicast server is added. This is configured by the user in the SNTP Global Settings page. On power up, when the switch sends a request and there is no reply, it issues another request (three retries at most) after 20 seconds of waiting. If no SNTP server is found, the process is invoked every “poll interval” (set in the SNTP Global Settings page), and a management trap is triggered. Authentication You can require that SNTP servers be authenticated, although this is not mandatory (see the SNTP Authentication pages). Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 181 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MD5 (Message Digest 5) Authentication safeguards device synchronization paths to SNTP servers. MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash value. MD5 is a variation of MD4, and increases MD4 security. MD5 both verifies the integrity of the communication and authenticates the origin of the communication. Global Settings (Clock Source) System time can be set manually, or it may be received from an external SNTP server. You if wish to set the system time manually, you do not to use the Global Settings page, because the default is manual (local) system time. To set the clock source: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 9-5. Global Settings182 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Select the Clock Source. The possible options are: – Local—System time is taken from the device’s internal clock. Set this as defined in "Manual Time Settings" on page 169. – SNTP— System time is set via an SNTP server. Set SNTP parameters as defined in "System Time from an SNTP Server" on page 177. Defining the Clock Source Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the clock source. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNTP Global Settings If SNTP was selected as the clock source in the Global Settings page, you must define the mechanism of setting time from an SNTP server. This is done in the SNTP pages, described below. Table 9-7. Clock Source CLI Command CLI Description clock source {sntp} no clock source Configures an external time source for the system clock. Use the no form of this command to disable the external time source. show clock [detail] Displays the time and date from the system clock and its source. console# configure console(config)# clock source sntp console# show clock detail 3:29:03 UTC Sep 7 2010 Time source is sntp Time zone: Offset is UTC+0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 183 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define the types of server from which the device accepts SNTP information and the polling interval: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Global Settings in the tree view to display the SNTP Global Settings page. Figure 9-6. SNTP Global Settings 2 Enter the fields: – Poll Interval (60-86400) — Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the SNTP servers are polled. – Receive Broadcast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time information from Broadcast servers. – Receive Anycast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time information from Anycast SNTP servers. – Receive Unicast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time information from the SNTP servers defined on the switch. – Poll Unicast Requests — Enable/disable sending SNTP Unicast server time information requests to the SNTP server.184 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining SNTP Global Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Global Settings pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNTP Authentication Use the SNTP Authentication page to enable/disable SNTP authentication between the device and an SNTP server, and to set the means by which the SNTP server is authenticated. Table 9-8. SNTP Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp client poll timer seconds no sntp client poll timer Sets the polling time for an SNTP client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. sntp broadcast client enable no sntp broadcast client enable Enables SNTP Broadcast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP Broadcast clients. sntp anycast client enable no sntp anycast client enable Enables SNTP Anycast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP Anycast clients. sntp unicast client enable no sntp unicast client enable Enables SNTP predefined Unicast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP Unicast clients. show sntp configuration Displays SNTP configuration console(config)# sntp anycast client enableDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 185 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure SNTP authentication: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Authentication in the tree view to display the SNTP Authentication: Summary page. Figure 9-7. SNTP Authentication: Summary The previously-defined authentication keys are displayed. 2 Enable/disable SNTP Authentication. This enables/disables authenticating SNTP sessions between the device and an SNTP server. 3 Multiple keys can be defined. To add a new SNTP authentication key, click Add, and enter the fields. – Encryption Key ID (1 - 4294967295) — Enter the number used to identify this SNTP authentication key internally. – Authentication Key (1 - 8 Characters) — Enter the key used for authentication. The SNTP server must send this key for the switch to use its time/date information.186 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Trusted Key — Check to specify that the encryption key is used to authenticate the (Unicast) SNTP server. If this is not checked, the key is not used for authentication (and another key(s) is used). Defining SNTP Authentication Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Authentication pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-9. SNTP Authentication CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp authenticate no sntp authenticate Defines authentication for received SNTP traffic from servers. Use the no form of this command to disable the feature. sntp trusted-key keynumber no sntp trusted-key keynumber Authenticates the identity of a system to which SNTP will synchronize. Use the no form of this command to disable system identity authentication. sntp authentication-key key-number md5 value no sntp authenticationkey key-number Defines an authentication key for SNTP. Use the no form of this command to remove the authentication key for SNTP. console(config)# sntp authenticate console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8 console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkkeyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 187 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNTP Servers To add an SNTP server or display SNTP server information: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Servers in the tree view to display the SNTP Servers: Summary page. Figure 9-8. SNTP Servers: Summary The following is displayed for the previously-defined servers: – SNTP Server — IP address of server. – Polling — Polls the selected SNTP server for system time information, when enabled. – Encryption Key ID — Key Identification used to communicate between the SNTP server and device. 188 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Preference — SNTP server providing SNTP system time information. The system displays on of the following options: • Primary — The server from which time was last accepted. • Secondary — All other servers from which time was received. – Status — The operating SNTP server status. The possible options are: • Up — The SNTP server is currently operating normally. • Down — An SNTP server is currently not available, for example, the SNTP server is currently not connected or is currently down. • In progress — The SNTP server is currently sending or receiving SNTP information. • Unknown — The progress of the SNTP information currently being sent is unknown, for example, the device is currently looking for an interface. – Last Response — The last time a response was received from the SNTP server. – Offset — The estimated offset of the server's clock, relative to the local clock, in milliseconds. The host determines the value of this offset, using the algorithm described in RFC 2030. – Delay — The estimated round-trip delay of the server's clock, relative to the local clock over the network path between them, in milliseconds. The host determines the value of this delay, using the algorithm described in RFC 2030. 2 To add an SNTP Server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is used for the IP address of the SNTP server. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. Select one of the possible options: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 189 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. Select one of the possible options: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – SNTP Server — Enter the SNTP server’s IP address. – Poll Interval — Enable/disable polling the selected SNTP server for system time information, when enabled. – Encryption Key ID — Check to use an encryption key, and select one of the encryption keys that was defined in the SNTP Authentication pages. Defining SNTP Servers Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Server pages. Table 9-10. SNTP Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp server {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|ipv6- address|hostname} [poll] [key key-id] no sntp server {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|ipv6- address|hostname} Configures the device to use SNTP to request and accept SNTP traffic from a server. Use the no form of this command to remove a server from the list of SNTP servers. sntp unicast client poll no sntp unicast client poll Enables polling for the SNTP predefined Unicast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable the polling for the SNTP client. show sntp status Displays the SNTP server statuses.190 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNTP Interfaces If receiving time information from Anycast servers is enabled, you can determine through which interface the Anycast packets are sent and received. If no interface is defined, Anycast requests are not sent. console(config)# sntp server 100.1.1.1 poll key 10 console# show sntp status Clock is unsynchronized Unicast servers: Server Status Last Response Offset Delay [mSec] [mSec] --------------- --------- ------------- -------- ------- Anycast server: Server Interface Status Last Response Offset Delay [mSec] [mSec] --------------- -------- -------------- ------ ------ Broadcast: Interface IP Address Last Response ------------ --------------- ----------------------- gi1/0/1 00:00:00.0 Jan 1 2010Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 191 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To enable receiving Anycast updates on an interface: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Interface Settings to display the SNTP Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-9. SNTP Interface Settings: Summary The following fields are displayed for every interface for which an SNTP interface has been enabled: – Interface — The port, LAG or VLAN on which SNTP is enabled. – Receive Servers Updates — Displays whether the interface is enabled to receive updates from the SNTP server. 2 To add an interface that can receive SNTP server updates, click Add. 3 Select an interface and enable/disable State to indicate that the interface can now receive/not receive SNTP server updates.192 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining SNTP Interface Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Interface Settings pages. Table 9-11. SNTP Interface Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp client enable {[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-id|vlan vlan-id|portchannel LAG-number]} no sntp client enable {[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et]port-number|vlan vlan-id|portchannel LAG-number]} Enables the SNTP client on an interface in Global Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the SNTP client. sntp client enable no sntp client enable Enables SNTP client on an interface in Interface Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the SNTP client. show sntp configuration Shows the configuration of the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 193 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: CLI Script for Receiving Time from an SNTP Server The following is a sample script that configures receiving system time from an SNTP server. console# configure console(config)# sntp client enable gi1/0/1 console# exit console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# sntp client enable console# show sntp configuration SNTP port : 123. Polling interval: 1024 seconds. No MD5 authentication keys. Authentication is not required for synchronization. No trusted keys. Unicast Clients: Disabled Unicast Clients Polling: Disabled Server Polling Encryption Key ----------------------------- ---------- ----------- Broadcast Clients: disabled Anycast Clients: disabled Broadcast Interfaces: gi1/0/1 Table 9-12. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands CLI Description console# configure console(config)#clock source sntp Set the source of time as an SNTP server.194 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console(config)#sntp client poll timer 6 Set polling time to 6 seconds. console(config)#sntp unicast client enable Enable accepting time from predefined Unicast clients. console(config)#sntp unicast client poll Enable polling predefined Unicast clients. console(config)#sntp server 10.4.1.3 poll Define the server that will be used as an SNTP server. console(config)#exit console# show sntp configuration Display SNTP settings. console# show sntp status Display SNTP servers. Table 9-12. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands (Continued) CLI DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 195 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Logs The Logs feature enables the switch to keep several, independent logs. Each log is a set of entries that record system events. It contains the following topics: • System Log Overview • Global Parameters • RAM Log • Log File (in Flash) • Login History • Remote Log Server System Log Overview System logs record events and report errors or informational messages. Some aspects of system logging can be configured, as described below. When you configure system logging, the configuration applies to all units in the stack. Some events are automatically logged, such as hardware problems. You may enable/disable logging the following types of events: • Authentication Events in the Global Parameters page • Copy File Events in the Global Parameters page • Management Access Events in the Global Parameters page • Login History in the Login History page Event messages have a unique format, as per the System Logs (SYSLOG) protocol recommended message format for all error reporting, for example, SYSLOG and local device reporting messages are assigned a severity code, and include a message mnemonic that identifies the source application generating the message. Messages may be filtered, based on their urgency or relevancy. Events may be logged to the following destinations: • Console • Logging buffer (RAM)— Messages are stored in a cyclical file buffer. When the maximum number of messages is reached, messages are written starting at the beginning of the buffer (overwriting the old messages). 196 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Logs stored on the Logging buffer are deleted when the device is reset. • Logging file (flash) — Messages are stored in flash memory. When the buffer is full, messages are written starting at the beginning of the memory block (overwriting the old messages). • SYSLOG Server — Messages are sent to a remote server. This is useful for central and remote management and to provide more space for storage of messages. Up-to eight SYSLOG servers can be defined in the Remote Log Server Settings pages. You can select where to send logging messages according to their severity. Each of the severity level can be directed to the console, RAM log, flash log file or SYSLOG server or to any combination of these destinations. Global Parameters Use the Global Parameters page to enable/disable logging for the following logging severity levels. – Emergency — If the device is down or not functioning properly, an emergency log message is saved to the specified logging location. – Alert — An alert log is saved if there is a serious device malfunction, for example, all device features are down. – Critical — A critical log is saved if a critical device malfunction occurs, for example, two device ports are not functioning, while the rest of the device ports remain functional. – Error — A device error has occurred, for example, a single port is offline. – Warning — The lowest level of a device warning. The device is functioning, but an operational problem has occurred. – Notice — Provides device information to which you might have to respond. – Informational — Provides device information to which you do not have to respond. – Debug — Provides debugging messages. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 197 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY If you enable logging, some events are automatically logged, and in addition, you can enable/disable specific types of logging and set their destination. To configure logging: 1 Click System > Logs > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 9-10. Global Parameters 2 Enable/disable logging in the Logging drop-down list. Console logs are enabled by default, and cannot be disabled. 3 If Logging is enabled, select the types of events to be logged in addition to the events that are always logged: – Log Authentication Events — Enable/disable generating logs when users are authenticated. 198 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Log Copy Files Events — Enable/disable generating logs when files are copied. – Log Management Access Events — Enable/disable generating logs when the device is accessed using a management method, for example, each time the device is accessed using SSH, a device log is generated. 4 To select the destination of logging messages, according to their severity levels, check the minimum severity level that will be associated with the console log, RAM log, Log file (Flash memory) and remote SYSLOG servers. When a severity level is selected, all severity levels above the selection are selected automatically. Enabling Logs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Global Parameters page. Table 9-13. Global Log Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description logging on no logging Enables error message logging. Turns off error message logging. logging console level no logging console level Limits messages logged to the console, based on severity. Use the no form of this command to disable logging limiting to the console. logging file level no logging file Limits SYSLOG messages stored in flash memory, based on severity. Use the no form of this command to cancel using the buffer. file-system logging {copy|delete-rename} Enables the logging of file system events.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 199 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: management logging {deny} no management logging {deny} Enables Management Access List (ACL) deny events. Use the no form of this command to disable logging management access list events. aaa logging {login} no aaa logging {login} Enables logging authentication login events. Use the no form of this command to disable logging authentication login events. console# configure console(config)# logging on console(config)# logging console errors console(config)# logging file alerts Table 9-13. Global Log Parameters CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description200 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RAM Log To manage the RAM log buffer: 1 Click System > Logs > RAM Log in the tree view to display the RAM Log page. Figure 9-11. RAM Log The Max RAM Log Entries (20-400) line, which contains the maximum number of RAM log entries permitted, is displayed. When the log buffer is full, the oldest entries are overwritten. The Current Setting contains how many entries are currently permitted, and you can change this number in the New Setting (after reset) field. The following is displayed for the existing logs: – Log Index — The log number in the RAM Log table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 201 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Log Time — The time at which the log was entered into the RAM Log table. – Severity — The log severity. – Description — The log entry text. 2 To remove all entries from the RAM log, click Clear Log. Viewing and Clearing the RAM Log Table Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the size of the RAM log buffer, viewing, and clearing entries in the RAM log. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-14. RAM Log Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description logging buffered size no logging buffered Sets the number of SYSLOG messages stored in the internal buffer (RAM). Use the no form of this command to cancel using the buffer. show logging Displays the RAM logging buffer. clear logging Clears the RAM logging buffer. console(config)# logging buffered 300 04-Oct-2010 09:47:04 %SYSLOG-N-LOGGINGBFRSIZE: the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer will be changed to 300 (after reboot).202 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Log File (in Flash) To view and/or clear the flash memory log file: 1 Click System > Logs > Log File in the tree view to display the Log File page. Figure 9-12. Log File The following is displayed for the existing logs: – Log Index — The log number in the Log file. – Log Time — The time at which the log was entered. – Severity — The log severity. – Description — The log entry text. 2 To remove all entries from the log file, click Clear Log.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 203 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying the Log File Table Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Log File page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Login History Use the Login History page to monitor users, including the time a user logged in, and the protocol used to log on to the device. Table 9-15. Log File Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description show logging file Displays the logging state and the SYSLOG messages stored in the logging file. console# show logging file Logging is enabled. Console Logging: Level info. Console Messages: 0 Dropped. Buffer Logging: Level info. Buffer Messages: 62 Logged, 62 Displayed, 200 Max. File Logging: Level debug. File Messages: 11 Logged, 51 Dropped. SysLog server 1.1.1.1 Logging: info. Messages: 0 Dropped. 01-Jan-2000 01:12:01 :%COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully 01-Oct-2010 01:11:49 :%LINK-I-Up: gi/1/0/11 01-Oct-2010 01:11:46 :%LINK-I-Up: gi/1/0/12204 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To enable user history logging and view user login history: 1 Click System > Logs > Login History in the tree view to display the Login History page. Figure 9-13. Login History The login history for the selected user or all users is displayed. 2 Enable/disable Login History to File to record login history. 3 Select a user or All from the User Name drop-down list. The login history for this user is displayed in the following fields: • Login Time — The time the selected user logged on to the device. • User Name — The user that logged on to the device. • Protocol — The means by which the user logged on to the device. • Location — The IP address of the station from which the device was accessed.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 205 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying the Device Login History Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing and setting fields displayed in the Login History page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-16. Login History CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa login-history file no aaa login-history file Enables writing to the login history file. Use the no form of this command to disable writing to the login history file. show users login-history [username] Displays the user’s login history. console (config)# aaa login-history file console# show users login-history Login Time Username Protocol Location ----------- -------- -------- ---------- 01-Oct-2010 23:58:17 admin HTTP 172.16.1.8 01-Oct-2010 07:59:23 admin Telnet 172.16.0.8206 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Remote Log Server Log messages can be sent to remote log servers, using the SYSLOG protocol. To add a remote log server: 1 Click System > Logs > Remote Server Settings in the tree view to display the Remote Log Server: Summary page. Figure 9-14. Remote Log Server: Summary The previously-defined remote servers are displayed. 2 To add a remote log server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 207 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – New Log Server IP Address — Enter the IP address of the remote SYSLOG server. – UDP Port (1-65535) — Enter the UDP port to which the logs are sent for the selected server. – Facility — Select a user-defined application from which system logs are sent to the remote server. Only a single facility can be assigned to a single server. If a second facility level is assigned, the first facility level is overridden. All applications defined for a device utilize the same facility on a server. – Description (0-64 Characters) — Enter a server description. – Severity to Include — Check the severity levels to be logged to the remote server. The event severity levels are listed on this page in descending order from the highest severity to the lowest. When a severity level is selected to appear in a log, all higher severity events are automatically selected to appear in the log. When a security level is not selected, no lower severity events appear in the log. 208 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Working with Remote Server Logs Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for working with remote log servers. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-17. Remote Log Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description logging host {ipv4-address|ipv6- address|hostname} [port port-id] [severity level] [facility facility] [description text] no logging host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} Logs messages to a remote server with this IP address. Use the no form of this command to delete the SYSLOG server with the specified address from the list of SYSLOGs. show syslog-servers Displays list of SYSLOG servers. console (configure) # logging host 1.1.1.1 console# show syslog-servers Device Configuration --------------------------------------------------------- IP Address Port Facility Severity Description ----------- ----- -------- ----------- ----------- 1.1.1.1 514 local7 info 1.1.1.2 514 local7 info 1.1.1.3 514 local7 info 1.1.1.4 514 local7 infoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 209 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IP Addressing This section describes how to configure IP addresses on the switch, and contains the following topics: • IP Addressing Overview • IPv4 Interface Parameters • DHCP IPv4 Interface • IPv4 Static Routing • IPv6 Interfaces • IPv6 Default Gateway • ISATAP Tunnel • IPv6 Neighbors • IPv6 Routes Table • Domain Name System • Default Domain Names • Host Name Mapping • ARP • UDP Relay IP Addressing Overview The device functions as an IPv6-compliant host, as well as an IPv4-host (also known as dual stack). This enables device operation in a pure-IPv6 network, as well as in a combined IPv4/IPv6 network. Difference Between IPv4 and IPv6 Addressing The primary difference between IPv4 to IPv6 is the length of network addresses. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits, whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits. Thus, IPv6 addresses enable the use of many more unique addresses. The 128-bit IPv6 address format is divided into eight groups of four hexadecimal digits. Abbreviation of this format by replacing a group of zeros with double colons (::) is acceptable. IPv6 address representation can be further simplified by suppressing the leading zeros.210 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY All IPv6 address formats are acceptable, yet for display purposes, the system displays the most abbreviated form, which replaces groups of zeros with double colons and removes the leading zeros. IPv6 Prefixes While Unicast IPv6 addresses written with their prefix lengths are permitted, in practice their prefix lengths are always 64 bits, and therefore are not required to be expressed. Any prefix that is less than 64 bits is a route or address range that summarizes a portion of the IPv6 address space. For every assignment of an IP address to an interface, the system runs the Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) algorithm to ensure uniqueness. An intermediary transition mechanism is required for IPv6-only nodes to communicate with IPv6 nodes over an IPv4 infrastructure. The tunneling mechanism implemented is the Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP). This protocol treats the IPv4 network as a virtual IPv6 local-link, with each IPv4 address mapped to a Link Local IPv6 address. IPv4 Interface Parameters You can assign IP addresses to the interface in the following ways: • Manual Assignment — Described below • DHCP Server Assignment — Described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214 Multiple IP addresses can be configured in the IPv4 Interface Parameters pages. These IP addresses can be assigned to a port, LAG, or VLAN interface. When an IP address is assigned, it is checked for uniqueness in the following way: • A gratuitous ARP request is sent three times every three seconds. • If after (3+1)*3 = 12 seconds the switch has not received the ARP response, the IP address is considered to be unique. • During the procedure the switch has to reply to gratuitous ARP and probe ARP requests with the validated IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 211 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The IP address is assigned even if the above validation procedure concludes that the IP address in question is not unique, but a SYSLOG message is generated. In addition to the above validation procedure every time a switch receives an ARP request with a sender IP address that is equal to its IP address defined on the input interface it sends a SYSLOG message informing of IP duplication, containing the sender IP and MAC addresses, from the received ARP message. To assign an IP address to an interface, and to define subnets to which traffic can be routed: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv4 Interface Parameters in the tree view to display the IP Interface Parameters: Summary page. Figure 9-15. IPv4 Interface Parameters: Summary212 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The previously-assigned IP addresses are displayed. 2 To add an IP address to an interface, click Add, and enter the fields: – IP Address — Enter the IP address assigned to the interface. – Network Mask — Select the subnetwork mask to which traffic can be routed. – Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the IP address prefix of the subnetwork. – Interface — Select the interface for which the IP address is defined. Select an interface type Port, LAG, or VLAN and the specific interface number. Defining IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv4 Interfaces Parameters page. Table 9-18. IPv4 Interface Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip address ip-address {mask|prefix-length} no ip address [ip-address] Sets an IP address. Use the no form of the command to remove an IP address. show ip interface [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet]port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IP.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 213 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following are sample procedures to configure a static IPv4 address on an interface using CLI and then to remove it: Table 9-19. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Statically on a VLAN CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter Interface mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ip address 10.5.225.40 /27 Set the routing interface with prefix length of 27. console(config-if)# ip defaultgateway 10.5.225.33 Set the address of the default gateway console(config-if)# no ip address Remove the address (if required). Table 9-20. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Statically on a Port CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode for port 1 on unit 1. console(config)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an IP interface (Layer 3 mode). console(config-if)# ip address 10.5.225.40 /27 Configure an IP address with prefix length of 27. console(config-if)# ip defaultgateway 10.5.225.33 Set the address of the default gateway console(config-if)# no ip address Remove the address (if required).214 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP IPv4 Interface The switch can operate in the following ways: • It can function as a DHCP client that obtains its own IP from a DHCP server, as described in this section • It can function as a DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to other devices, as described in "DHCP Server" on page 297 When the interface is configured as a DHCP client, it keeps requesting an IP address from the DHCP server, until it receives one. It then sends Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets to confirm the uniqueness of the IP address. If the ARP response shows that the IP address is in use, the switch sends a DHCPDECLINE message to the DHCP server, and sends another DHCPDISCOVER packet that restarts the process. IP address collisions occur when the same IP address is used in the same IP subnet by more than one device. Address collisions require administrative actions on the DHCP server and/or the devices that collide. Up to 32 interfaces (ports, LAGs, and/or VLAN) on the switch can be configured with a static or dynamic IP address. The IP subnets to which these IP addresses belong are known as directly connected/attached IP subnets. The IP address assignment rules for the switch are as follows: • If the IP address on the switch is changed, the switch issues gratuitous ARP packets to the corresponding VLAN, to check IP address collisions. • When a client must renew its lease, prior to its expiration date, a DHCPREQUEST message is sent. • A specific interface can have either a static IP address or a dynamic IP address, but not both.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 215 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define the switch as a DHCP client: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > DHCP IPv4 Interface in the tree view to display the DHCP IPv4 Interface: Summary page. Figure 9-16. DHCP IPv4 Interface: Summary216 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The previously-configured DHCP IPv4 interfaces are displayed. 2 To add an interface that can receive an IP address, click Add and select the whether the interface is a port, LAG or VLAN in the Interface field. Defining DHCP IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the DHCP IPv4 Interface pages. Table 9-21. DHCP IPv4 Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip address dhcp no ip address dhcp Acquires an IP address on an Ethernet interface from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Use the no form of this command to release an acquired IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 217 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DHCP IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI The following is a sample CLI script to configure a dynamic IPv4 address on an interface and then to remove it: IPv4 Static Routing IPv4 static routes can be configured for IP addresses that are not on directly connected networks. These are defined in the IPv4 Static Routing pages. Table 9-22. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Dynamically on a VLAN CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN 1. console(config)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an IP interface (Layer 3 mode). console(config-if)# ip address dhcp Use the DHCP protocol to acquire the IP address. console(config-if)# no ip address dhcp Remove the address (if required). Table 9-23. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Dynamically on a Port CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ip address dhcp Use the DHCP protocol to acquire the IP address. console(config-if)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an IP interface (Layer 3 mode). console(config-if)# no ip address dhcp Remove the address (if required).218 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY When routing traffic, the next hop is determined according to the longest prefix match (LPM algorithm). A destination IPv4 address may match multiple routes in the IPv4 Static Route table. The switch uses the matched route with the longest prefix match. To add an IPv4 static route: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv4 Static Routing in the tree view to display the IPv4 Static Routing: Summary page. Figure 9-17. IPv4 Static Routing: Summary 2 Click Add to add a destination, and enter the fields: – Destination IP Prefix — Enter the destination IPv4 prefix. If all zeros are entered, this represents a default route. – Network Mask — Select the destination IPv4 mask. – Prefix Length — Select the length of the destination IPv4 address prefix. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 219 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Next Hop — Enter the IP address to which the packet is forwarded on the route to the destination address. This is typically the address of a neighboring switch. – Route Type — Select the route type. The possible options are: • Reject — Rejects the route and stops routing to the destination network via all gateways. This ensures that if a frame arrives with the destination IP of this route, it is dropped. • Remote — The route is a remote path. – Metric (1-255) — Enter the administrative distance (cost) to the destination. Defining IPv4 Static Routing Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IPv4 static routing. The following is an example of the CLI command: Table 9-24. IPv4 Static Routing CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip routing no ip routing Enables IPv4 Routing. Use the no format of the command to disable IPv4 Routing. ip route prefix {mask|prefixlength} ip-address-next-hop [metric distance] [reject-route] no ip route prefix {mask|prefixlength} [ip-address-next-hop] Configures static routes. Use the no form of this command to remove static routes. show ip route Displays the current routing table state. console(config)# ip route prefix 192.168.1.1 /8 10.5.234.255 metric 3 reject-route220 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Two IP Networks on Two Different VLANS Using CLI The following shows how to configure two IP networks on two different VLANS using CLI: To test this setup described in Figure 9-18: 1 Connect a host whose address is 1.1.1.2 to interface 1/0/1 (default route 1.1.1.1) 2 Connect a host whose address 2.1.1.2 to port 1/0/2 (default route 2.1.1.1) 3 Ping from 1.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.2 to verify the configuration Table 9-25. Sample CLI Script to Configure Two IP Networks on Two Different VLANSs CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# vlan database Enter VLAN mode. console(config-vlan)# vlan 100-150 Create VLANs number 100 to 150. console(config-vlan)# exit Exit VLAN mode. console(config)#interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode for port 1 on unit 1. console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 100 Make port a member of VLAN 100. console(config-if)# ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Set the IP address with mask. console(config-vlan)# exit Exit Interface mode for port. console(config)#interface gi1/0/2 Enter Interface mode for port 2 on unit 1. console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 150 Make port a member of VLAN 150. console(config-if)# ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Set the IP address with mask. console(config-vlan)# exit Exit Interface mode for port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 221 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Figure 9-18. IP Routing Setup IPv6 Interfaces The system supports IPv6-addressable hosts. To define IPv6 interfaces: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Interface in the tree view to open the IPv6 Interface: Summary page. Figure 9-19. IPv6 Interface: Summary PC 1.1.1.1 Switch PC 2.1.1.1 VLAN 100 VLAN 150222 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Select an interface. The IPv6 addresses defined on the interface are displayed. In addition to the fields described in the Add pages, the following fields are displayed: – ICMP Error Rate Limit Interval (0-2147483647) — Enter the rate-limit interval for ICMPv6 error messages in milliseconds. The value of this parameter together with the Bucket Size parameter (below) determines how many ICMP error messages may be sent per time interval, for example, a rate-limit interval of 100 ms and a bucket size of 10 messages translates to 100 ICMP error messages per second. – ICMP Error Rate Limit Bucket Size (1-200) — Enter the bucket size for ICMPv6 error messages. The value of this parameter together with the ICMP Error Rate Limit Interval parameter determines how many ICMP error messages may be sent per time interval, for example, a rate-limit interval of 100 ms and a bucket size of 10 messages translates to 100 ICMP error messages per second. 3 To add a new IPv6 interface, click Add IPv6 Interface, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select an IPv6 interface to be configured. – Number of DAD Attempts — Enter the number of consecutive neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on an interface while Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is performed on Unicast IPv6 addresses on this interface. New addresses remain in a tentative state while duplicate address detection is performed. A field value of 0, disables duplicate address detection processing on the specified interface. A field value of 1, indicates a single transmission without follow up transmissions. – Autoconfiguration — Enable/disable stateless auto configuration of IPv6 address assignment. When enabled, the router solicitation ND procedure is initiated. This discovers a router in order to assign an IP address to the interface, based on prefixes received with RA messages. When auto configuration is disabled, no automatic assignment of IPv6 global Unicast addresses is performed, and existing, automatically-assigned IPv6 global Unicast addresses are removed from the interface. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 223 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Send ICMP Unreachable — Enable/disable transmission of ICMPv6 address Unreachable messages. When enabled, unreachable messages are generated for any packet arriving on the interface with unassigned TCP/UDP port. 4 To add an address to an IPv6 interface, click Add IPv6 Address, and enter the fields for the selected interface: – IPv6 Address Type — Check the means by which the IP address was added to the interface. The possible options are: • Link Local — The IP address is link local; non-routable and can be used for communication on the same network only. A Link Local address has a prefix of 'FE80'. • Global Unicast — The IP address is a globally unique IPv6 Unicast address; visible and reachable from different subnets. • Global Anycast — The IP address is a globally unique IPv6 Anycast address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – IPv6 Address — Enter the IPv6 address assigned to the interface. The address must be a valid IPv6 address, specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons. An example of an IPv6 address is 2031:0:130F:0:0:9C0:876A:130D and the compressed version is represented as 2031:0:130F::9C0:876A:130D. Up to five IPv6 addresses (not including Link Local addresses) can be set per interface, with the limitation of up to128 addresses per system. – Prefix Length — For global Unicast or Anycast, enter the length of the IPv6 prefix. The length is a decimal value that indicates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address). The Prefix field is applicable only on a static IPv6 address defined as a Global IPv6 address. – EUI-64 — For global Unicast or Anycast, check to use the EUI-64 option.224 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining IPv6 Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Interface pages. Table 9-26. IPv6 Interfaces CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 enable [no-autoconfig] no ipv6 enable Enables the IPv6 addressing mode on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable the IPv6 addressing mode on an interface ipv6 address autoconfig no ipv6 address autoconfig Enables automatic configuration of IPv6 addresses, using stateless auto configuration on an interface. Addresses are configured depending on the prefixes received in Router Advertisement messages. Use the no form of this command to disable address auto configuration on the interface. ipv6 icmp error-interval milliseconds [bucketsize] no ipv6 icmp error-interval Configures the rate limit interval and bucket size parameters for IPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) error messages. Use the no form of this command to return the interval to its default setting. ipv6 address ipv6- address/prefix-length [eui-64] [anycast] no ipv6 address [ipv6- address/prefix-length] [eui- 64] Configures an IPv6 address for an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the address from the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 225 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ipv6 address ipv6- address/prefix-length linklocal no ipv6 address link-local Configures an IPv6 link-local address for an interface. Use the no form of this command to return to the default link local address on the interface. ipv6 unreachables no ipv6 unreachables Enables the generation of ICMP for IPv6 (ICMPv6) unreachable messages for packets arriving on a specified interface. Use the no form of this command to prevent the generation of unreachable messages. ipv6 nd dad attempts attempt Configures the number of consecutive neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on an interface while Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is performed on the unicast IPv6 addresses of the interface. show ipv6 interface [[gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAGnumber] Displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IPv6. show ipv6 icmp error-interval Displays the IPv6 ICMP error interval. Table 9-26. IPv6 Interfaces CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description226 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is a sample script to configure IPv6 using CLI: IPv6 Default Gateway Use the IPv6 Default Gateway pages to configure and view the default IPv6 router addresses. This list contains routers that are candidates to become the switch default router for non-local traffic. The switch randomly selects a router from the list. The switch supports one static IPv6 default router. Dynamic default routers are routers that have sent router advertisements to the switch IPv6 interface. When adding or deleting IP addresses, the following events occur: • When removing an IP interface, all of its default gateway IP addresses are removed. • Dynamic IP addresses cannot be removed. • An alert message is displayed after a user attempts to insert more than one IP address. • An alert message is displayed when attempting to insert a non-Link Local type address. Table 9-27. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv6 on a Port CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ipv6 enable Enable IPv6 (dynamic). console(config-if)# ipv6 address 5::1/64 Set the IPv6 address (static)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 227 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure a router: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Default Gateway in the tree view to display the IPv6 Default Gateway: Summary page. Figure 9-20. IPv6 Default Gateway: Summary The previously-defined routers are displayed with the following fields: – IPv6 Default IPv6 Address — The router’s address. – Interface — The interface on which the router is accessed. – Type — The means by which the default gateway was configured. The possible options are: • Static — The default gateway is user-defined. • Dynamic — The default gateway is dynamically configured through router advertisement.228 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – State — The router’s status. The possible options are: • Incomplete — Address resolution is in progress and the link-layer address of the default gateway has not yet been determined. • Reachable — The default gateway is known to have been reachable recently (within tens of seconds ago). • Stale — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable but until traffic is sent to the default gateway, no attempt is made to verify its reachability. • Delay — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has recently been sent to the default gateway. Rather than probe the default gateway immediately, however, there is a delay sending probes for a short while in order to give upper-layer protocols a chance to provide reachability confirmation. • Probe — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable, and Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify reachability. • Unreachable — No reachability confirmation was received. 2 To add an IPv6 default gateway, click Add, and enter the fields: – IPv6 Address Type — Displays that the IP address was added to the interface through a link local address. – Link Local Interface — Displays the outgoing interface through which the default gateway can be reached. – Default Gateway IPv6 Address — Enter the Link Local IPv6 address of the default gateway. Defining IPv6 Default Gateway Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Default Gateway pages . Table 9-28. IPv6 Default Gateway CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 default-gateway ipv6- address Defines an IPv6 default gateway.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 229 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following are examples of these CLI command: ISATAP Tunnel To deliver IPv6 addresses in an IPv4 network, a tunneling process must be defined that encapsulates IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets. The Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP) is an IPv6 transition mechanism that is used to transmit IPv6 packets between dual-stack nodes (nodes that can accept both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses) on top of an IPv4 network. When enabling ISATAP on a tunnel interface, an explicit IPv4 address is configured as the tunnel source, or an automatic mode exists, where the lowest IPv4 address is assigned to an IP interface. This source IPv4 address is used for setting the tunnel interface identifier according to ISATAP addressing conventions. When a tunnel interface is enabled for ISATAP, the tunnel source must be set for the interface in order for the interface to become active. An ISATAP address is represented using the [64-bit prefix]:0:5EFE:w.x.y.z, where 5EFE is the ISATAP identifier and w.x.y.z is a public or private IPv4 address. Thus, a Link Local address will be represented as FE80::5EFE:w.x.y.z show ipv6 route Displays the current state of the IPv6 routing table. console(config)# ipv6 default-gateway fe80::abcd console(config-if)# do show ipv6 route Codes: L - Local, S - Static, I - ICMP, ND - Router Advertisement The number in the brackets is the metric. L 3000::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite L 4003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite L 5003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite L 6003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite Table 9-28. IPv6 Default Gateway CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description230 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY After the last IPv4 address is removed from the interface, the ISATAP IP interface state becomes inactive and is represented as Down, however the Admin state remains Enabled. When defining tunneling, note the following: • An IPv6 Link Local address is assigned to the ISATAP interface. The initial IP address is assigned to the interface, and the interface state becomes Active. • If an ISATAP interface is active, the ISATAP router IPv4 address is resolved via DNS by using ISATAP-to-IPv4 mapping. If the ISATAP DNS record is not resolved, the ISATAP host name-to-address mapping is searched in the host name cache. • When an ISATAP router IPv4 address is not resolved via the DNS process, the status of the ISATAP IP interface remains Active. The system does not have a default gateway for ISATAP traffic until the DNS procedure is resolved. • In order for an ISATAP Tunnel to work properly over an IPv4 network, an ISATAP router is must be set up.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 231 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 ISATAP Tunnel in the tree view to display the ISATAP Tunnel page. Figure 9-21. IPv6 ISATAP Tunnel 2 Enter the fields: – ISATAP Status —Enable/disable the status of ISATAP on the device. – IPv4 Address Type — Enter the source of the IPv4 address used by the tunnel. The options are: • Auto —Use the dynamic address. • None —Disable the ISATAP tunnel • Manual —Use the manual address assigned. – IPv4 Address — Enter the local (source) IPv4 address of a tunnel interface. 232 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Tunnel Router's Domain Name — Enter a specific automatic tunnel router domain name. – Domain Name Query Interval(10 - 3600) — Enter the interval between DNS queries (before the IP address of the ISATAP router is known) for the automatic tunnel router domain name. – ISATAP Router Solicitation Interval(10 - 3600) — Enter the interval between router solicitations messages when there is no active router. – ISATAP Robustness (1 - 20) — Enter the number of DNS Query/Router Solicitation refresh messages that the device sends per second. Select the Use Default option to use the default setting of a field. Defining ISATAP Tunnel Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the ISATAP Tunnel pages. Table 9-29. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Commands CLI Command Description interface tunnel number Enters tunnel interface configuration mode. tunnel mode ipv6ip {isatap} no tunnel mode ipv6ip Configures an IPv6 transition mechanism global support mode. Use the no form of this command to remove an IPv6 transition mechanism. tunnel isatap router router_name no tunnel isatap router Configures a global string that represents a specific automatic tunnel router domain name. Use the no form of this command to remove the string associated with the router domain name and restore the default configuration. tunnel source {auto|ip-address ipv4-address} no tunnel source Sets the local (source) IPv4 address of a tunnel interface. Use the no form of the command to delete the tunnel local address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 233 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of a CLI script to create a tunnel: tunnel isatap query-interval seconds no tunnel isatap query-interval Configures the interval between DNS Queries (before the IP address of the ISATAP router is known) for the automatic tunnel router domain name. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. tunnel isatap solicitationinterval seconds no tunnel isatap solicitationinterval Configures the interval between ISATAP router solicitations messages (when there is no active ISATAP router). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. tunnel isatap robustness number no tunnel isatap robustness Configures the number of DNS Query/Router Solicitation refresh messages that the device sends. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show ipv6 tunnel Displays information on the ISATAP tunnel. Table 9-30. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Script CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter Interface mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ip address 10.5.225.40 /27 Configure an IP address with prefix length of 27. console(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.5.225.33 console(config-if)#exit Set the address of the default gateway and exit Interface mode. Table 9-29. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description234 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console (config)# ip domain lookup Enable DNS lookup console(config)# ip name-server 176.16.1.18 Define DNS server console(config)# interface tunnel 1 Enter tunnel mode console(config-tunnel)#tunnel mode ipv6ip isatap Enable tunnel. console(config-tunnel)#tunnel source auto The system minimum IPv4 address will be used as the source address for packets sent on the tunnel interface. console(config-tunnel)# do show ipv6 tunnel Display tunnel configuration Table 9-30. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Script CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 235 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6 Neighbors The Neighbors feature is similar in functionality to the IPv4 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) feature. It enables detecting Link Local addresses within the same subnet, and includes a database for maintaining reachability information about active neighbors. The device supports a total of up to 64 neighbors, obtained statically or dynamically. When removing an IPv6 interface, all neighbors entered statically or learned dynamically, are removed. To add an IPv6 neighbor: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Neighbors in the tree view to display the IPv6 Neighbors: Summary page. Figure 9-22. IPv6 Neighbors: Summary236 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The previously-defined neighbors are displayed along with their states. The possible states are: – Incomplete — An address resolution is in progress, and the link-layer address of the neighbor has not yet been determined. – Reachable — The neighbor is known to have been reachable recently (within tens of seconds). – Stale — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, but until traffic is sent to the neighbor, no attempt is made to verify its reachability. – Delay — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has recently been sent to the neighbor. Rather than probe the neighbor immediately, however, there is a delay sending probes for a short while, in order to give upper-layer protocols a chance to provide reachability confirmation. – Probe — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify reachability. 2 To clear the Neighbors table, select one of the following options: – None — Does not clear any entries. – Static Only — Clears the static entries. – Dynamic Only — Clears the dynamic entries. – All Dynamic and Static — Clears the static and dynamic address entries. 3 To add a new IPv6 neighbor, click Add, and enter the fields: – IPv6 Interface — Displays the interface on which IPv6 Interface is defined. – IPv6 Address — Enter the neighbor IPv6 address. – MAC Address — Enter the MAC address assigned to the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 237 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 To modify or remove an IPv6 neighbor, click Edit, and enter the fields described on the Add page. 5 If an entry for the specified IPv6 address already exists in the neighbor discovery cache, as learned through the IPv6 neighbor discovery process, you can convert the entry to a static entry. To do this, select Static in the Type field. Defining IPv6 Neighbors Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Neighbors pages. Table 9-31. IPv6 Neighbors CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 neighbor ipv6_addr {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]} mac_addr no ipv6 neighbor ipv6_addr {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]} Configures a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache. Use the no form of this command to remove a static IPv6 entry from the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache. show ipv6 neighbors {static|dynamic}[ipv6-address ipv6- address] [mac-address mac-address] [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]] Displays IPv6 neighbor discovery cache information. clear ipv6 neighbors Deletes all entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache.238 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# config console(config)# ipv6 neighbor 3000::a31b vlan 1 001b.3f9c.84ea console# show ipv6 neighbors dynamic Interface IPv6 Address HW Address State Router --------- ------------ ---------- ----- ----- VLAN 1 3000::a31b 0001b.3f9c.84ea Reachable YesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 239 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6 Routes Table The IPv6 Routes Table describes how to reach IPv6 destinations. The routing table is used to determine the next-hop address and the interface used for forwarding. Each dynamic entry also has an associated invalidation timer value (extracted from Router Advertisements). This timer is used to delete entries that are no longer advertised. To view IPv6 destinations and how they are reached: • Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Routes Table in the tree view to display the IPv6 Routes Table page. Figure 9-23. IPv6 Routes Table The following is displayed for each IP address: – IPv6 Address — The destination IPv6 address.240 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Prefix Length — The length of the IPv6 prefix. This field is applicable only when the destination address is defined as a global IPv6 address. – Interface — The interface that is used to forward the packet. Interface refers to any Port, LAG or VLAN. – Next Hop — The address to which the packet is forwarded on the route to the Destination address (typically the address of a neighboring router). This can be either a Link Local or Global IPv6 address. – Metric — The value used for comparing this route to other routes with the same destination in the IPv6 route table. This is an administrative distance with the range of 0-255. – Life-Time — The timeout interval of the route if no activity takes place. Infinite means the address is never deleted. – RouteType — Specifies whether the destination is directly-attached and the means by which the entry was learned. The possible options are: • Local — A directly-connected route entry. • Static — Manually configured route, supported only for default gateway, learned through the Neighbor Discover (ND) process. • ICMP — The route was learned through ICMP Redirect messages, sent by the router. • ND — Route was learned by the ND protocol from Router Advertisement messages. Viewing IPv6 Routes Table Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Routes Table page. Table 9-32. IPv6 Routes Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description show ipv6 route Displays the current state of the ipv6 routing table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 241 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console> show ipv6 route Codes: L - Local, S - Static, I - ICMP, ND - Router Advertisement The number in the brackets is the metric. S::/0 via fe80::77 [0] VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite ND::/0 via fe80::200:cff:fe4a:dfa8 [0] VLAN 1 Lifetime 1784 sec L 2001::/64 is directly connected, g2 Lifetime Infinite L 2002:1:1:1::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime 2147467 sec L 3001::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite L 4004::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite L 6001::/64 is directly connected, g2 Lifetime Infinite242 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Domain Name System The Domain Name System (DNS) converts user-defined domain names into IP addresses. Each time a domain name is assigned, the DNS service translates the name into a numeric IP address, for example, www.ipexample.com is translated into 192.87.56.2. DNS servers maintain domain name databases and their corresponding IP addresses. To add a DNS server and specify the active DNS server: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > Domain Name System in the tree view to display the Domain Name System: Summary page. Figure 9-24. Domain Name System: Summary The list of previously-defined DNS servers is displayed. 2 To enable mapping of host names into IP addresses through a DNS server, select DNS Status. 3 To activate one of the currently-defined DNS servers, enable Active Server.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 243 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 To add a DNS server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – DNS Server — Enter the IP address of the DNS server being added. – DNS Server Currently Active — Displays the DNS server that is currently active. – Set DNS Server Active — Check to activate the selected DNS server. Configuring DNS Servers Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Domain Name System pages. Table 9-33. DNS CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip domain lookup Enables DNS system for translating host names to IP addresses. ip name-server {server1- ipv4-address|server1-ipv6- address} [server-address2 …server-address8] no ip name-server [serveraddress … server-address8] Sets the available name servers. Up to eight name servers can be set. The no form of the command removes a name server.244 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: clear host Deletes entries from the host name-toaddress cache. clear host dhcp {name|*} Deletes entries from the host name-toaddress mapping received from DHCP. show hosts Displays the default domain name, the list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses console (config)# ip domain lookup console(config)# ip name-server 176.16.1.18 Table 9-33. DNS CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 245 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Default Domain Names A default domain name is used when an IP address cannot be mapped to a known domain name. This domain name is applied to all unqualified host names. To define the default domain name: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > Default Domain Name to display the Default Domain Name page. Figure 9-25. Default Domain Name If there is a currently-defined default domain name, it is displayed. 2 Enter the Default Domain Name (1 - 160 Characters). Its Type is displayed, and has one of the following options: – Dynamic — The IP address was created dynamically. – Static — The IP address is a static IP address.246 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Default Domain Names Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the default domain name: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-34. Default Domain Name CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip domain-name name no ip domain-name Defines a default domain name that the software uses to complete unqualified host names. The no form of the command disables the use of the Domain Name System (DNS). console(config)# ip domain-name dell.com Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 247 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Host Name Mapping Host names can be dynamically mapped to IP addresses through the Domain Name System pages, or statically through the Host Name Mapping page. To assign IP addresses to static host names. 1 Click System > IP Addressing > Host Name Mapping in the tree view to display the Host Name Mapping: Summary page. Figure 9-26. Host Name Mapping: Summary The currently-defined host names are displayed. 2 Click Add to add a new host name. Up to four IP addresses can be added. 3 For each IP address, enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. 248 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. • Host Name (1-160 Characters) — Enter the host name to be associated with the IP address entered below. • IP Address — Enter the IP address of the domain. Four addresses can be entered. 4 Click Remove to delete a host name. All addresses for this host name are deleted at the same time. Mapping IP Addresses to Domain Host Names Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for mapping domain host names to IP addresses. Table 9-35. Domain Host Name CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip host name address [address2 address3 address4] Defines the static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache no ip host name Removes the name-to-address mapping. clear host {name|*} Deletes entries from the host name-to-address cache. show hosts [name] Displays the default domain name, list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 249 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: ARP The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) converts IP addresses into physical MAC addresses. ARP enables a host to communicate with other hosts when their IP addresses are known. To add an IP/MAC address mapping: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > ARP in the tree view to display the ARP: Summary page. Figure 9-27. ARP: Summary console(config)# ip host accounting.abc.com 176.10.23.1250 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The entries in the table are displayed. 2 Enter the parameters: • ARP Entry Age Out (1 - 40000000) — Enter the amount of time in seconds that can pass between ARP requests for this address. After this period, the entry is deleted from the table. • Clear ARP Table Entries — Select the type of ARP entries that are cleared on all devices. The possible options are: • None — ARP entries are not cleared. • All — All ARP entries are cleared. • Dynamic — Only learned ARP entries are cleared. • Static — Only static ARP entries are cleared. 3 To add a mapping, click Add, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select an interface to be associated with the addresses. – IP Address — Enter the station IP address, which is associated with the MAC address filled in below. – MAC Address — Enter the station MAC address, which is associated in the ARP table with the IP address. 4 To change the status of a mapping from static to dynamic or vice versa, click Edit and enter the field: – Status — Select the entry’s status. The possible options are: • Static — The entry was statically entered. • Dynamic — The entry was dynamically learned. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 251 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring ARP Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the ARP pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-36. ARP CLI Commands CLI Command Description arp ip_addr mac_addr {[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAGnumber} Adds a permanent entry in the ARP cache. no arp ip-address Removes an ARP entry from the ARP Table. arp timeout seconds Configures how long an entry remains in the ARP cache. This command can be used in Global Configuration mode for all interfaces, or in Interface Configuration mode for a specific interface. clear arp-cache Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache show arp Displays entries in the ARP Table. show arp configuration Displays the global and interface configuration of the ARP protocol console(config)# arp 198.133.219.232 00-00-0c-40-0f-bc console(config)# arp timeout 12000 console(config)# exit console# show arp ARP timeout: 12000 Seconds Interface IP Address HW Address Status --------- ---------- ---------- ------ gi1/0/11 10.7.1.102 00:10:B5:04:DB:4B dynamic gi1/0/12 10.7.1.135 00:50:22:00:2A:A4 static252 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY UDP Relay Switches do not typically route IP Broadcast packets between IP subnets. However, if configured, the switch can relay specific UDP Broadcast packets received from its IPv4 interfaces to specific destination IP addresses. To configure the relaying of UDP packets received from a specific IPv4 interface with a destination UDP port: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > UDP Relay in the tree view to display the UDP Relay: Summary page. Figure 9-28. UDP Relay: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 253 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The UDP relays are displayed. 2 To add a UDP relay, click Add, and enter the fields: – Source IP Address — Select the source IP address to where the switch is to relay UDP Broadcast packets, based on a configured UDP destination port. The interface must be one of the IPv4 interfaces configured on the switch. Select All for all addresses. – UDP Port (1 - 65535) — Check Default Services to select all of the following default ports: • IEN-116 Name Service (port 42) • DNS (port 53) • NetBIOS Name Server (port 137) • NetBIOS Datagram Server (port 138) • TACACS Server (port 49) • Time Service (port 37) If Default Services are not selected, check the text box and enter a UDP port. – Destination IP Address — Enter the IP address that receives the UDP packet relays. If this field is 0.0.0.0, UDP packets are discarded. If this field is 255.255.255.255, UDP packets are flooded to all IP interfaces. Configuring UDP Relay Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the UDP Relay pages. Table 9-37. UDP Relay CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip helper-address {ipinterface|all} address [udpport-list] no ip helper-address {ipinterface|all} address Enables the forwarding of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcast packets received on an interface to a specific (helper) address. Use the no form of this command to disable the forwarding of broadcast packets to a specific (helper) address.254 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console (config)# ip helper-address all 172.16.9.9 49 53 console (config)# do show ip helper-address Interface Helper Address UDP Ports ----------- --------------- -------------------------- All 172.16.9.9 49,53Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 255 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Diagnostics This section describes how to perform cable tests on copper and fiber optic cables. It contains the following sections: • Integrated Cable Test • Optical Transceiver Diagnostics256 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Integrated Cable Test Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology is used to test the quality and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port. Cables up to 120 meters long can be tested. Cables can only be tested when the ports are in the down state, with the exception of Approximated Cable Length test. This test can only be performed when the port is up and operating at 1 Gbps. To perform a cable test and view the results: 1 Click System > Diagnostics > Integrated Cable Test: Summary in the tree view to display the Integrated Cable Test: Summary page. Figure 9-29. Integrated Cable Test: Summary 2 Select a unit in the stack in the Unit ID field. Results from previously-run tests on that unit are displayed. 3 Ensure that both ends of the copper cable are connected to a device. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 257 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 Ensure that the cable is connected to tested port. Go to the Test tab. 5 Click Test Now. The copper cable and Approximate Cable Length tests are performed, and the following test results are displayed: – Test Result — Displays the cable test results. The possible options are: • No Cable — There is no cable connected to the port. • Open Cable — The cable is connected on only one side. • Short Cable — A short has occurred in the cable. • OK — The cable passed the test. – Cable Fault Distance — Displays the distance from the port where the cable error occurred. – Last Update — Displays the last time the port was tested. – Approximate Cable Length — Displays the approximate cable length. Performing Integrated Cable Tests Using CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for performing integrated cable tests. Table 9-38. Integrated Cable Test CLI Commands CLI Command Description test cable-diagnostics tdr interface[gigabitethernet|tengigab itethernet] port-number Performs VCT tests. show cable-diagnostics tdr interface[gigabitethernet|tengigab itethernet] port-number Shows results of last VCT tests on ports. show cable-diagnostics cablelength interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number Displays the estimated copper cable length attached to a port.258 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Optical Transceiver Diagnostics The Optical Transceiver Diagnostics page displays the operating conditions reported by the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) transceiver. Some information might not be available for SFPs that do not support the digital diagnostic monitoring standard SFF-8472. The following is the list of the compatible SFPs: • SFP: – X3366 — 1000Base-SX, Finisar FTLF8519P2BNL – U3650 — 1000Base-LX, Finisar FTRJ1319P1BTL • SFP+: – N743D — SR, Finisar FTLX8571D3BCL – T307D — LR, Finisar FTLX1471D3BCL – C043H — LRM, Avago AFBR-707SDZ-D1 – N198M — LRM, Finisar FTLX1371D3BCL console> enable console# test cable-diagnostics tdr gi1/0/3 Cable is open at 100 meters. console# show cable-diagnostics cable-length interface gi2/0/5 Port Length [meters] ------- ---------------- gi2/0/5 < 50Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 259 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To view the results of optical fiber tests: • Click System > Diagnostics > Optical Transceiver Diagnostics in the tree view to display the Optical Transceiver Diagnostics page. Figure 9-30. Optical Transceiver Diagnostics The following fields are displayed for the selected unit: – Port — The port number on which the cable was tested. – Temperature — The temperature (C) at which the cable is operating. – Voltage — The voltage at which the cable is operating. – Current — The current at which the cable is operating. – Output Power — The rate at which output power is transmitted. – Input Power — The rate at which input power is transmitted. – Transmitter Fault — A fault occurred during transmission. – Loss of Signal — A signal loss occurred in the cable. – Data Ready — The transceiver has achieved power up, and data is ready.260 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Performing Fiber Optic Cable Tests Using CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI command for performing fiber optic cable tests. The following is an example of the CLI command: Table 9-39. Fiber Optic Cable Test CLI Commands CLI Command Description show fiber-ports opticaltransceiver [interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number] [detailed] Displays the optical transceiver diagnostics. console# show fiber-ports optical-transceiver detailed Port Temp [C] Voltage Current [aM] Output [mWat] Input [mWa] POWER [mWa] LOS ------- ---- ------- ---- ---- ---- ---- --- gi1/0/1 48 5.15 50 1.789 1.789 No No gi1/0/2 43 5.15 10 1.789 1.789 No NoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 261 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Management Security This section describes the pages used to manage device security. It contains the following topics: • Access Profiles • Profile Rules • Authentication Profiles • Select Authentication • Active Users • Local User Database • Line Passwords • Enable Password • TACACS+ • Password Management • RADIUS Access Profiles Access to management functions may be limited to users identified by: • Ingress interface (Port, LAG, or VLAN) • Source IP address • Source IP subnet Management access may be separately defined for the following types of management access methods: • Telnet (CLI over Telnet sessions) • Secure Telnet • Web (HTTP) • Secure Web (HTTPS, Using SSL) • SNMP 262 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY This means, for example, that the set of managers allowed via Telnet may be different than the set of Web-based managers which is, in turn, may be different than the set of secure-web based managers, and so on. A specific management access method may be completely disabled by denying all user access to it (e.g. denying all users access to CLI/Telnet management effectively disables CLI/Telnet as an available management interface to the system). By default, management access to the system, through all methods, is enabled over all interfaces. NOTE: If you enable management access through a physical port, all VLANs and IP interfaces on that port will be acceptable management traffic sources. If you enable management access through a VLAN, all ports and IP interfaces on that VLAN will be acceptable. If specific IP address(es) are specified, only traffic from the specified IP addresses on the appropriate ports will be accepted. Access Profiles Rules Each management access profile is composed of at least one rule, which acts as a filter, and defines the device management method, interface type, source IP address, network mask, and the device management access action. Users can be blocked or permitted management access. Rule priority sets the order in which the rules are implemented. Assigning an access profile to an interface denies access via other interfaces. If an access profile is not assigned to any interface, the device can be accessed by all interfaces. A total of 256 rules can be defined for all Management Access profiles. To add rules to existing access profiles, see "Profile Rules" on page 266.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 263 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Creating an Access Profile To define an access profile with a single rule: 1 Click System > Management Security > Access Profiles in the tree view to display the Access Profiles: Summary page. Figure 9-31. Access Profiles: Summary The currently-defined access profiles are displayed. 2 To activate an access profile, select it in the Active Access Profile field. If you select Console Only, active management of the device can only be performed using the console connection. This profile cannot be removed. 3 To add a new profile, click Add, and enter the fields: – Access Profile Name (1-32 Characters) — Enter a name for the access profile. 264 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Rule Priority (1-65535) — Enter the rule priority. Rules are applied to packets according to their priority. These can be viewed in the Profile Rules: Summary page. – Management Method — Select the management method to which the access profile is applied. Users using this management method are authenticated using this access profile. The possible options are: • All — The access profile is applied to all management methods. • Telnet — The access profile is applied to Telnet users. • Secure Telnet (SSH) — The access profile is applied to SSH users. • HTTP — The access profile is applied to HTTP users. • Secure HTTP (HTTPS) — The access profile is applied to HTTPS users. • SNMP — The access profile is applied to SNMP users. – Interface — Check the fields and select the interface type to which the rule applies. – Enable Source IP Address — Check this parameter to restrict access, based on the source IP address. When this field is not selected, the source IP address cannot be entered into a configured rule. – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported for the source IP addresses. – Source IP Address — Enter the interface source IP address for which the rule applies. This is an optional field and indicates that the rule is valid for a subnetwork. – Network Mask — Enter the IP subnetwork mask if Supported IP Format is IPv4. – Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix, or the network mask of the source IP address. – Action — Select whether to permit or deny management access to the defined interface. The possible options are: • Permit — Permits access to the device. • Deny — Denies access to the device. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 265 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Access Profiles Using CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI command for defining an access profile, without its rules. The CLI commands for defining the rules are described in "Defining Access Profile Rules Using CLI Commands" on page 267. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-40. Access Profile CLI Commands CLI Command Description management access-list name no management access-list name Defines an access-list for management. Use the no form of this command to delete an access list. console(config)# management access-list mlist console(config-macl)#266 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Profile Rules If an access profile already exists, meaning that a single rule has been defined on it, use the Profile Rules pages to add additional rules to it. To add a rule to a management access profiles: 1 Click System > Management Security > Profile Rules in the tree view to display the Profile Rules: Summary page. Figure 9-32. Profile Rules: Summary 2 Select an access profile name. Its rules are displayed in the order that they will be implemented. 3 To add a rule to the selected management access profile, click Add. 4 Select a management access profile. 5 Complete the fields that are defined in Access Profiles pages.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 267 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Access Profile Rules Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for adding rules to access profiles. Table 9-41. Access Profiles CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit[[gigabitethernet|tengigab itethernet port-number]|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port permit conditions for the management access list. permit ip-source {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|prefixlength} [mask mask|prefixlength] [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet][port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port permitting conditions for the management access list, and the selected management method. deny [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port denying conditions for the management access list, and the selected management method. deny ip-source {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|prefixlength} [mask mask|prefixlength] [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port denying conditions for the management access list, and the selected management method. management access-class {console-only|name} no management access-class Defines which access-list is used as the active management connections. Use the no form of this command to disable management connection restrictions.268 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show management access-list [name] Displays the active management access-lists. show management access-class Displays information about management access-class. console(config)# management access-list mlist console(config-macl)# permit gi1/0/1 console(config-macl)# permit gi1/0/2 console(config-macl)# deny gi1/0/3 console(config-macl)# deny gi1/0/4 console(config-macl)# exit console(config)# management access-class mlist console(config)# exit console# show management access-list mlist ----- permit gi1/0/1 permit gi1/0/2 deny gi1/0/3 deny gi1/0/4 ! (Note: all other access implicitly denied) console# show management access-class Management access-class is enabled, using access list mlist Table 9-41. Access Profiles CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 269 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Authentication Profiles In addition to access profiles, you can configure authentication for management access methods, such as SSH, console, Telnet, HTTP, and HTTPS. User authentication can occur: • Locally • Via an external server, such as a TACACS+ or a RADIUS server User authentication occurs in the order that the methods are selected, for example, if both the Local and RADIUS options are selected, the user is authenticated first locally. If the local user database is empty, the user is authenticated via the RADIUS server. If an error occurs during the authentication, the next selected method is used. If an authentication method fails, or the user has an insufficient privilege level, the user is denied access to the switch. The switch then stops, does not continue, and does not attempt to use the next authentication method. If a privilege level is redefined, the user must also be re-defined. User authentication can also be set to None, in which case no authentication is performed. The process of configuring authentication for management access methods is divided into the following stages: • Create an authentication profile, as described below • Assign an authentication profile to a management method, as described in "Select Authentication" on page 272270 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To create an authentication profile: 1 Click System > Management Security > Authentication Profiles in the tree view to display the Authentication Profiles: Summary page. Figure 9-33. Authentication Profiles: Summary All currently-defined authentication profiles are displayed. 2 Click Add to add a new authentication profile, and enter the fields: – Profile Name (1-12 Characters) — Enter the name of the new authentication profile. Profile names cannot include blank spaces. – Authentication Method: Optional Methods — Select a user authentication methods that can be assigned to this authentication profile. The possible options are: • Line — The line password is used for user authentication (defined in "Line Passwords" on page 279).Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 271 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Enable — The enable (encrypted) password is used for authentication (defined in "Enable Password" on page 281). • Local — The user authentication is performed by the device, which checks the user name and password for authentication. • RADIUS — The user authentication is performed by the RADIUS server. For more information, see "RADIUS" on page 291. • TACACS+ — The user authentication is performed by the TACACS+ server. For more information, see "TACACS+" on page 282. • None — No user authentication occurs. Select a method by highlighting it in the Optional Methods list, and clicking on the right arrow to move it to the Selected Methods list. Configuring an Authentication Profile Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Authentication Profiles pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-42. Authentication Profile CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa authentication login {default|list-name} method1 [method2] no aaa authentication login {default|list-name} Configures login authentication. Use the no form of the command to remove a login authentication profile. console(config)# aaa authentication login default radius local enable none272 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Select Authentication After Authentication Profiles are defined, the Authentication Profiles can be assigned to Management Access methods, for example, console users can be authenticated by Authentication Profile 1, while Telnet users can be authenticated by Authentication Profile 2. To assign an authentication profile to a management access method: 1 Click System > Management Security > Select Authentication in the tree view to display the Select Authentication page. Figure 9-34. Select Authentication 2 For the Console, Telnet and Secure Telnet (SSH) types of users, select either the default authentication profile or one of the previously-defined authentication profiles.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 273 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 For Secure HTTP and HTTP types of users, select one or all of the Optional Methods and click the right-arrow to move them to the Selected Methods. The options are: – Local — Authentication occurs locally. – None — No authentication method is used for access. – RADIUS — Authentication occurs at the RADIUS server. – TACACS+ — Authentication occurs at the TACACS+ server. Assigning Access Authentication Profiles Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Select Authentication page. Table 9-43. Select Authentication CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa authentication enable {default|listname} method [method2 ...] no aaa authentication enable {default|listname} Indicates the authentication method list when accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet, Console or SSH. enable authentication [default|list-name] no enable authentication Specifies the authentication method for accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet or console. Use the no form of this command to restore the default authentication method login authentication [default|list-name] Indicates the login authentication method list for a remote Telnet, Console or SSH. ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication method1 [method2] no ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication Indicates authentication methods for HTTP or HTTPS servers. show authentication methods Displays information about the authentication methods.274 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands that sets authentication for the console using the default method list that was previously-defined: The following is an example of the CLI commands that creates an authentication method list for http server access (RADIUS and local): console(config)#line console console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# exit console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication radius local console(config)# exitDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 275 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Active Users To view active users on the device: • Click System > Management Security > Active Users in the tree view to display the Active Users page. Figure 9-35. Active Users The following fields are displayed for all active users: – Name — Active users logged into the device. – Protocol — The management method by which the user is connected to the device. – Location — The user’s IP address.276 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying Active Users Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing active users connected to the device. The following example shows an example of the CLI command: Table 9-44. Active Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description show users Displays information about active users. console> show users Username Protocol Location -------- -------- --------- Bob Serial John SSH 172.16.0.1 Robert HTTP 172.16.0.8 Betty Telnet 172.16.1.7Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 277 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Local User Database Use the Local User Database pages to define users, passwords and access levels. To add a new user: 1 Click System > Management Security > Local User Database in the tree view to display the Local User Database: Summary page. Figure 9-36. Local User Database: Summary All users are displayed even if they have been suspended. If a user has been suspended, it can be restored here by selecting the Reactivate Suspended User field. 2 To add a user, click Add, and enter the fields: – User Name (1-20 characters) — Enter the username of the user.278 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Access Level — Select a user access level. The lowest user access level is 1 and 15 is the highest user access level. Users with access level 15 are Privileged Users, and only they can access and use the switch administrator. – Password (8-64 characters) — Enter the password of the user. – Confirm Password — Confirm the password of the user. The following fields are displayed: • Expiry Date — The expiration date of the user-defined password. • Lockout Status — Specifies whether the user currently has access (status Usable), or whether the user is locked out due to too many failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in successfully (status Locked). • Reactivate Suspended User — Check to reactivate the specified user’s access rights. Access rights can be suspended after unsuccessfully attempting to login. Configuring Local Users Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring local users. Table 9-45. Local User CLI Commands CLI Command Description username name {nopassword|password password|password encrypted encrypted-password} username name [privilege-level] no username name Establishes a username-based authentication system. Use the no form to remove a user name. set username name active Reactivates a suspended user’s access rights. show user accounts Displays users information.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 279 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Line Passwords To add a line password for Console, Telnet, and Secure-Telnet users: 1 Click System > Management Security > Line Passwords in the tree view to display the Line Password page. Figure 9-37. Line Password 2 Enter the fields for each type of user, separately: – Password (0 - 159 Characters) — Enter the line password for accessing the device. – Confirm Password — Confirm the line password. console(config)# username bob password lee privilege 15 console# set username bob active280 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Console/Telnet/Secure Telnet Line Aging (1-365) — Check to set the amount of time in days that elapses before a line password is aged out. Enter the number of days after which the password expires. – Expiry Date — Displays the expiration date of the line password. – Lockout Status — Displays whether the user currently has access (status Usable), or whether the user is locked out due to too many failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in successfully (status Locked). – Reactivate Locked Line — Check to reactivate the line password for a Console/Telnet/Secure Telnet session. Access rights can be suspended after a number of unsuccessful attempts to log in. Assigning Line Passwords Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Line Password page . The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-46. Line Password CLI Commands CLI Command Description line {console|telnet|ssh} Identifies a specific line for configuration and enters the Line Configuration command mode. password password [encrypted] no password Sets a password on a line. Use the no form of this command to remove the password. console(config)# line console console(config-line)# password dellDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 281 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Enable Password To set a local password to control access to Normal and Privilege levels activities. 1 Click System > Management Security > Enable Passwords in the tree view to display the Enable Password page. Figure 9-38. Enable Password 2 Enter the fields: – Select Enable Access Level — Select the access level to associate with the enable password. The lowest user access level is 1 and 15 is the highest user access level. Users with access level 15 are Privileged Users, and only they can access and use the OpenManage Switch Administrator. – Password (0-159 characters) — Enter the enable password. – Confirm Password — Confirm the password.282 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Expiry Date — If Aging is selected, displays the expiration date of the enable password. – Lockout Status — Displays the number of failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in successfully (if the Enable Login Attempts checkbox is selected in the Password Management page.) Specifies LOCKOUT, when the user account is locked. – Reactivate Suspended User — Check to reactivate the specified user’s access rights. Access rights can be suspended after unsuccessfully attempting to login. Assigning Enable Passwords Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Enable Password page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: TACACS+ The device can act as a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) client. TACACS+ provides centralized validation of users accessing the device, while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services: • Authentication — Provides authentication during login and via user names and user-defined passwords. • Authorization — Performed at login after authentication. The TACACS+ server checks the privileges of the authenticated user. Table 9-47. Enable Password CLI Commands CLI Command Description enable password [level level] d [encrypted] no enable password [level level] Sets a local password to control access to user and privilege levels. Use the no form of this command to remove the password requirement. console(config)# enable password level 15 secretDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 283 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The TACACS+ protocol ensures network integrity through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS+ server. To configure TACACS+ servers: 1 Click System > Management Security > TACACS+ in the tree view to display the TACACS+: Summary page. Figure 9-39. TACACS+: Summary The list of currently-defined TACACS+ servers is displayed. The parameters for each server is displayed, along with its connection status. 2 Enter the default parameters for TACACS+ servers. These values are used unless values are added in the TACACS+ Add or Edit pages. – Source IP Address — The device IP address used for the TACACS+ session between the device and the TACACS+ server. The default is 0.0.0.0., which means that any IP address of the device can be used to communicate with the TACACS+ server.284 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Key String (1-128 Characters) — The authentication and encryption key for TACACS+ communications between the device and the TACACS+ server. This key must match the encryption key sent by the TACACS+ server. This key is encrypted. – Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times out. 3 To add a TACACS+ server, click Add, and enter the fields on the page. The fields below are those that were not described on the TACACS+: Summary page. – Host IP Address — Enter the TACACS+ server IP address. – Priority (0-65535) — Enter the order in which the TACACS+ servers are used if several are defined. – Source IP Address — Enter either specific device IP address for the TACACS+ server. – Authentication Port (0-65535) — Enter the port number through which the TACACS+ session occurs. – Timeout for Reply (1-30) — Enter the amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times out. – Single Connection — Check to maintain a single open connection between the device and the TACACS+ server.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 285 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Wherever available, check Use Default to use a value that was entered in the TACACS+: Summary page. Defining TACACS+ Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the TACACS+ Settings pages. Table 9-48. TACACS+ CLI Commands CLI Command Description tacacs-server host {ip address|hostname}[singleconnection] [port port-number] [timeout timeout][key keystring][source source] [priority priority] no tacacs-server host {ipaddress|hostname} Configures a TACACS+ host. Use the no form of this command to delete the specified TACACS+ host. tacacs-server key key-string no tacacs-server key Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS+ communications between the device and the TACACS+ server. Use the no form of this command to disable the key. tacacs-server timeout timeout no tacacs-server timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds. tacacs-server source-ip source no tacacs-server source-ip source Specifies the source IP address. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show tacacs [ip-address] Displays configuration and statistics for a TACACS+ server.286 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Password Management Password management provides increased network security and improved password control. This feature is optional and must be enabled in the Password Management page. Passwords for SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, and SNMP access can be assigned security features that include: • Minimum password lengths • Password expiration dates (password aging) • Prevention of frequent password reuse • Lockout of users after failed login attempts • Number of repeated characters allowed • Number of different character classes required in the password. Numeric, alphabetic, and special characters are all character classes. console(config)# tacacs-server source-ip 172.16.8.1 console# show tacacs Device Configuration ----------------------------- IP Address Status Port Single TimeOut Source IP Priority Connection ---------- ------ ------ ---------- -------- ---------- -------- 1.1.1.11 Not 49 No Global Global 10 Connected 1.1.1.21 Not 49 No Global Global 19 Connected 1.1.1.31 Not 49 No Global Global 18 Connected 1.1.1.41 Not 49 No Global Global 17 Connected Global values -------------- TimeOut : 5 ----------------------------- Source IP : 0.0.0.0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 287 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Password aging starts immediately after password management is enabled. However it is only effective if system time on the device is taken from an SNTP server. Passwords expire according to the user-defined expiration date/time. Ten days prior to password expiration, the device displays a password expiration warning message. After the password has expired, users can log in a few additional times. During the remaining logins, an additional warning message displays informing the user that the password must be changed. If the password is not changed, users are locked out of the system, and can only log in using the console. Password warnings are logged in the SYSLOG file. NOTE: Password aging is enabled only after setting the switch to use SNTP for setting time.288 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define password management parameters: 1 Click System > Management Security > Password Management in the tree view to display the Password Management page. Figure 9-40. Password Management 2 Check the required fields and enter their values: – Enable Strong Passwords — Check to enable this feature. – Number of Classes — Select a number of character classes. The character classes are: upper case characters, lower case characters, digits and punctuation. The number of character classes selected indicates how many different types of characters must be in the password. – Repeated Characters — Select the number of permissible repeated characters in the password.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 289 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Password Minimum Length (8-64 characters) — When checked, specifies the minimum password length. Enter the minimum password length. – Enable Login Attempts — When checked, enables locking a user out of the device when a faulty password is used more than the number of times entered. Select the maximum number of login attempts. – Global Password Aging (1-365) — When checked, specifies that the password will expire in the number of days entered. Enter the number of days. This is only enabled after setting the switch to use SNTP for setting time – Consecutive Passwords Before Reuse (1-10) — When checked, indicates the number of times a password must be changed, before the password can be reused. Select the number of times. – Password History Hold Time (1-365) — When checked, the password history will be deleted after the number of days entered. Enter the number of days. Password Management Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Password Management page. Table 9-49. Password Management CLI Commands CLI Command Description passwords strength-check enable no passwords strength-check Enforces password strength checks. Use the no form of this command to disable enforcing password strength checks. passwords strength [max-limit repeated characters | minimum character-classes] no passwords strength Enforces limits of repeated characters and character classes. Use the no form of this command to disable enforcing limits of repeated characters and character classes.290 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is a sample script that sets password strength rules and creates a user with a valid password. password min-length length no password min-length Defines the minimum password length. Use the no form of this command to remove the restriction. passwords aging days no passwords aging Enforces password aging. Use the no form of this command to return to default. password history number no password history Defines the amount of times a password is changed, before the password can be reused. password history hold-time days no password history hold-time Configures the duration that a password is relevant for tracking passwords history. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. password lockout number no password lockout Defines the number of times a faulty password is entered before the user is locked out of the device. Use the no form of this command to disable the lockout feature. show password configuration Displays password management information. Table 9-50. CLI Script to Configure Strong Password CLI Command Description console#configure console(conf)# passwords strengthcheck enable Enable strong passwords. Table 9-49. Password Management CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 291 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers provide additional security for networks. Up to four RADIUS servers can be defined. RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for: • Telnet Access • Secure Shell Access • Web Access • Console Access console(config)# passwords strength minimum character-classes 3 Enable that passwords must contain at least three character classes. password min-length 8 Enable that passwords must contain at least eight characters. console(config)# username admin privilege 15 password FGH123!@# Create a user named "admin" with privilege level 15 and password that fits the strength rules. Table 9-50. CLI Script to Configure Strong Password CLI Command Description292 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To add a RADIUS server: 1 Click System > Management Security > RADIUS in the tree view to display the RADIUS: Summary page. Figure 9-41. RADIUS: Summary The RADIUS default parameters and previously-defined RADIUS servers are displayed. 2 Enter the default parameters to be used when these parameters are not entered for a specific server. – Default Retries (1-10) — The default number of transmitted requests sent to RADIUS server before a failure occurs. – Default Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The default amount of the time (in seconds) that the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before timing out. – Default Dead time (0-2000) — The default amount of time (in minutes) that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests. – Default Key String (0-128 Characters) — The Default Key string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server. This key is used for encryption. – Source IPv4 Address — The source IP v4 address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 293 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Source IPv6 Address — The source IP v6 address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers. 3 To add a RADIUS server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IP Address — Enter the RADIUS server IP address. – Priority (0-65535) — Enter the priority of the authentication server being added. 0 is the highest value. This is used to configure the order in which servers are queried. – Authentication Port (0-65535) — Enter the authentication port used to verify the RADIUS server authentication. Enter 0 if you do not want this server to be used for authentication purposes. – Accounting Port (0-65535) — Enter the accounting port, which is the UDP port number of the RADUS server used for accounting requests. Enter 0 if you do not want this server to be used for accounting purposes. – Usage Type — Enter the RADIUS server usage. The possible options are: • Login — Used for login authentication and/or accounting. • 802.1x — Used for 802.1x authentication and/or accounting. • All — Used for all types of authentication and/or accounting. 4 Enter the following fields if you do not want to use the default values entered in the RADIUS: Summary page. If you do want to use the default values, check Use Default for these fields. – Number of Retries (1-10) — Enter the number of requests sent to the RADIUS server before a failure occurs. – Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The amount of the time in seconds that the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retrying the query, or switching to the next server. – Dead Time (0-2000) — The amount of time (in minutes) that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests. – Key String (0-128 Characters) — The key string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server. 294 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Source IP Address — The device IP address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers. Defining RADIUS Servers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed on the RADIUS pages. Table 9-51. RADIUS Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description radius-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|ipv6zaddress|hostname} [auth-port auth-port-number] [acct-port acct-port-number][timeout timeout] [retransmit retries] [deadtime deadtime] [key keystring] [source {ipv4- address|ipv6-address}] [priority priority] [usage {login|802.1x|all}] no radius-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} Specifies a RADIUS server host. Use the no form of the command to delete the specified RADIUS server host. radius-server timeout timeout no radius-server timeout Sets the interval for which a device waits for a server host to reply. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server source-ip sourceip-address no radius-server source-ip source-ip-address Specifies the source IPv4 address that will be used for the IPv4 communication with RADIUS servers. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 295 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY radius-server source-ipv6 source-ipv6-address no radius-server source-ipv6 source-ipv6-address Specifies the source IPv6 address that will be used for the IPv6 communication with RADIUS servers. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server retransmit retries no radius-server retransmit Specifies the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server deadtime deadtime no radius-server deadtime Configures unavailable servers to be skipped. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server key key-string no radius-server key Sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS server. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show radius-servers Displays the RADIUS server settings. Table 9-51. RADIUS Server CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description296 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of CLI commands: console(config)# radius-server host 192.168.10.1 authport 20 timeout 20 console(config)# radius-server key enterprise-server console# show radius-servers IP address Port Port Time- Ret- Dead- Source IP Prio. Usage Auth Acct Out rans Time --------------- ----- ----- ------ ------ ------ --------------- ----- --- 1.1.1.11 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 10 all 1.1.1.21 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 19 all 1.1.1.31 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 18 all 1.1.1.41 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 17 all 1.1.1.51 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 16 all Global values -------------- TimeOut : 3 Retransmit : 3 Deadtime : 0 Source IP : 0.0.0.0 Source IPv6 : ::Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 297 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Server The switch can operate as either: • DHCP client that obtains its own IP from a DHCP server, as described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214 • DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to other devices, as described in this section This section contains the following topics: • DHCP Server Overview • DHCP Server Properties • Network Pool • Excluded Addresses • Static Hosts • Address Binding DHCP Server Overview A DHCP server uses a defined pool of IP addresses (user-defined) from which it allocates IP addresses to DHCP clients. The DHCP server can allocate IP addresses in the following modes: • Static Allocation — The hardware address of a host is manually mapped to an IP address. • Permanent Allocation — An IP address sent to the client through a standard request-reply mechanism, is owned by that client permanently (unless changes in the network environment/connections take place, for any reason). • Dynamic Allocation — A client obtains a leased IP address for a specified period of time. The IP address is revoked at the end of this period, and the client must request another IP address. 298 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Server Properties If the device is configured to act as a DHCP server, pinging capability can be enabled. The DHCP server pings an IP address in the address pool before assigning that IP address to a requesting client. If the ping is unanswered, the DHCP server assumes that the address is not in use and assigns the address to the client. To configure the device as a DHCP server: 1 Click System > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Properties in the tree view to display the DHCP Server Properties page. Figure 9-42. DHCP Server PropertiesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 299 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the fields: – DHCP Server Status — Enable/disable the ability of the device to function as a DHCP server. – DHCP Ping — Enable/disable the DHCP server to ping the offered IP address before responding to a client request. – DHCP Ping Retries — Enter the number of pings that are sent before discarding an IP address. Use Default reverts to the default Ping Retries setting. – DHCP Ping Timeout — Enter the maximum time interval (in milliseconds) that the DHCP server waits for a ping reply. Use Default reverts to the default Ping Timeout. Defining DHCP Server Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining the switch as a DHCP server. Table 9-52. DHCP Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp server no ip dhcp server Enables the DHCP server feature on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable the DHCP server feature. ip dhcp ping enable no ip dhcp ping enable Enables the DHCP server to send ping packets before assigning the address to a requesting client. Use the no form of this command to prevent the server from pinging pool addresses. ip dhcp ping count number no ip dhcp ping count Specifies the number of packets a DHCP server sends to a pool address as part of a ping operation. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.300 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: ip dhcp ping timeout milliseconds no ip dhcp ping timeout Specifies the time interval during which a DHCP server waits for a ping reply from an address pool. Use the no form of this command to restore default values. console(config)# ip dhcp ping enable console(config)# ip dhcp ping count 5 Table 9-52. DHCP Server CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 301 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Network Pool When the device is serving as a DHCP server, a pool of IP addresses must be defined, from which the switch will allocate IP addresses to clients. Each IP pool has a lease duration. To create a pool of IP addresses, and define their lease durations: 1 Click System > DHCP Server > Network Pool in the tree view to display the Network Pool: Summary page. Figure 9-43. Network Pool: Summary The previously-defined network pools are displayed. 2 Click Add to define a new network pool, and enter the fields: – Pool Name — Enter the pool name. – Subnet IP Address — Enter the subnet in which the network pool resides.302 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Network Mask — Check and enter the pool’s network mask. • Prefix Length — Check and enter the number of bits that comprise the address prefix. – Address Pool Start — Enter the first IP address in the range of the network pool. – Address Pool End — Enter the last IP address in the range of the network pool. – Lease Duration — Enter the amount of time a DHCP client can use an IP address from this pool. The total lease duration is 4294967295 seconds, i.e. 49710.2696 days. Thus a lease of 49710 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds is a legal value, while a lease of 49710 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds results in an Out of Range alert. • Days — The duration of the lease in number of days. The range is 0 to 49710 days. • Hours — The number of hours in the lease. A days value must be supplied before an hours value can be added. • Minutes — The number of minutes in the lease. A days value and an hours value must be added before a minutes value can be added. • Infinite — The duration of the lease is unlimited. – Default Router — Enter the default router for the DHCP client. – Domain Name Server — Enter the DNS server available to the DHCP client. – Domain Name — Enter the domain name for a DHCP client. The domain name may contain up to 32 characters. – NetBIOS WINS Server — Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server available to a DHCP client. – NetBIOS Node Type — Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name. Valid node types are: • Empty— Default value. • Broadcast — IP Broadcast messages are used to register and resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 303 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Peer-to-Peer — Point-to-point communications with a NetBIOS name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP addresses. • Mixed — A combination of b-node and p-node communications is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names. M-node first uses b-node; then, if necessary, p-node. M-node is typically not the best choice for larger networks because its preference for b-node Broadcasts increases network traffic. • Hybrid — A hybrid combination of b-node and p-node is used. When configured to use h-node, a computer always tries p-node first and uses b-node only if p-node fails. This is the default. – SNTP Server — Enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP client. – Next Server — Enter the IP address of the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. If the next server in the boot process is not configured, the DHCP server uses inbound interface helper addresses as boot servers. – Next Server Name — Enter the name of the next server in the boot process. – Image File Name — Enter the name of the file that is used as a boot image. Configuring Network Pool Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining a pool of addresses on the DHCP server. Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp pool network name no ip dhcp pool network name Configures a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server and enters DHCP Pool Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the address pool.304 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY address {network-number|low low-address high highaddress} {mask|prefixlength} no address Configures the subnet number, mask and start and end addresses for a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server. Use the no form of this command to remove the subnet number and mask. lease {days [{hours} [minutes]]|infinite} no lease Configures the time duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP server to a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default value default-router ip-address [ip-address2 ... ipaddress8] no default-router Configures the default router list for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the default router list. dns-server ip-address [ipaddress2 ... ip-address8] no dns-server Configures the DNS IP servers available to a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the DNS server list. domain-name domain no domain-name Specifies the domain name for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the domain name. netbios-name-server ipaddress [ip-address2 ... ipaddress8] no netbios-name-server Configures the NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) servers that are available to Microsoft DHCP clients. Use the no form of this command to remove the NetBIOS name server list. netbios-node-type {b-node|pnode|m-node|h-node} no netbios-node-type Configures the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients. Use the no form of this command to remove the NetBIOS node type. Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 305 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: time-server ip-address [ipaddress2 ... ip-address8] no time-server Specifies the time servers list for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the time servers list. next-server ip-address no next-server Configures the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the boot server. next-server-name name no next-server-name Configures the next server name in the boot process of a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the boot server name. bootfile filename no bootfile Specifies the default boot image file name for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to delete the boot image file name. show ip dhcp pool network [name] Displays the DHCP network pool configuration. console(config)# ip dhcp pool network pool1 console(config-dhcp)# address 10.12.1.99 255.255.255.0 01b7.0813.8811.66 console(config-dhcp)# lease 1 Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description306 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Excluded Addresses By default, the DHCP server assumes that all pool addresses in a pool may be assigned to clients. A single IP address or a range of IP addresses can be excluded. To define an excluded address range: 1 Click System > DHCP Server > Excluded Addresses in the tree view to display the Excluded Addresses: Summary page. Figure 9-44. Excluded Addresses: Summary The previously-defined excluded IP addresses are displayed. 2 To add a range of IP addresses to be excluded, click Add, and enter the fields: – Start IP Address — First IP address in the range of excluded IP addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 307 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – End IP Address — Last IP address in the range of excluded IP addresses. Excluding Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for excluding addresses. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-54. Excluding Addresses Using CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp excluded-address lowaddress [high-address] no ip dhcp excluded-address low-address [high-address] Configures a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server and enter DHCP Pool Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the address pool. show ip dhcp excluded-addresses Displays the excluded addresses. console(config)# ip dhcp excluded-address 172.16.1.100 172.16.1.199 console> show ip dhcp excluded-addresses The number of excluded addresses ranges is 2 Excluded addresses: 10.1.1.212- 10.1.1.219, 10.1.2.212- 10.1.2.219308 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Static Hosts To manually allocate permanent IP addresses to clients (known as static hosts): 1 Click System > DHCP Server > Static Hosts in the tree view to display the Static Hosts: Summary page. Figure 9-45. Static Hosts: Summary The static hosts are displayed. 2 To add a static host, click Add, and enter the fields: – Host Name — Enter the host pool name, which can be a string of symbols and an integer. – IP Address — Enter the IP address that was statically assigned to the host. • Network Mask — Enter the pool’s network mask. • Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the address prefix.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 309 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Client Identifier — Enter a unique identification of the client specified in dotted hexadecimal notation, such as: 01b6.0819.6811.72. or: – MAC Address — Enter the MAC address of DHCP static host. – Client Name — The name of the client, using a standard set of ASCII characters. The client name must not include the domain name. – Default Router — Enter the default router for the DHCP client. – Domain Name Server — Enter the DNS server available to the DHCP client. – Domain Name — Enter the domain name for a DHCP client. The domain name may contain up to 32 characters. – NetBIOS WINS Server — Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server available to a DHCP client. – NetBIOS Node Type — Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name. Valid node types are: • Empty — Default value. • Broadcast — IP Broadcast messages are used to register and resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses. • Peer-to-Peer — Point-to-point communications with a NetBIOS name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP addresses. • Mixed — A combination of b-node and p-node communications is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names. M-node first uses b-node; then, if necessary, p-node. M-node is typically not the best choice for larger networks because its preference for b-node Broadcasts increases network traffic. • Hybrid — A hybrid combination of b-node and p-node is used. When configured to use h-node, a computer always tries p-node first and uses b-node only if p-node fails. This is the default. – SNTP Server — Enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP client.310 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Next Server — Enter the IP address of the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. If the next server in the boot process is not configured, the DHCP server uses inbound interface helper addresses as boot servers. – Next Server Name — Enter the name of the next server in the boot process. – Image File Name — Enter the name of the file that is used as a boot image. Defining Static Hosts Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining static hosts. See Table 9-53 for the remaining CLI commands that are common to the Network Pool pages, but are used in the context DHCP Pool Host context. Table 9-55. Defining Static Hosts Using CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp pool host no ip dhcp pool host Configures a DHCP static address on a DHCP Server and enters the DHCP Pool Host Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the address pool. ip host name address [address2 address3 address4] no ip host name Defines the static host name-toaddress mapping in the host cache. Use the no form of this command to remove the static hostname-toaddress mapping. show hosts Displays the default domain name, the list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses. clear host Deletes entries from the host nameto-address cache.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 311 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# ip dhcp pool host station console(config-dhcp)#ip host accounting.website.com 176.10.23.1 console# show hosts System Name: Default domain: Domain name is not configured Name/address lookup is enable Name servers (Preference order): 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.3 1.1.1.4 1.1.1.5 Configured host name-to-address mapping: Host IP Address --------------------------------- ----------------------- accounting.website.com 176.10.23.1312 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Address Binding Use the Address Binding page to view and remove the IP addresses allocated by the switch and their corresponding MAC addresses. To view and/or remove address bindings: • Click System > DHCP Server > Address Binding in the tree view to display the Address Binding page. Figure 9-46. Address Binding The following fields for the address bindings are displayed: – IP Address — The IP addresses of the client. – Client Identifier/MAC Address — A unique identification of the client specified as a MAC Address or in dotted hexadecimal notation, e.g., 01b6.0819.6811.72. – Lease Expiration — The lease expiration date and time of the host’s IP address. – Type — The manner in which the IP address was assigned to the client. The possible options are: • Static — The hardware address of the host was mapped to an IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 313 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Permanent — The IP address, obtained dynamically from the switch, is owned by the client permanently (unless changes in the network environment/connections take place, for any reason). • Dynamic — The IP address, obtained dynamically from the switch, is owned by the client for a specified period of time. The IP address is revoked at the end of this period, at which time the client must request another IP address. 314 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP This section describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) for managing network devices. It contains the following topics: • SNMP Overview • SNMP Global Settings • SNMP Views • SNMP Access Control (Groups) • SNMP User Security Model (Users) • SNMP Communities • SNMP Notification Filters • SNMP Notification Recipients SNMP Overview The switch supports the SNMPv1, SNMPv2 and SNMPv3. SNMP v1 and v2 The SNMP agent maintains a list of variables that are used to manage the switch. These variables are stored in the Management Information Base (MIB) from which they may be presented. The SNMP agent defines the MIB specification format, as well as the format used to access the information over the network. Access rights to the SNMP agents are controlled by access strings. SNMPv1 and v2 are enabled by default. SNMP v3 In addition to the features provided by SNMPv1 and SNMPv2, SNMPv3 applies access control and a new trap mechanism to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 PDUs. In addition, a User Security Model (USM) can be defined, which includes: • Authentication — Provides data integrity and data origin authentication. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 315 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Privacy — Protects against disclosure of message content. Cipher BlockChaining (CBC) is used for encryption. Either authentication alone can be enabled on an SNMP message, or both authentication and privacy can be enabled on an SNMP message. However privacy cannot be enabled without authentication. • Timeliness — Protects against message delay or message redundancy. The SNMP agent compares incoming message to the message time information. • Key Management — Defines key generation, updates, and use. The switch supports SNMP notification filters, based on Object IDs (OIDs), which are used by the system to manage switch features. Authentication or Privacy Keys are modified in the User Security Model (USM). SNMPv3 can only be enabled if the Local Engine ID is enabled. SNMP Access Rights Access rights in SNMP are managed in the following ways: • SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 — Communities The community name is a password sent by the SNMP management station to the device for authentication purposes. A community string is transmitted along with the SNMPv1,v2 frames, but neither the frames nor the community string are encrypted. Since SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are not encrypted, they are not secure. Communities can be associated with views or groups, and they are defined in the Community pages. • SNMPv3 — Users and Groups SNMP v3 works with users instead of communities. The users belong to groups that have access rights assigned to them. Users are defined in the User Security Model pages SNMPv3 provides two security mechanisms: – Authentication — The switch checks that the SNMP user is an authorized system administrator. This is done for each and every frame. 316 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Privacy — SNMP frames can carry encrypted data. These mechanisms can be combined to provide three levels of security: – No security – Authentication – Authentication and Privacy. Note that for both authentication and privacy to be enabled, two groups with the same name, one with authentication and one with privacy, must be created. A group is a label for a combination of attributes that determines whether members have read, write, and/or notify privileges. Users can be associated with a group. A group is operational only when it is associated with an SNMP user. Model OIDs The following are the switch model Object IDs (OIDs): SNMP Global Settings The Engine ID is used by SNMPv3 entities to uniquely identify themselves. An SNMP agent is considered an authoritative SNMP engine. This means that the agent responds to incoming messages (Get, GetNext, GetBulk, Set), and sends Trap messages to a manager. The agent's local information is encapsulated in fields in the message. Each SNMP agent maintains local information that is used in SNMPv3 message exchanges (not relevant for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2). The default SNMP Engine ID is comprised of the enterprise number and the default MAC address. The SNMP engine ID must be unique for the administrative domain, so that no two devices in a network have the same engine ID. Model Name Object ID PC5524 10895.3030 PC5524P 10895.3032 PC5548 10895.3031 PC5548P 10895.3033Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 317 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The local information is stored in four read-only MIB variables: snmpEngineId, snmpEngineBoots, snmpEngineTime, and snmpEngineMaxMessageSize. To configure SNMP: 1 Click System > SNMP > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 9-47. Global Parameters The global parameters are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Local Engine ID (10-64 Hex Characters) — Check and enter the local device engine ID. The field value is a hexadecimal string. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon. The Engine ID must be defined before SNMPv3 is enabled. For stacked devices, verify that the Engine ID is unique for the administrative domain. This prevents two devices in a network from having the same Engine ID. 318 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Use Default — Check to use the device-generated Engine ID. The default Engine ID is based on the device MAC address, and is defined per standard as: • First 4 octets — First bit = 1, the rest is IANA Enterprise number = 674. • Fifth octet — Set to 3 to indicate the MAC address that follows. • Last 6 octets — MAC address of the device. – SNMP Notifications — Enable/disable the switch sending SNMP notifications. – Authentication Notifications — Enable/disable the switch sending SNMP traps when authentication fails. Setting SNMP Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Global Parameters page. Table 9-56. SNMP Global Parameters Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server engine ID local {engine-id-string|default} no snmp-server engine ID local Specifies the local device engine ID. The field values is a hexadecimal string. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or colon. The Engine ID must be defined before SNMPv3 is enabled. Use the no form of this command to remove the configured engine ID. snmp-server enable traps no snmp-server enable traps Enables the router to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps. Use the no form of the command to disable SNMP traps.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 319 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP Views An SNMP view, which is a collection of MIB subtrees, provides or blocks access to device features. Each subtree is defined by the Object ID (OID) of the root of its subtrees. In extreme cases this subtree can be a leaf. Well-known names can be used to specify the root of the desired subtree, or an OID can be entered (see "Model OIDs" on page 316). Each subtree is either included in or excluded from the view being defined. snmp-server trap authentication no snmp-server trap authentication Enables the router to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps when authentication fails. Use the no form of this command to disable SNMP failed authentication traps. show snmp Checks the status of SNMP communications. console(config)# snmp-server enable traps console(config)# snmp-server trap authentication console(config)# snmp-server engineid local default The engine-id must be unique within your administrative domain. Do you wish to continue? [Y/N]y The SNMPv3 database will be erased. Do you wish to continue? [Y/N]y Table 9-56. SNMP Global Parameters Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description320 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Views can be attached to groups in the Access Control pages. To create an SNMP view: 1 Click System > SNMP > View Settings in the tree view to display the View Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-48. View Setting: Summary 2 Select a view name. Its subtrees are displayed. 3 To remove a subtree from an SNMP view, click Remove. The subtrees of the default views (Default, DefaultSuper) cannot be changed. 4 To add a new view, click Add, and enter a new View Name (1-30 Characters). 5 To complete the definition of the view, click Edit, and select a View Name to modify. Enter the fields: – New Object ID Subtree — Check to specify the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 321 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Selected from List — Select the device feature OID by using the Up and Down buttons to scroll through a list of all device OIDs. Or: • Insert — Specify the device feature OID. – View Type — Specify if the defined OID branch will be included or excluded in the selected SNMP view. Defining SNMP Views Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the View Settings pages. The following is an example of CLI commands: Table 9-57. SNMP View CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included|excluded} no snmp-server view view-name [oid-tree] Creates or updates a SNMP server view entry. Use the no form of this command to remove an SNMP server view entry. show snmp views [viewname] Displays the configuration of a view or all views. console(config)# snmp-server view user1 1 included console(config)# end console# show snmp views Name OID Tree Type ------------ --------------- -------- user1 system included Default iso included Default snmpVacmMIB excluded Default usmUser excluded Default rndCommunityTable excluded DefaultSuper iso included322 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP Access Control (Groups) For ease of use, users may be assigned to groups. In this way, it is possible to assign feature access rights to an entire group, instead of assigning them individually to users. Users are created in the User Security Model pages. Groups can be defined in any version of SNMP, but only SNMPv3 groups can be assigned authentication methods. To add an SNMP group, and assign it access control privileges: 1 Click System > SNMP > Access Control in the tree view to display the Access Control: Summary page. Figure 9-49. Access Control: Summary Previously-defined groups are displayed. 2 To add a new group, click Add, and enter the fields: – Group Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter a group name. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 323 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Security Model — Select the SNMP version of the group. – Security Level — Select the security level attached to the group. Security levels apply to SNMPv3 only. The possible options are: • No Authentication — Neither authentication nor the privacy security levels are assigned to the group. • Authentication — Authenticates SNMP messages, and ensures that the origin of the SNMP message is authenticated. • Privacy — Encrypts SNMP message. – Operation — Select the group access rights. The possible options are: • Read — The management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from the drop-down list. • Write — The management access is read-write and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from the drop-down list. • Notify — Sends traps for the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from the drop-down list. Defining SNMP Access Control Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Access Control pages. Table 9-58. SNMP Access Control CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server group groupname {v1|v2|v3 {noauth|auth|priv}} [read readview] [write writeview] [notify notifyview] no snmp-server group groupname {v1|v2|v3 [noauth|auth|priv]} [context-name] Configure a new Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) group, or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views. Use the no form of this command to remove a specified SNMP group. show snmp groups [groupname] Displays the configuration of groups 324 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP User Security Model (Users) An SNMP user is defined by the following: • Login credentials (username, password, and authentication method) • Context and scope in which the user operates • Association with a group • Engine ID SNMP user login credentials are verified using a local database. After a user is authenticated, it takes on the attributes of its group, and can then access the views permitted to this group. A user can only be a member of a single group. Before you create an SNMPv3 user, create an SNMPv3 group in the Access Control pages. When the configuration file is saved, SNMP communities/users are not saved. This means that if you configure another device with this configuration file, you must define the SNMP communities/users on that device. console (config)# snmp-server group user-group v3 priv read user-view console# show snmp groups Name Security Views Model Level Read Write Notify ----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ---------- 1 V1 noauth - - - 2 V1 noauth - - - 3 V1 noauth - - - 4 V1 noauth - - - 5 V1 noauth - - -Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 325 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To create an SNMP V3 user, and assign it to a group and view: 1 Click System > SNMP > User Security Model in the tree view to display the User Security Model: Summary page. Figure 9-50. User Security Model: Summary The currently-defined users and their groups are displayed. 2 To add a user, click Add, and enter the fields: – User Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter a new user name. – Engine ID — Specifies the local or remote SNMP entity, to which the user is connected. Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID deletes the SNMPv3 User Database. Select either Local or Remote. If Remote is selected, enter the remote engine ID. – Group Name — Select from a list of user-defined SNMP groups. SNMP groups are defined in the Access Control Group pages.326 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Authentication Method — Select an authentication method used to authenticate users. The possible options are: • None — No user authentication is used. • MD5 Password — HMAC-MD5-96 password is used for authentication. • SHA Password — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-SHA- 96 authentication level. • MD5 Key — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-MD5 algorithm. • SHA Key — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level. – Password (0-32 Characters) — If the MD5 Password or SHA Password authentication method was selected, enter the user-defined password for a group. – Authentication Key (MD5-16; SHA-20 Hex Characters) — If the MD5 Key or SHA Key authentication method was selected, enter the HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96 keys. The authentication and privacy keys are entered to define the authentication key. If only authentication is required, 16 bytes are defined for MD5. If both privacy and authentication are required, 32 bytes are defined for MD5. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon. – Privacy Key (16 Hex Characters) — If the MD5 Key or SHA Key authentication method was selected, enter the privacy key. If only authentication is required, 20 bytes are defined. If both privacy and authentication are required, 16 bytes are defined. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or colon. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 327 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining SNMPv3 Users Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the User Security Model pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP Communities When using SNMP v1,2, communities strings (passwords) are used to provide access rights in the following ways: • Basic Table — The access rights of a community can be read-only, readwrite, or SNMP Admin. In addition, you can restrict access to the community to only certain MIB objects using a view. Views are defined in the Views Setting pages. • Advanced Table — Access rights to a community are assigned to a group that consists of users. A group can have Read, Write, and Notify access to views. Groups are defined in the Access Control pages. Table 9-59. SNMP Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server user username groupname {v1|v2c|[remote-host] v3 [encrypted] [auth {md5|sha} auth-password]} no snmp-server user username [remotehost] Configures a new SNMP V3 user. Use the no form of the command to remove a user. show snmp users [username] Displays the configuration of users. console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v1 console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v2c console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v3328 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define an SNMP community: 1 Click System > SNMP > Communities in the tree view to display the Communities: Summary page. Figure 9-51. SNMP Community The Basic and Advanced tables are displayed. 2 To add a new community, click Add. 3 Define the SNMP management station by entering its IP address information: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is being used. – IPv6 Address Type — When the community supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 329 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – SNMP Management Station — Enter the management station IP address for which the SNMP community is defined, or choose All to be able to receive SNMP messages from anywhere. – Community String (1-20 Characters) — Enter the community string, which functions as a password, and is used to authenticate the management station to the device. 4 To associate access mode and views directly with the community, enter the fields: – Basic — Check to enable SNMP Basic mode for a selected community. – Access Mode — If Basic is selected, specify the access rights of the community. The possible options are: • Read-Only — Management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the community. • Read-Write — Management access is read-write and changes can be made to the device configuration, but not to the community. • SNMP Admin — User has access to all device configuration options, as well as permissions to modify the community. – View Name — Select a view from a list of user-defined SNMP views. The view determines other characteristics associated with the community. 5 To use Advanced mode, enter the fields: – Advanced — When SNMP Advanced mode is selected, you can select an SNMP group to specify the SNMP access control rules for the selected community. The SNMP Advanced mode is defined only with SNMPv3. 330 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Group Name — Select the group to be associated with the community. Configuring Communities Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Community pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP Notification Filters Notification filters determine the type of SNMP notifications that are sent to the management station, based on the OID of the notification to be sent. Each OID is linked to a device feature or a feature aspect. SNMP notification filters provide the following services: • Identification of management trap targets • Trap filtering Table 9-60. SNMP Community CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server community community [view view-name] [ro|rw|su] {ipv4-address|ipv6-address} [mask mask-value|prefix-length prefix-value] [type router|oob] Sets up the community access string to permit access to the SNMP protocol. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified community string snmp-server community-group community group-name [ipv4- address|ipv6- address][mask|prefix-length] [type router|oob] no snmp-server community string [ipv4-address|ipv6-address] Sets up community access string to permit limited access to the SNMP protocol, based on group access rights. show snmp Displays the current SNMP device configuration. console (config)# snmp-server community dell ro 10.1.1.1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 331 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Selection of trap generation parameters • Access control checks After creating a notification filter, attach it to a notification recipient in the SNMPv1,2 Notification Recipients pages. To add a notification filter: 1 Click System > SNMP > Notification Filters in the tree view to display the Notification Filter: Summary page. Figure 9-52. Notification Filter: Summary 2 The OIDs of the selected filter are displayed. 3 If required, the notification filter type can be changed by selecting one of the following options: – Excluded — OID traps or informs will not be sent. – Included — OID traps or informs will be sent.332 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 To add a new notification filter, click Add. 5 In addition to the fields described in the Summary page, enter the fields: – Filter Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter the notification filter name. – New Object Identifier Tree — Check to specify the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view. • Selected from List — Select the device feature OID by using the Up and Down buttons to scroll through a list of all device OIDs. or: • Object ID — Specify the device feature OID. – Filter Type — Select whether the defined OID branch will be Included or Excluded in the selected SNMP view. Configuring Notification Filters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Notification Filter pages. Table 9-61. SNMP Notification Filter CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server filter filter-name oidtree {included|excluded} no snmp-server filter filter-name [oid-tree] Creates or updates an SNMP notification filter. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified SNMP server filter entry. show snmp filters [filter-name] Displays the configuration of SNMP notification filtersDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 333 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of CLI commands: SNMP Notification Recipients An SNMP notification is a trap message, sent from the switch to the SNMP management station, indicating that a certain event has occurred, such as a link up or down. Trap receivers, also known as notification recipients, are network nodes to which trap messages are sent by the switch. A trap receiver entry contains the IP address of the node and the SNMP credentials corresponding to the version that will be included in the trap message. When an event arises that requires a trap message to be sent, it is sent to every node listed in the trap receiver list. Some messages are of an informational nature and are called "informs" instead of traps. console (config)# snmp-server filter user1 iso included console(config)# end console # show snmp filters Name OID Tree Type ----------- ------------- -------- user1 iso Included334 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To add notification recipients, and attach them to notification filters: 1 Click System > SNMP > Notification Recipient in the tree view to display the Notification Recipients: Summary page. Figure 9-53. Notification Recipients: Summary The previously-defined notification recipients are displayed. 2 To add a new notification recipient, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the recipient supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 335 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The IPv6 interface is configured on this VLAN. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – Recipient IP — The IP address to whom the traps are sent. – Notification Type — The notification sent. The possible options are: • Trap — Traps are sent. • Inform — Informs are sent. If SNMP versions 1 and 2 are enabled for the selected recipient, enter the fields: – Community String — The community string of the trap manager. – Notification Version — The message trap SNMP version (v1 or v2). If SNMPv3 is used to send and receive traps, enter the fields: – User Name — The user to whom SNMP notifications are sent. – Security Level — The means by which the packet is authenticated. The possible options are: • No Authentication — The packet is neither authenticated nor encrypted. • Authentication — The packet is authenticated. • Privacy — The packet is both authenticated and encrypted. 3 Enter the fields for all versions of SNMP: – UDP Port (1-65535) — The UDP port used to send notifications. The default is 162. – Filter Name — Select an SNMP filter from a list of previously-defined SNMP filters. – Timeout (1-300) — The amount of time (seconds) the device waits before resending informs. – Retries (1-255) — The amount of times the device resends an inform request. 336 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring SNMP Notification Recipients Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Notification Recipients pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-62. SNMP Notification CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} [traps|informs] [version {1|2c|3 [auth|noauth|priv]}] communitystring [udp-port port] [filter filtername] [timeout seconds] [retries retries] no snmp-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} [traps|informs] [version {1|2c|3}] Creates or updates a notification recipient receiving notifications in SNMP version 1, 2 or 3. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified host. show snmp Shows the current SNMP configuration. console(config)# snmp-server host 172.16.1.1 private console(config)# end console# show snmp CommunityString CommunityAccess View Name IP Address ------------- ------------ --------- ---------- public read only user-view All private read write default 172.16.1.1 private su DefaultSup er 172.17.1.1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 337 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY File Management This section describes how to manage device firmware (image files) and configuration files. It contains the following topics: • File Management Overview • Auto-Update/Configuration Feature • File Download • File Upload • Active Images • Copy Files • File System File Management Overview This section describes the system files found in the system and how they can be updated (downloaded) and backed up (uploaded). System Files The following system files are maintained on the system: • Startup Configuration File — Files with extension .text. These files contain the commands required to configure the device at startup or after reboot. The Startup Configuration file is created from the Running Configuration file, or can be created from another file. • Running Configuration File — Files with extension .text. These files contain all Startup Configuration file commands, as well as all commands entered during the current session. After the device is powered down or rebooted, all commands stored in the Running Configuration file are lost. During the startup process, all commands in the Startup Configuration file are copied to the Running Configuration file, and applied to the device. During the session, new configuration commands are added to the Running Configuration file. To update the Startup Configuration file with these configuration commands, the Running Configuration file must first be copied to the Startup Configuration file before powering down the 338 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY device. This can be done manually in the Copy Files page or see "AutoUpdate/Configuration Feature" on page 338 for more information about how to perform this automatically. • Image Files—Files with extension .ros. System file images are saved in two flash files called Image 1 and Image 2. The active image contains the active copy, while the other image contains a backup copy. The device boots and runs from the active image. If the active image is corrupted, the system automatically boots from the non-active image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the software upgrade process. Downloading/Uploading System Files System files can be manually loaded from (downloaded) or copied to (uploaded) a TFTP server or a USB drive. This can be done in one of the following ways: • Manually—System files can be downloaded using the File Download page and uploaded using the File Upload page. • Automatically (Auto Update/Configuration)—System files can be downloaded automatically, as follows: – Auto-Configuration—If the Auto-Configure feature is enabled (in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page), the Startup Configuration file (in various conditions described below) might be automatically updated after reboot. – Auto-Update—If the Firmware Auto-Update feature is enabled in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page, the image file is might be automatically updated (in various conditions described below). Auto-Update/Configuration Feature The Auto-Update/Configuration feature enables initial configuration of the device and upgrading of the firmware through an automatic process, which enables the administrator to ensure that the configuration/firmware of all the devices in the network is up-to-date. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 339 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The required configuration files/images are stored on a USB key or TFTP server, and these are downloaded to all the devices in the network when the device boots up instead of booting from a local startup configuration file. Auto-Update/Configuration also enables quick installation of new devices on the network, since an out-of-box device can be configured to retrieve its configuration file from the network/USB, allowing instant access to it from the administrator's management station and up-to-date configuration on the device. NOTE: If Auto-Update is performed through the USB port, in addition to upgrading the Startup Configuration and image file, a new IP address can also be assigned to the device. See "Setup Files" on page 339 below. Setup Files In addition to placing configuration and image files on the USB key, the USB key might also contain a setup file, which is a file with a .setup extension. Setup File Contents A setup file contains one or more lines. Each line contains some or all of the following fields: • MAC Address—This indicates to which device the line applies. In this way, a single setup file can be used for multiple devices. • New IP Address—The new IP address to be assigned to the device. • New IP Address Mask—The IP address mask to be applied to the new IP address assigned to the device. • Configuration File Name—Name of the configuration file to be used as the Startup Configuration. • Image File Name—Name of the image file to be loaded on device. • Flag—Indicates the status of the line. The following values can be used in this field: – In-Use—This line has already been applied. It is no longer a candidate for future use. – Invalid—The line is invalid, do not use. – Blank—There is no value for the flag field. This line is a candidate to be applied to the device.340 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Setup File Format A line in a setup file contains all or some of the above fields separated by spaces (in the following order): If the field is omitted, it is considered to be blank. A line can be in one of the following formats: • Format A—Contains all possible fields: Examples: – 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500- 4018.ros This means that the line applies to the device with MAC address: 0080.c200.0010; a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file. – 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500- 4018.ros in-use This line will not be used because the flag is in-use indicating that it has already been used for some device, and it would be incorrect to use if for another device. – 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500- 4018.ros invalid This line will not be used because the flag is invalid indicating that it is failed in the past.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 341 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Format B—Contains the following 4 fields: Example: 0080.c200.0010 switch-X.text pc5500-4018.ros This means that the line applies to the device with MAC address: 0080.c200.0010. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file. • Format C—Contains the following 5 fields: Example: 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch.text pc5500-4018.ros This means that the line applies to any device (no MAC address is supplied); a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file. • Format D—Contains the following 3 fields: Example: 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 This means that the line applies to any device (no MAC address is supplied); a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0.342 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Triggering the Auto-Update/Configuration Process When the Auto-Update/Configuration feature is enabled (in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page), the device automatically attempts to download a new image or configuration file (under certain circumstances) using one of the following processes: • The Auto-Update process is triggered from the USB drive if a USB key in the USB drive is found. • The Auto-Configuration process is triggered from the USB drive after the Auto-Update process completed and the device was rebooted (if a new image file was loaded), and if the following conditions are fulfilled: – There is a USB key in the USB drive. – Force Configuration Download at Next Startup has been enabled by the boot host dhcp command, or the Startup Configuration file is empty. See "Performing Auto-Update from a USB Drive" on page 343. • The Auto-Update from a TFTP server is triggered if the following conditions are fulfilled: – The conditions for a USB Auto-Update are not fulfilled. – An IP address of a TFTP server is received from a DHCP server. – A file name is received from DHCP server. • The Auto-Configuration from a TFTP server is triggered if the following conditions are fulfilled: – The conditions for USB Auto-Configuration are not fulfilled. – The switch as DHCP client received a configuration file name or a TFTP URL. – Force Configuration Download at Next Startup enabled by the boot host dhcp command, or, the Startup Configuration file is empty. See "Preparations for Using Auto Configuration from a TFTP Server" on page 345. NOTES: • DHCP client never triggers the Auto-Update process from a TFTP server after attempting (whether successfully or not) to auto-update/configure configuration/image file from the USB drive. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 343 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If the auto process involved setting the IP address of the device from the setup file, the auto process from the TFTP server can be triggered. • If the USB drive contains a setup file, but that setup file does not include a line that can be used for the current device, the DHCP client is able to trigger the Auto-Update process from TFTP (because the USB process never started at all). Automatic DHCP IP Interface Assignment The user can manually define a DHCP interface in the DHCP IPv4 page. If the user does not do this, the switch automatically creates a DHCP interface on the VLAN with the lowest VLAN ID that does not have an IP address defined on it after boot if both of the following conditions are fulfilled: • There is no DHCP IP interface. • There is a VLAN without an IP address. Preparations for Using Auto Update/Configuration from a USB Drive Before Auto-Update/Configuration from a USB drive can be performed, the following steps must be performed: 1. Enable Auto-Update/Configuration in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page. 2. (Optional) Create a line in the setup file for this device containing the required options and load it on the USB key. 3. Load configuration/image files on the USB key as required. 4. Insert the USB key in the USB drive and reboot the device. Performing Auto-Update from a USB Drive When Auto-Update is initiated from a USB drive, the following steps are performed: 1. Locate the correct setup file—The USB drive is searched for a setup file. One of the following can occur: – Setup file is not found—The root folder of the USB is searched for an image files (with .ros extension). • The image file with the most recent version is loaded into the image file if the versions are different.344 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If a new image file was loaded, the device is rebooted. • The USB drive is searched for a configuration file (.text extension). If there is more than one configuration file, the file named powerconnect.text is loaded (if it is not found the process is stopped). – One or more setup files are found—If a single setup file is found, it is used; if several files are found, the file powerconnect.setup is used. If no setup file with this name is found, the process is stopped. 2. Find the line in the setup file relevant to the device—When the correct setup file is found, it is searched for a line relevant to the device, as follows: – The setup file is searched for a line with format A or B in which there is a match to the device's MAC address. If such line is found, and its format is valid (the field is empty), the line is applied. – If no line for the specific device was found, the setup file is searched for valid lines with formats C or D. The first line found is applied. 3. Apply the correct line—When the correct line in the setup file is found, it is applied, as follows: – If the line contains an IP address and IP mask, the IP address is configured on the default VLAN. – If the line contains an image file and its version differs from the current image file version, the USB image file is loaded and the switch is rebooted. – If a new image file was loaded, it is loaded onto all units in the stack. – If the line contains a configuration file, the configuration file is appended to running configuration file. 4. Mark the flag in the applied line—When the line is applied (successfully or not), its flag is set, as follows: – If the line contains an IP address and IP mask (format C or D), the IP address is configured on the default VLAN and the line is marked as "in-use". This ensures that the line is not used for another device. – If the line was not applied successfully, for one of the following reasons, the line is marked as "invalid" and a SYSLOG message is sent.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 345 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • The configuration file specified by the line does not exist on the USB key or is corrupted. • The image file specified by the line does not exist on the USB key or is corrupted. – If parsing of the line failed for some other reason, the line is ignored and a SYSLOG message is sent. NOTE: When both Auto-Update and Auto-Configuration are performed, the image file is loaded first, the device is booted and then the configuration file is loaded. Preparations for Using Auto Configuration from a TFTP Server The Auto-Update/Configuration feature enables configuring the device from a configuration file found on the TFTP server. Two methods may be used: • One-file Read, described in "Auto Configuration (One File Read Method)" on page 345. This method is used if a configuration file is found on the TFTP server. • Multi-file Read, described in "Auto Configuration (Multi File Read Method)" on page 346. This method is used if a configuration file name is not found on the DHCP server, or the configuration file is not found on the TFTP server. Auto Configuration (One File Read Method) This method requires the following preparations on the DHCP and TFTP servers: • TFTP Server Place a configuration file, for example config.txt in the main directory. This file can be created by copying a configuration file from a device. When the device is booted this becomes the Running configuration file. • DHCP Server – Configure the DHCP server with option 67 and the name of the configuration file on the TFTP server (for example, config.txt). – Configure the DHCP server with option -20 or 66. This is the IP address of the TFTP server.346 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Device - On the device, one of the following cases may exist: – If Configuration Auto-Config is selected, the device is configured with the configuration file on the TFTP server only if the Startup configuration file is empty. – If Force Configuration Download at Next Startup is selected, the device is configured with the configuration file on the TFTP server whether the Startup configuration file is not empty or not. Auto Configuration (Multi File Read Method) If the one-file method has failed and the TFTP Server IP address has been provided by the DHCP Server, the switch applies the multi-file method to download the configuration file. The following steps are performed by the switch: • The switch gets the hostname, as described below. – If the hostname was provided by the DHCP server, this hostname is used. – If the hostname has not been provided by a DHCP server, and if the user has configured the sysName variable, its value is used as a hostname. – If neither of the above occurred, the switch uses the fp-net.cfg Filename List on the TFTP server. Each file in this list is a text file containing commands, each of which: • Occupies one line. • Has the following format: ip host hostname ip-addr. Each line maps an IP address to a hostname. When the switch identifies its own IP address in this list, the hostname associated with it is used. • The switch tries to download a configuration file with the following names: – hostname-config – hostname.cfg if the previous file does not exist – host.cfg if the previous files do not existDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 347 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Preparations for Firmware Image Download from TFTP The image file download consists of the following steps: • The switch downloads the Indirect Image File and extracts from it the name of the image file. Note: If the size of the image name bigger than 160 octets only the first 160 octets will be used • If the image file version differs from the current image file version, then the image file is loaded and the switch is rebooted. The preparations on the DHCP and TFTP servers require the following: • TFTP Server – Create a sub directory in the main directory. Place a software image file in it. – Create an indirect file that contains a path and the name of the software version (for example indirect-contax.txt that contains contax\contax-version.ros). – Copy this file to the TFTP server’s main directory • DHCP Server – Configure the DHCP server with option -20 or 66. This is the IP address of the TFTP server. – Configure the DHCP server with option 125. Enter the following information: • A2-02-00-00 — Enterprise Number 674 (Dell PowerConnet 55xx value). It should be written from right to left. 674=02 a2 • 15 — Data Length • 01 — Sub option code 1 (Dell PowerConnet 55xx value) • 13 — Sub option length • Conversion of the file name (in the above example: conversion of indirect-contax.txt from ASCII to HEX - 69-6E-64-69-72-65-63- 74-2D-63-6F-6E-74-61-78-2E-74-78-74348 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Auto Update Configuration through the GUI To set the auto update and configuration parameters: . NOTE: For the automatic options in this page to work the following must be implemented: • Since Auto-Config depends on retrieving information from a DHCP server, the startup configuration needs to include a DHCP IP interface. The device is defined as a DHCP client, as described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. After reboot, this command is not saved in the Startup configuration. • Preparations described above must be completed on the DHCP server and TFTP servers. 1 Click System > File Management > Auto Update of Configuration/Image File in the tree view to display the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page. Figure 9-54. Auto Update of Configuration/Image File The auto-update-configuration options are displayed. 2 Modify the auto-update configuration parameters as required: – Configuration Auto-Config (boot host auto-config)— Enable/disable automatic download of the configuration parameters to the Running Configuration file. By default, this occurs only if the Startup Configuration file is empty. – Firmware Auto-Update (boot host auto-update)— Enable/disable automatic download of the image file. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 349 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Force Configuration Download at Next Startup (boot host dhcp) — Enable/disable the Configuration Auto Update option to work even if the Startup Configuration file is not empty. – Auto-Copy Running Configuration to Startup Configuration After Download (boot host auto-save)— Enable/disable the Running Configuration file to be automatically copied to the Startup Configuration file after downloading the Running Configuration file. Auto Update Configuration Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page. Table 9-63. Auto Update of Configuration/Image File CLI Commands CLI Command Description boot host auto-config no boot host auto-config Enables the support of autoconfiguration via DHCP. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP auto configuration. boot host auto-update no boot host auto-update Enables the support of auto-update via DHCP. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP auto configuration boot host dhcp no boot host dhcp Forces the mechanism used to download a configuration file at the next system startup. Use the no form of this command to restore the host configuration file to the default. boot host auto-save no boot host auto-save Enables automatic saving of Running configuration in Startup configuration after download. Use the no form of this command restore default behavior show boot Shows the status of the IP DHCP Auto Config process.350 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI command to view the Auto-Update status: The following is an example of the CLI command to configure auto-update on the switch: console# show boot Auto Config ----------- Config Download via DHCP: enabled Next Boot Config Download via DHCP: force Auto Update ----------- Image Download via DHCP: enabled console# configure console(config)# boot host auto-save console(config)# interface vlan 1 console(config-if)# ip address dhcp console(config-if)# 01-Oct-2006 15:19:51 %BOOTP_DHCP_CL-WDHCPIPCANDIDATE: The device is waiting for IP address verification on interface Vlan 1 , IP 10.5.225.47, mask 255.255.255.224, DHCP server 10.5.224.25 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %BOOTP_DHCP_CL-I-DHCPCONFIGURED: The device has been configured on interface Vlan 1 , IP 10.5.225.47, mask 255.255.255.224, DHCP server 10.5.224.25 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL tftp://10.5.224.4/33.txt destination URL runningconfig 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL running-config destination URL flash://startup-config 01-Oct-2006 15:20:10 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfullyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 351 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY File Download Software and configuration files can be downloaded from an external device to the switch: • To download from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP • To download files using TFTP To download from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Download in the tree view to display the File Download page. Figure 9-55. File Download 2 For HTTP, enter the IP Format fields for the HTTP server IP address. – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.352 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. 3 Select a Firmware/Configuration option. The possible options are: – Firmware Download — A firmware file is downloaded. – Configuration Download — A configuration file is downloaded. 4 Select to download firmware or a configuration file via a USB port or HTTP in Download Protocol. 5 If the Firmware Download option was selected, enter the following: – Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The file to be downloaded. – Destination File Type — The destination file type to which the file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Software Image — Downloads the Image file. The image file overwrites the non-active image. It is recommended to designate that the non-active image becomes the active image after reset, and then to reset the device following the download. During the Image file download a dialog box opens that displays the download progress, and browsing is disabled. • Boot Code — Downloads the Boot file. 6 If the Configuration Download option was selected, enter the following: – Server IP Address — Enter the IP address of the server. – Source File Name (1-64 Characters) — Enter the source file name. – Destination File Name — Select the destination file to which the configuration file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Check to download commands into the Running Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • Startup Configuration — Check to download commands into the Startup Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • New File Name (1-64 Characters) — Check to copy commands into a file in flash memory. Enter the filename.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 353 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 7 Click Activate to start the download process. To download files using TFTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Download in the tree view to display the File Download page. Figure 9-56. File Download 2 Enter the IP Format fields for the TFTP server IP address. – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only.354 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. 3 Select a Firmware/Configuration option. The possible options are: – Firmware Download — A firmware file is downloaded. – Configuration Download — A configuration file is downloaded. 4 Select to download firmware or a configuration file via a TFTP server in Download Protocol. 5 If the Firmware Download option was selected, enter the following: – Server IP Address — The IP address of the server from which the firmware file is downloaded. – Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The file to be downloaded. – Destination File Type — The destination file type to which the file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Software Image — Downloads the Image file. The image file overwrites the non-active image. It is recommended to designate that the non-active image becomes the active image after reset, and then to reset the device following the download. During the Image file download a dialog box opens that displays the download progress. The window closes automatically when the download is complete. • Boot Code — Downloads the Boot file. 6 If the Configuration Download option was selected, enter the following: – Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address from which the configuration files are downloaded. – Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The configuration file to be downloaded. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 355 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Destination File Name — The destination file to which the configuration file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Check to download commands into the Running Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • Startup Configuration — Check to download commands into the Startup Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • New File Name (1-64 characters) — Check to download commands into a configuration backup file. Enter the filename. 7 Click Activate to start the download process. Downloading Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the File Download page. The following is an example of the CLI command: NOTE: Each exclamation mark (!) indicates that ten packets were successfully transferred. File Upload Software and configuration files can be uploaded to an external device. • To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP • To upload a file or image using TFTP Table 9-64. File Download CLI Commands CLI Command Description copy source-url destinationurl Copies files from a source to a destination. console# copy tftp://10.6.6.64/pp.txt startup-config ....! Copy: 575 bytes copied in 00:00:06 [hh:mm:ss] 01-Jan-2000 06:41:55 %COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully 356 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following methods can be used: • To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP • To upload a file or image using TFTP To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Upload in the tree view to display the File Upload page. Figure 9-57. File Upload 2 Configuration Upload is selected automatically. 3 Select to upload a configuration file when the management computer is using HTTP or from a USB port in Download Protocol. 4 Enter the fields: – Transfer File Name — The configuration file to which the configuration is uploaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Uploads the Running Configuration file. • Startup Configuration — Uploads the Startup Configuration file. 5 Click Activate to start the upload process. A message will be displayed asking where for the path of the destination file.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 357 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To upload a file or image using TFTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Upload in the tree view to display the File Upload page. Figure 9-58. File Upload 2 Enter the IP Format fields for the TFTP server IP address. – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.358 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. 3 Select one of the options: – Firmware Upload — A firmware file is uploaded. – Configuration Upload — A configuration file is uploaded. 4 Select to upload firmware or a configuration file via a TFTP server in Download Protocol. 5 If Firmware Upload was selected, enter: – TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address to which the software image is uploaded. – Destination File Name (1-64 Characters) — The file name to which the file is uploaded. 6 If Configuration Upload was selected, enter: – TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address to which the configuration file is uploaded. – Destination File Name (1-64 Characters) — The configuration file name/path to which the file is uploaded. – Transfer File Name — The configuration file that is uploaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Uploads the Running Configuration file. • Startup Configuration — Uploads the Startup Configuration file. • User-defined Files —Uploads the selected file. A user-defined file is only displayed in this list if one was previously created by a user, for example, if the user copied the running configuration file to a user-defined configuration file called BACKUP-SITE-1, the BACKUP-SITE-1 configuration file is displayed in the list and can be selected. 7 Click Activate to start the upload process.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 359 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Uploading Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the File Upload page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-65. File Upload CLI Commands CLI Command Description copy source-url destination-url Copies any file from a source to a destination. console# copy image tftp://10.6.6.64/uploaded.ros !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Copy: 4234656 bytes copied in 00:00:33 [hh:mm:ss] 01-Jan-2000 07:30:42 %COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully360 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Active Images There are two firmware images, Image1 and Image2, stored on the switch. One of these images is identified as the active image, and the other is identified as the inactive image. The switch boots from the active image. You can switch the inactive image to the active image, and then reboot the switch. The active image file for each unit in the stack can be individually selected. To select the image file to be used after reset: 1 Click System > File Management > Active Images in the tree view to display the Active Images page. Figure 9-59. Active Images The following fields are displayed: – Unit ID — ID of the unit.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 361 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Active Image — The name of the image file that is currently active on the unit in the stack. – After Reset — The image file that will be active on the unit in the stack after the device is reset. The possible options are: • Image 1 — Activates Image file 1 after the device is reset. • Image 2 — Activates Image file 2 after the device is reset. 2 Click Apply to select the image file to be used after reset in After Reset. Working with the Active Image File Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed in the Active Images. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Copy Files Firmware and configuration files can be copied between units in the stack. Use the Copy Files page to perform the following: • Copy the firmware on the Master unit to another unit in the stack. • Copy the master Running Configuration file to the master sTartup Configuration file, or copy the configuration to a user-defined configuration file. • Copy the master Startup Configuration file to a backup file on the Flash file system or to a USB if available. Table 9-66. Active Image CLI Commands CLI Command Description boot system {image- 1|image-2} [switch number|all] Sets the system image that the device loads at startup. show version [unit unit] Displays version information for the system console# boot system image-1 all362 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Copy a configuration file to the Running Configuration file. It is important to be aware that copying a file to the Running Configuration file actually executes these commands, so some of the configuration commands might fail (for example when trying to create a VLAN that is already defined on the system). • Restore configuration factory defaults. To copy files: 1 Click System > File Management > Copy Files in the tree view to display the Copy Files page. Figure 9-60. Copy Files 2 To copy the firmware from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit or to all other units, select Copy Master Firmware and select the options: – Source— Select either the current Master unit’s software image file or boot code file.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 363 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Destination Unit — Check to copy the firmware to either the Backup Master unit or all units in the stack. 3 To copy the Running Configuration file of the Master unit to the Startup Configuration file of the Master unit or vice versa, select Copy Configuration Firmware and enter the options: – Source — Select either the Running Configuration or the Startup Configuration file. – Destination — Select either the Running Configuration, Startup Configuration file or user-created flash files, depending on the source configuration file. or – New File Name (1-64 characters) — To copy the source file to a user-named file, enter the name of a file. If this option is selected, check where the file is stored: Flash or USB. 4 Select Restore Configuration Factory Defaults to replace the current configuration settings by the factory configuration default settings. 5 Click Activate to initiate the selected process. Copying Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for performing actions provided by the Copy Files page. Table 9-67. Copy Files CLI Commands CLI Command Description copy source-url destination-url Copies any file from a source to a destination. delete startup-config Deletes the startup-config file. delete url Deletes a file from the FLASH memory device.364 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# delete startup-config Delete startup-config [y/n]? y console# 01-Oct-2006 16:10:51 %FILE-I-DELETE: File Delete - file URL flash://startup-config console# copy running-config startup-config Overwrite file [startup-config] ?[Yes/press any key for no]....01-Oct-2006 16:11 :47 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL running-config destination URL flash://startup-config 01-Oct-2006 16:12:01 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully Copy succeededDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 365 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY File System Use the File System page to view information about files currently stored on the system, including file names, file sizes, files modifications, and file permissions. The files system permits managing up to two user-defined backup configuration files. To view information about files: 1 Click System > File Management > File System in the tree view to display the File System page. Figure 9-61. File System 2 Select the File Location. The possible options are: – Flash — Files in flash memory are displayed. – USB — Files on the USB device are displayed. 366 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following information is displayed for all files in the system: – File Name — The name of the file currently stored in the file management system. – Size — The file size. – Modified — The date the file was last modified. – Permission — The permission type assigned to the file. 3 The following system-wide information is displayed if Flash was selected: – Total Bytes — The total amount of the space currently being used. – Free Bytes — The remaining amount of space currently free. Total bytes and free bytes are not available when selecting USB. 4 To rename a file, click its Rename button. Change the File Name. Managing Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for viewing system files. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-68. File Management CLI Command CLI Command Description dir [flash://|usb://] Display list of files on a flash file system rename url new-url Renames a file delete url Deletes a file console# dir flash:// Directory of flash: File Name Permission Flash Size Data Size Modified -------------- ---------- ---------- --------- ----------------------- 1.cfg rw 524160 14065 05-Oct-2006 21:20:36 2.cfg rw 524160 14065 7-Oct-2006 09:11:07 aaafile.prv -- 65520 -- 03-Oct-2006 15:45:41 dhcpdb.sys r- 65520 -- 01-Oct-2006 19:22:49 Total size of flash: 16121856 bytes Free size of flash: 524768 bytesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 367 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stack Management This section describes how to manage the stack. It consists of the following topics: • Stack Management Overview • Stack Unit ID • Versions • Reset • Unit Identification (Location) Stack Management Overview A stack consists of up to eight units, with support for up to 400 network ports. Unit 1 usually acts as the stack master and Unit 2 is the backup master. All other units act as slaves. The entire stack, without regard to the stack topology or the number of units in the stack, can be managed as a single switch. For more information about stacking, see "Stacking Overview" on page 45. The stacking pages described in this section enable the following actions: • Switching from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit • Changing unit IDs • Viewing hardware and software versions on each unit • Resetting either a unit or all the units in the stack • Setting the Location LED on a unit(s) Stack Unit ID Use the Stack Unit ID pages to: • Switch stack control from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit • Change unit IDs, or enable them to be automatically numbered by the system368 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To switch from the Backup Master unit to the Master Unit or set unit IDs: 1 Click System > Stack Management > Stack Unit ID in the tree view to display the Stack Unit ID page. Figure 9-62. Stack Unit ID 2 Enter the fields: – Switch Stack Control from Unit 1 to Unit 2 — Check this field to make unit 2 the Master unit. – Unit ID After Reset — Select Auto if you want the system to assign the unit ID after reset. Select a number to assign the unit an ID manually.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 369 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Managing Stacks Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Stack Unit ID page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-69. Stack Unit ID CLI Commands CLI Command Description stack master unit no stack master Makes the unit specified be the Master unit. Use the no version to restore the default Master unit. switch current-unit-number renumber new-unit-number Changes the unit ID of a specific unit. console(config)# stack master unit 2 console(config)# switch 3 renumber 6370 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Versions To view the hardware and software versions currently running on the switch: • Click System > Stack Management > Versions in the tree view to display the Versions page. Figure 9-63. Versions The following fields are displayed: – Unit ID — The unit number for which the device versions are displayed. – Software Version — The current software version running on the device. – Boot Version — The current Boot version running on the device. – Hardware Version — The current device hardware version.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 371 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying Device Versions Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed in the Versions page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Reset Use the Reset page to reset the device from a remote location. To reset a unit in the stack: 1 If changes were made to the Running Configuration file, save them to the Startup Configuration file before resetting the device. This prevents the current device configuration from being lost. For more information about saving Configuration files, see "Copy Files" on page 361. Table 9-70. Versions CLI Commands CLI Command Description show version [unit-id] Displays system version information for a unit or for the whole stack. console> show version 2 Unit SW Version Boot Version HW Version ---- ------------- ------------- ------------ 2 1.0.0.8 1.0.0.02 00.00.01372 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Click System > Stack Management > Reset in the tree view to display the Reset page. Figure 9-64. Reset 3 In the Reset Unit ID field, select either the unit ID to be reset or Stack to reset all the units in the stack. Resetting the Device Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for performing a reset of the device via the CLI: Table 9-71. Reset CLI Command CLI Command Description reload [slot unit] Reloads the operating system of a single unit or of all the units.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 373 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI command: Unit Identification (Location) The Location LED on a unit helps you to discover a specific unit, or indeed, all the units in a stack. To light up the Location LED: 1 Click System > Stack Management > Unit Identification in the tree view to display the Unit Identification page. Figure 9-65. Unit Identification console# reload You haven't saved your changes. Are you sure you want to continue? (Y/N)[N] Y This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue? (Y/N)[N]374 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the fields: – Identify Unit ID —Select a unit. This unit’s Location and Power LED start blinking. Select All to cause the Location LEDs in all the units in the stack to light up. – Identification Duration (2-60) —Enter a time interval. The Location and Power LED light up for this period of time. Setting the Location LED Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the Location LED: The following is an example of the CLI command: Table 9-72. Location LED CLI Commands CLI Command Description system light [unit unitnumber] [duration seconds] system light stop Lights the location LED on a specific unit. Use the no form of this command to turn off the light. console# system light unit 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 375 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow This section describes sFlow monitoring of traffic. It contains the following sections: • sFlow Overview • Workflow • sFlow Receiver Settings • sFlow Interface Settings • sFlow Statistics sFlow Overview The sFlow feature enables collecting statistics using the sFlow sampling technology, based on sFlow V5. This sampling technology is embedded within switches and routers. It provides the ability to continuously monitor traffic flows on some or all the interfaces, simultaneously. The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow agent (embedded in a switch or router or in a stand alone probe) and a central data collector, known as the sFlow receiver. The sFlow agent uses sampling technology to capture traffic and statistics from the device it is monitoring. sFlow datagrams are used to forward the sampled traffic and statistics to an sFlow receiver for analysis. sFlow V5 defines: • How traffic is monitored. • The sFlow MIB that controls the sFlow agent. • The format of the sample data used by the sFlow agent when forwarding data to a central data collector. The device provides support for two types of sFlow sampling: flow sampling and counters sampling. The following counters sampling is performed according to sFlow V5 (if supported by the interface): – Generic interface counters (RFC 2233) – Ethernet interface counters (RFC 2358)376 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Workflow By default, flow and counter sampling are disabled. To enable sFlow sampling: 1 Set the IP address of a receiver (also known as a collector) for sFlow statistics. Use the sFlow Receivers Settings page for this. 2 Enable flow and/or counter sampling, direct the samples to a receiving interface, and configure the average sampling rate. Use the sFlow Interface Settings pages for this. 3 View and clear the sFlow statistics counters. Use the sFlow Statistics page for this.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 377 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow Receiver Settings To set the sFlow receiver parameters: 1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Receivers Settings in the tree view to display the sFlow Receivers Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-66. sFlow Receivers Settings: Summary The sflow parameters are displayed. 2 To add a receiver (sflow analyzer), click Add and select one of the pre-defined sampling definition indices in Index. 3 Enter the receiver’s address fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. 378 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • None — Disable the ISATAP tunnel. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – IP Address — Enter the receiver’s IP address. 4 Enter the fields: – Syslog Port Number — Port to which SYSLOG message are sent. – Maximum Header Size (Bytes) — Maximum number of bytes that can be sent to the receiver in a single sample datagram (frame). Adding an sFlow Receiver Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for adding an sFlow receiver. Table 9-73. sflow Receiver CLI Commands CLI Command Description sflow receiver index {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} [port port] [max-datagram-size bytes] no sflow receiver index Defines an sFlow receiver. Use the no form of this command to remove the definition of the receiver. show sflow configuration [port_id] Displays the sFlow configuration for ports that are enabled for Flow sampling or Counters sampling.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 379 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# sflow receiver 2 1.1.1.1 port 6343 console# show sflow configuration Receivers Index IP Address Port Max Datagram Size ----- -------------------- -------- ---------------- 1 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 2 172.16.1.2 6343 1400 3 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 4 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 5 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 6 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 7 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 8 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 Interfaces Interface Flow Counters Max Header Collector Index Sampling Sampling Interval Size Sampling Counters --------- --------- ----------------- ------------ ----------- --------- gi1/0/1 1/2048 60 sec 128 1 1 gi1/0/2 1/4096 Disabled 128 0 2380 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow Interface Settings To sample datagrams or counters from a port, the port must be associated with a receiver. sFlow port settings can be configured only after a receiver has been defined in the sFlow Receiver Settings pages. To enable sampling and configure the port from which to collect the sFlow information: 1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Interface Settings in the tree view to display the sFlow Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-67. sFlow Interface Settings: Summary The sflow interface settings are displayed. 2 To associate an sFlow receiver with a port, click Add, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select the unit/port from which information is collected. – Flow Sampling — Enable/disable flow sampling. Flow sampling cannot be disabled if Counters Sampling is disabled.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 381 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Flow Sampling Average Sampling Rate(1024–1073741823) — If x is entered, a flow sample will be taken for each x frames. – Flow Sampling Receiver Index — Select one of the indices that was defined in the sFlow Receivers Settings pages. – Flow Sampling Maximum Header Size (20–256) — Maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet. – Counters Sampling — Enable/disable counters sampling. Flow sampling cannot be disabled if Flow Sampling is disabled – Counters Sampling Interval (15–86400) — If x is entered, this specifies that a counter sample will be taken for each x seconds. – Counters Sampling Receiver Index — Select one of the indices that was defined in the sFlow Receivers Settings pages. Configuring sFlow Interfaces Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring sFlow interfaces. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-74. sflow Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description sflow flow-sampling rate receiver-index [max-header-size bytes] no sflow flow-sampling Enables sFlow Flow sampling and configure the average sampling rate of a specific port. Use the no form of this command to disable Flow sampling. sflow counters-sampling interval receiver-index no sflow counters-sampling Enable sFlow counters sampling and to configure the maximum interval of a specific port. Use the no form of this command to disable sFlow Counters sampling. console(config)# interface gi2/0/3 console(config-if)#sflow flow-sampling 1024 1 382 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow Statistics To view sFlow statistics: 1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Statistics in the tree view to display the sFlow Statistics page. Figure 9-68. sFlow Statistics The following sflow statistics per interface are displayed: – Interface — Port for which sample was collected. – Packets Sampled — Number of packets sampled. – Datagrams Sent to Receiver — Number of sFlow sampling packets sent. 2 Click Clear Statistics to clear the counters.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 383 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing sFlow Statistics Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing sFlow statistics: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-75. sFlow Statistics CLI Command CLI Command Description show sflow statistics [port-id] Displays sFlow statistics for ports that are enabled for Flow sampling or Counters sampling. clear sflow statistics [port-id] Clears sFlow statistics for ports that are enabled for Flow sampling or Counters sampling. console # show sflow statistics Total sFlow datagrams sent to collectors: 100 Interface Packets Sampled Datagrams Sent to Collector --------- ------- ------------------------------------ gi1/0/1 30 50 gi1/0/2 10 10 gi2/0/1 0 10 gi2/0/2 0 0384 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 10 Ports This section describes how to configure port functionality. It contains the following topics: • Overview • Jumbo Frames • Green Ethernet Configuration • Protected Ports • Port Profile • Port Configuration • LAG Configuration • Storm Control • Port MirroringDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 385 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Overview This section includes a description of port features and describes the following: • Auto-Negotiation • MDI/MDIX • Flow Control • Back Pressure • Port Default Settings Auto-Negotiation Auto-negotiation enables automatic detection of speed, duplex mode and flow control on all switching 10/100/1000BaseT ports. Auto-negotiation is enabled on all ports by default. Auto-negotiation is a mechanism established between two link partners to enable a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode and flow control abilities to its partner. Both ports then operate at the highest common denominator. If connecting a Network Interface Card (NIC) that does not support autonegotiation or is not set to auto-negotiation, both the device switching port and the NIC must be manually set to the same speed and duplex mode. If the station, on the other side of the link, attempts to auto-negotiate with a device 100BaseT port that is configured to full duplex, the auto-negotiation results in the station attempting to operate in half duplex. MDI/MDIX The device supports auto-detection of straight-through and crossed cables on all 10/100/1000BaseT ports. This feature is part of auto-negotiation and is enabled when Auto-negotiation is enabled. When the MDI/MDIX (Media Dependent Interface with Crossover) is enabled, the automatic correction of errors in cable selection is possible, thus making the distinction between a straight-through cable and a crossover cable 386 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY irrelevant. The standard wiring for end stations is known as MDI (Media Dependent Interface), and the standard wiring for hubs and switches is known as MDIX. Flow Control The device supports 802.3x flow control for ports configured to Full Duplex mode. By default, this feature is enabled on all ports, and it can be disabled per port. Flow control creates a lossless link with no packet loss. The flow control mechanism enables the receiving side to signal to the transmitting side that transmission must temporarily be halted to prevent buffer overflow. This signaling is done by sending PAUSE frames. The ports that receives pause frames stops transmitting traffic. Flow control on the device works in Receive-Only mode, meaning that the interfaces with enabled flow control receive PAUSE frames, but do not send them. When flow control is enabled, the system buffers are allocated per port so that if the buffers of one port are consumed, other ports will still have their free buffers. Back Pressure The device supports back pressure for ports configured to Half Duplex mode. By default, this feature is disabled, and it can be enabled per port. The back-pressure mechanism prevents the sender from transmitting additional traffic temporarily. The receiver may occupy a link so it becomes unavailable for additional traffic. Port Default Settings Table 10-1 describes the port default settings. Table 10-1. Port Default Settings Function Default Setting Port speed and mode 10/100/1000 BaseT copper: auto-negotiation SFP+1000/10G Mbps full duplex, auto discovery Port forwarding state EnabledDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 387 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port tagging No tagging Flow Control On Back Pressure Off Table 10-1. Port Default Settings (Continued) Function Default Setting388 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Jumbo Frames Jumbo frames are frames of up to 10 Kb in size. If Jumbo frames are not enabled, the system supports a packet size of up to 1,632 bytes. To enable jumbo frames: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Jumbo Frames in the tree view to display the Jumbo Frames page. Figure 10-1. Jumbo Frames The current jumbo frames setting is displayed 2 Enable/disable jumbo frames in the New Setting (after reset) field. NOTE: You must save the configuration and reboot the device in order to make jumbo frames operational.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 389 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Jumbo Frames Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Jumbo frames. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 10-2. Jumbo Frames CLI Commands CLI Command Description port jumbo-frame no port jumbo-frame Enables jumbo frames on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable jumbo frames. console(config)# port jumbo-frame390 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Green Ethernet Configuration Green Ethernet is a name of a set of features that are designed to reduce the power consumption of a device, and so make it environmentally friendly. The Green Ethernet feature reduces overall power usage in the following ways: • Energy Efficient Ethernet — When using EEE, systems on both sides of the link can disable portions of their functionality and save power during periods of low link utilization. EEE is a hardware feature that is enabled by default, and is transparent to users. This feature is defined per port, regardless of their LAG membership. • Short-Reach Mode — Power usage is adjusted to the actual cable length. In this mode, the VCT (Virtual Cable Tester) length test is performed to measure cable length. If the cable is shorter than a predetermined length, the switch reduces the power used to send frames over the cable, thus saving energy. This mode is only supported on RJ45 ports. Power savings and current power consumption in Short Reach mode can be monitored. The total amount of saved energy can be viewed as a percentage of the power that would have been consumed by the physical interfaces had they not been running in Green Ethernet mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 391 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The above two energy saving modes must be enabled globally and then configured per port. Green Ethernet Configuration To configure Green Ethernet settings: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Green Ethernet Configuration in the tree view to display the Green Ethernet Configuration: Summary page. Figure 10-2. Green Ethernet Configuration: Summary 2 The amount of energy saved from the last switch reboot is displayed in the Cumulative Energy Saved field. This value is updated each time there is an event that affects power saving. Click Reset to reset its value. 3 Enter the fields: • Energy Efficient Ethernet — Globally enable/disable the Energy Efficient Ethernet feature. • Link Short-Reach Energy Saving Mode — Globally enable/disable Short Reach mode.392 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Current Power Consumption — Displays the current power consumption. • Power Savings — Displays the percentage of power saved by running in Green Ethernet mode. 4 Select a unit in the stack to display its power consumption parameters. Its ports are displayed along with the following settings. – Energy Efficient Ethernet • Oper — Enabled or not on the port • Remote Peer —Enabled or not on the remote peer – Short-Reach • Oper — Enabled or not on the port • Fault Reason —Reason that short reach is not enabled – Cable Length (Meter) — Length of cable. 5 Click LLDP Interface Details. 6 Select a unit in the stack. The following is displayed for each port on the unit: – Port — Port number. – Oper — Displays the operational status of Green Ethernet. – Resolved Tx Timer(μsec) — Integer that indicates the current Tw_sys_tx is supported by the local system. – Local Tx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the time (in micro seconds) that the transmitting link partner waits before it starts transmitting data after leaving Low Power Idle (LPI mode). – Resolved Rx Timer(μsec) — Integer that indicates the current Tw_sys_tx supported by the remote system. – Local Rx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the time (in micro seconds) that the receiving link partner requests that the transmitting link partner waits before transmission of data following Low Power Idle (LPI mode). – Remote Tx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the local link partner’s reflection of the remote link partner’s Tx value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 393 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Remote Rx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the local link partner’s reflection of the remote link partner’s Rx value. Configuring Green Ethernet Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Green Ethernet. Table 10-3. Green Ethernet CLI Commands CLI Command Description green-ethernet short-reach no green-ethernet short-reach Enables/disables Green Ethernet short reach mode. green-ethernet short-reach force no green-ethernet short-reach force Forces short-reach mode on an interface. Use the no form of this command to return to the default. green-ethernet short-reach threshold cable-length no green-ethernet short-reach threshold Set the maximum cable length for applying short-reach mode. Use the no form of this command to return to the default. green-ethernet power-meter reset Resets the power save meter. eee enable no eee enable Enables the EEE mode globally. Can be used globally or per interface. Use the no format of the command to disable the mode. eee lldp enable no eee lldp enable Enables EEE support by LLDP on an Ethernet port. Use the no format of the command to disable the support. show eee Displays EEE information.394 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protected Ports Protected Port Overview Protected ports provide Layer 2 isolation between interfaces (Ethernet ports and LAGs) that share the same Broadcast domain (VLAN) with other interfaces. This can be used to set up a group of ports that receive similar services. A protected port does not forward traffic (Unicast, Multicast, or Broadcast) to any other protected port on the same switch. A community is a group of protected ports. Protected ports within the same community can forward traffic to each other. The following types of ports can be defined: • Protected Port — Can send traffic only to uplink ports. • Community Port — A protected port that is associated with a community. It can send traffic to other protected ports in the same community and to uplink ports. • Uplink Port — An uplink port is an unprotected port that can send traffic to any port. • Isolated Port — A protected port that does not belong to a community. Port Protection is independent of all other features and configuration settings. Two protected ports in a common VLAN cannot communicate with each other. Protected Port Restrictions The following restrictions apply to protected ports: • When a protected port is placed in a LAG, it loses its protected port attribute and takes upon itself the LAG's protection attributes. When the port is removed from the LAG, its attributes are re-applied. • Mirrored traffic is not subject to protected ports rules. • Routing is not affected by the protected port forwarding rule, so that if a packet enters a protected port, it can be routed by the device to another protected port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 395 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protected Port Configuration To configure protected ports and establish their communities: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Protected Ports in the tree view to display the Protected Ports: Summary page. Figure 10-3. Protected Ports: Summary A summary of all the ports and their statuses is displayed. 2 Click Edit. 3 Select the unit and interface. 4 Enter values for the following fields: • State — Select Protected/Unprotected to enable/disable port protection. • Community — Select the community to which to add the port, or define the port as Isolated.396 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Protected Ports Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring protected ports. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 10-4. Protected Ports CLI Commands CLI Command Description switchport protected-port no switchport protected-port Isolates Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast traffic on a port at Layer 2 from other protected ports on the same switch. Use the no form of this command to disable protection on the port. switchport community community no switchport community Associates a protected port with a community Use the no form of this command to return to default. show interfaces protectedports[gigabitethernet|tengiga bitethernet] port-number Displays protected ports configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/3 console(config-if)# switchport protected-port console(config-if)# switchport community 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 397 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Profile Port profiles provide a convenient way to save and share a port configuration. When a port profile, which is a set of CLI commands having a unique name, is applied to a port, the CLI commands contained within the profile (macro) are executed and added to the Running Configuration file. Port profiles can be applied to a specific interface, a range of interfaces, or globally. There are two types of port profiles: • User Defined — Enables the user to bundle configurations, as a port profile, and then apply it to one or more interfaces at a time. Up to 20 user-defined macros can be supported. These can only be defined through CLI commands. • Built-In — Pre-defined macros that cannot be changed or deleted. The device includes the following built-in macros: – Global – Desktop – Phone – Switch – Router – Wireless Configuration Before a built-in profile can be applied to an interface, the global profile must be applied. The global profile enables QoS Advanced mode, sets Advanced mode parameters, CoS to queue mapping, and DSCP to queue mapping and defines certain standard ACLs. Use the CLI command show parser macro name profile-global to display the Global profile contents.398 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To assign a profile to a port: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Profile in the tree view to display the Port Profiles: Summary page. Figure 10-4. Port Profile: Summary A summary of all the interfaces and their profiles is displayed. 2 To assign the Global profile to the system, check Run Global Profile. Apply the global profile before applying a built-in interface profile. 3 To assign a profile to an interface, click Edit. 4 Select a unit/interface and a Assigned Profile. The Profile Description is displayed. 5 Each profile requires entering various elements of VLAN information. Enter the fields according to the profile: – VLAN Port Mode — Displays the port mode applied to ports in the profile. – VLAN ID-Untagged (1-4094) — Enter the VLAN for untagged traffic. – VLAN ID-Tagged (1-4095) — Enter the VLAN for tagged traffic.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 399 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Native VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter the VLAN ID used for untagged traffic to trunk ports, or check None. The remaining fields on this page are display-only, and describe the port configuration of the profile. The following fields are described: Port Security fields: – Mode — Learning mode. The possible options are: • Classic Lock — Locks the port using the classic lock mechanism. The port is immediately locked, regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned. • Limited Dynamic Lock — Locks the port by deleting the dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled. – Max Entries — Displays the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. – Action on Violation — Action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port. The possible options are: • Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source. • Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source, without learning the MAC address. • Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source, and shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are reactivated, or the device is reset. Spanning Tree fields: – Point-to-Point Admin Status — Displays whether a point-to-point links is established. The possible options are: • Enable — Enables the device to establish a point-to-point link, or specifies for the device to automatically establish a point-to-point link. To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the originating PPP first sends Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols (NCP) packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols. 400 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been configured, packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link. The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link, or until some external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It may differ from the administrative state. • Disable — Disables point-to-point link. • Auto — The device automatically establishes a point-to-point link. – Fast Link — Displays whether Fast Link mode is enabled for the port. If this is enabled, the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding statewhen the port is up. – BPDU Guard — Displays whether BPDU Guard is enabled on the port. Miscellaneous fields: – Policy Name — Displays the name of a policy if one is defined on the port. – Auto Negotiation — Displays whether auto-negotiation is enabled on the port. Auto-Negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode, and Flow Control abilities to other devices. 6 Click Apply Profile to apply the profile to the specified interface. Configuring Port Profile Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring port profiles. Table 10-5. Port Profiles CLI Commands CLI Command Description macro {apply|trace} macro-name [parameter {value}] [parameter {value}] [parameter {value}] Applies a macro to an interface or traces a macro configuration on an interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 401 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Sample CLI Scripts This section provides sample scripts of CLI commands. These particular actions cannot be performed through the GUI, which only allows applying built-in macros. These scripts describe how to create macros, display them and apply them. The following is a script that creates a global macro. show parser macro [{brief|description [interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number|name macro-name}] Displays the parameters for all configured macros or for one macro on the switch. Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/2 Switch(config-if) # macro trace dup Applying command… ‘duplex full’ Applying command… ‘speed auto’ Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/2 Switch(config-if) # macro apply duplex $DUPLEX full $SPEED auto Switch(config-if) # exit Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/3 Switch(config-if) # macro apply dup Switch(config-if) # exit Table 10-6. Create a Global Macro Script CLI Command Description console#config console(config)# macro name interswitch Enter macro commands one per line. End with the character '@'. Create a macro called interswitch. Table 10-5. Port Profiles CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description402 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is a script that creates an interface macro. vlan database vlan 40-50 @ Enter the commands in the macro, which create VLANs 40 through 50. console(config)# do show parser macro name interswitch Display the macro. console(config)# macro global apply interswitch Apply the macro. Table 10-7. Create an Interface Macro Script CLI Command Description console#config console(config)# interface range gi1/0/1- 24 Enter Interface mode for ports 1-24 on unit 1. console(config-if-range)# macro name access_port Enter macro commands one per line. End with the character '@'. Create a macro called access_port. disable spanning-tree @ Enter the commands in the macro, disables spanning tree on the interfaces. console(config)# do show parser macro name access_port Display the macro. console(config)# macro global apply access_port Apply the macro to ports 1-24 on unit 1. Table 10-6. Create a Global Macro Script (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 403 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Configuration If port configuration is modified while the port is a LAG member, the configuration change is only effective after the port is removed from the LAG. To configure a port: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Configuration in the tree view to display the Port Configuration: Summary page. Figure 10-5. Port Configuration: Summary All ports on the selected unit and their configuration settings are displayed. 2 To modify the port settings, click Edit and select a port. 3 Enter the following fields: – Description (1 - 64 Characters) — Enter a user identification attached to the port. – Port Type — Displays the type of port. – Admin Status — Enable/disable traffic forwarding through the port. • Up— Traffic is enabled through the port.404 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Down— Traffic is disabled through the port. – Current Port Status — Displays whether the port is currently operational or non-operational. – Re-Activate Suspended Port — Check to reactivate a port if the port has been disabled through the locked port security option. – Operational Status — Displays the port operational status. The possible options are: • Suspended — Port is currently active, and is not receiving or transmitting traffic. • Active — Port is currently active, and is receiving and transmitting traffic. • Disable — Port is currently disabled, and is not receiving or transmitting traffic. – Admin Speed — Select the configured rate for the port. The port type determines the available speed setting options. You can designate Administrative Speed only when port auto-negotiation is disabled. – Current Port Speed — Displays the actual synchronized port speed (bps). – Admin Duplex — Select the port duplex mode (this is only possible if Auto Negotiation is not enabled). The options are: • Full — The interface supports transmission between the device and the client in both directions simultaneously. • Half — The interface supports transmission between the device and the client in only one direction at a time. – Current Duplex Mode — Displays the synchronized port duplex mode. – Auto Negotiation — Select to enable auto-negotiation on the port. Auto-Negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode, and Flow Control abilities to other devices. • Energy Efficient Ethernet — Globally enable/disable Energy Efficient Ethernet and the EEE LLDP advertisement feature. – Current Auto Negotiation — Displays the current auto-negotiation setting. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 405 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Admin Advertisement — Check the auto-negotiation setting the port advertises. The possible options are: • Max Capability — The port advertises all the options that it can support. • 10 Half — The port advertises for a 10 mbps speed port and half duplex mode setting. • 10 Full — The port advertises for a 10 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. • 100 Half — The port advertises for a 100 mbps speed port and half duplex mode setting. • 100 Full — The port advertises for a 100 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. • 1000 Full — The port advertises for a 1000 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. • 10000 Full — The port advertises for a 10000 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. – Current Advertisement — Displays the port advertises its speed to its neighbor port to start the negotiation process. The possible field values are those specified in the Admin Advertisement field. – Neighbor Advertisement — Displays the neighboring port’s advertisement settings. The field values are identical to the Admin Advertisement field values. – Back Pressure — Enable/disable Back Pressure mode that is used with Half Duplex mode to disable ports from receiving messages. – Current Back Pressure — Displays the current Back Pressure setting. – Flow Control — Set flow control on the port. The following options are available: • Enable/Disable — Enable/disable flow control on the port (Enabled is the default). • Auto Negotiation — Enables auto-negotiation of flow control on the port. – Current Flow Control — Displays the current Flow Control setting.406 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – MDI/MDIX — Select one of the options that enables the device to decipher between crossed and uncrossed cables. Hubs and switches are deliberately wired opposite to the way end stations are wired, so that when a hub or switch is connected to an end station, a straight through Ethernet cable can be used, and the pairs are match up properly. When two hubs/switches are connected to each other, or two end stations are connected to each other, a crossover cable is used ensure that the correct pairs are connected. The possible options are: • Auto — Use to automatically detect the cable type. • MDIX — Use for hubs and switches. • MDI — Use for end stations. – Current MDI/MDIX — Displays the current device MDIX settings. – LAG — Displays whether the port is part of a LAG. Configuring Ports Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring ports as displayed in the Port Configuration pages. Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands CLI Command Description eee enable no eee enable Enables the EEE mode globally. Use the no format of the command to disable the mode. eee lldp enable no eee lldp enable Enables EEE support by LLDP on an Ethernet port. Use the no format of the command to disable the support. description string no description Adds a description to an interface configuration. Use the no form of this command to remove the description. shutdown no shutdown Disables an interfaces. Use the no form of this command to restart a disabled interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 407 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY set interface active {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] interface|port-channel LAGnumber} Reactivates an interface that is shutdown. speed {10|100|1000|10000} no speed Configures the speed of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. duplex {half|full} no duplex Configures the full/half duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation. negotiation [capability1 [capability2…capability5] no negotiation Enables auto negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a given interface. Use the no form of this command to disable auto-negotiation. back-pressure no back-pressure Enables Back Pressure on a given interface. Use the no form of this command to disable back pressure. flowcontrol {auto|on|off} no flowcontrol Configures the flow control on a given interface. Use the no form of this command to disable flow control. mdix {on|auto} no mdix Enables automatic crossover on a given interface or Port-channel. Use the no form of this command to disable cable crossover. show interfaces configuration [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the configuration for all configured interfaces. Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description408 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show interfaces advertise Displays the interface’s negotiation advertisement settings. show interfaces status [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the status for all configured interfaces. show interfaces description [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the description for all configured interfaces. console(config)# interface gi2/0/1 console(config-if)# description "RD SW#3" console(config-if)# shutdown console(config-if)# no shutdown console(config-if)# speed 100 console(config-if)# duplex full console(config-if)# negotiation console(config-if)# back-pressure console(config-if)# flowcontrol on console(config-if)# mdix auto console(config-if)# end console# show interfaces configuration gi2/0/1 Flow Admin Back Mdix Port Type Duplex Speed Neg control State Pressure Mode -------- ------------ ------ ----- -------- ------- ----- -------- ---- gi2/0/1 1G-Copper Full 1000 Enabled Off Up Disabled Auto console# show interfaces status gi2/0/1 Flow Link Back Mdix Port Type Duplex Speed Neg ctrl State Pressure Mode -------- ------------ ------ ----- -------- ---- ----------- -------- ---- gi2/0/1 1G-Copper -- -- -- -- Down -- -- Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 409 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LAG Configuration Use the LAG Configuration pages to configure LAGs. The device supports up to 32 LAGs per system, meaning for all units in the stack. For information about Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs) and assigning ports to LAGs, see "Link Aggregation" on page 508. To configure LAGs: 1 Click Switching > Ports > LAG Configuration in the tree view to display the LAG Configuration: Summary page. Figure 10-6. LAG Configuration: Summary The LAG parameters are displayed. 2 To configure a LAG, click Edit. 3 Select the LAG and enter the fields: – LAG Mode — Select the LAG mode. The possible options are:410 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Static — The ports comprise a single logical port for high-speed connections between networking devices. • LACP — Link Aggregate Control Protocol. LACP-enabled LAGs can exchange information with other links in order to update and maintain LAG configurations automatically. – Description (0 - 64 Characters) — Enter a user-defined description of the configured LAG. – LAG Type — Displays the port types that comprise the LAG. – Admin Status — Enable/disable the selected LAG. – Current Status — Displays the LAG is currently operating. – Admin Speed — Select the configured speed at which the LAG is operating. The possible options are: • 10M— The LAG is currently operating at 10 Mbps. • 100M — The LAG is currently operating at 100 Mbps. • 1000M — The LAG is currently operating at 1000 Mbps. • 10000 Full— The LAG is currently operating at 1000 Mbps. – Current Speed — Displays the speed at which the LAG is currently operating. – Admin Auto Negotiation — Enable/disable auto-negotiation, which is a protocol between two link partners that enables a LAG to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode and flow control abilities to its partner. – Current Auto Negotiation — Displays the current auto-negotiation setting. – Admin Advertisement — If auto-negotiation is enabled, select the auto-negotiation setting the LAG advertises. The possible options are: • Max Capability — All LAG speeds and Duplex mode settings are accepted. • 10 Full — The LAG advertises for a 10 mbps speed LAG and full duplex mode setting. • 100 Full — The LAG advertises for a 100 mbps speed LAG and full duplex mode setting.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 411 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • 1000 Full — The LAG advertises for a 1000 mbps speed LAG and full duplex mode setting. – Current Advertisement — Displays the speed that the LAG advertises to its neighbor LAG to start the negotiation process. The possible field values are those specified in the Admin Advertisement field. – Neighbor Advertisement — Displays the neighboring LAG advertisement settings. The field values are identical to the Admin Advertisement field values. – Admin Flow Control — Enable/disable flow control on the LAG. Flow Control mode is effective on the ports operating in Full Duplex in the LAG. The possible options are: • Enable — Enables flow control on the LAG (default). • Disable — Disables flow control on the LAG. • Auto Negotiation — Enables the auto-negotiation of flow control on the LAG. – Current Flow Control — Displays the current Flow Control setting. Configuring LAGs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring LAGs as displayed in the LAG Configuration pages. Table 10-9. LAG Configuration CLI Commands CLI Command Description interface port-channel LAGnumber Enters the interface configuration mode of a specific LAG. channel-group port-channel mode {on|auto} no channel-group Sets a mode for a LAG. Use the no form of this command restore the default configuration. description string no description Adds a description to a LAG. Use the no form of this command to remove the description.412 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY shutdown no shutdown Disables the LAG. Use the no form of this command to restart the LAG. speed {10|100|1000|10000} no speed Configures the speed of the LAG when not using auto negotiation. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. negotiation [capability1 [capability2…capability5] no negotiation Enables auto negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a LAG. Use the no form of this command to disable auto-negotiation. flowcontrol {auto|on|off} no flowcontrol Configures the flow control on a given LAG. Use the no form of this command to disable flow control. show interfaces configuration [port-channel LAG-number] Displays the configuration for the LAGs. show interface advertise Displays the LAG’s negotiation advertisement settings. show interfaces status [portchannel LAG-number] Displays the status for all configured LAGs. show interfaces description [port-channel LAG-number] Displays the description for all configured LAGs. show interfaces port-channel [LAG-number] Displays LAG information. Table 10-9. LAG Configuration CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 413 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface port-channel 1 console(config-if)# no negotiation console(config-if)# speed 100 console(config-if)# flowcontrol on console(config-if)# exit console(config)# interface port-channel 2 console(config-if)# shutdown console(config-if)# exit console(config-if)# end console# show interfaces port-channel Channel Ports --------- --------- ch1 Inactive: gi/1/0/(11-13) ch2 Active: gi/1/0/14414 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Storm Control When Broadcast, Multicast, or Unknown Unicast frames are received, they are duplicated, and a copy is sent to all possible egress ports. This means that in practice, they are sent to all ports belonging to the relevant VLAN. In this way, one ingress frame is turned into many, creating the potential for a storm. Storm protection provides the ability to limit the number of frames entering the switch, and to define the types of frames that are counted towards this limit. When a threshold (limit) is configured on the device, the port discards traffic when that threshold is reached. The port remains blocked until the traffic rate drops below this threshold. It then resumes normal forwarding. To configure Storm Control: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Storm Control in the tree view to display the Storm Control: Summary page. Figure 10-7. Storm ControlDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 415 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Storm control parameters are displayed for all ports on the selected unit. 2 To configure Storm Control on a port, click Edit. 3 Select a port from the Port drop-down list and enter the following fields: – Broadcast Control — Enable/disable forwarding Broadcast packets on the specific interface. – Broadcast Mode — Select the counting mode. The possible options are: • Multicast & Broadcast — Counts Broadcast and Multicast traffic together towards the bandwidth threshold. • Broadcast Only — Counts only Broadcast traffic towards the bandwidth threshold. – Broadcast Rate Threshold (3500-1000000) — Enter the maximum rate (Kbits/sec) at which unknown packets are forwarded. Configuring Storm Control Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Storm Control as displayed on the Storm Control pages. Table 10-10. Storm Control CLI Commands CLI Command Description storm-control includemulticast [unknown-unicast] no storm-control includemulticast Counts Multicast packets in the Broadcast storm control. Use the no form of this command to disable counting of multicast packets in the Broadcast storm control. storm-control broadcast enable no storm-control broadcast enable Enables Broadcast storm control. Use the no form of this command to disable Broadcast storm control. storm-control broadcast level kbps no storm-control broadcast level Configures the maximum Broadcast rate. Use the no form of this command to return the Broadcast level to the default value.416 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show ports storm-control port Displays the storm control configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# storm-control broadcast enable console(config-if)# storm-control include-multicast unknown-unicast console# show ports storm-control gi1/0/1 Port State Rate [Kbits/Sec] Included -------- -------- ---------------- --------------------- gi1/0/1 Disabled 8500 Broadcast Table 10-10. Storm Control CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 417 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Mirroring Switches usually only forward frames to relevant ports. To monitor traffic, either for information gathering, such as statistical analysis, or for troubleshooting higher-layer protocol operation, the Mirroring feature forwards frames to a monitoring port. Mirroring provides the ability to specify that a desired destination (target) port will receive a copy of all traffic passing through designated source ports. The frames arriving at the destination port are copies of the frames passing through the source port at ingress, prior to any switch action. It is possible to specify several source ports to be monitored by a single target port. However, in this case, the traffic sent to the target port is placed in the target port's queues on a first come, first served basis, and any excess traffic is silently discarded. This may mean that the traffic actually seen by any device attached to the target port is an arbitrarily selected subset of the actual traffic going through the source ports. Port mirroring is only relevant to physical ports. Therefore, if you want a LAG to function as the source of a port mirroring session, the member ports must be individually specified as sources. Up to four sources can be mirrored. This can be any combination of four individual ports. Before configuring Port Mirroring, note the following: • Monitored ports cannot operate faster than the monitoring port. • All Rx/Tx packets should be monitored to the same port. Destination Port Restrictions The following restrictions apply to destination ports: • Destination ports cannot be configured as source ports. • Destination ports cannot be a member of a LAG. • IP interfaces cannot be configured on the destination port. • GVRP cannot be enabled on the destination port. • The destination port cannot be a member of a VLAN. • Only one destination port can be defined.418 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • All QoS/CoS rules that apply to the destination port, as an egress, such as traffic shaping, are suspended for the duration of the mirroring session. Any such settings, configured on the port during the mirroring session, take effect only after the port is no longer a destination port for a mirroring session. • Ingress mirrored packets may arrive at the ingress port either with an 802.1q tag or without. When the packets are mirrored to a port analyzer, they should be transmitted as they are received on the ingress port. However, in the device, the packet is transmitted out of the port analyzer as always tagged or always untagged (user configurable), regardless of the input encapsulation. Source Port Restrictions The following restrictions apply to ports specified as source ports: • Source ports cannot be a member of a LAG. • Source ports cannot be configured as a destination port. • Up to four source ports can be mirrored. NOTE: When a port is set to be a target port for a port-mirroring session, all normal operations on it are suspended. This includes Spanning Tree and LACP. All currently active protocols and services on that port are suspended.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 419 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Mirroring To specify source and destination ports for port mirroring: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Mirroring in the tree view to display the Port Mirroring: Summary page. Figure 10-8. Port Mirroring: Summary The previously-defined source ports for the selected Destination Port are displayed, along with the fields defined in the Add page and their status. – Status — Indicates if the port is currently being monitored (Active) or not being monitored (notReady), because of some problem. 2 To add a port to be mirrored, click Add, and enter the fields: – Source Port — The port number from which port traffic is copied. – Type — Type of traffic (Tx or Rx or both) to be copied.420 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Port Mirroring Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Port Mirroring. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 10-11. Port Mirroring CLI Commands CLI Command Description port monitor srcinterface-id [rx|tx] no port monitor srcinterface-id Starts a port monitoring session. This must be performed in Interface Configuration mode, which is the destination interface. Use the no form of this command to stop a port monitoring session. show ports monitor Displays the port monitoring status. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# port monitor gi1/0/8 console# show ports monitor Source port Destination Port Type Status ----------- ---------------- ---- ----------- gi1/0/1 gi1/0/8 RX,TX ActiveDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 421 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY422 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 11 Address Tables This section describes how MAC addresses are handled on the device. It contains the following topics: • Overview • Static Addresses • Dynamic AddressesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 423 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Overview MAC addresses, associated with ports, are stored in the Static Address or the Dynamic Address tables. Packets, addressed to a destination stored in one of these tables, are forwarded to the associated port. MAC addresses are dynamically learned when packets arrive at the device. Addresses are associated with ports by learning the source address of the frame. Frames, addressed to a destination MAC address that is not associated with any port, are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN. In order to prevent the bridging table from overflowing, dynamic MAC addresses, from which no traffic is seen for a certain period, are erased. Static addresses are manually entered into the table.424 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Static Addresses Static addresses are manually assigned to a specific interface and VLAN on the switch. If a static address is seen on another interface, the address is ignored and it is not written to the address table. To define a static address: 1 Click Switch > Address Tables > Static Address Table in the tree view to display the Static Address Table: Summary page. Figure 11-1. Static Address Table A list of the currently-defined static addresses is displayed. 2 To add a static address, click Add. 3 Enter the following fields: • Interface — Select a port or LAG for the entry. • MAC Address — Enter the interface MAC address. • VLAN ID — Check and select the VLAN ID for the port. or • VLAN Name — Check and enter the VLAN name. • Status — Select how the entry in the table will be treated. The possible options are:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 425 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Permanent — The MAC address is never aged out of the table and, if it is saved to the Startup Configuration, it is retained after rebooting. • Delete on Reset — The MAC address is deleted when the device is reset. • Delete on Timeout — The MAC address is deleted when a timeout occurs. • Secure — The MAC address is secure when the interface is in classic locked mode. To prevent Static MAC addresses from being deleted when the Ethernet device is reset, ensure that the port attached to the MAC address is locked. Configuring Static Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring static address parameters as displayed in the Static Address Table pages. Table 11-1. Static Address CLI Commands CLI Command Description mac address-table static macaddress vlan vlan-id interface {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber} [permanent|delete-onreset|delete-on-timeout|secure] no mac address-table static [macaddress] vlan vlan-id Adds a MAC-layer station source address to the MAC address table. Use the no form of this command to delete the MAC address. show mac address-table [dynamic|static|secure] [vlan vlan] [[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber]] [address mac-address] Displays entries in the MAC address table.426 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config-if)#bridge address 00:60:70:4C:73:FF permanent gi1/0/8 console# show mac address-table static Aging time is 300 sec VLAN MAC Address Port Type ---- ------------------ -------- -------- 1 00:60:70:4C:73:FF gi1/0/8 static 1 00:60:70:8C:73:FF gi1/0/8 static 200 00:10:0D:48:37:FF gi1/0/9 staticDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 427 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic Addresses The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses acquired by monitoring the source addresses of traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports in the VLAN of the frame. To prevent the table from overflowing and to make room for new addresses, an address is deleted from the table if no traffic is received from a dynamic MAC address for a certain period. This period of time is called the aging interval. To configure dynamic addresses: 1 Click Switch > Address Tables > Dynamic MAC Address in the tree view to display the Dynamic Address page. Figure 11-2. Dynamic Address Table The current address table is displayed along with other parameters. 2 Enter Address Aging (10-630). The aging time is a value between the userconfigured value and twice that value minus 1. For example, if you entered 300 seconds, the aging time is between 300 and 599 seconds.428 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 To clear the table, check Clear Table. 4 To display a subset of the addresses in a particular order, enter the query criteria and sort key under Query By, and click Query. The following fields are displayed for entries matching the query criteria: – VLAN ID — VLAN ID in the entry. – MAC Address — Interface MAC address. – Interface — Port or LAG associated with the MAC address. Configuring Dynamic Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring static address parameters as displayed in the Dynamic Address Table pages. Table 11-2. Dynamic Address CLI Commands CLI Command Description mac address-table aging-time seconds no mac address-table aging-time Sets the aging time of the address table. Use the no form of this command to restore the default. clear mac address-table dynamic [interface [{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber}} [permanent|delete-onreset|delete-on-timeout|secure]] clear mac address-table secure interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber Removes learned or secure entries from the forwarding database. show mac address-table [dynamic|static|secure] [vlan vlan] [interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber] [address mac-address] Displays entries in the MAC address table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 429 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# mac address-table aging-time 600 console# show mac address-table dynamic Aging time is 300 sec VLAN MAC Address Port Type ---- ------------------ -------- -------- 1 00:60:70:4C:73:FF gi1/0/8 dynamic 1 00:60:70:8C:73:FF gi1/0/8 dynamic430 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 12 GARP This section describes how to configure Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) on the device. It contains the following topics: • GARP Overview • GARP TimersDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 431 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GARP Overview Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is a general-purpose protocol that registers network connectivity or membership-style information. GARP defines a set of devices interested in a given network attribute, such as VLAN or Multicast address. The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN, such as end stations and switches, can register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN Identifiers, with each other. In doing so, these attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN, and these devices form a reachability tree that is a subset of an active topology. GARP defines the architecture, rules of operation, state machines and variables for the registration and deregistration of attribute values. When configuring GARP, ensure the following: • The leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time. • The leave-all time must be greater than the leave time. • Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2-connected devices. If the GARP timers are set differently on the Layer 2-connected devices, GARP application does not operate successfully.432 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GARP Timers To enable a GARP timer on an interface: 1 Click Switching > GARP > GARP Timers in the tree view to open the GARP Timers: Summary page. Figure 12-1. GARP Timers: Summary The GARP timers are displayed. 2 Click Edit. 3 Select an interface, and enter the fields: – GARP Join Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter the time, in milliseconds, during which Protocol Data Units (PDU) are transmitted. – GARP Leave Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter the time interval, in milliseconds, which the device waits before leaving its GARP state. Leave time is activated by a Leave All Time message sent/received, and cancelled by the Join message received. Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time. – GARP Leave All Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter time interval, in milliseconds, which all devices wait before leaving the GARP state. The leave all time must be greater than the leave time. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 433 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining GARP Timers Using CLI Commands This table summarizes the CLI commands for defining GARP timers as displayed in the GARP Timers pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 12-1. GARP Timer CLI Commands CLI Command Description garp timer {join|leave|leaveall} timer_value Adjusts the GARP application join, leave, and leaveall GARP timer values. show gvrp configuration [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net]port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] Displays GVRP configuration information, including timer values, whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation are enabled, and which ports are running GVRP. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# garp timer leave 900 console(config-if)# end console# show gvrp configuration gi1/0/11 GVRP Feature is currently Disabled on the device. Maximum VLANs: 223 Port(s) GVRP Registration Dynamic VLAN Timers (milliseconds) Status Creation Join Leave Leave All -------- ------- ------------ ----------- ------ ----- --------- gi1/0/11 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 900 10000434 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 13 Spanning Tree This chapter describes the Spanning Tree Protocol. It contains the following topics: • Spanning Tree Protocol Overview • Global Settings • STP Port Settings • STP LAG Settings • Rapid Spanning Tree • Multiple Spanning TreeDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 435 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Spanning Tree Protocol Overview Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides tree topography for any bridge arrangement. STP eliminates loops by providing a unique path between end stations on a network. Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts. Loops, in an extended network, can cause bridges to forward traffic indefinitely, resulting in packets not arriving at their destination, increased traffic, and reduced network efficiency. The device supports the following Spanning Tree versions: • Classic STP — Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For more information on configuring Classic STP, see "Global Settings" on page 437. • Rapid STP (RSTP) — Provides faster convergence of the spanning tree than Classic STP. RSTP is most effective when the network topology is naturally tree-structured, and therefore faster convergence might be possible. RSTP is enabled by default. Although Classic STP is guaranteed to prevent Layer 2 forwarding loops, in a general network topology, there might be an unacceptable delay before convergence. This means that before convergence, each bridge or switch in the network must decide if it should actively forward traffic or not, on each of its ports. For more information on configuring Rapid STP, see "Rapid Spanning Tree" on page 450. • Multiple STP (MSTP) — MSTP is based on RSTP. It detects Layer 2 loops, and attempts to mitigate them by preventing the involved port from transmitting traffic. Since loops exist on a per-Layer 2-domain basis, a situation can occur where there is a loop in VLAN A and no loop in VLAN B. If both VLANs are on Port X, and STP wants to mitigate the loop, it stops traffic on the entire port, including VLAN B traffic, where there is no need to stop traffic. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) solves this problem by enabling several STP instances, so that it is possible to detect and mitigate loops separately in each instance. By associating instances to VLANs, each 436 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY instance is associated with the Layer 2 domain on which it performs loop detection and mitigation. This enables a port to be stopped in one instance, such as traffic from VLAN A that is causing a loop, while traffic can remain active in another domain where no loop was seen, such as on VLAN B. MSTP provides full connectivity for packets allocated to any VLAN, and transmits packets assigned to various VLANs, through different multiple spanning tree (MST) regions. MST regions act as a single bridge. For more information on configuring Multiple STP, see "Multiple Spanning Tree" on page 454.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 437 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Settings To enable STP and select the STP mode on the device: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 13-1. Global Settings The currently-defined settings are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Spanning Tree State — Enable Spanning Tree on the device. – STP Operation Mode — Select the STP mode enabled on the device. The possible options are: • Classic STP — Enables Classic STP on the device. • Rapid STP — Enables Rapid STP on the device. This is the default value. • Multiple STP — Enables Multiple STP on the device.438 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – BPDU Handling — Select how Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port/device. BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information. The possible options are: • Filtering — Filter BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface. • Flooding — Flood BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface. – Path Cost Default Values — Select the method used to assign default path costs to STP ports. The possible options are: • Short — Specifies 1 through 65,535 range for port path costs. • Long — Specifies 1 through 200,000,000 range for port path costs. The default path costs assigned to an interface vary according to the selected method: Bridge Settings – Priority (0-61440 in steps of 4096) — Enter the bridge priority value. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the device with the lowest priority value becomes the Root Bridge. The default value is 32768. The port priority value is provided in increments of 4096. For example, 4096, 8192, 12288, etc. – Hello Time (1-10) — Check to use the device Hello Time, which is the interval of time in seconds that a root bridge waits between configuration messages. Enter a value. – Max Age (6-40) — Check to use device Maximum Age Time, which is the time interval in seconds that a bridge waits before sending configuration messages. Enter a value. Interface Long Cost Short Cost LAG 20,000 4 1000 Mbps 20,000 4 100 Mbps 200,000 19 10 Mbps 2,000,000 100Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 439 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Forward Delay (4-30) — Check to use device forward delay time, which is the interval of time in seconds that a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets. Enter a value. Designated Root — Displays the following: – Bridge ID — The bridge priority and MAC address. – Root Bridge ID — The root bridge priority and MAC address. – Root Port — The port number that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the Root Bridge. This is significant when the Bridge is not the Root. – Root Path Cost — The cost of the path from this bridge to the root. – Topology Changes Counts — The total amount of STP state changes that have occurred. – Last Topology Change — The amount of time that has elapsed since the bridge was initialized or reset, and the last topographic change occurred. Defining STP Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining STP global parameters as displayed in the Global Settings pages. Table 13-1. STP Global Parameter CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree no spanning-tree Enables spanning tree functionality. Use the no form of this command to disable the spanning-tree functionality. spanning-tree mode {stp|rstp|mstp} no spanning-tree mode Configures the mode of the spanning tree protocol. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree bpdu {filtering|flooding|bridging} no spanning-tree bpdu Defines BPDU handling when the spanning tree is disabled globally or on a single interface. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.440 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY spanning-tree pathcost method {long|short} no spanning-tree pathcost method Sets the default path cost method. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. spanning-tree priority priority no spanning-tree priority Configures the spanning tree priority. Use the no form of this command to restore the default device spanning-tree priority. spanning-tree hello-time seconds no spanning-tree hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge Hello Time, which is how often the device Broadcasts Hello messages to other devices. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree max-age seconds no spanning-tree max-age seconds Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration spanning-tree forward-time seconds no spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time, which is the amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before entering the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree [[gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] [instance instance-id] Displays spanning tree configuration. show spanning-tree [detail] [active|blockedports] [instance instance-id] Displays detailed spanning tree information on active or blocked ports. show spanning-tree mstconfiguration Displays spanning tree MST configuration identifier. Table 13-1. STP Global Parameter CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 441 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# spanning-tree console(config)# spanning-tree mode rstp console(config)# spanning-tree priority 12288 console(config)# spanning-tree hello-time 5 console(config)# spanning-tree max-age 12 console(config)# spanning-tree forward-time 25 console(config)# exit442 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY STP Port Settings To assign STP properties to individual ports: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > STP Port Settings in the tree view to display the STP Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 13-2. STP Port Settings: Summary The ports and their STP settings are displayed. 2 To modify STP settings on a port, click Edit. 3 Select the port, and enter the fields: – STP — Enable/disable STP on the port. – Fast Link — Check to enable Fast Link mode for the port. If this is enabled, the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding state when the port is up. Fast Link mode optimizes the time it takes for the STP protocol to converge. STP convergence can take 30-60 seconds in large networks. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 443 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – BPDU Guard — Check to enable BPDU Guard on the port. – Root Guard — Check to prevent devices outside the network core from being assigned the spanning tree root. – Port State — Displays the current STP state of a port. If the port state is not disabled, it determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. The possible port states are: • Disabled — STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses. • Blocking — The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. Blocking is displayed when Classic STP is enabled. • Listening — The port is currently in the listening mode. The port cannot forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses. • Learning — The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot forward traffic, however it can learn new MAC addresses. • Forwarding — The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses. – Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm that provides STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.444 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Speed — Displays the speed at which the port is operating. – Path Cost (1-200000000) — Enter the port contribution to the root path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value, and is used to forward traffic when a path being rerouted. – Default Path Cost — Check to use the default path cost. – Priority — Select the priority value that influences the port choice when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop. The priority value is provided in increments of 16. – Designated Bridge ID — Displays the bridge priority and the MAC address of the designated bridge. – Designated Port ID — Displays the designated port’s priority and interface. – Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops. – Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the port has changed from the Forwarding state to Blocking. – LAG — Displays the LAG to which the port is attached. Defining STP Port Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining STP port parameters as displayed in the STP Port Settings page. Table 13-2. STP Port Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree disable no spanning-tree disable Disables spanning tree on a specific port. Use the no form of this command to enable the spanning tree on a port. spanning-tree cost cost no spanning-tree cost Configures the spanning tree cost contribution of a port Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 445 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY spanning-tree port-priority priority no spanning-tree port-priority Configures port priority. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number][instance instanceid] Displays spanning tree configuration. spanning-tree portfast no spanning-tree portfast Enables Fast Link mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the PortFast mode. spanning-tree bpduguard {enable|disable} no spanning-tree bpduguard Shuts down an interface when it receives a bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree guard root Enables root guard on all spanning tree instances on the interface. show spanning-tree [detail] [active|blockedports] [instance instance-id] Displays detailed spanning tree information on active or blocked ports. Table 13-2. STP Port Settings CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description446 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console> enable console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# spanning-tree enable console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000 console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96 console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast console(config-if)# exit console(config)# exit console# show spanning-tree gi1/0/15 instance 12 Port gi1/0/15 enabled State: discarding Role: alternate Port ID: 128.15 Port cost: 19 Type: P2p (configured: Auto) Internal Port Fast: No (configured: No) Designated bridge Priority : 32768 Address: 00:00:b0:07:07:49 Designated port ID: 128.11 Designated path cost: 0 Guard root: Disabled Number of transitions to forwarding state: 3 BPDU: sent 482, received 1035Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 447 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY STP LAG Settings To assign STP parameters to LAGs: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > LAG Settings in the tree view to display the STP LAG Settings: Summary page. Figure 13-3. STP LAG Settings: Summary The LAGs and their STP settings are displayed. 2 To modify STP settings on a LAG, click Edit. 3 Select a LAG from the Select a LAG drop-down menu. 4 Enter the fields. – STP — Enable/disable STP on the LAG. – Fast Link — Check to enable Fast Link mode for the LAG. If Fast Link mode is enabled for a LAG, the LAG State is automatically placed in Forwarding when the LAG is up. Fast Link mode optimizes the time it takes for the STP protocol to converge. STP convergence can take from 30-60 seconds in large networks. – BPDU Guard — Check to enable BPDU Guard on the LAG. – Root Guard — Check to prevent devices outside the network core from being assigned the spanning tree root. 448 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – LAG State — Displays the current STP state of the LAG. If enabled, the LAG state determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. If the bridge discovers a malfunctioning LAG, the LAG is placed in the Broken state. Possible LAG states are: • Disabled — STP is currently disabled on the LAG. The LAG forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses. • Blocking — The LAG is blocked and cannot be used to forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. • RSTP Discarding State — The LAG does not learn MAC addresses and does not forward frames. This state is union of Blocking and Listening state introduced in STP (802.1.D). • Listening — The LAG is in the listening mode, and cannot forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. • Learning — The LAG is in the learning mode, and cannot forward traffic, but it can learn new MAC addresses. • Forwarding — The LAG is currently in the forwarding mode, and it can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses. • Broken — The LAG is currently malfunctioning, and cannot be used for forwarding traffic. – Role — Displays the LAG role assigned by the STP algorithm that provides STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This LAG provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This LAG is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This LAG provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This LAG provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This LAG is not participating in the Spanning Tree.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 449 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Path Cost (1-200000000) — Enter the amount the LAG contributes to the root path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value, and is used to forward traffic when a path is being rerouted. The path cost has a value of 1 to 200000000. – Default Path Cost — Check for the device to use the default path cost. – Priority — Select the priority value of the LAG. The priority value influences the LAG choice when a bridge has looped ports. The priority value is given in steps of 16. – Designated Bridge ID — Displays the priority and the MAC address of the designated bridge. – Designated Port ID — Displays the ID of the selected interface. – Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops. – Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the LAG State has changed from the Forwarding state to a Blocking state. Defining STP LAG Settings Using CLI Commands For information about CLI commands for defining STP LAG settings, see Table 13-2. The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface port-channel 1 console(config-if)# spanning-tree disable console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000 console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96 console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast450 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Rapid Spanning Tree While classic spanning tree prevents Layer 2 forwarding loops on a general network topology, convergence can take from 30 to 60 seconds. This delay provides time to detect possible loops, and propagate status changes. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) detects and uses network topologies that enable a faster convergence of the spanning tree, without creating forwarding loops. To configure RSTP: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > Rapid Spanning Tree in the tree view to display the Rapid Spanning Tree: Summary page. Figure 13-4. Rapid Spanning Tree: Summary 2 To modify RSTP settings on an interface, click Edit and enter the fields: – Interface — Select a port or LAG. – State — Displays the RSTP state of the selected interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 451 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree. – Mode — Displays if RSTP is enabled. – Fast Link Operational Status — Displays if Fast Link is enabled or disabled for the port or LAG. If Fast Link is enabled for an interface, the interface is automatically placed in the forwarding state. The possible options are: • Enable — Fast Link is enabled. • Disable — Fast Link is disabled. • Auto — Fast Link mode is enabled a few seconds after the interface becomes active. – Point-to-Point Admin Status — Select if a point-to-point links is established, or permits the device to establish a point-to-point link. The possible options are: • Enable — Enables the device to establish a point-to-point link, or specifies for the device to automatically establish a point-to-point link. To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the originating PPP first sends Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols (NCP) packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols. When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been 452 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY configured, packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link. The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link, or until some external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It may differ from the administrative state. • Disable — Disables point-to-point link. • Auto — The device automatically establishes a point-to-point link. – Point-to-Point Operational Status — Displays the Point-to-Point operating state. – Active Protocol Migration Test — Check to run a Protocol Migration test. This discovers whether the link partner using STP still exists, and if so whether it has migrated to RSTP or MSTP. If it still exists as an STP link, the device continues to communicate with it by using STP. Otherwise, if it has been migrated to RSTP or MSTP, the device communicates with it using RSTP or MSTP, respectively. Defining Rapid STP Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining Rapid STP parameters as displayed in the Rapid Spanning Tree pages. Table 13-3. Rapid STP Parameters CLI Command CLI Command Description spanning-tree link-type {pointto-point|shared} no spanning-tree spanning-tree link-type Overrides the default link-type setting determined by the port duplex mode, and enables RSTP transitions to the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. clear spanning-tree detectedprotocols interface [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Restarts the protocol migration process.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 453 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show spanning-tree [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays spanning tree configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/5 console(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type shared Table 13-3. Rapid STP Parameters CLI Command (Continued) CLI Command Description454 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multiple Spanning Tree This section describes Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). It contains the following topics: • MSTP Overview • MSTP Properties • VLAN to MSTP Instance • MSTP Instance Settings • MSTP Interface SettingsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 455 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MSTP Overview MSTP maps VLANs into STP instances, using various load balancing scenarios. As a result of this partitioning into instances, if port A is blocked in one STP instance, the same port can be placed in the Forwarding State in another STP instance. In addition, packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along different paths within Multiple Spanning Trees Regions (MST Regions). Regions are one or more Multiple Spanning Tree bridges by which frames can be transmitted. MSTP Properties To set an MSTP region: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Settings in the tree view to display the MSTP Properties: Summary page. Figure 13-5. MSTP Properties: Summary456 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the following fields: – Region Name (1-32 Characters) — Enter the user-defined MSTP region name. – Revision (0-65535) — Enter the unsigned 16-bit number that identifies the current MST configuration revision. The revision number is required as part of the MST configuration. – Max Hops (1-40) — Enter the total number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. Once the BPDU is discarded, the port information is aged out. – IST Master — Displays the Internal Spanning Tree Master ID. The IST Master is the instance 0 root. Configuring MST Properties Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MST properties in the MSTP Properties pages. Table 13-4. MSTP Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst configuration Enters MST Configuration mode. spanning-tree mst max-hops hop-count no spanning-tree mst maxhops Configures the number of hops in an MST region before the BDPU is discarded and the port information is aged out (in Global Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. name string no name Sets the MSTP region name. Use the no form of this command to restore the default setting. revision value no revision Defines the MST configuration revision number. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. exit Exits the MST region configuration mode after applying configuration changes.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 457 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show {current|pending} Displays the current or pending MST region configuration. show spanning tree mstconfiguration Displays the MSTP configuration. console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# instance 1 add vlan 10-20 console(config-mst)# name region1 console(config-mst)# revision 1 console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 144 console(config)# spanning-tree mst max-hops 10 console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# instance 2 add vlan 21-30 console(config-mst)# name region1 console(config-mst)# revision 1 console(config-mst)# show pending Pending MST configuration Name: Region1 Revision: 1 Instance VLANs Mapped -------- ------------ 0 1-9,31-4094 1 10-20 2 21-30 Table 13-4. MSTP Properties CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description458 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN to MSTP Instance To map VLANs to MSTP instances: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > VLAN to MSTP Instance in the tree view to display the VLAN to MSTP Instance: Summary page. Figure 13-6. VLAN to MSTP Instance: Summary The MSTP instances and their associated VLANs are displayed. 2 To associate a VLAN with an MSTP instance, click Edit. 3 Select the MSTP instance, the VLAN and whether to add or remove the VLAN from the MSTP instance association. 4 Enter the fields: – Select MST Instance ID — Select an MST instance. – VLANs — Enter the VLANs being mapped to this instance. – Action — Select the mapping action. The possible options are: Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 459 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Add —Add these VLANS to the MST instance. • Remove —Remove these VLANS from the MST instance. Mapping VLAN to MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for mapping VLANs to MSTP instances. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 13-5. Mapping VLAN to MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst configuration Enters MST Configuration mode. instance instance-id vlan vlan-range no instance instance-id vlan vlan-range Maps VLANs to an MST instance. Use the no form of this command to restore default mapping. show spanning-tree detail Displays the spanning-tree configuration console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 10-20460 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MSTP Instance Settings To configure MSTP instances: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Instance Settings in the tree view to display the MSTP Instance Settings page. Figure 13-7. MSTP Instance Settings The MSTP instances and their associated VLANs are displayed. 2 Select an Instance ID. 3 Enter the Bridge Priority (0-61440) of this bridge for the selected MSTP instance. 4 The following fields are displayed: – Included VLANs — Displays VLANs included in this instance. – Designated Root Bridge ID — Priority and MAC address of the Root Bridge for the MST instance.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 461 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Root Port — Root port of the selected instance. – Root Path Cost — Root path cost of the selected instance. – Bridge ID — Bridge priority and the MAC address of this switch for the selected instance. – Remaining Hops — Number of hops remaining to the next destination. Configuring MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the MSTP Instance pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 13-6. Configuring MSTP Instances CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst configuration Enters MST Configuration mode. spanning-tree mst instance-id priority priority no spanning-tree mst instance-id priority Configures the device priority for the specified spanning-tree instance. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree detail Displays the spanning-tree configuration console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# spanning-tree mst 1 priority 4096462 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MSTP Interface Settings To assign interfaces to MSTP instances: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Interface Settings in the tree view to display the MSTP Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 13-8. MSTP Interface Settings: Summary MSTP interface settings for the selected instance is displayed. 2 To set MSTP settings for an interface, click Edit. 3 Select an instance, and enter the fields: – Interface ID — Assign either ports or LAGs to the selected MSTP instance. – Port State — Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled in the specific instance. – Type — Displays whether MSTP treats the port as a point-to-point port, or a port connected to a hub, and whether the port is internal to the MST region or a boundary port. A Master port provides connectivity from a MSTP region to the outlying CIST root. A Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 463 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Boundary port attaches MST bridges to LAN in an outlying region. If the port is a boundary port, it also indicates whether the device on the other side of the link is working in RSTP or STP mode. – Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree. – Interface Priority— Enter the interface priority for specified instance. – Path Cost (1-200,000,000) — Enter the port contribution to the Spanning Tree instance. If a loop occurs, the spanning tree considers path cost when selecting an interface to put in the Forwarding state. – Default Path Cost — Check to use the default path cost. – Designated Bridge ID — Displays the bridge ID number that connects the link or shared LAN to the root. – Designated Port ID — Displays the Port ID number on the designated bridge that connects the link or the shared LAN to the root. – Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the path from the link or the shared LAN to the root. – Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the port changed to the forwarding state. – Remain Hops — Displays the number of hops remaining to the next destination.464 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining MSTP Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining MSTP interfaces as displayed in the MSTP Interfaces pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 13-7. MSTP Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost no spanning-tree mst instance-id cost Sets the path cost of the port for MST calculations (in Interface Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree mst instance-id portpriority priority Configures the device priority for the specified spanning-tree instance (in Interface Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree mstconfiguration Displays the MST configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/9 console(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 1 cost 4Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 465 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY466 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 14 VLANs This chapter describes how VLANs are configured on the device. It contains the following topics: • Virtual LAN Overview • VLAN Membership • Port Settings • LAGs Settings • Protocol Groups • Protocol Port • GVRP Parameters • Private VLAN • Voice VLANDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 467 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Virtual LAN Overview A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented on an organizational basis, by functions, project teams, or applications rather than on a physical or geographical basis. For example, all workstations and servers used by a particular workgroup team can be connected to the same VLAN, regardless of their physical connections to the network, or the fact that they might be intermingled with other teams. Reconfiguration of the network can be done through software rather than by physically unplugging and moving devices or wires. A VLAN can be thought of as a Broadcast domain that exists within a defined set of switches. A VLAN consists of a number of end systems, either hosts or network equipment (such as bridges and routers), connected by a single bridging domain. The bridging domain is supported on various pieces of network equipment; for example, LAN switches that operate bridging protocols between them with a separate bridge group for each VLAN. VLANs are created to provide the segmentation services traditionally provided by routers in LAN configurations. VLANs address scalability, security, and network management. Routers in VLAN topologies provide broadcast filtering, security, address summarization, and traffic flow management. None of the switches, within a defined group, will bridge any frames, not even broadcast frames, between two VLANs. 468 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Frame Flow Figure 14-1 describes the flow of VLAN frames from the Ingress port to the Egress port: Figure 14-1. Frame Flow Through a VLAN When a frame is received, it must be assigned a VLAN. VLAN assignment is accomplished by the following steps: 1 If the frame contains a VLAN tag, that tag is used, otherwise the frame is classified by the port's default VLAN (PVID), if it is defined. 2 After classification, the frame may pass (if enabled) through ingress filtering, where the frame is dropped if the frame's VLAN ID is not one of the VLANs to which the ingress port belongs. 3 A forwarding decision is made, as a function of the VLAN ID and the destination MAC address. 4 The egress rules define whether the frame is to be sent as tagged or untagged. Special-case VLANs VLAN#1 and VLAN#4095 are special-case VLANs: • VLAN1 — Defined as the default VLAN, and may only be used as a Ports Default VLAN ID (PVID). This means that if the VLAN, whose VID is the current port's PVID, is deleted from the port (or from the system), that port's PVID is set to 1. VLAN#1 cannot be deleted from the system. • VLAN #4095 — Defined (according to standard and industry practice) as the "discard" VLAN. A frame classified to this VLAN is silently dropped. Ingress Egress VLAN C lassification Ingress Filtering Egress Filtering Progress Forwarding Decision Filtering Database Received Frame T ransmitted Frame Ingress Egress VLAN C lassification Ingress Filtering Egress Filtering Progress Forwarding Decision Filtering Database Received Frame T ransmitted FrameDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 469 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QinQ Tagging QinQ tagging enables you to add an additional tag to previously-tagged packets. The added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, which ensures private and segregated network traffic. The VLAN ID tag is assigned to a customer port in the service provider network. The designated port then provides additional services to the packets with the double-tags. This enables administrators to expand service to VLAN users. Port Modes Ports participating in Layer 2 switching may be classified as: • Access Ports Ports set to Access mode belong to a single VLAN, whose VID is the currently set PVID (default =1). These ports accept all untagged frames, and all frames tagged with the VID, currently set as the port's PVID. All traffic is sent untagged. If the VLAN, whose VID is set as the current PVID of the port, is deleted from the system, or deleted from the port, the port's PVID will be set to 1, meaning that the port will be made a member of VLAN#1, the default VLAN. Ingress filtering is always enabled for ports in Access mode. Setting an Access port’s PVID to 4095 effectively shuts it down, as no frames will be transferred in either direction. Access mode ports are intended to connect end-stations to the system, especially when the end-stations are incapable of generating VLAN tags. • Trunk Ports Ports set to Trunk mode may belong to multiple VLANs. The default VLAN membership of a trunk port is all VLANs (1-4094). A PVID must be set on the port (it can be a non-existing VLAN). Trunk ports accept tagged and untagged frames. Untagged frames will be classified to the VLAN whose VLAN ID (VID) is configured as the port’s PVID. Frames, sent from the port in the VLAN, whose VID is the current PVID, are sent untagged. Frames sent in all other VLANs active on the port are sent tagged.470 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Ingress filtering is always enabled on Trunk-mode ports. Incoming frames will undergo ingress filtering, and if correctly tagged, (tagged with a VID of one of the VLANs to which the port currently belongs) are admitted. The default PVID is 1 (the default VLAN). If another VID is configured as the port’s PVID, and the corresponding VLAN is deleted from the port or from the system, the port’s PVID reverts to 1, meaning that the port is made a member of the default VLAN. Setting a trunk-port’s PVID to 4095 limits traffic to tagged frames. Incoming untagged frames are silently discarded, and no frames are sent untagged. Trunk-mode ports are intended for switch-to-switch links, where traffic is usually tagged. • General Ports Ports set to General mode may be members of multiple VLANs. Each of these VLANs may be configured to be tagged or untagged. This setting applies to transmitted frames. Incoming untagged frames are classified into the VLAN whose VID is the currently configured PVID. Ingress filtering may be disabled on General ports. Ingress filtering is enabled by default. • Promiscuous Ports A promiscuous port can communicate with all ports of the same Private VLAN (PVLAN), including the isolated ports of the same PVLAN. • Isolated An isolated port has complete Layer 2 isolation from the other ports within the same PVLAN, but not from the promiscuous ports. Isolated ports can communicate with promiscuous ports. In the factory default configuration, all ports are designated as Access ports, and are associated with the default VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 471 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Acceptable Frame Type The acceptable frame type can be set on a port to accept all frames (tagged and untagged), tagged only, or untagged only. This setting takes precedence over all other settings, so that if the acceptable frame type is tagged only, incoming untagged frames are silently discarded, even if the port has a valid PVID.472 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Membership The device supports up to 2-4094 VLANs. Ports are assigned to a VLAN in the Port Settings pages. To view the ports in a VLAN, and assign various parameters: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > VLAN Membership in the tree view to display the VLAN Membership: Summary page. Figure 14-2. VLAN Membership: Summary The ports in the selected unit/VLAN are displayed along with their statuses. Each port/LAG is labeled with one of the following codes, regarding its membership in the VLAN:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 473 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – T — Tagged. The interface is a member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the interface are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information. – U — Untagged. The interface is a member of a VLAN. Packets forwarded by the interface are untagged. – F — Forbidden. The interface is denied membership to a VLAN. – Blank — The interface is not a VLAN member. Packets associated with the interface are not forwarded. 2 Enter the fields: – Show VLAN — Check one of the possible options: • VLAN ID — Check VLAN ID, and select a VLAN ID to view. • VLAN Name — Check VLAN Name, and select a VLAN ID to view. – VLAN Name (0-32 Characters) — Enter a new VLAN name. – Status — The VLAN type. Possible values are: • Dynamic — The VLAN was dynamically created through GVRP. • Static — The VLAN is user-defined. – Authentication Not Required — Enable/disable authentication on the VLAN. 3 To define a new VLAN, click ADD, and enter the fields. The fields in this page are described above. Defining VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining VLAN membership as displayed in the VLAN Membership pages. Table 14-1. VLAN Membership CLI Commands CLI Command Description vlan database Enters the VLAN configuration mode.474 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: vlan {vlan-range}[name vlanname] no vlan vlan-range Creates a VLAN. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration or delete a VLAN. name string Adds a name to a VLAN. dot1x auth-not-req no dot1x auth-not-req Enables unauthorized devices access to the VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable access to the VLAN. console(config)# vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan 1972 console(config-vlan)# end console(config)# interface vlan 1972 console(config-if)# name Marketing console(config-vlan)# dot1x auth-not-req console(config-if)# end Table 14-1. VLAN Membership CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 475 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Settings After a VLAN has been defined, assign ports to it. To assign a VLAN to untagged packets, arriving on the device, enter the port default VLAN ID (PVID). All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID. All ports must have a defined PVID. If no other value is configured, the default VLAN PVID is used. VLAN ID #1 is the default VLAN, and cannot be deleted from the system. To configure ports on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Port Settings in the tree view to display the Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 14-3. Port Settings: Summary All interfaces on the selected unit and their settings are displayed. 2 To modify the port settings, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Enter the unit/port number to be modified. – Switchport Mode — Select whether the port is in Layer 2 or Layer 3. If the port is in Layer 2, enter the parameters described below, otherwise the fields are not relevant.476 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Port VLAN Mode — Enter the port VLAN mode. The possible options are: • General — The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is user-defined as tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode). • Access — The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a port is in Access mode, the packet types that are accepted on the port cannot be designated. Ingress filtering cannot be enabled/disabled on an access port. • Trunk — The port belongs to VLANs on which all ports are tagged (except for one port that can be untagged). • Customer — When a port is in Customer mode, an added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, ensuring private and segregated network traffic for that customer. • Private VLAN Promiscuous — The port is a promiscuous port. • Private VLAN Host — The port is an isolated port – Current Reserved VLAN — Displays the VLAN currently designated by the system as the reserved VLAN. – Reserve VLAN for Internal Use (1-4094) — Check to enter a reserved VLAN, and enter its ID. If none is required, check None. – PVID (1-4095) — Enter a VLAN ID to be added to untagged packets. The possible values are 1-4095. VLAN 4095 is defined according to standard and industry practice as the discard VLAN. Packets classified to the discard VLAN are dropped. – VLAN List (I - Inactive Configuration) — Enter the VLAN(s) to which this port belongs, and indicate its type. The possible options are: • T — Tagged. The port is a member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the LAG are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information. • U — Untagged. The port is a member of a VLAN. Packets forwarded by the LAG are untagged. • F — Forbidden. The port is denied membership to a VLAN. Click Add to move the port to the VLAN list together with its type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 477 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Frame Type — Select the packet type accepted on the port. The possible options are: • Admit All — Both tagged and untagged packets are accepted on the port. • Admit Tagged Only — Only tagged packets are accepted on the port. • Admit Untagged Only — Only untagged packets are accepted on the port. – Ingress Filtering — Enable/disable ingress filtering, which discards packets that are destined to VLANs of which the specific port is not a member. – Native VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for untagged traffic to trunk ports. – Multicast VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for Multicast TV VLAN traffic on access ports. – Customer VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for customer ports. Assigning Ports to VLAN Groups Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for assigning ports to VLAN groups. Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands CLI Command Description switchport general acceptableframe-type {tagged-only|untaggedonly|all} no switchport general acceptableframe-type Configures ingress filtering based on packet type tagged/untagged. Use the no form of this command to return to default. switchport mode {access|trunk|general} Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.478 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY switchport access vlan {vlanid|none} no switchport access vlan Configures the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. switchport trunk allowed vlan {all|none|add vlan-list|remove vlan-list|except vlan-list} no switchport trunk allowed vlan Sets the trunk characteristics when the interface is in Trunking mode. Use the no form of this command to reset a trunking characteristic to the default. switchport trunk native vlan {vlanid|none} no switchport trunk native vlan Defines the native VLAN when the interface is in trunk mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. switchport general allowed vlan {add|remove} vlan-list [tagged|untagged] no switchport general allowed vlan Sets the general characteristics when the interface is in general mode. Use the no form of this command to reset a general characteristic to the default. switchport general pvid vlan-id no switchport general pvid Configures the PVID when the interface is in general mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. switchport customer vlan vlan-id no switchport customer vlan Sets the port's VLAN when the interface is in customer mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 479 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY switchport mode {access|trunk|general|private-vlan {promiscuous|host}|customer} no switchport mode Configure the VLAN membership mode of a port. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description480 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan 23-25 console(config-vlan)# end console(config)# interface vlan 23 console(config-if)# name Marketing console(config-if)# end console(config)# interface gi1/0/8 console(config-if)# switchport mode access console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 23 console(config-if)# end console(config)# interface gi1/0/9 console(config-if)# switchport mode trunk console(config-if)# switchport mode trunk allowed vlan add 23-25 console(config-if)# end console(config)# interface gi1/0/11 console(config-if)# switchport mode general console(config-if)# switchport general allowed vlan add 23,25 tagged console(config-if)# switchport general pvid 25Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 481 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LAGs Settings VLANs can either be composed of individual ports or of LAGs. Untagged packets entering the device are tagged with the LAGs ID specified by the PVID. To configure LAGS on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > LAG Settings in the tree view to display the VLAN LAG Settings page. Figure 14-4. VLAN LAG Settings All LAGs and their settings are displayed. 2 To modify the LAG settings, click Edit, and enter the fields: – LAG — Select the LAG to be modified. – Switchport Mode — Select whether the LAG is in Layer 2 or Layer 3. If the LAG is in Layer 2, enter the parameters described below, otherwise the fields are not relevant.482 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Port VLAN Mode — Enter the port VLAN mode. The possible options are: • General — The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is user-defined as tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode). • Access — The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a port is in Access mode, the packet types that are accepted on the port cannot be designated. Ingress filtering cannot be enabled/disabled on an access port. • Trunk — The port belongs to VLANs on which all ports are tagged (except for one port that can be untagged). • Customer — When a port is in Customer mode, an added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, ensuring private and segregated network traffic for that customer. • Private VLAN Promiscuous — The port is a promiscuous port. • Private VLAN Host — The port is an isolated port – Current Reserved VLAN — Displays the VLAN currently designated as the reserved VLAN. – Reserve VLAN for Internal Use (1-4094) — Enter the VLAN that is designated as the reserved VLAN after the device is reset, or select None. – PVID (1-4095)— Assigns a VLAN ID to untagged packets. The possible VLAN IDs are 1-4095. VLAN 4095 is defined as per standard and industry practice, as the discard VLAN. Packets classified to this VLAN are dropped. – VLAN List (I - Inactive Configuration) — Enter the VLAN(s) to which this LAG belongs, and indicate its type. The possible options are: • T — Tagged. The LAG is a member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the LAG are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information. • U — Untagged. The LAG is a member of a VLAN. Packets forwarded by the LAG are untagged. • F — Forbidden. The LAG is denied membership to a VLAN. Click Add to move the LAG to the VLAN list together with its type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 483 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Frame Type — Packet type accepted by the LAG. The possible options are: • Admit All — Tagged and untagged packets are both accepted by the LAG. • Admit Tag Only — Only tagged packets are accepted by the LAG. • Admit Untagged Only — Only untagged packets are accepted on the LAG. – Ingress Filtering — Enable/disable Ingress filtering by the LAG. Ingress filtering discards packets that are destined to VLANs of which the specific LAG is not a member. – Native VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for untagged traffic to trunk ports, or select None. – Multicast VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for Multicast TV VLAN traffic on access ports, or select None. – Customer VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for customer ports, or select None. Assigning LAGs to VLAN Groups Using CLI Commands Refer to Table 14-2 for a list of the LAG to VLAN CLI commands.484 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol Groups Protocol groups are based on protocol-based VLANs. Protocol-based VLANs Untagged frames received on a VLAN-aware switch can be classified by methods others than source port, such as data-link-layer protocol identification. This classification method is referred to as protocol-based VLANs. Protocol-based VLANs are useful for isolating Layer 2 traffic of various Layer 3 protocols. If, for example, a switch serves IP stations and IPX stations that communicate with a single VLAN-unaware server, without using protocol-based VLANs, all the Layer 2 Broadcast traffic would reach all the stations. With protocol-based VLANs, the switch can forward incoming traffic from the server to stations in a specific VLAN only. Protocol-based VLANs are only available on General ports. Classification rules are set on a per-port basis, and may be sensitive to the frame's encapsulation. The default encapsulation assumed is Ethernet. On each port, a user can define associations between groups of data-link layer protocols and ports. For each group/port combination, the user may set the VLAN to which frames incoming on that port will be classified if they belong to any of the protocols in the group. Several protocol-groups may be associated to a single port, and a protocol group may be assigned to multiple ports, if so desired. It is not guaranteed that the VLAN to which the frame is classified exists in the system, or is active on that port. Restrictions The following frames (packet) types are supported: Ethernet, RFC 1042, and LLC Other. There may be dependencies between protocols and encapsulations, and specifying one protocol may automatically add additional protocols to the protocol-group, such as specifying IP implies ARP and vice-versa. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 485 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Similarly, there may be implied dependencies between encapsulations, so that specifying an encapsulation implies defining the protocol group for related encapsulations. An example of this is specifying the Ethernet encapsulation, even by default, implies IEEE802 encapsulation, as per RFC 1042. The following standards are relevant: • IEEE802.1V defines VLAN assignment by protocol type. • IETF RFC 10-2 defines a standard for the transmission of IP datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks Defining Protocol Groups Define protocol groups in two steps: 1 Define a protocol group by assigning one or more protocols to the group and giving it a protocol-group ID (any integer), using the Protocol Group pages. 2 Associate the group with a desired VLAN classification, per port, using the Protocol Port pages.486 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define a protocol group: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Protocol Group in the tree view to display the Protocol Group: Summary page. Figure 14-5. Protocol Group: Summary The currently-defined protocol groups are displayed. 2 To add a new protocol group, click Add, and enter the fields: – Frame Type — Select a frame type to be accepted in the protocol group. – Protocol Value — Select a protocol name. or – Ethernet-Based Protocol Value (0600 - FFFF) — Enter the Ethernet protocol group type. – Protocol Group ID — Assign a protocol group ID number.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 487 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining VLAN Protocol Groups Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining VLAN Protocol groups. The following is a sample of the CLI commands: Table 14-3. VLAN Protocol Groups CLI Commands CLI Command Description map protocol protocol [encapsulation] protocolsgroup group no map protocol protocol [encapsulation] Maps a protocol to a protocol group. Protocol groups are used for protocolbased VLAN assignment. Use the no form of this command to delete a protocol from a group. console (config)# vlan database console (config-vlan)# map protocol ip protocols-group 213488 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol Port A protocol port is a port assigned to a particular protocol group. Traffic from particular types of frames may be assigned to a protocol group, which has a port and VLAN associated with it. To add an interface to a protocol group: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Protocol Port in the tree view to display the Protocol Port: Summary page. Figure 14-6. Protocol Port: Summary A list of previously-defined protocol groups is displayed. 2 To assign an interface to a protocol group, click Add, and enter the fields: – Interface — Port or LAG number to be added to a protocol group. – Group ID — Select a protocol group ID to which the interface is added. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 489 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol ports can either be attached to aVLAN ID or a VLAN name. – VLAN ID (1- 4094) —Check and enter a VLAN ID. or – VLAN Name — Check and enter a VLAN name. Defining Protocol Ports Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining protocol ports. The following is a sample of the CLI commands: Table 14-4. Protocol Port CLI Commands CLI Command Description switchport general map protocols-group group vlan vlan-id no switchport general map protocols-group group Sets a protocol-based classification rule. Use the no form of this command to delete a classification. console (config-if)# switchport general map protocolsgroup 1 vlan 8490 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GVRP Parameters GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) is provided for automatic distribution of VLAN membership information among VLAN-aware bridges. GVRP enables VLAN-aware bridges to automatically learn VLANs-to-bridgeports mapping, without having to individually configure each bridge and register VLAN membership. To ensure the correct operation of the GVRP protocol, it is advised to set the maximum number of GVRP VLANs equal to a value which significantly exceeds: – The number of all static VLANs both currently configured and expected to be configured. – The number of all dynamic VLANs participating in GVRP, both currently configured (initial number of dynamic GVRP VLANs is 128) and expected to be configured. To set GVRP parameters: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > GVRP Parameters in the tree view to display the GVRP Parameters: Summary page. Figure 14-7. GVRP Global Parameters 2 Enable/disable GVRP on the device in the GVRP Global Status field.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 491 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Check Unit ID and select a unit ID to view ports on the unit, or select LAGs to view the LAGs in the system. 4 To set GVRP for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Specifies port or LAG for editing GVRP settings. – GVRP State — Enable/disable GVRP on the interface. – Dynamic VLAN Creation — Enable/disable Dynamic VLAN creation on the interface. – GVRP Registration — Enable/disable VLAN registration through GVRP on the interface. NOTE: GVRP functions only on ports in switchport general mode. If you enable it on another type of port, GVRP does not function. Configuring GVRP Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring GVRP as displayed in the GVRP Global Parameters page. Table 14-5. GVRP Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description gvrp enable no gvrp enable In Global Configuration mode, this command enables GVRP globally. In Interface Configuration mode, it enables GVRP on the interface. Use the no form of this command to disable GVRP on the device. gvrp vlan-creation-forbid no gvrp vlan-creation-forbid Enables or disables dynamic VLAN creation. Use the no form of this command to enable dynamic VLAN creation or modification. gvrp registration-forbid no gvrp registration-forbid De-registers all dynamic VLANs, and prevents dynamic VLAN registration on the port. Use the no form of this command to allow dynamic registration of VLANs on a port.492 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY show gvrp configuration [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays GVRP configuration information, including timer values, whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation is enabled, and which ports are running GVRP. show gvrp error-statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays GVRP error statistics. show gvrp statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays GVRP statistics. clear gvrp statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Clears all the GVRP statistics information. Table 14-5. GVRP Global Parameters CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 493 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console(config)# gvrp enable console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# gvrp enable console(config-if)# gvrp vlan-creation-forbid console(config-if)# gvrp registration-forbid console(config-if)# end console# show gvrp configuration GVRP Feature is currently Disabled on the device. Maximum VLANs: 4094 Port(s) GVRP-Status Registration Dynamic VLAN Timers(milliseconds) Creation Join Leave Leave All -------- ----------- ------------ ------------ ---- ----- -------- gi1/0/1 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/2 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/3 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/4 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/5 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/6 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/7 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/8 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/9 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000494 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Private VLAN Private VLANs (PVLANs) provide Layer 2 isolation between ports that share the same Broadcast domain, or in other words, they create a point-to-multipoint Broadcast domain. The ports can be located anywhere in the Layer 2 network, as opposed to protected ports which must be in the same stack. The switch ports can be members of a Private VLAN (PVLAN) in the following membership types: • Promiscuous ports that can communicate with all ports of the same PVLAN, including the isolated ports of the same PVLAN. • Isolated ports that have complete Layer 2-isolation from the other ports within the same PVLAN, but not from the promiscuous ports. Isolated ports can communicate with promiscuous ports. The PVLAN entity is implemented by allocating the following VLANs per PVLAN: • Primary VLAN: Carries traffic from promiscuous ports. • Isolated VLAN: Carries traffic from isolated ports.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 495 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure PVLANs: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Private VLAN in the tree view to display the Private VLAN: Summary page. Figure 14-8. Private VLAN: Summary The previously-defined private VLANs are displayed. 2 To query by Associated Primary VLAN ID, check that field, enter a VLAN ID, and click Query. The associated VLANs are displayed. 3 To define a private VLAN, click Assign, and enter the fields: – Private VLAN ID — Select a VLAN to be assigned. – Private VLAN Type — Select one of the possible options: • Primary — Traffic from promiscuous ports flow through this type of VLAN. This is for the internet or shared servers. • Isolated —Traffic from isolated ports flow through this type of VLAN.496 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Associate Primary VLAN — If the Private VLAN type is Isolated, check to associate the isolated VLAN with a primary VLAN, thus allowing traffic between isolated and promiscuous ports. – Primary VLAN ID — Select a VLAN to be associated with the isolated VLAN. 4 To assign ports to the private VLAN, click Membership. 5 Select a Primary VLAN ID. 6 Select a Isolated VLAN ID. 7 Select the ports to be assigned to each VLAN, and assign each port/LAG a port type in the Admin row of ports/LAGs. The possible options are: – H - Host (Isolated) — Port is isolated. – P - Promiscuous — Port is promiscuous. – C - Conditional (operational state depends on Port VLAN Mode) — Port receives the Port VLAN type set in the VLAN Port Settings page. See "Port Modes" on page 469 for a description of the various port modes. Configuring Private VLAN Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring private VLANs. Table 14-6. Private VLAN CLI Commands CLI Command Description private-vlan {primary|isolated} no private-vlan Configures a private VLAN. Use the no form of this command to return the VLAN to normal VLAN configuration. private-vlan association [add|remove] secondary-vlanlist no private-vlan association Configures the association between the primary VLAN and the secondary VLANs. Use the no form of this command to remove the association.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 497 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id [add|remove] secondary-vlanlist no switchport private-vlan mapping Configures the VLANs of the privatevlan promiscuous port. Use the no form of this command to reset to default switchport private-vlan hostassociation primary-vlan-id secondary-vlan-id no switchport private-vlan host-association Configures the VLANs of the privatevlan host port. Use the no form of this command to reset to default. show vlan private-vlan [tag vlan-id] Displays private VLAN information. console# show vlan private-vlan Primary Secondary Type Ports -------- --------- ---------- --------------------- 20 Primary gi1/0/1-2 20 201 Isolated gi1/0/1-8 20 202 Isolated gi1/0/1-2 gi1/09-18 20 203 Isolated gi1/0/1-2 gi1/0/19-21 30 Primary gi1/0/22 30 301 Isolated gi1/0/22-28 30 302 Isolated gi1/0/22, gi1/0/29-38 30 303 Isolated gi1/0/22, gi1/0/39-41 Table 14-6. Private VLAN CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description498 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Voice VLAN The Voice VLAN feature enables you to enhance VoIP service by configuring ports to carry IP-voice traffic from IP phones on a specific VLAN. This VLAN is configured with a QoS profile that ensures high voice quality. Equipment, such as VOIP phones, transmits IP traffic with a pre-configured Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) prefix in the source MAC address. This enables the switch to dynamically identify ports connected to the VoIP equipment and automatically add these ports to the Voice VLAN. IP phones use one of the following modes, both of which are supported by the device: • Use only tagged packets for all communications. • Initially use untagged packets while retrieving the initial IP address through DHCP. Then the phone uses the Voice VLAN and starts sending tagged VoIP packets. Non-VoIP traffic is dropped from the Voice VLAN when the device is in Auto Voice VLAN secured mode. The Voice VLAN feature also provides QoS actions to VoIP, ensuring that the quality of voice does not deteriorate if the IP traffic is received unevenly. To summarize, when Voice VLAN is enabled and configured, and VoIP equipment is connected to one of the switch ports, the VoIP traffic triggers the switch’s Voice VLAN feature to add this port to the Voice VLAN (a VLAN that usually carries only voice traffic), and to assign traffic from this port a specific QoS profile, ensuring high voice quality. The device supports a single voice VLAN. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 499 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Properties To set voice VLAN parameters that apply to the voice VLAN on the device: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Properties in the tree view to display the Properties page. Figure 14-9. Properties 2 Enter the fields: – Voice VLAN State — Select Enable to use the Voice VLAN feature on the device. – Voice VLAN ID — Select the VLAN that is to be the voice VLAN. – Class of Service — Select to add a CoS level to untagged packets, received on the voice VLAN. The possible values are 0 to 7, where 7 is the highest priority. 0 is used as a best-effort, and is invoked automatically when no other value has been set. – Remark CoS — Displays whether the Remark CoS is enabled.500 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Voice VLAN Aging Time — Enter the interval of time after which the port exits the voice VLAN, if no voice packets are received. The aging time starts after the MAC address is aged out from the Dynamic MAC Address table. The default time is 300 sec. For more information on defining MAC address age out time, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427. Defining Voice VLAN Properties Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining voice VLAN properties. Table 14-7. Voice VLAN Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description voice vlan enable no voice vlan enable Enables automatic voice VLAN configuration for a port. Use the no form of this command to disable automatic voice VLAN configuration. voice vlan id vlan-id no voice vlan id Enables the voice VLAN and configures the voice VLAN ID in Global Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable voice VLAN. voice vlan cos cos-queue [remark] no voice vlan cos Sets the voice VLAN Class of Service (CoS) queue. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. voice vlan aging-timeout minutes no voice aging-timeout Sets the voice VLAN aging timeout in Global Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show voice vlan [[gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Use the show voice vlan EXEC command to display the voice VLAN status.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 501 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: console# show voice vlan Aging timeout: OUI table 1440 minutes MAC Address - Prefix Description 00:E0:BB 3COM 00:03:6B Cisco 00:E0:75 Veritel 00:D0:1E Pingtel 00:01:E3 Siemens 00:60:B9 NEC/Philips 00:0F:E2 Huawei-3COM 00:09:6E Avaya Voice VLAN VLAN ID: 8 CoS: 6 Remark: Yes Interface Enabled Secure Activated --------- -------- ------ --------- gi1/0/1 Yes Yes Yes gi1/0/2 Yes Yes Yes gi1/0/3 Yes Yes Yes gi1/0/4 Yes Yes Yes502 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Setting To configure voice VLAN ports properties: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port Setting in the tree view to display the Port Setting: Summary page. Figure 14-10. Voice VLAN Port Setting A list of the ports and their voice VLAN settings is displayed. 2 To modify the voice VLAN settings for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Enter the specific port or LAG to which the Voice VLAN settings are applied. – Voice VLAN Mode — Select the Voice VLAN mode. The possible options are: Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 503 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • None— Disables the selected port/LAG on the Voice VLAN. This is the default. • Static — Statically adds the port to the Voice VLAN. This is usually done for VoIP uplink ports that connect the device to VoIP PBX, for example. • Auto — Indicates that if traffic with an IP phone MAC address is transmitted on the port/LAG, the port/LAG joins the Voice VLAN. The port/LAG is aged out of the voice VLAN if the IP phone’s MAC address (with an OUI prefix) is aged out. If the MAC address of the IP phones OUI was added manually to a port/LAG in the voice VLAN, the user cannot add it to the Voice VLAN in Auto mode, only in Static mode. – Voice VLAN Security — Enable/disable security on the interface. Security ensures that packets arriving with an unrecognized OUI are dropped (for example data packets). Defining Voice VLAN Port Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining Voice VLAN port settings. Table 14-8. Voice VLAN Port Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description voice vlan enable no voice vlan enable Enables automatic voice VLAN configuration on a port. Use the no form of this command to disable automatic voice VLAN configuration on a port. voice vlan secure no voice vlan secure Configures secure mode for the voice VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable secure mode.504 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: OUI Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUIs) are a 24-bit numbers assigned by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Incorporated (IEEE) Registration Authority to equipment manufacturers. Up to 16 OUIs can be stored on the switch. Nine specific OUIs of popular VoIP phones manufacturers are stored by default. Traffic from each type of IP phone contains the OUI for the phone manufacturer. When frames are received, in which the source MAC address’s first three octets match one of the OUIs in the OUI list, the port on which they are received is automatically assigned to the Voice VLAN. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# voice vlan enable console(config-if)# voice vlan secure console(config-if)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 505 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To view existing OUIs, and add new OUIs: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI in the tree view to display the OUI Summary. Figure 14-11. OUI: Summary The previously-defined OUIs are displayed. 2 To add a new OUI, click Add, and enter the fields: – Telephony OUI — Enter a new OUI. – Description — Enter an OUI description up to 32 characters. 506 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Voice VLAN OUIs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining Voice VLAN OUIs. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 14-9. Voice VLAN OUIs CLI Commands CLI Command Description voice vlan oui-table {add mac-address-prefix|remove mac-address-prefix} [text] no voice vlan oui-table Configures the voice OUI table. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# voice vlan oui-table add 00:E0:BB console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 507 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY508 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 15 Link Aggregation This section describes link aggregation of ports. It contains the following topics: • Link Aggregation Overview • LACP Parameters • LAG MembershipDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 509 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Link Aggregation Overview Link Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single LAG (aggregated group). Aggregating ports multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy. The device supports the following types of LAGs: • Static LAGs — Manually-configured LAGs. • Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs — LACP LAGs negotiate aggregating a port’s links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establishes a LAG between them. When you aggregate ports, the ports and LAG must fulfill the following conditions: • All ports within a LAG must be the same media type. • A VLAN is not configured on the port. • The port is not assigned to another LAG. • Auto-negotiation mode is not configured on the port. • The port is in full-duplex mode. • All ports in the LAG have the same ingress filtering and tagged modes. • All ports in the LAG have the same back pressure and flow control modes. • All ports in the LAG have the same priority. • All ports in the LAG have the same transceiver type. • The device supports up to 32 LAGs, and eight ports in each LAG. • Ports can be configured as LACP ports only if the ports are not part of a previously configured LAG.510 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Ports added to a LAG lose their individual port configuration. When ports are removed from the LAG, the original port configuration is applied to the ports. The device uses a hash function to assign packets to a LAG member. The hash function statistically load-balances the aggregated link members. The device considers an Aggregated Link to be a single logical port. Aggregate ports can be linked into link-aggregation port-groups. Each group comprises ports with the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG can contain different media types if the ports are operating at the same speed. Aggregated links can be manually or automatically configured by enabling LACP on the relevant links.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 511 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LACP Parameters To define LACP LAGs, configure LACP global and port parameters, such as LACP system priority, timeout, and port priority. With all factors equal, when the LAG is configured with more candidate ports than the maximum number of active ports allowed, the switch activates the highest priority candidate ports from the dynamic LAG. To set LACP parameters: 1 Click Switching > Link Aggregation > LACP Parameters in the tree view to display the LACP Parameters page. Figure 15-1. LACP Parameters The LACP parameters for all ports are displayed. 2 Enter the global LACP System Priority (1-65535) value that determines which candidate ports will become members of the LAG. The page displays the LACP settings of the ports on the selected unit. 3 To modify LACP parameters for a particular port, click Edit, and enter the following fields: – Port — Select the port for which timeout and priority values are assigned.512 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – LACP Port Priority (1-65535) — Enter the LACP priority value for the port. – LACP Timeout — Select the rate of periodic transmissions of LACP PDUs. The possible options are: • Long — Slow transmission rate • Short — Fast transmission rate Configuring LACP Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring LACP parameters as displayed in the LACP Parameters page. Table 15-1. LACP Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description lacp system-priority value Configures the system priority. lacp port-priority value Configures the priority value for physical ports. lacp timeout{long|short} Assigns an administrative LACP timeout. show lacp [gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net] port-number [parameters|statistics|protocolstate] Displays LACP information for ethernet ports.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 513 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console (config)# lacp system-priority 120 console (config)# interface gi1/0/11 console (config-if)# lacp port-priority 247 console (config-if)# lacp timeout long console (config-if)# end console# show lacp gi1/0/11 statistics Port gi1/0/11 LACP Statistics: LACP PDUs sent:2 LACP PDUs received:2514 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LAG Membership Each device supports up to 32 LAGs per system, and eight ports per LAG. When you add a port to a LAG, the port acquires the LAG’s properties. If the port cannot be configured with the LAG’s properties, it is not added to the LAG and an error message is generated. If the first port joining the LAG cannot be configured with the LAG settings, the port is added to the LAG, using the port default settings, and an error message is generated. Since this is the only port in the LAG, the entire LAG operates with the port’s settings, instead of the LAG’s defined settings. To assign ports to LAGs: 1 Click Switching Link Aggregation LAG Membership in the tree view to display the LAG Membership: Summary page. Figure 15-2. LAG Membership: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 515 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The LACP and static LAGs on each unit are displayed along with their member ports. This page displays the following fields: – LACP — Aggregates the port to a LAG, using LACP. – LAG — Adds a port to a LAG, and indicates the specific LAG to which the port belongs. 2 Click Edit to change the status of a port in a LAG. 3 Select the LAG. 4 In the LACP row (the first row), toggle the button under the port number to assign either the LACP or the static LAG. 5 In the LAG row (the second row), toggle the button to a specific number to aggregate or remove the port to that LAG number. Adding Ports to LAGs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for assigning ports to LAGs as displayed in the LAG Membership pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 15-2. LAG Membership CLI Commands CLI Command Description channel-group LAG-number mode {on|auto} no channel-group Associates a port with a port-channel with or without a LACP operation. Use the no form of this command to remove the channel-group configuration from the interface. show interfaces portchannel [LAG-number] Displays port-channel information for all port channels or for a specific port channel. console(config)# interface gi1/0/11 console(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode on516 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 16 Multicast This chapter describes Multicast support on the device. It contains the following topics: • Multicast Support Overview • Global Parameters • Bridge Multicast Groups • Bridge Multicast Forward All • IGMP Snooping • Unregistered Multicast • Multicast TV VLAN • Multicast TV VLAN MappingDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 517 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast Support Overview Multicast forwarding enables a single packet to be forwarded to multiple destinations. Layer 2 Multicast service is based on a Layer 2 device receiving a single packet addressed to a specific Multicast address. Multicast forwarding creates copies of the packet, and transmits the packets to the relevant ports. There are two types of Multicast groups: • Registered Multicast Group — When traffic addressed to a registered Multicast group is received, it is handled according to its entry in the Multicast Filtering Database and forwarded only to the registered ports. • Unregistered Multicast Group — If traffic addressed to an unregistered Multicast group is received, it is handled by a special entry in the Multicast Filtering Database. The default setting of this is to flood all such traffic (traffic in unregistered Multicast groups). The device supports: • Forwarding L2 Multicast Packets — Forwards Layer 2 Multicast packets. Layer 2 Multicast filtering is enabled by default, and is not user-configurable. • Filtering L2 Multicast Packets — Forwards Layer 2 packets to interfaces. If Multicast filtering is disabled, Multicast packets are flooded to all relevant ports. NOTE: The system supports Multicast filtering for 256 Multicast groups. Layer 2 Switching Layer 2 switching forwards Multicast packets to all relevant VLAN ports by default, managing the packet as a single Multicast transmission. While Multicast traffic forwarding is effective, it is not optimal, as irrelevant ports also receive the Multicast packets. The excess packets cause increased network traffic. Multicast forwarding filters enable forwarding of Layer 2 packets to a subset of ports instead of to all ports.518 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) adds IGMP packets to Multicast traffic. When IGMP Snooping is enabled globally, all IGMP packets are forwarded to the CPU. The CPU analyzes the incoming packets and determines: • Which ports want to join which Multicast groups. • Which ports have Multicast routers generating IGMP queries. • What routing protocols are forwarding packets and Multicast traffic. Ports requesting to join a specific Multicast group issue an IGMP report, specifying that the Multicast group is accepting members. This results in the creation of an entry in the Multicast filtering database. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 519 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Parameters To enable Multicast filtering and IGMP Snooping: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 16-1. Global Parameters 2 Enter the fields: – Bridge Multicast Filtering — Enable/disable Multicast filtering. Disabled is the default value. – IGMP Snooping Status — Enable/disable IGMP Snooping on the device. Disabled is the default value. 520 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Enabling Multicast Filtering and IGMP Snooping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling Multicast Filtering and IGMP snooping as displayed on the Global Parameters page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-1. Multicast Filtering and Snooping CLI Commands CLI Command Description bridge multicast filtering no bridge multicast filtering Enables filtering of Multicast addresses. Use the no form of this command to disable multicast address filtering. ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Enables Internet Group Membership Protocol (IGMP) snooping. Use the no form of this command to disable IGMP snooping. console(config)# bridge multicast filtering console(config)# ip igmp snoopingDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 521 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Bridge Multicast Groups The Bridge Multicast Group: Summary page displays the ports and LAGs attached to a Multicast service group and the manner in which the port or LAG joined it. To add and configure a Multicast group: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Bridge Multicast Group in the tree view to display the Bridge Multicast Group: Summary page. Figure 16-2. Bridge Multicast Group: Summary The ports and LAGs in the selected Multicast Group are displayed.522 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Select a VLAN and enter the Multicast group IP address in Bridge Multicast Address. Two rows of ports and LAGs are displayed: for each unit – Static — Displays available static ports/LAGs. These port/LAGs can be included or excluded from the Multicast groups, as described below. – Current — Displays status of ports/LAGs in the Multicast group, as actually applied. 3 For each port in the VLAN, toggle to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this group. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN. 4 To add a new Multicast group, click Add, and enter the fields: – VLAN ID — Select the VLAN ID to set its forwarding method. – New Bridge IP Multicast — Enter a Multicast group IP address. – New Bridge MAC Multicast — Enter a Multicast group MAC address. – Ports — Select the ports to be added to a Multicast service. Toggle a port to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this service. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN. – LAGs — Select the LAGs to be added to a Multicast service. Toggle a LAG to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static LAG. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this service. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN. The following table describes the codes used for the interface in this page: Table 16-2. IGMP Port/LAG Members Table Control Settings Port Control Definition S Attaches the port to the Multicast group as static member in the static row. The port/LAG has joined the Multicast group statically in the current row. F Forbidden. The port cannot belong to the Multicast group. Blank The port is not attached to a Multicast group, but it is also not forbidden.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 523 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Managing Bridge Multicast Groups Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for managing Multicast service members as displayed in the Bridge Multicast Group pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-3. Bridge Multicast Group CLI Commands CLI Command Description bridge multicast address {macmulticast-address|ip-multicastaddress} no bridge multicast filtering Registers MAC-layer Multicast addresses to the bridge table, and adds static ports to the group. Use the no form of this command to disable Multicast address filtering. bridge multicast forbidden address {mac-multicastaddress|ip-multicastaddress}[add|remove] {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] interface-list|portchannel LAG-number-list} no bridge multicast forbidden address {mac-multicast-address} Forbids adding a specific Multicast address to specific ports. Use the no form of this command to return to default Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show bridge multicast addresstable [vlan vlan-id] [address {mac-multicast-address|ipmulticast-address}] [format ip|mac] Displays Multicast MAC address table information. console(config-if)# bridge multicast address 0100.5e02.0203 add gi1/0/11,gi1/0/12 console(config-if)# end console # show bridge multicast address-table VLAN MAC Address Type Ports ---- ----------- ----- ---------- 1 0100.5e02.0203 static gi1/0/11, gigi1/0/12 Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:524 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN MAC Address Ports ---- ----------- ---------- 1 0100.5e02.0203 gi1/0/8 19 0100.5e02.0208 gi1/0/8 console # show bridge multicast address-table format ip VLAN IP Address Type Ports ---- ----------- ----- ---------- 1 224-239.130|2.2.3 static gi1/0/11, gi1/0/12 Forbidden ports for multicast addresses: VLAN IP Address Ports ---- ----------- ---------- 1 224-239.130|2.2.3 gi1/0/8Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 525 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Bridge Multicast Forward All Use the BridgeMulticast Forward All page to attach ports or LAGs to a device that is attached to a neighboring Multicast router/switch. After IGMP Snooping is enabled, Multicast packets are forwarded to the appropriate port or VLAN. To attach interfaces to a Multicast service: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Bridge Multicast Forward All in the tree view to display the Bridge Multicast Forward All page. Figure 16-3. Bridge Multicast Forward All 2 Select a unit/VLAN and click on the ports and LAGs to be attached to the Multicast service. Toggle a port to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to add it as a Forbidden port. Two rows of ports and LAGs are displayed:526 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Static — Displays available static ports/LAGs. These port/LAGs can be included or excluded from the Multicast groups, as described below. – Current — Displays status of ports/LAGs, as actually applied, in the Multicast group. Managing LAGs and Ports Attached to Multicast Routers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for managing LAGs and ports attached to Multicast routers as displayed on the Bridge Multicast Forward All page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-4. Managing LAGs and Ports Attached to Multicast Routers CLI Commands CLI Command Description show bridge multicast filtering vlan-id Displays the Multicast filtering configuration. bridge multicast forward-all {add|remove} {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] interface-list|portchannel LAG-number-list} Enables forwarding of all Multicast packets on a port. Use the no form of this command to return to default. console(config)# interface vlan 1 console(config-if)# bridge multicast forward-all add gi1/0/3 console(config-if)# end console# show bridge multicast filtering 1 Filtering: Enabled VLAN: Forward-All Port Static Status ------- ----------------- ----------- gi1/0/11 Forbidden Filter gi1/0/12 Forward Forward(s) gi1/0/13 - Forward(d)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 527 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping can be enabled globally, as described in the Global Parameters page. It can also be enabled per VLAN to support selective IPv4 Multicast forwarding. In this case, Bridge Multicast filtering must also be enabled. By default, a Layer 2 switch forwards Multicast frames to all ports of the relevant VLAN, essentially treating the frame as if it were a Broadcast. When IGMP Snooping is enabled per VLAN, the switch forwards Multicast frames to ports that have registered as Multicast clients in the VLAN. NOTE: The switch supports IGMP Snooping only on static VLANs. It does not support IGMP Snooping on dynamic VLANs.528 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The IGMP Snooping Querier is used to support a Layer 2 Multicast domain of snooping switches in the absence of a Multicast router, for example, where Multicast content is provided by a local server, but the router (if one exists) on that network does not support Multicast. There should only be a single IGMP Querier in a Layer 2 Multicast domain. The switch supports standards-based IGMP Querier election when more than one IGMP Querier is present in the domain. The speed of IGMP Querier activity should be aligned with the IGMPsnooping-enabled switches. Queries should be sent at a rate that is aligned to the snooping table aging time. If queries are sent at a rate lower than the aging time, the subscriber cannot receive the Multicast packets. To enable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching Multicast Support IGMP Snooping in the tree view to display the IGMP Snooping page. Figure 16-4. IGMP Snooping The IGMP snooping information for the VLANs on the switch is displayed. 2 To enable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN, click Edit and select the VLAN from the VLAN ID drop down menu.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 529 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Enter the fields: • IGMP Snooping Status — Enable/disable the monitoring of network traffic to determine which hosts have asked to be sent Multicast traffic. The switch performs IGMP snooping only if IGMP snooping and Bridge Multicast filtering are both globally enabled. • Operational IGMP Snooping Status — Displays whether IGMP Snooping is enabled. • MRouter Ports Auto Learn — Enables or disables auto learning of the ports to which the Mrouter is connected. • Query Robustness (1-7) — Enter the Robustness variable value to be used. The Robustness value enables tuning for the expected packet loss on a link. If a link is expected to have losses, the Robustness Value may be increased. • Operational Query Robustness — Displays the robustness variable sent by the elected querier. • Query Interval (30-18000) — Enter the interval between general queries sent by the querier . • Operational Query Interval — The time interval in seconds between general queries sent by the elected querier • Query Max Response Interval (5-20) — Enter the amount of time in which a host should respond to a query. • Operational Query Max Response Interval — Displays the actual delay. • Last Member Query Counter (1-7) — Enter the number of IGMP group-specific queries sent before the switch assumes there are no local members. To use the default, check Use Default. • Operational Last Member Query Counter — Displays the operational value of the Last Member Query counter. • Last Member Query Interval (100-25500)— Enter the time between two consecutive group-specific queries that are sent by the querier. • Operational Last Member Query Interval— Displays the Last Member Query Interval sent by the elected querier. • Intermediate Leave — Enable/disable an immediate timeout period. The default timeout is 10 seconds.530 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • IGMP Querier Status — Enables or disables the IGMP Querier. The IGMP Querier simulates the behavior of a Multicast router, enabling snooping of the Layer 2 Multicast domain even though there is no Multicast router. • Querier Source IP Address — Select the IP address of the IGMP Querier. Use either the VLAN’s IP address or define a unique IP address that will be used as a source address of the querier. • Operational Source Querier IP Address — Operational Querier IP address. Configuring IGMP Snooping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IGMP snooping on a VLAN: Table 16-5. IGMP Snooping CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid Enables IGMP snooping on a specific VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface. ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter learn pim-dvmrp no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid mrouter learn pim-dvmrp Enables automatic learning of Multicast router ports in the context of a specific VLAN. Use the no form of this command to remove the configuration. ip igmp robustness count no ip igmp robustness Changes the value of the IGMP robustness variable. Use the no format of the command to return to default. ip igmp query-interval seconds no ip igmp query-interval Configures the Query interval. Use the no format of the command to return to default.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 531 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ip igmp query-max-responsetime seconds no ip igmp query-max-responsetime Configures the Query Maximum Response time. Use the no format of the command to return to default. ip igmp last-member-querycount count no ip igmp last-member-querycount Configures the Last Member Query Counter. Use the no format of the command to return to default. ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid immediate-leave Enables the IGMP Snooping Immediate-Leave processing on a VLAN. Use the no format of the command to disable IGMP Snooping ImmediateLeave processing. ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id querier no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid querier Enables the IGMP querier on a specific VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable the IGMP querier on a VLAN interface. ip igmp snooping querier address source-ip-address no ip igmp snooping querier address Defines the source IP address that the IGMP Snooping querier would use. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show ip igmp snooping groups [vlan vlan-id] [address ipmulticast-address] Displays the Multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping. show ip igmp snooping interface vlan-id Displays IGMP snooping configuration. show ip igmp snooping mrouter [interface vlan-id] Displays information about dynamically learned Multicast router interfaces. Table 16-5. IGMP Snooping CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description532 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console (config)# ip igmp snooping console (config)# interface vlan 1 console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping mrouter learn-pim-dvmrp console (config)# interface vlan 1 console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping leave-time-out 60 console # do show ip igmp snooping groups VLAN IP Address Querier Ports ---- ---------- ------ ---------------------- 1 224-239.130 |2.2.3 Yes gi1/0/1, gi1/0/2 console # show ip igmp snooping interface 1 IGMP Snooping is globaly disabled IGMP Snooping admin: Enabled IGMP Snooping oper mode: Disabled Routers IGMP version: 3 IGMP snooping querier admin: disabled IGMP snooping querier oper: disabled IGMP snooping querier address admin: IGMP snooping querier address oper: 10.5.234.232 IGMP snooping robustness: admin 2 oper 2 IGMP snooping query interval: admin 125 sec oper 125 sec IGMP snooping query maximum response: admin 10 sec oper 10 sec IGMP snooping last member query counter: admin 2 oper 2 IGMP snooping last member query interval: admin 1000 msec oper 1000 msec IGMP snooping last immediate leave: disable Automatic learning of Multicast router ports is enabledDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 533 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Unregistered Multicast Multicast frames are generally forwarded to all ports in the VLAN. If IGMP Snooping is enabled, the device learns about the existence of Multicast groups and tracks which ports have joined what Multicast group. Multicast groups can also be statically enabled. This enables the device to forward the Multicast frames (from a registered Multicast group) only to ports that are registered to that Multicast group. Traffic from unregistered Multicast groups, which are the groups that are not known to the device, can either be filtered or forwarded. After a port has been set to Forwarding/Filtering, its configuration is valid for any VLAN of which it is a member (or will be a member of). To set the action for unregistered Multicast groups on a port: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Unregistered Multicast in the tree view to display the Unregistered Multicast: Summary page. Figure 16-5. Unregistered Multicast: Summary534 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The action for each port is displayed. 2 To modify the forwarding action for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields. • Interface — Select a port or LAG. • Unregistered Multicast — Select the forwarding status of the selected interface. The possible options are: • Forwarding — Enables forwarding of unregistered Multicast frames on the selected port or port-channel. • Filtering — Enables filtering of unregistered Multicast frames on the selected VLAN interface. Configuring Unregistered Multicast Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Unregistered Multicast on the device: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-6. Unregistered Multicast CLI Commands CLI Command Description bridge multicast unregistered Configures the forwarding state of unregistered multicast addresses. show bridge multicast unregistered Displays the unregistered multicast filtering configuration. console # show bridge multicast unregistered Port Unregistered ------- -------- gi1/0/1 Forward gi1/0/2 Filter gi1/0/3 FilterDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 535 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast TV VLAN This section describes the Multicast TV VLAN feature. It contains the following sections: • Multicast TV VLAN Overview • Multicast TV VLAN Membership • Multicast TV VLAN Mapping Multicast TV VLAN Overview The Multicast TV VLAN feature provides the ability to supply Multicast transmissions to Layer 2-isolated subscribers, without replicating the Multicast transmissions for all subscriber VLANs. The subscribers are the only receivers of the Multicast transmissions. • A Multicast TV VLAN can be defined for an Access port (a port that is in Access mode for VLAN membership). • All static VLANs are permitted to be a Multicast-TV VLAN. • The configuration is performed per port. One or more IP Multicast address groups can be associated with a Multicast VLAN. The source port must belong to the Multicast VLAN. Source and receiver ports do not have to be members of the same VLAN. An end port is defined as a receiver port for the Multicast VLAN. Receiving ports can belong to a single user VLAN and additionally to one Multicast VLAN. The receiver port can be an access member in any VLAN, but not in the defined Multicast VLAN. In Multicast VLAN, the receiver port can only receive traffic and not send traffic on it. Receivers of same Multicast VLAN are isolated in different User (Access port) VLANs and therefore isolated from each other. If a Multicast-TV VLAN is defined on an access port, then: • The access port joins the Multicast-TV VLAN. • The Multicast-TV VLAN on the receiver port is always untagged. • The acceptable frame type of the port is set to Admit Untagged Only.536 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast TV VLAN Membership To view Multicast TV VLANs: • Click Switching > Multicast Support > Multicast TV VLAN Membership in the tree view to display the Multicast TV VLAN Membership page. Figure 16-6. Multicast TV VLAN Membership The receiver and transceiver ports in the selected TV VLAN are displayed. Displaying Multicast TV VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for displaying Multicast TV VLAN membership: Table 16-7. Multicast TV VLAN Membership CLI Commands CLI Command Description show vlan multicast-tv vlan vlan-id Displays information on the source ports and receiver ports of multicast-TV VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 537 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Multicast TV VLAN Mapping To set the Multicast Group IP address for a TV VLAN: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Multicast TV VLAN Mapping in the tree view to display the Multicast TV VLAN Mapping: Summary page. Figure 16-7. Multicast TV VLAN Mapping: Summary The Multicast Group IP addresses for the selected TV VLAN are displayed. 2 To add the Multicast Group IP address for a VLAN, click Add, and enter the fields: • VLAN ID — Enter a VLAN ID. console # show vlan multicast-tv vlan 1 Source Ports ------------------------------------- gi1/0/8, gi1/0/9 Receiver Ports ------------------------------------- gi2/0/1-18, gi3/0/1-18, gi4/0/1-18538 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Multicast Group IP Address — Enter the Multicast group IP address for which the IGMP Snooping is enabled. Mapping Multicast TV VLANs to IP Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for mapping Multicast TV VLANs to Multicast IP addresses: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-8. Unregistered Multicast CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id multicast-tv ip-multicast-address [count number] no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id multicast-tv ip-multicast-address [count number] Defines the Multicast IP addresses that are associated with a Multicast-TV VLAN. Use the no form of this command to remove all associations. show ip igmp snooping multicast-tv [vlan vlan-id] Displays the IP addresses associated with Multicast TV VLANs. console# show ip igmp snooping multicast-tv VLAN IP Address ---- ----------- 1000 239.255.0.0 1000 239.255.0.1 1000 239.255.0.2 1000 239.255.0.3 1000 239.255.0.4 1000 239.255.0.5Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 539 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY540 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 17 LLDP The section describes the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). It contains the following topics: • LLDP Overview • LLDP Properties • LLDP Port Settings • MED Network Policy • LLDP MED Port Settings • Neighbors InformationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 541 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP Overview The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables network managers to troubleshoot and enhance network management by discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. LLDP discovers network neighbors by standardizing methods for network devices to advertise themselves to other systems, and to store discovered information. Discovery information includes: • Device identification • Device capabilities • Device configuration The advertising device transmits multiple advertisement message sets in a single LAN packet. The multiple advertisement message sets are sent in the packet’s Type Length Value (TLV) field. LLDP devices must support chassis and port ID advertisements, as well as system name, system ID, system description, and system capability advertisements. LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) increases network flexibility by enabling various IP systems to co-exist on a single network, and provides the following features: • Detailed network topology information, including information on which devices are located on the network and where the devices are located, for example, which IP phone is connect to which port, which software is running on which switch, and which port is connected to which device. • Automatic deployment of policies over networks for: – QoS Policies – Voice VLANs • Emergency Call Service (E-911) via IP phone location information. • Troubleshooting information. LLDP MED sends network managers alerts for: – Port speed and duplex mode conflicts – QoS policy misconfigurations542 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP Properties To enable and configure LLDP: 1 Click System > LLDP > LLDP Properties in the tree view to display the LLDP Properties page. Figure 17-1. LLDP Properties The current LLDP properties are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Enable LLDP — Enable/disable LLDP on the device. – Updates Interval (5-32768) — Enter the rate at which LLDP advertisement updates are sent. – Hold Multiplier (2-10) — Enter the hold time to be sent in the LLDP update packets, as a multiple of the timer value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 543 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Reinitializing Delay (1-10) — Enter the minimum time, in seconds, that an LLDP port waits before reinitializing LLDP transmission. – Transmit Delay (1-8192) — Enter the amount of time that passes between successive LLDP frame transmissions, due to changes in the LLDP local systems MIB. To use the default values for any field, select Use Default.544 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring LLDP Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to set the fields in the LLDP Properties page. Table 17-1. LLDP Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp run no lldp run Enables enable LLDP. Use the no form of this command to disable LLDP. lldp timer seconds no lldp timer Specifies how often the software sends LLDP updates. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. lldp hold-multiplier number no lldp hold-multiplier Specifies the time that the receiving device should hold a Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) packet before discarding it. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. lldp reinit seconds no lldp reinit Specifies the minimum time an LLDP port will wait before reinitializing. Use the no form of this command to revert to the default setting. lldp tx-delay seconds no lldp tx-delay Specifies the delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 545 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# lldp run console(config)# lldp timer 30 console(config)# lldp hold-multiplier 3 console(config)# lldp reinit 4546 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP Port Settings LLDP configuration of a port includes activating LLDP notification on it, and selecting the optional TLVs that will be sent in the LLDP PDU, in addition to the mandatory ones. By setting these properties, it is possible to provide additional types of information to those network devices that support the LLDP. To configure LLDP per port: 1 Click System > LLDP > LLDP Port Settings in the tree view to display the LLDP Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 17-2. LLDP Port Settings: Summary LLDP settings for all ports are displayed. 2 To modify the LLDP settings for a port, click Edit and select the port to be configured. 3 Select the transmission type on which LLDP is to be configured in the State field. The possible options are: • Tx Only — Enables LLDP on transmitting LLDP packets only. • Rx Only — Enables LLDP on receiving LLDP packets only. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 547 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Tx & Rx — Enables LLDP on transmitting and receiving LLDP packets. • Disable — LLDP is disabled on the port. 4 Move the optional TLVs that the switch should advertise from the Available TLV list to the Optional TLV list. The TLVs advertise the following: – Port Description — Information about the port, including manufacturer, product name, and hardware/software version. – System Name — System's assigned name (in alpha-numeric format). This value equals the sysName object. – System Description — Description of the network entity (in alphanumeric format). This includes the system's name and versions of the hardware, operating system, and networking software supported by the switch. This value equals the sysDescr object. – System Capabilities — Primary functions of the switch, and whether or not these functions are enabled in the switch. The capabilities are indicated by two octets. Bits 0 through 7 indicate Other, Repeater, Bridge, WLAN AP, Router, Telephone, DOCSIS cable device, and station respectively. Bits 8 through 15 are reserved. – 802.3 MAC-PHY — Duplex and bit rate capability and the current duplex and bit rate settings of the sending device. It also advertises whether the current settings are due to auto-negotiation or manual configuration. An alternative way to select the TLVs is to select the Use Default field, in which case only mandatory TLVs are used. These are: Chassis subtype (MAC address), Port subtype (port number), and TTL (time-to-leave). 5 Enter the Management IP Address that is advertised from the interface. Check Use Default to use the default Management IP address.548 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring LLDP Port Settings Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to configure LLDP on ports. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 17-2. LLDP Port Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp transmit no lldp transmit Enables transmitting LLDP on an interface. Use the no form of this command to stop transmitting LLDP on an interface. lldp receive no lldp receive Enables receiving LLDP on an interface. Use the no form of this command to stop receiving LLDP on an interface. lldp optional-tlv tlv1 [tlv2 … tlv5] Specifies which optional TLVs from the basic set should be transmitted console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# lldp transmit console(config-if)# lldp receive console(config-if)# lldp optional-tlv port-descDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 549 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MED Network Policy An LLDP-MED network policy is a set of configuration settings that is identified by a network policy number. Policies are loaded into LLDP-MED TLVs, and sent to devices connected to the switch. A network policy instructs the connected device as to how to send traffic, for example, a policy can be created for VoIP phones that instructs them to: • Send voice traffic on VLAN 10 • Tag voice traffic with DSCP=63 • Transmit data-traffic to the switch (from the PC connected to the switch through the VoIP phone) without modification to traffic sent by the PC (typically, Untagged). For network policies to be implemented, they must be created and then associated with ports. Before policies are defined, the administrator must create the VLANs, and configure memberships in the VLANs, based on the specification in the LLDP-MED network policies. 550 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To add a MED network policy: 1 Click System > LLDP > MED Network Policy in the tree view to display the MED Network Policy: Summary page. Figure 17-3. MED Network Policy: Summary Previously-defined network policies are displayed. 2 To add a network policy, click Add, and enter the fields: – Network Policy Number — Select an available network policy number. – Application — Select the application (type of traffic) for which the network policy is defined. – VLAN ID — Enter the VLAN ID to which the traffic should be sent. – VLAN Type —Select whether the traffic is Tagged or Untagged.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 551 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – User Priority — Select the traffic priority assigned to the network application. – DSCP Value — Select the value to be used by neighbors to mark the traffic sent to the switch. Configuring MED Network Policies Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to configure MED network policies. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 17-3. LLDP MED Network Policies CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp med network-policy number application [vlan id] [vlan-type {tagged|untagged}] [up priority][dscp value] no lldp med network-policy number Defines an LLDP MED network policy. Use the no form of this command to remove an LLDP MED network policy. console(config)# lldp med network-policy 1 voice-signaling vlan 1552 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP MED Port Settings To assign MED network policies to ports: 1 Click System > LLDP > MED Port Settings in the tree view to display the MED Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 17-4. MED Port Settings: Summary 2 Select the unit in the stack. All ports on that unit are displayed along with the following fields: – LLDP MED Status — Specifies if LLDP-MED is enabled on the selected port. – Network Policy — Specifies whether a network policy is assigned to the port. – Location — Specifies whether the location is advertised. – PoE — Specifies whether PoE is enabled on the port. 3 To modify network policies on a port, click Edit. 4 Select the port to be configured, and enter the fields for the port: – Enable LLDP-MED — Enable/disable LLDP-MED on the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 553 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Available TLVs — Contains a list of available TLVs that can be advertised by the port. The possible options are: • Network Policy — Advertises the network policy attached to the port. • Location — Advertises the port’s location. • PoE-PSE — Indicates if the connected media is a PoE or PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment) device. Move the TLVs to be published to the Tx Optional TLVs list. – Available Network Policy — Contains a list of network policies that can be assigned to a port. Move the network policies to be assigned to the port to the Network Policy list. – Location Coordinate (16 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s location map coordinates. – Location Civic Address (6-160 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s civic or street address location, for example 414 23rd Ave E. – Location ECS ELIN (10-25 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s ECS ELIN location. 5 To view MED details for a port, click Details and select a port. The following fields are displayed for the port: – Auto-Negotiation Status — Enabled specifies that auto-negotiation is enabled on the port; Disabled indicates that it is not. – Advertised Capabilities — The list of port capabilities advertised for the port. – MAU Type — The Media Attachment Unit type. The MAU performs physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interfaces' collision detection and bit injection into the network, for example, 100BASE-TX full duplex mode. – System Name — The system's assigned name (in alpha-numeric format). This value equals the sysName object. – System Description — A description of the network entity (in alphanumeric format). This includes the system's name and versions of the hardware, operating system, and networking software supported by the switch. This value equals the sysDescr object. 554 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Device ID — The device ID advertised, for example, the device MAC address. – Device Type — The type of device. – LLDP MED Capabilities — The TLVs that are advertised by the port. – LLDP MED Device Type — Specifies whether a sender is a network connectivity device or an endpoint device. – Application — The following fields are displayed for each possible application type: • Application Type — The application type. • Flags — The VLAN tagging status for the application type: Tagged or Untagged. • VLAN ID — The VLAN number for the application type. • User Priority — The user priority for the application type. • DSCP — The DSCP value assigned to the network policy. – Location Type — Displays the port’s LLDP location type: • Coordinates— Device’s location map coordinates. • Civic Address — Device’s civic or street address location, for example 414 23rd Ave E. • ECS ELIN — Device’s ECS ELIN location. – Location Address — Displays the port’s LLDP location, according to the Location Type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 555 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring MED on Ports Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to set the fields in the MED Port Settings pages. Table 17-4. LLDP Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp med enable [tlv … tlv4] no lldp med enable Enables LLDP MED on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable LLDP MED on an interface. lldp med network-policy {add|remove} number no lldp med network-policy number Attaches or removes an LLDP MED network policy on an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove all the LLDP MED network policies from the interface lldp med location {{coordinate data}|{civicaddress data}|{ecs-elin data}} no lldp med location {coordinate|civicaddress|ecs-elin} configure the LLDP MED for an interface. Use the no form of this command to delete location information for an interface. show lldp med configuration [gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number Displays the LLDP MED configuration for all interfaces or for a specific interface. show lldp local [gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number Displays the LLDP information that is advertised from a specific port.556 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface gi1/0/3 console(config)# lldp med location civic-address 6162636465 console# show lldp med configuration Fast Start Repeat Count: 4. Network policy 1 ------------------- Application type: voiceSignaling VLAN ID: 1 untagged Layer 2 priority: 0 DSCP: 0 Port Capabilities Network Location PoE Notif Inventory Policy ications --------- -------------- ---------------- ---------- ------ gi1/0/1 Yes Yes Yes No Enabled No gi1/0/2 Yes Yes No No Enabled NoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 557 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Neighbors Information Use the Neighbors Information page to view information that was received in LLDP advertisements from neighboring devices. The neighbor’s information is deleted after timeout. Timeout is the maximum interval that can pass without receiving an LLDP PDU from a neighbor. The timeout value is computed from the neighbor’s Time to Live TLV. To view neighbors information: 1 Click System > LLDP > Neighbors Information in the tree view to display the Neighbors Information page. Figure 17-5. Neighbors Information The following fields are displayed for each port on the device that has a discovered neighbor: – Port — Port number for which neighboring information is displayed 558 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Device ID — Neighboring device ID – System Name — Name of the neighboring system – Port ID — Neighboring port ID – Capabilities — Neighboring device capabilities 2 Click Clear Neighbors Table to delete all the entries or select Remove to delete a specific port entry. 3 Click the Details button of a port to display the Neighbors Information: Details page for that port. In addition to the fields displayed in the MED Port Settings: Details Advertise Information page and the Green Ethernet Configuration pages, the following fields are displayed for the neighbors of the selected port: – Power Type — Port’s power type – Power Source — Port’s power source – Power Priority — Port’s power priority – Power Value — Port’s power value, in Watts – Hardware revision — Hardware revision – Firmware revision — Firmware revision – Software revision — Software revision – Serial number — Device serial number – Manufacturer name — Device manufacturer name – Model name — Device model name – Asset ID — Asset ID Configuring LLDP Neighbors Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to configure LLDP neighbors. Table 17-5. LLDP Neighbors Information CLI Commands CLI Command Description show lldp neighbors [gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number Displays information about neighboring devices discovered using LLDPDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 559 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show lldp neighbors Port Device ID Port ID System Capabili TTL Name ties --------- ----------------- -------- ------- ------- ---- gi2/0/17 00:75:73:71:72:55 1/e21 0 91 gi2/0/33 00:12:cf:7c:63:a0 1/e1 0 92 gi2/0/33 00:11:22:11:22:33 1/g39 0 107 gi2/0/33 00:aa:aa:aa:aa:aa 1/e37 0 106 gi2/0/41 a4:ba:db:57:7c:8d g13 O 97560 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 18 Dynamic ARP Inspection This section describes dynamic ARP inspection. It contains the following topics: • Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview • Global Settings • Dynamic ARP Inspection List • Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries • VLAN Settings • Trusted InterfacesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 561 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview ARP Inspection eliminates man-in-the-middle attacks, where false ARP packets are inserted into the subnet. ARP requests and responses are inspected, and their MAC-address-to-IP-address binding is checked according to the ARP Inspection List defined by the user (in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List and Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries pages). If the packet’s IP address was not found in the ARP Inspection List, and DHCP Snooping is enabled for a VLAN, a search of the DHCP Snooping database is performed. See "How DHCP Snooping Works" on page 573 for an explanation of the DHCP Snooping database. If the IP address is found the packet is valid, and is forwarded. Packets with invalid ARP Inspection bindings are logged and dropped. Ports are classified as follows: • Trusted — Packets are not inspected. • Untrusted —Packets are inspected as described above. The following additional validation checks may be configured by the user: • Source MAC — Compares the packet’s source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender’s MAC address in the ARP request. This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses. • Destination MAC — Compares the packet’s destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the destination interface’s MAC address. This check is performed for ARP responses. • IP Addresses — Compares the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses. Addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP Multicast addresses. 562 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Settings To enable ARP inspection on the device: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 18-1. Global Settings 2 Enter the fields: • Enable ARP Inspection — Enable/disable ARP inspection. • ARP Inspection Validate — Enable/disable the following checking source MAC address, destination MAC address and IP addresses against the respective addresses in the ARP body. • Minimal Syslog Interval (0 – 86400) — Enter the minimum time interval between successive ARP SYSLOG messages. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 563 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Setting Dynamic ARP Inspection Global Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Global Settings pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-1. ARP Inspection Global Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection no ip arp inspection Enables ARP inspection. Use the no form of this command to disable ARP inspection. ip arp inspection validate no ip arp inspection validate Performs specific checks for dynamic ARP inspection. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. ip arp inspection logging interval {seconds | infinite} no ip arp inspection logging interval Sets the minimum time interval between successive ARP SYSLOG messages. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# ip arp inspection console(config)# ip arp inspection validate564 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic ARP Inspection List An ARP inspection list consists of entries where each entry is a pair of MAC/IP addresses. To create a new ARP inspection list and add the first entry to it: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection > Dynamic ARP Inspection List in the tree view to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection List: Summary page. Figure 18-2. Dynamic ARP Inspection List: Summary The dynamic ARP lists are displayed. 2 To create a new list and enter the first address pair in it, click Add, and enter the fields: • List Name — Create and enter a list name. • IP Address — Enter the IP address that will be mapped to the MAC address entered below. • MAC Address — Enter the MAC address that will be mapped to the IP address entered above.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 565 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Creating a Dynamic ARP Inspection List Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-2. Dynamic ARP Inspection List CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection list create name no ip arp inspection list create name Creates a static ARP binding list and enters the ARP list configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete the list. console(config)# ip arp inspection list create servers console(config-ARP-list)#566 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries To add additional addresses to the lists defined in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List page: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries in the tree view to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries: Summary page. Figure 18-3. Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries: Summary The dynamic ARP entries for the selected list are displayed. 2 To add a new address pair to a list, click Add and select the list. 3 Enter the fields: • IP Address — Enter the IP address that will be mapped to the MAC address entered below. • MAC Address — Enter the MAC address that will be mapped to the IP address entered above.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 567 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Adding Entries to a Dynamic ARP Inspection List Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-3. Dynamic ARP Inspection List Entries CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip ip-address mac-address mac-address no ip ip-address mac-address mac-address Creates a static ARP binding. Use the no form of this command to delete a static ARP binding.. show ip arp inspection list Displays the static ARP binding list. console(config)# ip arp inspection list create servers console(config-arp-list)# ip 172.16.1.1 mac-address 0060.704c.7321 console(config-arp-list)# ip 172.16.1.2 mac-address 0060.704c.7322 console(config-arp-list)# do show ip arp inspection list List name: servers Assigned to VLANs: IP MAC --------------- ------------------ 172.16.1.1 00:60:70:4c:73:21 172.16.1.2 00:60:70:4c:73:22 console(config-arp-list)#568 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Settings To assign a list of IP/MAC address pairs, defined in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List pages, to a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries > VLAN Settings in the tree view to display the VLAN Settings: Summary page. Figure 18-4. VLAN Settings: Summary The VLANs and their associated lists of IP/MAC address pairs are displayed. 2 To designate a VLAN to be associated with an ARP inspection list, click Add VLAN and enter the VLAN ID. 3 Click Assign and select the List Name to be associated with the VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 569 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Assigning IP/MAC Address Pairs to VLANs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the VLAN Settings pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-4. Assigning IP/MAC Address Pairs to VLANs CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection vlan vlanid Enables ARP inspection on a VLAN, based on the DHCP Snooping database. Use the no form of this command to disable ARP inspection on a VLAN. ip arp inspection list assign vlan-id name no ip arp inspection list assign vlan Assigns a static ARP binding list to a VLAN. Use the no form of this command to delete the assignment. console(config)# ip arp inspection list assign 37 servers570 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Trusted Interfaces Interfaces are untrusted if the packet is received from an interface outside the network or from an interface beyond the network firewall. Trusted interfaces receive packets only from within the network or the network firewall. To configure an interface to be trusted: 1 Click Switching Dynamic ARP Inspection Trusted Interface in the tree view to display the Trusted Interface: Summary page. Figure 18-5. Trusted Interface: Summary The ports on the selected unit and their trusted status are displayed. 2 To modify the status of an interface, click Edit. 3 Select the interface and enable/disable its Trust Status, which is the DHCP Snooping Trust mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 571 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Trusted Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Trusted Interface pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-5. Configuring Trusted Interface Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection trust no ip arp inspection trust Configures an interface trust state that determines if incoming ARP packets are inspected. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show ip arp inspection [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays the ARP inspection configuration for all interfaces or a specific interface. console(config)# interface gi1/0/3 console(config-if)# ip arp inspection trust572 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 19 DHCP Snooping This section describes DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay features. It contains the following topics: • DHCP Snooping • DHCP RelayDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 573 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Snooping This section describes DHCP snooping. It contains the following topics: • DHCP Snooping Overview • Global Parameters • VLAN Settings • Trusted Interfaces • Snooping Binding Database DHCP Snooping Overview DHCP snooping expands network security by providing layer security between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. By enabling DHCP snooping, network administrators can differentiate between trusted interfaces connected to end-users or DHCP Servers, and untrusted interfaces located beyond the network firewall. How DHCP Snooping Works DHCP snooping filters untrusted messages, and stores these messages in a database. Interfaces are untrusted if the packet is received from an interface outside the network, or from an interface beyond the network firewall. Trusted interfaces receive packets only from within the network or the network firewall. The DHCP Snooping Binding database contains the untrusted interfaces’ MAC address, IP address, Lease Time, VLAN ID, and interface information. Table 19-1 describes how DHCP packets are handled when DHCP snooping is enabled on an interface. Table 19-1. DHCP Packet Handling when DHCP Snooping is Enabled Packet Type Arriving from Untrusted Ingress Interface Arriving from Trusted Ingress Interface DHCPDISCOVER Forward to trusted interfaces only. Forwarded to trusted interfaces only.574 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCPOFFER Filter. Forward the packet according to DHCP information. If the destination address is unknown the packet is filtered. DHCPREQUEST Forward to trusted interfaces only. Forward to trusted interfaces only. DHCPACK Filter. Same as DHCPOFFER and an entry is added to the Binding database. DHCPNAK Filter. Same as DHCPOFFER. Remove entry if exists. DHCPDECLINE Check if there is information in the database. If the information exists and does not match the interface on which the message was received, the packet is filtered. Otherwise the packet is forwarded to trusted interfaces only, and the entry is removed from database. Forward to trusted interfaces only DHCPRELEASE Same as DHCPDECLINE. Same as DHCPDECLINE. DHCPINFORM Forward to trusted interfaces only. Forward to trusted interfaces only. DHCPLEASEQUERY Filtered. Forward. Table 19-1. DHCP Packet Handling when DHCP Snooping is Enabled (Continued) Packet Type Arriving from Untrusted Ingress Interface Arriving from Trusted Ingress InterfaceDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 575 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY As shown in Table 19-1, the DHCP Snooping Binding database is updated by interception of DHCPACK, DHCPDECLINE and DHCPRELEASE packets, and is stored in non-volatile memory. Even if a port is down, its entries are not deleted. NOTE: Only DHCP requests on untrusted ports are maintained in the Binding database. Limitations The following limitations apply: • Enabling DHCP snooping uses TCAM resources. • The switch writes changes to the binding database only when the switch system clock is synchronized with SNTP. • The switch does not update the Binding database when a station moves to another interface. Global Parameters Use the Global Parameters page to: • Enable/disable DHCP snooping globally. • Determine whether to forward or filter DHCP packets received from untrusted interfaces, whose source MAC address and the DHCP client MAC address do not match. • Determine whether to forward or filter DHCP packets, received from untrusted interfaces, with option-82 information. • Set Binding database update interval.576 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure DHCP snooping on the device: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 19-1. Global Parameters 2 Enable/disable DHCP snooping on the device in the DHCP Snooping Status field. 3 If DHCP snooping is enabled, enter the fields: – Option 82 Passthrough — Enable/disable whether to forward (enable) or filter (disable) DHCP packets, received from untrusted interfaces, with option-82 information. – Verify MAC Address — Enable/disable MAC addresses verification. This determines whether to forward (enable) or filter (disable) DHCP packets received from untrusted interfaces, whose source MAC address and the DHCP client MAC address do not match. – Save Binding Database to File — Enable/disable saving the DHCP snooping database to flash memory. – Save Binding Database Internal(600-86400) — Enter how often, in seconds, the Binding database is updated. Configuring DHCP Snooping Global Parameters Using CLI CommandsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 577 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP snooping global parameters. Table 19-2. DHCP Snooping Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping no ip dhcp snooping Globally enables DHCP snooping. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted no ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted Allows a device to accept DHCP packets with option-82 information from an untrusted port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. ip dhcp snooping verify no ip dhcp snooping verify Configures the switch to verify on an untrusted port that the source MAC address in a DHCP packet matches the client hardware address. Use the no form of this command to configure the switch to not verify the MAC addresses. ip dhcp snooping database no ip dhcp snooping database Configures the DHCP snooping binding file. Use the no form of this command to delete the binding file. ip dhcp snooping database update-freq seconds no ip dhcp snooping database update-freq Configures the update frequency of the DHCP snooping binding file. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show ip dhcp snooping [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.578 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: console(config)# ip dhcp snooping console(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted console(config)# ip dhcp snooping verify console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database frequency 1200 console# show ip dhcp snooping DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP snooping database: enabled Option 82 on untrusted port is allowed Verification of hwaddr field is enabled DHCP snooping file update frequency is configured to: 1200 seconds Interface Trusted --------- ---------- gi2/0/1 yes gi2/0/2 yesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 579 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Settings To separate ports in a VLAN, enable DHCP snooping on it. Before you enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN, you must globally enable DHCP snooping on the device. When DHCP snooping is disabled for a VLAN, the Binding entries that were collected for that VLAN are removed from the Binding database. To enable/disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > VLAN Settings in the tree view to display the VLAN Settings page. Figure 19-2. VLAN Settings The list of existing VLANs are displayed in the VLAN ID list. 2 Click Add to move the VLANs, for which you want to enable DHCP snooping, from the VLAN ID list to the Enabled VLANs list. To remove a VLAN, click Remove to move it from the Enabled VLANs list to the VLAN ID list.580 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DHCP Snooping on VLANs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP snooping on VLANs . The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 19-3. DHCP Snooping on VLANs CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id no ip dhcp snooping vlan-id Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. console(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 581 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Trusted Interfaces To define a trusted interface: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Trusted Interface in the tree view to display the Trusted Interface: Summary page. Figure 19-3. Trusted Interfaces: Summary A list of the interfaces is displayed. 2 To change the trust status of an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select a unit and port or LAG. – Trust Status — Enable/disable DHCP Snooping Trust mode on the selected port or LAG. 582 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP snooping trusted interfaces. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Snooping Binding Database Entries in the DHCP Snooping Binding database consist of pairs of MAC/IP addresses. In addition to the entries added by DHCP snooping, entries to the Snooping Binding database can be manually added or deleted. These entries are added to the Snooping Binding database and Snooping Binding file, if it exists, but they are not added to the configuration files. A manually-added entry can be either dynamic or a static. When configuring a dynamic entry, an expiration date must be assigned. The refresh time (in seconds) of the binding table is added in the Global Parameters pages. Table 19-4. DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping trust no ip dhcp snooping trust Configures an interface as trusted for DHCP snooping purposes. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. console(config)# interface gi1/0/5 console(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trustDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 583 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To query and add IP addresses to the Binding database: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Binding Database in the tree view to display the Binding Database: Summary page. Figure 19-4. Binding Database A list of the database entries is displayed. 2 To query the database, enter query criteria and click Query. Database entries matching the query are displayed. 3 To add a entry, click Add, and enter the fields: – Type — Select the entry type. The possible options are: • Static —IP address was statically configured. • Dynamic —IP address was dynamically configured. – MAC Address — Enter the MAC address to be recorded in the entry. 584 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – VLAN ID — Select the VLAN ID to which the IP address is associated in the entry. – IP Address — Enter the IP address to be recorded in the entry. – Interface — Select the unit and port or LAG to be recorded in the entry. – Lease Time — If the entry is dynamic, enter the amount of time that the entry will be active in the DHCP Database. If there is no Lease Time, check Infinite. Configuring DHCP Snooping Binding Database Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the DHCP Snooping Binding database. Table 19-5. DHCP Snooping Binding Database CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping database no ip dhcp snooping database Enables the DHCP Snooping binding database file. Use the no form of this command to delete the DHCP Snooping binding database file. ip dhcp snooping database updatefreq seconds no ip dhcp snooping database update-freq Enables the DHCP Snooping binding database file. Use the no form of this command to delete the DHCP Snooping binding database file. ip dhcp snooping binding macaddress vlan-id ip-address [gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber] expiry {seconds|infinite} no ip dhcp snooping binding macaddress vlan-id Configures the DHCP snooping binding database and adds binding entries to the database. Use the no form of this command to delete entries from the binding database. clear ip dhcp snooping database Clears the DHCP binding database.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 585 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: show ip dhcp snooping binding [mac-address mac-address] [ipaddress ip-address] [vlan vlanid][[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number]] Displays the DHCP snooping binding database and configuration information for all interfaces or some interfaces on a switch. console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database console(config)# ip dhcp snooping update-freq 3600 console# show ip dhcp snooping binding Update frequency: 3600 Total number of binding: 2 MAC Address IP Address Lease (sec) Type VLAN Interface ----------- ---------- ------ -------- ----- ---------- 0060.704C.73FF 10.1.8.1 7983 snooping 3 gi1/0/21 0060.704C.7BC1 10.1.8.2 92332 snooping (s)3 gi1/0/22 Table 19-5. DHCP Snooping Binding Database CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description586 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Relay This section describes DHCP relay. It contains the following topics: • DHCP Relay Overview • Option 82 • Global Settings • Interface Settings DHCP Relay Overview The device can act as a DHCP Relay agent that listens for DHCP messages, and relays them between DHCP servers and clients, which reside in different VLANs or IP subnets. This functionality is intended to be used when the client ingress VLAN is different than the VLAN on which DHCP servers are connected. The switch can relay DHCP messages received from its IPv4 interfaces to one or more configured DHCP servers. The switch puts the IPv4 address into the message giaddr before relaying it to the servers. It uses the switch’s IPv4 address of the interface where the message is received. The switch uses the giaddr from the response to determine how to forward the response back to the DHCP client. DHCP Relay must be enabled globally and per VLAN. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 587 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Option 82 Overview The relay agent information option (Option 82) in the DHCP protocol enables a DHCP relay agent to send additional client information when requesting an IP address. Option 82 specifies the relaying switch's MAC address, the port identifier, and the VLAN that forwarded the packet. Both DHCP snooping and DHCP relay can insert option 82 into traversing packets. DHCP snooping with option 82 insertion provides transparent Layer 2 relay agent functionality when the DHCP server is on the same VLAN as the clients. Limitations The following limitations exist for DHCP Relay: • It is not supported on IPv6. • It is not relayed to servers on the client’s VLAN. • Packets that have option-82 information, added by other devices, are discarded. • It does not support Option 82 on non-VLAN interfaces. • It can be enabled only on a VLAN/Port/LAG that has an IP address defined on it.588 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Option 82 To enable Option82 insertion: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Option 82 in the tree view to display the Option 82 page. Figure 19-5. Option 82 2 Enable/disable Option 82 insertion.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 589 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Option 82 Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Option 82 page. The following is an example of the CLI command: Global Settings To set the DHCP Relay global settings: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings: Summary page. Figure 19-6. Global Settings: Summary The currently-define DHCP servers are displayed. 2 Enable/disable DHCP relay. Table 19-6. CLI Option 82 Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp information option no ip dhcp information option Enables DHCP option-82 data insertion. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP option-82 data insertion. console(config)# ip dhcp information option590 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 To add a DHCP server, click Add. 4 Enter the IP address of the DHCP server in the DHCP Server IP Address field. Defining Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Global Settings pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 19-7. Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp relay enable no ip dhcp relay enable Enables DHCP relay features on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable the DHCP relay agent. ip dhcp relay address ipaddress no ip dhcp relay address [ipaddress] Defines the DHCP servers available for the DHCP relay. Use the no form of this command to remove servers from the list. show ip dhcp relay Displays the server addresses on the DHCP relay. console(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable console(config)# ip dhcp relay address 176.16.1.1 console(config)# do show ip dhcp relay DHCP relay is Enabled Option 82 is Disabled Maximum number of supported VLANs without IP Address is 0 DHCP relay is not configured on any port. DHCP relay is not configured on any VLAN. Servers: 176.16.1.1 console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 591 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Interface Settings . NOTE: For DHCP Relay to function on an interface, it also must be activated globally in the Global Settings page. To enable DHCP relay on a port, LAG, or VLAN: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Interface Settings in the tree view to display the Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 19-7. Interface Settings: Summary The currently-define DHCP interfaces are displayed. 2 To enable DHCP relay on an interface, click Add. 3 Select the interface.592 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Interface Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Interface Settings pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands that enable DHCP Relay on VLAN 2, assign it an IP address and show the DHCP Relay status: Interface Settings Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp relay enable no ip dhcp relay enable Enables the DHCP relay features on the interface (in Interface Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to disable the DHCP relay agent feature on the interface. ip dhcp relay address ipaddress no ip dhcp relay address Defines a DHCP servers available for DHCP relay. Use the no form of this command to remove servers from the list. console(config)# interface vlan 2 console(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable console(config)# ip dhcp relay address 176.16.1.1 console> show ip dhcp relay DHCP relay is Enabled Option 82 is Disabled Maximum number of supported VLANs without IP Address is 0 DHCP relay is not configured on any port. DHCP relay is not configured on any vlan. No servers configuredDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 593 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY594 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 20 iSCSI Optimization This section describes iSCSI optimization. It contains the following topics: • Optimizing iSCSI Overview • Global Parameters • iSCSI Targets • iSCSI Sessions • Configuring iSCSI Using CLIDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 595 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Optimizing iSCSI Overview The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is an IP-based storage networking standard for linking data storage facilities. By carrying SCSI commands over IP networks, iSCSI is used to facilitate data transfers over intranets, and to manage storage over long distances. iSCSI can be used to transmit data over local area networks (LANs), wide area networks (WANs), or the Internet, and can enable location-independent data storage and retrieval. Unlike traditional Fiber channels, which requires special-purpose cabling, iSCSI can be run over long distances, using existing network infrastructure. The protocol enables clients (called initiators) to send SCSI commands (CDBs) to SCSI storage devices (targets) on remote servers. This enables organizations to consolidate storage into data center storage arrays, while providing hosts (such as database and web servers) with the illusion of locally-attached disks. The targets listen on a well-known TCP port (or any other TCP port that has been explicitly specified) for incoming connections. The login process is started when the initiator establishes a TCP connection to the desired target, through the TCP port that was explicitly specified. The group of iSCSI TCP connections that link an initiator with a target is called an iSCSI session. When you connect an EqualLogic device to the switch, and iSCSI optimization is enabled, the switch automatically recognizes the port to which the EqualLogic equipment is connected to, and configures the STP Mode to RSTP to support fast network convergence. Optimizing iSCSI iSCSI optimization provides the following features: • Ability to assign a specific QoS profile to the iSCSI flows • Display of iSCSI session details (connections, initiator, target, and so on) • Identification of (self-discovered) iSCSI sessions • Identification of iSCSI session termination • Identification of non-active iSCSI sessions596 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Limitations The following limitations exist: • All iSCSI connections receive the relevant QoS, regardless of whether they are being monitored or not. If, for example, a feature was disabled for some period and was enabled again, it is possible that there are iSCSI TCP connections that were established during this period of time. These cannot be monitored, because all relevant information was already passed at the beginning of the session. But these unidentified sessions will still be assigned to iSCSI QoS. • The maximum number of iSCSI TCP connections, which is also the default setting, is 1K. This can be changed after reset. • The number of iSCSI connections affects other system features. iSCSI-aware, DHCP Snooping, and ACL rules all use the TCAM system resource. If the number of iSCSI connections has been increased, the other application rules (DHCP Snooping or ACL) can be removed after reset. • If the target uses redirect messages upon the initiator request, and, as a result, the initiator opens a connection to a different target, the new target must be configured as part of the general configuration. • Only iSCSI flows to targets that use the iSCSI well-known port or other explicit user-defined configuration are assigned QoS. • The aging configuration works for each connection. The mechanism checks connection activities in a group of 28 TCP iSCSI connections, within the aging time. In the worst case, when the maximum number of 1K TCP connections are monitored and are not terminated gracefully, the mechanism causes inaccuracy, namely, the last 28 TCP iSCSI connections are aged out after (1K/28)*aging-time. • In general, the greater the number of ungracefully terminated iSCSI TCP connections, the greater the inaccuracy is. Not all iSCSI TCP connections are monitored for aging at the same time. Sessions, whose associated TCP connections are not being currently monitored, will show unchanged aging time. • Encryption (Ipsec) must not be applied on iSCSI traffic, otherwise a QoS profile will not be assigned to iSCSI. • iSCSI optimization does not work with IP fragmented frames.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 597 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Each session supports at most four TCP connections. If a new TCP connection of an already opened iSCSI session arrives, and there are already four TCP connections, the new connection replaces the oldest one, within this specific iSCSI session. • A short flow interruption, caused by STP topology change or administrative port-down action, might cause the TCP connection to reinitiate without closing the iSCSI session. If the actual iSCSI session used only one TCP connection, the reinitiated one will be added to the monitoring table, for an aging-time period. After that, it is removed from the list.598 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Parameters Use the Global Parameters page to enable iSCSI and to set iSCSI QoS frame priority. You may also enable Remark to change the DSCP or CoS user priority field in the packet. In the QoS Properties pages, you can then set the queuing to strict priority or WRR, and map the CoS or DSCP to the desired queue in the CoS to Queue or DSCP to Queue pages. To enable iSCSI and set its QoS parameters: 1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 20-1. Global Parameters 2 Enter the fields: – iSCSI Status — Enable/disable iSCSI optimization. – iSCSI COS Status — Enable/disable the Class of Service profile to apply to iSCSI flows. – Classification — Select whether the priority of iSCSI packets is determined by CoS or DSCP. Check the classification, and select the desired value. – Remark — Enable/disable whether iSCSI frames will be remarked with the CoS or DSCP value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 599 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – iSCSI Aging Time — Enter how long the device will wait, after the last received frame of an iSCSI session, before deleting the session from the list. Enabling iSCSI automatically enables Jumbo frames and enables Flow Control on all interfaces. Jumbo frames are only enabled after copying the Running configuration to the Startup configuration and resetting the device (the Flow Control changes are effective immediately). Defining iSCSI Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the iSCSI Global Parameters pages. Table 20-1. iSCSI Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description iscsi enable no iscsi enable Enables iSCSI awareness. Use the no form of the command to disable iSCSI awareness. iscsi cos {vpt vpt|dscp dscp} [remark] no iscsi cos Sets the quality of service profile that will be applied to iSCSI flows. Use the no form of the command to return to default. iscsi aging time minutes no iscsi aging time Sets the aging time for iSCSI sessions. Use the no form of the command to cancel aging. show iscsi Displays iSCSI settings.600 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# iscsi enable console(config)# iscsi cos dscp 31 console(config)# iscsi aging time 10 console# show iscsi Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 -------------------------------------------------------- Session 1: --------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12. storage:sys1.xyz Time started: 23-Jul-2002 10:04:50 Time for aging out: 10 min ISID: 11 Initiator Initiator Target Target IP Address TCP Port IP Address IP port ---------- --------- ---------- ------- 172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 30001 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 601 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY iSCSI Targets To add an iSCSI target: 1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > iSCSI Targets in the tree view to display the iSCSI Targets: Summary page. Figure 20-2. iSCSI Targets: Summary The currently-defined targets are displayed. 2 To add a new target, click Add. 3 Enter the fields: – TCP Port — TCP port used by the target for iSCSI communications. – IP Address — IP address of the target. The IP address 0.0.0.0 is any IP address. – Target Name (0-223 characters) — Name of the target.602 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining iSCSI Targets Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the iSCSI Targets Table. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 20-2. iSCSI Targets Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2… tcp-port-8] [address ip-address] [name target-name] no iscsi target port tcpport-1 [tcp-port-2… tcp-port- 8] [address ip-address] Configures iSCSI port/s, target address and name. Use the no form of this command to delete an iSCSI target. show iscsi sessions Show the current iSCSI targets and sessions. console(config)# iscsi target port 30001 address 176.16.1.1 name iqn.1993-11.com.disk vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678.tape:sys1.xyzDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 603 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY iSCSI Sessions To display information about iSCSI communications to various targets: 1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > iSCSI Sessions in the tree view to display the iSCSI Sessions page. Figure 20-3. iSCSI Sessions 2 Select a target and click Details. The following is displayed: – Target Name — The name of the target. – Initiator Name — The name of the initiator. – ISID — The iSCSI session ID. – Session Life Time — The amount of time that has passed since the first frame of the session. – Aging Time — The time left until the session ages out and is removed.604 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Initiators/Targets — The IP address and TCP port used by each initiator and target in the session is displayed. Displaying iSCSI Sessions Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for displaying iSCSI sessions. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 20-3. iSCSI CLI Commands CLI Command Description show iscsi sessions [detailed] Displays iSCSI sessions console(config)# show iscsi sessions Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 ------------------------------------------------------------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12 ISID: 11 Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 ISID: 222 -------------------------------------------------------------- Target: iqn.103-1.com.storage-vendor:sn.43338.storage.tape:sys1.xyz -------------------------------------------------------------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12 ISID: 44 Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 ISID: 65 -------------------------------------------------------------- console# show iscsi sessions detailed Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 -------------------------------------------------------------- Session 1: --------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12.storage:sys1.xyz UP Time: 02:10:45 (DD:HH:MM) Time for aging out: 10 min ISID: 11 Initiator IP Address Initiator TCP Port Target IP Address Target IP Port -------------------- ----------------- ---------------- ------------- 172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001 172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001 1172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001 30001Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 Status: Active UP Time: 00:04:50 (DD:HH:MM) Time for aging out: 2 min ISID: 22Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 605 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring iSCSI Using CLI The following is a sample procedure to configure the iSCSI feature using CLI: Table 20-4. Sample CLI Script to Configure iSCSI CLI Command Description iscsi enable Enable iSCSI. iscsi cos vpt 2 remark Set iSCSI flow to use VPT 2 (Layer 2 CoS). This VPT value replaces the original VPT in the packet. show iscsi sessions Verify that iSCSI is enabled and that the iSCSI flows are displayed. Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 606 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 21 Statistics/RMON This section describes many of the statistics available on the device. The only exception is the QoS statistics described in "Quality of Service" on page 650. It contains the following topics: • Table Views • RMON Components • ChartsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 607 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Table Views This section displays statistics in table form. It contains the following topics: • Denied ACEs Counters • Utilization Summary • Counter Summary • Interface Statistics • Etherlike Statistics • GVRP Statistics • EAP Statistics608 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Denied ACEs Counters The Denied ACEs counters contain the number of packets that were dropped (denied) because they did not meet ACL criteria expressed in some ACE. To display the denied ACE counters: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Denied ACEs Counters in the tree view to display the Denied ACEs Counters page. Figure 21-1. Denied ACEs Counters The global number of dropped packets is displayed along with the number of dropped packets on each interface. 2 To clear the counters, select either a stack unit and port or LAG. All ports/LAGs in the unit are displayed. 3 Mark the counters to be cleared and click Clear Counters. 4 To clear all counters, click Clear All Counters. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 609 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing Denied ACE Counters Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing denied ACE counters statistics. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-1. Denied ACE Counters CLI Commands CLI Command Description show interfaces access-lists counters [gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays Access List counters. console# show interfaces access-lists counters Interface Denied ACE hits --------- ------------- gi1/0/1 55 gi1/0/2 33 gi1/0/3 32610 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Utilization Summary Use the Utilization Summary page to display interface utilization. This page is refreshed periodically to minimize impact on performance. Display may be disrupted during this period. To display interface utilization statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Utilization Summary in the tree view to display the Utilization Summary page. Figure 21-2. Utilization Summary 2 Select a unit and port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Port/LAG — The port/LAG number. – Interface Status — The status of the interface: Up, Down or Not Present when no port is attached to the LAG. – % Interface Utilization — Network interface utilization percentage, based on the duplex mode of the interface. The range of this reading is from 0 to 200%. The maximum reading of 200% for a full duplex connection indicates that 100% of bandwidth of incoming and outgoing connections is used by the traffic travelling through the interface. The maximum reading for a half duplex connection is 100%.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 611 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – % Unicast Received — Percentage of Unicast packets received on the interface. – % Non Unicast Packets Received — Percentage of non-Unicast packets received on the interface. – % Error Packets Received — Percentage of packets with errors received on the interface. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. The CPU utilization chart is displayed.612 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Counter Summary To display the number of received and transmitted packets on ports, as numeric figures and not percentages: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Counter Summary in the tree view to display the Counter Summary page. Figure 21-3. Counter Summary Counters for the selected units or LAG are displayed. 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Port/LAG — The interface number. – Interface Status — Status of the interface: Up or Down. – Received Unicast Packets — Number of received Unicast packets on the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 613 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Transmitted Unicast Packets — Number of transmitted Unicast packets from the interface. – Received Non Unicast Packets — Number of received non-Unicast packets on the interface. – Transmitted Non Unicast Packets — Number of transmitted nonUnicast packets from the interface. – Received Errors — Number of received packets with errors on the interface. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the counters should be refreshed.614 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Interface Statistics To display the number of received and transmitted packets on an interface: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Interface Statistics in the tree view to display the Interface Statistics page. Figure 21-4. Interface Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the counters should be refreshed. The following fields are displayed: Receive Statistics – Total Bytes (Octets) — Amount of octets received on the selected interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 615 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Unicast Packets — Number of Unicast packets received on the selected interface. – Multicast Packets — Number of Multicast packets received on the selected interface. – Broadcast Packets — Number of Broadcast packets received on the selected interface. – Packets with Errors — Number of errors packets received on the selected interface. Transmit Statistics – Total Bytes (Octets) — Number of octets transmitted from the selected interface. – Unicast Packets — Number of Unicast packets transmitted from the selected interface. – Multicast Packets — Number of Multicast packets transmitted from the selected interface. – Broadcast Packets — Number of Broadcast packets transmitted from the selected interface. 4 Click Reset All Counters to clear these counters.616 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Etherlike Statistics To display interface error statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Etherlike Statistics in the tree view to display the Etherlike Statistics page. Figure 21-5. Etherlike Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Frame Check Sequence (FCS) Errors — Number of frames received that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. – Single Collision Frames — Number of frames that are involved in a single collision, and are subsequently transmitted successfully. – Late Collisions — Number of collisions detected after the first 512 bits of data.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 617 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Excessive Collisions — Number of frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions. – Internal MAC Transmit Errors — Number of frames for which reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. – Oversize Packets — Number of frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. – Received Pause Frames — Number of MAC Control frames received with a PAUSE operation code. – Transmitted Pause Frames — Number of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with a PAUSE operation code. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to clears the statistics for the selected interface. Viewing Interface Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing utilization, counters and interface statistics. Table 21-2. Interface Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description show interfaces counters [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays traffic seen by the physical interface.618 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI command for all ports: The following is an example of the CLI command for a single port: console# show interfaces counters Port InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts InOctets ------- ------------ ----------- ----------- -------- gi2/0/1 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/2 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/3 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/4 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/5 0 0 0 0 Port OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts OutOctets --------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ gi2/0/1 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/2 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/3 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/4 0 0 0 0 console# show interfaces counters gi1/0/1 Port InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts InOctets -------- ------------- ------------ ------------ ------------ gi1/0/1 0 0 0 0 Port OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts OutOctets -------- ----------- ------------ ------------ ------------ gi1/0/1 0 0 0 0 Alignment Errors: 0 FCS Errors: 0 Single Collision Frames: 0 Multiple Collision Frames: 0 SQE Test Errors: 0 Deferred Transmissions: 0 Late Collisions: 0 Excessive Collisions: 0 Carrier Sense Errors: 0 Oversize Packets: 0 Internal MAC Rx Errors: 0 Symbol Errors: 0 Received Pause Frames: 0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 619 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GVRP Statistics To display device GVRP statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > GVRP Statistics in the tree view to display the GVRP Statistics page. Figure 21-6. GVRP Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The number of received and transmitted packets in the following counters is displayed: GVRP Statistics Table – Join Empty — The number of GVRP Join Empty packets. – Empty — The number of GVRP empty packets. – Leave Empty — The number of GVRP Leave Empty packets. – Join In — The number of GVRP Join In packets.620 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Leave In — The number of GVRP Leave In packets. – Leave All — The number of GVRP Leave All packets. GVRP Error Statistics – Invalid Protocol ID — The number of GVRP Invalid Protocol ID errors. – Invalid Attribute Type — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute ID errors. – Invalid Attribute Value — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute Value errors. – Invalid Attribute Length — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute Length errors. – Invalid Event — The number of GVRP Invalid Events errors. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. Viewing GVRP Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing GVRP statistics. Table 21-3. GVRP Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description show gvrp statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet ] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays GVRP statistics. show gvrp error-statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet ] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays GVRP error statistics.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 621 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show gvrp statistics GVRP Statistics: ---------------- Legend: rJE : Join Empty Received rJIn: Join In Received rEmp : Empty Received rLIn: Leave In Received rLE : Leave Empty Received rLA : Leave All Received sJE : Join Empty Sent sJIn: Join In Sent sEmp : Empty Sent sLIn: Leave In Sent sLE : Leave Empty Sent sLA : Leave All Sent Port rJE rJIn rEmp rLIn rLE rLA sJE sJIn sEmp sLIn sLE sLA ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- ---- --- ---- ---622 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY EAP Statistics For information about EAP, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132. To display EAP statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > EAP Statistics in the tree view to display the EAP Statistics page. Figure 21-7. EAP Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Frames Received — The number of valid EAPOL frames received on the port. – Frames Transmitted — The number of EAPOL frames transmitted via the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 623 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Start Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL Start frames received on the port. – Log off Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL Logoff frames received on the port. – Respond ID Frames Receive — The number of EAP Resp/ID frames received on the port. – Respond Frames Receive — The number of valid EAP Response frames received on the port. – Request ID Frames Transmit — The number of EAP Req/ID frames transmitted via the port. – Request Frames Transmitted — The number of EAP Request frames transmitted via the port. – Invalid Frames Receive — The number of unrecognized EAPOL frames received on this port. – Length Error Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL frames with an invalid Packet Body Length received on this port. – Last Frame Version — The protocol version number attached to the most recently received EAPOL frame. – Last Frame Source — The source MAC address attached to the most recently received EAPOL frame. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. Viewing EAP Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing EAP statistics. Table 21-4. EAP Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description show dot1x statistics Displays 802.1X statistics for the specified interface.624 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show dot1x statistics gi1/0/1 EapolFramesRx: 11 EapolFramesTx: 12 EapolStartFramesRx: 1 EapolLogoffFramesRx: 1 EapolRespIdFramesRx: 3 EapolRespFramesRx: 6 EapolReqIdFramesTx: 3 EapolReqFramesTx: 6 InvalidEapolFramesRx: 0 EapLengthErrorFramesRx: 0 LastEapolFrameVersion: 1 LastEapolFrameSource: 0008.3b79.8787Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 625 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RMON Components This section describes Remote Monitoring (RMON), which enables network managers to display network information from a remote location. It contains the following topics: • Statistics • History Control • History Table • Events Control • Events Log • Alarms626 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Statistics To display device utilization statistics and errors that occurred on the device: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Statistics in the tree view to display the Statistics page. Figure 21-8. Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Received Bytes (Octets) — Number of bytes received on the selected interface. – Received Packets — Number of packets received on the selected interface. – Broadcast Packets Received — Number of good Broadcast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed. This number does not include Multicast packets. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 627 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Multicast Packets Received — Number of good Multicast packets received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – CRC&Align Errors — Number of packets received with a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). – Undersize Packets — Number of packets received, less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and otherwise well formed. – Oversize Packets — Number of packets received, longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and otherwise well formed. – Fragments — Number of packets received, less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), which has either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). – Jabbers — Number of packets received, longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and having either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). – Collisions — Number of collisions received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 64 Bytes — Number of 64-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 65 to 127 Bytes — Number of 65-127-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 128 to 255 Bytes — Number of 128-255-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 256 to 511 Bytes — Number of 256-511-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 512 to 1023 Bytes — Number of 512-1023-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.628 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Frames of 1024 to Max Octets — Number of 1024-Max Octet frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. Configuring RMON Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing and enabling RMON statistics. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-5. Configuring RMON Statistics Using CLI Command CLI Command Description show rmon statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays RMON Ethernet statistics. console# show rmon statistics gi1/0/1 Port te1/0/1 Dropped: 0 Octets: 0 Packets: 0 Broadcast: 0 Multicast: 0 CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0 Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0 Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0 64 Octets: 0 65 to 127 Octets: 1 128 to 255 Octets: 1 256 to 511 Octets: 1 512 to 1023 Octets: 0 1024 to max Octets: 0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 629 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY History Control To display the requested RMON history group statistics or request a new sample of interface statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > History Control in the tree view to display the History Control: Summary page. Figure 21-9. History Control: Summary Previously-defined samples are displayed. 2 To add a new entry, click Add. The New History Entry number, which uniquely identifies the sample, is displayed. 3 Enter the fields for the entry: – Source Interface — Sampled Ethernet interface. – Owner (0-20 characters) — RMON station or user that configured the entry.630 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Max No. of Samples to Keep (1-50) — Number of samples to be saved. – Sampling Interval (1-3600) — The time interval in seconds between samples. Configuring RMON History Control Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for configuring RMON history control. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-6. RMON History Control CLI Commands CLI Command Description rmon collection stats index [owner ownername|bucket bucket-number] [interval seconds] no rmon collection stats index Enables and configures RMON on an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove a specified RMON history group of statistics. show rmon collection history [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays RMON collection history statistics. console(config)# interface gi1/0/8 console(config-if)# rmon collection stats 1 interval 2400Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 631 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY History Table The History Table page displays interface-specific statistical network samplings. Each table entry represents the counter values compiled during a single sample. To display RMON statistics for a specified sample: 1 Click Statistics/RMONRMONHistory Table in the tree view to display the History Table page. Figure 21-10. History Table 2 Select a History Entry No. The following fields are displayed: – Owner — RMON station or user that requested the RMON information. – Sample No. — Number of the specific sample the information in the table reflects.632 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Drop Events — Number of dropped packets due to lack of network resources during the sampling interval. This may not represent the exact number of dropped packets, but rather the number of times dropped packets were detected. – Received Bytes (Octets) — Number of data octets, including bad packets, received on the network. – Received Packets — Number of packets received during the sampling interval. – Broadcast Packets — Number of good Broadcast packets received during the sampling interval. – Multicast Packets — Number of good Multicast packets received during the sampling interval. – CRC Align Errors — Number of packets received during the sampling session, with a length of between 64-1632 octets, who had a bad Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets, or a bad FCS with a non-integral number. – Undersize Packets — Number of packets, having less than 64 octets, received during the sampling session. – Oversize Packets — Number of packets having more than 1632 octets, received during the sampling session. – Fragments — Number of packets, having less than 64 octets and having a FCS, received during the sampling session. – Jabbers — Number of packets, having more than 1632 octets and who had an FCS, received during the sampling session. – Collisions — Estimated number of packet collision that occurred during the sampling session. Collisions are detected when repeater port detects two or more stations transmitting simultaneously. – Utilization — Estimated main physical layer network usage on an interface during the session sampling. The value is stated in hundredths of a percent.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 633 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing the RMON History Table Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing the RMON history table. The following is an example of a CLI command: Table 21-7. RMON History Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description show rmon history index {throughput|errors|other } [period seconds] Displays RMON Ethernet statistics history. console# show rmon history 1 throughput Sample Set: 1 Interface: 1/0/1 Requested samples: 50 Owner: CLI Interval: 1800 Granted samples: 50 Maximum table size: 500 Time -------------------- Jan 18 2005 21:57:00 Octets --------- 303595962 Packets -------- 357568 Broadcast --------- 3289 Multicast ---------- 7287 Util -------- 19%634 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Events Control Events are actions that are performed when an alarm is generated (alarms are defined in the Alarms page). An event can be any combination of logs/traps. If the action includes logging, then the events are logged in the Events Log page. To define an RMON event: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Events Control in the tree view to display the Events Control: Summary page. Figure 21-11. Events Control: Summary The currently-defined events are displayed. Along with the fields described in the Events Control: Add page, the following field is displayed for the events: – Time — The time that the event occurred. 2 To define a new event, click Add.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 635 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Enter the fields: – Event Entry — Displays a new event number. – Community — Enter the community to which the event belongs or keep the default community. – Description — Enter the event description. – Type — Select the event action. The possible options are: • None — No action is taken. • Log — When an alarm occurs, a log entry is recorded. • Trap — When an alarm occurs, a trap is generated. • Log and Trap — When an alarm occurs, a log entry is recorded and a trap is generated. – Owner — Enter the event owner. Defining RMON Events Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for defining RMON events. Table 21-8. RMON Event Definition CLI Commands CLI Command Description rmon event index {none|log|trap|log-trap} [community text] [description text] [owner name] no rmon event index Configures an event. Use the no form of this command to remove an event. show rmon events Displays RMON event table.636 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# rmon event 1 log console(config)# exit console# show rmon events Index Description Type Community Owner Last Time Sent ----- ----------- ------ --------- ----- ----------- 1 Errors Log Default Community CLI Jan 18 2002 23:58:17 2 High Broadcast LogTrap Router Manager Jan 18 2002 23:59:48Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 637 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Events Log The Events log displays the log of events that occurred. An event is logged when the type of the event is Log or Log and Trap. The action in the event is performed when the event is bound to an alarm (see the Alarms page) and the conditions of the alarm have occurred. To display the events log: • Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Events Log in the tree view to display the Events Control page. Figure 21-12. Events Control The following fields are displayed: – Event — The event identifier. – Log No. — The log number. – Log Time — Time when the log entry was entered. 638 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Description — Description of the log entry. Viewing Device Events Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing device events. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Alarms RMON alarms provide a mechanism for setting thresholds and sampling intervals to generate exception events on a counter or any other SNMP object counter maintained by the agent. Both the rising and falling thresholds must be configured in the alarm. After a rising threshold is crossed, another rising event is not generated until the companion falling threshold is crossed. After a falling alarm is issued, the next Table 21-9. Device Event Viewing CLI Commands CLI Command Description show rmon log [event] Displays the RMON logging table. console(config)# rmon event 1 log console> show rmon log Maximum table size: 500 Event Description Time ----- --------------- -------------- 1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23:58:17 2 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23:59:48Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 639 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY alarm is issued when a rising threshold is crossed. One or more alarms are bound to an event. The event indicates the action to be taken when the alarm occurs. To add an RMON alarm: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Alarms in the tree view to display the Alarms: Summary page. Figure 21-13. Alarms: Summary The currently-defined alarms are displayed. 2 To add a new alarm, click Add and enter the fields: – Alarm Entry — Displays a new alarm entry. – Interface — Select the interface for which RMON statistics are displayed. – Counter Name — Select the selected MIB variable. 640 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Sample Type — Select the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. The possible options are: • Delta — Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value. The difference in the values is compared to the threshold. • Absolute — Compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. – Rising Threshold (0–2147483647) — Enter the rising counter value that triggers the rising event alarm. – Rising Event — Select one of the previously-defined events. – Falling Threshold (0–2147483647) — Enter the falling counter value that triggers the falling event alarm. – Falling Event — Select one of the previously-defined events. – Startup Alarm — Select the trigger that activates the alarm. The possible options are: • Rising Alarm — A rising counter value triggers the alarm • Falling Alarm — A falling counter value triggers the alarm. • Rising and Falling — Both rising and falling counter values trigger the alarm. – Interval (1–2147483647) — Enter the alarm interval time in seconds. This is the interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. – Owner — Enter the name of the user or network management system that receives the alarm.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 641 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Device Alarms Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for defining device alarms. Table 21-10. Device Alarm CLI Commands CLI Command Description rmon alarm index MIB_Object_ID interval rthreshold fthreshold revent fevent [type type] [startup direction] [owner name] no rmon alarm index Configures RMON alarm conditions. Use the no form of this command to remove an alarm. show rmon alarm-table Displays summary of the alarm table. show rmon alarm number Displays the RMON alarm configuration.642 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# rmon alarm 1000 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 360000 1000000 1000000 10 20 console# show rmon alarm-table Index ----- 123 OID ---------------------- 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.9 Owner ------- CLI Manager CLIDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 643 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Charts This section describes how to display statistics as charts. It contains the following topics: • Ports • LAGs • CPU Utilization Ports To display port statistics in chart format: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > Ports in the tree view to display the Ports page. Figure 21-14. Ports 2 Select the unit ID of a unit in the stack for which you want to display statistics.644 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Check the type of statistics to be displayed: – Interface Statistics — Select the interface statistics to display. – Etherlike Statistics — Select the frame error statistics to display. – RMON Statistics — Select the RMON statistics to display. – GVRP Statistics — Select the GVRP statistics type to display. – Refresh Rate — Select the amount of time that passes before the statistics are refreshed. 4 To draw a chart for the selected statistics, click Draw. The chart for the selected statistic is displayed on the page.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 645 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing Port Statistics Using the CLI Commands The CLI commands for viewing port statistics are the same CLI commands described above. The Ports page simply shows the same statistics in chart form. LAGs To display LAG statistics in chart format: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > LAGs in the tree view to display the LAGs page. Figure 21-15. LAGs 2 Check the type of statistics to be displayed: – Interface Statistics — Select the interface statistics to display. – Etherlike Statistics — Select the frame error statistics to display. – RMON Statistics — Select the RMON statistics to display.646 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – GVRP Statistics — Select the GVRP statistics type to display. – Refresh Rate — Select the amount of time that passes before the statistics are refreshed. 3 To draw a chart for the selected statistics, click Draw. The chart for the selected statistic is displayed on the page. Viewing LAG Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing LAG statistics. Table 21-11. LAG Statistic CLI Commands CLI Command Description show interfaces counters [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays traffic seen by the physical interface. show rmon statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number} Displays RMON Ethernet statistics. show gvrp statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number} Displays GVRP statistics. show gvrp-error statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number} Displays GVRP error statistics.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 647 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show rmon statistics gi1/0/1 Port gi1/0/1 Dropped: 0 Octets: 0 Packets: 0 Broadcast: 0 Multicast: 0 CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0 Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0 Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0 64 Octets: 0 65 to 127 Octets: 1 128 to 255 Octets: 1 256 to 511 Octets: 1 512 to 1023 Octets: 0 1024 to max Octets: 0648 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY CPU Utilization Use the CPU Utilization page to display the system’s CPU utilization and percentage of CPU resources consumed by each unit in the stack. Each unit in the stack is assigned a color on the graph. To display CPU utilization in chart format: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > CPU Utilization in the tree view to display the CPU Utilization page. Figure 21-16. CPU Utilization 2 Select the Refresh Rate to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. 3 The CPU utilization chart is displayed. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 649 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing CPU Utilization Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing CPU utilization. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-12. CPU Utilization CLI Commands CLI Command Description show cpu utilization Displays CPU utilization. console# show cpu utilization CPU utilization service is on. CPU utilization -------------------------- five seconds: 5%; one minute: 3%; five minutes: 3%Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 650 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 22 Quality of Service This section provides information for configuring Quality of Service (QoS). It contains the following topics: • QoS Features and Components • General • QoS Basic Mode • QoS Advanced Mode • QoS StatisticsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 651 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Features and Components The QoS feature is used to optimize network performance. It provides classification of incoming traffic into traffic classes, based on one or more attributes, including: – Device configuration – Ingress interface – Packet contents QoS includes the following features: • Traffic Classification — Classifies each incoming packet, as belonging to a specific traffic flow, based on the packet contents and/or interface. The classification is done by an ACL (Access Control List), and only traffic that meets the ACL criteria is subject to classification. • Assignment to Hardware Queues — Assigns incoming packets to forwarding queues. Packets are sent to a particular queue for handling as a function of the traffic class to which they belong. • Other Traffic Class-Handling Attribute — Applies QoS mechanisms to various classes, including bandwidth management. QoS Modes A single QoS mode is selected and applies to all interfaces in the system. The modes are: • Basic Mode — Class of Service (CoS). – Traffic is divided into classes that determine how it is treated. All traffic in a class is treated with the same QoS action. The QoS action for the class of traffic determines the egress queue on the egress port, based on the indicated QoS value in the incoming frame. The QoS value in the incoming frame is: • Layer 2 Packets — VLAN Priority Tag (VPT) 802.1p value • Layer 3 IPv4 Frames — Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value • Layer 3 IPv6 Frames —Traffic Class (TC) value When operating in Basic mode, the switch trusts this externally-assigned QoS value. 652 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY This is the default QoS mode. • Advanced Mode — Per-flow Quality of Service (QoS). In Advanced mode, a per-flow QoS consists of a class map and a policer: – A class map defines the kind of traffic in a flow, and contains one or more ACLs. Packets that match the ACLs belong to the flow. – A policer applies the configured QoS to a flow. The QoS configuration of a flow may consist of the egress queue, the DSCP or CoS value, and actions on out-of-profile (excess) traffic. • Disable Mode (QoS is not enabled) In this mode, all traffic is mapped to a single best-effort queue, so that no type of traffic is prioritized over another. Only a single mode can be active at a time. When the system is configured to work in QoS Advanced mode, settings for QoS Basic mode are not active and vice versa. When the QoS mode is changed, the following occurs: • When changing from Advanced mode to any other mode, policy profile definitions and class maps are deleted. ACLs, which are bonded directly to interfaces, remain bonded. • When changing from Basic mode to Advanced mode, the QoS Trust mode configuration in Basic mode is not retained. • When disabling QoS, the shaper and queue setting (WRR/SP bandwidth settings) are reset to default values. All other user configurations remain intact.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 653 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY General This section contains the following topics: • QoS Mode • QoS Properties • Queue • Mapping to Queue • Bandwidth • TCP Congestion Avoidance QoS Mode To enable/disable the QoS mode: 1 Click Quality of Service > General >QoS Mode in the tree view to display the QoS Mode page. Figure 22-1. QoS Mode 2 Select the QoS Mode. The possible options are: – Basic — QoS is enabled in Basic mode on the switch654 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Advanced — QoS is enabled in Advanced mode on the switch. – Disable — QoS is not enabled on the switch. Setting QoS Mode Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the QoS mode. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-1. QoS Mode CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos [basic|advanced] no qos Enables QoS on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable QoS on the device show qos Displays the QoS mode. console(config)# qos basicDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 655 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Properties To set the default CoS value on incoming, untagged packets: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > QoS Properties in the tree view to display the QoS Properties: Summary page. Figure 22-2. QoS Properties: Summary The default CoS values for all interfaces on the selected unit are displayed. 2 To modify the CoS value for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select a port or LAG if required. – Set Default CoS — Enter the default CoS tag value for untagged packets.656 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring QoS Properties Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the QoS Properties: Summary page. The following is an example of the CLI command: Queue The switch supports eight queues for each interface. Queue number eight is the highest priority queue. Queue number one is the lowest priority queue. Traffic Limitation Methods There are two ways of determining how traffic in queues is handled, Strict Priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR): • Strict Priority — Egress traffic from the highest-priority queue is transmitted first. Traffic from the lower queues is processed only after the highest queue has been transmitted, thus providing the highest level of priority of traffic to the lowest-numbered queue. • Weighted Round Robin (WRR) — In WRR mode, the number of packets sent from the queue is proportional to the weight of the queue (the higher the weight, the more frames are sent). For example, if all eight queues are WRR and the default weights are used, queue 1 receives 1/15 of the bandwidth (assuming all queues are saturated and there is congestion), queue 2 receives 2/15, queue 3 receives 4/15, and queue 8 receives 8/15 of the bandwidth. The type of WRR algorithm used in the device is not the standard Deficit WRR (DWRR), but rather Shaped Deficit WRR (SDWRR). Table 22-2. QoS Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos cos default-cos no qos cos Defines the default CoS value of a port. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/15 console(config-if)# qos cos 3Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 657 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Combination of WRR and Strict Priority The priority for handling traffic can be selected for each queue. When the queuing mode is Weighted Round Robin for all queues, queues are serviced according to their weights. If all queues are assigned strict priority, queues are serviced according to that order. The following is true if some queues are assigned strict priority and others are assigned WRR: • If one queue is assigned strict priority, all higher queues are also assigned strict priority. Conversely, if a queue is assigned a WRR weight, all lower queues must also have a WRR weight assigned to them. • In the above case, traffic for the strict priority queues is always sent before traffic from the WRR queues. Traffic from the WRR queues is forwarded only after the strict priority queues have been emptied. The relative portion from each WRR queue depends on its weight.658 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To select the priority method and enter WRR weights: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > Queue in the tree view to display the Queue page. Figure 22-3. Queue The queues are displayed. 2 Enter the parameters for the queues: – Strict Priority — Check to indicate that traffic scheduling for the selected queue, and all higher queues, is based strictly on the queue priority. – WRR — Check to indicate that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based on WRR. The time period is divided between the WRR queues that are not empty, meaning they have descriptors to egress. This happens only if strict priority queues are empty. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 659 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Scheduling WRR Weight — If WRR is selected, enter the WRR weight assigned to the queue. – % of WRR Bandwidth — Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned to the queue. These values represent the percent of the WRR weight. Configuring Queue Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Queue page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Mapping to Queue This section provides information for mapping DSCP and CoS values to service queues, and contains the following topics: • CoS to Queue • DSCP to Queue Table 22-3. Queue Setting CLI Commands CLI Command Description priority-queue out num-ofqueues number-of-queues no priority-queue out numof-queues Configures the number of expedite queues. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. wrr-queue bandwidth weight1 weight2 ... weight_n no wrr-queue bandwidth Assigns WRR weights to egress queues. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# priority-queue out num-of-queues 2 console(config-if)# wrr-queue bandwidth 6 6 6 6 6 6660 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY CoS to Queue The CoS to Queue page maps CoS priorities to an egress queue, meaning that the egress queues of the incoming packets is based on the CoS priority in their VLAN Tags. For incoming, untagged packets, the CoS priority is the default CoS priority assigned to ingress ports. By changing CoS to Queue mapping, Queue schedule method, and bandwidth allocation, it is possible to achieve the desired quality of services in a network. The CoS to Queue mapping is applicable only if one of the following exists: • The switch is in QoS Basic mode, and CoS is the trusted mode. • The switch is in QoS Advanced mode, and the packets belong to flows that are CoS trusted.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 661 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To map CoS values to egress queues: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > CoS to Queue in the tree view to display the CoS to Queue page. Figure 22-4. CoS to Queue The CoS/queue mappings are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Class of Service — The CoS priority tag values, where zero is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority. – Queue — The queue to which the CoS priority is mapped. 662 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Mapping CoS Priorities to Queues Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the CoS to Queue page . The following is an example of the CLI commands: DSCP to Queue The DSCP to Queue mapping determines the egress queues of the incoming IP packets, based on their DSCP values. The original VPT (VLAN Priority Tag) of the packet is unchanged. By changing the DSCP to Queue mapping, the Queue schedule method, and bandwidth allocation, it is possible to achieve improved quality of service in a network. The DSCP to Queue mapping is applicable to IP packets when: • The switch is in Basic mode and DSCP is the trusted mode • The switch is in Advanced mode and the packets belongs to flows that are DSCP trusted Non-IP packets are always classified to the best-effort queue. Table 22-4. CoS to Queue CLI Commands CLI Command Description wrr-queue cos-map queue-id cos1 ... cos8 no wrr-queue cos-map [queueid] Maps CoS values to the egress queues. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# wrr-queue cos-map 4 7Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 663 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To map DSCP to queues: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > DSCP to Queue in the tree view to display the DSCP to Queue page. Figure 22-5. DSCP to Queue The DSCP values in the incoming packet and its associated queues are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – DSCP In — The values of the DSCP field in the incoming packet. – Queue — The queue to which packets with the specific DSCP value is assigned. The values are 1-8, where 1 is the lowest value, and 8 is the highest.664 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Mapping DSCP Values to Queues Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the DSCP to Queue page. The following is an example of the CLI command: Bandwidth The amount of traffic that can be received and transmitted on an interface can be limited by the following: • Ingress Rate Limit — Number of bits per second that can be received from the ingress interface. Excess bandwidth above this limit is discarded. • Egress Shaping Rates is defined by the following: – Committed Information Rate (CIR) sets the average maximum amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interface, measured in bits per second – Committed Burst Shape (CBS) sets the maximum burst of data that is allowed to be sent, even though it is above the CIR. This is defined in number of bytes of data. Table 22-5. DSCP to Queue CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos map dscp-queue dscp-list to queue-id no qos map dscp-queue [dscplist] Modifies the DSCP to queue mapping. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# qos map dscp-queue 33 40 41 to 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 665 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure bandwidth limitation: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > Bandwidth in the tree view to display the Bandwidth: Summary page. Figure 22-6. Bandwidth: Summary The ingress and egress rates are displayed for all ports on the selected unit. 2 To set interface parameters, click Edit. 3 Select an interface, and enter the fields: – Enable Ingress Rate Limit — Enable/disable ingress traffic limit for the interface. If this field is selected, enter the Ingress Rate Limit. – Ingress Rate Limit — Enter the ingress traffic limit for the interface.666 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Egress Shaping Rate — Enable/disable egress traffic limitation. If this field is selected, enter the following fields. – Committed Information Rate (CIR) — Enter the average maximum amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interface, measured in bits per second. – Committed Burst Size (CBS) — Enter the maximum burst of data that is allowed to be sent on the egress interface, even though it is above the CIR. This is defined in number of bytes of data. Configuring Bandwidth Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Bandwidth pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-6. Bandwidth CLI Commands CLI Command Description traffic-shape committed-rate [committed-burst] no traffic-shape Sets shaper on egress port. Use no form in order to disable the shaper. rate-limit committed-rate-kbps [burst committed-burst-byte] no rate-limit Limits the rate of the incoming traffic. Use the no form to disable rate limit. console(config)# interface gi1/0/5 console(config-if)# traffic-shape 124000 9600 console(config-if)# rate-limit 150000Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 667 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY TCP Congestion Avoidance Use the TCP Congestion Avoidance page to activate a congestion avoidance algorithm. The algorithm breaks up or prevents TCP global synchronization in a congested node, where the congestion is due to various sources sending packets with the same byte count. To configure TCP congestion avoidance: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > TCP Congestion Avoidance in the tree view to display the TCP Congestion Avoidance page. NOTE: TCP Congestion Avoidance increases network reliability, but it also increases network traffic. Continue only if you are sure it will improve overall network performance. For this change to be effective you must save the configuration and reboot the device. Figure 22-7. TCP Congestion Avoidance 2 Check TCP Congestion Avoidance to enable the algorithm.668 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring TCP Congestion Avoidance Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the TCP Congestion Avoidance page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-7. TCP Congestion Avoidance CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos wrr-queue wrtd no qos wrr-queue wrtd Enables Weighted Random Tail Drop (WRTD). Use the no form of this command to disable WRTD. console(config)# qos wrr-queue wrtd This setting will take effect only after copying running configuration to startup configuration and resetting the device.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 669 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Basic Mode This section describes QoS Basic mode. It contains the following topics: • Basic Mode Overview • Workflow to Configure Basic Mode • Global Settings • DSCP Rewrite • Interface Settings Basic Mode Overview In QoS Basic mode, a specific domain in the network can be defined as trusted. Within that domain, packets are marked with CoS priority and/or DSCP values, to signal the type of service they require. Nodes within the domain use these fields to assign the packet to a specific output queue. The initial packet classification and marking of these fields is done in the ingress of the trusted domain. Workflow to Configure Basic Mode To configure Basic QoS mode, perform the following: 1 Select Basic mode for the system in the QoS Mode page. 2 Select the trust-behavior in the Global Settings page. 3 If there is any port that, as an exception, should not trust the incoming CoS mark, disable the QoS state on that port in the Interface Settings pages. If a port is disabled without trusted mode, all its ingress packets are forwarded in best effort. It is recommended that you disable the trusted mode at the ports where the CoS and/or DSCP values in the incoming packets are not trustworthy. Otherwise, performance in the network might be negatively affected. 4 If you selected DSCP Rewrite in the Global Settings page, set the DSCP in/out values in the DSCP Rewrite page.670 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Settings Use the Global Settings page to enable Trust on all interfaces on the switch. This configuration is only active when the QoS mode is Basic. Packets entering a QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain. For more information on setting Trust mode on an interface, see "Interface Settings" on page 674. To define Trust configuration: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 22-8. Global SettingsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 671 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the fields: – Trust Mode — Enable/disable Trust mode. • CoS — Traffic is mapped to queues, based on the VPT field in the VLAN tag, or based on the per-port default CoS value (if there is no VLAN tag on the incoming packet). The mapping of the VPT to queue can be configured in the CoS to Queue page. • DSCP — All IP traffic is mapped to queues, based on the DSCP field in the IP header. The mapping of the DSCP to queue is configured in the DSCP to Queue page. – Always Rewrite DSCP — Check to always rewrite the DSCP values in the incoming packets with the new values set in the DSCP to Queue page. When this field is enabled, the switch uses the new DSCP values to select the egress queue. Assigning Global Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Global Settings page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-8. Global Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos trust {cos|dscp} no qos trust Configures the system to either the CoS or DSCP trust state. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. qos dscp-mutation no qos dscp-mutation Applies the DSCP Mutation map to system DSCP trusted ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the trusted port with no DSCP mutation. console(config)# qos trust dscp console(config)# qos dscp-mutation672 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DSCP Rewrite Use the DSCP Rewrite page to rewrite the DSCP tags for incoming traffic, when different DSCP values are used in the incoming and outgoing domains. Changing the DSCP value used in one domain to the DSCP value used in the other domain preserves the priority of traffic used in the first domain. As an example, assume that there are three levels of service: Silver, Gold, and Platinum. The DSCP incoming values used to mark these levels are 10, 20, and 30 respectively. If this traffic is forwarded to another service provider that has the same three levels of service, but uses DSCP values 16, 24, and 48, the values set in the DSCP Rewrite page are used to change the incoming values to the outgoing values. These settings are active globally when the system is in QoS Basic mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 673 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To map DSCP In values to DSCP Out values: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > DSCP Rewrite in the tree view to display the DSCP Rewrite page. Figure 22-9. DSCP Rewrite674 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 For each DSCP In value (DSCP value of the incoming packet) that needs to be rewritten to an alternative value, set a DSCP Out value. Assigning DSCP Rewrite Values Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the DSCP Rewrite page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Interface Settings QoS Trust mode can be configured on each port of the switch, as follows: • QoS Trust State Disabled on an Interface — All inbound traffic on the port is mapped to the best effort queue and no classification/prioritization takes place. • QoS Trust State Enabled on an Interface — Port prioritized traffic on ingress is based on the system- wide configured trusted mode, which is either CoS Trusted mode or DSCP Trusted mode. Table 22-9. DSCP Rewrite CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos map dscp-mutation indscp to out-dscp no qos map dscp-mutation [in-dscp] Configures the DSCP to DSCP Mutation table. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# qos map dscp-mutation 1 2 4 5 6 to 63Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 675 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define QoS Trust for an interface: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > Interface Settings in the tree view to display the Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 22-10. Interface Settings: Summary Trust mode is displayed for each interface on the selected unit. 2 To change the QoS trust state for an interface, click Edit, and select an interface on a unit. 3 Enable/disable the QoS Trust State.676 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Assigning Interface Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Interface Settings page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Configuring QoS Basic Mode Using CLI Commands The following is a sample script configuring QoS Basic mode. Table 22-10. Interface Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos trust no qos trust Enables each port trust state while the system is in the basic QoS mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the trust state on each port. show qos interface[buffers | queueing | policers | shapers | rate-limit] [interface-id]] Displays QoS information on the interface. console(config)# interface gi1/0/15 console(config-if)# qos trust Table 22-11. Sample CLI Script to Configure QoS Basic Mode CLI Command Description console#configure console(config)# qos basic Enable QoS in Basic mode. console(config)#mac access-list extended MAC1 Define an ACL named "MAC1" console(config-mac-a1)#deny 00:00:00:00:00:11 00:00:00:00:00:ff any MAC1 discards all traffic with source MAC 00:00:00:00:00:XX addresses. console(config-mac-a1)# permit any any MAC1 permits all other traffic. console(config-mac-a1)#exit Exit ACL mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 677 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console(config)#interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode on port gi1/0/1. console(config-if)#service-acl input mac1 Bind MAC1 to port gi1/0/1. Table 22-11. Sample CLI Script to Configure QoS Basic Mode (Continued) CLI Command Description678 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Advanced Mode This section describes QoS Advanced mode. It contains the following topics: • Advanced Mode Overview • Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode • DSCP Mapping • Class Mapping • QoS Policers • Policy Binding Advanced Mode Overview In Advanced mode, the switch uses policies to support per-flow QoS. A policy and its components have the following characteristics and relationships: • A policy contains one or more class maps. • A class map defines a flow with one or more associated ACLs. Packets that match the ACL rules (ACEs) in a class map with Permit (forward) action, belong to the same flow, and are subject to the same quality of service action. A policy can contain one or more flows, each with a user-defined QoS action. • The QoS of a class map (flow) may be enforced by the associated policer. There are two type of policers, as described in "Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands" on page 684. • Per-flow QoS actions are applied to flows by binding the policy maps to the desired ports. A policy map and its class maps can be bound to one or more ports, but each port is bound with, at the most, one policy map. The following points should be considered: • An ACL can be configured to one or more class maps, regardless of policies. • A class map can belong to only one policy map. • When a class map, using a single policer, is bound to multiple ports, each port has its own instance of the policer. Each instance applies the QoS actions on the class map (flow) at a port independent of each other.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 679 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If you bind a policy map to more than one port and one of its classes contains a single policer, all policy map rules will be multiplied per port (using up more TCAM resources). • An aggregate policer applies the QoS to all of its flows in aggregation, regardless of policies and ports. Advanced QoS settings consist of the following elements: • Rules — All frames matching a single group of rules are considered to be a flow. • Actions — To be applied to frames in each flow that match the rules. – Policers — See "Single Policers" on page 689 – Aggregate Policers — "Aggregate Policers" on page 687 – Trust —"Interface Settings" on page 674, "Policy Class Maps" on page 692 – Set DSCP/CoS — "Policy Class Maps" on page 692 – Set Queue — "DSCP Mapping" on page 680 • Binding — Combination of rules and actions that are bound to one or more interfaces. Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode To configure Advanced QoS mode, perform the following: 1 Select Advanced mode for the system in the QoS Mode page. 2 If external DSCP values are different from those used on incoming packets, map the external values to internal values in the DSCP Rewrite page. 3 Create ACLs, as described in "Network Security" on page 97. 4 When ACLs are defined, create class maps and associate the ACLs with them in the Class Mapping pages. 5 Create a policy map in the Policy Class Maps pages, and associate the policy map with one or more class maps. Specify the QoS action, if needed, for example by assigning a policer to a class map, when you associate the class map to the policy.680 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY a Single Policer — Create a policy that associates a class map with a single policer in the Policy Table pages and the Class Mapping pages. Within the policy, define the single policer. b Aggregate Policer — Create a QoS action for each flow. This action sends all matching frames to the same policer (aggregate policer), defined in the Aggregate Policer pages. Create a policy that associates a class map with the aggregate policer in the Policy Table pages. 6 Bind the policy to an interface in the Policy Binding pages. DSCP Mapping When a policer is assigned to a class map (flow), you can specify the action to take when the amount of traffic in the flow(s) exceeds the QoS-specified limits. The portion of the traffic that causes the flow to exceed its QoS limit is referred to as out-of-profile packets. If the exceed action is Remark DSCP (as opposed to Drop), the switch rewrites the original DSCP value of the out-of-profile IP packets to a new value, based on the values entered in the DSCP Mapping page. The switch uses the new values to assign resources and egress queues to these packets. The switch physically replaces the original DSCP value in the out-of-profile packets with the new DSCP value. To use the Remark DSCP exceed action, set the DSCP Out value in the DSCP Mapping page. Otherwise the action is null, because the DSCP value in the packet is rewritten to the original DSCP value, set by factory default.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 681 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To set new DSCP values: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > DSCP Mapping to display the DSCP Mapping page. Figure 22-11. DSCP Mapping 2 If the Exceed Action is Out-of-Profile (in the Policy Class Maps page) or Remark DSCP (in the Aggregate Policy page), the DSCP In values are rewritten with the DSCP Out values. Set the DSCP Out values as required.682 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DSCP Mapping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the DSCP Mapping page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Class Mapping A Class Map defines a traffic flow associated with ACL(s). A MAC-based ACL, IP-based ACL, and an IPv6-based ACL can be combined into a class map. Class maps are configured to match packet criteria on a match-all or match-any basis. They are matched to packets on a first-fit basis, meaning that the action associated with the first-matched class map is the action performed by the system. Packets that match the same class map belong to the same flow. There are two possible types of matching: • match-all — Traffic matches class map if it matches IP/IPV6 and MAC ACLs • match-any — Traffic matches class map if it matches at least one of the ACLs If a more complex set of rules is needed, several class maps can be grouped into a super-group called a policy (see "Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands" on page 684). Table 22-12. DSCP Mapping CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos map policed-dscp dscp-list to dscp-mark-down no qos map policed-dscp [dscplist] Configures the policed-DSCP map for remarking purposes. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# qos map policed-dscp 3 to 43Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 683 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define a class map: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Class Mapping to display the Class Mapping: Summary page. Figure 22-12. Class Mapping: Summary The previously-defined class maps are displayed. 2 To add a class map, click Add. A new class map is added by selecting one or two ACLs and assigning them a class map name. If a class map has two ACLs, specify that a frame must match both ACLs, or that it must match either one or both of the ACLs selected. 3 Enter the parameters. – Class Map Name — Enter the name of a new class map.684 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Match ACL Type — Enter the criteria that a packet must match in order to belong to the flow defined by the class map. The possible options are: • IP — A packet must match either of the IP-based ACLs in the class map. • MAC — A packet must match the MAC-based ACL in the class map. • IP and MAC — A packet must match the IP-based ACL and the MAC-based ACL in the class map (match-all). • IP or MAC — A packet must match either the IP-based ACL or the MAC-based ACL in the class map (match-any). – IPACL — Select the IPv4-based ACL or the IPv6-based ACL for the class map. – MAC ACL — Select the MAC-based ACL for the class map. – Preferred ACL — Select whether packets are first matched to an IP-based ACL or a MAC-based ACL. Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Class Mapping pages. Table 22-13. Class Mapping CLI Commands CLI Command Description class class-map-name [accessgroup acl-name] no class class-map-name Defines a traffic classification and enters the Policy-map Class Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to detach a class map from the policy map. class-map class-map-name [match-all|match-any] no class-map class-map-name Creates or modifies a class map and enters the Class-map Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete a class map.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 685 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: QoS Policers This section describes QoS policers. It contains the following topics: • QoS Policers Overview • Aggregate Policers • Single Policers match access-group acl-name no match access-group acl-name Defines the match criteria for classifying traffic. Use the no form of this command to delete the match criteria. show class-map [class-map-name] Displays information about the class map. console(config)# qos advanced console(config)# class-map class1 match-all console(config-cmap)# match access-group enterprise console(config-cmap)# do show class-map class1 Class Map matchAll class1 Match access-group enterprise Table 22-13. Class Mapping CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description686 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Policers Overview The rate of traffic that matches a pre-defined set of rules can be measured, and limits, such as limiting the rate of file-transfer traffic that is allowed on a port, can be enforced. This is done by using the ACLs in the class map(s) to match the desired pattern of traffic, and by using a policer to apply QoS on the matching traffic. A policer is configured with a QoS specification. There are two kinds of policers: • Single Policer — A single policer applies the QoS to a single class map, and to a single flow, based on the policer's QoS specification. When a class map, using a single policer, is bound to multiple ports, each port has its own instance of the single policer; each applying the QoS on the class map (flow) at ports that are otherwise independent of each other. A single policer is created in the Policy Table and Policy Class Maps pages. • Aggregate Policer — An aggregate policer applies QoS to one or more class maps, and to one or more flows. An aggregation policer can support class maps from various policies. An aggregate policer applies QoS to all its flow(s) in aggregation, regardless of policies and ports. An aggregate policer is created in the Aggregate Policer pages. An aggregate policer is defined if the policer is to be shared with more than one class. Each policer is defined with its own QoS specification, and is composed of a combination of the following parameters: • Committed Information Rate (CIR) — A maximum allowed rate of traffic, measured in Kbps. • Committed Burst Size (CBS) — An amount of traffic, measured in bytes, which is allowed to pass as a temporary burst, even if it is above the defined maximum rate. • Exceed Action — An action to be applied to frames that are over the limits (called out-of-profile traffic). These frames can be forwarded as is, dropped, or forwarded, after rewriting their DSCP value with a value that marks them as lower-priority frames for all subsequent handling within the device. A policer is assigned to a class map when a class map is added to a policy.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 687 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Aggregate Policers To define an aggregate policer: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Aggregate Policer to display the Aggregate Policer: Summary page. Figure 22-13. Aggregate Policer: Summary The existing aggregate policers are displayed. 2 To add an aggregate policer, click Add, and enter the fields. – Aggregate Policer Name — Enter the name of the Aggregate Policer. – Committed Information Rate (CIR) — Enter the maximum bandwidth allowed in bits per second. See the description of this field in "Bandwidth" on page 664. – Committed Burst Size (CBS) — Enter the maximum burst size (even if it goes beyond the CIR) in bytes. See the description of this in the "Bandwidth" on page 664.688 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Exceed Action — Select the action to be performed on incoming packets that exceed the CIR. The possible options are: • None — No action is performed on packets exceeding the defined CIR value. • Drop — Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped. • Remark DSCP — The DSCP values of packets exceeding the defined CIR value are rewritten to a value entered in the DSCP Mapping pages. Defining Aggregate Policers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Aggregate Policer pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-14. Aggregate Policer CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte[exceed-action {drop|policed-dscp-transmit}] no qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name Defines the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic classes within the same policy map. Use the no form of this command to remove an existing aggregate policer. console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000 9600 exceed-action dropDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 689 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Single Policers Defining Aggregate Policers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Aggregate Policer pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Single policers are created by: 1 Create a policy in the Police Table pages 2 Configure the policy in the Policy Class Maps pages. Here the policy class can be designated as containing a single policer, or it can be designated as containing Aggregate policers. Policy Table A policy can consist of one of the following: • One or more class maps of ACLs that define the traffic flows in the policy. • One or more aggregate policers that apply the QoS to the traffic flows in the policy. Table 22-15. Aggregate Policer CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte[exceed-action {drop|policed-dscp-transmit}] no qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name Defines the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic classes within the same policy map. Use the no form of this command to remove an existing aggregate policer. console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000 9600 exceed-action drop690 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Only those policies that are bound to an interface are active (see the Policy Binding pages). After a policy has been added, class maps can be added in the Policy Table pages. To create a QoS policy: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Table to display the Policy Table: Summary page. Figure 22-14. Policy Table: Summary The previously-defined policies are displayed. 2 To create a policy, click Add. 3 Enter the name of the new policy in the Policy Name field. 4 Add class maps to the new policy in the Policy Class Maps page.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 691 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Policies Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policy Table page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-16. Policy Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description policy-map policy-map-name no policy-map policy-mapname Creates a policy map and enters the Policymap Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete a policy map. console(config)# policy-map policy1692 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Policy Class Maps One or more class maps can be added to a policy. A class map defines the type of packets that are considered to belong to the same traffic flow. To add a class map to a policy: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Class Maps to display the Policy Class Maps: Summary page. Figure 22-15. Policy Class Maps: Summary 2 Select a policy in the Policy Name field. The class maps in that policy are displayed. 3 To add a class map, click Add. 4 Enter the parameters. – Policy Name — Select the policy to which the class map is being added.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 693 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Class Map Name — Select an existing class map to be associated with the policy. Class maps are created in the Class Mapping pages. – Action Type — Select the action regarding the ingress CoS and/or DSCP value of all the matching packets. • None — Ignore the ingress CoS and/or DSCP value. The matching packets are sent as best effort. • Trust CoS, DSCP — If this option is selected, the switch will trust the CoS or DSCP value of the matching packet. If a packet is an IP packet, the switch will put the packet in the egress queue, based on its DSCP value and the DSCP to Queue mapping. Otherwise, the egress queue of the packet is based on the packet's CoS value and the CoS to Queue mapping. • Set — See the description of this field below. – Set — If this option is selected, enter a New Value, which determines the egress queue of the matching packets: • DSCP — If DSCP is selected, the new DSCP value and the DSCP to Queue mapping determines the egress queue of the matching packets. • Queue — If Queue is selected, the new value is the egress queue number for all matching packets. • CoS — If CoS is selected, the CoS priority value and the CoS to Queue mapping determines the egress queue of the matching packets. – Police Type — Available in Layer 2 Mode only. Select the policer type for the policy. The possible options are: • None — No policy is used. • Single — The policer for the policy is a single policer. • Aggregate — The policer for the policy is an aggregate policer. – Aggregate Policer — Available in Layer 2 Mode only. If Police Type is Aggregate, select a previously-defined aggregate policer. If Police Type is Single, enter the following QoS parameters: – Ingress Committed Information Rate (CIR) (Range: 100 - 1000000) — Enter the CIR in Kbps. See its description in the Bandwidth pages.694 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Ingress Committed Burst Size (CBS) (Range: 3000 - 16769020) — Enter the CBS in bytes. See its description in the Bandwidth pages. – Exceed Action — Select the action assigned to incoming packets exceeding the CIR. The possible options are: • None — No action. • Drop — Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped. • Out-of-Profile DSCP — Packets, exceeding the defined CIR, are forwarded with a new DSCP, derived from the DSCP Mapping pages. Defining Policy Class Maps Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policy Class Maps pages. Table 22-17. Policy Class Maps CLI Commands CLI Command Description class class-map-name [accessgroup acl-name] no class class-map-name Defines a traffic classification and enters the Policy-map Class Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to detach a class map from the policy map. trust [cos-dscp] no trust Configures the trust state, which selects the value that QoS uses as the source of the internal DSCP value. Use the no form of this command to return to the default trust state. set {dscp new-dscp|queue queueid|cos new-cos} no set Sets new values in the IP packet. Use the no form of this command to return to the default values. police committed-rate-kbps committed-burst-byte [exceedaction {drop|policed-dscptransmit}] no police Defines the policer for classified traffic. Use the no form of this command to remove a policer.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 695 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte [exceed-action {drop|policed-dscp-transmit}] no qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name Defines the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic classes. Use the no form of this command to remove an existing aggregate policer. show policy-map [policy-mapname] Displays all policy maps or a specific policy map. console(config)# policy-map policy1 console(config-pmap)# class class1 access-group enterprise console(config-pmap)# trust cos-dscp console(config-pmap)# set dscp 56 console(config-pmap)# class class1 console(config-pmap-c)# police 124000 9600 exceed-action drop console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000 9600 exceed-action drop Table 22-17. Policy Class Maps CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description696 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Policy Binding After policies are created, they must be bound to interfaces (ports or LAGs).When a policy is bound to a specific interface, it becomes active on it (subject to time range restrictions). Only one policy can be active on a single interface, but a single policy can be bound to more than one interface. When a policy is bound to an interface, it filters and applies QoS to ingress traffic that belongs to the flows defined in the policy. The policy does not apply to traffic egress to the same port. To edit a policy, it must first be removed (unbound) from all those ports to which it is bound. To define policy binding: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Binding to display the Policy Binding: Summary page. Figure 22-16. Policy Binding: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 697 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Previously-defined policy bindings are displayed. 2 To bind a policy to an interface, click Add. 3 Select the interface assigned to the policy. 4 Select the Policy Name to be activated on the interface. Defining Policy Binding Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policy Binding pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-18. Policy Binding CLI Commands CLI Command Description service-policy input policy-map-name no service-policy input Applies a policy map to the input of a particular interface. Use the no form of this command to detach a policy map from an interface. console(config-if)# service-policy input policy1698 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Statistics This section describes how to view and manage QoS statistics. It contains the following topics: • Policer Statistics • Aggregated Policer • Queues StatisticsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 699 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Policer Statistics A Single Policer is bound to a class map from a single policy. An Aggregate Policer is bound to one or more class maps from one or more policies. Use the Policer Statistics pages to view the number of in-profile and out-ofprofile packets received from an interface that meet the conditions defined in the class map of a policy. To view policer statistics: 1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Policer Statistics to display the Policer Statistics: Summary page. Figure 22-17. Policer Statistics: Summary The following statistics for the previously-defined counters are displayed: – Interface — Statistics are displayed for this interface. – Policy— Statistics are displayed for this policy.700 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Class Map — Statistics are displayed for this class map. – In-Profile Bytes — Number of in-profile bytes received. – Out-of-Profile Bytes — Number of out-of-profile bytes received. 2 Click Add to add a new counter that applies to another policy-class map. 3 Enter the fields: – Interface — Select the interface for which the counter is defined. – Policy - Class Map Name — Select a policy class map pair. Defining Policer Statistics Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policer Statistics pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-19. Policer Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos statistics policer policymap-name class-map-name no qos statistics policer policy-map-name class-map-name Enables counting in-profile and out-ofprofile bytes vis-a-vis a policer. Use the no form of this command to disable counting. clear qos statistics Clears the statistics show qos statistics Displays the statistics console(config-if)# qos statistics policer policy1 class1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 701 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Aggregated Policer To view aggregated policer statistics: 1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Aggregate Policer to display the Aggregate Policer: Summary page. Figure 22-18. Aggregate Policer: Summary The following statistics for the previously-defined counters are displayed: – Aggregate Policer Name — Policer on which statistics are based. – In-Profile Bytes — Number of in-profile packets that were received. – Out-of-Profile Bytes — Number of out-of-profile packets that were received. 2 To add a new counter that applies to another aggregate policer, click Add. 702 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Select an aggregate policer in the Aggregate Policer Name field. Defining Aggregate Policer Statistics Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Aggregate Policer Statistics pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Queues Statistics Queue statistics include statistics of forwarded and dropped packets, based on interface, queue, and drop precedence. Lowest drop precedence has the lowest probability of being dropped. Table 22-20. Aggregate Policer Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos statistics aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name no qos statistics aggregatepolicer aggregate-policer-name Enables counting in-profile and out-of-profile bytes vis-a-vis an aggregate policer. Use the no form of this command to disable counting. clear qos statistics Clears the statistics show qos statistics Displays the statistics console (config)# qos statistics aggregate-policer policer1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 703 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To view Queue Statistics: 1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Queues Statistics to display the Queues Statistics: Summary. Figure 22-19. Queues Statistics: Summary The statistics for previously-defined counters are displayed. – Counter Set —Number of counter. – Port —Number of port. – Queue —Number of queue. – Total Packets —Number of packets forwarded or tail dropped. – Tail Drop Packets —Percentage of packets that were tail dropped.704 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 To add a new counter, click Add, and enter the fields: – Counter Set—Select the counter set. The possible options are: • Set 1 — Displays the statistics that contains all interfaces and queues with a high DP (Drop Precedence). • Set 2 — Displays the statistics that contains all interfaces and queues with a low DP. – Interface — Select the unit/interface for which Queue statistics are displayed. – Queue — Select the queue on which packets were forwarded or tail dropped. Defining QoS Statistics Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the QoS Statistics pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-21. QoS Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos statistics queues set-number {queue|all} {dp|all} {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet]port-number|all} no qos statistics queues setnumber Enables QoS statistics for output queues. Use the no form of this command to disable QoS statistics for output queues. clear qos statistics Clears the statistics show qos statistics Displays the statistics console(config)# qos statistics queues 1 all all allDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 705 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Glossary Figure 23-20. This glossary contains key technical words of interest. A Access Mode Specifies the method by which user access is granted to the system. Access Profiles Allows network managers to define profiles and rules for accessing the switch module. Access to management functions can be limited to user groups, which are defined by the following criteria: • Ingress interfaces • Source IP address or Source IP subnets ACL Access Control List. Allow network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress ports. Aggregated VLAN Groups several VLANs into a single aggregated VLAN. Aggregating VLANs enables routers to respond to ARP requests for nodes located on different subVLANs belonging to the same Super VLAN. Routers respond with their MAC address. ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses. ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit. A custom chip designed for a specific application. Asset Tag Specifies the user-defined switch module reference. A BCDE F GHI L MNOP Q RSTUVW706 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Authentication Profiles Sets of rules which that enables login to and authentication of users and applications. Auto-negotiation Allows 10/100 Mpbs or 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to establish for the following features: • Duplex/Half Duplex mode • Flow Control • Speed B Back Pressure A mechanism used with Half Duplex mode that enables a port not to receive a message. Backplane The main BUS that carries information in the switch module. Backup Configuration Files Contains a backup copy of the switch module configuration. The Backup file changes when the Running Configuration file or the Startup Configuration file is copied to the Backup file. Bandwidth Bandwidth specifies the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time. For digital switch modules, bandwidth is defined in Bits per Second (bps) or Bytes per Second. Bandwidth Assignments The amount of bandwidth assigned to a specific application, user, or interface. Baud The number of signaling elements transmitted each second. Best Effort Traffic is assigned to the lowest priority queue, and packet delivery is not guaranteed.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 707 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Boot Version The boot version. BootP Bootstrap Protocol. Enables a workstation to discover its IP address, an IP address of a BootP server on a network, or a configuration file loaded into the boot of a switch module. BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit. Provide bridging information in a message format. BPDUs are sent across switch module information with in Spanning Tree configuration. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities, and forwarding costs. Bridge A device that connect two networks. Bridges are hardware specific, however they are protocol independent. Bridges operate at Layer 1 and Layer 2 levels. Broadcast Domain device sets that receive Broadcast frames originating from any device within a designated set. Routers bind Broadcast domains, because routers do not forward Broadcast frames. Broadcasting A method of transmitting packets to all ports on a network. Broadcast Storm An excessive amount of Broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port. Forwarded message responses are heaped onto the network, overloading network resources or causing the network to time out. For more information about Broadcast storms, see "LACP Parameters" on page 511. C CDB Configuration Data Base. A file containing a device’s configuration information.708 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Class of Service Class of Service (CoS). Class of Service is the 802.1p priority scheme. CoS provides a method for tagging packets with priority information. A CoS value between 0-7 is added to the Layer II header of packets, where zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest. A overlapping transmission of two or more packets that collide. The data transmitted cannot be used, and the session is restarted. CLI Command Line Interface. A set of line commands used to configure the system. For more information on using the CLI, see Using the CLI. Communities Specifies a group of users which retains the same system access rights. CPU Central Processing Unit. The part of a computer that processes information. CPUs are composed of a control unit and an ALU. D DHCP Client A device using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters, such as a network address. DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping expands network security by providing firewall security between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. DSCP DiffServe Code Point (DSCP). DSCP provides a method of tagging IP packets with QoS priority information. Domain A group of computers and devices on a network that are grouped with common rules and procedures. Duplex Mode Permits simultaneous transmissions and reception of data. There are two different types of duplex mode:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 709 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Full Duplex Mode — Permits for bisynchronous communication, for example, a telephone. Two parties can transmit information at the same time. • Half Duplex Mode — Permits asynchronous communication, for example, a walkie-talkie. Only one party can transmit information at a time. Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) • Allows automatic assignment of users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication. When a user is authenticated by the RADIUS server, the user is automatically joined to the VLAN configured on the RADIUS server. E Egress Ports Ports from which network traffic is transmitted. End System An end user device on a network. Ethernet Ethernet is standardized as per IEEE 802.3. Ethernet is the most common implemented LAN standard. Supports data transfer rates of Mpbs, where 10, 100 or 1000 Mbps is supported. EWS Embedded Web Server. Provides device management via a standard web browser. Embedded Web Servers are used in addition to or in place of a CLI or NMS. F FFT Fast Forward Table. Provides information about forwarding routes. If a packet arrives to a device with a known route, the packet is forwarded via a route listed in the FFT. If there is not a known route, the CPU forwards the packet and updates the FFT.710 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY FIFO First In First Out. A queuing process where the first packet in the queue is the first packet out of the queue. Flapping Flapping occurs when an interfaces state is constantly changing. For example, an STP port constantly changes from listening to learning to forwarding. This may cause traffic loss. Flow Control Enables lower speed devices to communicate with higher speed devices, that is, that the higher speed device refrains from sending packets. Fragment Ethernet packets smaller than 576 bits. Frame Packets containing the header and trailer information required by the physical medium. G GARP General Attributes Registration Protocol. Registers client stations into a Multicast domain. Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet transmits at 1000 Mbps, and is compatible with existing 10/100 Mbps Ethernet standards. GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol. Registers client stations into a VLANs. H HOL Head of Line. Packets are queued. Packets at the head of the queue are forwarded before packets at the end of the line.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 711 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Host A computer that acts as a source of information or services to other computers. HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol. Transmits HTML documents between servers and clients on the internet. I IC Integrated Circuit. Integrated Circuits are small electronic devices composed from semiconductor material. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. Allows gateway or destination host to communicate with a source host, for example, to report a processing error. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. An Engineering organization that develops communications and networking standards. IEEE 802.1d Used in the Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE 802.1d supports MAC bridging to avoid network loops. IEEE 802.1p Prioritizes network traffic at the data-link/MAC sublayer. IEEE 802.1Q Defines the operation of VLAN Bridges that permit the definition, operation, and administration of VLANs within Bridged LAN infrastructures. IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping examines IGMP frame contents, when they are forwarded by the device from work stations to an upstream Multicast router. From the frame, the device identifies work stations configured for Multicast sessions, and which Multicast routers are sending Multicast frames.712 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Image File System images are saved in two Flash sectors called images (Image 1 and Image 2). The active image stores the active copy; while the other image stores a second copy. Ingress Port Ports on which network traffic is received. IP Internet Protocol. Specifies the format of packets and there addressing method. IP addresses packets and forwards the packets to the correct port. IP Address Internet Protocol Address. A unique address assigned to a network device with two or more interconnected LANs or WANs. IP Version 6 (IPv6) A version of IP addressing with longer addresses than the traditional IPv4. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long, whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits; allowing a much larger address space. ISATAP Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol . ISATAP is an automatic overlay tunneling mechanism that uses the underlying IPv4 network as a non-Broadcast/multicast access link layer for IPv6. ISATAP is designed for transporting IPv6 packets within a site where a native IPv6 infrastructure is not yet available. L LAG Link Aggregated Group. Aggregates ports or VLANs into a single virtual port or VLAN. For more information on LAGs, see Defining LAG Membership. LAN Local Area Networks. A network contained within a single room, building, campus or other limited geographical area.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 713 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Layer 2 Data Link Layer or MAC Layer. Contains the physical address of a client or server station. Layer 2 processing is faster than Layer 3 processing because there is less information to process. Layer 3 Establishes a connections and ensures that all data arrives to their destination. Packets inspected at the Layer 3 level are analyzed and forwarding decisions, based on their applications. LLDP-MED Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery. LLDP allows network managers to troubleshoot and enhance network management by discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. MED increases network flexibility by allowing different IP systems to co-exist on a single network LLDP. Load Balancing Enables the even distribution of data or processing packets across available network resources. For example, load balancing may distribute the incoming packets evenly to all servers, or redirect the packets to the next available server. M MAC Address Media Access Control Address. The MAC Address is a hardware specific address that identifies each network node. MAC Address Learning MAC Address Learning characterizes a learning bridge, in which the packet’s source MAC address is recorded. Packets destined for that address are forwarded only to the bridge interface on which that address is located. Packets addressed to unknown addresses are forwarded to every bridge interface. MAC Address Learning minimizes traffic on the attached LANs. MAC Layer A sub-layer of the Data Link Control (DTL) layer.714 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Mask A filter that includes or excludes certain values, for example parts of an IP address. For example, Unit 2 is inserted in the first minute of a ten-minute cycle, and Unit 1 is inserted in fifth minute of the same cycle, the units are considered the same age. MD5 Message Digest 5. An algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash. MD5 is a variation of MD4, and increases MD4 security. MD5 verifies the integrity of the communication, authenticates the origin of the communication. MDI Media Dependent Interface. A cable used for end stations. MDIX Media Dependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX). A cable used for hubs and switches. MIB Management Information Base. MIBs contain information describing specific aspects of network components. Multicast Transmits copies of a single packet to multiple ports. N NA Neighbor Advertisement. ND Neighbor Discovery. NS Neighbor Solicitation. NMS Network Management System. An interface that provides a method of managing a system.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 715 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Node A network connection endpoint or a common junction for multiple network lines. Nodes include: • Processors • Controllers • Workstations O OID Organizationally Unique Identifiers. Identifiers associated with a Voice VLAN. OUI Object Identifier. Used by SNMP to identify managed objects. In the SNMP Manager/Agent network management paradigm, each managed object must have an OID to identify it. P Packets Blocks of information for transmission in packet switched systems. PDU Protocol Data Unit. A data unit specified in a layer protocol consisting of protocol control information and layer user data. PING Packet Internet Groper. Verifies if a specific IP address is available. A packet is sent to another IP address and waits for a reply. Port Physical ports provide connecting components that allow microprocessors to communicate with peripheral equipment. Port Mirroring Monitors and mirrors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from one port to a monitoring port. For more information on port mirroring, see Defining Port Mirroring Sessions.716 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol A set of rules that governs how devices exchange information across networks. PVE Protocol VLAN Edge. A port can be defined as a Private VLAN Edge (PVE) port of an uplink port, so that it will be isolated from other ports within the same VLAN. Q QoS Quality of Service. QoS allows network managers to decide how and what network traffic is forwarded according to priorities, application types, and source and destination addresses. Query Extracts information from a database and presents the information for use. R RA RADIUS Advertisement. RD RADIUS Discovery. RS Router Solicitation. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. A method for authenticating system users, and tracking connection time. RMON Remote Monitoring. Provides network information to be collected from a single workstation. RouterDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 717 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY A device that connects to separate networks. Routers forward packets between two or more networks. Routers operate at a Layer 3 level. RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. Detects and uses network topologies that allow a faster convergence of the spanning tree, without creating forwarding loops. Running Configuration File Contains all startup configuration file commands, as well as all commands entered during the current session. After the switch module is powered down or rebooted, all commands stored in the Running Configuration file are lost. S Segmentation Divides LANs into separate LAN segments for bridging. Segmentation eliminates LAN bandwidth limitations. Server A central computer that provides services to other computers on a network. Services may include file storage and access to applications. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. Manages LANs. SNMP based software communicates with network devices with embedded SNMP agents. SNMP agents gather network activity and device status information, and send the information back to a workstation. SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol. SNTP assures accurate network switch clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. SoC System on a Chip. An ASIC that contains an entire system. For example, a telecom SoC application can contain a microprocessor, digital signal processor, RAM, and ROM.718 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Spanning Tree Protocol Prevents loops in network traffic. The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides tree topography for any arrangement of bridges. STP provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. SSH Secure Shell. Permits logging to another computer over a network, execute commands on a remote machine, and move files from one machine to another. Secure Shell provides strong authentication and secure communications methods over insecure channels. Startup Configuration Retains the exact switch module configuration when the switch module is powered down or rebooted. Subnet Sub-network. Subnets are portions of a network that share a common address component. On TCP/IP networks, devices that share a prefix are part of the same subnet. For example, all devices with a prefix of 157.100.100.100 are part of the same subnet. Subnet Mask Used to mask all or part of an IP address used in a subnet address. Switch Filters and forwards packets between LAN segments. Switches support any packet protocol type. T TCP/IP Transmissions Control Protocol. Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees packets are transmitted and received in the order their sent. Telnet Terminal Emulation Protocol. Enables system users to log in and use resources on remote networks. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 719 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Uses User Data Protocol (UDP) without security features to transfer files. Trap A message sent by the SNMP that indicates that system event has occurred. Trunking Link Aggregation. Optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single trunk (aggregated groups). U UDP User Data Protocol. Transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery. Unicast A form of routing that transmits one packet to one user. V VLAN Virtual Local Area Networks. Logical subgroups with a Local Area Network (LAN) created via software rather than defining a hardware solution. VoIP Voice over IP. W WAN Wide Area Networks. Networks that cover a large geographical area. Wildcard Mask Specifies which IP address bits are used, and which bits are ignored. A wild switch module mask of 255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that all the bits are important. 720 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Index Numerics 24/48 G Ports 37 802.1ab (LLDP-MED) 28 802.1d 22 802.1Q 476, 482 A AC unit 44 Acceptable Frame Type 471 Access Control Lists 31 Access mode 329 Access ports 469 Access Profile Rules (ACEs) 262 Access profiles 261, 272 Accessing the device through the CLI 71 ACE, IPv4 110 ACL binding 123 ACL, IPv4 109 ACL, IPv6 118 ACLs 31, 103 Active users 275 Address pool 301 Address Resolution Protocol 249, 706 Address Tables 422 Administrator Buttons 91 Advanced QoS 25 Advanced Switch Configuration 67 Aggregate Policer 686, 701 Aggregated VLAN 706 Alarms 638 Anycast 178, 183 Apply&Save 91 ARP 249, 251, 706 ARP inspection 31 ARP, dynamic inspection 560 ARP, dynamic inspection list 564 ARP, dynamic inspection list entries 566 ARP, global settings 562 ARP, trusted interfaces 570 ARP, VLAN settings 568 Asset 156 Assignment to hardware queues 651 Authentication methods 134 Authentication profiles 269721 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Auto update, configuration/image file 338 Automatic aging for MAC addresses 19 Auto-Negotiation 18 B Back panel 39, 44 Back Pressure 17, 386 Bandwidth 664 Boot Image Download 85 Booting the Switch 60 BootP 24, 708 BootP and DHCP Clients 24 BPDU 438, 456, 708 BPDU Guard 23 BPDU Handling 438 Bridge Multicast Forward All 525 Bridge Multicast Groups 521 Bridge Protocol Data Unit 708 Broadcast 179, 183 Broadcast Storm Control 20 Buttons 38 C Cables testing 256 CBC 315 Cipher Block-Chaining 315 Class Mapping 682 Class of Service 709 Classic lock 98 Classic STP 435 CLI 27, 68, 71, 261 CLI macro 31 Clock Source 181 Command Line Interface 27 Command Mode Overview 68 Configuration file 354 Configuration file download 352 Configuration using the Setup Wizard 61 Configuration Work Flow 58 Configuring Login Banners 78 Configuring the Stack 61 Configuring the Switch 57 Connecting the Switch to the Terminal 59 Console 269, 272 Console access 291 Copying files 361 CoS 709 CoS 802.1p support 24 CoS to Queue 660 Counter Summary 612 CPU Utilization 648722 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY D Daylight Savings Times 170 Default domain names 245 Default Gateway, IPv6 226 Defining device information 156 Denied ACEs Counters 608 Device representation 89 Device structure 36 DHCP 572 DHCP client 24, 297 DHCP limitations 575 DHCP Relay 586 DHCP Relay, global settings 589 DHCP Relay, limitations 587 DHCP Relay, Option 82 Overview 587 DHCP server 32, 297, 299 DHCP server properties 298 DHCP server, retreiving an IP address 72 DHCP Snooping 31, 573 DHCP, global parameters 575 DHCP, trusted interfaces 581 DHCP, VLAN settings 579 DiffServe Code Point 709 DNS 28, 242 Domain 709 Domain Name System 28, 242 Dot1x 29 Dot1x Authentication 132 Download, boot image 85 Download, system image 83 Download, TFTP 353 Download, USB/HTTP 351 Downloading software 80, 337 DSCP 709 DSCP Mapping 680 DSCP Rewrite 671 DST Times 170 Duplex mode 709 DVA 134, 710 Dynamic ACL Assignment/Dynamic Policy Assignment (DACL/DPA) 31 Dynamic Addresses 427 Dynamic addresses 428 Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment 134 Dynamic VLAN Assignment 141 Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) 134, 710 E E-911 541 EAP 29, 132 EAP Statistics 622723 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Egress ports 710 Egress Shaping Rates 664 Emergency Call Service 541 Enable 282 Enable passwords 281 End System 710 Erase FLASH File 81 Etherlike Statistics 616 Ethernet 710 Events 634 Events log 637 EWS 710 Excluded addresses 306 Excluding addresses 307 Extensible Authentication Protocol 29, 132 F Fans 160 Fast Forward Table 710 Fast link 23, 442, 447 FFT 710 FIFO 711 File information 365 Filtering 477, 483, 517 Filtering L2 Multicast Packets 517 Firmware download 352 First In First Out 711 Flapping 711 Flow Control 386, 711 Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) 17 Flow Monitoring (sflow) 26 Forwarding L2 Multicast Packets 517 Fragment 711 Frame 711 Frame Flow 468 Front Panel 37 Full 802.1Q VLAN Tagging Compliance 21 G GARP 430, 433, 711 GARP timers 432 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 21, 711 General Ports 470 General Switch Information 156 Generic Attributes Registration Protocol 711 Giga Port LEDs 42 Gigabit Ethernet 711 Global Configuration Mode 69 Green Ethernet 17724 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Green Ethernet Configuration 390 Guest VLAN 22 GVRP 620, 711 GVRP parameters 490 GVRP statistics 619 GVRP Support 21 H Hardware description 35 Hardware version 370 Hash 181 HDMI port LEDs 43 HDMI ports 37 Head of Line Blocking Prevention 17 Help 91 HMAC-SHA-96 326 HOL 17, 711 Host 712 Host name mapping 247 HTTP 261, 269, 286, 712 HTTP password, configuring 77 HTTPS 261, 264, 269, 286 HyperText Transport Protocol 712 I IC 712 ICMP 712 Icons 91 Identifying a switch via LED 33 IEEE 712 IEEE 802.1d 712 IEEE 802.1p 712 IEEE 802.1Q 21, 712 IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree 23 IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree 23 IGMP 518 IGMP Snooping 20, 527, 712 Image file 713 Image files, active 360 Information Buttons 91 Ingress port 713 Ingress Rate Limit 664 Interface Configuration Mode 70 Interface Statistics 614 IP 713 IP address from a BOOTP Server 73 IP Addressing 209 IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support 16 IPv4 Interfaces 210 IPv6 Default Gateway 226 IPv6 Interfaces 221725 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6 Neighbors 235 IPv6 Routes Table 239 IPv6-based ACL 117 ISATAP 229 iSCSI 595 iSCSI Sessions 603, 605 iSCSI Targets 601 iSCSI, global parameters 598 iSCSI, limitations 596 iSCSI, optimization 32, 594 J Jumbo Frames 388 L LACP parameters 511 LAG configuration 409 LAG membership 514 LAG statistics 645 LAGs 24, 508, 525, 713 LAGs Settings 481 LAN 713 Layer 2 714 Layer 2 Features 20 Layer 2 Switching 517 Layer 3 714 LED Definitions 40 LEDs 38, 42 LEDs on Front Panel 38 Light Emitting Diodes 40 Limited dynamic lock 98 Line passwords 279 Link Aggregated Group 713 Link aggregation 24, 508, 510 Link Aggregation and LACP 24 Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets 399, 451 Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery 714 Link/Duplex/Activity LEDs 42 LLDP 540 LLDP MED Port Settings 552 LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery 541 LLDP Port Settings 546 LLDP properties 542 LLDP-MED 28, 541, 714 Load Balancing 714 Loading Software into Stack Members 54 Local User Database 277 Location LED 373 Locked ports 29, 100, 105, 108, 110, 115, 118, 121, 124, 126, 130, 580, 582, 584726 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Log file in Flash 202 Logging Global Parameters 196 Logging Severity Level - Alert 196 Logging Severity Level - Critical 196 Logging Severity Level - Debug 196 Logging Severity Level - Emergency 196 Logging Severity Level - Error 196 Logging Severity Level - Informational 196 Logging Severity Level - Notice 196 Logging Severity Level - Warning 196 Login Banners 78 Login History 203 Logs 195 Loops 435 M MAC Address Capacity Support 18 MAC address learning 714 MAC addresses 98, 714 MAC addresses, supported features 18 MAC Layer 714 MAC Multicast Support 19 Mac-based ACE 106 Mac-based ACL 104 Management Access Lists 262 Management Access Methods 272 Management Information Base 314, 715 Management IP Address Conflict Notification 26 Management methods 264 Management security 261 Managing configuration files on the stack 54 Manual Time Setting 169 Mask 715 MD5 181, 715 MDI 406, 715 MDI/MDIX 18, 385 MDIX 406, 715 MED Network Policy 549 Media Endpoint Discovery 549 Message Digest 5 181, 715 MIB 314, 715 Monitoring users 146 MPS 44 MST Properties 456 MSTP 23, 455 MSTP Instance Settings 460 MSTP Interface Settings 462727 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast 516, 525 Multicast TV VLAN 22 Multicast TV VLAN Mapping 537 Multicast TV VLAN Membership 535 Multiple STP (MSTP) 435 N ND 715 Neighbor Advertisement 715 Neighbor Discovery. 715 Neighbor Solicitation 715 Neighbors 557 Neighbors, IPv6 235 Network Control Protocols 399, 451 Network Management System 715 Network pool 303 NMS 715 NS 715 O Object ID 315 OID 315 Optical transciever diagnostics 258 Option 82 587 OUI 504 P Packets 716 Password configuration 75 Password management 30, 286 Password recovery 82 Passwords 88, 282 Path Cost 438 PDU 716 PING 716 PoE 16, 162 Policer Statistics 699 Policers 685 Policy Binding 696 Policy Table 689 Port 716 Port Configuration 403 Port default settings 386 Port LEDs 40, 42 Port mirroring 20, 417, 716 Port modes 469 Port profile 31 Port representation 89 Port security 98 Port settings 475 Port-based Authentication 132 Port-based Authentication (Dot1x) 29728 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port-based Virtual LANs (VLANs) 21 Ports 37, 89, 384, 645 Ports, statistics 643 Power over Ethernet 16 Power supplies 44 Print 91 Private VLAN 22, 494 Privileged EXEC Mode 68 Proprietary Protocol Filtering 32, 125 Protected Port Configuration 395 Protected ports 32, 394 Protected ports, restrictions 394 Protocol 717 Protocol Group 484, 485 Protocol Ports 488 Protocol VLAN Edge 717 PVE 717 PVID 475, 482 Q QinQ 469 QoS 24, 656, 717 QoS Advanced mode 676 QoS Basic mode 670 QoS Modes 653 QoS Properties 655 QoS, Advanced Mode, Workflow 679 QoS, Aggregate Policer 686 QoS, assignment to hardware queues 651 QoS, Bandwidth 664 QoS, Basic mode 669 QoS, Basic Mode, Workflow 669 QoS, Class Mapping 682 QoS, DSCP Mapping 680 QoS, DSCP Rewrite 671 QoS, DSCP to Queue 662 QoS, Mapping to Queue 659 QoS, Policer Statistics 699 QoS, Policers 684 QoS, Policy Binding 696 QoS, Policy Class Maps 692 QoS, Policy Table 689 QoS, Queues 656 QoS, Single Policer 686 QoS, Statistics 697 QoS, Traffic Classification 651 QoS, Trust Mode 674 Quality of Service 650, 653, 717 R RA 717 RADIUS 271, 291, 717729 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RADIUS Advertisement 717 RADIUS client 29 RADIUS discovery 717 RADIUS server 291 RAM Log 200 Rapid Spanning Tree 450 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 450, 718 Rapid STP 435, 452, 464 RD 717 Rebooting the Stack 54 Refresh 92 Registered Multicast Group 517 Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service 29, 717 Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service 291 Remote Log Server 206 Remote Monitoring 27, 717 Reset button 38 Retrieving an IP Address 72 RMON 625, 628, 629, 717 RMON Statistics 625, 626 Router Solicitation 717 Routes Table, IPv6 239 RS 717 RS-232 Console Port 37 RSTP 23, 450, 718 Rules 262 Running Configuration File 337, 718 S Secure Shell 291 Secure Telnet (SSH) 261, 272 Security Features 29 Security Management 75 Segmentation 718 Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units 51 Self-Learning MAC Addresses 19 Server 718 Set Terminal Baud-Rate 82 Setup Wizard 61 sFlow 375 sFlow interface 380 sFlow receiver 377 sFlow statistics 382 SFP 44 SFP LEDs 44 Simple Network Management Protocol 718 Simple Network Time Protocol 28, 178 Single Policer 686 SMMP groups 322730 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP 261, 264, 286, 314, 718 SNMP access rights 315 SNMP communities 327 SNMP global parameters 316 SNMP logs 25 SNMP Model OIDs 316 SNMP notification filters 330 SNMP notification recipients 333 SNMP users 324 SNMP Versions 1, 2, and 3 26 SNMP views 319 SNTP 28, 178 SNTP Authentication 184 SNTP Global Settings 183 SNTP Servers 187 Software Download 83 Software version 370 Spanning Tree Protocol 22, 435, 719 SPF LEDs 40, 42 SSH 30, 264, 269, 286, 719 SSH password, configuring 77 SSL 29 Stack ID LED 44 Stack management 46, 367 Stack Menu 82 Stack Support 16 Stacking 46 Stacking failover topology 49 Stacking, adding a unit to the stack 50 Stacking, assigning unit IDs 50 Stacking, automatic assignment of unit IDs 50 Starting the Application 88 Startup Configuration 337, 719 Startup file 337 Startup Menu 80 Static addresses 424, 425 Static hosts 308, 310 Statistics 606 Statistics, alarms 638 Statistics, Counter Summary 612 Statistics, CPU Utilization 648 Statistics, Denied ACEs Counters 608 Statistics, EAP 622 Statistics, Etherlike 616 Statistics, events control 634 Statistics, events log 637 Statistics, GVRP 619 Statistics, history control 629 Statistics, history table 631 Statistics, Interface Statistics 614 Statistics, LAGs 645 Statistics, ports 643731 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Statistics, QoS 698 Statistics, Utilization Summary 610 Storm control 414 STP 22, 444 STP BPDU Guard 23 STP mode 437 STP port settings 442 STP, bridge settings 438 STP, classic 437 STP, designated roots 439 STP, LAG settings 447 Subnet 719 Subnet Mask 719 Switch 719 Switching from the Master to the Backup Master 53 SYSLOG 195 System Image Download 83 System LEDs 40 T Table Views 607 TACACS+ 30, 271, 282 TCP Congestion Avoidance 25, 666 TCP/IP 719 TDR technology 256 Telnet 261, 264, 269, 272, 280, 286, 291, 719 Telnet Connection 71 Telnet password, configuring 76 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System 282 Terminal Connection 72 TFTP 27, 720 Time Domain Reflectometry 256 Time range 127 Time range, absolute 128 Time range, recurring 129 Time synchronization 169 Traffic Classification 651 Traffic limitation methods 656 Traffic limitation, combination of WRR and Strict Priority 657 Traffic limitation, Strict Priority 656 Traffic limitation, Weighted Round Robin (WRR) 656 Trap 720 Tree view 88 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 720 Trunk Ports 469 Trunking 720 Tunnel, ISATAP 229732 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY U UDP 720 UDP relay 253 Unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLANs 135 Understanding the interface 88 Unicast 178, 183 Unit ID 367 Unit identification 373 Unregistered Multicast Group 517 Uploading files 355 Uploading files, TFTP 357 Uploading files, USB/HTTP 356 USB File Transfer Protocol 27 USB port 38 User Data Protocol 720 User Security Model 314 Using Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator 87 Using the CLI 68 USM 314 Utilization Summary 610 V Ventilation System 40 Versions, hardware/software 370 Virtual Local Area Networks 720 VLAN 21, 466, 472, 473, 525, 720 VLAN frame flow 468 VLAN membership 472 VLAN settings, DHCP 579 VLAN Support 21 VLAN to MSTP Instance 458 VLAN, ARP settings 568 VLAN, LAG settings 481 VLAN, port settings 475 VLAN, private 494 VLAN, special cases 468 VLAN, voice 498 VLAN-aware MAC-based Switching 19 Voice VLAN 21, 498 Voice VLAN OUI 504 VoIP 720 W Warm standby 52 Web access 291 Web management system icons 91 Web-Based Management 26 Weighted Round Robin (WRR) 656733 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY X XG Ports 37734 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 735 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 25 Revision History Rev Date Description A7 Mar. 11, 2013 Made the following corrections: • Added comment that GVRP is only operational on ports in general mode. A6 Sept. 3, 2012 Made the following corrections: • Added Power Limit field in "Power over Ethernet" on page 162 • Corrected number of ports that can be mirrored to 4 • Corrected number of OUIs from 128 to 16. • Corrected parameters to show power inline command. • Added description of when traps are generated in "Power over Ethernet" on page 162. A5 May 1, 2012 Added "Auto-Update/Configuration Feature" on page 338 A4 April 4, 2012 Made the following corrections: • Put a the note (of the recommendation of using HDMI cable version to 1.4 for stacking) more clearly. • Fixed RDP description A4 April 2, 2012 Following corrections made: • Add description regarding the Egress ACL feature • Enter comments regarding the PVLAN feature. • Fixed RDP abbreviation to Reliable Data Protocol in ACL section. • Add the recommendation of using HDMI cable version to 1.4 for stacking A3 Jan 31, 2012 Corrected command in private VLAN CLI command. A2 Sept 21, 2011 Entered comment that enabling iSCSI also enables flow control on all interfaces.www.dell.com|support.dell.com Printed in the U.S.A. Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series Getting Started Guide Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548P ContaxGS.book Page 1 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your system. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell OpenManage and the YOURS IS HERE logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, MS-DOS and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548P September 2010 P/N JN2W1 A01 ContaxGS.book Page 2 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMContents 3 Contents 1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Unpacking the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Installing the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Installing in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Installing on a Flat Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Connecting the Switch to Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 8 2 Stacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Stacking Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Unit ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Automatic Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Manual Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ContaxGS.book Page 3 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM4 Contents 3 Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Configuration Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connecting the Switch to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . 14 Booting the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Configuring the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Configuration Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . 16 ContaxGS.book Page 4 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 5 Installation Overview This guide describes how to install and run the PowerConnect 5500 series switches. For more information, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide, available on your Documentation CD, or check the Dell Support website at support.dell.com/manuals for the latest updates on documentation and software. In this document, the word "switch" refers to either a single switch or a group of stacked switches. For a complete description of the PowerConnect 5500 series switch, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide, available on your Documentation CD. NOTE: Even though the graphics in this guide show the Dell PowerConnect 5524P device, the instructions are the same for all models. Site Preparation PowerConnect 5500 series switches can be mounted in a standard 48.26-cm (19-inch) equipment rack or placed on a tabletop. Before installing the unit, verify that the chosen location for installation meets the following site requirements: • Power — – The unit is installed near an easily accessible 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz outlet. – If a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) or a Modular Power Supply (MPS) is being used, check that it is easily accessible. • Clearance — There is adequate frontal clearance for operator access. Allow clearance for cabling, power connections, and ventilation. ContaxGS.book Page 5 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM6 Installation • Cabling — The cabling is routed to avoid sources of electrical noise, such as radio transmitters, broadcast amplifiers, power lines, and fluorescent lighting fixtures. • Ambient Requirements — The ambient unit operating temperature range is 0 to 45ºC (32 to 113ºF) at a relative humidity of 10% to 90%, noncondensing. Unpacking Package Contents While unpacking the switch, ensure that the following items are included: • Switch • AC power cable • RS-232 cable with a male 8-pin RJ-45 connector • Self-adhesive rubber pads • Rack-mount kit for rack installation • Documentation CD Unpacking the Switch NOTE: Before unpacking the switch, inspect the package and immediately report any evidence of damage. To unpack the switch: 1 Place the box on a clean flat surface. 2 Open the box or remove the box top. 3 Carefully remove the switch from the box and place it on a secure and clean surface. 4 Remove all packing material. 5 Inspect the switch and accessories for damage. Report any damage immediately to the dealer. ContaxGS.book Page 6 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMInstallation 7 Installing the Switch The PowerConnect 5500 Series switches can be: • Installed on a rack • Placed on a flat surface Installing in a Rack CAUTION: Disconnect all cables from the unit before mounting the switch in a rack or cabinet. CAUTION: When mounting multiple switches into a rack, mount the switches from the bottom up. To install the switch in a rack: 1 Place the supplied rack-mounting bracket on one side of the switch, ensuring that the mounting holes on the switch line up to the mounting holes on the rack-mounting bracket. Figure 1-1 illustrates where to mount the brackets. Figure 1-1. Bracket Installation for Rack Mounting 2 Insert the supplied screws into the rack-mounting holes and tighten with a screwdriver. ContaxGS.book Page 7 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM8 Installation 3 Repeat the process for the rack-mounting bracket on the other side of the switch. 4 Insert the unit into the 48.26-cm (19-inch) rack, ensuring that the rack-mounting holes on the switch line up to the mounting holes on the rack. 5 Secure the unit to the rack with the rack screws (not provided). Fasten the lower pair of screws before the upper pair of screws. Ensure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed. Installing on a Flat Surface Install the switch on a flat surface if it is not installed on a rack. The surface must be able to support the weight of the switch and the switch cables. To install the switch on a flat surface: 1 Attach the self-adhesive rubber pads on each marked location on the bottom of the chassis. 2 Set the switch on a flat surface, leaving 5.08 cm (2 inches) on each side and 12.7 cm (5 inches) at the back. 3 Ensure that the switch has proper ventilation. Connecting the Switch to Power Supplies Each switch in the stack must be connected to an AC power supply. The power connectors are positioned on the back panel. Connecting a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) or Modular Power Supply (MPS) is optional, but recommended. The RPS or MPS connector is on the back panel of the switch. The RPS is used for non-PoE switches and MPS is used for PoE switches. Figure 1-2. Back-Panel Power Connector RPS or MPS A/C Power Supply ContaxGS.book Page 8 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 9 Stacking Overview Each switch is a member in a stack, although the stack may consist of only a single switch. Up to eight switches are supported per stack. All stacks must have a Master unit, and may have a Master Backup unit. All other switches are connected to the stack as members (slaves). Stacking Switches PowerConnect 5500 series switches use two HDMI 10G ports for stacking. To connect the switches in the stack: 1 Insert one end of an HDMI cable into the left-hand HDMI port on the switch at the top of the stack and the other end into the right-hand HDMI port of the switch immediately below it. 2 Repeat this process until all switches are connected. 3 (Optional) Connect the left-hand HDMI port of the switch at the bottom of the stack to the right-hand HDMI port of the switch at the top of the stack. This step provides increased bandwidth and redundancy. ContaxGS.book Page 9 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM10 Stacking Figure 2-1 shows this process. Figure 2-1. Stacking Cable Diagram HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel Front Panel HDMI Ports ContaxGS.book Page 10 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMStacking 11 Unit ID Assignment Each switch in the stack has a unique unit ID that defines the unit’s position and function in the stack. Figure 2-2 describes the stacking LEDs on the front panel of the switch. Figure 2-2. Stacking LEDs on Front Panel The Unit ID of each switch can be either automatically assigned or manually assigned, as described below. Automatic Assignment When you power-up the stack, each switch is assigned a unique Unit ID. This is displayed on the front panel of the switch, as shown in Figure 2-2. The switch that is assigned Unit ID 1 is the Master unit, by default. The switch that is assigned Unit ID 2 is the Master Backup unit. Unit ID Master ContaxGS.book Page 11 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM12 Stacking Manual Assignment To assign unit IDs to the switches in the stack, do the following for each switch in the stack: 1 Connect the switch to the terminal, as described in "Connecting the Switch to the Terminal". 2 Turn on the switch to begin auto boot and press Return or Esc to abort and enter the Start Up menu. 3 Select Stack menu to open the Stack Menu. 4 Select Set unit stack id. Enter either a Unit ID or 0. 0 indicates that the unit ID will be assigned automatically. NOTE: The entire stack should be installed, as shown in Figure 2-1, before powering up the switches. For more information on stacking, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide on the Documentation CD. Startup Menu [1]Download Software [2]Erase Flash File [3]Password Recovery Procedure [4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate [5]Stack menu [6]Back [1]Show unit stack id [2]Set unit stack id [3]Back ContaxGS.book Page 12 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 13 Configuring the Switch This section describes the configuration that must be performed after the switch is installed and connected to power supplies. Additional advanced functions are described in the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide on the Documentation CD. NOTE: Before proceeding further, read the release notes for this product. You can download the release notes from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. NOTE: We recommend that you obtain the most recent revision of the user documentation from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Configuration Work Flow To configure the switches: 1 For each switch in the stack: a Connect it to a terminal, as described in the "Connecting the Switch to the Terminal". b Boot the switch, as described in the "Booting the Switch". c Assign a unit ID to the switch, as described in "Unit ID Assignment". 2 Connect the units in the stack to each other, as described in "Configuring the Stack". 3 Connect the Master unit to the terminal, reboot the unit and the Setup Wizard is run automatically, as described in "Configuration Using the Setup Wizard". 4 Respond to the Setup Wizard prompts. 5 Continue managing the switch, either through the console or Telnet, using the CLI or the web GUI, as described in the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide. ContaxGS.book Page 13 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM14 Configuring the Switch Connecting the Switch to the Terminal The switch is configured and monitored through a terminal desktop system that runs terminal emulation software. The switch connects to the terminal through the console port. To connect the switch to a terminal: 1 Connect an RS-232 cable to a VT100-compatible terminal or the serial connector of a desktop system running terminal emulation software. 2 Connect the RS-232 cable to the switch console port on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 3-1) using an 8-pin RJ-45 male connector. Figure 3-1. Front-Panel Console Port 3 Set the terminal emulation software as follows: a Select the appropriate serial port to connect to the switch. b Set the data rate to 9600 baud. c Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. d Set Flow Control to none. e Select VT100 for Emulation mode within your communication software. f Select Terminal keys for Function, Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that the setting is for Terminal keys (not Windows keys). NOTE: You can connect a console to the console port on any unit in the stack, but stack management is performed only from the stack master (Unit ID 1 or 2). Console Port ContaxGS.book Page 14 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 15 Booting the Switch After the local terminal is connected, turn on power. The switch then goes through power-on self-test (POST). POST runs every time the switch is started and checks hardware components, to determine if the switch is operational before completely booting. If the system detects a critical problem, the boot process stops. If POST passes successfully, a valid executable image is loaded into RAM. POST messages are displayed on the terminal and indicate test success or failure. The boot process runs for approximately 40-45seconds. When the boot process completes, the following LEDs are lit, as shown in Figure 3-2: • Power • Status • Fan (should be green) • RPS (if it is being used) Figure 3-2. Initial LEDs Power Status Fan RPS ContaxGS.book Page 15 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM16 Configuring the Switch Configuring the Stack The switch is always considered to be a stack of switches even if the stack only contains a single switch. If there is more than one switch in the stack, each switch must be configured individually. See "Unit ID Assignment" for instructions on how to configure the stack. Configuration Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration to get the system up and running as quickly as possible. Note that you can skip the Setup Wizard and configure the switch manually through the CLI. The Setup Wizard configures the following fields: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password • Management switch IP address • IP subnet mask • Default gateway IP address NOTE: The Setup Wizard assumes the following: • The PowerConnect switch was never configured before and is in the same state as when you received it. • The PowerConnect switch booted successfully. • The console connection is established and the console prompt is displayed on the screen of a VT100 terminal switch. Connect the Master unit to a terminal. You can identify the Master unit by the illuminated Master LED on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 2-2). To configure the system using the Setup Wizard: 1 Obtain the following information from the network administrator: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password ContaxGS.book Page 16 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 17 • The IP address to be assigned to the VLAN 1 interface through which the switch is to be managed (by default, every external and internal port is a member of the VLAN 1) • The IP subnet mask for the network • The default gateway (next hop router) IP address for configuring the default route 2 Boot the Master unit. The system automatically prompts you to use the Setup Wizard. The Setup Wizard displays the following information: Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration and gets you up and running easily and quickly. You can skip the Setup Wizard and enter CLI mode to manually configure the switch. The system will prompt you with a default answer; by pressing Enter, you accept the default value. You must respond to the next question to run the Setup Wizard within 60 seconds, otherwise the system will continue with normal operation using the default system configuration. Would you like to enter the Setup Wizard (you must answer this question within 60 seconds)? (Y/N) 3 Enter [Y] to run the wizard. If you enter [N] or if you do not respond within 60 seconds, the Setup Wizard automatically exits and the CLI console prompt appears. If you enter [Y] the wizard provides interactive guidance through the initial switch configuration. The following information is displayed: You can exit the Setup Wizard at any time by entering [ctrl+Z]. The system is not set up for SNMP management by default. ContaxGS.book Page 17 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM18 Configuring the Switch To manage the switch using SNMP (required for Dell Network Manager) you can: • Setup the initial SNMP version 2 account now. • Return later and set up the SNMP version account. For more information on setting up a SNMP version 2 account, see the user documentation. Would you like to set up the SNMP management interface now? [Y/N] 4 Enter [N] to skip to Step 7 or enter [Y] to continue the Setup Wizard. If you enter [Y] the following information is displayed: To set up the SNMP management account you must specify the management system IP address and the "community string" or password that the particular management system uses to access the switch. The wizard automatically assigns the highest access level [Privilege Level 15] to this account. You can use Dell Network Manager or other management interfaces to change this setting later and to add additional management system later. For more information on adding management systems, see the user documentation. To add a management station: Please enter the SNMP community string to be used: 5 Enter the SNMP community string. You can use the default name "public" Please enter the IP address of the Management System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage from any Management Station:[0.0.0.0]. 6 Enter the SNMP Management System IP. ContaxGS.book Page 18 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 19 7 Set up user account privilege level, as follows: The following information is displayed: Now we need to set up your initial privilege (Level 15) user account. This account is used to login to the CLI and Web interface. You may set up other accounts and change privilege levels later. For more information on setting up user accounts and changing privilege levels, see the user documentation. To set up a user account: Enter the user name: Please enter the user password: Please reenter the user password: 8 Enter the following: • User name, for example "admin" • Password and password confirmation. 9 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Next, an IP address is setup. The IP address is defined on the default VLAN (VLAN #1). This is the IP address you use to access the Telnet, Web interface, or SNMP interface for the switch. To set up an IP address: Please enter the IP address of the device (A.B.C.D): Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or nn): 10 Enter the management IP address and IP subnet mask, for example 192.168.2.100 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the IP subnet mask. ContaxGS.book Page 19 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM20 Configuring the Switch 11 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Finally, set up the default gateway. Please enter the IP address of the gateway from which this network is reachable (e.g. 192.168.2.1).Default gateway (A.B.C.D):[0.0.0.0] 12 Enter the default gateway. 13 Press Enter. The following is displayed (example): This is the configuration information that has been collected: SNMP Interface = "Dell Network Manager"@192.168.2.10 User Account setup = admin Password = ********** Management IP address = 192.168.2.100 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.2.1 The following information is displayed: If the information is correct, please select (Y) to save the configuration and copy to the start-up configuration file. If the information is incorrect, select (N) to discard configuration and restart the wizard: [Y/N] ContaxGS.book Page 20 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Inspiron™ 640M/ E1405 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle PP19LRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Abréviations et sigles Pour la liste complète des abréviations et des sigles, reportez-vous à la section « Glossaire » à la page 171. Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'application Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. ____________________ Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2006–2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell TravelLite, ExpressCharge, Dell Media Experience et Strike Zone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel et Pentium sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft, Outlook et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque déposée appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et est utilisée par Dell sous licence ; IBM est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation ; EMC est une marque déposée d'EMC Corporation ; ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP19L Mars 2007 Réf. XF808 Rév. A02Table des matières 3 Table des matières Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 Présentation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vue du côté droit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vue de dessous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2 Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connexion à Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Configuration de votre connexion Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Configuration d'une imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Câble de l'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Connexion d'une imprimante USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques. . . . . . . . 30 Parasurtenseurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Filtres de ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Onduleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3 Utilisation de l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Réglage de la luminosité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Basculement de l'image vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Réglage de la résolution d'affichage et du taux de rafraîchissement . . . . . 314 Table des matières 4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile. . . . . . . . . . . 33 Pavé numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Combinaisons de touches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fonctions système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fonctions d'affichage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Radios (notamment le réseau sans fil et une carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Fonctions des haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . . . 35 Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Personnalisation de la tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5 Utilisation d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Performances de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Vérification de la charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Microsoft® Windows® Jauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Indicateur de charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Alerte de batterie faible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Préservation de l'alimentation par batterie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Modes d'économie d'énergie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . 41 Chargement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Remplacement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Stockage de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Lecture CD ou DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Table des matières 5 Réglage du volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Réglage de l'image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™. . . . . . . 46 Si l'ordinateur est allumé ou en mode Veille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Si l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée . . . . . . 46 Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience. . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Utilisation du CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) de Dell MediaDirect™ ou du CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) de Dell MediaDirect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Réparation de Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Connexion de votre ordinateur à un périphérique téléviseur ou audio . . . . 50 S-vidéo et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Vidéo composite et audio standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Vidéo composante et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuration de la lecture de DVD via le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Types de carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Caches pour carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Installation d'une carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Types de carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Caches de carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia ou d'un cache . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Table des matières 8 Configuration d'un réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande . . . . . . . . . 71 Assistant Configuration réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Surveillance de l'état des connexions réseau sans fil via Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Réseau étendu large bande mobile ou sans fil (WWAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Éléments requis pour établir une connexion avec un réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Réseau Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuration de votre connexion Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connexion à un réseau Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Verrou du câble de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Mots de passe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Logiciel de suivi informatique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 10 Dépannage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Service Dell Technical Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . 81 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities . . . . 82 Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Table des matières 7 Utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Problèmes de lecteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel . . . . . . 86 Problèmes liés au disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet . . . . 86 Messages d'erreur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Problèmes liés à la carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au clavier externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Caractères imprévus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Blocages et problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 L'ordinateur ne démarre pas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 L'ordinateur ne répond plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement. . . . . . . . 94 Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® antérieur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Un écran bleu uni apparaît . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Problèmes Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Autres problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Problèmes liés à la mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Problèmes liés au réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Problèmes d'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Problèmes liés au scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Aucun son émis par le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Table des matières Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Problèmes vidéo et d'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Si l'écran est vide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Si l'écran est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles. . . . . . . . . . 104 Restauration du système d'exploitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Utilisation du CD Operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 11 Ajout et remplacement de pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Retour de votre disque dur à Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Lecteurs optiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 À propos de la vis de fixation de périphérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Retrait et installation des lecteurs optiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B . . . 118 Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM A . . . 120 Modem (en option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Carte Mini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Retrait du cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Remise en place du cache de la charnière. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Table des matières 9 Clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Retrait du clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Remise en place du clavier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . 130 Pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Retrait de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Remise en place de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 12 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 13 Voyager avec votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Identification de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Emballage de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Conseils de voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Transport aérien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 14 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 15 Caractéristiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 16 Annexe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Affichage de l'écran de configuration du système. . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Options fréquemment utilisées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Nettoyage de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Ordinateur, clavier et écran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Lecteur de disquette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 CD et DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16810 Table des matières Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . 168 Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell . . . . . 169 Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Classe B de la FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Caractéristiques Macrovision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Glossaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Recherche d'informations 11 Recherche d'informations REMARQUE : Il se peut que certaines fonctionnalités et certains supports soient en option et ne soient pas livrés avec votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ne sont pas nécessairement disponibles dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient fournies avec votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici • Programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • La documentation concernant mon appareil • NSS (Notebook System Software) CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé ResourceCD) REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec tous les ordinateurs. La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser le CD pour réinstaller les pilotes (reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102) ou pour exécuter Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). Des fichiers « Lisez-moi » peuvent être inclus sur votre CD ; ces fichiers fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques de dernière minute apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des pilotes et de la documentation se trouvent à l'adresse support.dell.com. • Informations sur les garanties • Termes et Conditions (États-Unis uniquement) • Consignes de sécurité • Informations sur les réglementations • Informations relatives à l'ergonomie • Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™12 Recherche d'informations • Comment configurer mon ordinateur Schéma de configuration • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft® Windows® Ces étiquettes sont situées sur la base de votre ordinateur. • Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service de support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support technique. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciRecherche d'informations 13 • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens, cours en ligne et questions fréquemment posées • Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Coordonnées, appels de service et état des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations • Service et support — État des appels de service et historique du support, contrat de service, discussions en ligne avec le support technique • Référence — Documentation de l'ordinateur, détails sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques de produit et livres blancs • Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles agréés • Notebook Logiciel système (NSS)— Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation de l'ordinateur, vous devez également réinstaller l'utilitaire NSS. NSS fournit des mises à jour essentielles pour le système d'exploitation et la prise en charge des lecteurs de disquette USB Dell™ de 3,5 pouces, des processeurs Intel® Pentium® M, des lecteurs optiques et des périphériques USB. NSS est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell. Ce logiciel détecte automatiquement votre ordinateur et son système d'exploitation, et installe les mises à jour appropriées à votre configuration. Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région pour afficher le site de support approprié. REMARQUE : Les représentants des grandes entreprises, du gouvernement et du domaine de l'éducation peuvent également utiliser le site Web de support personnalisé Premier de Dell à l'adresse premier.support.dell.com. Pour télécharger NSS (Notebook System Software) : 1 Allez à l'adresse support.dell.com et cliquez sur Téléchargements. 2 Saisissez votre numéro de service ou le modèle de l'appareil. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Télécharger une catégorie, cliquez sur All (Toutes). 4 Sélectionnez le système d'exploitation et la langue du système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur, puis cliquez sur Soumettre. 5 Sous Select a Device (Sélectionner un périphérique), rendez-vous à System and Configuration Utilities (Utilitaires de système et de configuration), puis cliquez sur Dell NSS(Notebook System Software). • Mises à niveau logicielles et astuces de dépannage — Questions fréquemment posées, sujets d'actualité et état général de votre environnement informatique Utilitaire de support de Dell L'utilitaire de support de Dell est un système de mise à niveau et de notification automatique installé sur votre ordinateur. Il permet de réaliser des balayages en temps réel de l'état de votre environnement informatique et des mises à jour logicielles et fournit des informations de support automatique appropriées. Accédez à l'utilitaire de support de Dell à l'aide de l'icône située dans la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilitaire de support de Dell » à la page 84. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici14 Recherche d'informations • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Comment utiliser des programmes et des fichiers • Comment personnaliser mon bureau Centre d'aide et de support de Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. • Informations sur l'activité réseau, l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation, les touches de raccourci et les éléments contrôlés par Dell QuickSet Aide Dell QuickSet Pour afficher l'aide Dell QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône , dans la barre des tâches de Microsoft® Windows®. Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD Operating System REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Operating System soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec certains ordinateurs. Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Operating System. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du CD Operating system » à la page 108. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities (ResourceCD) pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques accompagnant votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre CD dépend du système d'exploitation que vous avez commandé. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciPrésentation de votre ordinateur 15 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue frontale 1 loquet de fermeture de l'écran 2 écran 3 bouton d'alimentation 4 voyants d'état de l'appareil 5 tablette tactile 6 boutons de commande multimédia 7 haut-parleurs 8 boutons de la tablette tactile 9 clavier 10 voyants d'état du clavier et du sans fil 11 loquets de l'écran (2) 1 9 2 5 8 3 7 10 4 6 1116 Présentation de votre ordinateur LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L'ÉCRAN — Faites glisser et maintenez ce loquet pour déverrouiller les dispositifs de fermeture et ouvrir l'écran. ÉCRAN — Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de l'écran » à la page 31. BOUTON D'ALIMENTATION — Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie. AVIS : Afin d'éviter de perdre des données, éteignez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer plutôt qu'en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation. VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D E L'APPAREIL Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : • Vert fixe : la batterie est en cours de charge. • Vert clignotant : la batterie est presque complètement chargée. Si l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : • Éteint : la batterie est suffisamment chargée (ou l'ordinateur est éteint). • Orange clignotant : le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. • Orange fixe : le niveau de charge de la batterie est critique. S'allume lorsque vous mettez l'ordinateur sous tension et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant clignote. Reste allumé ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie.Présentation de votre ordinateur 17 TABLETTE TACTILE — Assure les mêmes fonctions que la souris. BOUTONS D E COMMANDE MULTIMÉDIA — Contrôlent la lecture des CD, DVD et lecteurs multimédia. HAUT-PARLEURS — Pour régler le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés, appuyez sur les boutons de commande multimédia ou les raccourcis clavier du volume des haut-parleurs. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions des haut-parleurs » à la page 35. BOUTONS D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — La tablette tactile et ses boutons offrent les mêmes fonctionnalités que la souris. CLAVIER — Le clavier comporte un pavé numérique et la touche du logo Microsoft Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les raccourcis clavier pris en charge, reportez-vous à la section « Combinaisons de touches » à la page 34. Met le son en sourdine. Diminue le son. Augmente le son. Lecture ou pause. Revient à la plage précédente. Passe à la plage suivante. Arrêt. Lancement de Dell MediaDirect ou Microsoft® Windows® Media Center Edition. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™ » à la page 46.18 Présentation de votre ordinateur VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D U CLAVIER E T D U SANS FIL Les voyants verts situés au-dessus du clavier indiquent ce qui suit : LOQUETS D E L'ÉCRAN — Permettent de maintenir l'écran fermé. S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allume lorsque la fonction Majuscules est activée. S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Pour activer ou désactiver le réseau sans fil, appuyez sur . S'allume lorsqu'une carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® est activée. REMARQUE : La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth est une fonctionnalité optionnelle, le voyant ne s'allume donc que lorsque vous avez commandé la carte avec votre ordinateur. Pour des informations supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec votre carte. Pour désactiver uniquement la fonctionnalité de technologie sans fil Bluetooth, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la zone de notification et sélectionnez Désactiver radio Bluetooth. Pour activer ou désactiver rapidement tous les périphériques sans fil, appuyez sur . 9 APrésentation de votre ordinateur 19 Vue du côté gauche PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, assurez-vous qu'il correspond au type d'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. EMPLACEMENT POUR CÂBLE D E SÉCURITÉ — Permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec l'appareil. ENTRÉE D'AIR — L'ordinateur utilise des ventilateurs pour garantir la circulation de l'air à travers les entrées d'air et éviter tout risque de surchauffe. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 entrée d'air 3 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 4 connecteur IEEE 1394 5 connecteur microphone 6 connecteur de casque 7 lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 8 logement de carte ExpressCard 1 2 6 3 45 7 820 Présentation de votre ordinateur CONNECTEUR D E SORTIE TV S-VIDÉO CONNECTEUR IEEE 1394 — Permet de relier des périphériques qui prennent en charge des vitesses de transfert ultra rapides IEEE 1394, par exemple des caméras vidéo numériques. CONNECTEURS AUDIO LECTEUR D E CARTE MÉMOIRE MULTIMÉDIA 5 EN 1— Moyen pratique et rapide de visualiser et de partager des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire. Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia numériques suivantes : • Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Carte xD-Picture LOGEMENT D E CARTE EXPRESSCARD — Prend en charge une carte ExpressCard. Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique dans le logement. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Permet également de relier des périphériques audio numériques à l'aide d'un câble d'adaptateur audio numérique/TV. Raccordez un microphone au connecteur . Raccordez un casque ou des haut-parleurs au connecteur .Présentation de votre ordinateur 21 Vue du côté droit BAIE D E LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Vous pouvez installer des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur de DVD ou un autre lecteur optique dans la baie de lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. BOUTON D'ÉJECTION D U PLATEAU D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour éjecter un CD ou un DVD du lecteur optique. CONNECTEURS USB CONNECTEUR MODEM (RJ-11) AVIS : Le connecteur réseau est légèrement plus grand que le connecteur modem. Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, ne connectez pas de ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. 1 baie de lecteur optique 2 bouton d'éjection du plateau du lecteur optique 3 connecteurs USB (2) 4 connecteur modem (RJ-11) 5 connecteur réseau (RJ-45) 6 connecteur vidéo Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette optionnel. Pour utiliser le modem interne, connectez la ligne téléphonique au connecteur modem. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du modem, reportez-vous à la documentation en ligne correspondante fournie avec votre ordinateur. 1 2 6 3 4522 Présentation de votre ordinateur CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU (RJ-45) CONNECTEUR VIDÉO Vue arrière CONNECTEURS USB CONNECTEUR D'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Sert à relier l'adaptateur secteur à l'ordinateur. Cet adaptateur convertit l'alimentation CA en alimentation CC qui est celle requise par l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint. Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un réseau. Les voyants vert et jaune situés près du connecteur indiquent l'activité de communication filaire. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la carte réseau, consultez la documentation en ligne de la carte réseau fournie avec votre ordinateur. Permet de relier un moniteur externe compatible VGA. 1 connecteurs USB (2) 2 connecteur d'adaptateur secteur Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette optionnel. 1 2Présentation de votre ordinateur 23 PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur fonctionne avec les tensions secteur disponibles dans le monde entier. Cependant, les connecteurs et les rampes d'alimentation varient selon les pays. L'utilisation d'un câble non compatible ou le branchement incorrect du câble sur la rampe d'alimentation ou la prise secteur peut provoquer un incendie ou endommager l'équipement. AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur, tenez le connecteur du câble de l'adaptateur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d'éviter de l'endommager. Vue de dessous BATTERIE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le brancher au secteur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37. CACHE D U MODULE D E MÉMOIRE — Recouvre le compartiment des modules de mémoire. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la page 117. LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L A BAIE D E BATTERIE — Permet de retirer la batterie de la baie de batterie. Reportezvous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41. 1 batterie 2 cache du module de mémoire 3 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 4 aération du ventilateur 5 cache du processeur et du module thermique 6 cache du modem/de la carte/ du dispositif sans fil 7 vis de verrouillage du lecteur optique 8 unité de disque dur 9 indicateur de charge de la batterie 6 5 7 1 3 2 4 8 924 Présentation de votre ordinateur VENTILATEUR — L'ordinateur utilise un ventilateur pour garantir la circulation de l'air à travers les entrées d'air et éviter tout risque de surchauffe. CACHE D U PROCESSEUR E T D U MODULE THERMIQUE — Masque le processeur et le module thermique. CACHE D U MODEM/D E LA CARTE MINI/D U DISPOSITIF SANS FIL — Recouvre le compartiment qui contient le modem, la carte Mini et la carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la page 123. VIS D E VERROUILLAGE D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Sert à fixer le lecteur optique dans la baie du lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. DISQUE DUR — Stocke les logiciels et les données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections « Disque dur » à la page 113 et « Problèmes liés au disque dur » à la page 86. La taille de votre disque dur affichée dans l'Explorateur Windows est la capacité du lecteur avant l'installation de tout système d'exploitation ou tous programmes. INDICATEUR D E CHARGE D E L A BATTERIE — Donne des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de la charge de la batterie » à la page 38.Configuration de votre ordinateur 25 Configuration de votre ordinateur Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Votre fournisseur d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion Internet suivantes : • Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup plus lentes que les connexions DSL ou modem par câble. • Connexions DSL qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique existante. Avec une connexion DSL, vous pouvez accéder à Internet et utiliser votre téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément. • Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de la ligne TV câblée locale. Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne téléphonique au connecteur du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion DSL ou modem par câble, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour obtenir les instructions de configuration. Configuration de votre connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l'aide du raccourci de bureau d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet fourni : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Pour effectuer la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Si aucune icône de fournisseur d'accès Internet n'apparaît sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre fournisseur d'accès Internet : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Internet Explorer. L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée : • Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en sélectionner un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet.26 Configuration de votre ordinateur • Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur de services Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous sélectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour terminer la configuration. REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour terminer la configuration. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes de connexion à Internet, reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet » à la page 86. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet alors que vous l'avez déjà fait auparavant, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet subisse une interruption de services. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP inclut un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de déplacer des données d'un ordinateur à un autre. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que : • Messages e-mail • Paramètres de la barre d'outils • Tailles de fenêtre • Signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur en utilisant une connexion réseau, ou les stocker sur un support amovible, comme un CD inscriptible ou une disquette. REMARQUE : Pour des instructions sur la configuration d'une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances de Microsoft Article nº 305621, intitulé How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP (Comment configurer une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs sous Windows XP). Ces informations peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, utilisez le CD Operating System en option ou créez un disque Assistant à l'aide de l'utilitaire Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System REMARQUE : Le CD Operating system est requis. Toutefois, ce CD est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs.Configuration de votre ordinateur 27 Pour ouvrir l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD Operating System de Windows XP. 2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating system en option, vous devez créer un disque Assistant qui va permettre la création d'un fichier d'image de sauvegarde pour supports amovibles. Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de Windows XP et suivez les étapes suivantes : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.28 Configuration de votre ordinateur 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je souhaite créer un disque Assistant dans le lecteur suivant : , puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'une disquette ou un CD, puis cliquez sur OK. 6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant. 7 Allez à votre ancien ordinateur. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Insérez le disque Assistant sur l'ancien ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Exécuter. 3 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz (pour le support amovible approprié) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, rendez-vous sur le site Web dell.support.com pour accéder au document nº PA1089586 (How Do I Transfer Files From My Old Computer to My New Dell Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System CD? [Comment transférer des fichiers à partir de mon ancien ordinateur vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du CD Operating System Microsoft® Windows®XP]). REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base de connaissances Dell. Configuration d'une imprimante AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, notamment : • Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour. • Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur. • Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre.Configuration de votre ordinateur 29 Consultez le Manuel du propriétaire de l'imprimante pour obtenir une assistance technique ou contactez le fabricant de l'imprimante. Câble de l'imprimante L'imprimante se connecte à l'ordinateur avec un câble USB ou un câble parallèle. Il est possible que l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous qu'il est compatible avec votre imprimante et votre ordinateur. Si vous avez acheté un câble d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous soit livré avec ce dernier. Connexion d'une imprimante USB REMARQUE : Vous pouvez connecter des périphériques USB pendant que l'ordinateur est sous tension. 1 Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation, si vous ne l'avez pas déjà fait. 2 Raccordez le câble USB de l'imprimante aux connecteurs USB de l'ordinateur et de l'imprimante. Les connecteurs USB ne s'insèrent que dans un seul sens. 3 Allumez l'imprimante, puis l'ordinateur. Si la fenêtre Assistant Ajout de matériel apparaît, cliquez sur Annuler. 4 Le cas échéant, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante. 1 connecteur USB de l'ordinateur 2 câble USB de l'imprimante 3 connecteur sur l'imprimante 2 1 330 Configuration de votre ordinateur Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la tension et les pannes d'alimentation : • Parasurtenseurs • Filtres de ligne • Onduleurs Parasurtenseurs Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection contre la surtension réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage électrique ou suite à une coupure de courant. Certains fabricants offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez attentivement la garantie du parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre une meilleure protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs. AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de courant. De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour assurer la protection du modem. Consultez la documentation du parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem. AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau. Déconnectez le câble de réseau de la prise réseau murale pendant les orages. Filtres de ligne AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de courant. Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement constant. Onduleurs AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque dur peut provoquer une perte de données ou la corruption du fichier. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez uniquement votre ordinateur à un onduleur. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente équipée d'un parasurtenseur. Les onduleurs protègent contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Ils incluent une batterie qui alimente temporairement les périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de la batterie et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Utilisation de l'écran 31 Utilisation de l'écran Réglage de la luminosité Lorsque l'ordinateur Dell™ fonctionne avec une batterie, vous pouvez économiser de l'énergie en réglant le paramètre de luminosité au minimum acceptable à l'aide de et la flèche haut ou bas du clavier. REMARQUE : Les combinaisons de touches pour la luminosité n'ont des répercussions que sur l'affichage de l'ordinateur portable ; elles n'ont aucune répercussion sur les moniteurs ou les projecteurs que vous connectez au portable ou à la station d'accueil. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe et que vous essayez de modifier le niveau de luminosité, il se peut que l'indicateur de luminosité s'affiche, mais le niveau de luminosité du périphérique externe ne change pas dans tous les cas. Appuyez sur les touches suivantes pour régler la luminosité de l'écran : • Appuyez sur et sur la flèche haut pour augmenter la luminosité de l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). • Appuyez sur et sur la flèche bas pour réduire la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). Basculement de l'image vidéo Lorsque vous démarrez un ordinateur auquel un périphérique externe (tel qu'un moniteur externe ou un projecteur) est connecté et que ce périphérique est sous tension, l'image peut s'afficher sur l'écran intégré ou sur le périphérique externe. Appuyez sur pour basculer entre les options d'affichage suivantes pour l'image vidéo : écran seul, périphérique externe seul ou écran et périphérique externe simultanément. Réglage de la résolution d'affichage et du taux de rafraîchissement Pour qu'un programme s'affiche à une résolution spécifique, le contrôleur vidéo et l'écran doivent prendre tous deux en charge le programme sélectionné et les pilotes vidéo requis doivent être installés. Avant de modifier un paramètre d'affichage par défaut, prenez note du paramètre d'origine et gardez-le pour référence ultérieure.32 Utilisation de l'écran Si vous sélectionnez une résolution ou une palette de couleurs plus élevée que celle prise en charge par l'écran, les paramètres se règlent automatiquement sur la configuration prise en charge la plus proche. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous Choisissez une tâche…, cliquez sur la zone à modifier, ou sous ou une icône du Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. REMARQUE : Lorsque vous augmentez la résolution de l'écran, les icônes et le texte apparaissent plus petits.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 33 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Pavé numérique Le pavé numérique fonctionne comme celui d'un clavier externe. Chaque touche du pavé numérique a plusieurs fonctions. Les chiffres et les symboles du pavé numérique figurent en bleu à droite de ces touches. Pour taper un chiffre ou un symbole, appuyez sur et sur la touche désirée après activation du pavé. • Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur . Le voyant indique que le pavé numérique est activé. • Pour désactiver le pavé numérique, appuyez de nouveau sur . 1 pavé numérique 1 934 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Combinaisons de touches Fonctions système Batterie Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD Fonctions d'affichage Radios (notamment le réseau sans fil et une carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®) Ouvre la fenêtre Gestionnaire des tâches. Affiche la jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet. Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas prise en charge par Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 38. Éjecte le plateau du lecteur (si Dell QuickSet est installé). Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas prise en charge par Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. Bascule l'image vidéo vers l'option d'affichage suivante. Les options comprennent l'écran intégré, un moniteur externe et les deux écrans simultanément. et la touche flèche haut Augmente la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (non pas sur un moniteur externe). et la touche flèche bas Diminue la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (non pas sur un moniteur externe). Active et désactive les radios, notamment le réseau sans fil et la carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 35 Gestion de l'alimentation Fonctions des haut-parleurs Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® Pour régler les options du clavier, telles que la vitesse de répétition des caractères, ouvrez le panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Clavier. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14. Active un mode d'économie d'énergie. Vous pouvez reprogrammer ce raccourci clavier pour activer un autre mode d'économie d'énergie sous l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation. Reportezvous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. Augmente le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Diminue le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Active et désactive les haut-parleurs intégrés et les hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Touche du logo Windows et Réduit toutes les fenêtres ouvertes. Touche du logo Windows et Agrandit toutes les fenêtres. Touche du logo Windows et Exécute l'Explorateur Windows. Cela ouvre la même fenêtre que lorsque vous double-cliquez sur Poste de travail sur le bureau. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Exécuter. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results (Résultats de la recherche). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results-Computer (Résultats de la recherche - Ordinateur) (si l'ordinateur est connecté à un réseau). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue System Properties (Propriétés système).36 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Tablette tactile La tablette tactile détecte la pression et le mouvement de vos doigts pour vous permettre de déplacer le curseur à l'écran. Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons de la même façon que vous utilisez la souris. • Posez et déplacez votre doigt sur la surface de la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur. • Pour sélectionner un objet, appuyez délicatement une fois sur la surface de la tablette tactile ou appuyez avec le pouce sur le bouton gauche de la tablette tactile. • Pour sélectionner et déplacer (ou faire glisser) un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et tapez deux fois sur la tablette. Laissez votre doigt sur la tablette tactile la deuxième fois et déplacez l'objet sélectionné en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la surface. • Pour double-cliquer sur un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et appuyez doucement deux fois sur la tablette tactile ou appuyez deux fois sur le bouton gauche à l'aide de votre pouce. Personnalisation de la tablette tactile Vous pouvez désactiver la tablette tactile ou régler ses paramètres à l'aide de la fenêtre de propriétés Mouse Properties (Souris). 1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis cliquez sur Souris. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14. 2 Dans la fenêtre de propriétés Mouse Properties (Souris), cliquez sur l'onglet Tablette tactile pour régler les paramètres de la tablette tactile. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre. 1 tablette tactile 1Utilisation d'une batterie 37 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des informations sur la garantie Dell de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide d'information sur le produit ou au document de garantie livré avec votre ordinateur. Pour un fonctionnement optimal et afin de préserver les paramètres du BIOS, laissez la batterie principale installée en permanence dans votre ordinateur portable Dell™. Votre ordinateur est livré avec une batterie, installée dans la baie. REMARQUE : Lors de la première utilisation de votre ordinateur, la batterie n'étant pas obligatoirement complètement chargée, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour raccorder votre nouvel ordinateur à une prise secteur. Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur tant que la batterie n'est pas complètement chargée. Pour afficher le niveau de charge de la batterie, accédez au Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Options d'alimentation, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Jauge d'alimentation. REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie reste chargée) diminue avec le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, il est possible que vous deviez en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur. L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction des conditions de fonctionnement. Cette durée est considérablement réduite par l'exécution de certaines opérations, notamment, sans que cela soit limitatif : • Utilisation des lecteurs optiques • Utilisation de périphériques de communications sans fil, de cartes ExpressCard, de cartes mémoire multimédia ou de périphériques USB • Utilisation de paramètres élevés d'affichage et de luminosité, d'économiseurs d'écran en 3D ou d'autres programmes gourmands en ressources, tels que des jeux en 3D • Fonctionnement de l'ordinateur en mode de performances optimales (reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41). REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de connecter l'ordinateur à une prise électrique lorsque vous gravez un CD ou DVD. Vous pouvez vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie (reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de la charge de la batterie » à la page 38) avant d'insérer la batterie dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin que l'ordinateur vous alerte lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Pour des informations sur l'accès à Quickset ou à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41.38 Utilisation d'une batterie PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell. N'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures ménagères. Lorsque votre batterie ne tient plus sa charge, contactez votre service municipal de traitement des déchets pour savoir comment vous en débarrasser. Reportez-vous à la section « Mise au rebut de la batterie » du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation inadéquate de la batterie peut augmenter le risque d'incendie ou de brûlure chimique. Prenez soin de ne pas la percer, l'incinérer, la démonter ou l'exposer à une température supérieure à 65 °C (149 °F). Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec d'extrêmes précautions. Les batteries endommagées peuvent fuir et causer des dommages personnels ou matériels. Vérification de la charge de la batterie La jauge de batterie Dell QuickSet, la fenêtre de jauge de Microsoft® Windows®, l'icône , la jauge de charge et la jauge d'état de la batterie, ainsi que l'alerte de batterie faible fournissent des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet Si Dell QuickSet est installé, appuyez sur pour afficher la jauge de batterie QuickSet. La fenêtre Jauge de batterie affiche l'état, le niveau de charge et la durée nécessaire pour le chargement complet de la batterie de votre ordinateur. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Microsoft® Windows® Jauge La jauge de Windows indique la charge de batterie restante. Pour consulter la jauge, double-cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur la jauge d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41. Si l'ordinateur est relié à une prise secteur, l'icône apparaît. Indicateur de charge En appuyant une fois sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie ou en appuyant et en maintenant enfoncé ce bouton, vous pouvez vérifier les éléments suivants : • Le niveau de charge de la batterie (appuyez et relâchez le bouton d'état) • L'état de fonctionnement de la batterie (appuyez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton d'état) L'autonomie de la batterie est déterminée en grande partie par le nombre de charges qu'elle reçoit. Après des centaines de cycles de charge et de décharge, la capacité de charge des batteries diminue et l'état des batteries se dégrade. C'est pourquoi, une batterie peut afficher l'état « chargé » tout en maintenant un niveau de charge réduit (état). Utilisation d'une batterie 39 Vérification du niveau de charge de la batterie Pour vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie, appuyez sur le bouton d'état, situé sur l'indicateur de charge de la batterie, et relâchez-le pour allumer les voyants de niveau de charge. Chaque voyant représente environ 20 pour cent de la charge totale de la batterie. S'il reste, par exemple, 80 pour cent de la charge de la batterie, quatre des voyants sont allumés. Si aucun voyant n'est allumé, la batterie est complètement déchargée. Vérification de l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie de l'une des deux manières suivantes : en utilisant l'indicateur de charge de la batterie comme décrit ci-dessous ou en utilisant la jauge de batterie de Dell QuickSet. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Pour vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie à l'aide de l'indicateur de charge, appuyez sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 3 secondes. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, la batterie est en bon état et elle dispose encore de plus de 80 pour cent de sa capacité de charge d'origine. Chaque voyant représente une dégradation incrémentielle. Si cinq voyants s'allument, la batterie dispose de moins de 60 pour cent de sa capacité de charge et vous devez envisager son remplacement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'autonomie de la batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157. Alerte de batterie faible AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre ou de corrompre des données, enregistrez votre travail juste après l'apparition de l'alerte de batterie faible, puis branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise murale. Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, l'ordinateur passe automatiquement en mode Mise en veille prolongée. Par défaut, une fenêtre contextuelle vous avertit lorsque la batterie est déchargée à environ 90 pour cent. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des alertes relatives à la batterie. Pour des informations sur l'accès à Quickset ou à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41. Préservation de l'alimentation par batterie Procédez comme suit pour économiser l'alimentation de la batterie : • Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur aussi souvent que possible car la durée de vie de la batterie est largement déterminée par le nombre d'utilisations et de recharges. • Mettez l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée lorsque vous le laissez allumé sans l'utiliser pendant de longs laps de temps. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée, reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. • Vous pouvez sélectionner des options à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation afin d'optimiser l'utilisation de l'énergie de votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer ces options pour changer lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, fermez l'écran ou appuyez sur <Échap>. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41 pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « Performances de la batterie » à la page 37 pour plus d'informations sur la préservation de l'alimentation par batterie.40 Utilisation d'une batterie Modes d'économie d'énergie Mode Veille Le mode Veille permet d'économiser l'énergie en désactivant l'affichage et le disque dur au terme d'une période d'inactivité prédéterminée (délai d'attente). Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Veille, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Si l'alimentation secteur ou sur batterie est coupée alors que l'ordinateur est en mode Veille, vous risquez de perdre des données. Pour passer en mode Veille : • Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, puis sur Veille. ou • Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées sous l'onglet Avancé (reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41) de la fenêtre Propriétés des Options d'alimentation, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : – Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. – Fermez l'écran. – Appuyez sur <Échap>. En fonction de la configuration des options de l'onglet Avancé, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation électrique ou ouvrez l'écran pour quitter le mode Veille. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Veille au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Mode Mise en veille prolongée Le mode Mise en veille prolongée économise l'énergie en copiant les données système dans une zone réservée du disque dur avant d'éteindre complètement l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Mise en veille prolongée, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez ni retirer des périphériques ni déconnecter votre ordinateur de la station d'accueil lorsqu'il est en mode Mise en veille prolongée. Votre ordinateur passe en mode Mise en veille prolongée quand le niveau de charge de la batterie devient insuffisant. Pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée manuellement : • Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, appuyez sur et maintenez la touche enfoncée, puis cliquez sur Mise en veille prolongée. ou • Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées dans l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée : – Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. – Fermez l'écran. – Appuyez sur .Utilisation d'une batterie 41 REMARQUE : Certaines cartes ExpressCard peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement lorsque l'ordinateur sort du mode Mise en veille prolongée. Retirez et réinsérez la carte (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67) ou redémarrez tout simplement l'ordinateur. Pour quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur peut mettre quelques instants à quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Mise en veille prolongée, consultez la documentation livrée avec votre système d'exploitation. Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation Vous pouvez utiliser l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation de QuickSet ou les propriétés des options d'alimentation de Windows pour configurer les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation sur votre ordinateur. • Pour accéder à l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, double-cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez sur le bouton Aide dans l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. • Pour accéder à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Performances et maintenance→ Options d'alimentation. Pour des informations sur les champs de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur l'icône Point d'interrogation dans la barre de titre, puis sur la zone sur laquelle vous souhaitez obtenir des informations. Chargement de la batterie REMARQUE : Avec Dell™ ExpressCharge™, l'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée en 1 heure si l'ordinateur est éteint. La durée de chargement est plus longue lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension. Vous pouvez laisser la batterie dans l'ordinateur aussi longtemps que vous le souhaitez. Les circuits internes de la batterie préviennent toute surcharge. Lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur ou que vous installez une batterie pendant que l'ordinateur est branché sur une prise secteur, l'ordinateur vérifie le niveau de charge et la température de la batterie. Au besoin, l'adaptateur secteur charge alors la batterie et maintient le niveau de charge. Si la batterie est chaude parce qu'elle se trouvait dans l'ordinateur ou en raison de la température extérieure, il est probable qu'elle ne se charge pas lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur. Si le voyant clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée. Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur et laissez refroidir l'ordinateur et la batterie jusqu'à ce qu'ils atteignent la température ambiante. Branchez alors l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur et continuez à charger la batterie. Pour plus d'informations sur la résolution des problèmes liés à la batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes d'alimentation » à la page 97. Remplacement de la batterie PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'exécuter ces procédures, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez l'adaptateur secteur de la prise secteur et de l'ordinateur, débranchez le modem de la prise murale et de l'ordinateur et retirez les autres câbles externes de l'ordinateur.42 Utilisation d'une batterie AVIS : Vous devez retirer tous les câbles externes de l'ordinateur pour éviter d'endommager les connecteurs. PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell™, n'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur. AVIS : Si vous décidez de remplacer la batterie alors que l'ordinateur est en veille, vous disposez d'une minute pour effectuer cette opération. Passé ce délai, l'ordinateur s'éteint et toutes les données non enregistrées sont définitivement perdues. Pour retirer la batterie : 1 Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la station d'accueil. 2 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode de gestion de l'alimentation. 3 Faites glisser en le maintenant le loquet de fermeture de la baie de la batterie, situé sous l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie. Pour remettre en place la batterie, suivez la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. Stockage de la batterie Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur lorsque vous rangez ce dernier pendant une période prolongée. Sinon, la batterie finira par se décharger. Après une longue période de stockage, rechargez complètement la batterie avant de l'utiliser (reportez-vous à la section « Chargement de la batterie » à la page 41). 1 batterie 2 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 2 1Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 43 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Lecture CD ou DVD AVIS : N'exercez pas de pression vers le bas sur le plateau du lecteur de CD ou de DVD lorsque vous l'ouvrez ou le fermez. Laissez le plateau fermé lorsque vous n'utilisez pas le lecteur. AVIS : Ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lors de la lecture de CD ou de DVD. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection qui se trouve sur le devant du lecteur. 2 Tirez sur le plateau. 3 Placez le disque, étiquette vers le haut, au centre du plateau et enclenchez-le sur l'axe. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un module expédié avec un autre ordinateur, installez les pilotes et les logiciels nécessaires à la lecture de DVD ou à l'écriture de données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au CD Drivers and Utilities (le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement disponible pour votre ordinateur ou dans certains pays). 4 Poussez le plateau du lecteur pour le refermer.44 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Pour formater les CD afin de stocker des données, créer des CD de musique ou copier des CD, reportezvous au logiciel du CD livré avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous d'être en règle avec les lois relatives aux droits d'auteur lorsque vous créez des CD. Les lecteurs de CD sont dotés des boutons essentiels suivants : Les lecteurs de DVD sont dotés des boutons essentiels suivants : Pour plus d'informations sur la lecture de CD ou DVD, cliquez sur Aide sur le lecteur de CD ou DVD (si disponible). Lecture. Marche arrière dans la plage en cours. Pause. Marche avant dans la plage en cours. Arrêt. Revenir à la plage précédente. Éjecter. Passer à la plage suivante. Arrêt. Redémarrer le chapitre en cours. Lecture. Avance rapide. Pause. Retour rapide. Avancer d'une trame en mode Pause. Passer au titre ou au chapitre suivant. Lecture continue du titre ou du chapitre en cours. Revenir au titre ou au chapitre précédent. Éjecter.Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 45 Réglage du volume REMARQUE : Lorsque les haut-parleurs sont mis en sourdine, vous ne pouvez pas entendre le son du CD ou du DVD. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes (ou Programmes)→ Accessoires→ Divertissement (ou Multimédia), puis cliquez sur Contrôle du volume. 2 Dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume, cliquez et faites glisser la barre située dans la colonne Contrôle du volume, puis déplacez-la vers le haut ou le bas pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume. Pour plus d'informations sur les options de contrôle du volume, cliquez sur Aide dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume. L'indicateur de volume affiche le niveau du volume actuel, même lorsque le son est mis en sourdine, sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches et sélectionner ou désélectionner Disable On Screen Volume Meter (Désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran) ou appuyer sur les boutons de contrôle du volume pour activer ou désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran. Lorsque l'indicateur est activé, réglez le volume à l'aide des boutons de contrôle du volume ou en appuyant sur les touches suivantes : • Appuyez sur pour augmenter le volume. • Appuyez sur pour réduire le volume. • Appuyez sur pour mettre le volume en sourdine. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Réglage de l'image Si un message d'erreur vous informe que la résolution et la profondeur de couleur en cours utilisent trop de mémoire et empêchent la lecture du DVD, réglez les propriétés d'affichage. 1 icône du volume 2 indicateur de volume 3 icône de mise en sourdine 1 3 246 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous Choisir une tâche..., cliquez sur Change the screen resolution (Modifier la résolution de l'écran). 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés de l'affichage, cliquez sur la barre de Résolution de l'écran et faites-la glisser pour définir la résolution à 1024 sur 768 pixels. 5 Cliquez sur le menu déroulant sous Qualité couleur, puis cliquez sur Moyenne 16 bits. 6 Cliquer sur OK. Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™ REMARQUE : Dell MediaDirect™ est en option et peut ne pas être fourni avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Dell QuickSet est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de Dell MediaDirect. La modification ou la désactivation des paramètres par défaut de QuickSet peuvent limiter les fonctionnalités de Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. Appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect, situé à l'avant de l'ordinateur, pour lancer Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect. Si l'ordinateur est allumé ou en mode Veille Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect tandis que l'ordinateur est sous tension ou en mode Veille, Windows XP Media Center Manager ou Dell Media Experience s'exécute, en fonction de la configuration de votre système. Si l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée Lorsque votre ordinateur est hors tension ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée, vous pouvez appuyer sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect pour le démarrer et lancer automatiquement l'application Dell MediaDirect. 1 bouton Dell MediaDirect 1Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 47 REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonction Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect si vous reformatez involontairement le disque dur. Le logiciel d'installation est requis pour réinstaller ces applications multimédia. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience L'application multimédia de Dell sur votre ordinateur contient des informations d'aide. Lorsque vous lancez l'application multimédia, cliquez sur l'icône du bureau pour obtenir une aide supplémentaire. Utilisation du CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) de Dell MediaDirect™ ou du CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) de Dell MediaDirect CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) REMARQUE : L'utilitaire de réparation peut être enregistré sur le CD Drivers and Utilities plutôt que sur le CD Repair Utility, ou bien il peut être téléchargé. Utilisez le CD Repair Utility pour réparer Dell MediaDirect lorsque : • Votre ordinateur est encore équipé de son disque dur d'origine, mais que : – Dell MediaDirect ne fonctionne par correctement. – Dell MediaDirect ne s'exécute pas lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect. – Vous devez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. • Vous recevez ce kit avec un nouvel ordinateur et vous souhaitez modifier la façon dont votre disque dur est partitionné. AVIS : Ne modifiez la façon dont votre disque dur est partitionné que si vous êtes sûr de ce que vous faites. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de réparation, reportez-vous à la section « Réparation de Dell MediaDirect ». 1 bouton Dell MediaDirect 148 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) Utilisez le CD Reinstallation pour réinstaller Dell MediaDirect lorsque vous souhaitez remplacer votre disque dur existant par un nouveau lecteur à l'aide de ce kit. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect ». Réparation de Dell MediaDirect REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt réparer Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réinstaller. Si vous utilisez le CD Repair Utility alors que vous devriez réinstaller Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement. REMARQUE : L'utilitaire de réparation peut être enregistré sur le CD Drivers and Utilities plutôt que sur le CD Repair Utility, ou bien il peut être téléchargé. Pour réparer Dell MediaDirect sur votre disque dur : 1 Insérez le CD Repair Utility (ou le CD Drivers and Utilities, le cas échéant) dans le lecteur optique et redémarrez votre ordinateur. 2 Appuyez sur la touche dès l'apparition du logo Dell pour entrer dans le menu d'amorçage. 3 Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour mettre en surbrillance le premier CD de la liste. 4 Appuyez sur pour démarrer à partir du CD. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities, tapez après avoir démarré à partir du CD. 5 À l'invite, tapez la commande cd \MD2 et appuyez sur . 6 Saisissez Repair (réparer) et appuyez sur . L'utilitaire de réparation de Dell MediaDirect s'ouvre. Pour lancer l'utilitaire pour réparer Dell MediaDirect : 1 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner OK et appuyez sur . 2 Lorsque le message Terminé apparaît, retirez le CD du lecteur et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser le bouton Dell MediaDirect de votre ordinateur pour lancer Dell MediaDirect. Réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt réinstaller Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réparer. Si vous utilisez le CD Reinstallation alors que vous devriez réparer Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement. Pour pouvoir réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect, vous devez préparer votre disque dur. Après avoir remplacé le disque, suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect » lorsque vous installez le système d'exploitation Windows XP. Une fois votre disque dur prêt, vous pouvez réinstaller les pilotes matériels et les logiciels (consultez les Guides de réinstallation de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com). Ensuite, suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect ».Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 49 Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect Lorsque vous installez le système d'exploitation Windows XP, vous devez partitionner le disque dur et réserver 1308 Mo d'espace non partitionné pour Dell MediaDirect. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez créer trois partitions maximum, en plus de l'espace non partitionné réservé à Dell MediaDirect. Pour créer une partition sur votre disque dur : 1 Appuyez sur la touche pour accepter le contrat de licence lors de l'installation de Windows XP. 2 Sur la fenêtre de configuration des partitions, utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'espace non partitionné. 3 Tapez C pour créer une nouvelle partition à l'aide de l'espace non partitionné. REMARQUE : Pour créer suffisamment d'espace sur votre disque dur pour la partition de Dell MediaDirect, vous devez calculer la taille de la partition en méga-octets (Mo), en soustrayant 1308 à la quantité d'espace disponible en Mo sur le disque dur. 4 Entrez la taille désirée en Mo pour la nouvelle partition et appuyez sur . 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner la partition créée et appuyez sur . 6 Sélectionnez Formater la partition en utilisant le système de fichiers NTFS (Rapide) et appuyez sur . 7 Consultez le guide d'installation de Windows XP pour terminer l'installation de Windows XP. Lorsque toutes les étapes de l'installation de Windows XP sont passées et que le bureau apparaît, vous pouvez réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect. Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt réinstaller Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réparer.Si vous utilisez le CD Reinstallation alors que vous devriez réparer Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement. REMARQUE : Suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect » avant de réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect. Si vous ne le faites pas, vous recevrez un message d'erreur lors de la réinstallation du logiciel. Si vous recevez un message d'erreur, réinstallez Windows XP ou procurez-vous un utilitaire qui vous permettra de partitionner un disque dur à partition unique avec un système d'exploitation déjà installé dessus. Pour réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect : 1 Insérez le CD Reinstallation dans le lecteur optique. La fenêtre Dell MediaDirect™ s'ouvre. 2 Appuyez sur pour réinstaller Dell MediaDirect. Un message indiquant la fin du processus de réinstallation apparaît. 3 Retirez le CD Reinstallation du lecteur optique et appuyez sur pour fermer la fenêtre de réinstallation. 4 Arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer. 5 Utilisez le bouton Dell MediaDirect de votre ordinateur pour lancer Dell MediaDirect et terminer le processus de réinstallation.50 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Connexion de votre ordinateur à un périphérique téléviseur ou audio REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur n'est pas livré avec tous les câbles audio et vidéo nécessaires pour le relier à un téléviseur ou à un autre périphérique audio. Il est possible d'acheter des câbles et des câbles d'adaptateur TV/audio numérique auprès de Dell. Votre ordinateur est doté d'un connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo qui vous permet de raccorder l'ordinateur à un téléviseur par un câble S-vidéo standard, un câble d'adaptateur vidéo composite ou un câble d'adaptateur vidéo composante (disponible auprès de Dell). 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 connecteur S-vidéo 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 3 connecteur audio numérique S/PDIF 4 connecteur de sortie vidéo composite 5 connecteur S-vidéo 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composante 3 connecteur audio numérique S/PDIF 4 connecteur de sortie vidéo composante Pr (rouge) 5 connecteur de sortie vidéo composante Pb (bleu) 6 connecteur de sortie vidéo composante Y (vert) 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 6Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 51 Votre téléviseur est doté d'un connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo, d'un connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite ou d'un connecteur d'entrée vidéo composante. En fonction du type de connecteur disponible sur votre téléviseur, vous pouvez utiliser un câble S-vidéo, vidéo composite ou vidéo composante disponible dans le commerce pour relier l'ordinateur au téléviseur. Il est recommandé de connecter les câbles vidéo et audio à l'ordinateur selon l'une des combinaisons suivantes. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous aux schémas situés au début de chaque sous-section pour déterminer la méthode de connexion la plus appropriée. • S-vidéo et audio standard • Vidéo composante et audio standard • Audio standard et sortie vidéo composante Lorsque vous avez terminé de connecter les câbles vidéo et audio entre l'ordinateur et le téléviseur, vous devez activer votre ordinateur pour qu'il fonctionne avec le téléviseur. Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. En outre, si vous utilisez l'audio numérique S/PDIF, reportez-vous à la section « Activation de l'audio numérique S/PDIF » à la page 62. S-vidéo et audio standard 1 connecteur audio 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 1 252 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez brancher un câble S-vidéo directement sur le connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur (sans passer par le câble d'adaptateur audio numérique/TV) si votre téléviseur ou périphérique audio prend en charge la technologie S-vidéo mais pas l'audio numérique S/PDIF. 2 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie S-vidéo de l'ordinateur. 3 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo. 4 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 5 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou sur un autre périphérique audio. 6 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 7 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 câble S-vidéo standard 2 câble audio standard 1 2Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 53 S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble S-vidéo 3 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 2 354 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie S-vidéo de l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo situé sur le téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio numérique sur le câble d'adaptateur vidéo composite. 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF sur le connecteur d'entrée audio situé sur le téléviseur ou le périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble S-vidéo 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 2Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 55 Vidéo composite et audio standard 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble vidéo composite sur le connecteur de sortie vidéo composite situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 connecteur d'entrée audio 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 3 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 3 câble audio standard 2 1 3 1 2 356 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 6 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou sur un autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 1 1 2Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 57 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble vidéo composite dans le connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio S/PDIF sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 3 câble audio standard 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 3 2 1 1 258 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique sur le connecteur d'entrée S/PDIF situé sur le téléviseur ou l'autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. Vidéo composante et audio standard 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble vidéo composante 3 câble audio standard 1 2 1 2 3Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 59 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composante au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez les trois extrémités du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante situés sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux ports d'adaptateur appropriés. 4 Branchez les trois connecteurs de l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs d'entrée vidéo composante situés sur le téléviseur. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 6 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou le périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble vidéo composante 1 260 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble vidéo composante 3 câble audio standard 1 2 1 2 3Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 61 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composante au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez les trois extrémités du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante situés sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux ports d'adaptateur appropriés. 4 Branchez les trois connecteurs de l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs d'entrée vidéo composante situés sur le téléviseur. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio S/PDIF situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique sur le connecteur d'entrée S/PDIF situé sur le téléviseur ou l'autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante 3 câble vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 3 2 2 162 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Activation de l'audio numérique S/PDIF REMARQUE : Votre logiciel de DVD peut se présenter différemment. Reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec votre logiciel de DVD. Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un lecteur de DVD, vous pouvez activer le son numérique pour la lecture des DVD. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tousles programmes, puis sélectionnez l'application de DVD. 2 Insérez un DVD dans le lecteur de DVD. Si la lecture du DVD démarre, cliquez sur le bouton d'arrêt. 3 Cliquez sur l'option Paramètres. 4 Cliquez sur l'option DVD. 5 Cliquez sur l'icône DVD Audio Setting (Paramétrage audio du DVD). 6 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Configuration des haut-parleurs pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option SPDIF. 7 Cliquez une première fois sur le bouton Précédent, puis une seconde fois pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Activation de S/PDIF dans le pilote audio Windows 1 Double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur dans la zone de notification de Windows. 2 Cliquez sur le menu Options, puis sur Contrôles avancés. 3 Cliquez sur Avancé. 4 Cliquez sur Interface S/PDIF. 5 Cliquez sur Fermer. 6 Cliquer sur OK. Configuration de la lecture de DVD via le casque Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un lecteur de DVD, vous pouvez activer le son numérique pour la lecture des DVD. REMARQUE : Votre logiciel de DVD peut se présenter différemment. Reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec votre logiciel de DVD. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, puis sélectionnez le programme de DVD. 2 Insérez un DVD dans le lecteur de DVD. Si la lecture du DVD démarre, cliquez sur le bouton d'arrêt. 3 Cliquez sur l'option Paramètres. 4 Cliquez sur l'option DVD. 5 Cliquez sur l'icône DVD Audio Setting (Paramétrage audio du DVD). 6 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Configuration des haut-parleurs pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option Casque.Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 63 7 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Audio listening mode (Mode d'écoute audio) pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option CL Headphone (Casque CL). 8 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard de l'option Dynamic range compression (Compression de la plage dynamique) pour sélectionner l'option la plus adaptée. 9 Cliquez une première fois sur le bouton Précédent, puis une seconde fois pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur Contrôleur vidéo REMARQUE : Pour vous assurer que les options d'affichage apparaissent correctement, connectez le téléviseur à votre ordinateur avant d'activer les paramètres d'affichage. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Affichage, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. 3 Cliquez sur Avancé. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet de votre carte vidéo. REMARQUE : Pour déterminer le type de carte vidéo installée sur votre ordinateur, consultez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, cliquez sur Démarrer→Aide et support. Sous Choisissez une tâche, cliquez sur Utiliser les outils pour afficher des informations sur votre ordinateur et diagnostiquer les problèmes. Sous Informations sur le poste de travail, sélectionnez Matériel. 5 Dans la section des périphériques d'affichage, sélectionnez l'option appropriée en fonction de l'utilisation d'un affichage simple ou multiple tout en vous assurant que les paramètres d'affichage sont corrects pour votre sélection.64 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédiasUtilisation de cartes ExpressCard 65 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard Types de carte ExpressCard Pour plus d'informations sur les cartes ExpressCard prises en charge, reportez-vous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157. REMARQUE : Une carte ExpressCard n'est pas un périphérique amorçable. Caches pour carte ExpressCard Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique dans le logement de carte ExpressCard. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsqu'il n'y a pas de carte installée dans le logement. Les caches provenant d'autres ordinateurs ne sont pas adaptés à votre ordinateur. Pour retirer le cache, reportezvous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67. Installation d'une carte ExpressCard Vous pouvez installer une carte ExpressCard pendant que l'ordinateur fonctionne. Celui-ci détecte automatiquement la carte. Les cartes ExpressCard sont généralement marquées d'un symbole (un triangle ou une flèche, par exemple) ou portent une étiquette pour indiquer l'extrémité à insérer dans le logement. Les cartes sont conçues pour éviter une mauvaise insertion. Si l'orientation de la carte n'est pas claire, consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. Reportez-vous à l'illustration ci-dessous pour déterminer quelles sont les cartes prises en charge.66 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Pour installer une ExpressCard : 1 Tenez la carte face vers le haut. Le loquet devra peut-être être en position ouverte avant l'insertion de la carte. 2 Faites glisser la carte dans le logement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée dans le connecteur. Si vous sentez une trop grande résistance, ne forcez pas. Vérifiez l'orientation de la carte, puis faites une nouvelle tentative. 1 types de carte pris en charge (cartes Express) 2 type de carte non pris en charge (PCMCIA) 1 2Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard 67 L'ordinateur reconnaît la plupart des cartes ExpressCard et charge automatiquement le pilote de périphérique approprié. Si le programme de configuration vous demande de charger les pilotes du fabricant, utilisez la disquette ou le CD accompagnant la carte ExpressCard. Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache AVIS : Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration de carte ExpressCard (cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches) pour sélectionner et désactiver une carte avant de la retirer de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne désactivez pas la carte à l'aide de l'utilitaire de configuration, vous risquez de perdre des données. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Appuyez sur le loquet et retirez la carte ou le cache. Vous devrez appuyer à deux reprises sur certains loquets : une fois pour faire ressortir le loquet et une deuxième fois pour faire sortir la carte. Conservez le cache afin de l'utiliser à chaque fois qu'un logement d'ExpressCard est vide. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. 1 carte ExpressCard 168 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard Types de carte mémoire multimédia Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 constitue un moyen pratique et rapide de visualiser et de partager des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire. REMARQUE : Une carte mémoire multimédia n'est pas un périphérique amorçable. Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia suivantes : • Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Carte xD-Picture Caches de carte mémoire multimédia Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique installé dans le logement de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsqu'il n'y a pas de carte installée dans le logement. Les caches provenant d'autres ordinateurs ne sont pas adaptés à votre ordinateur. Pour retirer le cache, reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67. 1 bouton d'éjection 2 carte ExpressCard 1 2Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard 69 Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia Vous pouvez installer une carte mémoire multimédia dans l'ordinateur alors qu'il fonctionne. Celui-ci détecte automatiquement la carte. Les cartes mémoire multimédia sont généralement marquées d'un symbole (un triangle ou une flèche, par exemple) ou d'une étiquette pour indiquer l'extrémité à insérer dans le logement. Les cartes sont conçues pour éviter une mauvaise insertion. Si l'orientation de la carte n'est pas claire, consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Pour installer une carte mémoire multimédia : 1 Tenez la carte face vers le haut. 2 Faites glisser la carte dans le logement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée dans le connecteur. Si vous sentez une trop grande résistance, ne forcez pas. Vérifiez l'orientation de la carte, puis faites une nouvelle tentative. L'ordinateur reconnaît la carte mémoire multimédia et charge automatiquement le pilote de périphérique adapté. Si le programme de configuration vous indique de charger les pilotes du fabricant, utilisez le CD accompagnant la carte mémoire multimédia, le cas échéant. 1 logement de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 2 carte mémoire multimédia 1 270 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia ou d'un cache AVIS : Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration de carte mémoire multimédia (cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches) pour sélectionner et désactiver une carte avant de la retirer de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne désactivez pas la carte à l'aide de l'utilitaire de configuration, vous risquez de perdre des données. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Appuyez sur la carte pour libérer et retirer la carte ou le cache. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsque aucune carte mémoire multimédia n'est installée dans le logement. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Configuration d'un réseau 71 Configuration d'un réseau Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un réseau sans fil, une carte réseau doit être installée et un câble de réseau connecté à l'ordinateur. Pour connecter un câble de réseau : 1 Branchez le câble de réseau au connecteur de la carte réseau, situé sur le côté droit de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Insérez le connecteur du câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez doucement sur le câble pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble de réseau à un périphérique de connexion réseau ou à une prise murale de réseau. REMARQUE : Ne connectez pas de câble de réseau à une prise téléphonique murale. Assistant Configuration réseau L'Assistant Configuration réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre ordinateurs présents au sein d'un réseau domestique ou d'une petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Configuration réseau. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant.72 Configuration d'un réseau 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. REMARQUE : Sélectionner la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à l'Internet active le pare-feu intégré fourni avec le Service Pack 2 (SP2) de Windows XP. 4 Exécutez la liste de vérification. 5 Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) Un WLAN est une série d'ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par ondes aériennes plutôt que par le biais d'un câble réseau relié à chaque ordinateur. Dans un WLAN, un périphérique de radiocommunications appelé point d'accès ou routeur sans fil connecte des ordinateurs réseau et offre un accès réseau. Le point d'accès ou le routeur sans fil et la carte réseau sans fil située dans l'ordinateur communiquent en diffusant des données par ondes hertziennes depuis leurs antennes. Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN Pour configurer un WLAN, vous avez besoin des éléments suivants : • L'accès Internet haut débit (large bande) (comme un câble ou une connexion DSL) • Un modem large bande qui est connecté et en état de marche • Un routeur sans fil ou un point d'accès • Une carte réseau sans fil par ordinateur à connecter au WLAN • Un câble de réseau avec le connecteur (RJ-45) réseau Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil En fonction de votre sélection lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur, celui-ci a diverses configurations. Pour confirmer que votre ordinateur est équipé d'une carte réseau sans fil et pour connaître le type de cette carte, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Bouton Démarrer et option Connexions • La confirmation de votre commande Bouton Démarrer et option Connexions 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer. 2 Pointez sur Connexions, puis cliquez sur Afficher toutes les connexions. Si Connexion réseau sans fil n'apparaît pas sous Réseau local ou Internet à haute vitesse, il est possible que vous n'ayez pas de carte réseau sans fil.Configuration d'un réseau 73 Si Connexion réseau sans fil apparaît, vous disposez d'une carte réseau sans fil. Pour afficher des informations détaillées sur la carte réseau sans fil : 1 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Connexion réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Propriétés de la connexion réseau sans fil apparaît. Le nom et le numéro de modèle de la carte réseau sans fil sont répertoriés dans l'onglet Général. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur est configuré sur l'option de menu Démarrer classique, vous pouvez afficher les connexions réseau en cliquant sur le bouton Démarrer, en pointant sur Paramètres et en sélectionnant Connexions réseau. Si Connexion réseau sans fil n'apparaît pas, il est possible que vous n'ayez pas de carte réseau sans fil. Confirmation de commande La confirmation de commande que vous avez reçue à la commande de votre ordinateur énumère le matériel et les logiciels fournis avec celui-ci. Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN Connexion d'un routeur sans fil et d'un modem large bande 1 Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) pour obtenir des informations précises sur les exigences relatives à la connexion de votre modem large bande. 2 Assurez-vous d'avoir un accès Internet câblé par le biais de votre modem large bande avant d'essayer de configurer une connexion Internet sans fil. Reportez-vous à la section « Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande » à la page 71. 3 Installez les logiciels requis pour votre routeur sans fil. Un CD d'installation peut vous avoir été fourni avec votre routeur sans fil. Ce type de CD contient généralement des informations sur l'installation et le dépannage. Installez le logiciel requis conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 4 Arrêtez votre ordinateur et tout autre ordinateur fonctionnant sans fil à proximité par le biais du menu Démarrer. 5 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de votre modem large bande de la prise secteur. 6 Débranchez le câble réseau de l'ordinateur et du modem. REMARQUE : Patientez au moins 5 minutes, une fois votre modem large bande déconnecté avant de continuer de configurer le réseau. 7 Débranchez le câble d'adaptateur CA de votre routeur sans fil, afin d'avoir l'assurance que le routeur n'est plus alimenté. 8 Branchez un câble réseau sur le connecteur réseau (RJ-45) du modem large bande non alimenté. 9 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble sur le connecteur réseau (RJ-45) Internet du routeur sans fil non alimenté. 10 Veillez à ce qu'aucun autre câble réseau ou USB (hormis le câble réseau reliant le modem et le routeur sans fil) n'est relié au modem large bande. REMARQUE : Redémarrez les périphériques sans fil dans l'ordre décrit ci-dessous pour empêcher toute défaillance de connexion potentielle.74 Configuration d'un réseau 11 Mettez uniquement le modem large bande sous tension et attendez au moins 2 minutes qu'il se stabilise. Au bout de 2 minutes, passez à l'étape 12. 12 Mettez le routeur sans fil sous tension et attendez au moins 2 minutes qu'il se stabilise. Au bout de 2 minutes, passez à l'étape 13. 13 Démarrez l'ordinateur et attendez que la procédure d'amorçage soit terminée. 14 Consultez la documentation accompagnant le routeur sans fil pour exécuter les actions suivantes et configurer le routeur sans fil : • Établissez la communication entre votre ordinateur et votre routeur sans fil. • Configurez votre routeur sans fil pour communiquer avec votre routeur large bande. • Recherchez le nom de diffusion du routeur sans fil. Il est également fait référence à ce nom sous les termes techniques Identifiant d'ensemble de service (SSID) ou nom du réseau. 15 Au besoin, configurez votre carte réseau sans fil pour la connecter au réseau sans fil. Reportez-vous à la section « Connexion à un réseau local sans fil » à la page 74. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil REMARQUE : Avant de vous connecter à un WLAN, vérifiez que vous avez observé les instructions figurant dans la section « Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) » à la page 72. REMARQUE : Les instructions de mise en réseau suivantes ne s'appliquent pas aux cartes internes dotées de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® ni aux réseaux large bande mobile. Cette section présente des procédures générales concernant la connexion via une technologie sans fil. Les noms spécifiques du réseau et les détails de configuration sont variables. Reportez-vous à la section « Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) » à la page 72 pour plus d'informations sur la manière de préparer la connexion d'un ordinateur à un réseau WLAN. Votre carte réseau sans fil nécessite un logiciel et des pilotes spécifiques pour la connexion à un réseau. Le logiciel est déjà installé. REMARQUE : S'il a été supprimé ou endommagé, suivez les instructions fournies dans la documentation utilisateur de votre carte réseau sans fil. Vérifiez le type de carte réseau sans fil installée sur votre ordinateur, puis recherchez son nom sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse suivante : support.dell.com. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de carte réseau sans fil installée sur votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section « Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil » à la page 72. Détermination du Gestionnaire de périphérique réseau sans fil En fonction du logiciel installé sur votre ordinateur, différents utilitaires de configuration sans fil peuvent gérer vos périphériques réseau : • L'utilitaire de configuration de votre carte réseau sans fil • Le système d'exploitation de Windows XPConfiguration d'un réseau 75 Pour déterminer l'utilitaire de configuration sans fil qui gère votre carte réseau sans fil : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Connexions réseau. 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Connexion réseau sans fil, puis cliquez sur Afficher les réseaux sans fil disponibles. Si la fenêtre Choisir un réseau sans fil indique Windows ne peut pas configurer cette connexion, l'utilisation de configuration de la carte réseau sans fil gère la carte réseau sans fil. Si la fenêtre Choisir un réseau sans fil indique Cliquer sur un élément de la liste ci-dessous pour se connecter à un réseau sans fil dans la zone ou obtenir plus d'informations, le système d'exploitation Windows XP gère la carte réseau sans fil. Pour des informations spécifiques sur l'utilitaire de configuration sans fil installé sur votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à votre document de réseau sans fil dans le Centre d'aide et de support Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Sous Choisir une rubrique d'aide, cliquez sur Guides d'utilisation du système de Dell. 3 Sous Guides des périphériques, sélectionnez la documentation de votre carte réseau sans fil. Fin de la connexion au réseau WLAN Lorsque vous mettez votre ordinateur sous tension et qu'un réseau est détecté dans la zone pour laquelle votre ordinateur n'est pas configuré, un message contextuel apparaît à côté de l'icône communications sans fil de la barre d'état système (située dans le coin inférieur droit du bureau Windows). Suivez les instructions données dans toute invite d'utilitaire apparaissant à l'écran. Lorsque l'ordinateur est configuré pour le réseau sans fil que vous avez sélectionné, un autre message contextuel indique que l'ordinateur est connecté au réseau. Lorsque vous vous connectez ultérieurement à votre ordinateur dans la zone du réseau sans fil que vous avez sélectionné, le même message contextuel vous indique qu'une connexion au réseau sans fil est établie. REMARQUE : Si vous sélectionnez un réseau sécurisé, vous devez saisir une clé WEP ou WPA à l'invite. Les paramètres de sécurité du réseau sont uniques à votre réseau. Dell ne peut pas vous fournir ces informations. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre 1 minute. Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil REMARQUE : Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à un réseau sans fil, vérifiez que vous disposez de tous les éléments pour créer un réseau WLAN (reportez-vous à la section « Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN » à la page 72), puis vérifiez que votre carte réseau sans fil est bien activée en appuyant sur . Vous pouvez activer/désactiver la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil de votre ordinateur en appuyant sur la combinaison de touches . Si la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil est activée, appuyez sur pour la désactiver. Si la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil est désactivée, appuyez sur pour l'activer.76 Configuration d'un réseau Surveillance de l'état des connexions réseau sans fil via Dell™ QuickSet Le voyant d'activité sans fil permet de facilement surveiller l'état des périphériques sans fil de votre ordinateur. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Dell QuickSet de la barre des tâches pour sélectionner ou désélectionner Indicateur d'activité sans fil pour activer ou désactiver cet indicateur. Le voyant d'activité sans fil indique si les périphériques sans fil de votre ordinateur sont activés ou désactivés. Lorsque vous activez ou désactivez la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil, l'indicateur d'activité sans fil change pour afficher l'état en cours. Pour plus d'informations sur l'indicateur d'activité sans fil, consultez le fichier d'aide sur Dell QuickSet. Pour obtenir des informations sur QuickSet et savoir comment accéder au fichier d'aide sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. Réseau étendu large bande mobile ou sans fil (WWAN) De même qu'un WLAN, un réseau large bande mobile (ou WWAN) regroupe des ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par le biais d'une technologie sans fil. Cependant, un réseau large bande mobile utilise la technologie cellulaire. Par conséquent, l'accès Internet est disponible dans les mêmes régions que le service cellulaire. Votre ordinateur peut conserver une connexion réseau large bande mobile indépendamment de sa localisation physique tant que l'ordinateur reste dans une zone couverte par votre prestataire de service cellulaire. Éléments requis pour établir une connexion avec un réseau large bande mobile REMARQUE : Selon votre ordinateur, vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau large bande mobile au moyen d'une carte ExpressCard ou Mini large bande mobile mais pas les deux. Pour configurer une connexion réseau large bande mobile, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • Une carte ExpressCard ou Mini large bande mobile (selon la configuration de votre ordinateur) Pour des instructions sur l'utilisation des cartes ExpressCard, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65. • L'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility (préinstallé sur votre ordinateur si vous achetez la carte en même temps que l'ordinateur ou disponible sur le CD accompagnant la carte achetée séparément). Si l'utilitaire est corrompu ou supprimé de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility pour obtenir des instructions. Le guide d'utilisation est accessible via le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows (ou le CD accompagnant la carte achetée séparément). Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14.Configuration d'un réseau 77 Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile REMARQUE : Ces instructions ne s'appliquent qu'aux cartes ExpressCard ou Mini large bande mobile. Elles ne s'appliquent pas aux cartes internes dotées de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® ni aux cartes Mini WLAN. REMARQUE : Avant de vous connecter à Internet, vous devez activer le service large bande mobile auprès de votre fournisseur de services cellulaires. Pour des instructions et d'autres informations sur l'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, reportez-vous au guide de l'utilisateur disponible dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. Le guide d'utilisation est également disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et sur le CD fourni avec votre carte large bande mobile si vous avez acheté la carte séparément de l'ordinateur. À l'aide de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, créez et gérez une connexion réseau large bande mobile à Internet : 1 Cliquez sur l'icône de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, , dans la barre des tâches de Windows pour exécuter l'utilitaire. 2 Cliquez sur Connecter. REMARQUE : Le bouton Connecter se transforme en bouton Déconnecter. 3 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour gérer la connexion réseau à l'aide de cet utilitaire. Réseau Bluetooth Configuration de votre connexion Bluetooth Les systèmes, équipés de la technologie Bluetooth, afficheront l'icône Bluetooth dans la barre d'état système. Si vous disposez de la technologie Bluetooth, double-cliquez sur l'icône Bluetooth. Selon le logiciel Bluetooth installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer plusieurs opérations pour terminer la configuration. Le logiciel Bluetooth vous guidera dans la procédure. Cette procédure prendra environ 5 minutes. Une fois la procédure effectuée, votre système peut établir et utiliser des connexions Bluetooth. Si, après avoir double-cliqué sur l'icône Bluetooth, le logiciel Bluetooth ne vous invite pas à effectuer une série d'opérations, votre système Bluetooth est déjà complètement configuré et prêt à être utilisé. Connexion à un réseau Bluetooth Les systèmes, équipés d'une carte interne Bluetooth, peuvent se connecter à d'autres périphériques Bluetooth, tels que des claviers et des souris, des casques stéréo, des appareils photos, des assistants numériques personnels (PDA) et des imprimantes. Il suffit d'effectuer quelques opérations, qui restent simples, pour établir une connexion au périphérique. Ces opérations varient selon le logiciel Bluetooth installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour des informations détaillées sur l'établissement de connexions Bluetooth, ouvrez votre logiciel Bluetooth en double-cliquant sur l'icône Bluetooth dans la barre d'état système. Sélectionnez Aide dans le menu principal pour une description détaillée de l'utilisation de votre carte de mise en réseau interne.78 Configuration d'un réseauSécurisation de votre ordinateur 79 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur Verrou du câble de sécurité REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur n'est pas livré avec un verrou de câble de sécurité. Un verrou de câble de sécurité est un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour utiliser le verrou, fixez-le à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur Dell™. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le dispositif. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, vérifiez qu'il est compatible avec l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. Mots de passe Les mots de passe évitent tout accès non autorisé à votre ordinateur. Dès que vous démarrez votre ordinateur, vous devez affecter un mot de passe principal à l'invite. Si aucun mot de passe n'est entré dans les deux minutes qui suivent, l'ordinateur revient à l'état de fonctionnement précédent. En cas d'utilisation de mots de passe, respectez les consignes suivantes : • Choisissez un mot de passe dont vous vous souviendrez mais qui ne soit pas facile à deviner. Par exemple, n'utilisez pas les noms des membres de votre famille ni les noms de vos animaux familiers dans vos mots de passe. • Évitez de noter votre mot de passe sur un papier. Si vous notez vos mots de passe sur un papier, assurez-vous qu'il sont stockés dans un lieu sûr.80 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur • Ne partagez pas votre mot de passe avec quelqu'un. • Assurez-vous que personne ne vous regarde lorsque vous saisissez votre mot de passe. AVIS : Les mots de passe affectent un haut niveau de sécurité aux données de votre ordinateur ou de votre disque dur. Cependant, votre système n'est pas à l'abri de personnes mal intentionnées. Si vous souhaitez un plus haut niveau de sécurité, utilisez d'autres formes de protection, comme les cartes à puce, les programmes de cryptage de données ou les cartes PC (ou Mini) dotées de fonctions de cryptage. Pour ajouter ou modifier des mots de passe, allez dans Panneau de configuration, puis Comptes d'utilisateurs. Si vous avez oublié l'un de vos mots de passe, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137). Pour votre protection, l'équipe du support technique de Dell vous demandera de prouver votre identité pour que seules les personnes autorisées puissent utiliser votre ordinateur. Logiciel de suivi informatique Un logiciel de suivi informatique peut vous permettre de localiser votre ordinateur s'il est perdu ou volé. Le logiciel est disponible en option et peut être acquis lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur Dell™. Vous pouvez également contacter votre commercial Dell pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction de sécurité. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le logiciel de suivi ne soit pas disponible dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Si vous disposez de ce logiciel, vous devez contacter l'entreprise en charge du service de suivi pour signaler la disparition de votre ordinateur en cas de perte ou de vol de ce dernier. En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur • Appelez les autorités compétentes pour signaler la perte ou le vol. Incluez le numéro de service dans votre description de l'ordinateur. Demandez à ce qu'un numéro soit affecté à cette affaire et relevez ce numéro avec le nom, l'adresse et le numéro de téléphone du bureau de police. Si possible, obtenez le nom de l'agent chargé de l'affaire. REMARQUE : Si vous savez où a eu lieu le vol ou la perte de l'ordinateur, contactez les autorités compétentes de la région. Si vous ne connaissez pas cet endroit, appelez un bureau de police de votre lieu de résidence. • Si l'ordinateur appartient à une société, avertissez le bureau de sécurité de la société. • Contactez le service clientèle de Dell pour signaler la perte de l'ordinateur. Fournissez le numéro de service de l'ordinateur, le numéro de dossier et le nom, l'adresse et le numéro de téléphone du bureau de police auquel vous avez signalé le vol. Si possible, donnez le nom de l'agent chargé de l'affaire. Le représentant du service clientèle de Dell enregistrera votre rapport sous le numéro de service de l'ordinateur et enregistrera l'ordinateur comme manquant ou volé. Si quelqu'un appelle Dell pour obtenir de l'assistance technique et donne votre numéro de service, l'ordinateur sera automatiquement identifié comme le vôtre. Le représentant essaiera d'obtenir le numéro de téléphone et l'adresse de son correspondant. Dell contactera ensuite les autorités compétentes auxquelles vous avez signalé la perte de votre ordinateur.Dépannage 81 Dépannage Service Dell Technical Update Le service Dell Technical Update fournit une notification proactive par courrier électronique des mises à jour matérielles et logicielles pour votre ordinateur. Ce service est gratuit. En outre, vous pouvez personnaliser son contenu, son format et la fréquence à laquelle vous recevez des notifications. Pour vous abonner au service Dell Technical Update, visitez le site Web suivant : support.dell.com/technicalupdate. Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si des problèmes surviennent lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur, effectuez les vérifications indiquées dans la section « Blocages et problèmes logiciels » à la page 94 et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne qu'avec les ordinateurs Dell. REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur. Démarrez Dell Diagnostics à partir de votre disque dur ou du CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé ResourceCD). Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur.82 Dépannage 3 Il existe deux manières de lancer Diagnostics : a Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Sélectionnez Diagnostics à partir du menu de démarrage et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. b Appuyez sur la touche et maintenez-la enfoncée lors de la mise sous tension du système. REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostic n'a été trouvée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système de préamorçage avec une série de diagnostics intégrés qui effectue un test préalable de la carte système, du clavier, du disque dur et de l'écran. • Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. • Si une défaillance de composant est détectée, l'ordinateur s'arrête et émet un signal sonore. Pour arrêter l'évaluation et redémarrer l'ordinateur, appuyez sur ; pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur ; pour retester le composant défectueux, appuyez sur . • Si des défaillances sont détectées lors de l'évaluation de préamorçage du système, notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. Si l'évaluation de préamorçage du système se déroule sans problème, vous recevez le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Amorçage de la partition de l'utilitaire Dell Diagnostics. Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 4 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de diagnostics du disque dur. Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities 1 Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities. 2 Arrêtez, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l'option Boot from CD-ROM (Amorcer à partir du CD-ROM) dans le menu qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur . 5 Tapez 1 pour démarrer le menu du CD ResourceCD, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. 6 Sélectionnez Run Dell 32-bit Diagnostics (Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits) dans la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée à votre ordinateur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à effectuer.Dépannage 83 Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et lorsque l'écran du menu principal s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton de l'option que vous souhaitez. 2 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell. REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est situé en haut de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le support technique de Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. 3 Si vous exécutez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus d'informations. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de votre part. Effectuez tout d'abord un Test rapide pour trouver le problème plus rapidement. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend une heure ou plus et nécessite que vous répondiez régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du problème. Onglet Fonction Results (Résultats) Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Errors (Erreurs) Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Help (Aide) Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration (Configuration) Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient les informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Parameters (Paramètres) Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.84 Dépannage 4 Une fois les tests effectués, si vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, retirez le CD. 5 Une fois les tests terminés, fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran de menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran de menu principal. Utilitaire de support de Dell L'utilitaire de support de Dell est installé sur votre ordinateur et accessible en cliquant sur l'icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du bouton Démarrer. Cet utilitaire vous permet d'exécuter les actions suivantes : obtenir des informations de support automatique, effectuer des mises à jour et des balayages de votre environnement informatique pour en vérifier l'état. Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell Accédez à l'utilitaire de support de Dell à partir de l'icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du menu Démarrer. Si l'icône de support de Dell n'apparaît pas dans la barre des tâches, procédez comme suit : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis pointez sur Tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur Support de Dell, puis pointez sur Paramètres du support de Dell. 3 Assurez-vous que l'option Afficher l'icône dans la barre des tâches est sélectionnée. REMARQUE : Si l'utilitaire de support de Dell n'est pas disponible depuis le menu Démarrer, accédez au site support.dell.com et téléchargez le logiciel. L'utilitaire de support de Dell est personnalisé pour votre environnement informatique. L'icône de support de Dell figurant dans la barre des tâches offre un fonctionnement différent lorsque vous cliquez, double-cliquez ou cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit. Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell Cliquez ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône pour exécuter les tâches suivantes : • Vérifier votre environnement informatique • Afficher les paramètres de l'utilitaire de support de Dell • Accéder au fichier d'aide de l'utilitaire de support de Dell • Afficher les questions les plus fréquemment posées • En savoir plus sur l'utilitaire de support de Dell • Désactiver l'utilitaire de support de Dell Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell Double-cliquez sur l'icône pour contrôler manuellement votre environnement informatique, afficher les questions fréquemment posées, accéder aux fichiers d'aide de l'utilitaire de support de Dell et afficher les paramètres de support de Dell. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de support de Dell, cliquez sur le point d'interrogation (?)situé en haut de l'écran Dell Support (Support de Dell).Dépannage 85 Problèmes de lecteur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ QUE MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECONNAÎT L E LECTEUR — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur de disquette, de CD ou de DVD ne figure pas dans la liste, effectuez un balayage complet avec votre logiciel antivirus à la recherche de virus pour les supprimer. Les virus empêchent parfois Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. TESTEZ L E LECTEUR — • Insérez une autre disquette, un autre CD ou un autre DVD pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier support soit défectueux. • Insérez une disquette d'amorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur. NETTOYEZ L E LECTEUR O U L E DISQUE — Reportez-vous à la section « Nettoyage de votre ordinateur » à la page 167. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CD EST CORRECTEMENT POSITIONNÉ SUR L'AXE VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES VÉRIFIEZ LES INCOMPATIBILITÉS MATÉRIELLES — Reportez-vous à la section « Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles » à la page 104. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD REMARQUE : Il peut arriver que le lecteur de CD ou de DVD haute vitesse vibre et produise du bruit. Cela ne signifie en aucun cas que le lecteur ou le CD/DVD est défectueux. REMARQUE : En raison des différentes régions du monde entier et des différents formats de disque, certains titres DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans certains lecteurs DVD. Problèmes d'écriture sur un lecteur de CD/DVD-RW FERMEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES — Le lecteur de CD/DVD-RW doit recevoir un flux régulier de données lors de l'écriture. Si ce flux est interrompu, une erreur se produit. Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer l'écriture sur le CD/DVD-RW. DÉSACTIVEZ L E MODE VEILLE DANS WINDOWS AVANT D E LANCER L'ÉCRITURE SUR UN CD/DVD-RW — Reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40 pour des informations supplémentaires sur le mode Veille. RÉDUISEZ LA VITESSE D E GRAVURE — Consultez les fichiers d'aide de votre logiciel de création de CD ou de DVD. Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur est éteint. 2 Redressez un trombone et insérez l'une de ses extrémités dans le trou d'éjection situé à l'avant du lecteur ; poussez ensuite fermement jusqu'à ce que le plateau soit partiellement éjecté. 3 Retirez le plateau avec précaution jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête.86 Dépannage Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel • Assurez-vous que ce son n'est pas émis par un programme en cours d'exécution. • Assurez-vous que le disque est correctement inséré. Problèmes liés au disque dur LAISSEZ L'ORDINATEUR REFROIDIR AVANT D E L'ALLUMER — Un disque dur trop chaud peut empêcher le fonctionnement du système d'exploitation. Laissez l'ordinateur s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. LANCEZ LA COMMANDE CHECK DISK (VÉRIFIER DISQUE) — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2 Avec le bouton droit, cliquez sur Disque local C:. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 5 Sous Détection d'erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 6 Cliquez sur Rechercher et tenter une récupération des secteurs défectueux. 7 Cliquez sur Démarrer. Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Connectez le modem uniquement à une prise téléphonique analogique. Le modem ne fonctionne pas s'il est connecté à un réseau téléphonique numérique. VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E SÉCURITÉ D E MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS — Si vous n'arrivez pas à ouvrir les pièces jointes à vos messages électroniques : 1 Dans Outlook Express, cliquez sur Outils, sur Options, puis sur Sécurité. 2 Cliquez sur Interdire les pièces jointes pour supprimer la coche. VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION D E L A LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE VÉRIFIEZ L A PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE CONNECTEZ L E MODEM DIRECTEMENT À LA PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE MURALE UTILISEZ UNE LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE DIFFÉRENTE • Assurez-vous que la ligne téléphonique est connectée à la prise jack du modem. (La prise jack comporte une étiquette verte ou bien une icône en forme de connecteur apparaît à côté de cette prise.) • Insérez le connecteur de ligne téléphonique dans le modem jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. • Déconnectez la ligne téléphonique du modem et connectez-la à un téléphone. Attendez la tonalité. • Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, par exemple un répondeur téléphonique, un télécopieur, un parasurtenseur ou un séparateur de ligne, contournez-les et connectez le modem directement à la prise jack téléphonique murale. Si vous utilisez une ligne qui mesure au moins 3 m (10 pieds), essayez une ligne plus courte.Dépannage 87 EXÉCUTEZ LES DIAGNOSTICS ASSISTANT D U MODEM — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, puis cliquez sur Assistant du modem. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour identifier et résoudre les problèmes de modem. (L'Assistant du modem n'est pas disponible sur certains ordinateurs.) VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E MODEM COMMUNIQUE AVEC WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 3 Cliquez sur Options de modem et de téléphonie. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 5 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem. 6 Cliquez sur Propriétés, sur l'onglet Diagnostics, puis sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. VÉRIFIEZ QUE VOUS ÊTES CONNECTÉ À INTERNET — Assurez-vous que vous êtes bien abonné auprès d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet. Une fois le programme de messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si la case Travailler hors connexion est cochée, décochez-la, puis connectez-vous à Internet. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. ANALYSEZ L'ORDINATEUR À L A RECHERCHE D E LOGICIELS ESPIONS — Si vous observez un ralentissement des performances de votre ordinateur, si des fenêtres publicitaires s'affichent fréquemment sur votre écran ou si vous avez des problèmes pour vous connecter sur Internet, votre ordinateur est peut-être infecté par un logiciel espion. Utilisez un programme antivirus qui inclut une protection contre les logiciels espions (une mise à niveau de votre programme sera peut-être nécessaire) afin d'analyser votre ordinateur et de supprimer les logiciels espions. Pour plus d'informations, allez sur le site support.dell.com et lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé spyware (espion). Messages d'erreur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si le message n'est pas répertorié, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme qui s'exécutait lorsque le message s'est affiché. AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D'UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE AUXILIAIRE) — La tablette tactile, la manette ou la souris externe présente peut-être une défaillance. Dans le cas d'une souris externe, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Activez l'option Dispositif de pointage dans le programme de configuration du système. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME (COMMANDE O U NOM D E FICHIER INCORRECT) — Vérifiez que vous avez bien orthographié la commande, mis des espaces à bon escient et utilisé le chemin d'accès correct. CACHE DISABLED DUE T O FAILURE (CACHE DÉSACTIVÉ EN RAISON D'UNE PANNE) — Le cache interne principal du microprocesseur présente un dysfonctionnement. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D U LECTEUR D E CD) — Le lecteur de CD ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes de lecteur » à la page 85.88 Dépannage DATA ERROR (ERREUR D E DONNÉES) — Le disque dur ne peut pas lire les données. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes de lecteur » à la page 85. DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY (MÉMOIRE DISPONIBLE RÉDUITE) — Un ou plusieurs modules de mémoire peuvent être défaillants ou mal fixés. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION (ÉCHEC D E L'INITIALISATION D U DISQUE C:) — L'initialisation du disque dur a échoué. Exécutez le groupe de tests des unités de disque dur dans Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. DRIVE NOT READY (LE LECTEUR N'EST PAS PRÊT) — Le fonctionnement requiert la présence d'un disque dur dans la baie pour pouvoir continuer. Installez une unité de disque dur dans la baie d'unité de disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113. ERROR READING PCMCIA CARD (ERREUR LORS D E LA LECTURE D E LA CARTE PCMCIA) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas identifier la carte ExpressCard. Remettez la carte en place ou essayez une autre carte. Reportezvous à la section « Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65. EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED (LA TAILLE D E LA MÉMOIRE ÉTENDUE A CHANGÉ) — La quantité de mémoire enregistrée dans la mémoire vive rémanente (NVRAM) ne correspond pas à la mémoire installée sur l'ordinateur. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'erreur apparaît de nouveau, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE (LE FICHIER EN COURS D E COPIE EST TROP VOLUMINEUX POUR L E LECTEUR D E DESTINATION) — Le fichier que vous essayez de copier est trop volumineux pour le disque ou le disque est plein. Essayez de copier le fichier sur un autre disque ou utilisez un disque de capacité plus élevée. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: (UN NOM D E FICHIER N E PEUT CONTENIR AUCUN DES CARACTÈRES SUIVANTS :) \ / : * ? " < > | — N'utilisez pas ces caractères lorsque vous nommez un fichier. GATE A20 FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L A PORTE A20) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. GENERAL FAILURE (ERREUR GÉNÉRALE) — Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la commande. Ce message est généralement suivi d'informations spécifiques—par exemple, Printer out of paper (L'imprimante manque de papier). Effectuez l'action corrective appropriée. HARD-DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATION ERROR (ERREUR D E CONFIGURATION D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas identifier le type d'unité. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportezvous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0 (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D E DISQUE DUR 0) — L'unité de disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportezvous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81).Dépannage 89 HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'unité de disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'unité de disque dur est peut-être défectueuse. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur à partir d'un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA (INTRODUISEZ UN SUPPORT AMORÇABLE) — Le système d'exploitation tente de s'amorcer sur un CD non amorçable. Introduisez un CD amorçable. INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (INFORMATIONS D E CONFIGURATION NON VALIDES, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — Les informations de configuration du système ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle. C'est après l'installation d'un module de mémoire que ce message est le plus susceptible d'apparaître. Corrigez les options appropriées dans le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système » à la page 165). KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E L'HORLOGE CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller(Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou la souris durant la procédure d'amorçage. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E DONNÉES D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE (TOUCHE D U CLAVIER BLOQUÉE) — Pour les pavés numériques et les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou les touches durant la procédure d'amorçage. Exécutez le test Stuck Key (Touche du clavier bloquée) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). LICENSED CONTENT I S NOT ACCESSIBLE IN MEDIADIRECT (LE CONTENU SOUS LICENCE N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE DANS MEDIADIRECT) — Dell MediaDirect ne peut pas vérifier les restrictions Digital Rights Management (DRM - Gestion des droits numériques) sur le fichier, le fichier ne peut par conséquent pas être lu. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes Dell MediaDirect » à la page 95. MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D'ADRESSE MÉMOIRE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116).90 Dépannage MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR (ERREUR D'ALLOCATION D E MÉMOIRE) — Le logiciel que vous voulez utiliser est en conflit avec le système d'exploitation ou un autre programme ou utilitaire. Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez 30 secondes, puis redémarrez-le. Essayez d’utiliser le programme de nouveau. Si le message d'erreur réapparaît, consultez la documentation du logiciel. MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LIGNE D E DONNÉES À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LOGIQUE DOUBLE MOT À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LOGIQUE PAIR/IMPAIR À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE/ÉCRITURE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D'AMORÇAGE N'EST DISPONIBLE) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas trouver le disque dur. Si l'unité de disque dur est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous qu'elle est installée, bien en place et partitionnée comme périphérique d'amorçage. NO BOOT SECTOR ON HARD DRIVE (AUCUN SECTEUR D'AMORÇAGE SUR L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — Le système d'exploitation est peut-être endommagé. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D'HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN (MÉMOIRE O U RESSOURCES INSUFFISANTES. FERMEZ DES PROGRAMMES E T RÉESSAYEZ) — Trop d'applications sont ouvertes. Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme de votre choix. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND (SYSTÈME D'EXPLOITATION INTROUVABLE) — Réinstallez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113). Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM (MAUVAIS TOTAL D E CONTRÔLE D E LA ROM FACULTATIVE) — La mémoire ROM optionnelle présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND (UN FICHIER .DLL REQUIS EST INTROUVABLE) — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir. Supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer.Dépannage 91 4 Cliquez sur Supprimer ou Modifier/Supprimer et suivez les invites. 5 Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation. SECTOR NOT FOUND (SECTEUR INTROUVABLE) — Le système d'exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver un secteur sur le disque dur. Votre disque dur contient probablement un secteur défectueux ou une table d'allocation de fichiers (FAT) endommagée. Exécutez l'utilitaire de vérification des erreurs Windows pour vérifier la structure des fichiers du disque dur. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. Si un grand nombre de secteurs sont défectueux, sauvegardez les données (si vous le pouvez), puis reformatez le disque dur. SEEK ERROR (ERREUR D E RECHERCHE) — Le système d'exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver une piste particulière sur le disque dur. SHUTDOWN FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'ARRÊT) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (reportezvous à la page 81). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER (PERTE D'ALIMENTATION D E L'HORLOGE MACHINE) — Les paramètres de configuration du système sont corrompus. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, essayez de restaurer les données en accédant au programme de configuration du système. Puis quittez immédiatement le programme. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système » à la page 165. Si le message réapparaît, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK STOPPED (ARRÊT D E L'HORLOGE MACHINE) — La batterie de réserve qui alimente les paramètres de configuration du système nécessite peut-être d'être rechargée. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (L'HEURE N'EST PAS CONFIGURÉE, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — L'heure ou la date du programme de configuration du système ne correspond pas à l'horloge du système. Corrigez les paramètres des options Date et Heure. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système » à la page 165. TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED (ÉCHEC D U COMPTEUR 2 D E LA PUCE D'HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez le groupe de tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE (INTERRUPTION INATTENDUE EN MODE PROTÉGÉ) — Le contrôleur du clavier présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement ou un module de mémoire est mal fixé. Exécutez les tests System Memory (Mémoire système) et Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur de clavier) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY (X:\ N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE. LE PÉRIPHÉRIQUE N'EST PAS PRÊT) — Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW (AVERTISSEMENT : LE NIVEAU D E CHARGE D E LA BATTERIE EST CRITIQUE) — La batterie est pratiquement déchargée. Remplacez la batterie ou branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur. Sinon, activez le mode Mise en veille prolongée ou éteignez l'ordinateur.92 Dépannage Problèmes liés à la carte ExpressCard PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend pas en charge les cartes PC. VÉRIFIEZ L A CARTE EXPRESSCARD — Assurez-vous que la carte ExpressCard est correctement insérée dans le connecteur. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L A CARTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône Safely Remove Hardware (Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité) dans la barre des tâches Windows. Assurez-vous que la carte est répertoriée. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE EXPRESSCARD FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE EXPRESSCARD NON FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez le fabricant de la carte ExpressCard. Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST RECONNU PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. Si votre périphérique IEEE 1394 est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez Dell ou le fabricant du périphérique IEEE 1394. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 NON FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez Dell ou le fabricant du périphérique IEEE 1394. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST CORRECTEMENT INSÉRÉ DANS L E CONNECTEUR. Problèmes liés au clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Utilisez le clavier intégré lorsque vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics ou le programme de configuration du système. Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel.Dépannage 93 Problèmes liés au clavier externe REMARQUE : Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D U CLAVIER — Éteignez l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble du clavier, assurez-vous qu'il n'est pas endommagé et reconnectez-le fermement. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour clavier, déconnectez-le et branchez le clavier directement à l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez une minute, puis rallumez-le. 2 Vérifiez que les voyants des touches Verr num, Verr maj et Arrêt défil du clavier clignotent pendant le processus d'amorçage. 3 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 4 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier externe et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si vous ne parvenez pas à effectuer ces vérifications, votre clavier externe est probablement défectueux. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT BIEN D U CLAVIER EXTERNE, VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER INTÉGRÉ — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez le clavier externe. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 5 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier interne et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si les caractères s'affichent maintenant tandis qu'ils ne s'affichaient pas avec le clavier externe, ce dernier est probablement défectueux. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. EXÉCUTEZ LES TESTS D E DIAGNOSTIC D U CLAVIER — Exécutez les tests PC-AT Compatible Keyboards (Claviers compatibles PC-AT) dans Dell Diagnostics.Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Si les tests indiquent que le clavier externe est défectueux, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. Caractères imprévus DÉSACTIVEZ L E PAVÉ NUMÉRIQUE — Appuyez sur pour désactiver le pavé numérique s'il affiche des chiffres au lieu de lettres. Assurez-vous que le voyant de verrouillage numérique n'est pas allumé.94 Dépannage Blocages et problèmes logiciels PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. L'ordinateur ne démarre pas ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR EST SOLIDEMENT BRANCHÉ SUR L'ORDINATEUR E T SUR L A PRISE SECTEUR L'ordinateur ne répond plus AVIS : Vous pouvez perdre des données si vous n'arrivez pas à arrêter correctement le système d'exploitation. ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement FIN D U PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Applications, puis sélectionnez le programme qui ne répond plus. 3 Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. REMARQUE : Le programme chkdsk peut s'exécuter lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL — Si nécessaire, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. La documentation, la disquette ou le CD qui accompagne tout logiciel inclut généralement des instructions d'installation. Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® antérieur EXÉCUTEZ L'ASSISTANT COMPATIBILITÉ DES PROGRAMMES — L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement proche des environnements des systèmes d'exploitation non Windows XP. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Assistant Compatibilité des programmes. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Un écran bleu uni apparaît ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Dépannage 95 Problèmes Dell MediaDirect POUR PLUS D'INFORMATIONS, REPORTEZ-VOUS A U FICHIER D'AIDE DELL MEDIADIRECT — Cliquez sur l'icône en forme de point d'interrogation en bas de l'écran Dell MediaDirect pour accéder à l'aide. POUR LIRE DES FILMS AVEC DELL MEDIADIRECT, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN LECTEUR D E DVD E T L E LOGICIEL DELL DVD PLAYER — Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur équipé d'un lecteur de DVD, ce logiciel doit déjà être installé. PROBLÈMES LIÉS À LA QUALITÉ VIDÉO — Désactivez l'option Use Hardware Acceleration (Utiliser l'accélération matérielle). Cette fonctionnalité utilise le traitement spécial dans certains graphiques pour réduire les exigences du processeur lors de la lecture de DVD et de certains types de fichiers vidéo. IMPOSSIBILITÉ D E LIRE CERTAINS FICHIERS MÉDIA — Étant donné que Dell MediaDirect offre un accès aux fichiers média hors de l'environnement du système d'exploitation Windows XP, l'accès au contenu sous licence est restreint. Le contenu sous licence est du contenu numérique auquel s'applique Digital Rights Management (DRM). L'environnement Dell MediaDirect ne peut pas vérifier les restrictions DRM, les fichiers sous licence ne peuvent par conséquent pas être lus. Les fichiers musicaux et vidéo sous licence sont indiqués par une icône verrou. Vous pouvez accéder aux fichiers sous licence dans l'environnement du système d'exploitation Windows XP. RÉGLAGE DES PARAMÈTRES D E COULEUR POUR LES FILMS CONTENANT DES SCÈNES TROP SOMBRES O U TROP CLAIRES — Cliquez sur EagleVision pour utiliser une technologie d'amélioration vidéo qui détecte le contenu vidéo et règle la luminosité/le contraste/la saturation de manière dynamique. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonctionnalité Dell MediaDirect si vous reformatez volontairement le disque dur. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. Autres problèmes logiciels CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL O U CONTACTEZ L E FABRICANT POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS D E DÉPANNAGE — • Assurez-vous que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur. • Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est conforme aux exigences matérielles requises pour que le logiciel fonctionne. Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour de plus amples informations. • Assurez-vous que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. • Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. • Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. SAUVEGARDEZ IMMÉDIATEMENT VOS FICHIERS UTILISEZ UN PROGRAMME D E RECHERCHE DES VIRUS POUR VÉRIFIER L E DISQUE DUR, LES DISQUETTES O U LES CD ENREGISTREZ E T QUITTEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES E T LES FICHIERS OUVERTS, PUIS ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR VIA L E MENU Démarrer96 Dépannage ANALYSEZ L'ORDINATEUR À L A RECHERCHE D E LOGICIELS ESPIONS — Si vous observez un ralentissement des performances de votre ordinateur, si des fenêtres publicitaires s'affichent fréquemment sur votre écran ou si vous avez des problèmes pour vous connecter sur Internet, votre ordinateur est peut-être infecté par un logiciel espion. Utilisez un programme antivirus qui inclut une protection contre les logiciels espions (une mise à niveau de votre programme sera peut-être nécessaire) afin d'analyser votre ordinateur et de supprimer les logiciels espions. Pour plus d'informations, allez sur le site support.dell.com et lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé spyware (espion). EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Si tous les tests s'exécutent correctement, la condition d'erreur est liée à un problème logiciel. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Problèmes liés à la mémoire PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. SI L E MESSAGE D E MÉMOIRE INSUFFISANTE S'AFFICHE — • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution que vous n'utilisez pas pour voir si cela permet de résoudre le problème. • Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour prendre connaissance des besoins en mémoire minimaux. Le cas échéant, ajoutez de la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. • Réinsérez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ D'AUTRES PROBLÈMES D E MÉMOIRE — • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). • Veillez à bien suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Problèmes liés au réseau PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ L E CONNECTEUR D U CÂBLE RÉSEAU — Vérifiez que le câble de réseau est bien inséré dans le connecteur de réseau situé sur le côté de l'ordinateur et le port ou périphérique réseau. VÉRIFIEZ LES VOYANTS D U RÉSEAU SUR L E CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU — Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, cela signifie qu'il n'y a pas de communication avec le réseau. Remplacez le câble de réseau. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RECONNECTEZ-VOUS A U RÉSEAU VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D U RÉSEAU — Contactez l'administrateur de réseau pour qu'il vérifie vos paramètres et le fonctionnement du réseau.Dépannage 97 Problèmes d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION — Lorsque le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou lorsqu'il clignote, l'ordinateur est sous tension. Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille—appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour quitter le mode Veille. Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Veille, reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. CHARGEZ LA BATTERIE — Il se peut que la batterie soit déchargée. 1 Réinstallez la batterie. 2 Utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour connecter votre ordinateur à une prise secteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie reste chargée) diminue avec le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, vous devrez peut-être en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ÉTAT D E LA BATTERIE — Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote en orange ou est orange et fixe, la batterie est peu chargée ou complètement déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote alternativement en vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour lancer le processus de recharge. Éteignez l'ordinateur, déconnectez-le de la prise secteur, ainsi que la batterie, pour qu'ils reviennent à la température ambiante. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est vert et clignote rapidement, il se peut que la batterie soit défectueuse. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. VÉRIFIEZ L A TEMPÉRATURE D E LA BATTERIE — Si la température de la batterie est inférieure à 0 °C (32 °F), l'ordinateur ne démarrera pas. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE SECTEUR — Contournez les parasurtenseurs, les rampes d'alimentation et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. REMETTEZ EN PLACE LES MODULES D E MÉMOIRE — Si le voyant d'alimentation de l'ordinateur est allumé mais que l'écran reste vide, réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116).98 Dépannage Problèmes d'imprimante PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre imprimante, contactez le fabricant. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST ALLUMÉE VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES D E L'IMPRIMANTE — • Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles de l'imprimante sont solidement connectés à l'imprimante et à l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les télécopieurs installés. Si l'imprimante apparaît dans la liste, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône la représentant. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. Pour une imprimante parallèle, assurez-vous que le port d'impression est défini sur LPT1 (Port de l'imprimante). Pour une imprimante USB, assurez-vous que le port d'impression est défini sur USB. RÉINSTALLATION D U PILOTE D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes liés au scanner PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre scanner, contactez le fabricant du scanner. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U SCANNER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. DÉVERROUILLEZ L E SCANNER — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RÉESSAYEZ VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES — • Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles du scanner sont solidement connectés au scanner et à l'ordinateur.Dépannage 99 VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E SCANNER EST RECONNU PAR MICROSOFT WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Scanners et appareils-photo. Si votre scanner est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D U SCANNER — Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône en forme de haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume, les aigus ou les basses pour supprimer toute distorsion. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME À L'AIDE DES RACCOURCIS CLAVIER — Pour désactiver (mettre en sourdine) les hautparleurs intégrés, appuyez sur . RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CAISSON D E BASSE E T LES HAUT-PARLEURS SONT SOUS TENSION — Reportez-vous au schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vos haut-parleurs sont dotés de commandes du volume, réglez le volume, les basses ou les aigus pour éliminer les distorsions. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. DÉCONNECTEZ L E CASQUE D U CONNECTEUR D E CASQUE — Le son des haut-parleurs est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le casque est connecté au connecteur de casque du panneau avant de l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent des interférences. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. REMARQUE : Le réglage du volume de certains lecteurs MP3 annule l'effet du paramètre de volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des chansons au format MP3, assurez-vous que vous n'avez pas baissé ou augmenté le volume.100 Dépannage Aucun son émis par le casque VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES D U CASQUE — Assurez-vous que le câble du casque est solidement connecté au connecteur de casque (reportez-vous à la section « connecteurs audio » à la page 20). RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E LA TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3 Réglez les paramètres. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D E LA SOURIS — Éteignez l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble de la souris, vérifiez s'il n'est pas endommagé et reconnectez-le fermement. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour la souris, déconnectez-le et branchez la souris directement à l'ordinateur. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT D E LA SOURIS, TESTEZ L A TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez la souris. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le bureauWindows apparaît, utilisez la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur, sélectionner une icône et l'ouvrir. Si la tablette tactile fonctionne correctement, la souris est probablement défectueuse. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Problèmes vidéo et d'affichage PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si l'écran est vide REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un programme qui exige une résolution supérieure à celle dont vous disposez, Dell vous conseille de brancher un écran externe à votre ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L A BATTERIE — Si vous utilisez une batterie pour alimenter l'ordinateur, la batterie peut être déchargée. Branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur à l'aide de l'adaptateur secteur, puis allumez l'ordinateur.Dépannage 101 TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE SECTEUR — Contournez les parasurtenseurs, les rampes d'alimentation et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. BASCULEZ L'IMAGE VIDÉO — Si votre ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe, appuyez sur pour basculer l'affichage de l'image vidéo vers l'écran. Si l'écran est difficile à lire RÉGLEZ L A LUMINOSITÉ — Appuyez sur et sur la touche fléchée vers le haut ou vers le bas. ÉLOIGNEZ L E CAISSON D E BASSE EXTERNE D E L'ORDINATEUR O U D E L'ÉCRAN — Si vos haut-parleurs externes comportent un caisson de basse, vérifiez que ce dernier se trouve à au moins 60 cm (2 pieds) de l'ordinateur ou du moniteur externe. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. ORIENTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DANS UNE DIRECTION DIFFÉRENTE — Éliminez les reflets du soleil pouvant altérer la qualité de l'image. RÉGLEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D'AFFICHAGE D E WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Cliquez sur la zone que vous souhaitez modifier ou cliquez sur l'icône Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. VOIR «MESSAGES D'ERREUR » — Si un message d'erreur apparaît, reportez-vous à la section « Messages d'erreur » à la page 87. Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible CONNECTEZ UN MONITEUR EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur et connectez un moniteur externe à ce dernier. 2 Allumez l'ordinateur et le moniteur, puis réglez la luminosité et le contraste. Si le moniteur externe fonctionne correctement, le moniteur ou le contrôleur vidéo de l'ordinateur peut être défectueux. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137.102 Dépannage Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier par exemple. Tous les périphériques nécessitent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et tout autre programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique dispose de son propre jeu de commandes spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. Lorsque Dell livre l'ordinateur, les pilotes requis sont déjà installés—aucune installation ou configuration supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. AVIS : Le CD Drivers and Utilities peut contenir des pilotes pour des systèmes d'exploitation qui ne sont pas installés sur votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que vous installez les logiciels appropriés à votre système d'exploitation. De nombreux pilotes, tels que le pilote du clavier, sont fournis avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Vous devez installer des pilotes si vous : • Mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation ; • Réinstallez votre système d'exploitation ; • Connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un périphérique, identifiez le pilote à l'origine du problème et mettez-le à niveau si nécessaire. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Faites défiler la liste pour rechercher des périphériques comportant un point d'exclamation (un cercle jaune et un [!]) sur l'icône du périphérique. Lorsqu'un point d'exclamation se trouve à côté du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau. Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires AVIS : Le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et le CD Drivers and Utilities fournissent les pilotes appropriés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d'autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur.Dépannage 103 Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP Si un problème apparaît sur votre ordinateur après avoir installé ou mis à jour le pilote, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP pour remplacer le pilote par la version précédemment installée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8 Cliquez sur Restauration des pilotes. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système pour retourner à un état de fonctionnement de votre système d'exploitation antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Utilisation du CD Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur. Si l'utilisation de la fonctionRestauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP » à la page 103) ou de Restauration du système ne résout pas le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities. Dans la plupart des cas, le CD démarre automatiquement. Dans le cas contraire, lancez l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur le répertoire du lecteur de CD pour afficher le contenu du CD, puis doublecliquez sur le fichier autorcd.exe. La première fois que vous exécutez le CD, il se peut qu'il vous invite à installer des fichiers de configuration. Cliquez sur OK et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour continuer. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Langue de la barre d'outils, sélectionnez une langue pour le pilote ou l'utilitaire (si disponible). Un écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. Le CD analyse automatiquement votre matériel et détecte les pilotes et les utilitaires employés par votre ordinateur. 5 Une fois l'analyse du matériel terminée, vous pouvez détecter d'autres pilotes et utilitaires. Sous Critères de recherche, sélectionnez les catégories appropriées dans les menus déroulants Modèle de système, Système d'exploitation et Rubrique. Un ou plusieurs liens apparaissent pour le pilote et l'utilitaire particuliers utilisés par votre ordinateur.104 Dépannage 6 Cliquez sur le lien d'un pilote ou d'un utilitaire spécifique afin d'afficher les informations correspondantes. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Installer (s'il est disponible) pour lancer l'installation du pilote ou de l'utilitaire. À l'écran d'accueil, suivez les invites pour terminer l'installation. Si vous ne trouvez pas de bouton Installer, l'installation automatique n'est pas possible. Pour obtenir des instructions d'installation, reportez-vous aux instructions appropriées dans les sous-sections suivantes ou cliquez sur le bouton Extraire, suivez les instructions d'extraction et lisez le fichier Lisezmoi. S'il vous est demandé de trouver les fichiers de pilote, cliquez sur le répertoire du CD dans la fenêtre d'information sur le pilote pour afficher les fichiers associés à ce pilote. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes 1 Une fois les fichiers de pilote extraits vers votre disque dur, tel que décrit dans la section précédente, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Double-cliquez sur le type de périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote (par exemple, Modems ou périphériques infrarouges). 5 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote, puis sur Mettre à jour le pilote. 7 Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (utilisateurs expérimentés), puis sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Parcourir et placez-vous à l'endroit où vous avez précédemment copié les fichiers de pilote. 9 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, utilisez le Dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Pour démarrer le Dépanneur des conflits matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et Support. 2 Entrez dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Dépanneur de conflits matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur de conflits matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.Dépannage 105 Restauration du système d'exploitation Plusieurs méthodes de restauration du système d'exploitation sont disponibles : • La fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP ramène votre ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur, sans affecter les fichiers de données. Commencez par utiliser la fonction Restauration du système pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation et préserver vos fichiers de données. • L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore de Symantec restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Dell PC Restore supprime de façon permanente toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et supprime toutes les applications installées après réception de l'ordinateur. N'utilisez PC Restore que si la restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. • Si un CD Operating system vous a été livré avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l'utiliser pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Toutefois, l'utilisation de ce CD entraîne la suppression de toutes les données présentes sur le disque dur. N'utilisez ce CD que si la restauration du système n'a pas permis de résoudre le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de MicrosoftWindows XP Le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows XP comporte la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Consultez le Centre d'aide et de support Windows pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. AVIS : Sauvegardez régulièrement vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne contrôle pas vos fichiers de données et ne permet pas de les récupérer. REMARQUE : Les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l'affichage par défaut de Windows. Par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell™ est réglé sur le mode d'affichage classique de Windows. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur la tâche Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur Si des problèmes surviennent après l'installation d'un pilote de périphérique, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP » à la page 103) pour résoudre le problème. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée.106 Dépannage 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Assurez-vous que l'option Restaurer mon ordinateur à un état antérieur est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur une date du calendrier à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer votre ordinateur. L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration affiche un calendrier vous permettant de sélectionner des points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration terminée s'affiche une fois que la collecte des données par la fonction Restauration du système est terminée. L'ordinateur redémarre. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes en utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : Avant d'annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Cliquez sur Undo my last restoration (Annuler ma dernière restauration), puis sur Suivant. Activation de la fonctionnalité Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système est bien désactivée.Dépannage 107 Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec AVIS : Dell PC Restore supprime définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et supprime toutes les applications et tous les pilotes installés après que vous avez reçu l'ordinateur. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer PC Restore. N'utilisez PC Restore que si la restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell PC Restore de Symantec n'est pas obligatoirement disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. N'utilisez Dell PC Restore de Symantec qu'en dernier ressort pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les documents, feuilles de calcul, messages électroniques, photos numériques et fichiers de musique constituent les fichiers de données. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer PC Restore. Pour utiliser PC Restore : 1 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au cours du processus d'amorçage, une barre bleue portant la mention www.dell.com apparaît dans la partie supérieure de l'écran. 2 Dès que cette barre bleue s'affiche, appuyez sur . Si vous n'appuyez pas sur à temps, laissez l'ordinateur finir de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le de nouveau. AVIS : Si vous ne voulez pas poursuivre l'utilisation de PC Restore, cliquez sur Redémarrer à l'étape suivante. 3 Dans l'écran qui apparaît ensuite, cliquez sur Restaurer. 4 Dans l'écran suivant, cliquez sur Confirmer. La restauration prend de 6 à 10 minutes environ. 5 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : N'éteignez pas manuellement l'ordinateur. Cliquez sur Terminer et laissez l'ordinateur terminer le redémarrage. 6 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Oui. L'ordinateur redémarre. Étant donné que l'ordinateur est restauré à son état de fonctionnement d'origine, les écrans qui apparaissent, tels que le Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final sont identiques à ceux qui s'étaient affichés au premier démarrage de l'ordinateur. 7 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre. 8 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK.108 Dépannage Suppression de Dell PC Restore AVIS : La suppression de Dell PC Restore du disque dur supprime de manière permanente l'utilitaire PC Restore de votre ordinateur. Une fois Dell PC Restore supprimé, vous ne pourrez plus l'utiliser pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Dell PC Restore de Symantec n'est pas obligatoirement disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Nous vous recommandons de ne pas supprimer PC Restore de votre ordinateur, même s'il se révèle nécessaire de libérer de l'espace sur le disque dur. Une fois PC Restore supprimé du disque dur, il est impossible de le rappeler et vous ne pourrez jamais utiliser PC Restore pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur à son état de fonctionnement d'origine. Pour supprimer PC Restore : 1 Connectez-vous à l'ordinateur en tant qu'administrateur local. 2 Dans l'Explorateur Windows, rendez-vous à l'adresse c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Double-cliquez sur le nom de fichier DSRIRRemv2.exe. REMARQUE : Si vous ne vous êtes pas connecté en tant qu'administrateur local, le message qui s'affiche vous invite à le faire. Cliquez sur Quitter et connectez-vous en tant qu'administrateur local. REMARQUE : Si la partition de PC Restore n'existe pas sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, un message indiquant qu'elle n'a pas été trouvée apparaît. Cliquez sur Quitter; il n'existe aucune partition à supprimer. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour supprimer la partition PC Restore sur le disque dur. 5 Lorsqu'un message de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur Oui. La partition PC Restore est supprimée et l'espace disque ainsi libéré est ajouté à l'espace disque disponible sur le disque dur. 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local (C) dans l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur Propriétés, puis vérifiez que l'espace disque supplémentaire est disponible tel qu'indiqué par la valeur plus élevée sous Espace libre. 7 Cliquez sur Terminer pour fermer la fenêtre PC Restore Removal (Retrait de PC Restore). 8 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Utilisation du CD Operating system Avant de commencer Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour corriger un problème avec un nouveau pilote, utilisez tout d'abord la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP » à la page 103). Si la Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez Restauration du système pour ramener l'ordinateur à l'état de fonctionnement précédant l'installation du pilote. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows XP » à la page 105.Dépannage 109 Pour réinstaller Windows XP, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • CD Système d'exploitation • Dell™ CD Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities contient les pilotes installés à l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities pour charger les pilotes requis. Selon la région dans laquelle vous avez commandé votre ordinateur et selon que vous avez demandé ou non les CD, le CD Drivers and Utilities et le CD Operating System ne sont pas forcément livrés avec l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de Windows XP Pour réinstaller Windows XP, suivez toutes les étapes des sections ci-après, dans l'ordre indiqué. Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre de 1 à 2 heures. Après avoir réinstallé le système d'exploitation, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de périphériques, le programme antivirus et d'autres logiciels. AVIS : Le CD Operating System fournit des options de réinstallation du système Windows XP. Ces options peuvent remplacer des fichiers installés et avoir des répercussions sur les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas votre Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : Pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller le système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le logiciel. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation. 2 Insérez le CD Operating system. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Installer Windows XP apparaît. 3 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du logo DELL™. Si le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à l'affichage du bureau Windows, éteignez de nouveau l'ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'option CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur une touche lorsque le message Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer depuis le CD-ROM apparaît à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'écran Configuration de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur . 8 Respectez les instructions pour terminer la réinstallation. 9 Une fois la réinstallation terminée, réinstallez les pilotes et les applications, le cas échéant. Reportezvous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102.110 DépannageAjout et remplacement de pièces 111 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Ce chapitre fournit les instructions de retrait et d'installation des composants de votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes doivent exister préalablement à chaque procédure : • Vous avez effectué les étapes des sections « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » (reportez-vous à cette page) et « Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur » (reportez-vous à la page 112). • Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™. • Pour remplacer un composant ou pour l'installer, s'il a été acheté séparément, effectuez la procédure de retrait en ordre inverse. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document nécessitent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à lame plate • un tournevis cruciforme • une petite pointe en plastique • la mise à jour Flash BIOS (visitez le site Web d'assistance technique de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com) Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, enregistrez tous les fichiers ouverts, fermez-les et quittez toutes les applications avant de procéder à l'arrêt du système. 1 Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : a Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, quittez tous les programmes, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur. b Dans la fenêtre Arrêter l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Arrêter/Éteindre. L'ordinateur s'éteint une fois le système d'exploitation arrêté. 2 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés sont éteints. Si votre ordinateur et les périphériques qui y sont connectés ne se sont pas éteints automatiquement lorsque vous avez éteint votre ordinateur, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 4 secondes.112 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur contre les dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité personnelle. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les pièces ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la languette de montage métallique. Tenez les pièces, telles qu'un processeur, par les bords et non par les broches. AVIS : Seul un technicien d'entretien qualifié doit effectuer les réparations sur votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non autorisée par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis d'un connecteur à languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez ce type de câble, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage vers l'intérieur avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de connecteur. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. AVIS : Avant de commencer à travailler sur l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes suivantes pour éviter de l'endommager. 1 Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 Éteignez l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 111. AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble de réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise réseau murale. 3 Débranchez également de l'ordinateur tous les câbles de téléphone ou de réseau. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, veillez à retirer la batterie principale avant de réparer l'ordinateur. 4 Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont reliés de leur prise secteur. 5 Retirez la batterie. Faites glisser et maintenez le loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie, situé en dessous de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 113 6 Retirez le lecteur optique, le cas échéant, de la baie de lecteur optique. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. 7 Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre à la terre la carte système. 8 Retirez les cartes ExpressCard du logement correspondant. Reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67. 9 Retirez les cartes mémoire multimédia du lecteur 5 en 1 correspondant. Reportez-vous à la section « Caches de carte mémoire multimédia » à la page 68. 10 Fermez l'écran, retournez l'ordinateur et placez-le sur une surface plane. Disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Si vous enlevez le disque dur lorsqu'il est chaud, ne touchez pas l'habitacle en métal du disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter toute perte de données, éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 111) avant de retirer le disque dur. Ne retirez jamais l'unité de disque dur lorsque l'ordinateur est allumé, en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée. AVIS : Les disques durs sont très fragiles ; même un léger choc peut les endommager. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit ni la compatibilité ni la prise en charge des unités de disque dur provenant de sources autres que Dell. REMARQUE : Si vous installez un disque dur provenant d'une source autre que Dell, vous devez installer un système d'exploitation, des pilotes et des utilitaires sur le nouveau disque dur. 1 batterie 2 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 2 1114 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pour remettre l'unité de disque dur dans la baie d'unité : 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les deux vis imperdables du cache du disque dur. AVIS : Lorsque le disque dur n'est pas dans l'ordinateur, placez-le dans son emballage protecteur antistatique. Reportez-vous à la section « Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques » du Guide d'information sur le produit. 3 Soulevez le capot et mettez-le de côté. 4 Utilisez votre doigt pour faire glisser le disque dur vers les trous de vis, puis la languette de retrait pour soulever le disque dur vers le haut et le retirer de l'ordinateur. 1 vis (2) 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 115 5 Enlevez le nouveau disque de son emballage. Conservez cet emballage d'origine pour l'utiliser à nouveau lors du stockage ou de l'expédition du disque dur. AVIS : Faites glisser le disque dans son logement en exerçant une pression ferme et uniforme. Si vous exercez une pression trop forte sur le disque pour le mettre en place, vous risquez d'endommager le connecteur. 6 Installez le nouveau disque dur dans la baie, puis faites-le glisser dans le connecteur dans la direction opposée à celle des trous de vis jusqu'à ce qu'il soit bien en place. 7 Remettez le cache et les vis en place. 8 Installez le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Restauration du système d'exploitation » à la page 105. 9 Installez les pilotes et utilitaires de votre ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Retour de votre disque dur à Dell Pour retourner votre ancien disque dur à Dell, placez-le dans son emballage d'origine ou dans un emballage similaire. Faute de quoi il risque d'être endommagé en transit. 1 languette de retrait 2 unité de disque dur 2 1116 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Lecteurs optiques À propos de la vis de fixation de périphérique REMARQUE : Vous n'avez pas besoin d'installer la vis de fixation de périphérique à moins que vous vouliez sécuriser le module afin qu'on ne puisse pas facilement le retirer. Votre ordinateur Dell™ est livré avec un lecteur optique, installé dans la baie modulaire, et avec une vis de fixation de périphérique. Celle-ci n'est pas nécessairement installée sur le lecteur optique, elle peut être dans un sachet séparé. Lorsque vous installez le module dans la baie, vous pouvez aussi installer la vis de fixation de périphérique afin qu'on ne puisse pas facilement le retirer. Retrait et installation des lecteurs optiques AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les lecteurs, rangez-les dans un endroit sec et sûr lorsqu'ils ne sont pas installés dans l'ordinateur. Évitez d'exercer une pression quelconque ou de placer des objets lourds sur ces derniers. 1 L'ordinateur étant sous tension, double-cliquez sur l'icône Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité sur la barre des tâches, cliquez sur le périphérique que vous souhaitez éjecter, puis sur Stop (Arrêter). 2 Fermez votre écran et retournez l'ordinateur. 3 Utilisez un tournevis cruciforme pour retirer la vis de fixation de périphérique qui se trouve sous l'ordinateur. 4 Insérez un tournevis cruciforme dans le trou de vis afin de pousser le lecteur hors de la baie modulaire. 1 emballage en polystyrène 2 unité de disque dur 2 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 117 5 Sortez le lecteur de la baie modulaire. 6 Poussez le nouveau lecteur dans la baie modulaire jusqu'au déclic. 7 Remettez en place la vis de fixation de périphérique. 8 Retournez l'ordinateur à l'endroit et ouvrez l'écran. 9 Le système d'exploitation reconnaît automatiquement le lecteur. Le cas échéant, entrez votre mot de passe pour déverrouiller votre ordinateur. Mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte système. Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire prise en charge par votre ordinateur, reportezvous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157. Installez uniquement des modules conçus spécifiquement pour votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Cet ordinateur prend en charge les modules de mémoire 533 MHz et 667 MHz. En cas d'installation d'un autre module de mémoire, vous devez vous assurer que les deux DIMM sont cadencés à 667 MHz. Si l'un est cadencé à 533 MHz et l'autre à 667 MHz, l'ordinateur fonctionnera uniquement à la vitesse de 533 MHz et pas à la vitesse mémoire maximale de 667 MHz. REMARQUE : Les modules de mémoire achetés chez Dell sont couverts par la garantie de votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.118 Ajout et remplacement de pièces L'ordinateur possède deux connecteurs de module de mémoire, « DIMM A » et « DIMM B ». DIMM A (situé sous le clavier) renferme le module de mémoire principal configuré par l'usine. Si vous n'avez pas commandé de mémoire supplémentaire, le connecteur DIMM B (situé en dessous de l'ordinateur sous le cache du module de mémoire) est vide. Généralement, si vous ajoutez de la mémoire, vous devez installer un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B. Si vous voulez mettre la mémoire à niveau, vous devrez peut-être installer la mémoire dans les deux connecteurs DIMM A et B, en fonction de l'étendue de la mise à niveau. Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous quittez les lieux, remettez-vous à la terre au moment où vous revenez vers l'ordinateur. 3 Retournez l'ordinateur, desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du compartiment des modules de mémoire, puis retirez le cache. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur du module de mémoire, n'utilisez pas d'outil pour écarter les clips de fixation du module de mémoire. 4 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module existant : a Du bout des doigts, écartez avec précaution les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que le module sorte. b Retirez le module du connecteur. 1 vis (2) 2 cache du module de mémoire 1 2Ajout et remplacement de pièces 119 AVIS : Si vous devez installer des modules de mémoire dans deux connecteurs, installez un module de mémoire dans le connecteur « DIMM A » avant d'en installer un dans le connecteur « DIMM B ». Insérez les modules de mémoire suivant un angle de 45 degrés pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur. REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur ne vous avertit de cet échec. 5 Raccordez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire : a Alignez l'encoche du bord du module sur la languette située dans l'emplacement du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le module dans l'emplacement en suivant un angle de 45 degrés, puis faites-le pivoter vers le bas jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. 1 module de mémoire 2 clips de fixation (2 par connecteur) 1 2120 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 6 Replacez le cache du module de mémoire et serrez les vis. AVIS : Si vous rencontrez des difficultés pour fermer le cache, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. Ne forcez pas la fermeture du cache, car vous risqueriez d'endommager l'ordinateur. 7 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur et à une prise secteur. 8 Réinstallez le disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113. 9 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Aide et support, puis sur Informations sur l'ordinateur. Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM A Le connecteur de module de mémoire étiqueté « DIMM A » est situé sous le clavier. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous quittez les lieux, remettez-vous à la terre au moment où vous revenez vers l'ordinateur. 1 languette dans le logement du connecteur 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 121 3 Retirez le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section « Cache de la charnière » à la page 127. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de retirer les deux vis de la baie de batterie lors du retrait des charnières. 4 Retirez le clavier. Reportez-vous à la section « Clavier » à la page 129. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur du module de mémoire, n'utilisez pas d'outil pour écarter les clips de fixation du module de mémoire. 5 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module existant : a Du bout des doigts, écartez avec précaution les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que le module sorte. b Retirez le module du connecteur. AVIS : Si vous devez installer des modules de mémoire dans deux connecteurs, installez un module de mémoire dans le connecteur « DIMM A » avant d'en installer un dans le connecteur « DIMM B ». Insérez les modules de mémoire suivant un angle de 45 degrés pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur. REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur ne vous avertit de cet échec. 6 Raccordez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire : a Alignez l'encoche du bord du module sur la languette située dans l'emplacement du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le module dans l'emplacement en suivant un angle de 45 degrés, puis faites-le pivoter vers le bas jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. 1 module de mémoire 2 clips de fixation (2 par connecteur) 1 2122 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 7 Remettez le clavier en place. Reportez-vous à la section « Clavier » à la page 129. 8 Remettez en place le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section « Cache de la charnière » à la page 127. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de remettre les deux vis dans la baie de batterie lors de la réinstallation des charnières. 9 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur et à une prise secteur. 10 Réinstallez le disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113. 11 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Aide et support, puis sur Informations sur l'ordinateur. 1 languette dans le logement du connecteur 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 123 Modem (en option) Si vous avez commandé le modem en option en même temps que votre ordinateur, le modem est déjà installé. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil, puis retirez le cache. 3 Retirez le modem installé : a Retirez la vis permettant de fixer le modem sur la carte système et mettez-la de côté. b Soulevez la languette de retrait afin de retirer le modem du connecteur, sur la carte système, puis déconnectez le câble du modem. 1 cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil 1124 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 4 Installez le modem de remplacement : a Connectez le câble du modem au modem. AVIS : Les connecteurs sont prévus pour une insertion correcte. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. b Alignez le modem sur les trous des vis et appuyez sur le modem pour l'insérer dans le connecteur de la carte système. c Remettez en place la vis qui fixe le modem à la carte système. 5 Remettez en place le cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil. 1 vis 2 câble du modem 3 modem 4 languette de retrait 5 connecteur de carte système 4 5 1 2 3Ajout et remplacement de pièces 125 Carte Mini Si vous avez commandé une carte Mini avec votre ordinateur, la carte est déjà installée. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Si aucune carte Mini n'est installée, passez à l'étape 3. Si vous remplacez une carte Mini, retirez la carte existante : a Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte Mini. b Retirez la carte Mini en poussant les clips de fixation métalliques vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce que la carte soit doucement éjectée. c Retirez la carte Mini de son connecteur. 1 câbles d'antenne (2) 1126 Ajout et remplacement de pièces AVIS : Les connecteurs disposent de codes de couleur pour garantir leur bonne insertion. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. 3 Installez la carte Mini de remplacement : AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini, vérifiez que les câbles d'antenne ne sont pas sous la carte lorsque vous la mettez en place. a Alignez la carte Mini sur le connecteur suivant un angle de 45 degrés et enfoncez-la dans le connecteur jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini, ne placez jamais de câbles au-dessous de la carte. b Raccordez les câbles d'antenne aux connecteurs d'antenne de la carte Mini en faisant correspondre la couleur du câble avec la couleur du triangle au-dessus du connecteur. Raccordez le câble d'antenne principal (blanc) au connecteur d'antenne avec le triangle blanc. Raccordez le câble d'antenne auxiliaire (noir) au connecteur d'antenne avec le triangle noir. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un câble gris, raccordez celui-ci au connecteur avec le triangle gris, si ce connecteur est disponible sur votre carte. 1 languettes de fixation en métal (2) 2 carte Mini 2 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 127 Cache de la charnière Retrait du cache de la charnière PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Le cache de la charnière est fragile et peut être endommagé s'il est forcé. Faites plus particulièrement attention au cours du retrait du cache de la charnière. 1 Suivez les procédures de la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retirez la batterie (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41). 3 Retirez les deux vis de la baie de batterie. 1 câbles d'antenne (2) 1128 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 4 Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit et ouvrez entièrement l'écran (180 degrés) afin qu'il repose sur votre surface de travail. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le cache de la charnière, ne soulevez pas le cache des deux côtés simultanément. 5 Insérez une pointe en plastique dans l'encoche pour soulever le cache de la charnière du côté droit. 6 Faites glisser le cache de la charnière de droite à gauche, vers le haut et retirez-le. 1 vis (2) 1 cache de la charnière 2 encoche 1 1 2Ajout et remplacement de pièces 129 Remise en place du cache de la charnière 1 Mettez le coin gauche du cache en place. 2 Appuyez de gauche à droite sur le cache jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 3 Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur. 4 Remettez en place les deux vis dans la baie de batterie. 5 Remettez la batterie en place (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41). Clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. Retrait du clavier 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retirez le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section « Cache de la charnière » à la page 127. AVIS : Les touches du clavier sont fragiles, se déboîtent facilement et sont difficiles à remettre en place. Faites plus particulièrement attention au cours du retrait et de la manipulation du clavier. 3 Soulevez le clavier et maintenez-le soulevé et légèrement vers l'avant pour pouvoir accéder au connecteur du clavier. 4 Tirez sur le levier du connecteur de la carte système pour déconnecter le câble du clavier de la carte système.130 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Remise en place du clavier AVIS : Pour éviter de rayer le repose-mains lors de la remise en place du clavier, attachez les six languettes situées à l'avant du clavier dans le repose-mains, puis fixez le clavier. 1 Connectez le câble du clavier à la carte système. 2 Sécurisez le câble du clavier et le levier sur le connecteur de la carte système. 3 Placez les six languettes situées à l'avant du clavier dans le repose-mains. Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 clavier 2 câble du clavier 3 levier du connecteur de la carte système 4 languettes (6) 4 1 3 2Ajout et remplacement de pièces 131 La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth est déjà installée sur votre système si vous l'avez commandée avec votre ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Desserrez les vis captives du cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil, puis retirez le cache. 3 Retirez la vis de fixation du porte-carte. 4 Tirez le porte-carte hors du compartiment afin de pouvoir déconnecter la carte de son câble et la retirer de l'ordinateur. 5 Pour remettre la carte en place, connectez la carte au câble. 6 Puis, insérez-la avec précaution dans le porte-carte et introduisez ce dernier dans le compartiment. 7 Remettez la vis de fixation du porte-carte en place. 1 vis 2 porte-carte 3 carte 4 connecteur de carte 1 4 3 2132 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pile bouton Retrait de la pile bouton PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer les procédures suivantes, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple, le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retirez le cache de la charnière (reportez-vous à la page 127). 3 Retirez le clavier (reportez-vous à la page 129). 4 À l'aide d'une pointe en plastique, soulevez la pile afin de l'extraire de la carte système. Remise en place de la pile bouton Lorsque vous remettez la pile bouton en place, insérez-la dans le support circulaire avec le côté positif vers le haut, et enfoncez-la doucement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit bien en place. 1 pile bouton 1Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet 133 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet REMARQUE : Cette fonction peut ne pas être disponible sur votre ordinateur. Dell™ QuickSet vous permet de configurer et d'afficher facilement les paramètres suivants : • Connectivité réseau • Gestion de l'alimentation • Écran • Informations système En fonction de ce que vous souhaitez faire dans Dell™ QuickSet, vous pouvez lancer cette application en cliquant, en double-cliquant ou en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet, , dans la barre des tâches de Microsoft® Windows®. La barre des tâches se trouve dans le coin inférieur droit de votre écran. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet et sélectionnez Aide.134 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSetVoyager avec votre ordinateur 135 Voyager avec votre ordinateur Identification de l'ordinateur • Attachez une étiquette avec votre nom ou votre carte de visite à votre ordinateur. • Notez votre numéro de service et gardez-le en lieu sûr, dans un endroit autre que près de l'ordinateur ou de la sacoche de transport. • Utilisez votre numéro de service si vous devez reporter la perte ou le vol de votre ordinateur à la police et à Dell. • Créez un fichier sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows® et nommez-le si_trouvé. Placez dans ce fichier des informations, telles que vos nom, adresse et numéro de téléphone. • Contactez votre compagnie de carte de crédit et demandez-lui si elle offre des étiquettes avec identification codée. Emballage de l'ordinateur • Retirez tous les périphériques externes connectés à l'ordinateur et stockez-les en lieu sûr. Débranchez tous les câbles reliés aux cartes PC installées et retirez les cartes PC étendues (« Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65). • Pour alléger l'ordinateur autant que possible, remplacez les périphériques installés dans la baie modulaire par le module de voyage Dell TravelLite™. • Chargez complètement la batterie principale et toutes les batteries de secours que vous pensez emporter. • Éteignez l'ordinateur. • Débranchez l'adaptateur secteur. AVIS : Lorsque vous fermez l'écran, les objets laissés sur le clavier ou le repose-mains risquent d'endommager l'écran. • Retirez tous objets du clavier et du repose-mains, comme les trombones, les stylos et les papiers, puis fermez l'écran. • Utilisez la sacoche de transport Dell™ (en option) pour emballer l'ordinateur et ses accessoires en toute sécurité. • Évitez d'emballer l'ordinateur avec des articles tels que crème à raser, eau de Cologne, parfum ou nourriture.136 Voyager avec votre ordinateur AVIS : Si l'ordinateur a été exposé à des températures extrêmes, laissez-le s'acclimater pendant une heure à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. • Protégez l'ordinateur, les batteries et le disque dur contre des risques tels que les températures extrêmes, la surexposition à la lumière, la saleté, la poussière ou les liquides. • Calez bien l'ordinateur afin d'éviter qu'il ne se déplace dans le coffre de votre voiture ou dans un compartiment à bagages situé en hauteur. Conseils de voyage AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lorsque vous utilisez le lecteur optique. AVIS : N'enregistrez pas votre ordinateur avec vos bagages. • Pensez à désactiver l'activité réseau sans fil sur votre ordinateur afin d'optimiser l'autonomie de la batterie. Pour désactiver l'activité sans fil, appuyez sur . • Pensez à modifier vos options de gestion de l'alimentation (reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41) afin d'optimiser l'autonomie de la batterie. • Si vous voyagez à l'étranger, emmenez une preuve de propriété ou de votre droit à utiliser l'ordinateur s'il appartient à votre société pour accélérer le passage de la douane. Cherchez des informations auprès des autorités douanières des pays que vous pensez visiter et envisagez d'acquérir un carnet international (appelé également passeport de marchandises) auprès de votre gouvernement. • Renseignez-vous sur le type de prises secteur utilisées dans les pays où vous vous rendez et munissezvous des adaptateurs appropriés. • Les détenteurs de cartes de crédit doivent se renseigner auprès de leur compagnie de crédit au sujet de l'assistance en cas d'urgence à l'étranger proposée aux utilisateurs d'ordinateurs portables. Transport aérien AVIS : Ne faites jamais passer votre ordinateur dans un détecteur de métal. Vous pouvez faire passer l'ordinateur dans un détecteur à rayons X ou le faire inspecter manuellement. • Assurez-vous d'avoir une batterie chargée sous la main au cas où l'on vous demanderait d'allumer l'ordinateur. • Avant de pénétrer dans l'avion, assurez-vous que l'utilisation d'un ordinateur est permise. Certaines compagnies aériennes interdisent l'usage d'appareils électroniques pendant le vol. Toutes les compagnies aériennes interdisent l'usage de tels dispositifs pendant les phases de décollage et d'atterrissage.Contacter Dell 137 Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell par voie électronique, par l'intermédiaire des sites Web suivants : • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (support) Pour les adresses Internet de votre pays, recherchez la section appropriée du pays dans le tableau cidessous. REMARQUE : Les numéros verts sont valables dans le pays pour lequel ils sont renseignés. REMARQUE : Dans certains pays, le support spécifique aux ordinateurs Dell XPS™ est disponible via un numéro de téléphone différent, répertorié pour les pays participants. Si vous ne trouvez pas de numéro de téléphone répertorié spécifique aux ordinateurs XPS, contactez le service de support de Dell, au numéro indiqué, et l'on fera suivre votre appel de manière appropriée. Si vous devez contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les indicatifs fournis dans le tableau ci-dessous. Si vous avez besoin d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un opérateur local ou international. REMARQUE : Les coordonnées fournies étaient correctes au jour d'impression de ce document et sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_za_support@dell.com File d'attente Gold 011 709 7713 Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clientèle 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700138 Contacter Dell Allemagne (Francfort) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif de la ville : 69 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique pour XPS 069 9792 7222 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 069 9792-7200 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0180-5-224400 Service clientèle segment International 069 9792-7320 Service clientèle comptes privilégiés 069 9792-7320 Service clientèle grands comptes 069 9792-7320 Service clientèle comptes publics 069 9792-7320 Standard 069 9792-7000 Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4093 Service clientèle (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Fax (Support technique et Service clientèle) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Fax pour les ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728-3772 Anguilla Site Web : www.dell.com.ai E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua-et-Barbuda Site Web : www.dell.com.ag E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-805-5924 Antilles Néerlandaises E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 001-800-882-1519 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 139 Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com E-mail pour ordinateurs de bureau et portables : la-techsupport@dell.com E-mail pour serveurs et produits de stockage EMC® : la_enterprise@dell.com Service clientèle numéro vert : 0-800-444-0730 Support technique numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Services de support technique numéro vert : 0-800-444-0724 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Aruba Site Web : www.dell.com.aw E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 800-1578 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international : 0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : support.ap.dell.com/contactus Support technique général 13DELL-133355 Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international : 900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux grand public et PME 0820 240 530 00 Fax pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 49 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support technique de XPS 0820 240 530 81 Support aux grand public et PME pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 0820 240 530 17 Support Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 17 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Site Web : www.dell.com.bs E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts140 Contacter Dell Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 02 481 92 96 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 02 481 92 88 Télécopieur pour support technique 02 481 92 95 Service clientèle 02 713 15 65 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Site Web : www.dell.com/bm E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-890-0751 Bolivie Site Web : www.dell.com/bo E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif de la ville : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support clients, support technique 0800 90 3355 Fax du support technique 51 3481 5470 Fax du Service clientèle 51 3481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4888 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 141 Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international : 011 État des commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (Support matériel et garantie automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clientèle (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Service clientèle (imprimantes, projecteurs, téléviseurs, ordinateurs de poche, jukebox numériques et ordinateurs sans fil) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support garantie de matériel (ventes au grand public/PME) numéro vert : 1-800-906-3355 Support garantie de matériel (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Support garantie de matériel (imprimantes, projecteurs, téléviseurs, ordinateurs de poche, jukebox numériques et ordinateurs sans fil) 1-877-335-5767 Ventes aux grand public et PME numéro vert : 1-800-387-5752 Ventes (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Vente de pièces et Vente de service étendu 1866 440 3355 Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : www.dell.com/cl E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Ventes et support clients numéro vert : 1230-020-4823 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts142 Contacter Dell Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Indicatif de la ville : 592 Site Web du Support technique : support.dell.com.cn E-mail (Support technique) : cn_support@dell.com E-mail du Service clientèle : customer_cn@dell.com Fax du support technique 592 818 1350 Support technique (Dell™ Dimension™ et Inspiron) numéro vert : 800 858 2968 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) numéro vert : 800 858 0950 Support technique (serveurs et stockage) numéro vert : 800 858 0960 Support technique (projecteurs, PDA, commutateurs, routeurs, etc.) numéro vert : 800 858 2920 Support technique (imprimantes) numéro vert : 800 858 2311 Service clientèle numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Fax du Service clientèle 592 818 1308 Grand public et PME numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2557 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grandes entreprises - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et éducation - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et éducation - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Équipe File d'attente des comptes grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2572 Comptes grandes entreprises - Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises - Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises Pièces détachées numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Site Web : www.dell.com/cl E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 01-800-915-4755 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 143 Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif de la ville : 2 E-mail : krsupport@dell.com Support technique numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Support (Dimension, PDA, Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 080-200-3801 Ventes numéro vert : 080-200-3600 Fax 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Costa Rica Site Web : www.dell.com/cr E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 0800-012-0231 Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 7010 0074 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 7023 0182 Service clientèle (relations) 7023 0184 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard Fax (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (grand public et PME) 3287 5000 Fax (grand public et PME) 3287 5001 Dominique Site Web : www.dell.com/dm E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 Équateur Site Web : www.dell.com/ec E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général (appel de Quito) numéro vert : 999-119-877-655-3355 Support technique général (appel de Guayaquil) numéro vert : 1800-999-119-877-655-3355 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts144 Contacter Dell Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif de la ville : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 115 236 Standard 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 145 États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Support matériel et garantie (téléviseurs, imprimantes et projecteurs Dell) pour la clientèle relationnelle numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Support des produits SPS destinés aux clients américains numéro vert : 1-800-232-8544 Support consommateur (Activités à domicile et activités professionnelles à domicile) pour tous les autres produits Dell numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Secteur privé Support et Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support pour imprimantes, projecteurs, PDA et lecteurs MP3 numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (gouvernement, enseignement et services de la santé) Support et Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355 ou numéro vert : 1-800-879-3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de pièces au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Fax numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes d'élocution numéro vert : 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts146 Contacter Dell Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international : 990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif de la ville : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : fi_support@dell.com Support technique 0207 533 555 Service clientèle 0207 533 538 Standard 0207 533 533 Ventes (moins de 500 employés) 0207 533 540 Fax 0207 533 530 Ventes (plus de 500 employés) 0207 533 533 Fax 0207 533 530 France (Paris) (Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs de la ville : (1) (4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique pour XPS 0825 387 129 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 0825 387 270 Service clientèle 0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventes 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clientèle 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 00800-44 14 95 18 Support technique Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83 Standard 2108129810 Standard Gold Service 2108129811 Ventes 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Grenade E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 147 Guatemala E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-999-0136 Guyane E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Hong Kong Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail (Support technique) : HK_support@Dell.com Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) 2969 3188 Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) 2969 3191 Support technique (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ et PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Service clientèle 3416 0910 Comptes grandes entreprises 3416 0907 Programmes clients internationaux 3416 0908 Division des moyennes entreprises 3416 0912 Division du grand public et des PME 2969 3105 Îles Caïmans E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-262-5415 Îles Turks et Caicos Site Web : www.dell.com/tc E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4735 Îles Vierges Britanniques Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Îles Vierges (États-Unis) E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-702-4288 Inde E-mail : india_support_desktop@dell.com india_support_notebook@dell.com india_support_Server@dell.com Support technique 1600338045 et 1600448046 Ventes (Comptes grandes entreprises) 1600 33 8044 Ventes (Grand public et PME) 1600 33 8046 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts148 Contacter Dell Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Ventes Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Dell Outlet 1850 200 778 Support de commande en ligne 1850 200 778 Service clientèle Service clientèle pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 1850 200 982 Support technique Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs XPS 1850 200 722 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 1850 543 543 Généralités Fax des relations ventes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Service clientèle pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au RoyaumeUni uniquement) 0870 907 4000 Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif de la ville : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 149 Jamaïque E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-440-9205 Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif de la ville : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension et Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 0120-198-433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Support technique (PDA, projecteurs, imprimantes, routeurs) numéro vert : 0120-981-690 Support technique en dehors du Japon (PDA, projecteurs, imprimantes, routeurs) 81-44-556-3468 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 heures sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clientèle 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux entreprises (jusqu'à 400 employés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux Comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 employés) 044-556-3433 Ventes secteur public (agences gouvernementales, établissements d'enseignement et institutions médicales) 044-556-5963 Segment International - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 La Barbade Site Web : www.dell.com/bb E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-534-3142 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts150 Contacter Dell Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 342 08 08 075 Ventes aux grand public et PME +32 (0)2 713 15 96 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 26 25 77 81 Service clientèle +32 (0)2 481 91 19 Fax 26 25 77 82 Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 105 Service clientèle (Xiamen, Chine) 34 160 910 Ventes aux particuliers (Xiamen, Chine) 29 693 115 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif de la ville : 4 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 1 800 880 193 Support technique (Dimension, Inspiron et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 1 800 881 306 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 881 386 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1800 881 306 (option 6) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 52 E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clientèle 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Groupe principal 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 001-800-220-1377 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 151 Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 815 35 043 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 671 16882 Suivi clientèle 671 17575 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard Fax 671 16865 Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : support.ap.dell.com/contactus Support technique général 0800 441 567 Panama E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 011-800-507-1264 Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif de la ville : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 020 674 45 94 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 020 674 45 00 Fax du support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 020 674 42 00 Suivi clientèle 020 674 4325 Ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Fax des ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 47 75 Fax des relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Fax du standard 020 674 47 50 Pays du Pacifique et du Sud-est Asiatique Support technique, service clientèle et ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Pérou E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 0800-50-669 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts152 Contacter Dell Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : pl_support_tech@dell.com Service clientèle (téléphone) 57 95 700 Service clientèle 57 95 999 Ventes 57 95 999 Service clientèle (Fax) 57 95 806 Réception (Fax) 57 95 998 Standard 57 95 999 Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 707200149 Service clientèle 800 300 413 Ventes 800 300 410 ou 800 300 411 ou 800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 Porto Rico E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-537-3355 République Dominicaine Site Web : www.dell.com/do E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-156-1588 République Tchèque (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 22537 2727 Service clientèle 22537 2707 Fax 22537 2714 Télécopieur pour support technique 22537 2728 Standard 22537 2711 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 153 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif de la ville : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Site Web du Service clientèle : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/form/home.asp Ventes Ventes aux grand public et PME 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux grandes entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Service clientèle Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clientèle pour les comptes privilégiés (500–5000 employés) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle Comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clientèle Gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clientèle Administration locale et Enseignement 01344 373 199 Service clientèle (Santé) 01344 373 194 Support technique Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs XPS 0870 366 4180 Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de 1000 employés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique pour tous les autres produits 0870 353 0800 Généralités Fax pour le grand public et les PME 0870 907 4006 Salvador Site Web : www.dell.com/ec E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 800-6132 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts154 Contacter Dell Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international : 005 Indicatif national : 65 REMARQUE : Les numéros de téléphone mentionnés ici doivent être utilisés depuis Singapour ou la Malaisie uniquement. Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (Dimension, Inspiron et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 1 800 394 7430 Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) numéro vert : 1 800 394 7488 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1 800 394 7478 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1 800 394 7430 (option 6) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 394 7412 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 394 7419 Slovaquie (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 421 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02 5441 5727 Service clientèle 420 22537 2707 Fax 02 5441 8328 Fax du Support technique 02 5441 8328 Standard (Ventes) 02 5441 7585 St- Kitts-et-Nevis Site Web : www.dell.com/kn E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 St- Lucie Site Web : www.dell.com/lc E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-882-1521 St- Vincent-et-les Grenadines Site Web : www.dell.com/vc E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4740 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 155 Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif de la ville : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 0771 340 340 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 08 590 05 199 Suivi clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 020 140 14 44 Fax du support technique 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Support technique pour XPS 0848 33 88 57 Support technique (grand public et PME) pour tous les autres produits Dell 0844 811 411 Support technique (entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) 0848 802 202 Service clientèle (entreprises) 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01 Taïwan Indicatif international : 002 Indicatif national : 886 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron, Dimension et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 00801 60 1256 Service clientèle numéro vert : 00801 60 1250 (option 5) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 00801 65 1228 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 00801 651 227 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts156 Contacter Dell Thaïlande Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 66 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) numéro vert : 1800 0060 07 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 0600 09 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1800 006 007 (option 7) Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1800 006 009 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1800 006 006 Trinité/Tobago Site Web : www.dell.com/tt E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Site Web : www.dell.com/uy E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Site Web : www.dell.com/ve E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 0800-100-4752 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsCaractéristiques 157 Caractéristiques Processeur Type de processeur Processeur Intel® Core™ Solo ou processeur Intel® Core™ Duo Mémoire cache L1 I-cache de 32 Ko x2 D-cache de 32 Ko x2 Mémoire cache L2 2 Mo Fréquence du bus externe (bus frontal) 533 MHz et 667 MHz Informations sur le système Jeu de puces du système Mobile Intel 945 GM Express Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM Bus bicanal (2) 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresses du processeur 32 bits Flash EPROM 1 Mo Bus graphique Interne Bus PCI 32 bits Carte ExpressCard REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard est conçu uniquement pour les cartes ExpressCard. Il ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. Contrôleur de la carte ExpressCard Intel ICH7M Connecteur de la carte ExpressCard Un logement ExpressCard (54 mm) Cartes prises en charge Carte ExpressCard/34 (34 mm) et carte ExpressCard/54 (54 mm) 1,5 et 3,3 V Taille du connecteur de la carte ExpressCard 28 broches158 Caractéristiques Lecteur de carte multimédia 5 en 1 Contrôleur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Ricoh R5C832 Connecteur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Connecteur de la carte combinée 5 en 1 Cartes prises en charge MS MS Pro SD/SDIO MMC xD CF type I/II et IBM® Microdrive via une carte ExpressCard Taille du connecteur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 36,8 x 29,3 x 4,75 mm Mémoire Connecteur du module de mémoire Deux connecteurs SODIMM Capacités du module de mémoire 256 Mo, 512 Mo, 1 Go et 2 Go Type de mémoire DDR2 SODIMM 1,8 V Mémoire minimale 256 Mo Mémoire maximale 2 Go Ports et connecteurs Audio Connecteur de microphone, connecteur de casque/haut-parleurs stéréo IEEE 1394a Connecteur série à 4 broches Carte Mini Un emplacement de carte Mini type IIIA Modem Port RJ-11 Carte réseau Port RJ-45 Connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo Connecteur mini-DIN à 7 broches (adaptateur S-vidéo/composite) USB Quatre connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme USB 2.0 Vidéo Connecteur à 15 trousCaractéristiques 159 Communications Modem : Type v.92 56K MDC Contrôleur Softmodem Interface Bus HDA interne Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100 sur la carte système Sans fil Prise en charge des cartes Mini internes Wi-Fi et de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® Vidéo Type de vidéo : Carte intégrée Contrôleur vidéo Intel® GMA950 Mémoire vidéo Jusqu'à 224 Mo partagés si la mémoire totale de l'ordinateur est de 512 Mo minimum, jusqu'à 128 Mo partagés si la mémoire totale de l'ordinateur est de 256 Mo Interface LCD LVDS Prise en charge TV NTSC/PAL Audio Type d'audio Bus HDA (High Definition Audio) Contrôleur audio Sigmatel STAC9200 Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interfaces : Interne Bus HDA Externe Connecteur de microphone (entrée), connecteur de casque/de haut-parleurs stéréo Haut-parleur Deux haut-parleurs 4 ohms Amplificateur de haut-parleur interne Canal de 1 W en 4 ohms Contrôle du volume Raccourcis clavier, menus de programme, boutons de commande multimédia160 Caractéristiques Écran Type (matrice active TFT) 14,1 pouces WXGA et 14,1 pouces WXGA+ Dimensions : Hauteur 206 mm (8,11 pouces) Largeur 320 mm (12,59 pouces) Diagonale 357,74 mm (14,1 pouces) Résolutions maximales : WXGA WXGA+ 1280 sur 800 avec 262 144 couleurs 1440 sur 900 avec 262 144 couleurs Taux de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angle de fonctionnement 0° (fermé) à 180 ° Angles de visualisation : Horizontal ±40 ° (WXGA) en général Vertical +15°/–30 ° (WXGA) Taille du pixel : WXGA WXGA+ 0,237 mm 0,211 mm Boutons de réglage Possibilité de réglage de la luminosité à l'aide de raccourcis clavier Clavier Nombre de touches 87 (États-Unis et Canada) ; 88 (Europe) ; 91 (Japon) Disposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tablette tactile Résolution X/Y (mode Tablette graphique) 240 cpi Taille : Largeur Zone sensible de 73 mm (2,9 pouces) Hauteur Rectangle de 42,9 mm (1,7 pouce)Caractéristiques 161 Batterie Type lithium ion « intelligente » 6 cellules lithium ion « intelligente » 9 cellules Dimensions : Profondeur 49 mm (1,93 pouce) (6 cellules) 60,1 mm (2,37 pouces) (9 cellules) Hauteur 24 mm (0,94 pouce) Largeur 206,8 mm (8,14 pouces) Poids 0,32 kg (0,7 livres) (6 cellules) 0,48 kg (1,06 livres) (9 cellules) Tension 11,1 VCC Durée approximative de la charge : Ordinateur éteint 2 heures (6 cellules) 3 heures (9 cellules) Durée de fonctionnement L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l'utilisation et peut être considérablement réduite en cas d'utilisation intensive. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes d'alimentation » à la page 97. Pour plus d'informations sur la durée de vie de la batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37. Durée de service approximative 500 cycles de décharge/charge Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 ° à 35 °C (32 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Pile bouton CR-2032162 Caractéristiques Adaptateur secteur Tension d'entrée 90 à 264 VCA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,5 A Fréquence d'entrée 47 à 63 Hz Courant de sortie 4,34 A (maximum à impulsion 4 secondes) ; 3,34 A (continu) Alimentation de sortie 65 W Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 +/–1,0 VCC Dimensions : Hauteur 28,2 mm (1,11 pouce) Largeur 57,9 mm (2,28 pouces) Profondeur 137,2 mm (5,4 pouces) Poids (avec les câbles) 0,4 kg (0,9 livre) Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 ° à 35 °C (32 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 38,6 mm (1,52 pouce) Largeur 330 mm (12,99 pouces) Profondeur 243 mm (9,56 pouces) Poids (avec batterie 6 cellules, lecteur combiné CD-RW/DVD et disque dur de 40 Go) : Configurable jusqu'à moins de 2,5 kg (5,5 livres)Caractéristiques 163 Environnement de fonctionnement Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 ° à 35 °C (32 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) : Fonctionnement 10 à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration maximale (avec un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement utilisateur) : Fonctionnement 0,66 GRMS Stockage 1,3 GRMS Chocs maximaux (mesurés avec le disque dur en état de marche et une demi-impulsion sinusoïdale de 2 ms en fonctionnement. Également mesurés avec le disque dur en position de repos et une demi-impulsion de 2 ms en stockage) : Fonctionnement 142 G Stockage 163 G Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)164 CaractéristiquesAnnexe 165 Annexe Utilisation du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Il se peut que votre système d'exploitation configure automatiquement la plupart des options disponibles dans le programme de configuration ; les options que vous avez configurées à l'aide de ce programme sont alors ignorées. Seule exception, l'option External Hot Key (Touche rapide externe), que vous pouvez désactiver ou activer via le programme de configuration du système uniquement. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des fonctions de votre système d'exploitation, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14. Les écrans de configuration du système affichent les informations sur la configuration courante et les paramètres de votre ordinateur, par exemple : • Configuration du système • Paramètres de configuration de base des périphériques • Paramètres de sécurité du système et mot de passe de disque dur • Paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation • Paramètres de configuration d'amorçage (démarrage) et d'affichage • Paramètres de la station d'accueil • Paramètres de contrôle sans fil AVIS : Ne modifiez les paramètres du programme de configuration du système que si vous êtes un utilisateur expérimenté en informatique ou si vous êtes assisté par un représentant du support technique de Dell. Certaines modifications risquent de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Affichage de l'écran de configuration du système 1 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. Programme de configuration du système L'écran de configuration du système se compose de trois fenêtres d'information. La fenêtre de gauche contient une hiérarchie développable des catégories de contrôle. Si vous sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) une catégorie (comme Système, Périphériques intégrés ou Vidéo) et que vous appuyez sur , vous pouvez afficher ou masquer les sous-catégories connexes. La fenêtre de droite contient des informations sur la catégorie ou sous-catégorie sélectionnée dans la fenêtre de gauche. 166 Annexe La fenêtre du bas vous indique comment contrôler les fonctions des touches du programme de configuration du système. Utilisez ces touches pour sélectionner une catégorie, modifier les paramètres, ou quitter le programme de configuration du système. Options fréquemment utilisées Certaines options nécessitent le redémarrage de l'ordinateur pour que les nouveaux paramètres entrent en vigueur. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage La séquence d'amorçage, ou ordre de démarrage, indique à l'ordinateur où chercher pour trouver le logiciel requis pour démarrer le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez contrôler la séquence d'amorçage et activer/désactiver les périphériques à l'aide de la page Ordre d'amorçage du programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour modifier la séquence d'amorçage sur une base ponctuelle, reportez-vous à la section « Exécution d'un amorçage ponctuel » à la page 167. Cette page affiche la liste générale des périphériques amorçables pouvant être installés sur l'ordinateur, notamment les suivants : • Lecteur de disquette • Unité de disque dur interne • Périphérique de stockage USB • Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW • Disque dur de la baie modulaire REMARQUE : Seuls sont amorçables les périphériques précédés d'un numéro. Pendant la procédure d'amorçage, l'ordinateur commence par le début de la liste, puis analyse chacun des périphériques activés à la recherche des fichiers de démarrage du système d'exploitation. Lorsque les fichiers ont été trouvés, l'ordinateur arrête la recherche et fait démarrer le système d'exploitation. Pour définir les périphériques d'amorçage, sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) un périphérique en appuyant sur les touches fléchées haut ou bas, puis activez ou désactivez le périphérique ou modifiez son ordre dans la liste. • Pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur la barre d'espacement. Les éléments activés sont précédés d'un numéro ; ceux qui ne le sont pas ne sont pas précédés d'un numéro. • Pour modifier l'ordre d'un périphérique dans la liste, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur (h) ou (b) pour déplacer le périphérique vers le haut ou le bas. Les modifications que vous apportez à la séquence d'amorçage sont prises en compte dès que vous les enregistrez et que vous quittez le programme de configuration du système.Annexe 167 Exécution d'un amorçage ponctuel Vous pouvez définir une séquence d'amorçage ponctuelle sans devoir passer par le programme de configuration du système. (Vous pouvez également utiliser cette procédure pour initialiser Dell Diagnostics sur la partition de l'utilitaire de diagnostics de votre disque dur.) 1 Arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer. 2 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 4 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage apparaît, sélectionnez celui que vous voulez utiliser pour l'amorçage, puis appuyez sur . L'ordinateur démarre à partir du périphérique sélectionné. Au prochain redémarrage de l'ordinateur, l'ordre d'amorçage précédent sera restauré. Nettoyage de votre ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Ordinateur, clavier et écran PRÉCAUTION : Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Retirez toute batterie installée. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un chiffon doux humecté d'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. • Utilisez une bouteille d'air comprimé pour retirer la poussière entre les touches du clavier, ainsi que les dépôts de poussière sur l'écran. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur ou l'écran, ne vaporisez pas de liquide de nettoyage directement sur l'écran. Utilisez uniquement les produits conçus particulièrement pour le nettoyage d'écrans et suivez les instructions fournies avec le produit. • Utilisez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, humecté d'eau ou un nettoyant d'écran. N'utilisez pas d'alcool ni de nettoyant à base d'ammoniac. Essuyez l'écran doucement du centre vers les bords jusqu'à ce qu'il soit propre et exempt de traces de doigt. Veillez à ne pas trop appuyer sur l'écran. • Humectez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, d'eau et essuyez l'ordinateur et le clavier. Veillez à ne pas laisser l'eau du chiffon s'infiltrer entre la tablette tactile et le repose-mains qui l'entoure. Tablette tactile 1 Arrêtez l'ordinateur et mettez-le hors tension. Reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 111. 2 Débranchez les périphériques de l'ordinateur et des prises secteur.168 Annexe 3 Retirez toute batterie installée. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37. 4 Humectez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, d'eau et passez-le doucement sur la surface de la tablette tactile. Veillez à ne pas laisser l'eau du chiffon s'infiltrer entre la tablette tactile et le repose-mains qui l'entoure. Lecteur de disquette AVIS : N'essayez pas de nettoyer les têtes de lecture avec une tige de nettoyage. Vous risqueriez de déranger accidentellement l'alignement des têtes et d'empêcher le fonctionnement du lecteur. Nettoyez le lecteur de disquette à l'aide d'une trousse de nettoyage que vous trouverez dans le commerce. Ces trousses comportent des disquettes prétraitées qui permettent d'enlever les dépôts accumulés au cours d'une utilisation normale. CD et DVD AVIS : Utilisez toujours de l'air comprimé pour nettoyer la lentille du lecteur et suivez les instructions fournies avec l'air comprimé. Ne touchez jamais la lentille qui se trouve à l'intérieur du lecteur. Si vous avez des problèmes pendant la lecture de vos CD ou DVD (des sauts pendant la lecture par exemple), nettoyez les disques. 1 Tenez le disque par son bord extérieur. Vous pouvez également toucher le bord intérieur de l'orifice central. AVIS : Pour éviter d'abîmer la surface, n'essuyez pas le disque par mouvement circulaire. 2 Avec un chiffon doux et non pelucheux, nettoyez doucement la partie inférieure du disque (côté sans étiquette) en suivant une ligne droite depuis le centre jusqu'au bord extérieur. Si la poussière ne part pas, utilisez de l'eau ou une solution diluée d'eau et de savon doux. Certains produits vendus dans le commerce nettoient les disques et les protègent contre la poussière, les empreintes et les rayures. Les produits de nettoyage pour CD peuvent également être utilisés sur les DVD sans aucun risque. Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) Le support technique fourni par les techniciens nécessite la coopération et la participation du client dans le processus de dépannage et permet de restaurer le système d'exploitation, les logiciels et les pilotes matériels à leur configuration par défaut telle que livrée par Dell ; il permet en outre de vérifier le fonctionnement approprié de l'ordinateur et de tout le matériel installé par Dell. En plus du support technique par nos techniciens, vous disposez d'une aide en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com. Des options payantes de support technique complémentaire sont également disponibles.Annexe 169 Dell offre un support technique limité pour l'ordinateur et tous les logiciels et périphériques1 installés par Dell. Le support technique pour les logiciels et les périphériques tiers est assuré par le fabricant luimême, y compris le support pour tout logiciel ou périphérique acheté et/ou installé par le biais de Dell Software & Peripherals, Readyware et Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Les services de réparation sont fournis selon les termes et les conditions stipulés par votre garantie limitée et par tout contrat de service de support optionnel acheté avec l'ordinateur. 2 Tous les composants Dell standard inclus dans un projet d'intégration personnalisée en usine (Custom Factory Integration - CFI) sont couverts par la garantie limitée standard de Dell applicable à votre ordinateur. Toutefois, Dell propose un programme de remplacement des pièces pour couvrir tous les composants non standard ou de sociétés tierces intégrés via CFI pendant la durée du contrat de service de l’ordinateur. Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell Les logiciels installés par Dell englobent le système d'exploitation et certains logiciels installés sur l'ordinateur pendant le processus de fabrication (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus et ainsi de suite). L'expression « périphériques installés par Dell » recouvre toute carte d'extension interne, ou baie modulaire de marque Dell ou encore tous les accessoires ExpressCard. Sont inclus également les produits de marque Dell suivants : moniteurs, claviers, souris, haut-parleurs, microphones pour modems à fonction téléphonique, stations d'accueil et réplicateurs de port, produits réseau et le câblage associé. Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers Les logiciels et périphériques tiers incluent tout périphérique, accessoire ou logiciel vendu par Dell mais qui ne porte pas la marque Dell (imprimantes, scanners et appareils photo, jeux et ainsi de suite). Le support technique pour tout logiciel ou périphérique tiers est fourni par le fabricant du produit en question. Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Classe B de la FCC Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie de fréquence radio et peut, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions du guide du fabricant, être la cause de perturbations des réceptions radio et télévision. Cet équipement a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites des appareils numériques de classe B définies à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Ce périphérique est conforme à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : • Cet appareil ne doit pas émettre d'interférences nuisibles. • Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences qu'il reçoit, y compris celles qui peuvent perturber son fonctionnement. AVIS : Les réglementations de la FCC prévoient que les changements ou modifications non explicitement approuvés par Dell Inc. peuvent annuler vos droits à utiliser cet équipement. 170 Annexe Ces limites ont été conçues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans un milieu résidentiel. Cependant, la possibilité d'interférence d'une installation particulière n'est pas entièrement exclue. Si cet équipement crée effectivement des interférences nuisibles avec la réception radio et télévision, ce qui peut être déterminé en allumant et en éteignant l'équipement, vous êtes encouragé à essayer de corriger les interférences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Repositionner le système en fonction du récepteur. • Éloigner le système du récepteur. • Brancher le système sur une autre prise, pour faire en sorte que le système et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation. Si nécessaire, consultez un représentant de Dell Inc. ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur le ou les appareil(s) couvert(s) dans ce document conformément aux réglementations de la FCC : Caractéristiques Macrovision Ce produit intègre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protégée par des brevets américains et d'autres droits de propriété intellectuelle. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur est soumise à l'autorisation de Macrovision ; elle est destinée exclusivement à une utilisation domestique et à des opérations limitées de visualisation, sauf autorisation particulière de Macrovision. L'ingénierie inverse et le désassemblage sont interdits. Nom du produit : Dell™ Inspiron™ 640M/ E1405 Numéro de modèle : PP19L Nom de la société : Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400Glossaire 171 Glossaire Les termes répertoriés dans ce glossaire ne sont fournis qu'à titre informatif et ne décrivent pas obligatoirement les fonctions incluses avec votre ordinateur particulier. A ACPI — Advanced Configuration and Power Interface — Spécification de gestion de l'alimentation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® de placer l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée afin de conserver l'énergie électrique attribuée à chaque périphérique connecté à l'ordinateur. adressage de mémoire — Processus permettant à l'ordinateur d'attribuer des adresses mémoire à des emplacements physiques au démarrage. Les périphériques et les logiciels peuvent ensuite déterminer les informations auxquelles le microprocesseur peut accéder. adresse E/S — Adresse RAM associée à un périphérique spécifique (un connecteur série, un connecteur parallèle ou une baie d'extension) et qui permet au microprocesseur de communiquer avec ce périphérique. adresse mémoire — Emplacement spécifique où les données sont stockées temporairement dans la mémoire RAM. AGP — Accelerated Graphics Port — Port graphique dédié allouant de la mémoire système à utiliser pour les tâches liées à la vidéo. Le port AGP permet d'obtenir une image vidéo de haute qualité avec des couleurs fidèles grâce à une interface très rapide entre le circuit vidéo et la mémoire de l'ordinateur. ALS — Capteur d'éclairage ambiant. APR — Advanced Port Replicator — Station d'accueil qui permet d'utiliser aisément un moniteur externe, un clavier, une souris ou d'autres périphériques avec l'ordinateur portable. arrêt — Processus consistant à fermer les fenêtres et les programmes, à quitter le système d'exploitation et à éteindre l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez perdre des données si vous éteignez l'ordinateur sans effectuer la procédure d'arrêt. ASF — Alert Standards Format — Standard permettant de définir un mécanisme pour signaler les alertes matérielles et logicielles à une console de gestion. La norme ASF est conçue pour être indépendante des platesformes et des systèmes d'exploitation. autonomie de la batterie — Nombre de minutes ou d'heures durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut alimenter l'ordinateur. B baie modulaire — Logement qui prend en charge des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur optique, une seconde batterie ou un module TravelLite™ de Dell. barre d'état système — La barre d'état système du bureau Windows contient des icônes permettant d'accéder rapidement aux programmes et aux fonctions de l'ordinateur, notamment à l'horloge, au contrôle du volume et à l'état de l'imprimante. Appelée également Zone de notification. batterie — Source d'énergie interne rechargeable qui permet d'alimenter des ordinateurs portables lorsqu'ils ne sont pas raccordés à un adaptateur secteur et une prise secteur. BIOS — Basic Input/Output System — Programme (ou utilitaire) qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun d'eux sur l'ordinateur. Appelé également programme de configuration du système. bit — L'unité de donnée la plus petite pouvant être interprétée par l'ordinateur.172 Glossaire bps — Bits per second (bits par seconde) — Unité standard de mesure de la vitesse de transmission de données. BTU — British Thermal Unit (unité thermique britannique) — Mesure de sortie de chaleur. bus — Passerelle pour les communications entre les composants de votre ordinateur. bus local — Bus de données permettant une transmission rapide des données entre les périphériques et le microprocesseur. C C — Celsius — Système de mesure des températures où 0 ° est le point de congélation et 100 ° le point d'ébullition de l'eau. CA— Courant alternatif — Forme d'électricité qui alimente votre ordinateur lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur secteur sur une prise électrique. capteur infrarouge — Port permettant de transférer des données entre l'ordinateur et des périphériques compatibles infrarouge sans utiliser de connexion câblée. carnet — Document international des douanes qui facilite les importations temporaires dans les pays étrangers. Appelé également passeport de marchandises. carte à puce — Carte qui incorpore un microprocesseur et une puce mémoire. Les cartes à puce permettent d'identifier un utilisateur sur des ordinateurs équipés de telles cartes. carte d'extension — Carte installée dans un logement d'extension sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs et qui permet d'augmenter les capacités de l'ordinateur. Il peut s'agir d'une carte vidéo, modem ou son. carte ExpressCard — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des cartes ExpressCard courantes. Les cartes ExpressCard prennent en charge les standards PCI Express et USB 2.0. carte PC — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des cartes PC courantes. carte PC étendue — Carte PC qui dépasse du logement de carte PC lorsqu'elle est installée. carte réseau — Puce qui offre des fonctions réseau. Un ordinateur peut comprendre une carte réseau sur sa carte système ou il peut contenir une carte PC sur laquelle se trouve un adaptateur intégré. Une carte réseau est aussi appelée NIC (Network Interface Controller [contrôleur d'interface réseau]). carte système — Carte à circuit imprimé principale de votre ordinateur. Appelée également carte mère. CD — Compact Disc — Support de stockage optique, souvent utilisé pour les logiciels et les programmes audio. CD amorçable — CD pouvant être utilisé pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. Le CD Drivers and Utilities ou ResourceCD est un CD amorçable. CD-R — CD Recordable — Version enregistrable d'un CD. Des données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un CD enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. CD-RW — CD ReWritable — Version réinscriptible d'un CD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un CD-RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. COA — Certificate of Authenticity (certificat d'authenticité) — Code alphanumérique Windows inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur. Appelé également Product Key (Clé de produit) ou Product ID (Identification produit). code de service express — Code numérique inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur Dell™. Utilisez le code de service express lorsque vous contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Le code de service express n'est pas nécessairement disponible dans tous les pays. combinaison de touches — Commande nécessitant une pression simultanée sur plusieurs touches. connecteur DIN — Connecteur rond à 6 broches conforme aux normes DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm), généralement utilisé pour connecter des connecteurs de câbles de souris ou de clavier PS/2.Glossaire 173 connecteur parallèle — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter une imprimante parallèle à l'ordinateur. Appelé également port LPT. connecteur série — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter des périphériques comme des organiseurs ou des appareils photo numériques sur votre ordinateur. contrôleur — Puce qui contrôle le transfert de données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques. contrôleur vidéo — Circuits de la carte vidéo ou de la carte système (sur les ordinateurs dotés d'un contrôleur vidéo intégré) qui fournissent, en association avec l'écran ou un moniteur externe, les fonctions vidéo, de votre ordinateur. CRIMM — Continuity Rambus In-line Memory Module — Module ne disposant pas de puces de mémoire, utilisé pour remplir les emplacements RIMM inutilisés. curseur — Marqueur sur l'écran qui indique l'emplacement de la prochaine action du clavier, de la tablette tactile ou de la souris. Il s'agit généralement d'une ligne clignotante, d'un caractère de soulignement ou d'une petite flèche. D disquette — Type de support de stockage électromagnétique. Également appelé disquette floppy ou disque floppy. disquette amorçable — Disquette pouvant être utilisée pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. dissipateur de chaleur — Plaque en métal sur certains microprocesseurs qui permet de dissiper la chaleur. DMA — Direct Memory Access (accès direct à la mémoire) — Canal permettant à certains types de transferts de données entre la mémoire RAM et un périphérique d'éviter de passer par le microprocesseur. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — Consortium de compagnies représentant des fournisseurs de matériel et de logiciel développant des normes de gestion pour les environnements réseau, Internet, de bureau et d'entreprise distribués. domaine — Groupe d'ordinateurs, de programmes et de périphériques sur un réseau administrés en tant qu'unité avec des règles et des procédures communes afin d'être utilisés par un groupe d'utilisateurs donné. Les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au domaine pour avoir accès aux ressources. dossier — Terme utilisé pour décrire l'espace sur une disquette ou un disque dur sur lequel des fichiers sont organisés et regroupés. Les fichiers d'un dossier peuvent être affichés et classés de différentes façons, par exemple par ordre alphabétique, par date ou par taille. DRAM — Dynamic Random Access Memory (mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire) — Mémoire qui stocke des informations dans les circuits intégrés contenant des condensateurs. DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — Technologie offrant une connexion Internet constante et à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique analogique. durée de vie d'une batterie — Nombre d'années durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut être rechargée. DVD — digital versatile disc (disque polyvalent numérique) — Disque à grande capacité généralement utilisé pour stocker des films. Les lecteurs de DVD lisent également la plupart des CD. DVD-R — DVD recordable (DVD enregistrable) — Version enregistrable d'un DVD. Des données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un DVD enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. DVD+RW — DVD réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un DVD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un DVD+RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. (La technologie DVD+RW diffère de la technologie DVD-RW.) DVI — digital video interface (interface vidéo numérique) — Norme de transmission numérique entre un ordinateur et un écran vidéo numérique.174 Glossaire E ECC — Error Checking and Correction (code de vérification et de correction d'erreur) — Type de mémoire qui inclut des circuits spéciaux pour tester l'exactitude des données lorsqu'elles passent par la mémoire. ECP — Extended Capabilities Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. Similaire à EPP, le port ECP utilise l'accès direct à la mémoire pour transférer des données et améliore généralement les performances. éditeur de texte — Programme utilisé pour créer et modifier les fichiers contenant uniquement du texte ; par exemple, le Bloc-notes de Windows utilise un éditeur de texte. En général, les éditeurs de texte n'offrent pas les fonctions de renvoi à la ligne automatique ou de mise en forme (option permettant de souligner, de changer les polices, etc.). EIDE — Enhanced Integrated Device Electronics (électronique de périphérique intégré améliorée) — Version améliorée de l'interface IDE pour les disques durs et les lecteurs de CD. EMI — Electromagnetic Interference (interférence électromagnétique) — Interférences électriques causées par radiation électromagnétique. emplacement d'extension — Connecteur de la carte système (sur certains ordinateurs) dans lequel vous insérez une carte d'extension pour la connecter au bus système. ENERGY STAR® — Exigences de l'agence EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) permettant de diminuer la consommation globale d'électricité. EPP — Enhanced Parallel Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. E/S — Entrée/Sortie — Opération ou périphérique entrant et extrayant des données de votre ordinateur. Les claviers et les imprimantes sont des périphériques d'E/S. ESD — ElectroStatic Discharge (décharge électrostatique) — Brève décharge d'électricité statique. Ce type de décharge peut endommager les circuits intégrés du matériel informatique et de communication. F Fahrenheit — Système de mesure des températures où 32 ° correspond au point de congélation et 212 ° au point d'ébullition de l'eau. FCC — Federal Communications Commission (Commission fédérale des communications, aux ÉtatsUnis) — Bureau américain responsable de l'application de réglementations relatives aux communications qui évalue la quantité de radiations pouvant être émise par les ordinateurs et autres équipements électroniques. fichier d'aide — Fichier qui contient des descriptions ou des instructions relatives à un produit. Certains fichiers d'aide sont associés à un programme particulier, par exemple Aide de Microsoft Word. D'autres fichiers d'aide fonctionnent comme sources de référence autonomes. Les fichiers d'aide portent généralement l'extension .hlp ou .chm. fichier « Lisez-moi » — Fichier texte livré avec un logiciel ou du matériel. En général, les fichiers « Lisez-moi » fournissent des informations sur l'installation et décrivent les améliorations ou corrections apportées au produit qui n'ont pas encore été documentées. formatage — Processus qui prépare un disque pour le stockage des fichiers. Lorsqu'un lecteur ou disque est formaté, les informations existantes sur ce lecteur ou disque sont perdues. FSB — Front Side Bus (bus frontal) — Canal de données et interface physique entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire RAM. FTP — File Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de fichiers) — Protocole Internet standard utilisé pour échanger des fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet. G G — Gravité — Mesure de poids et de force. GHz — Gigahertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à un milliard de Hz ou à mille MHz. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces des ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en GHz.Glossaire 175 Go — Giga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1024 Mo (1 073 741 824 octets). Ce terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'il fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur. GUI — Graphical User Interface (interface graphique utilisateur) — Logiciel interagissant avec l'utilisateur à l'aide de menus, de fenêtres et d'icônes. La plupart des programmes fonctionnant avec les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows ont des interfaces graphiques utilisateur. H unité de disque dur — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire des données sur un disque dur. Les termes lecteur de disque dur et disque dur sont souvent utilisés indifféremment. mode Mise en veille prolongée — Mode de gestion de l'alimentation électrique qui enregistre le contenu de la mémoire dans un espace réservé du disque dur, puis arrête l'ordinateur. Quand vous redémarrez l'ordinateur, les informations de la mémoire qui ont été enregistrées sur le disque dur sont automatiquement restaurées. HTML — Hypertext Markup Language — Ensemble de codes insérés dans une page Web afin de s'afficher dans un navigateur Internet. HTTP — Hypertext Transfer Protocol — Protocole d'échange de fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet. Hz — Hertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1 cycle par seconde. La vitesse de fonctionnement des ordinateurs et des périphériques électroniques est souvent mesurée en kilohertz (kHz), mégahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz) ou térahertz (THz). I IC — circuit intégré — Semi-conducteur ou puce sur lesquels sont fabriqués des milliers ou des millions de minuscules composants électroniques destinés aux équipements informatiques, audio et vidéo. IDE — Integrated Drive Electronics (électronique d'unité intégrée) — Interface pour les périphériques de stockage en masse dans laquelle le contrôleur est intégré à l'unité de disque dur ou au lecteur de CD. IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — Bus série à hautes performances utilisé pour connecter des périphériques compatibles IEEE 1394 tels que les appareils numériques et les lecteurs DVD à l'ordinateur. intégré — Fait généralement référence aux composants physiquement situés sur la carte système de l'ordinateur. Synonyme d'incorporé. IrDA — Infrared Data Association — Organisme en charge de la création de normes internationales pour les communications infrarouge. IRQ — Interrupt Request (requête d'interruption) — Passerelle électronique associée à un périphérique spécifique et qui permet à ce dernier de communiquer avec le microprocesseur. Une IRQ doit être attribuée à chaque périphérique. Bien que deux périphériques puissent partager la même affectation d'IRQ, ils ne peuvent pas fonctionner simultanément. ISP — Internet service provider (fournisseur d'accès Internet) — Société qui vous permet d'accéder à son serveur hôte afin de vous connecter directement à Internet, d'envoyer et de recevoir des messages électroniques et d'accéder à des sites Web. Le fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) vous attribue un progiciel, un nom d'utilisateur et des numéros de téléphone d'accès contre un paiement. K Kb — Kilobit — Unité de données égale à 1024 bits. Mesure de la capacité des circuits intégrés de mémoire. kHz — Kilohertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1000 Hz. Ko — Kilo-octet — Unité de données égale à 1024 octets mais souvent considérée comme étant égale à 1000 octets. L LAN — Local Area Network (réseau local) — Réseau informatique couvrant une petite zone. Un réseau local est généralement limité à un seul bâtiment ou à plusieurs bâtiments avoisinants. Un LAN peut être connecté à un autre réseau local sur n'importe quelle distance par des lignes téléphoniques et des ondes radioélectriques pour constituer un réseau étendu (WAN, Wide Area Network).176 Glossaire LCD — Liquid Crystal Display (affichage à cristaux liquides) — Technologie utilisée pour les écrans plats et ceux des ordinateurs portables. lecteur de CD — Lecteur utilisant la technologie optique pour lire des données sur des CD. lecteur de CD (CD player) — Logiciel utilisé pour lire les CD musicaux. Le lecteur de CD affiche une fenêtre comprenant des boutons qui permettent de lire un CD. lecteur de CD-RW — Lecteur qui peut lire les CD et écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de CD-RW/DVD — Lecteur, parfois appelé lecteur combiné, permettant de lire des CD et des DVD, ainsi que d'écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de disquette — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire sur des disquettes. lecteur de DVD — Lecteur utilisant la technologie optique pour lire des données sur les DVD et CD. lecteur de DVD (DVD player) — Logiciel permettant de visionner des films DVD. Le lecteur de DVD affiche une fenêtre comprenant des boutons qui permettent de visionner un film. lecteur de DVD+RW — Lecteur permettant de lire les DVD et la plupart des supports CD et d'écrire sur des disques DVD+RW (DVD réinscriptibles). lecteur optique — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire ou écrire des données sur des CD, des DVD ou des DVD+RW. Les lecteurs de CD, de DVD, de CD-RW et les lecteurs combinés de CD-RW/DVD sont des exemples de lecteurs optiques. lecteur Zip — Lecteur de disquette à grande capacité développé par Iomega Corporation qui utilise des disquettes amovibles de 3,5 pouces appelées disquettes Zip. Les disquettes Zip sont légèrement plus grandes que les disquettes normales, à peu près deux fois plus épaisses et peuvent contenir jusqu'à 100 Mo de données. lecture seule — Données et/ou fichiers que vous pouvez afficher, mais pas modifier ou supprimer. Un fichier peut être en lecture seule si : • Il se trouve sur une disquette physiquement protégée en écriture, un CD ou un DVD. • Il est situé sur un réseau dans un répertoire sur lequel l'administrateur système n'a affecté des droits qu'à certains individus. LED — Light-Emitting Diode (diode électroluminescente) — Composant électronique émettant de la lumière pour indiquer l'état de l'ordinateur. logiciel — Tout élément pouvant être stocké sous forme électronique, comme des programmes ou des fichiers informatiques. logiciel antivirus — Programme spécialement conçu pour identifier, isoler et/ou supprimer des virus de votre ordinateur. LPT — Line Print Terminal — Désignation d'une connexion parallèle à une imprimante ou à un autre périphérique parallèle. M Mb — Mégabit — Mesure de la capacité de la puce de mémoire égale à 1024 Ko. Mb/s — Mégabits par seconde — 1 million de bits par seconde. Cette mesure est en règle générale utilisée pour les vitesses de transmission des réseaux et des modems. mémoire — Zone de stockage de données temporaire dans l'ordinateur. Dans la mesure où les données en mémoire ne sont pas permanentes, il vous est recommandé d'enregistrer fréquemment vos fichiers lorsque vous travaillez ainsi qu'avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. Un ordinateur peut avoir plusieurs formes de mémoire : la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM et la mémoire vidéo. Le terme mémoire est souvent synonyme de mémoire RAM. mémoire cache — Mécanisme de stockage à grande vitesse spécifique. Il peut s'agir d'une section réservée de la mémoire principale ou d'un périphérique de stockage rapide indépendant. La mémoire cache permet d'améliorer l'efficacité de nombreuses opérations du microprocesseur. mémoire cache L1 — Mémoire cache principale se Glossaire 177 trouvant dans le microprocesseur. mémoire cache L2 — Mémoire cache secondaire pouvant être externe au microprocesseur ou intégrée à l'architecture de celui-ci. mémoire vidéo — Mémoire composée de puces mémoire dédiées aux fonctions vidéo. La mémoire vidéo est en général plus rapide que la mémoire système. La quantité de mémoire vidéo installée a principalement des effets sur le nombre de couleurs qu'un programme peut afficher. MHz — Mégahertz — Mesure de fréquence égale à 1 million de cycles par seconde. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces d'ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en MHz. microprocesseur — Puce d'ordinateur qui interprète et exécute les instructions des programmes. Le microprocesseur est parfois appelé processeur ou unité centrale (UC). Mo — Méga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1 048 576 octets. 1 Mo est égal à 1024 Ko. Lorsque l'on fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur, le terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 octets. mode de bureau étendu — Paramètre d'affichage permettant d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode Double affichage. mode Double affichage — Paramètre d'affichage qui permet d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode de bureau étendu. mode graphique — Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les modes graphiques peuvent afficher un nombre illimité de formes et de polices. mode Veille — Mode d'économie d'énergie qui arrête toutes les opérations inutiles de l'ordinateur pour économiser de l'énergie. mode vidéo — Mode qui décrit la façon dont le texte et les graphiques sont affichés sur un moniteur. Les logiciels à affichage graphique, tels que les systèmes d'exploitation Windows, s'affichent en modes vidéo définis par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les logiciels à base de caractères, comme les éditeurs de texte, s'affichent en modes vidéo qui se définissent par le nombre de colonnes x et par le nombre de rangées y. module de mémoire — Petite carte à circuits imprimés, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte système. module de voyage — Périphérique en plastique conçu pour être inséré dans la baie modulaire de l'ordinateur portable pour réduire le poids de ce dernier. modem — Dispositif permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs par l'intermédiaire de lignes téléphoniques analogiques. Il existe trois types de modems : externe, carte PC et interne. Généralement, vous utilisez un modem pour vous connecter à Internet et échanger des messages électroniques. moniteur — Périphérique haute résolution ayant l'apparence d'un téléviseur et affichant les données et les images créées par l'ordinateur. Mo/s — Méga-octets par seconde — 1 million d'octets par seconde. Cette mesure est souvent utilisée pour les taux de transfert de données. ms — milliseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un millième de seconde. Le temps d'accès des périphériques de stockage est souvent mesuré en ms. N NIC — Voir carte réseau. ns — nanoseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un milliardième de seconde. numéro de service — Étiquette de code-barres apposée sur l'ordinateur permettant d'identifier ce dernier lorsque vous accédez au support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service clientèle ou le support technique de Dell. NVRAM — Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (mémoire rémanente à accès direct) — Type de mémoire qui conserve des données lors de la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur ou en cas de coupure d'alimentation électrique. La mémoire NVRAM permet de conserver les informations de configuration, comme la date, l'heure et d'autres options de configuration du système que vous pouvez définir.178 Glossaire O octet — Unité de stockage de données de base utilisée par votre ordinateur. Un octet équivaut généralement à 8 bits. onduleur — UPS, Uninterruptible Power Supply — Source d'alimentation de secours utilisée lorsque l'alimentation électrique est coupée ou descend à un niveau de tension inacceptable. Un onduleur permet à l'ordinateur de fonctionner pendant un temps limité en cas de panne d'électricité. Les onduleurs sont en général équipés d'un parasurtenseur et peuvent également offrir des régulations de tension. Les petits systèmes UPS proposent une alimentation par batterie de quelques minutes pour vous permettre d'éteindre l'ordinateur correctement. P Panneau de configuration — Utilitaire Windows permettant de modifier les paramètres du système d'exploitation et du matériel : les paramètres d'affichage, par exemple. papier peint — Motif ou image d'arrière-plan du bureau Windows. Vous pouvez changer de papier peint en utilisant le panneau de configuration Windows. Vous pouvez également numériser votre photo préférée et en faire un papier peint. parasurtenseur — Dispositif qui empêche les sautes de tension, pouvant survenir au cours d'orages, par exemple, de pénétrer dans l'ordinateur par l'intermédiaire de la prise secteur. Les parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas de la foudre ou des baisses de tension qui se produisent lorsque la tension descend à plus de 20 pour cent au-dessous du niveau normal de tension de ligne à courant alternatif. Les connexions réseau ne peuvent pas être protégées par les parasurtenseurs. Vous devez toujours déconnecter le câble de réseau du connecteur réseau pendant les orages. partition — Zone de stockage physique sur un disque dur affectée à une ou plusieurs zones de stockage logique appelées unités logiques. Chaque partition peut contenir plusieurs lecteurs logiques. PCI — Peripheral Component Interconnect — Bus local prenant en charge les chemins de données de 32 et 64 octets et fournissant un chemin de données haute vitesse entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques (vidéo, lecteur, réseau). PCI Express — Type d'interface PCI qui accélère le taux de transfert des données entre le processeur et ses périphériques. Avec PCI Express, le taux de transfert des données se situe entre 250 Mo/s et 4 Go/s. Si le jeu de puces PCI Express et le périphérique tournent à des vitesses différentes, ils fonctionnent à la vitesse la plus basse. PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association — Organisme chargé d'établir des normes pour les cartes PC. périphérique — Matériel, tel qu'un lecteur de disque, une imprimante ou un clavier, installé sur votre ordinateur ou connecté à celui-ci. pilote — Logiciel permettant au système d'exploitation de contrôler un périphérique comme une imprimante. La plupart des périphériques ne fonctionnent pas correctement si le pilote approprié n'est pas installé sur l'ordinateur. pilote de périphérique — Voir pilote. PIN — Personal Identification Number — Séquence de nombres et/ou de lettres utilisée pour restreindre les accès non autorisés aux réseaux informatiques ainsi qu'à d'autres systèmes sécurisés. PIO — Programmed Input/Output (Entrée/Sortie programmée) — Méthode de transfert des données entre deux périphériques utilisant le microprocesseur comme partie du chemin de données. pixel — Point unique sur un écran. Les pixels sont disposés en rangs et en colonnes pour créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 800 sur 600, s'exprime en nombre de pixels en largeur sur le nombre de pixels en hauteur. Plug-and-Play — Possibilité pour l'ordinateur de configurer automatiquement les périphériques. La norme Plug-and-Play permet d'installer et de configurer automatiquement un périphérique et assure la compatibilité avec le matériel existant si le BIOS, le système d'exploitation et tous les périphériques sont compatibles Plug-and-Play. POST — Power-On Self-Test (autotest de démarrage) — Programmes de diagnostic, chargés automatiquement par le BIOS, qui effectuent des tests de base sur la plupart des composants de l'ordinateur, comme la mémoire, les unités de disque dur, etc. Si aucun problème n'est détecté au cours de l'autotest de démarrage, l'ordinateur continue son démarrage.Glossaire 179 programme — Logiciel permettant de traiter des données, comme un tableur, un traitement de texte, une base de données ou un jeu. Vous devez disposer d'un système d'exploitation pour exécuter des programmes. programme de configuration — Programme utilisé pour installer et configurer le matériel et le logiciel. Le programme setup.exe ou install.exe est généralement livré avec la plupart des progiciels Windows. Il ne faut pas confondre programme de configuration et programme de configuration du système. programme de configuration du système — Utilitaire qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Le programme de configuration du système vous permet de configurer les options sélectionnables par l'utilisateur dans le BIOS, comme la date et l'heure ou le mot de passe système. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun des paramètres sur l'ordinateur. protection en écriture — Fichiers ou supports ne pouvant pas être modifiés. Utilisez la protection en écriture lorsque vous voulez empêcher la modification ou la destruction des données. Pour protéger contre l'écriture une disquette de 3,5 pouces, faites glisser la languette de protection en écriture en position ouverte. PS/2 — Personal System/2 — Type de connecteur permettant de relier un clavier, une souris ou un pavé numérique compatible PS/2. PXE — Pre-boot execution Environment — Norme WfM (Wired for Management) permettant à des ordinateurs en réseau sans système d'exploitation d'être configurés et démarrés à distance. R raccourci —Icône permettant d'accéder rapidement à un programme, fichier, dossier ou lecteur fréquemment utilisé. En double-cliquant sur un raccourci placé sur votre bureau Windows, vous pouvez ouvrir le dossier ou le fichier correspondant sans avoir à le rechercher au préalable. Les raccourcis ne modifient pas l'emplacement des fichiers. Si vous supprimez un raccourci, le fichier original n'est pas affecté. Vous pouvez également renommer un raccourci. RAID — Ensemble redondant de disques indépendants — Méthode assurant la redondance des données. Parmi les implémentations courantes de RAID : RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 et RAID 50. RAM — Random-Access Memory — Zone principale de stockage temporaire pour les instructions et les données des programmes. Toute information stockée dans la RAM est définitivement perdue lorsque vous éteignez l'ordinateur. résolution — Netteté et clarté d'une image produite par une imprimante ou affichée sur un moniteur. Plus la résolution est élevée, plus l'image est nette. résolution vidéo — Voir résolution. RFI — Radio Frequency Interference (interférence de fréquence radio) — Interférence générée à des fréquences radio caractéristiques, entre 10 kHz et 100 000 MHz. Les fréquences radio se trouvent à l'extrémité inférieure du spectre de fréquences électromagnétiques et sont plus susceptibles de présenter des perturbations que les radiations de plus haute fréquence, telles que les infrarouges et la lumière. ROM — Read-Only Memory (mémoire morte) — Mémoire qui stocke des données et programmes que l'ordinateur ne peut pas supprimer ou dans laquelle il ne peut pas écrire. À la différence de la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM conserve son contenu même après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. Certains programmes essentiels au fonctionnement de l'ordinateur se trouvent dans la mémoire morte. RPM — Revolutions Per Minute (tours par minute) — Mesure le nombre de rotations effectuées par minute. La vitesse des disques durs est souvent mesurée en RPM. RTC — Real Time Clock (horloge temps réel) — Horloge alimentée par pile, située sur la carte système, qui conserve la date et l'heure après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. RTCRST — Real Time Clock Reset — Cavalier sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs pouvant souvent être utilisé pour résoudre les problèmes. S sauvegarde — Copie d'un programme ou d'un fichier de données sur une disquette, un CD ou un disque dur. Il est prudent de sauvegarder régulièrement les fichiers de données de votre disque dur.180 Glossaire ScanDisk — Utilitaire Microsoft qui recherche les erreurs présentes dans les fichiers et les dossiers, ainsi que sur la surface du disque dur. ScanDisk s'exécute souvent lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après un blocage. SDRAM — Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory — Type de mémoire vive dynamique (DRAM) synchronisée avec la vitesse d'horloge optimale du microprocesseur. SDRAM DDR — SDRAM à double débit de données — Type de SDRAM doublant les cycles de données en rafale et améliorant les performances du système. SDRAM DDR2 — SDRAM à double débit de données 2 — Type de SDRAM DDR qui utilise une pré- extraction de 4 bits et d'autres modifications architecturales pour passer la vitesse de la mémoire à plus de 400 MHz. segmentation des données — Technique de répartition des données sur plusieurs lecteurs de disque. La segmentation des données peut accélérer les opérations de récupération des données sur les disques. Les ordinateurs utilisant la segmentation des données permettent généralement à l'utilisateur de sélectionner la taille des unités de données ou la taille des segments. séquence d'amorçage — Précise l'ordre des périphériques à partir desquels l'ordinateur tente de s'amorcer. station d'accueil — Voir APR. SIM — Module d'identité d'abonné. Une carte SIM contient une micropuce qui crypte les transmissions vocales et de données. Les cartes SIM peuvent être utilisées avec des téléphones ou des ordinateurs portables. sortie TV S-vidéo — Connecteur permettant de relier des périphériques audio numériques ou un téléviseur à l'ordinateur. souris — Dispositif de pointage qui contrôle le mouvement du curseur à l'écran. Il suffit de faire glisser la souris sur une surface plane et rigide pour déplacer le pointeur ou le curseur à l'écran. S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — Format de fichier de transfert audio permettant de transférer des données audio entre deux fichiers sans conversion préalable au format analogique, ce qui pourrait dégrader la qualité du fichier. Strike Zone™ — Zone renforcée de la base de la plateforme qui offre une protection au disque dur en servant d'amortisseur en cas de choc résonnant ou de chute de l'ordinateur (allumé ou éteint). SVGA — Super-Video Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo. Les résolutions SVGA types sont de 800 sur 600 et 1024 sur 768. Le nombre de couleurs et la résolution affichés par un programme dépendent des capacités du moniteur, du contrôleur vidéo et de ses pilotes, ainsi que de la quantité de mémoire vidéo installée dans l'ordinateur. SXGA — Super-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur 1024. SXGA+ — Super-extended Graphics Array plus — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1400 sur 1050. T TAPI — Telephony Application Programming Interface — Permet aux programmes Microsoft Windows de fonctionner avec de nombreux périphériques de téléphonie (voix, données, télécopie et vidéo). taux de rafraîchissement — Fréquence, mesurée en Hz, à laquelle les lignes horizontales de l'écran sont rechargées (on parle parfois aussi de fréquence verticale). Plus le taux de rafraîchissement est élevé, moins le scintillement vidéo est perceptible à l'œil nu. Technologie sans fil Bluetooth® — Norme technologique sans fil pour les périphériques de mise en réseau de courte portée (9 m [29 pieds]) permettant aux périphériques activés de se reconnaître automatiquement. U UMA — allocation de mémoire unifiée — Mémoire système allouée de manière dynamique à la mémoire vidéo.Glossaire 181 USB — Universal Serial Bus — Interface matérielle pour les périphériques lents comme un clavier, une souris, une manette de jeu, un scanner, un jeu de haut-parleurs, une imprimante, des périphériques large bande (DSL et modems par câble), des périphériques d'imagerie ou de stockage compatibles USB. Les périphériques sont branchés directement à un support à 4 broches de votre ordinateur, ou à un concentrateur à plusieurs ports qui se raccorde à votre ordinateur. Les périphériques USB peuvent être connectés et déconnectés lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et peuvent également être connectés en guirlande. UTP — Unshielded Twisted Pair (paire torsadée non blindée) — Type de câble utilisé dans la plupart des réseaux téléphoniques et dans certains réseaux informatiques. Les paires de câbles non blindés sont torsadées afin de les protéger contre les interférences électromagnétiques et sont utilisées à la place des câbles comportant une gaine métallique autour de chaque paire de fils. UXGA — Ultra-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1600 sur 1200. V V — Volt — Unité de mesure de la puissance électrique ou de la force électromotrice. Un V est mesuré sur une résistance de 1 ohm lorsqu'elle est traversée par un courant de 1 ampère. virus — Programme conçu pour nuire ou détruire les données stockées sur votre ordinateur. Un virus se déplace d'un ordinateur à un autre par l'intermédiaire d'une disquette infectée, d'un logiciel téléchargé à partir d'Internet ou de pièces jointes à des messages électroniques. Lorsque vous démarrez un programme infecté, le virus intégré démarre lui aussi. Un type courant de virus est le virus d'amorçage, qui est stocké dans les secteurs d'amorçage d'une disquette. Si vous laissez la disquette dans le lecteur lorsque vous éteignez puis rallumez l'ordinateur, celui-ci est infecté lors de la lecture des secteurs d'amorçage de la disquette, à la recherche du système d'exploitation. Si l'ordinateur est infecté, le virus d'amorçage peut se reproduire sur toutes les disquettes lues ou écrites sur cet ordinateur jusqu'à son éradication. vitesse de bus — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle un bus peut transférer des informations. vitesse d'horloge — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle les composants de l'ordinateur connectés au bus système fonctionnent. W W — Watt — Mesure du courant électrique. Un watt est 1 ampère de courant dont le débit est de 1 volt. Wh — Wattheure — Unité de mesure utilisée couramment pour indiquer la capacité approximative d'une batterie. Par exemple, une batterie de 66 Wh peut fournir 66 W de courant pendant 1 heure ou 33 W pendant 2 heures. WLAN — réseau local sans fil. Ensemble d'ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par les ondes aériennes et qui utilisent des points d'accès ou des routeurs pour fournir un accès Internet. WWAN — réseau étendu sans fil. Réseau de données haut débit sans fil utilisant la technologie cellulaire et couvrant une zone géographique plus grande que celle couverte par le WLAN. WXGA — wide-aspect extended graphics array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur 800. X XGA — Extended Graphics Array —Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1024 sur 768.182 Glossaire Z ZIF — Zero Insertion Force — Type de connecteur ou de support permettant l'installation ou le retrait d'une puce sans forcer sur la puce ou le support. Zip — Format courant de compression des données. Les fichiers compressés au format Zip sont appelés fichiers Zip et portent en général l'extension .zip. Un type spécial de fichier zippé/compressé est un fichier à extraction automatique, dont l'extension est .exe. Pour décompresser un fichier à extraction automatique, double-cliquez dessus. zone de notification — Voir barre d'état système.Index 183 Index A Aide QuickSet, 14 alimentation filtres de ligne, 30 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 40 mode Veille, 40 modes de gestion de l'alimentation, 38 parasurtenseurs, 30 périphériques de protection, 30 problèmes, 97 UPS, 30 alimentation sans interruption. Voir UPS Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 26 assistants Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 94 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 26 audio numérique S/PDIF activation, 62 audio. Voir son B baie modulaire permutation des périphériques, 116 vis de fixation de périphérique, 116 barre des tâches icône QuickSet, 133 barres d'outils réglage de la taille, 133 batterie chargement, 41 description, 23 indicateur de charge, 38 jauge, 38 performances, 37 préservation de l'alimentation, 39 retrait, 41 stockage, 42 vérification de la charge, 38 bouton d'éjection du plateau du lecteur optique description, 21 boutons de commande multimédia bouton Dell MediaDirect, 46 description, 17 lecture/pause/Dell MediaDirect, 17 C cache de la charnière retrait, 127 cache du modem description, 24 cache du module de mémoire, 23 caches ExpressCard, 65 retrait, 67, 70 caractéristiques, 157 carnet, 136 carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth installation, 130 voyant d'état de l'appareil, 18 cartes ExpressCard caches, 67 installation, 65 retrait, 67 cartes mémoire multimédia caches, 70 installation, 69 logements, 68 retrait, 70 technologie CardBus, 68 types, 68 casque Dolby, configuration, 62184 Index 184 Index CD lecture, 43 système d'exploitation, 14 CD Drivers and Utilities, 103 CD Operating System, 14 CD ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 Centre d'aide et de support, 14 clavier description, 17 pavé numérique, 33 problèmes, 92 raccourcis, 34 retrait, 129 conflits incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles, 104 conflits de requête d'interruption, 104 connecteur de sortie TV Svidéo description, 20 connecteur IEEE 1394 description, 20 problèmes, 92 connecteur modem description, 21 connecteur réseau description, 22 connecteur vidéo description, 22 connecteurs audio, 20 connecteurs USB description, 21-22 connexion périphérique audio, 50 réseau large bande mobile, 76 téléviseur, 50 WLAN, 72 connexion Internet à propos de, 25 configuration, 25 options, 25 consignes de sécurité, 11 contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 11 D Dell contacter, 137, 170 politique de support, 169 site de support, 13 Dell Diagnostics à propos de, 81, 84 démarrage à partir du disque dur, 81 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, 82 Dell MediaDirect, 17 à propos de, 46 problèmes, 95 dépannage Centre d'aide et de support, 14 conflits, 104 Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 104 problèmes de clavier externe, 92 restauration de l'état de fonctionnement précédent de l'ordinateur, 105 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 104 diagnostics Dell, 81, 84 disque dur description, 24 problèmes, 86 remplacement, 113 retour à Dell, 115 documentation contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 11 en ligne, 13 ergonomie, 11 garantie, 11 guide d'information sur le produit, 11 réglementaire, 11 sécurité, 11 DVD lecture, 43 E écran basculement de l'image vidéo, 31 description, 16 réglage de la luminosité, 31 réglage de la taille des barres d'outils, 133Index 185 réglage de la taille des icônes, 133 résolution, 31 écran. Reportez-vous à moniteur emplacement pour câble de sécurité description, 19 étiquette Microsoft Windows, 12 étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 12 numéro de service, 12 ExpressCard caches, 65 étendue, 65 logements, 65 technologie CardBus, 65 types, 65 F fichier d'aide Centre d'aide et de support de Windows, 14 fixation vis de fixation de périphérique, 116 G gestion de l'alimentation préservation de l'alimentation par batterie, 39 QuickSet, 133 réglage des paramètres, 133 guide d'information sur le produit, 11 H haut-parleur problèmes, 99 volume, 99 haut-parleurs description, 17 I icônes réglage de la taille, 133 imprimante câble, 29 configuration, 28 connexion, 28 problèmes, 98 USB, 29 informations réglementaires, 11 informations relatives à l'ergonomie, 11 informations sur la garantie, 11 L large bande mobile (WWAN) connexions réseau, 76 lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1, 68 lecteur de CD problèmes, 85 lecteur de CD-RW problèmes, 85 lecteur de disquette branchement sur un connecteur USB, 21-22 lecteur de DVD problèmes, 85 lecteur optique description, 21 lecteurs problèmes, 85 Voir disque dur lecture de CD, 43 lecture de DVD, 43 log, 104 logement de carte ExpressCard description, 20 logiciel problèmes, 95 logiciel de suivi protection de votre ordinateur, 80 logiciel espion, 87, 96 logiciels problèmes, 94 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie, 23 loquet de l'écran, 18 luminosité réglage, 31186 Index 186 Index M matériel conflits, 104 Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 mémoire ajout, 118, 120 installation, 117 retrait, 118, 121 messages erreur, 87 messages d'erreur, 87 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 40 mode Veille à propos de, 40 modem installation, 123 moniteur basculement de l'image vidéo, 31 problèmes, 100 mots de passe à propos de, 79 oubli, 80 N nettoyage tablette tactile, 167 numéro de service, 12 O ordinateur blocage, 94 blocages, 94 caractéristiques, 157 faibles performances, 87, 96 ne répond plus, 94 protection, 80 restauration de l'état de fonctionnement précédent, 105 ordinateur perdu, 80 ordinateur volé, 80 P pavé numérique, 33 PC Restore, 107 périphérique audio activation, 62 connexion, 50 pilotes à propos de, 102 identification, 102 réinstallation, 102 problème scanner, 98 problèmes alimentation, 97 blocage de l'ordinateur, 94 blocages, 94 blocages de l'ordinateur, 94 blocages répétés de l'ordinateur, 94 clavier, 92 compatibilité des programmes et de Windows, 94 conditions du voyant d'alimentation, 97 connecteur IEEE 1394, 92 Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 Dell MediaDirect, 95 disque dur, 86 écran bleu, 94 faibles performances de l'ordinateur, 87, 96 haut-parleurs, 99 imprimante, 98 l'ordinateur ne répond plus, 94 lecteur de CD, 85 lecteur de CD-RW, 85 lecteur de DVD, 85 lecteurs, 85 logiciel, 94-95 logiciel espion, 87, 96 logiciels, 94 messages d'erreur, 87 non démarrage de l'ordinateur, 94 réseau, 96 restauration de l'état précédent du système d'exploitation, 105 support technique, 169 vidéo et moniteur, 100 programme de configuration du système affichage, 165 écrans, 165 options fréquemment utilisées, 166 protection de votre ordinateur, 79Index 187 Q QuickSet, 34, 46, 133 R RAM. Voir mémoire réinstallation Windows XP, 105 réseau problèmes, 96 QuickSet, 133 résolution réglage, 31 Restauration du système, 105 restauration du système, 105 S sans fil marche/arrêt, 133 scanner problèmes, 98 séquence d'amorçage, 166 site Web de support, 13 Site Web Premier Support de Dell, 11 son problèmes, 99 volume, 99 support contacter Dell, 137, 170 politique, 169 support technique politique, 169 système d'exploitation CD, 14 réinstallation, 14 réinstallation de Windows XP, 105 T tablette tactile description, 17 nettoyage, 167 personnalisation, 36 technologie CardBus cartes mémoire multimédia, 68 ExpressCard, 65 téléviseur connexion, 50 transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, 26 U UPS, 30 V ventilateur description, 19, 24 Vérifier disque, 86 vidéo problèmes, 100 vis de fixation de périphérique à propos de, 116 volume réglage, 99 voyager avec l'ordinateur avion, 136 conseils, 136 emballage, 135 étiquette d'identification, 135 voyant d'alimentation conditions, 97 voyants d'état de l'appareil, 16 voyants d'état du clavier description, 18 W Windows XP Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 94 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 26 Centre d'aide et de support, 14 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 104 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 40 mode Veille, 40 réinstallation, 14, 105 Restauration des pilotes de périphériques, 103 Restauration du système, 105 restauration du système, 105 WLAN, 71188 Index 188 Index Dellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W Getting Started With Your System Démarrage avec votre système Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System Начало работы c вашей системой Inicio de su sistema 系统使用 入门指南 系統使用 入門指南 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comDellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W Getting Started With Your System Démarrage avec votre système Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System Начало работы c вашей системой Inicio de su sistema 系统使用 入门指南 系統使用 入門指南 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotes and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your software. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage incidents. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or injury. DANGER: A DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. DANGER: Observe the following instruction to help prevent an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury: S This UPS contains LETHAL VOLTAGES. All repairs and service should be performed by AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY. There are NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS inside the UPS. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Phillipsis a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. July 2009System Features | 1 System Features Providing outstanding performance and reliability, the UPS's unique benefits include: S Buck and Boost voltage regulation that ensures regulated voltage to your load by correcting voltage fluctuations. S Start-on-battery capability for powering up the UPS even if utility power is not available. S Extended runtime with an optional External Battery Module (EBM) for 1000–1920W UPS models. S Two standard communication ports (USB and DB-9 serial port). S Optional Dell Network Management Card with enhanced communication capabilities for increased power protection and control. S Network transient protector that guards your network communications equipment from surges. S Advanced power management with the Dell UPS Management Software for graceful shutdowns and power monitoring. S Sequential shutdown and load management through separate receptacle groups called load segments. S Firmware that is easily upgradable without a service call. S Backed by worldwide agency approvals.2 | Finding Information Finding Information CAUTION: The Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document provides important safety and regulatory information. What are You Looking For? Find It Here S The user's guide for my UPS S The user's guide for the Dell Network Management Card S Dell UPS Management Software NOTE:Documentation and software updates can be found at support.dell.com. Dell UPS Disc S Specifications S How to configure UPS settings S How to troubleshoot and solve problems Dell UPS User's Guide The user's guide is available on the Dell UPS disc and on support.dell.com. S Safety instructions S Regulatory information S Recycling information Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information S Warranty information S Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) S End User License Agreement Dell Warranty and Support Information S Support information Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view the appropriate support site.Installation and Startup | 3 Installation and Startup CAUTION: Before performing the procedures in this document, read and follow the safety instructions and important regulatory information in your Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document. CAUTION: The cabinet is heavy [500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)]. Use caution to unpack and move the cabinet. This section describes the steps to set up your system for the first time. Unpacking the System 1 Unpack your system and identify each item. 2 Discard or recycle the packaging in a responsible manner, or store it for future use.4 | Installation and Startup Identifying the UPS This section shows a front and rear panel of the Dell Tower UPS. Refer to the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide for all rear panel details. Cover Latch Cover Latch LCD Panel Scroll Button (Up or Back) Select Button Scroll Button (Down or Forward) Figure 1. The Dell Tower UPS Communication Port Six 5-15 Receptacles (Load Segment 1) Network Transient Protector USB Port UPS Communication Bay On/Off Button IEC-C14 Input Connector Two 5-15 Receptacles (Load Segment 2) EBM Connector Figure 2. UPS Rear Panel (1000W, 120V Rear Panel)Installation and Startup | 5 Removing the UPS Front Cover 3 Remove the UPS front cover. Push the two cover latches to release the front cover and pull up. Removing the Battery Cover 4 Unscrew the thumbscrew on the the metal battery cover and lift up to remove the cover.6 | Installation and Startup Connecting the Internal Battery Connector 5 Connect the internal battery connector. 6 Replace the metal battery cover. Torque the screw to 0.7 Nm (6.2 lb in). 7 Replace the UPS front cover.Installation and Startup | 7 Connecting the Equipment 9 Connect equipment to UPS Connect communication cable from computer to UPS (optional) 8 8 If you plan to use Dell UPS Management Software, connect your computer to the USB port or RS-232 port using the supplied cable. 9 Plug the equipment to be protected into the UPS output receptacles, but do not turn on the protected equipment. NOTE: Verify that the total equipment ratings do not exceed the UPS capacity to prevent an overload alarm.8 | Installation and Startup Connecting the Power Cord 10 Verify that the power input to the UPS has adequate upstream overcurrent protection: Table 1. Minimum Upstream Circuit Breaker Rating UPS Output Power 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (at 100V) 1920W 20A — 15A 11 Plug the UPS power cord into a power outlet. NOTE: For 1920/1500W models. There are two power cords in the box, one with BSMI and PSE certified markings that can be used in Taiwan and Japan, another cord is for regions other than Taiwan and Japan.Installation and Startup | 9 Starting the UPS 12 Press the button on the UPS rear panel. Completing the Startup 13 Verify that the Normal icon appears on the UPS status summary screen, indicating that the UPS is operating normally and any loads are powered. 14 On the UPS status summary screen, press the button to check for active alarms or notices. Resolve any active alarms before continuing. See “Troubleshooting” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide. If there are no active alarms, a “No Active Alarms” message appears. 15 To change other factory-set defaults, see “Operation” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide.10 | Installation and StartupOnduleur Tour Dellt 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W Démarrage avec votre système H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comRemarques et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre logiciel. DANGER : Un DANGER indique une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, provoquera la mort ou une blessure grave. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, pourrait provoquer la mort ou une blessure. ATTENTION : Une ATTENTION indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer une blessure mineure ou légère ou des dommages matériels. DANGER : Respectez les instructions suivantes pour aider à empêcher une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer la mort ou des blessures graves : S Cet onduleur contient desTENSIONS MORTELLES. Toutes les réparations et tous les entretiens devront être effectués UNIQUEMENT PAR UN PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN AGRÉÉ. Aucune pièce à l’intérieur de cet onduleur NE PEUT ÊTRE ENTRETENUE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. Les informations dans ce document sont soumises à modifications sans préavis. E 2009 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de quelque manière que ce soit sans autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce texte : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques commerciales de Dell Inc. ; Phillips est une marque déposée de Phillips Screw Company. D’autres marques commerciales et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour se référer à des entités revendiquant les marques et les noms ou leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques commerciales et les noms commerciaux ne lui appartenant pas. Julliet 2009Caractéristiques du système | 13 Caractéristiques du système Offrant une fiabilité et des performances remarquables, les avantages uniques de l'onduleur comprennent : S La régulation de tension Buck and Boost qui assure une tension régulée à votre charge en corrigeant les fluctuations de tension. S La capacité de démarrage-sur-batterie pour alimenter l'onduleur même si le courant du secteur n'est pas disponible. S Temps d'exécution prolongé avec un Module de batterie externe (EBM) en option pour les modèles d'onduleur 1000–1920 W. S Deux ports de communication standards (port série DB-9 et USB). S Carte de gestion de réseau Dell optionnelle avec capacités de communication améliorées pour une protection et un contrôle accrus de l'alimentation électrique. S Protecteur de réseau contre les phénomènes transitoires qui protège votre équipement de communication réseau contre les surtensions. S Gestion avancée de l'alimentation électrique avec le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell pour des coupures progressives et une surveillance de l'alimentation. S Arrêt séquentiel et gestion de charge par des groupes de prises séparés appelés « segments de charge ». S Micrologiciel qui peut être facilement mis à niveau sans appeler le service technique. S Soutenu par des approbations d'organismes dans le monde entier.14 | Trouver des informations Trouver des informations ATTENTION! Le document Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation fournit des informations importantes sur la sécurité et la réglementation. Que recherchez-vous ? Trouvez-le ici S Le guide d'utilisation de mon onduleur S Le guide d'utilisation de ma Carte de gestion de réseau Dell S Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell REMARQUE : Les mises à jour des documents et des logiciels se trouvent sur support.dell.com. Disque de l'onduleur Dell S Spécifications S Comment configurer les paramètres de l'onduleur S Comment identifier et résoudre les problèmes Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur Dell Le guide d'utilisation est disponible sur le disque de l'onduleur Dell et sursupport.dell.com. S Instructions sur la sécurit S Informations sur la réglementation S Informations sur le recyclage Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation S Informations sur la garantie S Termes et conditions (États-Unis uniquement) S Contrat de licence de l'utilisateur final Informations sur l'assistance et la garantie Dell S Informations sur l'assistance Site Internet d'assistance Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région ou votre segment commercial pour voir le site d'assistance approprié.Installation et démarrage | 15 Installation et démarrage ATTENTION! Avant de réaliser les procédures de ce document, lisez et suivez les instructions de sécurité et les informations importantes sur la réglementation qui figurent dans votre document Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation. ATTENTION! Le module est lourd [500 W : 11,6 kg (25,6 lb) ; 1000 W : 18,3 kg (40,3 lb) ; 1920/1500 W : 30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Prenez toutes les précautions nécessaires pour déballer et déplacer le module. Cette section décrit les étapes de configuration de votre système pour la première fois. Déballage du système 1 Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément. 2 Jetez ou recyclez l'emballage d'une façon responsable, ou conservez-le pour une utilisation ultérieure.16 | Installation et démarrage Identification de l'onduleur Cette section montre un panneau avant et arrière de l'onduleur Tour Dell. Reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W pour tous les détails sur le panneau arrière. Loquet du couvercle Loquet du couvercle Panneau LCD Bouton de défilement (haut ou arrière) Bouton de sélection Bouton de défilement (bas ou avant) Figure 1. Onduleur Tour Dell Port de communication Six prises 5-15 (Segment de charge 1) Protecteur de réseau contre les phénomènes transitoires Port USB Baie de communication de l'onduleur Bouton Marche/Arrêt Connecteur d'entrée CEI-C14 Deux prises 5-15 (Segment de charge 2) Connecteur de l'EBM Figure 2. Panneau arrière de l'onduleur (panneau arrière du 1000 W, 120 V)Installation et démarrage | 17 Retrait du couvercle avant de l'onduleur 3 Retirez le couvercle avant de l'onduleur. Poussez les deux loquets du couvercle pour libérer le couvercle avant et levez. Retrait du couvercle des batteries 4 Dévissez la vis à oreilles sur le couvercle métallique des batteries et levez pour retirer le couvercle.18 | Installation et démarrage Connexion du connecteur interne des batteries 5 Branchez le connecteur interne des batteries. 6 Remettez en place le couvercle métallique des batteries. Serrez la vis à un couple de 0,7 N·m (6,2 lb in). 7 Remettez en place le couvercle avant de l'onduleur.Installation et démarrage | 19 Connexion de l'équipement 9 Connectez l'équipement à l'onduleur Connectez le câble de communication de l'ordinateur à l'onduleur (en option) 8 8 Si vous prévoyez d'utiliser le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell, connectez votre ordinateur au port USB ou RS-232 en utilisant le câble fourni. 9 Branchez l'équipement à protéger sur les prises de sortie de l'onduleur, mais ne mettez pas l'équipement à protéger sous tension. REMARQUE: Pour éviter une alarme de surcharge, vérifiez que les valeurs nominales totales de l'équipement ne dépassent pas la capacité de l'onduleur.20 | Installation et démarrage Connexion du cordon d'alimentation 10 Vérifiez que l'entrée d'alimentation de l'onduleur possède une protection contre les surintensités montantes compatible avec la valeur nominale de l'intensité pouvant être acheminée par le cordon d'alimentation. 11 Vérifiez que l'entrée d'alimentation vers l'onduleur possède une protection adéquate contre des surintensités montantes : Tableau 1. Valeur nominale minimale du disjoncteur amont Puissance de sortie de l'onduleur 120 V 208 V 230 V 500 W 15 A — 15 A 1000 W 15 A — 15 A 1500 W (à 100 V) 1920 W 20 A — 15 A 12 Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de l'onduleur à une prise secteur.Installation et démarrage | 21 Démarrage de l'onduleur 13 Appuyez sur le bouton sur le panneau arrière de l'onduleur. Achèvement du démarrage 14 Vérifiez que l'icône Normal apparaît sur l'écran de résumé d'état de l'onduleur, indiquant que l'onduleur fonctionne normalement et que toutes les charges sont alimentées. 15 Sur l'écran de résumé d'état de l'onduleur, appuyez sur le bouton pour vérifier les avis et les alarmes actives. Résolvez toutes les alarmes actives avant de continuer. Voir « Dépannage » dans le Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W. Si aucune alarme n'est activée, un message « Aucune alarme active » apparaît. 16 Pour changer d'autres valeurs d'usine par défaut, voir « Fonctionnement » dans le Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W.22 | Installation et démarrageDellt Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comHinweise und Warnungen HINWEIS: Ein HINWEIS macht auf eine wichtige Information aufmerksam, mit deren Hilfe Sie Ihre Software optimal nutzen können. GEFAHR: GEFAHR macht auf eine unmittelbar gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zum Tod oder schweren Verletzungen führt, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird. WARNUNG: Eine WARNUNG macht auf eine potenziell gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zum Tod oder zu Verletzungen führt, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird. ACHTUNG: ACHTUNG macht auf eine potenziell gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zu geringen oder mäßigen Verletzungen oder Sachschäden führen kann, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird. GEFAHR: Beachten Sie den folgenden Hinweis, um eine unmittelbar gefährliche Situation zu vermeiden, die zum Tod oder zu schweren Verletzungen führen könnte: S Diese USV führt LEBENSGEFÄHRLICHE SPANNUNG. Sämtliche Reparatur-- und Wartungsarbeiten dürfen NUR VON AUTORISIERTEM WARTUNGSPERSONAL durchgeführt werden. Im Inneren der USV sind KEINE VOM BENUTZER WARTBAREN TEILEvorhanden. Unangekündigte Änderungen der Angaben in diesem Dokument vorbehalten. E 2009 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Die Vervielfältigung, gleich welcher Art, ist ohne schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. strengstens untersagt. In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell und das DELL--Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc.; Phillipsist eine eingetragene Marke von Phillips Screw Company. In diesem Dokument können weitere Marken und Handelsnamen verwendet werden, die sich entweder auf die Personen beziehen, die diese Marken und Namen für sich beanspruchen , oder auf deren Produkte. Dell Inc. verzichtet auf sämtliche gewerblichen Eigentumsrechte an Marken und Handelsnamen, bei denen es sich nicht um eigene Marken und Handelsnamen handelt. Juli 2009Systemmerkmale | 25 Systemmerkmale Die herausragende Leistung und Zuverlässigkeit sind nur einige der Vorteile der USV-Anlagen. Sie bieten zudem: S Spannungsregulierung durch das „Buck and Boost“-Verfahren. Dies gewährleistet durch die Korrektur von Unregelmäßigkeiten einen gleichbleibenden Spannungswert für Ihre Anlagen. S Starten der Anlage im Batteriebetrieb zum Versorgen der USV mit Strom, selbst wenn kein Netzstrom zur Verfügung steht. S Erweiterte Laufzeit mit optionalem Externes Batteriemodul (EBM) für USV-Modelle für 1000-1920 W. S Serienmäßige Ausstattung mit zwei Kommunikationsschnittstellen (USV-Schnittstelle und serielle DB-9-Schnittstelle). S Optionale Dell Netzwerkmanagementkarte mit erweiterten Kommunikationsmöglichkeiten für verbesserten Leistungsschutz und Kontrolle. S Netzwerkschutzeinrichtungen schützen Ihre Anlage für Netzwerkkommunikation vor Spannungsspitzen. S Fortgeschrittene Stromüberwachung mit der Dell USV Management Software für sicheres Herunterfahren und Stromüberwachung. S Abschaltsequenz und Lastenmanagement durch separate Anschlussgruppen (sogenannte Lastsegmente). S Firmware, die sich einfach und ohne Wartungsdienst aktualisieren lässt. S Entspricht einschlägigen Normen auf der ganzen Welt.26 | Auffinden von Informationen Auffinden von Informationen ACHTUNG: Im Dokument Informationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften finden Sie wichtige Sicherheitshinweise und Informationen zu gesetzlichen Bestimmungen. Was suchen Sie? Hier finden Sie es S Die Benutzeranleitung für meine USV S Die Benutzeranleitung für die Dell Netzwerkmanagementkarte S Dell USV Management Software HINWEIS:Dokumente und Softwareaktualisierungen finden Sie unter support.dell.com. Die Disk für die Dell USV S Spezifikationen S Anleitung zum Konfigurieren der USV-Einstellungen S Behebung von Fehlern und Lösung von Problemen Benutzeranleitung der Dell USV Die Benutzeranleitung finden Sie auf der Disk zu der Dell USV und auch untersupport.dell.com. S Sicherheitshinweise S Informationen über Ordnungsvorschriften S Recycling-Informationen Informationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften S Garantieerklärung S AGB (nur USA) S Lizenzvereinbarung für Endbenutzer Informationen zu Garantie und Support von Dell S Supportinformationen Support-Website von Dell – support.dell.com HINWEIS: Wählen Sie Ihre Region bzw. Ihre Branche aus, um die geeignete Support-Website aufzurufen.Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 27 Installation und Inbetriebnahme ACHTUNG: Vor der Ausführung der Verfahren in diesem Dokument lesen Sie bitte die Sicherheitshinweise und wichtigen Informationen zu Ordnungsvorschriften in Ihrem Dokument überInformationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften und halten Sie diese unbedingt ein. :ACHTUNG: Das Gehäuse ist schwer [500 W: 11,6 kg (25,6 lb); 1000 W: 18,3 kg (40,3 lb); 1920/1500 W: 30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Beim Auspacken und Transportieren des Gehäuses ist Vorsicht geboten. In diesem Abschnitt werden die Schritte für die Erstkonfiguration Ihres Systems beschrieben. Auspacken des Systems 1 Packen Sie das System aus und identifizieren Sie die einzelnen Komponenten. 2 Entsorgen oder recyceln Sie die Verpackung in umweltbewusster Weise, oder bewahren Sie sie für den späteren Gebrauch auf.28 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme Beschreibung der USV In diesem Abschnitt wird die Vorder- und Rückansicht der Dell Tower USV angezeigt. Alle Einzelheiten zur Rückseite finden Sie in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung. Abdeckungslasche Abdeckungslasche LCD-Anzeigen Bildlauftaste (aufwärts oder rückwärts) Auswahltaste Bildlauftaste (abwärts oder vorwärts) Abbildung 1. Die Dell Tower USV Kommunikationsschnittstelle Sechs 5-15-Anschlussdosen (Lastsegment 1) Netzwerk-Transienten Schutz USB-Schnittstelle Kommunikationssteckplatz der USV Ein-/Ausschalttaste IEC-C14-Eingangsanschluss Zwei 5-15-Anschlussdosen (Lastsegment 2) EBM-Anschluss Abbildung 2. Rückseite der USV (1000 W, 120 V)Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 29 Entfernen der vorderen USV-Abdeckung 3 Entfernen Sie die vordere USV-Abdeckung. Drücken Sie auf die beiden Abdeckungslaschen, um die vordere Abdeckung zu lösen, und ziehen Sie diese hoch. Entfernen der Batterieabdeckung 4 Lösen Sie die Rändelschraube auf der metallenen Batterieabdeckung und heben Sie die Abdeckung hoch, um sie zu entfernen.30 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme Anklemmen des Anschlusses im Inneren der Batterie 5 Klemmen Sie den Anschluss im Inneren der Batterie an. 6 Setzen Sie die die Batterieabdeckung aus Metall wieder ein. Drehen Sie die Schraube mit einem Drehmoment von 0,7 Nm (6,2 lb in) wieder ein. 7 Bringen Sie die vordere Abdeckung der USV wieder an.Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 31 Anschließen der Anlage 9 Schließen Sie die Anlage an die USV an Schließen Sie das Kommunikationskabel vom Computer an die USV an (optional) 8 8 Sofern Sie die Benutzung der Dell USV Management Software planen, schließen Sie Ihren Computer mit dem beiliegenden Kabel an die USB-Schnittstelle oder an die RS-232-Schnittstelle an. 9 Stecken Sie Stecker der zu schützenden Geräte in die Ausgangsanschlüsse der USV ein, aber schalten Sie die geschützten Geräte noch nicht ein. HINWEIS: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Gesamtnennleistung aller angeschlossenen Geräte die Kapazität der USV nicht überschreitet, um einen Überlastalarm zu vermeiden.32 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme Anschließen des Netzkabels 10 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stromeingang der USV entsprechend dem Nennstrom des Netzkabels mit einem Schutz gegen Spannungsspitzen ausgestattet ist. 11 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stromeingang der USV mit einem angemessenen Schutz gegen Spannungsspitzen ausgestattet ist: Tabelle 1. Mindestnennstrom der Überstromsicherung USV-Ausgangsleistung 120 V 208 V 230 V 500 W 15 A — 15 A 1000 W 15 A — 15 A 1500 W (bei 100 V) 1920 W 20 A — 15 A 12 Stecken Sie das Netzkabel der USV in eine Netzsteckdose.Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 33 Starten der USV 13 Drücken Sie die Taste auf der Rückseite der USV. Abschluss des Startvorgangs 14 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Symbol für „Normal“ auf dem Bildschirm der USV-Statusübersicht angezeigt wird. Hierdurch wird angezeigt, dass die USV ordnungsgemäß funktioniert und dass alle angeschlossenen Lasten mit Strom versorgt werden.34 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme 15 Wählen Sie im Bildschirm mit der USV-Statusübersicht die Schaltfläche , um zu prüfen ob eine aktive Warnmeldung oder ein aktiver Hinweis vorliegt. Lösen Sie alle aktiven Warnmeldungen, bevor Sie den Vorgang fortsetzen. Siehe „Fehlerbehebung“ in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung. Falls keine Warnmeldungen aktiv sind, wird die Meldung „Keine aktiven Warnmeldungen“ angezeigt. 16 Für die Änderung anderer werkseitiger Standardeinstellungen siehe „Betrieb“ in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung.ИБП башенного типа Dellt 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Начало работы c вашей системой www.dell.com | support.dell.comПримечания и предупреждения ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Пометка ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ указывает на важную информацию, которая поможет вам более эффективно использовать свое программное обеспечение. ОПАСНОСТЬ: Пометка ОПАСНОСТЬ указывает на ситуации, в которых существует непосредственная угроза, которая, если ее не избежать, приведет к серьезной травме или летальному исходу. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: Пометка ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ указывает на потенциально опасную ситуацию, которая, если ее не избежать, может привести к травме или летальному исходу. ВНИМАНИЕ: Пометка ВНИМАНИЕ указывает на потенциально опасную ситуацию, которая, если ее не избежать, может привести к травмам легкой и средней степени тяжести или к повреждению имущества. ОПАСНОСТЬ: Следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям, позволяющим предупредить непосредственную угрозу, которая, если ее не избежать, приведет к серьезной травме или летальному исходу: S В устройстве ИБП некоторые узлы находятся под СМЕРТЕЛЬНО ОПАСНЫМ НАПРЯЖЕНИЕМ. Все работы по ремонту и обслуживанию должны выполняться ТОЛЬКО УПОЛНОМОЧЕННЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАЮЩИМ ПЕРСОНАЛОМ. В ИБП НЕТ УЗЛОВ, ОБСЛУЖИВАЕМЫХ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЕМ. Информация в настоящем документе может быть изменена без предварительного уведомления. E 2009 Dell Inc. Все права защищены. Воспроизведение данного документа любым способом безписьменного разрешения компании Dell Inc. категорически запрещено. Торговые знаки, используемые в данном тексте: Логотипы Dell и DELL являются торговыми знаками компании Dell Inc.; Phillips является зарегистрированным торговым знаком компании Phillips Screw Company. Прочие торговые знаки и торговые марки могут использоваться в данном документе для ссылки на организации, предъявляющие права на эти знаки и марки, или на их товары. Dell Inc. отказывается от любого права собственности на какие-либо торговые знаки или торговые марки, кроме своих собственных. Июль 2009 г.Функции системы | 37 Функции системы Вот уникальные преимущества, обеспечивающие исключительную эффективность и надежность ИБП: S Понижающая и повышающая регулировка напряжения обеспечивает подачу стабильного напряжения на нагрузку путем коррекции колебаний напряжения. S Функция запуска от батареи используется для питания ИБП даже при отсутствии питания от электросети. S Увеличенное время работы при помощи дополнительного модуля Модуль внешней батареи (EBM) для моделей ИБП 1000 - 1920 Вт. S Два стандартных коммуникационных порта (USB и последовательный порт DB-9). S Дополнительная Карта сетевого управления Dell с усовершенствованными коммуникационными возможностями улучшает защиту питания и его мониторинг. S Защита от сетевых переходных процессов, которая предохраняет устройства сетевой связи от скачков. S Усовершенствованное управление питанием при помощи Программа управления ИБП Dell обеспечивает корректное выключение нагрузки и мониторинг электропитания. S Последовательное выключение и управление нагрузкой при помощи раздельных групп разъемов, называемых сегментами нагрузки. S Легко обновляемое аппаратно-программное обеспечение; для обновления нет необходимости обращаться в службу технической поддержки. S Утверждены международными организациями.38 | Поиск информации Поиск информации ВНИМАНИЕ: Документ Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация содержит важную информацию о технике безопасности и нормативную информацию. Что вы ищите? Вы найдете это здесь S Руководство пользователя для моего ИБП S Руководство пользователя для карты Карта сетевого управления Dell S Программа управления ИБП Dell ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Документация и обновленные версии ПО можно найти на сайте support.dell.com. Диск ИБП Dell S Спецификации S Как конфигурировать настройки ИБП S Как находить и устранять неисправности и решать проблемы Руководство пользователя ИБП Dell Руководство пользователя доступно на диске ИБП Dell и на сайте support.dell.com. S Инструкции по технике безопасности S Нормативная информация S Информация об утилизации Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация S Информация о гарантии S Сроки и условия (только для США) S Лицензионное соглашение с конечным пользователем Информация о гарантии и поддержке Dell S Информация о поддержке Веб-сайт поддержки Dell — support.dell.com ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Выберите свой регион или сегмент бизнеса, чтобы увидеть соответствующий сайт поддержки.Установка и запуск | 39 Установка и запуск ВНИМАНИЕ: Перед выполнением процедуры, описанной в данной документации, прочтите и выполните инструкции по технике безопасности и ознакомьтесь с важной нормативной информацией, которая содержится в документе Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация. ВНИМАНИЕ: ВНИМАНИЕ: Корпустяжелый (500 Вт: 11,6 кг; 1000 Вт: 18,3 кг; 1920/1500 Вт: 30,5 кг]. Проявляйте осторожность при распаковке и перемещении корпуса. В данном разделе описываются этапы настройки системы в первый раз. Распаковка системы 1 Распакуйте систему и проверьте каждый элемент. 2 Выбросьте или утилизируйте упаковку согласно правилам или сохраните ее для будущего использования.40 | Установка и запуск Описание ИБП В данном разделе показаны передняя и задняя панели ИБП «Башня» Dell. См. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Dell, чтобы получить подробную информацию о задней панели. Защелка крышки Защелка крышки Жидкокристаллическая панель Кнопка пролистывания (вверх или назад) Кнопка выбора Кнопка пролистывания (внизили вперед) Рис. 1. ИБП «Башня» Dell Коммуникационный порт Шесть гнезд 5-15 (Сегмент нагрузки 1) Устройство защиты от переходных процессов в коммуникационной сети Порт USB Коммуникационного отсека блока бесперебойного питания Кнопка Вкл./Выкл Входной разъем IEC-C14 Два гнезда 5-15 (Сегмент нагрузки 2) Разъем EBM Рис. 2. Задняя панель ИБП (задняя панель 1000 Вт, 120 В)Установка и запуск | 41 Снятие передней крышки ИБП 3 Снимите переднюю крышку ИБП. Нажмите на две защелки крышки, чтобы освободить переднюю крышку, и потяните вверх. Снятие крышки батарей 4 Отвинтите винты на металлической крышке батарей и поднимите ее, чтобы снять.42 | Установка и запуск Подключение разъема внутренней батареи 5 Подключите разъем внутренней батареи. 6 Установите на место металлическую крышку батарей. Затяните винт с усилием 0,7 Нм (6,2 фунта на дюйм). 7 Установите на место переднюю крышку ИБП.Установка и запуск | 43 Подключение оборудования 9 Присоедините свое оборудование к ИБП Подключите кабель связи от компьютера к ИБП (факультативно) 8 8 Если вы планируете использовать Программа управления ИБП Dell, подключите свой компьютер к USB-порту или порту RS-232 при помощи прилагающегося кабеля. 9 Подключите оборудование, которое необходимо предохранить от скачков напряжения, к выходным гнездам ИБП, но не включайте это оборудование. Примечание: Убедитесь, что общая паспортная мощность потребителей не превышает мощность ИБП во избежание сигнала перегрузки.44 | Установка и запуск Подключение шнура питания 10 Убедитесь, что вход питания на ИБП имеет защиту от верхней перегрузки по току согласно номинальному току шнура питания. 11 Убедитесь, что вход питания ИБП имеет соответствующую защиту от верхней перегрузки по току: Таблица 1. Минимальный номинал вышестоящего выключателя Выходная мощность ИБП 120 В 208 В 230 В 500 Вт 15 A — 15 A 1000 Вт 15 A — 15 A 1500 Вт (на 100 В) 1920 Вт 20 A — 15 A 12 Вставьте шнур питания ИБП в розетку электросети.Установка и запуск | 45 Включение ИБП 13 Нажмите кнопку на задней панели ИБП. Завершение запуска 14 Убедитесь, что на итоговом экране состояния ИБП появилась пиктограмма обычного режима , обозначающая, что ИБП работает нормально и подает электропитание на существующие нагрузки.46 | Установка и запуск 15 На итоговом экране состояния ИБП нажмите кнопку , чтобы проверить, активны ли аварийные сигналы или извещения. Отреагируйте на все активные сигналы, прежде чем продолжить. См. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Dell, раздел «Поиск и устранение неисправностей». При отсутствии активных аварийных сигналов появится сообщение «Активные аварийные сигналы отсутствуют». 16 Чтобы изменить прочие заводские настройки по умолчанию см. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и , раздел «Эксплуатация».UPS de la torre de Dellt 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W Inicio de su sistema H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotas y advertencias NOTA: Una NOTA indica información importante que lo ayuda a utilizar mejor el software. PELIGRO: Un PELIGRO indica una situación inminentemente peligrosa que, si no se evita, dará como resultado la muerte o una lesión grave. AVISO: Una ADVERTENCIA indica una situación potencialmente peligrosa que, si no se evita, podría dar como resultado la muerte o una lesión. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica una situación potencialmente peligrosa que, si no se evita, puede dar como resultado una lesión moderada o menor, o en incidentes de daño de la propiedad. PELIGRO: Cumpla con la siguiente instrucción para evitar una situación inminentemente peligrosa que, de no evitarse, dará como resultado la muerte o una lesión grave: S Esta UPS contiene VOLTAJES LETALES. SÓLO EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADO debe realizar las reparaciones y el servicio. SÓLO EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADO dentro de la UPS. La información de este documento se encuentra sujeta a cambios sin previo aviso. E 2009 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida cualquier forma de reproducción sin el previo consentimiento de Dell Inc. por escrito. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell y el logotipo de DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Phillips es una marca comercial registrada de Phillips Screw Company. Es posible que en este documento se utilicen otras marcas y nombres comerciales para hacer referencia a las entidades que responden a dichas marcas y nombres o a sus productos. Dell Inc. niega cualquier interés en la propiedad de las marcas y nombres comerciales de terceros. julio de 2009Características del sistema | 49 Características del sistema Al brindar rendimiento y confiabilidad sobresalientes, los beneficios exclusivos de la UPS incluyen: S Regulación del aumento y la reducción de voltaje que garantiza un voltaje constante para la carga, corrigiendo así las fluctuaciones. S Capacidad de arranque en batería para poner en funcionamiento la UPS aun cuando el suministro eléctrico no esté disponible. S Tiempo de ejecución con un Módulo de batería externa opcional (EBM) para los modelos de UPS 1000-1920 W. S Dos puertos de comunicación estándar (USB y puerto serie). S Tarjetas opcionales Tarjeta de gestión de red de Dell con capacidades de comunicación mejoradas para lograr mayor control y protección del suministro eléctrico. S Protector transitorio de redes que preserva a su equipo de comunicaciones en red de las sobretensiones. S El manejo avanzado del suministro eléctrico con Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell permite el apagado ordenado y la supervisión del suministro eléctrico. S El apagado secuencial y la gestión de carga mediante grupos de receptáculos separados que se denominan segmentos de carga. S Firmware que se actualiza fácilmente sin necesidad de llamar al cliente. S Respaldado por las aprobaciones de agencias a nivel mundial.50 | Búsqueda de información Búsqueda de información PRECAUCIÓN: El documento Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad brinda información regulatoria y sobre seguridad importante. ¿Qué está buscando? Encuéntrelo aqu S La guía del usuario para mi UPS S La guía del usuario para la Tarjeta de gestión de red de Dell S Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell NOTA:La documentación y la actualización de software se pueden encontrar en support.dell.com. Disco de la UPS de Dell S Especificaciones S Cómo configurar los valores de la UPS S Cómo diagnosticar las fallas y resolver problemas Guía del usuario de la UPS de Dell La guía del usuario está disponible en el disco de la UPS de Dell y en support.dell.com. S Instrucciones de seguridad S Información regulatoria S Información sobre reciclado Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad S Información sobre seguridad S Términos y condiciones (sólo EE. UU.) S Acuerdo de licencia del usuario final Información sobre soporte y garantía de Dell S Información sobre soporte Sitio web de soporte de Dell — support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región o segmento de negocio para visualizar el sitio de soporte correspondiente.Instalación y arranque | 51 Instalación y arranque PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar los procedimientos que se describen en este documento, lea y cumpla con las instrucciones de seguridad y la información regulatoria importante en su documento Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad. PRECAUCIÓN: El gabinete es pesado [500 W: 11,6 kg (25,6 lb); 1000 W: 18,3 kg (40,3 lb); 1920/1500 W: 30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Tenga precaución al desembalar y trasladar el gabinete. En la presente sección, se describen los pasos para configurar su sistema por primera vez. Cómo desembalar el sistema 1 Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento. 2 Deseche o recicle el embalaje de una manera responsable o guárdelo para un uso futuro.52 | Instalación y arranque Identificación de la UPS En la presente sección, se muestra un panel frontal y posterior de la UPS de la Torre de Dell. Consulte la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W para obtener todos los detalles del panel posterior. Pestillo de la Pestillo de la cubierta cubierta Panel LCD Botón de desplazamiento (hacia arriba o hacia atrás) Botón de selección Botón de desplazamiento (hacia abajo o hacia delante) Figure 1. La UPS de la Torre de Dell Puerto de comunicaciones Seis receptáculos de 5-15 (Segmento de carga 1) Protector de red a transitorios Puerto USB Compartimiento de comunicación de la UPS Botón de Encendido/Apagado Conector de entrada IEC-C14 Dos receptáculos de 5-15 (Segmento de carga 2) Conector EBM Figure 2. Panel posterior de la UPS (panel posterior 1000 W, 120 V)Instalación y arranque | 53 Cómo retirar la cubierta frontal de la UPS 3 Extraiga la cubierta frontal de la UPS. Empuje las dos pestillas de la cubierta para liberar la cubierta frontal y levantarla. Cómo extraer la cubierta de la batería 4 Desatornille el tornillo de apriete manual de la cubierta metálica de la batería y levante para extraer la cubierta.54 | Instalación y arranque Cómo conectar el conector de la batería interna 5 Conecte el conector de la batería interna. 6 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta metálica de la batería. Apriete el tornillo a 0,7 N·m (6,2 lb pulg.). 7 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta frontal de la UPS.Instalación y arranque | 55 Conectar el equipo 9 Conecte el equipamiento a la UPS Conecte el cable de comunicación de la computadora a la UPS (opcional) 8 8 Si planea utilizar el Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell, conecte su equipo al puerto USB o el puerto RS-232 mediante el uso del cable suministrado. 9 Enchufe el equipo para que esté protegido en los receptáculos exteriores de la UPS, pero no encienda el equipo protegido. NOTA: Verifique que los regímenes totales del equipo no excedan la capacidad de la UPS para prevenir una alarma de sobrecarga.56 | Instalación y arranque Conexión del cable de energía 10 Verifique que la entrada de energía a la UPS tenga protección de sobrecarga de corriente ascendente de acuerdo con el régimen de corriente del cable de energía. 11 Verifique que la entrada de energía a la UPS tenga protección de sobrecarga de corriente ascendente adecuada: Table 1. Régimen mínimo del disyuntor ascendente Potencia de salida de la UPS 120 V 208 V 230 V 500 W 15 A — 15 A 1000W 15 A — 15 A 1500 W (a 100 V) 1920 W 20 A — 15 A 12 Conecte el cable de alimentación de la UPS a un tomacorriente.Instalación y arranque | 57 Inicio de la UPS 13 Presione el botón del panel posterior de la UPS. Cómo completar el arranque 14 Verifique que el ícono Normal aparezca en la pantalla de resumen del estado UPS, que indica que la UPS funciona normalmente y todas las cargas están energizadas.58 | Instalación y arranque 15 En la pantalla de resumen de estado de UPS, presione el botón para comprobar las notificaciones y las alarmas activas. Solucione todas las alarmas activas antes de continuar. Consulte el “Diagnóstico de fallas” en la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W. Si no hay ninguna alarma activa, se muestra el mensaje “Ninguna alarma activa”. 16 Para cambiar otros valores predeterminados establecidos de fábrica, consulte “Funcionamiento” en la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W.Dellt 塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 系统使用 入门指南 H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意和警告 注意: “注意”表示可帮助您更好使用本软件的重要信息。 危险:“危险”表示紧急危险情况,如果不加以避免,将导致死亡或严重的伤害。 警告:“警告”表示潜在危险情况,如果不加以避免,将会导致死亡或伤害。 小心:“小心”表示潜在危险情况,如果不加以避免,可能导致轻度或中度伤害,或财产损失事故。 危险: 遵守下列须知有助于防止紧急危险情况,其若不加以避免,将导致死亡或严重的伤害: S 本 UPS 包含危险致命的电压。所有维修和服务都只能由经过授权的维修人员进行。UPS 中没有用户可自行维修的部件。 本文档所含信息如有更改,恕不另行通知。 E 2009 Dell Inc. 保留所有权利。 未经 Dell Inc. 书面允许,严禁以任何形式进行复制。 本文中使用的商标:Dell和DELL 徽标为 Dell Inc.的商标;Phillips 为 Phillips Screw Company 的注册商标。 本文件中可能会使用其它商标或商业名称来指称拥有该商标或名称权利的实体或其产品。Dell Inc. 对不属于自己的商标和商品名称,不拥有任何产权利益。 2009 年 7 月系统性能 | 61 系统性能 该 UPS 可提供杰出的性能与可靠性,其独特优势包括: S 降压与升压调节,通过调节电压波动确保您的负荷电压稳定。 S 即使没有公用电源,电池启动功能也能给 UPS 供电。 S 对 1000–1920W UPS 型号,通过可选的外部电池模块(EBM)延长运行时间。 S 两个标准通信端口(USB 和 DB-9 串行口)。 S 为了加强电源保护和控制,可选择增强通信能力的 Dell 网络管理卡。 S 网络抗瞬变装置可保护您的网络通信设备免受电涌的损害。 S 高级电源管理,用Dell UPS 管理软件进行平滑关机和电力监控。 S 通过称为载入段的单独插座组进行顺序关机和负荷管理。 S 不必拨打服务电话,即可自行对固件进行方便升级。 S 全球代理认证提供支持。62 | 查找信息 查找信息 CAUTION:安全、环保和法规信息文件提供了重要的安全和法规信息。 您正在寻找什么? 在此查找 S 我的 UPS 的用户指南 S Dell 网络管理卡 用户指南 S Dell UPS 管理软件 注意:文件和软件更新可在 support.dell.com 找到。 Dell UPS 光盘 S 规格 S 如何配置 UPS 设置 S 如何排查故障和解决问题 Dell UPS 用户指南 用户指南可从 Dell UPS 光盘和 support.dell.com 上找到。 S 安全操作说明 S 行政法规信息 S 回收信息 安全、环保和法规信息 S 保修信息 S 条款和条件(仅限美国) S 最终用户许可协议 Dell 保修和支持信息 S 支持信息 Dell 支持网站 — support.dell.com 注意:选择您的区域或业务部门,以查看合适的支 持网站。安装和启动 | 63 安装和启动 CAUTION: 在进行本文件中的步骤之前,请先阅读和遵循 安全、环保和法规信息 文件中的安全操作说明和重要法规信息。 CAUTION:小心:机箱较重 [500W: 11.6 千克(25.6 磅);1000W:18.3 千克(40.3 磅);1920/1500W: 30.5 千克 (67.2 磅)]。请在拆开包装和搬动机箱时特别小心。 本节描述首次安装系统的步骤。 打开系统 1 打开系统,查看每个物品项目。 2 以负责任的方式处理包装材料或回收循环利用,或者收起存放以备将来使用。64 | 安装和启动 UPS 识别 本节介绍 Dell 塔式 UPS 的前面板和后面板。后面板详细情况请参见 Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南 。 外盖闩锁 外盖闩锁 LCD 显示面板 滚动按钮(向上或向后) 选择按钮 滚动按钮(向下或向前) 图 1. Dell 塔式 UPS 通信端口 六个 5-15 插座(载入段 1) 网络抗瞬变装置 USB 端口 UPS 通信槽 开/关按钮 IEC-C14 输入连接器 两个 5-15 插座(载入段 2) EBM 接线器 图 2. UPS 后面板(1000W (瓦),120V (伏)后面板)安装和启动 | 65 取下 UPS 前盖 3 取下 UPS 前盖。 推动两个外盖闩锁,以松开前盖,并拉起。 取下电池盖 4 松开电池金属盖上的翼形螺钉,并提起以取下外盖。66 | 安装和启动 连接内部电池连接器 5 连接内部电池接线器。 6 重新放回电池金属盖。 将螺钉拧至 0.7 牛米(N·m) (6.2 磅英寸(lb in))。 7 重新放回 UPS 前盖。安装和启动 | 67 连接设备 9 将设备连接到 UPS 上 将计算机的通信电缆连接到 UPS 上(可选) 8 8 如果您计划使用Dell UPS 管理软件,用提供的电缆将您的电脑连接到 USB 端口或 RS-232 端口。 9 将需要保护的设备插入 UPS 输出插座,但不要启动受保护的设备。 注意:确保全部设备的总额定值不超过 UPS 的负载能力,以防止出现过载警报。68 | 安装和启动 连接电源线 10 根据电源线额定电流验证 UPS 的功率输入具有上游过电流保护。 11 验证 UPS 的功率输入具有足够的上游过电流保护: 图 1. 最小上游断路器额定值 UPS 输出功率 120V(伏) 208V(伏) 230V(伏) 500W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1000W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1500W (瓦) (在100V(伏)时) 1920W(瓦) 20A(安) — 15A(安) 12 将 UPS 电源线插入电源插座。安装和启动 | 69 启动 UPS 13 按下 UPS 后面板上的 按钮。 完成启动 14 确认“正常”(Normal)图标 显示在 UPS 状态概要屏幕上,这表明 UPS 运转正常,任何负荷都有动力供给。 15 在 UPS 状态屏上,按下 按钮,查看现有警报或通知。 解决所有警报问题,然后继续。 参见Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南中的“故障处理”。 如果没有现有警报,会出现“无现有警报”(No Active Alarms)信息。 16 要更改其它出厂设置默认项,请参见Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南中的“操作”。70 | 安装和启动Dellt 塔式 UPS 500W、1000W 和 1920/1500W 系統使用 入門指南 H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意和警告 注意: 「注意」表示可幫助您更好地使用本軟體的重要資訊。 危險: 「危險」表示緊急危險情況,如果不加以避免,將導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。 警告: 「警告」表示潛在危險情況,如果不加以避免,將會導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。 小心:「小心」表示潛在危險情況,如果不加以避免,可能導致輕度或中度傷害,或財產損失事故。 危險: 遵守以下須知有助於防止緊急危險情況,其若不加以避免,將導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。 S 本 UPS 包含危險致命的電壓。所有維修和服務都只能由經過授權的維修人員進行。UPS 中沒有可由使用者自行維修的零件。 本文件所含資訊如有變更,恕不另行通知。 E 2009 Dell Inc. 保留所有權利。 未經 Dell Inc. 書面允許,嚴格禁止以任何形式進行複製。 本文中使用的商標:Dell和Dell 標誌為 Dell Inc.的商標;Phillips 為 Phillips Screw Company 的註冊商標。 本文件中可能會使用其他商標或商業名稱來指涉擁有該商標或名稱權利的實體或其產品。Dell Inc. 對不屬於自己的商標和商品名稱,不擁有任何產權利益。 2009 年 7 月系統性能 | 73 系統性能 該 UPS 可提供傑出的性能與可靠性,包括下列獨有優勢: S 降壓與升壓調節,藉由調節電壓波動確保您的負載電壓穩定。 S 電池啟動功能使您能在沒有外部電源時,也能使 UPS 通電。 S 1000–1920W UPS 型號可藉由選配的 外部電池模組(EBM)延長運行時間。 S 兩個標準通信連接埠(USB 和 DB--9 序列埠)。 S 選配的 Dell 網路管理卡 具有增強通訊功能,可增加電源保護和控制。 S 網路瞬態過電保護裝置可保護您的網路通信設備免受電壓突波的損害。 S 使用Dell UPS 管理軟體的先進電源管理,進行平滑關機和電力監控。 S 藉由稱為負載區段的單獨插座組進行順序關機和負載管理。 S 不必撥打服務電話,即可自行輕鬆的升級韌體。 S 提供全球代理商認證支援。74 | 尋找資訊 尋找資訊 CAUTION: 安全、環保和法規資訊文件提供重要的安全和法規資訊。 您正在尋找什麼? 在此尋找 S 我的 UPS 的使用者指南 S Dell 網路管理卡 使用者指南 S Dell UPS 管理軟體 注意:文件和軟體更新可在 support.dell.com 找到。 Dell UPS 光碟 S 規格 S 如何進行 UPS 設定 S 如何排除故障和解決問題 Dell UPS 使用者指南 使用者指南可從 Dell UPS 光碟和 support.dell.com 上取得。 S 安全操作說明 S 行政法規資訊 S 回收資訊 安全、環保和法規資訊 S 保固資訊 S 條款與條件(僅限美國) S 一般使用者授權協議 Dell 保固和支援資訊 S 支援資訊 Dell 支援網站 — support.dell.com 注意:選擇您的區域或業務部門,以查看合適的支援 網站。安裝和啟動 | 75 安裝和啟動 CAUTION: 在進行本文件中的步驟之前,請先閱讀和遵循 安全、環保和法規資訊 文件中的安全操作說明和重要法規資訊。 CAUTION:小心: 機箱較重 [500W; 11.6 公斤 (25.6 磅); 1000W; 18.3 公斤 (40.3 磅); 1920/1500W: 30.5 公斤 (67.2 磅)]。 在拆開包裝和搬動機箱時請特別小心。 本節描述首次安裝系統的步驟。 拆除系統包裝 1 拆除系統包裝,並檢查確定每個項目。 2 以負責任的方式棄置或回收包裝材料,或者將其存放以備將來使用。76 | 安裝和啟動 UPS 的識別 本節介紹 Dell 塔式 UPS 的前面板和後面板。後面板詳細情況請參見 Dell在線互動機架式 UPS 500W、1000W、和 1920/1500W使用者指南。 外蓋閂鎖 外蓋閂鎖 LCD 顯示面板 捲軸按鈕(向上或向後) 選擇按鈕 捲軸按鈕(向下或向前) 圖 1. Dell 塔式UPS 通信連接埠 六個 5-15 插座(負載區段 1) 網路瞬態過電保護裝置 USB 連接埠 UPS 通信槽 開/關按鈕 IEC--C14 輸入連接器 兩個 5-15 插座(負載區段 2) EBM 接線器 圖 2. UPS 後面板(1000W,120V 後面板)安裝和啟動 | 77 取下 UPS 前蓋 3 取下 UPS 前蓋。 推動兩個外蓋閂鎖,以鬆開前蓋並將其拉起。 取下電池蓋 4 鬆開電池金屬蓋上的翼形螺釘,提起以取下外蓋。78 | 安裝和啟動 連接內部電池連接器 5 連接內部電池接線器。 6 重新放囘電池金屬蓋。 將螺釘擰至 0.7 牛米(N·m)(6.2 磅吋(lb in))。 7 重新放囘 UPS 前蓋。安裝和啟動 | 79 連接設備 9 將設備連接到 UPS 上 將電腦的通信電纜連接 到 UPS 上(可選 8 8 如果您計劃使用Dell UPS 管理軟體,請使用提供的電纜將您的電腦連接到 USB連接埠或 RS--232 連接埠。 9 將要保護的設備插入 UPS 輸出插座,但不要開啟受保護設備的電源。 注意: 確保全部設備的縂額定值未超過 UPS 的負載能力,以防止出現過載警報。80 | 安裝和啟動 連接電源線 10 根據電源線額定電流驗證 UPS 的電源輸入具有上游過電保護。 11 驗證 UPS 的電源輸入具有足夠的上游過電保護: 表 1. 最小上游斷路器額定值 UPS 輸出功率 120V(伏) 208V(伏) 230V(伏) 500W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1000W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1500W(瓦) (當100V(伏)時) 1920W(瓦) 20A(安) — 15A(安) 12 將 UPS 電源線插入電源插座。安裝和啟動 | 81 啟動 UPS 13 按下 UPS 後面板上的 按鈕。 完成啟動 14 確認「正常」(Normal)圖示 顯示在 UPS 狀態概要螢幕上,這表明 UPS 運作正常, 任何負載都有電力提供。 15 在 UPS 狀態概要螢幕上,按下 按鈕,查看作用中的警報或通知。解決所有警報問題, 然後繼續。 參見 Dell在線互動機架式 UPS 500W、1000W和 1920/1500W使用者指南 中的「故障處理」。 如果沒有作用中的警報,會出現「無作用中警報」(No Active Alarms)訊息。 16 若要變更其它出廠預設設定,請參見Dell在線互動塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W和 1920/1500W 使用者指南中的「操作」。82 | 安裝和啟動Dellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com참고 및 경고 참고:"참고"는 소프트웨어를 더 잘 활용하는 데 도움이 되는 중요한 정보를 나타냅니다. 위험:"위험"은 피하지 않을 경우, 급박한 위험 상황이 사망이나 중상의 결과를 야기할 수 있음을 나타냅니다. 경고:"경고"는 피하지 않을 경우 죽음이나 상해를 야기할 수 있는 잠재적 위험 상황을 표시합니다. 주의:"주의"는 피하지 않을 경우 경미하거나 보통의 상해 또는 재산 손실 사고를 야기할 수 있는 잠재적 위험 상황을 표시합니다. 위험: 아래의 지시사항을 준수하여, 피하지 않을 경우 사망이나 중상의 결과를 야기할 수 있는 급박한 위험 상황을 방지하십시오. S UPS는 사망에 이를 수 있는 전압을 갖고 있습니다. 모든 수리와 정비는 자격있는 서비스 요원만이 수행해야 합니다. UPS 내부에는 사용자가 정비할 수 없는 부품이 있습니다. 이 문서에 포함된 정보는 고지없이 변경될 수 있습니다. E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Dell Inc.의 서면 허락 없이 어떤 방식으로든 복제를 하는 것은 엄격히 금지됩니다. 이 문서에서 사용된 상표 : Dell및DELL로고는 Dell Inc.의 상표입니다. Phillips는Phillips Screw Company 의 등록상표입니다. 기타 상표와 상호를 관련 상표 및 명칭 또는 관련 제품에 대한 권리를 가지는 당사자를 지칭하기 위해 이 문서에서 사용될 수 있습니다. Dell Inc.는 Dell Inc.가 소유하지 않은 상표 및 상호에 대한 재산적 이해관계를 부인합니다. 2009 년 7월시스템 기능 | 85 시스템 기능 탁월한 성능과 신뢰도를 제공하면서, 본 UPS는 다음과 같은 특유의 장점을 지닙니다. S 전압 변동을 교정하여 사용자의 부하에 대한 조정 전압을 보장하는 승강압형 전압 조정. S 상용 전력을 사용할 수 없는 경우에도 UPS에 전력을 공급하는 스타트온 배터리 (start--on--battery) 기능. S 선택사양인 1000–1920W UPS 모델용 외장 배터리 모듈(EBM)을 갖춘 확장 런타임. S 2개의 표준 통신 포트 (USB 및 DB--9 시리얼 포트). S 전원 보호 및 제어 능력을 제고하기 위한 강화된 통신 기능을 갖춘 선택사양인 Dell Network Management Card. S 네트워크 통신 장비를 서지(surge)로부터 보호하는 네트워크 과도전류(transient) 프로텍터. S 안정적인 종료 및 전원 감시를 위한 Dell UPS Management Software로 수행되는 고급 전원 관리. S 로드 세그먼트라고 하는 별도의 콘센트 그룹을 통한 순차적 종료 및 부하 관리. S 서비스 요청 없이도 쉽게 업그레이드할 수 있는 펌웨어. S 세계적인 인증기관의 각종 인증을 득함.86 | 정보 찾아보기 정보 찾아보기 주의:안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 문서는 중요한 안전 및 규제 정보를 제공합니다. 찾는 정보 항목 정보의 소재 S UPS용 사용자 설명서 S Dell Network Management Card용 사용자 설명서 S Dell UPS Management Software 참고: 문서 및 소프트웨어 업데이트는 support.dell.com에서 조회할 수 있습니다. Dell UPS 디스크 S 사양 S UPS 설정 구성 방법 S 문제점 처리 및 해결 방법 Dell UPS 사용자 설명서 사용자 설명서는 Dell UPS 디스크 및 support.dell.com에서 조회할 수 있습니다. S 안전 지침 S 규제 정보 S 재활용 정보 안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 S 보증 정보 S 약관 (미국만 해당) S 최종사용자 라이센스 계약 Dell 보증 및 지원 정보 S 지원 정보 Dell 지원 웹사이트 — support.dell.com 참고:적절한 지원 사이트를 보려면 해당 지역이나 사업분야를 선택하십시오.설치 및 시동 | 87 설치 및 시동 주의:본 문서의 절차를 수행하기 전에 안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 문서에 있는 안전 지침 및 중요한 규제정보를 읽고 준수하십시오. 주의:캐비닛은 무겁습니다[500W : 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W : 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W : 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)]. 주의하여 캐비닛의 포장을 풀고 캐비닛을 옮기십시오. 이 절은 귀하의 시스템을 처음 설치하는 절차를 설명합니다. 시스템 포장풀기 1 시스템 포장을 풀고 각 품목을 확인하십시오. 2 포장은 해당 처리방식에 따라 폐기하거나 재활용하십시오. 또는, 추후 사용하려면 보관하십시오.88 | 설치 및 시동 UPS 확인하기 이 절에서는 Dell Tower UPS의 앞면 패널과 뒷면 패널을 보여줍니다. 모든 뒷면 패널의 세부에 대해서는 Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서를 참조하십시오. 덮개 걸쇠 덮개 걸쇠 LCD패널 스크롤 버튼(위로 또는 뒤로) 버튼 선택 스크롤 버튼(아래로 또는 앞으로) 그림 1. Dell Tower UPS 통신 포트 6개의5-15콘센트 (로드 세그먼트1) 네트워크 과도전류 프로텍터 USB포트 UPS통신 베이 ON/OFF버튼 IEC-C14입력 커넥터 2개의5-15콘센트 (로드 세그먼트 2) EBM 커넥터 그림 2. UPS 뒷면 패널 (1000W, 120V 뒷면 패널)설치 및 시동 | 89 UPS 앞면 덮개 제거하기 3 UPS 앞면 덮개를 제거하십시오. 두 개의 덮개 걸쇠를 밀어서 앞면 덮개를 풀고 당겨 올리십시오. 배터리 덮개 제거하기 4 금속 배터리 덮개의 손나사를 풀고 들어올려 덮개를 제거하십시오.90 | 설치 및 시동 내부 배터리 커넥터 연결하기 5 내부 배터리 커넥터를 연결하십시오. 6 금속 배터리 덮개를 교체하십시오. 나사에 0.7 N·m (6.2 lb in)의 토크를 주십시오. 7 UPS 앞면 덮개를 교체하십시오.설치 및 시동 | 91 장비 연결하기 9 장비를UPS로 연결 컴퓨터에서UPS로 통신 케이블을 연결(선택사양) 8 8 Dell UPS Management Software를 사용하실 계획이라면, 제공된 케이블을 이용하여 컴퓨터를 USB 포트나 RS--232 포트로 연결하십시오. 9 보호할 장비를 UPS 출력 콘센트에 꽂되 켜지는 마십시오. 참고: 과부하 경보를 방지하려면 장비의 전체 정격사양이 UPS 용량을 초과하지 않도록 확인하십시오.92 | 설치 및 시동 전원 코드 연결하기 10 UPS로 입력되는 전원이 전원코드 전류 정격에 따라 업스트림 과전류 보호를 받고 있는지 확인하십시오. 11 UPS로 입력되는 전원이 적당한 업스트림 과전류에 대해 보호 받고 있는지 확인하십시오. 표 1. 최소 업스트림 회로차단기 정격 UPS 출력 전원 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (100V) 1920W 20A — 15A 12 UPS 전원코드를 전원 콘센트에 연결하십시오.설치 및 시동 | 93 UPS 시동하기 13 UPS 앞면 패널의 버튼을 누르십시오. 시동 완료하기 14 UPS가 정상적으로 작동하고 있고 모든 부하가 전력을 공급받고 있음을 표시하는, 정상 아이콘 이 UPS 상태 요약 화면에 나타나는지 확인하십시오. 15 UPS 상태 요약 화면에서, 활성 경보나 통지를 확인하려면 버튼을 누르십시오. 후속 작업을 계속하기 전에 활성 경보를 처리하십시오. Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서의 "장애처리"를 참조하십시오. 활성 경보가 없을 경우, "활성 경보 없음" 메시지가 나타납니다. 16 기타 공장설정값을 변경하려면 Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서의 "작동"을 참조하십시오.94 | 설치 및 시동Delltタワー型UPS 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意および警告 注記: 「注記」は、ソフトウェアを有効に利用するための重要な情報を示しています。 危険: 「危険」は、回避しないとほぼ確実に死亡、または重傷を招く危険な状況を示しています。 警告: 「警告」は、回避しないと死亡、または重傷を招く潜在的に危険な状況を示しています。 注意: 「注意」は、回避しないと軽傷、または中程度の傷害を招く恐れがある潜在的に危険な状況を示 しています。 危険: 避しないとほぼ確実に死亡、または重傷を招く危険な状況を防ぐため、以下の説明をよくお読みくだ さい。 S このUPSの中には致死的な電圧が掛かっています。 すべての修理や点検は、公認のサービ ススタッフのみが行わなければいけません。 当資料の情報は、予告なく変更されることがあります。 E 2009 Dell Inc.無断複写・転載を禁じます。 Dell Inc.の書面による許可のない複写は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。. DellおよびDELLのロゴは、Dell Inc.の登録商標です:Phillipsは、Phillips Screw Companyの登録商標です。 本書に使用されているその他の登録商標および商標名は、商標や名称を主張する事業体、あるいは製品のいずれかに言及しま す。Dell Inc.は、Dell自身が所有する登録商標および商標権におけるいかなる所有権を一切放棄します。 2009年7月システムの特徴 | 97 システムの特徴 UPSは優れた性能や信頼性を提供し、以下のような独自の利点がございます: S 電圧変動を修正することで、負荷への一貫した電圧を保証する「昇降圧」電圧調節。 S 外部電力がないときでもUPSの電力を入れることができる始動電池の能力。 S 拡張ランタイムおよびオプションとして1000--1920W UPS型用 の外付けバッテリーモジュール(外付けバッテリーモジュール)付き。 S 2つの標準通信ポート(USBおよびDB--9シリアルポート)。 S オプションとして、増加電力の保護や制御を行う高度通信機能付きDell ネットワークマネージメントカード。 S サージからネットワーク通信装置を保護するネットワーク過度電流プロテクタ。 S スムースなシャットダウンや電力管理を行うDell UPS制御ソフトウェアおよび高度電力 管理。 S 負荷セグメントと呼ばれる個別のレセプタクルグループを通じた逐次シャットダウンおよび 負荷制御。 S カスタマーサービスに問い合わせる必要なく、 簡単にアップグレードができるファームウェア。 S 世界中の代理店の承認による支持。98 | 情報検出 情報検出 注意:: 安全、環境、規則に関する情報資料には、安全および規定に関する重要情報が含まれています。 どんな情報をお探しですか? こちらでご覧いただけます S UPSユーザーガイド S Dellネットワークマネージメントカード用の ユーザーガイド S Dell UPS制御ソフトウェア 注記:説明書およびソフトウェアの更新情報 は、support.dell.comでご確認いただけます。 Dell UPS ディスク S 仕様 S UPSの設定方法 S トラブルシューティングおよび問題の解決方法 Dell UPS ユーザーガイド ユーザーガイドはDell UPSディスクおよび support.dell.comで入手することができます。 S 安全に関する説明書 S 規則に関する情報 S リサイクルに関する情報 安全、環境、規則に関する情報 S 保証情報 S 使用上の条件(アメリカのみ) S エンドユーザー使用許諾契約 Dell 保証およびサポート情報 S サポート情報 Dell サポート用ウェブサイト ‒ support.dell.com 注意:使用する地域や事業区分を選択し、 適切なサポートサイトをご覧ください。インストールおよび設定 | 99 インストールおよび設定 注意:: 当資料の手順を実施する前に、安全、環境、規則に関する情報資料に記載されている安全に関す る説明書および重要な規制情報をご覧いただき、これらの情報に従ってください。 注意:: キャビネットの重量[500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)] 注意して開梱し、キャビネットを移動します。 このセクションは、最初におけるシステムの設定方法について説明しています。 システムの開梱 1 システムを開梱し、各項目を識別します。 2 責任を持ってパッケージを処分、またはリサイクルし、あるいは将来使えるように保管し ます。100 | インストールおよび設定 UPSの識別 このセクションは、Dellタワー型UPSのフロントパネルおよびリヤパネルを示しています。 リヤパネルの詳細に関しましては、Dellラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドをご参照ください。 カバー止め カバー止め LCDパネル スクロールボタン (上方向、または後方) 選択ボタン スクロールボタン (下方向、または前方) 図 1. Dellタワー型UPS 通信ポート 5-15レセプタクル 6個 (負荷セグメント1) ネットワーク過度 電流プロテクタ USBポート カバーを取り外します オン/オフボタン IEC-C14 入力コネクタ 5-15レセプタクル 2個 EMB コネクタ (負荷セグメント2) 図 2. UPSリヤパネル(1000W、120Vリヤパネル)インストールおよび設定 | 101 UPSのフロントカバーの取り外し方法 3 UPSのフロントカバーを取り外します。 2個のカバー止めを押し、フロントカバーを開放し、引き上げます。 バッテリーカバーの取り外し方 4 金属製バッテリーカバーの蝶ネジを外し、カバーを持ち上げて取り外します。102 | インストールおよび設定 内臓バッテリーコネクタの接続方法 5 内臓バッテリーコネクタを接続します。 6 金属製バッテリーカバーを取り外します。 ネジを0.7 N·m (6.2 lb in)のトルクで締めます。 7 UPSフロントカバーを取り外します。インストールおよび設定 | 103 装置の接続方法 9 装置をUPSへ接続 コンピューターからUPSへの通信 ケーブルを接続(オプション) 8 8 Dell UPS制御ソフトウェアを使用する場合は、同梱のケーブルを使って、 コンピューターをUSBポートやRS--232ポートへ接続してください。 9 保護する装置をUPS出力レセプタクルに差し込みます。ただし保護装置の電源は入れない でください。 注記:: 過負荷アラームを防ぐため、装置の定格の合計がUPSの容量を超えていないか確認してください。104 | インストールおよび設定 電源コードの接続方法 10 UPSへの電源入力には、電源コードの定格電流に従い、逆流過電流保護があるか確認して ください。 11 UPSへの電源入力には、十分な逆流過電流保護があるか確認してください。 表 1. 上流遮断機最小定格 UPS出力 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (100V時) 1920W 20A — 15A 12 UPSの電源コードを電源コンセントに差し込みます。インストールおよび設定 | 105 UPSの起動方法 13 UPSのリヤパネルの ボタンを押します。 起動の完了 14 UPSが正常に動作し、負荷電力があることを示す「正常」アイコン がUPSのステータス 要約画面に現れていることをお確かめください。 15 アクティブになっているアラームや通知を確かめるには、UPSステータス要約画面の ボタ ンを押します。 続ける前に、アクティブになっているアラームを解消してください。Dell ラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドの 「トラブルシューティング」をご参照ください。 アクティブになっているアラームがない場合は、「アクティブアラームなし」と表示され たメッセージが現れます。 16 その他の工場出荷時設定の変更は、Dellラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドの「操作方法」をご参照ください。106 | インストールおよび設定*1642018091* 164201809 1 Dell PowerEdge T420 Guide de mise en route Modèle réglementaire: E20S Series Type réglementaire: E20S001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE: Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION: Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT: Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée, et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation. 2012 - 05 Rev. A01Installation et configuration AVERTISSEMENT: Avant d'exécuter la procédure suivante, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système. Déballage du système Sortez le système de son emballage et identifiez chaque élément. Facultatif l— Configuration du rack Si vous utilisez la du rack en option, assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes de sécurité et les instructions d'installation en rack fournies avec le système. Stabilisation d'un système en tour AVERTISSEMENT: Le système en tour dispose de quatre pieds sur son panneau inférieur qui peuvent être réglés pour aider à stabiliser correctement le système. S'il est impossible de régler les pieds, il y a un risque que le système bascule, provoquant des blessures corporelles ou endommageant le système. Figure 1. Réglage des pieds du système en tour 3En option : connexion du clavier, de la souris et du moniteur Figure 2. Connexion du clavier, de la souris et du moniteur Connectez le clavier, la souris et le moniteur (facultatif). Les connecteurs à l'arrière du système sont assortis d'icônes indiquant quels câbles brancher à chaque connecteur. Assurez-vous de serrer les vis (le cas échéant) sur le connecteur du câble du moniteur. Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation Figure 3. Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation Connectez le ou les câbles d'alimentation au système et, si vous utilisez un moniteur, branchez son câble d'alimentation. 4Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation Figure 4. Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation Faites une boucle comme indiqué dans l'illustration, puis fixez-le à l'aide de la sangle fournie. Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité du ou des câbles sur une prise de courant mise à la terre ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]). Mise sous tension du système Figure 5. Mise sous tension du système Retirez le cadre en option s'il est installé. Appuyez sur le bouton de mise sous tension. Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume. 5Installation du cadre en option Figure 6. Installation du cadre Installez le cadre (facultatif). Finalisation de l'installation du système d'exploitation Si un système d'exploitation était préinstallé sur votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la documentation du système d'exploitation livrée avec votre système. Pour une première installation du système d'exploitation, reportez-vous à la documentation concernant l'installation et la configuration de votre système d'exploitation. Assurez-vous que le système d'exploitation est bien installé avant d'installer du matériel ou logiciel n'ayant pas été fourni avec le système. REMARQUE: Reportez-vous à l'adresse dell.com/ossupport pour obtenir les dernières informations sur les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge. Contrat de licence des logiciels Dell Avant d'utiliser votre système, veuillez lire le contrat de licence du logiciel Dell fourni avec celui-ci. Vous devez considérer les CD, DVD, ou disquettes du logiciel installé par Dell comme étant des copies de SAUVEGARDE du logiciel installé sur le disque dur de votre système. Si vous n'acceptez pas les termes du contrat, veuillez appeler le numéro d'assistance client. Les clients aux États-Unis doivent appeler le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). Les clients en-dehors des États-Unis doivent se rendre sur support.dell.com et sélectionner leur pays ou région en haut de la page. Autres informations utiles AVERTISSEMENT: Reportez-vous aux informations concernant la sécurité et les réglementations qui accompagnent le système. Des informations sur la garantie peuvent être incluses à ce document ou à un document séparé. • Le Manuel de l'utilisateur fournit des informations concernant les fonctionnalités du système et décrit comment dépanner le système et installer ou remplacer des composants système. Ce document est disponible en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack, le cas échéant. • Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et des outils permettant de configurer et de gérer le système, notamment les supports du système d'exploitation, du logiciel de gestion du système, des mises à jour système et des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. 6REMARQUE: Vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals et lisez les informations de mise à jour en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents. REMARQUE: Nous vous recommandons de télécharger et d'installer la dernière version du BIOS, du pilote et du micrologiciel de gestion des systèmes sur votre système depuis support.dell.com. Obtention d'une assistance technique Si vous ne comprenez pas une procédure décrite dans ce guide ou si le système ne fonctionne pas comme prévu, consultez votre Manuel du propriétaire. Dell offre des formations et certifications sur le matériel approfondies. Pour des informations supplémentaires, voir dell.com/training. Ce service n'est pas offert dans toutes les régions. Informations NOM Les informations suivantes, qui s'appliquent à l'appareil décrit dans ce document, sont fournies conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) : Importateur : Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 -11º Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Numéro de modèle : E20S Tension d'alimentation : 100-240 V CA (avec bloc d'alimentation secteur de 495 W, 550 W, 750 W et 1 100 W) Fréquence : 50 Hz/60 Hz (bloc d'alimentation secteur) Consommation électrique : 12 A à 6,5 A (X2) (avec bloc d'alimentation secteur de 1 100 W) 10 A à 5 A (X2) (avec bloc d'alimentation secteur de 750 W) 6,5 A à 3 A (X2) (avec bloc d'alimentation secteur de 495 W) 7,4 A à 3,7 A (avec bloc d'alimentation secteur non redondant de 550 W) Caractéristiques techniques REMARQUE: Les caractéristiques suivantes se limitent à celles que la législation impose de fournir avec le système. Pour une liste complète des caractéristiques actuelles de votre ordinateur, consultez le site Web support.dell.com. Alimentation Bloc d'alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation) Puissance 495 W, 550 W, 750 W ou 1 100 W Dissipation thermique REMARQUE: La dissipation thermique est calculée par rapport à la puissance nominale du bloc d'alimentation. 1 908 BTU/h maximum (bloc d'alimentation 495 W) 2 891 BTU/h maximum (bloc d'alimentation 750 W) 4 100 BTU/h maximum (bloc d'alimentation 1 100 W) 2 317 BTU/h maximum (bloc d'alimentation non redondant 550 W) 7Alimentation Tension REMARQUE: Ce système est également conçu pour être connecté aux systèmes d'alimentation informatiques avec une tension phase à phase ne dépassant pas 230 V. de 100 à 240 VCA, réglage automatique, de 50 à 60 Hz Batterie Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium Caractéristiques physiques Tour Hauteur 443,3 mm avec le pied 430,3 mm sans le pied Largeur 304,5 mm avec le pied ouvert 218 mm avec le pied fermé Profondeur 542,2 cm sans le cadre 558,6 cm avec le cadre Rack Hauteur 218 mm Largeur 430,3 mm sans les pattes 482,4 mm avec les pattes Profondeur (minimale) 538,4 mm depuis l'arrière des pattes et avec un module de bloc d'alimentation câblé Profondeur (maximale) 584,05 mm depuis l'arrière des pattes et avec un ventilateur système externe Poids de configuration maximale 30. 16 kg Poids à vide 15,6 kg Environnement REMARQUE: Pour en savoir plus sur les mesures d'exploitation liées à différentes configurations particulières, rendez-vous sur dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Température En fonctionnement Fonctionnement continu : 10 à 35 °C avec une humidité relative (HR) de 10 à 80%, avec point de condensation maximal de 26 °C. Réduction maximale admissible de la température sèche de 1 °C/300 mètres au-dessus de 900 mètres. 8Environnement REMARQUE: Pour plus d'informations sur la plage de températures étendue et les configurations prises en charge, voir support.dell.com/manuals. Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C avec un gradient thermique maximal de 20 °C par heure Humidité relative Entreposage 5 à 95 % à une température dans un environnement humide maximale de 38 °C. Tolérance maximale aux vibrations En fonctionnement 0,26 Grms de 5 à 350 Hz pendant 5 minutes (toutes orientations de fonctionnement) Entreposage 1,87 Grms de 10 à 500 Hz pendant 15 minutes (les 6 orientations de fonctionnement testées) Choc maximal En fonctionnement Un choc de 31 G pendant 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) pour un système installé dans la position de fonctionnement Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Six chocs consécutifs sur les axes x, y et z en positif et négatif (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) d'impulsion d'onde carrée de 27 G avec un changement de vitesse de 597 cm/s. Altitude: En fonctionnement De –15,2 à 3 048 m REMARQUE: Pour les altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres, la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 17,22 °C tous les 300 mètres. Entreposage De –15,2 m à 10 668 m Niveau de contamination aérienne Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 9 Installing and Removing the Cable Management Arm NOTE: You can attach the CMA to either the right or left mounting rail, depending on how you intend to route cables from the system. Mounting the CMA on the side opposite of the power supplies is recommended; otherwise, the CMA must be disconnected in order to remove the outer power supply. You mustremove the tray before removing the power supplies. At the back of the system, fit the latch on the front end of the CMA on the innermost bracket of the slide assembly until the latch engages (1). Fit the other latch on the end of the outermost bracket until the latch engages (2). To remove the CMA, disengage both latches by pressing the CMA release buttons at the top of the inner and outer latch housings (3). Installation et retrait du passe-câbles REMARQUE : vous pouvez fixer le passe-câbles sur la gauche ou la droite du rail de montage, en fonction de la façon dont vous voulez acheminer les câbles dans le système. Il est conseillé d'installer le passe-câbles du côté opposé aux blocs d'alimentation. Dans le cas contraire, vous devrez le déconnecter en cas de retrait du bloc d'alimentation extérieur. Vous devezretirer le plateau avant de retirer les blocs d'alimentation. À l'arrière du système, placez le loquet situé sur la partie avant du passe-câbles sur le support interne du rail coulissant jusqu'à ce que le loquet s'enclenche (1). Placez l'autre extrémité du loquet sur le support externe jusqu'à ce que le loquet s'enclenche (2). Pour retirer le passe-câbles, dégagez les deux loquets en appuyant sur les boutons de dégagement du passe-câbles situés en haut des logements des loquets interne et externe (3). Installieren und Entfernen des Kabelführungsarms ANMERKUNG: Sie können den Kabelführungsarm an der rechten oder der linken Montageschiene befestigen, je nachdem, wie Sie die Systemkabel verlegen wollen. Empfohlen wird die Montage des Kabelführungsarms auf der den Netzteilen gegenüberliegenden Seite; andernfalls muss zum Entfernen des äußeren Netzteils der Kabelführungsarm abgenommen werden. Sie müssen vor dem Entfernen der Netzteile die Auflage entfernen. Befestigen Sie auf der Systemrückseite die Raste am vorderen Ende des Kabelführungsarms an der inneren Halterung des Schienensatzes und lassen Sie die Verbindung einrasten (1). Befestigen Sie die andere Raste am Ende der äußeren Halterung und lassen Sie die Verbindung einrasten (2). Um den Kabelführungsarm zu entfernen, lösen Sie beide Verbindungen, indem Sie auf die Sperrklinken auf der Oberseite der inneren und äußeren Halterungsabdeckung drücken (3). 1 2 Cable Management Arm Installation Installation du passe-câbles | Installation des Kabelführungsarms | | Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables Moving the CMA Away from the CMA Tray The CMA can be pulled away from the system and extended away from the tray for access and service (1). At the hinged end, lift the CMA up and off of the tray to unseat it from the tray catch. Once it is unseated from the tray, swing the CMA away from the system (2). NOTE: You can also extend the CMA into the service position once it is cabled to access the back of the system. Dégagement du passe-câbles hors du plateau Vous pouvez dégager le passe-câbles du système et l'éloigner du plateau, si une intervention le nécessite (1). Sur la charnière, soulevez le passe-câbles du plateau pour le dégager du cliquet. Une fois le passe-câbles dégagé du plateau, faites-le pivoter pour l'éloigner du système (2). REMARQUE : vous pouvez également faire pivoter le passe-câbles une fois qu'il est installé afin de le mettre en position de maintenance et accéder à l'arrière du système. Wegführen des Kabelführungsarms von der Auflage Der Kabelführungsarm lässt sich für Zugang und Wartung vom System wegbewegen und ausziehen (1). Heben Sie den Kabelführungsarm am Scharnierende nach oben und von der Auflage herunter, um ihn davon zu lösen. Sobald er von der Auflage genommen ist, können Sie den Kabelführungsarm vom System weg schwenken (2). ANMERKUNG: Auch um auf die Systemrückseite zuzugreifen, können Sie den Kabelführungsarm im verkabelten Zustand in die Wartungsposition bringen. Separación del brazo para tendido de cables y la bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables Se puede tirar del brazo para tendido de cables para separarlo de la bandeja a fin de facilitar el acceso y el mantenimiento (1). Desde el extremo con bisagra, levante el brazo para tendido de cables hacia arriba y hacia fuera para desencajarlo del retén de la bandeja. Una vez desenganchado de la bandeja, haga rotar el brazo para tendido de cables para alejarlo del sistema (2). NOTA: También puede extender el brazo para tendido de cables en la posición de mantenimiento una vez que esté cableado para acceder a la parte posterior del sistema. Identifying the Cable Management Arm Kit Contents Locate the components for installing the Cable Management Arm (CMA) assembly: Cable Management Arm tray (1) Cable Management Arm (2) Nylon cable tie wraps (3) NOTE: To secure the CMA for shipment in the rack, loop the tie wraps around both baskets and tray and cinch them firmly. For larger CMAs, the tie wraps can be threaded through the inner and outer baskets and around the tray to secure them. Securing the CMA in this manner will also secure your system in unstable environments. Identification des composants du kit de passe-câbles Identifiez les composants de l'assemblage de passe-câbles à installer : Plateau du passe-câbles (1) Passe-câbles (2) Fixe-câbles en nylon (3) REMARQUE : si vous devez expédier le rack avec le passe-câbles, fixez le passe-câbles en introduisant les fixe-câbles à la fois dans le panier et dans le plateau, puis sanglez-les. Dans le cas de passe-câbles de plus grand format, vous pouvez faire passer les fixe-câbles dans les paniers interne et externe et autour du plateau pour qu'ils ne bougent pas. Ceci permet également de stabiliser le système si celui-ci se trouve dans un environnement instable. Bestandteile des Kits für den Kabelführungsarm Identifizieren Sie die Komponenten für die Installation des Kabelführungsarms: Auflage für den Kabelführungsarm (1) Kabelführungsarm (2) Kabelbinder aus Kunststoff (3) ANMERKUNG: Um den Kabelführungsarm zum Transport am Rack zu sichern, ziehen Sie die Kabelbinder um beide Kabeltunnel und die Auflage. Bei größeren Kabelführungsarmen können die Kabelbinder durch die inneren und äußeren Kabeltunnel und um die Auflage herum gefädelt und festgezogen werden. Ein derart gesicherter Kabelführungsarm kann außerdem das System in instabilen Umgebungen schützen. Installing and Removing the Cable Management Arm Tray NOTE: The CMA tray provides support and acts as a retainer for the CMA. Align and engage each side of the tray with the receiver brackets on the inner edges of the rails and push forward until the tray clicks into place (1). To remove the tray, squeeze the latch-release buttons on both sides toward the center and pull the tray out of the receiver brackets (2). Installation et retrait du plateau du passe-câbles REMARQUE : le plateau est un dispositif sur lequel repose le passe-câbles et le maintient en place. Placez chaque côté du plateau en face des supports situés sur les bords internes des rails et poussez-les jusqu'à ce que le plateau s'enclenche (1). Pour retirer le plateau, pincez les loquets de dégagement pour les ramener vers l'intérieur et sortez le plateau des supports (2). Installieren und Entfernen der Kabelführungsarm-Auflage ANMERKUNG: Die Kabelführungsarm-Auflage dient als Unterstützung und als Rückhaltemechanismus für den Kabelführungsarm. Führen Sie die Seiten der Auflage in die Aufnahmen auf den inneren Seiten der Schienen ein und drücken Sie die Auflage bis zum Einrasten nach vorn (1). Um die Auflage zu entfernen, schieben Sie die Sperrklinken auf beiden Seiten zur Mitte hin, und ziehen Sie die Auflage aus den Aufnahmen (2). Instalación y extracción de la bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables NOTA: La bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables actúa como pieza de soporte y de retención para el brazo para tendido de cables. Alinee y encaje cada lado de la bandeja con las guías en los extremos interiores de los rieles y empuje hacia delante hasta que la bandeja encaje en su lugar (1). Para extraer la bandeja, apriete los botones de liberación del pestillo de ambos lados hacia el centro y tire de la bandeja para extraerla de las guías (2). 3 4 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 Identificación del contenido del kit del brazo para tendido de cables Localice los componentes para instalar el ensamblaje del brazo para tendido de cables (CMA): Bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables (1) Brazo para tendido de cables (2) Abrazaderas de cable de nylon (3) NOTA: Para fijar el brazo para tendido de cables para su envío con el rack, pase las abrazaderas alrededor de los dos soportes y la bandeja y apriételas con fuerza. En el caso de brazos para tendido de cables más grandes, puede fijar las abrazaderas pasándolas por los soportes interno y externo y alrededor de la bandeja. Si fija el brazo para tendido de cables de este modo, el sistema también quedará sujeto en entornos inestables. Instalación y extracción del brazo para tendido de cables NOTA: Puede instalar el brazo para tendido de cables en el riel de montaje de la derecha o de la izquierda, según cómo tenga previsto colocar los cables desde el sistema. Se recomienda instalar el brazo para tendido de cables en el lado opuesto a las fuentes de alimentación, ya que de lo contrario deberá desconectarse para poder extraer la fuente de alimentación externa. Debe retirar la bandeja antes de extraer las fuentes de alimentación. En la parte posterior del sistema, encaje el pestillo del extremo frontal del brazo para tendido de cables en la guía más interna del ensamblaje deslizante hasta que encaje en su sitio (1). Encaje el otro pestillo en el extremo de la guía más externa hasta que encaje en su sitio (2). Para extraer el brazo para tendido de cables, desenganche los dos pestillos presionando los botones de liberación del brazo para tendido de cables en la parte superior de los alojamientos de pestillo interno y externo (3). F880Kcc0.qxp 30/10/2008 15:13 Page 10F880KA00 CMA Installation Instructions Printed in China. Imprimé en Chine. Gedruckt in China. Impreso en China. Printed on recycled paper. Instructions d'installation du passe-câbles Installationsanweisungen für den Kabelführungsarm Instrucciones de instalación del brazo para tendido de cables Notes, Cautions and Warnings A NOTE: indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. A CAUTION: indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. A WARNING: indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Remarques, Précautions et Avertissements Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. Une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions données. Un AVERTISSEMENT vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Anmerkungen, Vorsichtshinweise und Warnungen Eine ANMERKUNG: macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, mit denen Sie das System besser einsetzen können. Ein VORSICHTSHINWEIS: warnt vor möglichen Beschädigungen der Hardware oder vor Datenverlust, falls die Anweisungen nicht befolgt werden. Eine WARNUNG: weist auf Gefahrenquellen hin, die materielle Schäden, Verletzungen oder sogar den Tod von Personen zur Folge haben können. Notas, precauciones y advertencias Una NOTA: proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. Un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN: indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o la pérdida de datos si no se siguen las instrucciones. Un mensaje de ADVERTENCIA: indica el riesgo de daños materiales, lesiones o incluso la muerte. WARNING: This is a condensed reference. Read the safety instructions in your Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information booklet before you begin. WARNING: Only trained service technicians are authorized to remove the system cover and access any of the components inside the system. Before you begin, review the safety instructions that came with the system. NOTE: The illustrations in this document are not intended to represent a specific server. These installation instructions show a 3U Cable Management Arm installation. Other CMAs may vary slightly in appearance. AVERTISSEMENT: ce document est uniquement un condensé. Veuillez lire le livret relatif à la sécurité, l'environnement et les réglementations avant de commencer. AVERTISSEMENT: seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes. Veuillez lire les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système avant de commencer. REMARQUE : les illustrations figurant dans ce document ne représentent pas de serveur spécifique. Ces instructions présentent l'installation d'un passe-câbles pour un système à 3 unités. L'apparence des passe-câbles peut varier selon les modèles. WARNUNG: Dieses Dokument stellt eine Kurzanleitung dar. Bevor Sie mit der Montage beginnen, lesen Sie bitte die Sicherheitshinweise in der Broschüre Sicherheits-, Umgebungs- und Betriebsbestimmungen. WARNUNG: Nur zugelassene Servicetechniker dürfen die Gehäuseabdeckung entfernen und auf die Komponenten im Innern des Systems zugreifen. Bevor Sie beginnen, lesen Sie die Sicherheitshinweise, die Sie zusammen mit Ihrem System erhalten haben. ANMERKUNG: Die Abbildungen in diesem Dokument sollen keinen bestimmten Server darstellen. Diese Anweisungen zeigen die Installation eines 3U-Kabelführungsarms. Andere Kabelführungsarme können im Erscheinungsbild leicht abweichen. ADVERTENCIA: Este documento es una referencia resumida. Lea las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en el folleto Información sobre seguridad, medio ambiente y normativas antes de empezar. ADVERTENCIA: Los técnicos de servicio especializados son las únicas personas autorizadas para retirar las cubiertas y acceder a los componentes internos del sistema. Antes de empezar, revise las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas con el sistema. NOTA: Las ilustraciones de este documento no representan un servidor específico. En estas instrucciones se muestra la instalación de un brazo para tendido de cables 3U. Es posible que otros brazos para tendido de cables tengan un aspecto ligeramente diferente. Cabling the System Using the CMA CAUTION: To avoid potential damage from protruding cables, secure any slack in the status indicator cable before routing this cable through the CMA. Using the tie wraps provided, bundle the cables together as they enter and exit the baskets so they do not interfere with adjacent systems (1). With the CMA in the service position, route the cable bundle through the inner and outer baskets (2). Use the preinstalled Velcro straps on either end of the baskets to secure the cables (3). Adjust the cable slack as needed at the hinge postion (4). Swing the CMA back into place on the tray (5). Install the status indicator cable at the back of the system and secure the cable by routing it through the CMA. Attach the other end of this cable to the corner of the outer CMA basket. (6). Câblage du système à l'aide du passe-câbles PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter tout dommage dû à des câbles dépassant du système, le câble du voyant d'état ne doit pas présenter de mou avant son acheminement via le passe-câbles. À l'aide des fixe-câbles, regroupez les câbles et faites-les passer dans les paniers afin qu'ils n'interfèrent pas avec les systèmes adjacents (1). Mettez le passe-câbles en position de service, puis faites passer le faisceau de câbles dans les paniers interne et externe (2). À l'aide des bandes Velcro préinstallées sur l'une ou l'autre extrémité des paniers, fixez les câbles (3). Ajustez les câbles pour qu'il n'y ait pas de mou au niveau de la charnière (4). Faites pivoter le passe-câbles pour le replacer dans le fixe-câbles (5). Installez le câble du voyant d'état à l'arrière du système et sécurisez-le en le glissant dans le passe-câbles. Fixez l'autre extrémité de câble au coin du panier externe du passe-câbles. (6). Verkabeln des Systems mit dem Kabelführungsarm VORSICHT: Um mögliche Schäden an vorstehenden Kabeln zu vermeiden, sichern Sie eine etwaige Überlänge des Statusanzeigekabels, bevor Sie dieses Kabel im Kabelführungsarm verlegen. Bündeln Sie mit den Kabelbindern die Kabel beim Eintritt und Austritt an den Kabeltunneln, so dass sie nicht mit benachbarten Systemen in Konflikt geraten (1). Verlegen Sie Kabel durch den inneren und äußeren Kabeltunnel, wobei sich der Kabelführungsarm in der Wartungsposition befindet (2). Sichern Sie die Kabel an den Enden der Kabeltunnel mit den vorinstallierten Klettbändern (3). Passen Sie das Kabelspiel an der Scharnierposition nach Bedarf an (4). Schwenken Sie den Kabelführungsarm zurück auf die Auflage (5). Installieren Sie das Statusanzeigekabel auf der Systemrückseite und sichern Sie das Kabel, indem Sie es im Kabelführungsarm verlegen. Befestigen Sie das andere Ende des Kabels an der Ecke des äußeren Kabelführungstunnels (6). 5 1 4 2 5 3 6 Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2008 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Dell and ReadyRails are trademarks of Dell Inc. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly prohibited. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. October 2008 Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2008 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Dell et ReadyRails sont des marques de Dell Inc. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Dell ne revendique aucun droit propriétaire sur les marques et noms des autres sociétés. Octobre 2008 Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen Informationen können ohne Vorankündigung geändert werden. © 2008 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Dell und ReadyRails sind Marken von Dell Inc. Die Reproduktion dieses Dokuments in jeglicher Form ist ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. streng verboten. Dell erhebt keinen Anspruch auf die Warenzeichen und Handelsnamen anderer Hersteller. Oktober 2008 La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin notificación previa. © 2008 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Dell y ReadyRails son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Dell renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres de terceros. Octubre de 2008 WARNING: This is a condensed reference. Read the safety instructions that ship with your system before you begin. AVERTISSEMENT : ce document est uniquement un condensé. Veuillez lire les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système avant de commencer. WARNUNG: Dieses Dokument stellt eine Kurzanleitung dar. Bevor Sie beginnen, lesen Sie die im Lieferumfang Ihres Systems enthaltenen Sicherheitshinweise. ADVERTENCIA: Este documento es una referencia resumida. Lea las instrucciones de seguridad suministradas con el sistema antes de empezar. Cable Management Arm Installation (continued) Installation du passe-câbles (suite) | Installation des Kabelführungsarms (fortgesetzt) | | Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables (continuación) Cableado del sistema mediante el brazo para tendido de cables PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar posibles daños debidos a cables que sobresalen, ajuste la holgura del cable de indicador de estado antes de pasar este cable por el brazo para tendido de cables. Mediante las abrazaderas proporcionadas, agrupe los cables al entrar y salir de los soportes de modo que no interfieran con los sistemas adyacentes (1). Con el brazo para tendido de cables en la posición de mantenimiento, pase el grupo de cables por los soportes interno y externo (2). Utilice las cintas de velcro preinstaladas en cada extremo de los soportes para fijar los cables (3). Realice los ajustes de holgura necesarios en los cables en las posiciones de las bisagras (4). Vuelva a girar el brazo para tendido de cables para que encaje en la bandeja (5). Instale el cable de indicador de estado en la parte posterior del sistema y fíjelo pasándolo por el brazo para tendido de cables. Fije el otro extremo de este cable a la esquina del soporte externo del brazo para tendido de cables. (6). F880Kcc0.qxp 30/10/2008 15:13 Page 2 Dell Glossary – Version 2 Glossary Glossar Glosario Glossaire 用語集 용어집 Sözlük 词汇表Dell Glossary – Version 2 GlossaryGlossary ACPI See advanced configuration and power interface. active control module For Dell EqualLogic PS Series arrays in a dual-control module array, the control module that is actively servicing I/O on a network. If it ceases to function, it fails over to the secondary control module. See secondary control module. active Controller The Dell AIM Controller that is actively managing the Dell AIM environment. active space In Dell Compellent Storage Center, the amount of space that is used by a volume, excluding replays. This amount does not include RAID overhead. See Replay. actual space In Dell Compellent Storage Center, the amount of active space plus replay space for a volume. See active space, Replay space. advanced configuration and power interface (ACPI) A standard interface for enabling the operating system to direct configuration and power management. agent In the Dell AIM environment (VMRacks based on Red Hat Xen and Microsoft Hyper-V, plus personas), the optional software installed on elements that the Controller uses to manage the elements and configure their networking properties. agentless persona A Dell AIM persona that does not have the Dell AIM agent installed. ambient temperature The temperature of the area or room where the system is located. array member A Dell EqualLogic PS Series array configured into a PS Series group. Groups can have several members. array serial number In the Dell EqualLogic PS Series array environment, a unique Dell EqualLogic PS Series array identification string that is encoded in the array's hardware. See service tag. ASM/ME See Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition. ASM/VE See Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition. Asset Management Appliance A Dell KACE appliance-based asset management solution for IT professionals that tracks software and license compliance. It automates the management of inventory, software assets, versions, upgrades, and computers through a web-based dashboard. asset tag An individual code assigned to a system, usually by an administrator, for security or tracking purposes. Assigned Disks In Dell Compellent Storage Center, physical storage media assigned to a disk folder in order to become managed and used for storing volumes and replays. See disk folder, Storage Pool. assignment mode A mechanism to control how personas and VMRacks are assigned to hosts based on the availability of HBAs in the host. See HBA. async/asynchronous replication The process of writing data to local storage then queuing that data for storage on a remote SAN. If the local SAN fails before a write is delivered, it is possible that the replication will fail. See replication, synchronous replication, remote instant replay. 3automatic RAID configuration In the context of Dell EqualLogic PS Series groups, an internal process that configures the user-selected RAID policy on the array. Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition (ASM/ME) A snap-in console application for the Microsoft Management Console that enables you to administer Smart Copies. Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE) A web-based application that works with VMware virtual environments to enable you to administer Smart Copies. available space Amount of total storage available on all drives. back end In Dell Compellent Storage Center, an isolated and dedicated network that connects the controller or storage cluster (e.g., redundant pair of controllers) to local disk enclosures. back end network Connection between controller and disks in the Dell Compellent Storage Center Controller. base volume (Dell EqualLogic PS Series) A volume mounted on the computer and reachable through its Windows-assigned drive letter (such as G:) or mount point. base volume (Dell EqualLogic Group Manager) A volume that has snapshots. Snapshots depend on the base volume. If the base volume is destroyed, the snapshots have been removed. Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) A server management module that implements the IPMI (Intelligent Platform Management Interface) protocol. In the context of Dell AIM, the Controller uses the BMC to control some models of servers remotely. blade For the Dell AIM SDK, blade is an element of the host superclass. For Dell modular systems, a blade refers to a modular server which is mounted into an enclosure. BMC See Baseboard Management Controller. Bootable media A CD, SD card, or USB memory key that is used to start your system if the system will not boot from the hard drive. cache A fast storage area that keeps a copy of data or instructions for quick data retrieval. CHA See Compellent Host Adapter. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol, a network login protocol that uses an encrypted challenge-response mechanism. Used to limit access to volumes and snapshots to hosts that supply the correct account name and password. CHAP is also used for login/ administrator accounts. channel In the Dell/AIM environment, one of up to eight physical connections you can assign to switch ports and that you can connect to a persona using up to eight physical NICs. You can configure a network to prefer one or two channels for its traffic, so if the preferred channel fails traffic is transparently rerouted to the other channel. CHAP See Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. chassis switch In the context of Dell AIM, an Ethernet switch in a bay in a chassis. Chassis switches are managed by the Controller. client device communication certificate In the context of EKM, a specialized encrypted key that allows a client to communicate with the server. 4Cluster Node A physical member of a resource cluster, such as a host in a server cluster or a SAN in a storage cluster. collection In ASM/ME, a collection is related groups of storage objects such as volumes, snapshots, or application components, and are represented by nodes in the ASM Console Tree under the Collections master node. In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, volume and replica collections and custom snapshot collections appear in the hierarchy under the Volumes view. Compellent Host Adapter (CHA) Internal cache card/battery seated in each Dell Compellent Storage Center controller. Write cache memory is mirrored to the cache card. On a dual-controller Dell Compellent Storage Center, the controller 1 cache card holds the mirror for controller 2, and the controller 2 cache card holds the mirror for controller 1. On a single-controller Dell Compellent Storage Center, the cache card holds the mirror for the single controller. configuration The database that describes the entire contents and configuration of the Dell AIM environment. Conservation Mode In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a data preservation mode that is reached when remaining free space drops to a critical threshold (typically 10%, up to 32 GB). In conservation mode, the Dell Compellent Storage Center generates an alert, prevents new volumes from being created, and starts expiring replays at a faster rate to free up space. See Emergency Mode. Console The web-based user interface that you use to monitor and work with the elements in the Dell AIM environment. The Dell AIM Console is hosted by the Dell AIM Controller. control module In Dell EqualLogic PS Series arrays, the physical processor and interface component. A control module contains the Dell EqualLogic PS Series firmware in flash memory and provides temporary power continuity for data sorted in cache memory. It has multiple network interfaces and an optional serial port. An array can contain two hot-swappable, dual redundant controllers. The active control module serves I/O, while the secondary control module mirrors data in its cache. control panel The part of the system that contains indicators and controls, such as the power button and power indicator. Control Port The destination iSCSI port to which iSCSI initiators (servers) connect in order to make storage requests. In a Dell Compellent Storage Center configured for virtual port mode, a control port is created for each iSCSI fault domain, to redirect iSCSI traffic to the appropriate virtual port. Controller (Dell AIM) Software that manages the physical and virtual hardware, software, and network configurations and hosts the Dell AIM Console. In the context of a pair of resilient Controllers, each Controller runs on a dedicated server but shares a configuration database and other key files on a shared file system. Controller (Dell Compellent) Provides disk aggregation (RAID), I/O routing, error detection, and data recovery. Provides the intelligence for the entire Dell Compellent Storage Center subsystem. Every Storage Center system contains at least one. Storage Center and recommend corrective actions to improve performance and availability of the system. Controller Services In the context of Dell AIM, the virtual IP address or addresses the Controller users for communications with the System Control Network (SCN), managed switches, the Console and CLI, and so on. By default, this is a single virtual IP address on the active Controller, but you can specify unique addresses for the services SCN Services and SNMP Trap Collector. 5Copilot Services Within Dell Compellent Storage Center, the combination of centralized support, product education and sales resources that proactively monitor the system and recommend corrective actions to improve performance and availability of the system. Copy-Mirror-Migrate A Dell Compellent Storage Center feature allowing volumes to be migrated between different disk types and RAID levels. credential store In the context of EKM, a repository that holds credential information across sessions. Credential information is security data such as user names, passwords, and certificates. Cryptographic Object A method of securing data. Data Collector A Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager component that runs in the background on a server, collecting information on all Dell Compellent Storage Center systems connected to the server. Data Instant Replay A Dell Compellent Storage Center feature that captures space-efficient point-in-time copies (PITC) of a volume on the local SAN at defined intervals, providing the ability to roll back a volume to a previous point in time. See Replay, snapshot. Data Progression A Dell Compellent Storage Center feature that automatically migrates data pages to higher or lower performance devices, based on the level of I/O activity (demand). See tiered storage. DDR See Double-data Rate. delegated space In the context of the Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, a space on a group set aside to store received replicas for a partner. Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) secures the data stored on LTO tape cartridges by managing encryption keys for Dell tape automation solutions. Dell Remote Access Controller (DRAC) An interface card that provides out-of-band management facilities. The controller has its own processor, memory, network connection, and access to the system bus, and allows system administrators to control systems remotely across a network. device driver A program that allows the operating system or some other program to interface correctly with a peripheral. DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Digital Versatile Disk Digital versatile disc or digital video disc (DVD). disk folder In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a collection of physical storage media devices (disks, SSDs) that can be viewed and managed by a user. Disk folders determine the storage pool(s) from which volume storage space is allocated. Although disk folders can be associated with multiple storage pools, Dell Compellent Storage Center performance is maximized by assigning all disks to the same folder and storage pool. Disk Position In Dell Compellent Storage Center, the slot position of a disk drive within its enclosure, in row-column notation. For example, disk position 01-02 refers to the slot in the first row from the top and second column from the left. DNS See Domain Name System. Domain Name System (DNS) A method of translating Internet domain names, such as www.example.com, into IP addresses, such as 208.77.188.166. dormant Persona In the AIM environment, a persona that is not currently running (or waiting to run) on a host. 6Double-data Rate (DDR) Double-data rate. A technology in memory modules that potentially doubles the data rate by transferring data on both the rising and falling pulses of a clock cycle. DRAC See Dell Remote Access Controller. DRAM See Dynamic random-access memory. Dual Redundant In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a storage profile option for protecting against the loss of any two drives, typically by using RAID 10 and/or RAID 6. DVD See Digital Versatile Disc. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) A method of automatically assigning an IP address to a client system. Dynamic randomaccess memory (DRAM) A system's RAM is usually made up entirely of DRAM chips. EKM See Dell Encryption Key Manager. EKM Administrator In the context of EKM, the super user who can create or delete users and groups. EKM Encryption Manager (tklmadmin) In the context of EKM, the daily user who creates or deletes keys and devices. Emergency Mode In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a mode that is reached when the system can no longer operate because there is no more free space. In emergency mode, all server I/O is rejected and all volumes are taken offline and cannot be brought back online until enough space is freed to exit emergency mode. See Conservation Mode . enclosure A physical enclosure that provides a single interface, power, and cooling to multiple disks or blades. environment In the context of Dell AIM, the collection of hardware, software, and network configurations managed by a Dell AIM Controller. Eth0 See Ethernet port 0. Eth1 See Ethernet port 1. Ethernet port 0 (Eth0) In Dell Compellent Storage Center, Eth0 is an Ethernet interface dedicated to management. Ethernet port 1 (Eth1) In Dell Compellent Storage Center, Eth1 is an Ethernet interface dedicated to inter-process communication between controllers, for clustering or remote replication. external network In the context of the Dell AIM environment, a network that is not part of the Dell AIM environment but is physically and logically connected to it. external switch In the context of the Dell Aim environment, a switch that is not part of the Dell AIM environment, but is physically and logically connected to it. Fabric A combination of interconnected switches that act as a unified routing infrastructure. It allows multiple connections among devices on a SAN and lets new devices enter unobtrusively. A FC (or iSCSI) topology with at least one switch present on the network. FastTrack An optional Dell Compellent Storage Center utility that dynamically places the most active data on the outer (faster) disk tracks. 7FAT See File Allocation Table. Fault Domain Within the Dell Compellent Storage Center environment, a Fault Domain identifies a failover set. In Virtual Port mode, all front-end ports can be part of the one fault domain. In Legacy Mode, each primary and reserved port creates one fault domain. FC See Fibre Channel. FE See Front End Network. Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed interconnect used to connect servers to controllers and back-end disk enclosures. FC components include HBAs, hubs, switches, and cabling. The term FC also refers to a high-speed, fully duplexed serial communication protocol permitting data transfer rates of up to 10 Gigabit per second. File Allocation Table (FAT) The file system structure used by MS-DOS to organize and keep track of file storage. The Microsoft Windows operating systems can optionally use a FAT file system structure. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) An application layer protocol used to transfer bulk-data files between machines or hosts. Front End Network (FE) The component in the Dell Compellent Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that initiates data writes. In general, servers (or switches) are the front end of the controller. However, a Storage Center system that is replicating data to a remote system is the front end of the remote system. See back end. FTP See File Transfer Protocol. GB See Gigabyte(s). Gigabyte(s) (GB) 1024 megabytes or 1,073,741,824 bytes. However, when referring to hard-drive capacity; the term is usually rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes. group See PS Series group. HBA See Host Bus Adapter. HIT/LE See Host Integration Tools for Linux. HIT/ME See Host Integration Tools for Windows. HIT/VM See Host Integration Tools for VMware. host In the Dell AIM environment, a host may be a physical server (rack-mounted or blade) or virtual machine. In the Dell AIM SDK, a superclass that includes blade servers, rackmounted servers, and virtual machines (VMs). host adapter A controller that implements communication between the system's bus and the peripheral device, typically a storage device. Host Bus Adapter (HBA) A device, typically an add-on card, that connects a server to a SAN (Storage Area Network). Each HBA is uniquely identified on the SAN by its WWPN (World Wide Port Number). Common HBA types include Fiber Channel and iSCSI. Host Integration Tools for Linux (HIT/LE) A suite of tools that integrate ESX systems with Dell EqualLogic PS Series storage arrays. It includes the Auto Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE), EqualLogic Datastore Manager, and EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment Utility. Host Integration Tools for Windows (HIT/ME) A suite of applications that enable you to configure and manage an array. It includes ASM/ ME, DSM (Multipath I/O Device Specific Module), and RSW (Remote Setup Wizard). 8Host Integration Tools for VMware (HIT/VM) A suite of tools that integrate Linux systems with Dell EqualLogic PS Series storage arrays. It includes the Remote Setup Wizard Command Line Interface (RSWCLI), the EqualLogic Host Performance and Configuration Tuning Suite (eqltune), and EqualLogic Log Gathering Facility (eqllog). Hot Spare Disk In the Dell Compellent Storage Center environment, a Hot Spare disk is a backup disk. In the event that an active array fails, the controller makes the Hot Spare part of the active array and rebuilds data on the fly. Although the Hot Spare becomes an active disk without human intervention, remember to replace the failed drive as soon as possible, so that the array is again protected with a new Hot Spare. Hot spares can span multiple disk enclosures. Storage Center Hot Spares can have a different capacity than the data drive it replaces. hot-plug The ability to insert or install a device, typically a hard drive or an internal cooling fan, into the host system while the system is powered on and running. Also referred to as hot-swap. hot-swap See hot-plug. I/O Input/Output. A keyboard is an input device, and a monitor is an output device. In general, I/ O activity can be differentiated from computational activity. ID In the Dell AIM environment, a unique identifier for an element in the , assigned when it is added to the environment. iDRAC See integration Dell Remote Access Controller. IKEv2-SCSI A protocol used for certificate creation. image Specific to Dell AIM, the actual bits stored on a disk or storage array that a persona or VMRack boots, along with information the Controller uses to boot that image on a specific type of host. You can configure a persona or VMRack with more than one image, for example, so the same persona can boot on either a physical server or a virtual machine. infiniBand infiniBand offers point-to-point bidirectional serial links intended for connection of processors and high-speed peripherals. Instant Replay See Data Instant Replay. integration Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) A remote access controller that uses the Internet SCSI protocol. Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) A protocol implemented by management modules in some servers, which is used to control the servers remotely. The blade management modules in the Dell servers implement iPMI. interconnect switch A switch in the Dell AIM environment, managed by the Controller, that you use to interconnect elements such as chassis, vRacks, other interconnect switches, and external switches. internet SCSI (iSCSI) Internet SCSI (see SCSI). A protocol that encapsulates standard SCSI commands for communication between client servers (iSCSI initiators) and network storage devices (iSCSI targets) on IP networks. IPMI See Intelligent Platform Management Interface. iSCSI See Internet SCSI. 9Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) Standards set up for the communication between enterprise key management systems and encryption systems. Key Serving Ports Ports used by the operating system to communicate in EKM. Keygroup In EKM, a set of keys assigned to a specific department, area, or hardware type. Keys An encrypted certificate used to protect data in EKM. Keystore / Keygroup/ Master Keystore A group of encrypted keys in EKM. KMIP See Key Management Interoperability Protocol. Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) An API for the Java programming language that defines how a client may access, query, and update data in a database. JDBC See Java Database Connectivity. Leader Controller The primary controller in a dual controller Dell Compellent Storage Center. Normally, the leader and peer controllers share the storage I/O load, essentially doubling throughput, but only the leader controller performs external management functions. If one controller fails, the remaining controller becomes or remains the leader and assumes the duties of both controllers. See Peer Controller. Legacy Mode In Dell Compellent Storage Center, fault domains are configured to dedicate pairs of primary and reserved front end ports, connected through redundant equipment, as a mechanism to protect storage traffic against a single point of failure. See Fault Domain, Virtual Port or Virtual Port Mode. Linear Tape-Open (LTO) An open standards tape format. logical unit number (LUN) A logical unit is a conceptual division (a subunit) of a storage disk or a set of disks. Each logical unit has an address, known as the logical unit number (LUN), which allows it to be uniquely identified. LTO See Linear Tape-Open. LTO Key Group Rollover In EKM, a set of keys assigned to be used once the default keygroup is depleted. LUN See logical unit number. MAC address See Media Access Control address. Managed Disks In Dell Compellent Storage Center, storage media devices (disks, SSDs) that are assigned to a disk folder in order to associate those devices with a storage pool. See Storage Pool, disk folder. managed system A managed system is any system that is monitored and managed using Dell OpenManage Server Administrator. management IP address Address used to used to connect to an intelligent IP-enabled device in order to monitor or manage that device. The address may be dedicated for exclusive use by management applications or shared for use by management and service applications. management network An optional management network separates iSCSI traffic (Volume I/O) from management traffic (GUI and CLI sessions, and other group management communications and intergroup operations). 10management station A system used to remotely manage one or more managed systems from a central location. Manual Replay A Dell Compellent Storage Center feature that allows the user to manually create point in time copies of volumes. manual transfer replication Replication done through transportable media instead of over a network. Used in cases where the network link between replication partners is too slow or otherwise unsuitable for transferring large amounts of data. Manual Transfer Utility A stand-alone utility from Dell EqualLogic that performs volume replication using transportable media, instead of the network. The utility has both graphical and command line user interfaces. Media Access Control address (MAC address) Your system's unique hardware number on a network. migrate volume A Dell Compellent Storage Center command to move data from one volume to another. migration In the context of EKM, combining a keystore into an existing keystore during (not after) Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0 installation. mirror volume A Dell Compellent Storage Center command to replicate a local volume onto a remote Dell Compellent Storage Center and maintain updates between the local and remote volumes until the mirror is manually broken. mirroring A type of data redundancy in which a set of physical drives stores data and one or more sets of additional drives stores duplicate copies of the data. Mirroring functionality is provided by software. See striping, RAID. NAS See Network-Attached Storage. network connection An object that defines a persona's and VMRack's required network connectivity. A network connection is created as the result of adding elements to a network, for example when you add a persona to a network. Network-Attached Storage (NAS) NAS is one of the concepts used for implementing shared storage on a network. NAS systems have their own operating systems, integrated hardware, and software that are optimized to serve specific storage needs. NTP The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched, variable-latency data networks. Oversubscribed space In a SAN that supports thin provisioning, the amount of storage space that is configured as available but not physically present (i.e., configured space minus available space). parity stripe In RAID arrays, a striped hard drive containing parity data. partition A physical section of a hard drive created using the fdisk command. Partitions can then be divided into multiple logical drives using the format command. passive Controller The Dell AIM Controller that acts as a hot standby, ready to take over managing the environment if the active Controller fails. Peer Controller In a dual-controller Dell Compellent Storage Center, the peer controller shares the I/O load with the leader controller but does not perform external management functions. If the leader controller fails, the peer controller assumes the I/O and management duties of both controllers. See Leader Controller. 11persona A server environment captured on disk: the operating system, optional Dell AIM agent software, and the network and other settings required to run an application on a host in the Dell AIM environment. pool Storage space in a SAN available for use by volumes. In Dell Compellent Enterprise Storage Manager and Dell Compellent Storage Center, this is equivalent to the total space in the SAN. In Dell EqualLogic PS Series arrays, this is equivalent to the total space on the members of the specific pool. pool administrator An account on a Dell EqualLogic PS Series group that has permission to manage objects only in a specific pool or set of pools for a group. Compare to group administrator. primary group Within the Dell EqualLogic Group Manager environment, the group containing the original volume in a replication partnership. See secondary group. primary volume Within the Dell EqualLogic Group Manager environment, a volume configured for replication to a replication partner. PS Series array A single Dell EqualLogic iSCSI storage unit, usually configured as a Dell EqualLogic PS Series group. You can join multiple PS Series arrays into a larger PS Series group and manage them as a single iSCSI SAN. PS Series group An iSCSI storage entity comprised of one or more Dell EqualLogic PS Series storage arrays that you access through a single IP address and manage as a storage area network (SAN). Public Services In the context of Dell AIM, the Controller Services virtual IP address that you use to connect to the Console or CLI on the active Controller. RAC Remote Access Controller. RAID See Redundant Array of Independent Disks. RAID 0 Data is striped across the available disks providing improved performance. RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy. RAID 10 Data is striped across available disk drives and mirrored, providing data availability and improved performance. Maintains a minimum of one full copy of all data on the volume. RAID 10 provides optimum Read / Write performance, increased probability of withstanding multiple failures, and the quickest restoration of data. RAID 5 Maintains a logical copy of the data using a mathematically derived rotating parity stripe. The parity stripe is derived from the data stripes. This method has less overhead for the redundant information than RAID 10 however write performance is slower than RAID 10 due to the calculation of the parity stripe for every write. Read performance is similar to RAID 10. RAID 50 RAID level 50 is a combination of RAID level 5 and RAID level 0. RAID 50 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drives. recovery volume A volume created for the purpose of recovering data. In Dell EqualLogic PS Series arrays, a recovery volume is created by promoting an inbound replica set as part of a failover operation. You can also create recovery template volumes and recovery thin clones. In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a view volume is created from a replay. See replica, View Volume, Replay. Redundancy The duplication of information or hardware equipment components to ensure that if a primary resource fails, a secondary resource can take over its function. Dell Compellent Storage Center provides redundancy for each component so that there is no single point of 12failure. Single Redundancy protects against loss of data if any one resource fails. Dual Redundancy protects against data lost if any two resources fail. Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) Redundant array of independent disks. A method of providing data redundancy. Some common implementations of RAID including RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, and RAID 50. See mirroring, striping. Remote Instant Replay A Dell Compellent Storage Center solution feature in which a replay is replicated to a remote Dell Compellent Storage Center. The local and remote Dell Compellent Storage Centers are active-active, and bidirectional replication can occur, synchronously or asynchronously, on independent intervals. Dell Compellent Storage Center replication requires the Enterprise Manager software application with a Replication license. See Replay, Remote System, replication. Remote Setup Wizard (RSW) A graphical user interface (GUI) that enables you to configure a Dell EqualLogic PS Series array after you install the Host Integration Tools/Microsoft Edition. Remote System In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a separate SAN configured to receive replication data from an original volume on the local Dell Compellent Storage Center. Dell Compellent Storage Center replication requires the Enterprise Manager software application with a Replication license. See replication. Replay In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a fully usable, point-in-time copy (PITC) of data that contains an image of the data as it appeared at the point in time at which the copy was initiated. The copy may be stored locally or on a remote Dell Compellent Storage Center. See snapshot, Data Instant Replay, Remote Instant Replay. Replay Profile In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a set of rules that determine when and how replays pointin-time copies will be taken and how long they will be saved. See Replay. Replay space In Dell Compellent Storage Center, the amount of space that is automatically reserved and used for replays. See active space, actual space. replica A point-in-time representation of a Dell EqualLogic PS Series volume. The original volume and its replica are located on different Dell EqualLogic PS Series groups (replication partners) potentially separated at some geographical distance to facilitate disaster tolerance. replica collection In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, the set of replicas resulting from each replication of a volume collection. replica collection set In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, the set of replica collections for a volume collection. replica reserve In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, the portion of the delegated space on a replication partner that is set aside for the replica sets for a specific volume. You configure the replica reserve for the volume on the primary group, but the actual replica reserve is on the secondary group. replica set In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, the set of complete replicas for a volume, template volume, or thin clone volume. replicating system A Dell Compellent Storage Center configured to send replication data from one or more local volumes to a remote Storage Center. See replication, Remote System, Remote Instant Replay. 13replication The process of copying volume data (only deltas) from the primary (local) SAN to a secondary (remote) SAN, so that data can be recovered from either SAN if necessary. The SANs can be an unlimited distance apart. replication partner In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, a group that is configured to send or receive replicas from another partner. RSW See Remote Setup Wizard. runnable persona In the context of Dell AIM, a network-booted persona that is started and is waiting to be assigned to a host. SAN See Storage Area Network. SAN HeadQuarters Enables you to monitor multiple Dell EqualLogic PS Series groups from a single graphical interface. It gathers and formats performance data and other important group information. SCN See System Control Network. SCN Services The Controller Services virtual IP address that personas and VMRacks in the Dell AIM environment use to communicate with the active Controller. SCSI See Small Computer System Interface. SDK See Software Development Kit. secondary control module Within the Dell EqualLogic Group Manager environment, the secondary control module mirrors cache data from the active control module. If the active control module ceases to function, the secondary takes over network operations. See active control module. secondary group In a Dell EqualLogic Group Manager replication configuration, the group that receives replicas of a source volume. See primary group. Server Cluster A group of independent servers working together as a single system to provide uninterrupted service in the event of individual computer failures. service tag A label on the system used to identify it when you call Dell for technical support. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Defines a message format and forwarding procedure to enable messages to be sent between hosts on the Internet. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) A standard interface that allows a network manager to remotely monitor and manage workstations. Simulator A component of the Dell AIM SDK that emulates a running Dell AIM environment, including the Controller, the Console, and physical and virtual networks. See SDK. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) Small computer system interface. An I/O bus interface with faster data transmission rates that standard ports. SMART Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. Allows hard drives to report errors and failures to the system BIOS and then display an error message on the screen. Smart Copy An ASM/ME point-in-time, application-consistent copy of objects in a Dell EqualLogic PS Series group. Smart Copies can be of type snapshot, clone, or replica depending on the edition of Auto-Snapshot Manager that you are using. SMP See symmetric multiprocessing. 14SMTP See Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. snapshot A point-in-time copy (PITC) of a volume. See Replay. snapshot collection A set of snapshots resulting from a snapshot operation on a volume collection. See volume collection. SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP Trap Collector In the context of Dell AIM, the Controller Services virtual IP address that managed switches and other devices use to send SNMP traps to the active Controller. Software Development Kit (SDK) A set of development tools used to create applications for a specific software package, software framework, hardware platform, computer system, video game console, operating system, or similar platform. Space Recovery A utility that recovers space that Windows reports as being used but is actually empty, available space that can be used by Dell Compellent Storage Center. spare disk A designated or unused drive in a SAN that is used automatically to replace a failed drive. Storage Area Network (SAN) A storage area network (SAN) is a specialized network that provides access to high performance and highly available storage subsystems using block storage protocols. The SAN is made up of specific devices, such as host bus adapters (HBAs) in the host servers, switches that help route storage traffic, and disk storage subsystems. The main characteristic of a SAN is that the storage subsystems are generally available to multiple hosts at the same time, which makes them scalable and flexible. Compare with NAS. Storage Cluster In Dell Compellent Storage Center, multiple SAN controllers that are interconnected for the purpose of improving reliability, availability, serviceability and performance (via load balancing). Storage Center uses an active-active configuration to provide automatic controller failover. A fully mirrored, battery-backed cache in each controller ensures data reliability over a restart and allows volumes to migrate between controllers in the event of a single controller failure. Storage Clustering A Dell Compellent Storage Center feature that provides automatic controller failover through multiple controllers in an active-active configuration. Fully mirrored, battery backup cache provides fault tolerance and automatic restart/recovery in the event of a controller failure. Storage Pool See pool. Storage Profile In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a set of rules that define the drive types (tiers) on which to store data and the RAID level to use for each tier. Storage Type In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a set of attributes, including redundancy options and block size, that control how space from a storage pool is allocated and protected. striping Disk striping writes data across three or more disks in an array, but only uses a portion of the space on each disk. The amount of space used by the "stripe" is the same on each disk used. A virtual disk may use several stripes on the same set of disks in an array. See also mirroring, and RAID. symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) Used to describe a system that has two or more processors connected via a high-bandwidth link and managed by an operating system, where each processor has equal access to I/O devices. synch See Synchronous Replication. 15Synchronous Replication Feature that atomically writes the same data to two separate volumes, stored on different physical hardware, before the application receives an I/O complete message. Both writes either complete or fail, so both volumes are fully synchronized at all times. However, the feature can increase write latency for the application. See synch. System Control Network (SCN) A private network that Dell AIM uses for communication between the Controller, personas, and VMRacks. The Controller also uses this network to discover servers and to boot personas and VMRacks on them. System Setup program A BIOS-based program that allows configuration of a system's hardware and customization of the system's operation by setting features such as password protection. Because the System Setup program is stored in NVRAM, any settings remain in effect until changed. Systems Deployment Appliance A Dell KACE appliance-based deployment management solution for IT professionals that provides tools for disk imaging, user state migration, remote site management, system repair and recovery, as well as computer inventory scanning and assessment. Additionally, it automates pre-and post-deployment configuration tasks such as computer inventory scanning and assessment; it also automates disk, BIOS, and RAID configuration, software distribution, and configuration management. Systems Management Appliance A Dell KACE appliance-based systems management solution for IT professionals that streamlines tasks such as inventory management, software distribution, reporting, patch management, asset management, scripting, and service desk support through a web-based interface. template In the context of Dell AIM, a dormant persona that you can clone to create other personas, but which you can't run (to prevent changes to the template). template volume Read-only volume from which you create thin clones. thin clone Volume that shares space with a template volume. Thin clones provide an efficient use of storage space for configurations with multiple volumes that have a large amount of common data. Thin Provisioning Feature that lets you over-provision (or over-subscribe) the space available in the SAN. Storage objects (such as volumes) that use thin provisioning report their potential maximum size to applications, but may actually use much less space. Thin provisioning allows organizations to reduce their overall storage expenditures, increase availability and achieve greater performance. tiered storage Storage optimization strategy in which data required quickly and often is stored on expensive, fast media types, and data required rarely is stored on less expensive, slower media types. unmanaged space In Dell EqualLogic PS Series arrays, delegated space capacity on the secondary group that is no longer accessible from the primary group. uplink port A port on a network hub or switch used to connect to other hubs or switches without requiring a crossover cable. vacate In Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, to remove a member from a group while the member remains online. View Volume In Dell Compellent Storage Center, a read-only volume that has been created from a previous replay, for the primary purpose of recovering data. See Replay. 16Virtual Port or Virtual Port Mode In the context of Dell Compellent Storage Center, Virtual Ports eliminate the need for reserve ports. When operating in Virtual Port mode, all front-end ports accept I/O and can be part of one Fault Domain. For information on enabling Virtual Ports, refer to the Dell Compellent Storage Center System Setup Guide. virtual World Wide Port Name (vWWPM) A virtual World Wide Port Name used in Dell AIM for creating SAN-booted personas. Virtualization The ability to use software to share the resources of a single computer or storage device across multiple environments. A single physical system or device may appear to the user as multiple virtual systems able to host multiple operating systems. VMRack A rack of virtual machines (VMs) on a server that is running a combination of agent software and Red Hat Xen, VMware ESX, or Microsoft Hyper-V. volume A discrete unit of storage striped to a storage device or devices. volume collection A number of volumes grouped together for purposes of performing operations on the volumes simultaneously. See snapshot collection, replica collection. volume reserve Amount of space allocated to a volume from free pool space. Without thin provisioning, volume reserve is the same as reported size. Volume Type In the context of Dell Compellent Storage Center, Volume Type: can be dynamic, Replay enabled, or Replication. A volume is dynamic until at least one Replay has been taken of that volume. Once a Replay has been taken of a volume, it becomes Replay Enabled. A Replication volume is one that is being Replicated to another Dell Compellent Storage Center system. vRack In the context of Dell AIM, a logical group of hosts connected to a virtual switch (vRack switch). vRack switch In the context of Dell AIM, a virtual switch that connects hosts in a vRack. vWWPN See virtual World Wide Port Name. 1718Dell Glossar – Version 2 GlossarGlossar ACPI Siehe Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (Erweiterte Konfigurations- und Stromverwaltungsschnittstelle). Aktives Kontrollmodul Bei Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Arrays mit zwei Kontrollmodulen dasjenige Kontrollmodul, das aktiv die E/A auf einem Netzwerk betreibt. Fällt es aus, wird an das Sekundärkontrollmodul übergeben. Siehe Sekundärkontrollmodul. Aktiver Controller Der Dell AIM Controller, der aktiv die Dell AIM Umgebung verwaltet. Aktiver Speicherplatz Im Dell Compellent Storage Center die von einem Volume verwendete Menge an Speicherplatz, ausgenommen Replays. Der RAID-Overhead ist nicht enthalten. Siehe Replay. Tatsächlicher Speicherplatz Im Dell Compellent Storage Center die Menge an aktivem Speicherplatz plus dem Replay-Speicherplatz für ein Volume. Siehe aktiver Speicherplatz, ReplaySpeicherplatz. Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI (Erweiterte Konfigurations- und Stromverwaltungsschnittstelle). Eine Standardschnittstelle, die dem Betriebssystem die Steuerung der Konfiguration und Energieverwaltung ermöglicht. Agent In der Dell AIM Umgebung (VMRacks auf Basis von Red Hat Xen und Microsoft Hyper-V sowie Personas) die optionale, auf Komponenten installierte Software, mittels derer der Controller die Koponenten verwaltet und ihre Netzwerkeigenschaften festlegt. Agentenlose Persona Eine Dell AIM Persona ohne installierten Dell AIM Agent. Umgebungstemperatur Die Temperatur in dem Bereich oder Raum, in dem sich das System befindet. Array-Mitglied Ein in einer PS-Series Gruppe konfiguriertes Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Array. Gruppen können mehrere Mitglieder besitzen. Array-Seriennummer In der Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Arrayumgebung eine eindeutige Identifikationszeichenkette für das Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Array, die auf der Hardware des Arrays verschlüsselt ist. Siehe Service Tag. ASM/ME Siehe Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition. ASM/VE Siehe Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition. Asset Management Appliance (Appliance zur Systemverwaltung) Eine Lösung zur Anlagenverwaltung für IT-Mitarbeiter auf Basis der Dell KACEAppliance, die Software und Lizenzen überwacht. Sie automatisiert die Verwaltung von Bestandslisten, Softwareanlagen, Versionen, Upgrades und Computern über eine webgestützte Anzeigetafel. Bestands-Tag Ein individueller Code, der dem System aus Sicherheits- oder Überwachungsgründen üblicherweise vom Systemadministrator zugewiesen wird. Zugewiesene Laufwerke Im Dell Compellent Storage Center die physischen Datenträger, die einem Laufwerksordner zur Verwaltung zugewiesen und zur Speicherung von 3Volumes und Replays verwendet werden. Siehe Laufwerksordner, Speicherpool. Assignment Mode (Zuweisungsmodus) Ein Mechanismus zur Steuerung, wie Personas und VMRacks den Hosts auf Basis der Verfügbarkeit von HBAs im Host zugewiesen werden. Siehe HBA. async/Asynchrone Replikation Der Vorgang, bei dem Daten auf lokalen Speicher geschrieben werden und dann in einer Warteschlange auf die Speicherung auf einem entfernten SAN warten. Wenn das lokale SAN vor Durchführung des Schreibvorgangs ausfällt, kann die Replikation möglicherweise fehlschlagen. Siehe Replikation, synchrone Replikation, Remote Instant Replay. Automatische RAID-Konfiguration Im Kontext von Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Gruppen ein interner Prozess, der das benutzerdefinierte RAID-Verfahren auf dem Array konfiguiert. Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition (ASM/ME) Eine Snap-in-Konsolenanwendung für die Microsoft Verwaltungskonsole, mit der Smart Copies verwaltet werden können. Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE) Eine webgestützte Anwendung, die zusammen mit virtuellen VMwareUmgebungen die Verwaltung von Smart Copies ermöglicht. Verfügbarer Speicherplatz Menge des gesamten Speicherplatzes auf allen Laufwerken. Back-End Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein isoliertes und dediziertres Netzwerk, das den Controller oder Speichercluster (bzw. ein redundantes Controllerpaar) mit lokalen Laufwerkgehäusen verbindet. Back-End-Netzwerk Verbindung zwischen Controller und Laufwerken im Dell Compellent Storage Center Controller. Basisvolume (Reihe Dell EqualLogic PS-Series) Ein auf dem Computer gemountetes und über seinen unter Windows zugewiesenen Laufwerkbuchstaben (beispielsweise G:) oder Mount-Point erreichbares Volume. Basisvolume (Dell EqualLogic Group Manager) Ein Volume, das Snapshots aufweist. Snapshots hängen vom Basisvolume ab. Ist das Basisvolume zerstört, wurden die Snapshots entfernt. Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) Ein Modul für die Serververwaltung, welches das IPMI-Protokoll (Intelligent Platform Management Interface) implementiert. Im Rahmen des Dell AIM verwendet der Controller den BMC zur Remote-Steuerung einiger Servermodelle. Blade Beim Dell AIM SDK ist ein Blade ein Element der Host-Superklasse. Bei modularen Dell-Systemen bezieht sich Blade auf einen modularen in ein Gehäuse eingebauten Server. BMC Siehe Baseboard Management Controller. Startfähiger Datenträger Eine CD, SD-Karte oder ein USB-Speichermedium, mit dem das System gestartet werden kann, wenn ein Start von der Festplatte nicht möglich ist. Cache Schneller Speicherbereich, der eine Kopie von Daten oder Anleitungen enthält, um die Zugriffszeiten auf Daten zu verkürzen. CHA Siehe Compellent Host Adapter. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) Ein Protokoll zur Netzwerkanmeldung mit einem verschlüsselten Anfrage- und Antwort-Verfahren. Wird bei Hosts, die den korrekten Benutzernamen und das 4korrekte Kennwort angeben, zur Einschränkung des Zugriffs auf Volumes und Snapshots verwendet. CHAP wird ebenfalls für Anmelde-/Administratorkonten genutzt. Kanal In der Dell/AIM-Umgebung eine von bis zu acht physischen Verbindungen, die Switch-Ports zugewiesen werden können und über bis zu acht physische Netzwerkkarten mit einer Persona verbunden werden können. Ein Netzwerk kann mit ein oder zwei bevorzugten Kanälen für den Datenverkehr konfiguriert werden, damit bei Ausfall des bevorzugten Kanals der Datenverkehr unsichtbar zum anderen Kanal geleitet wird. CHAP Siehe Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. Gehäuse-Switch Im Kontext des Dell AIM ein Ethernet-Switch in einem Gehäuseschacht. Gehäuse-Switches werden durch den Controller verwaltet. Client Device Communication Certificate Im Kontext des EKM ein spezieller Verschlüsselungscode, durch den ein Client mit dem Server kommunizieren kann. Clusterknoten Ein physisches Mitglied eines Ressourcen-Clusters wie beispielsweise ein Host in einem Servercluster oder ein SAN in einem Speichercluster. Sammlung Beim ASM/ME sind Sammlungen zusammengehörige Gruppen von Speicherobjekten wie Volumes, Snapshots oder Anwendungskomponenten und werden im Baumdiagramm der ASM-Konsole durch Knoten unter dem Masterknoten der jeweiligen Sammlung dargestellt. Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager erscheinen Volume- und Replika-Sammlungen sowie benutzerdefinierte Snapshot-Sammlungen in der Hierarchie unter der VolumeAnsicht. Compellent Host Adapter (CHA) In jedem Controller eines Dell Compellent Storage Center befindliche Karte/ Akku für den internen Cache. Der Speicher des Schreibcache wird auf die Cache-Karte gespiegelt. Auf einem Dell Compellent Storage Center mit zwei Controllern enthält die Cache-Karte von Controller 1 die Spiegelung für Controller 2 und die Cache-Karte von Controller 2 die Spiegelung für Controller 1. Auf einem Dell Compellent Storage Center mit einem Einzelcontroller enthält die Cache-Karte die Spiegelung für den Einzelcontroller. Konfiguration Die Datenbank, die den gesamten Inhalt und die Konfiguration der Dell AIM Umgebung beschreibt. Conservation Mode (Erhaltungsmodus) Ein Datenbewahrungsmodus des Dell Compellent Storage Center, der aktiviert wird, wenn der verbleibende freie Speicherplatz unter einen kritischen Schwellenwert sinkt (typischerweise 10%, bis zu 32 GB). Im ConservationModus gibt das Dell Compellent Storage Center eine Warnung aus, verhindert die Erstellung neuer Volumes und gibt Replays schneller frei, um Speicherplatz zu gewinnen. Siehe Notfallmodus. Konsole Die webgestützte Benutzeroberfläche, mit der Elemente in der Dell AIM Umgebung überwacht und bearbeitet werden können. Die Dell AIM Konsole befindet sich im Dell AIM Controller. Kontrollmodul In Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Arrays die physische Prozessor- und Schnittstellenkomponente. Ein Kontrollmodul enthält in seinem Flash-Speicher die Firmware der Dell EqualLogic PS-Series und sichert vorübergehend die 5unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung für Daten im Cachespeicher. Es verfügt über mehrere Netzwerkschnittstellen und einen optionalen seriellen Port. Ein Array kann zwei Hot-Swap-fähige, doppelt redundante Controller enthalten. Dabei bedient das aktive Kontrollmodul die E/A, während das zweite Kontrollmodul Daten in seinem Cache spiegelt. Bedienfeld Teil des Systems, der die Anzeigen und Bedienelemente enthält, z.B. den Netzschalter und die Betriebsanzeige. Steuerungsport Der iSCSI-Zielport, mit dem iSCSI-Initiatoren (Server) für Speicherabfragen verbunden werden. In einem für den Virtual-Port-Modus konfigurierten Dell Compellent Storage Center wird für jede iSCSI-Fault-Domain ein Steuerungsport erstellt, um den iSCSI-Datenverkehr zum entsprechenden virtuellen Port zu leiten. Controller (Dell AIM) Software, die die physische und virtuelle Hardware, Software und Netzwerkkonfigurationen verwaltet und die Dell AIM Konsole beherbergt. Bei einem Paar dynamischer Controller läuft jeder Controller auf einem dedizierten Server, verfügt jedoch über eine gemeinsame Konfigurationsdatenbank und weitere Schlüsseldateien in einem gemeinsamen Dateisystem. Controller (Dell Compellent) Bietet Gruppierung von Festplatten (RAID), E/A-Routing, Fehlererkennung und Datenwiederherstellung. Stellt die Intelligenz des gesamten Dell Compellent Storage Center Untersystems dar. Jedes Storage-Center-System enthält mindestens einen Controller. Storage Center und Controller empfehlen Korrekturmaßnahmen zur Verbesserung der Leistung und Verfügbarkeit des Systems. Controller Services (Controllerdienste) Im Kontext des Dell AIM die virtuelle(n) IP-Adresse(n), die der Controller zur Kommunikation mit dem System Control Network (SCN), verwalteten Switches, der Konsole, der Befehlszeilenschnittstelle (CLI) etc. verwendet. In der Standardeinstellung ist dies eine einzelne virtuelle IP-Adresse auf dem aktiven Controller; es können jedoch auch eindeutige Adressen für die Dienste „SCN Services“ und den SNMP Trap Collector festgelegt werden. Copilot Services (Kopilotendienste) Innerhalb des Dell Compellent Storage Center die Kombination aus zentralen Support-, Produktinformations- und Vertriebsressourcen, die das System proaktiv überwachen und zur Steigerung der Leistung und Optimierung der Systemverfügbarkeit korrigierende Maßnahmen einleiten. Copy-Mirror-Migrate (KopierenSpiegeln-Migrieren) Eine Funktion des Dell Compellent Storage Center, die das Migrieren von Volumes zwischen unterschiedlichen Laufwerktypen und RAID-Levels ermöglicht. Credential Store Im Kontext des EKM eine Ablage, die Zugangsdaten von Sitzungen enthält. Zugangsdaten sind sicherheitsrelevante Informationen wie Benutzernamen, Kennwörter oder Zertifikate. Cryptographic Object Ein Verfahren zur Sicherung von Daten. Data Collector Komponente des Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager, die im Hintergrund auf einem Server ausgeführt wird und Informationen zu allen Storage-CenterSystemen erfasst, die mit dem Server verbunden sind. 6Data Instant Replay Eine Funktion des Dell Compellent Storage Center, die in festgelegten Intervallen speichereffiziente Point-in-Time-Kopien (PITC) eines Volumes auf dem lokalen SAN anlegt, so dass ein Volume gegebenenfalls auf einen früheren Zeitpunkt zurückgesetzt werden kann. Siehe Replay, Snapshot. Data Progression Eine Funktion des Dell Compellent Storage Center, die Datenseiten auf Basis der E/A-Aktivität (Nachfrage) automatisch auf Geräte mit höherer oder niedrigerer Leistung transferiert. Siehe Tiered Storage (mehrstufige Speicherung). DDR Siehe Double-Data Rate. Delegierter Speicherplatz Im Kontext des Dell EqualLogic Group Manager in einer Gruppe zurückgehaltener Speicherplatz für die Speicherung empfangener Replika für einen Partner. Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) Der Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) sichert auf LTO-Bändern gespeicherte Daten durch die Verwaltung von Verschlüsselungscodes für Dell-Lösungen für die Bandautomation. Dell Remote Access Controller (DRAC) Eine Schnittstellenkarte mit der Fähigkeit zur bandexternen Verwaltung. Der Controller verfügt über einen eigenen Prozessor, Speicher, Netzwerkverbindung und Zugang zum Systembus und ermöglicht Systemadministratoren die Remote-Steuerung von Systemen in einem Netzwerk. Gerätetreiber Programm, über das die Kommunikation des Betriebssystems oder eines anderen Programms mit einem Peripheriegerät gesteuert wird. DHCP Siehe Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Digital Versatile Disc Digital Versatile Disc oder Digital Video Disc (DVD). Laufwerksordner Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center eine Sammlung physischer Datenspeichergeräte (Laufwerke, SSDs), die von einem Benutzer angesehen und verwaltet werden können. Laufwerksordner legen den/die Speicherpool(s) fest, von denen Volume-Speicherplatz zugewiesen wird. Obwohl Laufwerksordner mehreren Speicherpools zugeordnet werden können, ist die Leistung des Dell Compellent Storage Center am höchsten, wenn alle Laufwerke demselben Ordner und Speicherpool zugewiesen werden. Laufwerksposition Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center die Position eines Laufwerkschachts innerhalb seines Gehäuses in Zeilen-Spalten-Notation. So bezieht sich beispielsweise die Laufwerksposition 01-02 auf den Schacht in der ersten Reihe von oben und der zweiten Spalte von links. DNS Siehe Domain Name System. Domain Name System (DNS) Ein Verfahren zum Übersetzen von Internet-Domänennamen, wie z.B. www.example.com, in IP-Adressen wie 208.77.188.166. Ruhende Persona In der AIM-Umgebung eine Persona, die momentan weder auf einem Host läuft noch darauf wartet. Double-Data Rate (DDR) Eine Technologie in Speichermodulen zur potenziellen Verdoppelung der Datenrate, indem Daten sowohl an der ansteigenden als auch der abfallenden Flanke eines Taktzyklus übertragen werden. 7DRAC Dell Remote Access Controller (DRAC). DRAM Siehe Dynamic Random-Access Memory. Doppelt Redundant Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center eine Option von Speicherprofilen zum Schutz gegen den Verlust jedes einzelnen von zwei Laufwerken; erfolgt typischerweise durch die Verwendung von RAID 10 und/oder RAID 6. DVD Siehe Digital Versatile Disc. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Verfahren zur automatischen Zuweisung von IP-Adressen zu einem ClientSystem. Dynamic Random-Access Memory (DRAM) Der RAM eines Systems besteht normalerweise ausschließlich aus DRAMChips. EKM Siehe Dell Encryption Key Manager. EKM Administrator Im Kontext des EKM der Superbenutzer, der Benutzer und Gruppen erstellen und löschen kann. EKM Encryption Manager (tklmadmin) Im Kontext des EKM der tägliche Benutzer, der Schlüssel und Geräte erstellt oder löscht. Emergency Mode (Notfallmodus) Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein Modus, der aktiviert wird, wenn das System aufgrund fehlenden freien Speicherplatzes nicht mehr betriebsfähig ist. Im Notfallmodus wird sämtliche Server-E/A abgelehnt, sämtliche Volumes werden offline genommen und können nur dann wieder online gehen, wenn genügend Speicherplatz für die Beendigung des Notfallmodus frei gemacht wird. Siehe Conservation-Modus. Gehäuse Ein physisches Gehäuse, das für mehrere Laufwerke eine gemeinsame Schnittstelle für die Stromversorgung und die Kühlung bereitstellt. Umgebung Im Kontext des Dell AIM der Bestand von Hardware, Software und Netzwerkkonfigurationen, die durch einen Dell AIM Controller verwaltet werden. Eth0 Siehe Ethernet Port 0. Eth1 Siehe Ethernet Port 1. Ethernet Port 0 (Eth0) Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ist Eth0 eine für die Verwaltung reservierte Ethernet-Schnittstelle. Ethernet Port 1 (Eth1) Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ist Eth1 eine für die Kommunikation zwischen Controller-Prozessen, das Clustering oder Fernreplikation reservierte Ethernet-Schnittstelle. Externes Netzwerk Im Kontext der Dell AIM Umgebung ein Netzwerk, das nicht Teil der Dell AIM Umgebung, jedoch physisch und logisch mit ihr verbunden ist. Externer Switch Im Kontext der Dell AIM Umgebung ein Switch, der nicht Teil der Dell AIM Umgebung, jedoch physisch und logisch mit ihr verbunden ist. Fabric Eine Kombination aus miteinander verbundenen Switches die als einheitliche Routing-Infrastruktur fungieren. Sie ermöglicht mehrere Verbindungen zwischen Geräten auf einem SAN und erlaubt die reibungslose Eingliederung 8neuer Geräte. Eine FC- (oder iSCSI-)Topologie mit mindestens einem auf dem Netzwerk vorhandenen Switch. FastTrack Ein optionales Storage-Center-Dienstprogramm, das die aktivsten Daten auf den äußeren (schnelleren) Laufwerksspuren platziert. FAT Siehe File Allocation Table. Fault Domain Innerhalb der Dell Compellent Storage Center Umgebung bezeichnet eine Fault Domain eine Ausfallgruppe. Im Virtual-Port-Modus können alle Front-End-Ports Teil der einen Fault Domain sein. Im Legacy-Modus stellt jeder primäre und reservierte Port eine Fault Domain dar. FC Siehe Fibre Channel. FE Siehe Front-End-Netzwerk. Fibre Channel (FC) Eine Hochgeschwindigkeitsverbindung mit der Server mit Controllern und Back-End-Laufwerkgehäusen verbunden werden. FC-Komponenten sind beispielsweise HBAs, Hubs, Switches und die Verkabelung. Der Begriff FC erstreckt sich auch auf ein serielles Vollduplex-Hochgeschwindigkeitsprotokoll für die Kommunikation, das Datenübertragungsraten von bis zu 10 Gigabit pro Sekunde ermöglicht. File Allocation Table (FAT) Die Dateisystemstruktur, mittels derer MS-DOS die Dateispeicherung organisiert und verfolgt. Unter dem Betriebssystem Microsoft Windows kann optional ein FAT-Dateisystem verwendet werden. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Ein Protokoll auf Anwendungsebene, mit dem große Dateien zwischen Rechnern oder Hosts transferiert werden. Front-End-Netzwerk (FE) Die Komponente im SAN-Datenschreibfluss (Server zu Switch zu Controller zu Laufwerken) des Dell Compellent Storage Center, die Schreibvorgänge von Daten initiiert. Im Allgemeinen stellen Server (oder Switches) das Front-End des Controllers dar. Ein Storage-Center-System, das Daten auf ein entferntes System repliziert, stellt jedoch das Front-End des entfernten Systems dar. Siehe Back-End. FTP Siehe File Transfer Protocol. GB Siehe Gigabyte. Gigabyte (GB) 1024 Megabyte bzw. 1.073.741.824 Byte. In Bezug auf Festplattenkapazitäten wird der Wert jedoch üblicherweise auf 1.000.000.000 Byte gerundet. Gruppe Siehe PS-Series Gruppe. HBA Siehe Host Bus Adapter. HIT/LE Siehe Host Integration Tools für Linux. HIT/ME Siehe Host Integration Tools für Windows. HIT/VM Siehe Host Integration Tools für VMware Host In der Dell AIM Umgebung kann ein Host ein physischer Server (rackmontiert oder Blade) oder eine Virtual Machine sein. Beim Dell AIM SDK eine Superklasse, die Bladeserver, rackmontierte Server und Virtual Machines (VMs) umfasst. 9Host-Adapter Ein Controller, der die Kommunikation zwischen dem Systembus und dem Peripheriegerät, typischerweise einem Speichergerät, regelt. Host-Bus-Adapter (HBA) Ein Gerät (typischerweise eine Add-on-Karte), das einen Server mit einem SAN (Storage Area Network) verbindet. Jeder HBA wird vom SAN anhand seiner WWPN (World Wide Port Number) eindeutig identifiziert. Gebräuchliche HBATypen sind Fibre Channel und iSCSI. Host Integration Tools für Linux (HIT/ LE) Ein Satz von Werkzeugen zur Integration von ESX-Systemen in Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Speicherarrays. Er enthält den Auto Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE), den EqualLogic Datastore Manager und das EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment Utility. Host Integration Tools für Windows (HIT/ME) Ein Satz von Anwendungen zur Konfigurierung und Verwaltung von Arrays. Er enthält den ASM/ME, das DSM (Multipath I/O Device Specific Module) und den RSW (Remote Setup Wizard). Host Integration Tools für VMware (HIT/VM) Ein Satz von Werkzeugen zur Integration von Linux-Systemen in Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Speicherarrays. Er enthält das Remote Setup Wizard Command Line Interface (RSWCLI), die EqualLogic Host Performance and Configuration Tuning Suite (eqltune) und die EqualLogic Log Gathering Facility (eqllog). Hotspare-Laufwerk (Ersatzlaufwerk) In der Dell Compellent Storage Center Umgebung ist ein Hotspare-Laufwerk ein Backup-Laufwerk für Sicherungskopien. Falls ein aktives Array ausfällt, gliedert der Controller das Hotspare in das aktive Array ein und führt einen fliegenden Neuaufbau der Daten durch. Während das Hotspare ohne menschliches Zutun in ein aktives Laufwerk umgewandelt wird, sollten Sie daran denken, das ausgefallene Laufwerk so bald wie möglich auszutauschen, damit das Array wieder durch ein neues Hotspare geschützt ist. Hotspares können sich über mehrere Laufwerkgehäuse erstrecken. Storage-CenterHotspares können eine andere Kapazität aufweisen als das Datenlaufwerk, das sie ersetzen. Hot-Plug Die Fähigkeit, ein Gerät in das Hostsystem einzusetzen oder zu installieren (typischerweise eine Festplatte oder einen internen Lüfter) während das System eingeschaltet und in Betrieb ist. Wird auch als Hot-Swap bezeichnet. Hot-Swap Siehe hot-plug. E/A Eingabe/Ausgabe. Ein Eingabegerät ist beispielsweise eine Tastatur, ein Ausgabegerät ein Monitor. Im Allgemeinen kann die E/A-Aktivität von der Rechenaktivität unterschieden werden. ID In der Dell AIM Umgebung eine eindeutige Kennung für ein Element, die ihm zugewiesen wird, wenn es zur Umgebung hinzugefügt wird. iDRAC Siehe integration Dell Remote Access Controller IKEv2-SCSI Ein Protokoll für die Zertifikaterstellung. Image Speziell beim Dell AIM die Bits, die auf einem Laufwerk oder einem Speicherarray gespeichert sind, das eine Persona oder VMRack startet, sowie Informationen, die der Controller zum Starten dieses Image auf einem bestimmten Hosttyp verwendet. Eine Persona oder ein VMRack kann beispielsweise mit mehr als einem Image konfiguriert werden, so dass die 10Persona entweder auf einem physischen Server oder einer Virtual Machine gestartet werden kann. infiniBand infiniBand bietet bidirektionale serielle Punkt-zu-Punkt-Verbindungen für die Verbindung von Prozessoren und Hochgeschwindigkeits-Peripheriegeräten. Instant Replay Siehe Data Instant Replay. integration Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) Ein Remote-Access-Controller, der das Internet-SCSI-Protokoll verwendet. Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI (Intelligente PlattformVerwaltungsschnittstelle) Ein in einigen Servern durch Verwaltungsmodule umgesetztes Protokoll, mit dem die Server ferngesteuert werden. Die Blade-Verwaltungsmodule in DellServern implementieren iPMI. Verbindungsswitch Ein durch den Controller verwalteter Switch in der Dell AIM Umgebung, durch den Elemente wie Gehäuse, vRacks oder Verbindungsswitches und externe Switches verbunden werden. internet-SCSI (iSCSI) Internet-SCSI (siehe SCSI). Ein Protokoll, das Standard-SCSI-Befehle zur Kommunikation zwischen Client-Servern (iSCSI-Initiatoren) und NetzwerkSpeichergeräten (iSCSI-Targets) auf IP-Netzwerken beinhaltet. IPMI Siehe Intelligent Platform Management Interface. iSCSI Siehe Internet SCSI. Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) Standards für die Kommunikation zwischen EnterpriseSchlüsselverwaltungssystemen und Verschlüsselungssystemen. Key Serving Ports Ports, die vom Betriebssystem für die Kommunikation im EKM verwendet werden. Schlüsselgruppe Im EKM ein Satz von Schlüsseln, die einer bestimmten Abteilung, Region oder Hardwareart zugeordnet sind. Schlüssel Ein verschlüsseltes Zertifikat, mit dem Daten im EKM geschützt werden. Keystore / Keygroup / Master Keystore Eine Gruppe codierter Schlüssel im EKM. KMIP Siehe Key Management Interoperability Protocol Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) Eine Programmierschnittstelle (API) für die Programmiersprache Java, die festlegt, wie ein Client auf Daten in einer Datenbank zugreifen, sie abfragen und sie aktualisieren darf. JDBC Siehe Java Database Connectivity. Führungscontroller Der Primärcontroller in einem Dell Compellent Storage Center mit zwei Controllern. Normalerweise teilen sich die Führungs- und Peer-Controller die Speicher-E/A-Belastung, was den Durchsatz im Wesentlichen verdoppelt. Externe Verwaltungsfunktionen werden jedoch nur vom Führungscontroller durchgeführt. Fällt ein Controller aus, wird oder bleibt der übrige Controller der Führungscontroller und übernimmt die Aufgaben der beiden Controller. Siehe Peer-Controller. Legacy-Modus Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center werden Fault Domains konfiguriert, um Paare von primären und reservierten Front-End-Ports zuzuordnen, die 11redundant miteinander verbunden sind. Durch dieses Verfahren wird Speicherdatenverkehr gegen Single Points of Failure geschützt (Komponenten, deren Ausfall zum Ausfall eines Systems führen kann). Siehe Fault Domain, Virtueller Port oder Virtual-Port-Modus. Linear Tape-Open (LTO) Ein Format für Bandlaufwerke mit offenen Standards. Logical Unit Number (LUN) Eine logische Einheit (Logical Unit) ist eine konzeptionelle Aufteilung (eine Untereinheit) eines Speicherlaufwerks oder eines Satzes von Speicherlaufwerken. Jede logische Einheit besitzt eine Adresse, die als Logical Unit Number (LUN) bezeichnet wird und deren eindeutige Identifizierung ermöglicht. LTO Siehe Linear Tape-Open. LTO Key Group Rollover (Rücksetzen der Schlüsselgruppe) Im EKM ein zugewiesener Schlüsselsatz, der benutzt wird, wenn die StandardSchlüsselgruppe beeinträchtigt ist. LUN Siehe Logical Unit Number. MAC-Adresse Siehe Media Access Control Adresse. Verwaltete Laufwerke Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center Speichergeräte (Laufwerke, SSDs), die einem Laufwerksordner zugewiesen werden, um die Geräte einem Speicherpool zuzuordnen. Siehe Speicherpool, Laufwerksordner. Verwaltetes System Ein verwaltetes System ist jedes System, das mithilfe von Dell OpenManage™ Server Administrator überwacht und verwaltet wird. Verwaltungs-IP-Adresse Adresse für die Verbindung mit einem intelligenten IP-fähigen Gerät, um dieses Gerät zu verwalten oder zu überwachen. Die Adresse kann für die ausschließliche Verwendung durch Verwaltungsanwendungen reserviert oder für die Verwendung durch Verwaltungsanwendungen und Dienste freigegeben werden. Verwaltungsnetzwerk Ein optionales Verwaltungsnetzwerk trennt iSCSI-Datenverkehr (E/A von Volumes) von Verwaltungsdatenverkehr (GUI und CLI Sessions und andere Kommunikation für die Gruppenverwaltung oder Vorgänge zwischen Gruppen). Verwaltungsstation Ein System, mit dem ein oder mehrere verwaltete Systeme von einem zentralen Standort aus fernverwaltet werden. Manuelles Replay Eine Funktion des Dell Compellent Storage Center, die es dem Benutzer ermöglicht, manuell Point-in-Time-Kopien der Daten von Volumes zu einem bestimmten Zeitpunkt zu erstellen. Replikation durch manuelle Übertragung Über transportable Datenträger statt über ein Netzwerk durchgeführte Replikation. Wird in Fällen angewandt, in denen die Netzwerkverbindung zwischen Replikationspartnern zu langsam oder auf andere Weise für den Transfer großer Datenmengen ungeeignet ist. Manual Transfer Utility (Dienstprogramm für den manuellen Transfer) Ein einzelnes Dienstprogramm von Dell EqualLogic, das die Replikation von Volumes mittels transportabler Datenträger anstelle des Netzwerkes durchführt. Das Dienstprogramm verfügt sowohl über eine grafische Benutzoberfläche (GUI) als auch eine Befehlszeilenschnittstelle (CLI). 12Media Access Control Address (MAC-Adresse) Die eindeutige Hardwarekennung des Systems in einem Netzwerk. migrate volume (Volume Migrieren) Ein Befehl des Dell Compellent Storage Center, mit dem Daten von einem Volume zum anderen transferiert werden. Migration Im Kontext des EKM die Kombination eines Schlüsselspeichers mit einem vorhandenen Schlüsselspeicher während (nicht nach) der Installation des Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0. mirror volume (Volume spiegeln) Ein Befehl des Dell Compellent Storage Center, mit dem ein lokales Volume auf ein entferntes Dell Compellent Storage Center repliziert und aktualisiert wird, bis das Spiegeln manuell abgebrochen wird. Spiegeln Eine Art der Datenredundanz, bei der Daten auf einem Satz physischer Laufwerke und Duplikatkopien der Daten auf einem oder mehreren weiteren Laufwerksätzen gespeichert werden. Die Spiegelungsfunktion wird durch eine Software bereitgestellt. Siehe Striping, RAID. NAS Siehe Network-Attached Storage. Netzwerkanschluss Ein Objekt, das die erforderlichen Netzwerk-Anschlüsse einer Persona oder eines VMRacks festlegt. Ein Netzwerkanschluss wird beispielsweise erstellt, wenn eine Persona zu einem Netzwerk hinzugefügt wird. Network-Attached Storage (NAS) NAS ist eines der Konzepte zur Implementierung gemeinsamer Speicherung auf einem Netzwerk. NAS-Systeme besitzen ihre eigenen Betriebssysteme und integrierte Hardware und Software, die auf bestimmte Speicheranforderungen zugeschnitten sind. NTP Das Network Time Protocol (NTP) ist ein Protokoll zur Synchronisierung der Uhren von Computersystemen über paketvermittelte Datennetzwerke mit variabler Latenz hinweg. Überkonfigurierter Speicherplatz In einem SAN, das schlanke Provisionierung unterstützt, die Menge an Speicherplatz, die als verfügbar konfiguriert, jedoch nicht physisch vorhanden ist (d.h. konfigurierter Speicherplatz minus verfügbarem Speicherplatz). Paritätsstripe In RAID-Arrays ein Festplattenlaufwerk mit Striping, das Paritätsdaten enthält. Partition Eine physische, mithilfe des Befehls „fdisk“ entstandene Sektion einer Festplatte. Partitionen können mit dem „format“-Befehl auf mehrere logische Laufwerke aufgeteilt werden. Passiver Controller Der Dell AIM Controller, der als Standby-Reservegerät fungiert und bei Ausfall des aktiven Controllers für die Übernahme der Verwaltungsaufgaben bereitsteht. Peer-Controller In einem Dell Compellent Storage Center mit zwei Controllern teilt sich der Peer-Controller die E/A-Belastung mit dem Führungscontroller, führt jedoch keine externen Verwaltungsfunktionen durch. Fällt der Führungscontroller aus, übernimmt der Peer-Controller die E/A- und Verwaltungsaufgaben beider Controller. Siehe Führungscontroller. Persona Eine auf Laufwerk festgehaltene Umgebung: das Betriebssystem, optionale Dell AIM Softwareagenten, das Netzwerk oder weitere für eine auf einem Host der Dell AIM Umgebung laufende Anwendung benötigte Einstellungen. 13Pool Für die Nutzung durch Volumes auf einem SAN verfügbarer Speicherplatz. Beim Dell Compellent Enterprise Storage Manager und dem Dell Compellent Storage Center entspricht dies dem Gesamtspeicherplatz im SAN. In Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Arrays entspricht dies dem Gesamtspeicherplatz auf den Mitgliedern des jeweiligen Pools. Pool-Administrator Ein Konto auf einer Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Gruppe, das nur zur Verwaltung von Objekten in einem bestimmten Pool oder Satz von Pools für eine Gruppe berechtigt ist. Vergleiche Gruppen-Administrator. Primärgruppe Innerhalb der Umgebung des Dell EqualLogic Group Manager diejenige Gruppe, die das ursprüngliche Volume im Rahmen einer Replikationspartnerschaft enthält. Siehe Sekundärgruppe. Primärvolume Innerhalb der Umgebung des Dell EqualLogic Group Manager ein Volume, das für die Replikation auf einen Replikationspartner konfiguriert ist. PS-Series Array Eine einzelne Dell EqualLogic iSCSI-Speichereinheit, die üblicherweise als Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Gruppe konfiguriert ist. Mehrere PS-Series Arrays können in einer größeren PS-Series Gruppe zusammengefasst und als einzelnes iSCSI-SAN verwaltet werden. PS-Series Gruppe Eine aus einem oder mehreren Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Speicherarrays zusammengesetzte iSCSI-Speichereinheit, auf die über eine einzige IP-Adresse zugegriffen und die als Storage Area Network (SAN) verwaltet werden kann. Öffentliche Dienste Im Kontext des Dell AIM die virtuelle IP-Adresse der Controllerdienste, mithilfe derer die Konsole oder CLI mit dem aktiven Controller verbunden wird. RAC Remote Access Controller RAID Siehe Redundant Array of Independent Disks. RAID 0 Daten werden in Stripes über die verfügbaren Laufwerke verteilt und so die Leistung verbessert. RAID 0 bietet keinerlei Datenredundanz. RAID 10 Daten werden in Stripes über die verfügbaren Laufwerke verteilt und gespiegelt, was Datenverfügbarkeit und eine verbesserte Leistung bietet. Hält mindestens eine vollständige Kopie aller Daten auf dem Volume aufrecht. RAID 10 bietet optimale Lese-/Schreibleistung, eine erhöhte Wahrscheinlichkeit für die Tolerierung mehrfacher Ausfälle und die schnellste Wiederherstellung von Daten. RAID 5 Hält mithilfe eines mathematisch hergeleiteten rotierenden Paritätsstripes eine logische Kopie der Daten aufrecht. Das Paritätsstripe wird aus den Datenstripes abgeleitet. Dieses Verfahren bietet eine geringere Überkapazität für redundante Informationen als RAID 10, weist jedoch aufgrund der Berechung des Paritätsstripes bei jedem Schreibvorgang eine geringere Schreibleistung auf als RAID 10. Die Leseleistung hingegen entspricht derjenigen von RAID 10. RAID 50 RAID-Level 50 ist eine Kombination aus RAID-Level 5 und RAID-Level 0. RAID 50 umfasst sowohl Paritäts- als auch Laufwerk-Striping über mehrere Laufwerke hinweg. 14Wiederherstellungs-Volume Ein zum Zweck der Wiederherstellung von Daten erstelltes Volume. Bei Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Arrays wird ein Wiederherstellungs-Volume durch Verwendung eines eingehenden Replikasatzes als Teil eines Ausfallprozesses erstellt. Es können zudem Vorlage-Volumes und Thin Clones für die Wiederherstellung erzeugt werden. Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center wird ein Ansichts-Volume aus einem Replay erstellt. Siehe Replika, AnsichtsVolume, Replay. Redundanz Die Duplizierung von Informationen oder Hardwarekomponenten, um sicherzustellen, dass bei Ausfall einer Primäreinheit eine Sekundäreinheit dessen Funktion übernehmen kann. Das Dell Compellent Storage Center bietet Redundanz für jede Komponente, so dass kein Single Point of Failure existiert (Komponente deren Ausfall zum Ausfall eines Systems führen kann). Einzelredundanz schützt gegen Datenverlust bei Ausfall einer einzigen Komponente. Doppelte Redundanz schützt gegen Datenverlust bei Ausfall von zwei Komponenten. Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID). Redundante Anordnung unabhängiger Laufwerke. Ein Verfahren zur Bereitstellung von Datenredundanz. Einige verbreitete Implementierungen von RAID sind RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 und RAID 50. Siehe Spiegeln, Striping. Remote Instant Replay Eine Funktion des Dell Compellent Storage Center, bei der ein Replay auf ein entferntes Dell Compellent Storage Center repliziert wird. Das lokale und das entfernte Dell Compellent Storage Center befinden sich in einer Aktiv-AktivKonfiguration; die bidirektionale Replikation kann synchron oder asynchron in unabhängigen Intervallen erfolgen. Für Replikationen beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ist die Softwareanwendung Enterprise Manager und eine Replikationslizenz erforderlich. Siehe Replay, Remote-System, Replikation. Remote Setup Wizard (RSW) Eine grafische Benutzeroberfläche (GUI), mit der ein Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Array nach erfolgter Installation des Host Integration Tools/Microsoft Edition konfiguriert werden kann. Remote-System Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein separates SAN, das so konfiguriert ist, dass das lokalen Dell Compellent Storage Center Replikationsdaten vom ursprünglichen Volume empfängt. Für Replikationen beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ist die Softwareanwendung Enterprise Manager und eine Replikationslizenz erforderlich. Siehe Replikation. Replay Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center eine voll verwendungsfähige Point-inTime-Kopie (PITC) von Daten, die ein Image von Daten zu dem Zeitpunkt enthält, an dem die Kopie gestartet wurde. Die Kopie kann lokal oder auf einem entfernten Dell Compellent Storage Center gespeichert werden. Siehe Snapshot, Data Instant Replay, Remote Instant Replay. Replay-Profil Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein Satz von Regeln, die festlegen, wann und wie Replay-Point-in-Time-Kopien angefertigt werden und wie lange sie gespeichert werden. Siehe Replay. Replay-Speicherplatz Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center der Speicherplatz, der automatisch für Replays reserviert und verwendet wird. Siehe aktiver Speicherplatz, tatsächlicher Speicherplatz. 15Replik Ein Point-in-Time-Abbild eines Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Volumes. Das ursprüngliche Volume und seine Replika befinden sich in verschiedenen Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Gruppen (Replikationspartner), die nach Möglichkeit geografisch getrennt sind, um die Toleranz gegen Katastrophen zu erhöhen. Replika-Sammlung Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager der Satz von Replika, der aus jeder Replikation einer Volume-Sammlung hervorgeht. Replica-Sammlungs-Satz Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager der Satz von Replika-Collections für eine Volume-Sammlung. Replika-Reserve Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager der Anteil des delegierten Speicherplatzes bei einem Replikationspartner, der für die Replika-Sätze eines bestimmten Volumes reserviert ist. Die Replika-Reserve wird für das Volume auf der Primärgruppe konfiguriert, die tatsächliche Replika-Reserve befindet sich jedoch auf der Sekundärgruppe. Replika-Satz Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager der Satz vollständiger Replika für ein Volume, eine Volume-Vorlage oder ein Thin-Clone-Volume. Replizierendes System Ein Dell Compellent Storage Center, das so konfiguriert ist, dass es Replikationsdaten von einem oder mehreren lokalen Volumes zu einem entfernten Storage Center sendet. Siehe Replikation, Remote-System, Remote Instant Replay. Replikation Das Kopieren von Volume-Daten (nur Deltas) vom primären (lokalen) SAN auf ein sekundäres (entferntes) SAN, damit Daten erforderlichenfalls von jedem SAN wiederhergestellt werden können. Die SANs können unbegrenzt weit voneinander entfernt sein. Replikationspartner Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager eine Gruppe, die so konfiguriert ist, dass sie Replika an oder von einem anderen Partner sendet oder empfängt. RSW Siehe Remote Setup Wizard. Lauffähige Persona Im Kontext des Dell AIM eine vom Netzwerk gestartete Persona, die darauf wartet, einem Host zugewiesen zu werden. SAN Siehe Storage Area Network. SAN HeadQuarters Ermöglicht die Überwachung mehrerer Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Gruppen von einer einzigen grafischen Benutzeroberfläche. Es sammelt und formatiert Leistungsdaten und weitere wichtige Gruppeninformationen. SCN Siehe System Control Network. SCN Services (SCN-Dienste) Die virtuelle IP-Adresse der Controllerdienste, die Personas und VMRacks in der Dell AIM Umgebung zur Kommunikation mit dem aktiven Controller verwenden. SCSI Siehe Small Computer System Interface. SDK Siehe Software Development Kit. Sekundäres Kontrollmodul Innerhalb der Umgebung des Dell EqualLogic Group Manager spiegelt das sekundäre Kontrollmodul Cache-Daten vom aktiven Kontrollmodul. Stellt das aktive Kontrollmodul seine Funktion ein, übernimmt das sekundäre Kontrollmodul den Netzwerkbetrieb. Siehe aktives Kontrollmodul. 16Sekundärgruppe In einer Replikationskonfiguration des Dell EqualLogic Group Manager diejenige Gruppe, die Replika eines Quell-Volumes empfängt. Siehe Primärgruppe. Servercluster Eine Gruppe unabhängiger, als ein System zusammenarbeitender Server, die im Falle eines Ausfalls eines Einzelcomputers den ununterbrochenen Betrieb sicherstellen. Service Tag (Service-Tag-Nummer) Eine Kennzeichnung auf dem System, mit dem es für einen Anruf beim technischen Support von Dell identifiziert werden kann. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Legt ein Nachrichtenformat und ein Verfahren zur Weiterleitung fest, mit dem Nachrichten zwischen Hosts im Internet hin- und her gesendet werden. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) SNMP ist eine Industriestandardschnittstelle, mit der Netzwerkadministratoren Workstations im Fernzugriff überwachen und verwalten können. Simulator Eine Komponente des Dell AIM SDK, die eine laufende Dell AIM Umgebung einschließlich Controller, Konsole und physischem und virtuellem Netzwerk emuliert. Siehe SDK. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) Eine E/A-Bus-Schnittstelle mit schnellerer Datenübertragungsrate als Standardports. SMART Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (Selbstüberwachende Analyse- und Berichtstechnologie). Ermöglicht Fehler- und Ausfallberichte von Festplatten an das System-BIOS und deren Anzeige auf dem Bildschirm. Smart Copy Eine anwendungskonsistente Point-in-Time-Kopie des ASM/ME von Objekten in einer Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Gruppe. Smart Copies können je nach Version des verwendeten Auto-Snapshot Managers aus Snapshots, Klonen oder Replika bestehen. SMP Siehe Symmetric Multiprocessing. SMTP Siehe Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Snapshot Eine Point-in-Time-Kopie (PITC) eines Volumes zu einem bestimmten Zeitpunkt. Siehe Replay. Snapshot-Sammlung Ein Satz von Snapshots, der aus der Anfertigung eines Snapshot auf einer Volume-Sammlung herrührt. Siehe Volume-Sammlung. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) SNMP Trap Collector Im Kontext des Dell AIM die virtuelle IP-Adresse der Controllerdienste, die verwaltete Switches und andere Geräte verwenden, um SNMP-Traps an den aktiven Controller zu senden. Software Development Kit (SDK) Ein Satz von Entwicklungswerkzeugen, mit denen Anwendungen für spezielle Softwarepakete, Software-Frameworks, Hardware-Plattformen, Computersysteme, Videospielkonsolen, Betriebssysteme oder ähnliche Plattformen erstellt werden. Space Recovery Ein Dienstprogramm zur Gewinnung von Speicherplatz, der laut WindowsBerichten belegt, tatsächlich jedoch leer ist. Das Programm sorgt so für weiteren verfügbaren Speicherplatz, der vom Storage Center verwendet werden kann. 17Spare Disk (Ersatzlaufwerk) Ein ausgewiesenes oder ungenutztes Laufwerk in einem SAN, das automatisch als Ersatz für ein ausgefallenes Laufwerk verwendet wird. Storage Area Network (SAN) Ein Storage Area Network (SAN) ist ein spezialisiertes Netzwerk, das mittels Blockspeicherprotokollen Zugang zu hoch verfügbaren HochgeschwindigkeitsSpeichersubsystemen gewährt. Das SAN besteht aus bestimmten Geräten wie Host-Bus-Adaptern (HBAs) in den Hostservern, Switches für das Routen von Speicherdatenverkehr und Festplattenspeicher-Subsystemen. Das Hauptmerkmal eines SANs ist, dass die Speichersubsysteme generell für mehrere Hosts gleichzeitig verfügbar und dadurch skalierbar und flexibel sind. Vergleiche NAS. Speichercluster Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center mehrere SAN-Controller, die zwecks Verbesserung der Zuverlässigkeit, Verfügbarkeit, Betriebsfähigkeit und Leistung (über Lastausgleich) miteinander verbunden sind. Das Storage Center bietet durch eine Aktiv-Aktiv-Konfiguration eine automatische ControllerAusfallsicherung. Ein vollständig gespiegelter, akkugesicherter Cache in jedem Controller gewährleistet auch über einen Neustart hinweg die Datenverfügbarkeit und ermöglicht bei einem Ausfall eines der Controller die Migration von Volumes zwischen den Controllern. Speicher-Clustering Eine Funktion des Dell Compellent Storage Center, die durch mehrfache Controller in einer Aktiv-Aktiv-Konfiguration eine automatische Ausfallsicherung bietet. Ein vollständig gespiegelter akkugesicherter Cache bietet Fehlertoleranz und sorgt bei einem Controllerausfall automatisch für den Neustart bzw. die Wiederherstellung. Speicherpool Siehe Pool. Speicherprofil Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein Satz von Regeln, der die Laufwerkstypen (Tier) für die Datenspeicherung und den für jede Ebene einzusetzenden RAID-Level festlegen. Speichertyp Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein Satz von Attributen einschließlich Redundanzoptionen und Blockgröße, die steuern, wie Speicherplatz von einem Speicherpool alloziert und geschützt wird. Striping Laufwerk-Striping schreibt Daten über drei oder mehrere Laufwerke in einem Array, verwendet auf jedem Laufwerk jedoch nur einen Teil des Speicherplatzes. Die durch den „Stripe“ genutzte Menge an Speicherplatz ist auf jedem verwendeten Laufwerk identisch. Ein virtuelles Laufwerk kann mehrere Stripes auf derselben Laufwerkgruppe in einem Array nutzen . Siehe auch Spiegeln und RAID. Symmetric Multiprocessing (SMP) Ein System, bei dem mindestens zwei Prozessoren bei hoher Datenrate miteinander verbunden sind und von einem Betriebssystem gesteuert werden. Dabei hat jeder Prozessor gleichen Zugriff auf E/A-Geräte. synch Siehe Synchrone Replikation. Synchrone Replikation Funktion, bei der dieselben Daten automatisch auf zwei separate Volumes geschrieben und auf unterschiedlicher physischer Hardware gespeichert werden, bevor die Anwendung eine Meldung über den Abschluss des E/AVorgangs erhält. Dabei sind beide Schreibvorgänge entweder erfolgreich oder fehlgeschlagen, so dass beide Volumes jederzeit voll synchronisiert sind. Die 18Funktion kann jedoch die Schreiblatenzzeiten der Anwendung erhöhen. Siehe synch. System Control Network SCN (Systemsteuerungsnetzwerk) Ein internes Netzwerk, das der Dell AIM für die Kommunikation zwischen dem Controller, Personas und VMRacks nutzt. Der Controller verwendet dieses Netzwerk auch, um Server zu erkennen und Personas und VMRacks auf ihnen zu starten. System-Setup-Programm Ein BIOS-gestütztes Programm, mit dem durch die Einstellung von Funktionen die Hardware eines Systems konfiguriert und der Systembetrieb durch den Benutzer festgelegt werden kann. Da das System-Setup-Programm im NVRAM gespeichert ist, bleiben sämtliche Einstellungen bis zu einer erneuten Änderung wirksam. Systems Deployment Appliance (Systembereitstellungs-Appliance) Eine Lösung zur Systemverwaltung für IT-Mitarbeiter auf Basis der Dell KACEAppliance, die Werkzeuge für das Imaging von Laufwerken, die Migration des Benutzerzustands, Fernverwaltung von Anlagen, Reparatur und Wiederherstellung von Systemen sowie die Erfassung von Bestandslisten und Anlagen bereitstellt. Darüber hinaus automatisiert sie vor und nach der Bereitstellung Konfigurationsaufgaben, wie das Erfassen von Computerbestandslisten und Anlagen; sie automatisiert ebenfalls das Konfigurieren von Laufwerken, BIOS und RAID sowie die Softwareverteilung und Konfigurationsverwaltung. Systems Management Appliance (Systemverwaltungs-Appliance) Eine Lösung zur Systemverwaltung für IT-Mitarbeiter auf Basis der Dell KACEAppliance, die durch eine webgestützte Schnittstelle Aufgaben wie die Verwaltung von Bestandslisten, Softwareverteilung, Berichte, PatchVerwaltung, Anlagenverwaltung, Scripting und Support vereinfacht. Vorlage Im Kontext des Dell AIM eine ruhende Persona, die für die Erstellung weiterer Personas geklont werden kann, jedoch nicht lauffähig ist (um Änderungen an der Vorlage zu vermeiden). Vorlagenvolume Ein schreibgeschütztes Volume, von dem aus Thin Clones erstellt werden können. Thin Clone (schlanker Klon) Volume, das sich Speicherplatz mit einem Vorlagenvolume teilt. Thin Clones bieten eine effiziente Speicherplatznutzung bei Konfigurationen mit mehreren Volumes und einer großen Menge gemeinsamer Daten. Thin Provisioning (Schlanke Speicherzuweisung) Funktion, die eine Überprovisionierung (oder Überkonfigurierung) des im SAN verfügbaren Speicherplatzes ermöglicht. Speicherobjekte (wie Volumes) mit schlanker Speicherzuweisung informieren Anwendungen zwar über ihre maximal mögliche Größe, nutzen tatsächlich jedoch eventuell deutlich weniger Speicherplatz. Durch schlanke Speicherzuweisung kann der Gesamtspeicheraufwand reduziert, die Verfügbarkeit erhöht und eine höhere Leistung erzielt werden. Tiered Storage (Mehrstufige Speicherung) Speicheroptimierungsstrategie, bei der oft und schnell benötigte Daten auf teuren, schnellen Datenträgern und selten benötigte Daten auf weniger teuren, langsameren Datenträgern gespeichert werden. Nicht verwalteter Speicherplatz Bei Dell EqualLogic PS-Series Arrays zugeordneter Speicherplatz auf der Sekundärgruppe, der von der Primärgruppe nicht länger zugänglich ist. 19Uplink-Port Ein Port auf einem Netzwerk-Hub oder -Switch, über den weitere Hubs oder Switches ohne Cross-Over-Kabel angeschlossen werden können. Vacating Beim Dell EqualLogic Group Manager das Entfernen eines Mitglieds aus einer Gruppe, während das Mitglied online bleibt. Ansichts-Volume Beim Dell Compellent Storage Center ein schreibgeschütztes Volume, das aus einem vorherigen Replay hauptsächlich zum Zweck der Datenwiederherstellung erzeugt wurde. Siehe Replay. Virtueller Port oder Virtual-PortModus Im Kontext des Dell Compellent Storage Center ist bei virtuellen Ports keine Portreservierung mehr erforderlich. Im Betriebsmodus „Virtual Port“ (Virtueller Port) nehmen alle Front-End-Ports E/A an und können Teil einer Fault Domain sein. Informationen zur Aktivierung virtueller Ports finden Sie im Einrichtungshandbuch des Dell Compellent Storage Center Systems. virtual World Wide Port Name (vWWPM) Ein vom Dell AIM zur Erstellung SAN-gestarteter Personas verwendeter weltweiter virtueller Portname. Virtualisierung Die Möglichkeit, mithilfe von Software die Ressourcen eines einzelnen Computers oder Speichergeräts über mehrere Umgebungen hinweg gemeinsam zu nutzen. Für den Benutzer kann dabei ein einzelnes physisches System oder Gerät wie mehrere virtuelle Systeme erscheinen und auch mehrere Betriebssysteme beherbergen. VMRack Ein Rack von Virtual Machines (VMs) auf einem Server, auf dem eine Kombination aus Softwareagenten und Red Hat Xen, VMware ESX oder Microsoft Hyper-V läuft. Volume Eine einzelne Speichereinheit, die mittels Striping auf einem Speichergerät oder mehreren Speichergeräten verteilt ist. Volume-Sammlung Mehrere in einer Gruppe zusammengefasste Volumes mit dem Zweck, auf den Volumes gleichzeitig Operationen durchzuführen. Siehe Snapshot-Sammlung, Replika-Sammlung. Volume-Reserve Menge an Speicherplatz, die einem Volume aus dem freien Speicherplatz eines Pools zugewiesen ist. Ohne schlanke Provisionierung entspricht die VolumeReserve der berichteten Größe. Volumetyp Im Kontext des Dell Compellent Storage Center gibt es folgende Volumetypen: dynamisch, Replay aktiviert und Replikation. Ein Volume ist solange dynamisch, bis mindestens ein Replay von ihm erstellt wurde. Sobald ein Replay erstellt wurde, wird der Volumetyp zu „Replay Enabled“ (Replay Aktiviert). Ein Replikations-Volume ist ein Volume, das auf ein anderes Dell Compellent Storage Center repliziert wird. vRack Im Kontext des Dell AIM eine logische Gruppe von Hosts, die mit einem virtuellen Switch (vRack-Switch) verbunden sind. vRack-Switch Im Kontext des Dell AIM ein virtueller Switch, der Hosts in einem vRack verbindet. vWWPN Siehe virtual World Wide Port Name. 20Glosario de Dell: versión 2 GlosarioGlosario ACPI Ver Interfaz de energía y configuración avanzada módulo de control activo Para arreglos Dell EqualLogic PS Series de un arreglo de módulo de control dual, el módulo de control que está activamente ocupado en la E/S de una red. Si deja de funcionar, cede el testigo al módulo de control secundario. Ver Módulo de control secundario. controladora activa La controladora de Dell AIM que está gestionando de forma activa el entorno de Dell AIM. espacio activo En Dell Compellent Storage Center, la cantidad de espacio que utiliza un volumen, excluyendo las reproducciones. Esta cantidad no incluye sobrecarga de RAID. Ver Reproducción. espacio real En Dell Compellent Storage Center, la cantidad de espacio activo más el espacio de reproducciones de un volumen. Ver espacio activo, espacio de Reproducciones. Interfaz de energía y configuración avanzada (ACPI) Interfaz estándar que permite al sistema operativo controlar la configuración y la administración de energía. agente En el entorno de Dell AIM (VMRacks basados en Red Hat Xen y Microsoft Hyper-V, más personas), el software opcional instalado en elementos que la controladora utiliza para administrar los elementos y configurar sus propiedades de sistema de red. persona sin agente Persona de Dell AIM que no tiene un agente de Dell AIM instalado. temperatura ambiente La temperatura del área o de la habitación donde se encuentra el sistema. miembro de arreglo Arreglo Dell EqualLogic PS Series configurado en un grupo PS Series. Los grupos pueden tener varios miembros. número de serie de arreglo En el entorno de arreglo Dell EqualLogic PS Series, una cadena de identificación de arreglo Dell EqualLogic PS Series que se codifica en el hardware del arreglo. Consulte la etiqueta de servicio. ASM/ME Ver Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition. ASM/VE Ver Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition. Servidor de administración de activos Solución de administración de activos basada en el servidor KACE de Dell para profesionales de TI que realiza un seguimiento del software y del cumplimiento de licencias. Automatiza la administración del inventario, los activos de software, las versiones, las actualizaciones y los equipos a través de un panel basado en web. etiqueta de propiedad Código individual asignado a un sistema, normalmente por un administrador, con fines de seguridad o de seguimiento. Discos asignados En Dell Compellent Storage Center, medios físicos de almacenamiento asignados a una carpeta de discos para que se administren y utilicen para almacenar volúmenes y reproducciones. Ver carpeta de discos, Bloque de almacenamiento. modo de asignación Mecanismo para controlar cómo se asignan las personas y VMRacks a los hosts en función de la disponibilidad de HBA en el host. Ver HBA. replicación asíncrona El proceso de escribir datos en un almacenamiento local y de ponerlos luego en cola para su almacenamiento en una SAN remota. Si la SAN local falla antes de que se entregue una 3escritura, es posible que la replicación falle. Ver replicación, replicación sincrónica, reproducción instantánea remota. configuración RAID automática En el contexto de los grupos Dell EqualLogic PS Series, un proceso interno que configura la política de RAID seleccionada por el usuario en el arreglo. Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition (ASM/ME) Aplicación de consola de complemento para Microsoft Management Console que le permite administrar Smart Copies. Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE) Aplicación basada en web que funciona con entornos virtuales VMware para permitirle administrar Smart Copies. espacio disponible Cantidad de almacenamiento total disponible en todas las unidades. back-end En Dell Compellent Storage Center, red aislada y dedicada que conecta la controladora o el clúster de almacenamiento (por ejemplo, par redundante de controladoras) con gabinetes de discos locales. red de back-end Conexión entre controladora y discos en la controladora de Dell Compellent Storage Center. volumen base (Dell EqualLogic PS Series) Un volumen montado en el equipo y al que se accede a través de su letra de unidad asignada por Windows (por ejemplo, G:) o de su punto de montaje. volumen base (Dell EqualLogic Group Manager) Un volumen que tiene instantáneas. Las instantáneas dependen del volumen base. Si el volumen base se destruye, las instantáneas se habrán eliminado. Controladora de administración de la placa base (BMC) Módulo de administración de servidores que implementa el protocolo de Interfaz de administración de plataforma inteligente (IPMI). En el contexto de Dell AIM, la controladora utiliza el BMC para controlar algunos modelos de servidores de manera remota. blade Para el SDK de Dell AIM, el blade es un elemento de la superclase host. Para sistemas modulares de Dell, un blade hace referencia a un servidor modular que se monta en un gabinete. BMC Ver Controladora de administración de la placa base. Medio de inicialización CD, tarjeta SD o memoria USB que se utiliza para iniciar el sistema si éste no va a iniciarse desde la unidad de disco duro. caché Área de almacenamiento rápido que conserva una copia de los datos o instrucciones para brindar una recuperación más rápida de los datos. CHA Ver Adaptador de host Compellent. Protocolo de autenticación por desafío mutuo (CHAP) Protocolo de autenticación por desafío mutuo, un protocolo de inicio de sesión de red que utiliza un mecanismo de desafío-respuesta cifrado. Se utiliza para limitar el acceso a volúmenes e instantáneas a los hosts que suministran el nombre de cuenta y la contraseña correctos. CHAP también se utiliza para cuentas de inicio de sesión/administrador. canal En el entorno Dell/AIM, una de un máximo de ocho conexiones físicas que puede asignar para conmutar puertos y que puede conectar a una persona utilizando hasta ocho NICs físicas. Puede configurar una red para preferir uno o dos canales para su tráfico, de modo que si el canal preferido falla, el tráfico se redirige de forma clara al otro canal. CHAP Ver Protocolo de autenticación por desafío mutuo. 4conmutador de chasis En el contexto de Dell AIM, un conmutador Ethernet en el compartimento de un chasis. Los conmutadores de chasis los administra la controladora. certificado de comunicación de dispositivo cliente En el contexto de EKM, una clave cifrada especializada que permite a un cliente comunicarse con el servidor. Nodo del clúster Miembro físico de un clúster de recursos, caso de un host en un clúster de servidores o una SAN en un clúster de almacenamiento. colección En ASM/ME, una colección son grupos relacionados de objetos de almacenamiento como, por ejemplo, volúmenes, instantáneas o componentes de aplicación, y se representan mediante nodos en el Árbol de consola ASM bajo el nodo maestro Colecciones. En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, las colecciones de volúmenes y réplicas y las colecciones de instantáneas personalizadas aparecen en la jerarquía bajo la vista Volúmenes. Adaptador de host Compellent (CHA) Tarjeta/batería de caché interna colocada en cada controladora de Dell Compellent Storage Center. La memoria de caché de escritura se duplica en la tarjeta de caché. En un Dell Compellent Storage Center de controladora dual, la tarjeta de caché de la controladora 1 contiene el duplicado de la controladora 2, y la tarjeta de caché de la controladora 2 contiene el duplicado de la controladora 1. En un Dell Compellent Storage Center de una sola controladora, la tarjeta de caché contiene el duplicado de la única controladora. configuración Base de datos que describe todo el contenido y la configuración del entorno de Dell AIM. Modo de conservación En Dell Compellent Storage Center, un modo de conservación de datos que se alcanza cuando el espacio libre restante está por debajo de un umbral crítico (normalmente el 10%, hasta 32 GB). En modo de conservación, Dell Compellent Storage Center genera una alerta, impide que se creen nuevos volúmenes e inicia la caducidad de reproducciones a una velocidad mayor para liberar espacio. Ver Modo de emergencia. Consola La interfaz de usuario basada en web que utiliza para supervisar y trabajar con los elementos del entorno de Dell AIM. La consola de Dell AIM está alojada por la controladora de Dell AIM. módulo de control En arreglos Dell EqualLogic PS Series, el componente de interfaz y procesador físico. Un módulo de control contiene el firmware Dell EqualLogic PS Series en memoria flash y proporciona alimentación continua a los datos ordenados en la memoria caché. Tiene varias interfaces de red y un puerto serie opcional. Un arreglo puede contener dos controladoras redundantes duales de intercambio activo. El módulo de control activo suministra E/S, mientras el módulo de control secundario duplica los datos de su caché. panel de control Parte del sistema que contiene indicadores y controles, como el botón de encendido y el indicador de alimentación. Puerto de control Puerto iSCSI de destino al que se conectan los iniciadores iSCSI (servidores) para realizar solicitudes de almacenamiento. En un Dell Compellent Storage Center configurado para modo de puerto virtual, se crea un puerto de control para cada dominio de error iSCSI, para redirigir el tráfico iSCSI al puerto virtual adecuado. Controladora (Dell AIM) Software que administra el hardware virtual y físico, el software y las configuraciones de red y que aloja la consola de Dell AIM. En el contexto de un par de controladoras resistentes, cada controladora se ejecuta en un servidor dedicado pero comparte una base de datos de configuración y otros archivos de clave de un sistema de archivos compartido. 5Controladora (Dell Compellent) Proporciona agregación de discos (RAID), enrutamiento de E/S, detección de errores y recuperación de datos. Proporciona la inteligencia para todo el subsistema Dell Compellent Storage Center. Cada sistema Storage Center contiene al menos uno. Storage Center recomienda acciones correctivas para mejorar el rendimiento y la disponibilidad del sistema. Servicios de controladora En el contexto de Dell AIM, la dirección o las direcciones IP virtuales que utiliza la controladora para comunicarse con la Red de control del sistema (SCN), los conmutadores administrados, la consola y la CLI, etc. De forma predeterminada, se trata de una dirección IP virtual única en la controladora activa, pero puede especificar direcciones únicas para los servicios SCN Services (Servicios de SCN) y SNMP Trap Collector (Recolector de capturas SNMP). Copilot Services En Dell Compellent Storage Center, combinación de asistencia centralizada, formación sobre productos y recursos de ventas que supervisan proactivamente el sistema y recomiendan acciones correctivas para mejorar el rendimiento y la disponibilidad del sistema. Copy-Mirror-Migrate (Copiar-DuplicarMigrar) Función de Dell Compellent Storage Center que permite que los volúmenes se migren entre diferentes tipos de disco y niveles de RAID. almacén de credenciales En el contexto de EKM, un repositorio que contiene información de credenciales de las sesiones. La información de credenciales son datos de seguridad como nombres de usuario, contraseñas y certificados. Objeto criptográfico Método de protección de los datos. Recopilador de datos Componente de Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager que se ejecuta en segundo plano en un servidor, recopilando información sobre todos los sistemas de Compellent Storage Center conectados al servidor. Reproducción instantánea de datos Función de Dell Compellent Storage Center que captura copias puntuales (PITC) que ahorran espacio en la SAN local a intervalos definidos, ofreciendo la posibilidad de revertir un volumen a un punto en el tiempo anterior. Ver Reproducción, instantánea. Progresión de datos Función de Dell Compellent Storage Center que migra automáticamente las páginas a dispositivos de rendimiento más alto o más bajo, en función del nivel de actividad de E/S (demanda). Ver almacenamiento nivelado. DDR Ver Velocidad de datos doble. espacio delegado En el contexto de Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, espacio de un grupo reservado para almacenar las réplicas recibidas de un asociado. Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) protege los datos almacenados en cartuchos de cinta LTO administrando claves de cifrado para soluciones de automatización de cinta de Dell. Dell Remote Access Controller (DRAC) Tarjeta de interfaz que proporciona recursos de administración fuera de banda. La controladora tiene sus propios procesador, memoria, conexión de red y acceso al bus del sistema, y permite a los administradores del sistema controlar los sistemas de forma remota a través de una red. controladora de dispositivo Programa que permite que el sistema operativo u otro programa establezca una interfaz correcta con un dispositivo periférico. DHCP Ver Protocolo de configuración dinámica de host. Disco versátil digital Disco versátil digital o disco de vídeo digital (DVD). 6carpeta de discos En Dell Compellent Storage Center, colección de dispositivos de medios físicos de almacenamiento (discos, SSD) que un usuario puede ver y administrar. Las carpetas de discos determinan los bloques de almacenamiento desde los que se asigna el espacio de almacenamiento de volúmenes. Aunque las carpetas de discos pueden estar asociadas con varios bloques de almacenamiento, el rendimiento de Dell Compellent Storage Center se maximiza al asignar todos los discos a la misma carpeta y bloque de almacenamiento. Posición de disco En Dell Compellent Storage Center, la posición de ranura de una unidad de disco en su gabinete, en notación fila-columna. Por ejemplo, la posición de disco 01-02 hace referencia a la ranura de la primera fila empezando por arriba y a la segunda columna empezando por la izquierda. DNS Ver Sistema de nombres de dominio. Sistema de nombres de dominio (DNS) Método de conversión de nombres de dominio de Internet en direcciones IP; por ejemplo, conversión de www.ejemplo.com en 208.77.188.166. Imagen inactiva En el entorno de AIM, imagen que actualmente no se ejecuta (o espera para ser ejecutada) en un host. Velocidad de datos doble (DDR) Velocidad de datos doble. Tecnología de los módulos de memoria que puede llegar a doblar la velocidad de los datos al transferir datos en los flancos tanto de subida como de bajada de un ciclo de reloj. DRAC Ver Dell Remote Access Controller. DRAM Ver Memoria dinámica de acceso aleatorio. Redundante dual En Dell Compellent Storage Center, una opción de perfil de almacenamiento para protegerse frente a la pérdida de dos unidades, normalmente mediante el uso de RAID 10 y/o RAID 6. DVD Ver Disco versátil digital. Protocolo de configuración dinámica de host (DHCP) Método de asignación automática de una dirección IP a un sistema cliente. Memoria dinámica de acceso aleatorio (DRAM) La memoria RAM de un sistema está por lo general totalmente conformada por chips de DRAM. EKM Ver Dell Encryption Key Manager. Administrador de EKM En el contexto de EKM, el superusuario que puede crear o eliminar usuarios y grupos. EKM Encryption Manager (tklmadmin) En el contexto de EKM, el usuario diario que crea o elimina claves y dispositivos. Modo de emergencia En Dell Compellent Storage Center, un modo al que se llega cuando el sistema ya no puede funcionar porque no hay más espacio libre. En modo de emergencia, se rechaza toda E/S del servidor y todos los volúmenes se ponen fuera de línea y no se pueden volver a poner en línea hasta que se libere suficiente espacio para salir del modo de emergencia. Ver Modo de conservación. gabinete Un gabinete físico que proporciona una única interfaz, alimentación y enfriamiento a varios discos o blades. 7entorno En el contexto de Dell AIM, la colección de hardware, software y configuraciones de red administradas por una controladora de Dell AIM. Eth0 Vea puerto 0 Ethernet. Eth1 Vea puerto 1 Ethernet. puerto 0 Ethernet (Eth0) En Dell Compellent Storage Center, Eth0 es una interfaz Ethernet dedicada a la administración. puerto 1 Ethernet (Eth1) En Dell Compellent Storage Center, Eth1 es una interfaz Ethernet dedicada a la comunicación interprocesal entre controladoras, para agrupación en clústeres y replicación remota. red externa En el contexto del entorno de Dell AIM, una red que no forma parte del entorno de Dell AIM pero que está, física y lógicamente, conectada a él. conmutador externo En el contexto del entorno de Dell AIM, un conmutador que no forma parte del entorno de Dell AIM pero que está, física y lógicamente, conectado a él. Red Fabric Combinación de conmutadores interconectados que actúa como infraestructura de enrutamiento unificada. Permite varias conexiones entre dispositivos de una SAN y permite que nuevos dispositivos entren discretamente. Una topología FC (o iSCSI) con al menos un conmutador presente en la red. FastTrack Una utilidad opcional de Dell Compellent Storage Center que coloca dinámicamente los datos más activos en las pistas de disco exteriores (más rápidas). FAT Ver Tabla de asignación de archivos. Dominio de error En el entorno de Dell Compellent Storage Center, un dominio de error identifica un conjunto de protección contra fallos. En modo de puerto virtual, todos los puertos de front-end pueden formar parte del dominio de error. En modo heredado, cada puerto primario y reservado crea un dominio de error. FC Ver Fibre Channel. FE Ver Red de front-end. Fibre Channel (FC) Interconexión de alta velocidad que se utiliza para conectar servidores con controladoras y gabinetes de disco de back-end. Los componentes de FC incluyen HBA, concentradores, conmutadores y cables. El término FC también hace referencia a un protocolo de comunicación en serie completamente dúplex de alta velocidad que permite velocidades de transferencia de datos de hasta 10 gigabits por segundo. Tabla de asignación de archivos (FAT) Estructura del sistema de archivos usada por MS-DOS para organizar y realizar un seguimiento del almacenamiento de archivos. Los sistemas operativos Microsoft Windows pueden opcionalmente utilizar una estructura de sistema de archivos FAT. Protocolo de transferencia de archivos (FTP) Protocolo de la capa de aplicaciones que se utiliza para transferir archivos de datos masivos entre máquinas o hosts. Red de front-end (FE) El componente de escrituras de datos (servidor a conmutador a controladora a discos) del flujo de SAN de Dell Compellent Storage Center que inicia las escrituras de datos. En general, los servidores (o los conmutadores) son el front-end de la controladora. Sin embargo, un sistema Storage Center que esté replicando datos a un sistema remoto será el front-end del sistema remoto. Ver back-end. 8FTP Ver Protocolo de transferencia de archivos. GB Ver Gigabyte(s). Gigabyte(s) (GB) 1.024 megabytes o 1.073.741.824 bytes. No obstante, cuando se refiere a la capacidad de unidad de disco duro; el término se suele redondear a 1.000.000.000 bytes. grupo Ver Grupo PS Series. HBA Ver Adaptador de bus host. HIT/LE Ver Host Integration Tools para Linux. HIT/ME Ver Host Integration Tools para Windows. HIT/VM Ver Host Integration Tools para VMware. host En el entorno de Dell AIM, un host puede ser un servidor físico (montado en bastidor o blade) o una máquina virtual. En el SDK de Dell AIM, una superclase que incluye servidores blade, servidores montados en bastidor y máquinas virtuales (VM). adaptador host Controladora que implementa la comunicación entre el bus del sistema y el dispositivo periférico, que suele ser un dispositivo de almacenamiento. Adaptador de bus host (HBA) Dispositivo, normalmente una tarjeta complementaria, que conecta un servidor a una SAN (Red de área de almacenamiento). Cada HBA se identifica de forma exclusiva en la SAN a través de su WWPN (Número de puerto mundial). Entre los tipos comunes de HBA están Fiber Channel e iSCSI. Host Integration Tools para Linux (HIT/LE). Suite de herramientas que integran sistemas ESX con arreglos de almacenamiento Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Incluye Auto Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE), EqualLogic Datastore Manager, y EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment Utility. Host Integration Tools para Windows (HIT/ ME). Suite de aplicaciones que le permiten configurar y administrar un arreglo. Incluye ASM/ME, DSM (Módulo específico de dispositivo de E/S multirruta), y RSW (Remote Setup Wizard, Asistente para la instalación remota). Host Integration Tools para VMware (HIT/VM) Suite de herramientas que integran sistemas Linux con arreglos de almacenamiento Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Incluye la interfaz de línea de comandos del asistente para la instalación remota (RSWCLI), EqualLogic Host Performance and Configuration Tuning Suite (eqltune), y EqualLogic Log Gathering Facility (eqllog). Disco de repuesto dinámico En el entorno de Dell Compellent Storage Center, un disco de repuesto dinámico es un disco de copia de seguridad. En caso de que falle un arreglo activo, la controladora hace que el repuesto dinámico forme parte del arreglo activo y reconstruye los datos al vuelo. Aunque el repuesto dinámico se convierte en un disco activo sin intervención humana, recuerde sustituir la unidad errónea lo antes posible, para que el arreglo vuelva a estar protegido con un nuevo repuesto dinámico. Los repuestos dinámicos pueden abarcar varios gabinetes de disco. Los repuestos dinámicos de Storage Center pueden tener una capacidad diferente a la unidad de discos que sustituyan. conexión en caliente Capacidad de insertar o instalar un dispositivo, normalmente una unidad de disco duro o un ventilador de enfriamiento interno, en el sistema host mientras éste está encendido y en funcionamiento. También se denomina intercambio directo. intercambio directo Ver conexión en caliente. 9E/S Entrada/Salida. Un teclado es un dispositivo de entrada, y un monitor es un dispositivo de salida. En general, la actividad de E/S se puede diferenciar de la actividad computacional. Identificación En el entorno de Dell AIM, identificador exclusivo para un elemento, que se asigna al añadirse al entorno. iDRAC Ver integration Dell Remote Access Controller. IKEv2-SCSI Protocolo utilizado para la creación de certificados. imagen Específico de Dell AIM, los bits reales almacenados en un disco o arreglo de almacenamiento que una imagen o VMRack inicia, junto con la información que la controladora utiliza para iniciar dicha imagen en un tipo específico de host. Puede configurar una imagen o VMRack con más de una imagen, por ejemplo, para que la misma imagen pueda iniciarse en un servidor físico o una máquina virtual. infiniBand InfiniBand ofrece enlaces serie bidireccionales punto a punto para la conexión de procesadores y periféricos de alta velocidad. Reproducción instantánea Ver Reproducción instantánea de datos. integration Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) Controladora de acceso remoto que utiliza el protocolo Internet SCSI. Interfaz de administración de plataforma inteligente (IPMI) Protocolo implementado por módulos de administración en algunos servidores, que se utiliza para controlar los servidores de manera remota. Los módulos de administración blade en los servidores Dell implementan iPMI. conmutador de interconexión Conmutador del entorno de Dell AIM, administrado por la controladora, que se utiliza para interconectar elementos como chasis, vRacks, otros conmutadores de interconexión y conmutadores externos. internet SCSI (iSCSI) Internet SCSI (ver SCSI). Protocolo que encapsula comandos de SCSI estándar para la comunicación entre los servidores de cliente (iniciadores iSCSI) y los dispositivos de almacenamiento de red (destinos iSCSI) de las redes IP. IPMI Ver Interfaz de administración de plataforma inteligente. iSCSI Ver Internet SCSI. Protocolo de interoperabilidad de administración de claves (KMIP) Estándares configurados para la comunicación entre sistemas de administración de claves empresariales y sistemas de cifrado. Puertos de servicio clave Puertos utilizados por el sistema operativo para comunicarse en EKM. Grupo de claves En EKM, conjunto de claves asignado a un departamento, un área o un tipo de hardware específicos. Claves Certificado cifrado que se utiliza para proteger datos en EKM. Clasificación de claves / Grupo de Grupo de claves cifradas en EKM. 10claves / Clasificación de claves maestra KMIP Ver Protocolo de interoperabilidad de administración de claves Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) API para el lenguaje de programación Java que define cómo puede un cliente acceder a, consultar y actualizar los datos de una base de datos. JDBC Ver Java Database Connectivity. Controladora líder Controladora primaria de un Dell Compellent Storage Center de controladora dual. Normalmente, las controladoras líder y de acompañamiento comparten la carga de E/S de almacenamiento, doblando fundamentalmente el rendimiento, pero sólo la controladora líder realiza funciones de administración externa. Si una controladora falla, la controladora restante se convertirá o seguirá siendo el líder y asumirá las obligaciones de ambas controladoras. Ver Controladora de acompañamiento. Modo heredado En Dell Compellent Storage Center, los dominios de error se configuran para dedicar pares de puertos de front-end primario y reservado, conectados a través de equipo redundante, como mecanismo para proteger el tráfico de almacenamiento contra un único punto de error. Ver Dominio de error, Puerto virtual o Modo de puerto virtual. Linear Tape-Open (LTO) Formato de cinta de estándares abiertos. número de unidad lógica (LUN) Una unidad lógica es una división conceptual (una subunidad) de un disco de almacenamiento o un conjunto de discos. Cada unidad lógica tiene una dirección, conocida como número de unidad lógica (LUN), que le permite ser identificado de manera exclusiva. LTO Ver Linear Tape-Open. Sustitución de grupo de claves LTO En EKM, conjunto de claves asignado que se utiliza una vez agotado el grupo de claves predeterminado. LUN Ver número de unidad lógica. Dirección MAC Ver dirección Media Access Control. Discos administrados En Dell Compellent Storage Center, dispositivos de medios de almacenamiento (discos, SSD) que se asignan a una carpeta de discos para asociar dichos dispositivos con un bloque de almacenamiento. Ver Bloque de almacenamiento, carpeta de discos. sistema administrado Un sistema administrado es cualquier sistema que se supervisa y se administra utilizando Dell OpenManage Server Administrator. dirección IP de administración Dirección utilizada para conectarse a un dispositivo con IP activado inteligente para supervisar o administrar dicho dispositivo. La dirección puede dedicarse a uso exclusivo de las aplicaciones de administración o compartirse entre las aplicaciones de administración y servicio. red de administración Una red de administración opcional separa el tráfico iSCSI (E/S de volumen) del tráfico de administración (sesiones GUI y CLI, y otras comunicaciones de administración de grupos y operaciones entre grupos). estación de administración Sistema utilizado para administrar de manera remota uno o más sistemas administrados desde una ubicación central. Reproducción manual Función de Dell Compellent Storage Center que permite al usuario crear manualmente copias puntuales de los volúmenes. 11replicación de transferencia manual Replicación realizada a través de un medio transportable en lugar de a través de una red. Se utiliza en casos en los que el enlace de red entre los asociados de replicación es demasiado lento o de otro modo inadecuado para transferir grandes cantidades de datos. Utilidad para la transferencia manual Utilidad autónoma de Dell EqualLogic que realiza la replicación de volúmenes utilizando medios transportables en lugar de la red. La utilidad tiene tanto interfaz de usuario de línea de comandos como interfaz gráfica. dirección Media Access Control (dirección MAC) Número de hardware exclusivo de un sistema en una red. migrar volumen Comando de Dell Compellent Storage Center que sirve para mover datos de un volumen a otro. migración En el contexto de EKM, combinar una clasificación de claves en una clasificación de claves existente durante (no después de) la instalación de Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0. duplicar volumen Comando de Dell Compellent Storage Center para replicar un volumen local en un Dell Compellent Storage Center remoto y mantener actualizaciones entre los volúmenes locales y remotos hasta que el duplicado se deshaga manualmente. duplicación Tipo de redundancia de datos en la que un conjunto de unidades físicas almacena datos y uno o más conjuntos de unidades adicionales almacenan copias duplicadas de los datos. La funcionalidad de duplicación la proporciona el software. Ver seccionamiento, RAID. NAS Ver Almacenamiento conectado a la red. conexión de red Objeto que define una conectividad de red necesaria de una imagen y de VMRack. Una conexión de red se crea como resultado de añadir elementos a una red, por ejemplo, al añadir una imagen a una red. Almacenamiento conectado a la red (NAS) NAS es uno de los conceptos utilizados para implementar almacenamiento compartido en una red. Los sistemas NAS tienen sus propios sistemas operativos, hardware integrado y software que se optimizan para satisfacer las necesidades de almacenamiento específicas. NTP El protocolo de hora de red (Network Time Protocol, NTP) es un protocolo para sincronizar los relojes de los sistemas a través de redes de datos de latencia variable y conmutación de paquetes. Espacio sobresuscrito En una SAN que admita aprovisionamiento reducido, la cantidad de espacio de almacenamiento que se configura como disponible pero no está físicamente presente (por ejemplo, espacio configurado menos espacio disponible). sección de paridad En arreglos RAID, una unidad de disco duro seccionada que contiene datos de paridad. partición Sección física de una unidad de disco duro creada mediante el comando fdisk. Las particiones se pueden luego dividir en varias unidades lógicas utilizando el comando format. Controladora pasiva La controladora de Dell AIM que actúa en espera activa, listo para hacerse cargo de la administración del entorno si falla la controladora activa. Controladora de acompañamiento En un Dell Compellent Storage Center de controladora dual, la controladora de acompañamiento comparte la carga de E/S con la controladora líder pero no realiza funciones de administración externa. Si falla la controladora líder, la controladora de 12acompañamiento asume las obligaciones de E/S y administración de ambas controladoras. Ver Controladora líder. imagen Un entorno de servidor capturado en disco: el sistema operativo, el software del agente de Dell AIM y la red y los otros valores de configuración necesarios para ejecutar una aplicación en un host del entorno de Dell AIM. bloque Espacio de almacenamiento en una SAN disponible para su uso por volúmenes. En Dell Compellent Enterprise Storage Manager y Dell Compellent Storage Center, esto equivale al espacio total de la SAN. En arreglos Dell EqualLogic PS Series, equivale al espacio total de los miembros del bloque específico. administrador de bloque Cuenta de un grupo de Dell EqualLogic PS Series que tiene permiso para administrar objetos sólo en un bloque o conjunto de bloques que sean específicos de un grupo. Compárese con administrador de grupo. grupo primario En el entorno de Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, el grupo que contiene el volumen original de una asociación de replicación. Ver grupo secundario. volumen primario En el entorno de Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, un volumen configurado para replicación en un asociado de replicación. Arreglo PS Series Unidad de almacenamiento Dell EqualLogic iSCSI única, normalmente configurada como grupo de Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Puede unir varios arreglos PS Series en un grupo PS Series más grande y administrarlos como una única SAN iSCSI. Grupo PS Series Entidad de almacenamiento iSCSI compuesta de uno o más arreglos de almacenamiento de Dell EqualLogic PS Series a la que se accede a través de una única dirección IP y se administra como red de área de almacenamiento (SAN). Servicios públicos En el contexto de Dell AIM, la dirección IP virtual de servicios de controladora que se utiliza para conectarse a la consola o a la CLI de la controladora activa. RAC Remote Access Controller RAID Ver Arreglo redundante de discos independientes RAID 0 Los datos se seccionan entre los discos disponibles que proporcionan rendimiento mejorado. RAID 0 no proporciona redundancia de datos. RAID 10 Los datos se seccionan entre las unidades de disco disponibles y se duplican, proporcionando disponibilidad de datos y rendimiento mejorado. Mantiene un mínimo de una copia completa de todos los datos del volumen. RAID 10 ofrece un rendimiento de lectura/ escritura óptimo, mayor probabilidad de resistencia a varios errores y la restauración más rápida de los datos. RAID 5 Mantiene una copia lógica de los datos utilizando una sección de paridad rotatoria derivada matemáticamente. La sección de paridad se deriva de las secciones de datos. Este método tiene menos sobrecarga para la información redundante que RAID 10 aunque el rendimiento de escritura es más lento que el de RAID 10 debido al cálculo de la sección de paridad para cada escritura. El rendimiento de lectura es similar al de RAID 10. RAID 50 RAID nivel 50 es una combinación de RAID nivel 5 y RAID nivel 0. RAID 50 incluye seccionamiento de disco y de paridad en varias unidades. volumen de recuperación Volumen creado con el fin de recuperar datos. En arreglos Dell EqualLogic PS Series, un volumen de recuperación se crea promoviendo un conjunto de réplicas de entrada como 13parte de una operación de protección contra fallos. También puede crear volúmenes de plantilla de recuperación y copias idénticas reducidas de recuperación. En Dell Compellent Storage Center, un volumen de vista se crea a partir de una reproducción. Ver réplica, Volumen de vista, Reproducción. Redundancia La duplicación de información o los componentes de equipo de hardware para garantizar que si un recurso primario falla, un recurso secundario podrá asumir su función. Dell Compellent Storage Center proporciona redundancia para cada componente, de forma que no haya ningún único punto de error. La redundancia única protege frente a la pérdida de datos si falla un recurso cualquiera. La redundancia dual protege frente a la pérdida de datos si fallan dos recursos cualesquiera. Arreglo redundante de discos independientes (RAID) Arreglo redundante de discos independientes. Método de suministro de redundancia de datos. Algunas implementaciones comunes de RAID entre las que se incluye RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 y RAID 50. Ver duplicación, seccionamiento. Reproducción instantánea remota Función de una solución Dell Compellent Storage Center en la que se replica una reproducción en un Dell Compellent Storage Center remoto. Los Dell Compellent Storage Center local y remoto son activo-activo, y la replicación bidireccional se puede producir, de forma sincrónica o asíncrona, en intervalos independientes. La replicación de Dell Compellent Storage Center necesita la aplicación de software Enterprise Manager con una licencia de replicación. Ver Reproducción, Sistema remoto, replicación. Asistente para la instalación remota (RSW) Interfaz gráfica de usuario (GUI) que le permite configurar un arreglo Dell EqualLogic PS Series después de instalar las Host Integration Tools/Microsoft Edition. Sistema remoto En Dell Compellent Storage Center, una SAN independiente configurada para recibir datos de replicación de un volumen original en el Dell Compellent Storage Center local. La replicación de Dell Compellent Storage Center necesita la aplicación de software Enterprise Manager con una licencia de replicación. Ver replicación. Reproducción En Dell Compellent Storage Center, una copia puntual (PITC) y completamente útil de datos que contiene una imagen de los datos tal como aparecían en el momento en que se inició la copia. La copia se puede almacenar localmente o en un Dell Compellent Storage Center remoto. Ver instantánea, Reproducción instantánea de datos, Reproducción instantánea remota. Perfil de reproducción En Dell Compellent Storage Center, conjunto de reglas que determinan cuándo y cómo se realizarán las copias puntuales de las reproducciones y durante cuánto tiempo se guardarán. Ver Reproducción. Espacio de reproducción En Dell Compellent Storage Center, la cantidad de espacio que automáticamente se reserva y utiliza para reproducciones. Ver espacio activo, espacio real. réplica Representación puntual de un volumen Dell EqualLogic PS Series. El volumen original y su réplica se encuentran en grupos de Dell EqualLogic PS Series diferentes (asociados de replicación) potencialmente separados a cierta distancia geográfica para facilitar la tolerancia frente a desastres. colección de réplica En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, conjunto de réplicas resultante de cada replicación de una colección de volúmenes. conjunto de colecciones de réplicas En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, conjunto de colecciones de réplicas para una colección de volúmenes. 14reserva de réplica En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, la parte del espacio delegado de un asociado de replicación que se reserva para los conjuntos de réplicas de un volumen específico. La reserva de réplica del volumen se configura en el grupo primario, pero la reserva de réplica real está en el grupo secundario. conjunto de réplicas En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, el conjunto de réplicas completas de un volumen, un volumen de plantilla o un volumen de copias idénticas reducidas. sistema de replicación Un Dell Compellent Storage Center configurado para enviar datos de replicación de uno o más volúmenes locales a un Storage Center remoto. Ver replicación, Sistema remoto, Reproducción instantánea remota. replicación Proceso de copiar datos de volumen (sólo deltas) de la SAN primaria (local) en la SAN secundaria (remota), de modo que los datos se puedan recuperar de cualquier SAN si fuera necesario. Las SAN pueden estar separadas sin límite de distancia. asociado de replicación En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, grupo que está configurado para enviar o recibir réplicas de otro asociado. RSW Ver Asistente para la instalación remota. imagen ejecutable En el contexto de Dell AIM, imagen iniciada por la red que se inicia y que espera ser asignada a un host. SAN Ver Red de área de almacenamiento (SAN). Sede de SAN Le permite supervisar varios grupos de Dell EqualLogic PS Series desde una única interfaz gráfica. Reúne y formatea datos de rendimiento y demás información importante sobre los grupos. SCN Ver Red de control del sistema. SCN Services (Servicios de SCN) La dirección IP virtual de los servicios de la controladora que utilizan las imágenes y los VMRacks del entorno de Dell AIM para comunicarse con la controladora activa. SCSI Ver Interfaz estándar de equipos pequeños (SCSI) SDK Ver Kit de desarrollo de software. módulo de control secundario En el entorno de Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, el módulo de control secundario duplica los datos de la caché del módulo de control activo. Si el módulo de control activo deja de funcionar, el secundario asume las operaciones de red. Ver módulo de control activo. grupo secundario En una configuración de replicación de Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, el grupo que recibe réplicas de un volumen de origen. Ver grupo primario. Clúster de servidores Grupo de servidores independientes que funcionan juntos como sistema único para proporcionar servicio ininterrumpido en caso de fallos individuales en el equipo. etiqueta de servicio Una etiqueta en el sistema utilizada para identificarlo al llamar a Dell en busca de asistencia técnica. Protocolo simple de transferencia de correo (SMTP) Define un formato de mensaje y un procedimiento de reenvío para permitir que se envíen mensajes entre hosts en Internet. Protocolo simple de administración de red (SNMP) Interfaz estándar que permite que un administrador de red supervise y administre estaciones de trabajo de forma remota. 15Simulador Componente del SDK de Dell AIM que emula un entorno de Dell AIM en ejecución, incluyendo la controladora, la consola y las redes física y virtual. Ver SDK. Interfaz estándar de equipos pequeños (SCSI) Interfaz estándar de equipos pequeños. Interfaz de bus de E/S con velocidades de transmisión de datos más rápidas que los puertos estándar. SMART Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (Tecnología de análisis y generación de informes de auto-supervisión). Permite que las unidades de disco duro notifiquen errores y fallos al BIOS del sistema y, a continuación, muestren un mensaje de error en la pantalla. Smart Copy Copia coherente con la aplicación, puntual, de ASM/ME de objetos en un grupo de Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Las Smart Copy pueden ser de tipo instantánea, copia idéntica o réplica, dependiendo de la edición de Auto-Snapshot Manager que utilice. SMP Ver multiprocesamiento simétrico. SMTP Ver Protocolo simple de transferencia de correo instantánea Copia puntual (PITC) de un volumen. Ver Reproducción. colección de instantáneas Conjunto de instantáneas resultante de una operación de instantánea en una colección de volúmenes. Ver colección de volúmenes. SNMP Ver Protocolo simple de administración de red. SNMP Trap Collector (Recolector de capturas SNMP) En el contexto de Dell AIM, la dirección IP virtual de servicios de controladora que utilizan los conmutadores administrados y otros dispositivos para enviar capturas SNMP a la controladora activa. Kit de desarrollo de software (SDK) Conjunto de herramientas de desarrollo utilizado para crear aplicaciones para un paquete de software, una estructura de software, una plataforma de hardware, un sistema informático, una consola de videojuego, un sistema operativo o una plataforma similar concretos. Recuperación de espacio Utilidad que recupera el espacio que Windows indica que está en uso pero que en realidad está vacío; espacio disponible que puede utilizar Dell Compellent Storage Center. disco de repuesto Unidad designada o no utilizada en una SAN que se utiliza para reemplazar automáticamente una unidad errónea. Red de área de almacenamiento (SAN) Una Red de área de almacenamiento (SAN) es una red especializada que suministra acceso a subsistemas de almacenamiento de alto rendimiento y alta disponibilidad mediante protocolos de almacenamiento en bloques. La SAN se compone de dispositivos específicos como, por ejemplo, adaptadores de bus host (HBA) en los servidores de host, conmutadores que ayudan a enrutar el tráfico de almacenamiento, y subsistemas de almacenamiento en disco. La característica principal de una SAN es que los subsistemas de almacenamiento están normalmente disponibles para varios hosts al mismo tiempo, volviéndolos escalables y flexibles. Compárese con NAS. Clúster de almacenamiento En Dell Compellent Storage Center, varias controladoras de SAN interconectadas con el fin de mejorar la fiabilidad, la disponibilidad, la capacidad de servicio y el rendimiento (a través del equilibrio de carga). Storage Center utiliza una configuración activo-activo para proporcionar protección automática contra fallos de la controladora. Una caché respaldada mediante batería, completamente duplicada, en cada controladora garantiza la fiabilidad de los datos a través de un reinicio y permite que los volúmenes migren entre las controladoras en caso de fallo en una sola controladora. 16Agrupación en clústeres de almacenamiento Función de Dell Compellent Storage Center que proporciona protección automática contra fallos a través de varias controladoras en una configuración activo-activo. La caché respaldada mediante batería, completamente duplicada, proporciona tolerancia a errores y reinicio/recuperación automáticos en caso de fallo de la controladora. Bloque de almacenamiento Ver bloque Perfil de almacenamiento En Dell Compellent Storage Center, conjunto de reglas que definen los tipos de unidad (niveles) en los que almacenar datos y el nivel de RAID que utilizar para cada nivel. Tipo de almacenamiento En Dell Compellent Storage Center, conjunto de atributos, incluyendo opciones de redundancia y tamaño de bloques, que controla cómo se asigna y protege el espacio de un bloque de almacenamiento. seccionamiento El seccionamiento de disco escribe datos en tres o más discos de un arreglo, pero sólo utiliza una parte del espacio de cada disco. La cantidad de espacio utilizado por la "sección" es la misma en cada disco utilizado. Un disco virtual puede utilizar varias secciones del mismo conjunto de discos en un arreglo. Ver también duplicación, y RAID. multiprocesamiento simétrico (SMP) Se utiliza para describir un sistema con dos o más procesadores conectados mediante un enlace de gran amplitud de banda y gestionado por un sistema operativo donde cada procesador tiene el mismo tipo de acceso a los dispositivos de E/S. sincronizar Ver Replicación sincrónica. Replicación sincrónica Función que escribe automáticamente los mismos datos en dos volúmenes independientes, y los almacena en hardware físico diferente, antes de que la aplicación reciba un mensaje de finalización de E/S. Ambas escrituras se completan o fallan, así que ambos volúmenes estarán completamente sincronizados en todo momento. No obstante, la función puede aumentar la latencia de escritura para la aplicación. Ver sincronizar. Red de control del sistema (SCN) Red privada que Dell AIM utiliza para la comunicación entre la controladora, las imágenes y VMRacks. La controladora también utiliza esta red para descubrir servidores y para iniciar imágenes y VMRacks en ellos. Programa de configuración del sistema Programa basado en BIOS que permite la configuración de un hardware del sistema y la personalización del funcionamiento del sistema estableciendo funciones como la protección mediante contraseña. Como el programa de configuración del sistema se almacena en NVRAM, los valores permanecen en vigor hasta que se cambien. Servidor de implementación de sistemas Solución de administración de implementación basada en el servidor Dell KACE para profesionales de TI que proporciona herramientas para imágenes de disco, migración de estado del usuario, administración de sitios remotos, reparación y recuperación del sistema, así como exploración y evaluación del inventario del equipo. Además, automatiza tareas de configuración anteriores y posteriores a la implementación como, por ejemplo, la exploración y evaluación del inventario del equipo; también automatiza la configuración de discos, BIOS y RAID, la distribución del software y la administración de la configuración. Servidor de administración de sistemas Solución de administración de sistemas basadas en el servidor Dell KACE para profesionales de TI que racionaliza tareas como la administración del inventario, la distribución de software, la creación de informes, la administración de parches, la administración de activos, las secuencias de comandos y la asistencia del departamento de servicios a través de una interfaz basada en web. 17plantilla En el contexto de Dell AIM, una imagen inactiva que puede clonar para crear otras imágenes, pero que no podrá ejecutar (para evitar cambios en la plantilla). volumen de plantilla Volumen de sólo lectura a partir del cual puede crear copias idénticas reducidas. copia idéntica reducida Volumen que comparte espacio con un volumen de plantilla. Las copias idénticas reducidas proporcionan un uso eficaz del espacio de almacenamiento para configuraciones con varios volúmenes que tengan una gran cantidad de datos comunes. Aprovisionamiento reducido Función que le permite sobreaprovisionar (o sobresuscribir) el espacio disponible en la SAN. Los objetos de almacenamiento (como, por ejemplo, volúmenes) que utilizan aprovisionamiento reducido notifican su tamaño máximo potencial a las aplicaciones, pero pueden utilizar realmente mucho menos espacio. El aprovisionamiento reducido permite que las organizaciones reduzcan sus gastos de almacenamiento globales, aumenten la disponibilidad y consigan un mayor rendimiento. almacenamiento escalonado Estrategia de optimización de almacenamiento en la que los datos requeridos de forma rápida y frecuente se almacenan en tipos de medios caros y rápidos y los datos requeridos con poca frecuencia se almacenan en tipos de medios más lentos y menos caros. espacio sin administrar En arreglos Dell EqualLogic PS Series, capacidad de espacio delegado en el grupo secundario al que ya no se puede acceder desde el grupo primario. puerto de enlace ascendente Puerto de un concentrador o un conmutador de red que se utiliza para conectar a otros concentradores o conmutadores sin necesidad de utilizar un cable cruzado. vaciar En Dell EqualLogic Group Manager, eliminar un miembro de un grupo mientras el miembro permanece en línea. Volumen de vista En Dell Compellent Storage Center, un volumen de sólo lectura que se ha creado a partir de una reproducción anterior, con el principal propósito de recuperar datos. Ver Reproducción. Puerto virtual o Modo de puerto virtual En el contexto de Dell Compellent Storage Center, los puertos virtuales eliminan la necesidad de los puertos de reserva. Cuando se funciona en modo de puerto virtual, todos los puertos de front-end aceptan E/S y pueden formar parte de un dominio de error. Para obtener información sobre cómo activar puertos virtuales, consulte la Guía de configuración de Dell Compellent Storage Center System. Nombre de puerto mundial virtual (vWWPM) Nombre de puerto mundial virtual que se utiliza en Dell AIM para crear imágenes iniciadas por SAN. Virtualización Posibilidad de utilizar software para compartir los recursos de un único equipo o dispositivo de almacenamiento en varios entornos. Un dispositivo o sistema físico único puede mostrarse al usuario como varios sistemas virtuales capaces de alojar varios sistemas operativos. VMRack Bastidor de máquinas virtuales (VM) en un servidor que ejecuta una combinación de software de agente y Red Hat Xen, VMware ESX o Microsoft Hyper-V. volumen Unidad independiente de almacenamiento seccionada en un dispositivo o en varios dispositivos de almacenamiento. colección de volúmenes Serie de volúmenes agrupados juntos con el fin de realizar operaciones en los volúmenes de forma simultánea. Ver colección de instantáneas, colección de réplicas. 18reserva de volumen Cantidad de espacio asignado a un volumen desde un espacio de bloque libre. Sin aprovisionamiento reducido, la reserva de volumen es igual al tamaño notificado. Tipo de volumen En el contexto de Dell Compellent Storage Center, el tipo de volumen: puede ser dinámico, con reproducción activada, o replicación. Un volumen es dinámico hasta que al menos se haya realizado una reproducción de dicho volumen. Después de haber realizado una reproducción de un volumen, se vuelve Con reproducción activada. Un volumen de replicación es aquel que se ha replicado a otro sistema Dell Compellent Storage Center. vRack En el contexto de Dell AIM, grupo lógico de hosts conectados a un conmutador virtual (conmutador vRack). conmutador de vRack En el contexto de Dell AIM, un conmutador virtual que conecta hosts en un vRack. vWWPN Ver Nombre de puerto mundial virtual 1920Glossaire Dell – Version 2 GlossaireGlossaire ACPI Voir advanced configuration and power interface (interface avancée de configuration et d'alimentation) active control module (module de contrôle actif) Pour les matrices Dell EqualLogic PS Series dans une matrice de module à deux contrôleurs, il s'agit du module de contrôle qui gère activement les E/S sur un réseau. S'il cesse de fonctionner, il bascule sur le module de contrôle secondaire. Voir secondary control module (module de contrôle secondaire). active Controller (contrôleur actif) Le contrôleur Dell AIM gère activement l'environnement Dell AIM. active space (espace actif) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit de l'espace utilisé par un volume, sans compter les relectures. Cette quantité n'inclut pas le surdébit RAID. Voir Replay (Relecture). actual space (espace réel) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit de la quantité d'espace actif plus l'espace dédié aux relectures pour un volume. Voir active space (espace actif), Replay space (Espace de relecture). advanced configuration and power interface (interface avancée de configuration et d'alimentation - ACPI) Interface standard qui permet au système d'exploitation de contrôler les paramètres relatifs à la configuration et à la gestion de l'alimentation. agent Dans un environnement Dell AIM (des VMRack Red Hat Xen et Microsoft Hyper-V, plus les personas), le logiciel en option est installé sur les éléments que le contrôleur utilise pour gérer les éléments et configurer leurs propriétés de réseau. agentless persona (persona sans agent) Une persona Dell AIM pour laquelle aucun agent Dell AIM n'est installé. ambient temperature (température ambiante) Température de l'endroit ou de la pièce où se trouve le système. array member (membre de matrice) Un matrice Dell EqualLogic PS Series configurée dans un groupe PS Series. Les groupes peuvent avoir plusieurs membres. array serial number (numéro de série de matrice) Dans un environnement Dell EqualLogic PS Series, une chaîne d'identification de matrice Dell EqualLogic PS Series unique est codée dans le matériel de la matrice. Voir service tag (numéro de service). ASM/ME Voir Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition. ASM/VE Voir Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition. Asset Management Appliance (Serveur de gestion des actifs) Une solution de gestion de l'inventaire sous forme de serveur Dell KACE destinée aux professionnels de l'informatique qui gère la conformité des logiciels et licences. Elle automatise la gestion de l'inventaire, de l'inventaire logiciel, des versions, des mises à niveau, et des ordinateurs via un tableau de bord en ligne. asset tag (numéro d'inventaire) Un code individuel attribué à un système, en général par un administrateur système, pour des raisons de sécurité ou de suivi. 3Assigned Disks (Disques attribués) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit du support de stockage physique attribué à un dossier de disques pour qu'il puisse être géré et utilisé pour le stockage de volumes et de relectures. Voir disk folder (dossier de disques), Storage Pool (Pool de stockage). assignment mode (mode d'affectation) Un mécanisme permettant de contrôler l'affectation des personas et des VMRack aux hôtes en fonction de la disponibilité des HBA de l'hôte. Voir HBA. async/asynchronous replication (réplication asynchrone/async) Le processus d'écriture des données sur un stockage local puis d'acheminement de ces données sur un SAN distant pour être stockées. Si le SAN local échoue avant qu'une écriture soit acheminée, il est possible que la réplication échoue. Voir replication (réplication), synchronous replication (réplication synchrone), remote instant replay (relecture instantanée à distance). automatic RAID configuration (configuration RAID automatique) Dans le contexte des groupes Dell EqualLogic PS Series, il s'agit d'un processus interne qui configure la stratégie de RAID sélectionnée par l'utilisateur sur la matrice. Auto-Snapshot Manager/ Microsoft Edition (Gestionnaire d'instantanés automatiques/édition Microsoft) (ASM/ME) Une application de console intégrable pour la console de gestion Microsoft qui vous permet d'administrer les Smart Copy (Copies intelligentes). Auto-Snapshot Manager/ VMware Edition (Gestionnaire d'instantanés automatiques/édition VMware) (ASM/VE) Une application Web qui s'associe aux environnements virtuels VMware pour vous permettre d'administrer les Smart Copies (Copies intelligentes). available space (espace disponible) Espace total disponible sur tous les lecteurs. back end (arrière) Dans un centre de stockage Dell Compellent, il s'agit d'un réseau isolé et dédié connectant le contrôleur ou le cluster de stockage (par exemple, une paire de contrôleurs redondants) à des boîtiers de disques locaux. back end network (réseau arrière) Connexion entre le contrôleur et les disques dans le contrôleur du Dell Compellent Storage Center. base volume (volume de base) (Dell EqualLogic PS Series) Un volume monté sur l'ordinateur auquel vous pouvez accéder via sa lettre de lecteur attribuée par Windows (comme par exemple G:) ou son point de montage. base volume (volume de base) (Dell EqualLogic Group Manager - Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic) Un volume contenant des instantanés. Les instantanés dépendent du volume de base. Si le volume de base est détruit, les instantanés ont été retirés. BaseBoard Management Controller (BMC ) Un module de gestion de serveur qui implémente le protocole IPMI (Intelligent Platform Management Interface). Dans le contexte de Dell AIM, le contrôleur utilise le BMC pour contrôler à distance certains modèles de serveurs. blade (serveur lame) Pour le SDK Dell AIM, le serveur lame est un élément de la superclasse de l'hôte. Pour des systèmes modulaires Dell, un serveur lame désigne un serveur modulaire qui est monté dans un boîtier. 4BMC Voir Baseboard Management Controller. Bootable media (Support amorçable) Un CD, une carte SD ou une clé de mémoire USB utilisé(e) pour démarrer votre système si celui-ci ne s'amorce pas depuis le disque dur. cache Mémoire à accès rapide contenant une copie des données ou des instructions, permettant une réutilisation rapide de celles-ci. CHA Voir Compellent Host Adapter (Adaptateur hôte Compellent). Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (protocole CHAP) Un protocole de connexion au réseau qui utilise un mécanisme crypté de type questionréponse. Sert à limiter l'accès aux volumes et aux instantanés aux hôtes qui fournissent le nom et mot de passe corrects. CHAP est aussi utilisé pour les comptes de connexion/ administrateur. channel (canal) Dans un environnement Dell/AIM, il s'agit d'une parmi jusqu'à huit connexions physiques que vous pouvez attribuer à des ports de commutation et connecter à une persona en utilisant jusqu'à huit NIC physiques. Vous pouvez configurer un réseau pour qu'il préfère un ou deux canaux pour son trafic afin que, lors d'un échec du canal préféré, le trafic soit redirigé de manière transparente vers l'autre canal. CHAP Voir Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (Protocole CHAP) chassis switch (commutateur de châssis) Dans le contexte de Dell AIM, il s'agit d'un commutateur Ethernet dans une baie se trouvant dans un châssis. Les commutateurs de châssis sont gérés par le contrôleur. client device communication certificate (certificat de communication pour dispositif client) Dans le contexte de EKM, il s'agit d'une clé cryptée spécialisée permettant à un client de communiquer avec le serveur. Cluster Node (Nœud de cluster) Un membre physique d'un cluster de ressources, comme par exemple un hôte dans un cluster de serveur ou un SAN dans un cluster de stockage. collection Dans ASM/ME, une collection signifie des groupes apparentés d'objets de stockage (tels que des volumes, instantanés, ou des composants d'applications) représentés par des nœuds dans l'arborescence de console ASM sous le nœud maître Collections. Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), les collections de volumes et répliques et les collections d'instantanés personnalisés apparaissent dans la hiérarchie dans la vue Volumes. Compellent Host Adapter (Adaptateur d'hôte Compellent - CHA) Carte/batterie de cache interne situé(e) dans chaque contrôleur du Dell Compellent Storage Center. La mémoire cache d'écriture est mise en miroir sur la carte cache. Pour un Dell Compellent Storage Center à deux contrôleurs, la carte cache du contrôleur 1 contient le miroir du contrôleur 2 et la carte cache du contrôleur 2 contient le miroir du contrôleur 1. Pour un Dell Compellent Storage Center à un contrôleur unique, la carte cache contient le miroir du contrôleur. configuration Il s'agit de la base de données qui décrit tout le contenu et toute la configuration de l'environnement Dell AIM. Conservation Mode (Mode Conservation) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, un mode de conservation des données est atteint lorsque l'espace libre restant descend en-dessous d'un seuil critique (typiquement 10%, jusqu'à 32 Go). En mode Conservation, le Dell Compellent Storage Center génère une alerte, empêche la création de nouveaux volumes et commence à 5expirer des relectures à une plus grande vitesse afin de libérer de l'espace. Voir le mode Urgence. Console L'interface utilisateur Web que vous utilisez pour surveiller et utiliser les éléments dans l'environnement Dell AIM. La console Dell AIM est hébergée par le contrôleur Dell AIM. control module (module de contrôle) Dans les matrices Dell EqualLogic PS Series, il s'agit du processeur physique et du composant d'interface. Un module de contrôle contient le micrologiciel Dell EqualLogic PS Series dans la mémoire flash et fournit une continuité d'alimentation temporaire pour les données triées dans la mémoire cache. Il dispose de plusieurs interfaces réseau et d'un port série en option. Une matrice peut contenir deux contrôleurs à redondance double remplaçables à chaud. Le module de contrôle actif gère les E/S, tandis que le module de contrôle secondaire met en miroir les données de son cache. control panel (panneau de commande) Partie du système sur laquelle se trouvent les voyants et les contrôles (bouton d'alimentation, voyant d'alimentation, etc.). Control Port (Port de contrôle) Le port iSCSI de destination auquel les initiateurs (serveurs) iSCSI se connectent afin d'effectuer des requêtes de stockage. Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center configuré pour un mode de port virtuel, un port de contrôle est créé pour chaque domaine de défaillance iSCSI afin de rediriger le trafic iSCSI vers le port virtuel approprié. Controller (Contrôleur) (Dell AIM) Logiciel qui gère les configurations physiques et virtuelles du matériel, des logiciels et du réseau ainsi que les hôtes de la console Dell AIM. Dans le contexte d'une paire de contrôleurs robustes, chaque contrôleur s'exécute sur un serveur dédié mais partage une base de données de configuration et d'autres fichiers clés sur un système de fichiers partagé. Controller (Contrôleur) (Dell Compellent) Fournit les éléments suivants : regroupement de disques (RAID), routage d'E/S, détection d'erreurs et récupération de données. Fournit des informations à l'intégralité du sous-système Dell Compellent Storage Center. Tous les systèmes du Storage Center en contiennent au moins un. Storage Center et recommandent que des mesures correctives soient prises pour optimiser les performances et la disponibilité du système. Controller Services (Services du contrôleur) Dans le contexte de Dell AIM, cela correspond à l'adresse ou aux adresses IP virtuelles utilisées par le contrôleur pour communiquer avec le SCN (System Control Network - Réseau de contrôle du système), les commutateurs gérés, la console et la CLI, etc. Par défaut, il s'agit d'une adresse IP virtuelle unique, cependant vous pouvez spécifier des adresses uniques pour les services du SCN et le collecteur d'interruptions SNMP. Copilot Services (Services Copilot) Au sein du Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit de la combinaison de ressources de support centralisé, de formation au produit et de ventes qui surveillent le système de manière proactive et recommandent des mesures correctives pour optimiser les performances et la disponibilité du système. Copy-Mirror-Migrate (CopieMiroir-Migration) Fonction du Dell Compellent Storage Center qui permet la migration des volumes entre différents types de disque et niveaux de RAID. Credential store (stockage de références) Dans le contexte du EKM, il s'agit d'une logithèque contenant les informations de connexion pour toutes les sessions. Les informations de connexion correspondent aux données de sécurité comme les noms d'utilisateurs, les mots de passe et les certificats. 6Cryptographic Object (Objet cryptographique) Une méthode de sécurisation des données. Data Collector (Collecteur de données) Composant du Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager qui s'exécute en arrière-plan sur un serveur, recueillant des informations sur tous les systèmes de Dell Compellent Storage Center connectés au serveur. Data Instant Replay (Relecture instantanée des données) Fonction du Dell Compellent Storage Center qui capture des PITC (point-in-time copies - copies instantanées) à faible consommation d'espace d'un volume du réseau SAN local à des intervalles définis, permettant de restaurer un volume précédent à un point dans le temps défini. Voir Replay, snapshot (Relecture, instantané). Data Progression (Progression des données) Fonction du Dell Compellent Storage Center qui migre automatiquement les pages de données sur des périphériques à performances plus élevées ou plus basses, selon le niveau d'activité (demande) d'E/S. Voir tiered storage (stockage en couches). DDR Voir Double-data Rate (Taux de transfert de données double). delegated space (espace délégué) Dans le contexte du Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit d'un espace mis à part dans un groupe prévu pour le stockage de données reçues provenant d'un partenaire. Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM - Gestionnaire de clés de cryptage Dell) Le EKM Dell sécurise les données stockées sur les cartouches de bande LTO en gérant les clés de cryptage pour les solutions d'automatisation de bandes Dell. Dell Remote Access Controller (Contrôleur DRAC) Une carte d'interface qui fournit des capacités de gestion hors bande. Le contrôleur possède son propre processeur, accès au bus du système, sa propre mémoire et connexion réseau et permet aux administrateurs de contrôler les systèmes à distance sur un réseau. device driver (pilote de périphérique) Programme qui permet au système d'exploitation ou à un autre programme de communiquer correctement avec un périphérique donné. DHCP Voir Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (Protocole de configuration hôte dynamique) Digital Versatile Disk (Disque versatile numérique) Un disque versatile numérique ou disque vidéo numérique (DVD). disk folder (dossier de disques) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'un ensemble de périphériques de support de stockage physique (disques, disques SSD) qui peut être visualisé et géré par un utilisateur. Les dossiers de disques déterminent le ou les pools de stockage depuis lesquels un espace de stockage est attribué. Bien que les dossiers de disques puissent être associés à plusieurs pools de stockage, les performances du Dell Compellent Storage Center sont optimisées lorsque tous les disques sont attribués à un même dossier et pool de stockage. Disk position (Position de disque) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit de la position du logement de lecteur de disques au sein de son boîtier, dans une notation au format rangée-colonne. Par exemple, la position de disque 01-02 fait référence au logement de la première rangée (depuis le haut) et de la deuxième colonne (depuis le côté gauche). DNS Voir Domain Name System (Système de noms de domaine) Domain Name System (Système de noms de domaine) (DNS) Méthode de conversion des noms de domaines Internet (par exemple www.exemple.com) en adresses IP (par exemple 208.77.188.166). 7dormant Persona (Persona inactive) Dans l'environnement AIM, une persona qui n'est pas en cours d'exécution (ou est en attente d'exécution) sur un hôte. Double-data Rate (Taux de transfert de données doubles) (DDR) Taux de transfert de données doubles. Technologie de barrettes de mémoire qui permet de potentiellement doubler le débit des données en transférant celles-ci durant les phases ascendantes et descendantes d'un cycle d'horloge. DRAC Voir Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (Contrôleur DRAC). DRAM Voir Dynamic random-access memory (Mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire). Dual Redundant (Redondance double) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'une option de profil de stockage qui protège contre la perte de deux lecteurs (quels qu'ils soient), se servant habituellement de RAID 10 et/ou RAID 6. DVD Voir Digital Versatile Disc (Disque versatile numérique). Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (Protocole de configuration dynamique des hôtes) (DHCP) Protocole permettant d'attribuer automatiquement une adresse IP à un système client. Dynamic random-access memory (Mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire). La RAM d'un système est généralement constituée entièrement de puces DRAM. EKM Voir Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM - Gestionnaire de clés de cryptage Dell) EKM Administrator (Administrateur EKM) Dans le contexte d'un EKM, il s'agit du super-utilisateur qui peut créer ou supprimer des utilisateurs et des groupes. EKM Encryption Manager (Gestionnaire de cryptage EKM) (tklmadmin) Dans le contexte d'un EKM, il s'agit de l'utilisateur quotidien qui crée ou supprime des clés et des périphériques. Emergency Mode (Mode Urgence) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, ce mode est atteint lorsque le système n'arrive plus à fonctionner en raison d'un manque d'espace libre. En mode Urgence, toutes les E/S de serveur sont rejetées et tous les volumes sont mis hors ligne et ne seront remis en ligne qu'après l'acquisition d'un espace libre suffisant pour quitter le mode Urgence. Voir Conservation Mode (Mode Conservation). enclosure (boîtier) Boîtier physique qui fournit une interface unique, l'alimentation et le refroidissement à plusieurs disques. environment (environnement) Dans le contexte de Dell AIM, l'ensemble des configurations matérielles, logicielles et de réseau gérées par le contrôleur Dell AIM. eth0 Voir Ethernet port 0 (Port Ethernet 0). eth1 Voir Ethernet port 1 (Port Ethernet 1). Ethernet port 0 (Port Ethernet 0) (Eth0) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, Eth0 est une interface Ethernet dédiée à la gestion. Ethernet port 1 (Port Ethernet 1) (Eth1) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, Eth1 est une interface Ethernet dédiée à la communication inter-processus entre les contrôleurs pour la mise en cluster ou la réplication à distance. 8external network (réseau externe) Dans le contexte de l'environnement Dell AIM, il s'agit d'un réseau qui ne fait pas partie de l'environnement Dell AIM mais qui y est physiquement et logiquement connecté. external switch (commutateur externe) Dans le contexte de l'environnement Dell AIM, il s'agit d'un commutateur qui ne fait pas partie de l'environnement Dell AIM mais qui y est physiquement et logiquement connecté. Fabric (Structure) Une combinaison de commutateurs interconnectés qui agissent en tant qu'infrastructure de routage unifiée. Cela permet d'établir plusieurs connexions entre les périphériques d'un SAN et permet aux nouveaux périphériques d'y entrer sans provoquer d'interruption. Une topologie FC (ou iSCSI) dotée d'au moins un commutateur sur le réseau. FastTrack Utilitaire du Dell Compellent Storage Center en option qui place dynamiquement les données les plus actives sur les pistes extérieures (plus rapides) du disque. FAT Voir File Allocation Table (Tableau d'affectation de fichiers). Fault Domain (Domaine de défaillance) Au sein de l'environnement Dell Compellent Storage Center, un domaine de défaillance identifie un basculement. En mode Virtual Port (Port virtuel), tous les ports avant peuvent faire partie d'un domaine de défaillance. En mode Legacy (Hérité), chaque port principal et réservé crée un domaine de défaillance. FC Voir Fibre Channel. FE (Réseau avant) Voir Front End Network (Réseau avant). Fibre Channel (FC) Une interconnexion grande vitesse utilisée pour connecter les serveurs aux contrôleurs et boîtiers de disques arrière. Les composants FC comprennent : adaptateurs HBA, concentrateurs, commutateurs et composants de câblage. Le terme FC fait également référence à un protocole de communication série grande vitesse duplex intégral permettant des taux de transfert des données de jusqu'à 10 Gigabits par seconde. File Allocation Table (Tableau d'affectation de fichiers) (FAT) La structure du système de fichiers utilisée par MS-DOS pour organiser et faire le suivi du stockage de fichiers. Les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows ont également l'option d'utiliser une structure de système de fichiers FAT. File Transfer Protocol (Protocole de transfert de fichiers) (FTP) Un protocole de couche d'applications utilisé pour le transfert de fichiers de données en masse entre les machines et les hôtes. Front End Network (Réseau avant) (FE) Le composant du flux des écritures de données du SAN du Dell Compellent Storage Center (serveur à commutateur à contrôleur à disques) qui initie les écritures de données. En général, les serveurs (ou commutateurs) se trouvent à l'avant du contrôleur. Cependant, un système Storage Center qui réplique des données sur un système distant se trouve à l'avant du système distant. Voir Back end (Arrière). FTP Voir File Transfer Protocol (Protocole de transfert de fichiers). GB (Go) Voir Gigabyte(s) (Gigaoctet(s)). Gigabyte(s) (GB) (Gigaoctets - Go) 1024 mégaoctets ou 1 073 741 824 octets. Cependant, dans le cas d'une capacité de disque dur, le terme est généralement arrondi à 1 000 000 000 octets. group (groupe) Voir PS Series group (groupe PS Series). HBA Voir Host Bus Adapter (Adaptateur de bus hôte). 9HIT/LE Voir Host Integration Tools for Linux (Outils d'intégration de l'hôte pour Linux). HIT/ME Voir Host Integration Tools for Windows (Outils d'intégration de l'hôte pour Windows). HIT/VM Voir Host Integration Tools for VMware (Outils d'intégration de l'hôte pour VMware). host (hôte) Dans un environnement Dell AIM, un hôte peut signifier un serveur physique (monté en rack ou lame) ou une machine virtuelle. Dans le Dell AIM SDK, il s'agit d'une super classe qui comprend les serveurs lame, les serveurs montés en rack et les machines virtuelles (MV). host adapter (adaptateur hôte) Contrôleur permettant de mettre en œuvre les communications entre le bus du système et le périphérique (généralement un périphérique de stockage). Host Bus Adapter (Adaptateur de bus hôte) (HBA) Un périphérique, typiquement une carte d'extension, qui connecte un serveur au réseau SAN (Storage Area Network - Réseau de stockage). Chaque HBA est identifié de manière unique sur le SAN par son WWPN (World Wide Port Number - Numéro de port universel). Des types de HBA typiques comprennent Fiber Channel et iSCSI. Host Integration Tools for Linux (Outils d'intégration de l'hôte pour Linux) (HIT/LE). Une suite d'outils qui intègre les systèmes ESX avec matrices de stockage Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Elle comprend les outils suivants : ASM/VE (Auto Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition - Instantanés automatiques/Édition VMware), EqualLogic Datastore Manager (Gestionnaire de stockage des données EqualLogic) et EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment Utility (Utilitaire de déploiement du bureau virtuel EqualLogic). Host Integration Tools for Windows (Outils d'intégration hôte pour Windows) (HIT/ME). Une suite d'application qui vous permet de configurer et gérer une matrice. Elle comprend : ASM/ME, DSM (Multipath I/O Device Specific Module - Module pour périphériques d'E/S multivoies) et RSW (Remote Setup Wizard - Assistant de configuration à distance). Host Integration Tools for VMware (Outils d'intégration de l'hôte pour VMware) (HIT/ VM) Une suite d'outils qui intègre les systèmes Linux avec les matrices de stockage Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Elle comprend : la RSWCLI (Remote Setup Wizard Command Line Interface - Interface de ligne de commande de l'assistant de configuration à distance), eqltune (EqualLogic Host Performance and Configuration Tuning Suite - Suite de Performances des hôtes et réglages de la configuration EqualLogic) et eqllog (EqualLogic Log Gathering Facility - Emplacement de récupération des journaux EqualLogic). Hot Spare Disk (Disque de rechange) Dans l'environnement du Dell Compellent Storage Center, un disque de rechange est un disque de sauvegarde. Si une matrice active venait à échouer, le contrôleur rend la partie de rechange de la matrice active et reconstruit les données à la volée. Bien que le disque de rechange devienne un disque actif sans qu'un utilisateur ait besoin d'intervenir, veillez à remplacer le lecteur en échec le plus tôt possible afin que la matrice soit à nouveau protégée et dotée d'un nouveau disque de rechange. Les disques de rechange peuvent balayer plusieurs boîtiers de disques. Les disques de rechange Storage Center peuvent être de capacité différente que les lecteurs de données qu'ils remplacent. hot-plug (enfichage à chaud) La capacité d'insérer ou d'installer un périphérique (généralement un disque dur ou un ventilateur interne) sur le système hôte alors que celui-ci est sous tension et en cours de fonctionnement. Reportez-vous également à hot-swap (remplacement à chaud). hot-swap (remplacement à chaud) Voir hot-plug (enfichage à chaud). 10I/O (E/S) Input/Output (Entrée/Sortie). Un clavier est un périphérique d'entrée et un moniteur est un périphérique de sortie. En général, l'activité d'E/S est différente de l'activité informatique. ID Dans l'environnement Dell AIM, il s'agit d'un identifiant unique pour un élément du , attribué lorsqu'il est ajouté à l'environnement. iDRAC Voir Integration Dell Remote Access Controller (Contrôleur iDRAC). IKEv2-SCSI Un protocole utilisé pour la création de certificats. image Spécifique au Dell AIM, il s'agit des bits réels stockés sur un disque ou une matrice de stockage sur laquelle une persona ou un VMRack s'amorce, ainsi que les informations utilisées par le contrôleur pour amorcer l'image sur un type d'hôte particulier. Vous pouvez configurer une persona ou un VMRack avec plus d'une image, par exemple, de manière à ce que la même persona puisse s'amorcer sur un serveur physique ou une machine virtuelle. infiniBand InfiniBand propose des liaisons série bidirectionnelles point à point destinées à la connexion des processeurs aux périphériques à haut débit. Instant Replay (Relecture instantanée) Voir Data Instant Replay (Relecture instantanée des données). Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (Contrôleur iDRAC) Contrôleur d'accès à distance qui utilise le protocole Internet SCSI. Intelligent Platform Management Interface (Interface intelligente de gestion de plateforme) (IPMI) Un protocole mis en place par les modules de gestion dans certains serveurs, qui est utilisé pour contrôler les serveurs à distance. Les modules de gestion lame des servers Dell mettent en place l'iPMI. interconnect switch (commutateur d'interconnexion) Un commutateur dans l'environnement Dell AIM, géré par le contrôleur, qui sert à interconnecter des éléments tels que les châssis, les vRacks, d'autres commutateurs d'interconnexion ainsi que des commutateurs externes. internet SCSI (iSCSI) Internet SCSI (voir SCSI). Protocole qui contient les commandes SCSI permettant la communication entre les serveurs client (initiateurs iSCSI) et les périphériques de stockage réseau (cibles iSCSI) sur les réseaux IP. IPMI Voir Intelligent Platform Management Interface (Interface intelligente de gestion de plateforme) iSCSI Voir Internet SCSI. Key Management Interoperability Protocol (Protocole d'interopérabilité de gestion de clés) (KMIP) Les standards définis pour la communication entre les systèmes de gestion de clés Enterprise et les systèmes de cryptage. Key Serving Ports (Ports de services de clés) Les ports utilisés par le système d'exploitation pour communiquer avec EKM. Keygroup (Groupe de clés) Situé dans EKM, il s'agit d'un ensemble de clés attribué à un service, une zone ou un type de matériel spécifique. Keys (Clés) Un certificat crypté utilisé pour protéger les données dans le EKM. 11Keystore/Keygroup/Master Keystore (Stockage de clés/ Groupe de clés/Stockage de clés passe-partout) Groupe de clés cryptées dans le EKM. KMIP Voir Key Management Interoperability Protocol (Protocole d'interopérabilité de gestion de clés) (KMIP) Java Database Connectivity (Connectivité de base de données Java) (JDBC) Une interface API pour la langue de programmation Java qui définit comment un client peut accéder, effectuer une demande et mettre à jour les données dans une base de données. JDBC Voir Java Database Connectivity (Connectivité de la base de données Java). Leader Controller (Contrôleur leader) Contrôleur principal au sein d'un Dell Compellent Storage Center à deux contrôleurs. Normalement, les contrôleurs leader et homologue partagent la charge d'E/S de stockage, essentiellement doublant le débit, cependant uniquement le contrôleur leader effectue des fonctions de gestion externe. Si un contrôleur échoue, le contrôleur restant devient ou demeure le contrôleur leader et prend en charge les responsabilités des deux contrôleurs. Voir Peer Controller (Contrôleur homologue). Legacy Mode (Mode Hérité) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, les domaines de défaillance sont configurés de manière à dédier des paires de ports avant principal et en réserve, connectées via un équipement redondant, tel qu'un mécanisme de protection du trafic de stockage contre un point de panne unique. Voir Fault Domain (Domaine de défaillance), Virtual Port (Port virtuel) ou Virtual Port Mode (Mode de port virtuel). Linear Tape-Open (Bandes linéaires à format ouvert) (LTO) Un format standard ouvert de bande. Logical Unit Number (Numéro d'unité logique) (LUN) Une unité logique est une division conceptuelle (une sous-unité) d'un disque de stockage ou d'un ensemble de disques. Chaque unité logique possède une adresse, appelée numéro d'unité logique (LUN), qui lui permet d'être identifiée de manière unique. LTO Voir Linear Tape-Open (Bandes linéaires à format ouvert). LTO Key Group Rollover (Basculement du groupe de clés LTO) Dans le EKM, il s'agit d'un ensemble de clés attribuées à utiliser une fois le groupe de clés par défaut vidé. LUN Voir logical unit number (numéro d'unité logique). MAC address (Adresse MAC) Voir Media Access Control address (Adresse du contrôle d'accès aux médias). Managed Disks (Disques gérés) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit des périphériques de stockage (disques, SSD) attribués à un dossier de disques afin d'associer ces périphériques à un pool de stockage. Voir Storage Pool, disk folder (Pool de stockage, dossier de disques). managed system (système géré) « Système géré » signifie tout système surveillé et géré par Dell OpenManage Server Administrator. management IP address (adresse IP de gestion) Adresse utilisée pour établir une connexion à un périphérique IP intelligent afin de surveiller ou gérer ce périphérique. L'adresse peut être dédiée à un usage exclusif par 12les applications de gestion ou partagé pour être utilisée par la gestion et les applications de service. management network (réseau de gestion) Un réseau de gestion facultatif qui sépare le trafic iSCSI (E/S du volume) du trafic de gestion (sessions de l'interface graphique utilisateur et de la CLI, autres communications de gestion de groupe et opérations intergroupe). management station (station de gestion) Système utilisé pour gérer à distance un ou plusieurs systèmes gérés à partir d'un emplacement central. Manual Replay (Relecture manuelle) Fonction du Dell Compellent Storage Center qui permet à l'utilisateur de créer manuellement des copies de volumes à un moment dans le temps. manual transfer replication (réplication de transfert manuel) Réplication effectuée via un support amovible plutôt que sur un réseau. Utilisée lorsque la liaison réseau entre les partenaires de réplication est trop lente ou ne convient pas pour un transfert de larges quantités de données. Manual Transfer Utility (Utilitaire de transfert manuel) Utilitaire autonome de Dell EqualLogic qui effectue une réplication des volumes à l'aide d'un support amovible au lieu du réseau. L'utilitaire possède les interfaces GUI et CLI. Media Access Control address (MAC address) (Adresse du contrôle d'accès aux médias - Adresse MAC) Numéro unique d'identification de votre matériel sur un réseau. migrate volume (migrer un volume) Une commande du Dell Compellent Storage Center permettant de déplacer les données d'un volume à un autre. migration Dans le contexte de EKM, cela signifie l'introduction d'un stockage de clés dans un stockage de clés existant au cours de l'installation de Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0 (et non après). mirror volume (volume miroir) Une commande du Dell Compellent Storage Center qui permet de répliquer un volume local sur un Dell Compellent Storage Center distant et de maintenir les mises à jour entre les volumes locaux et distants jusqu'à ce que le miroir soit brisé manuellement. mirroring (mise en miroir) Un type de redondance des données dans lequel un ensemble de lecteurs physiques stockent des données et un ou plusieurs ensembles de lecteurs supplémentaires stockent les copies dupliquées des données. La fonctionnalité de mise en miroir est fournie par le logiciel. Voir striping (répartition), RAID. NAS Voir Network-Attached Storage (Stockage en réseau). network connection (connexion réseau) Un objet qui définit la connectivité de réseau requise d'une persona ou d'un VMRack. L'ajout d'éléments sur un réseau entraîne la création d'une connexion réseau, par exemple lorsque vous ajoutez une persona à un réseau. Network-Attached Storage (Stockage en réseau) (NAS) NAS est l'un des concepts utilisés pour la mise en place d'un stockage partagé sur un réseau. Les systèmes NAS ont leurs propres systèmes d'exploitation, matériel intégré et logiciel optimisé pour répondre à des besoins de stockage spécifiques. NTP Le protocole NTP (Network Time Protocol) est un protocole de synchronisation des horloges des systèmes informatiques sur des réseaux de données commutés par paquets et de latence variable. 13Oversubscribed space (espace surenregistré) Dans un SAN qui prend en charge l'allocation dynamique, il s'agit de la capacité de stockage configurée comme étant disponible sans être physiquement présente (c'est- à-dire, l'espace configuré moins l'espace disponible). parity stripe (bande de parité) Dans des matrices RAID, un disque dur segmenté contenant des données de parité. partition Une section physique du disque dur créée à l'aide de la commande fdisk. Les partitions peuvent être divisées en plusieurs lecteurs logiques à l'aide de la commande format. passive Controller (contrôleur passif) Le contrôleur Dell AIM qui agit en tant que disque de secours, prêt à prendre la relève pour la gestion de l'environnement si le contrôleur actif échoue. Peer Controller (Contrôleur homologue) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center à deux contrôleurs, le contrôleur homologue partage la charge d'E/S avec le contrôleur leader mais n'a aucune fonction de gestion externe. Si le contrôleur leader échoue, le contrôleur homologue prend la relève et se charge de la gestion et des E/S pour les deux contrôleurs. Voir Leader Controller (Contrôleur Leader). persona Un environnement du serveur capturé sur disque : le système d'exploitation, le logiciel agent Dell AIM facultatif et le réseau et tout autre paramètre requis pour l'exécution d'une application sur un hôte au sein de l'environnement Dell AIM. pool L'espace de stockage dans un SAN disponible pour une utilisation par les volumes. Dans un Dell Compellent Enterprise Storage Manager (Gestionnaire de stockage Enterprise Dell Compellent) et un Dell Compellent Storage Center, cela équivaut à l'espace total du SAN. Dans les matrices Dell EqualLogic PS Series, cela équivaut à l'espace total des membres du pool en question. pool administrator (administrateur de pool) Un compte du groupe Dell EqualLogic PS Series autorisé à gérer les objets dans des pools spécifiques uniquement ou un ensemble de pools pour un groupe. Comparer à l'administrateur de groupe (group administrator). primary group (groupe principal) Au sein de l'environnement du Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit du groupe contenant le volume d'origine dans un partenariat de réplication. Voir secondary group (groupe secondaire) primary volume (volume principal) Au sein d'un environnement du Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit d'un volume configuré pour la réplication sur un partenaire de réplication. PS Series array (Matrice PS Series) Une unité de stockage Dell EqualLogic iSCSI unique, généralement configurée en tant que groupe Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Vous pouvez introduire plusieurs matrices de série PS dans un groupe plus important de série PS et les gérer en tant que réseau SAN iSCSI unique. PS Series group (Groupe PS Series) Une entité de stockage iSCSI comprenant une ou plusieurs matrices de stockage Dell EqualLogic PS Series accessibles via une adresse IP unique et gérables en tant que réseau de stockage SAN. Public Services (Services publics) Dans le contexte du Dell AIM, il s'agit de l'adresse IP virtuelle des services de contrôleur que vous utilisez pour vous connecter à la console ou à la CLI du contrôleur actif. RAC Remote Access Controller (Contrôleur d'accès à distance) 14RAID Voir Redundant Array of Independent Disks (Matrice redondante de disques indépendants) RAID 0 Les données sont réparties sur les disques disponibles, offrant ainsi des performances optimisées. RAID 0 ne fournit cependant aucune redondance des données. RAID 10 Les données sont réparties sur les lecteurs de disque disponibles et mises en miroir, offrant ainsi une disponibilité et des performance optimisées des données. Maintient au moins une copie complète des données sur le volume. RAID 10 fournit des performances de Lecture/Écriture optimales, une probabilité de résistance à plusieurs pannes accrue et une restauration des données la plus rapide. RAID 5 Maintient une copie logique des données à l'aide d'une bande de parité rotative mathématiquement dérivée. La bande de parité est dérivée de bandes de données. Cette méthode permet moins de surcharge système pour les informations redondantes que le RAID 10, cependant les performances d'écriture sont plus lentes que RAID 10 en raison du calcul de parité associé à chaque écriture. Les performances d'écriture sont semblables à celles de RAID 10. RAID 50 Le niveau de RAID 50 est une combinaison des niveaux de RAID 5 et 0. RAID 50 inclut la parité et la répartition des disques sur plusieurs lecteurs. recovery volume (volume de restauration) Un volume créé dans le but de restaurer des données. Dans les matrices Dell EqualLogic PS Series, un volume de restauration est créé en associant un ensemble de répliques entrantes à une opération de basculement. Vous pouvez également créer des modèles de volumes de restauration ainsi que des « thin clones » (clones dynamiques) de restauration. Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, un volume d'affichage est créé depuis une relecture. Voir replica, View Volume, Replay (réplique, Volume d'affichage, Relecture). Redundancy (Redondance) La déduplication d'informations ou de composants d'équipement pour assurer la relève de la fonction d'une ressource principale en échec par une ressource secondaire. Le Dell Compellent Storage Center fournit une redondance à chaque composant pour qu'aucun point de panne unique ne survienne. La redondance unique protège contre la perte de données en cas d'échec d'une ressource. La double redondance protège contre la perte de données en cas d'échec de deux ressources. « Redundant Array of Independent Disks », matrice redondante de disques indépendants (RAID). Matrice redondante de disques indépendants. Une méthode d'apport de redondance des données. Certaines mises en œuvre typiques de RAID comprennent RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 et RAID 50. Voir mirroring, striping (mise en miroir, répartition). Remote Instant Replay (Relecture instantanée à distance) Une fonction de la solution du Dell Compellent Storage Center dans laquelle une relecture est répliquée sur un Dell Compellent Storage Center distant. Les Dell Compellent Storage Centers local et distant sont actif-actif et une réplication bidirectionnelle (synchrone ou asynchrone) peut se produire à des intervalles indépendants. La réplication du Dell Compellent Storage Center requiert une application logicielle de l'Enterprise Manager (Gestionnaire Enterprise) avec licence de réplication. Voir Replay, Remote System, replication (Relecture, Système distant, réplication). Remote Setup Wizard (Assistant de configuration distant) (RSW) Une interface utilisateur graphique (GUI) qui vous permet de configurer une matrice Dell EqualLogic PS Series une fois l'installation de Host Integration Tools/Microsoft Edition effectuée. 15Remote System (Système distant) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'un SAN distinct configuré pour recueillir des données de réplication provenant d'un volume d'origine du Dell Compellent Storage Center local. La réplication du Dell Compellent Storage Center requiert une application logicielle de l'Enterprise Manager (Gestionnaire Enterprise) avec licence de réplication. Voir replication (réplication). Replay (Relecture) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'une copie instantanée (PITC) complètement utilisable qui contient une image des données telles qu'elles apparaissent à un « point dans le temps » - moment auquel la copie fût initiée. La copie peut être stockée localement ou sur un Dell Compellent Storage Center distant. Voir snapshot, Data Instant Replay, Remote Instant Replay (instantané, Relecture instantanée des données, Relecture instantanée distante). Replay profile (Profil de relecture) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'un ensemble de règles qui déterminent quand et comment les copies instantanées de relectures seront prises et quelle sera leur durée de sauvegarde. Voir Replay (Relecture). Replay space (Espace de relecture) Dans un Dell Compellent Storage Center, l'espace automatiquement réservé et utilisé pour les relectures. Voir active space, actual space (espace actif, espace réel). replica (réplique) Une représentation « point dans le temps » d'un volume Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Le volume d'origine et sa réplique se trouvent sur les différents groupes Dell EqualLogic PS Series (partenaires de réplication) pouvant être séparés par une certaine distance géographique afin de faciliter la tolérance aux pannes. replica collection (collection de répliques) Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit de l'ensemble des répliques résultant d'une collection de volumes. replica collection set (ensemble de collection de répliques) Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit de l'ensemble de collections de répliques pour une collection de volumes. replica reserve (réserve de répliques) Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), la partie d'espace délégué mise de côté pour les ensembles de répliques d'un volume spécifique. Vous configurez la réserve de répliques pour le volume sur le groupe principal, mais la réserve de répliques réelle se trouve sur le groupe secondaire. replica set (ensemble de répliques) Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), l'ensemble de répliques complètes d'un volume, d'un volume modèle ou d'un volume « thin clone » (de clones dynamiques). replicating system (système en cours de réplication) Un Dell Compellent Storage Center configuré de manière à envoyer les données de réplication d'un ou plusieurs volumes locaux sur un Storage Center distant. Voir replication, Remote System, Remote Instant Replay (réplication, Système distant, Relecture instantanée à distance). replication (réplication) Il s'agit du processus de copie des données de volume (uniquement deltas) d'un réseau SAN (local) principal sur un réseau SAN (distant) secondaire, de manière à ce que les données puissent être restaurées depuis l'un ou l'autre SAN, au besoin. Il n'existe aucune limitation de distance entre les SAN. replication partner (partenaire de réplication) Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit d'un groupe configuré pour envoyer ou recevoir des répliques provenant d'un autre partenaire. RSW Voir Remote Setup Wizard (Assistant de configuration à distance). 16runnable persona (persona exécutable) Dans le contexte du Dell AIM, il s'agit d'une persona amorcée depuis le réseau qui est initialisée et en attente d'être attribuée à un hôte. SAN Voir Storage Area Network (Réseau de stockage). SAN HeadQuarters Permet de surveiller plusieurs groupes Dell EqualLogic PS Series depuis une interface graphique unique. Recueille et formate les données de performances et autres informations de groupe importantes. SCN Voir System Control Network (Réseau de contrôle système). SCN Services (Services SCN) L'adresse IP virtuelle des services du contrôleur utilisée par les personas et les VMRacks dans l'environnement Dell AIM pour communiquer avec le contrôleur actif. SCSI Voir Small Computer System Interface (Interface système pour micro-ordinateur) SDK Voir Software Development Kit (Kit de développement du logiciel). secondary control module (module de contrôle secondaire). Au sein de l'environnement du Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), le module de contrôle secondaire met en miroir les données du cache du module de contrôle actif. Si le module de contrôle actif cesse de fonctionner, le module secondaire prend alors la relève des opérations de réseau. Voir active control module (module de contrôle actif). secondary group (groupe secondaire) Dans une configuration de réplication du Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), il s'agit du groupe qui reçoit des répliques provenant d'un volume source. Voir primary group (groupe principal). Server Cluster (Cluster de serveurs) Un groupe de serveurs indépendants fonctionnant ensemble en tant que système unique pour fournir un service ininterrompu en cas de pannes d'ordinateur individuel. service tag (numéro de service) Une étiquette située sur le système permettant son identification auprès du support technique Dell. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de courrier simple) (SMTP) Définit un format et une procédure d'acheminement de message pour permettre l'envoi de messages sur Internet entre les hôtes. Protocole SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol - protocole de gestion de réseau simple). Interface standard permettant à un administrateur de réseau de suivre et de gérer des postes de travail à distance. Simulator (Simulateur) Un composant du Dell AIM SDK qui imite un environnement Dell AIM sous fonctionnement, y compris le contrôleur, la console et les réseaux physiques et virtuels. Voir SDK. Small Computer System Interface (Interface système pour micro-ordinateur) Small Computer System Interface (Interface système pour micro-ordinateur). Une interface du bus d'E/S avec des taux de transmission de données plus rapides que les ports standard. SMART Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (Technologie SMART). Permet aux lecteurs de disques de rapporter des erreurs et des pannes au BIOS du système et d'afficher ensuite un message d'erreur. Smart Copy (Copie intelligente) Une copie ASM/ME « point dans le temps » cohérente avec les applications d'objets dans un groupe Dell EqualLogic PS Series. Les copies intelligentes peuvent être de 17différents types : instantané, clone, ou réplique. Ces types varient selon l'édition du Gestionnaire d'instantanés automatiques (Auto-Snapshot Manager) utilisé. SMP Voir symmetric multiprocessing (multi-traitement symétrique). SMTP Voir Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de courrier simple) (SMTP) snapshot (instantané) Une copie instantanée (PITC) d'un volume. Voir Replay (Relecture). snapshot collection (collection d'instantanés) Un ensemble d'instantanés résultant d'une opération d'instantanés sur une collection de volumes. Voir volume collection (collection de volumes). SNMP Voir Simple Network Management Protocol (Protocole simplifié de gestion de réseau). SNMP Trap Collector (Collecteur d'interruptions SNMP) Dans le contexte de Dell AIM, l'adresse IP virtuelle des services du contrôleur qui gère les commutateurs et autres périphériques utilisée pour l'envoi d'interruptions SNMP au contrôleur actif. Software Development Kit (Kit de développement du logiciel) (SDK) Un ensemble d'outils de déploiement utilisé pour créer des applications de progiciel, cadre logiciel, plateforme matérielle, système informatique, console de jeux vidéo, système d'exploitation ou plateforme semblable spécifiques. Space Recovery (Restauration d'espace) Utilitaire qui restaure l'espace disponible que Windows reporte comme utilisé mais qui est réellement vide et qui peut être utilisé par Dell Compellent Storage Center. spare disk (disque de secours) Un lecteur désigné ou non utilisé d'un SAN qui est utilisé pour le remplacement automatique d'un lecteur en échec. Storage Area Network (Réseau de stockage SAN) Un réseau de stockage SAN est un réseau spécialisé qui fournit un accès à des soussystèmes de stockage ultraperformants et hautement disponibles en utilisant des protocoles de stockage de blocs. Le réseau SAN est composé de périphériques particuliers, tels que des adaptateurs de bus hôte (HBA) dans les serveurs hôte, des commutateurs qui aident à l'acheminement du trafic de stockage et des sous-systèmes de stockage de disques. La caractéristique principale d'un SAN s'avère être ses soussystèmes de stockage, généralement disponibles pour plusieurs hôtes de manière simultanée, les rendant de ce fait plus souples et évolutifs. Comparer au NAS. Storage Cluster (Cluster de stockage) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit de plusieurs contrôleurs SAN interconnectés dans le but d'optimiser la fiabilité, la disponibilité, la serviabilité et les performances (via l'équilibrage de charge). Le Storage Center se sert d'une configuration active-active pour fournir un basculement de contrôleur automatique. Un cache complètement en miroir et doté d'une batterie dans chaque contrôleur assure la fiabilité des données après un redémarrage et permet aux volumes de migrer entre les contrôleurs en cas d'échec d'un seul contrôleur. Storage Clustering (Mise en cluster du stockage) Une fonction du Dell Compellent Storage Center qui fournit un basculement de contrôleur automatique via plusieurs contrôleurs au sein d'un configuration activeactive. Pleinement mis en miroir, le cache de secours de la batterie fournit une tolérance aux erreurs ainsi qu'un redémarrage/restauration automatique en cas d'échec d'un contrôleur. Storage Pool (Pool de stockage) Voir pool. Storage Profile (Profil de stockage) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'un ensemble de règles qui définit les types de lecteurs (couches) sur lesquels stocker les données et le niveau de RAID à utiliser pour chaque couche. 18Storage Type (Type de stockage) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'un ensemble d'attributs, notamment les options de redondance et la taille des blocs, qui contrôle l'attribution et la protection de l'espace d'un pool de stockage. striping (répartition) La répartition des disques permet l'écriture des données sur trois disques ou plus au sein d'une matrice, cependant seule une partie de l'espace de chaque disque est utilisée. L'espace utilisé par la répartition est identique sur chaque disque utilisé. Un disque virtuel peut utiliser plusieurs répartitions sur le même ensemble de disques d'une matrice. Voir également mirroring (mise en miroir) et RAID. symmetric multiprocessing (multi-traitement symétrique) (SMP) Se dit d'un système qui dispose de deux processeurs ou plus reliés par un lien haut débit et qui est administré par un système d'exploitation, dans lequel l'ensemble des processeurs dispose des mêmes priorités d'accès au système d'E/S. synch Voir Synchronous Replication (Réplication synchrone). Synchronous Replication (Réplication synchrone) Fonction qui écrit de manière atomique les mêmes données sur deux volumes distincts, stockés sur du matériel physique distinct, avant que l'application ne reçoive un message intégral d'E/S. Les deux écritures se terminent ou échouent simultanément, ce qui signifie que les deux volumes sont toujours complètement synchrones. Cependant, la fonction peut avoir pour effet d'accroître la latence d'écriture pour l'application. Voir synch. System Control Network (Réseau de contrôle système) (SCN) Un réseau privé que le Dell AIM utilise pour la communication entre le contrôleur, les personas et les VMRacks. Le contrôleur utilise également ce réseau pour la détection des serveurs et pour amorcer les personas et les VMRacks sur ces derniers. System Setup program (Programme de configuration du système) Un programme BIOS qui permet la configuration du matériel d'un système et la personnalisation des opérations d'un système en définissant des fonctionnalités telles que la protection par mot de passe. Le System Setup program (Programme de configuration du système) étant stocké dans la NVRAM, tout paramètre restera actif jusqu'à ce qu'il soit modifié. Systems Deployment Appliance (Serveur de déploiement des systèmes) Une solution de gestion de déploiement basée sur le serveur Dell KACE destinée aux professionnels de l'informatique qui fournit des outils pour l'imagerie de disque, la migration de l'état des utilisateurs, la gestion de sites à distance, le dépannage et la restauration du système, ainsi que le balayage et l'évaluation de l'inventaire du système. En outre, elle automatise les tâches de configuration de pré et postdéploiement, telles que le balayage et l'évaluation de l'inventaire du système ; elle automatise également la configuration du disque, du BIOS et RAID, la distribution logicielle et la gestion des configurations. Systems Management Appliance (Serveur de gestion des systèmes) Une solution de gestion des systèmes basée sur serveur Dell KACE pour les professionnels de l'informatique qui simplifie les tâches telles que la gestion de l'inventaire, la distribution logicielle, la création de rapports, la gestion des correctifs, la gestion des actifs, la création de scripts et le support technique via un interface Web. template (modèle) Dans le contexte de Dell AIM, il s'agit d'une persona inactive qui peut être clonée pour créer d'autres personas mais qui ne peut pas être exécutée (ce qui évite d'endommager le modèle). template volume (volume du modèle) Un volume en lecture seule depuis lequel des clones dynamiques sont créés. 19thin clone (clone dynamique) Volume qui partage son espace avec un volume modèle. Les clones dynamiques (thin clones) fournissent une utilisation d'espace de stockage efficace pour les configurations à plusieurs volumes qui possèdent un montant important de données communes. Thin Provisioning (Allocation dynamique) Fonction qui permet de sur-allouer (ou sur-attribuer) l'espace disponible dans le SAN. Les objets de stockage (tels que des volumes) qui utilisent l'allocation dynamique rapportent leur taille maximale potentielle aux applications, cependant il est possible qu'ils en utilisent beaucoup moins. L'allocation dynamique permet aux organisations de réduire l'ensemble de leurs frais de stockage, accroître la disponibilité et obtenir de meilleures performances. tiered storage (stockage en couches) Stratégie d'optimisation du stockage dans laquelle les données qui sont souvent requises rapidement sont stockées sur des types de supports rapides onéreux et les données rarement requises sont stockées sur des types de supports plus économiques et plus lents. unmanaged space (espace non géré) Dans les matrices Dell EqualLogic PS Series, il s'agit de la capacité d'espace délégué sur le groupe secondaire qui n'est plus accessible depuis le groupe principal. uplink port (port de liaison montante) Port d'un concentrateur réseau ou d'un commutateur, qui sert à le relier à un autre concentrateur ou commutateur sans utiliser de câble croisé. vacate (vider) Dans le Dell EqualLogic Group Manager (Gestionnaire de groupes Dell EqualLogic), cela signifie retirer un membre du groupe alors que les autres membres restent en ligne. View Volume (Volume de vue) Dans le Dell Compellent Storage Center, il s'agit d'un volume en lecture seule créé au cours d'une relecture précédente et dont le but principal est la restauration des données. Voir Replay (Relecture). Virtual Port (Port virtuel) ou Virtual Port Mode (Mode port virtuel) Dans le contexte du Dell Compellent Storage Center, les ports virtuels éliminent le besoin de posséder des ports de réserve. En mode Port virtuel, tous les ports avant acceptent des E/S et peuvent faire partie d'un domaine de défaillance. Pour en savoir plus sur l'activation des ports virtuels, reportez-vous au Dell Compellent Storage Center System Setup Guide (Guide de configuration du système Dell Compellent Storage Center). virtual World Wide Port Name (nom de port universel virtuel) (vWWPN) Un nom de port universel virtuel utilisé dans le Dell AIM pour la création de personas depuis le SAN. Virtualization (Virtualisation) La capacité d'utiliser le logiciel pour partager les ressources d'un seul ordinateur ou périphérique de stockage sur plusieurs environnements. Un système ou périphérique physique peut apparaître comme plusieurs systèmes virtuels capables d'héberger plusieurs systèmes d'exploitation. VMRack Un rack de machines virtuelles (MV) se trouvant sur un serveur qui exécute une combinaison de logiciel agent et Red Hat Xen, VMware ESX ou Microsoft Hyper-V. volume Une unité de stockage distincte associée à un ou plusieurs périphériques de stockage. volume collection (collection de volumes) Plusieurs volumes regroupés dans le but d'effectuer des opérations simultanées sur les volumes. Voir snapshot collection, replica collection (collection d'instantanés, collection de répliques). 20volume reserve (réserve de volumes) Espace du pool disponible alloué à un volume. Lorsque l'allocation dynamique n'existe pas, la réserve de volumes correspond à la taille rapportée. Volume Type (Type de volume) Dans le contexte du Dell Compellent Storage Center, le type de volume peut être : dynamique, Relecture activée ou Réplication. Un volume est dynamique jusqu'à ce qu'au moins une relecture de ce volume ait été prise, après quoi il devient un volume de type Relecture activée. Un volume de réplication signifie qu'il est en cours de réplication sur un autre système Dell Compellent Storage Center. vRack Dans le contexte du Dell AIM, il s'agit d'un groupe logique qui héberge des hôtes connectés à un commutateur virtuel (commutateur vRack). vRack switch (Commutateur vRack) Dans le contexte du Dell AIM, il s'agit d'un commutateur qui connecte les hôtes au vRack. vWWPN Voir virtual World Wide Port Name (nom de port universel virtuel) 2122デル用語集 - バージョン 2 用語集用語集 ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface を参照してください。 アクティブコントロ ールモジュール デュアルコントロールモジュールアレイの Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイで、実際 にネットワーク上で I/O 動作を行っているコントロールモジュールです。停止する と、セカンダリコントロールモジュールにフェイルオーバーします。セカンダリコン トロールモジュールを参照してください。 アクティブコントロ ーラ Dell AIM 環境を実際に管理している Dell AIM コントローラです。 アクティブ領域 Dell Compellent Storage Center で、リプレイを除くボリュームで使用されている容量で す。この容量には RAID オーバーヘッドは含まれません。リプレイを参照してくだ さい。 実質領域 Dell Compellent Storage Center のボリュームのアクティブ領域とリプレイ領域を合計 した容量です。アクティブ領域、リプレイ領域を参照してください。 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) オペレーティングシステムが設定と電力管理を直接、実行できるようにするための標 準インタフェースです。 エージェント Dell AIM 環境(Red Hat Xen および Microsoft Hyper-V ベースの VMRack およびペルソ ナ)における、エレメント管理およびネットワークプロパティ設定のためにコントロ ーラが使用する、エレメントにインストールされたオプションソフトウェアです。 エージェントレスペ ルソナ Dell AIM エージェントがインストールされていない Dell AIM ペルソナです。 周囲温度 システムが置かれている場所や部屋の温度。 アレイメンバー PS シリーズグループに設定された Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイ。グループに は複数のメンバーを含めることができます。 アレイシリアルナン バー Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイ環境において、Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイを 識別する固有の文字列で、アレイのハードウェア内にエンコードされています。サー ビスタグを参照してください。 ASM/ME Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition を参照してください。 ASM/VE Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition を参照してください。 資産管理アプライア ンス IT 担当者向けの Dell KACE アプライアンスベースの資産管理ソリューションです。ソ フトウェアおよびライセンスの準拠を追跡します。インベントリ、ソフトウェア資 産、バージョン、アップグレード、コンピューターの管理をウェブベースのダッシュ ボード経由で自動的に実行します。 Asset Tag(管理タグ)通常はシステム管理者によって、セキュリティやトラッキング目的でシステムごとに 割り当てられるコード。 割り当て済みディス ク Dell Compellent Storage Center の物理ストレージメディア。ボリュームとリプレイの 保存用に管理および使用するためにディスクフォルダに割り当てられます。ディス クフォルダ、ストレージプールを参照してください。 割り当てモード ペルソナおよび VMRack を、ホスト内 HBA の可用性にもとづいてホストに割り当てる 手段を管理するメカニズムです。HBA を参照してください。 3非同期レプリケーシ ョン データをローカルストレージに書き込み、そのデータをリモート SAN に保存するた めにキューを行う処理です。書き込みが送信される前にローカル SAN に不具合が発 生すると、レプリケーションに失敗する可能性があります。レプリケーション、同 期レプリケーション、リモートインスタントリプレイを参照してください。 自動 RAID 設定 Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズグループで、ユーザーが選択した RAID ポリシーをアレイ で設定する内部処理です。 Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition (ASM/ME) スマートコピーを管理できる、Microsoft Management Console 向けの、スナップインコ ンソールアプリケーションです。 Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition (ASM/VE) VMware 仮想環境で動作する、スマートコピーを管理できるウェブベースのアプリケ ーションです。 使用可能容量 すべてのドライブ上の、利用可能なストレージの容量の合計。 バックエンド Dell Compellent Storage Center で、コントローラまたはストレージクラスタ(コントロ ーラの冗長ペアなど)をローカルディスクエンクロージャに接続する、独立した専用 ネットワーク。 バックエンドネット ワーク Dell Compellent Storage Center コントローラでの、コントローラとディスクの接続。 ベースボリューム (Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズ) コンピューターにマウントされたボリュームで、Windows で割り当てられたドライブ 文字(G: など)またはマウントポイントを使ってアクセスします。 ベースボリューム (Dell EqualLogic Group Manager) スナップショットを持つボリュームです。スナップショットはベースボリュームに 依存します。ベースボリュームが破壊されている場合、スナップショットは削除さ れています。 ベースボード管理コ ントローラ(BMC) IPMI (Intelligent Platform Management Interface) プロトコルを実装するサーバー管理モ ジュールです。Dell AIM では、コントローラで BMC を使用していくつかのモデルのサ ーバーをリモート制御します。 ブレード Dell AIM SDK で、ブレードはホストのスーパークラスのエレメントです。Dell モジュ ラシステムでは、ブレードはエンクロージャにマウントされたモジュラサーバーを指 します。 BMC ベースボード管理コントローラを参照してください。 起動可能なメディア システムをハードディスクドライブから起動できない場合にシステムの起動に使用 する CD、SD カード、または USB メモリキー。 キャッシュ データを迅速に取得するため、データのコピーまたは手順を保管しておく高速記憶領 域。 CHA Compellent ホストアダプタを参照してください。 チャレンジハンドシ ェイク認証プロトコ ル(CHAP) チャレンジハンドシェイク認証プロトコル(CHAP)は、暗号化されたチャレンジ / レ スポンスメカニズムを使用するネットワークログインプロトコルです。ボリューム およびスナップショットへのアクセスを、正しいアカウント名とパスワードを提供す るホストのみに制限するために使用します。 CHAP は、ログイン / 管理者アカウント でも使用します。 チャネル Dell / AIM 環境で、スイッチポートに割り当てることのできる最大 8 つの物理的な接続 のうちの 1 つで、最大 8 の物理 NIC を使用してペルソナに接続できます。 1 つまたは 42 つのチャネルをトラフィックに優先的に使用して、優先チャネルに不具合が発生し た場合には別のチャネルにトラフィックを透過的にルーティングできるようネット ワークを構成できます。 CHAP チャレンジハンドシェイク認証プロトコル(CHAP)を参照してください。 シャーシスイッチ Dell AIM で、シャーシ内ベイに搭載されたイーサネットスイッチです。シャーシスイ ッチはコントローラで管理します。 クライアントデバイ ス通信証明書 EKM で、クライアントとサーバーとの通信を許可する専用暗号化キーです。 クラスタノード サーバークラスタ内のホストやストレージクラスタ内の SAN など、リソースクラス タの物理メンバーです。 コレクション ASM/ME で、コレクションは、ボリュームやスナップショット、アプリケーションコ ンポーネントといったストレージオブジェクトの関連するグループで、ASM コンソ ールツリーで Collcetions マスターノードの下位ノードとして示されます。 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager では、ボリュームおよびレプリカのコレクションおよびカス タムスナップショットのコレクションは、Volumes ビューの下に階層構造で示されま す。 Compellent ホストア ダプタ(CHA) 各 Dell Compellent Storage Center コントローラ内に搭載された内部キャッシュカード / バッテリです。書き込みキャッシュメモリはキャッシュカードにミラーリングされ ます。デュアルコントローラの Dell Compellent Storage Center では、コントローラ 1 の キャッシュカードにはコントローラ 2 のミラーが含まれ、コントローラ 2 のキャッシ ュカードにはコントローラ 1 のキャッシュカードが含まれます。シングルコントロ ーラの Dell Compellent Storage Center では、キャッシュカードにはシングルコントロー ラのミラーが含まれます。 設定 全体のコンテンツの説明および Dell AIM 環境の設定を説明したデータベースです。 節約モード Dell Compellent Storage Center で残りの空き容量が重大しきい値(平均 10%、最大 32 GB)に低下すると到達するデータ保全モードです。節約モードで、Dell Compellent Storage Center はアラートを生成し、新規ボリュームの作成を抑制し、リプレイの期 限切れを早めて容量を解放します。緊急モードを参照してください。 コンソール Dell AIM 環境のエレメントの監視および操作に使用するウェブベースのユーザーイ ンタフェースです。Dell AIM コンソールのホストコントローラは Dell AIM コントロー ラです。 コントロールモジュ ール Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイの物理プロセッサおよびインタフェースコンポー ネント。コントロールモジュールのフラッシュメモリ内に Dell EqualLogic PS シリー ズのファームウェアが含まれ、キャッシュメモリに保存されたメモリに一時的な電源 を供給します。複数のネットワークインタフェースおよびオプションのシリアルポ ートを備えています。 1 つのアレイに、ホットスワップ可能なデュアル冗長コントロ ーラ 2 台を構成することができます。アクティブコントロールモジュールは I/O を提 供し、セカンダリコントロールモジュールはキャッシュ内にデータのミラーリングを 行います。 コントロールパネル システムの中で電源ボタン、電源インジケータなどの制御部品やインジケータをまと めた部分。 コントロールポート ストレージリクエストを行うための iSCSI イニシエータ(サーバー)の接続先 iSCSI ポートです。仮想ポートモードに設定された Dell Compellent Storage Center では、コ ントロールポートは iSCSI の各フォールトドメイン向けに作成され、該当する仮想ポ ートへの iSCSI トラフィックのリダイレクトを行います。 5コントローラ(Dell AIM) 物理および仮想ハードウェア、ソフトウェアおよび、ネットワーク構成を管理し、 Dell AIM コンソールのホストになるソフトウェア。レジリエントなコントローラの ペアでは、各コントローラは専用サーバー上で動作しますが、設定データベースおよ びその他主要ファイルを共有ファイルシステムで共有します。 コントローラ(Dell Compellent) ディスクアグリゲーション(RAID)、I/O ルーティング、エラー検出、データ復元を提 供します。Dell Compellent Storage Center サブシステム全体にインテリジェンスを提 供します。すべての Storage Center システムに 1 つ以上のコントローラが含まれてい ます。Storage Center および推奨される対応処置で、システムのパフォーマンスと可 用性を改善します。 コントローラサービ ス Dell AIM では、仮想 IP アドレス、またはコントローラがシステム制御ネットワーク (SCN)、管理対象スイッチ、コンソールおよび CLI などと通信を行うために使用する 複数のアドレスです。デフォルトでは、アクティブなコントローラ上の単一の仮想 IP アドレスですが、SCN サービスおよび SNMP トラップコレクタ向けに固有のアドレ スを指定することができます。 コパイロットサービ ス Dell Compellent Storage Center 内で、集中サポート、製品教育、および営業リソースを 一つに統合したサービスです。システムのパフォーマンスと可用性を向上させるた めに、システムの予防的監視を行い、改善策のアドバイスを行います。 コピー - ミラー - 移行 種類の異なるディスク間および RAID レベル間でボリュームの移行を可能にする、Dell Compellent Storage Center の機能です。 資格情報ストア EKM で、セッション間の資格情報を持つリポジトリ。資格情報は、ユーザー名やパス ワード、証明書といったセキュリティデータです。 暗号化オブジェクト データの保護手段。 Data Collector Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager のコンポーネントの一つ。サーバー上でバックグ ラウンドで実行され、サーバーに接続されたすべての Dell Compellent Storage Center シ ステムに関する情報を収集します。 Data Instant Replay Dell Compellent Storage Center の機能の一つ。ローカル SAN 上で、容量効率に優れたボ リュームのポイントインタイムコピー(PITC)を指定された間隔で実行し、以前の任 意の時点にボリュームをロールバックする機能を提供します。リプレイ、スナップ ショットを参照してください。 Data Progression Dell Compellent Storage Center の機能の一つ。 I/O 動作のレベル(需要)に応じて、パ フォーマンスの高いまたは低いデバイスにデータページを自動で移行します。階層 化ストレージを参照してください。 DDR ダブルデータ速度を参照してください。 委任済み容量 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager で、パートナーから受信するレプリカを保存するために 確保されているグループ上の容量です。 Dell Encryption Key Manager(EKM) Dell Encryption Key Manager(EKM)は、Dell テープ自動化ソリューション向けの暗号 化キーを管理することで、LTO テープカートリッジに保存されたデータを保護しま す。 Dell Remote Access Controller(DRAC) 帯域外管理機能を提供するインタフェースカードです。コントローラは固有のプロ セッサ、メモリ、ネットワーク接続およびシステムバスへのアクセスを持ち、システ ム管理者はネットワーク経由でシステムをリモート制御することができます。 デバイスドライバ オペレーティングシステムやプログラムが周辺機器と正しくインタフェースできる ようにするためのプログラム。 DHCP 動的ホスト構成プロトコルを参照してください。 6Digital Versatile Disk デジタル多用途ディスクまたはデジタルビデオディスク(DVD)。 ディスクフォルダ Dell Compellent Storage Center で、ユーザーが表示したり管理したりできる物理ストレ ージメディアデバイス(ディスク、SSD)の集合。ディスクフォルダは、ボリューム ストレージ容量の割り当て元のストレージプールを決定します。ディスクフォルダ を複数のストレージプールと関連付けることはできますが、すべてのディスクを同一 のフォルダおよびストレージプールに割り当てると Dell Compellent Storage Center の パフォーマンスは最大化します。 ディスク位置 Dell Compellent Storage Center で、エンクロージャ内ディスクドライブのスロット位置 で、行 / 列の形式で表記されます。たとえば、ディスク位置 01-02 は、上から1番目 の行、左から 2 番目の列のスロットを意味します。 DNS ドメインネームシステムを参照してください。 ドメインネームシス テム(DNS) たとえば www.example.com のようなインターネットのドメインネームを 208.77.188.166 のような IP アドレスに変換する方法です。 非アクティブなペル ソナ AIM 環境で、ホスト上で現在動作していない(または待機中の)ペルソナ。 ダブルデータ速度 (DDR) クロックサイクルの上昇パルスと下降パルスの両方でデータを転送することでデー タ速度を理論上 2 倍にするメモリモジュール内のテクノロジです。 DRAC Dell Remote Access Controller(DRAC)を参照してください。 DRAM ダイナミック RAM を参照してください。 デュアル冗長 通常は RAID 10 および / または RAID 6 を使用して 2 つのドライブの損失を防ぐ、Dell Compellent Storage Center のストレージプロファイルオプションです。 DVD Digital Versatile Disc を参照してください。 動的ホスト構成プロ トコル(DHCP) クライアントシステムに自動的に IP アドレスを割り当てるための方法です。 ダイナミック RAM 通常、システムの RAM は DRAM チップのみで構成されます。 EKM Dell Encryption Key Manager(EKM)を参照してください。 EKM 管理者 EKM において、ユーザーおよびグループの作成および削除を行えるスーパーユーザ ー。 EKM Encryption Manager(tklmadmin) EKM において、キーおよびデバイスの作成または削除を行えるデイリーユーザー。 緊急モード Dell Compellent Storage Center で、空き容量がなくなりシステムが動作できない場合に 到達するモードです。緊急モードでは、すべてのサーバー I/O は拒否され、すべての ボリュームはオフラインになり、緊急モードを終了できるだけの十分な容量が解放さ れるまではオンラインに戻りません。節約モードを参照してください。 エンクロージャ 物理的なエンクロージャ。複数のディスクまたはブレードに対して、単一のインタフ ェース、電源、および冷却システムを提供します。 環境 Dell AIM で、Dell AIM Controller が管理するハードウェア、ソフトウェアおよびネット ワーク構成の集合。 Eth0 イーサネットポート 0 を参照してください。 Eth1 イーサネットポート 1 を参照してください。 7イーサネットポート 0(Eth0) Dell Compellent Storage Center で、Eth0 は、管理専用のイーサネットインタフェースで す。 イーサネットポート 1(Eth1) Dell Compellent Storage Center で、Eth1 は、クラスタ化やリモートレプリケーションの ためのコントローラ間のプロセス間通信専用の、イーサネットインタフェースです。 外部ネットワーク Dell AIM 環境には含まれませんが、Dell AIM 環境に物理的および論理的に接続されて いるネットワークです。 外付けスイッチ Dell AIM 環境には含まれませんが、Dell AIM 環境に物理的および論理的に接続されて いるスイッチです。 ファブリック 統合ルーティングインフラストラクチャとして機能する、相互接続されたスイッチの 組み合わせ。SAN 上のデバイス間で複数接続が可能で、新規デバイスを目立たないよ うに追加できます。ネットワーク上で少なくとも 1 つのスイッチを備えた FC(また は iSCSI)トポロジ。 FastTrack 最もアクティブなデータをディスクトラックの外側(高速側)に動的に配置する、 Dell Compellent Storage Center のオプションユーティリティです。 FAT ファイルアロケーションテーブルを参照してください。 フォールトドメイン Dell Compellent Storage Center 環境内で、フォールトドメインはフェイルオーバーのセ ットを識別します。仮想ポートモードではすべてのフロントエンドポートを 1 つの フォールトドメインに含めることができます。レガシーモードでは、プライマリポー トおよび予約済みポートでそれぞれ 1 つのフォールトドメインを構成します。 FC ファイバーチャネルを参照してください。 FE フロントエンドネットワークを参照してください。 ファイバーチャネル (FC) サーバーのコントローラおよびバックエンドディスクエンクロージャへの接続に使 用する、高速相互接続。FC コンポーネントには HBA、ハブ、スイッチ、ケーブルが 含まれます。FC は、最大 10 Gbps のデータ転送が可能な高速全二重シリアル通信プロ トコルも意味します。 ファイルアロケーシ ョンテーブル(FAT) MS-DOS で、ファイルストレージの整理および追跡に使用されるファイルシステム構 造。 Microsoft Windows オペレーティングシステムのオプションで、FAT ファイルシス テム構造を使用することができます。 ファイル転送プロト コル(FTP) バルクデータファイルをマシンまたはホスト間で転送するために使用する、アプリケ ーションレイヤプロトコルです。 フロントエンドネッ トワーク(FE) Dell Compellent Storage Center の SAN を使用した書き込みデータの流れ(サーバーから スイッチ、コントローラ、ディスクの順)に含まれるコンポーネントです。通常、サ ーバー(またはスイッチ)はコントローラのフロントエンドですが、リモートシステ ムへのデータのレプリケーションを行っている Storage Center システムは、リモート システムのフロントエンドです。バックエンドを参照してください。 FTP ファイル転送プロトコルを参照してください。 GB ギガバイトを参照してください。 ギガバイト(GB) 1024 メガバイトまたは、1,073,741,824 バイト。ただし、ハードディスクドライブの容 量を指す場合は、1 ギガバイトは 1,000,000,000 バイトに丸められます。 グループ PS シリーズのグループを参照してください。 HBA ホストバスアダプタを参照してください。 HIT/LE Linux 向けホスト統合ツールを参照してください。 8HIT/ME Windows 向けホスト統合ツールを参照してください。 HIT/VM VMware 向けホスト統合ツールを参照してください。 ホスト Dell AIM 環境では、ホストは物理サーバー(ラックマウントまたはブレード型)であ る場合と仮想マシンである場合があります。Dell AIM SDK では、ブレードサーバ-、 ラックマウント型サーバー、および仮想マシン(VM)を含むスーパークラスです。 ホストアダプタ システムのバスと周辺機器(通常はストレージデバイス)の間の通信を実現するコン トローラ。 ホストバスアダプタ (HBA) 通常アドオンカードとして、サーバーを SAN(ストレージエリアネットワーク)に接 続するデバイス。各 HBA は、SAN 上で WWPN(ワールドワイドポート番号)で一意 に識別されます。共通 HBA タイプには、ファイバチャネルと iSCSI があります。 Linux 向けホスト統 合ツール(HIT/LE) Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズストレージアレイに ESX システムを統合するツールのス イート。Auto Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition(ASM/VE)、EqualLogic Datastore Manager、EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment Utility を含みます。 Windows 向けホスト 統合ツール(HIT/ME) アレイの設定および管理を行うアプリケーションのスイート。ASM/ME、DSM (Multipath I/O Device Specific Module)、RSW(リモートセットアップウィザード)を含 みます。 VMware 向けホスト 統合ツール(HIT/VM) Linux システムを Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズストレージアレイに統合するツールのス イート。Remote Setup Wizard Command Line Interface(RSWCLI)、EqualLogic Host Performance and Configuration Tuning Suite(eqltune)、EqualLogic Log Gathering Facility (eqllog)を含みます。 ホットスペアディス ク Dell Compellent Storage Center 環境で、ホットスペアディスクはバックアップディスク です。アクティブなアレイに不具合が発生した場合、コントローラは、アクティブな アレイのホットスペアパートを作成し、データをオンザフライで再構築します。ホッ トスペアはユーザーの操作なしでアクティブなディスクになりますが、アレイが新し いホットスペアで保護されるよう、故障したドライブをすぐに交換する必要がありま す。ホットスペアは、複数のディスクエンクロージャにまたがる場合もあります。 Storage Center のホットスペアには、置換するデータドライブとは異なる容量を持た せることができます。 ホットプラグ システムに電源が入って稼動している間にデバイス(通常はハードディスクドライブ または内蔵冷却ファン)をホストシステムに挿入する、または取り付けることができ る機能。ホットスワップも参照してください。 ホットスワップ ホットプラグを参照してください。 I/O 入力 / 出力。キーボードは入力デバイス、モニタは出力デバイスです。通常、I/O 動 作は演算動作とは区別されます。 ID Dell AIM 環境への追加時にエレメントに割り当てられる固有の識別子。 iDRAC Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller を参照してください。 IKEv2-SCSI 証明書の作成に使用されるプロトコル。 イメージ Dell AIM では特に、ペルソナまたは VMRack が起動するディスクまたはストレージア レイに保存された実際のビットを意味し、コントローラが特定の種類のホスト上でそ のイメージを起動するために使用する情報を含みます。たとえば、ペルソナまたは VMRack に複数のイメージを設定して、同じペルソナが物理サーバーまたは仮想マシ ンのいずれでも起動できるように設定できます。 infiniBand 複数のプロセッサと高速周辺機器との接続に、ポイントツーポイントの双方向シリア ルリンクを提供します。 9インスタントリプレ イ Data Instant Replay を参照してください。 Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller(iDRAC) インターネット SCSI プロトコルを使用するリモートアクセスコントローラです。 Intelligent Platform Management Interface(IPMI) いくつかのサーバーで管理モジュールで実装されるプロトコルで、サーバーのリモー ト制御に使用します。 Dell サーバーのブレード管理モジュールは iPMI を実装してい ます。 相互接続スイッチ Dell AIM 環境のスイッチ。コントローラによって管理され、シャーシ、vRack、その他 相互接続スイッチおよび外部スイッチの相互接続に使用します。 インターネット SCSI(iSCSI) インターネット SCSI(SCSI 参照)。 IP ネットワーク上のクライアントサーバー(iSCSI イニシエータ)とネットワークストレージデバイス(iSCSI ターゲット)間の通信の ための、標準 SCSI コマンドをカプセル化するプロトコルです。 IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface を参照してください。 iSCSI インターネット SCSI を参照してください。 Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) エンタープライズキー管理システムと暗号化システムの間の通信用の標準セットア ップ。 キー提供ポート EKM 内で通信を行うためにオペレーティングシステムで使用するポート。 キーグループ EKM で、特定の部門、エリア、ハードウェアの種類に対して割り当てられたキーの一 式。 キー EKM でデータを保護するために使用する、暗号化された証明書。 キーストア / キーグ ループ / マスターキ ーストア EKM 内の暗号化されたキーのグループ。 KMIP Key Management Interoperability Protocol(KMIP)を参照してください。 Java Database Connectivity(JDBC) Java プログラミング言語の API で、クライアントがデータベース内のデータにアクセ ス、クエリ、およびアップデートを行う方法を定義します。 JDBC Java Database Connectivity を参照してください。 リーダーコントロー ラ デュアルコントローラ型の Dell Compellent Storage Center のプライマリコントロー ラ。通常、リーダーおよびピアコントローラはストレージ I/O 負荷を共有して、基本 的にスループットを倍にしますが、リーダーコントローラのみが外部管理機能を実行 します。 1 台のコントローラに不具合が生じた場合、残りのコントローラがリーダー となり、両方のコントローラの役割を果たします。ピアコントローラを参照してく ださい。 レガシーモード Dell Compellent Storage Center で、フォールドドメインは、プライマリおよび予約済の フロントエンドポートの専用ペアに設定され、冗長機器を経由して、ストレージのト ラフィックを単一障害点から保護するメカニズムとして接続されます。フォールト ドメイン、仮想ポート、仮想ポートモードを参照してください。 Linear Tape-Open (LTO) 標準テープフォーマットを規程したオープン規格。 10論理ユニット番号 (LUN) 論理ユニットはストレージディスクまたはディスクのセットの概念部分(サブユニッ ト)です。各論理ユニットには、個別に識別が可能な論理ユニット番号(LUN)と呼 ばれるアドレスがあります。 LTO Linear Tape-Open を参照してください。 LTO キーグループロ ールオーバー EKM で、デフォルトのキーグループを使い切った時に使用するために割り当てられる キーのセットです。 LUN 論理ユニット番号を参照してください。 MAC アドレス メディアアクセスコントロールアドレスを参照してください。 管理対象ディスク Dell Compellent Storage Center で、ディスクフォルダに割り当てられ、ストレージプー ルに関連付けられるストレージメディアデバイス(ディスク、SSD)です。 ストレ ージプール、ディスクフォルダを参照してください。 管理下システム 管理下システムは Dell OpenManage Server Administrator を使った監視と管理の対象と なるシステムです。 管理 IP アドレス デバイスを監視または管理するために、IP 対応インテリジェントデバイスへの接続に 使用されるアドレスです。アドレスは、管理アプリケーションで使用する専用アド レスとすることも、管理およびサービスアプリケーションで使用を共有することもで きます。 管理ネットワーク オプションの管理ネットワーク。iSCSI トラフィック(ボリューム I/O)を管理トラフ ィック(GUI および CLI セッション、その他グループ管理通信およびグループ間操作) と分離します。 管理ステーション 1 つまたは複数の管理下システムを中央サイトからリモート管理するために使用され るシステム。 手動リプレイ ユーザーが手動でボリュームのポイントインタイムコピーを作成できる、Dell Compellent Storage Center の機能。 手動転送レプリケー ション ネットワーク経由ではなく可搬メディアを経由して行なわれるレプリケーション。 レプリケーションパートナー間のネットワークリンクが遅すぎるか、大容量データの 転送に適さない場合に使用します。 手動転送ユーティリ ティ Dell EqualLogic のスタンドアロンユーティリティ。ネットワークではなく可搬メディ アを使用してボリュームのレプリケーションを実行します。このユーティリティに はグラフィカルおよびコマンドラインの両方のユーザーインタフェースがあります。 メディアアクセスコ ントロールアドレス (MAC アドレス) ネットワーク上のシステムのハードウェアに付けられた固有の番号です。 移行ボリューム Dell Compellent Storage Center のコマンド。データを 1 つのボリュームから別のボリュ ームに移動します。 移行 EKM で、Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0 のインストール中(インストール後ではない) に 1 つのキーストアを既存の 1 つのキーストアに統合すること。 ミラーボリューム Compellent Storage Center のコマンド。ローカルボリュームをリモートの Dell Compellent Storage Center にレプリケーションして、ミラーが手動で分離されるまでロ ーカルとリモートボリュームの間でアップデートを維持します。 ミラーリング データ冗長性の一種。物理ディスクのセットにデータを保存し、1 つまたは複数のそ の他のドライブのセットにこのデータのコピーを保存します。ミラーリング機能は ソフトウェアから提供されます。ストライピング、RAID を参照してください。 11NAS ネットワーク接続ストレージを参照してください。 ネットワークの接続 ペルソナおよび VMRack で必要なネットワーク接続を定義するオブジェクト。たと えば、ペルソナをネットワークに追加する場合など、ネットワークへのエレメントの 追加によってネットワーク接続が作成されます。 ネットワーク接続ス トレージ(NAS) NAS は、ネットワークに共有ストレージを実装するための概念の一つです。 NAS シ ステムには、ストレージ固有のニーズに最適化された独自のオペレーティングシステ ム、内蔵ハードウェア、およびソフトウェアが搭載されます。 NTP Network Time Protocol(ネットワークタイムプロトコル)は、パケット交換型の可変 遅延データネットワークを介してコンピュータシステム時計を同期するためのプロ トコルです。 超過容量 シンプロビジョニングをサポートする SAN で、使用可能な容量として設定されてい るものの、物理的には存在していないストレージの容量(つまり、設定済み容量から 使用可能な容量を引いた容量)。 パリティストライプ RAID アレイで、パリティデータを含むストライピングされたハードディスクドライ ブ。 パーティション fdisk コマンドを使用して作成されたハードディスクドライブの物理セクション。パ ーティションは、フォーマットコマンドを使用して複数の論理ドライブに分割できま す。 パッシブコントロー ラ ホットスタンバイとして動作する、Dell AIM Controller。アクティブなコントローラに エラーが生じた場合、環境の管理を引き継ぎます。 ピアコントローラ デュアルコントローラ型の Dell Compellent Storage Center で、ピアコントローラはリー ダーコントローラと I/O 負荷を共有しますが、外部管理機能は実行しません。リーダ ーコントローラに不具合が発生すると、ピアコントローラは両方のコントローラの I/ O および管理を引き継ぎます。リーダーコントローラを参照してください。 ペルソナ ディスク上でキャプチャされるサーバー環境。オペレーティングシステム、オプシ ョンの Dell AIM エージェントソフトウェア、および Dell AIM 環境内のホスト上でのア プリケーションの実行に必要なネットワーク設定やその他の設定です。 プール ボリュームで使用可能な SAN 内のストレージ容量。Dell Compellent Enterprise Storage Manager および Dell Compellent Storage Center では、SAN の合計容量に等しい容量で す。Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイでは、特定のプール上のメンバーの合計容量に 等しい容量です。 プール管理者 Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズのグループ上でのアカウント。特定のプールまたはグル ープのプールのセットに限り、オブジェクトの管理を許可されす。グループ管理者と 比較。 プライマリグループ Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 環境内で、レプリケーションパートナーシップでオリジ ナルボリュームを持つグループ。セカンダリグループを参照。 プライマリボリュー ム Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 環境内で、レプリケーションパートナーへのレプリケー ション用に設定されたボリューム。 PS シリーズアレイ 単一の Dell EqualLogic iSCSI ストレージユニット。通常は、Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズ グループとして設定されます。複数の PS シリーズアレイをより大きな PS シリーズ グループに参加させて、単独の iSCSI SAN として管理することができます。 PS シリーズグルー プ iSCSI のストレージエンティティ。単一の IP アドレス経由でアクセスしてストレージ エリアネットワーク(SAN)として管理する、1 つまたは複数の Dell EqualLogic PS シ リーズストレージアレイで構成されます。 12パブリックサービス Dell AIM で、アクティブなコントローラのコンソールまたは CLI への接続に使用する コントローラサービスの仮想 IP アドレス。 RAC Remote Access Controller RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks を参照してください。 RAID 0 使用可能なディスク間でデータのストライピングが行なわれ、パフォーマンスを向上 します。RAID 0 はデータ冗長性を提供しません。 RAID 10 データは使用可能なディスクドライブ間でストライピングおよびミラーリングされ て、データの可用性を提供し、パフォーマンスを向上します。ボリューム上のすべて のデータの完全コピーを 1 つ以上維持します。RAID 10 は、最適な読み書きパフォー マンス、複数エラーへの耐性向上、およびデータの最速復元を提供します。 RAID 5 計算で得られた循環パリティストライプを使用して、データの論理コピーを保持しま す。パリティストライプはデータストライピングから得られます。この方法は、RAID 10 よりは冗長情報に関するオーバーヘッドは少ないですが、パリティストライプの計 算がすべての書き込みで行なわれるため、書き込みパフォーマンスは RAID 10 を下回 ります。読み取りパフォーマンスは RAID 10 とほぼ同等です。 RAID 50 RAID level 50 は、RAID level 5 と RAID level 0 を組み合わせたものです。RAID 50 には、 複数ドライブで行うパリティストライピングとディスクストライピングの両方が含 まれます。 リカバリボリューム データリカバリのために作成されるボリューム。 Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイ では、リカバリボリュームはインバウンドレプリカセットをフェイルオーバー動作の 一部として昇格させて作成します。リカバリテンプレートボリュームおよびリカバ リシンクローンも作成することができます。 Dell Compellent Storage Center では、リプ レイからビューボリュームが作成されます。レプリカ、ビューボリューム、リプレ イを参照してください。 冗長性 プライマリリソースに不具合が発生した場合にセカンダリリソースがその機能を引 き継ぐことができるように、情報またはハードウェア機器コンポーネントを複製する ことです。Dell Compellent Storage Center は、各コンポーネントに冗長性を提供し、単 一障害点が生じないようにします。シングル冗長性で、いずれか 1 つのリソースに不 具合が発生した場合にデータの損失を防ぎます。デュアル冗長性で、いずれか 2 つの リソースに不具合が発生した場合にデータの損失を防ぎます。 RAID(Redundant Array of Independent Disks) 個々のディスクの冗長アレイ。データの冗長性を提供する方法です。一般的に実装 される RAID には、RAID 0、RAID 1、RAID 5、RAID 10 および RAID 50 があります。ミラ ーリング、ストライピングを参照してください。 リモートインスタン トリプレイ リプレイがリモートの Dell Compellent Storage Center にレプリケーションされる、Dell Compellent Storage Center ソリューションの機能。ローカルおよびリモートの Dell Compellent Storage Centers はアクティブ / アクティブで、それぞれ異なる間隔で同期ま たは非同期での双方向レプリケーションが可能です。 Dell Compellent Storage Center のレプリケーションには、レプリケーションライセンスのある Enterprise Manager ソ フトウェアアプリケーションが必要です。リプレイ、リモートシステム、レプリケ ーションを参照してください。 リモートセットアッ プウィザード(RSW) Windows 向けホスト統合ツールをインストールした後に Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズ アレイの設定を可能にする、グラフィカルユーザーインタフェース(GUI)。 リモートシステム Dell Compellent Storage Center で、ローカルの Dell Compellent Storage Center にあるレプ リケーションデータをオリジナルボリュームから受信するよう設定された、独立し た SAN。 Dell Compellent Storage Center のレプリケーションには、レプリケーションラ 13イセンスのある Enterprise Manager ソフトウェアアプリケーションが必要です。レプ リケーションを参照してください。  リプレイ Dell Compellent Storage Center で、コピーが開始した時点のデータイメージを含む、完 全に使用可能なデータのポイントインタイムコピー(PITC)。コピーはローカルに保 存することも、リモートの Dell Compellent Storage Center に保存することもできま す。スナップショット、Data Instant Replay、リモートインスタントリプレイを参照し てください。 リプレイプロファイ ル Dell Compellent Storage Center で、リプレイのポイントインタイムコピーを取得する日 時と方法、および保存期間を決定する規則一式。リプレイを参照してください。 リプレイ領域 Dell Compellent Storage Center で、自動で予約されリプレイに使用される容量。アクテ ィブ領域、実質領域を参照してください。 レプリケーション Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズボリュームのポイントインタイムの複製。オリジナルボ リュームとそのレプリカは別々の Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズのグループ(レプリケー ションパートナー)にあり、災害耐性を実現するために地理的に離れている場合があ ります。 レプリカコレクショ ン Dell EqualLogic Group Manager で、ボリュームコレクションの各レプリケーションから 得られたレプリカのセット。 レプリカコレクショ ンセット Dell EqualLogic Group Manager で、ボリュームコレクションのためのレプリカコレクシ ョンのセット。 レプリカ予約 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager で、特定のボリュームのレプリカセットのために確保し ておく、複製パートナー上で委任された容量の部分。レプリカ予約はプライマリグ ループ上のボリュームに設定しますが、実際のレプリカ予約はセカンダリグループ上 にあります。 レプリカセット Dell EqualLogic Group Manager のボリューム、テンプレートボリューム、またはクロー ンボリュームの完全なレプリカのセット。 レプリケーション対 象システム レプリケーションデータを 1 つまたは複数のローカルボリュームからリモートの Storage Center へ送信するよう設定された、Dell Compellent Storage Center。レプリケー ション、リモートシステム、リモートインスタントリプレイを参照してください。  レプリケーション ボリュームデータ(デルタのみ)をプライマリ(ローカル)SAN からセカンダリ(リ モート)SAN にコピーする処理。必要に応じてデータをいずれかの SAN から回復で きます。 SAN 同士の距離は無制限です。 レプリケーションパ ートナー 別のパートナーとの間でレプリカの送受信を行うよう設定された Dell EqualLogic Group Manager のグループ。 RSW リモートセットアップウィザードを参照してください。 実行可能ペルソナ Dell AIM において、起動後、ホストへの割り当てを待機しているネットワーク起動さ れたペルソナ。 SAN ストレージエリアネットワークを参照してください。 SAN HeadQuarters (SAN HQ) 単一のグラフィカルインタフェースからの Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズの複数のグル ープの監視を実現します。パフォーマンスデータおよびその他重要なグループ情報 を収集し、フォーマットします。 SCN システム制御ネットワークを参照してください。 SCN サービス コントローラサービスの仮想 IP アドレス。Dell AIM 環境内でペルソナおよび VMRack がアクティブコントローラと通信するために使用します。 14SCSI Small Computer System Interface を参照してください。 SDK ソフトウェア開発キットを参照してください。 セカンダリコントロ ールモジュール Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 環境内で、セカンダリコントロールモジュールはアクテ ィブコントロールモジュールからのキャッシュデータをミラーリングします。アク ティブコントロールモジュールが動作を停止した場合、セカンダリコントロールモジ ュールがネットワーク動作を引き継ぎます。アクティブコントロールモジュールを 参照してください。 セカンダリグループ Dell EqualLogic Group Manager のレプリケーション設定で、ソースボリュームからレプ リカを受信するグループ。プライマリグループを参照してください。 サーバークラスタ 単一のシステムとして動作する、独立したサーバーのグループ。個々のコンピュータ ーに不具合が発生した場合に、サービスを継続的に提供します。 サービスタグ 弊社カスタマーサポートまたはテクニカルサポートにお問い合わせになる際に、コン ピュータを識別するためのラベル。 簡易メール転送プロ トコル(SMTP) インターネット上のホスト間でメッセージを送信するための、メッセージフォーマッ トおよび転送手順を定義します。 簡易ネットワーク管 理プロトコル (SNMP) ネットワーク管理者がリモートでワークステーションの監視および管理を行うため の、標準インタフェースです。 シミュレータ Dell AIM SDK のコンポーネントで、コントローラ、コンソール、物理および仮想ネッ トワークを含む実行中の Dell AIM 環境をエミュレートします。SDK を参照してくだ さい。 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) 小型コンピュータシステムインタフェース。標準ポートよりデータ転送レートが速 い I/O バスインタフェースです。 SMART Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology(システムの自己監視分析および報告 テクノロジ)。ハードディスクドライブからシステムの BIOS へのエラーおよび不具 合のレポート、さらに画面上へのエラーメッセージの表示を行います。 スマートコピー Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズグループ内のオブジェクトの、アプリケーション整合性の ある ASM/ME のポイントインタイムコピー。使用している Auto-Snapshot Manager の エディションによって、スマートコピーは、スナップショット、クローン、レプリカ のいずれかになります。 SMP 対称型マルチプロセッシングを参照してください。 SMTP 簡易メール転送プロトコル(SMTP)を参照してください。 スナップショット ボリュームのポイントインタイムコピー(PITC)です。リプレイを参照してくださ い。 スナップショットコ レクション ボリュームコレクション上のスナップショット動作で得られるスナップショット一 式。ボリュームコレクションを参照してください。 snmp 簡易ネットワーク管理プロトコル(SNMP)を参照してください。 SNMP トラップコレ クタ Dell AIM で、コントローラサービスの仮想 IP アドレス。管理対象スイッチおよびその 他デバイスで、SNMP トラップをアクティブコントローラに送信するために使用しま す。 15ソフトウェア開発キ ット(SDK) 特定のソフトウェアパッケージ、ソフトウェアフレームワーク、ハードウェアプラッ トフォーム、コンピューターシステム、ビデオゲームコンソール、オペレーティング システムまたは同様のプラットフォーム向けのアプリケーション作成に使用する、開 発ツール一式。 容量リカバリ Windows では使用中とレポートされるものの実際には空で、Dell Compellent Storage Center で使用可能な容量を回復するユーティリティ。 スペアディスク SAN 内の、専用または未使用のドライブ。不具合の発生したドライブを自動的に引き 継ぎます。 ストレージエリアネ ットワーク(SAN) ストレージエリアネットワーク(SAN)は、ブロックストレージプロトコルを使用し てパフォーマンスと可用性の高いストレージサブシステムへのアクセスを実現する、 専用ネットワークです。SAN は、ホストサーバー内のホストバスアダプタ(HBA)、 ストレージトラフィックのルーティングに関係するスイッチ、およびディスクストレ ージサブシステム等の特定デバイスで構成されます。SAN の主な特徴は、基本的にス トレージサブシステムを複数のホストで同時に使用可能な点で、拡張性と柔軟性を実 現しています。NAS と比較してください。 ストレージクラスタ 信頼性、可用性、サービス性、パフォーマンスを(ロードバランシングにより)改善 するため相互接続された、Dell Compellent Storage Center の複数の SAN コントローラ。 Storage Center はアクティブ / アクティブ構成を使用して、コントローラの自動フェー ルオーバーを提供します。各コントローラに、完全ミラーリングされバッテリでバ ックアップされたキャッシュを搭載して、再起動時のデータ信頼性を確保し、1 台の コントローラに不具合が発生した場合のコントローラ間でのボリュームの移行を可 能にします。 ストレージクラスタ リング アクティブ / アクティブ構成された複数コントローラを経由して、コントローラの自 動フェールオーバーを提供する、Dell Compellent Storage Center の機能。完全ミラーリ ングされバッテリでバックアップされたキャッシュを搭載して、コントローラに不具 合が発生した場合の、フォールトトレランスおよび自動再起動 / リカバリが可能で す。 ストレージプール プールを参照してください。 ストレージプロファ イル データを保存するドライブの種類(層)および各層で使用する RAID レベルを定義す る、Dell Compellent Storage Center のルール一式。 ストレージタイプ 冗長性オプションやブロックサイズをはじめとする、ストレージプールの容量の割り 当ておよび保護方法を制御する、Dell Compellent Storage Center の属性一式。 ストライピング ディスクストライピングは、アレイ内の 3 つ以上のディスクにデータを書き込みます が、各ディスクの容量の一部しか使用しません。ストライプでは、各ディスクで等 しい容量を使用します。仮想ディスクは、1 つのアレイ内の同じディスクのセットか ら複数のストライプを使用することができます。ミラーリング、RAID も参照してく ださい。 対称型マルチプロセ ッシング(SMP) 高帯域幅のリンクを介して複数のプロセッサを接続し、各プロセッサが同等な立場 で I/O 処理を行うようにオペレーティングシステムによって管理する技法です。 同期 同期レプリケーションを参照してください。 同期レプリケーショ ン 別々の物理ハードウェア内に保存された異なる 2 つのボリュームに対して、同じデー タをアトミックに書き込んだ後、アプリケーションが I/O 完了メッセージを受信する 機能。完了、失敗にかかわらず両方の書き込みが行なわれ、両方のボリュームは常に 完全に同期されます。ただし、この機能ではアプリケーションの書き込み遅延が長く なります。同期を参照してください。 16システム制御ネット ワーク(SCN) Dell AIM でコントローラ、ペルソナ、VMRack 間での通信に使用されるプライベート ネットワーク。このネットワークは、コントローラによるサーバーの検出および、 サーバー上のペルソナと VMRack の起動にも使用されます。 セットアップユーテ ィリティ BIOS ベースのプログラム。システムのハードウェア設定のほか、パスワード保護な どの機能を設定することによりシステム動作のカスタマイズを行うことができま す。セットアップユーティリティは NVRAM に保存されているため、設定内容は変更 されるまで有効です。 Systems Deployment Appliance Dell KACE アプライアンスベースの、IT 担当者向け導入管理ソリューション。ディス クイメージ作成、ユーザー状態移行、リモートサイト管理、システム修復およびリカ バリのほか、コンピューターのインベントリスキャンとアセスメントを行うツールを 提供します。さらに、コンピューターインベントリスキャンおよびアセスメントとい った導入前および導入後の設定タスクを自動化します。また、ディスク、BIOS およ び RAID の設定、ソフトウェア配布、設定管理も自動化します。 システム管理アプラ イアンス IT 担当者向けの、Dell KACE アプライアンスベースのシステム管理ソリューション。 インベントリ管理、ソフトウェア配布、レポート、パッチ管理、資産管理、スクリプ ト、サービスデスクサポートといったタスクを、ウェブベースのインタフェースで簡 素化します。 テンプレート Dell AIM で、他のペルソナを作成するためのクローニングが可能な、非アクティブな ペルソナ。ただし、テンプレートへの変更を防止するため、ユーザーが実行すること はできません。 テンプレートボリュ ーム シンクローンを作成する読み取り専用ボリューム。 シンクローン テンプレートボリュームと容量を共有するボリューム。シンクローンによって、大 量の共有データを持つ複数ボリュームを使用した設定向けに、ストレージ容量の効率 的な使用が可能になります。 シンプロビジョニン グ SAN 内の使用可能な容量をオーバープロビジョン(またはオーバーサブスクライブ) する機能。シンプロビジョニングを使用するストレージオブジェクト(ボリューム 等)は、見込み最大サイズをアプリケーションに対してレポートしますが、実際に使 用する容量はこれを大幅に下回る場合があります。シンプロビジョニングによって、 組織全体のストレージ支出を低減し、可用性を向上して、より高いパフォーマンスを 達成できます。 階層化ストレージ すぐに必要なデータを高価で高速なメディアに保存し、ほとんど使用しないデータを より廉価で低速なメディアに保存する、ストレージの最適化ストラテジです。 管理外容量 Dell EqualLogic PS シリーズアレイで、プライマリグループからはアクセスできなくな っているセカンダリグループ上の委任済み容量。 アップリンクポート 別のハブまたはスイッチに接続する際に使用するネットワークハブまたはスイッチ 上のポート。クロスオーバーケーブルを必要としません。 空にする Dell EqualLogic Group Manager で、メンバーがまだオンライン中にグループから削除す ること。 ビューボリューム データのリカバリを主な目的として以前のリプレイから作成された、Dell Compellent Storage Center の読み取り専用ボリューム。リプレイを参照してください。 仮想ポートまたは仮 想ポートモード Dell Compellent Storage Center で、仮想ポートは予約済みポートを不要にします。仮想 ポートモードでの動作時、すべてのフロントエンドポートは I/O を受け取り、フォー ルトドメインの一部を構成することができます。仮想ポートの有効化の詳細につい ては、『Dell Compellent Storage Center System Setup Guide』を参照してください。 17仮想ワールドワイド ポート名(vWWPM) SAN 起動のペルソナを作成するために Dell AIM で使用される、仮想ワールドワイドポ ート名。 仮想化 ソフトウェアを使用して、単一のコンピュータまたはストレージデバイスのリソース を複数環境で共有する機能。単一の物理システムまたはデバイスが、ユーザー側に は複数のオペレーティングシステムをホスト可能な複数の仮想システムに見える場 合があります。 VMRack エージェントソフトウェアと Red Hat Xen、VMware ESX、Microsoft Hyper-V のいずれか を組み合わせて実行している、サーバー上の仮想マシン(VM)のラック。 ボリューム 1 つまたは複数のストレージデバイスにストライピングされたストレージのディスク リートユニット。 ボリュームコレクシ ョン 各種動作を同時に実行する目的でグループ化された多数のボリューム。スナップシ ョットコレクション、レプリカコレクションを参照してください。 ボリューム予約 空きプール容量からボリュームに割り当てられた容量。シンプロビジョニングなし で、ボリューム予約はレポートされたサイズと同じです。 ボリュームタイプ Dell Compellent Storage Center で、ボリュームタイプは、動的、リプレイ有効、レプリ ケーション、のいずれかです。ボリュームは、そのボリュームで 1 つ以上のリプレイ が取得されるまで、動的です。ボリュームからリプレイが取得されると、リプレイ有 効になります。レプリケーションボリュームは、別の Dell Compellent Storage Center シ ステムにレプリケーションされたボリュームです。 vRack Dell AIM で、仮想スイッチ(vRack スイッチ)に接続されたホストの論理グループ。 vRack スイッチ Dell AIM で、vRack 内でホストを接続する仮想スイッチ。 vWWPN 仮想ワールドワイドポート名(vWWPM)を参照してください。 18Dell 용어집 – 버전 2 용어집용어집 ACPI 고급구성및전원인터페이스(Advanced Configuration and Power Interface)를참조 하십시오. 활성 제어 모듈 이중제어모듈배열의 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열의경우네트워크의 I/O를적 극적으로서비스하는제어모드입니다. 만일작동을멈추면장애조치로보조제 어모드가작동합니다. 보조제어모드를참조하십시오. 활성 컨트롤러 Dell AIM 환경을적극적으로관리하는 Dell AIM 컨트롤러입니다. 활성 공간 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서 Replay를제외하고볼륨에의해사용되는공간 입니다여기에는 RAID 오버헤드가포함되지않습니다. Replay 를참조하십시오. 실제 공간 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서활성공간에볼륨의 Replay 공간을더한공간입 니다. 활성공간(Active space), Replay 공간을참조하십시오. 고급 구성 및 전원 인터페 이스(Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) 운영체제가구성및전원을관리할수있도록하는표준인터페이스입니다. 에이전트 Dell AIM 환경(Red Hat Xen 및 Microsoft Hyper-V 그리고페르소나)에서컨트롤러가 요소를관리하고네트워킹속성을구성하는데사용하는요소에설치된선택적소 프트웨어입니다. 에이전트 없는 페르소나 Dell AIM 에이전트가설치되어있지않은 Dell AIM 페르소나입니다. 주변 온도 시스템이위치한환경또는실내온도입니다. 배열 멤버 PS 시리즈그룹에구성된 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열입니다. 그룹에는멤버가 여러개있을수있습니다. 배열 일련 번호 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열환경에서배열의하드웨어에인코딩된고유한 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열식별문자열입니다. 서비스태그를참조하십시오. ASM/ME Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition 을참조하십시오. ASM/VE Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition을참조하십시오. 자산 관리 어플라이언스 (Asset Management Appliance) 소프트웨어및라이센스준수를추적하는 IT 전문가를위한 Dell KACE 장치기반자 산관리솔루션입니다. 웹기반대시보드를통해인벤토리, 소프트웨어자산, 버전, 업그레이드및컴퓨터의관리를자동화합니다. 자산 태그 시스템에할당된개별코드로대개관리자가보안이나추적목적으로사용합니다. 할당된 디스크 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서관리형으로만들고볼륨과 Replay를저장하는 데사용하기위해디스크폴더에할당된물리적스토리지매체입니다. 디스크폴 더, 스토리지풀을참조하십시오. 할당 모드 페르소나와 VMRack이호스트에서 HBA의가용성을기반으로호스트에할당되는 방법을제어하는메커니즘입니다. HBA를참조하십시오. 비동기/비동기 복제 로컬스토리지에데이터를쓴후에원격 SAN 에저장하기위해해당데이터를대 기시키는프로세스입니다. 쓰기가수행되기전에로컬 SAN이실패하면복제도실 패할수있습니다. 복제, 동기복제, Remote Instant Replay 를참조하십시오. 3자동 RAID 구성 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈그룹컨텍스트에서사용자가선택한 RAID 정책을배열에 구성하는내부프로세스입니다. ASM/ME(Auto-Snapshot Manager/Microsoft Edition) 스마트사본을관리할수있는 Microsoft Management Console 용스냅인콘솔어플 리케이션입니다. ASM/VE(Auto-Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition) 스마트사본을관리할수있도록 VMware 가상환경과작동하는웹기반어플리케 이션입니다. 사용 가능한 공간 모든드라이브에서사용가능한전체스토리지의크기입니다. 백 엔드 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서컨트롤러나스토리지클러스터(예: 중복되는 컨트롤러쌍)를로컬디스크인클로저에연결하는고립된전용네트워크입니다. 백 엔드 네트워크 Dell Compellent Storage Center 컨트롤러입니다. 기준 볼륨(Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈) 컴퓨터에장착되며 Windows 기반드라이브문자(예: G:) 또는장착지점을통해연 결할수있는볼륨입니다. 기준 볼륨(Dell EqualLogic Group Manager) 스냅샷이있는볼륨입니다. 스냅샷은기준볼륨에의존합니다. 기본볼륨이폐기 되면스냅샷이제거됩니다. BMC(Baseboard Management Controller) IPMI(Intelligent Platform Management Interface) 프로토콜을구현하는서버관리모 듈입니다. Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서이컨트롤러는 BMC 를사용하여서버의일부모 델을원격으로제어합니다. 블레이드 Dell AIM SDK의경우블레이드는호스트슈퍼클래스의요소입니다. Dell 모듈러 시스템의경우에는블레이드가인클로저에장착되는모듈식서버를말합니다. BMC Baseboard Management Controller 를참조하십시오. 부팅 가능한 매체 시스템이하드드라이브에서부팅되지않은경우시스템을시작하는데사용되는 CD, 디스켓또는 USB 메모리키입니다. 캐시 데이터를빨리검색하기위해데이터또는명령의사본을보관하는고속스토리지 영역입니다. CHA Compellent Host Adapter 를참조하십시오. CHAP(Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) 암호화된도전-응답메커니즘을사용하는네트워크로그인프로토콜, 즉 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol입니다. 볼륨에대한액세스와올바른계정이름 과암호를공급하는호스트에대한스냅샷을제한하는데사용됩니다 CHAP 는로 그인/관리자계정에도사용됩니다. 채널 Dell/AIM 환경에서스위치포트에할당하고최대 8 개의물리적 NIC 를사용하여페 르소나에연결할수있는 8개물리적연결중하나입니다. 트래픽에대해한두개 의채널만선호하도록네트워크를구성할수있는데, 이렇게하면선호하는채널 이실패할경우트래픽이다른채널로투명하게재전송됩니다. CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 을참조하십시오. 섀시 스위치 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서섀시의베이에있는이더넷스위치입니다. 섀시스위치는 컨트롤러에의해관리됩니다. 클라이언트 장치 통신 인 증서 EKM 컨텍스트에서클라이언트가서버와통신할수있게해주는특수화된암호화 키입니다. 클러스터 노드 서버클러스터의호스트또는스토리지클러스터의 SAN 과같은리소스클러스터 의물리적멤버입니다. 4컬렉션 ASM/ME 에서컬렉션은볼륨, 스냅샷또는어플리케이션구성요소같은스토리지 개체의관련그룹이며컬렉션마스터노드아래의 ASM 콘솔트리에서노드로표 현됩니다. Dell EqualLogic Group Manager에서볼륨및레플리카컬렉션과사용자 지정스냅샷컬렉션은볼륨보기아래의계층구조에나타납니다. CHA(Compellent Host Adapter) 각 Dell Compellent Storage Center 컨트롤러에장착된내부캐시카드/배터리입니 다. 쓰기캐시메모리는캐시카드로미러링됩니다. 이중컨트롤러 Dell Compellent Storage Center에서컨트롤러 1 캐시카드가컨트롤러 2의미러를보유하고, 컨트 롤러 2 캐시카드가컨트롤러 1 의미러를보유합니다. 단일컨트롤러 Dell Compellent Storage Center에서는캐시카드가단일컨트롤러의미러를보유합니 다. 구성 Dell AIM 환경의전체콘텐츠와구성을설명하는데이터베이스입니다. 절전 모드 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서남은여유공간이심각한임계값(보통 10%, 최 대 32GB)으로떨어지면도달하는데이터보존모드입니다. 절전모드에서 Dell Compellent Storage Center 는알림을생성하고새볼륨을생성하지못하도록막으 며여유공간을마련하기위해더빠른속도로 Replay 만료를시작합니다. 응급모 드를참조하십시오. 콘솔 Dell AIM 환경의요소를모니터링하고이와작업하기위해사용하는웹기반사용 자인터페이스입니다. Dell AIM 콘솔은 Dell AIM 컨트롤러에의해호스팅됩니다. 제어 모듈 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열에서물리적프로세서및인터페이스구성요소입니 다. 제어모듈에는플래시메모리로 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리지펌웨어가포함되어 있으며, 캐시메모리에서정렬된데이터의일시적인전원지속이제공됩니다. 여 러개의네트워크인터페이스와선택적인직렬포트가있습니다. 배열에는핫스 왑가능한이중중복컨트롤러 2개가포함될수있습니다. 활성제어모듈은 I/O를 지원하는반면보조제어모듈은해당캐시에있는데이터를미러링합니다. 제어판 전원단추및전원표시등과같은표시등과제어부가있는시스템의한부분입니 다. 컨트롤 포트 iSCSI 이니시에이터(서버)가스토리지요청을위해연결하는대상 iSCSI 포트입니 다. 가상포트모드를위해구성된 Dell Compellent Storage Center에서는 iSCSI 트래 픽을해당가상포트로리디렉션하기위해각 iSCSI 오류도메인에대해제어포트 가생성됩니다. 컨트롤러(Dell AIM) 물리적및가상하드웨어, 소프트웨어, 네트워크구성을관리하고 Dell AIM 콘솔을 호스팅하는소프트웨어입니다. 장애복구형컨트롤러쌍의컨텍스트에서각컨트 롤러는전용서버에서실행되지만공유된파일시스템에서구성데이터베이스와 기타키파일을공유합니다. 컨트롤러(Dell Compellent) 디스크집계(RAID), I/O 라우팅, 오류감지및데이터복구를제공합니다. 전체 Dell Compellent Storage Center 하위시스템에지능적인기능을제공합니다. 모든 Storage Center 시스템에최소하나씩포함되어있습니다. 시스템의성능과가용성 을개선하기위한수정조치를제안합니다. 컨트롤러 서비스 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서컨트롤러가 SCN(System Control Network), 관리형스위치, 콘 솔및 CLI 등과통신을위해사용하는가상 IP 주소입니다. 기본적으로활성컨트롤 러에있는단일가상 IP 주소이지만 SCN 서비스와 SNMP Trap Collector 같은서비스 에대해고유한주소를지정할수있습니다. 5Copilot 서비스 Dell Compellent Storage Center 내에서시스템을사전에모니터링하고시스템의성 능및가용성을향상시키기위한수정조치를제안하는집중화된지원, 제품교육 및판매리소스의조합입니다. 복사-미러링-마이그레이 션 볼륨을다른디스크유형및 RAID 레벨간에마이그레이션할수있는 Dell Compellent Storage Center 기능입니다. 자격 증명 저장소 EKM 컨텍스트에서세션전체의자격증명정보를보관하는저장소입니다. 자격증 명정보는사용자이름, 암호, 인증서같은보안데이터입니다. 암호화 개체 데이터를안전하게보호하는방법입니다. Data Collector 서버의배경에서실행되어서버에연결된모든 Storage Center 시스템의정보를수 집하는 Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager 구성요소입니다. Data Instant Replay 로컬 SAN 에서정의된간격으로공간효율적인볼륨의 PITC(Point-In-Time Copy)를 캡처하는 Dell Compellent Storage Center 기능으로, 볼륨을이전시점으로롤백할수 있는기능을제공합니다. Replay, 스냅샷을참조하십시오. Data Progression(데이터 진행률) I/O 활동수준(수요)을기반으로데이터페이지를성능이보다높거나낮은장치로 자동마이그레이션하는 Dell Compellent Storage Center 기능입니다. 계층식스토리 지를참조하십시오. DDR 더블데이터속도를참조하십시오. 위임된 공간 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 컨텍스트에서파트너에대해수신된레플리카를저 장하기위해따로설정된공간입니다. Dell EKM(Encryption Key Manager) Dell EKM(Encryption Key Manager)은 Dell 테이프자동화솔루션을위해암호화키를 관리하여 LTO 테이프카트리지에저장된데이터를보호합니다. DRAC(Dell Remote Access Controller) 대역외(OOB) 관리기능을제공하는인터페이스카드입니다. 컨트롤러에는고유한 프로세서, 메모리, 네트워크연결및시스템버스에대한액세스권한이있으며, 시 스템관리자가네트워크전체에서원격으로시스템을제어할수있게허용합니 다. 장치 드라이버 운영체제또는일부다른프로그램이주변장치와올바르게통신할수있도록하 는프로그램입니다. DHCP 동적호스트구성프로토콜을참조하십시오. 디지털 다목적 디스크 디지털다목적디스크또는디지털비디오디스크(DVD)입니다. 디스크 폴더 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서사용자가보고관리할수있는물리적스토리지 매체장치(디스크, SSD)입니다. 디스크폴더는볼륨스토리지공간이할당되는스 토리지풀을결정합니다. 디스크폴더를여러개의스토리지풀에연결할수있기 는하지만 Dell Compellent Storage Center 성능은모든디스크를같은폴더와스토리 지풀에할당할경우에극대화됩니다. 디스크 위치 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서해당인클로저안에서행-열표기법을따르는 디스크드라이브의슬롯위치입니다. 예를들어, 디스크위치 01-02 는맨위에서첫 번째행, 왼쪽에서두번째열에있는슬롯을나타냅니다. DNS 도메인이름시스템을참조하십시오. 도메인 이름 시스템(DNS) www.example.com 과같은인터넷도메인이름을 208.77.188.166 과같은 IP 주소로 변환하는방식입니다. 6휴면 페르소나(dormant Persona) AIM 환경의호스트에서현재실행중이지않은(또는실행을기다리는) 페르소나입 니다. 더블 데이터 속도(DDR) 한클럭주기의상승펄스및하강펄스모두에서데이터를전송하여데이터속도 를두배로늘릴수있는메모리모듈기술입니다. DRAC Dell 원격액세스컨트롤러를참조하십시오. DRAM 동적임의접근메모리를참조하십시오. 이중 중복 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서일반적으로 RAID 10 및/또는 RAID 6 을사용하여 임의의두드라이브를손실로부터보호하기위한스토리지프로파일옵션입니다. DVD 디지털다목적디스크를참조하십시오. 동적 호스트 구성 프로토 콜(DHCP) 클라이언트시스템에 IP 주소를자동으로할당하는방식입니다. 동적 임의 접근 메모리 (DRAM) 일반적으로시스템의 RAM은모두 DRAM 칩으로구성되어있습니다. EKM Dell Encryption Key Manager를참조하십시오. EKM 관리자 EKM 컨텍스트에서사용자와그룹을만들거나삭제할수있는슈퍼사용자입니다. EKM Encryption Manager(tklmadmin) EKM 컨텍스트에서키와장치를만들거나삭제하는일일사용자입니다. 응급 모드 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서여유공간이없기때문에시스템이더이상작 동할수없을때도달하는모드입니다. 응급모드에서는모든서버 I/O 가거부되고 모든볼륨이오프라인상태가되며, 충분한공간이마련되어응급모드에서나갈 수있을때까지온라인상태로되돌릴수없습니다절전모드를참조하십시오. 인클로저 복수의디스크에단일인터페이스, 전력, 냉각을제공하는물리적인클로저입니 다. 환경 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서 Dell AIM 컨트롤러가관리하는하드웨어, 소프트웨어및네 트워크구성의모음입니다. Eth0 이더넷포트 0 을참조하십시오. Eth1 이더넷포트 1 을참조하십시오. 이더넷 포트 0(Eth0) Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서 Eth0은관리전용의이더넷인터페이스입니다. 이더넷 포트 1(Eth1) Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서 Eth1은클러스터링이나원격복제를위해컨트 롤러사이의내부프로세스통신을전담하는이더넷인터페이스입니다. 외부 네트워크 Dell AIM 환경컨텍스트에서 Dell AIM 환경에속하지는않지만물리적및논리적으 로연결되어있는네트워크입니다. 외부 스위치 Dell AIM 환경컨텍스트에서 Dell AIM 환경에속하지는않지만물리적및논리적으 로연결되어있는스위치입니다. 패브릭 통합라우팅인프라역할을하는상호연결된스위치모음입니다. SAN 에서장치 사이에여러연결을허용하며새장치가드러나지않게진입하도록허용합니다. 최소하나의스위치가있는 FC(또는 iSCSI) 토폴로지가네트워크에있습니다. 고속 트랙 가장활성화된데이터를트랙의바깥쪽(고속) 디스크트랙에동적으로위치시키는 선택적인 Dell Compellent Storage Center 유틸리티입니다. 7FAT 파일할당테이블을참조하십시오. 오류 도메인 Dell Compellent Storage Center 환경에서오류도메인은장애조치집합을식별합니 다. 가상포트모드에서모든프런트엔드포트는하나의오류도메인에속할수있 습니다. 레거시모드에서는기본및예비포트가각각하나의오류도메인을만듭 니다. FC 광학채널을참조하십시오. FE 프런트엔드네트워크를참조하십시오. 광학 채널(FC) 서버를컨트롤러와백엔드디스크에연결하는데사용되는고속상호연결입니 다. FC 구성요소에는 HBA, 허브, 스위치및케이블배선이포함됩니다. FC 는또한 최고초당 10 기가비트의데이터전송속도를허용하는고속전양방직렬통신프 로토콜을말합니다. 파일 할당 테이블(FAT) 파일스토리지를구성하고추적하기위해 MS-DOS에서사용하는파일시스템구 조입니다. Microsoft Windows 운영체제는선택적으로 FAT 파일시스템구조를사 용할수있습니다. 파일 전송 프로토콜(FTP) 머신또는호스트사이의대용량데이터파일전송에사용되는어플리케이션레이 어프로토콜입니다. 프런트 엔드 네트워크(FE) Dell Compellent Storage Center SAN 데이터쓰기흐름(서버-스위치-컨트롤러-디스 크) 데이터쓰기를시작하는구성요소입니다. 일반적으로서버(또는스위치)는컨 트롤러의프런트엔드입니다. 그러나데이터를원격시스템으로복제하는 Storage Center 시스템은원격시스템의프런트엔드입니다. 백엔드를참조하십시오. FTP 파일전송프로토콜을참조하십시오. GB 기가바이트를참조하십시오. 기가바이트(GB) 1024 메가바이트또는 1,073,741,824 바이트입니다. 그러나하드드라이브용량을가 리킬때에이용어는보통 1,000,000,000 바이트로반올림됩니다. 그룹 PS 시리즈그룹을참조하십시오. HBA 호스트버스어댑터입니다. HIT/LE Linux 용 Host Integration Tools 를참조하십시오. HIT/ME Windows 용 Host Integration Tools 를참조하십시오. HIT/VM VMware 용 Host Integration Tools 를참조하십시오. 호스트 Dell AIM 환경에서호스트는물리적서버(랙장착또는블레이드) 또는가상머신일 수있습니다. Dell AIM SDK 에서블레이드서버, 랙장착서버및가상머신(VM)을 포함하는슈퍼클래스입니다. 호스트 어댑터 시스템버스와주변장치(일반적으로스토리지장치) 간의통신기능을제공하는 컨트롤러입니다. 호스트 버스 어댑터(HBA) 서버를 SAN(Storage Area Network)에연결하는장치또는일반적으로추가기능입 니다. 각 HBA는 SAN 에서해당 WWPN(World Wide Port Number)에의해고유하게 식별됩니다. 일반적인 HBA 유형에는광학채널과 iSCSI가포함됩니다. Linux용 Host Integration Tools(HIT/LE) ESX 시스템과 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈스토리지배열을통합하는도구집합입니 다. Auto Snapshot Manager/VMware Edition(ASM/VE), EqualLogic Datastore Manager 및 EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment Utility를포함합니다. 8Windows 용 Host Integration Tools(HIT/ME) 배열을구성하고관리할수있는어플리케이션집합입니다. ASM/ME, DSM(다중경 로 I/O Device Specific Module) 및 RSW(원격설정마법사)를포함합니다. VMware용 Host Integration Tools(HIT/VM) Linux 시스템을 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈스토리지배열과통합하는도구집합입 니다. 원격설정마법사명령행인터페이스(RSWCLI), EqualLogic Host Performance and Configuration Tuning Suite(eqltune) 및 EqualLogic Log Gathering Facility(eqllog)를 포함합니다. 핫 스페어 디스크 Dell Compellent Storage Center 환경에서핫스페어디스크는백업디스크입니다. 활 성배열이실패할경우컨트롤러는핫스페어를활성배열의일부로만들고신속 하게데이터를다시구축합니다. 핫스페어가사용자의간섭없이활성디스크가 되기는하지만실패한드라이브를가능한빨리교체해야만새핫스페어로배열이 다시보호됩니다. 핫스페어는여러개의디스크인클로저를스팬할수있습니다. Storage Center 핫스페어에의용량은교체되는데이터드라이브와다릅니다. 핫 플러그 시스템의전원이켜져서실행중일때일반적으로하드드라이브또는내부냉각 팬등의장치를호스트시스템에설치또는삽입하는기능입니다. 핫 스왑 핫플러그를참조하십시오. I/O 입/출력입니다. 키보드는입력장치이고모니터는출력장치입니다. 일반적으로 I/ O 기능은컴퓨팅동작과구분될수있습니다. ID Dell AIM 환경에서요소가환경에추가되었을때할당되는요소의고유식별자입 니다. iDRAC 통합 Dell 원격액세스컨트롤러를참조하십시오. IKEv2-SCSI 인증서생성에사용되는프로토콜입니다. 이미지 Dell AIM 에서컨트롤러가특정유형의호스트에이미지를부팅하는데사용하는 정보와함께페르소나나 VMRack이부팅되는디스크나스토리지배열에저장되 는실제비트입니다. 동일한페르소나를물리적서버나가상머신에서부팅할수 있도록두개이상의이미지로페르소나또는 VMRack을구성할수있습니다. infiniBand InfiniBand 는프로세서와고속주변장치사이의연결을위한지점간양방향직렬 링크를제공합니다. Instant Replay Data Instant Replay를참조하십시오. 통합 Dell 원격 액세스 컨 트롤러(iDRAC) 인터넷 SCSI 프로토콜을사용하는원격액세스컨트롤러입니다. IPMI(Intelligent Platform Management Interface) 일부서버에서관리모듈에의해구현되는프로토콜로, 원격으로서버를제어하는 데사용됩니다. Dell 서버의블레이드는 iPMI를구현합니다. 상호 연결 스위치 Dell AIM 환경의스위치로, 컨트롤러에의해관리되며섀시, vRack, 기타상호연결 스위치및외부스위치같은요소를상호연결하는데사용합니다. 인터넷 SCSI(iSCSI) 인터넷 SCSI(SCSI 참조)입니다. IP 네트워크에서클라이언트서버(iSCSI 이니시에 이터)와네트워크스토리지장치(iSCSI 대상) 간의통신을위한표준 SCSI 명령을 압축하는프로토콜입니다. IPMI 인텔리전트플랫폼관리인터페이스를참조하십시오. iSCSI 인터넷 SCSI 를참조하십시오. KMIP(Key Management Interoperability Protocol) 엔터프라이즈키관리시스템과암호화시스템간의통신을위해설정된표준입니 다. 9Key Serving Port EKM 에서통신하기위해운영체제에서사용되는포트입니다. 키 그룹 EKM 에서특정부서, 영역또는하드웨어유형에할당되는일련의키입니다. 키 EKM 의데이터를보호하는데사용되는암호화된인증서입니다. 키 스토어 / 키 그룹 /마스 터 키 스토어 EKM 에서암호화된키그룹입니다. KMIP KMIP(Key Management Interoperability Protocol)를참조하십시오. JDBC(Java Database Connectivity) 클라이언트가데이터베이스에서데이터에액세스하고쿼리및업데이트하는방 법을정의하는 Java 프로그래밍언어의 API입니다. JDBC Java Database Connectivity를참조하십시오. 리더 컨트롤러 이중컨트롤러 Dell Compellent Storage Center 의기본컨트롤러입니다. 보통리더 및피어컨트롤러는스토리지 I/O 로드를공유하며, 근본적으로처리량이두배가 되지만리더컨트롤러만외부관리기능을수행합니다. 컨트롤러하나가실패하면 나머지컨트롤러가리더가되거나리더로남아있으며두컨트롤러의역할을모두 수행합니다. 피어컨트롤러를참조하십시오. 레거시 모드 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서오류도메인은기본및예비프런트엔드포트 의쌍을전담하도록구성되며, 단일오류지점에대한스토리지트래픽을보호하 기위한메커니즘으로중복장비를통해연결됩니다. 오류도메인, 가상포트또는 가상포트모드를참조하십시오. LTO(Linear Tape-Open) 개방형표준테이프형식입니다. LUN(Logical Unit Unmber) 논리적단위는스토리지디스크나일련의디스크에서개념적부분(하위단위)입니 다. 각논리적단위에는 LUN(Logical Unit Unmber)이라는주소가있으며, 이주소를 통해논리적단위를고유하게식별할수있습니다. LTO Linear Tape-Open을참조하십시오. LTO Key Group Rollover EKM 에서기본키그룹이대폭줄어들었을때사용하도록할당되는일련의키입니 다. LUN Logical Unit Number 를참조하십시오. MAC 주소 MAC(Media Access Control) 주소를참조하십시오. 관리형 디스크 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서스토리지풀과연결하기위해디스크폴더에할 당된스토리지매체장치(디스크, SSD)입니다. 스토리지풀, 디스크폴더를참조하 십시오. 관리 시스템 관리시스템은 Dell OpenManage Server Administrator 를사용하여모니터링및관리 되는시스템입니다. 관리 IP 주소 인텔리전트 IP 활성장치를모니터링하거나관리하기위해이장치에연결하는데 사용하는주소입니다. 주소는관리어플리케이션에의해독점사용되도록관리및 서비스어플리케이션에서공유되도록설정할수있습니다. 관리 네트워크 iSCSI 트래픽(볼륨 I/O)을관리트래픽(GUI 및 CLI 세션, 기타그룹관리통신및내부 그룹작업)에서분리하는선택적관리네트워크입니다. 관리 스테이션 중앙위치에서하나이상의관리되는시스템을원격으로관리하는데사용되는시 스템입니다. 10수동 Replay 사용자가수동으로볼륨의특정시점을생성할수있는 Dell Compellent Storage Center 기능입니다. 수동 전송 복제 네트워크를통하는대신전송가능한매체를통해수행되는복제입니다. 복제파 트너사이의네트워크링크가너무느리거나크기가큰데이터를전송하는데적 합하지않을경우에사용됩니다. 수동 전송 유틸리티 네트워크대신전송가능한미디를사용하여볼륨복제를수행하는 Dell EqualLogic 의독립실행형유틸리티입니다. 유틸리티에는그래픽및명령행사용자인터페이 스가모두있습니다. MAC(매체 접근 제어) 주소 네트워크상에서시스템의고유하드웨어번호입니다. 볼륨 마이그레이션 볼륨사이에서데이터를이동하기위한 Dell Compellent Storage Center 명령입니다. 마이그레이션 EKM 컨텍스트에서 Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0 설치중(이후아님)에키스토어 를기존키스토어로결합하는것입니다. 볼륨 미러링 로컬볼륨을원격 Dell Compellent Storage Center 명령으로복제하고미러링이수동 으로해제될때까지로컬및원격볼륨사이의업데이트를유지하기위한 Dell Compellent Storage Center 명령입니다. 미러링 물리적드라이브집합이데이터를저장하고하나이상의추가드라이브집합이데 이터를복사하는데이터중복유형입니다. 미러링기능은소프트웨어에의해제공 됩니다. 스트라이핑, RAID를참조하십시오. NAS 네트워크연결스토리지를참조하십시오. 네트워크 연결 페르소나및 VMRack의필수네트워크연결을정의하는개체입니다. 네트워크연 결은네트워크에요소를추가하여생성됩니다(예: 네트워크에페르소나를추가할 경우). 네트워크 연결 스토리지 (NAS) NAS 는네트워크에서공유된스토리지를구현하는데사용되는개념중하나입니 다. NAS 시스템에는고유한운영체제와특정스토리지요구를충족하도록최적화 된통합하드웨어와소프트웨어가있습니다. NTP NTP(Network Time Protocol)는패킷변경된변수지연기간데이터네트워크전반에 컴퓨터시계를동기화하기위한프로토콜입니다. 사용 초과된 공간 씬프로비저닝을지원하는 SAN 에서스토리지공간의크기는실제존재하는것이 아닌사용할수있는공간의크기로구성됩니다(예: 구성된공간 - 사용가능한공 간). 패리티 스트라이프 RAID 배열에서패리티데이터가포함되어있는스트라이프핑된하드드라이브입 니다. 파티션 fdisk 명령을사용하여생성되는하드드라이브의물리적섹션입니다. 이후 format 명령을사용하여파티션을여러개의논리적드라이브로나눌수있습니다. 수동 컨트롤러 핫대기역할을하는 Dell AIM 컨트롤러로, 활성컨트롤러가실패할경우환경관리 를담당할수있습니다. 피어 컨트롤러 이중컨트롤러 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서피어컨트롤러는리더컨트롤러 와 I/O 로드를공유하지만외부관리기능을수행하지않습니다. 리더컨트롤러가 실패하면피어컨트롤러가두컨트롤러모두에서 I/O 및관리역할을수행합니 다. 리더컨트롤러를참조하십시오. 11페르소나(persona) 디스크에서캡처한서버환경으로, Dell AIM 환경에서어플리케이션을실행하는 데필요한운영체제, 선택적 Dell AIM 에이전트소프트웨어, 네트워크및기타설 정입니다. 풀 볼륨에서사용할수있도록제공되는 SAN의스토리지공간입니다. Dell Compellent Enterprise 스토리지관리자및 Dell Compellent Storage Center에서는 SAN의총공 간과같습니다. Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열에서는특정풀의멤버에대한총공 간과같습니다. 풀 관리자 특정풀에서만또는그룹의풀집합에서개체를관리할수있는권한이있는 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈그룹의계정입니다. 그룹관리자와비교해보십시오. 기본 그룹 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 환경내에서복제파트너십의원래볼륨을포함하는 그룹입니다. 보조그룹을참조하십시오. 기본 볼륨 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 환경내에서복제파트너에대한복제를위해구성 된볼륨입니다. PS 시리즈 배열 일반적으로 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈그룹으로구성되는단일 Dell EqualLogic iSCSI 스토리지단위입니다. 여러개의 PS 시리즈배열을더큰 PS 시리즈그룹으로 결합하고이를하나의 iSCSI SAN 으로관리할수있습니다. PS 시리즈 그룹 하나이상의 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈스토리지배열으로구성된 iSCSI 스토리지 엔티티로, 단일 IP 주소를통해액세스하고 SAN(Storage Area Network)으로관리할 수있습니다. 공용 서비스 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서콘솔이나활성컨트롤러의 CLI에연결하는데사용하는컨 트롤러서비스가상 IP 주소입니다. RAC 원격액세스컨트롤러입니다. RAID 독립디스크중복배열을참조하십시오. RAID 0 데이터가사용가능한디스크전체에서스트라이핑되어성능이향상됩니다. RAID 0 은데이터중복을제공하지않습니다. RAID 10 데이터가사용가능한디스크드라이브와미러링된드라이브전체에서스트라이 핑되어데이터가용성과성능이향상됩니다. 볼륨에서모든데이터의전체사본을 최소하나유지합니다. RAID 10 은최적의읽기/쓰기성능을제공하며다중오류에 대한극복가능성이향상되며데이터를빠른속도로복원할수있습니다. RAID 5 수학적으로파생된회전패리티스트라이프를사용하여데이터의논리적사본을 유지합니다. 패리티스트라이프는데이터스트라이프에서파생됩니다. 이방법은 RAID 10 에비해중복정보에대한오버헤드를줄여주지만매번쓸때마다패리티 스트라이프계산으로인해 RAID 10 보다쓰기속도가느립니다. 읽기속도는 RAID 10 과비슷합니다. RAID 50 RAID 레벨 50 은 RAID 레벨 5 및 RAID 레벨 0 의조합입니다. RAID 50에는여러개의 드라이브에서패리티와디스크스트라이핑이모두포함됩니다. 복구 볼륨 데이터복구를목적으로생성된볼륨입니다. Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열에서 복구볼륨은인바운드레플리카집합을장애조치작업의일부로승격하여생성됩 니다. 또한복구템플릿볼륨과복구씬클론도생성할수있습니다. Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서뷰볼륨은 Replay에서생성됩니다. 레플리카, 뷰볼륨, Replay 를참조하십시오. 12중복성 기본리소스가실패할경우보조리소스가해당기능을맡도록하는정보의또는 하드웨어장비구성요소의중복입니다. Dell Compellent Storage Center 는단일오 류지점이없도록하기위해각구성요소에대해중복성을제공합니다. 단일중복 성은하나의리소스가실패할경우데이터손실을방지합니다. 이중중복성은두 개의리소스가실패할경우데이터손실을방지합니다. 독립 디스크 중복 배열 (RAID). 독립디스크의중복배열입니다. 데이터중복성을제공하는방법입니다. RAID 의 일반적인구현에는 RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 및 RAID 50 이포함됩니다. 미러 링, 스트라이핑을참조하십시오. Remote Instant Replay Replay 가원격 Dell Compellent Storage Center에복제되는 Dell Compellent Storage Center 솔루션기능입니다. 로컬및원격 Dell Compellent Storage Center 는활성상 태이며, 단방향복제가독립적인간격으로동기적또는비동기적으로발생할수 있습니다. Dell Compellent Storage Center 복제를위해서는복제라이센스가있는 Enterprise Manager 소프트웨어응용프로그램이필요합니다. Replay, 원격시스템, 복제를참조하십시오. 원격 설정 마법사(RSW) Host Integration Tools/Microsoft Edition 을설치한후에 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배 열을구성할수있는 GUI(그래픽사용자인터페이스)입니다. 원격 시스템 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서로컬 Dell Compellent Storage Center의원래볼 륨에서복제데이터를수신하도록구성된별도의 SAN입니다. Dell Compellent Storage Center 복제를위해서는복제라이센스가있는 Enterprise Manager 소프트 웨어응용프로그램이필요합니다. 복제를참조하십시오. Replay Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서사본이시작되는시점에표시되는상태의데이 터이미지가포함된사용가능한시점사본(PITC )입니다. 사본은로컬또는원격 Dell Compellent Storage Center에저장할수있습니다. 스냅샷, Data Instant Replay, Remote Instant Replay 를참조하십시오. Replay 프로파일 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서 Replay 시점사본을만드는시기와방법은물론 이사본이저장되는기간을결정하는규칙집합입니다. Replay를참조하십시오. Replay 공간 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서자동으로예약되는공간으로 Replay에사용됩 니다. 활성공간, 실제공간을참조하십시오. 레플리카(replica) Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈볼륨의시점표현입니다. 원래볼륨과해당레플리카는 장애방지를수월하게하기위해지리적으로떨어진곳에잠재적으로분리되는다 른 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈그룹(복제파트너)에위치합니다. 레플리카 컬렉션 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 에서볼륨컬렉션의각복제의결과로발생하는레 플리카의집합입니다. 레플리카 컬렉션 집합 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 에서볼륨컬렉션에대한레플리카컬렉션의집합입 니다. 레플리카 리저브(replica reserve) Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 에서특정볼륨에대해따로설정된복제파트너의 위임된공간입니다. 기본그룹의볼륨에대해레플리카리저브를구성해도실제 레플리카리저브는보조그룹에위치합니다. 레플리카 집합 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 에서볼륨, 템플릿볼륨또는씬클론볼륨에대한전 체레플리카집합입니다. 시스템 복제 하나이상의로컬볼륨에서원격 Storage Center 에복제데이터를보내도록구성된 Dell Compellent Storage Center입니다. 복제, 원격시스템, Remote Instant Replay 를 참조하십시오. 13복제 필요한경우 SAN에서데이터를복구할수있도록기본(로컬) SAN에서보조(원격) SAN 으로볼륨데이터(델타만)를복사하는프로세스입니다. SAN 사이의거리는 무제한으로설정할수있습니다. 복제 파트너 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 에서다른파트너로부터레플리카를주고받도록구 성된그룹입니다. RSW 원격설정마법사를참조하십시오. 실행 가능한 페르소나 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서시작되어호스트에할당될때까지대기중인네트워크부 팅페르소나입니다. SAN Storage Area Network 를참조하십시오. SAN HeadQuarters 하나의그래픽인터페이스에서여러개의 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈그룹을모니터 링할수있습니다. 성능데이터와기타중요그룹정보를수집하고포맷합니다. SCN System Control Network를참조하십시오. SCN 서비스 Dell AIM 환경에서페르소나및 VMRack 이활성컨트롤러와통신하는데사용하는 컨트롤러서비스가상 IP 주소입니다. SCSI 소형컴퓨터시스템인터페이스를참조하십시오. SDK 소프트웨어개발키트를참조하십시오. 보조 제어 모듈 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 환경안에서보조제어모듈은활성제어모듈에서 캐시데이터를미러링합니다. 활성제어모듈이작동을멈추면보조모듈이네트 워크작업을대신합니다. 활성제어모듈을참조하십시오. 보조 그룹 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 복제구성에서소스볼륨의레플리카를수신하는그 룹입니다. 기본그룹을참조하십시오. 서버 클러스터 개별컴퓨터오류발생시서비스가중단되는것을막기위해하나의시스템으로 함께작동하는독립서버그룹입니다. 서비스 태그 사용자가기술지원을위해 Dell 에연락할때시스템을식별하기위해사용되는시 스템레이블입니다. SMTP(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 인터넷의호스트사이에서메시지를보낼수있도록메시지형식과전달절차를 정의합니다. 단순 네트워크 관리 프로 토콜(Simple Network Management Protocol)의 약자입니다. 네트워크관리자가원격으로워크스테이션을모니터링하고관리할수있도록하 는표준인터페이스입니다. 시뮬레이터 컨트롤러, 콘솔, 물리적및가상네트워크를비롯하여실행중인 Dell AIM 환경을 에뮬레이션하는 Dell AIM SDK의구성요소입니다. SDK를참조하십시오. 소형 컴퓨터 시스템 인터 페이스(SCSI) 소형컴퓨터시스템인터페이스(Small Computer System Interface)의약자입니다. 표 준포트보다데이터전송속도가빠른 I/O 버스인터페이스입니다. SMART Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology의약자입니다. 하드드라이브에 서시스템 BIOS로오류및실패를보고한후화면에오류메시지를표시할수있습 니다. 14Smart 사본 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈그룹에서응용프로그램과일관적인개체의 ASM/ME 시 점사본입니다. Smart 사본은사용중인 Auto-Snapshot Manager 버전에따라스냅 샷, 클론또는레플리카유형중하나일수있습니다. SMP 대칭적다중처리를참조하십시오. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol을참조하십시오. 스냅샷 볼륨의시점사본(PITC)입니다. Replay 를참조하십시오. 스냅샷 컬렉션 볼륨컬렉션에서스냅샷작업으로인해발생하는스냅샷집합입니다. 볼륨컬렉션 을참조하십시오. SNMP 단순네트워크관리프로토콜(Simple Network Management Protocol)의약자입니 다. SNMP 트랩 컬렉터 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서관리형스위치와기타장치가 SNMP 트랩을활성컨트롤러 에보내는데사용하는컨트롤러서비스가상 IP 주소입니다. 소프트웨어 개발 키트 (SDK) 특정소프트웨어패키지, 소프트웨어프레임워크, 하드웨어플랫폼, 컴퓨터시스 템, 비디오게임콘솔, 운영체제또는유사플랫폼을위한응용프로그램을만드는 데사용되는개발도구집합입니다. 공간 복구 Windows 는사용중이라고보고하지만실제로는비어있는공간및 Storage Center 가사용할수있는공간을복구하는유틸리티입니다. 스페어 디스크 실패한드라이브를자동으로교체하는데사용되는 SAN 의지정또는미사용드라 이브입니다. SAN(Storage Area Network) SAN(Storage Area Network)은블록스토리지프로토콜을사용하여고성능, 고가용 성스토리지하위시스템에액세스할수있도록하는특수화된네트워크입니다. SAN은호스트서버의 HBA(호스트버스어댑터), 스토리지트래픽을라우팅하는 데도움을주는스위치, 디스크스토리지하위시스템등특정장치로구성됩니다. SAN의주요특징은일반적으로여러호스트가동시에스토리지하위시스템을사 용할수있어확장성과융통성이보장된다는것입니다. NAS와비교해보십시오. 스토리지 클러스터 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서안정성, 가용성, 서비스가능성및성능(로드밸 런싱을통해)을개선하기위한목적으로상호연결된여러개의 SAN 컨트롤러입니 다. 스토리지클러스터는활성구성을사용하여자동컨트롤러장애조치를제공 합니다. 각컨트롤러에서완전하게미러링되고배터리가지원되는캐시는재시작 시데이터안정성을보장하고, 단일컨트롤러오류발생시컨트롤러간에볼륨을 마이그레이션할수있도록해줍니다. 스토리지 클러스터링 활성구성에서여러컨트롤러를통해자동컨트롤러장애조치를제공하는 Dell Compellent Storage Center 기능입니다. 완전하게미러링되고배터리가지원되는캐 시는컨트롤러오류발생시내결함성과자동재시작/복구를제공합니다. 스토리지 풀 풀을참조하십시오. 스토리지 프로파일 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서데이터를저장하는드라이브유형(계층)과각 계층에서사용할 RAID 레벨을정의하는규칙집합입니다. 스토리지 유형 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서중복성옵션과블록크기를포함하여스토리지 풀의공간이할당되고보호되는방법을제어하는속성집합입니다. 스트라이핑 디스크스트라이핑은배열에서 3 개이상의디스크에데이터를쓰지만각디스크 에서공간의일부만사용합니다. "스트라이프"에서사용하는공간은사용되는각 15디스크에서동일합니다. 가상디스크는배열의같은디스크집합에서여러개의 스트라이프를사용할수있습니다. 미러링및 RAID를참조하십시오. SMP(대칭적 다중처리) 높은대역폭링크로연결되고운영체제에서관리하는프로세서가 2 개이상설치 된시스템입니다. 각프로세서는 I/O 장치에똑같이액세스할수있습니다. 동기화 동기화복제를참조하십시오. 동기화 복제 응용프로그램이 I/O 완료메시지를수신하기전에다른물리적하드웨어에저장된 별도의두볼륨에같은데이터를자동으로쓰는기능입니다. 두볼륨모두완료또 는실패를기록하므로언제나완벽하게동기화됩니다. 그러나이기능은어플리케 이션의쓰기지연율을증가시킵니다. 동기화를참조하십시오. SCN(System Control Network) 컨트롤러, 페르소나및 VMRack 사이의통신을위해 Dell AIM 이사용하는개인네 트워크입니다. 컨트롤러는또한이네트워크를사용하여서버를검색하고여기에 서페르소나와 VMRack을부팅합니다. 시스템 설정 프로그램 암호보호와같은기능을설정하여시스템의하드웨어구성및시스템의작동사 용자지정을허용하는 BIOS 기반프로그램입니다. 시스템설정프로그램은 NVRAM 에저장되므로변경되지않는한모든설정이효과를유지합니다. 시스템 배포 어플라이언 스 디스크이미징, 사용자상태마이그레이션, 원격사이트관리, 시스템수리및복구 는물론컴퓨터인벤토리검사및평가를위한도구를제공하는 IT 전문가를위한 Dell KACE 어플라이언스기반배포관리솔루션입니다. 또한컴퓨터인벤토리검사 및평가와같은사전및사후배포구성작업을자동화하고, 디스크, BIOS, 및 RAID 구성, 소프트웨어배포, 구성관리도자동화합니다. 시스템 관리 어플라이언 스 인벤토리관리, 소프트웨어배포, 보고, 패치관리, 자산관리, 스크립팅, 웹기반인 터페이스를통한서비스데스크지원과같은작업을능률화하는 IT 전문가를위한 Dell KACE 어플라이언스기반시스템관리솔루션입니다. 템플릿 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서다른페르소나를만들기위해복제할수있지만템플릿변 경을막기위해실행할수없는휴면페르소나입니다. 템플릿 볼륨 씬클론을생성하는읽기전용볼륨입니다. 씬 클론 템플릿볼륨과공간을공유하는볼륨입니다. 씬클론은많은양의공통데이터가 있는여러볼륨에서구성을위한스토리지공간을효율적으로사용할수있게합 니다. 씬 프로비저닝 SAN 에서사용할수있는공간을초과프로비저닝(또는초과서브스크립션)할수 있는기능입니다. 씬프로비저닝을사용하는스토리지개체(예: 볼륨)는잠재적인 최대크기를응용프로그램에보고하지만실제로이보다훨씬적은공간을사용할 수있습니다. 씬프로비저닝을사용하면조직에서전반적인스토리지비용을줄이 고가용성과성능을높일수있습니다. 계층식 스토리지 빠르게자주요구되는데이터가값비싸고빠른매체유형에저장되고, 거의필요 없는데이터가보다저렴하고느린매체유형에저장되는경우에사용되는스토리 지최적화전략입니다. 관리되지 않은 공간 Dell EqualLogic PS 시리즈배열에서기본그룹에서더이상액세스할수없는보조 그룹의위임된공간용량입니다. 업링크 포트 교차케이블없이기타허브나스위치에연결하는데사용되는네트워크허브나 스위치의포트입니다. 16vacate Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 에서멤버가온라인상태인동안에그룹에서멤버를 제거하는것입니다. 뷰 볼륨 Dell Compellent Storage Center 에서이전 Replay 로부터생성된읽기전용볼륨으로, 데이터복구가주요목적입니다. Replay 를참조하십시오. 가상 포트 또는 가상 포트 모드 Dell Compellent Storage Center 컨텍스트에서가상포트를사용하면리저브포트가 필요하지않습니다. 가상포트모드에서작동할경우모든프런트엔드포트가 I/O 를수락하고오류도메인하나의일부가될수있습니다. 가상포트를활성화하는 방법에대한자세한내용은 Dell Compellent Storage Center 시스템설치안내서를참 조하십시오. vWWPM(가상 World Wide 포트 이름) SAN 부팅페르소나를생성하기위해 Dell AIM 에서사용되는가상 World Wide 포트 이름입니다. 가상화 여러환경에걸쳐단일컴퓨터나스토리지장치의리소스를공유하기위해소프트 웨어를사용하는기능입니다. 사용자에게는하나의물리적시스템이나장치가여 러운영체제를호스팅할수있는여러개의가상시스템으로표시될수있습니다. VMRack 에이전트소프트웨어와 Red Hat Xen, VMware ESX 또는 Microsoft Hyper-V 의조합 을실행중인서버의가상머신(VM) 랙입니다. 볼륨 스토리지장치로스트라이핑되는별도의스토리지단위입니다. 볼륨 컬렉션 볼륨에서동시에작업을수행하기위해하나로그룹화된여러개의볼륨입니 다. 스냅샷컬렉션, 레플리카컬렉션을참조하십시오. 볼륨 리저브 여유풀공간에서볼륨에할당된공간입니다. 씬프로비저닝이없으면볼륨리저 브가보고된크기와같습니다. 볼륨 유형 Dell Compellent Storage Center 컨텍스트에서볼륨유형은동적, Replay 활성또는복 제가될수있습니다. 볼륨은최소하나의 Replay 를해당볼륨에서가져갈때까지 동적으로유지됩니다. 볼륨에서 Replay 를가져가면 Replay 활성상태가됩니다. 복 제볼륨은다른 Dell Compellent Storage Center 시스템으로복제되는볼륨입니다. vRack Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서가상스위치(vRack 스위치)에연결된호스트의논리적그룹 입니다. vRack 스위치 Dell AIM 컨텍스트에서 vRack의호스트에연결하는가상스위치입니다. vWWPN 가상 World Wide 포트이름을참조하십시오. 1718Dell Sözlük – Sürüm 2 SözlükSözlük ACPI Gelişmiş yapılandırma ve güç arayüzü bölümüne bakın. aktif kontrol modülü Çift kontrol modülü dizilerindeki Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi diziler için bir ağ üzerinde G/Ç'yi aktif olarak servis eden kontrol modülü. İşlevi durursa ikincil kontrol modülüne geçer. İkincil kontrol modülüne bakın. aktif Denetleyici Aktif olarak Dell AIM ortamını yöneten Dell AIM Denetleyici. aktif alan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, yeniden oynatmaların dışında kalan hacim tarafından kullanılan alan miktarı. Bu miktar RAID hizmetlerini içermez. Yeniden oynatmaya bakın. gerçek alan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, aktif alan artı bir hacim için yeniden oynatma alanıdır. Aktif alan, Yeniden oynatma alanına bakın. gelişmiş yapılandırma ve güç arayüzü İşletim sisteminin yapılandırma ve güç yönetimini yönlendirmesini sağlayan standart bir arayüz. aracı Dell AIM ortamında (Red Hat Xen ve Microsoft Hyper-V, plus personalara dayanan VMRack'ler), Denetleyicinin öğeleri yönetmek ve bunların ağ özelliklerini yapılandırmak için kullandığı öğeler üzerinde kurulu isteğe bağlı yazılım. aracısız persona Dell AIM aracısı kurulu olmayan Dell AIM persona. ortam sıcaklığı Sistemin bulunduğu bölüm ya da odanın sıcaklığı. dizi üyesi PS Serisi grubuna yapılandırılmış Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizisi. Grupların birden fazla üyesi olabilir. dizi seri numarası Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizi ortamında, dizi donanımında kodlanan benzersiz Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizi tanımlama dizesi. Servis etiketine bakın. ASM/ME Otomatik Anlık Görüntü Yöneticisi/Microsoft Edition'a bakın. ASM/VE Otomatik Anlık Görüntü Yöneticisi/VMware Edition'a bakın. Varlık Yönetimi Araçları IT profesyonelleri için yazılım ve lisans uyumluluğunu takip eden Dell KACE aracı tabanlı varlık yönetimi çözümü. Envanter, yazılım varlıkları, sürümleri, yükseltmeleri ve bilgisayarların web tabanlı bir göstergeden yönetilmelerini otomatik hale getirir. asset tag (varlık etiketi) Güvenlik ya da izleme amaçları için genellikle bir yönetici tarafından bir sisteme atanan bağımsız bir kod. Atanan Diskler Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, hacimler ve tekrar oynatmaları depolamak için yönetilmek ve kullanılmak amacıyla bir disk klasörüne atanan fiziksel depolama ortamı. Disk klasörü, Depolama Havuzuna bakın. atama modu Ana bilgisayarda HBA'ların olup olmamasına dayanarak personaların ve VMRack'lerin nasıl ana bilgisayarlara atandığının kontrol edilmesini sağlayan mekanizmadır. HBA'ya bakın. asenk/asenkron eşleme Veriyi yerel depolamaya yazıp ardından veriyi uzaktan bir SAN'da depolamak için kuyruğa alma işlemi. Yazma dağıtımından önce yerel SAN arızalanırsa eşleme de arızalanabilir. Eşleme, senkron eşleme, uzaktan anlık tekrar oynatmaya bakın. otomatik RAID yapılandırması Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi grubu kapsamında, kullanıcı tarafından seçilen RAID politikasını dizide yapılandıran dahili işlem. 3Otomatik Anlık Görüntü Yöneticisi/Microsoft Edition (ASM/ME) Akıllı Kopyalar'ı yönetmenizi sağlayan Microsoft Yönetim Konsolu için eklenti konsol uygulaması. Otomatik Anlık Görüntü Yöneticisi/VMware Edition (ASM/VE) Akıllı Kopyalar'ı yönetmenizi sağlayan VMware sanal ortamlarıyla birlikte çalışan web tabanlı bir uygulama. kullanılabilir alan Tüm sürücülerdeki kullanılabilir toplam depolama miktarı. arka uç Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, denetleyici veya depolama kümesini (örn. yedek denetleyici çiftleri) yerel disk kaslarına bağlayan ayrı ve bu işe adanmış bir ağdır. arka uç ağı Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi Denetleyicisinde denetleyici ve diskler arasındaki bağlantı. taban hacmi (Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi) Bilgisayara monte edilmiş ve Windows tarafından sürücü harfinden (örn G:) veya montaj noktasından erişilebilen hacim. taban hacmi (Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisi) Anlık görüntüleri olan hacim. Anlık görüntüler taban hacmine bağlıdır. Taban hacmi zarar görürse anlık görüntüler kaldırılır. Anakart Yönetim Denetleyicisi (BMC) IPMI (Akıllı Platform Yönetim Arayüzü) protokolünü uygulayan sunucu yönetim modülü. Dell AIM kapsamında Denetleyici, bazı sunucu modellerini uzaktan kontrol etmek için BMC'yi kullanır. blade Dell AIM SDK için blade, ana bilgisayar süper sınıfının bir öğesidir. Dell modüler sistemleri için blade, kasaya monte edilen bir modüler sunucu anlamına gelir. BMC Anakart Yönetim Denetleyicisine bakın. Önyüklenebilir ortam Sistem sabit sürücüden önyükleme yapamazsa, sisteminizi başlatmak için kullanılan CD, SD kart veya USB bellek anahtarı. önbellek Verilerin hemen alınabilmesi için verilerin ya da yönergelerin bir kopyasını tutan hızlı depolama alanı. CHA Compellent Ana Bilgisayar Adaptörüne Bakın. Karşılıklı Kimlik Doğrulama İletişim Kurallı (CHAP) Karşılıklı Kimlik Doğrulama İletişim Kurallı, şifreli kimlik sorma yanıt mekanizması kullanan bir ağ oturum açma protokolüdür. Doğru hesap ismi ve parolayı sağlayan ana bilgisayarlara hacim ve anlık görüntülere olan erişimi sınırlamak için kullanılır. CHAP ayrıca oturum açma/yönetici hesapları için de kullanılır. kanal Dell/AIM ortamında, bağlantı noktalarını değiştirmek için atayabileceğiniz ve sekiz fiziksel NIC kullanarak bir personaya bağlanabileceğini sekiz fiziksel bağlantıdan biri. Trafik için bir veya iki kanal tercih etmek amacıyla bir ağ yapılandırabilirsiniz böylece tercih edilen kanal arızalanırsa trafik görünmeden diğer kanala yeniden yönlendirilir. CHAP Karşılıklı Kimlik Doğrulama İletişim Kurallı'na (CHAP) bakın. kasa anahtarı Dell AIM kapsamında, Ethernet anahtarı kasadaki bir yuvada bulunur. Kasa anahtarları Denetleyici tarafından yönetilir. istemci sürücü iletişim sertifikası EKM kapsamında, istemcinin sunucuyla iletişimine izin veren özel şifreli bir anahtardır. Küme Düğümü Sunucu kümesindeki bir ana bilgisayar veya depolama kümesindeki SAN gibi kaynak kümesinin fiziksel bir üyesidir. 4toplama ASM/ME'de toplama, hacim, anlık görüntü veya uygulama bileşenleri gibi depolama nesnelerinin ilişkili gruplarıdır ve ASM Konsol Ağacında Toplama ana düğümünün altında düğümlerle temsil edilir. Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde, hacim ve eşleme toplamaları ile özel anlık görüntü toplamaları Hacimler görüntüsü altında bir hiyerarşiyle görünür. Compellent Ana Bilgisayar Adaptörü (CHA) Her Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi denetleyicisinde bulunan dahili önbellek kartı/pil. Yazma önbellek hafızası önbellek kartında yansıtılır. Çift denetleyicili Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi'nde, denetleyici 1 önbellek kartı denetleyici 2 için yansıtıcıdır ve denetleyici 2 önbellek kartı denetleyici 1 için yansıtıcıdır. Tekli denetleyicili Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi'nde, önbellek kartı tek denetleyici için yansıtıcıdır. yapılandırma Dell AIM ortamının tüm içeriğini ve yapılandırmasını açıklayan veritabanıdır. Koruma Modu Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi'nde, kalan boş alan kritik eşiğin altına düştüğünde (tipik olarak %10, 32 GB'ye kadar) veri koruma modu. Koruma modunda Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi bir uyarı oluşturur, yeni hacimlerin oluşturulmasını önler ve boş alan yaratmak için tekrar oynatmaları daha hızlı olarak sona erdirir. Acil durum moduna bakın. Konsol Dell AIM ortamındaki öğeleri izlemek ve bunlarla çalışmak için kullandığınız web tabanlı kullanıcı arayüzüdür. Dell AIM Konsolu Dell AIM Denetleyicide bulunur. kontrol modülü Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizilerde fiziksel işlemci ve arayüz bileşenidir. Bir kontrol modülü Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi ürün yazılımını flash bellekte içerir ve önbellek hafızasında saklanan veriler için geçici güç sürekliliği sağlar. Birden çok ağ arayüzü ve isteğe bağlı seri bağlantı noktası vardır. Bir dizi, çalışırken değiştirilebilen çift yedek denetleyici içerebilir. Aktif kontrol modülleri G/ Ç'ye hizmet ederken ikincil kontrol modülü önbelleğinde veri yansıtır. denetim masası Güç düğmesi ve güç göstergesi gibi gösterge ve kumandaların bulunduğu sistem bölümü. Kontrol Bağlantı Noktası Depolama isteğinde bulunmak için iSCSI başlatıcıların (sunucuların) bağlandığı hedef iSCSI bağlantı noktasıdır. Sanal bağlantı noktası modunda yapılandırılan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi'nde iSCSI trafiğini uygun sanal bağlantı noktasına yeniden yönlendirmek için her iSCSI hata etki alanı için bir kontrol bağlantı noktası oluşturulur. Denetleyici (Dell AIM) Fiziksel ve sanal donanım, yazılım ve ağ yapılandırmalarını yöneten ve Dell AIM Konsolunu içeren yazılımdır. Bir çift dirençli Denetleyici kapsamında her Denetleyici kendisine ayrılmış sunucuda çalışır ama bir yapılandırma veritabanı ve diğer önemli dosyaları paylaşılan dosya sisteminde paylaşır. Denetleyici (Dell Compellent) Disk toplanması (RAID), G/Ç yönlendirmesi, hata algılama ve veri kurtarması sağlar. Tüm Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi alt sistemi için bilgi sağlar. Her Depolama Merkezi sistemi en az bir tane içerir. Depolama Merkezi ve sistemin performansı ile kullanılabilirliğini iyileştirmek için tavsiye edilen düzeltici eylemler. Denetleyici Hizmetleri Dell AIM kapsamında, Denetleyicinin Sistem Kontrol Ağı (SCN), yönetilen anahtarlar, Konsol ve CLı ile iletişim için kullandığı sanal IP adresi veya adresleri. Varsayılan olarak bu, aktif Denetleyicide tek bir sanal IP adresidir ama SCN Hizmetleri ve SNMP Tuzak Toplayıcı için özel adresler belirleyebilirsiniz. Kopilot Hizmetleri Dell Compellent Depolama merkezinde sistemi proaktif olarak izleyen ve sistemin performansı ile kullanılabilirliğini iyileştirmek için düzeltici eylemler öneren, merkezi destek, ürün eğitimi ve satış kaynakları kombinasyonu. Kopyalama-YansıtmaGeçirme Hacimlerin farklı disk türleriyle RAID seviyeleri arasında geçirilmesine izin veren Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi özelliği. 5ayrıcalık alanı EKM kapsamında oturumlar arasında ayrıcalık bilgisini saklayan bellektir. Ayrıcalık bilgisi kullanıcı adı, parola ve sertifika gibi güvenlik bilgisidir. Kriptografik Nesne Veri güvenlik yöntemi. Veri Toplayıcı Sunucunun arka planında çalışan ve sunucuya bağlı tüm Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi sistemlerinden bilgi toplayan Dell Compellent Kurumsal Yönetici bileşenidir. Anlık Veri Yeniden Oynatma Belirli aralıklarla yerel SAN'da boş alan etkili zaman noktası kopyaları (PITC) yakalayan ve böylece hacmi önceki bir zaman noktasına geri çevirmeye izin veren Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi özelliğidir. Bkz. Yeniden oynatma, anlık görüntü. Veri İlerletme G/Ç aktivite (talep) seviyesine dayanarak veri sayfalarını otomatik olarak üst veya alt performans aygıtlarına geçiren Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi özelliğidir. Bkz. katmanlı depolama. DDR Bkz. Çift Veri Oranı. atanan alan Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisi kapsamında, bir ortak için alınan eşleri saklamak amacıyla bulunan bir gruptaki alan. Dell Şifreleme Anahtar Yöneticisi (EKM) Dell Şifreleme Anahtar Yöneticisi (EKM) Dell bant otomasyon çözümleri için şifreleme anahtarlarını yöneterek LTO bantlarında saklanan verileri güvenlik altına alır. Dell Uzaktan Erişim Denetleyicisi (DRAC) Bant dışı yönetim tesisini sağlayan bir arayüz kartıdır. Denetleyicinin kendi işlemcisi, belleği, ağ bağlantısı ve sistem veriyoluna erişimi vardır ve sistem yöneticilerinin bir ağ aracılığıyla sistemleri uzaktan kontrol etmesine izin verir. aygıt sürücüsü İşletim sistemi ya da diğer programların, çevre birimi ile doğru bir şekilde iletişim kurmasını sağlayan program. DHCP Bkz. Dinamik Ana Bilgisayar Yapılandırma Protokolü. Dijital Çok Amaçlı Disk Dijital çok amaçlı disk veya dijital video diski (DVD). disk klasörü Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, kullanıcı tarafından görüntülenebilen ve yönetilebilen fiziksel depolama ortam aygıtları toplamı (diskler, SSD'ler). Disk klasörleri depolama alanının sağlandığı depolama havuzlarını belirler. Disk klasörleri birden çok depolama havuzuyla ilişkili olabilse de Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi performansı tüm diskleri aynı klasöre ve depolama havuzuna atayarak en yüksek hale getirilebilir. Disk Konumu Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, kasasındaki disk sürücüsünün sıra-sütun şeklindeki yuva konumu. Örneğin disk konumu 01-02, üstten birinci sıradaki ve soldan ikinci sütundaki yuva anlamına gelir. DNS Bkz. Etki Alanı Adı Sistemi. Etki Alanı Adı Sistemi (DNS) www.example.com gibi Internet etki alanı adlarını, 208.77.188.166 gibi IP adreslerine dönüştürme yöntemi. dormant Persona AIM ortamında, bir ana bilgisayar üzerinde çalışmayan (veya çalışmayı beklemeyen) persona. Çift Veri Hızı (DDR) Çift veri hızı. Verileri bir saat döngüsünün hem yükselen hem de alçalan darbelerinde aktararak veri hızını potansiyel olarak iki kat artıran, bellek modüllerinde kullanılan bir teknoloji. DRAC Bkz. Dell Uzaktan Erişim Denetleyicisi. DRAM Bkz. Dinamik rasgele erişim belleği. İkili Yedek Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, tipik olarak RAID 10 ve/veya RAID 6'yı kullanarak herhangi iki sürücünün kaybolmasına karşı koruma sağlayan depolama profili seçeneği. 6DVD Bkz. Dijital Çok Amaçlı Disk. Dinamik Ana Bilgisayar Yapılandırma Protokolü (DHCP). Bir istemci sistemine otomatik olarak bir IP adresi atama yöntemi. Dinamik rasgele erişim belleği (DRAM) Bir sistemdeki RAM genellikle DRAM çiplerinden oluşur. EKM Bkz. Dell Şifreleme Anahtar Yöneticisi. EKM Yöneticisi EKM kapsamında, kullanıcı ve grup oluşturabilen veya silebilen süper kullanıcı. EKM Şifreleme Yöneticisi (tklmadmin) EKM kapsamında, anahtarları veya aygıtları oluşturan veya silen günlük kullanıcı. Acil Durum Modu Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, daha fazla boş alan olmamasından kaynaklı olarak sistem daha fazla çalışamadığında erişilen moddur. Acil durum modunda, tüm sunucu G/Ç'leri reddedilir ve tüm hacimler çevrimdışı olur ve acil durum modundan çıkacak kadar boş alan yaratılmadan tekrar çevrimdışı olmaz. Bkz. Koruma Modu. kasa Birden çok disk veya blade'e tek bir arayüz, güç ve soğutma sağlayan fiziksel kasa. ortam Dell AIM kapsamında, Dell AIM Denetleyici tarafından yönetilen donanım, yazılım ve ağ yapılandırmaları toplamı. Eth0 Bkz. Ethernet portu 0. Eth1 Bkz. Ethernet portu 1. Ethernet portu 0 (Eth0) Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde Eth0, yönetime ayrılan Ethernet arayüzüdür. Ethernet portu 1 (Eth1) Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde Eth1, kümeleme veya uzaktan eşleme için denetleyiciler arasındaki işlem arası iletişim için ayrılan Ethernet arayüzüdür. harici ağ Dell AIM ağ kapsamında, Dell AIM ortamının bir parçası olmayan ama fiziksel ve mantıksal olarak buna bağlı olan ağ. harici anahtar Dell AIM ortamı kapsamında, Dell AIM ortamının bir parçası olmayan ama fiziksel ve mantıksal olarak buna bağlı olan anahtar. Fabric Birleşik yönlendirme altyapısı olarak çalışan birbirine bağlı anahtar kombinasyonu. SAN'daki aygıtlar arasında birden çok bağlantıya izin verir ve yeni aygıtların sorunsuz olarak girmesini sağlar. Ağda en az bir anahtar bulunacak şekilde FC (veya iSCSI) topolojisi. FastTrack En aktif veriyi dış (daha hızlı) disk parçasına dinamik olarak yerleştiren isteğe bağlı Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi yardımcı programı. FAT Bkz. Dosya Ayırma Tablosu. Hata Etki Alanı Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi ortamında, Hata Etki Alanı yük devretme setini tanımlar. Sanal Bağlantı Noktası modunda tüm ön uç bağlantı noktaları bir hata etki alanının parçası olabilir. Legacy Modunda her birincil ve ayrılmış bağlantı noktası bir hata etki alanı oluşturur. FC Bkz. Fiber Kanal. FE Bkz. Ön Uç Ağı. 7Fiber Kanal (FC) Sunucuları denetleyicilere ve arka uç disk kasalarına bağlamak için kullanılan yüksek hızlı bağlantı. FC bileşenleri HBA'ları, hubları, anahtarları ve kabloları içerir. FC terimi aynı zamanda saniyede 10 Gigabayt'a kadar hızla veri aktarımı sağlayan yüksek hızlı, ikili seri iletişim protokolü anlamına gelir. Dosya Ayırma Tablosu (FAT) Dosya depolamasını organize ve takip etmek için MS-DOS tarafından kullanılan dosya yapısıdır. Microsoft Windows işletim sistemi isteğe bağlı olarak FAT dosya sistem yapısını kullanabilir. Dosya Aktarım Protokolü (FTP) Makineler ve ana bilgisayarlar arasında büyük miktarda veri dosyası aktarmak için kullanılan uygulama seviyesi protokolü. Ön Uç Ağ (FE) Veri yazımını başlatan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi SAN veri yazımı akışının (sunucudan anahtara, oradan denetleyiciye ve disklere) bileşeni. Genel olarak denetleyicinin ön ucunda bulunan sunucular (veya anahtarlar). Ancak, uzaktaki bir sisteme veri eşleyen bir Depolama Merkezi uzaktaki sistemin ön ucudur. Bkz. arka uç. FTP Bkz. Dosya Aktarım Protokolü. GB Bkz. Gigabayt. Gigabayt (GB) 1024 megabayt veya 1.073.741.824 bayt. Ancak sabit sürücü kapasitesine atıfta bulunurken bu genellikle 1.000.000.000 bayta yuvarlanır. grup Bkz. PS Serisi grubu. HBA Bkz. Ana Bilgisayar Veriyolu Adaptörü. HIT/LE Bkz. Linux için Ana Bilgisayar Entegrasyon Araçları. HIT/ME Bkz. Windows için Ana Bilgisayar Entegrasyon Araçları. HIT/VM Bkz. VMware için Ana Bilgisayar Entegrasyon Araçları. ana bilgisayar Dell AIM ortamında, ana bilgisayar bir fiziksel sürücü (rafa monte veya blade) veya sanal bir makine olabilir. Dell AIM SDK'de, blade sunucuları, rafa monte sunucuları ve sanal makineleri (VM) içeren süper sınıf. ana bilgisayar adaptörü Sistemin veriyolu ile genellikle bir depolama aygıtı olan çevre aygıtı arasında iletişimi gerçekleştiren bir denetleyici. Ana Bilgisayar Veriyolu Adaptörü (HBA) Bir sunucuyu SAN'a (Depolama Alanı Ağı) bağlayan genellikle ek bir kart olan aygıt. Her HBA, SAN üzerinde kendi WWPN'si (World Wide Port Number) ile tanımlanır. Ortak HBA türleri Fiber Kanal ve iSCSI'yı içerir. Linux (HIT/LE) için Ana Bilgisayar Entegrasyon Araçları. ESX sistemlerini Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi depolama dizileriyle entegre eden araç dizisi. Otomatik Anlık Görüntü Yöneticisi/VMware Sürümü (ASM/VE), EqualLogic Veri saklama Yöneticisi ve EqualLogic Sanal Masaüstü Dağıtım Yardımcı Programını içerir. Windows (HIT/ME) için Ana Bilgisayar Entegrasyon Araçları Bir diziyi yapılandırmanızı ve yönetmenizi sağlayan uygulamalar dizisi. ASM/ME, DSM (Çoklu Yol G/Ç Aygıtı Özel Modülü) ve RSW'yi (Uzaktan Kurulum Sihirbazı) içerir. VMware (HIT/VM) için Ana Bilgisayar Entegrasyon Araçları Linux sistemlerini Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi depolama dizileriyle entegre eden araç dizisi. Uzaktan Kurulum Sihirbazı Komut Satırı Arayüzü (RSWCLI), EqualLogic Ana Bilgisayar Performansı ve Yapılandırma Ayarlama Dizisi (eqltune) ile EqualLogic Log Bir Araya Getirme Tesisi'ni (eqllog) içerir. Kullanıma Hazır Yedek Disk Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi ortamında, Kullanıma hazır yedek disk, yedek bir disktir. Aktif dizinin arızalanması durumunda denetleyici Kullanıma Hazır Yedek Diski aktif dizinin bir parçası 8haline getirir ve anında veriyi yeniden oluşturur. Kullanıma hazır Yedek disk insan müdahalesi olmadan aktif diskin bir parçası olsa da, arızalanan sürücüyü en kısa zamanda değiştirmeyi unutmayın, böylece dizi yeni bir Kullanıma Hazır Yedek Diskle tekrar korunur. Kullanıma hazır yedek diskler birden fazla disk kasasında bulunabilir. Depolama Merkezi Kullanıma Hazır Yedek Diski yerini aldığı veri sürücüsünden farklı kapasiteye sahip olabilir. çalışırken takılabilir Genellikle bir sabit sürücü veya dahili bir soğutma pervanesi gibi bir aygıtı ana makine sistemine sistem gücü açıkken ve çalışıyorken ekleme veya takma yeteneği. Aynı zamanda çalışırken değiştirilebilir olarak da adlandırılır. çalışırken değiştirilebilir Bkz. çalışırken takılabilir. G/Ç Giriş/Çıkış. Klavye bir giriş aygıtı, monitör ise bir çıkış aygıtıdır. Genel olarak G/Ç aktivitesi bilgisayar aktivitesinden ayrıştırılabilir. Kimlik Dell AIM ortamında, ortama eklendiği zaman atanan öğe için benzersiz tanımlayıcı. iDRAC Bkz. Dell Uzaktan Erişim Denetleyicisi entegrasyonu. IKEv2-SCSI Sertifika oluşturmak için kullanılan protokol. görüntü Dell AIM'e özel olarak, Denetleyicinin özel türde bir ana bilgisayar üzerinde görüntüyü önyüklemek için kullandığı bilgiyle birlikte bir persona veya VMRack tarafından önyüklenen disk veya depolama dizisinde saklanan gerçek bitler. Birden fazla görüntüyle bir persona veya VMRack yapılandırabilirsiniz, örneğin, böylece aynı persona ya bir fiziksel sunucuda ya da sanal makinde önyükleme yapabilir. infiniBand InfiniBand, işlemcilerin yüksek hızlı çevre birimlerine bağlanması için tasarlanan noktadan noktaya çift yönlü seri bağlantıları sunar. Anlık Yeniden Oynatma Bkz. Anlık Veri Yeniden Oynatma. Dell Uzaktan Erişim Denetleyicisi (iDRAC) entegrasyonu. Internet SCSI protokolünü kullanan bir uzaktan erişim denetleyicisi. Akıllı Platform Yönetimi Arabirimi (IPMI). Bazı sunucularda sunucularındaki yönetim modülleri tarafından gerçekleştirilen ve sunucuları uzaktan kontrol etmek için kullanılan protokol. Dell sunucularındaki blade yönetim modülleri iPMI gerçekleştirir. bağlantı anahtarı Dell AIM ortamında, Denetleyici tarafından yönetilen ve kasa, vRack'ler, diğer bağlantı anahtarları ve harici anahtarlar gibi öğeleri birbirine bağlamak için kullanılan anahtar. internet SCSI (iSCSI) Internet SCSI (bkz. SCSI). Standart SCSI komutlarını, IP ağları üzerinde istemci sunucularıyla (iSCSI başlatıcılar) ağ depolama aygıtları (iSCSI hedefleri) arasında iletişim için içeren protokol. IPMI Bkz. Akıllı Platform Yönetimi Arabirimi. iSCSI Bkz. Internet SCSI. Anahtar Yönetimi Birlikte Çalışabilirlik Protokolü (KMIP) Kurumsal anahtar yönetim sistemleri ve şifreleme sistemleri arasındaki iletişim için konulan standartlardır. Anahtar Servis Bağlantı Noktaları EKM'de iletişim için işletim sistemi tarafından kullanılan bağlantı noktalarıdır. Anahtar grubu EKM'de, belli bir bölüm, alan veya donanım türüne atanmış anahtar setidir. 9Anahtarlar EKM'de veri korumak için kullanılan şifreli sertifika. Anahtar deposu / Anahtar grubu / Ana Anahtar Deposu EKM'deki bir grup şifreli anahtar. KMIP Bkz. Anahtar Yönetimi Birlikte Çalışabilirlik Protokolü. Java Veritabanı Bağlantısı (JDBC) İstemcinin bir veritabanında veriye nasıl erişeceğini, veriyi nasıl arayacağını ve güncelleyeceğini belirten Java programlama dili için API. JDBC Bkz. Java Veritabanı Bağlantısı. Baş Denetleyici Çift denetleyicili Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezindeki birincil denetleyici. Normalde baş ve yan denetleyiciler hacmi ikiye katlayarak depolama G/Ç yükünü paylaşır ama yalnızca baş denetleyici harici yönetim işlevlerini gerçekleştirir. Bir denetleyici arızalanırsa kalan denetleyici baş denetleyici olur veya olmaya devam eder ve her iki denetleyicinin görevlerini de üstlenir. Bkz. Yan Denetleyici. Legacy Modu Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, hata etki alanları birincil ve ayrılmış ön uç bağlantı noktası çiftlerini, yedek cihazla bağlanarak ayırmak için atanır, böylece tekli bağlantı noktası arızasına karşı depolama trafiğini korumak için bir mekanizma kullanılır. Bkz. Hata Etki Alanı, Sanal bağlantı noktası veya Sanal Bağlantı Noktası Modu. Doğrusal Bant-Açık (LTO) Açık bir standart bant formatı. mantıksal birim numarası (LUN) Mantıksal birim, bir depolama dizisinin veya disk setinin kavramsal bölümüdür (alt birimidir). Her mantıksal birimin, tanımlanmasına izin veren mantıksal birim numarası (LUN) vardır. LTO Bkz. Doğrusal Bant-Açık. LTO Anahtar Grup Aktarma EKM'de, varsayılan anahtar grubu kaldırıldığında kullanılmak üzere atanan bir anahtar seti. LUN Bkz. mantıksal birim numarası. MAC adresi Bkz. Ortam Erişim Denetimi adresi. Yönetilen Diskler Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, aygıtları depolama havuzuyla ilişkilendirmek için disk klasörüne atanan depolama ortam aygıtları (diskler, SSD'ler). Bkz. Depolama Havuzu, disk klasörü. yönetilen sistem Yönetilen sistem, Dell OpenManage Sunucu Yöneticisi kullanılarak izlenen ve yönetilen her sistemdir. yönetim IP adresi Akıllı IP'si etkin olan aygıtları izlemek veya yönetmek için bu aygıtlara bağlanmak amacıyla kullanılan adres. Adres, yönetim uygulamaları tarafından özel kullanıma ayrılmış veya yönetim ve servis uygulamaları tarafından paylaşılıyor olabilir. yönetim ağı İsteğe bağlı bir yönetim ağı, iSCSI trafiğini (Hacim G/Ç) yönetim trafiğinden (GUI ve CLI oturumları ve diğer grup yönetim iletişimleri ile gruplar arası işlemler) ayırır. yönetim istasyonu Bir veya daha fazla yönetilen sistemi merkezi bir konumdan yönetmek için kullanılan sistem. Manuel Yeniden Oynatma Kullanıcının, hacimlerin manuel olarak zaman noktası kopyalarını oluşturmasını sağlayan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi özelliği. manuel aktarım eşleme Bir ağ üzerinden değil taşınabilir ortam ile yapılan eşleme. Eşleme çiftleri arasındaki ağ bağlantısı çok yavaş olduğunda kullanılır aksi halde büyük miktarlarda veri aktarımı için uygun değildir. 10Manuel Aktarım Yardımcı Programı Ağ yerine taşınabilir ortamı kullanarak hacim eşlemesi sağlayan Dell EqualLogic'in bağımsız bir yardımcı programı. Yardımcı program hem grafik hem de komut satırı kullanıcı arabirimine sahiptir. Ortam Erişim Denetimi adresi (MAC adresi) Sisteminizin bir ağ üzerindeki benzersiz donanım numarası. geçiş hacmi Bir hacimden diğerine veri taşımak için Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi komutu. geçiş EKM kapsamında, Dell Şifreleme Anahtar Yöneticisi 3.0 kurulumu sırasında (sonrasında değil) var olan anahtar deposuna bir anahtar deposu birleştirme. yansıtma hacmi Yerel bir hacmi uzaktaki bir Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi'ne eşlemek ve yansıtma manuel olarak kaldırılana kadar yerel ve uzaktan hacimler arasında güncellemeleri sağlamak için Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi komutu. yansıtma Bir fiziksel sürücü setinin veriyi sakladığı ve bir veya daha fazla ek sürücünün verinin çift kopyasını sakladığı türde veri yedekleme. İşlevselliğin yansıtılması yazılım tarafından sağlanır. Bkz. bölüştürme, RAID. NAS Bkz. Ağa Bağlı Depolama. ağ bağlantısı Bir personanın veya VMRack'in gerekli ağ bağlantısını tanımlayan nesne. Ağ bağlantısı, örneğin ağa bir persona eklediğinizde olduğu gibi öğelerin ağa eklenmesiyle oluşturulur. Ağa Bağlı Depolama (NAS) NAS, bir ağ üzerinde paylaşılan depolama oluşturmak için kullanılan kavramlardan biridir. NAS sistemleri kendi işletim sistemlerine, entegre donanıma ve belli depolama ihtiyaçlarını karşılamak için optimize edilmiş yazılıma sahiptir. NTP Ağ Zaman Protokolü (NTP) bilgisayar sistemlerinin saatlerini paket anahtarlı, değişken gecikme süresi veri ağlarıyla senkronize etmek için olan bir protokoldür. Fazla talep gören alan Ölçülü kaynak sağlamayı destekleyen SAN'da fiziksel olarak mevcut olmayan ama mevcut olarak yapılandırılmış depolama alanı miktarı (örn., yapılandırılan alan eksi mevcut alan). eşlik şeridi RAID dizilerinde, eşlik verisini içeren şeritli sabit sürücü. bölüm Fdisk komutu kullanılarak oluşturulan sabit sürücüye ait fiziksel bir parça. Biçimlendir komutu kullanılarak bölümler daha sonra birden fazla mantıksal sürücüye bölünebilir. pasif Denetleyici Aktif Denetleyici arızalandığında yönetimi devralmak için hazır beklemede olan Dell AIM Denetleyici. Yan Denetleyici İkili denetleyiciye sahip Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, yan denetleyici G/Ç yükünü baş denetleyiciyle paylaşır ama harici yönetim işlevlerini gerçekleştirmez. Baş denetleyici arızalanırsa yan denetleyici, her iki denetleyicinin G/Ç ve yönetim görevlerini devralır. Bkz. Baş Denetleyici. persona Diskte yakalanan sürücü ortamı: Bir uygulamayı Dell AIM ortamındaki bir ana bilgisayarda çalıştırmak için gerekli işletim sistemi, isteğe bağlı Dell AIM aracı yazılımı ve ağ ile diğer ayarlar. havuz Hacimler tarafından kullanılmak üzere SAN'da bulunan depolama alanı. Dell Compellent Kurumsal Depolama Yöneticisi ve Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde bu, SAN'daki toplam alana eşittir. Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizilerde bu, belli bir havuzun üyelerindeki toplam alana eşittir. havuz yöneticisi Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi grubundaki, yalnızca belli bir havuzda veya bir grup için olan havuz setinde nesneleri yönetmeye izinli olan hesap. Grup yöneticisiyle karşılaştırılır. birincil grup Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisi Ortamında, bir eşleme ortaklığındaki orijinal hacme sahip grup. Bkz. ikincil grup. 11birincil hacim Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisi ortamında, bir eşleme ortağına eşleme için yapılandırılan hacim. PS Serisi dizi Tekli Dell EqualLogic iSCSI depo birimi, genellikle Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi grubu olarak yapılandırılır. Birden çok PS Serisi diziyi daha büyük bir PS Serisi gruba ekleyebilir ve bunları tek bir iSCSI SAN gibi yönetebilirsiniz. PS Serisi grubu Tek IP adresiyle eriştiğiniz ve depolama alanı ağı (SAN) olarak yönettiğiniz bir veya daha fazla Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi depolama dizisinden oluşan iSCSI depolama birimi. Kamu Hizmetleri Dell AIM kapsamında, Konsol veya aktif Denetleyicideki CLI'ya bağlanmak için kullandığınız Denetleyici Servisi sanal IP adresi. RAC Uzaktan Erişim Denetleyicisi. RAID Bkz. Yedekli Bağımsız Diskler Dizisi (RAID) RAID 0 Veriler, daha iyi performans için mevcut disklerde şeritlenir. RAID 0, hiçbir veri yedekliliği sağlamaz. RAID 10 Veriler, mevcut disk sürücülerinde şeritlenir ve yansıtılır, böylece veri ulaşılabilirliği ve daha iyi performans sağlanır. Hacimdeki tüm verilerin en az bir kopyasını saklar. RAID 10 optimum Okuma / Yazma performansı, birden çok hatayı kaldırabilen daha yüksek olasılık ve en hızlı veri onarımını sağlar. RAID 5 Matematiksel olarak geliştirilen dönen eşlik şeridini kullanarak verilerin mantıksal bir kopyasını saklar. Eşlik şeridi veri şeritlerinden türetilir. Bu yöntem, yedek bilgi için RAID 10'dan daha az servise sahiptir ama yazma performansı, eşlik şeridi her yazma için hesaplandığından daha yavaştır. Okuma performansı RAID 10'a benzerdir. RAID 50 RAID seviye 50, RAID seviye 5 ile RAID seviye 0'ın bir kombinasyonudur. RAID 50, çoklu sürücülerde hem eşleme hem de disk şeritlemeyi içerir. kurtarma hacmi Veri kurtarmak amacıyla oluşturulan hacim. Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizilerde, yük devretme işleminin bir parçası olarak gelen bir eşleme sağlanarak bir kurtarma hacmi oluşturulur. Ayrıca kurtarma hacimleri ve ince kurtarma klonları da oluşturabilirsiniz. Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, görüntü hacmi yeniden oynatmadan oluşturulur. Bkz. eşleme, Görüntü Hacmi, Yeniden oynatma. Yedeklilik Birincil kaynağın arızalanması durumunda ikincil kaynağın bunun yerini alacağından emin olmak için bilgilerin veya donanım cihazı bileşenlerinin yinelenmesi. Dell Compellent Destek Merkezi her bileşen için yedeklilik sağlar böylece tek bir arıza noktası yoktur. Tekli Yedeklilik, kaynaklardan biri arızalandığında olabilecek veri kaybına karşı koruma sağlar. İkili Yedeklilik, kaynaklardan ikisi de arızalandığında olabilecek veri kaybına karşı koruma sağlar. Yedekli Bağımsız Diskler Dizisi (RAID) Yedekli bağımsız diskler dizisi. Veri yedekliliği sağlama yöntemi. RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 ve RAID 50 gibi RAID'in bazı ortak uygulamaları. Bkz. yansıtma, şeritleme. Uzaktan Anlık Yeniden Oynatma Yeniden oynatmanın uzaktan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezine çoğaltıldığı Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi çözüm özelliği. Yerel ve uzaktan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezleri aktifaktiftir ve çift yönlü çoğalma senkronize veya asenkronize olarak bağımsız aralıklarla gerçekleşebilir. Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi çoğaltması Kurumsal Yönetici yazılım uygulamasının Çoğaltma lisansına sahip olmasını gerektirir. Bkz. Yeniden Oynatma, Uzak Sistem, çoğaltma. Uzaktan Kurulum Sihirbazı (RSW) Ana Bilgisayar Araçları/Microsoft Edition'ı yükledikten sonra Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizi yapılandırmanızı sağlayan grafik kullanıcı arabirimi (GUI). 12Uzak Sistem Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezindeki orijinal hacimden çoğaltma verisini almak üzere yapılandırılan farklı bir SAN. Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi çoğaltması Çoğaltma lisansına sahip Kurumsal Yönetici yazılım uygulamasını gerektirir. Bkz. çoğaltma. Yeniden oynatma Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, kopyalama başladığında zaman noktasında göründüğü gibi veri görüntüsü içeren tam kullanımlı, verilerin zaman noktası kopyası (PITC). Kopya yerel olarak veya uzak bir Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde saklanabilir. Bkz. anlık görüntü, Anlık Veri Yeniden Oynatma, Uzaktan Anlık Yeniden Oynatma. Yeniden Oynatma Profili Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, yeniden oynatma zaman noktası kopyalarının ne zaman ve nasıl çekileceği ile nerede saklanacağını belirleyen kurallar seti. Bkz. Yeniden Oynatma. Yeniden oynatma alanı Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, yeniden oynatmalar için otomatik olarak ayrılan ve kullanılan alan miktarı. Bkz. aktif alan, gerçek alan. eşleme Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi hacminin zaman noktası temsili. Orijinal hacim ve bunun eşlemesi farklı Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi gruplarında (eşleme çiftleri) potansiyel olarak felaket toleransı sağlamak için coğrafi olarak ayrılmış şekilde yer alır. eşleme toplaması Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde, bir hacim toplamasının her eşlemesinden ortaya çıkan eşleme seti. eşleme toplama seti Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde, bir hacim toplaması için replika toplama seti. eşleme rezervi Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde, belli bir hacim için olan eşleme setleri için ayrılan eşleme çiftindeki atanan alan oranı. Eşleme rezervini birincil gruptaki hacim için yapılandırırsınız ancak gerçek eşleme rezervi ikincil gruptadır. eşleme seti Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde, bir hacim için tüm eşleme seti, şablon hacim veya ince klon hacmi. eşleme sistemi Bir veya daha fazla yerel hacimden uzak bir Depolama Merkezine eşleme verisi göndermek için yapılandırılan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi. Bkz. eşleme, Uzak Sistem, Uzaktan Anlık Yeniden Oynatma. eşleme işlemi Gerektiğinde verilerin iki SAN'dan birinden kurtarılması için hacim verilerinin (yalnızca delta) birincil (yerel) SAN'dan ikincil (uzaktaki) SAN'a kopyalanması işlemi. SAN'lar birbirinden sınırsız bir uzaklıkta olabilir. eşleme çifti Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde başka bir çiftten eşleme göndermek veya almak için yapılandırılan grup. RSW Bkz. Uzaktan Kurulum Sihirbazı. çalıştırılabilir persona Dell AIM kapsamında, başlatılan ve bir ana bilgisayara atanmayı bekleyen ağ ile yüklenen persona. SAN Bkz. Depolama Alanı Ağı. SAN Ana Merkezi Tek bir grafik arayüzünden Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi gruplarını görüntülemenizi sağlar. Performans verilerini ve diğer önemli grup bilgilerini toplar ve biçimlendirir. SCN Bkz. Sistem Kontrol Ağı. SCN Hizmetleri Persona ve VMRack'lerin Dell AIM ortamında aktif Denetleyiciyle iletişim kurmak için kullandığı Denetleyici Sistemleri sanal IP adresi. SCSI Bkz. Küçük Bilgisayar Sistemi Arabirimi. 13SDK Bkz. Yazılım Geliştirme Kiti. ikincil kontrol modülü Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisi ortamında, ikincil denetleyici modülü aktif kontrol modülünden önbellek verisini yansıtır. Aktif kontrol modülünün çalışması durursa ikincil olan ağ işlemlerini üstlenir. Bkz. aktif kontrol modülü. ikincil grup Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisi eşleme yapılandırmasında kaynak hacmin eşlemelerini alan grup. Bkz. birincil grup. Sunucu Kümesi Tekli bilgisayar arızaları durumunda kesintisiz hizmet sağlamak için tek bir sistem gibi çalışan bağımsız bir sunucular grubu. servis etiketi Dell'i teknik destek için aradığınızda sistemi tanımlamak için kullanılan etiket. Basit Posta Aktarım Protokolü (SMTP) Mesajların Internet'te ana bilgisayarlar arasında gönderilmesini sağlamak için bir mesaj biçimi ve iletim prosedürü tanımlar. Basit Ağ Yönetim İletişim Protokolü (SNMP) Bir ağ yöneticisinin uzaktan iş istasyonlarını izlemesini ve yönetmesini sağlayan standart bir arayüz. Simülatör Denetleyici, Konsol ve fiziksel ile sanal ağların dahil olduğu çalışan Dell AIM ortamına öykünen Dell AIM SDK bileşeni. Bkz. SDK. Küçük Bilgisayar Sistemi Arabirimi (SCSI). Küçük bilgisayar sistemi arabirimi. Standart ana bilgisayarlardan daha hızlı veri aktarımına sahip bir G/Ç veriyolu arabirimi. SMART Kendi Kendini İzleme Analizi ve Raporlama Teknolojisi. Sabit sürücülerin BIOS sistemine hatalarla arızaları rapor etmesini ve ardından ekranda bir hata mesajı görüntülenmesini sağlar. Akıllı Kopya Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi grubunda nesnelerin ASM/ME zaman noktası ve uygulama uyumlu kopyası. Akıllı Kopyalar, kullandığınız Otomatik Anlık Görüntü sürümüne bağlı olarak anlık görüntü, klon veya eşleme türünde olabilir. SMP Bkz. simetrik çoklu işlem. SMTP Basit Posta Aktarım Protokolü. anlık görüntü Bir hacmin zaman noktası kopyası (PITC). Bkz. Yeniden oynatma. anlık görüntü toplaması Bir hacim toplamasındaki anlık görüntü işleminin sonucu olan anlık görüntü seti. Bkz. hacim toplama. SNMP Bkz. Basit Ağ Yönetim İletişim Protokolü. SNMP Tuzak Toplayıcı Dell AIM kapsamında, yönetilen anahtar ve diğer aygıtların, aktif Denetleyiciye SNMP tuzakları göndermek için kullandığı Denetleyici Hizmetleri sanal IP adresi. Yazılım Geliştirme Kiti (SDK) Belli bir yazılım paketi, yazılım çerçevesi, donanım platformu, bilgisayar sistemi, video oyun konsolu, işletim sistemi veya benzer bir platform için uygulamalar oluşturmak amacıyla kullanılan geliştirme araçları seti. Alan Kurtarma Windows'un kullanıldığını rapor ettiği ancak Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi tarafından kullanılabilecek boş olan alanı kurtaran yardımcı program. yedek disk Arızalanan sürücüyü değiştirmek için otomatik olarak kullanılan SAN'daki atanmış veya kullanılmayan bir sürücü. Depolama Alanı Ağı (SAN) Depolama alanı ağı (SAN), blok depolama kurallarını kullanarak yüksek performanslı ve yüksek kullanımdaki depolama alt sistemlerine erişim sağlayan özel bir ağdır. SAN, ana bilgisayar sunucularındaki ana bilgisayar veriyolu adaptörleri (HBA'lar), depolama trafiğini yönlendirmeye 14yardım eden anahtarlar ve disk depolama alt sistemleri gibi özel aygıtlardan oluşur. SAN'ın temel özelliği, depolama alt sistemlerinin birden çok ana bilgisayar için aynı anda kullanılabilir olmasıdır, böylece ölçülebilir ve esnek olurlar. NAS ile karşılaştırın. Depolama Kümesi Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, güvenilirliği, kullanılabilirliği, hizmet verebilirliği ve (yük dengelemesiyle) performansı iyileştirmek amacıyla birbirine bağlı çoklu SAN denetleyiciler. Depolama Merkezi otomatik denetleyici yük devretmesi sağlamak için aktif-aktif yapılandırma kullanır. Her denetleyicideki tam olarak yansıtılan, pille desteklenen önbellek, yeniden başlatmada veri güvenilirliği sağlar ve hacimlerin tekli denetleyici arızası durumunda denetleyiciler arasında taşınmasını sağlar. Depolama Kümelemesi Aktif-aktif yapılandırmada çoklu denetleyicilerle otomatik denetleyici yük devretmesi sağlayan Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi özelliği. Tam yansımalı, pille desteklenen önbellek hata toleransı ve denetleyicinin arızalanması durumunda otomatik yeniden başlatma/kurtarma sağlar. Depolama Havuzu Bkz. havuz. Depolama Profili Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, verinin depolanacağı sürücü türünü (katman) ve her katman için kullanılacak RAID seviyesini belirleyen kurallar seti. Depolama Türü Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, depolama havuzundan alanın nasıl ayrılacağını ve korunacağını kontrol eden yedeklilik seçenekleri ve blok boyutu gibi öznitelikler seti. şeritleme Disk şeritleme, bir dizide veriyi üç veya daha fazla diske yazar ama her diskte alanın bir kısmını kullanır. "Şerit" tarafından kullanılan alanın miktarı kullanılan her diskte aynıdır. Sanal bir disk bir dizideki aynı disk setinde birden çok şerit kullanabilir. Bkz. yansıtma ve RAID. simetrik çoklu işlem (SMP) Yüksek bant genişliği bağlantısı ile birbirine bağlı ve bir işletim sistemi (her işlemcinin G/Ç aygıtlarına eşit erişim hakkı olduğu) tarafından yönetilen iki ya da daha fazla işlemciye sahip sistemi tanımlamak için kullanılır. eşitleme Bkz. Senkron Eşleme. Senkron Eşleme Aynı veriyi, uygulama G/Ç tamamlama mesajını almadan önce farklı fiziksel donanımda saklanan iki ayrı hacme atomik olarak yazan özellik. Her ikisi de ya tam ya da arızalı olarak yazılır, böylece her iki hacim de her zaman tam olarak senkronizedir. Ancak özellik, uygulama için yazma gecikmesini artırabilir. Bkz. eşitleme. Sistem Kontrol Ağı (SCN) Dell AIM'in Denetleyici, personalar, ve VMRack'ler arasındaki iletişim için kullandığı özel ağ. Denetleyici bu ağı aynı zamanda sunucuları keşfetmek ve bunların üzerindeki personalar ile VMRack'leri başlatmak için kullanır. Sistem Kurulum programı Sistem donanımının yapılandırılmasını ve parola koruma gibi özellikler ayarlayarak sistem çalışmasının özelleştirilmesini sağlayan BIOS tabanlı program. Sistem Kurulum programı NVRAM'da saklandığından, tüm ayarlar değiştirilene kadar etkili olarak kalır. Sistem Dağıtım Araçları BT profesyonelleri için; disk görüntüleme, kullanıcı durum taşıması, uzaktan alan yönetimi, sistem onarımı ve kurtarması ile bilgisayar envanter taraması ve değerlendirmesi gibi araçlar sağlayan dağıtım yönetim çözümü. Ayrıca bilgisayar envanter taraması ve değerlendirmesi gibi dağıtım öncesi ve sonrası yapılandırma görevlerini otomatik hale getirir ve disk, BIOS ile RAID yapılandırması, yazılım dağıtımı ile yapılandırma yönetimini de otomatik hale getirir. Sistem Yönetim Araçları BT profesyonelleri için envanter yönetimi, yazılım dağılımı, raporlar, ek yönetimi, varlık yönetimi, yazma ve hizmet desteği gibi temel görevleri web tabanlı bir arabirimden gerçekleştirilmesini sağlayan Dell KACE araçları tabanlı sistem yönetim çözümü. 15şablon Dell AIM kapsamında, (şablondaki değişiklikleri engellemek için) çalıştıramayacağınız ama diğer personaları oluşturmak için klonlayabileceğiniz dormant persona. şablon hacmi İnce klonları oluşturabileceğiniz salt okunur hacim. ince klon Şablon hacmiyle alan paylaşan hacim. İnce klonlar, çok miktarda ortak veriye sahip olan çoklu hacimleri içeren yapılandırmalar için depolama alanının etkili kullanımını sağlar. Ölçülü kaynak sağlama SAN'da mevcut olan alanı fazla ön hazırlama (fazla abone olma) özelliği. Ölçülü kaynak sağlamayı kullanan (hacimler gibi) depolama nesneleri potansiyel maksimum boyutlarını uygulamalara rapor eder ama bundan çok daha az alan kullanabilir. Ölçülü kaynak sağlama kurumların genel depolama giderlerini azaltmalarını, kullanılabilirliği artırmalarını ve daha iyi bir performansa kavuşmalarını sağlar. katmanlı depolama Hızlı ve sık olarak gereken verilerin genellikle pahalı, hızlı medya türlerinde ve nadir gerekli olan verilerin daha az pahalı ve daha yavaş ortamlarda saklandığı depolama optimizasyon stratejisi. yönetilmeyen alan Dell EqualLogic PS Serisi dizilerde birincil gruptan erişilmeyen ikincil gruptaki atanmış alan kapasitesi. yer-uydu bağlantı noktası Bir ağ hub'ı ya da anahtarı üzerinde bulunan ve bir çapraz bağlantı kablosu olmadan diğer hub ya da anahtarlara bağlanmak için kullanılan yuva. boşaltma Dell EqualLogic Grup Yöneticisinde, üyenin çevrim içi kaldığı şekilde üyeyi bir gruptan çıkarma. Görüntü Hacmi Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezinde, veri kurtarma birincil amacıyla önceki bir yeniden oynatmadan oluşturulmuş olan salt okunur hacim. Bkz. Yeniden oynatma. Sanal Bağlantı Noktası veya Sanal Bağlantı Noktası Modu Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi kapsamında, Sanal Bağlantı Noktaları rezerv bağlantı noktası ihtiyacını ortadan kaldırır. Sanal Bağlantı Noktası Modunda çalışırken tüm ön uç bağlantı noktaları G/Ç'ı kabul eder ve Hata Etki Alanının bir parçası olabilir. Sanal Bağlantı Noktalarının devreye alınmasıyla ilgili bilgi için Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi Sistem Kurulum Kılavuzu'na bakın. sanal World Wide Port Adı (vWWPM) Dell AIM'de SAN ile başlatılan personalar oluşturmak için kullanılan Sanal World Wide Port Adı. Virtualization (Sanallaştırma) Tekli bir bilgisayar veya depolama aygıtının kaynaklarını çoklu ortamlarda paylaşmak için yazılım kullanma yeteneği. Tekli bir fiziksel sistem veya aygıt kullanıcıya, çoklu işletim sistemlerini taşımaya elverişli çoklu sanal sistem olarak görünebilir. VMRack Aracı yazılım ile Red Hat Xen, VMware ESX veya Microsoft Hyper-V bir kombinasyonunu çalıştıran sunucudaki sanal makinelerin (VM'ler) rafı. hacim Depolama dizisi veya dizilerine şeritlenmiş olan depolama birimi. hacim toplama Hacimlerde eş zamanlı olarak işlem gerçekleştirmek amacıyla gruplanmış hacim grupları. Bkz. anlık görüntü toplaması, eşleme toplaması. hacim rezervi Boş havuz alanından bir hacme ayrılan alan miktarı. Ölçülü kaynak sağlama olmadan hacim rezervi rapor edilen boyutla aynıdır. Hacim Türü Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi kapsamında, Hacim Türü: dinamik, Yeniden oynatma açık veya Eşleme olabilir. Hacim, en az bir yeniden oynatma bu hacimden alınana kadar dinamiktir. Bir Yeniden oynatma hacimden alındıktan sonra Yeniden Oynatma açık hale gelir. Eşleme hacmi diğer bir Dell Compellent Depolama Merkezi sistemine Eşlenendir. vRack Dell AIM kapsamında, sanal bir anahtara (vRack anahtarı) bağlı olan bir mantıksal ana bilgisayar grubudur. 16vRack anahtarı Dell AIM kapsamında, vRack'teki ana bilgisayarları bağlayan sanal bir anahtar. vWWPN Bkz. sanal World Wide Port Adı. 1718Dell 词汇表 – 版本 2 词汇表词汇表 ACPI 请参阅高级配置和电源接口。 主动控制模块 对于双控制模块阵列中的 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列,也就是在网络上主动提供 I/O 服务的控制模块。如果它停止正常工作,会故障转移到备用控制模块。请参阅备用控 制模块。 主动控制器 主动管理 Dell AIM 环境的 Dell AIM 控制器。 有效空间 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,卷使用的空间大小(不包含重播)。此容量不包 括 RAID 的额外开销。请参阅重播。 实际空间 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,卷有效空间加上重播空间的量。请参阅有效空间、 重播空间。 高级配置和电源接口 (ACPI) 用于启用操作系统以指导配置和电源管理的标准接口。 代理程序 在 Dell AIM 环境中(基于 Red Hat Xen 和 Microsoft Hyper-V 的 VMRack,加上角色), 安装在元件上的可选软件,控制器使用该软件管理元件和配置其网络属性。 无代理角色 没有安装 Dell AIM 代理程序的 Dell AIM 角色。 环境温度 系统所在的区域或房间的温度。 阵列成员 配置到 PS Series 组中的 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列。组可以有多个成员。 阵列序列号 在 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列环境中,被编码入阵列硬件中,独一无二的 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列标识字符串。请参阅服务标签。 ASM/ME 请参阅自动快照管理器/Microsoft 版。 ASM/VE 请参阅自动快照管理器/VMware 版。 资产管理工具 为 IT 专家准备的基于工具的 Dell KACE 资产管理解决方案,可用来跟踪软件和许可证 合规性。它通过基于 Web 的仪表板对资源清册、软件资产、版本、升级和计算机进行 自动化管理。 资产标签 分配给系统的独立代码,通常由管理员分配,用于安全保护或跟踪。 已分配磁盘 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,为了便于管理和被用来存储卷和重播而分配给磁 盘文件夹的物理存储介质。请参阅磁盘文件夹、存储池。 分配模式 用于控制如何根据主机中 HBA 的可用性将角色和 VMRack 分配给主机的机制。请参阅 HBA。 异步复制 将数据先写入本地存储,然后在远程 SAN 上排队存储数据的过程。如果本地 SAN 在写 入操作被发送之前发生故障,复制可能会失败。请参阅复制、同步复制、和远程即时 重播。 自动 RAID 配置 在 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 组环境中,在阵列上配置用户选定的 RAID 策略的内部过 程。 自动快照管理器/ Microsoft 版 (ASM/ME) 用于 Microsoft 管理控制台的管理单元控制台应用程序,可让您管理智能副本。 自动快照管理器/ VMware 版 (ASM/VE) 与 VMware 虚拟环境一起使用的、基于 Web 的应用程序,可让您管理智能副本。 3可用空间 所有驱动器上的总可用存储量。 后端 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,将控制器或存储群集(例如,控制器的冗余对) 连接到本地磁盘柜的专用单独网络。 后端网络 Dell Compellent Storage Center 控制器中控制器与磁盘之间的连接。 基卷(Dell EqualLogic PS Series) 挂载到计算机上,并可通过其 Windows 分配的驱动器号(例如 G:)或挂载点访问的 卷。 基卷(Dell EqualLogic Group Manager) 拥有快照的卷。快照取决于基卷。如果基卷已破坏,则快照已被删除。 底板管理控制器 (BMC) 实施 IPMI(智能平台管理接口)协议的服务器管理模块。在 Dell AIM 环境中,控制器 使用 BMC 远程控制某些型号的服务器。 刀片 对于 Dell AIM SDK,刀片是主机超类的元件。对于 Dell 模块化系统,刀片是指安装到 机柜中的模块化服务器。 BMC 请参阅底板管理控制器。 可启动介质 在无法从硬盘驱动器启动系统时用于启动系统的 CD、SD 卡或 USB 存储卡。 缓存 用于保存数据或指令的副本以进行快速数据检索的高速存储区域。 CHA 请参阅 Compellent 主机适配器。 质询握手身份验证协 议 (CHAP) 质询握手身份验证协议是使用加密的质询响应机制的网络登录协议,用于将对卷和快 照的访问限制于那些提供正确的用户名和密码的主机。CHAP 也可用于登录/管理员帐 户。 通道 在 Dell/AIM 环境中,您可以将最多八个物理连接之一分配给交换机端口并可以使用最 多八个物理 NIC 连接到角色。您可以将网络配置为首选一个或两个通道用于其通信 量,因此首选通道发生故障时通信量会透明地重新路由到其他通道。 CHAP 请参阅质询握手身份验证协议。 机箱式交换机 在 Dell AIM 环境中,机箱托架中的以太网交换机。机箱式交换机通过控制器进行管理。 客户端设备通信证书 在 EKM 环境中,允许客户端与服务器通信的特殊加密密钥。 群集节点 资源群集的物理成员,例如服务器群集中的主机或存储群集中的 SAN。 集合 在 ASM/ME 中,集合是存储对象(例如卷、快照或应用程序组件)的相关组,它通过 集合主节点下 ASM 控制台树中的节点表示。在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,卷和 副本集合以及自定义快照集合出现在卷视图下的层次结构中。 Compellent 主机适配 器 (CHA) 每个 Dell Compellent Storage Center 控制器中安置的内部缓存卡/电池。写入缓存存储 器镜像到缓存卡。在双控制器 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,控制器 1 的缓存卡容 纳控制器 2 的镜像,控制器 2 的缓存卡容纳控制器 1 的镜像。在单控制器 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,缓存卡容纳单一控制器的镜像。 配置 描述 Dell AIM 环境整个内容和配置的数据库。 保留模式 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,当剩余可用空间降至临界阈值(通常为 10%,最 多 32 GB)时进入数据保留模式。在保留模式下,Dell Compellent Storage Center 会生成 警报,阻止创建新卷,并以较快的速率开始让重播过期以释放空间。请参阅紧急模式。 控制台 基于 Web 的用户界面,用于监控 Dell AIM 环境中的元件并与它们一起工作。Dell AIM 控制台通过 Dell AIM 控制器托管。 4控制模块 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列中的物理处理器和接口组件。控制模块包含闪存中的 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 固件并为缓存存储器中存储的数据提供临时电源连续性。控 制模块有多个网络接口和一个可选的串行端口。阵列可包含两个可热交换的双冗余控 制器。主动控制模块提供 I/O 服务,而备用控制模块镜像其缓存中的数据。 控制面板 系统的一部分,包含指示灯和控件(例如电源按钮和电源指示灯)。 控制端口 iSCSI 发起程序(服务器)连接以发出存储请求的目标 iSCSI 端口。在配置用于虚拟端 口模式的 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,将为每个 iSCSI 故障域创建一个控制端口, 从而将 iSCSI 通信量重定向到相应的虚拟端口上。 控制器 (Dell AIM) 管理物理和虚拟硬件、软件以及网络配置并托管 Dell AIM 控制台的软件。在一对弹性 控制器的环境中,每个控制器在专用服务器上运行,但在共享文件系统上共享一个配 置数据库以及其他密钥文件。 控制器 (Dell Compellent) 提供磁盘聚合 (RAID)、I/O 路由、错误检测和数据恢复。为整个 Dell Compellent Storage Center 子系统提供智能管理。每个 Storage Center 系统包含至少一个控制器。Storage Center 和推荐的纠错操作以改进系统的性能和可用性。 控制器服务 在 Dell AIM 环境中,控制器用户用于与系统控制网络 (SCN)、托管的交换机、控制台 和 CLI 等进行通信的一个或多个虚拟 IP 地址。默认情况下,这是主动控制器上的单一 虚拟 IP 地址,但您可以指定唯一的地址用于 SCN 服务和 SNMP Trap Collector。 Copilot 服务 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 内,集中式支持、产品培训和销售资源的组合,能够 主动监控系统并建议纠错操作以改进系统的性能和可用性。 复制-镜像-迁移 允许卷在不同磁盘类型和 RAID 级别之间迁移的 Dell Compellent Storage Center 功能。 凭证存储 在 EKM 环境中,容纳跨会话凭证信息的存储库。凭证信息是诸如用户名、密码和证书 等的安全数据。 加密对象 一种保护数据的方法。 数据收集器 在服务器后台运行的 Dell Compellent Enterprise Manager 组件,用于收集连接到该服务 器的所有 Dell Compellent Storage Center 系统上的信息。 数据即时重播 一项 Dell Compellent Storage Center 功能,能够以定义的间隔捕获本地 SAN 上卷的高空 间效率时间点副本 (PITC),从而提供将卷回滚到以前时间点的能力。请参阅重播、快 照。 数据分级管理 一项 Dell Compellent Storage Center 功能,根据 I/O 活动(需求)级别将数据页自动迁移 到性能较高或较低的设备。请参阅分层存储。 DDR 请参阅双倍数据速率。 委派空间 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 环境中,组中留出用于存储合作伙伴所接收副本的空 间。 Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) Dell Encryption Key Manager (EKM) 通过管理 Dell 磁带自动化解决方案的密钥,进而保护 存储在 LTO 磁带上的数据。 Dell 远程访问控制器 (DRAC) 提供带外管理工具的接口卡。该控制器有自己的处理器、内存、网络连接和系统总线 访问权限,并允许系统管理员跨网络远程控制系统。 设备驱动程序 使得操作系统或某些其他程序能够与外围设备正确接口的程序。 DHCP 请参阅动态主机配置协议。 数字多用途磁盘 数字多用途光盘或数字视频光盘 (DVD)。 5磁盘文件夹 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,可由用户查看和管理的物理存储介质设备(磁盘、 SSD)的集合。磁盘文件夹可确定从其分配卷存储空间的存储池。尽管磁盘文件夹可 关联多个存储池,但通过将所有磁盘分配给同一文件夹和存储池可最大发挥出 Dell Compellent Storage Center 的性能优势。 磁盘位置 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,磁盘驱动器在其机柜内的插槽位置,以行-列表 示。例如,磁盘位置 01-02 指插槽位于从上数的第一行和从左数的第二列。 DNS 请参阅域名系统。 域名系统 (DNS) 将 Internet 域名(如 www.example.com)转换成 IP 地址(如 208.77.188.166)的方法。 休眠角色 在 AIM 环境中,当前没有在主机上运行(或等待运行)的角色。 双倍数据速率 (DDR) 双倍数据速率。内存模块中使用的一种技术,可在时钟周期的上升脉冲和下降脉冲均 传输数据,有可能成倍提高数据速率。 DRAC 请参阅 Dell 远程访问控制器。 DRAM 请参阅动态随机存取存储器。 双冗余 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,用于防止失去两个驱动器中任何一个的存储配置 文件选项(通常通过使用 RAID 10 和/或 RAID 6)。 DVD 请参阅数字多用途光盘。 动态主机配置协议 (DHCP) 一种将 IP 地址自动分配给客户端系统的方法。 动态随机存取存储器 (DRAM) 系统的 RAM 通常全部由 DRAM 芯片组成。 EKM 请参阅 Dell Encryption Key Manager。 EKM 管理员 在 EKM 环境中,可创建或删除用户和组的超级用户。 EKM 加密管理员 (tklmadmin) 在 EKM 环境中,创建或删除密钥和设备的日常用户。 紧急模式 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,当系统由于没有更多可用空间而无法再操作时进 入的模式。在紧急模式下,所有服务器 I/O 都将被拒绝,所有卷都将脱机且无法恢复联 机,直到释放足够的磁盘空间以退出紧急模式。请参阅保留模式。 机柜 为多个磁盘或刀片提供单个接口、电源和冷却功能的物理机柜。 环境 在 Dell AIM 环境中,通过 Dell AIM 控制器管理的硬件、软件和网络配置的集合。 Eth0 请参阅以太网端口 0。 Eth1 请参阅以太网端口 1。 以太网端口 0 (Eth0) 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,Eth0 是专用于管理的以太网接口。 以太网端口 1 (Eth1) 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,Eth1 是专用于控制器之间的进程间通信(用于群 集或远程复制)的以太网接口。 外部网络 在 Dell AIM 环境环境中,并非 Dell AIM 环境的组成部分,但从物理和逻辑上连接到该 环境的网络。 外部交换机 在 Dell AIM 环境环境中,并非 Dell AIM 环境的组成部分,但从物理和逻辑上连接到该 环境的交换机。 6结构 充当统一路由基础设施的互连交换机的组合。它允许在 SAN 上的设备之间有多个连 接并且可透明地添加新设备。在网络上存在至少有一台交换机的 FC(或 iSCSI)拓扑。 FastTrack 可选的 Dell Compellent Storage Center 公用程序,用于动态地将最活跃数据放在外部(更 快)磁盘磁轨上。 FAT 请参阅文件分配表。 故障域 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 环境内,故障域标识了故障转移集合。在虚拟端口模 式下,所有前端端口均可成为一个故障域的组成部分。在传统模式下,每个主要端口 和保留端口可创建一个故障域。 FC 请参阅光纤信道。 FE 请参阅前端网络。 光纤信道 (FC) 用于将服务器连接到控制器和后端磁盘柜的高速互连。FC 组件包括 HBA、总线、集线 器、交换机和电缆。术语 FC 还指允许数据传输速率高达每秒 10 千兆位的高速、全双 工串行通信协议。 文件分配表 (FAT) MS-DOS 用于组织和记录文件存储的文件系统结构。Microsoft Windows 操作系统可选 择使用 FAT 文件系统结构。 文件传输协议 (FTP) 用于在计算机或主机之间传输批量数据文件的应用程序层协议。 前端网络 (FE) Dell Compellent Storage Center 中的组件,启动数据写入的 SAN 数据流写入(从服务器 到交换机,再到控制器,然后到磁盘)。一般而言,服务器(或交换机)是控制器的 前端。不过,将数据复制到远程系统的 Storage Center 系统相对于远程系统为前端。请 参阅后端。 FTP 请参阅文件传输协议。 GB 请参阅千兆字节。 千兆字节 (GB) 1024 兆字节或 1,073,741,824 字节。不过,当指硬盘驱动器容量时,该术语通常取整为 1,000,000,000 字节。 组 请参阅 PS Series 组。 HBA 请参阅主机总线适配器。 HIT/LE 请参阅适用于 Linux 的主机集成工具。 HIT/ME 请参阅适用于 Windows 的主机集成工具。 HIT/VM 请参阅适用于 VMware 的主机集成工具。 主机 在 Dell AIM 环境中,主机可为物理服务器(机架安装式或刀片)或虚拟机。在 Dell AIM SDK 中,为包括刀片服务器、机架安装式服务器和虚拟机 (VM) 的超类。 主机适配器 用于实现系统总线与外围设备(通常是存储设备)之间通信的控制器。 主机总线适配器 (HBA) 将服务器连接到 SAN(存储区域网络)的设备,通常为附加卡。每个 HBA 在 SAN 上通 过其 WWPN(全球通用端口号)进行唯一标识。常见的 HBA 类型包括光纤信道和 iSCSI。 适用于 Linux 的主机集 成工具 (HIT/LE) 一套将 ESX 系统与 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 存储阵列集成的工具,包括自动快照管理 器/VMware 版 (ASM/VE)、EqualLogic Datastore Manager 和 EqualLogic Virtual Desktop Deployment 公用程序。 7适用于 Windows 的主 机集成工具 (HIT/ME) 一套可以配置和管理阵列的应用程序,包括 ASM/ME、DSM(多路径 I/O 设备特定模 块)和 RSW(远程设置向导)。 适用于 VMware 的主 机集成工具 (HIT/VM) 一套将 Linux 系统与 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 存储阵列集成的工具,包括远程设置向导 命令行界面 (RSWCLI)、EqualLogic 主机性能和配置优化套件 (eqltune) 和 EqualLogic 日志 收集工具 (eqllog)。 热备用磁盘 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 环境中,热备用磁盘是一个备份磁盘。如果活动阵列 发生故障,控制器会将热备用磁盘并入当前阵列并立即重建数据。尽管热备用可在无 人为干预下变为活性磁盘,请记住尽快更换发生故障的驱动器,使得阵列再次通过新 的热备用进行保护。热备用可跨多个磁盘柜。Storage Center 热备用的容量可与其更 换的数据驱动器不同。 热插拔 在系统通电且正在运行的情况下,将某一设备(通常是硬盘驱动器或内部冷却风扇) 插入或安装到主机系统中的功能。也称为热交换。 热交换 请参阅热插拔。 I/O 输入/输出。键盘是输入设备,显示器是输出设备。通常,I/O 活动与计算活动可区分 开来。 ID 在 Dell AIM 环境中,其中元件的唯一标识符,在其添加到该环境时进行分配。 iDRAC 请参阅集成 Dell 远程访问控制器。 IKEv2-SCSI 一种用于证书创建的协议。 映像 特定于 Dell AIM,存储在角色或 VMRack 启动的磁盘或存储阵列上的实际字位,伴随控 制器用于在特定类型主机上启动该映像的信息。例如,您可以使用多个映像配置角色 或 VMRack,以便同一角色可在物理服务器或虚拟机上启动。 infiniBand infiniBand 提供点对点双向串行链路,用于连接处理器和高速外围设备。 即时重播 请参阅数据即时重播。 集成 Dell 远程访问控 制器 (iDRAC) 使用 Internet SCSI 协议的远程访问控制器。 智能平台管理接口 (IPMI) 一种通过某些服务器中的管理模块实施的协议,用于远程控制服务器。Dell 服务器中 的刀片管理模块实施 iPMI。 互连交换机 Dell AIM 环境中的交换机,通过控制器管理,用于互连元件,例如机箱、vRack、其他 互连交换机和外部交换机。 internet SCSI (iSCSI) Internet SCSI(请参阅 SCSI)。一种封装标准 SCSI 命令用于 IP 网络上客户端服务器 (iSCSI 启动程序)和网络存储设备(iSCSI 目标)之间通信的协议。 IPMI 请参阅智能平台管理接口。 iSCSI 请参阅 Internet SCSI。 密钥管理互操作性协 议 (KMIP) 设置用于企业密钥管理系统和加密系统之间通信的标准。 密钥服务端口 操作系统用于在 EKM 中通信的端口。 密钥组 在 EKM 中,分配给特定部门、区域或硬件类型的一组密钥。 密钥 用于保护 EKM 中数据的加密证书。 密钥库/密钥组/主密钥 库 EKM 中的一组加密密钥。 8KMIP 请参阅密钥管理互操作性协议。 Java 数据库连接 (JDBC) Java 编程语言的 API,定义客户端如何去访问、查询和更新数据库中数据的方式。 JDBC 请参阅 Java 数据库连接。 主控制器 双控制器 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中的主控制器。通常,主控制器和对等控制器 共享存储 I/O 负载,基本上为双倍吞吐量,但只有主控制器执行外部管理功能。如果一 个控制器发生故障,剩余的控制器将变为或保持为主控制器并承担两个控制器的责任。 请参阅对等控制器。 传统模式 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,故障域被配置为通过冗余设备连接的、专属成对 主要和保留的前端端口,作为针对单点故障保护存储通信量的机制。请参阅故障域、 虚拟端口或虚拟端口模式。 线性磁带开放 (LTO) 一种开放式标准磁带格式。 逻辑单元号码 (LUN) 逻辑单元是一个存储磁盘或一组磁盘的概念性分支(子单元)。每个逻辑单元都有可 唯一标识该单元的地址,称为逻辑单元号 (LUN)。 LTO 请参阅线性磁带开放。 LTO 密钥组叠加 在 EKM 中,一旦默认密钥组用完后被指定使用的一组密钥。 LUN 请参阅逻辑单元号。 MAC 地址 请参阅介质访问控制地址。 托管磁盘 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,分配给磁盘文件夹以便将这些设备与存储池关联 起来的存储介质设备(磁盘、SSD)。请参阅存储池、磁盘文件夹。 托管系统 托管系统是使用 Dell OpenManage Server Administrator 监控和管理的任何系统。 管理 IP 地址 用于连接到启用智能 IP 的设备以便监控或管理该设备的地址。该地址可以专门由管 理应用程序独占使用或共享以供管理和服务应用程序使用。 管理网络 将 iSCSI 通信量(卷 I/O)与管理通信量(GUI 和 CLI 会话,以及其他组管理通信和组间 操作)分开的可选管理网络。 管理工作站 用于从中央位置远程管理一个或多个托管系统的系统。 手动重播 允许用户手动创建卷的时间点副本的 Dell Compellent Storage Center 功能。 手动传送复制 通过可携带介质而不是网络完成的复制。在复制伙伴之间的网络链路过慢或不适合传 输大量数据的情况下使用。 手动传输公用程序 Dell EqualLogic 的一个独立公用程序,通过可携带介质而不是网络执行卷复制。该公用 程序有图形和命令行用户界面。 介质访问控制地址 (MAC 地址) 您的系统在网络上的唯一硬件编号。 迁移卷 一条 Dell Compellent Storage Center 命令,用于将数据从一个卷移动到另一个卷。 迁移 在 EKM 环境中,在 Dell Encryption Key Manager 3.0 安装期间(而不是之后)将一个密 钥库组合到现有密钥库中。 卷镜像 一条 Dell Compellent Storage Center 命令,用于将本地卷复制到远程 Dell Compellent Storage Center,并在本地卷和远程卷之间保持更新,直到镜像被手动断开。 镜像 一种数据冗余类型,使用一组物理驱动器存储数据,并使用一组或多组额外的驱动器 存储这些数据的副本。镜像功能由软件提供。请参阅分拆、RAID。 9NAS 请参阅网络连接存储。 网络连接 定义角色和 VMRack 所需网络连接的对象。在将元件添加到网络时创建网络连接,例 如,当您将角色添加到网络时。 网络连接存储 (NAS) NAS 是用于在网络上实施共享存储的概念之一。NAS 系统有其自己的操作系统、集成 硬件和软件,它们经过优化,可以满足特定的存储需要。 NTP 网络时间协议 (NTP) 是通过数据包交换、可变延迟数据网络同步计算机系统时钟的协 议。 过度订阅空间 在支持精简配置的 SAN 中,配置为可用但物理上不存在的存储空间量(即,已配置空 间减去可用空间)。 奇偶校验分拆 在 RAID 阵列中,包含奇偶校验数据的已分拆硬盘驱动器。 分区 使用 fdisk 命令创建的硬盘驱动器的物理区域。随后可使用 format 命令将分区划分为 多个逻辑驱动器。 被动控制器 充当热备用的 Dell AIM 控制器,准备在主动控制器发生故障时接管管理环境。 对等控制器 在双控制器 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,对等控制器与主控制器共享 I/O 负载但不 执行外部管理功能。如果主控制器发生故障,对等控制器将承担两个控制器的 I/O 和管 理责任。请参阅主控制器。 角色 磁盘中捕获的服务器环境:在 Dell AIM 环境中的主机上运行应用程序所需的操作系统、 可选的 Dell AIM 代理程序软件以及网络和其他设置。 池 SAN 中可供卷使用的存储空间。在 Dell Compellent Enterprise Storage Manager 和 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,这等同于 SAN 中的总空间。在 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列中,这等同于特定池成员中的总空间。 池管理员 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 组中的一个帐户,拥有仅在组的一个特定池或一组池中管理对 象的权限。请与组管理员进行比较。 主要组 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 环境内,包含复制伙伴关系中的原始卷的组。请参阅 备用组。 主要卷 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 环境内,配置用于复制到复制伙伴的卷。 PS Series 阵列 单个 Dell EqualLogic iSCSI 存储单元,通常配置为 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 组。您可以 将多个 PS Series 阵列加入到较大的 PS Series 组并将其作为单个 iSCSI SAN 进行管理。 PS Series 组 包含一个或多个 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 存储阵列的 iSCSI 存储实体,可通过单一 IP 地 址访问并作为存储区域网络 (SAN) 进行管理。 公共服务 在 Dell AIM 环境中,用于连接到主动控制器上的控制台或 CLI 的控制器服务虚拟 IP 地 址。 RAC 远程访问控制器。 RAID 请参阅独立磁盘冗余阵列。 RAID 0 数据跨可用磁盘拆分以提供改进的性能。RAID 0 不提供任何数据冗余。 RAID 10 数据跨可用磁盘驱动器拆分并镜像,提供数据可用性和改进的性能。保存至少卷上所 有数据的一个完整副本。RAID 10 提供最佳读/写性能,提高了承受多次故障的机率, 并可实现最快的数据还原。 10RAID 5 通过数学方式推导出的旋转奇偶校验条带来保持数据的逻辑副本。奇偶校验条带来自 数据条带。此方法的冗余信息开销比 RAID 10 少,不过由于在每次写入时计算奇偶校验 条带而导致写入性能比 RAID 10 差。读取性能与 RAID 10 类似。 RAID 50 RAID 级别 50 是 RAID 级别 5 和 RAID 级别 0 的组合。RAID 50 包括跨多个驱动器的奇偶 校验和磁盘拆分。 恢复卷 出于恢复数据目的而创建的卷。在 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列中,通过升级入站副 本集作为故障转移操作的组成部分而创建了恢复卷。您还可以创建恢复模板卷和恢复 精简克隆。在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,视图卷创建自重播。请参阅副本、视 图卷、重播。 冗余 复制信息或硬件设备组件以确保在主要资源发生故障时,备用资源可接管其功能。Dell Compellent Storage Center 为每个组件提供冗余来避免发生单点故障。单冗余可防止在 任一资源发生故障时丢失数据。双冗余可在任何两个资源发生故障时防止丢失数据。 独立磁盘冗余阵列 (RAID) 独立磁盘冗余阵列。一种提供数据冗余的方法。一些常见的 RAID 实施包括 RAID 0、 RAID 1、RAID 5、RAID 10 和 RAID 50。请参阅镜像、拆分。 远程即时重播 Dell Compellent Storage Center 解决方案功能,该功能将重播复制到远程 Dell Compellent Storage Center。本地和远程 Dell Compellent Storage Centers 是主动-主动状态,并且可 按独立的间隔进行同步或异步双向复制。Dell Compellent Storage Center 复制需要 Enterprise Manager 软件应用程序及复制许可证。请参阅重播、远程系统、复制。 远程设置向导 (RSW) 用于在安装了 Host Integration Tools/Microsoft 版后配置 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列的 图形用户界面 (GUI)。 远程系统 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,一个单独的 SAN 配置为从本地 Dell Compellent Storage Center 上的原始卷接收复制数据。Dell Compellent Storage Center 复制需要 Enterprise Manager 软件应用程序及复制许可证。请参阅复制。 重播 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,包含在发起复制的时间点出现之数据映像的完全 可用的数据时间点副本 (PITC)。该副本可本地存储或在远程 Dell Compellent Storage Center 上存储。请参阅快照、数据即时重播、远程即时重播。 重播配置文件 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,确定何时以及如何制作重播时间点副本及其保存 时长的一组规则。请参阅重播。 重播空间 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,自动保留并用于重播的空间量。请参阅主动空间、 实际空间。 副本 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 卷的时间点表示。原始卷及其副本位于不同的 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 组(复制伙伴)上,这些组可能有一些地理距离间隔以便于灾难容错。 副本集合 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,卷集合的每次复制所形成的一组副本。 副本集合集 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,卷集合的一组副本集合。 副本保留 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,复制伙伴上留出用于特定卷副本集的委派空间部 分。您可配置副本保留用于主要组中的卷,但实际副本保留位于备用组中。 副本组 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,卷、模板卷或精简克隆卷的一组完整副本。 复制系统 配置为将复制数据从一个或多个本地卷发送到远程 Storage Center 的Dell Compellent Storage Center。请参阅复制、远程系统、远程即时重播。 复制 将卷数据(仅增量)从主要(本地)SAN 复制到备用(远程)SAN,以便数据必要时 可从任一 SAN 进行恢复的过程。SAN 可相隔无限距离。 复制伙伴 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,配置为从另一个伙伴发送或接收副本的组。 11RSW 请参阅远程设置向导。 可运行的角色 在 Dell AIM 环境中,已启动并等待分配给主机的网络启动角色。 SAN 请参阅存储区域网络。 SAN HeadQuarter 使您能够从单个图形界面监控多个 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 组。它会收集并格式化性 能数据和其他重要的组信息。 SCN 请参阅系统控制网络。 SCN 服务 Dell AIM 环境中的角色和 VMRack 用于与主动控制器进行通信的控制器服务虚拟 IP 地 址。 SCSI 请参阅小型计算机系统接口。 SDK 请参阅软件开发工具包。 备用控制模块 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 环境内,备用控制模块从主动控制模块镜像缓存数据。 如果主动控制模块停止正常工作,备用控制模块会接管网络操作。请参阅主动控制模 块。 备用组 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 复制配置中,接收源卷副本的组。请参阅主要组。 服务器群集 一组独立的服务器,作为单个系统一起工作以在单个计算机出现故障的情况下提供不 中断的服务。 服务标签 系统上的标签,用于在致电 Dell 寻求技术支持时来唯一标识系统。 简单邮件传输协议 (SMTP) 定义消息格式和转发程序以便能够在 Internet 上的主机之间发送邮件。 简单网络管理协议 (SNMP) 使网络管理员可远程监控和管理工作站的标准接口。 模拟器 Dell AIM SDK 的一个组件,可模拟运行的 Dell AIM 环境,包括控制器、控制台以及物理 网络和虚拟网络。请参阅 SDK。 小型计算机系统接口 (SCSI) 小型计算机系统接口。一种 I/O 总线接口,具有比标准端口更快的数据传输速率。 SMART 自我监控分析和报告技术,允许硬盘驱动器向系统 BIOS 报告错误和故障,然后将错误 信息显示在屏幕上。 智能副本 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 组中对象的 ASM/ME 时间点、应用程序一致性副本。智能副本 的类型可以是快照、克隆或副本,具体视您所使用的 Auto-Snapshot Manager 版本而 定。 SMP 请参阅对称多处理。 SMTP 请参阅简单邮件传输协议。 快照 卷的时间点副本 (PITC)。请参阅重播。 快照集合 卷集合上的快照操作形成的一组快照。请参阅卷集合。 SNMP 请参阅简单网络管理协议。 SNMP 陷阱收集器 在 Dell AIM 环境中,管理用于将 SNMP 陷阱发送到主动控制器的交换机和其他设备的 控制器服务虚拟 IP 地址。 软件开发工具包 (SDK) 一组开发工具,用于创建特定软件包、软件框架、硬件平台、计算机系统、视频游戏 控制台、操作系统或类似平台的应用程序。 12空间恢复 用于恢复 Windows 报告为正在使用但实际为空、可供 Dell Compellent Storage Center 使 用的空间的公用程序。 备用磁盘 SAN 中指定或未使用的驱动器,用于自动替换发生故障的驱动器。 存储区域网络 (SAN) 存储区域网络 (SAN) 是可以访问使用块存储协议的高性能和高可用性存储子系统的专 用网络。SAN 由特定设备组成,例如主机服务器中的主机总线适配器 (HBA)、帮助路 由存储通信量的交换机以及磁盘存储子系统。SAN 的主要特征是存储子系统通常可同 时用于多台主机,从而使其可扩展并非常灵活。请与 NAS 进行比较。 存储群集 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,出于改进可靠性、可用性、易于维修和性能(通 过负载平衡)目的而互连的多个 SAN 控制器。Storage Center 使用主动-主动配置提供 自动控制器故障转移功能。每个控制器中完全镜像的、电池供电的缓存可确保重新启 动时的数据可靠性并允许卷在单个控制器出现故障的情况下在控制器之间迁移。 存储群集化 一项 Dell Compellent Storage Center 功能,它通过主动-主动配置中的多个控制器提供自 动控制器故障转移功能。完全镜像的、电池供电的缓存在控制器出现故障的情况下提 供容错和自动重启/恢复功能。 存储池 请参阅池。 存储配置文件 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,一组用于定义在其上存储数据的驱动器类型(层) 以及用于每个层的 RAID 级别的规则。 存储类型 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,一组用于控制如何从存储池分配和保护空间的属 性,包括冗余选项和块大小。 拆分 磁盘拆分会跨阵列中的三个或更多个磁盘写入数据,但仅使用每个磁盘中的部分空 间。“条带”所用的空间量在每个所用的磁盘上相同。虚拟磁盘可在阵列中的同一组磁 盘上使用多个条带。另请参阅镜像和 RAID。 对称多处理 (SMP) 用于描述一个系统,该系统具有两个或多个通过高带宽链路连接但由操作系统管理的 处理器,其中每个处理器对 I/O 设备具有同等的访问权限。 同步 请参阅同步复制。 同步复制 在应用程序接收 I/O 完成消息之前,将相同的数据自动写入两个存储在不同物理硬件上 的单独卷中的功能。两个写入都完成或失败,因此两个卷始终完全同步。不过,该功 能会增加应用程序的写入延迟。请参阅同步。 系统控制网络 (SCN) Dell AIM 用于在控制器、角色和 VMRack 之间进行通信的专用网络。控制器还使用此网 络查找服务器以及启动服务器上的角色和 VMRack。 系统设置程序 一个基于 BIOS 的程序,可以通过设置功能(例如密码保护)配置系统的硬件和自定 义系统的操作。由于系统设置程序存储在 NVRAM 中,因此任何设置在更改前都保持 有效。 系统部署工具 一个基于工具的 Dell KACE 部署管理解决方案,适用于 IT 专家,提供用于磁盘映像、 用户状态迁移、远程站点管理、系统修理和恢复以及计算机资源清册扫描和评估的工 具。此外,它将自动处理部署前和部署后配置任务,例如计算机资源清册扫描和评估; 它还会自动进行磁盘、BIOS 和 RAID 配置、软件分发以及配置管理。 系统管理工具 一个基于工具的 Dell KACE 系统管理解决方案,适用于 IT 专家,将通过基于 Web 的界 面进行的任务,例如资源清册管理、软件分发、报告、修补程序管理、资产管理、脚 本编写和服务台支持,实现了流水线作业。 模板 在 Dell AIM 环境中,您可以克隆用于创建其他角色但不能运行(以防止更改模板)的 休眠角色。 模板卷 可用于创建精简克隆的只读卷。 13精简克隆 与模板卷共享空间的卷。精简克隆可有效使用存储空间用于配置具有大量通用数据的 多个卷。 精简配置 可让您过度配置(或过度订阅)SAN 中可用空间的功能。使用精简配置的存储对象(例 如,卷)会向应用程序报告其潜在的最大大小,但可能实际使用的空间要少得多。精 简配置使组织可缩减其总体存储开支,提高可用性和实现更好的性能。 分层存储 存储优化策略,其中快速、且经常需要的数据存储在昂贵、高速介质类型上,而较少 需要的数据则存储在便宜、慢速介质类型上。 未托管的空间 在 Dell EqualLogic PS Series 阵列中,不再能从主要组访问的,备用组上的委派空间容 量。 上行链路端口 网络集线器或交换机上用于连接其他集线器或交换机(无需绞接电缆)的端口。 空出 在 Dell EqualLogic Group Manager 中,在保持组成员联机时从组中移除该成员。 视图卷 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 中,利用以前的重播创建的只读卷,主要目的为用于 恢复数据。请参阅重播。 虚拟端口或虚拟端口 模式 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 环境中,虚拟端口不再需要保留端口。在虚拟端口模 式下操作时,所有前端端口都会接受 I/O 并可成为一个故障域的组成部分。有关启用虚 拟端口的信息,请参阅《Dell Compellent Storage Center 系统设置指南》。 虚拟全球通用端口名 称 (vWWPM) Dell AIM 中用于创建 SAN 引导角色的虚拟全球通用端口名称。 Virtualization(虚拟化)使用软件跨多个环境共享单一计算机或存储设备资源的能力。单一物理系统或设备可 能对用户显示为能够托管多个操作系统的多个虚拟系统。 VMRack 其上运行代理程序软件以及 Red Hat Xen、VMware ESX 或 Microsoft Hyper-V 的组合的服 务器上虚拟机 (VM) 的机架。 卷 拆分为一个或多个存储设备的独立存储单元。 卷集合 出于在卷上同时执行操作目的而组合在一起的多个卷。请参阅快照集合、复制集合。 卷保留 从可用池空间分配给卷的空间量。如果没有精简配置,卷保留与报告的大小相同。 卷类型 在 Dell Compellent Storage Center 环境中,卷类型可以是“动态”、“重播启用”或“复制”。 卷是动态的,直到制作了该卷的至少一个重播。一旦制作了卷的重播,它将变为“重播 启用”。“复制”卷是被复制到其他 Dell Compellent Storage Center 系统的卷。 vRack 在 Dell AIM 环境中,连接到虚拟交换机(vRack 交换机)的主机逻辑组。 vRack 交换机 在 Dell AIM 环境中,连接 vRack 中主机的虚拟交换机。 vWWPN 请参阅虚拟全球通用端口名称。 14 Dell™ PowerEdge™ T605 Systems Getting Started With Your System Guide de mise en route Primeiros passos com o sistema Procedimientos iniciales con el sistemaDell™ PowerEdge™ T605 Systems Getting Started With Your SystemNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; AMD and AMD Opteron are registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices; Microsoft, Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc.; SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model SCM November 2007 P/N GM693 Rev. A00Getting Started With Your System 3 System Features This section describes the major hardware and software features of your system. It also provides information about other documents you may need when setting up your system and how to obtain technical assistance. • One or two dual-core or quad-core AMD™ Opteron™ processors. NOTE: Use the System Setup program to view processor information. See theHardware Owner’s Manual. • A minimum of 1 GB (single-processor systems) or 2 GB (two-processor systems) of 533 or 667 MHz registered parity DDR-II memory modules. Memory is upgradable to a maximum of 32 GB (two-processor systems) by installing combinations of 512-MB, 1-GB, 2-GB, or 4-GB memory modules in the eight memory module sockets on the system board. • Support for up to four 3.5-inch, internal non-hot-pluggable or hotpluggable (when available) Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA hard drives. A controller expansion card is required for SAS hard drives or for more than two SATA hard drives. • One 3.5-inch peripheral drive bay for the optional diskette drive, and two 5.25-inch bays for the following supported drives: DVD-ROM, combination CD-RW/DVD, DVD+RW, or tape backup device. NOTE: DVD devices are data only. • An intrusion switch that signals the appropriate systems management software if the cover is opened. • A 650-W non-redundant power supply, or an optional hot-pluggable 675-W power supply in a 1 + 1 redundant configuration.4 Getting Started With Your System The system board includes the following integrated features: • SATA controller that supports up to two cabled SATA hard drives, and up to two of the following supported devices: DVD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD combination drive, DVD+RW, or SATA tape backup device. NOTE: DVD devices are data only. • One 133-MHz PCI-X expansion slot, three PCI Express (PCIe) x4 expansion slots, and one PCIe x8 expansion slot. • An integrated ATI RN50 2D graphics controller with a minimum of 32 MB of graphics memory. Maximum resolution is 1280 x 1024 with 65,536 colors; graphics are supported in the following resolutions: 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1024 x 768, and 1280 x 1024. • An integrated Gigabit NIC, capable of supporting 1000-Mbps, 100-Mbps, or 10-Mbps data rates, with support for PXE, Wake-on-LAN, TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE), and iSCSI offload and boot. • An integrated Trusted Platform Module (TPM) version 1.2 used for security applications, capable of generating and storing keys and storing passwords and digital certificates. (Not available in China.) • Eight USB 2.0-compliant connectors (two on the front, one internal for a bootable memory key, and five on the back) capable of supporting a diskette drive, a DVD-ROM drive, a keyboard, a mouse, or a USB flash drive. • Optional Remote Access Controller (RAC) for remote systems management. • Standard Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) with serial and LAN access. • Back-panel connectors include serial, video, five USB connectors, and one NIC connector. • Front-panel connectors include two USB connectors. • Front-panel LCD for system ID and error messaging. For more information about specific features, see “Technical Specifications” on page 10.Getting Started With Your System 5 Supported Operating Systems Your system supports the following operating systems: • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard and Enterprise (32-bit x86) Editions • Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard and Enterprise (x64) Editions • Microsoft Windows® Small Business Server 2008 Standard and Premium Editions • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard and Enterprise (32-bit x86) Editions with SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard and Enterprise (x64) Editions with SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard and Enterprise (32-bit x86) Editions with SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard and Enterprise (x64) Editions with SP2 • Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 Standard and Premium Editions with SP2 • Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® ES and AS (version 4.5) (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES and AS (version 4.5) (x86_64) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_64) • SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 9 (SP4) (x86_64) • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 (x86_64) NOTE: For the latest information on supported operating systems, see www.dell.com.6 Getting Started With Your System Other Information You May Need CAUTION: The Product Information Guide provides important safety and regulatory information. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. • The Hardware Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system components. • CDs included with your system provide documentation and tools for configuring and managing your system. • Updates are sometimes included with the system to describe changes to the system, software, and/or documentation. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. • Release notes or readme files may be included to provide last-minute updates to the system or documentation or advanced technical reference material intended for experienced users or technicians. • Operating system documentation describes how to install (if necessary), configure, and use the operating system software. • Documentation for any components you purchased separately provides information to configure and install these options. Obtaining Technical Assistance If you do not understand a procedure in this guide or if the system does not perform as expected, see your Hardware Owner’s Manual. Dell Enterprise Training and Certification is available; see www.dell.com/training for more information. This service may not be offered in all locations.Getting Started With Your System 7 Installation and Configuration CAUTION: Before performing the following procedure, read and follow the safety instructions and important regulatory information in your Product Information Guide. NOTICE: Make sure there are no physical obstructions within 30 cm (12 inches) of the front of the system and 61 cm (24 inches) of the rear of the system. This may cause a decrease in airflow, which could cause your system to overheat. This section describes the steps to set up your system for the first time. Unpack the System Upack your system and identify each item. Keep all shipping materials in case you need them later.8 Getting Started With Your System Connect the Keyboard, Mouse, and Monitor Connect the keyboard, mouse, and monitor (optional). The connectors on the back of your system have icons indicating which cable to plug into each connector. Be sure to tighten the screws (if any) on the monitor's cable connector. Connect the System to Power Connect the monitor’s power cable to the monitor (optional), and connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system.Getting Started With Your System 9 Installing the Power Cord Retention Bracket Attach the power cord retention bracket on the right bend of the power supply handle. Bend the system power cable into a loop as shown in the illustration and attach to the bracket’s cable clasp. Repeat the procedure for the second power supply. Plug the other end of the power cable(s) into a grounded electrical outlet or a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or a power distribution unit (PDU). Turn on the System and Monitor Press the power button on the system and the monitor (optional). The power indicators should light. Adjust the monitor's controls until the displayed image is satisfactory.10 Getting Started With Your System Complete the 0perating System Setup If you purchased a preinstalled operating system, see the operating system documentation that ships with your system. To install an operating system for the first time, see the Quick Installation Guide. Be sure the operating system is installed before installing hardware or software not purchased with the system. Technical Specifications Processor Processor type One or two dual- or quad-core AMD™ Opteron™ processors Expansion Bus Bus type PCIe and PCI-X Expansion slots PCIe One x8 full-height, full-length 3.3-V (slot 4) Three x4 full-height, full-length 3.3-V (slots 1 through 3) PCI-X One full-height, full-length 3.3-V (slot 5) One internal USB key socket Memory Architecture 128-bit DDR II SDRAM DIMMs, rated for 533-MHz or 667-MHz operation Memory module sockets Eight 240-pin Memory module capacities 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, or 4 GB Minimum RAM 1 GB (one processor) or 2 GB (two processors) Maximum RAM 16 GB (one processor) or 32 GB (two processors)Getting Started With Your System 11 Drives Hard drives Up to four 3.5-inch internal non-hot-plug or hot-plug (when available) SAS or SATA Diskette drive One optional internal 3.5-inch, 1.44-MB Optical drives Up to two optional internal DVD-ROM (SATA or PATA), DVD+RW (SATA or PATA), or CD-RW/DVD combination (SATA) drives NOTE: DVD devices are data only. External optional USB DVD Tape drive One optional internal half-height, 5.25-inch SAS, SATA, or SCSI External optional USB tape backup device Flash drive External optional USB Internal optional USB Connectors Back NIC One RJ-45 (for Broadcom Gigabit LOM) Serial 9-pin, DTE, 16550-compatible USB Five 4-pin, USB 2.0-compliant Video 15-pin VGA Front USB Two 4-pin, USB 2.0-compliant Internal USB One 4-pin, USB 2.0-compliant12 Getting Started With Your System Video Video type Integrated Video memory 32 MB (minimum) Power AC power supply Wattage 650 W (non-redundant power supply) 675 W (redundant power supply) Voltage 100-240VAC, 6.0-3.0A, 50/60 Hz Heat dissipation 624 BTU/Hour (non-redundant power supply) 574 BTU/Hour (redundant power supply) CMOS backup battery CR 2032 3.0-V lithium ion coin cell Physical Height 456 mm (17.95 inches) Width 210 mm (8.27 inches) Depth 635 mm (25 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 27 kg (59.52 lb)Getting Started With Your System 13 Environmental NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific system configurations, see dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperature Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradient of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration Operating 0.26 Grms, 5 to 350 Hz at 0.0002 G2/Hz Storage 1.54 Grms, 10 to 250 Hz at 0.003 to 0.01 G2/Hz Maximum shock Operating 27 G +/– 10% with pulse duration of 2.6 msec +/– 10% Storage 71 G +/– 10% with pulse duration of 2 msec +/– 10%, 32G +/– 5% with velocity change of 235 ips +/– 5% Altitude Operating –15.2 to 3,048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) Airborne contaminant level Class G2 or lower as defined by ISA-S71.04-198514 Getting Started With Your SystemSystèmes Dell™ PowerEdge™ T605 Guide de mise en routeRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; AMD et AMD Opteron sont des marques déposées d'Advanced Micro Devices ; Microsoft, Windows et Windows Server sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Red Hat et Red Hat Enterprise Linux sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. ; SUSE est une marque déposée de Novell Inc. D'autres marques et noms de marques peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms de marque autres que les siens. Modèle SCM Novembre 2007 N/P GM693 Rév. A00Guide de mise en route 17 Caractéristiques du système Cette section décrit les principales caractéristiques matérielles et logicielles du système. Elle contient également des informations sur d'autres documents pouvant être utiles à la configuration du système et indique comment obtenir une assistance technique. • Un ou deux processeurs AMD™ Opteron™ double coeur ou quadruple coeur. REMARQUE : Utilisez le programme de configuration du système pour visualiser les informations concernant les processeurs. Reportez-vous au document Hardware Owner's Manual (Manuel du propriétaire). • Barrettes de mémoire DDR-II à registres et avec parité, représentant un minimum de 1 Go (systèmes monoprocesseur) ou de 2 Go (systèmes bi-processeur) et cadencées à 533 ou 667 MHz. La mémoire est extensible à un maximum de 32 Go (systèmes bi-processeur) via l'installation de combinaisons de barrettes de 512 Mo, 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go dans les huit emplacements mémoire de la carte système. • Prise en charge d'un maximum de quatre disques durs internes SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) ou SATA de 3,5 pouces, enfichables à chaud ou non (selon disponibilité). Une carte contrôleur d'extension est requise pour les disques durs SAS, ou si vous utilisez plus de deux disques durs SATA. • Une baie de périphérique de 3,5 pouces pouvant accueillir le lecteur de disquette en option, et deux baies de 5,25 pouces prenant en charge les lecteurs suivants : lecteur de DVD-ROM, lecteur combo CD-RW/DVD, lecteur de DVD+RW ou unité de sauvegarde sur bande. REMARQUE : Les périphériques DVD sont uniquement des périphériques de données. • Un détecteur d'intrusion qui transmet une alerte aux logiciels de gestion de systèmes appropriés en cas d'ouverture du capot de l'ordinateur. • Un bloc d'alimentation de 650W non redondant, ou un bloc d'alimentation de 675 W enfichable à chaud dans une configuration redondante 1 + 1 (en option).18 Guide de mise en route La carte système offre les caractéristiques suivantes : • Contrôleur SATA prenant en charge jusqu'à deux disques durs SATA connectés par câble, et jusqu'à deux périphériques parmi les suivants : lecteur de DVD-ROM, lecteur combo CD-RW/DVD, lecteur de DVD+RW ou périphérique SATA de sauvegarde sur bande. REMARQUE : Les périphériques DVD sont uniquement des périphériques de données. • Un logement d'extension PCI-X à 133-MHz, trois logements d'extension PCI Express (PCIe) x4 et un logement d'extension PCIe x8. • Un contrôleur vidéo 2D intégré ATI RN50 avec au moins 32 Mo de mémoire vidéo. La résolution maximale prise en charge est de 1280 x 1024 avec 65536 couleurs. Les graphiques sont pris en charge dans les résolutions suivantes : 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1024 x 768 et 1280 x 1024. • Un NIC Gigabit intégré prenant en charge des débits de données de 1000, 100 ou 10 Mbps, ainsi que les fonctions suivantes : PXE, Wake-on-LAN, moteur de décentralisation TCP/IP (TOE), déchargement et amorçage iSCSI. • Puce TPM (Trusted Platform Module) intégrée version 1.2, utilisée pour la sécurité des applications et pouvant générer et mémoriser des clés, des mots de passe et des certificats numériques (non disponible en Chine). • Huit connecteurs USB 2.0 (deux à l'avant, cinq à l'arrière et un connecteur interne pour une clé de mémoire amorçable). Ces connecteurs permettent de brancher un lecteur de disquette ou de DVD-ROM, un clavier, une souris ou un lecteur flash USB. • Un contrôleur RAC (Remote Access Controller) en option, pour la gestion de systèmes à distance. • Un contrôleur BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) standard avec accès série et réseau local. • Panneau arrière comprenant des connecteurs série et vidéo, des ports USB (5) et un connecteur de NIC.Guide de mise en route 19 • Panneau avant comprenant deux connecteurs USB. • Écran LCD du panneau avant affichant l'ID du système et les messages d'erreur. Pour plus d'informations sur des caractéristiques spécifiques, voir “Spécifications techniques”, à la page 24. Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge Le système prend en charge les systèmes d'exploitation suivants : • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, éditions Standard et Enterprise (32 bits, x86) • Microsoft Windows Server 2008, éditions Standard et Enterprise (64 bits) Editions • Microsoft Windows® Small Business Server 2008, éditions Standard et Premium • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 éditions Standard et Enterprise (32 bits, x86) avec SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 éditions Standard et Enterprise (64 bits) avec SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 éditions Standard et Enterprise (32 bits, x86) avec SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 éditions Standard et Enterprise (64 bits) avec SP2 • Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 éditions Standard et Premium avec SP2 • Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® ES et AS (version 4.5, x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES et AS (version 4.5, x86_64) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_64) • SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 9 (SP4, x86_64) • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 (x86_64) REMARQUE : Pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge, rendez-vous sur le site www.dell.com.20 Guide de mise en route Autres informations utiles PRÉCAUTION : Le document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) contient d'importantes informations se rapportant à la sécurité et aux réglementations. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent soit dans ce document, soit à part. • Le document Hardware Owner's Manual (Manuel du propriétaire) contient des informations sur les caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants. • Les CD fournis avec le système contiennent des documents et des outils relatifs à la configuration et à la gestion du système. • Des mises à jour sont parfois fournies avec le système. Elles décrivent les modifications apportées au système, aux logiciels et/ou à la documentation. REMARQUE : Vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations contenues dans les autres documents. • Si des notes d'édition ou des fichiers lisez-moi (readme) sont fournis, ils contiennent des mises à jour de dernière minute apportées au système ou à la documentation, ou bien des informations techniques avancées destinées aux utilisateurs expérimentés ou aux techniciens. • La documentation du système d'exploitation indique comment installer (au besoin), configurer et utiliser le système d'exploitation. • La documentation fournie avec les composants achetés séparément contient des informations permettant de configurer et d'installer ces options.Guide de mise en route 21 Obtention d'une assistance technique Si vous ne comprenez pas une procédure décrite dans ce guide ou si le système ne réagit pas comme prévu, reportez-vous au document Hardware Owner's Manual (Manuel du propriétaire). Des formations et certifications Dell Enterprise sont disponibles. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le site www.dell.com/training. Ce service n'est disponible que dans certains pays. Installation et configuration PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer la procédure suivante, lisez et appliquez les consignes de sécurité et les informations importantes sur les réglementations figurant dans le document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit). AVIS : Vérifiez que l'espace situé autour du système est dégagé sur au moins 30 cm (12 pouces) à l'avant et 61 cm (24 pouces) à l'arrière. Si cette condition n'est pas respectée, le système risque de surchauffer en raison d'une ventilation insuffisante. Cette section décrit les opérations à effectuer lors de la configuration initiale du système. Déballage du système Sortez le système de son emballage et identifiez chaque élément. Conservez les matériaux d'emballage au cas où vous en auriez besoin ultérieurement.22 Guide de mise en route Connexion du clavier, de la souris et du moniteur Connectez le clavier et la souris, ainsi que le moniteur (si nécessaire). Utilisez les icônes des connecteurs situés à l'arrière du système pour savoir où insérer chaque câble. N'oubliez pas de serrer les vis situées sur le connecteur du câble du moniteur, s'il en est équipé. Branchement du système sur le secteur Branchez les câbles d'alimentation appropriés (un sur le moniteur [si nécessaire] et un sur le système).Guide de mise en route 23 Installation du support de fixation du câble d'alimentation Fixez le support du câble sur la partie droite de la poignée du bloc d'alimentation. Faites une boucle comme indiqué dans l'illustration et insérez le câble d'alimentation dans le clip du support. Recommencez cette procédure pour le second bloc d'alimentation. Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité du câble sur une prise de courant mise à la terre ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]). Mise sous tension du système et du moniteur Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation du système, puis sur celui du moniteur (si nécessaire). Les voyants d'alimentation doivent s'allumer. Réglez le moniteur jusqu'à ce que l'image soit correctement affichée.24 Guide de mise en route Finalisation de l'installation du système d'exploitation Si vous avez acheté un système d'exploitation préinstallé, consultez tout d'abord la documentation associée, qui a été fournie avec l'ordinateur. Si vous installez un système d'exploitation pour la première fois, consultez le document Quick Installation Guide (Guide d'installation rapide). Veillez à installer le système d'exploitation avant tout élément matériel ou logiciel acheté séparément. Spécifications techniques Processeur Type de processeur Un ou deux processeurs AMD™ Opteron™ double coeur ou quadruple coeur Bus d'extension Type de bus PCIe et PCI-X Logements d'extension PCIe Un emplacement x8 pleine longueur/ pleine hauteur à 3,3 V (logement 4) Trois emplacements x4 pleine longueur/pleine hauteur à 3,3 V (logements 1 à 3) PCI-X Un emplacement pleine longueur/ pleine hauteur à 3,3 V (logement 5) Un connecteur interne pour clé USBGuide de mise en route 25 Mémoire Architecture Barrettes DIMM de SDRAM DDR II (128 bits), cadencées à 533 ou 667 MHz Connecteurs mémoire Huit à 240 broches Capacité des barrettes de mémoire 512 Mo, 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go RAM minimale 1 Go (avec un seul processeur) ou 2 Go (avec deux processeurs) RAM maximale 16 Go (avec un seul processeur) ou 32 Go (avec deux processeurs) Lecteurs Disques durs Jusqu'à quatre disques durs SAS ou SATA internes de 3,5 pouces, enfichables à chaud ou non (selon disponibilité) Lecteur de disquette Un lecteur interne 3,5 pouces de 1,44 Mo (en option) Lecteurs optiques Jusqu'à deux lecteurs internes en option parmi les suivants : DVD-ROM (SATA ou PATA), DVD+RW (SATA ou PATA) ou CD-RW/DVD (SATA) REMARQUE : Les périphériques DVD sont uniquement des périphériques de données. Un lecteur de DVD USB externe (en option) Lecteur de bande Un lecteur interne de 5,25 pouces, mi-hauteur, de type SAS, SATA ou SCSI (en option) Unité de sauvegarde sur bande USB externe (en option) Lecteur Flash USB externe en option USB interne en option26 Guide de mise en route Connecteurs Arrière NIC Un connecteur RJ-45 (pour carte Broadcom Gigabit avec fonction LAN sur la carte mère [LOM]) Série Connecteur DTE à 9 broches, compatible 16550 USB Cinq connecteurs à 4 broches, compatibles USB 2.0 Vidéo VGA, 15 broches Avant USB Deux connecteurs à 4 broches, compatibles USB 2.0 Interne USB Un connecteur à 4 broches, compatible USB 2.0 Vidéo Type de vidéo Intégrée Mémoire vidéo 32 Mo (minimum) Alimentation Bloc d'alimentation en CA Puissance 650 W (bloc d'alimentation non redondant) 675 W (bloc d'alimentation redondant) Tension 100-240 VCA ; 6,0-3,0 A ; 50/60 Hz Dissipation thermique 624 BTU/h (157,25 kcal/h – bloc d'alimentation non redondant) 574 BTU/h (144,65 kcal/h – bloc d'alimentation redondant) Pile de sauvegarde CMOS Pile bouton au lithium-ion CR2032 (3 V) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 456 mm (17,95 pouces) Largeur 210 mm (8,27 pouces) Profondeur 635 mm (25 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 27 kg (59,52 livres)Guide de mise en route 27 Environnement REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations concernant les mesures d'exploitation liées à différentes configurations spécifiques, rendez-vous à l'adresse dell.com/environment_datasheets. Température Fonctionnement De 10° à 35°C (50 à 95°F) Stockage De -40° à 65°C (-40° à 149°F) Humidité relative Fonctionnement De 20% à 80% (sans condensation) avec un gradient d'humidité maximal de 10% par heure Stockage De 5% à 95% (sans condensation) Tolérance maximale aux vibrations Fonctionnement 0,26 Grms ; 5 à 350 Hz à 0,0002 G2/Hz Stockage 1,54 Grms ; 10 à 250 Hz ; 0,003 à 0,01 G2/Hz Choc maximal Fonctionnement 27 G +/- 10% avec une durée d'impulsion de 2,6 msec +/- 10% Stockage 71 G +/- 10% avec une durée d'impulsion de 2 msec +/- 10%, 32G +/- 5% avec un changement de vitesse de 235 ips +/- 5% Altitude Fonctionnement -15,2 à 3048 m (-50 à 10000 pieds) Stockage -15,2 à 10600 m (-50 à 35000 pieds) Contaminants en suspension dans l'air Classe G2 ou inférieure selon la norme ISA-S71.04-198528 Guide de mise en routeSistemas Dell™ PowerEdge™ T605 Primeiros passos com o sistemaNotas, avisos e advertências NOTA: As NOTAS fornecem informações importantes que o ajudam a utilizar melhor o computador. AVISO: As mensagens de AVISO informam sobre possíveis danos ao hardware ou perda de dados e indicam como evitar o problema. ADVERTÊNCIA: As mensagens de ADVERTÊNCIA indicam possíveis danos de propriedade, ferimentos pessoais ou morte. ____________________ As informações contidas neste documento estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. © 2007 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Fica proibida a reprodução por quaisquer meios sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. Marcas comerciais utilizadas neste texto: Dell e o logotipo da DELL são marcas comerciais da Dell Inc.; AMD e AMD Opteron são marcas registradas da Advanced Micro Devices; Microsoft, Windows e Windows Server são marcas registradas da Microsoft Corporation; Red Hat e Red Hat Enterprise Linux são marcas registradas da Red Hat, Inc.; SUSE é marca registrada da Novell Inc. Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser mencionados neste documento em referência às entidades proprietárias das marcas e nomes ou seus produtos. A Dell Inc. renuncia ao direito de qualquer participação em nomes e marcas comerciais que não sejam de sua propriedade. Modelo SCM Novembro de 2007 N/P GM693 Rev. A00Primeiros passos com o sistema 31 Recursos do sistema Esta seção descreve os principais recursos de hardware e software do sistema. Também fornece informações sobre outros documentos de que talvez necessite quando configurar o sistema e sobre como obter assistência técnica. • Um ou dois processadores AMD™ Opteron™ Dual core ou Quad core. NOTA: Use o programa de configuração do sistema para visualizar informações sobre o processador. Consulte o Manual do proprietário de hardware. • Mínimo de 1 GB (sistemas com um processador) ou 2 GB (sistemas com dois processadores) com módulos de memória DDR-II de paridade registrada de 533 ou 667 MHz. A memória pode ser atualizada até o máximo de 32 GB (sistemas com dois processadores) por meio da instalação de combinações de módulos de memória de 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB ou 4 GB nos oito soquetes para módulos de memória existentes na placa do sistema. • Suporte para até quatro unidades de disco rígido SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) ou SATA de 3,5 polegadas, internas e com ou sem conexão automática (se disponível). É necessária uma placa de expansão de controlador para as unidades de disco rígido SAS ou para mais de duas unidades SATA. • Um compartimento periférico de 3,5 polegadas para a unidade de disquete opcional e dois compartimentos de 5,25 polegadas para as seguintes unidades compatíveis: DVD-ROM, combinação de CD-RW/DVD, DVD+RW ou dispositivo de backup de fita. NOTA: Os dispositivos de DVD destinam-se somente a dados. • Uma chave de violação que sinaliza ao software de gerenciamento de sistemas adequado quando a tampa superior é aberta. • Uma fonte de alimentação de 650 W não redundante ou uma com conexão automática opcional. Fonte de alimentação de 675 W em uma configuração redundante 1 + 1.32 Primeiros passos com o sistema A placa de sistema inclui os seguintes recursos: • Controlador SATA que suporta até duas unidades de disco rígido SATA cabeadas e até dois dos seguintes dispositivos compatíveis: DVD-ROM, combinação de unidades CD-RW/DVD, DVD+RW ou dispositivo de backup de fita. NOTA: Os dispositivos de DVD destinam-se somente a dados. • Um slot de expansão PCI-X de 133 MHz, três PCI Express (PCIe) x4 e um PCIe x8. • Um controlador gráfico ATI RN50 2D integrado com memória gráfica mínima de 32 MB. A resolução máxima é de 1280 x 1024 com 65.536 cores e os gráficos têm suporte nas seguintes resoluções: 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1024 x 768 e 1280 x 1024. • Uma placa NIC Gigabit integrada, capaz de suportar taxas de dados de 1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps ou 10 Mbps, com suporte para PXE, Wake-on-LAN, TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE) e inicialização/descarregamento iSCSI. • Um módulo de plataforma confiável (Trusted Platform Module, TPM) integrado versão 1.2, usado para aplicativos de segurança, capaz de gerar e armazenar chaves de memória e armazenar senhas e certificados digitais (não disponível na China). • Oito conectores compatíveis com USB 2.0 (dois na parte frontal, um na parte interior para dispositivos de memória de inicialização e cinco na parte traseira) capazes de suportar unidades de disquete, uma unidade de DVD-ROM, um teclado, um mouse ou uma unidade flash USB. • Controlador de acesso remoto (RAC) para o gerenciamento remoto de sistemas. • Processador de serviço (BMC) padrão com acesso serial e LAN. • Os conectores do painel traseiro incluem um conector serial, um conector de vídeo, um conector paralelo cinco conectores USB e um conector NIC. • Os conectores do painel frontal incluem dois conectores USB. • Um visor LCD de 1x5 pol. no painel frontal para visualização da identificação do sistema e de mensagens de erro. Para obter mais informações sobre recursos específicos, consulte a seção “Especificações técnicas” na página 39.Primeiros passos com o sistema 33 Sistemas operacionais admitidos O sistema admite os seguintes sistemas operacionais: • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, edições Standard e Enterprise (x86 de 32 bits) • Microsoft Windows Server 2003, nas edições x64 Standard e Enterprise • Microsoft Windows® Small Business Server 2003, nas edições Standard e Premium • Microsoft Windows Server 2003, edições Standard e Enterprise (x86 de 32 bits) • Microsoft Windows Server 2003, nas edições x64 Standard e Enterprise • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, edições Standard e Enterprise com SP2 (x86 de 32 bits) • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, edições Standard e Enterprise com SP2 (x64) • Microsoft Windows Server Small Business Server 2003 R2 nas edições Standard e Premium com SP2 • Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® ES e AS (versão 4.5) (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES e AS (versão 4.5) (x86_64) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_64) • SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 9 (SP4) (x86_64) • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 (x86_64) NOTA: Para obter as informações mais recentes sobre os sistemas operacionais compatíveis, consulte o site www.dell.com.34 Primeiros passos com o sistema Outras informações úteis ADVERTÊNCIA: O Guia de informações do produto fornece informações importantes sobre segurança e regulamentação. As informações sobre garantia podem estar incluídas neste documento ou serem fornecidas como um documento separado. • O Manual do proprietário de hardware fornece informações sobre os recursos do sistema e descreve como solucionar problemas do sistema e instalar ou substituir seus componentes. • Os CDs incluídos com o sistema fornecem documentação e ferramentas para a configuração e o gerenciamento do sistema. • Às vezes, atualizações são fornecidas com o sistema para descrever mudanças ao sistema, software e/ou à documentação. NOTA: Verifique sempre as atualizações disponíveis no site support.dell.com (em Inglês) e leia sempre as atualizações em primeiro lugar, pois estas geralmente substituem informações contidas em outros documentos. • Talvez existam notas de versão e arquivos leia-me incluídos, para fornecer atualizações de última hora do sistema ou documentação/material para referência técnica avançada destinados a usuários experientes ou técnicos. • A documentação do sistema operacional descreve como instalar (se necessário), configurar e utilizar o software do sistema operacional. • A documentação para quaisquer componentes adquiridos em separado fornece informações para configurar e instalar esses opcionais.Primeiros passos com o sistema 35 Como obter assistência técnica Se não compreender algum procedimento descrito neste guia ou se o sistema não apresentar o desempenho esperado, consulte o Manual do proprietário de hardware. Existem recursos de treinamento e certificação empresarial da Dell; visite o site www.dell.com/training (em inglês) para obter mais informações. Esse serviço pode não ser oferecido em todos os locais. Instalação e configuração ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de executar o seguinte procedimento, leia e siga as instruções de segurança e as informações importantes sobre regulamentação contidas no Guia de informações do produto. AVISO: Verifique se não há obstruções físicas a menos de 30 cm (12 pol.) da parte frontal e de 61 cm (24 pol.) da parte traseira do sistema. As obstruções podem diminuir o fluxo de ar, o que causaria superaquecimento do sistema. Esta seção descreve as etapas para a configuração do sistema pela primeira vez. Remoção do sistema da embalagem Remova o sistema da embalagem e identifique cada item. Mantenha todos os materiais de envio para o caso de precisar deles mais tarde.36 Primeiros passos com o sistema Conexão do teclado, mouse e monitor Conecte o teclado, o mouse e o monitor (opcional). Os conectores na parte de trás do sistema possuem ícones indicando quais cabos devem ser ligados a cada conector. Certifique-se de apertar os parafusos (se houver) no conector do cabo do monitor. Conecte o sistema à energia Conecte o cabo de alimentação ao monitor (opcional) e o cabo de alimentação do sistema ao mesmo.Primeiros passos com o sistema 37 Instalação do suporte de retenção do cabo de alimentação Conecte o suporte de retenção do cabo de alimentação na dobra direita da alça da fonte de alimentação. Dobre o cabo de alimentação do sistema em forma de laço conforme apresentado na ilustração e conecte-o ao colchete do cabo localizado no suporte. Repita o procedimento para a segunda fonte de alimentação. Conecte a outra extremidade dos cabos de alimentação a uma tomada elétrica aterrada ou a uma fonte de energia separada como, por exemplo, uma UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [fonte de alimentação ininterrupta]) ou uma PDU (Power Distribution Unit [unidade de distribuição de energia]). 38 Primeiros passos com o sistema Ligação do sistema e do monitor (opcional) Pressione o botão liga/desliga do sistema e do monitor. As luzes indicadoras de energia deverão se acender. Ajuste os controles do monitor até que a imagem exibida seja satisfatória. Conclua a configuração do sistema operacional Caso tenha adquirido um sistema operacional pré-instalado, consulte a respectiva documentação fornecida com o sistema. Para instalar um sistema operacional pela primeira vez, consulte o Guia de instalação rápida. Certifique-se de que o sistema operacional esteja instalado antes de instalar qualquer hardware ou software que não tenha sido adquirido com o sistema.Primeiros passos com o sistema 39 Especificações técnicas Processador Tipo de processador Um ou dois processadores AMD™ Opteron™ Dual core ou Quad core Barramento de expansão Tipo de barramento PCIe e PCI-X Slots de expansão PCIe Um de altura e comprimento completos x8 de 3,3 V (slot 4) Três de altura e comprimento completos x4 de 3,3 V (slots 1 a 3) PCI-X Um de altura e comprimento completos x8 de 3,3 V (slot 5) Um soquete interno de chave USB Memória Arquitetura DIMMs SDRAM DDR II de 128 bits, ajustados para operação a 533 MHz ou 667 MHz Soquetes dos módulos de memória Oito de 240 pinos Capacidades dos módulos de memória 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB ou 4 GB RAM mínima 1 GB (um processador) ou 2 GB (dois processadores) RAM máxima 16 GB (um processador) ou 32 GB (dois processadores)40 Primeiros passos com o sistema Unidades Unidades de disco rígido Até quatro SAS ou SATA de 3,5 polegadas internos com (se disponível) ou sem conexão automática Unidade de disquete Uma unidade interna opcional de 3,5 polegadas de 1,44 MB Unidades ópticas Até duas unidades internas opcionais de DVD-ROM (SATA ou PATA), DVD+RW (SATA ou PATA) ou combinação de CD-RW/DVD (SATA) NOTA: Os dispositivos de DVD destinam-se somente a dados. Unidade óptica USB externa de DVD-ROM opcional Unidade de fita Uma unidade SAS, SATA ou SCSI opcional interna de meia altura e 5,25 polegadas Dispositivo de backup em fita USB externo opcional Unidade flash USB externa opcional USB interna opcional Conectores Parte posterior NIC Um RJ-45 (para Broadcom Gigabit LOM) Serial DTE de 9 pinos, compatível com 16550 USB Cinco de 4 pinos, compatível com USB 2.0 Vídeo VGA de 15 pinos Parte frontal USB Dois de 4 pinos, compatível com USB 2.0 Interna USB Dois de 4 pinos, compatível com USB 2.0Primeiros passos com o sistema 41 Vídeo Tipo de vídeo Integrado Memória de vídeo 32 MB (mínimo) Energia Fonte de alimentação CA Potência 650 W (fonte de energia não-redundante) 675 W (fonte de energia redundante) Voltagem 100 a 240 VCA, 6,0A a 3,0A, 50 Hz a 60 Hz Dissipação de calor 624 BTU/hora (fonte de energia não-redundante) 574 BTU/hora (fonte de energia redundante) Bateria de backup do CMOS Pilha do tipo moeda, de íon de lítio, CR 2032 de 3,0 V Características físicas Altura 456 mm (17,95 pol.) Largura 210 mm (8,27 pol.) Profundidade 635 mm (25 pol.) Peso (configuração máxima) 27 kg (59,52 lb)42 Primeiros passos com o sistema Características ambientais NOTA: Para obter informações adicionais sobre os valores ambientais para configurações de sistema específicas, visite o site dell.com/environmental_datasheets (em inglês). Temperatura De funcionamento 10 °C a 35 °C (50 °F a 95 °F) De armazenamento –40 °C a 65 °C (–40 °F a 149 °F) Umidade relativa De funcionamento 20% a 80% (sem condensação) com variação de umidade máxima de 10% por hora De armazenamento 5% a 95% (sem condensação) Vibração máxima Em funcionamento 0,26 gRMS; de 5 Hz a 350 Hz; a 0,0002 G2/Hz Em armazenamento 1,54 gRMS; de 10 Hz a 250 Hz; a 0,003 G2/Hz Choque máximo Em funcionamento 27 G +/– 10% com duração de pulso de 2,6 msec +/– 10% Em armazenamento 71 G +/– 10% com duração de pulso de 2 msec +/– 10%, 32 G +/– 5% com mudança de velocidade de 235 ips +/– 5% Altitude De funcionamento –15,2 m a 3.048 m (–50 pés a 10.000 pés) De armazenamento –15,2 m a 10.600 m (–50 pés a 35.000 pés) Nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar Classe G2 ou inferior, conforme definido pelo ISA-S71.04-1985Sistemas Dell™ PowerEdge™ T605 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistemaNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o la pérdida de datos, e informa de cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica el riesgo de daños materiales, lesiones o incluso la muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2007 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell y el logotipo de DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; AMD y AMD Opteron son marcas comerciales registradas de Advanced Micro Devices; Microsoft, Windows y Windows Server son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; Red Hat y Red Hat Enterprise Linux son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc.; SUSE es una marca comercial registrada de Novell Inc. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo SCM Noviembre de 2007 N/P GM693 Rev. A00Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema 45 Componentes del sistema En esta sección se describen los principales componentes de hardware y software del sistema. También se ofrece información sobre otros documentos que puede necesitar para instalar el sistema y sobre cómo obtener asistencia técnica. • Uno o dos procesadores AMD™ Opteron™ de doble núcleo o de cuatro núcleos. NOTA: Utilice el programa de configuración del sistema para visualizar la información del procesador. Consulte el Manual del propietario del hardware. • Módulos de memoria DDR-II de paridad registrada a 533 o 667 MHz de un mínimo de 1 GB (sistemas con un solo procesador) o 2 GB (sistemas con dos procesadores). La memoria puede ampliarse a un máximo de 32 GB (sistemas con dos procesadores) mediante la instalación de combinaciones de módulos de memoria de 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB o 4 GB en los ocho zócalos de módulo de memoria de la placa base. • Compatibilidad con hasta cuatro unidades de disco duro internas de 3,5 pulgadas SCSI de conexión serie (SAS) o SATA sin acoplamiento activo o de acoplamiento activo (si está disponible). Es necesaria una tarjeta de expansión de la controladora para las unidades de disco duro SAS o para más de dos unidades de disco duro SATA. • Un compartimiento para unidades periféricas de 3,5 pulgadas para la unidad de disquete opcional y dos compartimientos de 5,25 pulgadas para las unidades admitidas siguientes: unidad de DVD-ROM, unidad combinada de CD-RW/DVD, DVD+RW o dispositivo de copia de seguridad en cinta. NOTA: Los dispositivos de DVD son sólo de datos. • Un interruptor de intrusión que indica el software de administración de sistemas adecuado si se abre la cubierta. • Una fuente de alimentación sin redundancia de 650 W, o una fuente de alimentación de acoplamiento activo opcional de 675 W en una configuración redundante 1 + 1.46 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema La placa base incluye los componentes integrados siguientes: • Controladora SATA que admite hasta dos unidades de disco duro SATA cableadas y hasta dos de los siguientes dispositivos compatibles: unidad de DVD-ROM, unidad combinada de CD-RW/DVD, DVD+RW o dispositivo de copia de seguridad en cinta SATA. NOTA: Los dispositivos de DVD son sólo de datos. • Una ranura de expansión PCI-X a 133 MHz, tres ranuras de expansión PCI Express (PCIe) x4 y una ranura de expansión PCIe x8. • Una controladora gráfica 2D ATI RN50 integrada con un mínimo de 32 MB de memoria gráfica. La resolución máxima es de 1 280 x 1 024 con 65 536 colores; se admiten gráficos en las resoluciones siguientes: 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1 024 x 768 y 1 280 x 1 024. • Una NIC Gigabit integrada que admite velocidades de transferencia de datos de 1 000 Mbps, 100 Mbps o 10 Mbps compatible con PXE, Wake-on-LAN, motor de descarga TCP/IP (TOE) y descarga e inicio de iSCSI. • Un módulo de plataforma segura (TPM) versión 1.2 integrado para aplicaciones de seguridad, que permite generar y almacenar claves, contraseñas y certificados digitales (no disponible en China). • Ocho conectores compatibles con USB 2.0 (dos en la parte frontal, uno interno para una memoria USB de inicio y cinco en la parte posterior) que admiten una unidad de disquete, una unidad de DVD-ROM, un teclado, un ratón o una unidad flash USB. • Controladora de acceso remoto (RAC) opcional para la administración remota de sistemas. • Controladora de administración de la placa base (BMC) estándar con acceso serie y a LAN. • Conectores serie y de vídeo, cinco conectores USB y un conector de NIC en el panel posterior. • Dos conectores USB en el panel frontal. • LCD del panel frontal para la ID y los mensajes de error del sistema. Para obtener más información sobre componentes específicos, consulte “Especificaciones técnicas” en la página 53.Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema 47 Sistemas operativos admitidos El sistema admite los sistemas operativos siguientes: • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard Edition y Enterprise Edition (x86 de 32 bits) • Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition y Enterprise (x64) Edition • Microsoft Windows® Small Business Server 2008 Standard Edition y Premium Edition • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition y Enterprise Edition con SP2 (x86 de 32 bits) • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition y Enterprise (x64) Edition con SP2 • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition y Enterprise Edition con SP2 (x86 de 32 bits) • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition y Enterprise (x64) Edition con SP2 • Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition y Premium Edition con SP2 • Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® ES y AS (versión 4.5) (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES y AS (versión 4.5) (x86_64) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_32) • Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 5 (x86_64) • SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 9 (SP4) (x86_64) • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 (x86_64) NOTA: Para obtener la información más reciente sobre sistemas operativos admitidos, visite www.dell.com.48 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema Otra información útil PRECAUCIÓN: La Guía de información del producto contiene información importante sobre seguridad y normativas. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este documento o constar en un documento aparte. • En el Manual del propietario del hardware se proporciona información sobre los componentes del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema e instalar o sustituir componentes. • Los CD que se facilitan con el sistema proporcionan documentación y herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema. • Algunas veces, con el sistema se incluyen actualizaciones que describen los cambios realizados en el sistema, en el software o en la documentación. NOTA: Compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com y, si las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos. • Es posible que se incluyan notas de la versión o archivos Léame para proporcionar actualizaciones de última hora relativas al sistema o a la documentación, o material de consulta técnica avanzada destinado a técnicos o usuarios experimentados. • En la documentación del sistema operativo se describe cómo instalar (si es necesario), configurar y utilizar el software del sistema operativo. • En la documentación de los componentes adquiridos por separado se incluye información para configurar e instalar las opciones correspondientes.Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema 49 Obtención de asistencia técnica Si no comprende algún procedimiento descrito en esta guía o si el sistema no funciona del modo esperado, consulte el Manual del propietario del hardware. Tiene a su disposición el servicio de formación y certificación Dell para empresas. Para obtener más información, visite www.dell.com/training. Es posible que este servicio no se ofrezca en todas las regiones. Instalación y configuración PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, lea y siga las instrucciones de seguridad y la información importante sobre normativas incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Asegúrese de que no haya obstrucciones físicas a menos de unos 30 cm de la parte frontal del sistema y a unos 61 cm de la parte posterior del sistema. Esto podría reducir el flujo de aire y causar un sobrecalentamiento del sistema. En esta sección se describen los pasos para configurar el sistema por primera vez. Desembalaje del sistema Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento. Guarde el material de embalaje por si lo necesita más adelante.50 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema Conexión del teclado, el ratón y el monitor Conecte el teclado, el ratón y el monitor (opcional). Los conectores de la parte posterior del sistema incluyen iconos que indican qué cable debe enchufarse en cada conector. Asegúrese de apretar los tornillos (si los hay) del conector del cable del monitor. Conexión del sistema a la alimentación Conecte el cable de alimentación del monitor al monitor (opcional) y conecte el cable (o cables) de alimentación del sistema al sistema.Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema 51 Instalación del soporte de retención del cable de alimentación Fije el soporte de retención del cable de alimentación en el codo derecho del asa de la fuente de alimentación. Doble el cable de alimentación del sistema en forma de bucle, tal como se muestra en la ilustración, y fíjelo a la abrazadera correspondiente del soporte. Repita el procedimiento para la segunda fuente de alimentación. Conecte el otro extremo del cable de alimentación a una toma eléctrica con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de energía, como por ejemplo un sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una unidad de distribución de alimentación (PDU). 52 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema Encendido del sistema y del monitor Presione el botón de encendido del sistema y del monitor (opcional). Los indicadores luminosos de alimentación deberían encenderse. Ajuste los controles del monitor hasta que la imagen mostrada sea satisfactoria. Finalización de la configuración del sistema operativo Si ha adquirido un sistema operativo preinstalado, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo que se suministra con el sistema. Para instalar un sistema operativo por primera vez, consulte la Guía de instalación rápida. Asegúrese de que el sistema operativo está instalado antes de instalar hardware o software no adquirido con el sistema.Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema 53 Especificaciones técnicas Procesador Tipo de procesador Uno o dos procesadores AMD™ Opteron™ de doble núcleo o de cuatro núcleos Bus de expansión Tipo de bus PCIe y PCI-X Ranuras de expansión PCIe Una ranura x8 de 3,3 V de altura y longitud completas (ranura 4) Tres ranuras x4 de 3,3 V de altura y longitud completas (ranuras de la 1 a la 3) PCI-X Una ranura de 3,3 V de altura y longitud completas (ranura 5) Un zócalo para memoria USB interna Memoria Arquitectura Módulos DIMM SDRAM DDR II de 128 bits, clasificados para funcionar a 533 o 667 MHz Zócalos de módulo de memoria Ocho de 240 patas Capacidades de módulo de memoria 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB o 4 GB RAM mínima 1 GB (un procesador) o 2 GB (dos procesadores) RAM máxima 16 GB (un procesador) o 32 GB (dos procesadores)54 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema Unidades Unidades de disco duro Hasta cuatro unidades de disco duro internas de 3,5 pulgadas SAS o SATA sin acoplamiento activo o de acoplamiento activo (si está disponible) Unidad de disquete Una unidad interna opcional de 3,5 pulgadas y 1,44 MB Unidades ópticas Hasta cuatro unidades internas opcionales de DVD-ROM (SATA o PATA), DVD+RW (SATA o PATA) o CD-RW/DVD combinada (SATA) NOTA: Los dispositivos de DVD son sólo de datos. Unidad de DVD USB externa opcional Unidad de cinta Una unidad interna opcional SAS, SATA o SCSI de 5,25 pulgadas de media altura Dispositivo de copia de seguridad en cinta de la unidad USB externa opcional Unidad flash Unidad USB externa opcional Unidad USB interna opcional Conectores Parte posterior NIC Un RJ-45 (para Broadcom Gigabit LOM) Serie 9 patas, DTE, compatible con 16550 USB Cinco de 4 patas compatibles con USB 2.0 Vídeo VGA de 15 patas Parte frontal USB Dos de 4 patas compatibles con USB 2.0 Internos USB Uno de 4 patas compatible con USB 2.0Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema 55 Vídeo Tipo de vídeo Integrado Memoria de vídeo 32 MB (como mínimo) Alimentación Fuente de alimentación de CA Potencia 650 W (fuente de alimentación sin redundancia) 675 W (fuente de alimentación redundante) Voltaje 100-240 V CA, 6,0-3,0 A, 50/60 Hz Disipación de calor 624 BTU/h (182,7 W) (fuente de alimentación sin redundancia) 574 BTU/h (168 W) (fuente de alimentación redundante) Batería de reserva de CMOS Batería de tipo botón de litio-ion de 3,0 V CR2032 Características físicas Altura 456 mm Anchura 210 mm Profundidad 635 mm Peso (configuración máxima) 27 kg56 Procedimientos iniciales con el sistema Especificaciones ambientales NOTA: Para obtener información adicional sobre medidas ambientales relativas a configuraciones de sistema específicas, vaya a dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperatura En funcionamiento De 10 a 35 °C En almacenamiento De –40 a 65 °C Humedad relativa En funcionamiento Del 20 al 80% (sin condensación) con un gradiente de humedad máxima del 10% por hora En almacenamiento Del 5 al 95% (sin condensación) Vibración máxima En funcionamiento 0,26 Grms, de 5 a 350 Hz a 0,0002 G2/Hz En almacenamiento 1,54 Grms, de 10 a 250 Hz a 0,003-0,01 G2/Hz Impacto máximo En funcionamiento 27 G +/– 10% con duración del impulso de 2,6 ms +/– 10% En almacenamiento 71 G +/– 10% con duración del impulso de 2 ms +/– 10%, 32 G +/– 5% con cambio de velocidad de 235 ips +/– 5% Altitud En funcionamiento De –15,2 a 3 048 m En almacenamiento De –15,2 a 10 600 m Nivel de contaminación atmosférica Clase G2 o menos de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-1985 www.dell.com | support.dell.com/manuals Alienware X51 Owner’s Manual Regulatory model: D05S Regulatory type: D05S001 book.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data, and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™ and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. Alienware® is a registered trademark of Alienware Corporation. Microsoft®, Windows®, and the Windows start button logo are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. 2012 - 01 Rev. A00 book.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMContents 3 Contents 1 About Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Turn Off Your Computer and Connected Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3 Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . 9 4 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Entering System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 book.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM4 Contents 5 Flashing the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 6 Contacting Alienware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 book.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMAbout Your Computer 5 1 About Your Computer Front View NOTE: Your Alienware X51 computer supports dual orientation. You can place your computer vertically or horizontally. The rotatable AlienHead allows you to change the direction of the AlienHead depending on the orientation of your computer. 1 power button 2 optical-drive eject button 3 optical drive 4 rotatable AlienHead 5 microphone connector 6 headphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 book.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM6 About Your Computer Back View Specifications For more information on specifications of your computer, see support.dell.com/manuals. 1 optical S/PDIF connector 2 HDMI connector 3 USB 2.0 connectors (4) 4 USB 3.0 connectors (2) 5 audio connectors (6) 6 hard-drive activity light 7 AC-adapter connector 8 discrete graphics card 9 security-cable slot 10 network connector and network lights 11 coaxial S/PDIF connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 10 9 8 book.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMBefore You Begin 7 2 Before You Begin Turn Off Your Computer and Connected Devices CAUTION: To avoid losing data, save and close all open files and exit all open programs before you turn off your computer. 1 Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. 2 Click Start and click Shut Down. Microsoft Windows shuts down and then the computer turns off. NOTE: If you are using a different operating system, see the documentation of your operating system for shut-down instructions. 3 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets. 4 Disconnect all telephone cables, network cables, and attached devices from your computer. 5 Press and hold the power button, while the computer is unplugged, to ground the system board. Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to protect your computer from potential damage and ensure your personal safety. WARNING: Before you begin, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at dell.com/regulatory_compliance. CAUTION: To avoid damaging the computer, ensure that the work surface is flat and clean. CAUTION: Only a certified service technician is authorized to remove the computer cover and access any of the components inside the computer. See the safety instructions for complete information about safety precautions and protecting against electrostatic discharge. book.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM8 Before You Begin CAUTION: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some cables have connectors with locking tabs or thumb-screws that you must disengage before disonnecting the cable. When disconnecting cables, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. When connecting cables, ensure that the connectors and ports are correctly oriented and aligned. CAUTION: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug the cable from the network device. NOTE: Ensure that you remove the security cable from the security-cable slot, if applicable. book.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMWorking Inside Your Computer 9 3 Working Inside Your Computer CAUTION: Only a certified service technician is authorized to remove the computer cover and access any of the components inside the computer. See the safety instructions for complete information about safety precautions and protecting against electrostatic discharge. For information on removing and replacing the internal component of your computer, contact Alienware. See "Contacting Alienware" on page 21. book.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM10 Working Inside Your Computer book.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMSystem Setup 11 4 System Setup Overview Use the system setup to: • get information about the hardware installed in your computer, such as the amount of RAM, the size of the hard drive, and so on • change the system configuration information • set or change a user-selectable option, such as the user password, type of hard drive installed, enabling or disabling base devices, and so on NOTE: Before you change system setup, it is recommended that you note the system-setup screen information for future reference. Entering System Setup 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 During POST, when the DELL logo is displayed, watch for the F2 prompt to appear and then press immediately. NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it, and then press . If you press before the F2 prompt, this keystroke is lost. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then, turn off your computer and try again. See "Turn Off Your Computer and Connected Devices" on page 7. book.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM12 System Setup System Setup Screens The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the setup item, active help screen, and key functions. System Setup Options NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may appear, or may not appear exactly as listed. Setup Item — This field appears on the left side of the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list containing features that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Scroll up and down the list with the up- and down-arrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Help Screen displays more information about that option and available settings. Help Screen — This field appears on the right side of the system setup window and contains information about each option listed in the Setup Item. In this field you can view information about your computer and make changes to your current settings. Press the up-arrow and down-arrow keys to highlight an option. Press to make that selection active and return to the Setup Item. NOTE: Not all settings listed in the Setup Item are changeable. Key Functions — This field appears below the Help Screen and lists keys and their functions within the active system setup field. Main BIOS Information Product Information Build Date Displays the BIOS release date. Product Name Displays the product name. BIOS Version Displays the BIOS version number. Set Service Tag Allows you to enter the service tag of your computer. Asset Tag Displays the asset tag of the computer. book.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMSystem Setup 13 Memory Information Total Memory Displays the total memory of the computer. Memory Available Displays the amount of memory available on the computer. Memory Technology Displays the type of memory technology used. Memory Speed Displays the memory speed. CPU Information Processor ID Displays the processor identification code. CPU Speed Displays the processor speed. Cache L2 Displays the processor L2 cache size. Cache L3 Displays the processor L3 cache size. Advanced — Standard CMOS Features System Date (mm:dd:yy) Displays current date. System Time (hh:mm:ss) Displays the current time. Device Information SATA Port1 Displays the SATA 1 drive integrated in the computer. SATA Port2 Displays the SATA 2 drive integrated in the computer. SATA Port3 Displays the SATA 3 drive integrated in the computer. Wait for ‘F1’ If Errors If enabled, the system will HALT during boot to display system errors. Advanced — Advanced BIOS Features Bootup Num-Lock Select power-on state for num-lock. OptionROM Display Screen Allows you to display or hide the RAID Option ROM screen during POST. book.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM14 System Setup Advanced — CPU Configuration Hyper-threading Technology If disabled only one thread per enabled core is active. XD Bit Capability Enable XD Bit Capability to allow the processor to distinguish between the bits of code that can be executed and the ones that cannot be executed. Intel(R) SpeedStep tech If enabled, the processor clock speed and core voltage are adjusted dynamically based on the processor load. Intel(R) C-State tech Allows you to enable the number of cores in each processor package. Options 1-5. Advanced — Integrated Devices USB Controller Allows you to enable or disable the integrated USB controller. HD Audio Allows you to enable or disable the integrated audio controller. Onboard LAN Controller Allows you to enable or disable the onboard LAN controller. Launch PXE OpROM Allows you to enable or disable the boot option for legacy network devices. PCH SATA Configuration SATA Mode Displays the SATA mode. Advanced — Power Management Setup Suspend Mode Sets the energy-saving mode of the ACPI function. AC Recovery Sets what action the computer takes when power is restored. Auto Power On Allows the computer to start up at a certain time. Auto Power On Date Allows you to set RTC Wake Up Date. Auto Power On Hour Allows you to set RTC Wake Up Hour. Auto Power On Minute Allows you to set RTC Wake Up Minute. Auto Power On Second Allows you to set RTC Wake Up Second book.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMSystem Setup 15 Security Supervisor Password: Allows you to change the supervisor password. User Password: Allows you to change the user password. You cannot use the user password to enter the BIOS setup, during POST. Set Supervisor Password Allows you to set a supervisor password. Set User Password Allows you to set a supervisor password. Boot Set Boot Priority 1st Boot Device Displays the first boot device. Default: USB floppy-drive. 2nd Boot Device Displays the second boot device. Default: USB hard-drive. 3rd Boot Device Displays the third boot device. Default: USB optical-drive. 4th Boot Device Displays the fourth boot device. Default: hard-drive. 5th Boot Device Displays the fifth boot device. Default: optical-drive. 6th Boot Device Displays the sixth boot device. Default: network boot. 7th Boot Device Displays the seventh boot device. Default: UEFI. Hard Disk Drive BBS Priorities Sets the hard drive boot priority. The items displayed are dynamically updated according to the hard drives detected. USB Disk BBS Drive Priorities Sets the USB drive boot priority. CD/DVD ROM Drive BBS Priorities Sets the CD/DVD drive boot priority. book.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM16 System Setup Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Boot Options • Diskette Drive —The computer attempts to boot from the floppy disk drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. • Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. • CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the optical drive. If no disc is in the drive, or if the disc is not bootable, the computer generates an error message. • USB Storage Device — Insert the memory device into a USB connector and restart the computer. When F12 Boot Options appears in the lower-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To ensure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. • Network — The computer attempts to boot from the network. If no operating system is found on the network, the computer generates an error message. Exit Provides options to Save Changes and Reset, Discard Changes and Reset, and Restore Defaults. book.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMSystem Setup 17 Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature to change the current boot sequence, for example, to boot from the optical drive to run Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities disc. The previous boot sequence is restored at the next boot. 1 If you are booting from a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector. 2 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3 When F2 Setup, F12 Boot Options appears in the lower-right corner of the screen, press . NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. 4 On the Boot Device Menu choose the device you want to boot from. For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Storage Device and press . Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1 Enter system setup. See "Entering System Setup" on page 11. 2 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot menu option and press to access the menu. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. 3 Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4 Press plus (+) or minus (–) to change the boot priority of the device. book.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM18 System Setup book.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMFlashing the BIOS 19 5 Flashing the BIOS The BIOS may require flashing when an update is available or when replacing the system board. To flash the BIOS: 1 Turn on the computer. 2 Go to support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3 Locate the BIOS update file for your computer: NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located on a label at the back of your computer. If you have your computer’s Service Tag: a Click Enter a Tag. b Enter your computer’s Service Tag in the Enter a service tag: field, click Go, and proceed to step 4. If you do not have your computer’s Service Tag: a Click Select Model. b Select the type of product in the Select Your Product Family list. c Select the product brand in the Select Your Product Line list. d Select the product model number in the Select Your Product Model list. NOTE: If you have selected a different model and want to start over again, click Start Over on the top right of the menu. e Click Confirm. 4 A list of results appears on the screen. Click BIOS. 5 Click Download Now to download the latest BIOS file. The File Download window appears. 6 Click Save to save the file on your desktop. The file downloads to your desktop. 7 Click Close if the Download Complete window appears. The file icon appears on your desktop and is titled the same as the downloaded BIOS update file. 8 Double-click the file icon on the desktop and follow the instructions on the screen. book.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM20 Flashing the BIOS book.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PMContacting Alienware 21 6 Contacting Alienware NOTE: Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options for your Alienware computer. These services may vary by country and product and may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1 Go to dell.com/contactdell. 2 Select your region, country, or language. 3 Select the segment for contact. 4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. 5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you. If you are in the United States, call 1-800-ALIENWARE for help on your Alienware computer. Websites For the latest information, FAQ’s, and solutions to most common issues, see support.dell.com/Alienware. book.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 17, 2012 10:32 PM Intel® Active Management Technology(主动管理技 术)v6.0 管理员指南 概览 产品概览 开箱即用体验 操作模式 设置和配置概览 菜单及默认设置 MEBx 设置概览 ME 常规设置 AMT 配置 Intel 快速呼叫帮助 ME 常规设置 AMT 配置 设置和配置 方法概览 配置服务 - 使用 USB 设备 配置服务 - USB 设备步骤 系统部署 操作系统驱动程序 管理 Intel AMT Web GUI AMT 重定向 (SOL/IDE-R) AMT 重定向概览 Intel Management and Security Status 应用程序 Intel Management and Security Status 应用 程序 故障排除 故障排除 如果您购买的是 Dell™ n 系列计算机,则本说明文件中关于 Microsoft® Windows® 操作系统的任何参考内容均不适用。 本说明文件中的信息如有更改,恕不另行通知。 © 2010 Dell Inc. 版权所有,翻印必究。 未经 Dell Inc. 书面许可,严禁以任何形式复制这些材料。 本文中使用的商标:Dell、Latitude 和 DELL 徽标是 Dell Inc. 的商标;Intel 是 Intel Corporation 在美国 及其他国家和地区的商标或注册商标;Microsoft 和 Windows 是 Microsoft Corporation 在美国及/或其他国家和地区的商标或注册商标。 本说明文件中述及的其他商标和商品名称是指拥有相应标记和名称的公司或其制造的产品。Dell Inc. 对其他公司的商标和产品名称不拥有任何所有权。 2010 年 4 月 修订版 A00返回目录页面 概览 Intel® 主动管理技术 (Intel AMT) 有助于公司轻松管理其联网计算机。 搜索网络上的计算机资产(无论计算机处于打开或关闭状态)– Intel AMT 使用存储在非易失性系统内存中的信息来访问计算机。即使计 算机处于关闭状态,也能对其进行访问(也称为带外访问或 OOB 访问)。 假如操作系统发生故障,也可远程修复计算机 — 在软件或操作系统发生故障的情况下,可使用 Intel AMT 远程访问计算机以完成修复。 此外,IT 管理员还可在 Intel AMT 带外事件记录和警报的协助下轻松检测计算机故障。 保护网络免受外来威胁,同时通过网络轻松地将软件和病毒防护应用程序保持最新。 软件支持 现有多家独立软件供应商 (ISV) 致力于开发可与 Intel AMT 功能配合使用的软件包。通过对其进行应用,当 IT 管理员从远程管理公司内部的联 网计算机资产时,便可为其提供多种选择。 功能和优点 Intel AMT 功能 优点 带外 (OOB) 访问 无论电源或操作系统状态为何,都可对平台进行远程管理 远程故障排除和恢复 大大减少现场查访次数,提高 IT 技术人员的工作效率 预警机制 减少停机时间并将修复次数降至最低 计算机要求 本说明文件中的计算机包括 Intel® 5 Series Chipset Family/Intel® PCH 平台,由 Intel Management Engine 管理。要配置 Intel Management Engine 并在客户端计算机运行,必须先满足以下针对安装和设置的固件和软件要求: SPI 闪存设备,使用 Intel AMT 6.0 闪存映像编程,集成了 BIOS、Intel Management Engine 和 GbE 组件映像。 BIOS 设置为启用 Intel AMT,可从 F12 菜单访问 MEBx。 要启用 Microsoft 操作系统内的所有 Intel Management Engine 功能,必须在客户端系统上安装和配置设备驱动程序 (Intel® MEI/SOL/LMS),以便在客户端系统运行的功能得以正常运行。 * 本页面上的信息由 Intel 提供。 注: Intel Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 是 Intel 专为 Dell™ 提供的可选 ROM 模块,它将包含于 Dell BIOS 中。MEBx 专为 Dell 计算机而定制。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 开箱即用体验 以下资料随 Intel™ 主动管理技术 (Intel AMT) 计算机一同提供: 出厂安装 Intel AMT 6.0 从 Dell 工厂出厂时处于出厂默认状态。 安装与快速参考指南 Intel AMT 概览(内含指向《Dell 技术指南》的链接)。 《Dell 技术指南》 高级别 Intel AMT 概览、设置、预配置和支持。 备份介质 ResourceCD 内附固件和关键驱动程序。 有关 Intel AMT 的详细信息,请参阅《管理员指南》。该指南发布在 Web 上,可从 support.dell.com 上的计算机手册中获取。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 操作模式 Intel® AMT 的早期版本支持两种操作模式 - 中小型企业 (SMB) 模式和企业模式。在当前版本中,可通过集成其功能以提供较早企业模式的功 能。 适用于 SMB 客户的新配置选项包括:手动设置和配置,及自动设置和配置。 设置 Intel AMT 5.0(默认设置) Intel AMT 6.0(默认设置) 企业模式 SMB 模式 “TLS mode”(TLS 模式) “Enabled”(已启用) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Disabled”(已禁用),可稍后启用 Web UI “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用) “Enabled”(已启用) “IDER/SOL/KVM Redirection network interface enabled”(IDER/SOL/KVM 重定向网络接口已启用) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用),如果可在 Intel® MEBx 中启用此功能 “Enabled”(已启用),可稍后禁用 “Legacy Redirection Mode”(传统重定向模式)(控 件 FW,监听接入重定向连接) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用),如果可在 Intel MEBx 中启用此功能 “Disabled”(已禁用)(要与传统 SMB 控制台配合使用,需设置 为“Enabled”(已启用)) 注: KVM 仅受集成图形 CPU 支持。系统应处于集成图形模式。 按照以下步骤执行手动配置: 111使用系统 BIOS 和 FW 刷新映像。 111 通过按 F12 菜单和键入默认密码“admin”,导航至 Intel MEBx。 登录后,更改密码。 111 导航至“Intel ME General Settings”(Intel ME 常规设置)菜单。 111 选择“Activate Network Access”(激活网络访问)。 111 屏幕显示确认信息时,选择“Y”(是)。 111 退出 Intel MEBx。 注: 您也可以使用 Intel Activator 工具,通过外部方式或操作系统,完成激活操作。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 设置和配置概览 下面是与 Intel® AMT 设置和配置相关的重要术语列表。 设置和配置 — 在 Intel AMT 管理的计算机中填写用户名、密码及网络参数的过程,以便从远程管理计算机。 配置服务 — 完成 Intel AMT 预配置的第三方应用程序。 Intel AMT WebGUI — 一种基于 Web 浏览器的界面,用于进行有限的远程计算机管理。 在使用 Intel AMT 之前,必须在计算机中对其进行设置和配置。通过 Intel AMT 设置,可让计算机开始使用 Intel AMT 模式,并启用网络连接 性。在计算机的整个使用过程中,该设置通常只需执行一次。一旦启用 Intel AMT,管理软件便可通过网络对其进行检测。 一旦在企业模式下设置 Intel AMT 后,便可开始启动针对其自身功能的配置。当所有必需的网络条件均已满足时,您只需将计算机连接至电源和 网络,Intel AMT 便会自动初始化其自身的配置。配置服务(第三方应用程序)将为您完成该操作流程。随后,Intel AMT 便可用于远程管理。此 配置通常只需数秒时间。当设置并配置 Intel AMT 之后,可根据需要为您的业务环境重新配置该技术。 一旦在 SMB 模式下设置 Intel AMT ,计算机便无需通过网络进行任何配置。它是手动设置的,并可与 Intel AMT Web GUI 搭配使用。 Intel AMT 的设置和配置状态 设置和配置 Intel AMT 的操作也被称作“预配置”。具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机可处于以下三种设置和配置状态 (SCS) 中的任一种状态: 出厂默认设置状态 设置状态 预配置状态 出厂默认设置状态为完全取消配置状态。在此状态下,安全凭证尚未建立,且 Intel AMT 功能还无法用于管理应用程序。在出厂默认设置状态 下,Intel AMT 采用出厂时所定义的设置。 设置状态为已进行部分配置的状态。在此状态下,已使用初始网络和传输层安全 (TLS) 信息对 Intel AMT 进行设置,这些信息包括:初始管理员 密码、预配置密文 (PPS) 以及预配置标识符 (PID)。设置 Intel AMT 之后,Intel AMT 便可接收来自配置服务的企业配置设置。 预配置状态为完全配置状态。在此状态下,已使用电源选项对 Intel Management Engine (ME) 进行配置,并使用 Intel AMT 的安全设置、凭 证以及激活 Intel AMT 功能的设置对其自身进行配置。配置 Intel AMT 之后,各项功能便可与管理应用程序进行交互。 预配置方法 TLS-PKI TLS-PKI 也称为“远程配置”。SCS 使用 TLS-PKI(公共密钥基础结构)证书安全地连接到已启用 Intel AMT 的计算机。生成该证书的方法有以 下几种: SCS 可使用已预编程到计算机的某一默认证书进行连接,详见本说明文件的“MEBx 界面”一节。 SCS 可创建自定义证书,该证书可通过现场查访方式,使用经过特殊格式化的 USB 驱动器闪存在 AMT 计算机上进行部署,详见本说明文 件的“配置服务”一节。 SCS 可使用在 Dell 出厂时已通过自定义工厂集成 (CFI) 进程预编程的自定义证书。 TLS-PSK TLS-PSK 也称为“一触式配置”。SCS 使用 PSK(预共享密钥)与 AMT 计算机建立安全连接。SCS 可创建这些包含 52 个字符的密钥,然后采 用以下两种现场查访方法之一将其部署到 AMT 计算机上: 可将密钥手动键入到 MEBx 中。 SCS 可创建自定义密钥列表,并将其保存到经特殊格式化的 USB 驱动器闪存中。随后,每台 AMT 计算机在 BIOS 引导时便可从经特殊 格式化的 USB 驱动器闪存恢复自定义密钥,详见本说明文件的“配置服务”一节。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 MEBx 设置概览 Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 为您提供了平台级别的配置选项,以便配置 Management Engine (ME) 平台的工作 方式。这些选项包括启用和禁用各个功能以及设置电源配置的选项。 本部分详细介绍了 MEBx 配置的选项和限制(如果有)。 注: 所有“ME Platform Configuration”(ME 平台配置)设置的更改均未在 MEBx 中进行缓存。在退出 MEBx 之前,系统不会将它们 提交到 ME 非易失性存储器 (NVM)。因此,如果 MEBx 崩溃,系统不会将在该点前所做的更改提交到 ME NVM。 访问 MEBx 配置用户界面 通过执行以下步骤,可在计算机上访问 MEBx 配置用户界面: 111 打开(或重新启动)计算机。 111 屏幕上显示蓝色 DELL™ 徽标时,立即按 键并选择 MEBx。 如果等待时间过长,系统已显示操作系统徽标,则请继续等待直至看到 Microsoft® Windows® 桌面。然后关闭计算机并再试一次。 111 键入 ME 密码。按 键。默认密码为“admin”。此外,用户可更改该密码。 注: 访问 MEBx 的另一种方法是按 键启动一次性引导菜单。屏幕上显示菜单时,使用上箭头和下箭头键选择“Intel Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx)”。按 键。 随即出现如下所示的 MEBx 屏幕。主菜单显示三个功能选项: “Intel ME General Settings”(Intel ME 常规设置) “Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置) “Exit”(退出) 注: Intel MEBx 仅显示已检测到的选项。如果系统没有显示这些选项中的一个或多个选项,则请验证系统是否支持相关的缺失功能。 更改 Intel ME 密码 在所有新部署的平台上,默认密码均为“admin”。在更改功能配置选项之前,必须先更改默认密码。 如果 IT 管理员使用默认密码首次进入 Intel MEBx 配置菜单,则他或她必须先更改默认密码,然后才能使用各种功能。 新密码必须包含以下要素: 至少包含 8 个字符,最多不超过 32 个字符 至少含一个大写字母 至少含一个小写字母 数字 特殊字符(非字母数字),例如 !、$ 或 ;,不包括 :、" 及 ,字符。 注: 下划线 ( _ ) 和空格也是有效的密码字符,但不会增加密码的复杂性。 * 本页面上的信息由 Intel 提供。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 ME 常规设置 要导航至“Intel® Management Engine (ME) Platform Configuration” (Intel® Management Engine (ME) 平台配置)页,请执 行以下步骤: 111在 Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 主菜单下,选择“Intel ME General Settings” (Intel ME 常规设置)。按 键。 111系统将显示以下信息: 获取“General Settings”(常规设置)配置 屏幕出现“ME General Configuration” (ME 常规配置)页。该页允许 IT 管理员配置 Intel ME 的特定功能,例如密码、电源选项等。指向 各部分的快速链接如下。 Intel ME 状态控制 更改 Intel ME 密码 密码策略 网络设置 网络名称设置 主机名 域名 FQDN 动态 DNS 定期更新间隔 TTL 上一级菜单 TCP/IP 设置 有线 LAN IPv4 配置 DHCP 模式 IPv4 地址 默认网关地址 首选 DNS 地址 备用 DNS 地址 上一级菜单 有线 LAN IPv6 配置 IPv6 功能选择 IPv6 接口 ID 类型 IPv6 地址 IPv6 默认路由器 首选 DNS IPv6 地址 备用 DNS IPv6 地址 上一级菜单 无线 LAN IPv6 配置 IPv6 功能选择 IPv6 接口 ID 类型 上一级菜单 取消配置网络访问 远程设置和配置 当前预配置模式 预配置记录 开始配置 上一级菜单 预配置服务器 IPv4/IPv6 预配置服务器 FQDN TLS PSK 设置 PID 和 PPS 删除 PID 和 PPS 上一级菜单 TLS PKI 远程配置 PKI DNS 后缀 管理散列值 添加定制散列值删除散列值 更改活动状态 查看证书散列值 上一级菜单 上一级菜单 FW 更新设置 本地 FW 更新 安全 FW 更新 上一级菜单 设置 PRTC 电源控制 在主机睡眠状态下开启 Intel ME 空闲超时 上一级菜单 Intel ME 状态控制 在“ME Platform Configuration”(ME 平台配置)菜单上选择“ME State Control”(ME 状态控制)选项后,会出现 “ME State Control”(ME 状态控制)菜单。可禁用 ME 以便将 ME 计算机从主平台隔离出来,直到调试过程结束。 通过“Intel ME State Control”(Intel ME 状态控制)选项(启用/禁用),可禁用 Intel ME 功能以便进行调试。通过令 MEBx 禁止执行 Intel ME 代码,即可实现禁用 Intel ME。从而使 IT 技术人员可以消除 Intel ME 中的潜在问题。 “ME Platform State Control”(ME 平台状态控制) 选项 说明 “Enabled”(已启用) 在平台上启用 Management Engine “Disabled”(已禁用) 在平台上禁用 Management Engine 注: “禁用”Intel ME 并不能真正禁用它。它只会造成 Intel ME 代码在 Intel ME 引导的最初阶段暂停,从而导致系统在任意总线上均没 有源自 Intel ME 的通信。这既不适用于正常操作模式,也不是受支持的配置,仅适用于进行调试。通过此选项,IT 技术人员可调试系统 故障,而无需担心 Intel ME 介入。更改 Intel ME 密码 111请在“Intel ME New Password”(Intel ME 新密码)提示符下键入新密码。(请注意密码策略和 “changing the Intel ME Password requirement”(更改 Intel ME 密码要求)中提及的限制) 111请在弹出的“Verify Password”(验证密码)提示符下重新键入新密码。 密码策略 该选项可确定何时允许用户通过网络更改 Intel MEBx 密码。 注: 用户可随时通过 Intel MEBx 用户界面更改 Intel MEBx 密码。以下是这些选项的简介。 仅默认密码 — 如果尚未更改默认密码,则可通过网络界面更改 Intel MEBx 密码。 在设置和配置期间 — 只能在设置和配置过程中通过网络界面更改 Intel MEBX 密码,而不能在其它时段更改。一旦完成设置和配置过程, 便无法再通过网络界面更改 Intel MEBx 密码。 任何时间 — 可随时通过网络界面更改 Intel MEBX 密码。 网络设置 在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“Network Setup”(网络设置),然后按 键。 “Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台设置)菜单将切换至“Intel ME Network Setup”(Intel ME 网络设置)页。 网络名称设置 在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称 设置),然后按 键。1.主机名 在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Host Name”(主机名),然后按 键。 可将主机名分配至具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机。这将是启用 Intel AMT 的系统的主机名。 2.域名在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Domain Name”(域名),然后按 键。 可将域名分配至具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机。 3.共享/专用 FQDN 在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Shared/Dedicated FQDN”(共享/专用 FQDN),然后按 键。 此设置可确定 Intel ME 完全合格域名 (Fully Qualified Domain Name, FQDN)(即“HostName.DomainName”)是否与主机共享、是否与操作系统计算机名称一致或者是否专用于 Intel ME。 选项 说明 “Dedicated”(专用) FQDN 域名专用于 ME “Shared”(共享) 与主机共享 FQDN 域名 4.动态 DNS 更新 在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新),然后按 键。 如果启用了“Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新),则固件会使用“Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新)协议,主动尝试在 DNS 中注册其 IP 地址和 FQDN。如果禁用了该选项,则固件不会使用 DHCP 选项 81 或“Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新)来试图更新 DNS。如果用户从未配置过“DDNS Update”(DDNS 更新)状态(“Enabled”(已启用)或“Disabled”(已禁用)),则固件将会执行旧的实 施方案(即固件使用 DHCP 选项 81 注册 DNS,而不会直接使用动态 DNS 更新协议更新 DNS)。要为“Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新)选择“Enabled”(已启用)时,需要设置“Host Name”(主机名)和“Domain Name”(域名)。 选项 说明 “Enabled”(已 启用) FW 中的“Dynamic DNS Update Client”(动态 DNS 更新客户端)已启用。 “Disabled”(已 禁用) FW 中的“Dynamic DNS Update Client”(动态 DNS 更新客户端)已禁用。 5.定期更新间隔 111在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Periodic Update Interval”(定期更新间隔),然后 按 键。 111键入所需的时间间隔,然后按 键。注:仅当已 启用“Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新)时,此选项才可用。 定义固件 DDNS 更新客户端发送定期更新的时间间隔。该间隔应根据公司 DNS 清理政策进行设置。单位为分钟。将该值设为 0 可禁用定期更 新。所设的值必须等于或大于 20 分钟。此属性的默认值为 24 小时,即 1440 分钟。 6.TTL 111在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择 TTL,然后按 键。 111键入所需的时间(以秒为单位),然后按 键。注:仅当已启用 “Dynamic DNS Update”(动态 DNS 更新)时,此选项才可用。 此设置允许以秒为单位配置 TTL 时间。该数值应该大于零。如果将该值设为零,则固件会使用其内部默认值,该值为 15 分钟或 1/3 的 DHCP 租 用时间。 7.上一级菜单 111在“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)下,选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 111“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)菜单将切换至“Intel Network Setup”(Intel 网络设置)页。 TCP/IP 设置 111在“Network Setup”(网络设置)菜单下,选择“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置),然后按 键。 111“Intel ME Network Name Settings”(Intel ME 网络名称设置)菜单将切换至“Intel Network Setup”(Intel 网络设置)页。 “Intel Network Setup”(Intel 网络设置)菜单将切换为“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)页。 注: Intel MEBx 有针对无线 IPv6 的菜单,但没有针对无线 IPv4 的菜单。Intel MEBx 启动时会检查无线接口,以决定是否显示无线 IPv6 菜单。 有线 LAN IPv4 配置 在“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)下,选择“Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置),然后按 键。 此时,“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单将切换为“Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置)页。1.DHCP 模式 在“Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置)下,选择“DHCP Mode”(DHCP 模式),然后按 键。 此时,“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单将切换为“Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置)页。 “ENABLED”(已启用):如果已启用“DHCP Mode”(DHCP 模式),则由 DHCP 服务器配置 TCP/IP 设置。屏幕上将显示更多选项。选 择“ENABLED”(已启用),然后按 键即可,无需执行其他步骤。 “DHCP Mode”(DHCP 模式)已启用。选择“DISABLED”(已禁用),然后按 键。如果您禁用了 DHCP,则会显示更多选项。 “DHCP Mode”(DHCP 模式)已禁用。 2.IPv4 地址 选择“IPv4 Address (IPv4 地址),然后按 键。 在地址栏中键入 IPv4 地址,然后按 键。3.子网掩码地址 选择“Subnet Mask Address”(子网掩码地址),然后按 键。 在地址栏中键入子网掩码地址,然后按 键。 4.默认网关地址选择“Default Gateway Address”(默认网关地址),然后按 键。 在地址栏中键入默认网关地址,然后按 键。 5.首选 DNS 地址 选择“Preferred DNS Address”(首选 DNS 地址),然后按 键。 在地址栏中键入首选 DNS 地址,然后按 键。6.备用 DNS 地址 选择“Alternate DNS Address”(备用 DNS 地址),然后按 键。 在地址栏中键入备用 DNS 地址,然后按 键。 7.上一级菜单 在“Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置)下,选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置)菜单将切换至“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单。 有线 LAN IPv6 配置 在“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)下,选择“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置),然后按 键。 此时,“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单将切换为“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)页。 Intel ME IPv6 地址为专用地址,不与主机操作系统共享。要启用针对 IPv6 地址的动态 DNS 注册,必须配置一个专用的 FQDN。注: Intel ME 网络堆栈支持多宿主 IPv6 接口。每个网络接口均可配置为以下 IPv6 地址: 111 一个链接本地自动配置地址 111 三个自动配置全局地址 111 一个已配置 DHCPv6 的地址 111 一个静态配置的 IPv6 地址 1.IPv6 功能选择 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“IPv6 Feature Selection”(IPv6 功能选择),然后按 键。 禁用:选择“Disabled”(已禁用),然后按 键。即可禁用“IPv6 Feature Selection”(IPv6 功能选择)。启用:选择“Enabled”(已启用),然后按 键。 即可启用“IPv6 Feature Selection”(IPv6 功能选择)从而进行更详细的配置。 2.IPv6 接口 ID 类型 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)中选择“IPv6 Interface ID Type”(IPv6 接口 ID 类型),然后按 键。 IPv6 IPv6 IPv6 ID 64 自动配置的 地址由两部分组成; 路由器设置的 前缀为第一部分,接口 是第二部分(各 位)。 选项 说明 “Random ID”(随机 ID) 按照 RFC 3041 中的说明,使用随机号码自动生成 IPv6 接口 ID。这是默认设置。 Intel ID 使用 MAC 地址自动生成 IPv6 接口 ID。 “Manual ID”(手动 ID) 手动配置 IPv6 接口 ID。要选择该类型,需要使用有效值设置“Manual Interface ID”(手动接口 ID)。 3.IPv6 地址 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“IPv6 Address”(IPv6 地址),然后按 键。 键入 IPv6 地址,然后按 键。4.IPv6 默认路由器 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“IPv6 Default Router”(IPv6 默认路由器),然后按 键。 键入 IPv6 默认路由器,然后按 键。5.首选 DNS IPv6 地址 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“Preferred DNS IPv6 Address”(首选 DNS IPv6 地址),然后按 键。 键入首选 DNS IPv6 地址,然后按 键。 6.备用 DNS IPv6 地址 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“Alternate DNS IPv6 Address”(备用 DNS IPv6 地址),然后按 键。 键入备用 DNS IPv6 地址,然后按 键。7.上一级菜单 在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 即可从“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)菜单切换至“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单。 无线 LAN IPv6 配置 在“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)中选择“Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration”(无线 LAN IPv6 配置),然后按 键。 即可从“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单切换至“Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration”(无线 LAN IPv6 配置)页。1.IPv6 功能选择 在“Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration”(无线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“IPv6 Feature Selection”(IPv6 功能选择),然后按 键。 2.IPv6 接口 ID 类型在“Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置)中选择“IPv6 Interface ID Type”(IPv6 接口 ID 类型),然后按 键。 自动配置的 IPv6 地址由两部分组成;IPv6 路由器设置的 IPv6 前缀为第一部分,接口 ID 是第二部分(各 64 位)。 选项 说明 “Random ID”(随机 ID) 按照 RFC 3041 中的说明,使用随机号码自动生成 IPv6 接口 ID。这是默认设置。 Intel ID 使用 MAC 地址自动生成 IPv6 接口 ID。 “Manual ID”(手动 ID) 手动配置 IPv6 接口 ID。要选择该类型,需要使用有效值设置“Manual Interface ID”(手动接口 ID)。 3.上一级菜单 在“Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration”(无线 LAN IPv6 配置)下选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 即可从“Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration”(无线 LAN IPv6 配置)菜单切换至“TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置)菜单。 取消配置网络访问 111在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“Unconfigure Network Access”(取消配置网络访 问),然后按 键。 注: 此操作会将 Intel ME 切换到预配置状态。111选择“Y(是)”即可取消配置。 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111 111选择“Full Unprovisioning”(完全取消预配置),然后按 键。111正在取消预配置。 远程设置和配置 在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(自动远 程设置和配置),然后按 键。 即可从“Intel ME Platform Configuration(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单切换至“Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(自动远程设 置和配置)页。“Current Provisioning Mode”(当前预配置模式) 在“Automated Setup and Configuration”(自动设置和配置)中选择“Current Provisioning Mode”(当前预配置模式),然后按 键。 “Current Provisioning Mode”(当前预配置模式)– 显示当前的预配 TLS 模式:None(无)、PKI 或 PSK。“Provisioning Record”(预配置记录) 在“Automated Setup and Configuration”(自动设置和配置)下,选择“Provisioning Record”(预配置记录)然后按 键。 “Provisioning Record”(预配置记录)- 显示系统的预配置 PSK/PKI 记录数据。如果尚未输入该数据,则 Intel MEBx 会显示一条信息,说 明“Provision Record not present”(预配置记录不存在)。 如果已输入数据,则“Provisioning Record”(预配置记录)会显示如下信息: 选项 说明 “TLS provisioning mode”(TLS 预配 置模式) 显示系统的当前配置模式:“None”(无)、PSK 或 PKI。 “Provisioning IP”(预配置 IP) 设置和配置服务器的 IP 地址。 “Date of Provision”(预配 置的日期) 显示预配置的日期和时间,其格式为“MM/DD/YYYY at HH:MM”(MM/DD/YYYY 时间:HH:MM) DNS 表示在执行远程配置前,Intel MEBx 中是否已配置“PKI DNS Suffix”(PKI DNS 后缀)。值为 0 表示 尚未配置 DNS 后缀,固件会依赖于 DHCP 选项 15,并将此后缀与配置服务器的客户端证书中的 FQDN 进行对比。值为 1 则表示已配置 DNS 后缀,并且固件与配置服务器的客户端证书中 的 DNS 后缀匹配。 “Host Initiated”(主机启动)– 显示设置和配置过程是否已由主机启动:“No”(否)表示设置和配置过程 不是由主机启动的;“Yes”(是)表示设置和配置过程是由主机启动的(仅 PKI)。 “Hash Data”(散 列值数据) 显示 40 个字符的证书散列值数据(仅 PKI)。 “Hash Algorithm”(散列 值算法) 描述散列值类型。目前,仅支持 SHA1。(仅 PKI)。 IsDefault 如果散列值算法是选定的默认算法,则显示“Yes”(是)。如果散列算法不是所使用的默认算法,则显 示“No”(否)(仅 PKI)。 FQDN 证书中提及的预配置服务器的 FQDN(仅 PKI)。 “SerialNumber”(序列 号) 32 位字符串,表示证书颁发机构分配的序列号。 “Time Validity Pass”(有效期通 过) 表示证书是否已通过有效期检查。 RCFG 在“Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单下,选择 RCFG,然后按 键。 “Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单将切换至“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)页。 开始配置 在“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单下,选择“Start Configuration”(开始配置),然后按 键。 如果未激活“Remote Configuration”(远程配置),则不会进行远程配置。 要激活(启动)“Remote Configuration”(远程配置),请选择“Y”(是)。上一级菜单 在“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单下,选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单将切换至“Intel Automated Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动设置和配置) 页。 预配置服务器 IPv4/IPv6 在“Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单下,选择 “Provisioning Server IPv4/IPv6”(预配置服务器 IPv4/IPv6),然后按 键。 111 键入预配置服务器地址,然后按 键。111键入预配置服务器端口号,然后按 键。 Intel AMT 预配置服务器的端口号为 (0 - 65535)。默认端口号为 9971。 预配置服务器 FQDN 在“Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单下,选择“Provisioning Server FQDN”(预配置服务器 FQDN),然后按 键。键入预配置服务器的 FQDN,然后按 键。 证书中提及的预配置服务器的 FQDN(仅 PKI)。这也是 AMT 针对 PSK 和 PKI 向其发送呼叫数据包的服务器的 FQDN。 TLS PSK 在“Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单下,选择 TLS PSK,然后按 键。 “Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单将切换至“Intel TLS PSK Configuration”(Intel TLS PSK 配置)页。 此子菜单包含用于 TLS PSK 配置设置的设置设置 PID 和 PPS 在“Intel TLS PSK Configuration”(Intel TLS PSK 配置)菜单下,选择“Set PID and PPS”(设置 PID 和 PPS),然后按 键。 键入 PID,然后按 键。 键入 PPS,然后按 键。 如果设置和配置处于“In-process”(正在进行)状态,则设置 PID/PPS 会导致部分取消预配置。应以短横线格式输入 PID 和 PPS。(例如PID:1234-ABCD;PPS:1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD) 注: 值为“0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000”的 PPS 并不会改变设置配置状态。如果使用该值,则设置和配置将保持 为“Not-started”(未启动)的状态。 删除 PID 和 PPS 在“Intel TLS PSK Configuration”(Intel TLS PSK 配置)菜单下,选择“Delete PID and PPS”(删除 PID 和 PPS),然后按 键。 此选项会删除存储在 Intel ME 中的当前 PID 和 PPS。如果之前没有输入 PID 和 PPS,则 Intel MEBx 会返回错误消息。 要删除 PID 和 PPS 条目,请选择“Y”(是),否则选择“N”(否)。 上一级菜单 在“Intel TLS PSK Configuration”(Intel TLS PSK 配置)菜单下,选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “Intel TLS PSK Configuration”(Intel TLS PSK 配置)菜单将切换至“Intel Automated Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动设置和配 置)页。 TLS PKI 在“Intel Automated Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动设置和配置)菜单下,选择 TLS PKI,然后按 键。 “Intel Automated Remote Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动远程设置和配置)菜单将切换至“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)页。 远程配置 在“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单下,选择“Remote Configuration”(远程配置),然后按 键。 如果设置和配置服务器处于“In-process”(正在进行)状态,则启用/禁用“Remote Configuration”(远程配置)会导致部分取消预配置。选项 说明 “Disabled”(已 禁用) “Remote Configuration”(远程配置)已禁用。仅“Remote Configuration”(远程配置)和“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单)项目可见。 “Enabled”(已 启用) “Remote Configuration”(远程配置)已启用,屏幕上将会显示其他字段。 要禁用:选择“Disabled”(已禁用),然后按 键。 要启用:选择“Enabled”(已启用),然后按 键。 PKI DNS 后缀 在“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单下,选择“PKI DNS Suffix”(PKI DNS 后缀),然后按 键。 键入 PKI DNS 后缀,然后按 键。管理散列值 在“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单下,选择“Manage Hashes”(管理散列值),然后按 键。 选择此选项,将枚举系统中的散列值,并显示散列值名称、活动状态和默认状态。如果系统中不包含任何散列值,Intel MEBx 则会显示下方的屏 幕。回答“Yes”(是),系统将开始添加定制散列值。请参阅后文中的下一节。 “Manage Certificate Hash”(管理证书散列值)屏幕提供了多个键盘控件,用于在系统中管理散列值。在“Manage Certificate Hash”(管理 证书散列值)菜单中,以下键有效: 键 说明 “Escape”( 键) 从菜单退出。 键 向系统添加定制的证书散列值。 键 删除系统中当前选定的证书散列值。 <+> 键 更改当前选定证书散列值的活动状态。 键 显示当前选定的证书散列值的详细信息。 添加定制散列值 在“Manage Certificate Hash”(管理证书散列值)屏幕上按 键后,系统会显示以下屏幕:要添加定制证书散列值:必须键入散列值名(最大不得超过 32 个字符)。按 键后,系统将提示您输入证书散列值。 1111111111111 证书散列值是一个十六进制数字(对于 SHA-1,为 20 字节;对于 SHA-2,为 32 字节)。必须使用正确的格式输入散列值,否则系统会显 示“Invalid Hash Certificate Entered - Try Again”(输入的散列值证书无效 - 请重新输入)信息。按 键后,系统会提示您设置散 列值的活动状态。您可以将定制散列值设置为以下活动状态: “Yes”(是)— 将定制散列值标记为活动。 “No”(否)— 将定制散列值添加到 EPS,但并不处于活动状态。 删除散列值 在“Manage Certificate Hash”(管理证书散列值)屏幕上按 键后,系统会显示以下屏幕: 注: 无法删除设为“Default”(默认)的证书散列值。该选项允许删除选定的证书散列值。 “Yes”(是)— Intel MEBx 向固件发送删除选定散列值的消息。 “No”(否)— Intel MEBx 不会删除选定的散列值,并返回“Remote Configuration”(远程配置)。 更改活动状态 在“Manage Certificate Hash”(管理证书散列值)屏幕上按 <+> 键后,系统会显示以下屏幕: 回答“Yes”(是),会将当前选定的证书散列值切换为活动状态。将散列值设置为活动状态,表示可在 PSK 预配置期间使用该散列值。 查看证书散列值 在“Manage Certificate Hash”(管理证书散列值)屏幕上按 键后,系统会显示以下屏幕:系统会向用户显示选定的证书散列值的详细信息,其中包括: 散列值名称 证书散列值数据 活动和默认状态 上一级菜单 在“Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单下,选择“Previous Menu” (上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “Intel Remote Configuration”(Intel 远程配置)菜单将切换至“Intel Automated Setup and Configuration”(Intel 自动设置和配置) 页。 FW 更新设置 在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置),然后按 键。 “Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台设置)菜单将切换至“FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置)页。本地 FW 更新 在“FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置)菜单下,选择“Local FW Update”(本地 FW 更新),然后按 键。 通过“Intel ME Firmware Local Update”(Intel ME 固件本地更新),用户可允许或阻止固件在字段中进行本地更新。选择“Enabled”(已启 用)选项后,IT 管理员便能通过本地 Intel Management Engine(Intel 管理引擎)界面或本地安全接口,更新 Intel ME 固件。 这种本地固件更新无需使用管理员用户名和密码。因此,一旦本地更新完成,Intel ME 固件就会自动将此设置设为“Disabled”(已禁用)。如需 进行本地更新,则此选项必须设为“Enabled”(已启用)。安全 FW 更新 在“FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置)菜单下,选择“Secure FW Update”(安全 FW 更新),然后按 键。 该选项允许您启动或禁用安全固件更新。“Secure Firmware Update”(安全固件更新)功能需使用管理员用户名和密码。如果没有提供管理员用 户名和密码,则无法更新固件。 启用“Secure Firmware Update”(安全固件更新)功能后,IT 管理员可使用安全方法更新固件。可通过 LMS 驱动程序更新安全固件。 上一级菜单 在“FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置)菜单下,选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置)菜单将切换至“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)页。 设置 PRTC 在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“Set PRC”(设置 PRC),然后按 键。有效的日期范围为 2004 年 1 月 1 日至 2021 年 1 月 4 日。设置 PRTC 值可用于在断电 (G3) 状态下物理保留 PRTC。 按照 GMT (UTC) 格式“YYYY:MM:DD:HH:MM:SS”(年:月:日:时:分:秒)键入 PRTC,然后按 键。 电源控制 在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“Power Control”(电源控制),然后按 键。 “Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单将切换至“Intel Power Control”(Intel 电源控制)页。为遵守“能源之星”* 和 EUP LOT6 规定,可在各种睡眠状态下关闭 Intel ME。“Intel ME Power Control”(Intel ME 电源控制)菜单可用于配 置 Intel ME 平台上与电源有关的策略。 在主机睡眠状态下开启 Intel ME 在“Intel ME Power Control”(Intel ME 电源控制)菜单下,选择“Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States”(在主机睡眠状态下开启 Intel ME),然后按 键。 选定的电源组将决定何时打开 Intel ME。可使用 FITC 或 FPT 修改默认的电源组。 最终用户管理员可根据系统使用情况选择使用哪个电源组。 下表显示了电源组的详细信息。 通过 Intel ME WoL,计时器超时后,Intel ME 会一直保持 M-off 状态,直至有命令发送到 ME。系统发送了此命令后,Intel ME 将切换到 M0 或 M3 状态,并且将对发送的下条命令作出反应。发送到 Intel ME 的 ping 命令也将使 Intel ME 转到 M0 或 M3 状态。 Intel ME 需要一小段时间才能从 M-off 状态切换到 M0 或 M3 状态。在此期间,Intel AMT 将不会对任何 Intel ME 命令作出反应。Intel ME 已转成 M0 或 M3 状态后,系统才对 Intel ME 命令作出反应。 电源组 1 2 S0 开 开 S3 关 开/ME WoL S4/S5 关 开/ME WoL 选择所需的“Power Policy”(电源策略),然后按 键。 注:若 将系统置于预配置状态,系统将自动切换到“Power Package 2”(电源组 2)。不过,稍后可通过 WebUI、管理控制台或 MEBx 改变此状态。 空闲超时 在“Intel ME Power Control menu”(Intel ME 电源控制)菜单下,选择“Idle Time Out” (空闲超时),然后按 键。该设置用于启用“Intel ME Wake”(Intel ME 唤醒)并定义 Intel ME 在 M3 状态下的空闲超时。请以分钟数形式输入该值。该值表示 Intel ME 转变为 M-off 状态之前,可在 M3 状态中保持空闲的总时间。 注: 如果 Intel ME 处于 M0 状态,则不会转为 M-off 状态。 上一级菜单 在“Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)菜单下,选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “Intel ME Power Control”(Intel ME 电源控制)菜单将切换至 “Intel ME Platform Configuration”(Intel ME 平台配置)页。 * 本页面上的信息由 Intel 提供。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 AMT 配置 在彻底配置 Intel® Management Engine (ME) 功能后,务必在配置 Intel AMT 前重新引导以完成无干扰的系统引导。从 Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 主菜单中选择“Intel AMT configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)选项。用户可使用此功能配置具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机,以支持 Intel AMT 管理功能。 注: 您需要对网络术语和计算机技术术语有基本了解,例如 TCP/IP、DHCP、VLAN、IDE、DNS、子网掩码、默认网关和域名。对这些 术语进行解释并不属于本说明文件的范畴。 显示“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页面。指向各部分的快速链接如下。 可管理性功能选择 SOL/IDER 用户名和密码 SOL 重定向模式 上一级菜单 KVM 配置 KVM 功能选择 用户自愿加入 从远程 IT 配置自愿加入 上一级菜单 上一级菜单 “Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页面包含下列用户可配置选项。 可管理性功能选择 在“Main Menu”(主菜单)中选择“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置),然后按 键。“Main Menu”(主菜单)将切 换至“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页。 在“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)菜单中选择“Manageability Feature Selection”(可管理性功能选择),然后按 键。启用“Manageability Feature Selection”(可管理性功能选择)后,将显示“ME manageability feature”(ME 可管理性功能)菜单。选 择“disabled”(已禁用)表明不启用此可管理性功能。 SOL/IDER 在“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页中(已启用 Intel AMT)选择 SOL/IDER,然后按 键。 “Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页将切换至“SOL/IDER”页。 用户名和密码 在“SOL/IDER”页面中选择“Username and Password”(用户名和密码),然后按 键 。 此选项提供用于 SOL/IDER 会话的用户鉴别。如果使用 Kerberos*,则应将此选项设置为“DISABLED”(已禁用), 并通过 Kerberos 设置用 户身份验证。如果未使用 Kerberos,则 IT 管理员可选择在 SOL/IDER 会话中启用或禁用用户身份验证。 选项 说明 “Enabled”(已启用) 启用“Username and Password”(用户名和密码) “Disabled”(已禁用) 禁用“Username and Password”(用户名和密码) SOL 在“SOL/IDER”页中选择 SOL,然后按 键。通过 SOL,可将 Intel AMT 管理的客户端控制台输入/输出重新定向到管理服务器控制台(如果客户端系统支持 SOL)。如果该系统不支持 SOL,则无法启用该值。 选项 说明 “Enabled”(已启用) SOL 已启用 “Disabled”(已禁用) SOL 已禁用。 注: 禁用 SOL 不会删除该功能,只是阻止使用该功能。 IDER 在“SOL/IDER”页中选择“IDER”,然后按 键。通过 IDE-R,Intel AMT 管理的客户端可由管理控制台通过远程磁盘映像进行引导。如果客户端系统不支持 IDE-R,则无法启用该值。 选项 说明 “Enabled”(已启用) IDER 已启用 “Disabled”(已禁用) IDER 已禁用。 注: 禁用 IDER 不会删除该功能,只是阻止使用该功能。 重定向模式 在“SOL/IDER”页中选择“Redirection Mode”(重定向模式),然后按 键。通过“Legacy Redirection Mode”(传统重定向模式),可控制重定向的工作方式。如果设置为禁用该模式,则在每次开始对话前,控制台都需 要打开重定向端口。该情况针对支持打开重定向端口的企业控制台和新型 SMB 控制台而言。因为旧 SMB 控制台(Intel AMT 6.0 之前的版本) 不支持打开重定向端口功能,所以需要通过此“Intel MEBx”选项手动打开重定向端口。 选中此模式时,屏幕将显示以下信息: 选项 说明 “Disabled”(已 禁用) 禁用“Legacy redirection Mode”(传统重定向模式)(默认)“Enabled”(已 启用) 启用 Intel MEBx 中的重定向以后,端口始终处于打开状态。这与之前项目中的 SMB 模式使 用情况相同。旧(Intel AMT 6.0 之前的版本)SMB 控制台需要该模式成功打开重定向对话。 上一级菜单 在“SOL/IDER”页中选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “SOL/IDER”页将切换至“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页。 KVM 配置 在“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页中选择“KVM Configuration”(KVM 配置),然后按 键。 “Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页将切换至“KVM Configuration”(KVM 配置)页。 KVM 功能选择 在“IKVM Configuration”(IKVM 配置)页中选择“KVM Feature Selection”(KVM 功能选择),然后按 键。 选项 说明 “Disabled”(已禁用) 禁用 KVM 功能 “Enabled”(已启用) 启用 KVM 功能 注: 禁用 KVM 不会删除该功能,而只是将其禁用。在此情况下无法使用 KVM。 用户自愿加入 在“IKVM Configuration”(IKVM 配置)页中选择“User Opt-in”(用户自愿加入),然后按 键。可选择以下选项: “Local User Consent is not required for remote establishment of KVM session”(无需取得本地用户同意即可远程建立 KVM 会话) “Local User Consent is required for remote establishment of KVM session”(必须取得本地用户同意才可远程建立 KVM 会话) 从远程 IT 配置自愿加入 在“IKVM Configuration”(IKVM 配置)页中选择“Opt-in Configurable from remote IT”(从远程 IT 配置自愿加入),然后按 键。选项 说明 “Disable Remote Control of KVM Opt-in Policy”(禁用 KVM 自愿加入策略的远程控制) 该选项禁止远程用户选择“User OPT-IN Policy”(用户自愿加入 策略)。禁用状态下只有本地用户可以控制自愿加入策略。 “Enable Remote Control of KVM Opt-in Policy”(启用 KVM 自愿加入策略的远程控制) 允许远程用户选择“User OPT-IN Policy”(用户自愿加入策 略)。 上一级菜单 在“KVM Configuration”(KVM 配置)页中选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “KVM Configuration”(KVM 配置)页将切换至“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页。 上一级菜单 在“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页中选择“Previous Menu”(上一级菜单),然后按 键。 “Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)页将切换至“Main Menu”(主菜单)页。 * 本页面上的信息由 Intel 提供。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 Intel® 快速呼叫 Intel® Fast Call for help (Intel® 快速呼叫帮助) 是一项可用于 VPro SKU 的功能。如果 VPro 系统位于公司网络之外,则 Intel 快速呼叫帮 助连接可协助最终用户请求帮助。如果可从 BIOS 启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助连接,则用户可在加载系统时,可通过按热键/按钮 () 来 启动该连接。建议按 键,然后选择“Fast Call for Help”(快速呼叫帮助)。 注:仅在 IT 管理员已将系统配置为支持该功能的情况下,才可使用该功能。 要求 要从操作系统上建立 Intel 快速呼叫连接,VPro 系统必须首先: 111 启用环境检测 111 创建远程连接策略 111 配备管理现场服务器 (MPS) 完全整合 要使用 Intel 快速呼叫帮助,系统必须处于预配置状态。如果系统支持完整的 VPro,则可使用 Intel 快速呼叫帮助。如果系统仅支持 Intel Standard Manageability,则无法启用 Intel 快速呼叫帮助。 111 在启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助之前,必须先启用环境检测。该操作可让 Intel AMT 确定系统是否位于公司网络中。通过 ISV 应用程序可对其 进行配置。 111 启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助之前,必须先创建远程连接策略。用户无需配置 BIOS 启动呼叫的策略,但在从 BIOS 启动帮助呼叫之前,必须 首先具备另一策略。BIOS 必须支持用于启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助的热键。 111 必须配备管理现场服务器以回复 Intel 快速呼叫帮助。管理现场服务器位于 DMZ 区域。 满足以上所有条件后,系统即可启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助。 启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助 完整配置该功能后,共有三种方法可启动 Intel 快速呼叫帮助会话。这三种方法是: 在 Dell 启动屏幕上按 键。 在 Dell 启动屏幕上按 键启动一次性引导菜单。 选择最后一个标题为“Intel Fast Call for Help”(Intel 快速呼叫帮助)的选项。 从 Windows 系统启动: 111 启动 Intel AMT 隐私图标/应用程序“Intel Management Security Status”(Intel 管理安全保护状态)。 111 切换至 Intel AMT 选项卡。 111在“Remote Connectivity” (远程连接) 框中,单击 “Connect”(连接)。 * 本页面信息由 Intel 提供。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 ME 常规设置 下表列出了“常规设置”页面中 Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 的默认设置。 密码 “Password”(密码) admin 更改 Intel ME 密码 “Change Intel ME Password”(更 改 Intel ME 密码) 空白 密码策略 “Password Policy”(密码策略) “Default Password Only”(仅默认密码)* “During Setup and Configuration”(在设置和配置期间) “Anytime”(任何时间) 网络设置 “Network Name Settings”(网络名称设置) “Host Name”(主机名) 空白 “Domain Name”(域名) 空白 FQDN “Dedicated”(专用) “Shared”(共享)* “Dynamic DNS”(动态 DNS) “Disabled”(已禁用)* “Enabled”(已启用) “TCP/IP Settings”(TCP/IP 设置) “Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv4 配置) “DHCP Mode”(DHCP 模式) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* “Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration”(有线 LAN IPv6 配置) “IPv6 Feature Selection”(IPv6 功能选择) “Disabled”(已禁用)* “Enabled”(已启用) 只有选定“enabled”(已启用) 时才显示配置页面。 “IPv6 Interface ID Type”(IPv6 接口 ID 类型) “Random ID”(随机 ID)* Intel ID “Manual ID”(手动 ID) “IPv6 Address”(IPv6 地址) 空白 “IPv6 Default Router”(IPv6 默认路 由器) 空白“Preferred DNS IPv6 Addrress”(首 选 DNS IPv6 地址) 空白 “Alternate DNS IPv6 Address”(备用 DNS IPv6 地址) 空白 “Activate Network Access”(激活 网络访问) “Y/N”(是/否) “Unconfigure Network Access”(取消配置网络访问) “Y/N”(是/否) 远程设置和配置 “Current Provisioning Mode”(当前预配置模式) “Provisioning Record”(预配置记录) RCFG “Start Configuration”(开始配置) “Y/N”(是/否) “Provisioning Server IPv4/IPv6”(预配置服务器 IPv4/IPv6) 空白 “Provisioning Server FQDN”(预 配置服务器 FQDN) 空白 TLS PSK “Set PID and PPS”(设置 PID 和 PPS) 空白 “Delete PID and PPS”(删除 PID 和 PPS) “Y/N”(是/否) TLS PKI “Remote Configuration”(远程配置) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* “PKI DNS Suffix”(PKI DNS 后缀) 空白 “Manage Hashes”(管理散列值) FW 更新设置 “FW Update Settings”(FW 更新设置) “Local FW Update Qualifier”(本地 FW 更新限制器) “Always Open”(始终打开)* “Never Open”(永不打开) “Restricted”(受限) “Secure FW Update”(安全 FW 更 新) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* * 默认设置 ** 可能导致 Intel AMT 部分取消预配置 1 仅可在进行 Management Engine (ME) 故障排除时更改“Intel ME Platform State Control”(Intel ME 平台状态控制)。 2 仅当已预配置该框后,才能查看取消预配置设置。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 AMT 配置 下表列出了“AMT 配置”页面上 Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 的默认设置。 可管理性/功能选择 SOL/IDER “Username and Password”(用户名 和密码) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* SOL “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* IDER “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* “Legacy Redirection Mode”(传统重 定向模式) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* “KVM Configuration”(KVM 配置) “KVM feature Selection”(KVM 功能 选择) “Disabled”(已禁用) “Enabled”(已启用)* “User Opt-in”(用户自愿加入) “User Consent is not required for KVM session”(KVM 会话不需要取得用户同意) “User Consent is required for KVM session”(KVM 会话需要取得用户同意)* “Opt-in Configurable from remote IT”(从远程 IT 配置自愿加入) “Disable Remote Control of KVM Opt-In Policy”(禁用 KVM 自愿加入策略的远程控制) “Enable Remote Control of KVM Opt-In Policy”(启用 KVM 自愿加入策略的远程控制)* 注: 要运行 KVM,必须配备 Clarkdale/Arrandale CPU * 默认设置 ** 可能导致 Intel AMT 部分取消预配置 1 仅可在进行 Management Engine (ME) 故障排除时更改“Intel ME Platform State Control”(Intel ME 平台状态控制)。 2 在“Enterprise Mode”(企业模式)下,DHCP 会自动加载域名。 3 仅当已预配置该框后,才能查看取消预配置设置。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 设置和配置方法概览 如“设置和配置概览”一节所述,您必须先配置计算机,Intel AMT 功能才可与管理应用程序进行交互。完成预配置过程共有两种方法(按照从最 简单到最复杂的顺序): 配置服务 — 配置服务可使您通过服务器上的 GUI 控制台完成预配置过程,整个过程只需对每台具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机操作一次。 使用由保存在 USB 海量存储设备中的配置服务所创建的文件来填写 PPS 和 PID 字段。 MEBx 界面 — IT 管理员可在每台已配置 Intel AMT 的计算机上,手动配置 Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 设置。通 过在 MEBx 界面中键入由配置服务创建的 32 字符和 8 字符的字母数字密钥,填写 PPS 和 PID 字段。 TLS-PKI — 通常也称为远程配置 (Remote Configuration, RCFG) 或零接触配置 (Zero Touch Configuration, ZTC)。该过程要用 到与 ProvisionServer 有关的证书。Intel Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx) 中必须列出相关的证书散列值。 以下几节将介绍使用这些不同方法的详细信息。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 配置服务 - 使用 USB 设备 本节讨论如何使用 USB 存储设备设置和配置 Intel® AMT。您可以使用 USB 驱动器闪存设置在本地配置密码、预配置 ID (PID) 和预配置密文 (PPS) 信息。这也被称为“USB 预配置”。借助 USB 预配置,您可以手动设置和配置计算机,从而避免了因手动键入条目所引起的问题。 注: 仅将 MEBx 密码设置为出厂默认值“admin”时,USB 预配置才会生效。如果已更改密码,则可通过清除 CMOS 将其重置为出厂默 认值。 典型的 USB 驱动器闪存的设置和配置过程如下。有关使用 Altiris® Dell™ Client Manager (DCM) 的详细过程,请参阅 USB device procedure(USB 设备步骤)页。 111IT 技术人员将 USB 驱动器闪存插入带管理控制台的计算机。 111技术人员通过控制台向设置和配置服务器 (SCS) 请求本地设置和配置记录。 111SCS 执行以下操作: 111 生成相应的密码、PID 和 PPS 集。 111 将该信息保存到数据库中。 111 将该信息返回管理控制台。 111 管理控制台将密码、PID 和 PPS 集写入 USB 驱动器闪存中的 setup.bin 文件。 111技术人员将 USB 驱动器闪存移至具有 Intel AMT 新功能的计算机所在的暂存区域。然后,技术人员执行以下操作: 111 如有必要,请拆封并连接计算机。 111 将 USB 驱动器闪存插入计算机。 111打开该计算机。 111计算机 BIOS 检测 USB 驱动器闪存。 如果找到 USB 驱动器闪存,BIOS 将在驱动器闪存中从头查找 setup.bin 文件。请转至步骤 7。 如果未找到 USB 驱动器闪存或 setup.bin 文件,则重新启动计算机。可忽略其余步骤。 111计算机 BIOS 显示一则消息,提示将自动完成设置和配置。 111setup.bin 文件中的首条可用记录被读入内存。该进程将完成以下操作: 验证文件头记录。 定位下一条可用记录。 如果该步骤执行成功,则当前记录将失效,从而无法再对其进行使用。 111 该进程会将内存地址置入 MEBx 参数块 。 111 该进程调用 MEBx。 111MEBx 处理该记录。 111 MEBx 在显示器中显示完成信息。 1111IT 技术人员关闭该计算机。此时,该计算机处于设置状态,并可分配给企业模式环境中的用户。 1111如果有多台计算机,则请重复步骤 5。 请咨询管理控制台供应商,以获取关于 USB 驱动器闪存设置和配置的更多信息。 USB 驱动器闪存要求 USB 驱动器闪存必须符合以下要求,才能设置和配置 Intel AMT: 其容量必须大于 16 MB。 必须以 FAT16 或 FAT32 文件系统格式对其进行格式化。 扇区大小必须为 1 KB。 USB 驱动器闪存无法引导。 USB 驱动器闪存仅用于 AMT 预配置,不得另作他用。 USB 闪存不得包含任何其它文件,无论是隐藏文件、已删除文件还是其他类型的文件。 setup.bin 文件必须是第一个加载到 USB 驱动器闪存上的文件(适用于 Legacy BIOS 或 Dell™ Optiplex™ 980)。 setup.bin 文件必须位于顶层目录中(适用于 UEFI BIOS、Dell™ Latitude™ E6410/E6410 ATG/E6510 或 Dell Precision™ Mobile Workstation M4500)。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 USB 设备步骤 所提供的默认控制台软件包为 Dell™ Client Management (DCM) 应用程序。本节介绍了使用 DCM 软件包设置和配置 Intel® AMT 的步骤。 如本说明先前所提及,您可以通过第三方供应商使用多个其他软件包。 开始本操作前,必须对计算机进行配置并可由 DNS 服务器检测到。此外还须具备 USB 存储设备,同时必须符合“配置服务 - 使用 USB 设备”页 所列出的要求。 注: 管理软件有一个固有特性,即它并非总是处于动态或实时状态。事实上,有时您向计算机发出执行某项任务的指示时(例如重新引 导),可能需重复执行此操作才会生效。 111 以 FAT16 文件系统格式化 USB 设备,且不设卷标。 111通过双击桌面图标或“Start”(开始)菜单,打开“Altiris® Dell Client Manager”应用程序。 111从左侧导航菜单中选择“AMT Quick Start”(AMT 快速启动)以打开“Altiris Console”(Altiris 控制台)。111单击 <+> 以展开“Intel AMT Getting Started”(Intel AMT 使用入门) 部分。111单击 <+> 以展开“Section 1.Provisioning”(第 1 部分. 预配置) 部分。111单击 <+> 以展开“Basic Provisioning (without TLS)”(基本预配置(无 TLS))部分。111选择“Step 1.Configure DNS”(步骤 1. 配置 DNS)。 装有带外管理解决方案的通知服务器必须在 DNS 中注册为“ProvisionServer”。111在“DNS Configuration”(DNS 配置)屏幕上单击 “Test”(测试), 验证 DNS 是否具有“ProvisionServer”输入项,以及是否可解 析为正确的 Intel 设置和配置服务器 (Setup and Configuration Server, SCS)。此时便会显示 ProvisionServer 及 Intel SCS 的 IP 地址。111选择“Step 2.Discovery Capabilities”(步骤 2. 检测功能)。1111验证该设置是否“Enabled”(已启用)。若为“Disabled”(已禁用),则选中 “Disabled”(已禁用)旁边的复选框,然后单 击“Apply”(应用)。1111选择“Step 3.View Intel AMT Capable Computers”(步骤 3. 查看具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机)。网络中所有具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机都将显示于该列表内。1111选择“Step 4.Create Profile”(步骤 4. 创建配置文件)。1111单击“+”号添加新的配置文件。在“General”(常规)选项卡上,管理员可修改配置文件的名称、说明及密码。管理员可设置标准密码以便于将来维护。选 中“manual” (手动)单选按钮并键入新密码。“Network”(网络)选项卡提供了用于启用 ping 响应、VLAN、WebUI、Serial over LAN(LAN 上串行)及 IDE Redirection(集成开发环境重定向)的选项。如果手动配置 Intel AMT,则也可在 MEBx 中使用这些设置。 借助“TLS”(传输层安全)选项卡可启用 TLS。如果已启用,则还需包括认证机构 (CA) 服务器名、CA 常用名、CA 类型及证书 模板等附加信息。 “ACL”(访问控制列表)选项卡可用于检查已与该配置文件关联的用户,以及添加新用户以及定义其访问权限。“Power Policy”(电源策略)选项卡含有为 Intel AMT 选择睡眠状态及“Idle Timeout”(空闲超时) 设置的选项。为达到最 佳性能,建议始终将空闲超时设置为 0。 警告: “Power Policy”(电源策略)选项卡的设置对计算机是否持续符合能源之星 4.0 标准存有潜在影响。 1111选择“Step 5.Generate Security Keys”(步骤 5. 生成安全密钥)。1111选择箭头外指的图标“Export Security Keys to USB Key”(将安全密钥导出为 USB 密钥)。1111选中“Generate keys before export”(导出前生成密钥)单选按钮。1111键入要生成的密钥数量(取决于需预配置的计算机数目)。默认值为 50。 1111Intel ME 默认密码为“admin”。为环境配置新的 Intel ME 密码。 1111单击“Generate”(生成)。一旦创建密钥,则会在“Generate”(生成)按钮左侧出现一个链接。1111将已预先格式化的 USB 设备插入预配置服务器的 USB 连接器。 1111单击“Download USB key file”(下载 USB 密钥文件)链接 将 setup.bin 文件下载至 USB 设备。默认情况下可自动识别 USB 设 备;将此文件保存至 USB 设备。 注: 如果以后需要其它密钥,则在把 setup.bin 文件保存到 USB 设备之前,必须将其重新格式化。111在“File Download”(文件下载)对话框中单击 “Save”(保存)。 111验证“Save in:”(保存位置:)是否已指向 USB 设备。单击“Save”(保存)。 111在“Download complete”(下载完成)对话框中单击“Close” (关闭) 。 此时便可在驱动器资源管理器窗口中看到 setup.bin 文件。1111关闭“Export Security Keys to USB Key”(将安全密钥导出为 USB 密钥)和驱动器资源管理器窗口,返回至“Altiris Console”(Altiris 控制台)。 1111将 USB 设备拿至计算机前,插入 USB 设备并打开计算机。此时会立即识别出 USB 设备,并提示您 “Continue with Auto Provisioning (Y/N)”(继续执行自动预配置 (是/否)) 按 键。 “Press any key to continue with system boot...”(按任意键继续系统引导...)1111完成后,请关闭计算机并回到管理服务器。 1111选择“Step 6.Configure Automatic Profile Assignments”(步骤 6. 配置自动配置文件分配)。1111验证该设置是否已启用。在“Intel AMT 2.0+”下拉框中,选择先前创建的配置文件。为环境配置其他设置。1111选择“Step 7.Monitor Provisioning Process”(步骤 7. 监控预配置进程)。应用密钥的计算机随即逐个出现在系统列表中。起初,其状态为 “Unprovisioned”(取消预配置),随后系统状态变为“In provisioning”(预配置中),最后在操作结束阶段变为“Provisioned”(预配置)。1111选择“Step 8.Monitor Profile Assignments”(步骤 8. 监控配置文件分配)。已为其分配配置文件的计算机将出现在列表中。每台计算机均由“FQDN”、“UUID”和“Profile Name”(配置文件名) 列进行 标识。一旦完成计算机预配置,便可在“Collections”(收藏) 文件夹下看到此计算机,其中该文件夹位于“All configured Intel AMT computers”(所有已配置的具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机)中。返回目录页面返回目录页面 系统部署 一旦准备为某一用户部署计算机,则请将计算机接通电源并连接至网络。使用集成的 Intel® 82566DM NIC。Intel 主动管理技术 (Intel AMT) 无法与其他任何 NIC 解决方案配合使用。 打开计算机后,计算机会立即查找设置和配置服务器 (SCS)。如果计算机找到该服务器,则具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机便会向服务器发 送“Hello”信息(用户必须先通过 MEBx 或使用 Intel Activator 激活网络访问)。 DHCP 和 DNS 必须能用于设置和配置服务器搜索以自动成功完成。如果 DHCP 和 DNS 不可用,则必须向具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机的 MEBx,手动输入设置和配置服务器 (SCS) IP 地址。 “Hello”信息包含以下信息: 预配置 ID (Provisioning ID, PID) 全局唯一标识符 (Universally Unique Identifier, UUID) IP 地址 ROM 和固件 (FW) 版本号 最终用户无法查看“Hello”信息。没有相应的反馈机制会提示您计算机正在广播信息。如果支持 TLS,则 SCS 可使用“Hello”信息中的信息,借 助 TLS 预共享密钥 (Pre-Shared Key, PSK) 密码套件,发起指向具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机的传输层安全 (Transport Layer Security, TLS) 连接。 SCS 使用 PID 在预配置服务器数据库中查找预配置密文 (Provisioning Passphrase, PPS),并使用 PPS 和 PID 生成 TLS 随机密码串 (PreMaster Secret)。TLS 属于可选对象。对于安全和加密事务,如果可以使用基础设施,则使用 TLS。如果不使用 TLS,则可将 HTTP Digest 用 于双向验证。HTTP Digest 不像 TLS 一样安全。SCS 使用用户名、密码登录 Intel AMT 计算机,并预配置以下必备数据项目: 新的 PPS 和 PID(用于将来的设置和配置) TLS 证书 私人密钥 当前日期和时间 HTTP Digest 凭证 HTTP Negotiate 凭证 计算机从设置状态转为预配置状态后,便可完全操作 Intel AMT。一旦处于预配置状态,即可远程管理计算机。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 操作系统驱动程序 在操作系统中,必须安装 AMT 统一驱动程序 (AMT Unified Driver),以在设备管理器 (Device Manager) 中移除未知设备。下面将讨论此驱动 程序。从客户重新安装的立场来看,前几个版本(3、4 或 5)均配有两个独立的 HECI 和 LMS/SOL 驱动程序,与此不同的是,在当前版本 中,这两个驱动程序均包含在 AMT 统一驱动程序通用包中。安装了统一驱动程序包后,它可管理设备管理器中的两个 PCI 设备。 AMT 统一驱动程序 Intel® AMT Serial-Over-LAN (SOL)/Local Manageability Service (LMS) 驱动程序可在 support.dell.com 和 ResourceCD 上 的“Chipset Drivers”(芯片组驱动程序)下找到。该驱动程序标有“Intel AMT SOL/LMS”。取得驱动程序后执行该文件,它会进行解压并提 示用户继续执行安装流程。 安装 SOL/LMS 驱动程序后,“PCI Serial Port”(PCI 串行端口)输入项将切换为 “Intel Active Management Technology - SOL (COM3)”(Intel 主动管理技术 - SOL (COM3))输入项。 HECI 驱动程序 Intel AMT 主机嵌入式控制器接口 (Host Embedded Controller Interface, HECI) 驱动程序可在 support.dell.com 和 ResourceCD 上的 “Chipset Drivers”(芯片组驱动程序)下找到。该驱动程序标有“Intel AMT HECI”。取得驱动程序后执行该文件,它会进行解压并提示用户 继续执行安装流程。 安装 HECI 驱动程序后,“PCI Simple Communications Controller”(PCI 简易通信控制器)输入项将切换为 “Intel Management Engine Interface”(Intel 管理引擎界面)输入项。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 Intel AMT WebGUI Intel® AMT WebGUI 是基于 Web 浏览器的界面,适用于有限的远程计算机管理。WebGUI 常用作一种检测程序,以确定 Intel AMT 设置和配 置是否能在计算机上正确执行。如果远程计算机与运行 WebGUI 的主计算机之间的远程连接成功,则说明远程计算机上的 Intel AMT 设置和配置 正确。 您可以从任何 Web 浏览器访问 Intel AMT WebGUI,例如 Internet Explorer®。 有限远程计算机管理包括: 硬件清单 事件记录 远程计算机重设 网络设置更改 添加新用户 注: 有关使用 WebUI 界面的信息,请访问 Intel AMT 网站。 要连接至已完成配置和设置的计算机上的 Intel AMT WebGUI,请执行以下步骤。 Intel AMT WebUI 111打开具备 Intel AMT 功能且已完成 Intel AMT 设置和配置的计算机。 111从一台独立的计算机启动 Web 浏览器,例如与 Intel AMT 计算机位于同一子网的管理计算机。 111连接至在 MEBx 中指定的 IP 地址以及具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机的端口。(例如:http://ip_address:16992 或 http://192.168.2.1:16992) 默认情况下,该端口为 16992。 注: 使用端口 16993 和 https:// 连接到已在企业模式下完成配置和设置的计算机上的 Intel AMT WebGUI。 如果使用了 DHCP,则为 ME 使用完全限定域名 (FQDN)。该 FQDN 由主机名和域组成。(例如:http://host_name:16992 或 http://system1:16992) 111管理计算机将与具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机建立 TCP 连接,并通过具备 Intel AMT 功能的计算机的 Management Engine 访问 Intel AMT 嵌入式顶级 Web 页面。 111键入用户名和密码。默认用户名为“admin”,密码则是在 MEBx 中的 Intel AMT 设置期间设置的密码。 111查看计算机信息,并执行必要的更改。 注: 您可以在 WebGUI 中更改远程计算机的 MEBx 密码。在 WebGUI 或远程控制台中更改密码将会产生两个密码。其中,新密 码(称为“远程 MEBx 密码”)仅可用于对 WebGUI 或远程控制台进行远程操作。用于本地访问 MEBx 的本地 MEBx 密码则未更 改。您必须牢记本地和远程 MEBx 密码,以便从本地和远程访问计算机 MEBx。最初在 Intel AMT 设置中设置 MEBx 密码时,该 密码既可用作本地密码也可用作远程密码。如果更改了远程密码,这两个密码则不再同步。 111选择“Exit” (退出) 。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 AMT 重定向概览 无论受管客户端的引导状态和电源状态为何,通过 Intel® AMT,都可将串行通信和集成开发环境 (IDE) 通信从受管客户端重定向至管理控制台。 客户端只需具备 Intel AMT 功能、与电源间的连接以及网络连接。Intel AMT 支持通过 TCP/IP 实现的 LAN 上串行(SOL、文本/键盘重定向) 和 IDE 重定向(IDER、CD-ROM 重定向)。 LAN 上串行概览 LAN 上串行 (Serial Over LAN, SOL) 是指通过标准网络连接模拟串行端口通信的功能。SOL 可用于大多数管理应用程序,但其中通常需要本地 串行端口连接。 在已启用 Intel AMT 的客户端与使用 Intel AMT 重定向库的管理控制台之间建立活动 SOL 会话时,客户端的串行通信将通过 Intel AMT 在 LAN 连接上重定向,并可到达管理控制台。 类似地,管理控制台也可能通过 LAN 连接发送串行数据,其中该 LAN 连接将通向客户端的 串行端口 进行操作。 IDE 重定向概览 集成开发环境重定向 (IDE Redirection, IDER) 可通过标准网络连接模拟 IDE CD 驱动器、传统软盘或 LS-120 驱动器。借助 IDER,可使管理 机器将其中某一本地驱动器连接至网络上的受管客户端。建立 IDER 会话后,受管客户端便可像直接连接到自身的某一 IDE 通道般使用远程设 备。此特性对于远程引导无响应的计算机十分有用。IDER 不支持 DVD 格式。 例如,使用 IDER 来引导操作系统已损坏的客户端。首先,将有效的引导盘载入管理控制台磁盘驱动器。随后,当管理控制台开启 IDER TCP 会 话时,该驱动器将作为参数进行传递。无论该设备的电源状态或引导状态为何,Intel AMT 都会将该设备注册为客户端上的虚拟 IDE 设备。由于 可能需要将客户端 BIOS 配置为从虚拟 IDE 设备进行引导,因此可能需要同时使用 SOL 和 IDER。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 Intel® Management and Security Status 应用程序 Intel® Management and Security Status (IMSS) 是一种用于显示平台的 Intel® 主动管理技术 (Intel AMT) 和 Intel® Standard Manageability 服务的相关信息的应用程序。 Intel Management and Security Status 图标可指示 Intel AMT 和 Intel Standard Manageability 是否正在平台上运行。该图标位于通知 区域。默认情况下,每次 Windows* 启动时,都会显示该通知图标。 每一代 Intel AMT(4.x、5.x、6.x)都拥有专门版本的 Intel Management and Security Status 应用程序。此处介绍的是适用于 Intel AMT 6.x 版的 Intel Management and Security Status 应用程序。 有关详情,请单击此处 Intel Management and Security Status 应用程序。 注: 用户登录 Windows 后,如果 Intel Management and Security Status 应用程序随之自动启动,则仅当启用平台上的 Intel AMT 或 Intel Standard Manageabilitye 时,图标才会加载到通知区域。如果通过“Start”(开始)菜单手动启动 Intel Management and Security Status 应用程序,则只要已安装所有驱动程序,即使未启用这些技术中的任何一项,也会加载图标。 注: Intel Management and Security Status 显示的信息并非实时信息。系统会按不同间隔刷新数据。 * 本页面上的信息由 Intel 提供。 返回目录页面返回目录页面 故障排除 本页介绍在出现 Intel® AMT 配置问题时可采纳的几个基本故障排除步骤。如需更多故障排除选项的信息,务请查看 DSN。 恢复默认设置 恢复默认设置也称作“取消预配置”。借助“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)屏幕及“Un-Provision”(取消预配置)选项,可将 已完成 Intel AMT 设置和配置的计算机设为取消预配置状态。 请遵照以下步骤将计算机设为取消预配置状态: 111选择“Un-Provision”(取消预配置),然后选择“Full Un-provision”(完全取消预配置)。 完全取消预配置可用于在“SMB Mode”(SMB 模式)下预配置的计算机。此选项可将所有 Intel AMT 配置设置恢复为出厂默认设置,且 不会重置 ME 配置设置或密码。完全和部分取消预配置可用于“Enterprise Mode”(企业模式)下的预配置计算机。部分取消预配置可将 所有 Intel AMT 配置设置恢复为出厂默认设置,但不包括 PID 和 PPS。部分取消预配置不会重置 ME 配置设置或密码。 约 1 分钟后显示取消预配置信息。取消预配置操作完成后,控制权将交回“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)屏幕。由于将 计算机设为默认“Enterprise Mode”(企业模式),因此可再次使用“Provisioning Server”(预配置服务器)、“Set PID and PPS”(设置 PID 和 PPS)以及“Set PRTC”(设置 PRTC)选项。 111 选择“Return to previous menu”(返回上一级菜单)。 111 选择“Exit”(退出),然后按 键。 计算机重新启动。 固件刷新 刷新固件以升级至更高版本的 Intel AMT。在 MEBx 界面中的 “Secure Firmware Update”(安全固件更新)设置下选择“Disabled”(已 禁用),即可禁用自动刷新功能。如果禁用此设置,则在刷新 BIOS 时会出现固件错误信息。 无法将固件刷新为较旧的版本或刷新至当前所安装的版本。如果固件刷新可用,则可在 support.dell.com 站点上下载。 LAN 上串行 (Serial-Over-LAN, SOL)/集成开发环境重定向 (IDE Redirection, IDE-R) 如果无法使用 IDE-R 和 SOL,则请遵照以下步骤进行操作: 111 在初始引导屏幕上,按

进入 MEBx 屏幕。 111 出现密码输入提示时,请键入新的 Intel ME 密码。 111 选择“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置),然后按 键。 111 选择“Un-Provision”(取消预配置),然后按 键。 111 选择“Full Unprovision”(完全取消预配置),然后按 。 111 在“Intel AMT Configuration”(Intel AMT 配置)菜单选项下,重新配置显示于此处的设置。 返回目录页面 www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Quick Reference Guide Model DCTRNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2004 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, OptiPlex, and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model DCTR April 2004 P/N G3630 Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Side View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cable Cover and Power Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Determining Placement and Orientation of the Computer . . . . . . . . 10 Installing a Device in the Module Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Installing a Hard Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Attaching the Optional Cable Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Removing the Computer Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Inside View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Replacing the Computer Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Power Supply Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Diagnostic Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Beep Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Running the Dell™ IDE Hard Drive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using Microsoft® Windows® XP System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Using the Drivers and Utilities CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ContentsQuick Reference Guide 5 Finding Information What Are You Looking For? Find It Here • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • My computer documentation • My device documentation • Desktop System Software (DSS) Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD) Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers, run the Dell Diagnostics, or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. NOTE: The latest drivers and documentation updates can be found at support.dell.com. • OS updates and patches Desktop System Software (DSS) Located on the Drivers and Utilities CD and at support.dell.com. • Warranty information • Safety instructions • Regulatory information • Ergonomics information • End User License Agreement Dell™ Product Information Guide NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at support.dell.com. • How to remove and replace parts • Technical specifications • How to configure system settings • How to troubleshoot and solve problems Dell OptiPlex™ User’s Guide Microsoft® Windows® XP Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User’s and system guides and click User’s guides. The User’s Guide is also available on the Drivers and Utilities CD.6 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Service Tag and Express Service Code • Microsoft Windows License Label Service Tag and Microsoft Windows License These labels are located on your computer. • Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact technical support. • Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting technical support. The Express Service Code is not available in all countries. • Latest drivers for my computer • Answers to technical service and support questions • Online discussions with other users and technical support • Documentation for my computer Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region to view the appropriate support site. The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including: • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses • Community — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information • Downloads — Drivers, patches, and software updates • Reference — Computer documentation, product specifications, and white papers • Service call status and support history • Top technical issues for my computer • Frequently asked questions • File downloads • Details on my computer configuration • Service contract for my computer Dell Premier Support Website — premiersupport.dell.com The Dell Premier Support website is customized for corporate, government, and education customers. This website may not be available in all regions. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 7 • How to use Windows XP • Documentation for my computer • Documentation for devices (such as a modem) Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD The operating system is already installed on your computer. To reinstall your operating system, use the Operating System CD. See your OptiPlex User’s Guide for instructions. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key is located on your Windows License label attached to your computer. NOTE: The color of your CD varies based on the operating system you ordered. • Regulatory Model Number DCTR • Chassis Type Ultra-Small Form-Factor (USFF) chassis What Are You Looking For? Find It Here8 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com About Your Computer NOTE: If you want to orient your computer under a desk top or on a wall surface, use the optional wallmount bracket. To order the bracket, contact Dell. For information on contacting Dell, see your online User’s Guide. NOTE: To ensure proper ventilation, do not block the cooling vents. Front View Side View USB connectors (2) microphone connector power light power button module bay hard-drive access light headphone connector vents (do not block) vents (do not block) mounting holes (2)Quick Reference Guide 9 Back View Cable Cover and Power Adapter cover release knob parallel connector diagnostic lights USB connectors (5) line-out connector line-in connector video connector serial connector power connector network activity light network adapter link integrity light vents (do not block)10 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Setting Up Your Computer NOTICE: When setting up your computer, secure all cables toward the back of your work area to prevent the cables from being pulled, tangled, or stepped on. NOTICE: To prevent the computer from overheating and shutting down, do not place the computer in a poorly ventilated area. NOTE: If you have ordered a computer without a hard drive, you can install a drive by using the drive rails that are included inside your computer (see "Installing a Hard Drive" on page 15). Determining Placement and Orientation of the Computer NOTICE: Do not place your monitor on top of the computer. Use a monitor stand. NOTICE: Do not position your computer upside down.Quick Reference Guide 11 NOTICE: In a high-vibration environment or when installing the computer under a surface or on a wall, use the optional wall-mount bracket. To order the bracket, contact Dell. For information on contacting Dell, see your online User’s Guide. NOTE: To ensure proper ventilation, place the computer at least 5 cm (2 inches) from a vertical surface. Do not place the computer in an enclosed environment without ventilation. Installing a Device in the Module Bay You can install a Dell™ portable device such as a floppy drive, CD/DVD drive, or second hard drive in the module bay. Your Dell computer ships with either a CD/DVD drive or an airbay (filler blank) installed in the module bay. As a security feature, your computer is equipped with a module locking switch to secure a device in the module bay. To access the switch, remove the computer cover (see "Removing the Computer Cover" on page 16). For added security, you may also secure a device in the module bay by using the device screw that ships with your computer (packaged separately). module locking switch12 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connecting External Devices CAUTION: Before performing any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. You must complete all steps to properly set up your computer. See the appropriate figures that follow the instructions. 1 Use the USB connectors on the back of your computer to connect the keyboard and mouse. 2 Connect the modem or network cable. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network wall jack, and then in to the computer. Insert the network cable, not the phone line, into the network connector. If you have an optional modem, connect the phone line to the modem. NOTICE: Do not connect a modem cable to the network adapter. Voltage from telephone communications can cause damage to the network adapter. 3 Connect the monitor. Align and gently insert the monitor cable to avoid bending connector pins. Tighten the thumbscrews on the cable connectors. NOTE: Some monitors have the video connector underneath the back of the screen. See the documentation that came with your monitor for its connector locations. 4 Connect the speakers. 1 device screwQuick Reference Guide 13 5 Connect power cables to the computer, monitor, and devices and insert the other ends of the power cables to electrical outlets. 6 Press the power buttons to turn on the computer and monitor. NOTE: Before you install any devices or software that did not ship with your computer, read the documentation that came with the software or device, or contact the vendor to verify that the software or device is compatible with your computer and operating system. NOTE: Your computer may vary slightly from the following setup figures. network connector USB connector14 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connecting a DVI Monitor If you have a DVI-compatible monitor, plug the cable from your monitor in to the white DVI display-connector on the computer back panel. Connecting a VGA Monitor If you have a VGA-compatible monitor, use the adapter cable to connect the cable from your monitor to the white DVI display-connector on the computer back panel.Quick Reference Guide 15 Connecting Two Monitors Use the adapter cable to connect both a VGA monitor and a DVI monitor to the white DVI displayconnector on the computer back panel. Installing a Hard Drive CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. 1 If you are installing a new drive, attach the drive rails—located inside the cover—to the new drive. 2 Attach the data and power cables to the hard drive connectors, being careful not to bend any of the pins. 3 Slide the hard drive into the bracket. Connecting the AC Adapter CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. 1 Connect the power adapter to the connector on the back of the computer. In order for the connection to be secure, verify that the latch engages completely. (An audible click will be heard or felt.) 2 Connect a power cable to the power adapter. 3 If your computer power-cable connector has a grounding wire, and you decide to connect it, continue with step 4. If you decide otherwise, go to step 5.16 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com CAUTION: If your power cord or adapter provides a green ground wire for connection to an electrical outlet, do not permit contact between the green ground wire and power leads because electrical shock, fire, or damage to your computer can occur (see the following figure). 4 Connect the metal ground connector to the grounding source on the outlet (see the following figure): a Loosen the grounding source. b Slide the metal ground connector behind the grounding source, and then tighten the grounding source. 5 Connect the AC power cable to the outlet. Attaching the Optional Cable Cover 1 Ensure that all external device cables are threaded through the hole in the cable cover and connected to the computer back panel. 2 Hold the bottom of the cable cover and align the four tabs with the four slots on the computer back panel. 3 Insert the tabs into the slots and slide the cable cover toward the diagnostic lights (see the figure) until the cable cover is securely positioned. 4 Install a security device in the security cable slot (optional). Inside Your Computer Removing the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To avoid electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the power adapter before removing the cover. grounding source metal ground connector cable cover (optional) security cable slotQuick Reference Guide 17 CAUTION: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 Remove the computer cover. a Rotate the cover release knob in a clockwise direction, as shown in the figure. b Slide the computer cover forward 1 cm (0.5 inch), or until it stops, and then raise the cover. Inside View cover release knob speaker (optional) memory modules (2) hard drive security cable slot chassis intrusion switch processor heat-sink fan shroud18 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Replacing the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. 1 Replace the cover: a Lower and align the cover with the metal computer frame. b Slide the cover until you hear or feel it click into place. 2 Connect your computer to its power adapter and connect devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. If the chassis intrusion detector is set to On, the following message appears on the screen after the next computer start-up: ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 3 Clear the chassis intrusion status by entering system setup and selecting Clear under the Intrusion Status option. For information on the chassis intrusion detector, see your online User’s Guide. NOTE: If an admin password has been assigned by someone else, contact your network administrator for information on resetting the chassis intrusion detector. Solving Problems Dell provides a number of tools to help you if your computer does not perform as expected. For the latest troubleshooting information available for your computer, see the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. If computer problems occur that require help from Dell, write a detailed description of the error, beep codes, or diagnostics light patterns; record your Express Service Code and Service Tag below; and then contact Dell from the same location as your computer. See "Finding Information" on page 5 for an example of the express service code and Service Tag. Express Service Code:___________________________ Service Tag:___________________________Quick Reference Guide 19 Dell Diagnostics CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Setting Up Your Computer" on page 10 and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. Enter system setup, review your computer’s configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test is displayed in system setup and is active. For information on system setup, see your online User’s Guide. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive (see "Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive" on page 19) or from the Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD —see "Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities CD" on page 19). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, see "Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities CD" on page 19. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. For information on shutting down your computer, see your online User’s Guide. 3 When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run (see page 20). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities CD 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 2 Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup.20 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 3 When the boot device list appears, highlight Onboard or USB CD-ROM and press . 4 Select Onboard or USB CD-ROM Device from the CD boot menu. 5 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. 6 Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. 7 Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 9 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run (see page 20). Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. 3 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description.Quick Reference Guide 21 4 When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5 Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Tab Function22 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Power Supply Light System Lights Your power button light and hard-drive light may indicate a computer problem. Light State PSU State Description Troubleshooting Off No AC, or a fault condition occurred Indicates that the power supply is not receiving power from an electrical outlet, OR that the power supply shut down due to a fault condition. Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Verify that the AC power cable connection is properly seated in the power supply. If necessary, reseat the AC cable connection at the power supply. Disconnect the AC power cable from the power supply and the DC cable from the computer for at least 10 seconds. Reattach the AC power cable to the power supply. The light on the power supply should turn yellow. Reattach the DC cable to the computer. The light on the power supply should turn green. Yellow AC present/no load Indicates that the power supply is attached to working electrical outlet but not connected to the computer. Verify that the power supply is completely plugged in to the computer and the retention latch is engaged. Reseat the connection if necessary. Green AC present/power to load Indicates that the power supply is receiving power from the electrical outlet and is properly connected to the computer. Check the power button light and see "System Lights" on page 22. Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green power light and no beep code but the computer locks up during POST An integrated system board device may be faulty. Check "Diagnostic Lights" on page 23 to see if the specific problem is identified. If the problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. Quick Reference Guide 23 Diagnostic Lights CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four lights labeled "A," "B," "C," and "D" on the back panel (see page 9). The lights can be yellow or green. When the computer starts normally, the patterns or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. If the POST portion of system boot completes successfully, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions during the POST process, the pattern displayed on the lights may help identify where in the process the computer halted. Solid green power light and no beep code and no video during POST The monitor may be faulty or incorrectly installed. Check "Diagnostic Lights" on page 23 to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid green and a beep code during POST A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing. See "Running the Dell™ IDE Hard Drive Diagnostics" on page 27 for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid yellow The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly installed. If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete. Check "Diagnostic Lights" on page 23 to see if the specific problem is identified. If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance. Blinks green several times and then turns off A configuration error exists. Check "Diagnostic Lights" on page 23 to see if the specific problem is identified. Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP). Press the power button to wake the computer. Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating normally. No corrective action is required. Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution24 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution off off off off The computer is in a normal off condition or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. green yellow yellow yellow A possible BIOS failure has occurred; the computer is in the recovery mode. Run the BIOS Recovery utility, wait for recovery completion, and then restart the computer. yellow green yellow yellow A possible processor failure has occurred. Reinstall the processor and restart the computer. For information on reinstalling the processor, see your online User’s Guide. green green yellow yellow Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. • If you have one memory module installed, reinstall it and restart the computer. For information on reinstalling the memory module, see your online User’s Guide. • If you have two memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. • If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. • If the problem persists, contact Dell. yellow green green yellow A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer.Quick Reference Guide 25 green green green yellow A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. yellow yellow yellow green No memory modules are detected. • If you have one memory module installed, reinstall it and restart the computer. For information on reinstalling the memory module, see your online User’s Guide. • If you have two memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. • If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. • If the problem persists, contact Dell. yellow green yellow green Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. • Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist. For information on memory modules, see your online User’s Guide. • Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer. • If the problem persists, contact Dell. yellow green green green An error occurred prior to boot. • Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive. • Check the computer message that appears on your monitor screen. • If the problem persists, contact Dell. green green green green The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. None. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution26 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. If your computer beeps during start-up: 1 Write down the beep code. 2 See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 19 to identify a more serious cause. 3 Contact Dell for technical assistance. Code Cause Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 4-2-1 No timer tick 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 4-4-4 Cache test failure 3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configurationQuick Reference Guide 27 Running the Dell™ IDE Hard Drive Diagnostics The Dell IDE Hard Drive Diagnostics is a utility that tests the hard drive to troubleshoot or confirm a hard drive failure. 1 Turn on your computer (if your computer is already on, restart it). 2 When F2 = Setup appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. If a failure is reported, see "Hard Drive Problems" in your User’s Guide. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured, you can use the Hardware Troubleshooter to resolve the incompatibility. In the Microsoft® Windows® 2000 operating system, you can also use Device Manager to resolve incompatibilities. Windows XP To resolve incompatibilities using the Hardware Troubleshooter: 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field and click the arrow to start the search. 3 Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. 4 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and click Next. Windows 2000 To resolve incompatibilities using Device Manager: 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel window, double-click System. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Click Device Manager. 5 Click View and click Resources by connection. 6 Double-click Interrupt request (IRQ). Incorrectly configured devices are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) or a red X if the device has been disabled.28 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 7 Double-click any device marked with an exclamation point to display the Properties window. The Device status area in the Properties window reports the cards or devices that need to be reconfigured. 8 Reconfigure the devices or remove the devices from the Device Manager. See the documentation that came with the device for information on configuring the device. To resolve incompatibilities using the Hardware Troubleshooter: 1 Click the Start button and click Help. 2 Click Troubleshooting and Maintenance on the Contents tab, click Windows 2000 troubleshooters, and then click Hardware. 3 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer and click Next. Using Microsoft® Windows® XP System Restore The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. See the Windows Help and Support Center for information on using System Restore. NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. Creating a Restore Point 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click System Restore. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State NOTICE: Before you restore the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close any open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. 3 Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in boldface type. 4 Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you prefer.Quick Reference Guide 29 5 Click Next. The Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data and then the computer restarts. 6 After the computer restarts, click OK. To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next. 3 Click Next. The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts. 4 After the computer restarts, click OK. Enabling System Restore If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. To see if System Restore is enabled: 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click System. 3 Click the System Restore tab. 4 Ensure that Turn off System Restore is unchecked. Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP Before You Begin If you are considering reinstalling the Windows XP operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback. (For information on Device Driver Rollback, see your online User’s Guide). If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore (see "Using Microsoft® Windows® XP System Restore" on page 28) to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. NOTICE: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the first drive detected by the computer.30 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com To reinstall Windows XP, you need the following items: • Dell™ Operating System CD • Dell Drivers and Utilities CD NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD contains drivers that were installed during assembly of the computer. Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to load any required drivers, including the drivers required if your computer has a RAID controller. Reinstalling Windows XP NOTICE: You must use Windows XP Service Pack 1 or later when you reinstall Windows XP. To reinstall Windows XP, perform all the steps in the following sections in the order in which they are listed. The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless a Dell technical support representative instructs you to do so. NOTICE: To prevent conflicts with Windows XP, disable any virus protection software installed on your computer before you reinstall Windows XP. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Booting From the Operating System CD 1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Operating System CD. Click Exit if Install Windows XP message appears. 3 Restart the computer. 4 Press immediately after the DELL™ logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5 Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and press . 6 When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows XP Setup 1 When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press to select To set up Windows now. 2 Read the information on the Microsoft Windows Licensing Agreement screen, and press to accept the license agreement. 3 If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and remove the CD. Quick Reference Guide 31 4 If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press to select that option. 5 Press to select the highlighted partition (recommended), and follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears, and the operating system begins to copy files and install the devices. The computer automatically restarts multiple times. NOTE: The time required to complete the setup depends on the size of the hard drive and the speed of your computer. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 6 When the Regional and Language Options screen appears, select the settings for your location and click Next. 7 Enter your name and organization (optional) in the Personalize Your Software screen, and click Next. 8 At the Computer Name and Administrator Password window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the one provided) and a password, and click Next. 9 If the Modem Dialing Information screen appears, enter the requested information and click Next. 10 Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window, and click Next. 11 If the Networking Settings screen appears, click Typical and click Next. 12 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional and you are prompted to provide further information regarding your network configuration, enter your selections. If you are unsure of your settings, accept the default selections. Windows XP installs the operating system components and configures the computer. The computer automatically restarts. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 13 When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click Next. 14 When the How will this computer connect to the Internet? message appears, click Skip. 15 When the Ready to register with Microsoft? screen appears, select No, not at this time and click Next. 16 When the Who will use this computer? screen appears, you can enter up to five users. 17 Click Next. 18 Click Finish to complete the setup, and remove the CD. 19 Reinstall the appropriate drivers with the Drivers and Utilities CD. 32 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 20 Reinstall your virus protection software. 21 Reinstall your programs. NOTE: To reinstall and activate your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works Suite programs, you need the Product Key number located on the back of the Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works Suite CD sleeve. NOTE: If you installed a unique image on your computer or if you had to reinstall your operating system, run the DSS utility. DSS is available on your Drivers and Utilities CD and at support.dell.com. Using the Drivers and Utilities CD To use the Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD) while you are running the Windows operating system: NOTE: To access device drivers and user documentation, you must use the Drivers and UtilitiesCDwhile you are running Windows. 1 Turn on the computer and allow it to boot to the Windows desktop. 2 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the CD drive. If you are using the Drivers and Utilities CD for the first time on this computer, the ResourceCD Installation window opens to inform you that the Drivers and Utilities CD is about to begin installation. 3 Click OK to continue. To complete the installation, respond to the prompts offered by the installation program. 4 Click Next at the Welcome Dell System Owner screen. 5 Select the appropriate System Model, Operating System, Device Type, and Topic. Drivers for Your Computer To display a list of device drivers for your computer: 1 Click My Drivers in the Topic drop-down menu. The Drivers and Utilities CD scans your computer’s hardware and operating system, and then a list of device drivers for your system configuration is displayed on the screen. 2 Click the appropriate driver and follow the instructions to download the driver to your computer. To view all available drivers for your computer, click Drivers from the Topic drop-down menu.Index 33 Index B beep codes, 26 C CD operating system, 7 computer beep codes, 26 closing cover, 18 restore to previous state, 28 conflicts software and hardware incompatibilities, 27 cover closing, 18 D Dell Diagnostics, 19 Dell Premier Support website, 5-6 Device Manager, 27 diagnostic lights, 22-23 diagnostics beep codes, 26 Dell, 19 Drivers and Utilities CD, 5 diagnostics (continued) lights, 22-23 documentation device, 5 online, 6 ResourceCD, 5 System Information Guide, 5 User’s Guide, 5 drivers ResourceCD, 5 Drivers and Utilities CD, 5 E error messages beep codes, 26 diagnostic lights, 22-23 F Finding Information, 5 H hardware beep codes, 26 conflicts, 27 Dell Diagnostics, 19 Hardware Troubleshooter, 27 Help and Support Center, 7 I IRQ conflicts, 27 L labels Microsoft Windows, 6 Service Tag, 6 lights back of computer, 23 diagnostic, 22-23 front of computer, 22 power button, 22 system, 22 M Microsoft Windows label, 6 O Operating System CD, 7 Installation Guide, 7 operating system reinstalling Windows XP, 29 Operating System CD, 734 Index 34 Index P power button light, 22 problems beep codes, 26 conflicts, 27 Dell Diagnostics, 19 diagnostic lights, 22-23 restore to previous state, 28 R reinstalling Drivers and Utilities CD, 5 ResourceCD, 5 Windows XP, 29 ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 19 S safety instructions, 5 Service Tag, 6 software conflicts, 27 system lights, 22 System Restore, 28 T troubleshooting conflicts, 27 Dell Diagnostics, 19 diagnostic lights, 22-23 Hardware Troubleshooter, 27 Help and Support Center, 7 restore to previous state, 28 U User’s Guide, 5 W warranty, 5 Windows 2000 Device Manager, 27 Hardware Troubleshooter, 27 Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter, 27 Help and Support Center, 7 reinstalling, 29 System Restore, 28www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Guide de référence rapide Modèle DCTRRemarques et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. ATTENTION : la mention ATTENTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2004 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, OptiPlex et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. Tous les autres noms de marques et marques commerciales utilisés dans ce document se rapportent aux sociétés propriétaires des marques et des noms de ces produits. Dell Inc. décline tout intérêt dans l'utilisation des marques déposées et des noms de marques ne lui appartenant pas. Modèle DCTR Avril 2004 P/N G3630 Rev. A00Sommaire 3 Sommaire Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 À propos de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Vue avant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Vue de profil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cache de protection des câbles et adaptateur d'alimentation . . . . . . 9 Configuration de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Détermination de l'emplacement et de la position de l'ordinateur . . . . 10 Installation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connexion de périphériques externes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Installation d'un disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Fixation du cache de protection des câbles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 À l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vue intérieure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Résolution des problèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Diagnostics Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Voyant du module d'alimentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Voyants du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Voyants de diagnostic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Exécution des diagnostics Dell pour disques durs IDE. . . . . . . . . . 28 Résolution des problèmes d'incompatibilité logicielle et matérielle. . . . 28 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Utilisation du CD Pilotes et utilitaires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 SommaireGuide de référence rapide 5 Recherche d'informations Que recherchez-vous ? Reportez-vous aux éléments suivants. • Un programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Des pilotes pour mon ordinateur • La documentation concernant mon ordinateur • La documentation concernant mes périphériques • Le logiciel DSS (Desktop System Software) CD Pilotes et utilitaires, également appelé ResourceCD La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre ordinateur. Le CD-ROM permet de réinstaller des pilotes, d'exécuter les outils de diagnostic Dell ou d'accéder à la documentation. Des fichiers “readme” (lisez-moi) peuvent être inclus sur votre CD afin de fournir des mises à jour de dernière minute concernant des modifications techniques apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. REMARQUE : les dernières mises à jour des pilotes ou de la documentation se trouvent sur le site support.dell.com • Des mises à jour du système d'exploitation et des correctifs Logiciel DSS (Desktop System Software) CD Pilotes et utilitaires et site support.dell.com. • Des informations sur la garantie • Des consignes de sécurité • Des informations sur la réglementation • Des informations sur l'ergonomie • Le contrat de licence utilisateur final Guide des informations sur le produit Dell™ REMARQUE : ce document est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com.6 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Comment retirer et remettre en place des pièces • Les spécifications techniques • Comment configurer les paramètres système • Comment identifier et résoudre les problèmes Manuel de l'utilisateur Dell OptiPlex™ Centre d'aide et de support Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur User's and system guides (Guides de l'utilisateur et du système) puis sur User's guides (Guides de l'utilisateur). Le Manuel de l'utilisateur est également disponible sur le CD Pilotes et utilitaires. • Le numéro de service et le code de service express • L'étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft Windows Ces étiquettes sont situées sur votre ordinateur. • Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier l'ordinateur lorsque vous visitez le site support.dell.com ou contactez le support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour faciliter l'acheminement de votre appel lorsque vous contactez le support technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays. • Les pilotes les plus récents pour mon ordinateur • Des réponses à des questions d'assistance technique et de support clientèle • Des discussions en ligne avec d'autres utilisateurs et le personnel de l'assistance clientèle • La documentation concernant mon ordinateur Site Web du support Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : sélectionnez votre région pour accéder au site de support approprié. Le site Web du support Dell comporte plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens et cours en ligne • Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations de mise à niveau pour les composants tels que la mémoire, le disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Coordonnées, statut des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations • Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles • Référence — Documentation sur l'ordinateur, caractéristiques produit et livres blancs Que recherchez-vous ? Reportez-vous aux éléments suivants.Guide de référence rapide 7 • L'état des appels au service clients et l'historique du support • Les problèmes techniques les plus importants concernant mon ordinateur • Les questions fréquemment posées • Des fichiers à télécharger • Des détails sur la configuration de mon ordinateur • Le contrat de service de mon ordinateur Site Web de support technique de Dell Premier — premiersupport.dell.com Le site Web Dell Premier Support est personnalisé pour les clients représentant des entreprises, des institutions gouvernementales ou des institutions d'enseignement. Ce site Web n'est pas disponible partout. • Comment utiliser Windows XP • La documentation concernant mon ordinateur • La documentation concernant mes périphériques (mon modem, par exemple) Centre d'aide et de support Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une phrase décrivant votre problème et cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit le problème. 4 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD du système d'exploitation Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour le réinstaller, utilisez le CD du système d'exploitation. Consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur Optiplex pour obtenir des instructions. Une fois que vous avez réinstallé votre système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques fournis avec votre ordinateur. La clé de produit de votre système d'exploitation se trouve sur l'étiquette de licence Windows apposée sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : la couleur du CD varie en fonction du système d'exploitation commandé. • Le numéro de modèle réglementaire DCTR • Le type de châssis Châssis USFF (Ultra-Small Form-Factor) Que recherchez-vous ? Reportez-vous aux éléments suivants.8 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com À propos de votre ordinateur REMARQUE : pour installer votre ordinateur sous un bureau ou sur un mur, utilisez le support de montage mural fourni en option. Pour commander ce support, contactez Dell. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. REMARQUE : afin d'assurer une ventilation appropriée, n'obstruez pas les grilles d'aération. Vue avant Vue de profil Connecteurs USB (2) Voyant d'alimentation Bouton d'alimentation Voyant d'activité du disque dur Baie modulaire Connecteur du casque Grilles d'aération (ne pas obstruer) Connecteur de microphone Trous de fixation (2) Grilles d'aération (ne pas obstruer)Guide de référence rapide 9 Vue arrière Cache de protection des câbles et adaptateur d'alimentation Dispositif de dégagement du capot Connecteur parallèle Voyants de diagnostic Connecteurs USB (5) Connecteur de ligne sortie Connecteur de ligne d'entrée Connecteur vidéo Connecteur série Connecteur d'alimentation Voyant d'activité réseau Voyant d'intégrité des liaisons Grilles d'aération (ne pas obstruer) Carte réseau10 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Configuration de votre ordinateur AVIS : lorsque vous installez l'ordinateur, attachez tous les câbles vers l'arrière de votre zone de travail pour éviter de les tirer, de les emmêler ou de les piétiner. AVIS : pour éviter un arrêt de l'ordinateur dû à une surchauffe, ne le placez pas dans un endroit mal ventilé. REMARQUE : si vous avez commandé un ordinateur sans disque dur, vous pouvez en installer un à l'aide des glissières qui se trouvent à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur (consultez la section “Installation d'un disque dur” page 15). Détermination de l'emplacement et de la position de l'ordinateur AVIS : ne placez pas le moniteur sur l'ordinateur. Utilisez un piédestal prévu à cet effet. Guide de référence rapide 11 AVIS : respectez l'orientation verticale de l'ordinateur (ne le mettez pas à l'envers). AVIS : si vous travaillez dans un environnement soumis à de fortes vibrations, ou si vous installez l'ordinateur sous un bureau ou sur un mur, utilisez le support de montage mural fourni en option. Pour commander ce support, contactez Dell. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. REMARQUE : pour assurer une ventilation suffisante, placez l'ordinateur à au moins 5 cm (2 pouces) de toute surface verticale. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans une alcôve ou un endroit non ventilé. Installation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire Vous pouvez installer un périphérique portable Dell™ tel qu'un lecteur de disquette, un lecteur de CD/DVD ou une deuxième unité de disque dur dans la baie modulaire. L'ordinateur Dell est livré avec un lecteur de CD/DVD ou un emplacement prédécoupé dans la baie modulaire. Par mesure de sécurité, l'ordinateur est équipé d'un loquet de verrouillage qui permet de fixer le périphérique installé dans la baie modulaire. Pour accéder à ce loquet, retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (consultez la section “Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur” page 16). Pour plus de sûreté, vous pouvez aussi attacher le périphérique dans la baie modulaire à l'aide de la vis de fixation fournie avec votre ordinateur (emballée séparément). Loquet de verrouillage du module12 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connexion de périphériques externes ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Vous devez effectuer toutes les étapes pour configurer correctement votre ordinateur. Vérifiez les chiffres indiquant l'ordre des instructions. 1 Branchez le clavier et la souris sur les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 2 Connectez le modem ou le câble réseau. AVIS : pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord dans la prise réseau murale, puis connectez-le à l'ordinateur. Insérez le câble de réseau, et non pas le fil téléphonique, dans le connecteur de réseau. Si vous disposez d'un modem (en option), connectez-le au cordon téléphonique. AVIS : ne raccordez pas de câble de modem à la carte réseau. Les tensions provenant des communications téléphoniques risqueraient d'endommager la carte réseau. 3 Connectez le moniteur. Alignez et insérez avec précaution le câble du moniteur pour éviter de plier les broches du connecteur. Resserrez les vis à ailettes des connecteurs de câble. REMARQUE : sur certains moniteurs, le connecteur vidéo est placé sous l'arrière de l'écran. Consultez la documentation fournie avec votre moniteur pour connaître les emplacements des connecteurs. 4 Connectez les hauts-parleurs. 1 Vis de fixation de périphériqueGuide de référence rapide 13 5 Connectez les cordons d'alimentation électrique à l'ordinateur, au moniteur et aux périphériques, puis branchez l'autre extrémité de ces cordons sur les prises de courant. 6 Appuyez sur les boutons d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur et le moniteur. REMARQUE : avant d'installer tout périphérique ou logiciel non fourni avec votre ordinateur, lisez la documentation livrée avec le logiciel ou le périphérique, ou contactez le vendeur pour vérifier la compatibilité avec votre ordinateur et votre système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : il se peut que votre système soit légèrement différent des illustrations suivantes concernant l'installation. Connecteur réseau Connecteur USB14 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connexion d'un moniteur DVI Si vous disposez d'un moniteur compatible DVI, branchez son câble sur le connecteur pour écran DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Connexion d'un moniteur VGA Si vous disposez d'un moniteur compatible VGA, utilisez le câble adaptateur pour raccorder ce moniteur au connecteur pour écran DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.Guide de référence rapide 15 Connexion de deux moniteurs Vous pouvez utiliser le câble adaptateur pour raccorder à la fois un moniteur VGA et un moniteur DVI au connecteur DVI blanc situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Installation d'un disque dur ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. 1 Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur, fixez les glissières d'installation (à l'intérieur du capot) sur le lecteur. 2 Branchez les câbles d'interface et d'alimentation sur les connecteurs du disque dur, en veillant à ne pas tordre les broches. 3 Faites glisser le disque dur dans le support. Connexion de l'adaptateur CA/CC ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. 1 Branchez le câble d'alimentation sur le connecteur situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de sûreté, vérifiez que le loquet est complètement enclenché (vous devez entendre ou sentir un déclic). 2 Connectez un câble d'alimentation à l'adaptateur d'alimentation. 3 Si le connecteur du câble d'alimentation est doté d'un fil de mise à la terre et que vous décidez de le brancher, passez à l'étape 4. Sinon, allez à l'étape 5.16 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com ATTENTION : si le câble d'alimentation ou l'adaptateur est doté d'un fil vert de masse pour la connexion à une prise électrique, n'autorisez aucun contact entre la masse et les conducteurs car cela pourrait provoquer un choc électrique, un incendie ou endommager votre ordinateur (consultez la figure suivante). 4 Reliez le connecteur métallique de masse à la source de masse sur la prise (consultez la figure suivante) : a Desserrez la source de masse. b Faites glisser le connecteur métallique de mise à la terre derrière la source reliée à la terre, puis serrez la source. 5 Connectez le câble d'alimentation CA à la prise. Fixation du cache de protection des câbles 1 Vérifiez que tous les câbles des périphériques externes sont engagés dans l'orifice du cache de protection et qu'ils sont connectés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 2 Maintenez la partie inférieure du cache et alignez les quatre onglets avec les quatre fentes sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. 3 Insérez les onglet dans les fentes et faites glisser le cache de protection vers les voyants de diagnostic (voir la figure) jusqu'à ce qu'il soit bien en place. 4 Installez un dispositif antivol dans l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité (facultatif). À l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Source reliée à la terre Connecteur métallique de mise à la terre Cache de protection des câbles (en option) Emplacement pour câble de sécuritéGuide de référence rapide 17 ATTENTION : pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de l'adaptateur d'alimentation avant de retirer le capot. ATTENTION : pour prévenir les dommages causés par les décharges électrostatiques aux composants de votre ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques du système. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. a Tournez le dispositif de dégagement du capot dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre, comme indiqué dans la figure. b Faites glisser le capot de l'ordinateur vers l'avant d'un centimètre (1/2 pouce), ou jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête et soulevez le capot. Vue intérieure Dispositif de dégagement du capot Haut-parleur (optionnel) Modules de mémoire (2) Unité de disque dur Emplacement pour câble de sécurité Commutateur d'intrusion du châssis Carénage du ventilateur du dissipateur thermique du processeur18 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. 1 Réinstallez le capot : a Abaissez le capot et alignez-le avec le cadre métallique de l'ordinateur. b Faites glisser le capot jusqu'à ce vous entendiez un déclic indiquant qu'il est en place. 2 Raccordez l'ordinateur à l'adaptateur d'alimentation et connectez les périphériques aux prises électriques, puis allumez-les. S'il est activé (On), le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis affichera le message suivant sur l'écran au prochain démarrage de l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 3 Réinitialisez le paramètre du détecteur d'intrusion en accédant au programme de configuration du système et en sélectionnant l'option Clear (Réinitialiser) sous le paramètre Intrusion Status (État de l'intrusion). Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. Résolution des problèmes Dell fournit un certain nombre d'outils qui vous aideront si votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas de la manière escomptée. Pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes concernant le dépannage de votre ordinateur, consultez le site Web du support technique de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Si des problèmes nécessitant l'aide de Dell surviennent, rédigez une description détaillée de l'erreur, des codes sonores ou des voyants de diagnostics, notez votre code de service express et votre numéro de service et contactez Dell depuis l'endroit où se trouve votre ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section “Recherche d'informations” page 5 pour obtenir un exemple de code de service express et de numéro de service. Code de service express :___________________________ Numéro de service :___________________________Guide de référence rapide 19 Diagnostics Dell ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Quand utiliser les diagnostics Dell Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la section “Configuration de votre ordinateur” page 10 et exécutez les diagnostics Dell avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. AVIS : les diagnostics Dell fonctionnent uniquement sur les ordinateurs Dell™. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, étudiez les informations de configuration de votre ordinateur et assurez-vous que le périphérique que vous souhaitez tester s'affiche dans le programme de configuration du système et qu'il est actif. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. Lancez les diagnostics Dell à partir du disque dur (consultez la section “Lancement des diagnostics Dell à partir du disque dur” page 19) ou du CD Pilotes et utilitaires, également appelé ResourceCD (consultez la section “Lancement des diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires” page 19). Lancement des diagnostics Dell à partir du disque dur 1 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostics Dell n'a été trouvée, consultez la section “Lancement des diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires” page 19. Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite, le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Puis arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Boot to Utility Partition (Démarrer sur la partition d'utilitaires) et appuyez sur . 4 Lorsque la page Main Menu (Menu principal) des diagnostics Dell s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à exécuter (voir la page 20). Lancement des diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires 1 Insérez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires. 2 Arrêtez et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .20 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows s'affiche, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le Bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. REMARQUE : cette fonctionnalité ne modifie la séquence d'amorçage qu'une seule fois. Lors du prochain démarrage, l'ordinateur s'initialise en fonction des périphériques spécifiés dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques de démarrage s'affiche, mettez en surbrillance l'option Onboard or USB CD-ROM (Lecteur de CD-ROM intégré ou USB) et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l'option Onboard or USB CD-ROM Device (Lecteur de CD-ROM intégré ou USB) dans le menu d'initialisation du CD. 5 Sélectionnez l'option Boot from CD-ROM (Démarrer à partir du CD-ROM) dans le menu qui s'affiche. 6 Tapez 1 pour lancer le menu ResourceCD. 7 Tapez 2 pour démarrer les diagnostics Dell. 8 Sélectionnez Run Dell 32-bit Diagnostics (Exécuter les diagnostics Dell 32 bits) dans la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée pour votre ordinateur. 9 Lorsque la page Main Menu (Menu principal) des diagnostics Dell s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à exécuter (voir la page 20). Menu principal des diagnostics Dell 1 Une fois les diagnostics Dell chargés et lorsque l'écran Main Menu (Menu principal) s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant à l'option voulue. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend 10 à 20 minutes et n'exige aucune intervention de votre part. Exécutez le test rapide en premier pour augmenter la possibilité de déterminer le problème rapidement. Extended Test (Test complet) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend une heure ou plus et nécessite que vous répondiez régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests que vous souhaitez exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes rencontrés les plus communs et vous permet de sélectionner un test selon le symptôme du problème auquel vous êtes confronté.Guide de référence rapide 21 2 Si un problème est rencontré lors d'un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell. REMARQUE : le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est affiché au sommet de chaque écran de test. Si vous contactez Dell, le service de support technique vous le demandera. 3 Si vous exécutez un test à partir des options Custom Test (Test personnalisé) ou Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes), cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus d'informations. 4 Une fois les tests terminés, si vous exécutez les diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires, retirez ce CD du lecteur. 5 Fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran Main Menu. Pour quitter les diagnostics Dell et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran Main Menu. Onglet Fonction Results (Résultats) Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Errors (Erreurs) Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Help (Aide) Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Les diagnostics Dell obtiennent des informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes et les affichent dans la liste des périphériques, dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Parameters (Paramètres) Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.22 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Voyant du module d'alimentation État du voyant État du module d'alimentation Description Dépannage Éteint Pas d'alimentation en CA, ou condition de défaillance. Indique que le module d'alimentation ne reçoit pas de courant de la prise électrique OU qu'il a cessé de fonctionner en raison d'une défaillance. Vérifiez que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe, par exemple. Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation CA est correctement inséré dans le connecteur du module d'alimentation. Si nécessaire, débranchez et rebranchez ce cordon. Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation CA du module d'alimentation et déconnectez le cordon CC de l'ordinateur pendant au moins 10 secondes. Raccordez le cordon d'alimentation CA sur le module d'alimentation. Le voyant du module d'alimentation devrait s'allumer en jaune. Reconnectez le cordon CC sur l'ordinateur. Le voyant du module d'alimentation devrait s'allumer en vert. Jaune CA présent/Pas de charge Indique que le module d'alimentation est bien raccordé à une prise électrique opérationnelle, mais qu'il n'est pas connecté à l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le câble du module d'alimentation est bien enfoncé dans le connecteur de l'ordinateur, et que le taquet de fixation est en place. Si nécessaire, rebranchez le câble correctement. Vert CA présent/Charge en cours Indique que le module d'alimentation reçoit du courant de la prise électrique et est correctement connecté à l'ordinateur. Vérifiez le voyant du bouton d'alimentation et consultez la section “Voyants du système” page 22. Guide de référence rapide 23 Voyants du système Le voyant du bouton d'alimentation et le voyant du disque dur peuvent indiquer un problème de fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Voyant d'alimentation Description du problème Solution proposée Voyant d'alimentation vert fixe et aucun code sonore, mais l'ordinateur se verrouille durant le POST Un périphérique intégré de la carte système peut être défaillant. Consultez la section “Voyants de diagnostic” page 23 pour voir si ce problème y est décrit. Si le problème n'est pas identifié, contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Voyant d'alimentation vert fixe, aucun code sonore et aucune vidéo durant le POST Le moniteur est peut-être défaillant ou mal installé. Consultez la section “Voyants de diagnostic” page 23 pour voir si ce problème y est décrit. Vert fixe et code sonore durant le POST Un problème a été détecté lors de l'exécution de BIOS. Pour obtenir des instructions sur l'établissement d'un diagnostic du code sonore, consultez la section “Exécution des diagnostics Dell pour disques durs IDE” page 28. Contrôlez également les voyants de diagnostic pour voir si le problème est identifié. Jaune fixe Les diagnostics Dell exécutent un test, ou bien un périphérique sur la carte système est défectueux ou mal installé. Si les diagnostics Dell sont en cours d'exécution, laissez le test se terminer. Consultez la section “Voyants de diagnostic” page 23 pour voir si ce problème y est décrit. Si votre ordinateur ne démarre pas, contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Clignote vert plusieurs fois puis s'éteint Erreur de configuration. Consultez la section “Voyants de diagnostic” page 23 pour voir si ce problème y est décrit. Vert clignotant L'ordinateur est en mode suspension (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 et Windows XP). Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour que l'ordinateur quitte le mode d'économie d'énergie. Vert fixe L'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne normalement. Aucune action n'est requise.24 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Voyants de diagnostic ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans leGuide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Afin de vous aider à résoudre les incidents, votre ordinateur est muni de quatre voyants sur le panneau arrière, marqué A, B, C et D (voir la page 9). Ces voyants peuvent être jaunes ou verts. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre normalement, le comportement ou les codes des voyants changent au fur et à mesure de l'avancement du processus de démarrage. Si la partie POST du démarrage du système s'effectue correctement, les quatre voyants sont vert fixe. Si l'ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement lors du POST, le comportement des voyants peut vous aider à identifier l'endroit où l'incident s'est produit. Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée Éteint Éteint Éteint Éteint L'ordinateur est éteint ou un incident s'est produit avant l'accès au BIOS. Branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise de courant opérationnelle et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. Vert Jaune Jaune Jaune Échec éventuel du BIOS ; l'ordinateur est en mode Récupération. Exécutez l'utilitaire de sauvegarde du BIOS, attendez que la récupération soit terminée et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Jaune Vert Jaune Jaune Défaillance possible du processeur. Réinstallez le processeur et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la réinstallation du processeur, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne.Guide de référence rapide 25 Vert Vert Jaune Jaune Des modules de mémoire sont détectés mais une panne de mémoire s'est produite. • Si un seul module de mémoire est installé, réinstallez-le et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la réinstallation du module de mémoire, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. • Si deux modules de mémoire sont installés, retirez-les, réinstallez-en un, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur démarre normalement, réinstallez le module supplémentaire. • Si possible, installez des modules de mémoire de même type. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Jaune Vert Vert Jaune Une défaillance de l'unité de disque dur ou du lecteur de disquette semble s'être produite. Remettez en place tous les câbles d'alimentation et de données et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Vert Vert Vert Jaune Défaillance possible de l'USB. Réinstallez tous les périphériques USB, vérifiez les connexions des câbles et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Jaune Jaune Jaune Vert Aucun module de mémoire n'est détecté. • Si un seul module de mémoire est installé, réinstallez-le et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la réinstallation du module de mémoire, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. • Si deux modules de mémoire sont installés, retirez-les, réinstallez-en un, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur démarre normalement, réinstallez le module supplémentaire. • Si possible, installez des modules de mémoire de même type. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée26 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Jaune Vert Jaune Vert Des modules de mémoire sont détectés mais il existe une erreur de compatibilité ou de configuration de mémoire. • Vérifiez qu'aucune contrainte particulière ne doit être respectée pour l'installation des modules dans les connecteurs de mémoire. Pour plus d'informations sur les modules de mémoire, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. • Vérifiez que les modules de mémoire que vous installez sont compatibles avec votre ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Jaune Vert Vert Vert Une erreur s'est produite avant le démarrage. • Vérifiez que les câbles reliant la carte système au disque dur, au lecteur de CD et au lecteur de DVD sont correctement connectés. • Lisez le message qui s'affiche sur l'écran du moniteur. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Vert Vert Vert Vert L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement après le POST. Aucune Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposéeGuide de référence rapide 27 Codes sonores Votre ordinateur peut émettre une série de signaux sonores lors du démarrage si le moniteur ne peut pas afficher les erreurs ou les problèmes éventuels. Cette série de signaux sonores, appelée le code sonore, permet d'identifier un problème. Un des codes sonores possibles (code 1-3-1) est composé d'un signal, d'une série de trois signaux, puis d'un autre signal. Ce code sonore vous indique que l'ordinateur a rencontré un problème de mémoire. Si votre ordinateur émet un signal lors du démarrage : 1 Notez le code que vous avez entendu. 2 Consultez la section “Diagnostics Dell” page 19 pour identifier la cause de l'incident. 3 Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Code Cause Code Cause 1-1-2 Échec du registre du microprocesseur 3-3-4 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo 1-1-3 Erreur de lecture/écriture en NVRAM 3-4-1 Erreur d'initialisation de l'écran 1-1-4 Erreur de total de contrôle du BIOS en mémoire ROM. 3-4-2 Échec du retraçage d'écran 1-2-1 Erreur du cadenceur d'intervalle programmable 3-4-3 Échec de la recherche de mémoire vidéo 1-2-2 Erreur d'initialisation des DMA 4-2-1 Pas de cycle d'horloge. 1-2-3 Erreur de lecture/écriture du registre de page DMA 4-2-2 Échec de l'arrêt 1-3 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo 4-2-3 Échec Gate A20 1-3-1 à 2-4-4 La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée 4-2-4 Interruption inattendue en mode protégé 3-1-1 Échec du registre DMA esclave 4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh 3-1-2 Échec du registre DMA maître 4-3-3 Échec du compteur 2 de puce d'horloge 3-1-3 Échec du registre de masque d'interruption maître 4-3-4 Arrêt de l'horloge système 3-1-4 Échec du registre de masque d'interruption esclave 4-4-1 Échec du test du port série ou parallèle 3-2-2 Échec du chargement du vecteur d'interruption 4-4-2 Échec de décompression du code vers la mémoire de doublage 3-2-4 Échec du test du contrôleur du clavier 4-4-3 Échec du test du coprocesseur mathématique 3-3-1 Panne d'alimentation NVRAM 4-4-4 Échec du test de la mémoire cache 3-3-2 Configuration incorrecte de la NVRAM28 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Exécution des diagnostics Dell pour disques durs IDE L'utilitaire de diagnostics Dell pour disques durs IDE teste l'unité de disque dur pour la dépanner ou confirmer une défaillance. 1 Allumez l'ordinateur (s'il est déjà allumé, redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque F2 = Setup (Configuration) s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur . 3 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si une défaillance est indiquée, consultez la section “Problèmes liés au disque dur” du Manuel de l'utilisateur. Résolution des problèmes d'incompatibilité logicielle et matérielle Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté lors de la configuration du système d'exploitation ou s'il est détecté mais pas correctement configuré, vous pouvez utiliser l'utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Si vous utilisez Microsoft® Windows® 2000, vous pouvez aussi faire appel au Gestionnaire de périphériques pour la résolution des incompatibilités. Windows XP Pour résoudre les incompatibilités à l'aide de l'utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Tapez utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels dans le champ Rechercher puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. 4 Dans la liste Utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Windows 2000 Pour résoudre les incompatibilités avec le Gestionnaire de périphériques : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuration, double-cliquez sur Système. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 4 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 5 Cliquez sur Affichage puis sur Ressources par connexion.Guide de référence rapide 29 6 Double-cliquez sur Requête d'interruption (IRQ). Les périphériques incorrectement configurés sont indiqués par un point d'exclamation jaune (!), ou par un x rouge (X) si le périphérique a été désactivé. 7 Double-cliquez sur un périphérique suivi d'un point d'exclamation pour afficher la fenêtre Propriétés. La zone État du périphérique de la fenêtre Propriétés indique les cartes et les périphériques devant être reconfigurés. 8 Reconfigurez les périphériques ou supprimez-les du Gestionnaire de périphériques. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration du périphérique, consultez la documentation qui l'accompagne. Pour résoudre les incompatibilités à l'aide de l'utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide. 2 Cliquez sur Dépannage et maintenance sous l'onglet Sommaire, cliquez sur Utilitaires de résolution de problèmes de Windows 2000, puis sur Matériel. 3 Dans la liste Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un problème matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP comporte la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support technique de Windows pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : effectuez des sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne gère pas et ne récupère pas vos fichiers de données. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions à l'écran.30 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur AVIS : avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Vérifiez que l'option Restaurer mon ordinateur à une heure antérieure est activée et cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur la date à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer l'ordinateur. L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration inclut un calendrier vous permettant de visualiser et de sélectionner les points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration et cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois que la fonction Restauration du système termine la collecte des données, l'écranRestauration terminée apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes un utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : avant d'annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration puis sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système s'affiche et l'ordinateur redémarre. 4 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK.Guide de référence rapide 31 Activation de la fonctionnalité Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Système. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 4 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système est bien désactivée. Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP Avant de commencer Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour corriger un problème avec un nouveau pilote, utilisez tout d'abord la fonctionnalité de restauration des pilotes de périphériques. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques, consultez le Manuel de l'utilisateur en ligne. Si la restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction de restauration du système pour rétablir l'ordinateur à l'état de fonctionnement précédant l'installation du pilote (voir la section “Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP” page 29). AVIS : avant d'effectuer l'installation, sauvegardez tous les fichiers de données de votre disque dur principal. Pour les configurations de disque dur conventionnelles, le disque dur principal correspond au premier disque dur détecté par l'ordinateur. Pour réinstaller Windows XP, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • CD du système d'exploitation fourni par Dell™ • CD Pilotes et utilitaires Dell REMARQUE : le CD Pilotes et utilitaires contient les pilotes installés lors de l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez-le pour charger les pilotes requis, y compris les pilotes nécessaires si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un contrôleur RAID. Réinstallation de Windows XP AVIS : vous devez utiliser Windows XP avec le Service Pack 1 pour la réinstallation. Pour réinstaller Windows XP, suivez toutes les étapes des sections ci-après, dans l'ordre indiqué. Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre de 1 à 2 heures. Après avoir réinstallé le système d'exploitation, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de périphériques, le programme anti-virus et d'autres logiciels.32 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com AVIS : le CD du système d'exploitation fournit des options pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP. Ces options peuvent écraser les fichiers et affecter les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas votre Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller Windows XP. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le logiciel. Initialisation à partir du CD Système d'exploitation. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et les programmes ouverts. 2 Insérez le CD du système d'exploitation. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Installer Windows XP s'affiche. 3 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à l'affichage du bureau Windows, éteignez de nouveau l'ordinateur et réessayez. 5 Appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour sélectionner CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche lorsque le message Press any key to boot from CD (Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer à partir du CD) apparaît à l'écran. Installation de Windows XP 1 Lorsque l'écran Installation de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur pour sélectionner Pour installer Windows maintenant. 2 Prenez connaissance des informations de l'écran Contrat de licence Microsoft Windows et appuyez sur pour accepter le contrat. 3 Si Windows XP est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur et que vous souhaitez récupérer vos données Windows XP actuelles, tapez r pour sélectionner l'option de réparation, puis retirez le CD. 4 Si vous souhaitez installer une nouvelle copie de Windows XP, appuyez sur <Échap> pour sélectionner cette option. 5 Press pour sélectionner la partition en surbrillance (recommandé), puis suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. L'écran Configuration Windows XP s'affiche et le système d'exploitation commence la copie des fichiers et l'installation des périphériques. L'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement à plusieurs reprises. REMARQUE : le temps nécessaire pour exécuter le programme d'installation dépend de la taille de votre disque dur et de la vitesse de votre ordinateur.Guide de référence rapide 33 AVIS : n'appuyez sur aucune touche lorsqu'un message du type suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer à partir du CD. 6 Lorsque l'écran Options régionales et linguistiques s'affiche, sélectionnez les paramètres de votre région, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Entrez votre nom et le nom de votre organisation (facultatif) dans l'écran Personnalisez votre logiciel, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur (ou acceptez le nom proposé) ainsi qu'un mot de passe lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur et mot de passe Administrateur s'affiche, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9 Si l'écran Informations de numérotation pour le modem apparaît, entrez les informations requises puis cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Entrez la date, l'heure et le fuseau horaire dans la fenêtre Réglage de la date et de l'heure, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 11 Si l'écran Paramètres de gestion de réseau s'affiche, cliquez sur Par défaut, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 12 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel et que le système vous demande des informations supplémentaires sur votre configuration réseau, entrez vos choix. Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de vos paramètres, acceptez les sélections par défaut. Windows XP installe les composants du système d'exploitation et configure l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement. AVIS : n'appuyez sur aucune touche lorsqu'un message du type suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour redémarrer à partir du CD. 13 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 14 Lorsque le message Comment cet ordinateur sera-t-il connecté à Internet ? s'affiche, cliquez sur Ignorer. 15 Lorsque l'écran Êtes-vous prêt à vous enregistrer auprès de Microsoft ? s'affiche, sélectionnez Non, pas maintenant, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 16 Lorsque l'écran Qui va utiliser cet ordinateur ? s'affiche, vous pouvez entrer le nom de cinq utilisateurs. 17 Cliquez sur Suivant. 18 Cliquez sur Terminer pour terminer le programme d'installation et retirez le CD du lecteur. 19 Réinstallez les pilotes appropriés à l'aide du CD Pilotes et utilitaires. 34 Guide de référence rapide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 20 Réinstallez votre logiciel anti-virus. 21 Réinstallez vos programmes. REMARQUE : pour réinstaller et activer la suite Microsoft Office ou Microsoft Works, vous devez vous munir de la clé produit indiquée sur le boîtier du CD d'installation. REMARQUE : si vous avez installé une image unique sur votre ordinateur ou si vous avez dû réinstaller le système d'exploitation, lancez l'utilitaire DSS. Cet utilitaire est disponible sur le CD Pilotes et utilitaires, ainsi que sur le site support.dell.com. Utilisation du CD Pilotes et utilitaires Pour utiliser le CD Pilotes et utilitaires (également appelé ResourceCD) en exécutant le système d'exploitation Windows : REMARQUE : pour accéder aux pilotes de périphériques et à la documentation utilisateur, vous devez utiliser le CDPilotes et utilitaires pendant l'exécution de Windows. 1 Allumez l'ordinateur et attendez que le bureau Windows s'affiche. 2 Insérez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires dans le lecteur. Si vous utilisez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour la première fois sur cet ordinateur, la fenêtre Installation de ResourceCD s'ouvre et vous indique que le CD Pilotes et utilitaires va s'installer. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour continuer. Pour terminer l'installation, répondez aux invites du programme d'installation. 4 Dans l'écran Welcome Dell System Owner (Vous êtes propriétaire d'un système Dell, bienvenue), cliquez sur Next (Suivant). 5 Sélectionnez les options System Model (Modèle de système), Operating System (Système d'exploitation), Device Type (Type de périphérique) et Topic (Rubrique) appropriées. Pilotes pour votre ordinateur Pour afficher une liste des pilotes de périphériques pour votre ordinateur : 1 Cliquez sur My Drivers (Mes pilotes) dans le menu déroulant Topic (Rubrique). Le CD Pilotes et utilitaires recherche le système d'exploitation et les éléments matériels de votre ordinateur, puis une liste de pilotes de périphériques pour la configuration de votre système s'affiche à l'écran. 2 Cliquez sur le pilote approprié puis suivez les instructions pour télécharger le pilote sur votre ordinateur. Pour afficher la liste de tous les pilotes disponibles pour votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Drivers (Pilotes) dans le menu Topic (Rubrique).Index 35 Index A Alimentation, voyant, 23 C Capot fermeture, 18 CD système d'exploitation, 7 CD Pilotes et utilitaires, 5 Centre d'aide et de support, 7 Codes sonores, 27 Conflits logiciels ou matériels, 28 Conflits d'IRQ, 28 Consignes de sécurité, 5 D Dell site de support, 6 site Web de support technique de Dell Premier, 7 Dépannage centre d'aide et de support, 7 conflits, 28 diagnostic, voyants, 23 diagnostics Dell, 19 problèmes matériels, 28 restauration à l'état précédent, 29 Diagnostics CD Pilotes et utilitaires, 5 codes sonores, 27 Dell, 19 voyants, 23-24 Documentation en ligne, 6-7 Guide des informations sur le système, 5 Manuel de l'utilisateur, 6 périphériques, 5 ResourceCD, 5 E Erreurs voyants, 23 voyants de diagnostic, 24 Étiquette Microsoft Windows, 6 Étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 6 numéro de série, 6 F Fonctions de diagnostic, 19 G Garantie, 5 Gestionnaire de périphériques, 28 L Logiciels conflits, 28 M Manuel de l'utilisateur, 6 Matériel codes sonores, 27 conflits, 28 diagnostics Dell, 19 Messages d'erreur codes sonores, 27 N Numéro de série, 6 O Ordinateur codes sonores, 27 fermeture du capot, 18 restauration à l'état précédent, 2936 Index 36 Index P Pilotes ResourceCD, 5 Problèmes codes sonores, 27 conflits, 28 diagnostics Dell, 19 restauration à l'état précédent, 29 voyants, 23 voyants de diagnostic, 24 Problèmes matériels, résolution, 28 R Recherche d'informations, 5 Réinstallation CD Pilotes et utilitaires, 5 ResourceCD, 5 Windows XP, 31 ResourceCD diagnostics Dell, 19 Restauration du système, 29 S Site de Support de Dell, 5 Site Web Premier de Support de Dell, 7 Système d'exploitation CD, 7 guide d'installation, 7 réinstallation de Windows XP, 31 Système, voyants, 23 V Voyants arrière de l'ordinateur, 24 avant de l'ordinateur, 23 bouton d'alimentation, 23 diagnostic, 23-24 système, 23 Voyants de diagnostic, 24 W Windows 2000 gestionnaire de périphériques, 28 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériel, 28 Windows XP centre d'aide et de support, 7 problèmes matériels, 28 réinstallation, 31 restauration du système, 29 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, 28www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Guía de referencia rápida Modelo DCTRNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. AVISO: un AVISO indica un posible daño en el hardware o la pérdida de datos, e informa de cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: una PRECAUCIÓN indica el riesgo de daños en la propiedad, lesiones corporales o incluso la muerte. Si ha adquirido un ordenador Dell™ serie n, las referencias que se hagan en este documento a los sistemas operativos Microsoft® Windows® no serán aplicables. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin notificación previa. © 2004 Dell Inc. Reservados todos los derechos. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento de cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales que aparecen en el texto: Dell, OptiPlex y el logotipo de DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Microsoft y Windows son marcas registradas de Microsoft Corporation. Las demás marcas comerciales y nombres comerciales que puedan utilizarse en este documento se refieren a las entidades propietarias de dichos nombres y marcas o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas comerciales y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo DCTR Abril de 2004 P/N G3630 Rev. A00Contenido 3 Contenido Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Acerca del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Vista frontal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Vista lateral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Cubierta de cables y adaptador de alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuración del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Determinación de la posición y la orientación del ordenador . . . . . . 11 Instalación de un dispositivo en el compartimento para módulos . . . . 12 Conexión de dispositivos externos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Instalación de una unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Fijación de la cubierta de cables opcional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Interior del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Vista interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Colocación de la cubierta del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Solución de problemas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Diagnósticos Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Indicador luminoso de fuente de alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Indicadores luminosos del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Indicadores de diagnóstico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Códigos de sonido. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Ejecución de los Diagnósticos de la unidad de disco duro IDE de Dell™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Solución de incompatibilidades de software y hardware . . . . . . . . 29 Uso de la función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . 30 Reinstalación de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Uso del CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) . . . . . . . . 35 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ContenidoGuía de referencia rápida 5 Localización de información ¿Qué información busca? Dónde encontrarla • Un programa de diagnóstico para el ordenador • Controladores para el ordenador • Documentación del ordenador • Documentación del dispositivo • Software del sistema de escritorio (DSS) CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades), también denominado ResourceCD o CD de recursos) La documentación y los controladores ya están instalados en el ordenador. Puede utilizar el CD para volver a instalar los controladores, ejecutar los Diagnósticos Dell o acceder a la documentación. El CD puede incluir archivos Léame con actualizaciones de última hora sobre cambios técnicos del ordenador, o material de consulta técnica avanzado para usuarios con experiencia o técnicos. NOTA: encontrará los últimos controladores y las últimas actualizaciones de la documentación en support.dell.com. • Actualizaciones y parches del sistema operativo Software del sistema de escritorio (DSS) Disponible en el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) y en support.dell.com. • Información sobre la garantía • Instrucciones de seguridad • Información sobre normativas • Información sobre ergonomía • Acuerdo de licencia del usuario final Guía de información del producto de Dell™ NOTA: este documento está disponible en formato PDF en la página support.dell.com.6 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Cómo quitar y reemplazar componentes • Especificaciones técnicas • Cómo configurar los valores del sistema • Cómo identificar y solucionar problemas Guía del usuario de Dell OptiPlex™ Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y seleccione Guías del usuario. La Guía del usuario también está disponible en el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). • Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio urgente • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows Estas etiquetas se incluyen en el ordenador. • Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el ordenador cuando visite la página support.dell.com o al ponerse en contacto con el soporte técnico. • Cuando se ponga en contacto con el soporte técnico, especifique el código de servicio urgente a fin de gestionar mejor su llamada. El código de servicio urgente no está disponible en todos los países. ¿Qué información busca? Dónde encontrarlaGuía de referencia rápida 7 • Controladores más recientes para el ordenador • Respuestas a preguntas de servicio y soporte técnico • Conversaciones en línea con otros usuarios y soporte técnico • Documentación del ordenador Página Web de soporte de Dell: support.dell.com NOTA: seleccione su zona para ver la página de soporte correspondiente. La página Web de soporte de Dell proporciona diversas herramientas en línea, incluidas las siguientes: • Soluciones: consejos y sugerencias para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos y cursos en línea • Comunidad: conversaciones en línea con otros clientes de Dell • Actualizaciones: información de actualización de componentes, como por ejemplo la memoria, la unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo • Atención al cliente: información de contacto, estado de los pedidos, información sobre garantías y reparaciones • Descargas: controladores, parches y actualizaciones de software • Consulta: documentación del ordenador, especificaciones de productos y documentos técnicos • Estado de la llamada al servicio de reparación e historial de soporte técnico • Principales problemas técnicos del ordenador • Preguntas frecuentes • Descargas de archivos • Detalles sobre la configuración del ordenador • Contrato de servicio del ordenador Página Web Dell Premier Support (soporte preferente): premiersupport.dell.com La página Web Dell Premier Support está personalizada para empresas e instituciones gubernamentales y educativas. Es posible que esta página Web no esté disponible en todos los países. • Cómo utilizar Windows XP • Documentación del ordenador • Documentación de dispositivos (como un módem) Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. ¿Qué información busca? Dónde encontrarla8 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Cómo reinstalar el sistema operativo CD Operating System (Sistema operativo) El sistema operativo ya está instalado en el ordenador. Para reinstalar el sistema operativo, utilice el CD Operating System (Sistema operativo). Para obtener instrucciones al respecto, consulte la Guía del usuario de OptiPlex. Una vez que haya reinstalado el sistema operativo, utilice el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) para volver a instalar los controladores de los dispositivos suministrados con el ordenador. La clave del producto del sistema operativo se encuentra en la etiqueta de licencia de Windows que está adherida en el ordenador. NOTA: el color del CD varía según el sistema operativo solicitado. • Número de modelo reglamentario DCTR • Tipo de chasis Chasis USFF (factor de forma ultra pequeño) ¿Qué información busca? Dónde encontrarlaGuía de referencia rápida 9 Acerca del ordenador NOTA: si desea fijar el ordenador debajo de una mesa o en la pared, utilice el soporte de pared opcional. Para solicitar este soporte, póngase en contacto con Dell. Para obtener información sobre cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. NOTA: para garantizar una ventilación adecuada, no obstruya las rejillas de ventilación. Vista frontal Vista lateral Conectores USB (2) Conector para micrófono Indicador de alimentación Botón de alimentación Compartimento Indicador de acceso a la unidad para módulos de disco duro Conector para auriculares Rejillas de ventilación (no bloquear) Rejillas de ventilación (no bloquear) Orificios de montaje (2)10 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vista posterior Cubierta de cables y adaptador de alimentación Mando de liberación de la cubierta Conector paralelo Indicadores de diagnóstico Conectores USB (5) Conector de salida de línea Conector de entrada de línea Conector de vídeo Conector serie Conector de alimentación Indicador de actividad de red Adaptador de red Indicador de integridad del enlace Rejillas de ventilación (no bloquear)Guía de referencia rápida 11 Configuración del ordenador AVISO: cuando realice la instalación del ordenador, fije todos los cables en la parte posterior del área de trabajo para evitar tirar de los cables, pisarlos o que se enreden. AVISO: para evitar que el ordenador se caliente excesivamente y se apague, no lo coloque en un área que no tenga una ventilación adecuada. NOTA: si ha solicitado un ordenador sin una unidad de disco duro, puede instalar una unidad mediante los rieles de la unidad que se incluyen dentro del ordenador (consulte “Instalación de una unidad de disco duro” en la página 16). Determinación de la posición y la orientación del ordenador AVISO: no coloque el monitor encima del ordenador. Utilice un soporte para monitor. 12 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com AVISO: no coloque el ordenador boca abajo. AVISO: si el ordenador se encuentra en un entorno donde se producen fuertes vibraciones o si se instala bajo una superficie o en una pared, utilice el soporte de pared opcional. Para solicitar este soporte, póngase en contacto con Dell. Para obtener información sobre cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. NOTA: para garantizar una ventilación adecuada, coloque el ordenador a 5 cm como mínimo de una superficie vertical. No coloque el ordenador en un entorno cerrado sin ventilación. Instalación de un dispositivo en el compartimento para módulos Puede instalar un dispositivo portátil de Dell™ (como una unidad de disquete, una unidad de CD/DVD o una segunda unidad de disco duro) en el compartimento para módulos. El ordenador Dell se entrega con una unidad de CD/DVD o un compartimento de unidad (con paneles de relleno) instalado en el compartimento para módulos. Como medida de seguridad, el ordenador cuenta con un interruptor de bloqueo de módulo para fijar un dispositivo al compartimento para módulos. Para acceder a este interruptor, extraiga la cubierta del ordenador (consulte “Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 17). Para reforzar la seguridad, también puede fijar un dispositivo en el compartimento para módulos utilizando el tornillo de dispositivo suministrado con el ordenador (se entrega por separado). Interruptor de bloqueo del móduloGuía de referencia rápida 13 Conexión de dispositivos externos PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Debe llevar a cabo todos los pasos para configurar correctamente el ordenador. Consulte las figuras correspondientes que se muestran después de las instrucciones. 1 Utilice los conectores USB de la parte posterior del ordenador para conectar el teclado y el ratón. 2 Conecte el cable del módem o de red. AVISO: para conectar un cable de red, primero debe enchufarlo en la toma de red de la pared y, después, en el ordenador. Inserte el cable de red, no la línea telefónica, en el conector de red. Si dispone de un módem opcional, conecte la línea telefónica al módem. AVISO: no conecte el cable del módem al adaptador de red. El voltaje de las comunicaciones telefónicas puede dañar el adaptador de red. 3 Conecte el monitor. Alinee e inserte suavemente el cable del monitor para evitar que se doblen las patillas. Apriete los tornillos que hay en los conectores de los cables. NOTA: algunos monitores tienen el conector de vídeo debajo de la parte posterior de la pantalla. Consulte la documentación incluida con el monitor para conocer las ubicaciones de los conectores. 4 Conecte los altavoces. 1 Tornillo de dispositivo14 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 Conecte los cables de alimentación al ordenador, al monitor y a los dispositivos, e inserte el otro extremo de los cables en las tomas eléctricas. 6 Presione los botones de alimentación para encender el ordenador y el monitor. NOTA: antes de instalar cualquier dispositivo o software que no se haya entregado con el ordenador, lea la documentación que se incluye con el software o dispositivo, o póngase en contacto con el proveedor para comprobar que el software o dispositivo es compatible con el ordenador y el sistema operativo. NOTA: su ordenador puede ser ligeramente distinto del que se muestra en las figuras de instalación siguientes. Conector de red Conector USBGuía de referencia rápida 15 Conexión de un monitor DVI Si dispone de un monitor compatible con DVI, enchufe el cable del monitor en el conector de pantalla DVI de color blanco del panel posterior del ordenador. Conexión de un monitor VGA Si dispone de un monitor compatible con VGA, utilice el cable adaptador para conectar el cable del monitor al conector de pantalla DVI de color blanco situado en el panel posterior del ordenador.16 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Conexión de dos monitores Utilice el cable adaptador para conectar el monitor VGA y el monitor DVI al conector de pantalla DVI de color blanco situado en el panel posterior del ordenador. Instalación de una unidad de disco duro PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Si va a instalar una nueva unidad, fije los rieles de unidad, situados dentro de la cubierta, a la unidad nueva. 2 Conecte los cables de datos y de alimentación a los conectores de la unidad de disco duro, procurando no doblar ninguna patilla. 3 Deslice la unidad de disco duro hacia el interior del soporte. Conexión del adaptador de CA PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Conecte el adaptador de alimentación al conector situado en la parte posterior del ordenador. Para que la conexión resulte segura, compruebe que el pasador queda bien encajado. Se oirá un clic. 2 Conecte un cable de alimentación al adaptador de alimentación. 3 Si el conector del cable de alimentación del ordenador tiene un borne de conexión a tierra y decide conectarlo, continúe con el paso 4. Si decide no conectarlo, vaya al paso 5.Guía de referencia rápida 17 PRECAUCIÓN: si el cable de alimentación o el adaptador incluyen un conductor de tierra de color verde para la conexión a una toma eléctrica, no permita el contacto entre el conductor de tierra verde y los cables de alimentación, ya que esto puede provocar una descarga eléctrica, un incendio o daños en el ordenador (consulte la figura siguiente). 4 Conecte el conector de tierra metálico a la conexión a tierra de la toma eléctrica (consulte la figura siguiente): a Afloje la conexión a tierra. b Deslice el conector de tierra metálico por detrás de la conexión a tierra y, a continuación, fije la conexión a tierra. 5 Conecte el cable de alimentación de CA a la toma eléctrica. Fijación de la cubierta de cables opcional 1 Asegúrese de que todos los cables de dispositivos externos pasen por el orificio de la cubierta de cables y estén conectados al panel posterior del ordenador. 2 Sujete la parte inferior de la cubierta de cables y alinee las cuatro lengüetas con las cuatro ranuras del panel posterior del ordenador. 3 Inserte las lengüetas en las ranuras y deslice la cubierta de cables hacia los indicadores de diagnóstico (consulte la figura) hasta que quede bien encajada. 4 Instale un dispositivo de seguridad en la ranura para cable de seguridad (opcional). Interior del ordenador Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: para evitar las descargas eléctricas, desenchufe siempre el ordenador del adaptador antes de extraer la cubierta. Conexión a tierra Conector de tierra metálico Cubierta de cables (opcional) Ranura para cable de seguridad18 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com PRECAUCIÓN: para evitar que los componentes internos del ordenador resulten dañados por descargas electrostáticas, antes de tocar cualquiera de sus componentes electrónicos, descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque una superficie metálica sin pintar del chasis del ordenador. 1 Retire la cubierta del ordenador. a Gire el mando de liberación de la cubierta en el sentido de las agujas del reloj, como se muestra en la figura. b Deslice la cubierta del ordenador 1 cm hacia delante o hasta que se detenga y, a continuación, levántela. Vista interior Mando de liberación de la cubierta Altavoz (opcional) Módulos de memoria (2) Unidad de disco duro Ranura para cable de seguridad Interruptor de intrusión en el chasis Cubierta del ventilador del disipador de calor del procesadorGuía de referencia rápida 19 Colocación de la cubierta del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta: a Baje y alinee la cubierta con la estructura metálica del ordenador. b Deslice la cubierta hasta que encaje en su sitio. 2 Conecte el ordenador al adaptador de corriente, conecte los dispositivos a las tomas eléctricas y enciéndalos. Si el detector de intrusión en el chasis está activado, aparecerá este mensaje en la pantalla después del siguiente inicio del ordenador: ALERT! Cover was previously removed! 3 Desactive el estado de intrusión en el chasis abriendo la configuración del sistema y seleccionando Clear (Borrar) bajo la opción Intrusion Status (Estado de intrusión). Para obtener información sobre el detector de intrusión en el chasis, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. NOTA: si otra persona ha asignado una contraseña de administrador, póngase en contacto con el administrador de red para obtener información sobre cómo restablecer el detector de intrusión en el chasis. Solución de problemas Dell proporciona varias herramientas de ayuda en caso de que el ordenador no funcione del modo esperado. Para obtener la información sobre solución de problemas más reciente disponible para su ordenador, consulte la página Web de soporte de Dell en support.dell.com. Si surge algún problema con el ordenador que requiera asistencia por parte de Dell, escriba una descripción detallada del error, los códigos de sonido o los patrones de los indicadores de diagnóstico, anote el código de servicio urgente y la etiqueta de servicio debajo, y póngase en contacto con Dell desde la misma ubicación que su ordenador. Consulte “Localización de información” en la página 5 para ver un ejemplo de código de servicio urgente y de etiqueta de servicio. Código de servicio urgente:___________________________ Etiqueta de servicio:_____________________20 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Diagnósticos Dell PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Cuándo utilizar los Diagnósticos Dell Si tiene problemas con el ordenador, realice las comprobaciones descritas en “Configuración del ordenador” en la página 11 y ejecute los Diagnósticos Dell antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. AVISO: los Diagnósticos Dell sólo funcionan en los ordenadores Dell™. Abra la configuración del sistema, revise la información de configuración del ordenador y compruebe que el dispositivo que desea probar se muestra en la configuración del sistema y está activo. Para obtener información sobre la configuración del sistema, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. Inicie los Diagnósticos Dell desde la unidad de disco duro (consulte “Inicio de los Diagnósticos Dell desde la unidad de disco duro” en la página 20) o desde el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades), conocido también como ResourceCD (consulte “Inicio de los Diagnósticos Dell desde el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades)” en la página 21). Inicio de los Diagnósticos Dell desde la unidad de disco duro 1 Encienda (o reinicie) el ordenador. 2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: si aparece un mensaje que informa de que no se ha encontrado ninguna partición de utilidades de diagnóstico, consulte “Inicio de los Diagnósticos Dell desde el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades)” en la página 21. Si no lo hace inmediatamente y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, espere hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows®. A continuación, apague el ordenador y vuelva a intentarlo. Para obtener información sobre cómo apagar el ordenador, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. 3 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de arranque, resalte la opción Boot to Utility Partition (Arrancar desde partición de utilidades) y pulse . 4 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal) de Diagnósticos Dell, seleccione la prueba que desee ejecutar (consulte la página 21).Guía de referencia rápida 21 Inicio de los Diagnósticos Dell desde el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) 1 Inserte el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). 2 Apague el ordenador y reinícielo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente. Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el ordenador y vuelva a intentarlo. NOTA: los pasos siguientes modifican la secuencia de arranque sólo por una vez. En el siguiente inicio, el ordenador arranca con los dispositivos especificados en la configuración del sistema. 3 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de arranque, resalte la opción Onboard or USB CD-ROM (CD-ROM USB o integrado) y pulse . 4 Seleccione la opción Onboard or USB CD-ROM Device (Dispositivo de CD-ROM USB o integrado) en el menú de arranque del CD. 5 Seleccione la opción Boot from CD-ROM (Arrancar desde el CD-ROM) en el menú que aparece. 6 Escriba 1 para iniciar el menú de ResourceCD. 7 Escriba 2 para iniciar los Diagnósticos Dell. 8 Seleccione Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Ejecutar los Diagnósticos Dell de 32 bits) en la lista numerada. Si aparecen varias versiones, seleccione la versión apropiada para su ordenador. 9 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal) de Diagnósticos Dell, seleccione la prueba que desee ejecutar (consulte la página 21). Menú principal de los Diagnósticos Dell 1 Después de cargar los Diagnósticos Dell y de que aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón correspondiente a la opción que desee. Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele durar entre 10 y 20 minutos, y no requiere la intervención del usuario. Ejecute Express Test (Prueba rápida) primero para aumentar la posibilidad de realizar un seguimiento del problema rápidamente. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele durar una hora o más, y requiere que el usuario responda a preguntas periódicamente. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico. Es posible personalizar las pruebas que se van a ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Enumera los síntomas más comunes encontrados y permite seleccionar una prueba en función del síntoma del problema que ha surgido.22 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com 2 Si se detecta un problema durante una prueba, aparece un mensaje con el código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga las instrucciones que se muestran en la pantalla. Si no puede resolver la condición de error, póngase en contacto con Dell. NOTA: la etiqueta de servicio del ordenador se indica en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el soporte técnico le solicitará información de la etiqueta de servicio. 3 Si ejecuta una prueba mediante la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), seleccione la ficha correspondiente como se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información. 4 Cuando finalicen las pruebas, si está ejecutando los Diagnósticos Dell desde el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades), extraiga el CD. 5 Cierre la pantalla de la prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Diagnósticos Dell y reiniciar el ordenador, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Ficha Función Results (Resultados) Muestra los resultados de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuration (Configuración) Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Los Diagnósticos Dell obtienen información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y muestran dicha información en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. Es posible que en la lista de dispositivos no se muestren los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el ordenador ni de todos los dispositivos conectados a él. Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración.Guía de referencia rápida 23 Indicador luminoso de fuente de alimentación Estado del indicador luminoso Estado de la unidad de fuente de alimentación Descripción Solución de problemas Apagado No hay CA o se ha producido una condición de error Indica que la fuente de alimentación no recibe alimentación de una toma eléctrica, o que la fuente de alimentación se ha interrumpido debido a una condición de error. Asegúrese de que la toma eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. Compruebe que el cable de alimentación de CA esté conectado correctamente a la fuente de alimentación. Si es necesario, vuelva a conectar el cable de CA a la fuente de alimentación. Desconecte el cable de alimentación de CA de la fuente de alimentación y el cable de CC del ordeandor durante al menos diez segundos. Vuelva a conectar el cable de alimentación de CA a la fuente de alimentación. El indicador luminoso de la fuente de alimentación mostrará una luz amarilla. Vuelva a conectar el cable de CC al ordenador. El indicador luminoso de la fuente de alimentación mostrará una luz verde. Amarillo Hay CA, no se carga Indica que la fuente de alimentación está conectada a una toma eléctrica que funciona, pero que no está conectada al ordenador. Compruebe que la fuente de alimentación esté conectada completamente al ordenador y que el pasador de retención esté encajado. Vuelva a realizar la conexión, si es necesario. Verde Hay CA, alimentación para la carga Indica que la fuente de alimentación recibe corriente de la toma eléctrica y que está conectada correctamente al ordenador. Compruebe el indicador luminoso del botón de alimentación y consulte “Indicadores luminosos del sistema” en la página 24. 24 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Indicadores luminosos del sistema Los indicadores del botón de alimentación y de la unidad de disco duro pueden indicar un problema del ordenador. Indicador de alimentación Descripción del problema Solución recomendada Indicador de alimentación iluminado con una luz verde continua y ningún código de sonido, pero el ordenador se bloquea durante la prueba POST Puede ser que un dispositivo integrado en la placa base sea defectuoso. Consulte “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 25 para ver si se identifica el problema específico. Si no se identifica el problema, póngase en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. Indicador de alimentación con una luz verde continua y ningún código de sonido ni vídeo durante la prueba POST El monitor puede ser defectuoso o puede haberse instalado incorrectamente. Consulte “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 25 para ver si se identifica el problema específico. Luz verde continua y un código de sonido durante la prueba POST Se ha detectado un problema durante la ejecución del BIOS. Para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo identificar los códigos de sonido, consulte “Ejecución de los Diagnósticos de la unidad de disco duro IDE de Dell™” en la página 29. Además, consulte los indicadores de diagnóstico para intentar identificar el problema específico. Luz amarilla continua Los Diagnósticos Dell están ejecutando una prueba, o un dispositivo de la placa base puede que esté defectuoso o instalado incorrectamente. Si se están ejecutando los Diagnósticos Dell, deje que termine la prueba. Consulte “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 25 para ver si se identifica el problema específico. Si el ordenador no arranca, póngase en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. Luz verde intermitente que después se apaga Existe un error de configuración. Consulte “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 25 para ver si se identifica el problema específico. Luz verde intermitente El ordenador se encuentra en el estado de suspensión (en Microsoft® Windows® 2000 y Windows XP). Presione el botón de alimentación para activar el ordenador. Luz verde continua La alimentación está activada y el ordenador funciona normalmente. No es necesaria ninguna acción correctora.Guía de referencia rápida 25 Indicadores de diagnóstico PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos descritos en esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Para ayudarle a solucionar un problema, el ordenador dispone de cuatro indicadores luminosos marcados como “A”, “B”, “C” y “D” en el panel posterior (consulte la página 10). Los indicadores pueden ser de color amarillo o verde. Cuando el ordenador se inicia normalmente, los patrones o códigos de los indicadores luminosos cambian a medida que avanza el proceso de arranque. Si la parte de la POST correspondiente al inicio del sistema se completa correctamente, los cuatro indicadores emiten una luz verde continua. Si se producen errores durante el proceso de la POST, el patrón mostrado en los indicadores luminosos puede ayudar a identificar en qué punto del proceso se ha detenido el ordenador. Patrón de los indicadores Descripción del problema Solución recomendada Apagado Apagado Apagado Apagado El ordenador se encuentra en una condición de apagado normal, o se ha producido un posible error previo al BIOS. Enchufe el ordenador a una toma eléctrica que funcione y presione el botón de alimentación. Verde Amarillo Amarillo Amarillo Se ha producido un posible error del BIOS, o el ordenador se encuentra en modo de recuperación. Ejecute la utilidad de recuperación del BIOS, espere a que se complete la recuperación y reinicie el ordenador. Amarillo Verde Amarillo Amarillo Se ha producido un posible error en el procesador. Vuelva a instalar el procesador y reinicie el ordenador. Para obtener información sobre cómo reinstalar el procesador, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea.26 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Verde Verde Amarillo Amarillo Se detectan los módulos de memoria, pero se ha producido un error de la memoria. • Si tiene instalado un módulo de memoria, vuelva a instalarlo y reinicie el ordenador. Para obtener información sobre cómo reinstalar el módulo de memoria, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. • Si tiene instalados dos módulos de memoria, extráigalos, vuelva a instalar un módulo y reinicie el ordenador. Si el ordenador se inicia normalmente, vuelva a instalar otro módulo. • Si dispone de otra memoria del mismo tipo que funcione, instálela en el ordenador. • Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell. Amarillo Verde Verde Amarillo Se ha producido un posible error en la unidad de disquete o de disco duro. Vuelva a conectar todos los cables de alimentación y de datos, y reinicie el ordenador. Verde Verde Verde Amarillo Se ha producido un posible error de USB. Reinstale todos los dispositivos USB, compruebe las conexiones de los cables y reinicie el ordenador. Amarillo Amarillo Amarillo Verde No se detecta ningún módulo de memoria. • Si tiene instalado un módulo de memoria, vuelva a instalarlo y reinicie el ordenador. Para obtener información sobre cómo reinstalar el módulo de memoria, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. • Si tiene instalados dos módulos de memoria, extráigalos, vuelva a instalar un módulo y reinicie el ordenador. Si el ordenador se inicia normalmente, vuelva a instalar otro módulo. • Si dispone de otra memoria del mismo tipo que funcione, instálela en el ordenador. • Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell. Patrón de los indicadores Descripción del problema Solución recomendadaGuía de referencia rápida 27 Códigos de sonido El ordenador puede emitir una serie de sonidos durante el arranque, si el monitor no puede mostrar errores o problemas. Esta serie de sonidos, llamados códigos de sonido, identifican un problema. Un código de sonido posible (código 1-3-1) consta de un sonido, una secuencia de tres sonidos y, a continuación, otro sonido. Este código de sonido indica que el ordenador ha detectado un problema de memoria. Amarillo Verde Amarillo Verde Se detectan módulos de memoria, pero existe un error de configuración o de compatibilidad de la memoria. • Asegúrese de que no existen requisitos especiales para la colocación del conector o del módulo de memoria. Para obtener información sobre los módulos de memoria, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. • Verifique que los módulos de memoria que instala sean compatibles con el ordenador. • Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell. Amarillo Verde Verde Verde Se ha producido un error anterior al arranque. • Compruebe que los cables de las unidades de disco duro, CD y DVD estén conectados correctamente a la placa base. • Compruebe el mensaje del ordenador que aparece en la pantalla. • Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell. Verde Verde Verde Verde El ordenador se encuentra en condiciones normales de funcionamiento después de la POST. Ninguna. Patrón de los indicadores Descripción del problema Solución recomendada28 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Si el ordenador emite sonidos durante el arranque: 1 Anote el código de sonido. 2 Para identificar una causa más grave, consulte “Diagnósticos Dell” en la página 20. 3 Póngase en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. Código Causa Código Causa 1-1-2 Error de registro del microprocesador 3-3-4 Error de la prueba de la memoria de vídeo 1-1-3 Error de escritura/lectura de NVRAM 3-4-1 Error de inicialización de la pantalla 1-1-4 Error de suma de comprobación de ROM del BIOS. 3-4-2 Error en el barrido de la pantalla 1-2-1 Error del temporizador de intervalos programable 3-4-3 Error de búsqueda de la memoria ROM de vídeo 1-2-2 Error de inicialización de DMA 4-2-1 No hay pulsos del temporizador 1-2-3 Error de escritura/lectura del registro de páginas DMA 4-2-2 Error de apagado 1-3 Error de la prueba de la memoria de vídeo 4-2-3 Error en la puerta A20 De 1-3-1 a 2-4-4 La memoria no se utiliza o no se identifica correctamente 4-2-4 Interrupción inesperada en modo protegido 3-1-1 Error del registro DMA esclavo 4-3-1 Error en la memoria por encima de la dirección 0FFFFh 3-1-2 Error del registro del DMA maestro 4-3-3 Error en el contador 2 del chip del temporizador 3-1-3 Error del registro maestro de enmascaramiento de interrupciones 4-3-4 El reloj de hora se ha parado 3-1-4 Error del registro esclavo de enmascaramiento de interrupciones 4-4-1 Error de la prueba de puerto paralelo o serie 3-2-2 Error de la carga del vector de interrupción 4-4-2 Error al descomprimir el código en la memoria duplicada 3-2-4 Error de la prueba de la controladora del teclado 4-4-3 Error de la prueba del coprocesador matemático 3-3-1 Pérdida de la alimentación de la NVRAM 4-4-4 Error de la prueba caché 3-3-2 Configuración de NVRAM no válidaGuía de referencia rápida 29 Ejecución de los Diagnósticos de la unidad de disco duro IDE de Dell™ Los Diagnósticos de la unidad de disco duro IDE de Dell son una utilidad que sirve para probar la unidad de disco duro a fin de solucionar problemas o confirmar la existencia de errores en dicha unidad. 1 Encienda el ordenador (si ya está encendido, reinícielo). 2 Cuando aparezca F2 = Setup (F2 = Configuración) en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla, pulse . 3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. Si se indica un error, consulte “Problemas con la unidad de disco duro” en la Guía del usuario. Solución de incompatibilidades de software y hardware Si un dispositivo no se detecta durante la instalación del sistema operativo o bien se detecta pero no está configurado correctamente, puede utilizar el solucionador de problemas de hardware para resolver la incompatibilidad. En el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® 2000, también puede utilizar el Administrador de dispositivos para resolver las incompatibilidades. Windows XP Para resolver incompatibilidades mediante el solucionador de problemas de hardware: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba solucionador de problemas de hardware en el campo Buscar y haga clic en la flecha para iniciar la búsqueda. 3 Haga clic en Solucionador de problemas de hardware en la lista Resultado de la búsqueda. 4 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un conflicto de hardware en mi equipo y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. Windows 2000 Para resolver las incompatibilidades con el Administrador de dispositivos, siga estos pasos: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Configuración y haga clic en Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, haga doble clic en Sistema. 3 Seleccione la ficha Hardware. 4 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 5 Haga clic en Ver y seleccione Recursos por conexión. 6 Haga doble clic en Solicitud de interrupción (IRQ). Los dispositivos que no están configurados correctamente se indican mediante un signo de admiración (!) de color amarillo o bien mediante una X de color rojo si se ha desactivado el dispositivo.30 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com 7 Haga doble clic en uno de los dispositivos marcados con un signo de admiración; aparecerá la ventana Propiedades. En el área de estado Dispositivo de la ventana Propiedades se indican las tarjetas y los dispositivos que deben configurarse de nuevo. 8 Vuelva a configurar los dispositivos o desinstálelos desde el Administrador de dispositivos. Para obtener información sobre cómo configurar un dispositivo, consulte la documentación que se le entregó con éste. Para resolver incompatibilidades mediante el solucionador de problemas de hardware: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda. 2 En la ficha Contenido, haga clic en Solucionar problemas y mantenimiento, haga clic en Solucionadores de problemas de Windows 2000 y, a continuación, haga clic en Hardware. 3 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un conflicto de hardware en mi equipo y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. Uso de la función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft® Windows® XP El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP dispone de la función Restaurar sistema que permite regresar a un estado operativo anterior del ordenador (sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos) si los cambios efectuados en el hardware, en el software o en otros parámetros del sistema han dejado el ordenador en un estado operativo no deseado. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows para obtener información sobre cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema. AVISO: realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos. Creación de un punto de restauración 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. Restauración del ordenador a un estado operativo anterior AVISO: antes de restaurar el ordenador a un estado operativo anterior, guarde y cierre todos los archivos y programas abiertos. No modifique, abra ni suprima ningún archivo ni programa hasta que la restauración del sistema haya finalizado. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Asegúrese de que la opción Restaurar mi equipo a un estado anterior está seleccionada y haga clic en Siguiente.Guía de referencia rápida 31 3 En el calendario, haga clic en la fecha a la que desea restaurar el ordenador. La pantalla Seleccione un punto de restauración proporciona un calendario que permite ver y seleccionar puntos de restauración. Todas las fechas con puntos de restauración disponibles aparecen en negrita. 4 Seleccione un punto de restauración y haga clic en Siguiente. Si una fecha sólo tiene un punto de restauración, éste se selecciona automáticamente. Si hay dos o más puntos de restauración disponibles, haga clic en el punto de restauración que prefiera. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. Cuando la función Restaurar sistema ha terminado de recopilar datos, aparece la pantalla Restauración finalizada y, a continuación, el ordenador se reinicia. 6 Una vez que se haya reiniciado el ordenador, haga clic en Aceptar. Para cambiar el punto de restauración, puede repetir los pasos con otro punto de restauración o bien puede deshacer la restauración. Cómo deshacer la última restauración del sistema AVISO: antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos y programas abiertos. No modifique, abra ni suprima ningún archivo ni programa hasta que la restauración del sistema haya finalizado. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Seleccione Deshacer la última restauración y haga clic en Siguiente. 3 Haga clic en Siguiente. Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el ordenador se reinicia. 4 Una vez que se haya reiniciado el ordenador, haga clic en Aceptar. Activación de la función Restaurar sistema Si vuelve a instalar Windows XP con menos de 200 MB de espacio libre disponible en el disco duro, se desactivará automáticamente la función Restaurar sistema. Para ver si la función Restaurar sistema está activada: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Sistema. 3 Seleccione la ficha Restaurar sistema. 4 Asegúrese de que la opción Desactivar Restaurar sistema no está seleccionada.32 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com Reinstalación de Microsoft® Windows® XP Antes de empezar Si está pensando en volver a instalar el sistema operativo Windows XP para corregir un problema con un controlador instalado recientemente, intente primero solucionar el problema con la función de Windows XP Volver al controlador anterior. Para obtener información sobre la función Volver al controlador anterior, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. Si con esto no se soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar sistema (consulte la “Uso de la función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft® Windows® XP” en la página 30) para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador de dispositivo. AVISO: antes de llevar a cabo la instalación, realice una copia de seguridad de todos los archivos de datos de la unidad de disco duro principal. En las configuraciones convencionales de disco duro, la unidad de disco duro principal es la primera unidad que detecta el ordenador. Para reinstalar Windows XP, necesitará: • El CD Operating System (Sistema operativo) de Dell™ • El CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) de Dell NOTA: el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) contiene los controladores que se instalaron durante el montaje del ordenador. Utilice el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) para cargar los controladores que necesite, incluidos los que necesitará si el ordenador cuenta con una controladora RAID. Reinstalación de Windows XP AVISO: debe utilizar Windows XP Service Pack 1 o una versión posterior cuando reinstale Windows XP. Para reinstalar Windows XP, realice todos los pasos descritos en las secciones siguientes en el orden en que se enumeran. El proceso de reinstalación puede durar entre una y dos horas. Una vez finalizada la reinstalación del sistema operativo, deberá reinstalar los controladores de dispositivo, el antivirus y los demás programas de software. AVISO: el CD Operating System (Sistema operativo) ofrece varias opciones para reinstalar Windows XP. Estas opciones pueden llegar a sobregrabar archivos y pueden afectar a los programas instalados en la unidad de disco duro. Por lo tanto, se recomienda no reinstalar Windows XP a menos que se lo indique un representante del soporte técnico de Dell. AVISO: para evitar conflictos con Windows XP, desactive el software antivirus que tenga instalado en el ordenador antes de reinstalar Windows XP. Para obtener instrucciones, consulte la documentación proporcionada con el software.Guía de referencia rápida 33 Arranque desde el CD Operating System (Sistema operativo) 1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos y programas abiertos. 2 Inserte el CD Operating System (Sistema operativo). Haga clic en Exit (Salir) si aparece el mensaje Install Windows XP (Instalar Windows XP). 3 Reinicie el ordenador. 4 Pulse inmediatamente después de que aparezca el logotipo de DELL™. Si se muestra el logotipo del sistema operativo, espere hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows y, a continuación, apague el ordenador e inténtelo de nuevo. 5 Utilice las teclas de flecha para seleccionar CD-ROM y luego pulse . 6 Cuando aparezca el mensaje Press any key to boot from CD (Pulse cualquier tecla para arrancar desde el CD), pulse cualquier tecla. Instalación de Windows XP 1 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Instalación de Windows XP, pulse para seleccionar Instalar Windows ahora. 2 Lea la información de la pantalla Contrato de licencia de Microsoft Windows y pulse para aceptar el contrato de licencia. 3 Si Windows XP ya está instalado en el ordenador y desea recuperar los datos actuales de Windows XP, escriba r para seleccionar la opción de reparación y extraiga el CD. 4 Si desea instalar una copia nueva de Windows XP, pulse para seleccionar esa opción 5 Pulse para seleccionar la partición resaltada (opción recomendada) y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. Aparece la pantalla Programa de instalación de Windows XP, y el sistema operativo empieza a copiar archivos y a instalar los dispositivos. El ordenador se reinicia automáticamente varias veces. NOTA: el tiempo necesario para que se complete la instalación depende del tamaño de la unidad de disco duro y de la velocidad del ordenador. AVISO: no pulse ninguna tecla cuando aparezca el mensaje: Press any key to boot from the CD. 6 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Configuración regional y de idioma, seleccione la configuración regional de su zona y haga clic en Siguiente. 7 Escriba su nombre y el de su empresa (opcional) en la pantalla Personalice su software y haga clic en Siguiente. 8 En la ventana Nombre del equipo y contraseña del administrador, escriba un nombre para el ordenador (o acepte el que se proporciona) y una contraseña, y haga clic en Siguiente. 9 Si aparece la pantalla Información de marcado del módem, especifique la información solicitada y haga clic en Siguiente.34 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.com 10 Especifique la fecha, la hora y la zona horaria en la ventana Valores de fecha y hora y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 11 Si aparece la pantalla Configuración de red, seleccione Típica y haga clic en Siguiente. 12 Si está reinstalando Windows XP Professional y el sistema le solicita información adicional sobre la configuración de la red, introduzca sus selecciones. Si no está seguro de su configuración, acepte las opciones predeterminadas. Windows XP instala los componentes del sistema operativo y configura el ordenador. El ordenador se reiniciará automáticamente. AVISO: no pulse ninguna tecla cuando aparezca el mensaje: Press any key to boot from the CD. 13 Cuando aparezca la pantalla de bienvenida a Microsoft, haga clic en Siguiente. 14 Cuando aparezca el mensaje ¿Cómo se conectará este equipo a Internet?, haga clic en Omitir. 15 Cuando aparezca la pantalla ¿Está listo para registrarse con Microsoft?, seleccione No, quizá en otro momento y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 16 Cuando aparezca la pantalla ¿Quién usará este equipo?, puede especificar hasta cinco usuarios. 17 Haga clic en Siguiente. 18 Haga clic en Finalizar para completar la instalación y extraiga el CD. 19 Vuelva a instalar los controladores adecuados mediante el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). 20 Vuelva a instalar el software antivirus. 21 Vuelva a instalar los programas. NOTA: para reinstalar y activar los programas de Microsoft Office o de Microsoft Works Suite, necesitará el número de clave del producto, que se encuentra en la parte posterior de la funda del CD de Microsoft Office o Microsoft Works Suite. NOTA: si ha instalado una sola imagen en el ordenador, o si ha tenido que reinstalar el sistema operativo, ejecute la utilidad DSS. DSS está disponible en el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) y en support.dell.com.Guía de referencia rápida 35 Uso del CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) Para utilizar el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades), conocido también como ResourceCD, mientras ejecuta el sistema operativo Windows: NOTA: para acceder a la documentación del usuario y los controladores de dispositivo, utilice el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) mientras ejecuta Windows. 1 Encienda el ordenador y espere a que aparezca el escritorio de Windows. 2 Inserte el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) en la unidad de CD. Si utiliza el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) por primera vez en este ordenador, aparece la ventana de instalación del ResourceCD, que le informa de que el CD está a punto de iniciar la instalación. 3 Haga clic en OK (Aceptar) para continuar. Para completar la instalación, responda a las indicaciones del programa de instalación. 4 Haga clic en Next (Siguiente) en la pantalla Welcome Dell System Owner (Bienvenida al propietario del sistema Dell). 5 Elija los valores apropiados para System Model (Modelo del sistema), Operating System (Sistema operativo), Device Type (Tipo de dispositivo) y Topic (Tema). Controladores para el ordenador Para ver una lista de los controladores de dispositivo de su ordenador: 1 Haga clic en My Drivers (Mis controladores) en el menú desplegable Topic (Tema). El CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) explorará el hardware y el sistema operativo de su ordenador y mostrará en la pantalla una lista de los controladores de dispositivo para la configuración del sistema. 2 Seleccione el controlador adecuado y siga las instrucciones para descargar el controlador en el ordenador. Para ver todos los controladores disponibles para su ordenador, haga clic en Drivers (Controladores) en el menú desplegable Topic (Tema).36 Guía de referencia rápida www.dell.com | support.dell.comÍndice 37 Índice A administrador de dispositivos, 29 B búsqueda de información, 5 C CD sistema operativo, 8 CD Drivers and Utilities, 5 CD Operating System, 8 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 7 códigos de sonido, 27 conflictos incompatibilidades de software y hardware, 29 conflictos de IRQ, 29 controladores ResourceCD, 5 cubierta cerrar, 19 D Dell página de soporte, 7 página Web de soporte preferente, 7 diagnósticos CD Drivers and Utilities, 5 códigos de sonido, 27 Dell, 20 indicadores luminosos, 24-25 documentación dispositivo, 5 en línea, 7 guía de información del sistema, 5 Guía del usuario, 6 ResourceCD, 5 E etiquetas de servicio, 6 Microsoft Windows, 6 G garantía, 5 Guía del usuario, 6 H hardware códigos de sonido, 27 conflictos, 29 Diagnósticos Dell, 20 I indicadores de diagnóstico, 24-25 indicadores luminosos botón de alimentación, 24 diagnóstico, 24-25 parte frontal del ordenador, 24 parte posterior del ordenador, 25 sistema, 24 instrucciones de seguridad, 5 M mensajes de error códigos de sonido, 27 indicadores de diagnóstico, 24-2538 Índice 38 Índice O Operating System CD, 8 Guía de instalación, 8 ordenador cerrar la cubierta, 19 códigos de sonido, 27 restaurar a estado anterior, 30 P página Web Dell Premier Support, 5, 7 problemas códigos de sonido, 27 conflictos, 29 Diagnósticos Dell, 20 indicadores de diagnóstico, 24-25 restaurar a estado anterior, 30 R reinstalar CD Drivers and Utilities, 5 ResourceCD, 5 Windows XP, 32 ResourceCD Diagnósticos Dell, 20 Restaurar sistema, 30 S sistema operativo reinstalar Windows XP, 32 software conflictos, 29 solucionar problemas Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 7 conflictos, 29 Diagnósticos Dell, 20 hardware, 29 indicadores de diagnóstico, 24-25 restaurar a estado anterior, 30 W Windows 2000 administrador de dispositivos, 29 solucionador de problemas de hardware, 29 Windows XP Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 7 reinstalar, 32 Restaurar sistema, 30 solucionador de problemas de hardware, 29 Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Remarques et avertissements Abréviations et sigles Pour obtenir une liste complète des abréviations et des acronymes, consultez la section « Glossaire ». Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modifications sans préavis. © 2004 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Documentation sur votre ordinateur Recherche d'informations sur votre ordinateur Spécifications techniques Composants de la carte système Nettoyage de votre ordinateur À propos de votre ordinateur Vue avant Vue de profil Vue arrière Connecteurs du panneau arrière Connexion d'un moniteur VGA Connexion de deux moniteurs À l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Cache de protection des câbles (en option) Connexion de l'adaptateur d'alimentation Plaque Fonctions avancées Hyper-Threading Positionnement des cavaliers Contrôle par technologie LegacySelect Facilité de gestion Protection par mot de passe Gestion de l'alimentation Sécurité Configuration du système Ajout et retrait de composants Avant de commencer Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur Pile  Commutateur d'intrusion du châssis Haut-parleur du châssis Disque dur Mémoire Baie modulaire Processeur Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur Outils et utilitaires de dépannage Diagnostics Dell Voyant de l'adaptateur d'alimentation Voyants du système Voyants de diagnostic Codes sonores Messages d'erreur Résolution des problèmes d'incompatibilité  logicielle et matérielle Résolution des problèmes Problèmes de pile Problèmes d'alimentation Problèmes de lecteur Problèmes d'imprimante Problèmes de clavier Restauration des paramètres par défaut Blocages du système et incidents logiciels Problèmes de périphériques parallèles ou série Problèmes de mémoire Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs Problèmes de souris Problèmes de vidéo et d'affichage Problèmes de réseau Réinstallation des pilotes et du  système d'exploitation Les pilotes Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système  de Microsoft® Windows® XP Réinstallation de Microsoft Windows XP Informations complémentaires Fonctionnalités de Microsoft® Windows® XP Obtention d'aide Glossaire Garantie REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.  AVIS : un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.  ATTENTION : la mention ATTENTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort.Toute reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, OptiPlex, Inspiron, Dimension, Latitude, Dell Precision, DellNet, Dell Travellite, PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, Pentium et Celeron sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft, Windows NT, MS-DOS et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et est utilisée par Dell Inc. sous licence. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée  de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell a fait en sorte que ce  produit réponde aux normes de ce programme en matière de consommation énergétique. Tous les autres noms de marques et marques commerciales utilisés dans ce document se rapportent aux sociétés propriétaires des marques et des noms de ces produits. Dell Inc. décline tout intérêt dans l'utilisation des marques déposées et des noms de marques ne lui appartenant pas. Modèle DCTR Avril 2004    P/N F3287    Rév. A00Retour à la page du sommaire À propos de votre ordinateur  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Vue avant Vue avant Connexion de deux moniteurs Vue de profil À l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Vue arrière Cache de protection des câbles (en option) Connecteurs du panneau arrière Connexion de l'adaptateur d'alimentation Connexion d'un moniteur VGA Plaque AVIS : afin d'assurer une ventilation appropriée, n'obstruez pas les grilles d'aération.  AVIS : placez l'ordinateur à un endroit bien ventilé, en laissant au moins 6 cm (2 pouces) devant et derrière l'ordinateur pour assurer  une bonne circulation de l'air. AVIS : ne placez pas le moniteur sur l'ordinateur. Utilisez un pied prévu à cet effet.  AVIS : lorsque vous installez l'ordinateur, attachez tous les câbles vers l'arrière de votre zone de travail pour éviter de les tirer, de les emmêler ou de  les piétiner.  REMARQUE : pour installer votre ordinateur sous un bureau ou sur un mur, utilisez le support de montage mural fourni en option. Pour commander ce support, contactez Dell. 1 Connecteurs USB (2) Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB tels qu'une souris, un clavier, une imprimante, une manette de jeu et des hautparleurs d'ordinateur à l'un des connecteurs USB. 2 Connecteur de microphone Permet de connecter un microphone. 3 Connecteur du casque Permet de connecter des écouteurs. 4 Voyant d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe pour indiquer différents états : l Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint (S4, S5 ou fermeture mécanique).  l Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement. l Vert clignotant— L'ordinateur est en mode économie d'énergie (S1 ou S3).  l Jaune fixe ou clignotant — Consultez la section "Problèmes d'alimentation". Pour quitter le mode économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce périphérique  est configuré comme un périphérique de réactivation dans le Gestionnaire de périphériques Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur  les états de veille et leur arrêt, consultez la section "Gestion de l'alimentation". Consultez la section "Voyants de diagnostic" pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux pouvant vous aider à résoudre les  problèmes rencontrés avec votre ordinateur. 5 Bouton d'alimentation Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer l'ordinateur. AVIS : pour ne pas perdre de données, n'utilisez pas directement le bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Effectuez  plutôt un arrêt normal de Microsoft® Windows® (via le menu Démarrer).  6 Grilles d'aération Les grilles d'aération assurent la circulation de l'air dans l'ordinateur. Afin d'assurer une ventilation appropriée, ne les obstruez pas. 7 Baie modulaire Permet d'installer un lecteur de CD/DVD, un second disque dur ou un lecteur de disquette. 8 Voyant d'accès au  disque dur Le voyant d'accès au disque dur s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur l'unité de disque dur. Le voyant peut  également être allumé lorsque des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur de CD, fonctionnent. 9 Grilles d'aération Les grilles d'aération assurent la circulation de l'air dans l'ordinateur. Afin d'assurer une ventilation appropriée, ne les obstruez pas.Vue de profil Vue arrière Connecteurs du panneau arrière 1 Grilles d'aération Ces grilles, situées de chaque côté de l'ordinateur, assurent la circulation de l'air dans le système. Afin d'assurer une ventilation  appropriée, ne les obstruez pas. 1 Voyants de diagnostic Consultez la section "Voyants de diagnostic" pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux pouvant vous aider à  résoudre les problèmes rencontrés avec votre ordinateur. 2 Dispositif de dégagement  du capot Tournez le dispositif de dégagement dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retirer le capot. 3 Connecteurs du panneau arrière Connecteurs de votre ordinateur. 4 Connecteur d'alimentation Connecteur pour l'adaptateur d'alimentation. 5 Grilles d'aération Les grilles d'aération assurent la circulation de l'air dans l'ordinateur. Afin d'assurer une ventilation appropriée, ne les  obstruez pas. 1 Connecteur parallèle Connectez un périphérique parallèle, comme une imprimante, au connecteur parallèle. Si vous avez une imprimante USB,  branchez-la sur un connecteur USB. 2 Voyant d'intégrité des  liens réseau l Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 10 Mbps et l'ordinateur.  l Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 100 Mbps et l'ordinateur.  l Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 1000 Mbps (1 Gbps) et l'ordinateur.  l Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion physique avec le réseau, ou bien le contrôleur réseau est désactivé  dans le programme de configuration du système. Connexion d'un moniteur VGA Si vous disposez d'un moniteur compatible VGA, utilisez le câble adaptateur pour raccorder ce moniteur au connecteur pour écran DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière  de l'ordinateur. Connexion de deux moniteurs Vous pouvez utiliser le câble adaptateur pour raccorder à la fois un moniteur VGA et un moniteur DVI au connecteur DVI blanc situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Si vous connectez deux moniteurs, le pilote détecte cette connexion et active l'affichage multi-écrans. 3 Carte réseau Connectez le câble UTP à une prise jack RJ45 murale ou à un port RJ45 sur un concentrateur ou un centre de transit UTP, puis  connectez l'autre extrémité du câble UTP au connecteur de la carte réseau en vous assurant que la mise en place est correcte. Dell recommande l'utilisation des câbles et des connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour les réseaux de ses clients. 4 Voyant d'activité  réseau Le voyant orange clignote lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit des données sur le réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut  donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 Connecteur de sortie de ligne Utilisez le connecteur de sortie de ligne (vert) pour connecter un ensemble de haut-parleurs avec amplificateur intégré. 6 Connecteur d'entrée  de ligne Utilisez le connecteur d'entrée de couleur bleue pour connecter des périphériques d'enregistrement/de lecture tels que des  lecteurs de cassettes, des lecteurs de CD ou des magnétoscopes. 7 Connecteurs USB (5) Permet de connecter des périphériques USB tels qu'une souris, un clavier, une imprimante, une manette de jeu et des hautparleurs d'ordinateur à un connecteur USB. 8 Connecteur série Vous pouvez connecter un périphérique série, par exemple un ordinateur de poche, au connecteur série. 9 Connecteur vidéo Si vous disposez d'un moniteur compatible DVI, branchez son câble sur le connecteur pour écran DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière  de l'ordinateur. Si vous disposez d'un moniteur VGA, consultez la section "Connexion d'un moniteur VGA". 10 Connecteur d'alimentation Connecteur pour l'adaptateur d'alimentation. 11 Voyants de diagnostic Consultez la section "Voyants de diagnostic" pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux pouvant vous aider à résoudre  les problèmes rencontrés avec votre ordinateur. 1 Câble adaptateurÀ l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Cache de protection des câbles (en option) Fixation du cache de protection des câbles  1. Vérifiez que tous les câbles des périphériques externes sont engagés dans l'orifice du cache de protection.  2. Branchez-les sur les connecteurs situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  3. Maintenez la partie inférieure du capot et alignez les quatre onglets avec les quatre fentes sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  4. Insérez les onglets dans les fentes et faites glisser le cache de protection vers les voyants de diagnostic (voir la figure ci-après) jusqu'à ce qu'il soit  bien en place. 5. Installez un dispositif antivol dans l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité (facultatif).  1 Câble adaptateur ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de l'adaptateur d'alimentation avant de retirer le  capot. ATTENTION : pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique  non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 Carénage du dissipateur thermique du microprocesseur 4 Disque dur 2 Haut-parleur (facultatif) 5 Emplacement pour câble de sécurité 3 Modules de mémoire (2) 6 Commutateur d'intrusion du châssisRetrait du cache de protection des câbles  1. Si un dispositif est installé dans l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité, retirez-le. 2. Appuyez sur le taquet de déblocage et saisissez le cache. Faites-le ensuite glisser sur la gauche jusqu'à la butée, puis retirez-le. Connexion de l'adaptateur d'alimentation 1. Branchez l'adaptateur d'alimentation sur le connecteur situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de sûreté, vérifiez que le loquet est complètement  enclenché (vous devez entendre ou sentir un déclic).  2.  Connectez le câble d'alimentation en CA à l'adaptateur d'alimentation.  3. Si le câble d'alimentation est doté d'un fil vert de masse pour la connexion à une prise électrique, reliez le connecteur métallique de masse à la source  de masse sur la prise (consultez la figure suivante). a. Desserrez la source reliée à la terre.  b. Faites glisser le connecteur métallique de mise à la terre derrière la source reliée à la terre, puis serrez la source.  4. Connectez le câble d'alimentation CA à la prise.  1 Cache de protection des câbles 2 Emplacement pour câble de sécurité 1 Taquet de déblocage ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : si le câble d'alimentation ou l'adaptateur est doté d'un fil vert de masse pour la connexion à une prise électrique, n'autorisez aucun contact entre la masse et les conducteurs car cela pourrait provoquer un choc électrique, un incendie ou endommager votre ordinateur. 1 Source reliée à la terre 2 Connecteur métallique de mise à la terrePlaque La plaque apposée sur le devant de l'ordinateur peut être tournée dans l'autre sens. Pour tourner la plaque : 1. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Tirez sur le taquet pour dégager la plaque de l'emplacement.  3. Tournez la plaque dans la position souhaitée, en veillant à ce que l'onglet soit bien engagé dans la fente.  Retour à la page du sommaire ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. 1 Taquet 2 EmplacementsRetour à la page du sommaire Fonctions avancées Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280  Hyper-Threading L'Hyper-Threading est une technologie Intel® qui améliore les performances globales de l'ordinateur en permettant à un processeur physique de fonctionner  comme deux processeurs logiques capables d'exécuter certaines tâches en simultané. Il est recommandé d'utiliser le système d'exploitation Microsoft®  Windows® XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) car il a été conçu pour tirer le meilleur parti de cette technologie. Même si de nombreux programmes peuvent bénéficier de  la technologie Hyper-Threading, certains n'ont pas été spécialement optimisés dans ce but. Il faut donc envisager une mise à jour de ces programmes. Pour  obtenir des mises à jour et des informations sur l'utilisation de votre logiciel avec Hyper-Threading, contactez l'éditeur du logiciel. Pour savoir si votre ordinateur utilise la technologie Hyper-Threading : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Poste de travail, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 2. Cliquez sur Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 3. Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de périphériques, cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé en regard du type de processeur. Si la technologie Hyper-Threading est activée, le processeur est mentionné deux fois.  Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver Hyper-Threading au niveau de la configuration du système. Positionnement des cavaliers Pour modifier un paramètre de cavalier, retirez la fiche de sa ou de ses broches, puis insérez-la avec précaution sur la ou les broches indiquées. Hyper-Threading Protection par mot de passe Positionnement des cavaliers Gestion de l'alimentation électrique Contrôle par technologie LegacySelect Sécurité Facilité de gestion Configuration du système AVIS : assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est éteint et débranché avant de changer le réglage des cavaliers. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager votre  ordinateur ou d'obtenir des résultats inattendus.  AVIS : avant de toucher quoi ce soit à l'intérieur de l’ordinateur, mettez-vous à la masse en touchant une partie métallique non peinte du châssis, par  exemple à l’arrière de l’ordinateur. Pendant votre travail à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour  dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes.  Cavalier Réglage Description PSWD (valeur par défaut) Les fonctions de mot de passe sont activées. Les fonctions de mot de passe Effacement des mots de passe oubliés  1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Retirez le disque dur. 3. Retirez le cavalier du mot de passe (PWSD) de la carte système. Ce cavalier comporte deux broches. 4. Remettez le disque dur en place. 5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 6. Branchez l'ordinateur et l'écran sur les prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 7. Lorsque le bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche, arrêtez l'ordinateur.  8. Éteignez le moniteur et débranchez-le de la prise électrique.  9. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de l'ordinateur de la prise électrique, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la  terre. 10. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 11. Retirez le disque dur. 12. Remettez en place le cavalier PSWD. 13. Remettez le disque dur en place. 14. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 15. Branchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques aux prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 16. Attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou administrateur.  Effacement des paramètres CMOS  1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Retirez le disque dur. 3. Réinitialisez les paramètres CMOS :  a. Repérez les cavaliers PSWD et CLR CMOS sur la carte système.  b. Retirez le cavalier PSWD. c. Placez ce cavalier sur les broches du cavalier CLR CMOS et attendez environ cinq secondes. d. Retirez le cavalier des broches CLR CMOS et remettez-le sur les broches du cavalier PWSD. 4. Remettez le disque dur en place. 5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. sont désactivées. CLR CMOS Remise à zéro de l'horloge  temps réel.    cavalier positionné     cavalier non  positionné ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. AVIS : ce processus efface à la fois le mot de passe système et le mot de passe administrateur.  AVIS : pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : cette opération réactive la fonctionnalité de mot de passe. Lorsque vous ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, les deux  options de mot de passe (système et administrateur) ont pour valeur Not Enabled (Non activé) : cela signifie que la fonctionnalité est activée mais  qu'aucun mot de passe n'est attribué.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement..6. Branchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques aux prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Contrôle par technologie LegacySelect Le contrôle par technologie LegacySelect offre des solutions entièrement héritées, à héritage réduit ou sans héritage basées sur des plates-formes courantes, des images de disque dur et des procédures de dépannage. Le contrôle est donné aux administrateurs via divers éléments : programme de configuration du  système, Dell OpenManage™ IT Assistant, intégration personnalisée Dell™ définie en usine. LegacySelect permet aux administrateurs d'activer et de désactiver électroniquement les connecteurs et les supports dotés de ports série et USB ou d'un port  parallèle. La désactivation de ces connecteurs et supports permet de libérer des ressources. Vous devez redémarrer l'ordinateur pour que la modification  devienne effective. Facilité de gestion Format ASF (Alert Standard Format) ASF est une norme de gestion DMTF qui spécifie des techniques d'alerte en amont du système d'exploitation ou sans système d'exploitation. Cette norme est  conçue pour générer une alerte en cas de conditions anormales ou de problèmes potentiels de sécurité lorsque le système d'exploitation est en veille ou que  l'ordinateur est éteint. ASF est conçu pour remplacer toutes les technologies d'alerte sans système d'exploitation. Votre ordinateur prend en charge les alertes ASF version 1.03 et les fonctions à distance suivantes : Pour plus d'informations sur l'implémentation Dell de l'ASF, consultez les manuels ASF User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation ASF) et ASF Administrator's Guide (Guide de l'administrateur ASF), disponibles sur le site support.dell.com. Dell OpenManage IT Assistant Cet assistant configure, gère et contrôle les ordinateurs et les autres périphériques sur un réseau d'entreprise. Il gère les biens, les configurations, les  événements (alertes) et la sécurité des ordinateurs munis de logiciels de gestion classiques. Il prend en charge les instrumentations compatibles avec les  normes SNMP, DMI et CIM. AVIS : pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.  Alerte Description Châssis : Intrusion dans le châssis – Violation physique de la sécurité/Intrusion dans le châssis – Événement de violation physique de la  sécurité réinitialisé  Le châssis de l'ordinateur a été ouvert ou l'alerte d'intrusion dans le  châssis a été réinitialisée. Processeur : arrêt d'urgence  La température du processeur est trop élevée et l'alimentation a été  coupée. Dispositif de refroidissement : Panne de ventilateur critique  générique/Panne de ventilateur critique générique réparée  La vitesse (tours par minute) du ventilateur dépasse les limites de la  normalité ou le problème de vitesse (tours par minute) du ventilateur  a été résolu. Température : Problème de température critique générique/Problème de  température critique générique réparé  La température de l'ordinateur dépasse les limites de la normalité, ou  bien le problème lié à la température de l'ordinateur a été résolu. Batterie faible La batterie du système a atteint une tension de 2,2 V ou moins.Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation, basée sur DMI et CIM, est disponible pour votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Guide d'utilisation de Dell OpenManage IT Assistant disponible sur le site Web du support technique Dell, support.dell.com. Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation est un logiciel qui permet aux programmes de gestion à distance, tels que IT Assistant par exemple, d'effectuer les  tâches suivantes : l accéder aux informations relatives à votre ordinateur, le nombre de processeurs et le système d'exploitation utilisé par exemple ; l gérer l'état de votre ordinateur pour détecter les alertes de température des sondes ou les alertes d'échec des disques durs installés dans les  périphériques de stockage ; l modifier l'état de votre ordinateur, mettre à jour le BIOS ou éteindre l'ordinateur à distance par exemple. Un système géré est un système sur lequel Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation est configuré sur un réseau utilisant IT Assistant. Pour plus  d'informations, consultez le manuel Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation User's Guide disponible sur le site Web du support technique Dell, support.dell.com. Protection par mot de passe Mot de passe système  Paramètres de l'option Vous ne pouvez pas modifier ni saisir un nouveau mot de passe système si l'une des deux options suivantes est affichée : l Enabled (Activé) — Un mot de passe système est attribué. l Disabled (Désactivé) — Le mot de passe système est désactivé par la position d'un cavalier sur la carte système. Vous ne pouvez affecter un mot de passe système que lorsque l'option suivante est affichée : l Not Set (Non défini) — Aucun mot de passe système n'a été attribué, et le cavalier de mot de passe sur la carte système est en position d'activation  (position par défaut). Attribution d'un mot de passe système Pour sortir du champ sans attribuer de mot de passe système, appuyez sur  ou sur la combinaison de touches  pour passer dans un autre  champ, ou encore appuyez sur <Échap> à tout moment avant d'avoir achevé l'étape 5. 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que Password Status (État du mot de passe) a la valeur Unlocked (Déverrouillé).  2. Sélectionnez System Password (Mot de passe système), puis appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite.  Le nom de l'option devient Enter Password (Entrez le mot de passe), suivi d'un champ vide entre crochets pouvant contenir 32 caractères. 3. Tapez votre nouveau mot de passe système.  Vous pouvez utiliser jusqu'à 32 caractères. Pour supprimer un caractère lors de l'entrée de votre mot de passe, appuyez sur la touche d'effacement   ou sur la touche flèche vers la gauche. Le mot de passe ne fait pas la distinction majuscule/minuscule. AVIS : même si les mots de passe protègent votre ordinateur, ils ne sont pas à toute épreuve. Si vos données nécessitent une plus grande sécurité, il  vous incombe d'obtenir et d'utiliser en plus d'autres systèmes de protection, comme des programmes de cryptage de données.  AVIS : il est très facile d'accéder aux données stockées sur votre système si vous laissez celui-ci sans surveillance alors que vous n'avez pas défini de  mot de passe système. Si l'ordinateur n'est pas verrouillé, une personne non autorisée peut aussi déplacer le cavalier d'activation du mot de passe et  effacer celui-ci. Certaines combinaisons de touches ne sont pas acceptées. Si vous entrez l'une de ces combinaisons, le haut-parleur émet un signal sonore. Les caractères entrés ne sont pas affichés dans le champ, ils sont remplacés (y compris les espaces) par des caractères génériques. 4. Appuyez sur .  Si le nouveau mot de passe système comporte moins de 32 caractères, des espaces réservés remplissent la totalité du champ. L'option Verify Password (Vérifier le mot de passe) s'affiche ensuite, suivi d'un autre champ vide entre crochets pouvant également contenir 32 caractères. 5. Pour confirmer votre mot de passe, tapez-le une seconde fois puis appuyez sur .  Le paramètre du mot de passe prend alors la valeur Set (Défini).  6. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  La protection par mot de passe prend effet lors du redémarrage de l'ordinateur. Saisie de votre mot de passe système Lorsque vous démarrez ou redémarrez votre ordinateur, l'une des invites suivantes s'affiche à l'écran. Si Password Status (État du mot de passe) a pour valeur Unlocked (Déverrouillé) : Type in the password and (Tapez le mot de passe et) - press  to leave password security enabled. (appuyez sur  pour que la sécurité par mot de passe reste activée.) - press  to disable password security. (appuyez sur  pour désactiver la sécurité par mot de passe.) Enter password: (Entrez le mot de passe :)  Si Password Status (État du mot de passe) a pour valeur Locked (Verrouillé) : Type the password and press . (Tapez le mot de passe et appuyez sur .)  Si vous avez attribué un mot de passe administrateur, l'ordinateur accepte ce mot de passe comme mot de passe système secondaire. Si vous tapez un mot de passe système incorrect ou incomplet, le message suivant s'affiche à l'écran : ** Incorrect password. (Mot de passe incorrect.) ** Si vous tapez une nouvelle fois un mot de passe système incorrect ou incomplet, le même message s'affiche à l'écran. Si, pour la troisième fois consécutive,  vous tapez un mot de passe système incorrect ou incomplet, l'ordinateur affiche le message suivant : ** Incorrect password. (Mot de passe incorrect.) ** Number of unsuccessful password attempts: (Nombre d'échecs de saisie de mot de passe :) 3 System Halted! (Le système s'est arrêté !) Must power down. (Il doit être éteint.)  Même après avoir éteint puis rallumé votre ordinateur, le message précédent s'affiche à chaque fois que vous tapez un mot de passe système incorrect ou  incomplet. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser le paramètre Password Status (État du mot de passe) conjointement avec les paramètres System Password (Mot de passe système) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour protéger davantage votre ordinateur des modifications non autorisées. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système existant 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que Password Status (État du mot de passe) a la valeur Unlocked (Déverrouillé).  2. Redémarrez votre ordinateur.  3. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, tapez le mot de passe système.  4. Appuyez sur  pour désactiver le mot de passe existant.  5. Confirmez que l'option System Password (Mot de passe système) a pour valeur Not Set (Non défini).  Si la valeur Not Set (Non défini) est affichée, le mot de passe système est supprimé. Si la valeur Not Set (Non défini) n'est pas affichée, appuyez sur   pour redémarrer l'ordinateur, puis répétez les étapes 3 à 5. Pour attribuer un nouveau mot de passe, suivez la procédure décrite à la section "Attribution d'un mot de passe système". 6. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Mot de passe administrateur Paramètres de l'option Vous ne pouvez pas modifier ou saisir un nouveau mot de passe administrateur si l'une des deux options suivantes est affichée : l Set (Défini) — Un mot de passe administrateur est défini. l Disabled (Désactivé) — Le mot de passe administrateur est désactivé par un positionnement de cavalier sur la carte système.  Vous ne pouvez attribuer un mot de passe administrateur que lorsque l'option suivante est affichée : l Not Set (Non défini) — Aucun mot de passe administrateur n'a été défini et le cavalier du mot de passe de la carte système est en position d'activation  (position par défaut). Attribution d'un mot de passe administrateur Le mot de passe administrateur peut être identique au mot de passe système. 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) a la valeur Not Set (Non défini). 2. Sélectionnez Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) et appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite.  L'ordinateur vous invite à taper et à vérifier le mot de passe. Si vous tapez un caractère non autorisé, l'ordinateur émet un signal sonore. 3. Tapez puis vérifiez le mot de passe.  Une fois le mot de passe vérifié, le paramètre Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) prend la valeur Set (Défini). La prochaine fois que vous  accéderez au programme de configuration du système, l'ordinateur vous demandera ce mot de passe. 4. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  La modification du paramètre Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) est effective immédiatement (il n'est pas nécessaire de redémarrer  l'ordinateur). Fonctionnement de votre ordinateur avec un mot de passe administrateur activé Quand vous démarrez le programme de configuration du système, l'option Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) est sélectionnée, vous invitant à  entrer le mot de passe. REMARQUE : si les deux mots de passe sont différents, le mot de passe administrateur peut être utilisé à la place du mot de passe du système.  Toutefois, le mot de passe système ne peut pas être utilisé à la place du mot de passe administrateur. Si vous ne tapez pas le mot de passe correct, l'ordinateur vous permet d'afficher, mais non de modifier, les options de configuration du système. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe administrateur existant Pour modifier un mot de passe administrateur, vous devez connaître ce mot de passe. 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système. 2. À l'invite, tapez le mot de passe administrateur.  3. Sélectionnez Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur), puis appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite pour supprimer le mot de passe  administrateur existant. La valeur du paramètre passe à Not Set (Non défini). Pour attribuer un nouveau mot de passe administrateur, suivez la procédure décrite à la section "Attribution d'un mot de passe système". 4. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié et définition d'un nouveau mot de passe  Pour réinitialiser les mots de passe système ou administrateur , consultez la section "Effacement des mots de passe oubliés." Gestion de l'alimentation Votre ordinateur peut être configuré pour consommer moins d'électricité lorsqu'il n'est pas utilisé. Vous pouvez gérer la consommation électrique à l'aide du  système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur et de certains paramètres du programme de configuration du système. Ces périodes d'économie d'énergie  sont appelées "états de veille" : l Veille. Cet état de veille permet d'économiser l'énergie ou de désactiver la plupart des composants, y compris les ventilateurs de refroidissement.  Cependant, la mémoire système reste active. Cet état n'est pas pris en charge par Windows NT 4.0. l Mise en veille prolongée. Cet état de veille réduit la consommation électrique à un niveau minimal en inscrivant toutes les données de la mémoire  système sur un disque dur, puis en coupant l'alimentation du système. La sortie de cet état entraîne le redémarrage de l'ordinateur et la restauration  du contenu de la mémoire. L'ordinateur retourne à l'état dans lequel il se trouvait avant l'activation de la mise en veille prolongée. Cet état n'est pas pris en charge par Windows NT 4.0. l Arrêt. Cet état de veille coupe toute l'alimentation de l'ordinateur à l'exception d'une petite quantité d'énergie auxiliaire. L'ordinateur peut être  démarré automatiquement ou à distance tant qu'il reste branché sur la prise électrique. Par exemple, l'option Auto Power On (Activation automatique)  du programme de configuration du système permet de démarrer automatiquement l'ordinateur à un moment précis. L'administrateur réseau peut  également démarrer à distance votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un événement de gestion d'alimentation tel que la fonctionnalité de sortie de veille à  distance. Le tableau suivant répertorie les états de veille et les méthodes permettant de réactiver l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : vous pouvez utiliser l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) avec l'option Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) pour protéger le mot de passe système de toute modification non autorisée.  REMARQUE : tous les composants installés dans l'ordinateur doivent prendre en charge cette fonctionnalité et posséder les pilotes appropriés afin  d'entrer en état de veille. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation de chaque composant.  REMARQUE : tous les composants installés dans l'ordinateur doivent prendre en charge cette fonctionnalité et posséder les pilotes appropriés afin  d'entrer en état de mise en veille prolongée. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation de chaque composant. Sécurité Détection d'une intrusion dans le châssis  Cette fonctionnalité détecte que l'unité centrale a été ouverte et alerte l'utilisateur. Pour modifier le paramètre Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) : 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système. 2. Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour atteindre l'option Security (Sécurité).  3. Appuyez sur  pour développer le menu Security. 4. Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour atteindre l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis).  5. Appuyez sur  pour accéder à la zone des options.  6. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées vers la gauche et vers la droite pour sélectionner un paramètre.  7. Appuyez sur pour revenir au menu Security. 8. Appuyez sur <Échap> pour accéder au menu de sortie du programme de configuration du système.  9. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées du clavier et sélectionnez l'option Save/Exit (Sauvegarder/Quitter). 10. Appuyez sur pour enregistrer vos modifications et quitter le programme de configuration. Paramètres de l'option  l On : si le châssis de l'ordinateur est ouvert, la valeur du paramètre passe à Detected (Détecté) et le message d'alerte suivant s'affiche au redémarrage  de l'ordinateur : Alert! Cover was previously removed. Pour réinitialiser le paramètre Detected (Détecté), ouvrez le programme de configuration du système. Dans l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis), appuyez sur la flèche vers la droite ou vers la gauche pour sélectionner Reset (Réinitialiser) puis sélectionnez On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé- silencieux) ou Disabled (Désactivé). l On-Silent (Activé-silencieux, valeur par défaut) : si le châssis de l'ordinateur est ouvert, la valeur du paramètre passe à Detected (Détecté). Aucun  message d'alerte ne s'affiche au prochain démarrage de l'ordinateur. l Disabled (Désactivé) : aucune surveillance des intrusions n'est effectuée et aucun message ne s'affiche. Anneau du cadenas et emplacement pour câble de sécurité  Utilisez une des méthodes suivantes pour verrouiller votre ordinateur : l Utilisez un cadenas seul ou un cadenas et un câble de sécurité muni d'une boucle avec l'anneau pour cadenas. État de veille Méthodes de réactivation (Windows XP) Veille l Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. l Auto power on (Activation automatique) l Activité sur un périphérique USB (à l'exclusion du clavier ou de la souris)  l Événement de gestion de l'alimentation  Mise en veille prolongée l Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. l Auto power on (Activation automatique) l Événement de gestion de l'alimentation  Arrêt l Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. l Auto power on (Activation automatique) l Événement de gestion de l'alimentation  REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur la gestion de l'alimentation, consultez la documentation de votre système d'exploitation.  REMARQUE : si le mot de passe administrateur est activé, vous devez le connaître pour pouvoir réinitialiser le paramètre Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis). Un cadenas seul empêche l'ouverture de l'ordinateur. Un câble de sécurité enroulé autour d'un objet fixe et utilisé en conjonction avec le cadenas permet d'empêcher que l'ordinateur ne soit déplacé sans  autorisation. l Attachez un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Les dispositifs antivol sont généralement composés d'un câble galvanisé muni d'un dispositif de verrouillage et de sa clé. La documentation fournie avec  le périphérique contient des instructions d'installation. Configuration du système Présentation générale  Utilisez le programme de configuration du système comme suit : l Pour modifier la configuration du système après avoir ajouté, modifié ou supprimer un composant matériel ; l Pour modifier ou définir des options définissables par l'utilisateur, telles que le mot de passe système ; l Pour connaître la quantité de mémoire actuelle ou la vitesse du processeur ; Nous vous recommandons de noter les informations de l'écran de configuration du système pour pouvoir vous y référer ultérieurement. Accès au programme de configuration du système  1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite, le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le bureau Microsoft ®  Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. L'écran de configuration du système affiche les informations de configuration en cours ou modifiables. L'écran est divisé en trois zones contenant la liste des  options, le champ des options actives et les fonctions des touches. REMARQUE : avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, vérifiez qu’il est bien compatible avec l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur.  Options List (Liste des options) — Cette zone s'affiche dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre du programme de  configuration du système. Il s'agit  d'une zone déroulante  répertoriant les options qui  définissent la configuration de  votre ordinateur, y compris le matériel, le mode d'économie  d'énergie et les fonctionnalités de  sécurité installés. Pour faire défiler la liste, utilisez  les touches fléchées gauche et  droite du pavé numérique.  Lorsqu'une option est mise en surbrillance, la zone Option Field (Champ de l'option) affiche des informations plus détaillées  concernant cette option et ses paramètres. Appuyez sur  pour  développer ou réduire chacun des  Option Field (Champ de l'option) — Ce champ contient des informations relatives à  chaque option. Il permet de visualiser les paramètres en cours et de les modifier. Utilisez les touches fléchées gauche et droite pour mettre une option en surbrillance.  Appuyez sur  pour activer cette sélection. Appuyez sur <Échap> pour annuler  les modifications.Options du programme de configuration du système  champs Option. Key Functions (Fonctions des touches) — Cette zone affichée sous la zone Option Field (Champ de l'option) répertorie les touches disponibles et indique leur comportement si  elles sont utilisées dans le champ actif. REMARQUE : en fonction de votre ordinateur et des périphériques installés, certaines options répertoriées dans cette section peuvent ne pas s'afficher.  Menu Info System Info Indique le nom de l'ordinateur, la version du BIOS, l'étiquette de service et le numéro d'inventaire du châssis. CPU Info Identifie le type du processeur et indique s'il prend en charge l'Hyper-threading ou le traitement 64 bits. Affiche également la vitesse du bus  du processeur, la vitesse d'horloge et la taille du cache L2. Memory Info Indique la quantité de mémoire installée, sa vitesse, le mode (à simple voie ou à double voie) et la technologie utilisée. Date/Time Affiche l'heure et la date en cours. Boot Sequence L'ordinateur essaie de démarrer à partir de la séquence de périphériques indiquée dans cette liste. Menu Drives Diskette Drive Cette option active ou désactive le lecteur de disquette.  REMARQUE : vérifiez que l'option USB est définie sur On. Pour utiliser un lecteur de disquette USB dans la baie modulaire, vérifiez également  que le paramètre Module Bay (baie modulaire) est réglé sur On (Activé) ou FDD Only (Lecteur de disquette uniquement). Drive 0 Identifie le disque dur ATA série principal relié au connecteur SATA1 sur la carte système. Module Bay Cette option active ou désactive la baie modulaire. Elle fournit également des options qui permettent d'activer uniquement les lecteurs de  disquette ou les lecteurs IDE installés dans la baie modulaire. Les options disponibles sont Off (Désactivé), FDD only (Lecteur de disquette uniquement), IDE only (IDE uniquement) et On (Activé). Drive Controller Configure le mode de fonctionnement du contrôleur série ATA. L'option Normal permet au contrôleur série ATA de fonctionner en mode natif  ATA uniquement. L'option Compatible permet au contrôleur série ATA de fonctionner en mode ATA combiné série/parallèle. Error Reporting Ce paramètre détermine si les erreurs de disque dur doivent être signalées au démarrage du système. Menu Onboard Devices Audio Controller Active ou désactive le contrôleur audio intégré. NIC Controller Les valeurs possibles sont On (Activé, valeur par défaut), Off (Désactivé) et On w/ PXE (Activé avec PXE). Lorsque l'option On w/ PXE (Activé avec PXE) est active (uniquement à partir du prochain démarrage), l'ordinateur invite l'utilisateur à appuyer sur . Cette  combinaison de touches affiche un menu qui vous permet de sélectionner une méthode d'amorçage à partir d'un serveur de réseau. Si une  procédure d'amorçage n'est pas disponible à partir du serveur sur le réseau, le système essaie de démarrer à partir du périphérique suivant  dans la liste de séquence d'amorçage. LPT Port Mode Cette option définit le mode de fonctionnement du port parallèle intégré. Les options disponibles sont Off (Désactivé), PS/2 (valeur par défaut), EPP, ECP et AT. l AT configure le port pour le rendre compatible avec les systèmes IBM AT.  l PS/2 configure le port pour le rendre compatible avec les systèmes IBM PS/2.  l EPP : Enhanced Parallel Port (port parallèle étendu)  l ECP : Extended Capabilities Port (port à capacités étendues)  Cette option détermine l'adresse utilisée par le port parallèle intégré. Les paramètres disponibles sont 378h (valeur par défaut), 278h et LPT Port Address 3BCh. Serial Port #1 La valeur Auto permet d'attribuer automatiquement une désignation particulière (COM1 ou COM3) à un connecteur. USB Défini sur On (Activé, valeur par défaut) pour que les périphériques soient détectés et pris en charge par le système d'exploitation. Front USB Ports Cette option active ou désactive les connecteurs USB situés à l'avant de l'ordinateur. Menu Performance Hyperthreading Cette option n'est répertoriée que si votre ordinateur prend en charge la technologie Hyper-threading. IDE Performance l Quiet (Silencieux, valeur par défaut) — Le disque dur fonctionne dans son mode le plus silencieux. l Performance — Le disque dur fonctionne à sa vitesse maximale. l Bypass (Contourner) — L'ordinateur n'effectue aucun test ni aucune modification de la configuration acoustique actuelle. l Suggested (Recommandé) — Le disque dur fonctionne au niveau recommandé par le fabricant.  REMARQUE : l'activation du mode Performance peut accroître le niveau sonore du disque dur sans pour autant affecter ses performances. La modification de la configuration acoustique n'altère pas l'image du disque dur.  Security Cette section contient les options de sécurité disponibles sur le système. Consultez la section "Sécurité" pour plus d'informations. Admin Password Cette option permet de protéger le programme de configuration du système de la même façon que le mot de passe système protège  l'ordinateur contre les accès non autorisés. Les options disponibles sont Enabled (Activé) et Disabled (Désactivé). Si elle est désactivée, entrez un mot de passe pour l'activer. Si la valeur Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, un verrou rouge s'affiche dans l'angle supérieur gauche de tous les écrans du programme de  configuration. Entrez un mot de passe pour déverrouiller l'option Admin Password. L'icône cesse alors de s'afficher. Pour désactiver le mot de passe administrateur, entrez-le à l'invite et appuyez sur  et . System Password Cette option permet d'afficher l'état du mot de passe système et de le redéfinir. Les options disponibles sont Enabled (Activé) et Disabled (Désactivé). Si elle est désactivée, entrez un mot de passe pour l'activer. Si l'option est Enabled (Activée), l'ordinateur ne démarrera qu'une fois le mot de passe correct entré par l'utilisateur. Pour désactiver le mot de passe système, entrez-le à l'invite et appuyez sur  et . Drive 0 Password Définissez ce mot de passe pour protéger le disque dur contre toute tentative d'accès non autorisé. ModBay Password Définissez ce mot de passe pour protéger le périphérique installé dans la baie modulaire contre toute tentative d'accès non autorisé. Password Status Les options disponibles sont Locked (Verrouillé) et Unlocked (Déverrouillé). Lorsque l'option Locked (Verrouillé) est sélectionnée, il est  nécessaire d'entrer le mot de passe administrateur pour désactiver ou modifier le mot de passe système. Si l'option Unlocked (Déverrouillé) est sélectionnée, le mot de passe système peut être modifié sans qu'il soit nécessaire d'entrer le mot de  passe administrateur. Lorsque l'option Locked est sélectionnée, l'utilisateur doit déverrouiller le programme de configuration (à l'aide du mot de passe  administrateur), avant de pouvoir changer le mot de passe système. Chassis Intrusion Cette option permet d'avertir l'utilisateur que le châssis de l'ordinateur a été ouvert. L'avertissement s'affiche au redémarrage du système.  Les valeurs possibles sont On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé-Silencieux, valeur par défaut) et Off (Désactivé). Intrusion Status Cette option ne s'affiche que si une intrusion dans le châssis a été détectée. Les options disponibles sont Clear (Initialiser) et Detected (Détecté, option par défaut). Sélectionnez Clear (Initialiser) pour réinitialiser l'état du détecteur d'intrusion. Menu Power Management Détermine ce qui se passe lorsque l'ordinateur est à nouveau alimenté en CA.Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage)  Cette fonction permet de modifier la séquence de démarrage des périphériques. AC Recovery Auto Power On Définit l'heure et les jours de la semaine où l'ordinateur doit être mis sous tension automatiquement. Les choix possibles sont tous les jours,  ou tous les jours ouvrés (du lundi au vendredi). L'heure est affichée au format 24 heures (heures:minutes). Avancez ou reculez l'heure de démarrage en appuyant sur les touches fléchées  gauche et droite. Vous pouvez aussi taper les chiffres directement. Le paramètre par défaut est  Disabled (Désactivé). Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas utilisable si vous éteignez votre ordinateur à l'aide d'une barrette d'alimentation ou d'un protecteur de  surtension. Auto Power Time Indique l'heure à laquelle l'ordinateur doit être mis sous tension automatiquement. Utilisez cette option avec le paramètre Auto Power On (Mise sous tension automatique). Low Power Mode Lorsque l'option Low Power Mode (Mode faible alimentation) est sélectionnée, les événements de réveil à distance ne fonctionnent plus  lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode Hibernate (Mise en veille prolongée) ou Off (Désactivé). Remote Wake Up Cette option permet au système d'être réactivé lorsqu'une carte réseau (NIC) ou un modem prenant en charge le réveil à distance reçoit un  signal de réactivation. On (Activé) est le paramètre par défaut. L'option On w/ Boot to NIC (Activé avec initialisation sur le contrôleur réseau) permet au système  de démarrer à partir du réseau avant d'utiliser la séquence d'amorçage. REMARQUE : cette option n'apparaît que si le paramètre 'Low Power Mode' (Mode faible alimentation) est sur OFF (Désactivé). Normalement, le système peut être réactivé à distance lorsqu'il est en mode suspension ou mise en veille prolongée, ou lorsqu'il est éteint. Si  le mode faible alimentation (dans le menu Power Management) est activé, le système ne peut être activé à distance que lorsqu'il est en  mode suspension. Suspend Mode Les options disponibles sont S1 (état de veille dans lequel l'ordinateur fonctionne en mode d'économie d'énergie) et S3 (l'alimentation est réduite ou coupée pour la plupart des composants mais la mémoire du système reste active). Maintenance CMOS Defaults Cette option restaure les paramètres définis en usine de l'ordinateur. Event Log Affiche le journal des événements système. BIOS Update Sélectionnez l'emplacement du fichier de mise à jour du BIOS. Les options disponibles sont Hard Drive (Disque dur) et Diskette (Disquette). Vidéo Video Memory Size Cette option définit la quantité de mémoire réservée au contrôle vidéo intégré. Les options disponibles sont 1MB (1 Mo) et 8MB (8 Mo,  valeur par défaut). Menu POST Behavior Fastboot Si vous sélectionnez On (Activé, valeur par défaut), l'ordinateur démarre plus rapidement car il n'effectue pas tous les tests et  configurations. Numlock Key Cette option définit le comportement du pavé de touches situé à droite de votre clavier. La valeur On (Activé, valeur par défaut) active les  fonctions mathématiques et numériques inscrites en haut de chaque touche. La valeur Off (Désactivé) active les fonctions de contrôle du  curseur inscrites au bas de chaque touche. OS Install Ce paramètre active On or Off ou désactive le mode d'installation du système d'exploitation. La valeur par défaut est Off (Désactivé). POST Hotkeys Cette option définit si les séquences de touches sont affichées au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Le paramètre par défaut est Setup & Boot Menu (Configuration et menu d'amorçage). Keyboard Errors Cette option permet d'activer et de désactiver la consignation des erreurs liées au clavier au démarrage de l'ordinateur.Paramètres de l'option l Onboard or USB Floppy Drive (Lecteur de disquette intégré ou USB) : L'ordinateur essaie de démarrer à partir du lecteur de disquette. Si la disquette  qui se trouve dans le lecteur n'est pas amorçable, ou si le lecteur ne contient aucune disquette, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l Onboard SATA Hard Drive (Disque dur SATA intégré) : L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du disque dur principal. Si aucun système d'exploitation  ne se trouve sur le disque dur, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l Onboard IDE Hard Drive (Disque dur IDE intégré) : L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du disque dur installé dans la baie modulaire. l External Add-in Hard Disk (Disque dur externe supplémentaire) : L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir d'un disque dur externe. l Onboard or USB CD-ROM Device (Lecteur de CD-ROM intégré ou USB) : L'ordinateur essaie de démarrer à partir du lecteur de CD/DVD. Si le lecteur ne  contient aucun CD ou si le CD inséré ne contient aucun système d'exploitation, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l USB Device (Périphérique USB) : Insérez le périphérique mémoire dans un port USB et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque F12 = Boot Menu apparaît  dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur . Le BIOS détecte le périphérique et ajoute l'option Flash USB dans le menu d'amorçage. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour l'amorçage actuel Cette fonction peut être utilisée, par exemple, pour forcer l'ordinateur à démarrer à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires afin d'exécuter les diagnostics Dell, puis à  redémarrer à partir du disque dur une fois les diagnostics terminés. Vous pouvez aussi l'utiliser pour que l'ordinateur démarre à partir d'un périphérique USB  (lecteur de disquette, clé de mémoire ou lecteur CD-RW). 1. Si vous démarrez à partir d'un périphérique USB, connectez-le sur un connecteur USB. 2. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3. Lorsque le message F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu apparaît dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur .  Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite, le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le bureau Microsoft ®  Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. Le menu Boot Device (Périphérique d'amorçage) s'affiche, répertoriant tous les périphériques d'amorçage disponibles. Chaque périphérique dispose  d'un numéro.  4. Au bas du menu, entrez le numéro du périphérique à utiliser pour l'amorçage actuel uniquement.  Par exemple, pour démarrer sur une clé de mémoire USB, mettez l'option USB Device (Périphérique USB) en évidence et appuyez sur . Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour les amorçages futurs 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système. 2. Utilisez les touches fléchées du clavier pour sélectionner l'option de menu Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage), puis appuyez sur  pour  accéder au menu déroulant.  3. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées bas et haut pour vous déplacer dans la liste des périphériques.  4. Appuyez sur la barre d'espacement pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique (les périphériques activés comportent une coche).  5. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées vers le haut ou vers le bas pour déplacer un périphérique sélectionné dans la liste.  Retour à la page du sommaire REMARQUE : pour démarrer à partir d'un périphérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Pour vous assurer qu'il s'agit d'un périphérique amorçable,  consultez sa documentation. REMARQUE : si vous démarrez à partir d'un lecteur de disquette USB et qu'un lecteur de disquette est installé dans la baie modulaire, vous devez  d'abord sélectionner le paramètre OFF (Désactivé) dans la configuration du système. REMARQUE : pour démarrer à partir d'un périphérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Pour vous assurer que tel est le cas, consultez sa  documentation. REMARQUE : notez la séquence d'amorçage utilisée au cas où vous auriez besoin de la restaurer. Retour à la page du sommaire Pile   Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Une pile bouton conserve les informations de configuration, de date et d'heure de l'ordinateur. Elle peut durer plusieurs années. Vous devrez peut-être remplacer la pile si une date ou une heure incorrecte s'affiche au cours de la procédure d'amorçage avec un message tel que : Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP program. ou Invalid configuration information - please run System Setup Program ou Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility Pour déterminer s'il est nécessaire de remplacer la pile, modifiez la date et l'heure dans le programme de configuration du système et quittez le programme  pour enregistrer les informations. Éteignez l'ordinateur et déconnectez-le de la prise électrique pendant quelques heures puis reconnectez-le, mettez-le sous tension puis ouvrez le programme de configuration du système. Si la date et l'heure sont incorrectes dans le programme de configuration du système,  remplacez la pile. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur sans pile, mais les informations de configuration seront supprimées lorsque l'ordinateur est mis hors tension ou  déconnecté de la prise électrique. Dans ce cas, vous devez ouvrir le programme de configuration du système et redéfinir les options de configuration. 1. Si vous ne l'avez pas déjà fait, effectuez une copie de vos informations de configuration. Vous les trouverez dans le programme de configuration du système. 2. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 3. Retirez le disque dur. 4. Trouvez l'emplacement du support de pile intitulé BATTERY (consultez la section "Composants de la carte système". 5. Pour retirer la pile, saisissez-la et tournez-la légèrement tout en la soulevant du connecteur.  6. Insérez la nouvelle pile dans le support (côté "+" opposé à l'ouverture) et appuyez dessus pour la mettre en place.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique  non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : une pile neuve peut exploser si elle est mal installée. Remplacez la pile par une pile de type identique ou d'un type équivalent  recommandé par le fabricant. Débarrassez-vous de la pile usagée selon les instructions du fabricant. AVIS : si vous sortez la pile de son support avec un objet pointu, prenez garde de ne pas toucher la carte système avec l'objet. Vérifiez que l'objet est  inséré entre la pile et son support avant de tenter d'extraire la pile. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager la carte système en arrachant le support ou en  cassant les pistes du circuit sur la carte système. 7. Remettez le disque dur en place. 8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 9. Remettez le cache de protection des câbles en place (si vous l'utilisez).  10. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques, puis allumez-les. Une fois le capot remis, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affiche le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de  l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 11. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). 12. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et restaurez les paramètres enregistrés au cours de l'étape 1. 13. Jetez l'ancienne pile en vous conformant à la réglementation en vigueur.  Retour à la page du sommaire 1 Emplacement du connecteur de la pile AVIS : pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment  réinitialiser le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. Retour à la page du sommaire Commutateur d'intrusion du châssis Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion du châssis Réinitialisation du détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion du châssis 1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Débranchez le câble du commutateur d'intrusion du châssis de la carte système.  3. Retirez le commutateur d'intrusion du châssis de son emplacement et retirez-le de l'ordinateur, ainsi que le câble correspondant.  4. Insérez le commutateur neuf dans l'emplacement et faites-le glisser jusqu'à ce qu'il soit bien en place.  5. Branchez le câble sur le connecteur de la carte système.  6. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 7. Remettez le cache de protection des câbles en place (si vous l'utilisez).  8. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques, puis allumez-les. Une fois le capot remis, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affiche le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de  l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 9. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). Réinitialisation du détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le  produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir le capot. AVIS : pour raccorder un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble dans la prise réseau murale, puis dans l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le  détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite, le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le bureau Microsoft ®  Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Appuyez sur la touche fléchée vers le bas pour atteindre l'option Security (Sécurité).  4. Appuyez sur  pour développer le menu Security (Sécurité).  5. Appuyez sur la touche fléchée vers le bas pour accéder au paramètre Chassis Intrusion. 6. Appuyez sur  pour accéder à la zone des options.  7. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées vers la gauche et vers la droite pour sélectionner un paramètre.  8. Appuyez sur  pour retourner au menu Security (Sécurité).  9. Appuyez sur <Échap> pour accéder au menu de sortie du programme de configuration du système.  10. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées vers la gauche et vers la droite du clavier et sélectionnez l'option Save/Exit (Sauvegarder/Quitter). 11. Appuyez sur  pour sauvegarder les modifications et quitter le programme de configuration.  Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Nettoyage de votre ordinateur Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Ordinateur, écran et clavier Souris Lecteur de disquette CD et DVD Ordinateur, écran et clavier l Utilisez un aspirateur muni d'une brosse pour ôter délicatement la poussière des baies et ouvertures de l'ordinateur ainsi qu'entre les touches du  clavier. l Pour nettoyer votre écran, humidifiez légèrement un chiffon doux et propre avec de l'eau. Si possible, utilisez un chiffon spécial pour le nettoyage des  écrans ou une solution adaptée au revêtement antireflet de l'écran. l Nettoyez le clavier, l'ordinateur et les parties en plastique de l'écran avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'une solution composée de trois volumes d'eau et  d'un volume de détergent pour vaisselle. Ne trempez pas le chiffon et ne laissez pas de solution couler à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur ou du clavier. Souris Si le curseur à l'écran saute ou se déplace de façon anormale, nettoyez votre souris. Pour nettoyer une souris qui n'est pas une souris optique : 1. Tournez l'anneau de retenue situé sous votre souris dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour retirer la bille.  2. Essuyez la bille avec un chiffon propre et non pelucheux. 3. Soufflez doucement dans la cavité de la bille pour y déloger la poussière et les peluches.  4. Si les roulements dans la cavité de la bille sont sales, nettoyez-les avec un coton-tige légèrement imbibé d'alcool.  5. Vérifiez le centrage des roulements dans leurs canaux. Assurez-vous que le coton-tige n'a pas laissé de peluches sur les roulements.  6. Remettez en place la bille et l'anneau de retenue, puis tournez l'anneau de retenue dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour le remettre en place. Lecteur de disquette Nettoyez le lecteur de disquettes à l'aide d'un kit de nettoyage que vous trouverez dans le commerce. Ces kits comportent des disquettes prétraitées  permettant d'enlever les dépôts accumulés au cours d'une utilisation normale. CD et DVD ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un tissu doux et humidifié avec  de l'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. AVIS : n'essuyez pas l'écran avec une solution à base d'alcool ou du savon. Vous risquez d'endommager le revêtement antireflet.  AVIS : n'essayez pas de nettoyer les têtes de lecteurs avec une coton-tige. Vous risquez de désaligner accidentellement les têtes et d'empêcher le  fonctionnement du lecteur. Si vous avez des problèmes lors de la lecture de vos CD ou DVD (des sauts pendant la lecture par exemple), essayez de nettoyer les disques. 1. Saisissez le disque par les bords. Vous pouvez également toucher l'orifice central.  2. Avec un chiffon doux et non pelucheux, nettoyez doucement la partie inférieure du disque (côté sans étiquette) en suivant une ligne droite depuis le  centre jusqu'au bord extérieur.  Si la poussière ne part pas, utilisez de l'eau ou une solution diluée d'eau et de savon doux. Vous pouvez également acheter des produits de nettoyage pour  disques vendus dans le commerce et protéger vos disques contre la poussière, les empreintes et les rayures. Les produits de nettoyage pour CD peuvent être  utilisés sur les DVD sans aucun risque. Retour à la page du sommaire AVIS : utilisez toujours de l'air comprimé pour nettoyer la lentille du lecteur de CD/DVD et suivez les instructions fournies avec la bombe d'air comprimé.  Ne touchez jamais la lentille se trouvant à l'intérieur du lecteur.  AVIS : pour éviter d'abîmer la surface, n'essuyez pas le disque par mouvement circulaire. Retour à la page du sommaire Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 1. Vérifiez que vous n'avez rien oublié à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  2. Remettez le capot en place :  a. Abaissez le capot et alignez-le avec le cadre métallique de l'ordinateur.  a. Faites glisser le capot jusqu'à ce qu'il se mette correctement en place.  3. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques, puis allumez-les. Une fois le capot remis, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affiche le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de  l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 4. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). Retour à la page du sommaire ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. AVIS : pour raccorder un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble dans la prise réseau murale puis dans l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le  détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. Retour à la page du sommaire Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. a. Tournez le dispositif de dégagement du capot dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre, comme indiqué dans l'illustration.  b. Faites glisser le capot de l'ordinateur vers l'avant d'un centimètre (1/2 pouce), ou jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête et soulevez le capot.  Retour à la page du sommaire ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique  non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. AVIS : avant de toucher les composants situés à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, mettez-vous à la masse en touchant la surface métallique non peinte  du châssis de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre travail à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour dissiper  toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes.  1 Dispositif de dégagementRetour à la page du sommaire Réglementations de la FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Classe A Classe B Informations d'identification de la FCC La plupart des systèmes informatiques Dell sont classés par la FCC (Federal Communications Commission [commission fédérale des communications des États- Unis]) comme appareils numériques de Classe B. Pour déterminer la classification de votre système informatique, examinez toutes les étiquettes  d'enregistrement de la FCC situées sous l'ordinateur ou sur un panneau arrière ou latéral, sur les pattes de montage des cartes et sur les cartes elles-mêmes.  Si l'une des étiquettes indique la Classe A, tout votre système est considéré être un appareil numérique de Classe A. Si toutes les étiquettes portent une  indication d'appartenance à la classe B FCC (numéro d'identification FCC ou logo FCC) ( ), votre système est considéré comme un dispositif numérique de  classe B. Après avoir déterminé la classification FCC de votre système, prenez connaissance de la réglementation FCC qui s'y rapporte. Notez que la réglementation de  la FCC stipule que les changements et modifications non explicitement approuvés par Dell peuvent annuler votre droit d'utiliser cet équipement. Cet appareil est conforme à l'alinéa 15 de la réglementation de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est régi par les deux conditions suivantes : l Ce dispositif ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences préjudiciables. l Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les perturbations qu'il reçoit, y compris celles susceptibles de perturber son fonctionnement.  Classe A Ce matériel a été testé et certifié conforme aux limites des appareils numériques de Classe A définies par l'alinéa 15 de la réglementation de la FCC. Ces  restrictions sont conçues pour fournir une protection adéquate contre les perturbations nuisibles quand le matériel est utilisé dans un environnement  commercial. Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie de fréquence radio et risque, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux  instructions du guide du fabricant, de produire des perturbations nuisibles aux radiocommunications. L'utilisation de cet équipement dans une zone  résidentielle risque de provoquer des perturbations nuisibles que vous devrez corriger à vos propres frais. Classe B Cet équipement a été testé et reconnu conforme aux limites des appareils numériques de Classe B en vertu de l'alinéa 15 de la réglementation de la FCC. Ces  limites sont conçues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les perturbations nuisibles quand l'équipement est utilisé dans un environnement  résidentiel. Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie de fréquence radio et risque, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé suivant les instructions du  guide du fabricant, de perturber les radiocommunications. Il n'y a cependant aucune garantie qu'il n'y aura pas de perturbation dans une installation particulière. Si le matériel crée des perturbations nuisibles à la réception radio ou télévision, ce qui peut être déterminé en l'éteignant et le rallumant, vous  devriez essayer de corriger ces perturbations en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : l Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception ou la déplacer. l Augmenter la distance entre l'équipement et le récepteur. l Connecter l'équipement à une source d'alimentation sur un circuit différent de celui sur lequel est connecté le récepteur. l Consultez le vendeur ou un technicien qualifié en radio/télévision pour obtenir de l'aide.  Informations d'identification de la FCC Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur les dispositifs couverts par ce document en conformité avec la réglementation de la FCC : Numéros de modèle : DCTR Nom de la société : Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Recherche d'informations Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Que recherchez-vous ? Reportez-vous aux éléments suivants. l Un programme de diagnostics pour mon ordinateur l Des pilotes pour mon ordinateur l La documentation concernant mon ordinateur l La documentation concernant mon périphérique  l Le logiciel DSS (Desktop System Software)  Le CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires, également appelé ResourceCD) La documentation et les pilotes ont été préinstallés par Dell sur votre ordinateur. Le CD permet de réinstaller  des pilotes, d'exécuter les diagnostics Dell ou d'accéder à la documentation.  Des fichiers « readme » (lisez-moi) peuvent être inclus sur votre CD afin de fournir des mises à jour de  dernière minute concernant des modifications techniques apportées à votre système ou des informations de  référence destinées aux utilisateurs expérimentés ou aux techniciens. REMARQUE : les dernières mises à jour des pilotes ou de la documentation se trouvent sur le site  support.dell.com l Comment configurer mon ordinateur l Des informations sur le dépannage  l Comment exécuter les diagnostics  Dell l Comment déterminer la signification  des codes d'erreur et des voyants de diagnostic l Des outils et des utilitaires Guide de référence rapide Dell™  REMARQUE : ce document est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com. l Les mises à jour et les correctifs du  système d'exploitation  Logiciel DSS (Desktop System Software) Cet utilitaire est disponible sur le CD Pilotes et utilitaires, ainsi que sur le site de support de Dell. l Le numéro de service et le code de  service express l L'étiquette de licence Microsoft  Windows  Le numéro de service et la licence Microsoft Windows Ces étiquettes sont situées sur votre ordinateur.  Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier l'ordinateur lorsque vous visitez le site support.dell.com ou contactez le support technique. Entrez le code de service express pour faciliter l'acheminement de votre appel lorsque vous contactez le support technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays. l Les informations sur la garantie l Les consignes de sécurité  l Des informations sur la réglementation  l Des informations sur l'ergonomie l Le contrat de licence utilisateur final  Guide des informations sur le produit Dell™ REMARQUE : ce document est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com. l Les pilotes les plus récents pour mon  ordinateur l Les réponses aux questions posées  au service et support technique l Des discussions en ligne avec le support technique et d'autres utilisateurs l La documentation sur mon ordinateur Site Web du support Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : sélectionnez votre région pour accéder au site de support approprié.  Le site Web du support technique Dell comporte plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : l Solutions — Des conseils de dépannage, des astuces, des articles rédigés par des techniciens et des  cours en ligne l Forum communauté — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres utilisateurs Dell l Mises à niveau — Informations de mise à niveau pour les composants tels que la mémoire, le disque  dur et le système d'exploitation  l Service clientèle — Coordonnées, statut des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations  l Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles  l Référence — Documentation sur l'ordinateur, caractéristiques produit et livres blancs Retour à la page du sommaire l État des appels au service clients et  historique du support l Les principaux problèmes techniques  concernant mon ordinateur l Les questions fréquemment posées  l Des fichiers téléchargeables  l Des détails sur la configuration de  mon ordinateur l Le contrat de service de mon ordinateur Site Web Dell Premier Support — premiersupport.dell.com Le site Web Dell Premier Support est personnalisé pour les clients représentant des entreprises, des  institutions gouvernementales ou des institutions d'enseignement. Ce site Web n'est pas disponible partout. l Comment utiliser Windows XP  l La documentation sur mon ordinateur l La documentation sur les périphériques (par exemple un  modem) Centre d'aide et de support Windows 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer puis sur Aide et support. 2. Tapez un mot ou une phrase pour décrire votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône représentant une  flèche.  3. Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème.  4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  l Comment réinstaller mon système  d'exploitation  CD du Système d'exploitation Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour le réinstaller, utilisez le CD du système  d'exploitation. Consultez la section "Réinstallation des pilotes et du système d'exploitation" pour obtenir des instructions. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, utilisez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour réinstaller les pilotes des  périphériques fournis avec votre ordinateur.  L'étiquette de la clé du produit de votre système d'exploitation se trouve sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : la couleur du CD varie en fonction du système d'exploitation commandé. Retour à la page du sommaire Obtention d'aide Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Assistance technique Problèmes avec votre commande Informations sur les produits Articles en retour pour réparation sous garantie ou à porter en crédit Avant d'appeler Contacter Dell Assistance technique Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour un problème technique, Dell se tient à votre disposition pour vous fournir l'assistance adéquate. 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section "Résolution des problèmes". 2. Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. 3. Faites une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics, puis remplissez-la. 4. Utilisez la gamme complète de services en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web Dell Support (support.dell.com) pour obtenir de l'aide sur les procédures d'installation et de dépannage.  5. Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas permis de résoudre le problème, contactez Dell.  REMARQUE : appelez le support technique depuis un téléphone situé près de l'ordinateur pour que le support technique puisse vous aider à effectuer les  procédures nécessaires.  REMARQUE : il se peut que le système de code de service express de Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays.  Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé de Dell vous le demande, entrez votre code de service express pour acheminer directement votre appel vers le  personnel de support compétent. Si vous ne disposez pas d'un code de service express, ouvrez le dossier Dell Accessories (Accessoires Dell), double-cliquez sur l'icône Express Service Code (Code de service express) et suivez les indications. Pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation du service de support technique, consultez la section "Service de support technique". REMARQUE : certains des services suivants ne sont pas disponibles partout en dehors des États-Unis. Appelez votre représentant Dell local pour obtenir des  informations sur leur disponibilité.  Services en ligne Vous pouvez accéder au site Dell Support à l'adresse support.dell.com. Sélectionnez votre région sur la page WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT (Bienvenue dans le service de support de Dell) et donnez les détails requis pour accéder aux outils d'aide et aux informations.  Vous pouvez contacter Dell électroniquement aux adresses suivantes : l World Wide Web www.dell.com/ www.dell.com/ap/ (région Asie/Pacifique uniquement) www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement) ATTENTION : si vous devez retirer les capots de l'ordinateur, déconnectez d'abord de leurs prises les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du  modem.www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) www.dell.com/la/ (pays d'Amérique Latine) www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement) l Protocole de transfert de fichiers (FTP) anonyme ftp.dell.com/ Connectez-vous en tant que user : anonymous (utilisateur anonyme) et utilisez votre adresse électronique comme mot de passe. l Service de support électronique mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) support.jp.dell.com (Japon uniquement) support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) l Service de devis électronique sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada uniquement) l Service d'informations électronique info@dell.com Service AutoTech Le service de support technique automatisé de Dell, AutoTech, fournit des réponses enregistrées aux questions les plus fréquemment posées par les clients  de Dell concernant les ordinateurs portables et de bureau. Quand vous appelez AutoTech, utilisez votre téléphone à touches pour choisir les sujets qui correspondent à vos questions. Le service AutoTech est disponible 24 heures sur 24, 7 jours sur 7. Vous pouvez aussi accéder à ce service via le service de support technique. Pour connaître  le numéro de téléphone à appeler, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région.Service d'état des commandes automatisé  Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de produits Dell™, vous pouvez visiter le site Web support.dell.com ou appeler le service d'état des commandes  automatisé. Un message préenregistré vous invite à entrer les informations concernant votre commande afin de la localiser et de vous informer. Pour  connaître le numéro de téléphone à appeler, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Service de support technique Le service de support technique de Dell est disponible 24 heures sur 24, 7 jours sur 7, pour répondre à vos questions concernant le matériel Dell. Notre  équipe de support technique utilise des diagnostics sur ordinateur pour fournir rapidement des réponses précises. Pour contacter le service de support technique de Dell, consultez la section "Assistance technique", puis composez le numéro correspondant à votre pays  comme indiqué dans la section "Contacter Dell". Problèmes liés à votre commande Si vous avez un problème avec votre commande, comme des pièces manquantes, des mauvaises pièces ou une facturation erronée, contactez le service  clientèle de Dell. Gardez votre facture ou votre fiche d'expédition à portée de main lorsque vous appelez. Pour connaître le numéro de téléphone à appeler,  consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Informations sur les produits Si vous avez besoin d'informations à propos d'autres produits disponibles chez Dell, ou si vous désirez passer une commande, consultez le site Web de Dell à  l'adresse www.dell.com. Pour connaître le numéro à composer afin de consulter un spécialiste des ventes, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou un remboursement sous  forme de crédit Préparez comme indiqué ci-après tous les articles à renvoyer, que ce soit pour un renvoi ou un remboursement sous forme de crédit : 1. Contactez Dell pour obtenir un numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel et écrivez-le clairement et bien visiblement sur l'extérieur de la boîte.  Pour connaître le numéro de téléphone à appeler, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. 2. Joignez une copie de la facture et une lettre expliquant le motif du retour. 3. Joignez une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics indiquant les tests effectués et tous les messages d'erreur mentionnés par les diagnostics  Dell. 4. Joignez tous les accessoires qui vont avec les articles renvoyés (câbles d'alimentation, disquettes de logiciels, guides, etc.) si le retour est à porter en  crédit.  5. Empaquetez l'équipement à renvoyer dans son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent).  Vous êtes responsable des frais d'envoi. Vous devez aussi assurer les produits retournés et assumer les risques de pertes en cours d'expédition. Les envois  contre remboursement ne sont pas acceptés. Les retours ne comportant pas les éléments décrits ci-dessus seront refusés au quai de réception de Dell et vous seront retournés.Avant d'appeler REMARQUE : ayez votre code de service express à portée de main quand vous appelez. Le code permet au système d'assistance téléphonique automatisé de  Dell de diriger votre appel plus efficacement. N'oubliez pas de remplir la liste de vérification des diagnostics. Si possible, allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique et appelez à l'aide d'un téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre ordinateur. Il peut vous être demandé de taper certaines commandes au  clavier, de donner des informations détaillées sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou d'essayer d'autres méthodes de dépannage uniquement possibles sur  ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible. Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell électroniquement en allant sur les sites Web suivants : l www.dell.com l support.dell.com (support technique) l premiersupport.dell.com (support technique pour les clients de l'éducation, de l'administration, de la santé et des grands comptes, comprenant les  clients Premier, Platinum et Gold) Vous trouverez les adresses Web spécifiques à votre pays dans la section correspondant du tableau ci-dessous. REMARQUE : les numéros d'appel gratuits ne peuvent être utilisés que dans le pays pour lequel ils sont mentionnés.  Pour contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les codes indiqués dans le tableau suivant. Si vous avez besoin  d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un standardiste local ou international. ATTENTION : avant de travailler à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Liste de vérification des diagnostics Nom : Date : Adresse : Numéro de téléphone : Code de maintenance (code à barres à l'arrière de l'ordinateur) : Code de service express : Numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par un membre du support technique de Dell) : Système d'exploitation et version : Périphériques : Cartes d'extension : Êtes-vous relié(e) à un réseau ? Oui Non Réseau, version et carte réseau : Programmes et versions : Consultez la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu des fichiers de démarrage du système. Si l'ordinateur est relié à  une imprimante, imprimez chaque fichier. Sinon, notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant d'appeler Dell. Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de diagnostic : Description du problème et procédures de dépannage effectuées : Pays (Ville) Indicatif international Indicatif de la ville Nom du département ou Zone de service Site Web et Adresse électronique Indicatifs régionaux Numéros locaux et  Numéros verts Anguilla Support technique général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua et Barbuda Support technique général 1-800-805-5924 Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar Support technique et Service clientèle numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Télécopieur pour support technique  11 4515 7139 Télécopieur pour service clientèle  11 4515 7138Aruba Support technique général numéro vert : 800 -1578 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international :  0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif de la ville : 2 E-mail (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (Nouvelle-Zélande) : nz_tech_support@dell.com Petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 1-300-65-55-33 Gouvernement et entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-633-559 Division Comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 1-800-060-889 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-819-339 Ventes aux entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-808-385 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1-800-808-312 Télécopieur numéro vert : 1-800-818-341 Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international :  900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 0820 240 530 00 Télécopieur pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 0820 240 530 49 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle – Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support technique pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à  domicile 0820 240 530 14 Support technique – Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0660 8779 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 La Barbade Support technique général 1-800-534-3066 Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_be@dell.com E-mail pour les clients francophones : support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Support technique 02 481 92 88 Service clientèle 02 481 91 19 Ventes aux entreprises 02 481 91 00 Télécopieur 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Support technique général 1-800-342-0671 Bolivie Support technique général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif de la ville : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br Service clientèle, Support technique 0800 90 3355 Télécopieur pour support technique  51 481 5470 Télécopieur pour service clientèle  51 481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Îles vierges britanniques Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international :  011 État de commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (support technique automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 TechFax numéro vert : 1-800-950-1329 Service clientèle (petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clientèle (grands comptes et administration) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Support technique (petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support technique (grands comptes et administration) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Ventes aux petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile numéro vert : 1-800-387-5752 Ventes (grands comptes et administration) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Ventes de pièces au détail et Service étendu 1 866 440 3355 Îles Caïmans Support technique général 1-800-805-7541 Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Ventes, Service clientèle, Support technique numéro vert : 1230 -020 -4823 Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Site Web pour support technique : support.dell.com.cn E-mail du support technique : cn_support@dell.com Télécopieur pour support technique 818 1350Indicatif de la ville : 592 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 800 858 2969 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) numéro vert : 800 858 0950 Support technique (serveurs et stockage) numéro vert : 800 858 0960 Support technique (projecteurs, PDA, imprimantes, commutateurs, routeurs, etc.) numéro vert : 800 858 2920 Commentaires clients numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division Comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2557 Comptes grandes entreprises – GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grands entreprises - nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises – Administration et éducation Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises – Administration et éducation Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Comptes grandes entreprises – Queue Team numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Comptes grandes entreprises – Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises – Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises – Pièces détachées  numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Support technique général 980-9-15-3978 Costa Rica Support technique général 0800-012-0435 République Tchèque  (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02  2186 27 27 Service clientèle 02  2186 27 11 Télécopieur 02  2186 27 14 TechFax 02  2186 27 28 Standard 02  2186 27 11 Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support E-mail (ordinateurs portables) : den_nbk_support@dell.com Support E-mail (ordinateurs de bureau) : den_support@dell.com Support E-mail (serveurs) : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 7023 0182 Service clientèle (relations) 7023 0184 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard télécopieur (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (Petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile) 3287 5000 Télécopieur (Petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile) 3287 5001 Dominique Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 République Dominicaine Support technique général 1-800-148-0530 Equateur Support technique général numéro vert : 999 -119 Salvador Support technique général 01-899-753-0777 Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international :  990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif de la ville : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : fin_support@dell.com Support E-mail (serveurs) : Nordic_support@dell.com Support technique 09 253 313 60 Télécopieur pour support technique 09 253 313 81 Service relations clientèle 09 253 313 38 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 09 693 791 94 Télécopieur 09 253 313 99 Standard 09 253 313 00 France (Paris, Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs des villes : (1) (4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Grand public et PME/PMI Support technique 0825 387 270 Service clientèle  0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 00Ventes 0825 004 700 Télécopieur 0825 004 701 Télécopieur (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clientèle 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Télécopieur 01 55 94 71 01 Allemagne (Langen) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif de la ville : 6103 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique 06103 766-7200 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 0180-5-224400 Service clientèle, segment International 06103 766-9570 Service clientèle comptes privilégiés 06103 766-9420 Service clientèle, Grands comptes 06103 766-9560 Service clientèle comptes publics 06103 766-9555 Standard 06103 766-7000 Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Support technique 080044149518 Support technique Gold 08844140083 Standard 2108129800 Ventes 2108129800 Télécopieur 2108129812 Grenade Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Support technique général 1-800-999-0136 Guyane Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Hong Kong Indicatif international :  001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) 2969 3189 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) 2969 3191 Support technique (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ et PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Service d'assistance téléphonique CEE Gold Queue 2969 3187 Service pour les clients 3416 0910 Comptes grandes entreprises 3416 0907 Programmes pour clients internationaux 3416 0908 Division Petites et moyennes entreprises 3416 0912 Division Petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 2969 3105 Inde Support technique 1600 33 8045 Ventes 1600 33 8044 Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 16 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique 1850 543 543 Support technique pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 1850 200 982 Service clientèle pour les entreprises (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Ventes pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4000 Télécopieur /Télécopieur pour les ventes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif de la ville : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Grand public et PME/PMI Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 696 821 14Télécopieur 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 577 825 55 Télécopieur 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821  Jamaïque Support technique général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-682-3639 Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international :  001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif de la ville : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension et Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™ et Latitude™) numéro vert : 0120 -198 -433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Support technique (Axim™) numéro vert : 0120-981-690 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Axim) 81-44-556-3468 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 heures sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clientèle 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux entreprises (jusqu'à 400 salariés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux Comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 salariés) 044-556-3433 Ventes aux Comptes grandes entreprises (plus de 3 500 salariés) 044-556-3430 Ventes secteur public (agences gouvernementales, établissements d'enseignement et  institutions médicales) 044-556-1469 Segment International - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international :  001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Support technique numéro vert : 080 -200 -3800 Ventes numéro vert : 080 -200 -3600 Service clientèle (Séoul, Corée) numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Télécopieur 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4093 Service clientèle (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Télécopieur (Support technique et service clientèle) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Télécopieur pour les ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728 -3772 Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_be@dell.com Support technique (Bruxelles, Belgique) 3420808075 Ventes aux petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile (Bruxelles,  Belgique) numéro vert : 080016884 Ventes aux entreprises (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Service clientèle (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 19 Télécopieur (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 92 99 Standard (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 582 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0800 581 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif de la ville : 4 Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 1 800 88 0193 Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) numéro vert : 1 800 88 1306 Service clientèle 04 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383Indicatif national : 52 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clientèle 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Groupe principal 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Antilles néerlandaises Support technique général 001-800-882-1519 Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif de la ville : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Support technique) : (Enterprise) : nl_server_support@dell.com (Latitude) : nl_latitude_support@dell.com (Inspiron) : nl_inspiron_support@dell.com (Dimension) : nl_dimension_support@dell.com (OptiPlex) : nl_optiplex_support@dell.com (Dell Precision) : nl_workstation_support@dell.com Support technique 020 674 45 00 Télécopieur pour support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 020 674 42 00 Service relations clientèle  020 674 4325 Ventes aux petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur des ventes aux petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 020 674 47 75 Télécopieur pour les relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur du standard 020 674 47 50 Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 E-mail (Nouvelle-Zélande) : nz_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 0800 446 255 Gouvernement et entreprises 0800 444 617 Ventes 0800 441 567 Télécopieur 0800 441 566 Nicaragua Support technique général 001-800-220-1006 Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support E-mail (ordinateurs portables) : nor_nbk_support@dell.com Support E-mail (ordinateurs de bureau) : nor_support@dell.com Support E-mail (serveurs) : nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 671 16882 Service relations clientèle 671 17514 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard télécopieur 671 16865 Panama Support technique général 001-800-507-0962 Pérou Support technique général 0800-50-669 Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international :  011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : pl_support_tech@dell.com Service clientèle (téléphone)  57 95 700 Service clientèle  57 95  999 Ventes  57 95 999 Service clientèle (télécopieur)  57 95 806 Réception (télécopieur)  57 95 998Standard  57 95 999 Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Support technique 707200149 Service clientèle 800 300 413 Ventes 800 300 410, 800 300 411,  800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Télécopieur 21 424 01 12 Porto Rico Support technique général 1-800-805-7545 Saint-Kitts-et-Nevis Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4731 Ste Lucie Support technique général 1-800-882-1521 Saint-Vincent-et-les- Grenadines Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international :  005 Indicatif national : 65 Support technique numéro vert : 800 6011 051 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 800 6011 054 Ventes aux entreprises numéro vert : 800 6011 053 Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_za_support@dell.com Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clientèle 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Télécopieur 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700 Pays du Pacifique et du Sud-Est de l'Asie Support technique clients, service clientèle et ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif de la ville : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Grand public et PME/PMI Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Télécopieur 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 546 Standard 91 722 92 00 Télécopieur 91 722 95 83 Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif de la ville : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : swe_support@dell.com Support E-mail pour Latitude et Inspiron :  Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Support E-mail pour OptiPlex : Swe_kats@dell.com Support E-mail pour les serveurs : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 08 590 05 199 Service relations clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats pour employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 20 140 14 44 Support technique par télécopieur 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com E-mail pour les clients francophones (petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à  domicile et entreprises) : support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Support technique (petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile) 0844 811 411 Support technique (Entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clientèle (petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile) 0848 802 202 Service clientèle (entreprises) 0848 821 721 Télécopieur 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01Taïwan Indicatif international :  002 Indicatif national : 886 Support technique (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0080 60 1256 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0080 651 228 Ventes aux entreprises numéro vert : 0080 651 227 Thaïlande Indicatif international :  001 Indicatif national : 66 Support technique numéro vert : 0880 060 07 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes numéro vert : 0880 060 09 Trinité-et-Tobago Support technique général 1-800-805-8035 Îles Turks et Caicos Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif de la ville : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Site Web du service clientèle : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de  1 000 salariés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique (direct/Division Comptes privilégiés et général) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle Comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises et les activités professionnelles à domicile  0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés (500-5000 salariés) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle Gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clientèle Gouvernement local et Éducation 01344 373 199 Service clientèle (Santé) 01344 373 194 Ventes aux petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Télécopieur pour les petites entreprises et activités professionnelles à domicile 0870 907 4006 Uruguay Support technique général numéro vert : 000-413-598-2521 États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international :  011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Client (domicile et siège social)   Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clientèle  numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Support technique Dellnet™ numéro vert : 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clients du programme d'achats pour employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Entreprises Service clientèle et Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-822-8965 Clients du programme d'achats pour employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support technique pour les imprimantes et les projecteurs numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (administration, domaines Éducation et Santé)  Service clientèle et Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats pour employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-234-1490 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355  ou numéro vert : 1-800-879-3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de composants au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Télécopieur numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes  d'élocution  numéro vert : 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Îles vierges (États-Unis) Support technique général 1-877-673-3355 Venezuela Support technique général 8001-3605Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Glossaire Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P R S T U V W X Z Les termes mentionnés dans ce glossaire ne sont fournis qu'à titre informatif et ne décrivent pas obligatoirement des fonctions fournies sur votre ordinateur. A ACPI — Advanced Configuration and Power Interface — Spécification de gestion de l'alimentation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft®  Windows® pour placer l'ordinateur en mode veille ou mise en veille prolongée afin de conserver l'énergie électrique attribuée à chaque périphérique connecté  à l'ordinateur. adressage de mémoire — Processus permettant à l'ordinateur d'attribuer des adresses mémoire à des emplacements physiques au démarrage. Les  périphériques et les logiciels peuvent ensuite identifier les informations auxquelles le processeur peut accéder. Adresse E/S — Adresse RAM associée à un périphérique spécifique (un connecteur série, un connecteur parallèle ou une baie d'extension) et qui permet au  processeur de communiquer avec ce périphérique. adresse mémoire — Emplacement spécifique où les données sont stockées temporairement dans la mémoire RAM. affichage à cristaux liquides — (LCD, Liquid Crystal Display) — Technologie utilisée pour les écrans plats et ceux des ordinateurs portables. AGP — Accelerated Graphics Port — Port graphique dédié allouant de la mémoire système à utiliser pour les tâches liées à la vidéo. Le port AGP permet  d'obtenir une image vidéo de grande qualité avec des couleurs fidèles grâce à une interface très rapide entre le circuit vidéo et la mémoire de l'ordinateur. arrêt — Processus consistant à fermer les fenêtres et les programmes, à quitter le système d'exploitation et à éteindre l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez perdre des  données si vous éteignez l'ordinateur avant d'effectuer la procédure d'arrêt. ASF — Alert Standards Format — Standard permettant de définir un mécanisme pour signaler les alertes matérielles et logicielles à une console de gestion. Le  standard ASF est conçu pour être indépendant des plates-formes et des systèmes d'exploitation. B baie modulaire — Baie qui prend en charge des périphériques tels qu'un lecteur optique, une seconde batterie ou un module TravelLite™ de Dell. barre d'état système — Voir zone de notification. batterie — Source d'alimentation interne utilisée sur les ordinateurs portables lorsqu'ils ne sont pas reliés à un adaptateur CA/CC ou à une prise électrique. BIOS — Basic Input/Output System — Programme (ou utilitaire) qui joue le rôle d'interface entre les composants de votre ordinateur et le système  d'exploitation. Ne modifiez pas les paramètres de ce programme à moins de connaître avec exactitude les effets de chacun des paramètres sur l'ordinateur.  également appelé configuration du système. bit — La plus petite unité de données interprétée par l'ordinateur. Bluetooth™ — Norme des technologies sans fil pour les périphériques réseau de courte portée (9 mètres ou 30 pieds) permettant aux périphériques activés  de se reconnaître automatiquement. bps — bits per second (bits par seconde) — Unité standard de mesure de la vitesse de transmission de données. BTU — British Thermal Unit (unité thermique britannique) — Mesure de sortie de chaleur. bus — Passerelle de communication entre les composants de votre ordinateur. bus local — Bus de données fournissant une transmission rapide des données entre les périphériques et le processeur. C C — Celsius — Système de mesure des températures où 0° est le point de congélation et 100° le point d'ébullition de l'eau. CA — courant alternatif — Forme d'électricité qui alimente votre ordinateur lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA dans une prise  électrique. capteur infrarouge — Port permettant de transférer des données entre l'ordinateur et des périphériques compatibles infrarouge sans utiliser de connexion  câblée.carnet — Document international des douanes qui facilite les importations temporaires dans des pays étrangers. Appelé également passeport de marchandises. carte d'extension — Carte installée dans un emplacement d'extension sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs et qui permet d'augmenter les capacités  de l'ordinateur. Il peut s'agir d'une carte vidéo, modem ou son. carte intelligente — Carte incorporée à un processeur et à une puce mémoire. Les cartes intelligentes permettent d'identifier un utilisateur sur des  ordinateurs équipés de telles cartes. carte PC — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les modems et les cartes réseau sont des exemples de cartes PC. carte PC étendue — Carte PC qui dépasse l'emplacement pour carte PC lors de son installation. carte réseau — Puce qui offre des fonctions réseau. Un ordinateur peut disposer d'une carte réseau sur sa carte système ou il peut contenir une carte PC  avec un adaptateur intégré. Les cartes réseau sont également appelées NIC (Network Interface Controller, contrôleur d'interface réseau). carte système — Carte de circuits principale installée dans l'ordinateur. Appelée aussi carte mère. CD — Compact Disc — Média de stockage optique, souvent utilisé pour les logiciels et les programmes audio. CD amorçable — CD permettant de démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus,  assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. Le CD Pilotes et utilitaires (ou "ResourceCD") est amorçable. CD Player — Logiciel utilisé pour lire les CD musicaux. CD Player affiche une fenêtre comprenant des boutons qui permettent de lire un CD. CD-R — CD Enregistrable — Version enregistrable d'un CD. Un seul enregistrement de données peut être effectué sur un CD-R. Une fois les données  enregistrées, elles ne peuvent être ni effacées, ni écrasées. CD-RW — CD Réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un CD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un CD-RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. circuit intégré — Semi-conducteur ou puce sur lesquels sont fabriqués des milliers ou des millions de minuscules composants électroniques destinés aux  équipements informatiques, audio et vidéo.  COA — Certificate of Authenticity (certificat d'authenticité) — Code alphanumérique Windows situé sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur. Le certificat  d'authenticité peut être nécessaire pour procéder à une configuration ou à une réinstallation du système d'exploitation. également appelé Clé du produit ou Identification produit. code de service express — Code numérique situé sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur Dell™. Utilisez le code service express lorsque vous contactez Dell  pour obtenir une assistance technique. Le code de service express n'est pas nécessairement disponible dans tous les pays. connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo — Connecteur utilisé pour relier un téléviseur ou un périphérique audio numérique à l'ordinateur. connecteur DIN — Connecteur rond à 6 broches conforme aux normes DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm), généralement utilisé pour connecter des connecteurs  de câbles de souris ou de clavier PS/2. connecteur parallèle — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter une imprimante parallèle à l'ordinateur. Appelé également port LPT. connecteur série — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter des périphériques tels qu'un ordinateur de poche numérique ou un appareil photo numérique à  l'ordinateur. contrôleur — Circuit qui contrôle le transfert des données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques. contrôleur vidéo — Circuit sur une carte vidéo ou sur la carte système (dans les ordinateurs avec contrôleur vidéo intégré) qui offre, en association avec  l'écran, des fonctions vidéo. CRIMM — Continuity Rambus In-line Memory Module — Module ne disposant pas de puces de mémoires, utilisé pour remplir les emplacements RIMM inutilisés. curseur — Marqueur affiché à l'écran montrant l'emplacement de la prochaine action du clavier, du touchpad ou de la souris. Il s'agit généralement d'une ligne  clignotante, d'un caractère de soulignement ou d'une petite flèche. D DDR SDRAM — Double-Data-Rate SDRAM — Type de SDRAM doublant les cycles de données en rafale et améliorant les performances du système. disque dur — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire des données sur une unité de disque dur. Les termes unité de disque dur et disque dur sont souvent  utilisés indifféremment. disquette amorçable — Disquette permettant de démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un  virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. dissipateur thermique — Plaque en métal sur certains processeurs permettant de dissiper la chaleur. DMA — Direct Memory Access (accès direct à la mémoire) — Canal qui permet à certains types de transferts de données entre la mémoire RAM et un  périphérique d'éviter de passer par le processeur. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — Consortium de compagnies représentant des fournisseurs de matériel et de logiciel développant des normes  de gestion pour les environnements réseau, Internet, de bureau et d'entreprise distribués. domaine — Groupe d'ordinateurs, de programmes et de périphériques sur un réseau administrés en tant qu'unité avec des règles et des procédures  communes afin d'être utilisés par un groupe d'utilisateurs donné. Les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au domaine pour avoir accès aux ressources. dossier — Terme utilisé pour décrire l'espace sur une disquette ou une unité de disque dur sur laquelle des fichiers sont organisés et regroupés. Les fichiers  composant un dossier peuvent être affichés et classés de différentes façons, par exemple par ordre alphabétique, par date ou par taille. DRAM — Dynamic Random Access Memory (mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire) — Mémoire qui stocke des informations dans les circuits intégrés contenant  des condensateurs.DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — Technologie offrant une connexion Internet constante et à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique  analogique. durée de fonctionnement d'une batterie — Nombre de minutes ou d'heures durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut alimenter celui-ci. durée de vie d'une batterie — Nombre d'années durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut être rechargée. DVD — Digital Versatile Disc (disque polyvalent numérique) — Disque généralement utilisé pour stocker des films. Les disques DVD disposent de deux faces,  alors que les CD n'en ont qu'une. Les lecteurs de DVD lisent également la plupart des supports de CD. DVD Player — Logiciel permettant de lire des films au format DVD. DVD Player affiche une fenêtre comprenant des boutons qui permettent de visionner un  film. DVD+RW — DVD réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un DVD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un DVD+RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. (La  technologie DVD+RW diffère de la technologie DVD-RW.) DVI — Digital Video Interface — Norme de transmission numérique entre un ordinateur et un écran vidéo numérique. L'adaptateur DVI fonctionne grâce à la  puce graphique intégrée de l'ordinateur. E E/S — Entrée/Sortie — Opération ou périphérique entrant et extrayant des données de votre ordinateur. Les claviers et les imprimantes sont des  périphériques d'E/S.  ECC — Error Checking and Correction (code de vérification et de correction d'erreur) — Type de mémoire qui inclut des circuits spéciaux pour tester l'exactitude  des données lorsqu'elles passent par la mémoire. ECP — Extended Capabilities Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. Similaire à EPP, le port ECP  utilise l'accès direct à la mémoire pour transférer des données et améliore généralement les performances. éditeur de texte — Programme utilisé pour créer et modifier les fichiers contenant uniquement du texte ; par exemple le Bloc-notes de Windows utilise un éditeur de texte. En général, les éditeurs de texte n'offrent pas les fonctions de renvoi à la ligne automatique ou de mise en forme (option permettant de  souligner, de changer les polices, etc.). EIDE — Enhanced Integrated Device Electronics (électronique de périphérique intégré améliorée) — Version améliorée de l'interface IDE pour les disques durs  et les lecteurs de CD. EMI — Electromagnetic Interference (interférence électromagnétique) — Interférences électriques causées par radiation électromagnétique. emplacement d'extension — Connecteur de la carte système (sur certains ordinateurs) dans lequel vous insérez une carte d'extension pour la connecter au  bus système. ENERGY STAR® — Exigences de l'agence EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) permettant de diminuer la consommation globale d'électricité. EPP — Enhanced Parallel Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. ESD — ElectroStatic Discharge (décharge électrostatique) — Brève décharge d'électricité statique. Ce type de décharge peut endommager les circuits intégrés  qui se trouvent dans les équipements informatiques et de communication. F F — Fahrenheit — Système de mesure des températures où 32° correspond au point de congélation et 212 au point d'ébullition de l'eau. FCC — Federal Communications Commission (commission fédérale des communications, aux états-Unis) — Bureau américain responsable de l'application de  réglementations relatives aux communications qui évalue la quantité de radiations pouvant être émise par les ordinateurs et autres équipements  électroniques. fichier d'aide — Fichier qui contient des descriptions ou des instructions relatives à un produit. Certains fichiers d'aide sont associés à un programme  particulier, par exemple l'aide de Microsoft Word. D'autres fichiers d'aide fonctionnent comme sources de référence autonomes. Les fichiers d'aide portent  généralement l'extension .hlp ou .chm. fichier readme (lisez-moi) — Fichier texte livré avec un logiciel ou du matériel. En règle générale, les fichiers readme (lisez-moi) fournissent des informations d'installation et décrivent les améliorations ou corrections apportées à un produit et n'ayant pas encore été intégrées à la documentation de ce dernier. formatage — Processus qui prépare un lecteur ou un disque pour le stockage des fichiers. Lorsqu'une disquette ou une unité de disque dur est formatée, les  informations qui y sont contenues sont perdues. fréquence de rafraîchissement — Fréquence, mesurée en Hz, à laquelle les lignes horizontales de l'écran sont rafraîchies (on parle parfois aussi de fréquence  verticale). Plus le taux de rafraîchissement est élevé, moins le scintillement vidéo est perceptible à l'œil humain. FSB — Front Side Bus (bus frontal) — Canal de données et interface physique entre le processeur et la mémoire RAM. FTP — File Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de fichiers) — Protocole Internet standard utilisé pour échanger des fichiers entre des ordinateurs  connectés à Internet. GG — Gravité — Mesure de poids et de force. GHz — Gigahertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à un milliard de Hz ou à mille MHz. Les vitesses des processeurs, bus et interfaces des ordinateurs  sont en général mesurées en GHz. Go — giga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1024 Mo (1 073 741 824 octets). Ce terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'il fait  référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur. GUI — Graphical User Interface (interface graphique utilisateur) — Logiciel interagissant avec l'utilisateur à l'aide de menus, de fenêtres et d'icônes. La  plupart des programmes fonctionnant avec les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows sont des interfaces graphiques utilisateur. H HTML — Hypertext Markup Language — Ensemble de codes insérés dans une page Web destinée permettant l'affichage dans un navigateur Internet. HTTP — Hypertext Transfer Protocol — Protocole d'échange de fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet.  Hz — Hertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1 cycle par seconde. Les ordinateurs et périphériques électroniques sont souvent mesurés en kilohertz  (kHz), mégahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz) ou térahertz (THz). I IC — Industry Canada — Organisme de réglementation canadien responsable de la régulation des émissions des équipements électronique, comme l'est la  FCC aux états-Unis. IDE — Integrated Device Electronics — Interface pour les périphériques de stockage de masse dans laquelle le contrôleur est intégré à l'unité de disque dur  ou au lecteur de CD. IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — Bus série à hautes performances utilisé pour connecter des périphériques compatibles  IEEE 1394 tels que les appareils numériques et les lecteurs de DVD à l'ordinateur.  intégré — Fait généralement référence aux composants physiquement situés sur la carte système de l'ordinateur. également appelé incorporé. IrDA — Infrared Data Association — Nom de l'organisme responsable de la création des normes internationales en matière de communications infrarouges. IRQ — Interrupt Request (requête d'interruption) — Passerelle électronique associée à un périphérique spécifique et qui permet à ce périphérique de  communiquer avec le processeur. Une IRQ doit être attribuée à chaque périphérique. Bien que deux périphériques puissent partager la même affectation  d'IRQ, ils ne peuvent pas fonctionner simultanément. ISP — Internet Service Provider (fournisseur de services Internet) — Société permettant d'accéder à son serveur hôte afin de vous connecter directement à  Internet, d'envoyer et de recevoir des messages électroniques et d'accéder à des sites Web. Le fournisseur de services Internet (ISP) vous attribue un  progiciel, un nom d'utilisateur et des numéros de téléphone d'accès contre un paiement.  K Kb — kilo-bit — Unité de données égale à 1 024 bits. Mesure de la capacité des circuits intégrés de mémoire. kHz — Kilohertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1000 Hz. Ko — kilo-octet — Unité de données égale à 1 024 octets, mais souvent considérée comme étant égale à 1000 octets. L LAN — Local Area Network — Réseau informatique couvrant une petite zone. Un réseau local se limite en général à un même immeuble ou à quelques  bâtiments rapprochés. Un LAN peut être connecté à un autre réseau local sur n'importe quelle distance par des lignes téléphoniques et des ondes  radioélectriques pour constituer un réseau étendu (WAN, Wide Area Network). lecteur de CD — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire les données des disques compacts. lecteur de CD-RW — Lecteur permettant de lire les CD et d'écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). Vous pouvez graver plusieurs fois des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne peuvent être gravés qu'une seule fois. lecteur de CD-RW/DVD — Lecteur, parfois appelé lecteur mixte, permettant de lire des CD et des DVD, ainsi que d'écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CDRW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). Vous pouvez graver plusieurs fois des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne peuvent être gravés qu'une seule fois. lecteur de disquette — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire des données sur des disquettes. lecteur de DVD — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire les données des DVD et des CD. lecteur de DVD+RW — Lecteur permettant de lire les DVD et la plupart des supports de CD et d'écrire sur des disques DVD+RW (DVD réinscriptibles).lecteur optique — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire ou écrire des données sur des CD ou des DVD. Les lecteurs CD, DVD, CD-RW et les lecteurs combinés CD-RW/DVD sont des exemples de lecteurs optiques. lecteur Zip — Lecteur de disquettes à grande capacité développé par Iomega Corporation qui utilise des disquettes amovibles de 3,5 pouces appelées  disquettes Zip. Les disquettes Zip sont légèrement plus grandes que les disquettes normales, à peu près deux fois plus épaisses et peuvent contenir jusqu'à  100 Mo de données. lecture seule — Données et/ou fichiers que vous pouvez afficher, mais pas modifier ou supprimer. Un fichier peut être en lecture seule si : l Il se trouve sur une disquette physiquement protégée en écriture, un CD ou un DVD.  l Il est situé sur un réseau dans un répertoire sur lequel l'administrateur système n'a affecté des droits qu'à certains individus.  LED — Light-Emitting Diode (diode électroluminescente) — Composant électronique émettant de la lumière pour indiquer le statut de l'ordinateur. logiciel — Tout élément pouvant être stocké sous forme électronique, comme des programmes ou des fichiers informatiques. logiciel anti-virus — Programme spécialement conçu pour identifier, isoler et/ou supprimer des virus de votre ordinateur. LPT — Line Print Terminal — Désignation d'une connexion parallèle à une imprimante ou à un autre périphérique parallèle.  M Mb — mégabit — Mesure de la capacité de la puce de mémoire égale à 1 024 Kb. Mbps — Megabits Per Second (méga-bits par seconde) — 1 million de bits par seconde. Cette mesure est souvent utilisée pour les vitesses de transmission  des réseaux et modems. mémoire — Zone de stockage de données temporaire à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Dans la mesure où les données en mémoire ne sont pas permanentes,  il est recommandé d'enregistrer fréquemment vos fichiers lorsque vous travaillez ainsi qu'avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. Un ordinateur peut contenir plusieurs  formes de mémoire, telles que la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM et la mémoire vidéo. Le terme mémoire est souvent utilisé comme synonyme de mémoire RAM. mémoire cache — Mécanisme de stockage à grande vitesse spécifique. Il peut s'agir d'une section réservée de la mémoire principale ou un périphérique de  stockage rapide indépendant. La mémoire cache permet d'améliorer l'efficacité de nombreuses opérations du processeur. mémoire cache L1 — Mémoire cache principale se trouvant dans le processeur. mémoire cache L2 — Mémoire cache secondaire pouvant être externe au processeur ou intégrée à l'architecture de celui-ci. mémoire vidéo — Mémoire constituée de puces de mémoire dédiées à des fonctions vidéo. La mémoire vidéo est en général plus rapide que la mémoire  système. La quantité de mémoire vidéo installée affecte principalement le nombre de couleurs pouvant être affiché par un programme. MHz — Mégahertz — Mesure de fréquence égale à 1 million de cycles par seconde. Les vitesses des processeurs, bus et interfaces des ordinateurs sont en  général mesurées en MHz. Mo — Mégaoctet — Unité de stockage de donnée égale à 1 048 576 octets. 1 Mo est égal à 1 024 Ko. Ce terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 octets  lorsqu'il fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur. Mo/s —Mégaoctets par seconde — 1 million d'octets par seconde. Cette mesure est souvent utilisée pour les taux de transfert de données. mode affichage étendu — Paramètre d'affichage permettant d'utiliser un deuxième moniteur comme extension de votre écran. Appelé également mode double affichage. mode double affichage — Paramètre d'affichage permettant d'utiliser un deuxième moniteur comme extension de votre écran. Appelé également mode affichage étendu. mode graphique — Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les modes graphiques peuvent afficher un nombre illimité de formes et de polices. mode mise en veille prolongée — Mode de gestion de l'alimentation électrique qui enregistre le contenu de la mémoire dans un espace réservé de l'unité de  disque dur, puis arrête l'ordinateur. Lors du redémarrage de l'ordinateur, les informations de la mémoire enregistrées sur l'unité de disque dur sont restaurées  automatiquement. mode veille — Mode de gestion de l'alimentation qui arrête toutes les opérations inutiles de l'ordinateur pour économiser l'énergie. mode vidéo — Mode qui décrit la façon dont le texte et les graphiques sont affichés sur un écran. Les logiciels à affichage graphique, tels que les systèmes  d'exploitation Windows, s'affichent en modes vidéo définis par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les logiciels à base de caractères, comme les éditeurs de texte, s'affichent en modes vidéo qui se définissent par le nombre de colonnes x et par le nombre de rangées y. modem — Appareil permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs via une ligne téléphonique analogique. Il existe trois types de  modems : externe, carte PC et interne. En général, un modem vous permet de vous connecter à Internet et d'échanger des messages électroniques. module de mémoire — Petite carte de circuits, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte système. module de voyage — Périphérique en plastique conçu pour être inséré dans la baie modulaire de l'ordinateur portable pour réduire le poids de ce dernier. moniteur — Périphérique haute résolution ayant l'apparence d'un téléviseur et affichant les images créées par l'ordinateur. ms — milliseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un millième de seconde. Les temps d'accès des périphériques de stockage sont souvent mesurés en ms.N NIC — Voir carte réseau. ns — nanoseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un milliardième de seconde. numéro de service — étiquette de code à barres apposée sur l'ordinateur permettant d'identifier ce dernier lorsque vous accédez au support de Dell à  l'adresse support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service clientèle ou le support technique de Dell. NVRAM — Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (mémoire rémanente à accès direct) — Type de mémoire qui conserve des données lors de la mise hors tension  de l'ordinateur ou en cas de coupure d'alimentation électrique. La mémoire NVRAM permet de conserver les informations de configuration, comme la date,  l'heure et d'autres options de configuration du système que vous pouvez définir. O octet — Unité de stockage de données de base utilisée par votre ordinateur. Un octet équivaut généralement à 8 bits. P Panneau de configuration — Utilitaire Windows permettant de modifier les paramètres du système d'exploitation et du matériel, comme les paramètres  d'affichage. papier peint — Motif ou image d'arrière-plan du bureau Windows. Vous pouvez changer de papier peint en utilisant le Panneau de configuration Windows. Vous pouvez également numériser votre photo préférée et en faire un papier peint. partition — Zone de stockage physique, située sur un disque dur, qui est affectée à une ou plusieurs zones de stockage logiques appelées unités logiques.  Chaque partition peut contenir plusieurs unités logiques. PCI — Peripheral Component Interconnect — Bus local prenant en charge les chemins de données 32 et 64 bits et fournissant un chemin de données haute  vitesse entre le processeur et les périphériques (vidéo, lecteur, réseau). PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association — Organisme chargé d'établir des normes pour les cartes PC. périphérique — Matériel, tel qu'une unité de disque, une imprimante ou un clavier, installé sur votre ordinateur ou connecté à celui-ci. périphérique d'accueil — Voir réplicateur de ports. pilote — Logiciel permettant au système d'exploitation de contrôler un périphérique, par exemple une imprimante. La plupart des périphériques ne  fonctionnent pas correctement si le pilote approprié n'est pas installé sur l'ordinateur. pilote de périphérique — Voir pilote. PIN — Personal Identification Number — Séquence de nombres et/ou de lettres utilisée pour restreindre les accès non autorisés aux réseaux informatiques  ainsi qu'à d'autres systèmes sécurisés. PIO — Programmed Input/Output (Entrée/Sortie programmée) — Méthode de transfert des données entre deux périphériques en utilisant le processeur  comme une partie du chemin de données. pixel — Point unique sur un écran. Les pixels sont disposés en rangées et en colonnes afin de créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 800 x 600,  indique le nombre de pixels en largeur et le nombre de pixels en hauteur. Plug-and-Play — Possibilité pour l'ordinateur de configurer automatiquement des périphériques. La norme Plug-and-Play permet d'installer et de configurer automatiquement un périphérique et assure la compatibilité avec le matériel existant si le BIOS, le système d'exploitation et tous les périphériques sont  compatibles Plug-and-Play. POST — Power-On Self-Test (autotest de démarrage) — Programme de diagnostic, chargés automatiquement par le BIOS, qui effectue des tests de base sur  la plupart des composants de l'ordinateur, comme la mémoire, les unités de disque dur, etc. Si aucun problème n'est détecté lors de l'autotest de démarrage,  l'ordinateur continue son démarrage. processeur — Puce électronique qui interprète et exécute les instructions des programmes. Le microprocesseur est parfois appelé unité centrale ou CPU. programme — Logiciel permettant de traiter des données, comme un tableur, un traitement de texte, une base de données ou un jeu. Vous devez disposer  d'un système d'exploitation pour exécuter des programmes. programme de configuration — Programme utilisé pour installer et configurer le matériel et le logiciel. Le programme setup.exe ou install.exe est généralement livré avec la plupart des progiciels Windows. Il ne faut pas confondre programme de configuration et programme de configuration du système. programme de configuration du système — Utilitaire qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Le programme de  configuration du système vous permet de configurer les options sélectionnables par l'utilisateur dans le BIOS, comme la date et l'heure ou le mot de passe  système. Ne modifiez pas les paramètres de ce programme à moins de connaître avec exactitude les effets de chacun des paramètres sur l'ordinateur. protecteur de surtension — Dispositif qui empêche les sautes de tension, pouvant survenir au cours d'orages, par exemple, de pénétrer dans l'ordinateur par  l'intermédiaire de la prise électrique. Les protecteurs de surtension ne protègent pas de la foudre ou des baisses de tension qui se produisent lorsque la  tension descend de plus de 20 % au-dessous du niveau normal de tension de ligne à courant alternatif. Les connexions réseau ne peuvent pas être protégées par des protecteurs de surtension. Par conséquent, déconnectez toujours le câble réseau du  connecteur réseau pendant les orages. protégé en écriture — Fichiers ou supports ne pouvant pas être modifiés. Utilisez la protection en écriture lorsque vous voulez empêcher la modification ou la  destruction des données. Pour qu'une disquette de 3,5 pouces soit protégée en écriture, faites glisser sa languette de protection en position ouverte.PS/2 — Personal System/2 — Type de connecteur permettant de relier un clavier, une souris ou un pavé numérique compatible PS/2. PXE — Pre-boot eXecution Environment — Norme WfM (Wired for Management) permettant à des ordinateurs en réseau sans système d'exploitation d'être  configurés et démarrés à distance. R raccourci — Icône permettant d'accéder rapidement à des programmes, fichiers, dossiers et lecteurs fréquemment utilisés. En double-cliquant sur un raccourci placé sur votre bureau Windows, vous pouvez ouvrir le dossier ou le fichier correspondant sans avoir à le rechercher au préalable. Les raccourcis ne modifient  pas l'emplacement des fichiers. Si vous supprimez un raccourci, le fichier d'origine n'est pas affecté. Vous pouvez également renommer un raccourci. raccourci clavier — Commande nécessitant d'appuyer simultanément sur plusieurs touches. RAID — redundant array of independent disks — Méthode permettant d'assurer la redondance des données. Les types de RAID les plus fréquents sont les  RAID 0, 1, 5, 10 et 50. RAM — Random-Access Memory — Zone principale de stockage temporaire pour les instructions et les données des programmes. Toute information stockée  dans la RAM est définitivement perdue lorsque vous éteignez l'ordinateur. réplicateur de ports — Périphérique d'amarrage qui permet d'utiliser aisément un moniteur, un clavier, une souris ou d'autres périphériques avec votre  ordinateur portable. résolution — Netteté et clarté d'une image produite par une imprimante ou affichée sur un écran. Plus la résolution est élevée, plus l'image est nette. résolution vidéo — Voir résolution. RFI — Radio Frequency Interference (interférence de fréquence radio) — Interférence générée à des fréquences radio caractéristiques, entre 10 kHz et  100 000 MHz. Les fréquences radio se trouvent à l'extrémité inférieure du spectre de fréquences électromagnétiques et sont plus susceptibles de présenter  des interférences que les radiations de plus haute fréquence, telles que les infrarouges et la lumière. ROM — Read-Only Memory (mémoire morte) — Mémoire qui stocke des données et programmes que l'ordinateur ne peut pas supprimer ou dans laquelle il ne  peut pas écrire. à la différence de la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM conserve son contenu même après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. Certains programmes  indispensables au fonctionnement de l'ordinateur se trouvent dans la mémoire ROM. RPM — Revolutions Per Minute (tours par minute) — Mesure le nombre de rotations effectuées par minute. La vitesse des disques durs est souvent mesurée  en RPM. RTC — Real Time Clock (horloge temps réel)— Horloge alimentée par batterie, située sur la carte système, qui conserve la date et l'heure après l'arrêt de  l'ordinateur. RTCRST — Real Time Clock Reset — Cavalier sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs pouvant souvent être utilisé pour résoudre les problèmes. S S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — Format de fichier de transfert audio permettant de transférer des données audio entre deux fichiers sans  conversion préalable au format analogique, ce qui pourrait dégrader la qualité du fichier. sauvegarde — Copie d'un programme ou d'un fichier de données sur une disquette, un CD ou une unité de disque dur. Par précaution, il convient de  sauvegarder régulièrement les fichiers de données de votre unité de disque dur. ScanDisk — Utilitaire Microsoft qui recherche la présence d'erreurs dans les fichiers et les dossiers, ainsi que sur la surface du disque dur. ScanDisk s'exécute  souvent lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après un blocage. SDRAM — Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory — Type de mémoire vive dynamique (DRAM) synchronisée avec la vitesse d'horloge optimale du  processeur. segmentation des données — Technique de répartition des données sur plusieurs lecteurs de disques. La segmentation des données peut accélérer les  opérations de récupération des données sur les disques. Les ordinateurs utilisant la segmentation des données permettent généralement à l'utilisateur de  sélectionner la taille des unités de données ou la taille des segments.  séquence d'amorçage — Spécifie l'ordre des périphériques à partir desquels l'ordinateur tente de s'initialiser. souris — Dispositif de pointage qui contrôle le mouvement du curseur à l'écran. Il suffit de faire glisser la souris sur une surface plane et rigide pour déplacer le  pointeur ou le curseur à l'écran. SVGA — Super-Video Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo. Les résolutions SVGA types sont de 800 x 600 et de  1 024 x 768. Le nombre de couleurs et la résolution affichés par un programme dépendent des capacités de l'écran, du contrôleur vidéo et de ses pilotes, ainsi que de la  quantité de mémoire vidéo installée dans l'ordinateur. SXGA — Super-eXtended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à  1 280 x 1 024. SXGA+ — Super-eXtended Graphics Array plus — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à  1 400 x 1 050.T TAPI — Telephony Application Programming Interface — Permet aux programmes Microsoft Windows de fonctionner avec de nombreux périphériques de  téléphonie (voix, données, télécopie et vidéo). U UPS — Uninterruptible Power Supply (alimentation sans interruption) — Source d'alimentation de sauvegarde utilisée lorsque l'alimentation est coupée ou  descend à un niveau de tension inacceptable. Un onduleur permet à l'ordinateur de fonctionner pendant un temps limité en cas de panne d'électricité. Les  systèmes d'onduleur permettent en général de supprimer les surtensions et peuvent également offrir des régulations de tension. Les petits systèmes  d'onduleur peuvent fournir une alimentation par batterie pendant quelques minutes afin de vous permettre d'arrêter l'ordinateur. USB — Universal Serial Bus — Interface matérielle pour les périphériques lents comme un clavier, une souris, une manette de jeu, un scanner, un jeu de hautparleurs, une imprimante, des périphériques large bande (DSL et modems par câble), des périphériques d'imagerie ou de stockage compatibles USB. Les  périphériques sont branchés directement dans un support à 4 broches, sur votre ordinateur, ou dans un concentrateur à plusieurs ports qui se raccorde à  votre ordinateur. Les périphériques USB peuvent être connectés et déconnectés alors que l'ordinateur est sous tension et peuvent également être connectés  en guirlande. UTP — Unshielded Twisted Pair (paire torsadée non blindée) — Type de câble utilisé dans la plupart des réseaux téléphoniques et dans certains réseaux  informatiques. Les paires de câbles non blindés sont torsadées afin de les protéger des interférences électromagnétiques et sont utilisées à la place des  câbles comportant une gaine métallique autour de chaque paire de fils. UXGA — Ultra-eXtended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à  1 600 x 1 200. V V — volt — Unité de mesure de la puissance électrique ou de la force électromotrice. Un V apparaît sur une résistance de 1 ohm lorsqu'elle est traversée par  un courant de 1 ampère. virus — Programme conçu pour vous nuire ou détruire les données stockées sur votre ordinateur. Un virus se déplace d'un ordinateur à un autre via une  disquette infectée, un logiciel téléchargé à partir d'Internet ou des pièces jointes à des messages électroniques. Lorsque vous démarrez un programme  infecté, le virus intégré démarre lui aussi. Le virus d'amorçage est un type de virus courant qui est stocké dans les secteurs d'amorçage d'une disquette. Si la disquette reste dans le lecteur lorsque  l'ordinateur est éteint, puis allumé, celui-ci est infecté lors de la lecture des secteurs d'amorçage de la disquette en attendant de trouver le système  d'exploitation. Si l'ordinateur est infecté, le virus d'initialisation peut se reproduire sur toutes les disquettes lues ou écrites sur cet ordinateur jusqu'à son  éradication. vitesse de bus — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle un bus peut transférer des informations. vitesse d'horloge — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle les composants de l'ordinateur connectés au bus système fonctionnent.  W W — watt — Mesure du courant électrique. Un watt est 1 ampère de courant dont le débit est de 1 volt. Wh — watt-heure — Unité de mesure utilisée couramment pour indiquer la capacité approximative d'une batterie. Par exemple, une batterie de 66 Wh peut  fournir 66 W de courant pendant 1 heure ou 33 W pendant 2 heures. X XGA — eXtended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1 024 x 768. Z ZIF — Zero Insertion Force — Type de connecteur ou de support permettant à une puce d'être installée ou retirée sans forcer sur la puce ou le support. zip — Format de compression des données répandu. Les fichiers compressés au format Zip sont appelés fichiers Zip et portent en général l'extension .zip. Un type spécial de fichier zippé est un fichier à extraction automatique, dont l'extension est .exe. Pour dézipper un fichier à extraction automatique, doublecliquez sur ce fichier. zone de notification — Section de la barre des tâches Windows qui contient des icônes permettant d'accéder rapidement aux programmes et aux fonctions de  l'ordinateur, notamment à l'horloge, au contrôle du volume et à l'état de l'imprimante. Appelée également barre d'état système. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Disque dur Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Installation d'un lecteur de disque dur 1. Si vous procédez à l'installation d'un nouveau disque dur et non à un remplacement, fixez les glissières d'installation situées à l'intérieur du capot et  passez à l'étape 8. 2. Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, sauvegardez vos fichiers avant de commencer la procédure.  3. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier s'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  4. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 5. Saisissez les glissières d'installation, poussez-les l'une vers l'autre, faites glisser le lecteur légèrement vers l'avant puis faites-le pivoter pour le retirer du support (voir l'illustration). 6. Retirez les câbles de données et d'alimentation des connecteurs du disque dur.  7. Retirez les glissières de l'ancien disque dur et fixez-les sur le disque dur de remplacement. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de l'alimentation électrique avant de retirer le  disque dur. AVIS : pour prévenir les dommages causés par les décharges électrostatiques aux composants de votre ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques du système. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique non peinte  du châssis de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : pour ne pas endommager le lecteur, ne le déposez pas sur une surface dure. Posez-le sur une surface souple, un tapis de mousse par exemple. 1 Unité de disque dur 3 Connecteur du câble d'alimentation 2 Glissières d'installation du lecteur (2) 4 Connecteur du câble de données8. Branchez les câbles d'interface et d'alimentation sur les connecteurs du disque dur, après avoir vérifié que les connecteurs sont dans le bon sens.  9. Faites glisser le disque dur dans le support. 10. Remettez le capot en place. 11. Remettez le cache de protection des câbles en place (si vous l'utilisez).  12. Branchez l'ordinateur à l'adaptateur et les périphériques aux prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Consultez la documentation fournie avec le lecteur pour connaître les instructions d'installation du ou des logiciels requis pour le fonctionnement de ce  lecteur. 13. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.  14. Une fois le capot remis, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affiche le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de  l'ordinateur :  ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 15. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). 1 Lecteur 2 Glissières d'installation du lecteur (2) 3 Vis (4) AVIS : la plupart des connecteurs série d'alimentation et d'interface ATA sont conçus de manière à éviter une mauvaise insertion ; une encoche ou  l'emplacement d'une broche manquante sur un connecteur correspond à une patte ou à un trou sur l'autre connecteur. Avant de connecter les câbles à  l'unité, assurez-vous que les connecteurs sont dans le bon sens. AVIS : pour raccorder un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale puis sur l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le  détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. 16. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement le lecteur avant de passer à l'étape suivante.  Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. 17. Testez le disque dur en exécutant les diagnostics Dell. 18. Installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur.  Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Mémoire  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Consignes d'installation de la mémoire Installation de mémoire Retrait de mémoire Consignes d'installation de la mémoire Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, consultez la section "Mémoire" dans la rubrique Spécifications techniques. Présentation de la mémoire DDR2  Pour de meilleures performances, les modules de mémoire DDR2 doivent être installés par paires de même taille, même vitesse et même technologie. Si les modules de mémoire DDR2 ne sont pas installés par paires, l'ordinateur continuera de fonctionner mais ses performances peuvent légèrement diminuer. Les configurations de mémoire recommandées sont les suivantes : l Un module de mémoire installé dans le connecteur CHA_DIMM. ou l Une paire de modules de mémoire installés dans les connecteurs CHA_DIMM et CHB_DIMM. l Veillez à installer un module de mémoire à une seule rangée de connexions dans l'emplacement CHA_DIMM (le plus proche du processeur) avant  d'installer un module dans l'autre connecteur. Installation de mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Appuyez sur les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur de module de mémoire pour les écarter.  AVIS : avant d'installer de nouveaux modules de mémoire, téléchargez le BIOS le plus récent pour votre ordinateur à partir du site support.dell.com. AVIS : n'installez aucun module de mémoire à code correcteur d'erreurs (ECC).  REMARQUE : la mémoire achetée auprès de Dell est couverte par la garantie de votre ordinateur.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique  non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur.3. Alignez l'encoche de la partie inférieure du module avec la barre transversale du connecteur.  4. Insérez le module dans le connecteur jusqu'à ce qu'il se mette en place.  Si vous insérez le module correctement, les clips de fixation s'enclenchent dans les découpes à chaque extrémité du module. 5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 6. Branchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques aux prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Suite à l'ouverture et à la fermeture du capot, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affichera le message suivant sur l'écran au prochain  démarrage du système : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 7. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). 8. L'ordinateur détecte que la nouvelle mémoire ne correspond pas aux informations de configuration existantes et génère le message suivant :  The amount of system memory has changed. Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility. 1 Découpes (2) 4 Encoche 2 Connecteur 5 Clips de fixation (2) 3 Module de mémoire 6 Connecteurs de mémoire sur la carte système AVIS : pour éviter d'endommager le module de mémoire, enfoncez le module dans le connecteur en appliquant une force égale à chaque extrémité du  module. AVIS : pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le  détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. (La quantité de mémoire système a été modifiée.  Appuyez sur la touche F1 pour continuer ou sur la touche F2 pour lancer l'utilitaire de configuration.) 9. Appuyez sur  pour accéder à la configuration du système et vérifier les valeurs de System Memory (Mémoire système).  L'ordinateur doit avoir modifié la valeur de System Memory (Mémoire système) pour refléter la nouvelle capacité de mémoire installée, la vitesse et le  mode (simple ou double). Vérifiez que les informations sont correctes. Si la valeur est correcte, passez à l'étape 11. 10. Si la capacité mémoire totale n'est pas correcte, éteignez et débranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques des prises électriques. Ouvrez le capot de  l'ordinateur et vérifiez les modules de mémoire installés pour vous assurer qu'ils sont correctement positionnés dans leurs supports. Répétez ensuite  les étapes 5, 6 et 7. 11. Lorsque le paramètre System Memory (Mémoire système) est correct, appuyez sur <Échap> pour quitter le programme de configuration du système.  12. Exécutez les diagnostics Dell pour vérifier si les modules de mémoire fonctionnent correctement.  Retrait de mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Appuyez sur les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur de module de mémoire pour les écarter.  3. Saisissez le module et retirez-le. Si vous avez des difficultés à le retirer, déplacez doucement le module de l'arrière vers l'avant et vice-versa pour le dégager du connecteur. Retour à la page du sommaire ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique  non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur.Retour à la page du sommaire Baie modulaire Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Installation d'un périphérique lorsque votre ordinateur est éteint Installation d'un périphérique sur un système Microsoft Windows® XP Fixation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire Vous pouvez installer un périphérique portable Dell™ tel qu'un lecteur de disquette, un lecteur de CD/DVD ou une deuxième unité de disque dur dans la baie  modulaire. L'ordinateur Dell est livré avec un lecteur de CD/DVD ou un emplacement prédécoupé dans la baie modulaire. Pour fixer un lecteur dans la baie modulaire, vous  disposez de deux méthodes :  l Loquet de verrouillage (accessible en ouvrant le capot) l Vis de fixation de périphérique (emballée séparément) Consultez la section "Fixation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire" pour plus d'informations sur cette opération. Installation d'un périphérique lorsque votre ordinateur est éteint Pour installer un périphérique dans la baie modulaire : 1. Si la baie modulaire contient une entretoise, retirez-la et passez à l'étape 5. Si l'entretoise est verrouillée, retirez la vis de fixation de périphérique. 2. Si la baie modulaire contient un périphérique verrouillé, retirez le capot de l'ordinateur et levez le loquet de verrouillage du module pour libérer celui-ci. Si une vis de fixation maintient le périphérique, retirez-la. 3. Appuyez sur le taquet de déverrouillage pour faire ressortir le loquet.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. AVIS : pour éviter de les abîmer, rangez les périphériques dans un endroit sec et sûr lorsqu'ils ne sont pas installés dans l'ordinateur. Évitez d'exercer  une pression quelconque ou de placer des objets lourds sur ces derniers. 1 Loquet de verrouillage du module4. Tirez sur le taquet de déverrouillage pour retirer le périphérique de la baie modulaire.  5. Faites glisser le nouveau périphérique dans la baie modulaire.  6. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez verrouiller le nouveau périphérique dans la baie modulaire en déplaçant le loquet de verrouillage vers la position  Verrouillé.  7. Si vous aviez retiré le capot pour fixer le périphérique dans la baie, remettez-le en place. Installation d'un périphérique sur un système Microsoft Windows® XP 1. Si un périphérique est installé dans la baie modulaire, double-cliquez sur l'icône Retirer le périphérique en toute sécurité dans la barre des tâches.  2. Cliquez sur le périphérique que vous voulez éjecter.  3. Lorsqu'un message vous informe que le périphérique peut être retiré, procédez au retrait de celui-ci. 4. Faites glisser le nouveau périphérique dans la baie modulaire.  1 Taquet de déverrouillage AVIS : ne posez aucun objet lourd sur l'ordinateur. Cela pourrait gêner le retrait des périphériques installés dans la baie modulaire.  1 Taquet de déverrouillage REMARQUE : vous ne pouvez pas retirer un périphérique si l'ordinateur est allumé et le périphérique verrouillé dans la baie modulaire. Vous devez  arrêter l'ordinateur et suivrez les étapes de la section "Installation d'un périphérique lorsque votre ordinateur est éteint" pour retirer un périphérique  verrouillé.  AVIS : ne posez aucun objet lourd sur l'ordinateur. Cela pourrait gêner le retrait des périphériques installés dans la baie modulaire. Fixation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire 1. Par mesure de sécurité, l'ordinateur est équipé d'un loquet de verrouillage qui permet de fixer le périphérique installé dans la baie modulaire. Pour  accéder à ce loquet, retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Vous pouvez aussi attacher le périphérique dans la baie modulaire à l'aide de la vis de fixation fournie avec votre ordinateur (emballée séparément).  Retour à la page du sommaire 1 Bas de l'ordinateur 2 Vis de fixation de périphériqueRetour à la page du sommaire Ajout et retrait de composants Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Avant de commencer Cette section contient les procédures d'installation et de retrait des composants de l'ordinateur. Sauf mention contraire, chaque procédure suppose que les  conditions suivantes sont réunies : l Vous avez suivi les étapes de la section "Arrêt de l'ordinateur." l Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité du Guide des informations sur le produit fourni avec votre ordinateur. Outils recommandés Les procédures présentées dans ce document nécessitent l'utilisation des outils suivants : l Petit tournevis plat l Tournevis cruciforme l Programme de mise à jour du BIOS, sur disquette ou sur CD  Arrêt de l'ordinateur Utilisez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour protéger votre ordinateur contre des dommages potentiels et pour assurer votre sécurité personnelle. 1. Arrêtez l'ordinateur.  2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques reliés sont éteints. Si votre ordinateur et les périphériques qui y sont connectés ne se sont pas  éteints automatiquement lorsque vous avez éteint votre ordinateur, éteignez-les maintenant. 3. Débranchez également tous les fils de téléphone ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur.  4. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et des périphériques reliés, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à  la masse. 5. Retirez le cache de protection des câbles (si vous l'utilisez).  6. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. Avant de commencer Disque dur Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur Mémoire Pile Baie modulaire Commutateur d'intrusion du châssis Processeur Haut-parleur du châssis Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : manipulez les composants et les cartes avec soin. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts d'une carte. Tenez la carte par les bords ou le support métallique de montage. Tenez les pièces, telles que le processeur, par les rebords ou par les supports métalliques. Ne tenez  jamais les broches d'un composant. AVIS : seul un technicien agréé peut effectuer des réparations sur votre système. Les dommages causés par des interventions de maintenance non  autorisées par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie.  AVIS : lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur son connecteur ou sur sa boucle de serrage, et non pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles  possèdent un connecteur avec des pattes de fixation ; si vous déconnectez ce type de câble, appuyez sur les pattes avant de déconnecter. Lorsque  vous tirez sur les connecteurs, maintenez ces derniers correctement alignés, afin d'éviter tout risque de torsion des broches. Pour la même raison, lors  du raccordement d'un câble, vérifiez bien l'orientation et l'alignement des deux connecteurs.  AVIS : avant de commencer à effectuer des manipulations dans l'ordinateur, effectuez les étapes suivantes :  AVIS : pour déconnecter un câble réseau, débranchez-le d'abord de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise réseau murale.  ATTENTION : pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir le capot. AVIS : mettez vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte sur le châssis, telle que la partie métallique située à l'arrière de  l'ordinateur, avant de toucher un élément à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Pendant votre intervention, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique  non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Processeur Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Soulevez le carénage du ventilateur et retirez-le. 3. Retirez le dissipateur thermique. a. Retirez le module de mémoire (voir "Retrait de mémoire") le plus proche du dissipateur thermique. b. Appuyez sur le levier du socle de rétention jusqu'à ce que le dissipateur thermique se libère.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot. AVIS : lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas la face inférieure du nouveau processeur.  AVIS : lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du connecteur, et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. 1 Carénage  du ventilateur ATTENTION : le dissipateur thermique peut chauffer énormément. Laissez-le refroidir avant de le manipuler.c. Soulevez délicatement le dissipateur thermique pour l'enlever du processeur.  4. Soulevez le levier de verrouillage jusqu'à ce que le processeur soit dégagé puis retirez le processeur de son support.  5. Déballez le nouveau processeur en prenant garde de ne pas toucher sa face inférieure.  6. Si le levier d'éjection sur le support n'est pas complètement relevé, relevez-le. 7. Alignez les encoches avant et arrière du processeur avec celles du connecteur.  8. Alignez les angles de la broche 1 du processeur et du connecteur.  1 Dessus du dissipateur thermique 3 Socle de rétention 2 Dissipateur thermique 4 Levier AVIS : posez le dissipateur thermique avec la graisse thermique vers le haut. 1 Processeur 2 Support 3 Levier de verrouillage AVIS : reliez-vous à la masse en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du connecteur, et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. AVIS : pour éviter tout dommage, assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement aligné sur le support et n'exercez pas une force excessive quand  vous le mettez en place. 9. Installez doucement le processeur dans le socle et vérifiez qu'il est correctement positionné.  10. Lorsque le processeur est complètement installé dans le support, abaissez le levier de verrouillage jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche afin de maintenir le  processeur bien en place. Si vous installez un kit Dell de remplacement de processeur, renvoyez le processeur à Dell, dans le même emballage que celui dans lequel vous a été  envoyé le kit de remplacement. 11. Placez une extrémité du dissipateur thermique sous la patte du socle de rétention du côté opposé au levier (voir l'illustration). Abaissez le dissipateur  thermique sur le microprocesseur afin qu'il s'insère correctement sous la patte, à l'autre extrémité du socle de rétention.  12. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 13. Remettez le cache de protection des câbles en place (si vous l'utilisez). 14. Branchez l'ordinateur au câble d'alimentation et les périphériques aux prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 1 Encoche d'alignement arrière 2 Encoche d'alignement avant 3 Alignement des angles de la broche 1 du processeur et du support AVIS : reliez-vous à la masse en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  1 Dissipateur thermique 2 Socle de rétention 3 Levier AVIS : pour raccorder un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble dans la prise réseau murale puis dans l'ordinateur. Une fois le capot remis, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affiche le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de  l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 15. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). Retour à la page du sommaire REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le  détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. Retour à la page du sommaire Réinstallation des pilotes et du système d'exploitation  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Les pilotes Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP Réinstallation de Microsoft Windows XP Les pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ?  Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier par exemple. Tous les périphériques nécessitent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et tout autre programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique dispose de son propre jeu de commandes  spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. Dell vous livre l'ordinateur avec les pilotes requis déjà installés ; aucune installation ou configuration supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. De nombreux pilotes, les pilotes de clavier par exemple, sont fournis avec votre système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows. Vous devez installer des pilotes si vous : l mettez à niveau votre système d'exploitation ; l réinstallez votre système d'exploitation ; l connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un périphérique, identifiez le pilote à l'origine du problème et le mettez-le à niveau si nécessaire. Windows XP 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2. Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performance et maintenance. 3. Cliquez sur Système. 4. Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5. Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6. Faites défiler la liste pour rechercher des périphériques comportant un point d'exclamation (un cercle jaune et un [!]) sur l'icône du périphérique.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. AVIS : vous devez utiliser Windows XP avec le Service Pack 1 ou suivant pour la réinstallation.  REMARQUE : si vous avez installé une image unique sur votre ordinateur ou si vous avez dû réinstaller le système d'exploitation, lancez l'utilitaire DSS.  Cet utilitaire est disponible sur le CD Pilotes et utilitaires, ainsi que sur le site support.dell.com. AVIS : le CD Pilotes et utilitaires peut contenir des pilotes pour des systèmes d'exploitation qui ne sont pas installés sur votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que vous installez les logiciels appropriés à votre système d'exploitation. Lorsqu'un point d'exclamation se trouve à côté du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau. Réinstallation des pilotes et des utilitaires  Utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Microsoft Windows XP Si un problème apparaît sur votre ordinateur après avoir installé ou mis à jour le pilote, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de  Windows XP pour remplacer le pilote avec la version précédemment installée. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2. Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performance et maintenance. 3. Cliquez sur Système. 4. Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5. Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le lecteur qui a été installé, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 7. Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8. Cliquez sur Revenir à la version précédente. Si le programme Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne corrige pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système pour que votre ordinateur  revienne à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était avant que vous n'installiez le nouveau pilote. Utilisation du CD Pilotes et utilitaires Si le programme Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ou la fonction Restauration du système ne corrigent pas le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du  CD Pilotes et utilitaires (ou "Resource CD"). 1. Insérez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires. S'il s'agit de votre première utilisation du CD Pilotes et utilitaires, la fenêtre d'installation s'ouvre et vous indique que le CD va commencer l'installation.  Cliquez sur OK puis suivez les invites du programme d'installation pour terminer l'installation. 2. Dans l'écran Welcome Dell System Owner (Vous êtes propriétaire d'un système Dell, bienvenue), cliquez sur Next (Suivant). 3. Effectuez les sélections appropriées pour System Model (Modèle du système), Operating System (Système d'exploitation), Device Type (Type de périphérique) et Topic (Rubrique). 4. Dans le menu déroulant Topic (Rubrique), cliquez sur My Drivers (Mes pilotes). Le CD Pilotes et utilitaires analyse le système d'exploitation et les éléments matériels de votre ordinateur et affiche ensuite une liste de pilotes de  périphériques pour la configuration de votre système. 5. Cliquez sur le pilote approprié puis suivez les instructions pour télécharger le pilote sur votre ordinateur.  Pour afficher la liste de tous les pilotes disponibles pour votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Drivers (Pilotes) dans le menu déroulant Topic (Rubrique). Pour accéder aux fichiers d'aide du CD Pilotes et utilitaires, cliquez sur le bouton marqué d'un point d'interrogation ou sur le lien Help (Aide) situé en haut de  l'écran. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP AVIS : le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et le CD Pilotes et utilitaires fournissent des pilotes appropriés aux ordinateurs  Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes obtenus auprès d'autres sources, il se peut que votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement.  REMARQUE : pour accéder aux pilotes de périphérique et à la documentation de l'utilisateur, vous devez utiliser le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pendant que  l'ordinateur exécute Windows. Le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows XP comporte la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur  (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de  fonctionner correctement. Reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support technique de Windows pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Restauration du système. Création d'un point de restauration  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2. Cliquez sur Restauration du système. 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2. Vérifiez que l'option Restaurer mon ordinateur à une heure antérieure est sélectionnée et cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Cliquez sur la date à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer l'ordinateur.  L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration inclut un calendrier vous permettant de visualiser et de sélectionner les points de restauration. Toutes  les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4. Sélectionnez un point de restauration et cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont  disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5. Cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois que la fonction Restauration du système termine la collecte des données, l'écran Restauration terminée apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre  automatiquement. 6. Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes un utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2. Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration et cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système s'affiche et l'ordinateur redémarre.  4. Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Activation de la fonctionnalité Restauration du système AVIS : effectuez des sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne gère pas et ne récupère pas vos  fichiers de données.  AVIS : avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours  d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas  terminée.  AVIS : avant d'annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours  d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas  terminée. Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement  désactivée. Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2. Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3. Cliquez sur Système. 4. Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5. Vérifiez que la case à cocher Désactiver la Restauration du système est désactivée.  Réinstallation de Microsoft Windows XP Avant de commencer Si vous envisagez de réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour résoudre un problème avec un pilote récemment installé, utilisez d'abord la  fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP. Si le programme Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne corrige pas le problème,  utilisez la fonction Restauration du système pour que votre système d'exploitation revienne à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était avant que vous  n'installiez le nouveau pilote de périphérique. Pour réinstaller Windows XP, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : l CD du système d'exploitation Dell™ l CD Pilotes et utilitaires Dell Réinstallation de Windows XP  Pour réinstaller Windows XP, suivez toutes les étapes des sections ci-après, dans l'ordre indiqué. Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre de 1 à 2 heures. Après avoir réinstallé le système d'exploitation, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de  périphériques, le programme anti-virus et d'autres logiciels. Initialisation à partir du CD Système d'exploitation. 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et les programmes ouverts. 2. Insérez le CD Système d'exploitation. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Installer Windows XP s'affiche. 3. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.  4. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  AVIS : vous devez utiliser Windows XP avec le Service Pack 1 ou suivant pour la réinstallation.  REMARQUE : si vous avez installé une image unique sur votre ordinateur ou si vous avez dû réinstaller le système d'exploitation, lancez l'utilitaire DSS.  Cet utilitaire est disponible sur le CD Pilotes et utilitaires, ainsi que sur le site support.dell.com. AVIS : avant d'effectuer l'installation, sauvegardez tous les fichiers de données de votre disque dur principal. Pour les configurations de disque dur  conventionnelles, le disque dur principal correspond au premier disque dur détecté par l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : le CD Pilotes et utilitaires contient les pilotes installés à l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez-le pour charger les pilotes requis, y compris les pilotes nécessaires si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un contrôleur RAID.  AVIS : le CD Système d'exploitation fournit des options pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP. Ces options peuvent écraser les fichiers et  affecter les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas votre Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du  support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller  Windows XP. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le logiciel. Si le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à l'affichage du bureau Windows, éteignez de nouveau l'ordinateur et réessayez. 5. Appuyez sur les touches de direction pour sélectionner CD-ROM et appuyez sur .  6. Lorsque le message Press any key to boot from your CD... (Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer à partir du CD) s'affiche, appuyez sur une  touche du clavier. Installation de Windows XP 1. Lorsque l'écran Installation de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur < pour sélectionner Pour installer Windows maintenant. 2. Lisez les informations de l'écran Contrat de licence Microsoft Windows puis appuyez sur pour accepter ce contrat. 3. Si Windows XP est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur et que vous voulez récupérer vos données Windows XP, tapez r pour sélectionnez l'option de  réparation, puis retirez le CD du lecteur.  4. Si vous voulez installer une nouvelle copie de Windows XP, appuyez sur <Échap> pour sélectionner cette option.  5. Appuyez sur  pour sélectionner la partition en surbrillance (recommandé), puis suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  L'écran Configuration Windows XP s'affiche et le système d'exploitation commence la copie des fichiers et l'installation des périphériques. L'ordinateur  redémarre automatiquement à plusieurs reprises. 6. Lorsque l'écran Options régionales et linguistiques s'affiche, sélectionnez les paramètres appropriés, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7. Entrez votre nom et celui de votre société (facultatif) dans la fenêtre Personnalisez votre logiciel, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8. Entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur (ou acceptez le nom proposé) ainsi qu'un mot de passe lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur et mot de passe Administrateur s'affiche, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9. Si l'écran Informations de numérotation pour le modem apparaît, entrez les informations requises puis cliquez sur Suivant. 10. Entrez la date, l'heure et le fuseau horaire dans la fenêtre Paramètres de la date et de l'heure, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 11. Si l'écran Paramètres de gestion de réseau apparaît, cliquez sur Standard, puis sur Suivant. 12. Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel et que vous êtes invité à fournir des informations complémentaires concernant votre configuration réseau,  indiquez vos choix. Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de vos paramètres, acceptez les sélections par défaut.  Windows XP installe les composants du système d'exploitation et configure l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement. 13. Lorsque l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 14. Lorsque le message Comment cet ordinateur sera-t-il connecté à Internet ? s'affiche, cliquez sur . 15. Lorsque l'écran Êtes-vous prêt à vous enregistrer auprès de Microsoft ? apparaît, sélectionnez Non, pas maintenant puis cliquez sur Suivant. 16. Lorsque l'écran Qui va utiliser cet ordinateur ? apparaît, vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 5 utilisateurs.  17. Cliquez sur Suivant. 18. Cliquez sur Terminer pour terminer la configuration et retirez le CD du lecteur. 19. Réinstallez les pilotes appropriés à l'aide du CD Pilotes et utilitaires. 20. Réinstallez votre logiciel anti-virus. 21. Réinstallez vos programmes.  Retour à la page du sommaire REMARQUE : le temps nécessaire pour exécuter le programme d'installation dépend de la taille de votre disque dur et de la vitesse de votre ordinateur.  AVIS : n'appuyez sur aucune touche lorsqu'un message du type suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour redémarrer à partir du CD.. AVIS : n'appuyez sur aucune touche lorsqu'un message du type suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour redémarrer à partir du CD. REMARQUE : pour réinstaller et activer la suite Microsoft Office ou Microsoft Works, vous devez vous munir de la clé produit indiquée sur le boîtier du CD  d'installation. Retour à la page du sommaire Résolution des problèmes  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Problèmes de pile Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. Problèmes de lecteur Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. Problème liés au lecteur de CD et de DVD  Problèmes de pile Problèmes d'alimentation Problèmes de lecteur Problèmes d'imprimante Problèmes de clavier Restauration des paramètres par défaut Blocages du système et incidents logiciels Problèmes de périphérique parallèle ou série Problèmes de mémoire Problèmes de son et de haut-parleur Problèmes de souris Problèmes de vidéo et d'affichage Problèmes de réseau ATTENTION : il peut y avoir un risque d'explosion de la nouvelle pile si elle n'est pas correctement installée. Remplacez la pile par une pile de  type identique ou d'un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant. Débarrassez-vous de la pile usagée selon les instructions du fabricant. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Remplacez la pile. Si à maintes reprises vous devez réinitialiser les informations concernant l'heure et la date après avoir allumé l'ordinateur  ou si l'heure et la date affichées au démarrage sont incorrectes, remplacez la pile (consultez la section "Pile"). Si la pile ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement, contactez Dell. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Testez le lecteur. l Insérez une autre disquette, un autre CD ou un autre DVD pour éliminer la possibilité que le support soit défectueux.  l Insérez une disquette d'amorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Nettoyez le lecteur ou le disque. Consultez la section "Nettoyage de votre ordinateur". Vérifiez la connexion des câbles. Vérifiez l'absence de tout conflit logiciel ou matériel. Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. REMARQUE : en raison des différents formats de disque utilisés à travers le monde, tous les titres DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans tous les lecteurs de  DVD. Réglez le contrôle du volume de Windows.  l Cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans l'angle inférieur droit de votre écran.  l Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume en cliquant sur le curseur et en le faisant glisser vers le haut.  l Vérifiez que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine en cliquant sur l'une des cases à cocher activées.  Vérifiez les haut-parleurs et le caisson de basses. Consultez la section "Problèmes de son et de haut-parleur". Problèmes liés à la gravure d'un CD/DVD-RW Problèmes liés au disque dur  Problèmes de clavier  Blocages du système et incidents logiciels L'ordinateur ne démarre pas  L'ordinateur ne répond plus  Fermez tous les autres programmes. Le lecteur de CD/DVD-RW doit recevoir un flux de données continu pendant l'écriture. Si le flux est  interrompu, une erreur peut se produire. Essayez de fermer tous les programmes avant de graver un CD/DVD-RW. Désactivez le mode Veille de Windows avant d'écrire sur un disque CD/DVD-RW. Consultez la section "Gestion de l'alimentation". Exécution des diagnostics Dell pour disques durs IDE.   L'utilitaire de diagnostics Dell pour disques durs IDE teste l'unité de disque dur pour la dépanner ou confirmer une défaillance. 1. Allumez l'ordinateur (si ce dernier est déjà allumé, redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque F2 = Setup s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur .  3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Exécutez Check Disk.  Windows XP 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local C:. 3. Cliquez sur Propriétés. 4. Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 5. Sous Vérification des erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 6. Cliquez sur Rechercher et tenter une récupération des secteurs défectueux. 7. Cliquez sur Démarrer. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Vérifiez le câble du clavier.  l Assurez-vous que le câble du clavier est fermement connecté à l'ordinateur.  l Arrêtez l'ordinateur, reconnectez le câble du clavier comme indiqué dans le Guide de référence rapide, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Vérifiez l'absence de tout conflit logiciel ou matériel. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. REMARQUE : vous devez utiliser Windows XP avec le Service Pack 1 ou suivant pour la réinstallation.  REMARQUE : si vous avez installé une image unique sur votre ordinateur ou si vous avez dû réinstaller le système d'exploitation, lancez l'utilitaire DSS.  Cet utilitaire est disponible sur le CD Pilotes et utilitaires, ainsi que sur le site support.dell.com. Vérifiez les voyants de diagnostic de l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché sur l'ordinateur et sur la prise électrique.Un programme ne répond plus  Un programme se bloque de façon répétée  Un écran bleu apparaît  Autres problèmes logiciels  Problèmes de mémoire Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. AVIS : vous risquez de perdre des données si vous ne parvenez pas à arrêter le système d'exploitation.  Éteignez l'ordinateur. Si votre ordinateur se bloque et que vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une réponse en appuyant sur une touche du  clavier ou en déplaçant la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pendant une dizaine de secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur  s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Fermez le programme. 1. Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>.  2. Cliquez sur Applications. 3. Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus.  4. Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. REMARQUE : les logiciels sont généralement fournis avec des instructions d'installation (documentation, disquette ou CD).  Consultez la documentation du logiciel. Si nécessaire, supprimez puis réinstallez le programme.  Vérifiez que la version d'origine de Windows XP (Gold) n'est pas installée sur votre ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur. Si votre ordinateur se bloque et que vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une réponse en appuyant sur une touche du  clavier ou en déplaçant la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pendant une dizaine de secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur  s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Consultez la documentation ou contactez l'éditeur du logiciel pour obtenir des informations de dépannage.  l Vérifiez que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur.  l Vérifiez que le matériel du système répond aux exigences minimales requises pour l'exécution du logiciel. Reportez-vous à la  documentation du logiciel pour plus d'informations. l Vérifiez que le programme est correctement installé et configuré.  l Vérifiez que les pilotes de périphériques n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme.  l Si nécessaire, supprimez puis réinstallez le programme.  Sauvegardez vos fichiers immédiatement. Utilisez un programme de détection de virus pour vérifier le disque dur, les disquettes ou les CD. Sauvegardez et fermez les fichiers ouverts ou les programmes et arrêtez l'ordinateur au moyen du menu Démarrer. Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Si tous les tests s'exécutent correctement, la condition d'erreur est liée à un problème logiciel.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Si un message indiquant une mémoire insuffisante s'affiche  l Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et programmes ouverts que vous n'utilisez pas pour vérifier si cela permet de résoudre le  problème.  l Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel pour connaître la mémoire minimale requise pour son exécution. Si nécessaire, installez de la mémoire supplémentaireProblèmes de souris Problèmes de réseau Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. Problèmes d'alimentation Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. l Réinstallez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire.  l Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Si d'autres problèmes de mémoire se produisent.  l Réinstallez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire.  l Veillez à vous conformer aux consignes d'installation de la mémoire. l Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Nettoyez la souris. Consultez la section "Nettoyage de votre ordinateur". Vérifiez le câble de la souris.  1. Retirez et reconnectez le câble de la souris comme indiqué dans le Guide de référence rapide. Vérifiez les paramètres de la souris.  Windows XP 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration puis sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez sur Souris. 3. Essayez de régler les paramètres.  Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Vérifiez l'absence de tout conflit logiciel ou matériel. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Vérifiez le connecteur du câble réseau. Assurez-vous que le câble réseau est bien enfoncé dans le connecteur réseau au dos de  l'ordinateur et dans la prise de réseau murale.  Vérifiez les voyants du réseau sur l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Vérifiez les voyants réseau à l'arrière de l’ordinateur. Si le voyant de lien est éteint, il n'y a pas de communication réseau. Remplacez le câble réseau.  Redémarrez l'ordinateur et reconnectez-vous au réseau. Vérifiez les paramètres du réseau. Contactez votre administrateur réseau ou la personne qui a installé votre réseau pour vérifier que les  paramètres réseau sont corrects et que le réseau fonctionne.  Vérifiez l'absence de tout conflit logiciel ou matériel. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert et si l'ordinateur ne répond plus :  vérifiez les voyants de diagnostic à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et  consultez la section "Voyants de diagnostic". Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert clignotant :  l'ordinateur est en mode veille. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour rétablir le  fonctionnement normal. Si le voyant d'alimentation est jaune et vert ou jaune fixe :  l'ordinateur est alimenté, mais un périphérique ne fonctionne pas  correctement ou est mal installé. Problèmes d'imprimante Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. Restauration des paramètres par défaut l Retirez puis réinstallez les modules de mémoire.  l Réinstallez le processeur (consultez la section "Processeur". Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint :  l'ordinateur est éteint, ou bien il n'est pas alimenté.  l Reliez le câble d'alimentation au connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et à l'adaptateur d'alimentation. Vérifiez  ensuite que l'adaptateur est correctement branché sur une prise électrique.  l Si l'ordinateur est branché sur une barrette d'alimentation, vérifiez que celle-ci est branchée sur une prise électrique et qu'elle est  sous tension. Contournez les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les barrettes d'alimentation et les  prolongateurs de câble d'alimentation pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension.  l Débranchez l'adaptateur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et de la prise électrique, attendez une minute, puis rebranchez-le à la prise et  à l'ordinateur.  l Assurez-vous que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, comme une lampe.  Si le voyant d'alimentation est jaune clignotant : l'ordinateur reçoit du courant, mais un problème d'alimentation interne s'est peut-être  produit. l Vérifiez que tous les câbles d'alimentation sont bien raccordés à la carte système (consultez la section "Composants de la carte système"). Éliminez les interférences. Les interférences peuvent être dues à divers facteurs :  l Prolongateurs de câble d'alimentation  l Nombre trop important de périphériques raccordés à une même barrette d'alimentation  l Plusieurs barrettes d'alimentation raccordées à la même prise électrique  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. REMARQUE : si votre imprimante nécessite une assistance technique, contactez son constructeur.  Vérifiez la documentation de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur sa  configuration et son dépannage.  Vérifiez les connexions des câbles de l'imprimante.  l Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur les connexions de câble.  l Assurez-vous que les câbles de l'imprimante sont correctement connectés à l'imprimante et à l'ordinateur.  Testez la prise électrique. Vérifiez que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe, par exemple.  Vérifiez que l'imprimante est reconnue par Windows.  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration puis sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les télécopieurs installés.  Si l'imprimante utilisée est répertoriée, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur son icône. 3. Cliquez sur Propriétés puis sur l'onglet Ports. Pour une imprimante parallèle, vérifiez que l'option Imprimer vers a pour valeur LPT1. Pour une imprimante USB, vérifiez que l'option Imprimer vers a pour valeur USB. Réinstallez le pilote de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des instructions.  Pour restaurer la valeur par défaut des paramètres du système.  1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension ou redémarrez-le. 2. Lorsque le message "Press to Enter Setup" apparaît dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur  immédiatement.  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Microsoft® Windows® apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows  s'affiche. Puis éteignez votre ordinateur via le menu Démarrer et essayez de nouveau. 3. Sous System Management (Gestion du système), sélectionnez Maintenance et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Problèmes liés aux périphériques parallèles ou série  Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les vérifications suivantes. Les haut-parleurs n'émettent aucun son  Les casques n'émettent aucun son  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. REMARQUE : si vous rencontrez un problème avec une imprimante, consultez la section "Problèmes d'imprimante". Vérifiez la valeur de l'option. Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'ordinateur pour savoir quelles sont les valeurs recommandées. Ouvrez ensuite le programme de configuration du système et accédez au paramètre de l'option Legacy Select. Vérifiez que les paramètres du port  série ou du port parallèle correspondent aux valeurs recommandées.  Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. REMARQUE : le contrôle du volume de certains lecteurs MP3 prend la main sur le contrôle du volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des chansons au  format MP3, vérifiez que vous n'avez pas baissé ou augmenté le volume.  Vérifiez les connexions des câbles des haut-parleurs. Vérifiez que les haut-parleurs sont raccordés selon le schéma d'installation fourni  avec ceux-ci. Assurez-vous que les haut-parleurs sont allumés. Consultez le schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vos haut-parleurs sont dotés de commandes de volume, réglez le volume, les aigus ou les basses pour supprimer toute distorsion.  Réglez le contrôle du volume de Windows. Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans l'angle inférieur droit  de votre écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine.  Débranchez les écouteurs du connecteur de casque. Le son des haut-parleurs est automatiquement désactivé lorsque les écouteurs sont  connectés au connecteur de casque du panneau avant de l'ordinateur.  Activez le mode numérique. Les haut-parleurs ne fonctionnent pas si le lecteur de CD est en mode analogique. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Sons et périphériques audio. 2. Cliquez sur Sons et périphériques audio. 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 4. Double-cliquez sur le nom du lecteur de CD. 5. Cliquez sur l'onglet Propriétés. 6. Cochez la case Activer la lecture numérique de CD audio sur ce lecteur de CD. Éliminez les sources potentielles d'interférences. Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogène proches afin de vérifier s'ils  produisent des interférences.  Exécutez les diagnostics du haut-parleur. Réinstallez le pilote audio. Vérifiez la valeur de l'option.  Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que l'option du contrôleur audio est activée  (On). Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Vérifiez l'absence de tout conflit logiciel ou matériel. Vérifiez la connexion du câble du casque. Vérifiez que le câble du casque audio est correctement inséré dans le connecteur de casque.  Branchez les écouteurs sur le connecteur de sortie audio. Réglez le contrôle du volume de Windows.  Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans l'angle inférieur droit  de votre écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Problèmes de vidéo et d'affichage Remplissez la liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les contrôles suivants. Si l'écran est vide  Si l'affichage est difficile à lire  Retour à la page du sommaire ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. REMARQUE : Consultez la documentation du moniteur pour obtenir les instructions de dépannage.  Vérifiez la connexion du câble de l'écran.  l Vérifiez que le moniteur est correctement branché (voir le Guide de référence rapide fourni avec l'ordinateur). l Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension vidéo et que le fait de supprimer ce câble résout le problème, le câble est défectueux.  l Échangez les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du moniteur pour déterminez si le câble d'alimentation est défectueux.  l Vérifiez qu'aucune des broches du connecteur n'est tordue ni cassée. (Il est normal, pour les connecteurs de câbles de moniteur, que  certaines broches soient manquantes.) Examinez le voyant d'alimentation du moniteur. Si ce voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton pour vérifier que le moniteur est bien  allumé. Si le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou clignote, le moniteur est sous tension. Si le voyant d'alimentation clignote, appuyez sur une  touche du clavier ou déplacez la souris.  Testez la prise électrique. Vérifiez que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe, par exemple.  Testez le moniteur. Connectez un moniteur en bon état à l'ordinateur, et essayez de l'utiliser. Si le nouveau moniteur fonctionne, cela  signifie que le moniteur précédent était défectueux.  Vérifiez les voyants de diagnostic de l'ordinateur. Exécutez l'autotest du moniteur. Consultez la documentation du moniteur pour de plus amples informations. Vérifiez les paramètres du moniteur. Consultez la documentation du moniteur pour des instructions sur le réglage du contraste et de la  luminosité, le dégaussage du moniteur et l'exécution de l'autotest.  Éloignez le caisson de basses du moniteur. Si votre système de haut–parleurs inclut un caisson de basses, vérifiez que celui-ci se trouve à  au moins 60 cm (2 pieds) du moniteur.  Éloignez le moniteur des sources externes d'alimentation. Les ventilateurs, lampes fluorescentes, lampes à halogène et autres appareils  électriques peuvent faire "trembler" l'image. Éteignez les périphériques proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent des interférences.  Réglez les paramètres d'affichage Windows.  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration puis sur Apparence et thèmes. 2. Cliquez sur Affichage, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. 3. Essayez différentes valeurs pour les paramètres Qualité couleur et Résolution de l'écran. Retour à la page du sommaire Haut-parleur du châssis  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Votre ordinateur est peut-être livré avec un haut-parleur système en option. Si vous devez le remplacer ou en installer un autre, procédez comme suit : 1. Suivez les procédures de la section "Avant de commencer". 2. Si vous installez un nouveau haut-parleur, passez directement à l'étape 4. 3. Si vous remplacez le haut-parleur :  a. Débranchez le câble du haut-parleur de la carte système.  b. Appuyez sur le taquet et retirez le haut-parleur et son câble de l'emplacement.  4. Insérez le haut-parleur système dans l'emplacement et poussez-le jusqu'à ce qu'il soit bien en place.  ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. ATTENTION : pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir le capot. 1 Taquet 2 Câble du haut-parleur5. Branchez le câble du haut-parleur sur le connecteur de la carte système.  6. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place. 7. Remettez le cache de protection des câbles en place (si vous l'utilisez).  8. Branchez l'ordinateur sur le câble de l'adaptateur et les périphériques sur les prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Une fois le capot remis, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis, s'il est activé, affiche le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de  l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. 9. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis en modifiant l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) pour lui affecter la valeur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé-silencieux). Retour à la page du sommaire AVIS : pour raccorder un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale puis sur l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par quelqu'un d'autre, demandez à votre administrateur réseau comment réinitialiser le  détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. Retour à la page du sommaire Spécifications techniques  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Processeur Type de processeur Processeurs Intel® Pentium® 4 et Celeron® (selon disponibilité). Leur conception permet des mises à  niveaux futures du processeur. Les mises à niveau du  processeur prises en charge sont disponibles auprès  de Dell. Mémoire cache de niveau 1 (L1) 8 Ko Mémoire cache de niveau 2 (L2) 256 Ko ou 1 Mo, selon le processeur Mémoire Architecture Mémoire SDRAM DDR2 à 400 MHz Supports DIMM (Dual in-line memory module) Deux (non-ECC uniquement) Capacités DIMM 128 Mo, 256 Mo, 512 Mo, 1 Go Mémoire RAM minimale  256 Mo (mode à deux voies) 128 Mo (mode à une seule voie) Mémoire RAM maximale 2 Go (mode à deux voies) Adresse BIOS F0000h Informations concernant votre ordinateur Jeu de puces de l'ordinateur 915G Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresse 32 bits Interruptions 23 BIOS de l'ordinateur Puce Flash 4 Mo Vitesse du bus système Débit de données 4X de 800 ou 533 MHz ; horloge  200 ou 133 MHz (correspond à la vitesse du bus  externe) Contrôleur d'interface réseau Interface réseau Gigabit intégrée avec prise en  charge d'ASF 1.03, conformément aux normes DMTF Communication 10/100/1000 possible Audio  Type audio Émulation AC97, Sound Blaster ; haut-parleur interne en option Contrôleur audio Codec AC97 intégré Conversion stéréo 16 bits analogique à numérique et 20 bits numérique  à analogique Interfaces Interne Bus PCI/AC97 Externe Entrée/sortie ligne stéréo mini-jack sur le panneau arrière d'E/S ; connecteurs de casque et de  microphone sur le panneau avant Vidéo  Type de vidéo DVI-I intégré Contrôleur vidéo Accélérateur graphique intégré Intel 2D/3D Bus d'extension Type de bus USB 1.1 et 2.0 Taille du connecteur du module de mémoire DDR2 — 240 broches Lecteurs Baie accessible de l'extérieur Une baie pour périphérique portable module-D IDE ou USB Dell Baie accessible de l'intérieur Une baie pour disque dur série ATA Connecteurs Accessibles de l'extérieur Série (data terminal equipment [DTE]) Connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550 sur le  panneau arrière d'E/S Parallèle Connecteur à 27 trous (bidirectionnel) sur le  panneau arrière d'E/S Vidéo Connecteur DVI-I sur le panneau arrière d'E/S Carte réseau intégrée Connecteur RJ45 sur le panneau arrière d'E/S ; 10/100/1000 Audio Connecteurs de sortie ligne (vert) et d'entrée ligne  (bleu) sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur ;  connecteurs pour micro et écouteurs à l'avant de  l'ordinateur. USB Cinq connecteurs USB 2.0 sur le panneau arrière  d'E/S ; deux sur le panneau avant Accessibles de l'intérieur Disque dur principal Port série ATA Ventilateurs Deux connecteurs à 5 broches Commutateur d'intrusion du châssis Un connecteur à 3 broches Combinaisons de touches Sous Microsoft® Windows® XP, affiche la fenêtre  Sécurité de Windows. En mode MS-DOS®, redémarre  l'ordinateur.  ou  Démarre la configuration intégrée du système (au  démarrage uniquement) Démarre automatiquement l'ordinateur à partir de  l'environnement réseau spécifié par l'environnement  d'amorçage distant (PXE) plutôt qu'à partir d'un des  périphériques indiqués dans l'option Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) du programme de  configuration du système (au démarrage  uniquement). ou Affiche un menu de périphérique d'amorçage qui  permet à l'utilisateur d'entrer un périphérique pour  un amorçage unique (au démarrage uniquement)  ainsi que des options permettant d'exécuter les  diagnostics sur le disque dur et sur le système. Boutons et voyants Bouton d'alimentation Bouton poussoir Voyants d'alimentation Voyant vert sur le bouton d'alimentation : vert  clignotant à l'état de veille ; vert fixe à l'état de  marche Voyant orange : une lumière clignotante indique un  problème concernant un périphérique installé ; une  lumière continue indique un problème d'alimentation  interne (consultez la section "Problèmes  d'alimentation". Voyant d'accès au disque dur Voyant vert Voyant d'intégrité de la liaison (sur la carte réseau  intégrée) Voyant vert pour un fonctionnement à 10 Mbits ;  voyant orange pour un fonctionnement à 100 Mbits ;  voyant jaune pour un fonctionnement à 1000 Mbits  (1 Gbit) Voyant d'activité (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Voyant jaune clignotant Voyants de diagnostic Quatre voyants jaunes et/ou verts sur le panneau arrière Voyant d'alimentation d'attente Voyant AUX_LED jaune sur la carte système Voyant du module d'alimentation Voyant vert sur l'adaptateur d'alimentation Alimentation Adaptateur d'alimentation CC externe Puissance 220 W Chaleur émise 455 BTU/h (moyenne) Tension 90 à 135 V à 60 Hz ; 180 à 265 V à 50 Hz Pile de secours Pile bouton au lithium CR2032 de 3 V Caractéristiques physiques  Orientation verticale : largeur, profondeur et hauteur  (sans cache de protection des câbles) 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces), 25,3 cm (9,95 pouces), 26,4 cm  (10,375 pouces) Orientation verticale : largeur, profondeur et hauteur  (avec cache de protection des câbles) 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces), 33 cm (13 pouces), 26,4 cm  (10,375 pouces) Orientation verticale : largeur, profondeur et hauteur  (avec cache de protection des câbles, modèle évolué) 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces), 36,1 cm (14,2 pouces), 26,4 cm  (10,375 pouces) Poids (sans cache de protection des câbles, modèle  standard) 4,5 kg (10 livres) Poids (avec cache de protection des câbles, modèle  standard) 4,9 kg (10,8 livres) Environnement Température Fonctionnement 10° à 30° C (50° à 86° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Humidité relative 20% à 80% (sans condensation) Vibrations maximalesRetour à la page du sommaire Fonctionnement Bureau ou suspension verticale : 0,25 G (gravité)  entre 3 et 200 Hz à 0,5 octave/min ; orientation horizontale : 0,25 G entre 20 et 200 Hz à  0,5 octave/min Stockage 0,5 G entre 3 et 200 Hz à 1 octave/min Choc maximal Fonctionnement Impulsion semi-sinusoïdale inférieure avec  changement de vitesse de 50,8 cm/s Stockage Onde carrée moyenne de 27 G avec changement de  vitesse de 508 cm/s Altitude Fonctionnement –16 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –16 à 10 600 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)Retour à la page du sommaire Composants de la carte système  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Retour à la page du sommaire 1 Connecteur d'alimentation du carénage du ventilateur (FAN1) 8 Cavalier du mot de passe (PSWRD) 2 Connecteur de haut-parleur (SPEAKER) en option 9 Cavalier d'effacement de CMOS (CLEAR_CMOS) 3 Haut-parleur de la carte système 10 Voyant d'alimentation du mode veille (AUX_LED) 4 Connecteur mémoire B (CHB_DIMM) 11 Connecteur d'alimentation du carénage du ventilateur (FAN2) 5 Connecteur mémoire A (CHA_DIMM)  12 Connecteur du câble d'alimentation du disque dur (ATA_PWR) 6 Connecteur du câble de données du disque dur SATA 13 Connecteur d'alimentation du commutateur d'intrusion du châssis (INTRUDER) 7 Pile 14 Dissipateur thermique du microprocesseurRetour à la page du sommaire Outils et utilitaires de dépannage  Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Diagnostics Dell Voyant de l'adaptateur d'alimentation Voyants du système Voyants de diagnostic Codes sonores Messages d'erreur Résolution des problèmes d'incompatibilité logicielle ou matérielle Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la présente section et exécutez les diagnostics Dell avant de  contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Diagnostics Dell Il est recommandé d'imprimer ces procédures avant de commencer. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, étudiez les informations de configuration de votre ordinateur et assurez-vous que le périphérique que  vous souhaitez tester s'affiche dans le programme de configuration du système et qu'il est actif. Vous pouvez lancer les diagnostics Dell à partir du disque dur ou du CD Pilotes et utilitaires, également appelé ResourceCD. Démarrage des diagnostics Dell à partir de votre disque dur 1. Arrêtez l'ordinateur et redémarrez-le. 2. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez  alors votre ordinateur par le biais du menu Démarrer et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Boot to Utility Partition (Démarrer sur la partition d'utilitaires) et appuyez sur  .  4. Lorsque l'écran Main Menu (Menu principal) des diagnostics Dell s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à effectuer.  Démarrage des diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires 1. Insérez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires. 2. Arrêtez l'ordinateur et redémarrez-le. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows s'affiche, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le Bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre  ordinateur par le biais du menu Démarrer et faites une nouvelle tentative. ATTENTION : avant de commencer les procédures de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies dans le Guide des informations sur le produit et veillez à les respecter scrupuleusement. AVIS : les diagnostics Dell fonctionnent uniquement sur les ordinateurs Dell™.  REMARQUE : si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostics Dell n'a été trouvée, exécutez les diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Pilotes et  utilitaires. 3. Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Onboard or USB CD-ROM Device (Lecteur de CD-ROM intégré ou USB) et  appuyez sur  |  — Ne les utilisez pas dans les noms de fichiers. A required .DLL file was not found (Un fichier .DLL requis est introuvable) — Un fichier essentiel du programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir est manquant. Pour supprimer puis réinstaller le programme :  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 2. Sélectionnez le programme que vous voulez supprimer.  3. Cliquez sur l'icône Modifier ou supprimer des programmes. 4. Consultez la documentation du programme pour obtenir des instructions d'installation. Alert! Previous attempts at booting this system have failed at checkpoint [nnnn ]. For help in resolving this problem, please note this checkpoint and contact Dell Technical Support (Une tentative de démarrage précédente a échoué au point de contrôle [nnnn], contactez le support technique Dell.) — Contactez Dell et indiquez le code du point de contrôle (nnnn) au technicien de support. Attachment failed to respond (Pas de réponse du dispositif connecté) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Bad Command or File Name (Commande ou nom de fichier incorrect) — Vérifiez que la commande est correctement épelée, que les  espaces sont au bon endroit et que le nom de chemin est le bon. Bad error-correction code (ECC) on disk read (Mauvais code d'erreur ECC [détection et correction d'erreurs] à la lecture du disque) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Controller has failed (Échec du contrôleur) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Data error (Erreur de données) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Decreasing available memory (Diminution de la mémoire disponible) — Voir la section "Blocages du système et incidents logiciels." Diskette drive 0 seek failure (Échec de recherche du lecteur de disquette 0) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Diskette read failure (Échec de lecture de la disquette) — Voir la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Diskette subsystem reset failed (Échec de la réinitialisation du sous-système de disquette) — Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Diskette write-protected (Disquette protégée en écriture) — Faites glisser la languette de protection contre l'écriture en position ouverte.  Drive not ready (Lecteur non prêt) — Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur.  Gate A20 failure (Échec Gate A20) — Voir la section "Blocages du système et incidents logiciels". Hard-disk configuration error (Erreur de configuration du disque dur) — Hard-disk controller failure (Échec du contrôleur de disque dur) — Hard-disk drive failure (Échec de l'unité de disque dur) — Hard-disk drive failure (Échec de l'unité de disque dur) — Voir la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Insert bootable media (Introduire un support amorçable) — Introduisez une disquette ou un CD amorçable.  Invalid configuration information - please run SETUP program (Informations de configuration incorrectes, lancez le programme de configuration du système) — Accédez au programme de configuration du système et corrigez les paramètres de l'ordinateur.  Keyboard failure (Problème de clavier) — Consultez la section "Problèmes de clavier". Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value  (Échec d'adressage de la mémoire)  — Voir la section "Blocages du système et incidents logiciels". Memory allocation error (Erreur d'allocation de mémoire) — 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez 30 secondes, puis redémarrez-le. 2. Essayez à nouveau d'utiliser le programme.  3. Si le message d'erreur réapparaît, consultez la documentation du logiciel pour des suggestions de dépannage supplémentaires.  Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value  (Erreur de ligne dans la mémoire) — Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value  (Erreur de logique dans la mémoire) — Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value  (Erreur de parité dans la mémoire) — Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value  (Erreur de lecture/écriture dans la mémoire) — Memory size in CMOS invalid (Erreur dans la taille de mémoire indiquée dans le CMOS) — Voir la section "Blocages du système et incidents logiciels". No boot device available (Aucun périphérique d'amorçage disponible) — l Si le lecteur de disquette est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous qu'il contient une disquette amorçable.  l Si l'unité de disque dur est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous qu'elle est installée, bien en place et partitionnée comme  périphérique d'amorçage.  l Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et assurez-vous que les informations de la séquence d'amorçage sont correctes.  No boot sector on hard-disk drive (Aucun secteur d'amorçage sur le lecteur de disque dur) — Accédez au programme de configuration du  système et vérifiez que les informations de configuration du disque dur sont correctes.  No timer tick interrupt (Aucune interruption de top d'horloge) — Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Non-system disk or disk error (Disque non système ou erreur de disque) — Remplacez la disquette par une autre contenant un système  d'exploitation amorçable, ou bien retirez la disquette de la baie modulaire et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Not a boot diskette (Disquette non amorçable)— Insérez une disquette d'amorçage dans le lecteur et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Not enough memory or resources. Close some programs and try again (Mémoire ou ressources insuffisantes. Fermez des programmes  et réessayez). — Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme que vous souhaitez utiliser. Dans certains cas, vous devrez peut-être  redémarrer l'ordinateur pour restaurer ses ressources. Si vous devez effectivement arrêter l'ordinateur, exécutez le programme voulu dès  que le redémarrage est terminé. Résolution des problèmes d'incompatibilité logicielle et matérielle Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté lors de la configuration du système d'exploitation ou s'il est détecté mais pas correctement configuré, vous pouvez utiliser  le Gestionnaire de périphériques ou l'utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Microsoft® Windows® XP Pour résoudre les incompatibilités avec le Gestionnaire de périphériques : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2. Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance puis sur Système. 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4. Dans la liste Gestionnaire de périphériques, vérifiez les périphériques dont la configuration est incorrecte.  Ils sont repérables par un point d'exclamation jaune (!) ou le symbole X affiché en rouge si le périphérique a été désactivé. 5. Double-cliquez sur un périphérique suivi d'un point d'exclamation pour afficher la fenêtre Propriétés. La zone État du périphérique de la fenêtre Propriétés indique les périphériques devant être reconfigurés. 6. Reconfigurez les périphériques ou supprimez-les du Gestionnaire de périphériques. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration du périphérique,  consultez la documentation qui l'accompagne. Pour résoudre les incompatibilités à l'aide de l'utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels de Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer puis sur Aide et support. 2. Tapez utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche.  3. Cliquez sur Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. Operating system not found (Système d'exploitation introuvable) — Contactez Dell. Read fault (Erreur de lecture) — Requested sector not found (Secteur requis introuvable)  — Reset failed (Échec de la réinitialisation) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Sector not found (Secteur introuvable) — l Exécutez l'utilitaire de vérification des erreurs Windows pour vérifier la structure des fichiers de la disquette ou du disque dur.  Consultez l'aide de Windows pour obtenir des instructions. l Si un grand nombre de secteurs est défectueux, sauvegardez les données (si possible), puis reformatez la disquette ou le disque dur.  Seek error (Erreur de recherche) — Reportez-vous à la section "Problèmes de lecteur". Shutdown failure (Échec de l'arrêt) — Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Time-of-day clock stopped (Arrêt de l'horloge machine) — Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program (L'heure n'est pas configurée, exécutez le programme de configuration du  système) — Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et corrigez la date ou l'heure. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la pile.  Timer chip counter 2 failed (Échec du compteur 2 de la puce d'horloge) — Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. Unexpected interrupt in protected mode (Interruption inattendue en mode protégé) — Exécutez les diagnostics Dell. WARNING: Dell's Disk Monitoring System has detected that drive [0/1] on the [primary/secondary] EIDE controller is operating outside of normal specifications. It is advisable to immediately back up your data and replace your hard drive by calling your support desk or Dell (Le système de surveillance du disque de Dell a détecté que le lecteur [0/1] du contrôleur EIDE [principal/secondaire]  fonctionne hors des caractéristiques normales. Nous vous conseillons de sauvegarder vos données immédiatement et de remplacer  votre disque dur en contactant Dell ou votre centre de support) — Si un lecteur de remplacement n'est pas disponible dans l'immédiat et si ce lecteur n'est pas le seul lecteur d'amorçage, accédez au  programme de configuration du système et mettez le paramètre du lecteur correspondant sur None (Aucun). Retirez ensuite le lecteur de l'ordinateur. Write fault (Erreur de lecture)  Write fault on selected drive (Erreur de lecture sur le lecteur sélectionné)   — — Voir la section "Problèmes de lecteur". :\ is not accessible. The device is not ready (Le lecteur n'est pas accessible ou pas prêt).  — Le lecteur de disquette ne peut pas lire le support. Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. 4. Dans la liste Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un problème matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Garantie Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Dell Inc. (" Dell ") fabrique ses produits avec des pièces et des composants neufs ou équivalant à du neuf en accord avec les pratiques classiques de  l'industrie. Pour obtenir des informations sur la garantie Dell de votre ordinateur, consultez le Guide des informations sur le produit ou le document de garantie livré avec votre ordinateur. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Fonctionnalités de Microsoft® Windows® XP Manuel de l'utilisateur du système Dell™ OptiPlex™ SX280 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Comptes utilisateur et changement rapide d'utilisateur Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'entreprise Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP fournit un assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de déplacer des données de  l'ordinateur source vers le nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez déplacer des données, telles que : l les adresses électroniques ; l les paramètres de barre d'outils ; l les tailles des fenêtres ; l et les signets Internet. Vous pouvez transférer les données sur le nouvel ordinateur via le réseau ou une connexion série ou les stocker sur un support amovible tel qu'un CD  enregistrable ou une disquette. Pour préparer le nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers :  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→Accessoires→Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2. Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4. Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 5. Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, revenez à votre ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce stade !  Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1. Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD du système d'exploitation Windows XP. 2. Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3. Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4. Dans l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6. Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur le mode de transfert souhaité.  7. Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données s'affiche. 8. Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1. Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur du nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2. Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode choisie pour transférer les paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur  Suivant. L'assistant lit les fichiers et paramètres collectés et les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3. Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.  Comptes utilisateur et changement rapide d'utilisateur Ajout de comptes d'utilisateur Une fois le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP installé, l'administrateur ou un utilisateur disposant de droits d'administrateur peut créer des  comptes utilisateur supplémentaires. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2. Dans la fenêtre Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Comptes d'utilisateurs. 3. Sous Choisissez une tâche..., cliquez sur Créer un nouveau compte. 4. Sous Nommer le nouveau compte, saisissez le nom du nouvel utilisateur et cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Sous Choisir un type de compte, cliquez sur l'une des options suivantes :  l Administrateur de l'ordinateur — L'utilisateur peut modifier tous les paramètres de l'ordinateur. l Limité — L'utilisateur ne peut modifier que ses paramètres personnels, comme son mot de passe. Il ne peut ni installer des programmes, ni  utiliser Internet. 6. Cliquez sur Créer un compte. Changement rapide d'utilisateur La fonction Changement rapide d'utilisateur permet à plusieurs utilisateurs d'accéder à un ordinateur sans avoir à demander à l'utilisateur précédent de se  déconnecter. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer puis sur Fermer la session. 2. Dans la fenêtre Fermeture de session Windows, cliquez sur Changer d'utilisateur. Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Changement rapide d'utilisateur, les programmes utilisés par l'utilisateur précédent continuent de s'exécuter en arrière-plan. L'ordinateur risque donc de fonctionner au ralenti. En outre, les programmes multimédias, tels que les jeux et les logiciels sur DVD, risquent de ne pas  fonctionner. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'entreprise Connexion à une carte réseau  Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un réseau, une carte réseau doit être installée et un câble réseau connecté à l'ordinateur. Pour connecter un câble réseau : 1. Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur de carte réseau situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : la fonction Changement rapide d'utilisateur n'est pas disponible si l'ordinateur exécute Windows XP Professionnel et fait partie d'un  domaine, ou s'il dispose de moins de 128 Mo de mémoire.  REMARQUE : insérez le câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche, puis tirez le doucement pour vous assurer qu'il est bien fixé.  REMARQUE : n'utilisez pas de câble réseau sur une prise téléphonique murale. 2. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble réseau à un périphérique de connexion réseau, par exemple une prise murale du réseau.  Assistant Configuration du réseau  Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP fournit un assistant Configuration du réseau qui vous guide dans le processus de partage de fichiers,  d'imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre les ordinateurs installés chez un particulier ou dans une petite entreprise. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Configuration du réseau. 2. Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Cliquez sur la liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. 4. Renseignez la liste de vérification et procédez aux préparations requises.  5. Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration du réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Retour à la page du sommaire REMARQUE : la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet active le pare-feu intégré fourni avec Windows XP Service  Pack 1.  Airborne Contaminant Level Update The following airborne contaminant level supersedes the information that is present in the Getting Started Guide of your system: ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™ and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Airborne Contaminant Level Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985 July 2010气载污染物级别更新 以下气载污染物级别取代系统“入门指南”中提供的信息: ____________________ 本出版物中的信息如有更改,恕不另行通知。 © 2010 Dell Inc. 版权所有,翻印必究。 未经 Dell Inc. 书面许可,严禁以任何形式复制这些材料。 本文中使用的商标:Dell™、 DELL 徽标是Dell Inc. 的商标。 本说明文件中述及的其它商标和产品名称是指拥有相应商标和产品名称的公司或其制造的产品。 Dell Inc. 对其它公司的商标和产品名称不拥有任何所有权。 气载污染物级别 级别 G1 (依据 ISA-S71.04-1985 定义的标准) 2010 年 7 月空氣中懸浮污染物級別更新 以下空氣中懸浮污染物級別取代系統「入門指南」中提供的資訊: ____________________ 本文件中的資訊如有更改,恕不另行通知。 © 2010 Dell Inc. 版權所有,翻印必究。 未經 Dell Inc. 的書面許可,嚴格禁止以任何形式複製這些內容。 本文中使用的商標:Dell™ 和 DELL 標誌均是 Dell Inc 的商標。 本文件中述及的其他商標和商業名稱可能指擁有相應商標和名稱的公司實體或其產品。Dell Inc. 對本公司之外的商標和產品名稱不擁有任何所有權。 空氣中懸浮污染物級別 級別 G1 ( 依據 ISA-S71.04-1985 的定義 ) 2010 年 7 月Aktualizace úrovně uvolňování znečišt’ujících látek do vzduchu Následující informace o úrovni uvolňování znečišt’ujících látek do vzduchu nahrazují informace uvedené v příručce Začínáme dodané se systémem: ____________________ Informace v této publikaci se mohou bez předchozího upozornění změnit. © 2010 Dell Inc. Všechna práva vyhrazena. Jakákoli reprodukce těchto materiálů bez písemného povolení společnosti Dell Inc. je přísně zakázána. Ochranné známky použité v tomto textu: Dell™ a logo DELLjsou ochranné známky společnosti Dell Inc. V tomto dokumentu mohou být použity další ochranné známky a obchodní názvy s odkazem na společnosti vlastnící tyto známky a názvy nebo na jejich produkty. Společnost Dell Inc. nemá vlastnické zájmy vůči ochranným známkám a obchodním názvům jiným než svým vlastním. Úroveň uvolňování znečišt’ujících látek do vzduchu Třída G1 dle normy ISA-S71.04-1985 Červenec 2010Mise à jour des contaminants en suspension dans l'air Le niveau de contaminants en suspension dans l'air suivant remplace cette même information contenue dans le Getting Started Guide (Guide de mise en route) de votre système : ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2010 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™ et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou de leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Contaminants en suspension dans l'air Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 Juillet 2010Aktualisierung zur Luftverschmutzungsklasse Die folgenden Informationen ersetzen die Angaben zur Luftverschmutzungsklasse im Handbuch zum Einstieg für Ihr System: ___________________ Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2010 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Die Vervielfältigung oder Wiedergabe dieser Materialien in jeglicher Weise ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. ist strengstens untersagt. Marken in diesem Text: Dell™ und das DELL Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc. Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen sind Eigentum der entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen. Dell Inc. erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Markenzeichen und Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen. Luftverschmutzungsklasse Klasse G1 gemäß ISA-S71.04-1985 Juli 2010Ενηµέρωση επιπέδων αεροµεταφερόµενων ρύπων Τα παρακάτω επίπεδα αεροµεταφερόµενων ρύπων αντικαθιστά τις πληροφορίες που παρέχονται στον Οδηγό «Τα Πρώτα Βήµατα» του συστήµατός σας: ____________________ Οι πληροφορίες αυτής της δηµοσίευσης υπόκεινται σε αλλαγές χωρίς ειδοποίηση. © 2010 Dell Inc. Με επιφύλαξη όλων των δικαιωµάτων. Απαγορεύεται αυστηρώς η αναπαραγωγή αυτών των υλικών µε οποιονδήποτε τρόπο χωρίς την έγγραφη άδεια της Dell Inc. Εµπορικά σήµατα που χρησιµοποιούνται σε αυτό το κείµενο: η ονοµασία Dell™, το λογότυπο DELL είναι εµπορικά σήµατα της Dell Inc. Άλλα εµπορικά σήµατα και εµπορικές ονοµασίες µπορεί να χρησιµοποιούνται στο παρόν έγγραφο αναφερόµενα είτε στους κατόχους των σηµάτων και των ονοµάτων είτε στα προϊόντα τους. Η Dell Inc. παραιτείται από κάθε δικαίωµα σε εµπορικά σήµατα και εµπορικές ονοµασίες τρίτων. Επίπεδα αεροµεταφερόµενων ρύπων Κατηγορία G1 ή χαµηλότερη, όπως ορίζεται από το πρότυπο ISA-S71.04-1985 Ιούλιος 2010Pembaruan Tingkat Pencemaran Udara Tingkat pencemaran udara berikut ini menggantikan informasi yang disampaikan dalam Panduan Pengaktifan sistem Anda ____________________ Informasi dalam dokumen ini dapat berubah tanpa pemberitahuan. © 2010 Dell Inc. Hak cipta dilindungi undang-undang. Dilarang keras memperbanyak materi ini dengan cara apa pun tanpa izin tertulis dari Dell Inc. Merek dagang yang digunakan dalam dokumen ini: Dell™ dan logo DELL adalah merek dagang dari Dell Inc. Merek dagang dan nama dagang lain mungkin digunakan dalam dokumen ini untuk merujuk ke pihak lain yang memiliki hak kekayaan intelektual atas merek dan nama atau produk mereka. Dell Inc. menyangkal kepentingan kepemilikan apa pun atas merek dagang dan nama dagang selain miliknya sendiri. Tingkat Pencemaran Udara Kelas G1 sesuai standar ISA-S71.04-1985 Juli 2010空気汚染物質レベルのアップデー ト情報 下記の空気汚染物質レベルは、お使いのシステムの『はじめに』に記載さ れている情報にとって代わるものです。 ____________________ 本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。 © 2010 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。 Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。 本書に使用されている商標:Dell™ および DELL ロゴは Dell Inc. の商標です。 商標または製品の権利を主張する事業体を表すためにその他の商標および社名が使用されて いることがあります。それらの商標や会社名は、一切 Dell Inc. に帰属するものではありま せん。 空気汚染物質レベル クラス G1(ISA-S71.04-1985 の定義による) 2010 年 7 月공기중오염물질수준업데이트 아래에 있는 공기 중 오염 물질 수준은 해당 시스템의 시작 설명서에 제공된 정보를 대체합니다 . ____________________ 이 발행물에 수록된 정보는 사전 통보 없이 변경될 수 있습니다. © 2010 Dell Inc. 저작권 본사 소유. Dell Inc.의 서면승인없이 어떠한 방식으로든본 자료를 무단 복제하는 행위는엄격히 금지됩 니다. 본 설명서에사용된 상표인 Dell ™ 및 DELL 로고는 Dell Inc. 의 상표입니다. 본 문서에서특정 회사의표시나 제품이름을 지칭하기 위해 기타 상표나상호를 사용할수도 있 습니다. Dell Inc. 는자사가소유하고있는 것이외에기타모든 상표및상호에 대한어떠한 소유 권도없습니다 . 공기중오염물질수준 등급 ISA-S71.04-1985의규정에따른 G1 2010년 7월Aktualizacja danych o poziomie zanieczyszczeń w powietrzu Poniższe dane o poziomie zanieczyszczeń w powietrzu zastępują informacje przedstawione w Instrukcji uruchomienia użytkowanego komputera: ____________________ Informacje zawarte w tym dokumencie mogą zostać zmienione bez uprzedzenia. © 2010 Dell Inc. Wszelkie prawa zastrzeżone. Powielanie tych materiałów w jakiejkolwiek formie bez pisemnej zgody firmy Dell Inc. jest surowo zabronione. Znaki towarowe użyte w niniejszym dokumencie: Dell™ i logo DELL są znakami towarowymi firmy Dell Inc. Tekst może zawierać także inne znaki towarowe i nazwy towarowe, odnoszące się do podmiotów posiadających prawa do tych znaków i nazw lub do ich produktów. Firma Dell Inc. nie rości sobie żadnych praw do znaków i nazw towarowych innych niż jej własne. Poziom zanieczyszczeń w powietrzu Klasa G1 według definicji podanej w ISA-S71.04-1985 Lipiec 2010Atualização do nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar O seguinte nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar substitui as informações presentes no Guia de Primeiros Passos de seu sistema: ____________________ As informações contidas nesta publicação estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. © 2010 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Qualquer forma de reprodução deste material sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. é expressamente proibida. Marcas comerciais usadas neste texto: Dell™ e o logotipo DELL são marcas comerciais da Dell Inc. Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser usados neste documento como referência às entidades que reivindicam essas marcas e nomes ou a seus produtos. A Dell Inc. renuncia ao direito de qualquer participação em nomes e marcas comerciais que não sejam de sua propriedade. Nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar Classe G1, conforme definido pela norma ISA-S71.04-1985 Julho de 2010Обновление информации об уровне загрязняющих веществ в атмосфере Следующий уровень загрязняющих веществ в атмосфере является более верным по отношению к уровню, указанному в Руководстве по началу работы к системе: ____________________ Информация, содержащаяся в данной публикации, может быть изменена без предварительного уведомления. © 2010 Dell Inc. Все права защищены. Воспроизведение материалов данного руководства в любой форме без письменного разрешения корпорации Dell Inc. строго запрещается. Торговые марки, использованные в данном тексте: Dell™ и логотип компании DELL являются товарными знаками компании Dell Inc. Остальные товарные знаки и названия продуктов могут использоваться в данном документе для обозначения компаний, заявляющих права на эти товарные знаки и названия, или продуктов этих компаний. Dell Inc. не претендует на права собственности в отношении каких-либо товарных знаков и торговых наименований, кроме своих собственных. Уровень загрязняющих веществ в атмосфере Класс G1 или ниже согласно классификации ISA-S71.04-1985 Июль 2010 г.Actualización del nivel de contaminación atmosférica El nivel de contaminación atmosférica siguiente sustituye la información incluida en la Guía de introducción de su sistema: ____________________ La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2010 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este material en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™ y el logotipode DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Nivel de contaminación atmosférica Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-1985 Julio de 2010Havadan Geçen Madde Düzeyi Güncelleme Aşağıdaki havadan geçen madde düzeyi, sisteminize ait Başlangıç Kılavuzu içindeki bilgileri geçersiz kılmaktadır. ____________________ Bu belgedeki bilgiler önceden bildirilmeksizin değiştirilebilir. © 2010 Dell Inc. Tüm hakları saklıdır. Dell Inc.'in yazılı izni olmadan bu belgelerin herhangi bir şekilde çoğaltılması kesinlikle yasaktır. Bu metinde kullanılan ticari markalar: Dell™ ve DELL logosu Dell Inc. kuruluşunun ticari markalarıdır. Bu belgede, marka ve adların sahiplerine ya da ürünlerine atıfta bulunmak için başka ticari marka ve ticari adlar kullanılabilir. Dell Inc. kendine ait olanların dışındaki ticari markalar ve ticari isimlerle ilgili hiçbir mülkiyet hakkı olmadığını beyan eder. Havadan Geçen Madde Düzeyi Sınıf ISA-S71.04-1985 ile tanımlanan biçimde G1 Temmuz 2010עדכון לגבי רמת זיהום אוויר רמתזיהוםהאוויר הבאה עולה על הנתוניםהנקוביםבמדריךתחילתהעבודהשל המערכת שברשותך: רמת זיהוםאווירי ISA-S71.04-1985 בתקן כמוגדר G1 Class ____________________ המידע במסמך זה עשוי להשתנות ללא הודעהמוקדמת. .כלהזכויותשמורות .© 2010 Dell Inc שעתוק חומריםאלה בכל דרךשהיא, תהאאשר תהא, ללאקבלת רשות בכתב מאת .Dell Inc אסור בהחלט. סימני מסחר המוזכריםבמסמך זה: השם™Dell , הלוגושל DELL הםסימני מסחרשל .Dell Inc. ייתכןשייעשהשימושבסימניםמסחריים ובשמות מסחרייםאחריםבמסמך זה כדי להתייחס לישויות הטוענות לבעלות על הסימניםוהשמות, או למוצריםשלהן. .Dell Inc מוותרת על כל חלק קנייני בסימניםמסחרייםושמות מסחרייםפרט לאלהשבבעלותה. יולי 2010 Systèmes Dell PowerVault Network Attached Storage (NAS) Guide de l'administrateurRemarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE: Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION: Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT: Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée, et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation. 2012 - 06 Rev. A03Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: Présentation................................................................................................................5 Déploiement d'iSCSI.................................................................................................................................................5 Matériel et logiciel Dell pris en charge....................................................................................................................6 Configurations de rôles et services préinstallées sur votre système......................................................................6 Chapitre 2: Applications pour gérer votre système NAS.........................................................7 Configuration initiale de votre système NAS............................................................................................................7 Utilisation de Server Manager pour configurer votre système NAS........................................................................7 Rôles et fonctionnalités de Server Manager.....................................................................................................8 Rôles Server Summary.......................................................................................................................................8 Gestion du partage et du stockage....................................................................................................................9 File Server Resource Manager (FSRM - Gestionnaire de ressources du serveur de fichiers) ........................9 Gestion des rapports de stockage.....................................................................................................................9 Disk Management (Gestion des disques)..........................................................................................................9 Distributed File System Management (DFS - Gestion du système de fichiers distribuée)................................9 Namespaces (Espaces de noms).....................................................................................................................10 Réplication........................................................................................................................................................10 Diagnostics de groupe.....................................................................................................................................11 Outils de configuration du stockage.......................................................................................................................11 Windows Server Backup (Sauvegarde de serveur Windows)........................................................................11 Gestion de votre système NAS...............................................................................................................................11 Dell OpenManage Server Administrator................................................................................................................11 Fonctionnalités intégrées de Server Administrator ........................................................................................11 Page d'accueil de Server Administrator..........................................................................................................12 Server Administrator Instrumentation Service................................................................................................12 Service d'accès à distance Server Administrator...........................................................................................12 Server Administrator Storage Management Service......................................................................................12 Journaux de Server Administrator...................................................................................................................12 Bureau à distance pour l'administration................................................................................................................12 Pour créer et enregistrer une connexion Bureau à distance .........................................................................13 Mise à jour de votre système NAS.........................................................................................................................13 Réinstallation du système d'exploitation NAS........................................................................................................14 Chapitre 3: Utilisation de votre système NAS..........................................................................15 Création d'un partage SMB (Server Message Block)............................................................................................15Modification de partages SMB..............................................................................................................................15 Partage NFS............................................................................................................................................................15 Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2003 en tant que source de mappage d'identité........................................16 Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2008 en tant que source du mappage d'identité........................................16 Mappage de nom d'utilisateur de serveur en tant que source d'identité de mappage...................................16 Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS) en tant que source de mappage d'identité.........17 Configuration d'AD LDS pour Services For NFS..............................................................................................17 Installer le rôle de serveur AD LDS..................................................................................................................18 Création d'une nouvelle instance AD LDS.......................................................................................................18 Extension du schéma AD LDS pour permettre le mappage d'utilisateur NFS.................................................19 Définition d'un nom d'instance par défaut pour toutes les instances AD LDS................................................19 Mise à jour du schéma Active Directory..........................................................................................................20 Ajout de mappages de compte utilisateur et groupe d'un ordinateur Unix à un ordinateur Windows...........21 Connexion au nom unique ou au contexte d'attribution de nom.....................................................................21 Ajout de mappages de compte utilisateur.......................................................................................................21 Ajout de mappages de compte de groupe.......................................................................................................22 Autorisation d'un accès approprié à l'objet espace de noms ADS LDS..........................................................22 Configuration de la source de mappage..........................................................................................................23 Notes de débogage pour les problèmes de mappage de compte NFS...........................................................23 Redémarrage de Server For NFS.....................................................................................................................23 Création du partage NFS..................................................................................................................................23 Création de quotas et d'écrans de fichier en utilisant l'Assistant Gestion du partage et du stockage.................24 Création de quotas et d'écrans de fichier à l'aide de File Server Resource Manager..........................................24 Création d'un nouveau volume...............................................................................................................................25 Gestion d'un volume...............................................................................................................................................25 Extension d'un volume............................................................................................................................................26 Extension d'un volume de base en utilisant l'interface Windows...................................................................26 Extension d'un volume de base à l'aide de la CLI............................................................................................26 Réduction d'un volume...........................................................................................................................................27 Considérations supplémentaires lors de la réduction d'un volume.................................................................27 Suppression d'un volume.......................................................................................................................................27 Informations supplémentaires lors de la suppression d'un volume................................................................28 Activation ou désactivation de SIS sur un volume.................................................................................................28 Activation de SIS sur un volume......................................................................................................................28 Désactivation de SIS sur un volume................................................................................................................28 Activation et configuration de copies en double de dossiers partagés.................................................................28 Effectuer une sauvegarde de votre serveur à l'aide de l'outil intégrable Microsoft Windows Server..................29 Choix des volumes à sauvegarder..........................................................................................................................29 Choix d'un emplacement de stockage....................................................................................................................301 Présentation Les systèmes Dell Network Attached Storage (NAS) fonctionnent sous le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows Storage Server 2008 R2, qui offre une interface utilisateur pour les opérations suivantes : • Configuration initiale du système • Gestion unifiée des serveurs de stockage • Configuration simplifiée • Gestion du stockage et des dossiers partagés Le système d'exploitation Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 est spécialement conçu pour fournir des performances optimales pour NAS. Il offre des améliorations de scénarios de partage de gestion de stockage, ainsi qu'une intégration de la fonctionnalité et des composants de gestion des appliances de stockage. Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 fournit une gestion de fichiers efficace et unifiée en étendant et consolidant l'interface de gestion. Ceci inclut les fonctions et fonctionnalités suivantes : • FSRM (File Server Resource Manager) offre un support pour l'exécution de tâches d'administration supplémentaires. • Share and Storage Management (Gestion de partages et stockage) est un programme intégrable qui permet le provisionnement de partages via Server Message Block (SMB) et les protocoles Services for Network File System (NFS). • Services for Network File System (NFS) est une fonction permettant aux systèmes NFS d'accéder aux fichiers présents sur le système NAS. • Remote Desktop for Administration (Bureau à distance pour l'administration) offre une mini-application d'administration à distance Windows Server qui permet l'accès à distance, basé sur un navigateur, à la console de gestion pour les clients autres que Microsoft. • Single Instance Storage (SIS) offre une optimisation de la gestion à distance de jusqu'à 20 volumes par serveur et prend en charge le retrait de SIS d'un volume (unSIS). Déploiement d'iSCSI iSCSI est un moyen utile et relativement économe de fournir du stockage pour de nouvelles applications ou de fournir un pool réseau de stockage pour des applications existantes. Les SAN iSCSI et les périphériques de stockage iSCSI sont populaires pour une variété de raisons. Ils offrent les possibilités suivantes : • Tirer profit d'investissements existant en infrastructures et expertise Ethernet. • Tirer profit d'investissements existant en protocole IP. • Offrir une extension de capacité dynamique. • Simplifier la configuration et gestion SAN. • Centraliser la gestion via la consolidation de stockage. • Fournir des performances extensibles. • Fournir une utilisation de stockage supérieure. • Présenter des volumes en tant que périphériques de stockage en bloc. 5REMARQUE: Pour configurer l'iSCSI pour les systèmes de stockage PowerVault, voir technet.microsoft.com/en-us/ library/ee344838(v=ws.10). Matériel et logiciel Dell pris en charge • Dell PowerVault NX3200 prend en charge Microsoft Windows Storage Server 2008 R2, édition standard, x64 avec SP1 • Dell PowerVault NX3300 prend en charge Microsoft Windows Storage Server 2008 R2, édition standard, x64 avec SP1 Configurations de rôles et services préinstallées sur votre système • Services de fichiers : gère les dossiers partagés et permet aux utilisateurs d'accéder à des fichiers situés sur votre système à partir du réseau. • FSRM : permet aux utilisateurs de générer des rapports, de configurer des quotas et de définir des propriétés de filtrage de fichiers. • SIS : réduit l'espace de stockage en consolidant les fichiers dupliqués sur votre système de stockage. REMARQUE: SIS n'est pas disponible sous Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 Workgroup Edition x64 with SP1. • Services d'impression • Web Server (IIS) : fournit une fonction appelée WebRDP, WebRDP permet aux systèmes exécutant Windows ou à tout autre système d'exploitation d'accéder au système à l'aide d'un navigateur web. • Bureau distant • Services SNMP • Service SNMP et fournisseur WMI • Sauvegarde de serveur Windows : permet la sauvegarde et restauration du système d'exploitation, des applications, et des données. Les sauvegardes peuvent être planifiées ponctuellement ou peuvent être quotidiennes ou hebdomadaires. • Ports pare-feu 62 Applications pour gérer votre système NAS Configuration initiale de votre système NAS Pour configurer le BIOS de votre système : 1. Connectez votre système NAS au réseau approprié. Le câblage dépend du type de NIC acheté avec votre système. Les systèmes NX3300 doivent être déployés avec au moins deux systèmes mis en cluster sur le réseau approprié. REMARQUE: Les étapes de configuration des services de clusters Microsoft pour Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 SP1 et Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 sont semblables. Pour des informations supplémentaires, voir support.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/clusters. 2. Connectez une extrémité du cordon d'alimentation au système NAS et l'autre extrémité à une source d'alimentation. 3. Connectez un clavier, un moniteur et une souris au système NAS. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre le système NAS sous tension. 5. Connectez-vous au système SAS en tant qu'administrateur. Le mot de passe par défaut est Stor@ge!. 6. L'Assistant Configuration initiale Dell PowerVault NAS vous aide avec : a. Une option pour changer le mot de passe par défaut. b. Sélection et configuration du logiciel de stockage principal, le cas échéant. c. Sélection et configuration de la langue par défaut du système, au besoin. d. Validation des paramètres. e. Redémarrage du système, au besoin. 7. La fenêtre Server Manager s'ouvre à chaque fois qu'un administrateur se connecte. Si Server Manager ne s'ouvre pas, vous pouvez l'ouvrir en cliquant sur Démarrer→ Outils d'administration → Server Manager. À l'aide de Server Manager, vous pouvez effectuer les tâches suivantes : – Configuration initiale de l'ordinateur – Configuration de la mise en réseau – Modification du nom de l'ordinateur Utilisation de Server Manager pour configurer votre système NAS La console Server Manager est une Microsoft Management Console (MMC) étendue contenant plusieurs outils de configuration et gestion en un seul emplacement. Il sert comme unique point de gestion de votre système de stockage. La fenêtre principale de Server Manager vous permet de voir : • Un instantané détaillé des informations relatives à l'identité de votre serveur • Les options sélectionnées de configuration de la sécurité • Rôles et fonctions installés 7La zone Ressources et support de la fenêtre principale du Gestionnaire de serveur contient des liens vers les documentations et téléchargements les plus récents et vous permet de participer à des programmes d'évaluation qui aideront à améliorer les versions futures de Microsoft Windows Storage Server 2008 R2. La zone Récapitulatif serveur affiche des détails sur le serveur particulièrement utiles au cours d'un dépannage, tels que le nom du système, les adresses réseau et l'ID produit du système d'exploitation exécuté sur le système. Dans la zone Récapitulatif serveur, vous pouvez visualiser et modifier les connexions réseau, modifier les propriétés système et configurer le bureau à distance. Rôles et fonctionnalités de Server Manager La zone Récapitulatif de serveur contient également quatre sections principales avec des sous-sections déroulantes. Tableau 1. Sections Usine par défaut et les Sous-liens pour votre système Sections Sous-sections Rôles • Services de fichiers – Gestion du partage et du stockage * File Server Resource Manager (FSRM) (quotas, écrans de fichier et rapports de stockage) * Gestion des disques • Services d'impression • Web Server (IIS) Diagnostics • Visionneuse d'événements • Logiciel NAS Appliance • Fiabilité et performances • Gestionnaire de périphériques Configuration • Programmateur de tâches • Pare-feu Windows et sécurité avancée • Services • Commandes WMI • Utilisateurs et groupes locaux Stockage • Gestion des disques • Sauvegarde Microsoft Windows Server Rôles Server Summary La section Récapitulatif de rôles répertorie les rôles installés sur l'ordinateur. L'icône à gauche de chaque rôle affiche l'état de fonctionnement général actuel du rôle. Cliquez sur le nom du rôle de votre choix dans la section Récapitulatif de rôles pour ouvrir la page d'accueil de ce rôle. 8Gestion du partage et du stockage La gestion du partage et du stockage permet de centraliser la gestion des dossiers et des volumes partagés sur le réseau : • Pour créer des partages SMB (Server Message Block), voir « Création de partages SMB ». • Pour créer des partages NFS, voir « Création de partages NFS ». REMARQUE: Les opérations de volume ne sont disponibles que lorsque les fournisseurs de matériel Virtual Disk Service (VDS) sont installés sur la solution. VDS n'est pas pris en charge sur ce système NAS. File Server Resource Manager (FSRM - Gestionnaire de ressources du serveur de fichiers) FSRM est une suite d'outils pour Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 qui permet aux administrateurs de comprendre, contrôler, et gérer la quantité et le type de données stockées sur leur système. En utilisant FSRM, les administrateurs peuvent placer des quotas sur les dossiers et volumes, activement trier les dossiers, et générer des rapports de stockage compréhensifs. Cet ensemble d'instruments avancés aide non seulement l'administrateur à surveiller efficacement les ressources de stockage existantes, mais aussi à planifier et implémenter de futurs changements de stratégie. Pour des informations supplémentaires, voir « Création de quotas et d'écrans de fichiers ». Gestion des rapports de stockage La gestion des rapports de stockage du jeu d'outils intégrable FSRM MMC permet les actions suivantes : • Programmation de rapports de stockage périodiques pour identifier les tendances d'utilisation des disques • Surveillance des tentatives d'enregistrement de fichier non autorisées correspondant à tous les utilisateurs ou un groupe d'utilisateurs choisi • Génération instantanée de rapports de stockage Disk Management (Gestion des disques) Disk Management est un utilitaire système pour la gestion de disques durs et les volumes ou partitions qu'ils contiennent. Disk Management permet d'initialiser des disques, créer des volumes, et formater des volumes avec les systèmes de fichiers FAT, FAT32, ou NTFS. Il vous aide aussi à effectuer la plupart des tâches de disque sans redémarrer le système ou interrompre les utilisateurs. La plupart des modifications de configuration prennent effet immédiatement. Distributed File System Management (DFS - Gestion du système de fichiers distribuée) DFS n'est pas activée sur votre système par défaut. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes → Outils d'administration→ Server Manager (Gestionnaire de serveur). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Démarrer et saisir Server Manager dans le champ Rechercher dans les programmes et fichiers. La fenêtre Server Manager s'affiche. 2. Cliquez sur Ajouter des services de rôle. 9Vous pouvez également effectuer un clic droit sur Services de fichier et cliquer sur Ajouter des services de rôle. La fenêtre Ajouter des services de rôle s'affiche. 3. Cochez la case Distributed File System et suivez l'Assistant. Namespaces (Espaces de noms) Les espaces de noms DFS permettent de grouper des dossiers partagés qui se trouvent sur différents serveurs en un ou plusieurs espaces de noms logiquement structurés. Les utilisateurs voient chaque espace de noms comme un seul dossier partagé avec une série de sous-dossiers. Cependant, la structure sous-jacente de l'espace de noms peut être constituée de nombreux dossiers partagés qui se situent sur différents serveurs et sur plusieurs sites. Création d'un espace de nom Pour créer un espace de nom : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes → Outils d'administration→ Server Manager (Gestionnaire de serveur). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Démarrer et saisir Server Manager dans le champ Rechercher dans les programmes et fichiers. La fenêtre Server Manager s'affiche. 2. Cliquez sur Ajouter des services de rôle. Vous pouvez également effectuer un clic droit sur Services de fichier et cliquer sur Ajouter des services de rôle. La fenêtre Ajouter des services de rôle s'affiche. 3. Cochez la case Distributed File System (DFS) puis cliquez sur Suivant. La fenêtre Créer un espace de nom DFS s'affiche. 4. Saisissez un nom dans le champ Entrer un nom pour cet espace de nom et terminez l'Assistant. Réplication La réplication DFS est un moteur de réplication à plusieurs maîtres capable de répliquer des données entre plusieurs serveurs par une connexion réseau à largeur de bande limitée. Création d'un nouveau groupe de réplication Pour créer un nouveau groupe de réplication : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes → Outils d'administration→ Server Manager (Gestionnaire de serveur). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Démarrer et saisir Server Manager dans le champ Rechercher dans les programmes et fichiers. La fenêtre Server Manager s'affiche. 2. Cliquez sur Ajouter des services de rôle. Vous pouvez également effectuer un clic droit sur Services de fichier et cliquer sur Ajouter des services de rôle. La fenêtre Ajouter des services de rôle s'affiche. 3. Cochez la case Réplication DFS et terminez l'Assistant. 10Diagnostics de groupe Les outils de cette section aident à effectuer des diagnostics ou indiquer des problèmes dans votre système. Pour des informations supplémentaires sur l'utilisation de ces outils, effectuez un clic droit sur Intégrable dans Server Manager puis cliquez sur Aide. Outils de configuration du stockage Les outils de configuration du stockage aident l'administrateur à optimiser certaines tâches administratives. Pour des informations supplémentaires sur l'utilisation de ces outils, effectuez un clic droit sur Outil intégrable dans Server Manager puis cliquez sur Aide. Windows Server Backup (Sauvegarde de serveur Windows) Windows Server Backup est une fonction de Windows Server 2008 R2 qui fournit des assistants et outils pour vous aider à effectuer des tâches de sauvegarde et restauration de base pour le serveur sur lequel il est installé. Cette fonction a été retravaillée et introduit une nouvelle technologie. La fonction de sauvegarde précédente (Ntbackup.exe) dans des versions antérieures de Windows n'est plus disponible. Pour des informations supplémentaires, voir « Effectuer une sauvegarde de votre serveur ». Gestion de votre système NAS Les outils de gestion suivants sont préinstallés sur le système : • Dell OpenManage Server Administrator • Bureau à distance pour l'administration Dell OpenManage Server Administrator Dell OpenManage Server Administrator fournit une solution de gestion de systèmes un-à-un complète de deux façons : • Interface utilisateur graphique basée sur le Web intégrée : par l'intermédiaire de la page d'accueil de Server Administrator • Interface de ligne de commande (CLI) : par l'intermédiaire du système d'exploitation Server Administrator permet la gestion des systèmes NAS sur un réseau local ou distant. Server Administrator fournit des informations sur : • Les systèmes qui fonctionnent correctement et ceux qui sont défectueux ; • Les systèmes nécessitant des mises à jour • Les systèmes nécessitant des opérations de restauration à distance Fonctionnalités intégrées de Server Administrator Server Administrator offre une gestion et administration simple d'utilisation de systèmes locaux et distants via un ensemble compréhensif de services de gestion intégrés. Server Administrator se trouve uniquement sur le système géré et est accessible localement et à distance via la page d'accueil de Server Administrator. Server Administrator assure la sécurité de ses connexions de gestion via le contrôle d'accès à base de rôles (RBAC - Role-Based Access Control), l'authentification, et le cryptage SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) de norme dans l'industrie. 11Page d'accueil de Server Administrator La page d'accueil de Server Administrator fournit un système de gestion à base de navigateur web depuis le nœud géré ou depuis un hôte distant via un LAN, service bas débit, ou réseau sans fil. Lorsque le système NAS est installé et configuré sur le nœud géré, vous pouvez effectuer des fonctions de gestion à distance à partir de n'importe quel système avec un navigateur web pris en charge et une connexion. De plus, la page d'accueil de Server Administrator fournit une aide en ligne étendue et ciblée au contexte. Server Administrator Instrumentation Service Instrumentation Service fournit un accès rapide à des informations détaillées sur les défaillances et les performances recueillies par des agents de gestion de systèmes standard de l'industrie et permet l'administration à distance de systèmes surveillés, y compris l'arrêt, le démarrage et la sécurité. Service d'accès à distance Server Administrator Le service d'accès à distance Server Administrator offre une solution de gestion du système à distance complète pour les systèmes équipés de contrôleurs d'accès à distance. Pour des informations supplémentaires sur le Service d'accès à distance, voir Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller 7 (iDRAC7) Version User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation de la version 7 d'iDRAC) à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Server Administrator Storage Management Service Le Storage Management Service fournit des informations de gestion de stockage dans une vue graphique intégrée. Le Storage Management Service permet d'afficher l'état du stockage local connecté à un système surveillé en utilisant un contrôleur PERC (PowerEdge Expandable RAID Controller). Vous pouvez aussi créer des disques virtuels (souvent appelés LUN) à l'aide de ce service. Journaux de Server Administrator Server Administrator affiche des journaux de commandes exécutées au système ou par le système, des événements de matériel surveillés, des événements POST, et des alertes système. Vous pouvez ouvrir ces journaux depuis la page d'accueil, ainsi que les imprimer ou enregistrer en tant que rapports, et les envoyer par e-mail à un contact de service désigné. Bureau à distance pour l'administration Vous pouvez administrer à distance une appliance de stockage en utilisant le Bureau à distance pour l'administration (connu préalablement comme Services de terminal en mode Administration à distance). Vous pouvez l'utiliser pour administrer un ordinateur à partir d'essentiellement n'importe quel ordinateur de votre réseau. Le Bureau à distance pour l'administration est basé sur la technologie de services de terminal et est spécialement conçu pour la gestion de serveurs. Le Bureau à distance pour l'administration n'exige pas l'achat de licences spéciales pour les ordinateurs client ayant accès au serveur. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'installer une licence Terminal Server lorsque vous utilisez le bureau à distance pour l'administration. 12Vous pouvez utiliser le bureau à distance pour vous connecter à distance au serveur à l'aide de n'importe laquelle des fonctions suivantes : • Connexion Bureau à distance • Gestion Web à distance • Mini-application d'administration à distance Microsoft Windows Server Pour en savoir plus, voir le Bureau à distance pour l'administration, également disponible sur l'Aide de Windows Server 2008 R2. REMARQUE: Pour une connexion sécurisée, il vous est recommandé d'obtenir un certificat pour le serveur et d'utiliser une connexion HTTPS pour vous connecter à Windows Storage Server 2008 R2. Pour créer et enregistrer une connexion Bureau à distance Les administrateurs peuvent pleinement gérer les ordinateurs exécutant Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 à partir d'un ordinateur Windows en utilisant une connexion Bureau à distance. Pour faciliter l'accès, les administrateurs peuvent créer une connexion Bureau à distance et l'enregistrer sur le bureau de l'ordinateur utilisé pour l'administration. Pour créer et enregistrer une connexion Bureau à distance sous Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 : REMARQUE: Pour en savoir plus sur la configuration de la connexion Bureau à distance, cliquez sur Aide dans la fenêtre Connexion Bureau à distance. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Exécuter. La boîte de dialogue Exécuter s'affiche. 2. Dans la boîte de dialogue Exécuter, tapez MSTSC, puis cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre Connexion Bureau à distance s'affiche. 3. Dans la fenêtre de Connexion Bureau à distance, saisissez le nom de l'ordinateur ou l'adresse IP du serveur de stockage, puis cliquez sur Options. La fenêtre Paramètres de la matrice s'affiche. 4. Dans la fenêtre Connexion Bureau à distance, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous dans la zone Paramètres de connexion. La fenêtre Enregistrer sous apparaît. 5. Dans le champ Nom du fichier, saisissez le nom de la connexion et conservez l'extension .rdp. 6. Dans le menu déroulant Enregistrer sous, sélectionnez Bureau, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Pour en savoir plus sur la configuration de la connexion Bureau à distance, cliquez sur Aide dans la fenêtre Connexion Bureau à distance. Mise à jour de votre système NAS Pour mettre à jour votre système NAS avec les derniers logiciels : 1. Rendez-vous sur le site Web de support Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et téléchargez le dernier logiciel PowerVault NAS Appliance et tous les progiciels de mise à jour Dell correspondants à votre système. Par exemple, si vous possédez un PowerVault NX3300, téléchargez le logiciel NAS Appliance Software pour NX3300 en plus des progiciels de mise à jour Dell pour ce système. 2. Double-cliquez sur le fichier téléchargé et suivez les indications de l'Assistant. REMARQUE: Le logiciel PowerVault NAS Appliance s'exécute uniquement sur les systèmes PowerVault NX correspondants. 13Réinstallation du système d'exploitation NAS PRÉCAUTION: Il est recommandé de sauvegarder les disques internes de votre système avant de réinstaller le système d'exploitation NAS. 1. Insérez le support de ressources de réinstallation du système d'exploitation Dell PowerVault NAS (Dell PowerVault NAS Operating System Reinstall), puis mettez le système hors tension. 2. Redémarrez le système NAS et démarrez depuis le support de ressources. REMARQUE: Votre système NAS démarre à partir du support de ressources par défaut. Vous devrez peut-être modifier l'ordre de démarrage si celui-ci a été modifié par le passé. La réinstallation du système d'exploitation démarre et continue sans intervention de l'utilisateur si aucune erreur ne survient. Ce processus prend environ 30 à 45 minutes. Les erreurs qui surviennent sont indiquées sur le panneau LCD avant de votre périphérique. Pour résoudre des problèmes, voir Dell PowerVault Network Attached Storage (NAS) Systems Troubleshooting Guide (Guide de dépannage des systèmes NAS PowerVault Dell) sur le site web de support Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. 3. Une fois la réinstallation du système d'exploitation terminée, l'Assistant Configuration initiale PowerVault NAS apparaît sur votre bureau. 4. L'Assistant Configuration initiale PowerVault NAS vous guide comme suit : – Installation du logiciel NAS Appliance – Modification du mot de passe administrateur par défaut – Installation du logiciel de stockage dorsal (le cas échéant) – Sélection et installation du pack de langue, si nécessaire 5. Une fois l'Assistant PowerVault NAS Initial Configuration Wizard (Configuration initiale de NAS PowerVault) terminé, ouvrez Server Manager. 143 Utilisation de votre système NAS Création d'un partage SMB (Server Message Block) Le protocole Server Message Block (SMB), un contrôle d'accès des systèmes de fichiers basé sur Microsoft Windows, est mis en œuvre en donnant des permissions à des utilisateurs individuels et à des groupes. Pour créer un partage SMB à l'aide du Gestionnaire de serveur : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Programmes → Outils d'administration→ Gestion du partage et stockage . Ou bien, allez à Server Manager→ Rôles → Services de fichier→ Gestion du partage et stockage. La fenêtre Gestion du partage et stockage (Local) s'affiche. 2. Dans le volet de droite, sélectionnez Partage provision. 3. Parcourez les volumes et sélectionnez celui que vous souhaitez activer en tant que partage SMB, puis lancez l'Assistant. 4. Sélectionnez SMB en tant que protocole de partage. Le nom du dossier s'affiche sous forme de nom du partage suivi du chemin du partage. 5. Spécifiez les paramètres et permissions SMB dans les écrans qui suivent. Réviser les paramètres et créer le partage vous permet de réviser les paramètres du partage avant de le créer. 6. Une fois les paramètres du partage passés en revue, cliquez sur Créer pour créer le partage. 7. Fermez l'écran de confirmation. Modification de partages SMB Pour modifier les propriétés d'un partage existant : 1. Sélectionnez le partage dans le volet du milieu de l'écran Gestion du partage et du stockage. 2. Effectuez un clic droit pour sélectionner Propriétés. 3. Sélectionnez les différents onglets pour modifier les propriétés. L'accès au dossier partagé SMB nouvellement créé peut se faire à partir d'un client basé sur Windows. Partage NFS Le protocole NFS, qui fournit un contrôle d'accès (pour des systèmes de fichier basés sur UNIX), est mis en œuvre en donnant des permissions à des systèmes clients et groupes spécifiques à l'aide de noms de réseau. Avant de créer un partage NFS, l'administrateur doit configurer le mappage d'identité. La source de mappage d'identité peut être l'un des éléments suivants : • Serveur de noms de domaine Microsoft Active Directory (contrôleur de domaine Microsoft Windows Server 2003 ou contrôleur de domaine Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2) • Serveur User Name Mapping (UNM) • Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS) 15Choisissez l'option appropriée parmi les quatre options possibles, effectuez les actions, puis passez aux étapes de configuration et enfin aux étapes de création d'un partage NFS. Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2003 en tant que source de mappage d'identité 1. Allez sur le Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2003 et installez Identity Management for UNIX. REMARQUE: Il se peut que vous ayez besoin du support Windows 2003 SP 2. Si on vous le demande, introduisez le support Windows 2003 SP 2 et effectuez les actions suivantes : 2. Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes→ Ajouter ou supprimer des composants Windows→ Active directory Services (Services Active Directory). 3. Cliquez sur Détails. 4. Sélectionnez l'option Identity Management for UNIX, puis cliquez sur Suivant pour terminer l'installation. REMARQUE: Redémarrez votre système une fois l'installation terminée. Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2008 en tant que source du mappage d'identité Pour installer et configurer Identity Management for UNIX : 1. Allez sur le Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2008 et installez Identity Management for Unix (Gestion d'identité pour Unix) à l'aide de Server Manager→ Rôles→ Ajouter des services de rôles. REMARQUE: Le Contrôleur de domaine Windows 2008 doit être redémarré pour activer ce service. 2. Allez sur Client NFS, notez le nom d'utilisateur, le nom de groupe, l'ID d'utilisateur et l'ID de groupe. 3. Allez dans le Contrôleur de domaine 4. Ouvrez Utilisateurs et ordinateurs Active Directory, puis créez le nom d'utilisateur et le groupe UNIX. 5. Ajoutez l'utilisateur au groupe créé à l'étape précédente. 6. Sélectionnez l'utilisateur récemment créé, allez à Propriétés → Attributs UNIX. Modifiez l'ID d'utilisateur, l'ID de groupe, le shell, le répertoire d'accueil et les détails de domaine (saisis antérieurement du client NFS). 7. Sélectionnez le groupe nouvellement créé, vérifiez l'ID de groupe (pour qu'il corresponde à l'ID du groupe UNIX), modifiez les propriétés UNIX, ajoutez les membres (utilisateurs que vous avez ajoutés à l'étape précédente), puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 8. Allez sur le serveur PowerVault NAS Windows Storage Server 2008 (NFS). 9. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Programmes → Outils d'administration→ Services for Network File System (NFS) (Services pour NFS). 10. Sélectionnez Services pour NFS, effectuez un clic droit sur Propriétés→ Nom de domaine Active Directory en tant que source de mappage d'identité, saisissez le nom de domaine Windows 2008, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Mappage de nom d'utilisateur de serveur en tant que source d'identité de mappage Pour installer et configurer le mappage de nom d'utilisateur : 1. Sur le système NAS, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Outils d'administration→ Services pour NFS. 2. Dans la fenêtre qui apparaît, faites un clic droit sur Services pour NFS, puis sélectionnez Propriétés. 3. Sélectionnez Mappage de noms d'utilisateurs en tant que source de mappage d'identité et tapez le Nom d'hôte du serveur de mappage du nom d'utilisateur dans l'espace prévu. 4. Allez sur le serveur UNM, copiez le mot de passe et groupez les fichiers que vous avez recueillis à l'étape précédente sur un disque local. 165. Allez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes→ Ajouter des composants Windows→ Sélectionner d'autres services de fichier réseau ou d'impression. 6. Cliquez sur Détails. 7. Sélectionnez Services Microsoft pour NFS, cliquez sur Détails, puis sélectionnez Mappage de noms d'utilisateur. 8. Cliquez sur Suivant et terminez l'installation. REMARQUE: Redémarrez votre système une fois l'installation terminée. 9. Allez sur le Client NFS, obtenez les fichiers /etc/passwd et /etc/group et copiez-les sur une clé USB. 10. Allez sur le serveur UNM et copiez les fichiers UNIX de la clé USB sur un disque dur local. Ouvrez Services Microsoft pour NFS. 11. Sélectionnez l'option Mappage de noms d'utilisateur, puis effectuez un clic droit sur Propriétés. 12. Allez sur l'onglet Source utilisateur Unix et sélectionnez l'option Utiliser les fichiers de mot de passe et de groupe. 13. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir, puis sélectionnez les fichiers de mot de passe et de groupe que vous avez copiés à l'étape précédente. 14. Allez sur l'onglet Mappage simple, sélectionnez l'option Utiliser des mappes simples et cliquez sur Appliquer. 15. Sélectionnez Mappes utilisateur, puis effectuez un clic droit sur Créer la mappe. 16. Cliquez sur les options Répertorier les utilisateurs Windows et Répertorier les utilisateurs UNIX. Mappez les utilisateurs (sélectionnez un utilisateur à la fois) puis ajoutez-les à la liste. Répétez cette étape pour les autres utilisateurs répertoriés. 17. Ouvrez Mappes de groupe→ Créer des mappes. 18. Répertoriez Groupes Windows et Unix, mappez-les et ajoutez-les à la liste. 19. Ouvrez le fichier .maphosts (C:\Windows\msnfs et C:\Windows\amd64\cmpnents\r2 et recherchez le fichier .maphosts), puis ajoutez les détails du serveur NFS (adresse IP 4 ou nom d'hôte, si DNS existe), puis enregistrez le fichier. Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS) en tant que source de mappage d'identité AD LDS est utilisé pour le mappage d'identité sur les ordinateurs dont le système est Windows Server 2008 R2, dans un environnement où il n'y a pas d'Active Directory permettant le mappage des utilisateurs. Avant de démarrer le mappage AD LDS : • Déterminez les utilisateurs et les groupes de l'ordinateur Unix qui vont être mappés sur les utilisateurs et les groupes de l'ordinateur Windows. • Obtenez l'UID et le GID de chaque utilisateur Unix, et le GID de chaque groupe Unix. • Créez un utilisateur ou un groupe sur l'ordinateur Windows pour chaque utilisateur ou groupe Unix à mapper. REMARQUE: Chaque UID et GID exige un mappage unique. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les mappages un-à- plusieurs ou plusieurs-à-un. Configuration d'AD LDS pour Services For NFS Pour configurer AD LDS pour Services For NFS vous devez : 1. Installer le rôle de serveur AD LDS. 2. Créer une nouvelle instance AD LDS. 3. Étendre le schéma AD LDS pour permettre le mappage NFS. 4. Définir un nom d'instance par défaut pour toutes les instances AD LDS. 5. Mettre à jour le schéma Active Directory. 176. Ajouter des mappages de compte utilisateur et groupe d'un ordinateur Unix à un ordinateur Windows. 7. Autoriser un accès approprié à l'objet d'espace de noms ADS LDS. 8. Configurer la source de mappage. Installer le rôle de serveur AD LDS. Pour installer le rôle de serveur AD LDS : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Outils d'administration → Gestionnaire de serveurs. 2. Dans l'arborescence de la console, faites un clic droit sur le nœud Rôles, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des rôles pour démarrer l'AssistantAjouter des rôles. 3. Dans l'Assistant Ajouter des rôles, lisez les informations dans la fenêtre Avant de commencer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: La fenêtre Avant de commencer ne s'affiche pas si la case Ignorer cette page par défaut est cochée. 4. Dans la fenêtre Sélectionner des rôles de serveurs, cochez la case Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: Si des fonctionnalités supplémentaires sont requises pour l'installation d'AD LDS, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît. Cliquez sur Ajouter les fonctionnalités requises pour continuer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Dans la fenêtre Services Active Directory Lightweight, vérifiez le résumé des informations, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6. Dans la fenêtre Confirmer les sélections pour l’installation, lisez les messages d'informations éventuels, puis cliquez sur Installer. 7. Consultez la fenêtre Résultats de l'installation pour vérifier que l'installation s'est bien déroulée. 8. Cliquez sur Fermer pour quitter l'Assistant. Le nœud Services Active Directory Lightweight Directory (AD LDS) est créé sous le nœud Rôles dans l'arborescence de la console. Création d'une nouvelle instance AD LDS Pour créer une nouvelle instance AD LDS : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Outils d'administration→ Assistant Installation des services AD LDS. 2. Dans la fenêtre Bienvenue dans l'Assistant Installation des services AD LDS, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Dans la fenêtre Options de configuration, sélectionnez une instance unique, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Dans la fenêtre Nom de l'instance, tapez le nom de l'instance, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: Dans cet exemple, vous pouvez utiliser nfsadldsinstance comme nom d'instance. 5. Dans la fenêtre Ports, remplissez les zones de texte Numéro du port LDAP et Numéro du port SSL, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: Le numéro du port LDAP par défaut est 389 et le numéro du port SSL par défaut est 636. 6. Dans la fenêtre Partition de l'annuaire d'applications, sélectionnez Oui, créer une partition d'annuaire d'applications. 7. Dans la zone de texte Nom de la partition, utilisez le format suivant pour entrer un nom de partition qui n'existe pas encore dans cette instance : CN=,DC= REMARQUE: Par convention, cette chaîne de caractères utilise le nom de domaine complet ; par exemple, si le nom d'instance est nfsadldsinstance et que le nom du serveur est serveur1, le nom de partition serait le suivant : CN=nfsadldsinstance,DC=serveur1. 188. Après avoir tapé le nom de la partition, cliquez sur Suivant. 9. Dans la fenêtre Répertoires, dans les zones de texte Fichiers de données et Fichier de récupération de données, tapez ou recherchez les emplacements où vous souhaitez stocker les fichiers liés à AD LDS, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 10. Dans la fenêtre Sélection des comptes de service, sélectionnez Compte de service réseau, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: Si l'ordinateur n'est pas membre d'un domaine, un message de notification apparaît. Il vous avertit que cette instance AD LDS ne peut pas répliquer des données avec des instances AD LDS sur d'autres ordinateurs avec ce compte de service. 11. Cliquez sur Oui pour continuer ou sur Non pour annuler. 12. Dans la fenêtre Administrateurs AD LDS, sélectionnez l'utilisateur dont la session est actuellement ouverte : option , puis cliquez sur Suivant. 13. Dans la fenêtre Importation des fichiers LDIF, sélectionnez la case à cocher correspondant à chaque fichier que vous souhaitez importer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: Vous avez besoin de MS-InetOrgPerson.LDF et MS-User.LDF. 14. Dans la fenêtre Prêt pour l'installation, sous Sélections, vérifiez les sélections répertoriées, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 15. Cliquez sur Terminer pour fermer l'Assistant. Pour vérifier si une instance AD LDS active existe, démarrez Services.msc. Chaque instance AD LDS est répertoriée. Ajouter/Supprimer des programmes devrait aussi afficher AD LDS comme étant présent. Extension du schéma AD LDS pour permettre le mappage d'utilisateur NFS Pour étendre le schéma AD LDS pour permettre le mappage NFS : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer, effectuez un clic droit sur l'invite de commande, puis cliquez sur Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur pour ouvrir une invite de commande privilégiée. 2. Naviguez jusqu'au répertoire C:\WINDOWS\ADAM, puis tapez la commande suivante : ldifde -i -u -f MS-AdamSchemaW2K8.LDF -s localhost:389 -j . -c "cn=Configuration,dc=X" #configurationNamingContext Cette commande importe le fichier MS-AdamSchemaW2K8.LDF. REMARQUE: Cet exemple utilise le numéro de port LDAP par défaut 389 pour l'instance AD LDS. Ne modifiez pas les chaînes "cn=Configuration,dc=X" et #configurationNamingContext. Définition d'un nom d'instance par défaut pour toutes les instances AD LDS Pour définir un nom d'instance par défaut pour une instance AD LDS : 1. Cliquez sur DémarrerÆ Outils d'administrationÆ Éditeur ADSI pour ouvrir l'Éditeur ADSI. 2. Dans l'arborescence de la console, effectuez un clic droit sur Éditeur ADSI, puis cliquez sur Connecter à. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de connexion apparaît. a. Sous Point de connexion, sélectionnez l'option Sélectionner un Contexte d’attribution de noms connu, puis sélectionnez Configuration dans le menu déroulant. b. Sous Ordinateur, choisissez Sélectionner ou taper une option domaine ou serveur puis tapez ceci dans la zone de texte : localhost:389 19REMARQUE: Cet exemple utilise le numéro de port LDAP par défaut 389. Si vous avez spécifié un numéro de port différent dans l'Assistant de configuration d'Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services, utilisez cette valeur à la place. 3. Cliquez sur OK. L'Éditeur ADSI met à jour son affichage et affiche la nouvelle connexion. 4. Dans l'arborescence qui s'affiche, sous le nœud Configuration, cliquez sur CN=Configuration, cliquez sur CN=Sites, cliquez sur CN=Default-First-Site-Name, cliquez sur CN=Servers, cliquez sur CN=server1$ nfsadldsinstance, puis cliquez sur CN=NTDS Settings. 5. Effectuez un clic droit sur CN=NTDS Settings, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 6. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés, cliquez sur msDs-DefaultNamingContext, puis sur Modifier. 7. Dans l'Éditeur d'attribut de chaîne, dans la zone de texte Valeur, tapez CN=nfsadldsinstance, dc=server1, puis cliquez sur OK. 8. Fermez l'Éditeur ADSI. Mise à jour du schéma Active Directory Pour mettre à jour le schéma Active Directory : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer, effectuez un clic droit sur l'invite de commande, puis cliquez sur Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur pour ouvrir une invite de commande privilégiée. 2. Naviguez jusqu'au répertoire C:\WINDOWS\ADAM, puis tapez la commande suivante : regsvr32 schmmgmt.dll Cette commande active le plug-in Active Directory, schmmgmt.dll. 3. Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Exécuter, puis tapez MMC pour ouvrir la console de gestion Microsoft (MMC). 4. Dans le menu Fichier, cliquez sur Ajouter/Supprimer un jeu d'outils intégrable. 5. Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter ou supprimer un jeu d'outils intégrable, cliquez sur Schéma Active Directory. 6. Cliquez sur Ajouter, puis sur OK. 7. Effectuez un clic droit sur le nœud Schéma Active Directory, puis cliquez sur Changer de contrôleur de domaine Active Directory pour établir une connexion avec l'instance AD LDS précédemment créée. 8. Dans la boîte de dialogue Changer de serveur de répertoire, sous Changer en, cliquez sur Ce contrôleur de domaine ou une instance AD LDS. 9. Dans la colonne Nom, remplacez le texte par le serveur et le numéro de port (par exemple, localhost:389). 10. Cliquez sur OK. 11. Ajoutez les attributs gidNumber et uidNumber à la classe utilisateur de la façon suivante : a. Développez le nœud Schéma Active Directory, développez le nœud Classes, effectuez un clic droit sur Utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. b. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés, cliquez sur l'onglet Attributs. c. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner l'objet schéma. d. Cliquez sur gidNumber, puis sur OK. e. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner l'objet schéma. f. Cliquez sur uidNumber, puis sur OK. g. Cliquez sur OK. 12. Ajoutez l'attribut gidNumber à la classe de groupe de la façon suivante : a. Développez le nœud Schéma Active Directory et le nœud Classes. b. Effectuez un clic droit sur Groupe, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. c. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés, cliquez sur l'onglet Attributs. 20d. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner l'objet schéma. e. Cliquez sur gidNumber, puis sur OK. f. Cliquez sur OK. 13. Fermez la MMC, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ajout de mappages de compte utilisateur et groupe d'un ordinateur Unix à un ordinateur Windows Cette procédure comporte les étapes suivantes : • Connexion à un Nom unique ou Contexte d'attribution de nom. Suivez cette procédure pour établir un contexte d'attribution de nom et créer un conteneur pour vos mappages de compte depuis UNIX au système d'exploitation Windows. • Ajout de mappes de comptes utilisateur. Suivez cette procédure pour créer un objet de classe utilisateur dans le conteneur CN=Users, pour mapper les attributs uidNumber, gidNumber et sAMAccountName. • Ajout de mappes de comptes de groupe. Suivez cette procédure pour créer un objet de classe groupe dans le conteneur CN=Users, pour mapper les attributs gidNumber et sAMAccountName. Connexion au nom unique ou au contexte d'attribution de nom Pour établir une connexion au contexte d'attribution de nom unique : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Outils d'administration→ Éditeur ADSI pour ouvrir l'Éditeur ADSI. 2. Dans l'arborescence de la console, effectuez un clic droit sur Éditeur ADSI, puis cliquez sur Connecter à. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de connexion apparaît. 3. Sous Point de connexion, sélectionnez l'option Sélectionner un contexte d’attribution de noms connu. 4. Cliquez sur Contexte d'attribution des noms par défaut dans la liste déroulante. 5. Sous Ordinateur, sélectionnez l'option Sélectionnez ou entrez un domaine ou un serveur, puis tapez dans la zone de texte le nom du serveur et le numéro de port séparés par un deux-points (par exemple localhost:389). 6. Cliquez sur OK. L' Éditeur ADSI met à jour son affichage et affiche la nouvelle connexion. 7. Dans l'arborescence qui apparaît, sous le nœud Contexte d'attribution de noms par défaut, effectuez un clic droit sur le nom de la partition, pointez sur Nouveau, puis cliquez sur Objet. REMARQUE: Pour cet exemple, sous le contexte d'attribution de noms par défaut [localhost:389], sélectionnez les propriétés suivantes : CN=nfsadldsinstance, DC=server1. 8. Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un objet, sélectionnez la classe Conteneur, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9. Dans la zone de texte Valeur, tapez Utilisateurs, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Cette valeur spécifie le nom de l'objet conteneur qui sera utilisé pour conserver vos mappages de compte utilisateur. 10. Cliquez sur Terminer. Ajout de mappages de compte utilisateur Pour ajouter des mappages de compte utilisateur : 1. Dans l'Éditeur ADSI, développez le nœud Contexte d'attribution de noms par défaut, puis développez le nom de la partition. 2. Effectuez un clic droit sur CN=Users, pointez sur Nouveau, puis cliquez sur Objet. 213. Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un objet, sélectionnez la classe Utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Dans la zone de texte Valeur, tapez le nom d'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE: Le nom d'utilisateur n'est pas associé à l'utilisateur Windows ou Unix, et peut être n'importe quel nom. 5. Cliquez sur le bouton Plus d'attributs pour modifier les attributs uidNumber, gidNumber et sAMAccountName de ce compte utilisateur. REMARQUE: Le uidNumber et gidNumber représentent l'UID et le GID de l'utilisateur UNIX qui est mappé, et le sAMAccountName doit correspondre au nom d'un utilisateur Windows local sur l'ordinateur qui exécute Server for NFS. Si, après avoir choisi le bouton Plus d'attributs, le uidNumber et gidNumber n'apparaissent pas, fermez puis rouvrez ADSI Edit MMC. 6. Cliquez sur OK. Ajout de mappages de compte de groupe Pour ajouter des mappages de compte de groupe : 1. Dans l'Éditeur ADSI, développez le nœud Contexte d'attribution de noms par défaut, puis développez le nom de la partition. 2. Effectuez un clic droit sur CN=Users, pointez sur Nouveau, puis cliquez sur Objet. 3. Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un objet, sélectionnez la classe Groupe, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Assurez-vous que le nom de l'objet de groupe correspond au nom du compte de groupe pour lequel le mappage de compte de groupe est souhaité. 5. Définissez les attributs gidNumber et sAMAccountName pour le nouvel objet de groupe. REMARQUE: Le gidNumber est le GID (ID de groupe) du groupe UNIX à mapper, et le sAMAccountName doit correspondre au nom d'un groupe local de l'ordinateur Windows qui exécute Server for NFS. Si, après avoir sélectionné le bouton Plus d'attributs, le uidNumber et gidNumber n'apparaissent pas, fermez et ouvrez l'Éditeur ADSI MMC. 6. Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Terminer pour quitter l'Assistant. Autorisation d'un accès approprié à l'objet espace de noms ADS LDS Pour connecter la partition de configuration : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer, effectuez un clic droit sur l'invite de commande, puis cliquez sur Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur pour ouvrir une invite de commande privilégiée. 2. Naviguez vers le répertoire C:\WINDOWS\ADAM, puis exécutez la commande dsacls pour donner au groupe Everyone l'accès en lecture à la zone de stockage des données de mappage de la façon suivante : dsacls "\\server1:389\CN=nfsadldsinstance,dc=server1" /G everyone:GR /I:T 3. Vous pouvez aussi, si vous configurez une zone de stockage AD LDS partagée pour permettre à plusieurs serveurs NFS d'interroger la base de données de mappage de compte, ajouter la zone de stockage du mappage à l'ACL pour donner l'accès en lecture au compte Connexion anonyme de la façon suivante : dsacls "\\server1:389\CN=nfsadldsinstance,dc=server1" /G everyone:GR /I:T REMARQUE: Vous pouvez sauter cette étape s'il n'y a pas d'accès partagé entre ordinateurs à la zone de stockage des données de mappage. 22Configuration de la source de mappage Pour configurer la source de mappage : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer, effectuez un clic droit sur l'invite de commande, puis cliquez sur Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur pour ouvrir une invite de commande privilégiée. 2. Exécutez la commande suivante, dans laquelle est le nom de l'ordinateur où l'instance AD LDS a été créée, et est le port qu'utilise l'instance AD LDS : nfsadmin mapping config adlookup=yes addomain=: REMARQUE: Pour cet exemple, utilisez la commande suivante : nfsadmin mapping config adlookup=yes addomain=server1:389 3. Testez la configuration en accédant aux ressources NFS et en vérifiant que les mappages d'utilisateur et de groupe fonctionnent comme prévu. Notes de débogage pour les problèmes de mappage de compte NFS Le serveur pour NFS peut être configuré pour journaliser les erreurs de mappage de compte dans le Journal des événements Windows en définissant la clé de registre suivante : HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\nfsserver\Parameters \VerboseMappingFailureLogging INVALID USE OF SYMBOLS REG_DWORD = 1 Une fois la clé créée, vous devez redémarrer Serveur pour NFS. Redémarrage de Server For NFS Pour redémarrer Server For NFS : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer, effectuez un clic droit sur l'invite de commande, puis cliquez sur Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur pour ouvrir une invite de commande privilégiée. 2. Exécutez la commande suivante : nfsadmin server stop && nfsadmin server start Création du partage NFS Avant de créer le partage NFS, consultez la rubrique « Partage NFS ». REMARQUE: Veillez à répondre aux exigences préalables et à effectuer les étapes de configuration avant de procéder à la création du partage NFS. Pour créer un partage NFS : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Programmes → Outils d'administration→ Gestion des partages et du stockage, ou cliquez sur Server Manager (Gestionnaire de serveurs) → Rôles → Services de fichier→ Gestion des partages et du stockage. 2. Dans le volet de droite, sélectionnez Partage provision. 3. Parcourez les volumes et sélectionnez celui que vous souhaitez activer en tant que partage NFS, puis suivez l'Assistant. 4. Sélectionnez NFS en tant que protocole de partage. 23Le nom du dossier s'affiche comme nom de partage suivi du chemin de partage. Spécifiez les paramètres et permissions NTFS/NFS dans les écrans suivants. REMARQUE: Lors de la création du partage, modifiez les paramètres NTFS pour ajouter les détails du groupe récemment créé avec des permissions spécifiques. (Ceci ajoute tous les nouveaux utilisateurs que vous avez inclus dans le groupe). 5. Avant la création du partage NFS, l'option Réviser les paramètres et créer le partage permet de réviser les paramètres du partage avant de le créer. 6. Cliquez sur Créer pour continuer. 7. Fermez l'écran de confirmation. 8. Allez sur le Client NFS et faites un Montage NFS. REMARQUE: Seul l'utilisateur UNIX (qui a été ajouté à la liste d'utilisateurs du domaine) a accès au partage NFS. Si vous avez activé l'accès Anonyme pour le partage NFS, tous les utilisateurs UNIX ont accès au partage. Création de quotas et d'écrans de fichier en utilisant l'Assistant Gestion du partage et du stockage Des quotas et écrans de fichier peuvent être créés à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion du partage et du stockage lors de la création d'un partage NFS ou SMB. REMARQUE: Vous pouvez utiliser le Gestionnaire de ressources du serveur de fichiers (FSRM) qui se trouve parmi les Outils d'administration ou la Gestion du partage et du stockage pour les opérations relatives aux quotas et aux écrans de fichier. 1. Lancez l'Assistant Partage provision, créez un partage NFS ou SMB et suivez les étapes de l'Assistant. Après l'écran Permission de partage, l'écran Règle des quotas s'affiche. 2. Sélectionnez la case à cocher Appliquer un quota et sélectionnez une option pour Obtenir les propriétés depuis ce modèle de quota. 3. Sélectionnez Suivant pour passer à l'écran Règle d'écran de fichier. 4. Cochez la case Appliquer l'écran de fichier, puis sélectionnez une option pour Obtenir les propriétés depuis ce modèle d'écran de fichier. Réviser les paramètres et créer le partage répertorie les détails des règles de quota et d'écran de fichier. 5. Pour effectuer des modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Précédent, sinon cliquez sur Créer. Les options sélectionnées (Partage NFS/SMB, Quota et Écran de fichier) sont créées. Création de quotas et d'écrans de fichier à l'aide de File Server Resource Manager Vous pouvez créer des quotas et des écrans de fichier à l'aide de l'Assistant File Server Resource Manager REMARQUE: Vous pouvez utiliser le Gestionnaire de ressources du serveur de fichiers (FSRM) qui se trouve parmi les Outils d'administration ou la Gestion du partage et du stockage pour les opérations relatives aux quotas et aux écrans de fichier. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Outils d'administration → File Server Resource Manager. 2. Cliquez sur Gestion de quotas pour afficher les Quotas et le Modèle de quota. 3. Cliquez sur Quota, puis effectuez un clic droit ou utilisez l'option Créer un quota dans le volet droit. 4. Suivez l'Assistant, sélectionnez le chemin (volume ou dossier dans lequel vous souhaitez créer le quota), définissez vos Propriétés de quota et cliquez sur Créer. 24Le quota nouvellement créé s'affiche dans le volet central. 5. Sélectionnez un quota et effectuez un clic droit ou utilisez les options situées dans le volet de droite pour en modifier les propriétés. 6. Sélectionnez Gestion du filtrage de fichiers→ Filtres de fichier. 7. Effectuez un clic droit ou utilisez l'option Créer un écran de fichier dans le volet de droite. 8. Suivez l'Assistant, sélectionnez le chemin (volume ou dossier dans lequel vous souhaitez créer l'écran de fichier), sélectionnez vos Propriétés d'écran de fichier et cliquez sur Créer. L'écran de fichier nouvellement créé s'affiche dans le volet central. 9. Sélectionnez un écran de fichier et effectuez un clic droit ou utilisez les options dans le volet d'extrême droite pour en modifier les propriétés. Création d'un nouveau volume Pour créer un nouveau volume : REMARQUE: Opérateur de sauvegardes ou Administrateur est le niveau d'autorisation minimum pour réaliser cette configuration. 1. Dans le système NAS ou sur votre bureau à distance, ouvrez Gestion des disques, sélectionnez l'option Rebalayer les disques. Le volet central donne les LUN du système de stockage situé sur votre système NAS. REMARQUE: L'état par défaut du LUN nouvellement créé dans Gestion des disques est Inconnu ou Hors ligne. 2. Sélectionnez le disque et effectuez un clic droit pour sélectionner l'option En ligne. À présent, le disque est affiché comme étant Inconnu et non initialisé. 3. Sélectionnez le disque, puis effectuez un clic droit pour sélectionner l'option Initialiser le disque. Dans la boîte de dialogue Initialiser le disque, sélectionnez le(s) disque(s) à initialiser. La fenêtre contextuelle qui s'affiche permet de sélectionner le style de partition pour les disques sélectionnés à l'aide des options suivantes : – MBR : sigle de « Master Boot Record », enregistrement d'amorçage principal – GPT : sigle de « GUID Partition Table », table de partitions GUID 4. Sélectionnez un style de partition et cliquez sur OK. REMARQUE: Le disque s'initialise en tant que disque de base. 5. Dans le volet du milieu, sélectionnez le disque et lancez l'Assistant Nouveau volume simple…. 6. Sélectionnez la taille du volume, affectez la lettre du lecteur, choisissez le type de système de fichiers, saisissez le nom du volume, sélectionnez l'option de format et terminez l'opération de création de volume. Gestion d'un volume Disk Management (Gestion des disques) peut être utilisée pour gérer des disques et des volumes. • Vous pouvez initialiser des disques, créer des volumes et formater des volumes avec les systèmes de fichier FAT, FAT32 ou NTFS à l'aide de Disk Management. • Disk Management permet d'effectuer la plupart des tâches de disque sans redémarrer le système ou interrompre les utilisateurs. La plupart des modifications de configuration prennent effet immédiatement. 25Extension d'un volume Vous pouvez ajouter davantage d'espace à des partitions principales existantes et à des lecteurs logiques en les étendant en un espace adjacent non attribué sur le même disque. Pour étendre un volume de base, celui-ci doit être au format RAW ou formaté avec le système de fichiers NTFS. Extension d'un volume de base en utilisant l'interface Windows REMARQUE: Si vous ne bénéficiez pas d'espace non alloué sur votre disque, utilisez Dell OpenManage Server Administrator pour étendre votre LUN avant d'étendre votre volume. Pour étendre un volume de base à l'aide de l'interface Windows : 1. Dans Disk Management (Gestion des disques), effectuez un clic droit sur le volume de base à étendre. 2. Cliquez sur Étendre le volume…. 3. Suivez les instructions à l'écran. Choisissez le disque, saisissez la quantité d'espace et terminez l'Assistant. Extension d'un volume de base à l'aide de la CLI Pour étendre un volume de base à l'aide de la CLI : 1. Ouvrez une fenêtre d'invite de commande et saisissez diskpart. 2. À l'invite DISKPART, saisissez list volume (répertorier le volume). 3. Prenez note du volume de base à étendre. 4. À l'invite DISKPART : a) saisissez select volume (sélectionner le volume, numéro du volume) pour sélectionner le numéro du volume de base à étendre dans un espace contigu libre sur le même disque. b) saisissez extend [size=] (étendre, taille) pour étendre le volume sélectionné par mégaoctets (Mo). Exemple : C:\Users\administrator.NAS3K>diskpart Microsoft DiskPart version 6.0.6001 Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Microsoft Corporation. Sur l'ordinateur : R01-4 DISKPART> list volume Le tableau ci-dessous répertorie le volume : Volume # Lettre Étiquette Système de fichiers Type Taille État Volume 0 C SE NTFS Partition 119 Go Intègre Volume 1 E NTFS Partition 816 Go Intègre Volume 2 D FAT Amovible 985 Mo Intègre Volume 3 F Amovible 0 o Aucun support 26Volume # Lettre Étiquette Système de fichiers Type Taille État Volume 4 H 3 To NTFS Partition 2877 Go Intègre DISKPART> select volume 4 Le volume 4 est le volume sélectionné. DISKPART> extend size=30000 DiskPart a étendu le volume avec succès. Réduction d'un volume Vous pouvez réduire l'espace utilisé par les partitions principales et les lecteurs logiques en les réduisant à l'espace adjacent, contigu sur le même disque. Par exemple, si vous découvrez que vous avez besoin d'une partition supplémentaire mais ne disposez pas de disques supplémentaires, vous pouvez réduire la partition existante de la fin du volume pour créer un nouvel espace non attribué qui peut ensuite être utilisé pour une nouvelle partition. Pour réduire un volume : 1. Dans Disk Manager, effectuez un clic droit sur le volume de base à réduire. 2. Cliquez sur Réduire le volume.... 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. REMARQUE: Vous pouvez réduire uniquement des volumes de base qui n'ont pas de système de fichiers ou qui n'utilisent pas le système de fichiers NTFS. Considérations supplémentaires lors de la réduction d'un volume • Lorsque vous réduisez une partition, les fichiers non amovibles (par exemple, le fichier page ou la zone de stockage de copie en double) ne sont pas déplacés automatiquement et vous ne pouvez pas réduire l'espace alloué au-delà de l'emplacement des fichiers non amovibles. • Si le nombre de mauvais clusters détectés par le remappage de mauvais clusters dynamique est trop élevé, vous ne pouvez pas réduire la partition. Si tel est le cas, pensez à déplacer les données et remplacer le disque. • N'utilisez pas une copie au niveau des blocs pour transférer les données. La copie au niveau des blocs copie aussi le tableau du mauvais secteur et le nouveau disque traite les mêmes secteurs comme étant mauvais, même s'ils sont normaux. • Vous pouvez réduire les partitions et lecteurs logiques principaux sur des partitions non formatées (celles qui n'ont pas de système de fichiers) ou des partitions qui utilisent le système de fichiers NTFS. Suppression d'un volume Pour supprimer un volume : PRÉCAUTION: Vous devez supprimer tous les partages et les copies en double (Shadow Copy) de votre volume avant de le supprimer. Si un volume est supprimé avant que tous les partages de ce volume aient été supprimés, le Server Manager (Gestionnaire de serveurs) pourrait ne pas afficher les partages correctement. Dans Gestion de disques, effectuez un clic droit sur le Volume de base que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis sélectionnez l'option Supprimer le volume. Cliquez sur Oui dans l'écran de confirmation pour supprimer le volume. 27Informations supplémentaires lors de la suppression d'un volume Voici certaines des nouvelles fonctions de Disk Management : • Création de partition simplifiée : lorsque vous effectuez un clic droit sur un Volume, vous pouvez choisir une création de partition de base, fractionnée ou séquencée directement à partir du menu. • Options de conversion de disques : lorsque vous ajoutez plus de quatre partitions à un disque de base, vous êtes invité à convertir un disque en style partition dynamique ou GPT. • Extension et réduction de partitions : vous pouvez étendre ou réduire des partitions directement à partir de l'interface Windows. Activation ou désactivation de SIS sur un volume SIS est une solution de gestion de fichiers en double. Elle aide à récupérer de l'espace disque en réduisant la quantité de données redondantes stockées sur un volume. Elle identifie des fichiers identiques et ne stocke qu'une seule copie du fichier dans le SIS Common Store en remplaçant les fichiers en double par des liens (indicateurs) au fichier dans le SIS Common Store. SIS est activé ou désactivé sur des volumes individuels de votre appliance de stockage. Lorsque vous désactivez SIS sur un volume qui utilise SIS, le service Groveler est arrêté. SIS peut aussi être suspendu ou temporairement désactivé en suspendant le service Groveler ou en changeant sa priorité en utilisant l'utilitaire Sisadmin.exe. Le statut de membre au sein du groupe d'administrateurs locaux, ou équivalent, est le niveau minimum requis pour terminer cette procédure. REMARQUE: SIS n'est pas disponible sous Windows Storage Server 2008 R2 Workgroup Edition x64 avec SP1. Activation de SIS sur un volume Pour activer SIS sur un volume : 1. Dans l'onglet Volumes dans Gestion du partage et du stockage, cliquez sur le volume pour lequel vous souhaiter activer SIS. 2. Dans le volet Actions, cliquez sur Propriétés. 3. Dans l'onglet Avancé, cochez la case Activer SIS sur ce volume, puis cliquez sur OK. Désactivation de SIS sur un volume Pour désactiver SIS sur un volume : 1. Dans l'onglet Volumes dans Gestion du partage et du stockage, cliquez sur le Volume pour lequel vous souhaitez désactiver SIS. 2. Dans le volet Actions, cliquez sur Propriétés. 3. Dans l'onglet Avancé, décochez la case Activer SIS sur ce volume, puis cliquez sur OK. Activation et configuration de copies en double de dossiers partagés Si vous activez les copies en double (Shadow Copy) des dossiers partagés sur un volume qui utilise les valeurs par défaut, les tâches sont planifiées pour créer des copies en double à 7h et à midi. La zone de stockage par défaut se trouve sur le même volume, et sa taille est de 10 pourcent de l'espace disponible. 28Vous pouvez activer les copies en double des dossiers partagés uniquement par volume ; vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner des dossiers et fichiers partagés spécifiques sur un volume pour les copier ou non. REMARQUE: La création de copies en double ne remplace pas la création de sauvegardes régulières. PRÉCAUTION: Il existe une limite de 64 copies en double par volume. Lorsque cette limite est atteinte ou lorsque les limites de zone de stockage sont atteintes, la copie en double la plus ancienne est supprimée. Une fois supprimée, la copie en double ne peut plus être récupérée. 1. Ouvrez le Gestionnaire de serveur→ Disk Management (Gestion des disques). 2. Effectuez un clic droit sur le volume puis sélectionnez l'onglet Propriétés. Cliquez sur l'onglet Copies en double. 3. Cliquez sur le volume sur lequel vous souhaitez activer les copies en double de dossiers partagés, puis cliquez sur Activer. 4. Pour modifier l'emplacement de stockage, l'allocation d'espace et le calendrier, cliquez sur Paramètres. Effectuer une sauvegarde de votre serveur à l'aide de l'outil intégrable Microsoft Windows Server 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Outils d'administration → Server Manager. 2. Dans le panneau de gauche, développez Stockage et cliquez sur Sauvegarde Windows Server. Les options de sauvegarde disponibles sont les suivantes : – Activation de l'exécution programmée régulière des sauvegardes à l'aide de l'Assistant Planification de sauvegarde – Création d'une sauvegarde ponctuelle à l'aide de l'Assistant Sauvegarde unique REMARQUE: L'Assistant Sauvegarde unique est conçu pour la création de sauvegardes qui complètent des sauvegardes régulières. Nous vous recommandons de ne pas utiliser l'Assistant Sauvegarde unique comme seul moyen de création de sauvegardes. Vous pouvez récupérer la sauvegarde d'une sauvegarde programmée ou d'une sauvegarde ponctuelle à l'aide de l'Assistant Récupération. Choix des volumes à sauvegarder Pour créer une sauvegarde, vous devez spécifier les volumes que vous souhaitez inclure. Les volumes que vous sélectionnez ont un impact sur ce que vous pouvez récupérer. Vous disposez des options de volume et récupération suivantes. Options de volume Options de restauration Intégralité du serveur (tous les volumes) Sauvegardez tous les volumes si vous voulez restaurer l'ensemble du serveur—tous les fichiers, données, applications et l'état du système. Volumes critiques Sauvegardez uniquement les volumes critiques (volumes contenant les fichiers du système d'exploitation) si vous ne voulez restaurer que le système d'exploitation ou l'état du système. Volumes non critiques Sauvegardez un volume individuel si vous voulez uniquement restaurer les fichiers, applications ou données de ce volume. 29Choix d'un emplacement de stockage Pour stocker les sauvegardes que vous créez, vous devez spécifier un emplacement. En fonction du type de stockage que vous spécifiez, tenez compte des points suivants. Type de stockage Détails Dossier partagé Si vous stockez votre sauvegarde dans un dossier distant partagé, votre sauvegarde est écrasée chaque fois que vous créez une nouvelle sauvegarde. Ne choisissez pas cette option si vous souhaitez stocker une série de sauvegardes. Si le processus de sauvegarde échoue pendant que vous tentez de créer une sauvegarde dans un dossier partagé contenant déjà une sauvegarde, il est possible que vous perdiez les deux sauvegardes. Pour éviter ce problème, vous pouvez créer des sous-dossiers dans le dossier partagé pour stocker vos sauvegardes. DVD, autre support optique ou support amovible Si vous stockez votre sauvegarde sur un support optique ou amovible, vous ne pouvez récupérer que des volumes entiers, et non des applications ou des fichiers individuels. De plus, la sauvegarde sur des supports avec moins d'1 Go d'espace libre n'est pas prise en charge. Disque dur local Si vous stockez votre sauvegarde sur un disque dur interne, vous pouvez : • Restaurer des fichiers, dossiers, applications et volumes. • Effectuer des restaurations de l'état du système et du système d'exploitation si la sauvegarde utilisée contient tous les volumes critiques. Toutefois, vous ne pouvez pas effectuer de restauration du système d'exploitation si la sauvegarde se trouve sur le même disque physique qu'un ou plusieurs volumes critiques. De plus, le disque dur local que vous choisissez est dédié au stockage de vos sauvegardes programmées et n'est pas visible dans Windows Explorer. Disque dur externe Si vous stockez votre sauvegarde sur un disque dur externe, vous pouvez : • Restaurer des fichiers, dossiers, applications et volumes. • Effectuer des restaurations de l'état du système et du système d'exploitation si la sauvegarde utilisée contient tous les volumes critiques. • Déplacer facilement les sauvegardes hors site pour les protéger des sinistres. Si vous stockez vos sauvegardes programmées sur un disque dur externe, le disque est dédié au stockage de vos sauvegardes et n'est pas visible dans Windows Explorer. Ceci permet aux utilisateurs de déplacer les disques hors site pour les protéger des sinistres et assurer leur intégrité. 30 Dell™ OptiPlex™ 755 Guide d'utilisation Ordinateur mini-tour Ordinateur de bureau Ordinateur compact Ordinateur ultra compactRetour à la page Contenu  Fonctionnalités avancées  Guide d'utilisation Contrôle par technologie LegacySelect Facilité de gestion Sécurité physique TPM (Trusted Platform Module - Module de plate-forme approuvée) Logiciel de gestion de sécurité Logiciel de suivi informatique À propos des cartes à puce et des lecteurs d'empreintes digitales Protection par mot de passe Programme de configuration du système Amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB Paramètres des cavaliers Effacement des mots de passe oubliés Effacement des paramètres CMOS Hyperthreading et Technologie multi-cur Gestion de l'alimentation sous Windows XP et Windows Vista À propos des configurations RAID Contrôle par technologie LegacySelect  Le contrôle par technologie LegacySelect offre des solutions entièrement héritées, à héritage réduit ou sans héritage basées sur des plates-formes courantes, des images de disque dur et des procédures de dépannage. Le contrôle est donné aux administrateurs via divers éléments : programme de configuration du  système, Dell OpenManage™ IT Assistant ou intégration personnalisée Dell définie en usine. LegacySelect permet aux administrateurs d'activer ou de désactiver électroniquement des connecteurs et des périphériques de multimédias qui comprennent  des connecteurs série et USB, un connecteur parallèle, un lecteur de disquette, des emplacements PCI et une souris PS/2. La désactivation de ces  connecteurs et supports permet de libérer des ressources. Vous devez redémarrer l'ordinateur pour que les modifications s'appliquent. Facilité de gestion  DASH L'architecture DASH (Desktop and mobile Architecture for System Hardware) est une initiative de gestion de la (DMTF) (Desktop Management Task Force) visant à normaliser les interfaces de gérabilité pour matériels mobiles et de bureau. L'intérêt de l'architecture DASH est de permettre la gestion à distance des  ressources des PC mobiles et de bureau de façon standard, quel que soit l'état de fonctionnement. Votre ordinateur prend en charge les versions antérieures  de l'initiative DASH, et notamment les profils de gestion ci-dessous : l Base Desktop Mobile l  Gestion de l'état de l'alimentation l  Contrôle du démarrage l Processeur (UC) l  Mémoire du système l Ventilateur l Bloc d'alimentation l Capteur l Actif physique l Inventaire des logiciels Technologie de gestion active La technologie de gestion active d'Intel (iAMT) est destinée à offrir un plus grand nombre de fonctions de gestion des systèmes sécurisés en vue d'une  réduction des coûts informatiques ainsi que de meilleures détection, réparation et protection des actifs informatiques en réseau. Avec iAMT, la gestion des  ordinateurs peut s'effectuer que l'ordinateur soit allumé ou éteint, et même si le système d'exploitation ne fonctionne plus.  REMARQUE : Si vous avez choisi d'utiliser l'option « None » (Aucun) (pas de gérabilité) ou ASF, vous ne pourrez pas profiter des fonctions et des profils  qu'offre l'architecture DASH. REMARQUE : La technologie iAMT peut être configurée à l'aide de Dell Client Manager (DCM) 2.1.1 ou ultérieur. Pour savoir comment configurer l'iAMT,  reportez-vous à la documentation de Dell Client Manager 2.1.1 (ou ultérieur), consultable sur www.dell.com\openmanage. Pour de plus amples Les principaux avantages de la technologie iAMT sont les suivants : l Réduction du nombre de visites du service de support l Automatisation d'un plus grand nombre de fonctionnalités de gestion via l'activation du logiciel de la console de gestion des systèmes l Sécurité améliorée Fonctionnalités de la technologie iAMT  Fonctionnalités de base l Détection, suivi et inventoriage des actifs en présence ou en l'absence des systèmes d'exploitation. Le cordon d'alimentation du système doit être  branché à une prise secteur et raccordé au réseau. l Mise sous/hors tension à distance du système, quel que soit l'état du système d'exploitation. Fonctionnalités avancées l Résolution à distance des pannes (1 à 1) via la redirection de la console texte (fonction Serial-over-LAN) et la redirection IDE. l Sécurité renforcée via le contrôle de la présence des agents (activation de la détection des agents supprimés), le contrôle d'accès au réseau  (disjoncteur) et le contrôle de la version des logiciels. Votre système vous aide dans le dépannage de la technologie iAMT en affichant les messages d'erreur suivants : Gestion hors bande Le terme « hors bande » signifie que le système peut être géré en l'absence d'un système d'exploitation, lorsque le système d'exploitation se trouve dans un  état instable ou lorsqu'il n'est pas sous tension. La seule condition requise est un système doté de la technologie AMT ainsi que le raccordement d'un câble  réseau à la carte réseau intégrée.  Accès à la configuration de la technologie iAMT  L'interface MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) d'Intel contrôle les fonctionnalités et les fonctions iAMT et les options de configuration de votre  ordinateur. L'interface MEBx permet d'effectuer les tâches suivantes :  l Activation ou désactivation de la technologie iAMT l Paramétrage des modes iAMT l Paramétrage des modes de configuration iAMT Pour afficher l'écran de configuration MEBx, appuyez sur 

 pendant l'amorçage de votre ordinateur au démarrage. Par défaut, votre mot de passe  MEBx est admin. Désactivation de la technologie iAMT  La technologie iAMT est activée par défaut dans le micrologiciel du moteur de gestion. Toutefois, vous pouvez choisir de la désactiver.  Pour désactiver la technologie iAMT :  informations sur la mise en uvre de la technologie iAMT de Dell, reportez-vous au Guide de l'administrateur de gestion de systèmes clients, consultable sur le site Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse suivante : support.dell.com. REMARQUE : Un logiciel de gestion et des options supplémentaires sont requis pour les fonctionnalités ci-dessous. Message d'erreur Description SERVICE_MODE jumper: The service mode jumper is installed (Cavalier SERVICE_MODE : Le cavalier du mode service est installé) N'utilisez pas le cavalier SERVICE_MODE. La technologie AMT ne fonctionnera pas correctement. Ce cavalier ne sert qu'à la fabrication. MEMORY: Unsupported memory configuration (MÉMOIRE : La configuration de la  mémoire n'est pas prise en charge). Utilisez le dispositif DIMM1. Unable to launch ME. (Impossible de lancer le moteur de gestion.) La fonctionnalité AMT est interrompue si le dispositif DIM1 n'est pas utilisé. REMARQUE : L'alimentation est fournie aux DIMM même si le système est éteint. REMARQUE : Pour modifier les paramètres de configuration, vous devez modifier le mot de passe MEBx par défaut.1. Appuyez sur  pour accéder à la configuration de l'interface MEBx et pour entrer votre mot de passe.  2. Sélectionnez Intel® ME Configuration® Intel ME Features Control® Manageability (Gérabilité) Feature Selection (Sélection des fonctions).  3. Sélectionnez Aucune. 4. Sélectionnez deux fois Revenir au menu précédent. Les modifications sont appliquées et le système redémarre. Mise en uvre USB La technologie iAMT peut être provisionnée via une clé USB et Dell Client Manager. Cette clé USB doit : l Être formatée à l'aide du système de fichiers FAT16 sans fichiers système l Contenir uniquement le fichier setup.bin Pour provisionner la technologie AMT via une clé USB, branchez la clé USB sur un port USB avant de démarrer. Pendant l'auto-test de démarrage, le BIOS  affiche un message indiquant que le système est en cours de provisionnement. Format ASF (Alert Standard Format) ASF est une norme de gestion DMTF qui spécifie des techniques d'alerte en amont du système d'exploitation ou sans système d'exploitation. Cette norme est  conçue pour générer une alerte en cas de conditions anormales ou de problèmes potentiels de sécurité lorsque le système d'exploitation est en veille ou que  l'ordinateur est hors tension. ASF est conçue pour remplacer toutes les technologies d'alerte sans système d'exploitation. Votre ordinateur prend en charge les alertes ASF version 1.03 et 2.0 et les fonctions à distance suivantes : ASF permet d'échanger des messages RMCP (Remote Management and Control Protocol) entre une console de gestion distante et un ordinateur client à l'état  « pré-système d'exploitation » ou « système d'exploitation-absent ». Les messages RMCP peuvent être envoyés pour ordonner à un ordinateur client de  démarrer, de s'arrêter ou de redémarrer. Pour plus d'informations sur l'implémentation Dell de l'ASF, consultez les manuels ASF User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation ASF) et ASF Administrator's Guide (Guide de l'administrateur ASF), disponibles sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Applications Dell OpenManage™ Vous pouvez gérer votre ordinateur via IT Assistant ou Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation (OMCI). Cet Assistant configure, gère et contrôle les ordinateurs et les autres périphériques sur un réseau d'entreprise. Il gère les biens, les configurations, les  événements (alertes) et la sécurité des ordinateurs munis de logiciels de gestion classiques. Il prend en charge les instrumentations compatibles avec les  normes SNMP et CIM. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le Guide d'utilisation de Dell OpenManage IT Assistant disponible sur le site Web du support de Dell à l'adresse  support.dell.com. Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation est un logiciel qui permet aux programmes de gestion à distance, tels que IT Assistant par exemple, d'effectuer les  tâches suivantes : REMARQUE : La clé ne doit pas être amorçable. Alerte Description Chassis: Chassis Intrusion – Physical Security Violation/Chassis Intrusion – Physical Security Violation Event Cleared (Châssis : Intrusion dans le châssis – Violation de la sécurité physique/Intrusion dans le châssis – Événement Violation de la  sécurité physique terminée) Le châssis de l'ordinateur, sur lequel la fonction d'intrusion dans  le châssis (en option sur certains ordinateurs) est installée et  activée, a été ouvert, ou bien l'alerte d'intrusion dans le châssis  a été réinitialisée. CPU: Emergency Shutdown Event (Unité centrale : Arrêt d'urgence) La température du processeur est trop élevée et l'alimentation a  été coupée. Cooling Device: Generic Critical Fan Failure/Generic Critical Fan Failure Cleared (Dispositif de refroidissement : Panne de ventilateur critique générique/Panne de  ventilateur critique générique réparée) La vitesse (tours par minute) du ventilateur dépasse les limites  de la normalité ou le problème de vitesse (tours par minute) du  ventilateur a été résolu. Temperature: Generic Critical Temperature Problem/Generic Critical Temperature Problem Cleared (Température : Problème de température critique générique/Problème  de température critique générique réparé) La température de l'ordinateur dépasse les limites de la  normalité, ou bien le problème lié à la température de  l'ordinateur a été résolu. Battery Low (Batterie faible) La batterie de l'ordinateur a atteint une tension de 2,2 V ou moins. REMARQUE : Les applications Dell OpenManage™ et Dell™ Client Manager (DCM) sont à votre disposition pour répondre à vos besoins en matière de  gestion du système. Reportez-vous à la section Dell Client Manager (DCM) pour des informations sur DCM. l Accéder aux informations relatives à votre ordinateur, telles que le nombre de processeurs et le système d'exploitation utilisé l Gérer l'état de votre ordinateur pour détecter les alertes de température des sondes ou les alertes d'échec des disques durs installés dans les  périphériques de stockage Un ordinateur géré est un ordinateur sur lequel Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation est configuré sur un réseau utilisant IT Assistant. Pour plus  d'informations, consultez le Guide d'utilisation de Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation disponible sur le site Web du support technique de Dell à l'adresse  support.dell.com. Dell Client Manager (DCM) Console Dell Client Manager (DCM) La console Dell Client Manager (DCM) vous permet de configurer, de gérer et de surveiller les ordinateurs Dell d'un réseau d'entreprise via une simple interface  utilisateur graphique. Grâce à la console DCM, vous pouvez gérer les ressources, les configurations, les événements (alertes), l'état et la sécurité des  ordinateurs munis de logiciels de gestion classiques. Pour des informations sur les standards pris en charge par DCM, rendez-vous sur le site www.altiris.com. Pour des informations sur la console DCM, rendez-vous sur www.altiris.com ou sur le site Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. La console DCM vous permet d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : l Accéder aux informations relatives à votre ordinateur, telles que le nombre de processeurs et le système d'exploitation utilisé l Gérer l'état de votre ordinateur pour détecter les alertes de température des sondes ou les alertes d'échec des disques durs installés dans les  périphériques de stockage l Modifier l'état de votre ordinateur en mettant à jour le BIOS, en configurant les paramètres du BIOS ou en mettant l'ordinateur hors tension à distance Une fois Dell Client Manager installé sur une console et son logiciel client installé sur les ordinateurs clients, vous disposez d'un système géré. Pour des  informations sur DCM, rendez-vous sur le site Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Sécurité physique  Détection d'une intrusion dans le châssis Si elle a été installée et activée, cette fonctionnalité (en option sur certains ordinateurs) détecte toute ouverture du châssis et en informe l'utilisateur. Pour  modifier le paramètre Chassis Intrusion : 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 2. Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour atteindre l'option System Security (Sécurité du système).  3. Appuyez sur  pour accéder au menu local de l'option System Security. 4. Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour atteindre l'option Chassis Intrusion. 5. Appuyez sur  pour sélectionner un paramètre.  6. Appuyez de nouveau sur  une fois le paramètre mis à jour.  7. Quittez le programme de configuration du système en enregistrant vos modifications.  Paramètres de l'option l On (Activé) — Si le châssis de l'ordinateur est ouvert, la valeur du paramètre passe à Detected (Détecté) et le message d'alerte suivant s'affiche au  redémarrage de l'ordinateur : Alert! Cover was previously removed. (Alerte : Le capot a déjà été retiré). Pour réinitialiser le paramètre Detected (Détecté), ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Sous l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis), appuyez sur la touche fléchée droite ou gauche  pour sélectionner Reset (Rétablir), puis choisissez On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé silencieux) ou Off (Désactivé). l On-Silent (Activé silencieux, valeur par défaut) — Si le châssis de l'ordinateur est ouvert, la valeur du paramètre passe à Detected (Détecté). Aucun  REMARQUE : Dell™ Client Manager (DCM) ou les applications Dell OpenManage™ sont à votre disposition pour vous aider à répondre à vos besoins en  matière de gestion du système. Reportez-vous à la section Applications Dell OpenManage™ pour des informations sur les produits Dell OpenManage. REMARQUE : Si le mot de passe administrateur est activé, vous devez le connaître pour pouvoir réinitialiser le paramètre Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis).message d'alerte ne s'affiche au prochain démarrage de l'ordinateur. l Off (Désactivé) — Aucune surveillance des intrusions n'est effectuée et aucun message ne s'affiche. Anneau du cadenas et emplacement pour câble de sécurité Utilisez une des méthodes suivantes pour verrouiller votre ordinateur : l Utilisez un cadenas seul ou un cadenas et un câble de sécurité à boucle dans l'anneau prévu à cet effet. Un cadenas seul empêche l'ouverture de l'ordinateur. Un câble de sécurité enroulé autour d'un objet fixe et utilisé avec le cadenas permet d'empêcher que l'ordinateur ne soit déplacé à l'insu de son  propriétaire. l Reliez un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité situé sur le dessus de l'ordinateur. Les dispositifs antivol sont généralement composés d'un câble galvanisé muni d'un dispositif de verrouillage et de sa clé. La documentation fournie avec  le dispositif contient des instructions d'installation. TPM (Trusted Platform Module - Module de plate-forme approuvée)  La fonction TPM est une fonction de sécurité matérielle qui peut être utilisée pour la création et la gestion de clés de cryptage générées par ordinateur.  Utilisée en parallèle avec un logiciel de sécurité, la fonction TPM renforce la sécurité du réseau et de l'ordinateur en activant des fonctions telles que la  protection de fichiers et des e-mails. La fonction TPM est activée par une option du programme de configuration du système. Activation de la fonction TPM 1. Activez le logiciel TPM : a. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et appuyez sur  pendant l'autotest de mise sous tension pour entrer dans le programme de configuration du  système.  b. Sélectionnez Security® TPM Security (Sécurité TPM), puis appuyez sur .  c. Sous TPM Security (Sécurité TPM), sélectionnez On (Activé).  d. Appuyez sur <Échap> pour quitter le programme de configuration du système.  e. À l'invite, cliquez sur Enregistrer/Quitter. 2. Activez le programme de configuration de la TPM : a. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et appuyez sur  pendant l'autotest de mise sous tension pour entrer dans le programme de configuration du  système.  b. Sélectionnez Security® TPM Activation (Activation TPM), puis appuyez sur .  c. Sous TPM Activation, sélectionnez Activate (Activer), puis appuyez sur .  REMARQUE : Le câble de sécurité des ordinateurs ultra compacts se trouve à l'arrière de ces ordinateurs (reportez-vous à la section Vue arrière). REMARQUE : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, vérifiez qu'il est bien compatible avec l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si le système d'exploitation ne prend pas en charge la fonction TPM, celle-ci ne prendra pas en charge le cryptage. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la documentation correspondante et aux fichiers d'aide du logiciel. AVIS : Pour sécuriser vos données TPM et vos clés de cryptage, suivez les procédures de sauvegarde décrites dans la section Archivage et restauration du fichier d'aide de l'outil EMBASSY Security Center. Si ces sauvegardes sont incomplètes, perdues ou endommagées, Dell sera dans l'impossibilité de  vous aider à restaurer les données cryptées. REMARQUE : Vous n'aurez à activer la TPM qu'une seule fois.d. Une fois la procédure terminée, l'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement ou une invite vous demande de le faire.  Logiciel de gestion de sécurité  Pour vous aider à sécuriser votre ordinateur, le logiciel de gestion de sécurité comprend quatre fonctions différentes : l Gestion d'ouverture de session l Authentification de pré-amorçage (à l'aide d'un lecteur d'empreintes digitales, d'une carte à puce ou d'un mot de passe) l Cryptage l Gestion d'informations privées Pour des informations supplémentaires sur l'utilisation du logiciel et les différentes fonctions de sécurité, reportez-vous au Guide de mise en route du logiciel : Cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Wave Systems Corp® Guide de mise en route. Logiciel de suivi informatique Un logiciel de suivi informatique peut vous permettre de localiser votre ordinateur s'il est perdu ou volé. Le logiciel est disponible en option et peut être acquis  lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur Dell™. Vous pouvez également contacter votre commercial Dell pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction de sécurité. À propos des cartes à puce et des lecteurs d'empreintes digitales  Les cartes à puce sont des périphériques portables ayant la forme de cartes de crédit et comportant des circuits intégrés internes. Le dessus de la carte  contient généralement un processeur incorporé situé sous la plage de contact métallique. Sa petite taille et ses circuits intégrés font de cette carte un outil  privilégié pour les programmes relatifs à la sécurité, au stockage de données et pour les programmes spéciaux. L'utilisation d'une carte à puce renforce la  sécurité d'un système en combinant un support propre à l'utilisateur (la carte à puce) et une information (le PIN [NIP]) en principe uniquement connue de  l'utilisateur, afin d'offrir une sécurité d'authentification bien supérieure à celle d'un simple mot de passe. Le lecteur d'empreintes digitales est un périphérique que vous pouvez utiliser pour sécuriser votre ordinateur Dell™. Le lecteur est un capteur par bande situé  sur un périphérique de votre ordinateur. Lorsque vous glissez votre doigt sur le lecteur, celui-ci utilise votre empreinte digitale pour authentifier votre identité  d'utilisateur. Protection par mot de passe Mot de passe système Paramètres de l'option  Vous ne pouvez pas modifier ni saisir un nouveau mot de passe système si l'une des deux options suivantes est affichée : l Set (Défini) — Un mot de passe système est attribué. l Disabled (Désactivé) — Le mot de passe système est désactivé par la position d'un cavalier sur la carte mère. Vous ne pouvez affecter un mot de passe système que lorsque l'option suivante est affichée : l Not Set (Non défini) — Aucun mot de passe système n'a été attribué et le cavalier de mot de passe sur la carte mère est en position d'activation  (position par défaut). Affectation d'un mot de passe système  REMARQUE : Il se peut que le logiciel de suivi ne soit pas disponible dans certains pays. REMARQUE : Si vous disposez de ce logiciel, vous devez contacter l'entreprise en charge du service de suivi pour signaler la disparition de votre ordinateur en cas de perte ou de vol de ce dernier. REMARQUE : La fonctionnalité carte à puce ou le lecteur d'empreintes digitales peut ne pas être disponible sur votre ordinateur. AVIS : Même si les mots de passe fournissent une sécurité quant aux données de votre ordinateur, ils ne sont pas à toute épreuve. Si vos données  nécessitent davantage de sécurité, il vous incombe de vous procurer et d'utiliser d'autres formes de protection, telles que des programmes de cryptage  de données. AVIS : Si vous laissez votre ordinateur en fonctionnement, sans surveillance sans avoir affecté un mot de passe système, ou si vous laissez votre  ordinateur déverrouillé de sorte que quelqu'un peut très bien désactiver le mot de passe en changeant la position d'un cavalier, n'importe qui peut  accéder aux données enregistrées sur votre disque dur.Pour sortir du champ sans attribuer de mot de passe système, appuyez sur ou sur la séquence de touches  pour passer dans un autre champ, ou  encore appuyez sur <Échap> à tout moment avant d'avoir achevé l'étape 5. 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système) et vérifiez que  l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) a la valeur Unlocked (Déverrouillé).  2. Sélectionnez System Password (Mot de passe système), puis appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite.  L'intitulé de l'option devient alors Enter Password (Entrer le mot de passe), suivi d'un champ vide de 32 caractères entre crochets. 3. Entrez votre nouveau mot de passe système.  Vous pouvez utiliser jusqu'à 32 caractères. Pour effacer un caractère lors de l'entrée de votre mot de passe, appuyez sur la touche  ou  sur la touche fléchée gauche. Le mot de passe ne fait pas la distinction majuscule/minuscule. Certaines combinaisons de touches ne sont pas valides. Si vous utilisez l'une de ces combinaisons, le haut-parleur émet un signal sonore. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche de chaque caractère (ou la barre d'espacement pour un espace blanc), un espace réservé apparaît dans le champ. 4. Appuyez sur .  Si le nouveau mot de passe du système comporte moins de 32 caractères, tout le champ se remplit d'espaces réservés. L'intitulé de l'option devient  alors Verify Password (Vérifier le mot de passe), suivi d'un autre champ vide de 32 caractères entre crochets. 5. Pour valider votre mot de passe, saisissez-le une seconde fois et appuyez sur .  Le paramètre du mot de passe prend alors la valeur Set (Défini).  6. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  La protection par mot de passe prend effet lors du redémarrage de l'ordinateur. Saisie de votre mot de passe système  Lorsque vous démarrez ou redémarrez votre ordinateur, l'invite suivante s'affiche à l'écran. Si Password Status (État du mot de passe) a pour valeur Locked (Verrouillé) : Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur . Si vous avez attribué un mot de passe administrateur, l'ordinateur accepte ce mot de passe comme mot de passe système secondaire. Si vous tapez un mot de passe système incorrect ou incomplet, le message suivant s'affiche à l'écran : ** Incorrect password. ** Si vous tapez une nouvelle fois un mot de passe système incorrect ou incomplet, le même message s'affiche à l'écran. Si, pour la troisième fois consécutive,  vous tapez un mot de passe système incorrect ou incomplet, l'ordinateur affiche le message suivant : ** Incorrect password. ** Number of unsuccessful password attempts: 3 System halted! Must power down (** Mot de passe incorrect. ** Nombre d'entrées de mot de passe incorrectes : 3 Système stoppé ! Vous  devez éteindre le système). Même après que vous éteignez, puis rallumez votre ordinateur, le message précédent s'affiche à chaque fois que vous tapez un mot de passe système  incorrect ou incomplet. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe du système existant  1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 2. Mettez en surbrillance System Password (Mot de passe système) et appuyez sur .  3. À l'invite, saisissez le mot de passe système.  4. Appuyez deux fois sur  pour effacer le mot de passe système existant. La valeur du paramètre passe à Not Set (Non défini).  Si la valeur Not Set (Non défini) est affichée, le mot de passe système est supprimé. Si la valeur Not Set (Non défini) n'est pas affichée, appuyez sur   pour redémarrer l'ordinateur, puis répétez la procédure de l'étape 3 à l'étape 4. 5. Pour attribuer un nouveau mot de passe, appliquez la procédure décrite à la section Affectation d'un mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser le paramètre Password Status (État du mot de passe) conjointement avec les paramètres System Password (Mot de passe système) et Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) pour protéger davantage votre ordinateur contre toute utilisation non autorisée.6. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Mot de passe administrateur Paramètres de l'option  Vous ne pouvez pas modifier ni saisir un nouveau mot de passe administrateur si l'une des deux options suivantes est affichée : l Set (Défini) — Un mot de passe administrateur est défini. l Disabled (Désactivé) — Le mot de passe administrateur est désactivé par la position d'un cavalier sur la carte mère. Vous ne pouvez attribuer un mot de passe administrateur que lorsque l'option suivante est affichée : l Not Set (Non défini) — Aucun mot de passe administrateur n'a été attribué et le cavalier de mot de passe sur la carte mère est en position d'activation  (position par défaut). Affectation d'un mot de passe administrateur Le mot de passe administrateur peut être utilisé à la place du mot de passe système. 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système) et vérifiez que  l'option Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) a la valeur Not Set (Non défini).  2. Sélectionnez Mot de passe admin et appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite.  L'ordinateur vous invite à taper et à vérifier le mot de passe. Si vous tapez un caractère non autorisé, l'ordinateur émet un signal sonore. 3. Tapez, puis vérifiez le mot de passe.  Une fois le mot de passe vérifié, le paramètre Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) prend la valeur Set (Défini). La prochaine fois que vous ouvrirez le  programme de configuration du système, l'ordinateur vous demandera ce mot de passe. 4. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  La modification du paramètre Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) est effective immédiatement (il n'est pas nécessaire de redémarrer l'ordinateur). Fonctionnement de votre ordinateur avec un mot de passe administrateur activé  Lorsque vous ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, l'option Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) est sélectionnée, vous invitant à taper le  mot de passe. Si vous ne tapez pas le mot de passe correct, l'ordinateur vous permet d'afficher, mais non de modifier, les options de configuration du système. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe administrateur existant Pour modifier un mot de passe administrateur, vous devez connaître ce mot de passe. 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 2. À l'invite, tapez le mot de passe administrateur.  3. Sélectionnez Admin Password (Mot de passe admin), puis appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite pour supprimer le mot de passe  administrateur existant. La valeur du paramètre passe à Not Set (Non défini). Pour attribuer un nouveau mot de passe administrateur, suivez la procédure décrite à la section Affectation d'un mot de passe administrateur. 4. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  REMARQUE : Si les deux mots de passe sont différents, le mot de passe administrateur peut être utilisé à la place du mot de passe système. Toutefois,  le mot de passe système ne peut pas être utilisé à la place du mot de passe administrateur. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) avec l'option Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) pour protéger  le mot de passe système contre toute modification non autorisée.Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié et définition d'un nouveau mot de passe Pour réinitialiser les mots de passe système et/ou administrateur, reportez-vous à la section Effacement des mots de passe oubliés. Programme de configuration du système  Présentation générale Utilisez le programme de configuration du système pour effectuer les tâches suivantes :  l Modifier les informations de configuration du système après l'ajout, la modification ou le retrait de tout matériel de votre ordinateur l Définir ou modifier une option sélectionnable par l'utilisateur, telle que le mot de passe utilisateur l Connaître la quantité de mémoire disponible ou définir le type de disque dur à installer Avant d'utiliser le programme de configuration du système, il est fortement recommandé de noter les informations de l'écran de configuration pour pouvoir  vous y reporter ultérieurement. Ouverture du programme de configuration du système 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Puis arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur) et faites une autre tentative. Écrans du programme de configuration du système L'écran de configuration du système affiche les informations de configuration en cours ou modifiables. L'écran est divisé en trois zones contenant la liste des  options, le champ des options actives et les fonctions des touches. Options du programme de configuration du système Options List (Liste des options) — Ce champ s'affiche dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre  du programme de configuration du système. Il s'agit d'une liste déroulante qui contient  les fonctions qui définissent la configuration de votre ordinateur, y compris le matériel  installé et les fonctions d'économie d'énergie et de sécurité. Pour faire défiler la liste, utilisez les touches fléchées haut et bas du pavé numérique.  Lorsqu'une option est mise en surbrillance, L'Option Field (Champ de l'option) affiche des informations plus détaillées concernant cette option et ses paramètres. Option Field — Ce champ contient des informations relatives à  chaque option. Il permet de visualiser les paramètres en cours et  de les modifier. Utilisez les touches fléchées gauche et droite pour mettre une  option en surbrillance. Appuyez sur  pour activer cette  sélection. Key Functions (Fonctions des touches) — Ce champ affiché sous  Option Field (Champ de l'option) répertorie les touches  disponibles et indique leur fonction si elles sont utilisées dans le  champ actif de configuration du système. REMARQUE : En fonction de votre ordinateur et des périphériques installés, certaines options répertoriées dans cette section peuvent ne pas s'afficher. SystèmeSystem Info (Informations sur le système) Comprennent le nom de l'ordinateur, la version du BIOS, le numéro de service, le code de service express (le cas échéant) et  le numéro d'inventaire. Aucun de ces champs ne peut être modifié. Processor Info (Informations sur le processeur) Identifient le type d'unité centrale (UC), la vitesse du bus, la vitesse d'horloge et la taille de la mémoire cache L2. Indiquent s'il  s'agit d'un processeur Hyper-Threading et à cur multiple et si celui-ci prend en charge la technologie 64 bits. Aucun de ces champs ne peut être modifié. Memory Info (Informations sur la mémoire) Informations indiquant le type, la taille, la vitesse, le mode canal (double ou simple) et le banc de mémoire de la mémoire  installée. Pour chaque banc de mémoire utilisé, le programme de configuration du système répertorie la taille, le rang, le type et  l'organisation de DIMM. Les bancs de mémoire vides sont nommés « Empty » (vides). Aucun de ces champs ne peut être modifié. PCI Info (Informations PCI) Identifient toute carte PCI ou PCI Express installée. Aucun de ces champs ne peut être modifié. Date/Time (Date/Heure) Affiche les paramètres de date et heure actuels. Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) L'ordinateur tente de redémarrer à partir de la séquence de périphériques indiquée dans cette liste. Cette option vous permet  de contrôler/modifier la séquence d'amorçage (reportez-vous à la section Séquence d'amorçage). Lecteurs Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) (Internal [Interne] par défaut) Cette option active ou désactive le lecteur de disquette. Les options disponibles sont Off (Désactivé),  Internal (Interne), USB et Read Only (Lecture seule). REMARQUE : Si l'option USB est sélectionnée, assurez-vous que l'option de configuration USB Controller (Contrôleur USB) sous Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés) a la valeur On (Activé). SATA 0 through SATA n (SATA 0 à SATA n) Identifie, active et désactive les lecteurs reliés aux connecteurs SATA de la carte mère, et répertorie la  capacité des disques durs.  REMARQUE : Ces options apparaissent en tant que SATA 0 through SATA 3 (SATA 0 à SATA 3) pour les  ordinateurs mini-tour, SATA 0 through SATA 2 (SATA 0 à SATA 2) pour les ordinateurs de bureau, SATA 0 and SATA 1 (SATA 0 et SATA 1) pour les ordinateurs compacts et ultra compacts. SATA externe Identifie, active et désactive les lecteurs reliés au connecteur eSATA de la carte mère, et répertorie la capacité  des disques durs. REMARQUE : Cette option n'est pas disponible sur les ordinateurs ultra compacts. SATA Operation (Fonctionnement SATA) (RAID Autodetect/AHCI (Détection auto  RAID/AHCI par défaut pour les ordinateurs  mini-tour et de bureau) (AHCI par défaut pour les ordinateurs  compacts et ultra compacts) Options pour les ordinateurs mini-tour et de bureau : l RAID Autodetect/AHCI (Détection auto RAID/AHCI) (RAID en cas de lecteurs signés, sinon AHCI) l RAID Autodetect/ATA (Détection auto RAID/ATA (RAID en cas de lecteurs signés, sinon ATA) l RAID On (RAID activé) (Technologie SATA configurée pour le RAID à chaque démarrage) REMARQUE : En mode Autodetect (Détection auto), le système configure le lecteur en tant que RAID si une  signature RAID est détectée sur le lecteur. Sinon, le lecteur est configuré en tant que AHCI ou ATA. Options pour les ordinateurs compacts et ultra compacts : l AHCI l ATA SMART Reporting (Rapports SMART) (Off [Désactivé] par défaut) Ce paramètre détermine si les erreurs de disque intégré doivent être signalées au démarrage du système. Périphériques intégrés Integrated NIC (Carte réseau  intégrée) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive la carte réseau intégrée. Les valeurs sont On (Activé), Off (Désactivé), ou On w/ PXE (Activé avec PXE).  Lorsque le paramètre On w/ PXE (Activé avec PXE) est sélectionné, si une procédure d'amorçage n'est pas disponible sur le  serveur de réseau, l'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du périphérique suivant dans la séquence d'amorçage. Integrated Audio (Audio intégré) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive le contrôleur audio intégré. USB Controller (Contrôleur USB) Active ou désactive le contrôleur USB interne. No Boot (Aucun démarrage) active le contrôleur mais désactive la possibilité de  démarrer à partir d'un périphérique USB.(On [Activé] par  défaut) REMARQUE : Les systèmes d'exploitation avec prise en charge USB reconnaissent les lecteurs de disquette USB indépendamment  du paramètre No Boot (Aucun démarrage). Rear Quad/Triad USB (USB Quad/Triad arrière) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive les ports USB du haut situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Rear Dual USB (USB double arrière) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive les ports USB du bas situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Front USB (USB frontal) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive les ports USB avant. PCI Slots (Logements PCI) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive tous les logements PCI et PCI Express. LPT Port Mode (Mode du port LPT) (PS/2 par défaut) Détermine le mode de fonctionnement du port parallèle interne. L'option Off (Désactivé) désactive le port. L'option AT configure le port pour le rendre compatible avec les systèmes AT. L'option PS/2 configure le port pour le rendre compatible avec les systèmes  PS/2. L'option EPP configure le port pour le protocole bidirectionnel EPP. L'option ECP configure le port pour le protocole bidirectionnel ECP. REMARQUE : Si vous définissez le paramètre LPT Port Mode (Mode de port LPT) sur la valeur ECP, LPT Port DMA (Accès direct à la  mémoire du port LPT) apparaît dans le menu d'options. LPT Port Address (Adresse du port LPT) Détermine l'adresse utilisée par le port parallèle intégré. Serial Port #1 (Port série 1) (Auto par défaut) Détermine le mode de fonctionnement du port série. La valeur Auto, paramètre par défaut, permet d'attribuer automatiquement une désignation particulière à un connecteur (COM1 ou COM3). Serial Port #2 (Port série 2) (Auto par défaut) Détermine le mode de fonctionnement du port série. REMARQUE : Option disponible uniquement si un adaptateur de port série PS/2 est installé. La valeur Auto, paramètre par défaut, permet d'attribuer automatiquement une désignation donnée à un connecteur (COM2 ou COM4). Vidéo Primary Video (Contrôleur vidéo  principal) (Auto par défaut) Ce paramètre précise quel est le contrôleur vidéo principal, Auto ou Onboard/Card (Intégré/carte). Lorsque la valeur Auto est  sélectionnée, le contrôleur vidéo supplémentaire sera utilisé.  REMARQUE : Une carte graphique PCI Express aura la priorité sur le contrôleur vidéo intégré. Performances HyperThreading (On [Activé] par défaut) L'option Hyper-Threading s'affiche si le processeur installé prend en charge la technologie Hyper-Threading. Détermine si le processeur physique est représenté par un ou deux processeurs logiques. La performance de  certaines applications s'améliore en présence de processeurs logiques supplémentaires. La valeur On (Activé) active  la technologie Hyper-Threading. Multiple CPU Core (Noyau à plusieurs unités  centrales [UC]) (On [Activé] par défaut) Détermine si un ou deux noyaux seront activés pour le processeur. La valeur On (Activé) active le second noyau. Virtualization (Virtualisation) (Off [Désactivé] par défaut) Indique si un moniteur de machine virtuelle (VMM) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires fournies par  la technologie de virtualisation Intel.Technologie de virtualisation des E/S directes Indique si un moniteur de machine virtuelle (VMM) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires fournies par  la technologie de virtualisation des E/S directes. La valeur par défaut est Off (Désactivé). Technologie TXT (Trusted Execution) Indique si un moniteur de machine virtuelle mesuré (MVMM) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires  fournies par la technologie TXT d'Intel. La valeur par défaut est Off (Désactivé). Appareil virtuel Indique si un appareil virtuel (VA) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie  d'informations intégrées Intel. La valeur par défaut est Off (Désactivé). Verrou de configuration VA Indique si l'interface de configuration ACPI de l'appareil virtuel est verrouillée ou déverrouillée. Cette option n'a aucun  effet lorsque l'appareil virtuel est désactivé. La valeur par défaut est Unlocked (Déverrouillé). SpeedStep (Off [Désactivé] par défaut) Active la technologie SpeedStep® d'Intel® pour tous les processeurs pris en charge par l'ordinateur. Ce paramètre  modifie la consommation électrique et la fréquence du processeur. REMARQUE : Il se peut que cette option ne soit pas disponible sur votre ordinateur. Limit CPUID Value (Limitation de valeur CPUID) (Off [Désactivé] par défaut) Limite la valeur maxi prise en charge par la fonction CPUID standard du processeur. L'installation de certains systèmes  d'exploitation ne se termine pas lorsque la fonction CPUID maximum prise en charge est supérieure à 3. HDD Acoustic Mode (Mode acoustique disque dur) (Bypass [Ignorer] par défaut) l Quiet (Silencieux) — Le disque dur fonctionne dans son mode le plus silencieux. l Performance — Le disque dur fonctionne à sa vitesse maximale. l Bypass (Ignorer) — L'ordinateur n'effectue aucun test ni aucune modification de la configuration acoustique actuelle. l Suggested (Recommandé) — Le disque dur fonctionne au niveau recommandé par le fabricant. REMARQUE : L'activation du mode Performance peut accroître le niveau sonore du disque dur sans pour autant  affecter ses performances. La modification de la configuration acoustique n'altère pas l'image du disque dur. Sécurité Unlock Setup (Déverrouillage de  configuration) Lorsqu'un mot de passe d'administrateur est utilisé, il permet à l'utilisateur de modifier les paramètres de configuration du  système. Entrez le mot de passe d'administrateur à l'invite pour déverrouiller la configuration du système. Si le mot de passe  correct n'est pas introduit ici, l'utilisateur peut visualiser les champs de configuration du système mais non les modifier. Admin Password (Mot de passe admin) (Not Set [Non défini] par  défaut) Affiche l'état actuel de la fonctionnalité de sécurité par mot de passe de votre programme de configuration du système et  permet la vérification et la définition d'un nouveau mot de passe administrateur. Mot de passe système (Not Set [Non défini] par  défaut) Affiche l'état actuel de la fonctionnalité de sécurité par mot de passe système et permet d'affecter et de vérifier un nouveau  mot de passe système. SATA 0-n Password (Mot de passe du lecteur SATA 0-n) (Not Set [Non défini] par  défaut) Affiche l'état actuel de la fonctionnalité de sécurité par mot de passe du disque dur et permet la définition et la vérification  d'un nouveau mot de passe de disque dur. Password Changes (Modifications de mot de passe) (Unlocked [Déverrouillé]  par défaut) Détermine l'interaction entre le mot de passe système et le mot de passe administrateur. La valeur Locked (Verrouillé)  empêche un utilisateur ne disposant pas d'un mot de passe administrateur de modifier le mot de passe système. La valeur Unlocked (Déverrouillé) permet à un utilisateur possédant un mot de passe système valide de modifier le mot de passe du système. Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) (On-Silent [Activé  silencieux] par défaut) Lorsqu'elle est activée et que le commutateur a été installé, cette option permet d'avertir l'utilisateur que le châssis de  l'ordinateur a été ouvert. L'avertissement s'affiche au redémarrage de l'ordinateur. Les valeurs possibles sont On (Activé),  On-Silent (Activé silencieux, valeur par défaut) et Off (Désactivé). Intrusion Detected (Intrusion détectée) Accuse réception d'une alerte d'intrusion dans le châssis et efface cette alerte. TPM Security (Contrôleur de sécurité  TPM) (Off [Désactivé] par  défaut) Active ou désactive le périphérique de sécurité du module de plate-forme approuvée. TPM Activation (Activation TPM) (Deactivate [Désactiver]  par défaut) Active ou désactive le périphérique de sécurité du module de plate-forme approuvée. L'option Clear (Effacer) efface toutes les données enregistrées par un utilisateur ayant activé et utilisé au préalable TPM. REMARQUE : Pour activer le module de plate-forme approuvée, l'option TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) doit être paramétrée sur  On (Activé).Execute Disable (On [Activé] par défaut) Active ou désactive la technologie de protection mémoire Execute Disable. Computrace (Deactivate [Désactiver]  par défaut) Active ou désactive l'interface BIOS du service Computrace en option d'Absolute Software. Ce service de surveillance,  disponible en option, doit être acheté séparément.  L'option Activate permanently (Activer en permanence) active l'interface BIOS-Computrace. L'option Disable permanently (Désactiver en permanence) désactive l'interface BIOS-Computrace. L'option Deactivate temporarily (Désactiver  temporairement) désactive l'interface BIOS-Computrace. REMARQUE : En activant ce service, vous acceptez que les données de votre ordinateur soient transmises au serveur  Computrace. Gestion de l'alimentation AC Recovery (Rétablissement de  l'alimentation CA) (Off [Désactivé] par  défaut) Détermine la réaction de l'ordinateur lors du retour d'alimentation en courant alternatif après une coupure d'alimentation. La valeur  Off (Désactivé) indique au système de rester à l'arrêt au retour de l'alimentation. Pour que l'ordinateur s'allume, vous devez  appuyer sur le bouton d'alimentation du panneau avant. La valeur Activé indique au système de démarrer au retour de  l'alimentation. La valeur Last (Dernier) indique au système de revenir au dernier état d'alimentation précédant l'arrêt. Auto Power On (Mise en route automatique) (Off [Désactivé] par  défaut) Définit l'ordinateur pour un démarrage automatique. La valeur Off (Désactivé) désactive cette fonctionnalité. La valeur Everyday (Chaque jour) démarre l'ordinateur chaque jour à l'heure définie dans le paramètre Auto Power Time (Heure de mise sous tension automatique). La valeur Weekdays (Jours ouvrés) démarre l'ordinateur chaque jour du lundi au vendredi à l'heure définie dans le  paramètre Auto Power Time (Heure de mise sous tension automatique). REMARQUE : Cette fonction ne fonctionne pas si vous éteignez votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'interrupteur d'une multiprise ou d'un  parasurtenseur. Auto Power Time (Heure de mise sous tension automatique) Définit l'heure de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. L'heure est au format standard 12 heures (heures:minutes). Modifiez l'heure de démarrage en appuyant sur les touches fléchées  gauche et droite pour augmenter ou diminuer les nombres ou entrez directement les chiffres dans les champs date et heure. Low Power Mode (Mode faible consommation) (Off [Désactivé] par  défaut) Lorsque le mode faible consommation est sélectionné, les événements de réveil à distance ne mettent plus l'ordinateur sous  tension à partir de l'état de Mise en veille prolongée ou Éteint par l'intermédiaire de la carte réseau intégrée. Remote Wake Up (Réveil à distance) (Off [Désactivé] par  défaut) Cette option permet la réactivation du système lorsqu'une carte réseau (NIC) ou un modem prenant en charge le réveil à distance  reçoit un signal de réactivation. Le paramètre par défaut est On (Activé). L'option On w/ Boot to NIC (Activé avec initialisation sur le contrôleur réseau) permet au  système de démarrer à partir du réseau avant d'utiliser la séquence d'amorçage. REMARQUE : Normalement, le système peut être réactivé à distance lorsqu'il est en mode inactif ou Mise en veille prolongée, ou  lorsqu'il est éteint. Si l'option Low Power Mode (Mode faible consommation) est activée dans le menu Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation), l'ordinateur ne peut être activé à distance que lorsqu'il est en mode inactif. Suspend Mode (Mode inactif) (S3 par défaut) Définit le mode inactif de l'ordinateur. Les options possibles sont S1, un état inactif pendant lequel l'ordinateur tourne en mode  faible consommation, et S3, un état inactif pendant lequel l'alimentation est réduite ou coupée pour de nombreux composants mais  pendant lequel la mémoire du système reste active. Maintenance Service Tag (Numéro de service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. SERR Message (Message SERR) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Certaines cartes graphiques exigent la désactivation du message SERR. Load Defaults (Charger les paramètres par  défaut) Restaure les options de configuration du système aux paramètres par défaut d'usine. Event Log (Journal d'événements) Permet la visualisation du journal d'événements. Les entrées sont marquées de la lettre R pour Read (Lu) et de la lettre U pour Unread (Non lu). L'option Mark All Entries Read (Marquer toutes les entrées comme lues) ajoute la lettre R à la gauche de toutes  les entrées. L'option Clear Log (Effacer le journal) efface le contenu du Journal d'événements.Séquence d'amorçage Cette fonction permet de modifier la séquence de démarrage des périphériques. Paramètres d'option  l USB Device — (Périphérique USB) L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du périphérique USB. Si aucun système d'exploitation n'est présent,  l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l Onboard or USB Floppy Drive — (Lecteur de disquette intégré ou USB) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du lecteur de disquette. Si la  disquette qui se trouve dans le lecteur n'est pas amorçable, ou si le lecteur ne contient aucune disquette, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l Onboard SATA Hard Drive — (Disque dur SATA intégré) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du disque dur série ATA principal. Si aucun système  d'exploitation ne se trouve sur le disque dur, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive — (Lecteur de CD-ROM intégré ou USB) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du lecteur de CD. Si le lecteur ne  contient aucun CD ou si le CD ne contient aucun système d'exploitation, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. l Onboard Network Controller — (Contrôleur réseau intégré) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du contrôleur réseau. Si aucun système  d'exploitation n'est présent, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage en cours  Utilisez cette fonction, par exemple, pour indiquer à l'ordinateur de démarrer à partir d'un lecteur de CD, de façon à pouvoir exécuter Dell Diagnostics sur le  support Drivers and Utilities ; vous voudrez cependant démarrer l'ordinateur à partir du disque dur, une fois les tests de diagnostic terminés. Vous pouvez  aussi l'utiliser pour que l'ordinateur démarre à partir d'un périphérique USB (lecteur de disquette, clé de mémoire ou lecteur de CD). 1. Si vous démarrez à partir d'un périphérique USB, reliez-le à un connecteur USB.  2. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3. Lorsque la mention F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu (F2 = Configuration, F12 = Menu d'amorçage) s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran,  appuyez sur . Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite, le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît. Attendez que le bureau Microsoft Windows s'affiche.  Arrêtez ensuite l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur) et faites une autre tentative. Le menu Boot Device (Périphérique d'amorçage) s'affiche, répertoriant tous les périphériques d'amorçage disponibles. Un numéro apparaît en regard de  chaque périphérique.  4. Au bas du menu, entrez le numéro du périphérique à utiliser pour l'amorçage actuel uniquement.  Comportement du POST Fastboot (Démarrage rapide) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette fonctionnalité réduit le temps de démarrage en ignorant certaines étapes de compatibilité. La valeur  Off (Désactivé) n'ignore aucune étape pendant le démarrage de l'ordinateur. La valeur On (Activé) démarre le système plus  rapidement. Numlock Key (Touche Verr Num) (On [Activé] par  défaut) Détermine la fonction des touches numériques situées sur la droite de votre clavier. La valeur Off (Désactivé) indique aux  touches du pavé numérique de fonctionner comme des flèches. La valeur On (Activé) indique aux touches du pavé numérique de  fonctionner comme des chiffres. POST Hotkeys (Raccourcis clavier POST) (Setup & Boot Menu [Menu Configuration et démarrage] par défaut) Détermine si l'écran d'enregistrement affiche un message indiquant la séquence de touches requise pour entrer dans le  programme de configuration ou la fonctionnalité Quickboot. Le Setup & Boot Menu (Menu Configuration et démarrage) affiche  les deux messages (F2=Configuration et F12=Démarrage). La valeur Setup (Configuration) affiche uniquement le message de configuration (F2=Configuration). La valeur Boot (Démarrage) affiche uniquement le message Quickboot (Démarrage rapide)  (F12=Démarrage). La valeur None (Aucun) n'affiche aucun message. Touche de raccourci MEBx Détermine si l'écran d'enregistrement affiche un message indiquant la séquence de touches requise pour entrer dans le  programme de configuration MEBx. Le paramètre par défaut est On (Activé). Keyboard Errors (Erreurs de clavier) (Report [Signaler] par défaut) Lorsque ce paramètre a la valeur Report (Signaler) et qu'une erreur est détectée pendant le POST (autotest de démarrage), le  BIOS affiche le message d'erreur et vous invite à appuyer sur  pour continuer ou à appuyer sur  pour ouvrir le  programme de configuration du système. Lorsque ce paramètre a la valeur Do Not Report (Ne pas signaler) et qu'une erreur est détectée pendant le POST (autotest de  démarrage), le BIOS affiche le message d'erreur et poursuit le démarrage du système. REMARQUE : Si vous amorcez le système à partir d'un lecteur de disquette USB, vous devez d'abord choisir l'option USB pour le lecteur de disquette  dans le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système).Par exemple, pour démarrer sur une clé de mémoire USB, sélectionnez l'option USB Device (Périphérique USB) et appuyez sur . Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour les prochains amorçages du système  1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 2. Utilisez les touches fléchées du clavier pour sélectionner l'option de menu Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage), puis appuyez sur  pour  accéder au menu contextuel.  3. Appuyez sur les touches fléchées vers le bas et vers le haut pour vous déplacer dans la liste des périphériques.  4. Appuyez sur la barre d'espacement pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique. (Les périphériques activés ont une coche.)  5. Appuyez sur  ou  pour déplacer le périphérique sélectionné vers le haut ou le bas de la liste.  Amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB  Clé de mémoire 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire dans un port USB et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  2. Lorsque la mention F12 = Boot Menu (F12 = Menu de démarrage) s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur .  Le BIOS détecte le périphérique USB et l'ajoute au menu de démarrage. 3. À partir du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez le numéro indiqué à côté du périphérique USB.  L'ordinateur démarre à partir du périphérique USB. Lecteur de disquette 1. Dans le programme de configuration du système, paramétrez l'option Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) sur USB. 2. Quittez le programme de configuration du système en enregistrant vos modifications.  3. Connectez le lecteur de disquette USB, insérez une disquette amorçable, puis redémarrez le système.  Paramètres des cavaliers  REMARQUE : Pour démarrer sur un périphérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Pour vous assurer qu'il s'agit d'un périphérique amorçable,  consultez la documentation de ce périphérique. REMARQUE : Notez la séquence d'amorçage utilisée au cas où vous auriez besoin de la restaurer. REMARQUE : Pour démarrer sur un périphérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Pour vérifier que tel est bien le cas, consultez la documentation du  périphérique. Mini-tour et bureauEffacement des mots de passe oubliés  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 3. Repérez le cavalier de mot de passe (PSWD, 2 broches) sur la carte mère, et retirez-le pour effacer le mot de passe. Reportez-vous à la section  Compact Ordinateur ultra compact Cavalier Paramètre Description PSWD Les fonctions de mot de passe sont activées (configuration par défaut). Les fonctions de mot de passe sont désactivées. RTCRST L'horloge en temps réel n'a pas été réinitialisée. L'horloge en temps réel est en cours de réinitialisation (cavalier fermé temporairement). fermé  ouvert PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Ce processus efface à la fois le mot de passe système et le mot de passe administrateur.Paramètres des cavaliers. 4. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Branchez l'ordinateur et l'écran sur les prises secteur, puis allumez-les. 6. Après l'affichage du bureau Microsoft® Windows® sur votre ordinateur, arrêtez celui-ci (reportez-vous à la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur). 7. Éteignez le moniteur et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 8. Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte mère à la terre.  9. Ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur. 10. Repérez le cavalier de mot de passe (PSWD, 2 broches) sur la carte mère, et remettez-le en place pour réactiver la fonction de mot de passe.  11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 12. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 13. Affectez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou administrateur.  Effacement des paramètres CMOS  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 3. Réinitialisez les paramètres CMOS :  a. Localisez les cavaliers de mot de passe (PSWD) et semi-conducteur à oxyde de métal complémentaire (CMOS) (RTC_RST) sur la carte mère  (reportez-vous à la section Paramètres des cavaliers). b. Retirez la fiche du cavalier PSWD de ses broches. c. Placez la fiche de cavalier de mot de passe sur les broches RTC_RST et attendez environ 5 secondes.  d. Retirez la fiche de cavalier des broches RTC_RST et remettez-la sur les broches de mot de passe. 4. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Hyperthreading et Technologie multi-cur L'Hyper-Threading est une technologie Intel qui améliore les performances globales de l'ordinateur en permettant à un processeur physique de fonctionner  comme deux processeurs logiques pouvant exécuter certaines tâches en simultané. Les processeurs à cur multiple contiennent au moins deux unités  physiques de calcul au sein d'un même processeur, augmentant ainsi l'efficacité de calcul et les capacités d'exécution de tâches multiples. Intel a mis en uvre  cette technologie dans ses processeurs double cur et quatre curs. Ces processeurs possèdent respectivement deux et quatre unités de calcul. Il est  recommandé d'utiliser les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) ou supérieur ou Windows Vista optimisés pour tirer parti de ces  technologies. Bien que de nombreux programmes soient compatibles avec la technologie Hyper-Threading et à cur multiple, certains peuvent ne pas être optimisés pour  l'utilisation de ces technologies et il se peut que vous deviez installer une mise à jour fournie par le fabricant de ces logiciels. Contactez le fabricant du logiciel  pour obtenir les mises à jour et pour savoir comment utiliser la technologie Hyper-Threading ou à cur multiple avec votre logiciel. Pour savoir si votre  ordinateur utilise la technologie Hyper-Threading, assurez-vous que l'option du programme de configuration correspondante, située sous l'onglet Performance  (Performances), est sélectionnée (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Cette opération réactive la fonctionnalité de mot de passe. Lorsque la page de configuration du système s'affiche (reportez-vous à la  section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système), les options de mot de passe système et d'administrateur apparaissent en tant que Non définies, ce qui veut dire que la fonction de mot de passe est activée mais qu'aucun mot de passe n'a été affecté. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.Gestion de l'alimentation sous Windows XP et Windows Vista Options sous Windows XP Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows XP permettent de réduire la quantité d'électricité utilisée par l'ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est allumé et que vous ne l'utilisez pas. Vous pouvez réduire l'alimentation du moniteur ou du disque dur uniquement ou bien utiliser le mode Veille ou Mise en  veille prolongée pour réduire l'alimentation de l'ensemble de l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte un mode d'économie d'énergie, il retourne à son état  précédent. Mode Veille Le mode Veille permet d'économiser l'énergie en désactivant l'affichage et le disque dur au terme d'une période donnée, appelée délai d'attente. Lorsque  l'ordinateur quitte le mode Veille, il retourne à son état précédent. Pour configuration l'activation automatique du mode Veille au terme d'une période d'inactivité donnée : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Choisissez une catégorie® Performances et maintenance. 2. Sous ou une icône du panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Options d'alimentation. Pour activer immédiatement le mode Veille sans définir de période d'inactivité, cliquez sur Démarrer® Éteindre l'ordinateur® Mettre en veille. Pour quitter le mode Veille, appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou déplacez la souris. Mode Mise en veille prolongée  Le mode Mise en veille prolongée économise l'énergie en copiant les données système dans une zone réservée du disque dur avant d'éteindre complètement  l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Mise en veille prolongée, il retourne à son état précédent. Pour activer le mode Mise en veille prolongée : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Choisissez une catégorie® Performances et maintenance. 2. Sous ou une icône du panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Options d'alimentation. 3. Définissez les paramètres de mise en veille prolongée dans l'onglet Modes de gestion de l'alimentation, Avancé et Mise en veille prolongée. Pour quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur peut mettre quelques instants à quitter le mode Mise en  veille prolongée. Étant donné que le clavier et la souris ne fonctionnent pas en mode Mise en veille prolongée, l'ordinateur ne quitte pas ce mode lorsque vous  appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou que vous déplacez la souris. Le mode Mise en veille prolongée requiert la présence, sur votre disque dur, d'un fichier spécial offrant un espace suffisant pour stocker le contenu de la  mémoire de l'ordinateur. Dell crée donc un fichier de mise en veille prolongée d'une taille adaptée avant de vous livrer l'ordinateur. Si le disque dur de  l'ordinateur est corrompu, Windows XP recrée automatiquement le fichier de mise en veille prolongée. Propriétés des options d'alimentation  Définissez les paramètres des modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée ainsi que les autres paramètres d'alimentation dans la fenêtre Propriétés des options  d'alimentation. Pour accéder à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Choisissez une catégorie® Performances et maintenance. 2. Sous ou une icône du panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Options d'alimentation. 3. Définissez les paramètres d'alimentation sur les onglets Power Schemes (Modes de gestion de l'alimentation) Advanced (Avancé) et Hibernate (Mettre en veille prolongée) tel que décrit dans les sections suivantes.  Onglet Modes de gestion de l'alimentation REMARQUE : Windows XP Professionnel intègre des fonctions de sécurité et de mise en réseau qui ne sont pas disponibles sous Windows XP Édition  familiale. Lorsqu'un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows XP Professionnel est connecté à un réseau, différentes options de sécurité et de mise en  réseau s'affichent dans certaines fenêtres. REMARQUE : Les procédures d'activation des modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée peuvent différer selon le système d'exploitation utilisé. AVIS : Si l'alimentation est coupée alors que l'ordinateur est en mode Veille, vous risquez de perdre des données.Chaque configuration standard existante pour les paramètres d'alimentation est appelée « mode d'alimentation ». Pour sélectionner un mode d'alimentation  standard Windows sur votre ordinateur, sélectionnez-en un dans le menu déroulant Modes de gestion de l'alimentation. Les paramètres correspondants  apparaissent dans les champs situés sous le nom du mode d'alimentation. Chaque mode d'alimentation définit les paramètres relatifs au passage au mode  Veille et Mise en veille prolongée et à l'extinction du moniteur et du disque dur. Le menu déroulant Modes de gestion de l'alimentation affiche les modes suivants : l Toujours actif (valeur par défaut) — Si vous souhaitez utiliser l'ordinateur sans les fonctions d'économie d'énergie. l PC de bureau ou familial — Si vous souhaitez utiliser votre ordinateur de bureau ou familial avec une petite économie d'énergie. l Portable — Si votre ordinateur est un ordinateur portable que vous utilisez lors de vos déplacements. l Présentation — Si vous souhaitez utiliser votre ordinateur sans interruption (pas d'économie d'énergie). l Gestion d'alimentation minimale — Si vous souhaitez utiliser votre ordinateur avec une économie d'énergie minimale. l Niveau de batterie maxi — Si votre ordinateur est un ordinateur portable et que celui-ci fonctionne sur batterie pendant de longues périodes.  Pour modifier les paramètres par défaut d'un mode d'alimentation, cliquez sur le menu déroulant dans le champ Turn off monitor (Arrêt du moniteur), Turn off hard disks (Arrêt des disques durs), Mise en veille du système ou Mise en veille prolongée du système, puis sélectionnez une valeur dans la liste qui  s'affiche. La valeur sélectionnée remplace définitivement la valeur par défaut à moins que vous ne cliquiez sur Enregistrer sous pour sauvegarder le mode modifié sous un autre nom. Onglet Paramètres avancés  L'onglet Avancé vous permet de : l Placer l'icône Options d'alimentation  dans la barre des tâches de Windows pour pouvoir accéder rapidement à ces options. l Paramétrer l'ordinateur de façon à ce qu'il vous demande votre mot de passe Windows avant de quitter le mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée. l Programmer le bouton d'alimentation pour l'activation du mode Veille, Mise en veille ou la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. Pour programmer ces fonctions, cliquez sur une option dans le menu déroulant correspondant, puis sur OK. Onglet Mise en veille prolongée  L'onglet Mise en veille prolongée vous permet d'activer le mode Mise en veille prolongée. Si vous souhaitez utiliser les paramètres de mise en veille  prolongée tels qu'ils sont définis dans l'onglet Modes de gestion de l'alimentation, cochez la case Activer la prise en charge de la mise en veille prolongée dans l'onglet Mise en veille prolongée. Pour plus d'informations sur les options de gestion de l'alimentation : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Aide et support® Performances et maintenance. 2. Dans la fenêtre Performances et maintenance, cliquez sur Conserving power on your computer (Économiser l'énergie de l'ordinateur).  Options sous Windows Vista Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Vista permettent de réduire la quantité d'électricité utilisée par l'ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est allumé et  que vous ne l'utilisez pas. Vous pouvez réduire l'alimentation du moniteur ou du disque dur uniquement ou bien utiliser le mode Veille ou Mise en veille  prolongée pour réduire l'alimentation de l'ensemble de l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte un mode d'économie d'énergie, il retourne à son état  précédent. Mode Veille Le mode Veille permet d'économiser l'énergie en désactivant l'affichage et le disque dur au terme d'une période d'inactivité prédéterminée (délai d'attente).  Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Veille, il retourne à son état précédent. Pour passer en mode Veille sous Windows Vista, cliquez sur Démarrer , sur la flèche dans le coin inférieur droit du menu Démarrer, puis sur Veille. Pour quitter le mode Veille, appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou déplacez la souris. Mode Mise en veille prolongée  Le mode Mise en veille prolongée économise l'énergie en copiant les données système dans une zone réservée du disque dur avant d'éteindre complètement  l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Mise en veille prolongée, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Si vous définissez un délai d'extinction du disque dur inférieur à celui du moniteur, l'ordinateur peut sembler bloqué. Pour revenir en mode  normal, appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou cliquez sur la souris. Pour éviter ce problème, faites en sorte que le moniteur s'éteigne toujours avant le  disque dur.Pour passer manuellement en mode Mise en veille prolongée sous Windows Vista, cliquez sur Démarrer , sur la flèche dans le coin inférieur droit du menu  Démarrer, puis sur Mise en veille prolongée. Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation  Vous pouvez utiliser la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation de Windows pour configurer les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation sur votre  ordinateur. Pour accéder à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Système et maintenance® Options d'alimentation. À propos des configurations RAID  Cette section fournit une présentation générale de la configuration RAID que vous pouvez avoir sélectionnée lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur. Un certain  nombre de configurations RAID sont disponibles dans l'industrie à différentes fins d'utilisation. Votre ordinateur Dell prend en charge RAID de niveau 0 et RAID  de niveau 1. Une configuration RAID de niveau 0 est recommandée pour les programmes à hautes performances, alors que la configuration RAID de niveau 1  est recommandée aux utilisateurs souhaitant un niveau élevé d'intégrité des données. Le contrôleur RAID Intel® de votre ordinateur ne peut créer une configuration RAID qu'avec deux disques physiques. Les lecteurs doivent avoir la même taille  afin d'assurer que le lecteur de plus grande taille ne contienne pas d'espace non attribué (et donc inutilisable). Vérification du bon fonctionnement du RAID Votre ordinateur affiche des informations relatives à votre configuration RAID au démarrage, avant de charger le système d'exploitation. Si le RAID n'est pas  configuré, le message none defined (aucun défini) s'affiche sous RAID Volumes (Volumes RAID), avec la liste des lecteurs physiques installés sur votre  système. Si un volume RAID est identifié, vous pouvez alors contrôler la valeur du champ Status (État) pour connaître l'état actuel de votre configuration RAID.  Le champ Status contient des informations sur les modes suivants : l Normal — Votre configuration RAID fonctionne correctement. l Degraded — (Dégradé) — L'un de vos disques durs est défectueux. L'ordinateur est toujours amorçable mais le RAID ne fonctionne pas et les données  ne sont pas copiées sur l'autre lecteur. l Rebuild — (Reconstruction) — En mode dégradé, l'ordinateur a détecté le remplacement ou la connexion d'un disque dur secondaire et restaurera  automatiquement la configuration RAID au prochain chargement du système d'exploitation. RAID de niveau 0 RAID de niveau 0 utilise une technique de stockage appelée segmentation des données afin d'accélérer l'accès aux données. Cette méthode consiste à écrire  des segments consécutifs ou blocs, de données séquentiellement sur le(s) lecteur(s) physique(s) pour créer un lecteur virtuel de grande taille. La  segmentation des données permet à l'un des lecteurs de lire les données pendant que l'autre lecteur recherche et lit le bloc suivant. La configuration RAID de niveau 0 présente un autre avantage : elle utilise toutes les capacités de stockage des lecteurs. Par exemple, deux disques durs de  120 Go se combinent pour fournir 240 Go d'espace de disque dur sur lesquels stocker les données. REMARQUE : Les niveaux de RAID ne représentent pas une hiérarchie. Une configuration RAID niveau 1 n'est pas nécessairement meilleure ou pire  qu'une configuration RAID niveau 0. REMARQUE : Si vous avez acheté votre ordinateur Dell avec une configuration RAID, votre ordinateur a été configuré avec deux disques durs de même  taille. AVIS : Étant donné qu'une configuration RAID niveau 0 ne fournit aucune redondance des données, l'échec d'un lecteur entraîne la perte de toutes les  données. Pour protéger vos données lorsque vous utilisez une configuration RAID de niveau 0, effectuez des sauvegardes régulières. REMARQUE : Dans la configuration RAID de niveau 0, la taille de la configuration est égale à la taille du plus petit lecteur multipliée par le nombre de  lecteurs dans la configuration.Configuration RAID de niveau 1 RAID de niveau 1 utilise une technique de stockage redondante des données appelée mise en miroir pour optimiser l'intégrité. Les données écrites sur le  lecteur principal sont également dupliquées ou mises en miroir, sur le second lecteur de la configuration. En cas de panne d'un lecteur, les opérations de lecture et d'écriture sont redirigées vers le lecteur fonctionnant correctement. Un lecteur de remplacement  peut ensuite être reconstruit à partir des données du lecteur qui fonctionne correctement. Configuration de votre ordinateur pour RAID Il existe deux méthodes pour configurer des volumes de disque dur RAID. La première consiste à utiliser l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM. Elle ne requiert pas  la présence d'un système d'exploitation sur le disque dur. La seconde méthode consiste à utiliser les utilitaires Intel Matrix Storage Manager ou Intel Matrix  Storage Console après l'installation du système d'exploitation et de l'utilitaire Matrix Storage Console. Pour ces deux méthodes, vous devez avoir configuré  votre ordinateur en mode RAID avant de commencer. Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). 2. Appuyez sur les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Drives (Lecteurs) et appuyez sur .  3. Appuyez sur les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance SATA Operation (Exécution SATA) et appuyez sur .  4. Appuyez sur les touches fléchés gauche et droite pour mettre en surbrillance RAID On (RAID activé), appuyez ensuite sur , puis sur <Échap>.  5. Appuyez sur les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Enregistrer/Quitter et appuyez sur  pour quitter le programme  de configuration du système et reprendre le processus de démarrage.  Configuration de votre ordinateur pour RAID à l'aide de l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM  Création d'une configuration RAID de niveau 0 1. Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). 2. Appuyez sur  lorsque vous êtes invité à accéder à l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM.  REMARQUE : En configuration RAID de niveau 1, la taille de la configuration correspond à la taille du plus petit des deux lecteurs utilisés. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur les options RAID, reportez-vous à la section Options du programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Bien que des disques durs de n'importe quelle taille puissent être utilisés pour créer une configuration RAID à l'aide de l'utilitaire Intel RAID  Option ROM, il est préférable que les lecteurs soient de taille égale. Dans la configuration RAID de niveau 0, la taille de la configuration est égale à la  taille du plus petit lecteur multipliée par le nombre de lecteurs dans la configuration (deux). En configuration RAID de niveau 1, la taille de la  configuration correspond à la taille du plus petit des deux disques utilisés. AVIS : Toutes les données des disques durs sont perdues lors de la création d'une configuration RAID à l'aide de la procédure suivante. Avant de  continuer, sauvegardez les données que vous souhaitez conserver. REMARQUE : N'utilisez la procédure suivante que si vous réinstallez votre système d'exploitation. Ne l'utilisez pas pour migrer une configuration de  stockage existante à une configuration RAID de niveau 0.3. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Créer un volume RAID et appuyez sur .  4. Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou conservez la valeur par défaut, puis appuyez sur .  5. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner RAID0 (Stripe) (RAID0 (Blocs)) et appuyez sur .  6. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour modifier la taille de bloc et appuyez sur .  7. Sélectionnez la capacité de volume souhaitée et appuyez sur . La valeur par défaut est la taille maximale disponible.  8. Appuyez sur  pour créer le volume.  9. Appuyez sur  (o) pour confirmer la création du volume RAID.  10. Confirmez que la configuration de volume qui s'affiche dans l'écran principal de l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM est correcte.  11. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner Quitter et appuyez sur .  12. Installez le système d'exploitation (reportez-vous à la section Restauration du système d'exploitation). Création d'une configuration RAID de niveau 1 1. Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). 2. Appuyez sur  lorsque vous êtes invité à accéder à l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM.  3. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Créer un volume RAID et appuyez sur .  4. Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou conservez la valeur par défaut, puis appuyez sur .  5. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner RAID1 (Mirror) (RAID1 (Miroir)) et appuyez sur .  6. Sélectionnez la capacité de volume souhaitée et appuyez sur . La valeur par défaut est la taille maximale disponible.  7. Appuyez sur  pour créer le volume.  8. Appuyez sur  (o) pour confirmer la création du volume RAID.  9. Confirmez que la configuration de volume qui s'affiche dans l'écran principal de l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM est correcte.  10. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner Quitter et appuyez sur .  11. Installez le système d'exploitation (reportez-vous à la section Restauration du système d'exploitation). Configuration de l'ordinateur pour RAID à l'aide d'Intel Matrix Storage Manager  Si le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur un disque dur, et que vous souhaitez ajouter un deuxième disque dur et reconfigurer les deux lecteurs en un  volume RAID, sans perdre le système d'exploitation existant et des données, utilisez l'option de migration pour une configuration RAID de niveau 0 (reportezvous à la section Migration à une configuration RAID de niveau 0) ou une configuration RAID de niveau 1 (reportez-vous à la section Migration à une  configuration RAID de niveau 1). Créez un volume RAID de niveau 0 ou RAID de niveau 1 uniquement dans les cas suivants : l Vous ajoutez un nouveau lecteur à un ordinateur existant équipé d'un seul lecteur (et le système d'exploitation se trouve sur ce lecteur), et vous  souhaitez configurer les lecteurs en un volume RAID. l Vous disposez déjà d'un ordinateur équipé de deux disques durs configurés en un volume, mais il reste de l'espace sur le volume que vous voulez  désigner comme second volume RAID. Création d'une configuration RAID de niveau 0 1. Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). REMARQUE : Sélectionnez la taille de bloc la plus proche de celle du fichier moyen que vous souhaitez stocker sur le volume RAID. Si vous ne connaissez  pas la taille de fichier moyenne, choisissez 128 Ko comme taille de bloc. REMARQUE : L'exécution de cette opération entraînera la perte de toutes les données figurant sur les lecteurs RAID.2. Cliquez sur Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes® Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager® Intel Matrix Storage Console pour lancer l'utilitaire Intel Storage Utility. 3. Dans le menu Actions, sélectionnez Create RAID Volume (Créer un volume RAID) pour lancer l'Assistant Création d'un volume RAID, puis cliquez sur  Suivant. 4. À l'écran Select Volume Location (Sélectionner l'emplacement du volume), cliquez sur le premier disque dur à inclure dans le volume RAID de niveau 0,  puis cliquez sur la flèche droite.  5. Cliquez sur un deuxième disque dur. Pour ajouter un troisième disque dur au volume RAID de niveau 0, cliquez sur la flèche droite puis sur le troisième  lecteur jusqu'à ce que les trois lecteurs apparaissent dans la fenêtre Selected (Sélectionné), cliquez enfin sur Suivant. 6. Dans la fenêtre Specify Volume Size (Spécifier la taille du volume), cliquez sur la Volume Size (Taille de volume) de votre choix, puis sur Suivant. 7. Cliquez sur Finish (Terminer) pour créer le volume, ou sur Back (Précédent) pour apporter des modifications.  Création d'une configuration RAID de niveau 1 1. Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). 2. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes® Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager® Intel Matrix Storage Console pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel®. 3. Dans le menu Actions, sélectionnez Create RAID Volume (Créer un volume RAID) pour lancer l'Assistant Création d'un volume RAID.  4. Dans le premier écran, cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Validez le nom du volume, sélectionnez RAID 1 comme niveau de RAID, puis cliquez sur Suivant pour continuer. 6. À l'écran Select Volume Location (Sélectionner l'emplacement du volume), cliquez sur le premier disque dur à inclure dans le volume RAID de niveau 1,  puis cliquez sur la flèche droite. Cliquez sur un deuxième disque dur jusqu'à ce que deux lecteurs apparaissent dans la fenêtre Selected (Sélectionné),  puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7. Dans la fenêtre Specify Volume Size (Spécifier la taille du volume), cliquez sur la Volume Size (Taille de volume) de votre choix, puis sur Suivant. 8. Cliquez sur Finish (Terminer) pour créer le volume, ou sur Back (Précédent) pour apporter des modifications.  9. Suivez les procédures Microsoft Windows pour créer une partition sur le nouveau volume RAID.  Restauration via l'utilitaire Intel Matrix Storage Manager suite à la panne d'un disque dur  (RAID1) 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension ou redémarrez-le. 2. Appuyez sur  lorsque vous êtes invité à accéder à l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM.  3. Sous DEGRADED VOLUME DETECTED, (VOLUME DÉGRADÉ DÉTECTÉ) vérifiez que le nouveau lecteur (non RAID) est répertorié, puis appuyez sur  .  4. Sous Disk/Volume Information (Informations sur les disques/volumes) vérifiez que l'état du volume est Rebuild (Reconstruire). 5. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner Quitter et appuyez sur .  REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions ne s'affiche pas, vous n'avez pas encore configuré votre ordinateur sur le mode RAID (reportez-vous à la  section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). REMARQUE : L'exécution de cette opération entraînera la perte de toutes les données figurant sur les lecteurs RAID. REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions ne s'affiche pas, vous n'avez pas encore configuré votre ordinateur sur le mode RAID. REMARQUE : La procédure ci-dessous ne peut être réalisée qu'une fois le remplacement du disque dur défectueux effectué (reportez-vous à la section  « Lecteurs » appropriée). REMARQUE : Les volumes dotés de l'état Rebuild sont reconstruits au sein du système d'exploitation.L'ordinateur démarre sur le système d'exploitation et commence à reconstruire le volume RAID automatiquement. Une boîte de dialogue affichant la  progression de la reconstruction apparaît. Migration à une configuration RAID de niveau 0 REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pendant la reconstruction du volume RAID de niveau 1. 1. Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). 2. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Tous les programmes® Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager® Intel Matrix Storage Console pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel. 3. Dans le menu Actions, sélectionnez Create RAID Volume From Existing Hard Drive (Créer un volume RAID à partir du disque dur existant) pour lancer l'Assistant Migration. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant dans l'écran Assistant Migration.  5. Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou conservez la valeur par défaut.  6. Dans la case à menu déroulant, sélectionnez RAID 0 comme niveau de RAID. 7. Dans la case à menu déroulant, sélectionnez la taille de bloc appropriée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8. Dans l'écran Select Source Hard Drive (Sélectionner le disque dur source), double-cliquez sur le disque dur à partir duquel vous souhaitez effectuer la  migration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9. Dans l'écran Select Member Hard Drive (Sélectionner un disque dur membre), double-cliquez sur le(s) disque(s) dur(s) pour sélectionner le(s) lecteur(s)  membre(s) pour couvrir la matrice de blocs, et cliquez sur Suivant. 10. Dans l'écran Specify Volume Size (Spécifier la taille du volume), sélectionnez la Volume Size (Taille de volume) de votre choix, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 11. Cliquez sur Terminer pour démarrer la migration, ou sur Précédent pour apporter des modifications. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur comme d'habitude pendant la migration. Migration à une configuration RAID de niveau 1 1. Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur). 2. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Tous les programmes® Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager® Intel Matrix Storage Console pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel. 3. Dans le menu Actions, cliquez sur Create RAID Volume From Existing Hard Drive (Créer un volume RAID à partir du disque dur existant) pour lancer  l'Assistant Migration. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant dans le premier écran Assistant Migration.  5. Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou conservez la valeur par défaut.  6. Dans la case à menu déroulant, sélectionnez RAID 1 comme niveau de RAID. REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions ne s'affiche pas, vous n'avez pas encore configuré votre ordinateur sur le mode RAID. REMARQUE : Sélectionnez la taille de bloc la plus proche de celle du fichier moyen que vous souhaitez stocker sur le volume RAID. Si vous ne connaissez  pas la taille de fichier moyenne, choisissez 128 Ko comme taille de bloc. REMARQUE : Sélectionnez le disque dur que vous souhaitez utiliser comme disque dur source (le disque dur contenant les fichiers de données ou de  système d'exploitation à conserver sur le volume RAID). REMARQUE : À l'étape 11, toutes les données figurant sur le lecteur membre sont supprimées. REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions ne s'affiche pas, vous n'avez pas encore configuré votre ordinateur sur le mode RAID. REMARQUE : Sélectionnez le disque dur à utiliser comme disque dur source (le disque dur contenant les fichiers de données ou de système  d'exploitation à conserver sur le volume RAID).7. Dans l'écran Select Source Hard Drive (Sélectionner le disque dur source), double-cliquez sur le disque dur à partir duquel vous souhaitez effectuer la  migration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8. Dans l'écran Select Member Hard Drive (Sélectionner un disque dur membre), double-cliquez sur le disque dur pour sélectionner le lecteur membre qui  doit agir en tant que miroir dans la configuration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9. Dans l'écran Specify Volume Size (Spécifier la taille du volume), sélectionnez la taille de volume de votre choix, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 10. Cliquez sur Terminer pour démarrer la migration, ou cliquez sur Précédent pour apporter des modifications. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur comme d'habitude pendant la migration. Retour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : À l'étape 10, toutes les données figurant sur le lecteur membre sont supprimées.Retour à la page Contenu Pile Guide d'utilisation Remplacement de la pile Remplacement de la pile Une pile bouton conserve les informations de configuration, de date et d'heure de l'ordinateur. Elle peut durer plusieurs années. La pile peut nécessiter d'être remplacée si une date ou heure incorrecte s'affiche lors de la procédure d'amorçage avec un message tel que : Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP program (Heure actuelle non définie - veuillez exécuter le programme de configuration du système) ou Invalid configuration information - please run System Setup Program (Information de configuration non valide - exécutez le programme de configuration du système) ou Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility (Appuyez sur F1 pour continuer, sur F2 pour exécuter l'utilitaire de configuration) Pour déterminer s'il est nécessaire de remplacer la pile, modifiez la date et l'heure dans le programme de configuration du système et quittez le programme  pour enregistrer les informations. Éteignez l'ordinateur et déconnectez-le de la prise secteur pendant quelques heures. Reconnectez-le, mettez-le sous tension, puis ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Si la date et l'heure sont incorrectes dans le programme de configuration du système, remplacez la pile. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur sans pile, mais les informations de configuration seront supprimées lorsque l'ordinateur est mis hors tension ou  déconnecté de la prise secteur. Dans ce cas, vous devez ouvrir le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système) et redéfinir les options de configuration. Pour retirer la batterie : 1. Si ce n'est déjà fait, faites une copie des informations qui figurent dans le programme de configuration du système.  2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 3. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 4. Localisez le support de pile. 5. Retirez la pile du système.  a. Maintenez le connecteur de pile en place en appuyant fermement sur le côté positif du connecteur.  b. Tout en maintenant le connecteur de pile en place, éloignez la languette de la pile du côté positif du connecteur et extrayez la pile des  languettes de fixation du côté négatif du connecteur.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une pile neuve peut exploser si elle est mal installée. Ne remplacez la pile qu'avec un type similaire ou équivalent recommandé  par le fabricant. Mettez les piles usagées au rebut selon les instructions du fabricant.  AVIS : Si vous sortez la pile de son support avec un objet pointu, prenez garde de ne pas toucher la carte mère avec l'objet. Vérifiez que l'objet est  inséré entre la pile et son support avant de tenter d'extraire la pile. Autrement, vous pourriez endommager la carte mère en délogeant le logement de  la pile ou en rompant les circuits imprimés sur la carte mère. AVIS : Pour ne pas endommager le connecteur de pile, vous devez maintenir le connecteur en place lorsque vous installez ou retirez la pile. 6. Installez la nouvelle pile. a. Maintenez le connecteur de pile en place en appuyant fermement sur le côté positif du connecteur.  b. Tenez la pile avec le « + » vers le haut et faites-la glisser sous les languettes de fixation situées du côté positif du connecteur.  c. Appuyez sur la pile pour l'enclencher dans le connecteur. 7. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 8. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système) et restaurez les paramètres enregistrés au cours de l'étape 1. 9. Jetez l'ancienne pile en vous conformant aux instructions du Guide d'information sur le produit. Retour à la page Contenu 1 pile du système 2 côté positif du connecteur de pile 3 languette du support de pile 4 support de pileRetour à la page Contenu Avant de commencer Guide d'utilisation Outils recommandés Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Ce chapitre fournit les instructions de retrait et d'installation des composants de votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes  doivent exister préalablement à chaque procédure : l Vous avez suivi les étapes décrites dans les sections Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur et Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. l Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™. l Un composant peut être remis en place en effectuant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. Outils recommandés  Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document nécessitent les outils suivants : l Un petit tournevis à lame plate l Un tournevis cruciforme l Une disquette ou un CD pour le programme de mise à jour du Flash BIOS Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur 1. Arrêtez le système d'exploitation :  a. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et les programmes ouverts. b. Sous le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP, cliquez sur Démarrer® Arrêter® Arrêter. Sous Microsoft Windows Vista®, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista™, , situé dans le coin inférieur gauche du bureau, cliquez sur  la flèche dans le coin inférieur droit du menu Démarrer, comme illustré ci-dessous, puis cliquez sur Arrêter. L'ordinateur s'éteint automatiquement une fois le processus d'arrêt du système d'exploitation terminé. Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur  Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur contre les dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité  personnelle. 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, enregistrez tous les fichiers ouverts, fermez-les et quittez toutes les applications avant de procéder à l'arrêt  du système. AVIS : Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques reliés sont éteints. Si votre ordinateur et ses périphériques ne se sont pas automatiquement  éteints à l'arrêt du système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 4 secondes pour les éteindre. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les composants ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une  carte par les bords ou par la languette de montage métallique. Tenez les composants, tels qu'un processeur, par les bords et non par les broches.  AVIS : Seul un technicien d'entretien qualifié doit effectuer les réparations sur votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non agréée  par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont  munis d'un connecteur à languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez ce type de câble, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage vers l'intérieur  avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de  connecteur. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés.  AVIS : Avant de commencer à travailler sur l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes suivantes pour éviter de l'endommager. 2. Débranchez tous les fils de téléphone ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur.  3. Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques de leurs prises secteur, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte mère à la  terre. 4. Retirez, le cas échéant, le socle inclinable de l'ordinateur (pour les instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec le socle inclinable) et le  cache du câble (reportez-vous à la section Cache- câble (en option)). 5. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. l Pour un ordinateur mini-tour, reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur. l Pour un ordinateur de bureau, reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur. l Pour un ordinateur compact, reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur. l Pour un ordinateur ultra compact, reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur. Retour à la page Contenu AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble de réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise réseau murale. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot.  AVIS : Avant de toucher quoi que ce soit à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par  exemple la partie métallique à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre intervention, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte de  l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes.Retour à la page Contenu Nettoyage de votre ordinateur Guide d'utilisation Ordinateur, clavier et moniteur Souris Lecteur de disquette CD et DVD Ordinateur, clavier et moniteur l Utilisez une bombe aérosol d'air comprimé pour chasser la poussière qui se trouve entre les touches du clavier. l Pour nettoyer l'écran, humectez légèrement un chiffon doux et propre avec de l'eau. Vous pouvez également utiliser un chiffon spécial pour le  nettoyage des écrans ou une solution adaptée au revêtement antireflet de l'écran. l Nettoyez le clavier, l'ordinateur et les parties en plastique de l'écran avec un chiffon doux humecté d'une solution composée de trois volumes d'eau et  d'un volume de détergent pour vaisselle. Mouillez légèrement le chiffon et veillez à ne pas laisser pénétrer l'eau à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur ou du clavier. Souris Si le curseur de la souris saute ou se déplace anormalement, nettoyez la souris.  Nettoyage d'une souris non optique 1. Nettoyez l'extérieur du boîtier de la souris à l'aide d'un chiffon humecté d'une solution nettoyante non agressive. 2. Tournez l'anneau de retenue situé sous la souris dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour retirer la bille.  3. Essuyez la bille avec un chiffon propre et non pelucheux. 4. Soufflez dans la cavité de la bille ou utilisez une bombe d'air comprimé pour en déloger la poussière et les peluches.  5. Si les roulements dans la cavité sont sales, nettoyez-les avec un coton-tige légèrement humecté d'alcool.  6. Vérifiez le centrage des roulements dans leurs canaux. Assurez-vous que le coton-tige n'a pas laissé de peluches sur les roulements.  7. Remettez en place la bille et l'anneau de retenue, puis tournez l'anneau de retenue dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour fermer la cavité.  Nettoyage d'une souris optique Nettoyez l'extérieur du boîtier de la souris à l'aide d'un chiffon doux humecté d'une solution nettoyante non agressive. Lecteur de disquette PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur avant de le nettoyer. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un tissu doux humecté d'eau.  N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le revêtement antireflet, n'essuyez pas l'écran avec une solution à base d'alcool ou de savon. AVIS : Débranchez la souris de l'ordinateur avant de la nettoyer. AVIS : N'essayez pas de nettoyer les têtes de lecture avec une tige de nettoyage. Vous risqueriez de déranger accidentellement l'alignement des têtes  et d'empêcher le fonctionnement du lecteur.Nettoyez le lecteur de disquette à l'aide d'une trousse de nettoyage que vous trouverez dans le commerce. Ces kits comportent des disquettes prétraitées  permettant d'enlever les dépôts accumulés au cours d'une utilisation normale. CD et DVD Si vous avez des problèmes pendant la lecture de vos CD ou DVD (des sauts pendant la lecture par exemple), nettoyez les disques. 1. Saisissez le disque par son bord extérieur. Vous pouvez également toucher le bord intérieur de l'orifice central.  2. Avec un chiffon doux et non pelucheux, nettoyez doucement la partie inférieure du disque (côté sans étiquette) en suivant une ligne droite depuis le  centre jusqu'au bord extérieur.  Si la poussière ne part pas, utilisez de l'eau ou une solution diluée d'eau et de savon doux. Certains produits vendus dans le commerce nettoient les  disques et les protègent contre la poussière, les empreintes et les rayures. Les produits de nettoyage pour CD peuvent également être utilisés sur les  DVD sans aucun risque. Retour à la page Contenu AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la surface, ne nettoyez pas le disque avec des mouvements circulaires.Retour à la page Contenu Ordinateur de bureau Guide d'utilisation À propos de votre ordinateur de bureau Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur L'intérieur de votre ordinateur Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur Composants de la carte mère À propos de votre ordinateur de bureau  Vue frontale 1 connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'avant pour les périphériques  que vous connectez occasionnellement, comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo, ou pour les périphériques USB amorçables  (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système pour plus d'informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un périphérique  USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour  les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et le  clavier. 2 voyant LAN Ce voyant indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau local) est établie. 3 bouton d'alimentation Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour ne pas perdre de données, n'éteignez pas l'ordinateur en  appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du  système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la  section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Si la fonctionnalité ACPI est activée sur votre système  d'exploitation, lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, l'ordinateur procède à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. 4 badge Dell Vous pouvez faire pivoter ce badge pour l'aligner sur l'orientation de votre ordinateur. Pour le faire tourner, placez vos doigts sur l'extérieur  du badge, appuyez fermement et faites tourner le badge. Vous pouvez également le faire pivoter à l'aide de l'encoche située vers le bas du  badge. 5 voyant d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe, selon l'état  de fonctionnement : l Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint. l Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement. l Vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie  d'énergie. l Orange clignotant ou fixe — Reportez-vous à la section  Problèmes d'alimentation. Pour quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le bouton  d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce périphérique est Vue arrière Connecteurs du panneau arrière configuré comme un périphérique de réveil dans le Gestionnaire de  périphériques Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes de  mise en veille et sur la façon de quitter un mode d'économie d'énergie,  reportez-vous à la section Gestion de l'alimentation sous Windows XP et Windows Vista. Reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux permettant de résoudre les problèmes  rencontrés sur votre ordinateur. 6 voyants de diagnostic Ces voyants vous aident à résoudre les problèmes informatiques  d'après le code de diagnostic. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. 7 voyant d'activité du  disque dur Ce voyant clignote rapidement lors de l'accès au disque dur. 8 connecteur de casque Permet de connecter le casque et les haut-parleurs. 9 connecteur de microphone Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour brancher un microphone. 10 baie de lecteur de 3,5 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur de disquette en option, un deuxième disque  dur ou un lecteur de carte multimédia en option. 11 baie de lecteur de 5,25 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur optique. Permet d'insérer un CD ou un DVD (si  cela est pris en charge). 1 logements de carte Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI ou PCI  Express installées, connecteur PS/2, connecteur eSATA, etc. REMARQUE : La vue arrière du système sera différente si une carte  de montage est installée. 2 connecteurs du panneau arrière Branchez les périphériques série, USB et tout autre périphérique dans  les connecteurs appropriés (reportez-vous à la section Connecteurs du panneau arrière). 3 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez le câble d'alimentation. 4 sélecteur de  tension Votre ordinateur est équipé d'un sélecteur de tension manuel. Pour  ne pas endommager un ordinateur doté d'un sélecteur de tension  manuel, réglez le commutateur sur la tension qui correspond le mieux  à l'alimentation en CA de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez : AVIS : Au Japon, le commutateur de sélection de tension doit être  réglé sur 115 V. Assurez-vous également que votre moniteur et tous ses  périphériques sont électriquement réglés pour fonctionner avec la  puissance en CA disponible dans votre zone géographique. 5 anneau pour cadenas Insérez un cadenas pour verrouiller le capot de l'ordinateur. 6 loquet de fermeture du capot Permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.1 connecteur parallèle Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une  imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à un  connecteur USB. REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est  automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte  installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la même  adresse. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section  Options du programme de configuration du système. 2 voyant d'intégrité de  la liaison l Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau  10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le  réseau 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau  1 Gb/s (ou 1000 Gb/s) et l'ordinateur. l Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion  physique au réseau. 3 connecteur de carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large  bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une  prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large  bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de  carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un  déclic indique que le câble de réseau a été correctement installé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au  connecteur réseau. Pour que VPro fonctionne, le câble réseau doit être raccordé à la  carte NIC intégrée. Il est recommandé d'utiliser un câblage et des connecteurs de  catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de  catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s pour garantir un  fonctionnement fiable. 4 voyant d'activité  réseau Un voyant jaune clignote lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit  des données sur le réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut  donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 connecteur ligne de sortie Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs  intégrés. 6 connecteur ligne d'entrée/microphone Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée/microphone bleu et rose pour  raccorder un appareil d'enregistrement/de lecture, tel qu'un lecteur de cassette, un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope ; ou  un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée  vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. 7 connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les  périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et  le clavier. 8 connecteur vidéo Branchez le câble du moniteur compatible VGA dans le connecteur  bleu. REMARQUE : Si vous avez acheté une carte graphique  optionnelle, ce connecteur sera recouvert d'un cache. Connectez votre moniteur au connecteur sur la carte graphique. Ne retirez pas le cache. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez une carte graphique capable de gérer deux moniteurs, utilisez le câble Y fourni avec l'ordinateur. 9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port série.  Les désignations par défaut sont COM1 pour le connecteur série  1 et COM2 pour le connecteur série 2. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Si vous avez installé un cadenas dans l'anneau prévu à cet effet sur le panneau arrière, retirez-le. 3. Repérez le loquet de fermeture du capot illustré ci-dessous. Puis, faites glisser le loquet vers l'arrière tout en levant le capot.  4. Prenez le capot de l'ordinateur par les côtés et faites-le pivoter vers le haut en utilisant les languettes des charnières comme leviers.  5. Retirez le capot des languettes des charnières et mettez-le de côté sur une surface douce non abrasive.  L'intérieur de votre ordinateur  Options du programme de configuration du système. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte graphique peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir assez longtemps avant de le toucher. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 loquet de fermeture du capot 3 anneau pour cadenas PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur, prenez soin de ne pas déconnecter de câbles de la carte mère accidentellement.Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis  Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez le câble du commutateur d'intrusion du châssis de la carte mère. Pour ce faire, appuyez avec deux doigts sur le mécanisme de  déverrouillage situé de chaque côté du connecteur et tirez pour débrancher le connecteur du câble.  4. Faites glisser le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis en dehors de son logement dans le support métallique, puis faites-le passer par le trou carré  du support pour retirer le commutateur et son câble de l'ordinateur.  1 baies de lecteur (lecteur de carte multimédia ou lecteur de disquette, lecteur optique et disque dur)  5 logements de carte 2 bloc d'alimentation 6 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 3 commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis en option 7 panneau d'E/S avant 4 carte mère PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis est installé en standard sur les ordinateurs ultra compacts mais est en option sur les  ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau et compacts ; il est possible qu'il ne soit pas présent sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez sentir une légère résistance lorsque vous glissez le commutateur en dehors de son logement.Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Insérez avec précaution le commutateur depuis le dessous du support métallique dans le trou carré du support, puis faites-le glisser dans son logement jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position.  2. Rebranchez le câble sur la carte mère.  3. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Réinitialisation du détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, attendez que le bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Sélectionnez l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) et appuyez sur les touches fléchées gauche ou droite pour sélectionner Reset (Réinitialiser). Choisissez alors On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé silencieux) ou Disabled (Désactivé).  4. Enregistrez vos paramètres BIOS et quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Desserrez les vis imperdables situées de chaque côté de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur.  2. Faites pivoter l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur vers le haut et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Posez le dissipateur de chaleur, partie supérieure en bas.  Composants de la carte mère  REMARQUE : Le paramètre par défaut est On-Silent (Activé silencieux). PRÉCAUTION : Malgré la présence d'un blindage en plastique, l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une  utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir avant de le manipuler. 1 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 2 emplacement des vis imperdables (2)Retour à la page Contenu 1 haut-parleur interne (INT_SPKR) 12 connecteur du commutateur d'intrusion (INTRUDER) 2 connecteur du processeur (UC) 13 support de pile (BATTERY) 3 connecteur d'alimentation du processeur (12VPOWER) 14 connecteur PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 4 connecteurs pour module de mémoire (DIMM_1, DIMM_2, DIMM_3,  DIMM_4) 15 connecteur PCI (SLOT2) 5 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD) 16 connecteur PCI (SLOT3) 6 connecteurs SATA (SATA0, SATA1, SATA2) 17 connecteur de la carte de montage (utilise le port PCI-E/SLOT1 et le port PCI/SLOT2) 7 connecteur du panneau avant (FRONTPANEL) 18 connecteur série (SERIAL2) 8 connecteur d'alimentation (POWER) 19 haut-parleur de la carte mère (BEEP) 9 connecteur SATA externe (eSATA) 20 DEL d'alimentation auxiliaire (aux_LED) 10 USB interne (INT_USB) 21 connecteur du lecteur de disquette (DSKT) 11 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC (RTCRST) 22 connecteur du ventilateur (FAN_CPU)Dell™ OptiPlex™ 755 Guide d'utilisation Remarques, avis et précautions Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, OptiPlex, TravelLite, OpenManage et StrikeZone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, SpeedStep et Celeron sont des marques déposées et Core et vPro sont des marques d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows Vista et le bouton Démarrer de Windows  sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et  est utilisé par Dell Inc. sous licence. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En  tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell a fait en sorte que ce produit réponde aux normes de ce programme en matière de consommation énergétique. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèles: DCTR, DCNE, DCSM et DCCY Octobre 2007        Réf.: JN460        Rév. A01 Ordinateur de bureau À propos de votre ordinateur Recherche d'informations Ordinateur de bureau Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur de bureau  Fonctionnalités avancées Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte Nettoyage de votre ordinateur Fonctions Microsoft® Windows® Dépannage Obtention d'aide Glossaire Garantie Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Retrait et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Cartes Lecteurs Processeur Panneau d'E/S Bloc d'alimentation Haut-parleurs Pile Remplacement de la carte mère  Mémoire Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Cartes Cartes Votre ordinateur Dell™ prend en charge un adaptateur de port série PS/2 et fournit les connecteurs suivants sur la carte mère pour les cartes PCI et PCI  Express : l Deux connecteurs pour cartes PCI demi-hauteur l Un connecteur pour carte PCI Express x16 demi-hauteur Cartes PCI Installation d'une carte PCI Si vous remplacez une carte PCI, désinstallez le pilote actuel de cette carte. Consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte pour des informations  supplémentaires. 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur. 3. Appuyez avec précaution sur la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte pour l'amener en haut.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir l'homologation  de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussière et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de maintenir un flux d'air  qui refroidit votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur Dell n'est équipé que de connecteurs pour cartes PCI et PCI Express. Les cartes ISA ne sont pas prises en charge.4. Si vous installez une carte dans un connecteur de carte vide de la carte mère, retirez la plaque de recouvrement pour libérer une ouverture de  connecteur de carte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Passez ensuite à l'étape 6.  5. Si vous installez une carte en remplacement d'une autre, retirez la carte déjà installée dans l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'une carte PCI). 6. Préparez la carte à installer.  7. Si vous installez une carte PCI Express x16, maintenez le levier de la languette de fixation à l'écart du connecteur de la carte lorsque vous insérez la  nouvelle carte dans le logement du connecteur. 1 carte 4 cache de la carte 2 loquet de retenue de carte 5 languette de retenue 3 connecteur de carte mère REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, la création de  connexions internes et la personnalisation de la carte pour l'ordinateur. 1 languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte 2 carte 3 connecteur de bord de carte 4 connecteur de carte PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur lorsqu'elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger  d'un choc électrique, assurez-vous de bien débrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'installer des cartes.  1 carte PCI Express x16 2 levier de dégagement8. Placez la carte dans le connecteur, puis appuyez dessus fermement. À l'aide de l'illustration ci-dessous, vérifiez que la carte est correctement  positionnée dans son logement.  9. Avec précaution, faites pivoter la languette de retenue vers le bas pour placer le loquet de retenue de la carte dans la position qui permet de fixer les  cartes. 10. Branchez tout câble devant être connecté à la carte.  3 emplacement de fixation (uniquement sur certaines cartes) 4 languette de fixation 5 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 1 carte engagée 2 carte mal engagée 3 plaque dans le logement 4 plaque à l'extérieur du logement REMARQUE : Si vous installez une carte PCI Express x16, vérifiez que la languette de fixation du levier de dégagement du connecteur glisse dans  l'encoche située sur la partie avant de la carte. 1 languette de retenue 4 connecteur de bord de carte 2 loquet de retenue de carte 5 connecteur de carte 3 carte AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus ou derrière les cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la  fermeture correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement.11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 12. Si vous avez installé une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui attribuer la  valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs de la carte son. Ne les connectez pas au microphone, haut-parleur/casque ou aux connecteurs de ligne d'entrée du panneau arrière ou avant de l'ordinateur.  13. Si vous avez installé une carte réseau et que vous souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Network Controller (Contrôleur réseau) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Branchez le câble réseau au connecteur qui se trouve sur la carte réseau. Ne connectez pas le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du  panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  14. Installez les pilotes requis pour la carte en vous référant aux instructions de la documentation.  Retrait d'une carte PCI 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Avec précaution, faites pivoter vers le haut la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte.  4. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte.  5. Si vous remplacez une carte PCI Express x16, retirez la carte installée en écartant avec précaution le levier de dégagement de la carte jusqu'à ce que la  languette de fixation soit libérée de la bosselure dans la carte.  AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. 1 carte 4 cache de la carte 2 loquet de retenue de carte 5 languette de retenue 3 connecteur de carte mère6. Saisissez la carte par ses angles supérieurs et retirez-la du connecteur. 7. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture de connecteur de carte vide.  8. Faites pivoter la languette de retenue vers le bas jusqu'à ce que le loquet de retenue de la carte s'enclenche en position.  9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 10. Désinstallez le pilote de la carte. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la carte.  11. Si vous avez retiré une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui attribuer la  valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs audio situés sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  12. Si vous avez retiré une carte réseau :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Network Controller (Contrôleur réseau) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  Installation d'une carte PCI dans le panier à carte de montage  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Le cas échéant, retirez la carte installée dans le connecteur PCI3 de la carte mère.  4. Retirez le panier à carte de montage :  a. Vérifiez les câbles connectés aux cartes à travers les ouvertures sur le panneau arrière. Déconnectez les câbles qui n'atteignent pas le panier à  carte de montage lorsqu'ils sont retirés de l'ordinateur.  b. Tirez la poignée avec précaution et soulevez le panier à carte de montage pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.  1 carte PCI Express x16 2 levier de dégagement 3 emplacement de fixation (uniquement sur certaines cartes) 4 languette de fixation 5 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.5. Si vous installez une nouvelle carte, retirez la plaque de recouvrement pour libérer une ouverture du connecteur de carte.  Si vous remplacez une carte déjà installée dans l'ordinateur, retirez-la. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte. Saisissez la carte par ses  angles et retirez-la du connecteur. 6. Préparez la nouvelle carte pour l'installation.  7. Appuyez sur la languette de retenue pour lever le loquet de retenue de la carte. 8. Insérez fermement la carte dans le connecteur qui se trouve sur le panier à carte de montage.  9. Abaissez le loquet de retenue de la carte et appuyez dessus pour le mettre en place afin de bloquer la carte dans l'ordinateur. 1 panier à carte de montage 2 poignée REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, la création de  connexions internes et la personnalisation de la carte pour l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur lorsqu'elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger  d'un choc électrique, assurez-vous de bien débrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'installer des cartes.  1 languette de retenue 4 connecteur de bord de carte 2 loquet de retenue de carte 5 connecteur de carte 3 carte10. Remettez le panier à carte de montage en place :  a. Alignez les languettes situées sur le côté du panier à carte de montage sur les emplacements du côté de l'ordinateur, et faites glisser le panier à  carte de montage dans son emplacement. b. Vérifiez que les cartes adaptatrices sont complètement insérées dans les connecteurs de la carte mère.  11. Reconnectez les câbles retirés à l'étape 4. 12. Branchez tout câble devant être connecté à la carte.  13. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 14. Si vous avez installé une carte son, procédez comme suit :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui attribuer la  valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs de la carte son. Ne les connectez pas au connecteur du microphone, hautparleur/casque ou aux connecteurs de ligne d'entrée du panneau arrière.  15. Si vous avez installé une carte réseau et que vous souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Network Controller (Contrôleur réseau), puis modifier le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Reliez le câble réseau aux connecteurs de la carte réseau. Ne connectez pas le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière  de l'ordinateur. 16. Installez les pilotes requis pour la carte en vous référant aux instructions de la documentation.  Retrait d'une carte PCI du panier à carte de montage  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le panier à carte de montage :  a. Vérifiez les câbles connectés aux cartes à travers les ouvertures sur le panneau arrière. Déconnectez les câbles qui n'atteignent pas le panier à  carte de montage lorsqu'ils sont retirés de l'ordinateur.  b. Tirez la poignée avec précaution et soulevez le panier à carte de montage pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.  1 panier à carte de montage 3 cartes adaptatrices (2) 2 emplacements 4 connecteurs de carte mère (2) AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus ou derrière les cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la  fermeture correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. AVIS : Si vous désactivez la carte réseau intégrée, vous ne disposerez pas de la fonctionnalité AMT.4. Appuyez sur la languette pour lever le loquet de retenue de la carte. 5. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte.  6. Saisissez la carte par ses angles supérieurs et retirez-la du connecteur. 7. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture de connecteur de carte vide.  8. Abaissez le loquet de retenue de la carte et appuyez dessus pour le remettre en place. 9. Remettez le panier à carte de montage en place :  a. Alignez les languettes situées sur le côté du panier à carte de montage sur les emplacements du côté de l'ordinateur, et faites glisser le panier à  carte de montage dans son emplacement. b. Vérifiez que les cartes adaptatrices sont complètement insérées dans les connecteurs de la carte mère.  10. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 1 panier à carte de montage 2 poignée REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. 1 panier à carte de montage 3 cartes adaptatrices (2) 2 emplacements 4 connecteurs de carte mère (2)11. Désinstallez le pilote de la carte. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la carte.  12. Si vous avez retiré une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio), puis modifiez le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs audio situés sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  13. Si vous avez retiré une carte réseau :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Network Controller (Contrôleur réseau), puis modifiez le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  Adaptateur de port série PS/2 Installation d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Faites pivoter le loquet jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position ouverte.  4. Retirez la plaque de recouvrement (le cas échéant).  5. Alignez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 sur le logement de retenue et appuyez fermement dessus. Vérifiez que l'adaptateur est inséré à  fond dans le logement. 6. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 7. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Consultez la documentation fournie avec l'adaptateur pour des informations sur la façon de configurer un adaptateur, d'effectuer les  connexions internes, ou de personnaliser l'adaptateur pour votre ordinateur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement.8. Branchez le câble de l'adaptateur sur le connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 (SERIAL2) de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section  Composants de la carte mère). 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retrait d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Faites pivoter le loquet jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position ouverte.  4. Débranchez le câble du port série PS/2 de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère). 1 languette de retenue 2 loquet de retenue de l'adaptateur 3 support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 4 connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série 5 connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série sur la carte mère  (SERIAL2) REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 pour obtenir des informations sur le branchement des câbles.5. Retirez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 de son logement.  6. Si vous retirez définitivement l'adaptateur, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture du connecteur de carte vide.  7. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement.  8. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi toutes les cartes restantes. 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Installation d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2 dans le panier à carte de montage  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le panier à carte de montage :  a. Vérifiez les câbles connectés aux cartes à travers les ouvertures sur le panneau arrière. Déconnectez les câbles qui n'atteignent pas le panier à  carte de montage lorsqu'ils sont retirés de l'ordinateur.  b. Faites pivoter la poignée du panier à carte de montage vers le haut et tirez avec précaution dessus pour soulever le panier et retirer celui-ci de l'ordinateur. 4. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Faites pivoter le loquet jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position ouverte.  5. Si vous installez un nouvel adaptateur de port série PS/2, retirez la languette métallique pour libérer une ouverture du connecteur de carte.  6. Si vous remplacez un adaptateur PS/2 déjà installé dans l'ordinateur, retirez celui-ci. 7. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à l'adaptateur.  8. Alignez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 sur le logement de retenue et appuyez fermement dessus. Vérifiez que l'adaptateur est inséré à  fond dans le logement. REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. 1 panier à carte de montage 2 poignée 3 cartes adaptatrices (2) PRÉCAUTION : Pour vous protéger contre les risques d'électrocution, assurez-vous que vous avez débranché votre ordinateur avant d'installer  des cartes ou des adaptateurs. 9. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 10. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). 11. Branchez le câble de l'adaptateur sur le connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 (PS2/SERIAL2) de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section  Composants de la carte mère). 12. Remettez le panier à carte de montage en place :  a. Alignez les languettes situées sur le côté du panier à carte de montage sur les emplacements du côté de l'ordinateur, et faites glisser le panier à  carte de montage dans son emplacement. b. Vérifiez que les connecteurs de carte de montage sont complètement insérés dans les connecteurs de la carte mère.  c. Faites pivoter la poignée du panier à carte de montage vers le bas.  13. Rebranchez tous les câbles débranchés.  14. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 15. Installez tous les pilotes requis pour l'adaptateur de port série PS/2.  Retrait d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2 du panier à carte de montage  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le panier à carte de montage :  a. Vérifiez les câbles connectés aux cartes à travers les ouvertures sur le panneau arrière. Déconnectez les câbles qui n'atteignent pas le panier à  carte de montage lorsqu'ils sont retirés de l'ordinateur.  b. Faites pivoter la poignée du panier à carte de montage vers le haut et tirez avec précaution dessus, puis soulevez le panier et retirez celui-ci de l'ordinateur. 4. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Faites pivoter le loquet jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position ouverte.  5. Débranchez le câble du port série PS/2 de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère). 6. Prenez la languette de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 par ses coins supérieurs et dégagez doucement l'adaptateur de son connecteur.  AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. 1 panier à carte de montage 2 poignée 3 cartes adaptatrices (2)7. Si vous retirez définitivement l'adaptateur, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture du connecteur de carte vide.  8. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 9. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). 10. Remettez le panier à carte de montage en place :  a. Alignez les languettes situées sur le côté du panier à carte de montage sur les emplacements situés sur le côté de l'ordinateur, et faites glisser le  panier à carte de montage dans son emplacement.  b. Vérifiez que les connecteurs de carte de montage sont complètement insérés dans les connecteurs de la carte mère.  c. Faites pivoter la poignée du panier à carte de montage vers le bas.  11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 12. Désinstallez le pilote de l'adaptateur. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous la documentation livrée avec l'adaptateur.  eSATA eSATA permet des vitesses de transfert des données SATA intégrales (3 Go/sec) entre un lecteur et le jeu de puces, approximativement six fois le débit de  données de USB. eSATA sur votre ordinateur prend également en charge l'enfichage à chaud. L'enfichage à chaud permet la détection de périphériques sans arrêt de l'ordinateur  avant la connexion du périphérique à l'ordinateur. Une fois le périphérique connecté, le système d'exploitation reconnaît automatiquement la modification.  L'ordinateur doit cependant être éteint avant le retrait ou le remplacement. Installation d'un lecteur eSATA sans carte de montage 1. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 2. Retirez le cache du logement de carte que vous utilisez pour le connecteur eSATA. 3. Installez la plaque dans l'ouverture du connecteur de carte choisie. 4. Branchez l'extrémité libre du câble eSATA dans le connecteur eSATA de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère). REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques protègent également votre ordinateur de la poussière et autres particules. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité  statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non  peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur.5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 6. Démarrez votre ordinateur et ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Utilisez l'option esata pour activer le lecteur eSATA. Installation d'un lecteur eSATA avec carte de montage 1. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 2. Retirez la carte de montage de votre ordinateur. 3. Appuyez sur la languette de retenue bleue pour retirer le cache du logement de carte que vous utilisez pour le connecteur eSATA. 4. Insérez la plaque du connecteur eSATA dans cette ouverture et appuyez sur la languette de retenue pour maintenir la plaque en position.  5. Branchez l'extrémité libre du câble eSATA dans le connecteur eSATA de la carte mère. 6. Remettez la carte de montage en place. 7. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 8. Démarrez votre ordinateur et ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Utilisez l'option esata pour activer le lecteur eSATA. Retour à la page Contenu 1 panier à carte de montage 3 cartes adaptatrices (2) 2 emplacements 4 connecteurs de carte mère (2)Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Processeur Processeur Retrait du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le module du dissipateur de chaleur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur). 4. Ouvrez le cache du processeur en faisant glisser le levier de dégagement depuis le dessous du loquet de fermeture central du support. Puis, remettez  le levier en place pour dégager le processeur.  5. Retirez doucement le processeur de son support. Maintenez le levier de dégagement ouvert pour que le support puisse recevoir le nouveau processeur. Installation du processeur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. AVIS : À moins qu'un nouveau dissipateur de chaleur ne soit requis par le nouveau processeur, réutilisez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur initial  lorsque vous remplacez le processeur. 1 loquet de fermeture central 2 cache du processeur 3 processeur 4 support 5 levier de dégagement AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. AVIS : Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches.1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Déballez le nouveau processeur en prenant garde de ne pas toucher sa face inférieure.  4. Si le levier de dégagement du support n'est pas complètement ouvert, ouvrez-le. 5. Alignez les encoches avant et arrière du processeur sur celles du support.  6. Alignez les angles de la broche 1 du processeur et du support. 7. Placez doucement le processeur à l'intérieur du support et vérifiez qu'il est correctement positionné.  8. Une fois le processeur correctement installé dans le support, fermez le cache du processeur.  Vérifiez que la languette du cache du processeur est placée sous le loquet de fermeture central du support.  9. Faites pivoter le levier de dégagement du support en position de fermeture et enclenchez-le pour maintenir le processeur en place. 10. Nettoyez la pâte thermoconductible au bas du dissipateur de chaleur.  11. Appliquez la nouvelle pâte thermoconductible au-dessus du processeur. 12. Installez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur : a. Placez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur sur le support de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur. b. Faites pivoter l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur vers la base de l'ordinateur et serrez les deux vis imperdables. AVIS : Le processeur doit être correctement installé dans son support afin d'éviter de l'endommager de façon définitive ainsi que l'ordinateur lorsque  vous allumerez ce dernier. 1 cache du processeur 6 levier de dégagement 2 languette 7 encoche d'alignement avant 3 processeur 8 support et indicateur de la broche 1 du processeur 4 support du processeur 9 encoche d'alignement arrière 5 loquet de fermeture central AVIS : Pour éviter tout dommage, assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement aligné sur le support et n'exercez pas une pression excessive  quand vous le mettez en place. AVIS : Veillez à appliquer une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible. Une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible est essentielle pour assurer un thermoliage  adéquat, ce qui est obligatoire pour un fonctionnement optimal du processeur.13. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retour à la page Contenu AVIS : Vérifiez que l'assemblage du dissipateur est correctement installé. 1 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 2 support de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 3 emplacements des vis imperdables (2)Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Lecteurs Lecteurs Votre ordinateur prend en charge : l Un disque dur SATA (ATA série) l Une baie de lecteur de 3,5 pouces (prend en charge un lecteur de disquette, un lecteur de carte multimédia ou un deuxième disque dur SATA optionnel) l Un lecteur optique SATA l Un lecteur eSATA (avec support optionnel) Consignes générales d'installation des lecteurs Les connecteurs SATA de la carte mère sont identifiés comme suit : SATA0, SATA1 et SATA2. Les disques durs doivent être raccordés aux connecteurs SATA  portant les numéros les plus bas. Les autres périphériques SATA (lecteur optique par exemple) doivent être raccordés aux connecteurs SATA restants dont le  numéro suit immédiatement le numéro des connecteurs auxquels les disques durs sont raccordés. Par exemple, si vous disposez de deux disques durs SATA  et d'un lecteur optique SATA, raccordez les deux disques durs aux connecteurs SATA0 et SATA1 et le lecteur optique SATA au connecteur SATA2. (Reportezvous à la section Composants de la carte mère pour prendre connaissance de l'emplacement des connecteurs SATA sur la carte mère). Connexion des câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous installez un lecteur, vous raccordez deux câbles (un câble d'alimentation CC et un câble d'interface de données) à l'arrière du lecteur.  Connecteurs d'interface de données  REMARQUE : Le nombre de baies de lecteur et de contrôleurs étant limité sur cet ordinateur, vous ne pourrez pas connecter tous les périphériques pris  en charge en même temps. REMARQUE : Si vous comptez utiliser votre ordinateur sans lecteur optique ni périphérique de 3,5 pouces (lecteur de disquette ou lecteur de carte  multimédia), vous devez installer le cache de baie d'unité approprié au lieu du lecteur. Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité. 1 lecteur optique 2 lecteur de disquette 3 disque dur Connecteur SATAConnecteurs de câble d'alimentation  Connexion et déconnexion de câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous retirez un câble à l'aide d'une languette de retrait, saisissez la languette de retrait de couleur et tirez jusqu'à ce que le connecteur soit libéré. Lorsque vous connectez et déconnectez un câble sans languette de retrait, tenez le câble par le connecteur noir de chaque côté. Cache de lecteur Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique équipé de vis à épaulement et d'un cache métallique. Retrait des caches de lecteur Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur : 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 1 connecteur du câble d'interface de données 2 connecteur d'interface de données 1 câble d'alimentation 2 connecteur d'entrée d'alimentation3. Soulevez le loquet du lecteur. 4. Faites glisser la languette métallique vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur et soulevez-la. 5. Appuyez sur les languettes de retenue situées sur le cache en plastique, puis appuyez sur l'arrière pour effectuer le retrait.  Remise en place des caches de lecteur Si vous retirez un lecteur et que vous devez remettre les caches en place : 1. Placez le cache en plastique au-dessus de l'ouverture et appuyez sur la languette du cache jusqu'à ce que celui-ci s'enclenche en position. 2. Faites glisser la languette métallique vers l'avant de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche en position.  3. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Lecteur optique 1 cache métallique 1 vis à épaulement 2 cache en plastique du lecteur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur. Retrait d'un lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Tirez vers le haut le loquet de fermeture du lecteur et faites glisser celui-ci vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Puis soulevez le lecteur pour le retirer de  l'ordinateur. 4. Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation et les câbles de données de la partie arrière du lecteur.  5. Si vous ne remettez pas en place tout de suite le lecteur optique, abaissez le cache du lecteur dans la baie d'unité jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un  clic. Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité.  Installation d'un lecteur optique 1. Déballez le lecteur et préparez-le pour l'installation. Consultez la documentation fournie avec le lecteur pour vérifier si ce dernier est configuré pour votre ordinateur. 2. Tirez vers le haut le loquet de fermeture du lecteur et faites glisser celui-ci vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Puis soulevez le lecteur pour le retirer de  l'ordinateur. 3. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur : a. Retirez les caches (reportez-vous à la section Retrait des caches de lecteur). b. Insérez les trois vis à épaulement retirées du cache dans les trous situés sur les côtés du nouveau lecteur et serrez-les. c. Soulevez le loquet du lecteur et insérez le nouveau lecteur optique.  4. Si vous remplacez un lecteur existant : a. Suivez les procédures de la section Retrait d'un lecteur optique pour retirer le lecteur existant. b. Retirez les trois vis à épaulement du lecteur existant.  c. Insérez les trois vis à épaulement dans les trous situés sur les côtés du nouveau lecteur et serrez-les. REMARQUE : Si vous comptez utiliser votre ordinateur sans lecteur optique ni périphérique de 3,5 pouces (lecteur de disquette ou lecteur de carte  multimédia), vous devez installer le cache de baie d'unité approprié au lieu du lecteur. Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité.  Reportez-vous à la section Retrait des caches de lecteur. AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble. 1 loquet de fermeture du lecteur 2 lecteur optique5. Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur.  6. Alignez les vis à épaulement sur les guides-vis et faites glisser le lecteur dans la baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  7. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 9. Mettez à jour les informations de configuration en attribuant la valeur appropriée (0 ou 1) à l'option Drive (Lecteur) sous Drives (Lecteurs). Reportezvous à la section Programme de configuration du système pour plus d'informations. 10. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Lecteur de disquette Retrait d'un lecteur de disquette 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : Si vous comptez utiliser votre ordinateur sans lecteur optique ni périphérique de 3,5 pouces (lecteur de disquette), vous devez installer le  cache de baie d'unité approprié au lieu du lecteur. Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes ne nécessitant pas le retrait complet du lecteur optique, il n'est pas nécessaire de débrancher les câbles le  reliant.3. Retirez le lecteur optique (le cas échéant) et mettez-le de côté avec soin (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un lecteur optique). 4. Tirez vers le haut le loquet de fermeture du lecteur et faites glisser le lecteur de disquette vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Puis soulevez le lecteur pour le  retirer de l'ordinateur. 5. Déconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données de la partie arrière du lecteur.  6. Si vous ne remettez pas en place tout de suite le lecteur de disquette ou le lecteur de carte multimédia, installez les caches du lecteur du lecteur de  disquette (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place des caches de lecteur). Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité.  Installation d'un lecteur de disquette 1. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur de disquette : a. Retirez les caches du lecteur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait des caches de lecteur). b. Tirez pour retirer le cache du lecteur de disquette qui doit être installé dans la baie d'unité.  c. Retirez les quatre vis à épaulement du cache du panneau des lecteurs.  AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble. 1 loquet de fermeture du lecteur 2 lecteur de disquette 1 cache du lecteur2. Si vous remplacez un lecteur de disquette existant : Retirez les quatre vis à épaulement du lecteur ou du lecteur de carte multimédia existant.  3. Insérez les quatre vis à épaulement dans les trous situés sur les côtés du nouveau lecteur de disquette et serrez-les. 4. Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur de disquette.  5. Alignez les vis à épaulement sur les guides-vis et faites glisser le lecteur dans la baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  6. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 7. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 9. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et utilisez l'option Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) pour activer le nouveau lecteur de disquette (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). 10. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Lecteur de carte multimédia 1 câble d'alimentation 2 numéro de vérification d'emplacement PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : Si vous comptez utiliser votre ordinateur sans lecteur optique ni lecteur de 3,5 pouces, vous devez installer le cache de baie d'unité  approprié au lieu du lecteur. Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité.Retrait d'un lecteur de carte multimédia  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le lecteur optique (le cas échéant) et mettez-le de côté avec soin (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un lecteur optique). 4. Tirez le loquet du lecteur vers le haut et faites glisser le lecteur de carte multimédia vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Puis soulevez le lecteur pour le retirer  de l'ordinateur. 5. Débranchez le câble de l'arrière du lecteur de carte multimédia et de la carte mère.  6. Si vous ne remettez pas en place tout de suite le lecteur de carte multimédia, installez le cache du lecteur de 3,5 pouces (reportez-vous à la section  Remise en place des caches de lecteur). Contactez Dell si vous avez besoin d'un cache de baie d'unité.  Installation d'un lecteur de carte multimédia  REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes ne nécessitant pas le retrait complet du lecteur optique, il n'est pas nécessaire de débrancher les câbles le  reliant. AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble. 1 loquet de fermeture du lecteur 2 lecteur de carte multimédia1. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur ou lecteur de carte multimédia :  a. Retirez les caches du lecteur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait des caches de lecteur). b. Retirez les quatre vis à épaulement du cache du panneau des lecteurs.  c. Tirez pour retirer le cache du lecteur de 3,5 pouces qui doit être installé dans la baie d'unité.  2. Si vous remplacez un lecteur de carte multimédia existant :  Retirez les quatre vis à épaulement du lecteur de carte multimédia existant.  3. Insérez les quatre vis à épaulement dans les trous situés sur les côtés du nouveau lecteur de carte multimédia et serrez-les. 4. Raccordez le câble au connecteur du lecteur de carte multimédia et de la carte mère.  5. Alignez les vis à épaulement sur les guides-vis et faites glisser le lecteur de carte multimédia dans la baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  1 cache du lecteur6. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 7. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 9. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Disque dur Retrait d'un disque dur 1. Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de faire une sauvegarde de vos fichiers avant de commencer cette procédure.  2. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier s'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 4. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Retirez le lecteur optique de la baie et mettez-le de côté avec soin (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 6. Retirez le lecteur de disquette de la baie de 3,5 pouces et mettez-le de côté avec soin (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur de disquette). 7. Appuyez sur les deux clips de fixation en plastique situés sur chaque côté du lecteur et faites glisser le lecteur vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  1 câble d'alimentation 2 numéro de vérification d'emplacement PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes ne nécessitant pas le retrait complet du lecteur optique, il n'est pas nécessaire de débrancher les câbles reliant les  deux lecteurs. AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble.8. Retirez le lecteur de l'ordinateur et débranchez les câbles d'alimentation et de données du lecteur.  Installation d'un disque dur 1. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier s'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  2. Déballez le nouveau disque dur et préparez-le pour l'installation. 3. Si votre disque dur de remplacement n'est pas équipé d'un support de disque dur en plastique, retirez le support du disque dur existant en le  décliquetant du disque dur.  4. Fixez le support sur le nouveau lecteur en l'enclenchant dessus. 1 pinces de fixation (2) 2 disque dur AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse. 1 disque dur 2 languettes de retenue (2) 3 support de disque dur en plastique5. Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur.  6. Repérez l'emplacement approprié du lecteur et faites glisser celui-ci dans la baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  7. Remettez le lecteur de disquette et le lecteur optique en place. 8. Assurez-vous que tous les connecteurs sont correctement câblés et fermement fixés.  9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 10. Si le lecteur que vous venez d'installer est le lecteur principal, insérez un support amorçable dans le lecteur d'amorçage.  11. Allumez l'ordinateur. 12. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et mettez à jour l'option du port SATA sous la liste d'options Drives (Lecteurs) (reportez-vous à la  section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 13. Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  14. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre lecteur. 1 languettes de fixation (2) 3 languettes de retenue (2) 2 lecteur 4 support de disque dur en plastique 1 disque dur 2 numéro de vérification d'emplacement REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation.15. Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 16. Installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur.  Remplacement d'un deuxième disque dur  Pour des informations sur la configuration RAID, reportez-vous à la section À propos des configurations RAID. 1. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier s'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 3. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 4. Retirez le lecteur optique (si votre configuration en comprend un). Reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un lecteur optique. 5. Débranchez le câble du disque dur existant.  6. Retirez le disque dur existant de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un disque dur). 7. Retirez les vis du disque dur existant et installez-les sur le nouveau disque dur. 8. Faites glisser prudemment le nouveau disque dur dans la baie supérieure jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  9. Rebranchez le câble sur le lecteur.  10. Repérez un connecteur SATA inutilisé sur la carte mère et reliez ce connecteur au deuxième disque dur à l'aide d'un câble de données.  REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse. AVIS : Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de faire une sauvegarde de vos fichiers avant de commencer cette procédure. REMARQUE : L'installation d'un deuxième disque dur est réservée à certaines configurations des ordinateurs de bureau. AVIS : Reliez toujours le câble de données au connecteur SATA1 lorsque vous installez un deuxième disque dur.11. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (si votre configuration en comprend un). Reportez-vous à la section Installation d'un lecteur optique. 12. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 13. Allumez l'ordinateur. 14. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et mettez à jour l'option du port SATA sous la liste d'options Drives (Lecteurs) (reportez-vous à la  section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 15. Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  16. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre lecteur. 17. Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 18. Installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur.  Retour à la page Contenu 1 câble de données 2 connecteur du disque dur de la carte mère REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation.Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Panneau d'E/S Panneau d'E/S Retrait du panneau d'E/S 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le module du dissipateur de chaleur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur). 4. Retirez tous les autres câbles du passage.  5. Retirez la vis qui fixe le panneau d'E/S sur l'ordinateur de bureau. 6. Faites doucement pivoter et glisser le panneau d'E/S pour le retirer de l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez le câble du panneau d'E/S en tirant sur la languette de retrait.  Remise en place du panneau d'E/S PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot.  REMARQUE : Mémorisez la façon dont les câbles sont acheminés avant de les débrancher, de manière à pouvoir les remettre en place correctement lors  de l'installation du nouveau panneau d'E/S. AVIS : Faites extrêmement attention lorsque vous glissez le panneau d'E/S hors de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne prenez pas assez de précautions, vous  pouvez endommager les connecteurs et les pinces d'acheminement des câbles. 1 vis de fixation 2 panneau d'E/S 3 connecteur du câble d'E/S 4 boucle de retrait du connecteur d'E/SPour remettre en place le panneau d'E/S, suivez la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. Retour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : Utilisez les guides situés sur le support du panneau d'E/S pour positionner correctement le panneau, puis l'encoche située sur le support  du panneau d'E/S pour installer la carte.Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Bloc d'alimentation Bloc d'alimentation Remplacement du bloc d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez les câbles d'alimentation en CC des lecteurs et de la carte mère.  Mémorisez la façon dont les câbles d'alimentation en CC sont acheminés sous les languettes du châssis de l'ordinateur avant de débrancher les câbles  de la carte mère et des lecteurs. Vous devrez acheminer ces câbles correctement lorsque vous les remettrez en place, de sorte qu'ils ne risquent pas de  se coincer ou d'être mal positionnés. 4. Retirez les deux vis qui fixent le bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière du châssis de l'ordinateur.  5. Retirez le lecteur optique et mettez-le de côté (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 6. Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection situé sur la base du châssis de l'ordinateur.  7. Faites glisser le bloc d'alimentation sur environ 2,5 cm (1 pouce) vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 bouton d'éjection 2 bloc d'alimentation 3 vis (2) 4 connecteur d'alimentation en CA8. Soulevez le bloc d'alimentation et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. 9. Faites glisser le nouveau bloc d'alimentation dans son emplacement. 10. Remettez en place les quatre vis qui fixent le bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière du châssis de l'ordinateur.  11. Reconnectez les câbles d'alimentation en CC.  12. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 13. Branchez le câble d'alimentation CA sur le connecteur.  14. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Connecteurs d'alimentation en CC Broche P1 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +3,3 VCC Orange 2 +3,3 VCC Orange 3 GND Noir 4 +5 VCC Rouge 5 GND Noir 6 +5 VCC Rouge 7 GND Noir 8 PS_PWRGOOD* Gris 9 P5AUX Violet 10 +12 VCC Blanc 11 +12 VCC Blanc 12 +3,3 VCC OrangeBroche P2 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Broche P3 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Broche P4 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC 13 +3,3 VCC/SE Orange 14 +12 VCC* Bleu 15 GND Noir 16 PWR_PS_ON* Vert 17 GND Noir 18 GND Noir 19 GND Noir 20 NC NC 21 +5 VCC Rouge 22 +5 VCC Rouge 23 +5 VCC Rouge 24 GND Noir *Utilisez un câble 22 AWG au lieu de 18 AWG.  Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 GND Noir 2 GND Noir 3 +12 VCC Jaune 4 +12 VCC Jaune Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +12 VCC Jaune 2 GND Noir 3 GND Noir 4 +5 VCC Rouge Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 22 AWG 1 +5 VCC Rouge 2 GND NoirBroches P5 et P6 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Retour à la page Contenu 3 GND Noir 4 +12 VCC Jaune Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +3,3 VCC Orange 2 GND Noir 3 +5 VCC Rouge 4 GND Noir 5 +12 VCC JauneRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Haut-parleurs Haut-parleurs Installation d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Insérez le haut-parleur dans le châssis de l'ordinateur.  4. Raccordez les câbles à la carte mère.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retrait d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez les câbles de la carte mère.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur.4. Retirez le haut-parleur du châssis de l'ordinateur.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu  Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur de bureau  Guide d'utilisation Microprocesseur Type de microprocesseur Les processeurs suivants sont pris en charge : l Intel® Core™ 2 l Intel vPro™ l Intel Celeron® Mémoire cache interne L1 : jusqu'à 128 Ko ;  L2 : jusqu'à 8 Mo (selon votre processeur) Mémoire Type SDRAM DDR2 667 MHz ou 800 MHz Connecteurs de mémoire 4 Modules de mémoire pris en charge 512 Mo, 1 Go ou 2 Go non ECC Mémoire minimale Bicanal : 1 Go Monocanal : 512 Mo REMARQUE : 512 Mo est la configuration d'origine minimale. Mémoire maximale Système d'exploitation 64 bits : 8 Go Système d'exploitation 32 bits : 4 Go Adresse BIOS F0000h Informations concernant votre ordinateur Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Intel Q35 Express avec ICH9DO Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresse 32 bits Canaux DMA Huit Niveaux d'interruption 24 Puce du BIOS (NVRAM) 32 Mo NIC Interface réseau intégrée avec support ASF 1.03 et  2.0, conformément à la définition DMTF Communication 10/100/1000 possible iAMT 3.0 Vidéo Type l Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 3100 (intégré  à la carte mère) l Le logement PCI Express x16 peut prendre en charge une carte graphique PCI Express ou DVI (pour la prise en charge de deux moniteurs)Audio Type Audio ADI 1984 haute définition Conversion stéréo 24 bits analogique à numérique et 24 bits numérique  à analogique Contrôleurs Lecteurs Trois contrôleurs SATA et un contrôleur eSATA  prenant chacun en charge un périphérique Bus d'extension Type de bus PCI 2.3 PCI Express 1.0A SATA 1.0A et 2.0 USB 2.0 Vitesse du bus PCI : 133 Mo/s PCI Express x16 : vitesse bidirectionnelle de 8 Go/s SATA : 1,5 Gb/s et 3,0 Gb/s USB : 480 Mb/s Cartes La configuration standard ne prend en charge que les cartes demi-hauteur ; avec un panier à carte de  montage en option, l'ordinateur prend en charge les cartes demi-hauteur et pleine hauteur. Les cartes pleine hauteur sont prises en charge dans le panier à  carte de montage de 6,875 pouces. PCI : sans panier à carte de montage Connecteurs Deux Taille de carte Demi-hauteur Taille du connecteur 120 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 32 bits PCI Express : sans panier à carte de montage Connecteurs Un x16 Taille de carte Demi-hauteur Alimentation 25 W (maximum) Taille du connecteur 164 broches (x16) Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 16 voies PCI Express (x16) PCI et PCI Express : avec panier à carte de montage PCI Express pleine hauteur en option, prenant  en charge à la fois les cartes demi-hauteur et pleine hauteur PCI Connecteurs Deux Taille de carte Une carte demi-hauteur et une carte pleine hauteur Taille du connecteur 120 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 32 bits PCI Express Connecteurs Un x16 Taille de carte Pleine hauteur Alimentation 25 W maximum Taille du connecteur 164 broches (x16) Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 16 voies PCI Express (x16) PCI uniquement : avec panier à carte de montage PCI pleine hauteur en option, prenant en charge à  la fois les cartes demi-hauteur et pleine hauteur Connecteurs Trois PCI Taille de carte Une carte demi-hauteur et deux cartes pleine hauteur Taille du connecteur 120 broches Largeur de données du connecteur (maximale)  32 bits eSATALecteurs Accessible de l'extérieur Un Un lecteur eSATA (en option) Accessible de l'intérieur l Deux disques durs SATA (ATA série) l Un lecteur de disquette de 3,5 pouces ou un lecteur de carte multimédia l Un lecteur optique SATA Connecteurs Connecteurs externes : Série Connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550C Parallèle Connecteur à 25 broches (bidirectionnel) Vidéo Connecteur VGA à 15 broches Carte réseau Connecteur RJ45 Connecteur PS/2 en option avec adaptateur de port série secondaire Deux connecteurs mini-DIN à 6 broches USB Deux connecteurs de panneau avant et six connecteurs de panneau arrière conformes à la  norme USB 2.0 Audio Deux connecteurs pour la ligne d'entrée/le  microphone et la ligne de sortie ; deux connecteurs en face avant pour le casque et le microphone Connecteurs sur la carte mère : SATA Trois connecteurs à 7 broches eSATA Un connecteur à 7 broches USB interne Embase à 10 broches pour le lecteur de carte  multimédia en option (baie d'unité de 3,5 pouces) Lecteur de disquette Connecteur à 34 broches Série Connecteur à 12 broches pour la carte port série  PS/2 secondaire en option Ventilateur Connecteur à 5 broches PCI Express Un connecteur à 120 broches (x16) PCI 2.3 Deux connecteurs à 120 broches Panneau avant Connecteur à 40 broches Combinaisons de touches Sous Microsoft® Windows® XP, affiche la fenêtre  Sécurité de Windows ; sous MS-DOS®, redémarre  (réamorce) l'ordinateur.  ou  Démarre la configuration intégrée du système (au  démarrage uniquement) Démarre automatiquement l'ordinateur à partir de  l'environnement réseau spécifié par l'environnement  d'amorçage distant (PXE) plutôt qu'à partir d'un des  périphériques indiqués dans l'option Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) du programme de  configuration du système (utilisable au démarrage du  système uniquement) ou Affiche un menu de périphérique d'amorçage qui  permet à l'utilisateur d'entrer un périphérique pour  un amorçage ponctuel (utilisable au démarrage du  système uniquement) ainsi que des options  permettant d'exécuter les diagnostics sur le disque  dur et sur le système.

Affiche l'écran des paramètres de l'interface  Management Engine BIOS Extension qui vous permet de modifier ces paramètres Contrôles et voyants Bouton d'alimentation Bouton poussoirVoyant d'alimentation Voyant vert — Vert clignotant en mode de mise en veille ; vert fixe à l'état de marche. Voyant orange — Orange clignotant indique un problème concernant un périphérique installé ;  orange fixe indique un problème d'alimentation  interne (reportez-vous à la section Problèmes  d'alimentation.) Voyant d'accès au disque dur Vert Voyant de la liaison Vert fixe en cas de connexion réseau Voyant d'intégrité de la liaison (sur la carte réseau  intégrée) Voyant vert pour une opération de 10 Mb ; voyant  orange pour une opération de 100 Mb ; voyant jaune  pour une opération de 1000 Mb (1 Gb) Voyant d'activité (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Voyant jaune clignotant Voyants de diagnostic Quatre voyants sur le panneau avant (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic.) Voyant d'alimentation de veille AUX_PWR sur la carte mère Alimentation  Bloc d'alimentation en CC : REMARQUE : La consommation électrique générée  par une source d'alimentation en CA peut être nulle  lorsque l'ordinateur est débranché de cette source  d'alimentation mais la batterie interne tire une quantité minimale d'énergie du bloc d'alimentation,  même lorsque l'ordinateur ne tire pas d'énergie de la  source d'alimentation en CA. Consommation en watts 280 W Dissipation de chaleur 955 BTU/h REMARQUE : La dissipation de chaleur est calculée  suivant la valeur nominale de la consommation du bloc d'alimentation. Tension Blocs d'alimentation à sélection manuelle — 90 à 135  V à 50/60 Hz ; 180 à 265 V à 50/60 Hz Pile de secours Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 11,4 cm (4,5 pouces) Largeur 39,9 cm (15,7 pouces) Profondeur 35,3 cm (13,9 pouces) Poids 10,4 kg (23 livres) Environnement Température : Fonctionnement 10 ° à 35 °C (50 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Humidité relative 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,25 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 0,5 octave/min Stockage 0,5 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 1 octave/min Chocs maximaux : Fonctionnement Demi-impulsion sinusoïdale inférieure avec une  modification de la vélocité de 50,8 cm/s (20 pouces/s) Stockage Onde carrée moyenne de 27 G avec un changement  de vitesse de 508 cm/s (200 pouces/s) Altitude : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds)Retour à la page Contenu Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)Retour à la page Contenu Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte Guide d'utilisation L'installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte peut entraîner une moins bonne circulation de l'air et affecter les performances de votre ordinateur, lequel  peut éventuellement surchauffer. Suivez les consignes ci-dessous lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur dans une enceinte. n Pour un ordinateur mini-tour, reportez-vous à la section Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur mini-tour . n Pour un ordinateur de bureau, reportez-vous à la section Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur de bureau. n Pour un ordinateur compact, reportez-vous à la section Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur compact. n Pour un ordinateur ultra compact, reportez-vous à la section Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur ultra compact. l Ménagez un espace dégagé minimal de 10,2 centimètres (4 pouces) sur les côtés de l'ordinateur munis d'entrées d'air afin de permettre une ventilation  adéquate. l Si votre enceinte est équipée de portes, celles-ci doivent permettre une circulation de l'air d'au moins 30 % dans l'enceinte (avant et arrière). l Si votre ordinateur est installé dans le coin d'un bureau ou sous un bureau, ménagez un espace dégagé d'au moins 5,1 centimètres (2 pouces) entre  l'arrière de l'ordinateur et le mur afin de permettre une ventilation adéquate. AVIS : Les caractéristiques de température de fonctionnement indiquées dans ce guide correspondent à la température de fonctionnement ambiante  maximale. La température ambiante de la pièce doit être prise en considération lors de l'installation de l'ordinateur dans une enceinte. Par exemple, si  la température ambiante de la pièce est de 25 °C (77 °F), vous n'aurez une marge de température que de 5 °C à 10 °C (9 °F à 18 °F) avant d'atteindre  la température de fonctionnement maximale de votre ordinateur selon les caractéristiques de celui-ci. Pour obtenir des informations sur les caractéristiques de votre ordinateur :l N'installez pas votre ordinateur dans une enceinte qui ne permet pas une bonne circulation de l'air. Une mauvaise circulation de l'air affecte les performances de votre ordinateur, lequel peut éventuellement surchauffer. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu  Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Guide d'utilisation Classe B FCC Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie sous forme de radiofréquence et peut, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions  du manuel du fabricant, être la cause d'interférences aux transmissions radio et télévision. Cet équipement a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites des  appareils numériques de classe B définies à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC.  Ce périphérique est conforme à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :  1. Cet appareil ne doit pas créer d'interférences nuisibles.  2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences qu'il reçoit, y compris celles qui peuvent perturber son fonctionnement.  Ces limites ont été conçues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans un milieu résidentiel. Cependant, la possibilité  d'interférence d'une installation particulière n'est pas entièrement exclue. Si cet équipement crée effectivement des interférences nuisibles pour la réception  radio et télévision, ce qui peut être déterminé en allumant et en éteignant l'équipement, vous êtes encouragé à essayer de corriger les interférences en  prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : l Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. l Repositionner le système en fonction du récepteur. l Éloigner le système du récepteur. l Brancher le système sur une autre prise afin que le système et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation.  Si nécessaire, consultez un représentant de Dell Inc. ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires.  Les informations suivantes sont fournies conformément à la réglementation de la FCC :  l Nom du produit : Dell™ OptiPlex™ 755 l Numéros de modèle : DCTR, DCNE, DCSM, DCCY l Nom du fabricant : Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Retour à la page Contenu AVIS : Les réglementations de la FCC prévoient que les changements ou modifications non explicitement approuvés par Dell Inc. peuvent annuler vos  droits à utiliser cet équipement.  REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur les réglementations, reportez-vous à votre Guide d´information sur le produit. Retour à la page Contenu Recherche d'informations Guide d'utilisation REMARQUE : Certaines fonctionnalités ou supports peuvent être optionnels et ne pas accompagner votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ou  supports peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient fournies avec votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici l Programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur l Pilotes pour mon ordinateur l Documentation de mon ordinateur l Documentation concernant mon périphérique l Logiciel DSS (Desktop System Software) CD ou DVD Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec votre ordinateur. La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur l'ordinateur. Vous  pouvez utiliser ce support pour réinstaller les pilotes (reportez-vous à la  section Réinstallation des pilotes et des utilitaires), pour exécuter Dell  Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics), ou accéder à la  documentation. Des fichiers « Lisez-moi » peuvent être inclus sur votre CD. Ces fichiers  fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques de dernière  minute apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence  destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des pilotes et de la documentation  se trouvent à l'adresse support.dell.com. l Comment configurer mon ordinateur l Informations de dépannage de base l Comment exécuter Dell Diagnostics l Outils et utilitaires  Guide de référence rapide REMARQUE : Ce document peut être en option et n'est pas obligatoirement  expédié avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse  support.dell.com. l Informations sur les garanties l Termes et Conditions (États-Unis uniquement) l Consignes de sécurité l Informations sur les réglementations  Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™l Informations relatives à l'ergonomie l Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final l Comment retirer et remplacer des pièces l Caractéristiques l Comment configurer les paramètres du système l Comment déterminer et résoudre des problèmes  Guide d'utilisation du Dell™ OptiPlex™ Centre d'aide et de support Microsoft Windows 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ou ® Aide et support® Dell User and System Guides (Guide d'utilisation du système Dell)® Guides du système. 2. Cliquez sur le Guide d'utilisation de votre ordinateur. l Numéro de service et code de service express  l Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows  Numéro de service et licence Microsoft® Windows® Ces étiquettes sont apposées à l'ordinateur. l Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque  vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous contactez le service de support. l Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support. REMARQUE : Par mesure de sécurité, la nouvelle étiquette de licence de  Microsoft Windows intègre une partie manquante, afin d'éviter que  l'étiquette ne soit enlevée.  l Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens,  cours en ligne et questions fréquemment posées l Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell l Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants,  comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque dur et le système d'exploitation l Service clientèle — Coordonnées, appels de service et état des  commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations l Service et support — État des appels de service et historique du  support, contrat de service, discussions en ligne avec le support technique l Service Dell Technical Update — Notification proactive par e-mail des mises à jour logicielles et matérielles de votre ordinateur l Référence — Documentation de l'ordinateur, détails sur la configuration  de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques de produit et livres blancs l Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles agréés l DSS (Desktop System Software - Logiciel système de bureau) — Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur, vous devez  également réinstaller l'utilitaire DSS. DSS fournit des mises à jour  essentielles pour le système d'exploitation et la prise en charge des  processeurs, des lecteurs optiques, des périphériques USB, etc. DSS est  requis pour le bon fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell. Ce logiciel détecte automatiquement votre ordinateur et son système  d'exploitation, et installe les mises à jour appropriées à votre  configuration. Site Web du service de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région ou votre secteur d'activité pour  afficher le site de support approprié. Pour télécharger DSS (Desktop System Software) : 1. Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com, sélectionnez votre région  ou secteur d'activité, puis saisissez votre numéro de service.  2. Sélectionnez Drivers & Downloads (Pilotes et téléchargements), Retour à la page Contenu puis cliquez sur Go/OK. 3. Cliquez sur votre système d'exploitation et recherchez le mot-clé Desktop System Software. REMARQUE : L'interface utilisateur support.dell.com peut varier selon vos sélections. l Comment utiliser Windows XP l Comment utiliser des programmes et des fichiers l Comment personnaliser mon bureau Aide et support de Windows 1. Pour accéder à l'aide et au support de Windows :  ¡ Sous Windows XP, cliquez sur Démarrer puis sur Aide et support. ¡ Sous Windows Vista®, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de  Windows Vista puis sur Aide et support. 2. Entrez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis  cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche.  3. Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème.  4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. l Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation Support Operating System REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Operating System (Système  d'exploitation) soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec certains  ordinateurs. Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour le  réinstaller, utilisez le support Operating System. Reportez-vous à la section  Réinstallation de Windows XP ou Windows Vista. Après la réinstallation de votre système d'exploitation, utilisez le support  Drivers and Utilities pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques fournis  avec l'ordinateur. L'étiquette de la clé de produit du système d'exploitation est apposée à  l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur du support varie selon le système d'exploitation  que vous avez commandé.Retour à la page Contenu Obtention d'aide Guide d'utilisation Obtention d'assistance Problèmes liés à votre commande Informations concernant le produit Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou une mise en crédit Avant d'appeler Contacter Dell Obtention d'assistance 1. Effectuez les procédures décrites dans la section Dépannage. 2. Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 3. Faites une copie de la Liste de vérification des diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Liste de vérification des diagnostics) et renseignez-la. 4. Utilisez la gamme complète de services en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web de support technique (support.dell.com) pour obtenir de l'aide sur les procédures d'installation et de dépannage.  5. Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas permis de résoudre le problème, contactez Dell.  REMARQUE : Il se peut que le système de code de service express de Dell ne soit pas disponible dans tous les pays. Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé de Dell vous le demande, entrez votre code de service express pour que votre appel soit directement acheminé  vers l'équipe de support technique appropriée. Si vous n'avez pas de code de service express, ouvrez le dossier Accessoires Dell, double-cliquez sur l'icône  Code de service express et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation du service de support, reportez-vous à la section Service de support. Services en ligne Vous pouvez accéder au site du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Sélectionnez votre région sur la page WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT (BIENVENUE SUR LE SITE DU SERVICE DE SUPPORT DE DELL) et fournissez les informations demandées afin d'accéder aux outils et aux informations sur l'aide.  Vous pouvez contacter Dell par voie électronique aux adresses suivantes : l Site Web www.dell.com/ www.dell.com/ap/ (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement) www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) www.dell.com/la/ (pays d'Amérique latine et et des Caraïbes) www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement) l FTP (File Transfert Protocol, protocole de transfert de fichiers) anonyme ftp.dell.com/ Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur : anonyme et utilisez votre adresse électronique comme mot de passe. l Service de support électronique mobile_support@us.dell.com PRÉCAUTION : Si vous devez retirer les capots de l'ordinateur, déconnectez d'abord de leurs prises les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du  modem. REMARQUE : Appelez le service du support à l'aide d'un téléphone situé à proximité de l'ordinateur pour que le personnel du support puisse vous  guider pendant la procédure de dépannage. REMARQUE : Certains des services suivants ne sont pas toujours disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. Veuillez contacter votre représentant Dell local  pour obtenir des informations sur leur disponibilité.support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com (pays d'Amérique latine et des Caraïbes uniquement) apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) support.jp.dell.com(Japon uniquement) support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) l Service de devis électronique apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada uniquement) Service AutoTech Le service de support automatisé de Dell, AutoTech, fournit des réponses enregistrées aux questions les plus fréquemment posées par les clients de Dell  concernant les ordinateurs portables et de bureau. Lorsque vous appelez AutoTech, utilisez votre téléphone à touches pour sélectionner les sujets correspondant à vos questions. Le service AutoTech est accessible 24 heures sur 24, 7 jours sur 7. Vous pouvez aussi accéder à ce service par l'intermédiaire du service de support. Pour  obtenir le numéro de téléphone, reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell. Service d'état des commandes automatisé Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de produits Dell™, vous pouvez visiter le site Web support.dell.com ou appeler le service d'état des commandes  automatisé. Un enregistrement vous demande les informations nécessaires pour repérer votre commande et en faire un rapport. Pour obtenir le numéro de  téléphone, reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell. Service de support Le service de support de Dell est disponible à toute heure et tous les jours de la semaine pour répondre à vos questions au sujet du matériel Dell. Nos  employés de support utilisent des diagnostics sur ordinateur pour fournir rapidement des réponses exactes. Pour contacter le service de support de Dell, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide, puis appelez le numéro qui correspond à votre pays figurant dans la  liste Contacter Dell Problèmes liés à votre commande  Si vous avez un problème avec votre commande, comme des pièces manquantes ou non adaptées, ou une facturation erronée, contactez le Service clientèle  de Dell. Gardez votre facture ou votre bordereau de marchandises à portée de main lorsque vous appelez. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, reportezvous à la section Contacter Dell. Informations concernant le produit Si vous avez besoin d'informations sur les autres produits disponibles auprès de Dell, ou si vous voulez passer une commande, visitez le site Web de Dell à  l'adresse www.dell.com. Pour connaître le numéro à composer afin de consulter un spécialiste des ventes, reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell. Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou une mise en crédit  Préparez tous les articles à retourner, pour réparation ou mise en crédit, comme indiqué ci-après : 1. Contactez Dell pour obtenir un numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel et écrivez-le clairement et bien visiblement sur l'extérieur de la boîte.  Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell. 2. Joignez une copie de la facture et une lettre expliquant le motif du retour. 3. Joignez une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Liste de vérification des diagnostics), indiquant les tests que vous avez effectués et les messages d'erreur renvoyés par Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 4. Joignez tous les accessoires qui vont avec le ou les article(s) renvoyé(s) (câbles d'alimentation, disquettes de logiciels, guides, etc.) si le retour est à  porter en crédit. 5. Empaquetez l'équipement à renvoyer dans son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent).  Les frais d'envoi sont à votre charge. L'assurance des articles retournés vous incombe également et vous acceptez le risque de leur perte au cours de leur  acheminement vers Dell. Les envois en contre-remboursement ne sont pas acceptés. Les retours ne comportant pas les éléments décrits ci-dessus seront refusés au quai de réception de Dell et vous seront retournés. Avant d'appeler N'oubliez pas de renseigner la liste de vérification des diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Liste de vérification des diagnostics). Si possible, allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance, et appelez d'un téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre ordinateur. Il peut vous être  demandé de taper certaines commandes au clavier, de donner des informations détaillées sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou d'essayer d'autres  méthodes de dépannage uniquement possibles sur ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible. Contacter Dell Pour les clients situés aux États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW.DELL (800.999.3355). Dell vous propose plusieurs options de service. Vous pouvez également opter pour un support téléphonique ou un support en ligne. La disponibilité varie  selon les pays et les produits et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre région. Pour contacter Dell à propos de problèmes liés aux  ventes, au support technique ou au service client : 1. Rendez-vous sur support.dell.com. 2. Sélectionnez votre pays ou votre région dans le menu déroulant Choose A Country/Region (Sélectionner un pays ou une région), en bas de la page.  3. Cliquez sur Contactez-nous, à gauche de la page.  4. Sélectionnez le lien du service ou du support dont vous avez besoin.  5. Choisissez la méthode qui vous convient pour contacter Dell.  REMARQUE : Ayez à portée de main votre code de service express lorsque vous appelez. Ce code facilite l'acheminement de votre appel par le système  d'assistance téléphonique informatisé de Dell. Il est possible que l'on vous demande également votre numéro de service (il se trouve sur la face arrière  ou inférieure de votre ordinateur). PRÉCAUTION : Avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le  Guide d'information sur le produit. Liste de vérification des diagnostics Nom : Date : Adresse : Numéro de téléphone : Numéro de service (code-barre situé sur la face arrière ou inférieure de l'ordinateur) : Code de service express : Numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par le support technique de Dell) : Système d'exploitation et version : Périphériques : Cartes d'extension : Êtes-vous connecté à un réseau ? Oui Non Réseau, version et carte réseau : Programmes et versions : Consultez la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu des fichiers de démarrage du système. Si l'ordinateur est relié à une  imprimante, imprimez chaque fichier. Sinon, notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant d'appeler Dell. Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de diagnostic : Description du problème et procédures de dépannage que vous avez réalisées : REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet fonctionnelle, consultez votre facture, le bordereau de marchandises ou le catalogue des produits pour trouver les coordonnées de Dell. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Glossaire Guide d'utilisation Les termes répertoriés dans ce glossaire ne sont fournis qu'à titre informatif et ne décrivent pas obligatoirement les fonctions intégrées à votre ordinateur  particulier. A ACPI — Advanced Configuration and Power Interface — Spécification de gestion de l'alimentation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft®  Windows® de placer l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée afin de conserver l'énergie électrique attribuée à chaque périphérique connecté à  l'ordinateur. adressage de mémoire — Processus permettant à l'ordinateur d'attribuer des adresses mémoire à des emplacements physiques au démarrage. Les  périphériques et les logiciels peuvent ensuite déterminer les informations auxquelles le microprocesseur peut accéder. adresse E/S — Adresse RAM associée à un périphérique spécifique (un connecteur série, un connecteur parallèle ou une baie d'extension) et qui permet au  microprocesseur de communiquer avec ce périphérique. adresse mémoire — Emplacement spécifique où les données sont stockées temporairement dans la mémoire RAM. AGP — Accelerated Graphics Port — Port graphique dédié allouant de la mémoire système à utiliser pour les tâches liées à la vidéo. Le port AGP permet  d'obtenir une image vidéo de haute qualité avec des couleurs fidèles grâce à une interface très rapide entre le circuit vidéo et la mémoire de l'ordinateur. AHCI — Advanced Host Controller Interface — Interface du contrôleur hôte d'un disque dur SATA qui permet au pilote de stockage d'activer des technologies  telles que Native Command Queuing (NCQ) et l'enfichage à chaud. ALS — Ambient Light Sensor — Fonctionnalité aidant à contrôler la luminosité d'affichage. ASF — Alert Standards Format — Standard permettant de définir un mécanisme de sorte à signaler les alertes matérielles et logicielles à une console de  gestion. La norme ASF est conçue pour être indépendante des plates-formes et des systèmes d'exploitation. autonomie de la batterie — Nombre de minutes ou d'heures durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut alimenter l'ordinateur. B baie de média — Logement qui prend en charge des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur optique, une seconde batterie ou un module TravelLite™ de Dell. baie modulaire — Voir baie de média. BIOS — Basic Input/Output System — Programme (ou utilitaire) qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Ne  modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun d'eux sur l'ordinateur. Appelé également programme de configuration du système. bit — Unité de donnée la plus petite pouvant être interprétée par l'ordinateur. bps — Bits per second (bits par seconde) — Unité standard de mesure de la vitesse de transmission de données. BTU — British Thermal Unit (unité thermique britannique) — Mesure de sortie de chaleur. bus — Passerelle pour les communications entre les composants de votre ordinateur. bus local — Bus de données permettant une transmission rapide des données entre les périphériques et le microprocesseur. C C — Celsius — Système de mesure des températures où 0 ° est le point de congélation et 100 ° le point d'ébullition de l'eau. CA — courant alternatif — Forme d'électricité qui alimente votre ordinateur lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur secteur sur une prise  électrique. capteur infrarouge — Port permettant de transférer des données entre l'ordinateur et des périphériques compatibles infrarouge sans utiliser de connexion  câblée. carnet — Document international des douanes qui facilite les importations temporaires dans les pays étrangers. Appelé également passeport de marchandises. carte à puce — Carte qui incorpore un microprocesseur et une puce mémoire. Les cartes à puce permettent d'identifier un utilisateur sur des ordinateurs  équipés de telles cartes. carte d'extension — Carte installée dans un logement d'extension sur la carte mère de certains ordinateurs et qui permet d'augmenter les capacités de  l'ordinateur. Il peut s'agir d'une carte vidéo, modem ou son. carte ExpressCard — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des types courants de cartes  ExpressCard. Les cartes ExpressCard prennent en charge à la fois les normes PCI Express et USB 2.0.carte mère — Carte à circuits imprimés principale de votre ordinateur. Également appelée carte mère. CD-RW — CD ReWritable — Version réinscriptible d'un CD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un CD-RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. COA — Certificate of Authenticity (certificat d'authenticité) — Code alphanumérique Windows inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur. Appelé également  Product Key (Clé de produit) ou Product ID (Identification produit). code de service express — Code numérique inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur Dell™. Utilisez le code service express lorsque vous contactez Dell  pour obtenir une assistance technique. Le code de service express n'est pas nécessairement disponible dans tous les pays. combinaison de touches — Commande nécessitant une pression simultanée sur plusieurs touches. connecteur DIN — Connecteur rond à 6 broches conforme aux normes DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm), généralement utilisé pour connecter des connecteurs  de câbles de souris ou de clavier PS/2. connecteur parallèle — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter une imprimante parallèle à l'ordinateur. Appelé également port LPT. connecteur série — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter des périphériques comme des organiseurs ou des appareils photo numériques sur votre  ordinateur. contrôleur — Puce qui contrôle le transfert de données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques. contrôleur vidéo — Circuits de la carte vidéo ou de la carte mère (sur les ordinateurs dotés d'un contrôleur vidéo intégré) qui fournissent, en association avec  l'écran ou un moniteur externe, les fonctions vidéo, de votre ordinateur. CRIMM — Continuity Rambus In-line Memory Module — Module ne disposant pas de puces de mémoire, utilisé pour remplir les emplacements RIMM inutilisés. curseur — Marqueur sur l'écran qui indique l'emplacement de la prochaine action du clavier, de la tablette tactile ou de la souris. Il s'agit généralement d'une  ligne clignotante, d'un caractère de soulignement ou d'une petite flèche. disquette amorçable — Disquette pouvant être utilisée pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur  infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD, un DVD ou une disquette amorçable. dissipateur de chaleur — Plaque en métal sur certains processeurs qui permet de dissiper la chaleur. DMA — Direct Memory Access (accès direct à la mémoire) — Canal permettant à certains types de transfert de données entre la mémoire RAM et un  périphérique d'éviter de passer par le microprocesseur. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — Consortium de compagnies représentant des fournisseurs de matériel et de logiciel développant des normes  de gestion pour les environnements réseau, Internet, de bureau et d'entreprise distribués. domaine — Groupe d'ordinateurs, de programmes et de périphériques sur un réseau administrés en tant qu'unité avec des règles et des procédures  communes afin d'être utilisés par un groupe d'utilisateurs donné. Les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au domaine pour avoir accès aux ressources. dossier — Terme utilisé pour décrire l'espace sur une disquette ou un disque dur sur lequel des fichiers sont organisés et regroupés. Les fichiers d'un dossier  peuvent être affichés et classés de différentes façons, par exemple par ordre alphabétique, par date ou par taille. double cur — Technologie Intel® où deux unités informatiques physiques se trouvent au sein d'un seul processeur, augmentant ainsi la puissance de calcul et  la capacité multitâche. DRAM — Dynamic Random Access Memory (mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire) — Mémoire qui stocke des informations dans les circuits intégrés contenant  des condensateurs. DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — Technologie offrant une connexion Internet constante et à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique  analogique. durée de vie d'une batterie — Nombre d'années durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut être rechargée. DVD-R — DVD recordable (DVD enregistrable) — Version enregistrable d'un DVD. Les données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un DVD+R.  Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. La technologie DVD+R diffère de la technologie DVD-R. DVD-R — DVD recordable (DVD enregistrable) — Version enregistrable d'un DVD. Les données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un DVD  enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. La technologie DVD-R diffère de la technologie DVD+R. DVD+RW — DVD réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un DVD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un DVD+RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. La  technologie DVD+RW diffère de la technologie DVD-RW. DVD+RW — DVD réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un DVD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un DVD-RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. La  technologie DVD-RW diffère de la technologie DVD+RW. DVI — Digital Video Interface (interface vidéo numérique) — Norme de transmission numérique entre un ordinateur et un écran vidéo numérique. E ECC — Error Checking and Correction (code de vérification et de correction d'erreur) — Type de mémoire qui inclut des circuits spéciaux pour tester l'exactitude  des données lorsqu'elles passent par la mémoire. ECP — Extended Capabilities Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. Similaire à EPP, le port ECP  utilise l'accès direct à la mémoire pour transférer des données et améliore généralement les performances. éditeur de texte — Programme utilisé pour créer et modifier les fichiers contenant uniquement du texte ; par exemple, le Bloc-notes de Windows utilise un éditeur de texte. En général, les éditeurs de texte n'offrent pas les fonctions de renvoi à la ligne automatique ou de mise en forme (option permettant de  souligner, de changer les polices, etc.). EIDE — Enhanced Integrated Device Electronics (électronique de périphérique intégré améliorée) — Version améliorée de l'interface IDE pour les disques durs  et les lecteurs de CD.EMI — Electromagnetic Interference (interférence électromagnétique) — Interférences électriques causées par radiation électromagnétique. ENERGY STAR® — Exigences de l'agence EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) permettant de diminuer la consommation globale d'électricité. EPP — Enhanced Parallel Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. E/S — Entrée/Sortie — Opération ou périphérique entrant et extrayant des données de votre ordinateur. Les claviers et les imprimantes sont des  périphériques d'E/S.  ESD — ElectroStatic Discharge (décharge électrostatique) — Brève décharge d'électricité statique. Ce type de décharge peut endommager les circuits intégrés  du matériel informatique et de communication. F Fahrenheit — Système de mesure des températures où 32 ° correspond au point de congélation et 212 ° au point d'ébullition de l'eau. FBD — Fully-buffered DIMM — DIMM munie de puces DRAM DDR2 et d'une mémoire tampon avancée (Advanced Memory Buffer [AMB]) permettant d'accélérer la  communication entre les puces SDRAM DDR2 et le système. FCC — Federal Communications Commission (Commission fédérale des communications, aux États-Unis) — Bureau américain responsable de l'application de  réglementations relatives aux communications qui évalue la quantité de radiations pouvant être émise par les ordinateurs et autres équipements  électroniques. fichier « Lisez-moi » — Fichier texte livré avec un logiciel ou du matériel. En général, les fichiers « Lisez-moi » fournissent des informations sur l'installation et décrivent les améliorations ou corrections apportées au produit qui n'ont pas encore été documentées. formatage — Processus qui prépare un lecteur ou un disque pour le stockage des fichiers. Lorsqu'un lecteur ou disque est formaté, les informations existantes  sur ce lecteur ou disque sont perdues. FSB — Front Side Bus (bus frontal) — Canal de données et interface physique entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire RAM. FTP — File Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de fichiers) — Protocole Internet standard utilisé pour échanger des fichiers entre des ordinateurs  connectés à Internet. G G — Gravité — Mesure de poids et de force. GHz — Gigahertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à un milliard de Hz ou à mille MHz. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces des  ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en GHz. Go — Giga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1024 Mo (1 073 741 824 octets). Ce terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'il fait  référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur. GUI — Graphical User Interface (interface graphique utilisateur) — Logiciel interagissant avec l'utilisateur à l'aide de menus, de fenêtres et d'icônes. La plupart  des programmes fonctionnant avec les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows ont des interfaces graphiques utilisateur. H HTTP — Hypertext Transfer Protocol — Protocole d'échange de fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet.  Hyper-Threading — L'Hyper-Threading est une technologie Intel qui améliore les performances globales de l'ordinateur en permettant à un processeur  physique de fonctionner comme deux processeurs logiques capables d'exécuter certaines tâches en simultané. Hz — Hertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1 cycle par seconde. La vitesse de fonctionnement des ordinateurs et des périphériques électroniques  est souvent mesurée en kilohertz (kHz), mégahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz) ou térahertz (THz). I iAMT — Technologie de gestion active Intel® (Intel® Active Management Technology - Intel® AMT) — Grâce à des fonctions de plate-forme intégrées et à des  applications de gestion et de sécurité tiers réputées, la technologie Intel AMT permet au service informatique de mieux détecter, réparer et protéger les actifs  informatiques en réseau.  IC — circuit intégré — Semi-conducteur ou puce sur lesquels sont fabriqués des milliers ou des millions de minuscules composants électroniques destinés aux  équipements informatiques, audio et vidéo.  IDE — Integrated Device Electronics (électronique d'unité intégrée) — Interface pour les périphériques de stockage en masse dans laquelle le contrôleur est  intégré à l'unité de disque dur ou au lecteur de CD. IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — Bus série à hautes performances utilisé pour connecter des périphériques compatibles  IEEE 1394 tels que les appareils numériques et les lecteurs de DVD à l'ordinateur.  intégré — Fait généralement référence aux composants physiquement situés sur la carte mère de l'ordinateur. Synonyme d'incorporé. IrDA — Infrared Data Association — Organisme en charge de la création de normes internationales pour les communications infrarouge.IRQ — Interrupt Request (requête d'interruption) — Passerelle électronique associée à un périphérique spécifique et qui permet à ce dernier de communiquer  avec le microprocesseur. Une IRQ doit être attribuée à chaque périphérique. Bien que deux périphériques puissent partager la même affectation d'IRQ, ils ne  peuvent pas fonctionner simultanément. ISP — Internet service provider (fournisseur d'accès Internet) — Société qui vous permet d'accéder à son serveur hôte afin de vous connecter directement à  Internet, d'envoyer et de recevoir des messages électroniques et d'accéder à des sites Web. Le fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) vous attribue un progiciel,  un nom d'utilisateur et des numéros de téléphone d'accès contre un paiement.  K Kb — Kilobit — Unité de données égale à 1024 bits. Mesure de la capacité des circuits intégrés de mémoire. kHz — Kilohertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1000 Hz. Ko — Kilo-octet — Unité de données égale à 1024 octets mais souvent considérée comme étant égale à 1000 octets. L LAN — Local Area Network (réseau local) — Réseau informatique couvrant une petite zone. Un réseau local est généralement limité à un seul bâtiment ou à  plusieurs bâtiments avoisinants. Un LAN peut être connecté à un autre réseau local sur n'importe quelle distance par des lignes téléphoniques et des ondes  radioélectriques pour constituer un réseau étendu (WAN, Wide Area Network). LCD — Liquid Crystal Display (affichage à cristaux liquides) — Technologie utilisée pour les écrans plats et ceux des ordinateurs portables. lecteur de CD-RW — Lecteur qui peut lire les CD et écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire  plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de CD-RW/DVD — Lecteur, parfois appelé lecteur combiné, permettant de lire des CD et des DVD, ainsi que d'écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles  (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de DVD+/-RW — Lecteur permettant de lire les DVD et la plupart des supports de CD et d'écrire sur des disques DVD+/-RW (DVD réinscriptibles). lecteur d'empreintes digitales — Capteur, qui utilise les empreintes digitales comme moyen d'authentification de votre identité utilisateur, afin de sécuriser  l'ordinateur. lecteur optique — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire ou écrire des données sur des CD, des DVD ou des DVD+RW. Les lecteurs de CD, de DVD,  de CD-RW et les lecteurs composites de CD-RW/DVD sont des exemples de lecteurs optiques. lecteur Zip — Lecteur de disquette à grande capacité, développé par Iomega Corporation, qui utilise des disquettes amovibles de 3,5 pouces appelées  disquettes Zip. Les disquettes Zip sont légèrement plus grandes que les disquettes normales, à peu près deux fois plus épaisses et peuvent contenir jusqu'à  100 Mo de données.  lecture seule — Données et/ou fichiers que vous pouvez afficher, mais pas modifier ou supprimer. Un fichier peut être en lecture seule si : ¡ il se trouve sur une disquette physiquement protégée en écriture, un CD ou un DVD. ¡ il est situé sur un réseau dans un répertoire sur lequel l'administrateur système n'a affecté des droits qu'à certains individus.  LED — Light-Emitting Diode (diode électroluminescente) — Composant électronique émettant de la lumière pour indiquer l'état de l'ordinateur. logement d'extension — Connecteur de la carte mère (sur certains ordinateurs) dans lequel vous insérez une carte d'extension pour la connecter au bus  système. logiciel antivirus — Programme spécialement conçu pour identifier, isoler et/ou supprimer des virus de votre ordinateur. LPT — Line Print Terminal — Désignation d'une connexion parallèle à une imprimante ou à un autre périphérique parallèle.  M Mb — Mégabit — Mesure de la capacité de la puce de mémoire égale à 1024 Ko. Mb/s — Mégabits par seconde — 1 million de bits par seconde. Cette mesure est en règle générale utilisée pour les vitesses de transmission des réseaux et  des modems. mémoire — Zone de stockage de données temporaire dans l'ordinateur. Dans la mesure où les données en mémoire ne sont pas permanentes, il vous est  recommandé d'enregistrer fréquemment vos fichiers lorsque vous travaillez ainsi qu'avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. Un ordinateur peut avoir plusieurs formes de  mémoire : la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM et la mémoire vidéo. Le terme mémoire est souvent synonyme de mémoire RAM. mémoire cache — Mécanisme de stockage à grande vitesse spécifique. Il peut s'agir d'une section réservée de la mémoire principale ou d'un périphérique de  stockage rapide indépendant. La mémoire cache permet d'améliorer l'efficacité de nombreuses opérations du microprocesseur. mémoire cache L1 — Mémoire cache principale se trouvant dans le microprocesseur. mémoire cache L2 — Mémoire cache secondaire pouvant être externe au microprocesseur ou intégrée à l'architecture de celui-ci. mémoire vidéo — Mémoire composée de puces mémoire dédiées aux fonctions vidéo. La mémoire vidéo est en général plus rapide que la mémoire système.  La quantité de mémoire vidéo installée a principalement des effets sur le nombre de couleurs qu'un programme peut afficher. MHz — Mégahertz — Mesure de fréquence égale à 1 million de cycles par seconde. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces d'ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en MHz. microprocesseur — Puce d'ordinateur qui interprète et exécute les instructions des programmes. Le microprocesseur est parfois appelé processeur ou unité  centrale (UC). Mini PCI — Norme d'intégration de périphériques mettant l'accent sur les communications (modems et cartes réseau). Une carte Mini PCI est une petite carte  externe équivalente du point de vue fonctionnel à une carte PCI d'extension standard. mise en miroir — Duplication des données sur un autre ordinateur, à un autre endroit. La mise en miroir est effectuée à des fins de sauvegarde ou pour  fournir un stockage de proximité à l'utilisateur. Mo — Méga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1 048 576 octets. 1 Mo est égal à 1024 Ko. Lorsque l'on fait référence à la capacité de stockage  d'un disque dur, le terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 octets. mode de bureau étendu — Paramètre d'affichage permettant d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode Double affichage. mode Double affichage — Paramètre d'affichage qui permet d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode de bureau étendu. mode graphique — Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les modes graphiques peuvent afficher un nombre illimité de formes et de polices. mode Mise en veille prolongée — Mode de gestion de l'alimentation électrique qui enregistre le contenu de la mémoire dans un espace réservé du disque  dur, puis arrête l'ordinateur. Quand vous redémarrez l'ordinateur, les informations de la mémoire qui ont été enregistrées sur le disque dur sont  automatiquement restaurées. mode Veille — Mode d'économie d'énergie qui arrête toutes les opérations inutiles de l'ordinateur pour économiser de l'énergie. mode vidéo — Mode qui décrit la façon dont le texte et les graphiques sont affichés sur un moniteur. Les logiciels à affichage graphique, tels que les systèmes  d'exploitation Windows, s'affichent en modes vidéo définis par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les logiciels à base de caractères, comme les éditeurs de texte, s'affichent en modes vidéo qui se définissent par le nombre de colonnes x et par le nombre de rangées y. modem — Dispositif permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs par l'intermédiaire de lignes téléphoniques analogiques. Il  existe trois types de modems : externe, carte PC et interne. Généralement, vous utilisez un modem pour vous connecter à Internet et échanger des messages  électroniques. module de mémoire — Petite carte à circuits imprimés, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte mère. module de voyage — Élément en plastique conçu pour être inséré dans la baie modulaire de l'ordinateur portable pour réduire le poids de ce dernier. Mo/s — Méga-octets par seconde — 1 million d'octets par seconde. Cette mesure est souvent utilisée pour les taux de transfert de données. MP — Méga-pixel — Mesure de la résolution d'image utilisée pour les appareils photo numériques. ms — milliseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un millième de seconde. Le temps d'accès des périphériques de stockage est souvent mesuré en ms. N NIC — Voir carte réseau. ns — nanoseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un milliardième de seconde. numéro de service — Étiquette de code-barre apposée sur l'ordinateur permettant d'identifier ce dernier lorsque vous accédez au service de support de Dell  via l'adresse support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service clientèle ou le support technique de Dell. NVRAM — Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (mémoire vive rémanente) — Type de mémoire qui conserve des données lors de la mise hors tension de  l'ordinateur ou en cas de coupure d'alimentation électrique. La mémoire NVRAM permet de conserver les informations de configuration, comme la date, l'heure  et d'autres options de configuration du système que vous pouvez définir. O octet — Unité de stockage de données de base utilisée par votre ordinateur. Un octet équivaut généralement à 8 bits. onduleur — UPS, Uninterruptible Power Supply — Source d'alimentation de secours utilisée lorsque l'alimentation électrique est coupée ou descend à un  niveau de tension inacceptable. Un onduleur permet à l'ordinateur de fonctionner pendant un temps limité en cas de panne d'électricité. Les onduleurs sont en  général équipés d'un parasurtenseur et peuvent également offrir des régulations de tension. Les petits systèmes UPS proposent une alimentation par  batterie de quelques minutes pour vous permettre d'éteindre l'ordinateur correctement. P Panneau de configuration — Utilitaire Windows permettant de modifier les paramètres du système d'exploitation et du matériel : les paramètres d'affichage,  par exemple. papier peint — Motif ou image d'arrière-plan du bureau Windows. Vous pouvez changer de papier peint en utilisant le Panneau de configuration Windows. Vous pouvez également numériser votre photo préférée et en faire un papier peint. parasurtenseur — Dispositif qui empêche les sautes de tension, pouvant survenir au cours d'orages, par exemple, de pénétrer dans l'ordinateur par  l'intermédiaire de la prise secteur. Les parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas de la foudre ou des baisses de tension qui se produisent lorsque la tension descend  à plus de 20 pour cent au-dessous du niveau normal de tension de ligne à courant alternatif.PIO — Programmed Input/Output (Entrée/Sortie programmée) — Méthode de transfert des données entre deux périphériques à l'aide du microprocesseur  comme partie du chemin de données. pixel — Point unique sur un écran. Les pixels sont disposés en rangs et en colonnes pour créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 800 sur 600,  s'exprime en nombre de pixels en largeur sur le nombre de pixels en hauteur. Plug-and-Play — Possibilité pour l'ordinateur de configurer automatiquement les périphériques. La norme Plug-and-Play permet d'installer et de configurer automatiquement un périphérique et assure la compatibilité avec le matériel existant si le BIOS, le système d'exploitation et tous les périphériques sont  compatibles Plug-and-Play. POST — Power-On Self-Test (autotest de démarrage) — Programmes de diagnostic, chargés automatiquement par le BIOS, qui effectuent des tests de base  sur la plupart des composants de l'ordinateur, comme la mémoire, les unités de disque dur et la vidéo. Si aucun problème n'est détecté au cours de l'autotest  de démarrage, l'ordinateur continue son démarrage. programme de configuration — Programme utilisé pour installer et configurer du matériel et des logiciels. Le programme setup.exe ou install.exe est généralement livré avec la plupart des progiciels Windows. Il ne faut pas confondre programme de configuration et programme de configuration du système. programme de configuration du système — Utilitaire qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Le programme de  configuration du système vous permet de configurer les options sélectionnables par l'utilisateur dans le BIOS, comme la date et l'heure ou le mot de passe  système. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun des paramètres sur l'ordinateur. protection en écriture — Caractéristique des fichiers ou supports ne pouvant pas être modifiés. Utilisez la protection en écriture lorsque vous voulez  empêcher la modification ou la destruction des données. Pour protéger contre l'écriture une disquette de 3,5 pouces, faites glisser la languette de protection  contre l'écriture en position ouverte. PS/2 — Personal System/2 — Type de connecteur permettant de relier un clavier, une souris ou un pavé numérique compatible PS/2. PXE — Pre-boot execution Environment — Norme WfM (Wired for Management) permettant la configuration et le démarrage à distance d'ordinateurs en  réseau sans système d'exploitation. R raccourci — Icône permettant d'accéder rapidement à un programme, fichier, dossier ou lecteur fréquemment utilisé. En double-cliquant sur un raccourci placé  sur votre bureau Windows, vous pouvez ouvrir le dossier ou le fichier correspondant sans avoir à le rechercher au préalable. Les raccourcis ne modifient pas  l'emplacement des fichiers. Si vous supprimez un raccourci, le fichier original n'est pas affecté. Vous pouvez également renommer un raccourci. RAID — Ensemble redondant de disques indépendants — Méthode assurant la redondance des données. Parmi les implémentations courantes de RAID :  RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 et RAID 50. RAM — Random-Access Memory — Zone principale de stockage temporaire pour les instructions et les données des programmes. Toute information stockée  dans la RAM est définitivement perdue lorsque vous éteignez l'ordinateur. résolution — Netteté et clarté d'une image produite par une imprimante ou affichée sur un moniteur. Plus la résolution est élevée, plus l'image est nette. résolution vidéo — Voir résolution. RFI — Radio Frequency Interference — Interférence générée à des fréquences radio caractéristiques, entre 10 kHz et 100 000 MHz. Les fréquences radio se  trouvent à l'extrémité inférieure du spectre de fréquences électromagnétiques et sont plus susceptibles de présenter des perturbations que les radiations de  plus haute fréquence, telles que les infrarouges et la lumière. ROM — Read-Only Memory (mémoire morte) — Mémoire qui stocke des données et programmes que l'ordinateur ne peut pas supprimer ou dans laquelle il ne  peut pas écrire. À la différence de la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM conserve son contenu même après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. Certains programmes essentiels  au fonctionnement de l'ordinateur se trouvent dans la mémoire morte. RPM — Revolutions Per Minute (tours par minute) — Mesure le nombre de rotations effectuées par minute. La vitesse des disques durs est souvent mesurée  en RPM. RTC — Real Time Clock (horloge temps réel) — Horloge alimentée par pile, située sur la carte mère, qui conserve la date et l'heure après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. RTCRST — Real Time Clock Reset — Cavalier sur la carte mère de certains ordinateurs pouvant souvent être utilisé pour résoudre les problèmes. S SAS — Serial Attached SCSI — Version plus rapide et en série d'une interface SCSI (par opposition à l'architecture parallèle SCSI d'origine). SATA — Serial ATA (ATA série) — Version plus rapide et en série de l'interface ATA (IDE). ScanDisk — Utilitaire Microsoft qui recherche les erreurs présentes dans les fichiers et les dossiers, ainsi que sur la surface du disque dur. ScanDisk s'exécute  souvent lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après un blocage. SCSI — Small Computer System Interface — Interface à haute vitesse utilisée pour connecter des périphériques à un ordinateur, tels que des disques durs,  des lecteurs de CD, des imprimantes et des scanners. L'interface SCSI peut connecter de nombreux périphériques à l'aide d'un seul contrôleur. L'accès à  chaque périphérique s'effectue via un numéro d'identification repris sur le bus de contrôle SCSI. SDRAM — Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory — Type de mémoire vive dynamique (DRAM) synchronisée avec la vitesse d'horloge optimale du  microprocesseur. SDRAM DDR — SDRAM à double débit de données — Type de SDRAM doublant les cycles de données en rafale et améliorant les performances du système. segmentation des données — Technique de répartition des données sur plusieurs lecteurs de disque. La segmentation des données peut accélérer les  opérations de récupération des données sur les disques. Les ordinateurs utilisant la segmentation des données permettent généralement à l'utilisateur de  sélectionner la taille des unités de données ou la taille des segments.séquence d'amorçage — Précise l'ordre des périphériques à partir desquels l'ordinateur tente de s'amorcer. SIM — Subscriber Identity Module — Contient une puce qui crypte les transmissions voix et de données. Les cartes SIM peuvent être utilisées dans les  téléphones et les ordinateurs portables. sortie TV S-vidéo — Connecteur permettant de relier des périphériques audio numériques ou un téléviseur à l'ordinateur. S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — Format de fichier de transfert audio permettant de transférer des données audio entre deux fichiers sans  conversion préalable au format analogique, ce qui pourrait dégrader la qualité du fichier. station d'accueil — Voir APR. StrikeZone™ — Région renforcée de la base de la plate-forme protégeant le disque dur en faisant office de dispositif d'atténuation lorsqu'un ordinateur subit  des chocs par résonance ou tombe sur le sol (qu'il soit allumé ou éteint). SVGA — Super-Video Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo. Les résolutions SVGA types sont de 800 x 600 et 1024 x 768. Le nombre de couleurs et la résolution affichés par un programme dépendent des capacités de l'écran, du contrôleur vidéo et de ses pilotes, ainsi que de la  quantité de mémoire vidéo installée dans l'ordinateur.  SXGA — Super-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur  1024. SXGA+ — Super-extended Graphics Array plus — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à  1400 sur 1050. T TAPI — Telephony Application Programming Interface — Permet aux programmes Windows de fonctionner avec de nombreux périphériques de téléphonie  (voix, données, télécopie et vidéo). taux de rafraîchissement — Fréquence, mesurée en Hz, à laquelle les lignes horizontales de l'écran sont rechargées (on parle parfois aussi de fréquence  verticale). Plus le taux de rafraîchissement est élevé, moins le scintillement vidéo est perceptible à l'il nu. technologie sans fil Bluetooth® — Norme technologique sans fil pour les périphériques de mise en réseau de courte portée (9 m [29 pieds]) permettant aux  périphériques activés de se reconnaître automatiquement. TPM — Trusted Platform Module — Fonction de sécurité matérielle qui, associée à un logiciel de sécurité, améliore la sécurité de l'ordinateur et du réseau en  activant des fonctions telles que la protection des fichiers et des e-mails. U UMA — allocation de mémoire unifiée — Mémoire système allouée de manière dynamique à la vidéo. unité de disque dur — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire des données sur un disque dur. Les termes lecteur de disque dur et disque dur sont souvent  utilisés indifféremment. USB — Universal Serial Bus — Interface matérielle pour les périphériques lents comme un clavier, une souris, une manette de jeu, un scanner, des hautparleurs, une imprimante, des périphériques large bande (DSL et modems par câble), des périphériques d'imagerie ou de stockage compatibles USB. Les  périphériques sont branchés directement à un support à 4 broches de votre ordinateur, ou à un concentrateur à plusieurs ports qui se raccorde à votre  ordinateur. Les périphériques USB peuvent être connectés et déconnectés lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et peuvent également être connectés en  guirlande. UTP — Unshielded Twisted Pair (paire torsadée non blindée) — Type de câble utilisé dans la plupart des réseaux téléphoniques et dans certains réseaux  informatiques. Les paires de câbles non blindés sont torsadées afin de les protéger contre les interférences électromagnétiques et sont utilisées à la place  des câbles comportant une gaine métallique autour de chaque paire de fils. UXGA — Ultra-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1600 sur  1200. V V — Volt — Unité de mesure de la puissance électrique ou de la force électromotrice. Un V est mesuré sur une résistance de 1 ohm lorsqu'elle est traversée  par un courant de 1 ampère. virus — Programme conçu pour nuire ou détruire les données stockées sur votre ordinateur. Un virus se déplace d'un ordinateur à un autre par l'intermédiaire  d'une disquette infectée, d'un logiciel téléchargé à partir d'Internet ou de pièces jointes à des messages électroniques. Lorsque vous démarrez un programme  infecté, le virus intégré démarre lui aussi. Un type courant de virus est le virus d'initialisation, qui est stocké dans les secteurs d'initialisation d'une disquette. Si la disquette reste dans le lecteur  lorsque l'ordinateur est éteint, puis allumé, celui-ci est infecté lors de la lecture des secteurs d'initialisation de la disquette en attendant de trouver le système  d'exploitation. Si l'ordinateur est infecté, le virus d'initialisation peut se reproduire sur toutes les disquettes lues ou écrites sur cet ordinateur jusqu'à son  éradication.  vitesse de bus — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle un bus peut transférer des informations. vitesse d'horloge — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle les composants de l'ordinateur connectés au bus système fonctionnent. W W — Watt — Mesure du courant électrique. Un watt est 1 ampère de courant dont le débit est de 1 volt. Wh — Wattheure — Unité de mesure utilisée couramment pour indiquer la capacité approximative d'une batterie. Par exemple, une batterie de 66 Wh peut  fournir 66 W de courant pendant 1 heure ou 33 W pendant 2 heures. WLAN — Wireless Local Area Network (réseau local sans fil). Ensemble d'ordinateurs interconnectés communiquant par l'intermédiaire d'ondes à l'aide de  points d'accès ou de routeurs sans fil pour fournir l'accès à Internet. WWAN — Wireless Wide Area Network (réseau étendu sans fil). Un réseau de données sans fil à haute vitesse utilisant la technologie cellulaire et couvrant  une zone géographique beaucoup plus vaste qu'un WLAN.  WXGA — Wide-aspect Extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à  1280 sur 800. X XGA — Extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1024 sur 768. Z ZIF — Zero Insertion Force — Type de connecteur ou de support permettant l'installation ou le retrait d'une puce sans forcer sur la puce ou le support. Zip — Format courant de compression des données. Les fichiers compressés au format Zip sont appelés fichiers Zip et portent en général l'extension .zip. Un type spécial de fichier zippé/compressé est un fichier à extraction automatique, dont l'extension est .exe. Pour décompresser un fichier à extraction  automatique double-cliquez dessus. zone de notification — La zone de notification du bureau Windows contient des icônes permettant d'accéder rapidement aux programmes et aux fonctions de  l'ordinateur, notamment à l'horloge, au contrôle du volume et à l'état de l'imprimante. Appelée également Zone de notification. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu  Mémoire  Guide d'utilisation Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte mère. Votre ordinateur prend en charge la mémoire DDR2. Pour de plus amples informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, reportezvous aux caractéristiques de votre ordinateur décrites dans ce guide. Présentation de la mémoire DDR2 l Une fois installés par paire, les modules de mémoire DDR2 doivent être de même taille et même vitesse. Si les modules de mémoire DDR2 ne sont pas  installés par paires, l'ordinateur continuera de fonctionner mais ses performances peuvent légèrement diminuer. Pour déterminer la capacité des  modules, reportez-vous à l'étiquette dans le coin supérieur droit ou gauche. Les configurations de mémoire recommandées sont les suivantes : ¡ Une paire de modules de mémoire assortis dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 ou ¡ Une paire de modules de mémoire assortis dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 et une autre pair de modules assortis dans les connecteurs DIMM 3  et 4 l Si vous installer des paires mixtes de mémoire PC2-5300 (DDR2 667-MHz) et PC2-6400 (DDR2 800-MHz), les modules fonctionnent à la vitesse du  module le plus lent. l Veillez à installer un module de mémoire unique dans le connecteur DIMM 1, le connecteur le plus proche du processeur, avant d'installer les modules  dans les autres connecteurs. REMARQUE : Installez toujours les modules de mémoire DDR2 dans l'ordre indiqué sur la carte mère. AVIS : N'installez aucun module de mémoire à code correcteur d'erreurs (ECC). A paire de modules assortis dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 (clips de fixation blancs) B paire de modules de mémoires assortis dans les connecteurs DIMM 3 et 4 (clips  de fixation noirs) AVIS : Si vous retirez les modules de mémoire d'origine au cours d'une mise à niveau de la mémoire, gardez-les séparés de tout nouveau module,  même si vous l'avez acheté auprès de Dell. Si possible, n'associez pas un module d'origine à un module neuf. Votre ordinateur risque de ne pas  démarrer correctement. Installez les modules de mémoire d'origine par paires, dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 ou DIMM 3 et 4. REMARQUE : La mémoire achetée auprès de Dell est couverte par la garantie de votre ordinateur.Adressage des configurations de mémoire Si vous utilisez un système d'exploitation 32 bits, comme Microsoft® Windows® Vista®, votre ordinateur prend en charge un maximum de 4 Go de mémoire. Si  vous utilisez un système d'exploitation 64 bits, votre ordinateur prend en charge un maximum de 8 Go de mémoire (DIMM de 2 Go dans chacun des quatre  logements). Installation de la mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur » correspondante). 3. Appuyez sur les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur de module de mémoire pour les écarter.  4. Alignez l'encoche de la partie inférieure du module sur la barre transversale du connecteur.  5. Insérez le module dans le connecteur jusqu'à ce qu'il se mette en place.  Si vous insérez le module correctement, les pinces de fixation s'enclenchent dans les découpes à chaque extrémité du module. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique et des dommages aux composants internes, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet  antistatique ou en touchant régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte sur le châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 connecteur de mémoire le plus proche du processeur 2 pinces de fixation (2) 3 connecteur de mémoire 1 découpes (2) 2 module de mémoire 3 encoche 4 barre transversale AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le module de mémoire, enfoncez-le dans le connecteur en appliquant une force égale à chacune de ses extrémités.6. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 7. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 8. Lorsque le message, indiquant le changement de taille de la mémoire, s'affiche, appuyez sur  pour continuer.  9. Connectez-vous à votre ordinateur.  10. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Poste de travail sur le bureau Windows, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 11. Cliquez sur l'onglet Général. 12. Pour vérifier que la mémoire est correctement installée, reportez-vous à la valeur qui répertorie la quantité de mémoire (RAM).  Retrait de mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur » correspondante). 3. Écartez les pinces de fixation des extrémités du connecteur du module de mémoire.  4. Saisissez le module et retirez-le. Si vous avez des difficultés à le retirer, déplacez doucement le module de l'arrière vers l'avant et vice-versa pour le dégager du connecteur. Retour à la page Contenu AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur le port ou périphérique réseau, puis sur l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique et des dommages aux composants internes, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet  antistatique ou en touchant régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte sur le châssis de l'ordinateur.Dell™ OptiPlex™ 755 Guide d'utilisation Remarques, avis et précautions Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, OptiPlex, TravelLite, OpenManage et StrikeZone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, SpeedStep et Celeron sont des marques déposées et Core et vPro sont des marques d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows Vista et le bouton Démarrer de Windows  sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et  est utilisé par Dell Inc. sous licence. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En  tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell a fait en sorte que ce produit réponde aux normes de ce programme en matière de consommation énergétique. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèles: DCTR, DCNE, DCSM et DCCY Octobre 2007        Réf.: JN460        Rév. A01 Ordinateur mini-tour À propos de votre ordinateur Recherche d'informations Ordinateur mini-tour Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur mini-tour Fonctionnalités avancées  Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte Nettoyage de votre ordinateur Fonctions Microsoft® Windows® Dépannage Obtention d'aide Glossaire Garantie Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Retrait et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Cartes Lecteurs Processeur Panneau d'E/S Bloc d'alimentation Haut-parleurs Pile Remplacement de la carte mère  Mémoire Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Cartes Cartes Votre ordinateur Dell™ prend en charge un adaptateur de port série P/S2 et fournit les connecteurs suivants pour les cartes PCI et PCI Express : l Deux logements de carte PCI l Un logement de carte PCI Express x16 l Un logement de carte PCI Express x1 Installation d'une carte PCI ou PCI Express Si vous remplacez une carte, désinstallez le pilote de la carte existante. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la carte. 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Appuyez légèrement sur la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Le loquet restera dans cette position. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir l'homologation  de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussière et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de maintenir un flux d'air  qui refroidit votre ordinateur. 1 carte PCI Express x16 4 carte PCI Express x1 2 languette de fixation (uniquement pour les cartes PCI Express) 5 logement de carte PCI Express x1 3 logement de carte PCI Express x16 REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur Dell n'utilise que des logements PCI et PCI Express. REMARQUE : L'adaptateur de port série de l'ordinateur mini-tour inclut deux connecteurs PS/2. 4. Si vous installez une nouvelle carte, retirez la plaque de recouvrement pour libérer un connecteur de carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 5.  5. Si vous remplacez une carte déjà installée dans l'ordinateur, retirez-la. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte.  6. Si votre carte comprend une barre de retenue de carte, retirez la barre. Tirez doucement la languette de fixation, prenez la carte par ses coins supérieurs et dégagez-la doucement de son connecteur. 7. Préparez la nouvelle carte pour l'installation.  8. Si vous installez la carte dans le connecteur de carte x16, positionnez-la de façon à aligner l'encoche de fixation sur la languette de fixation, puis tirez  doucement la languette de fixation. 9. Placez la carte dans le connecteur, puis appuyez dessus fermement. Assurez-vous que la carte est bien engagée.  1 loquet de retenue de carte 2 guide d'alignement 3 carte 4 connecteur de bord de carte 5 connecteur de carte 6 languette de retenue REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, les connexions  internes et autres moyens de personnaliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur lorsqu'elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger  d'un choc électrique, assurez-vous de bien débrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'installer des cartes.  1 carte PCI Express x16 2 levier 3 emplacement de fixation (uniquement sur certaines cartes) 4 languette de fixation 5 connecteur de carte PCI Express x1610. Avant d'abaisser le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 11. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). 12. Branchez tout câble devant être connecté à la carte.  Consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte pour des informations sur le câblage approprié. 13. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 14. Si vous avez installé une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui attribuer la  valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs de la carte son. Ne les connectez pas au microphone, haut-parleur/casque ou connecteurs de ligne d'entrée du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  15. Si vous avez installé une carte réseau et souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Network Controller (Contrôleur réseau) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Reliez le câble réseau aux connecteurs de la carte réseau. Ne connectez pas le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière  de l'ordinateur. 16. Installez les pilotes requis pour la carte en vous référant aux instructions de la documentation.  Retrait d'une carte PCI ou PCI Express 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Appuyez légèrement sur la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Le loquet restera dans cette position. 1 carte engagée 2 carte mal engagée  3 plaque dans le logement 4 plaque à l'extérieur du logement AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus ou derrière les cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la  fermeture correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. AVIS : Si vous désactivez la carte réseau intégrée, vous ne disposerez pas de la fonctionnalité AMT.4. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte.  5. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture de connecteur de carte vide.  6. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 7. Désinstallez le pilote de la carte. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la carte.  8. Si vous avez retiré une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui attribuer la  valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs audio situés sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  9. Si vous avez retiré un connecteur de carte réseau :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Network Controller (Contrôleur réseau) et modifiez le paramètre pour lui  attribuer la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  Adaptateur de port série PS/2 Installation d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Appuyez légèrement sur la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Le loquet restera dans cette position. 1 loquet de retenue de carte 2 guide d'alignement 3 carte 4 connecteur de bord de carte 5 connecteur de carte 6 languette de retenue REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussière et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur.4. Retirez la plaque de recouvrement (le cas échéant).  5. Alignez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 sur le logement de retenue et appuyez fermement dessus. Vérifiez que l'adaptateur est inséré à  fond dans le logement. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que : l Les bords supérieurs de tous les adaptateurs et de toutes les languettes métalliques sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche sur le bord supérieur de l'adaptateur ou sur la languette métallique s'emboîte sur le guide d'alignement. 6. Appuyez légèrement sur le loquet de retenue jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place pour le fermer.  7. Branchez le câble de l'adaptateur sur le connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série (SERIAL2) de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère pour prendre connaissance de l'emplacement des connecteurs). 1 loquet de retenue de carte 2 guide d'alignement REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec l'adaptateur de port série P/S2 pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de  l'adaptateur, la création de connexions internes et la personnalisation de la carte pour votre ordinateur.  1 plaque dans le logement 2 plaque à l'extérieur du logement AVIS : N'acheminez pas de câbles au-dessus des cartes installées. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement.8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retrait d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Appuyez légèrement sur la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Le loquet restera dans cette position. 4. Débranchez le câble de l'adaptateur série PS/2 de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère). 5. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble externe relié à l'adaptateur.  6. Retirez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 de son logement.  REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 pour obtenir des informations sur le branchement des câbles. 1 loquet de retenue de carte 2 guide d'alignement7. Si vous retirez définitivement l'adaptateur, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture du connecteur de carte vide.  8. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement.  9. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). 10. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Installation d'un lecteur eSATA eSATA permet des vitesses de transfert des données SATA intégrales (3 Go/sec) entre un lecteur et le jeu de puces, approximativement six fois le débit de  données de USB. eSATA sur votre ordinateur prend également en charge l'enfichage à chaud. L'enfichage à chaud permet la détection de périphériques sans arrêt de l'ordinateur  avant la connexion du périphérique à l'ordinateur. Une fois le périphérique connecté, le système d'exploitation reconnaît automatiquement la modification.  L'ordinateur doit cependant être éteint avant le retrait ou le remplacement. 1. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 2. Retirez le cache du logement de carte que vous utilisez pour le connecteur eSATA. 3. Installez la plaque dans l'ouverture du connecteur de carte choisie. 4. Branchez l'extrémité libre du câble eSATA dans le connecteur eSATA de la carte mère.  5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 6. Démarrez votre ordinateur et ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Utilisez l'option esata pour activer le lecteur eSATA. REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité  statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non  peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur.Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Processeur Processeur Retrait du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Desserrez les vis imperdables (comme illustré dans la figure ci-dessous) situées de chaque côté de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur.  4. Faites pivoter l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur vers le haut et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Posez le dissipateur de chaleur en plaçant la partie contenant  la pâte thermoconductible vers le haut.  5. Ouvrez le cache du processeur en faisant glisser le levier de dégagement depuis le dessous du loquet de fermeture central du support. Ensuite, tirez le  levier vers l'arrière pour libérer le processeur.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Malgré la présence d'un blindage en plastique, l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une  utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir avant de le manipuler. 1 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 2 emplacements des vis imperdables (2) AVIS : À moins qu'un nouveau dissipateur de chaleur ne soit requis par le nouveau processeur, réutilisez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur initial  lorsque vous remplacez le processeur. AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches.6. Retirez doucement le processeur de son support. Maintenez le levier de dégagement ouvert pour que le support puisse recevoir le nouveau processeur. Installation du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Déballez le nouveau processeur en prenant garde de ne pas toucher sa face inférieure.  4. Si le levier de dégagement du support n'est pas complètement ouvert, ouvrez-le. 5. Alignez les encoches avant et arrière du processeur avec celles du support.  6. Alignez les angles de la broche 1 du processeur et du support. 1 loquet de fermeture central 2 cache du processeur 3 processeur 4 support 5 levier de dégagement AVIS : Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. REMARQUE : Le processeur doit être correctement installé dans son support afin d'éviter de l'endommager de façon définitive ainsi que  l'ordinateur lorsque vous allumerez ce dernier.7. Avec précaution, placez le processeur à l'intérieur du support et vérifiez qu'il est correctement positionné.  8. Une fois le processeur correctement installé dans le support, fermez le cache du processeur.  Vérifiez que la languette du cache du processeur est placée sous le loquet de fermeture central du support.  9. Faites pivoter le levier de dégagement du support en position de fermeture et enclenchez-le pour maintenir le processeur en place. 10. Nettoyez la pâte thermoconductible au bas du dissipateur de chaleur.  11. Appliquez la nouvelle pâte thermoconductible au-dessus du processeur. 12. Installez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur : a. Placez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur sur le support de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur. b. Faites pivoter l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur vers la base de l'ordinateur et serrez les deux vis imperdables. 13. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retour à la page Contenu 1 cache du processeur 2 languette 3 processeur 4 support du processeur 5 loquet de fermeture central 6 levier de dégagement 7 encoche d'alignement avant 8 support et indicateur de la broche 1 du processeur 9 encoche d'alignement arrière AVIS : Pour éviter tout dommage, assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement aligné sur le support et n'exercez pas une pression excessive  quand vous le mettez en place. AVIS : Veillez à appliquer une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible. Une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible est essentielle pour assurer un thermoliage  adéquat, ce qui est obligatoire pour un fonctionnement optimal du processeur. AVIS : Vérifiez que l'assemblage du dissipateur est correctement installé. 1 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 2 support de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 3 emplacements des vis imperdables (2)Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Lecteurs Lecteurs Votre ordinateur prend en charge : l Deux disques durs SATA (ATA série) l Un lecteur de disquette de 3,5 pouces ou un lecteur de carte multimédia l Deux lecteurs optiques SATA l Un lecteur eSATA (avec support en option) Consignes générales d'installation des lecteurs Les connecteurs SATA de la carte mère sont identifiés comme suit : SATA0, SATA1, SATA2 et SATA3.  Les disques durs doivent être raccordés aux connecteurs SATA portant les numéros les plus bas. Les autres périphériques SATA (lecteur optique par exemple)  doivent être raccordés aux connecteurs SATA restants, en commençant par le connecteur dont le numéro suit immédiatement le numéro des connecteurs  auxquels les disques durs sont raccordés. Par exemple, si vous disposez de deux disques durs SATA et d'un lecteur optique SATA, raccordez les deux disques  durs aux connecteurs SATA0 et SATA1 et le lecteur optique SATA au connecteur SATA2. (Reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère pour prendre connaissance de l'emplacement des connecteurs SATA sur la carte mère.)  Connexion des câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous installez un lecteur, vous raccordez deux câbles (un câble d'alimentation CC et un câble d'interface de données) à l'arrière du lecteur.  Connecteurs d'interface de données  1 lecteur optique 2 lecteur de 3,5 pouces ou lecteur de carte multimédia 3 disque dur Connecteur SATAConnecteurs de câble d'alimentation  Connexion et déconnexion de câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous retirez un câble à l'aide d'une languette de retrait, saisissez la languette de retrait de couleur et tirez jusqu'à ce que le connecteur se libère. Lorsque vous connectez et déconnectez un câble sans languette de retrait, tenez le câble par le connecteur noir de chaque côté. Disque dur Retrait d'un disque dur 1 connecteur du câble d'interface de données 2 connecteur d'interface de données 1 câble d'alimentation 2 connecteur d'entrée d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse.1. Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos fichiers avant de commencer cette procédure.  2. Consultez la documentation du lecteur pour vérifier qu'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 4. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Déconnectez du lecteur les câbles d'alimentation et de données.  6. Appuyez sur les languettes de retenue bleues situées de chaque côté du disque dur et faites glisser le disque dur vers le haut pour le retirer de  l'ordinateur. Installation d'un disque dur 1. Déballez le nouveau disque dur et préparez-le pour l'installation. 1 câble de données 2 connecteur de la carte mère du disque dur 3 câble d'alimentation 1 disque dur 2 languettes de retenue (2)2. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier qu'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  3. Si votre disque dur de remplacement n'est pas équipé d'un support de disque dur en plastique, retirez le support du disque dur existant en le  décliquetant du disque dur.  4. Fixez le support sur le nouveau disque dur. 5. Écartez avec précaution le support du disque dur de chaque côté et faites glisser le disque dur dans le support, en alignant le lecteur sur les broches du  support, jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  1 disque dur 2 support du disque dur 1 disque dur 2 support du disque dur 3 broches6. Avec précaution, faites glisser le disque dur dans la baie de lecteur jusqu'à ce vous entendiez un clic.  7. Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur.  8. Vérifiez que le câble de données est bien connecté au connecteur de la carte mère.  9. Assurez-vous que tous les connecteurs sont correctement câblés et fermement fixés.  10. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 11. Insérez un support amorçable, ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système) et mettez à jour l'option du port SATA sous la liste d'options Drives (Lecteurs).  12. Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  13. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre lecteur. Consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir des instructions. 14. Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 15. Si le lecteur que vous venez d'installer est le lecteur principal, installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur. Si le lecteur que vous venez  d'installer est le lecteur principal, insérez un support amorçable dans le lecteur d'amorçage. Consultez la documentation de l'unité de disque dur pour  des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour son fonctionnement. Ajout d'un deuxième disque dur  1. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier qu'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 3. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 4. Retirez le support en plastique du disque dur de l'intérieur de la baie de disque dur. Pour ce faire, appuyez sur les languettes de retenue et tirez avec  précaution le support de la baie vers le haut pour le retirer.  5. Écartez avec précaution le support du disque dur de chaque côté et faites glisser le disque dur dans le support, en alignant le lecteur sur les broches du  support, jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  AVIS : Reliez toujours le câble de données au connecteur SATA0 de la carte mère ou au connecteur SATA1 si vous avez déjà un disque dur raccordé au  connecteur SATA0 et que vous installez un deuxième disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse. AVIS : Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos fichiers avant de commencer cette procédure.6. Faites glisser prudemment le nouveau disque dur dans la baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  7. Connectez le câble d'alimentation au lecteur.  8. Repérez un connecteur SATA inutilisé sur la carte mère et reliez ce connecteur au deuxième disque dur à l'aide d'un câble de données.  1 disque dur 2 support du disque dur 3 broches9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 10. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système) et mettez à jour l'option du port  SATA sous la liste d'options Drives (Lecteurs). 11. Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  12. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre lecteur. Consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir des instructions. 13. Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 14. Si le lecteur que vous venez d'installer est le lecteur principal, installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur.  Lecteur de disquette Retrait du lecteur de disquette 1. Démarrez votre ordinateur et ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Utilisez l'option Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) pour désactiver le lecteur de disquette.  2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 3. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 4. Faites glisser le loquet de fermeture du lecteur vers le bas pour ouvrir le panneau et retirez le panneau des charnières.  5. Déconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données de la partie arrière du lecteur.  6. Faites glisser le levier de la plaque de guidage vers la partie inférieure de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce que le panneau des lecteurs s'ouvre ; tout en  maintenant le levier en place, faites glisser le lecteur hors de l'ordinateur. 1 câble de données 2 connecteur de la carte mère du disque dur 3 câble d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  1 lecteur de disquette 2 loquet de fermeture du lecteurInstallation du lecteur de disquette 1. Si vous remplacez un lecteur de disquette, retirez les vis à épaulement du lecteur existant et fixez-les sur le lecteur de remplacement. 2. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur de disquette, retirez le cache du panneau des lecteurs au niveau de la baie d'unité de 3,5 pouces, retirez les vis à  épaulement de l'intérieur du cache du panneau des lecteurs et fixez-les sur le nouveau lecteur. 3. Alignez les vis à épaulement, situées sur le lecteur de disquette, sur les emplacements de vis et faites glisser avec précaution le lecteur dans la baie  jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  4. Reliez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur de disquette et à la carte mère.  1 lecteur de disquette 2 vis à épaulement (4) 3 emplacements de vis à épaulement (2)5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 6. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système), et utilisez l'option Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) pour activer le nouveau lecteur de disquette. 7. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Lecteur de carte multimédia Retrait du lecteur de carte multimédia  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Faites glisser le loquet de fermeture du lecteur vers le bas pour ouvrir le panneau et retirez le panneau des charnières.  4. Débranchez le câble de données de l'arrière du lecteur de carte multimédia.  1 câble de données 2 câble d'alimentation 3 connecteur du lecteur de disquette (DSKT) PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur. 5. Faites glisser le levier de la plaque de guidage vers la partie inférieure de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce que le panneau des lecteurs s'ouvre ; tout en  maintenant le levier en place, faites glisser le lecteur de carte multimédia hors de l'ordinateur.  Installation du lecteur de carte multimédia  1. Si vous remplacez un lecteur de carte multimédia, retirez les vis à épaulement du lecteur existant et fixez-les sur le lecteur de carte multimédia de  remplacement. 2. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur de carte multimédia, retirez le cache du panneau des lecteurs au niveau de la baie d'unité de 3,5 pouces, retirez les  vis à épaulement de l'intérieur du cache du panneau des lecteurs et fixez-les sur le nouveau lecteur. 3. Alignez les vis à épaulement, situées sur le lecteur de carte multimédia, sur les emplacements de vis et faites glisser avec précaution le lecteur dans la  baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  1 lecteur de carte multimédia 2 loquet de fermeture du lecteur REMARQUE : Si vous remplacez un lecteur de disquette existant par un lecteur de carte multimédia, désactivez le lecteur de disquette avant  d'installer le lecteur de carte multimédia. Démarrez votre système et ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section  Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Utilisez l'option Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) pour désactiver le lecteur de  disquette. Suivez les instructions de la section Retrait du lecteur de disquette.4. Raccordez le câble au lecteur de carte multimédia et à la carte mère.  5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 6. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Lecteur optique Retrait d'un lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 1 lecteur de carte multimédia 2 vis à épaulement (4) 3 emplacements de vis à épaulement (2) 1 câble de données/d'alimentation 2 lecteur de carte multimédia PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de remettre le capot en place. 3. Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation et les câbles de données de la partie arrière du lecteur.  4. Faites glisser le levier de la plaque de guidage vers la partie supérieure de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce que le panneau des lecteurs s'ouvre ; tout en  maintenant le levier en place, faites glisser le lecteur hors de l'ordinateur. Installation d'un lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Si vous remplacez un lecteur optique, retirez les vis à épaulement du lecteur existant et fixez-les sur le lecteur de remplacement. 4. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur optique, retirez le cache du panneau du lecteur, retirez les vis à épaulement de l'intérieur du cache du panneau du  lecteur et fixez-les sur le nouveau lecteur. 5. Consultez la documentation fournie avec le lecteur pour vérifier si ce dernier est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  6. Alignez les vis à épaulement, situées sur le lecteur optique, sur les emplacements de vis et faites glisser le lecteur dans la baie jusqu'à ce que vous  entendiez un clic. 1 lecteur optique 2 loquet de fermeture du lecteur7. Reliez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur et à la carte mère.  Raccordez toujours le câble SATA du lecteur optique à un connecteur SATA de la carte mère en utilisant le connecteur dont le numéro suit immédiatement le  numéro des connecteurs auxquels les disques durs, installés sur l'ordinateur, sont raccordés. 8. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 10. Mettez à jour les informations de configuration dans le programme de configuration du système en attribuant la valeur approprié à l'option Drive (Lecteur) (SATA-1, SATA-2 ou SATA-3) sous Drives (Lecteurs). Reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système. 11. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Retour à la page Contenu 1 lecteur optique 2 vis à épaulement (3) 3 emplacements de vis à épaulement (2) 1 câble d'alimentation 2 câble de données 3 connecteur de lecteur optique SATARetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Panneau d'E/S Panneau d'E/S Retrait du panneau d'E/S 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez la vis qui maintient le panneau d'E/S en place. Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection et faites glisser la carte pour la retirer de la partie avant de  l'ordinateur. 4. Débranchez tous les câbles du panneau d'E/S et retirez le panneau de l'ordinateur.  Remise en place du panneau d'E/S 1. Pour remettre en place le panneau d'E/S, suivez la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot.  REMARQUE : Mémorisez la façon dont les câbles sont acheminés avant de les retirer, de manière à pouvoir les remettre en place correctement lors de  l'installation du nouveau panneau d'E/S. AVIS : Faites extrêmement attention lorsque vous faites glissez le panneau d'E/S hors de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne prenez pas assez de précautions,  vous pouvez endommager les connecteurs et les clips d'acheminement des câbles. 1 bouton d'éjection du panneau d'E/S 2 vis de fixation 3 panneau d'E/S 4 connecteur du câble d'E/SRetour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : Utilisez les guides situés sur le support du panneau d'E/S pour positionner correctement le panneau, utilisez ensuite l'encoche  située sur le support du panneau d'E/S pour installer le panneau.Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Bloc d'alimentation Bloc d'alimentation Remplacement du bloc d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez les câbles d'alimentation en CC des lecteurs et de la carte mère.  Mémorisez la façon dont les câbles d'alimentation en CC sont acheminés sous les languettes du châssis de l'ordinateur avant de débrancher les câbles  de la carte mère et des lecteurs. Vous devrez acheminer ces câbles correctement lorsque vous les remettrez en place, de sorte qu'ils ne risquent pas de  se coincer ou d'être mal positionnés. 4. Retirez les quatre vis qui fixent le bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière du châssis de l'ordinateur.  5. Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection situé sur la base du châssis de l'ordinateur.  6. Faites glisser le bloc d'alimentation d'environ 2,5 cm (1 pouce) vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. 7. Soulevez le bloc d'alimentation et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 bouton d'éjection 2 bloc d'alimentation 3 vis (4) 4 connecteur d'alimentation en CA8. Faites glisser le nouveau bloc d'alimentation dans son emplacement. 9. Remettez en place les quatre vis qui fixent le bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière du châssis de l'ordinateur.  10. Rebranchez les câbles d'alimentation en CC sur le bloc d'alimentation.  11. Branchez le câble d'alimentation en CA dans un connecteur d'alimentation en CA.  12. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Connecteurs d'alimentation en CC Broche P1 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +3,3 VCC Orange 2 +3,3 VCC Orange 3 GND Noir 4 +5 VCC Rouge 5 GND Noir 6 +5 VCC Rouge 7 GND Noir 8 PS_PWRGOOD Gris 9 P5AUX Violet 10 V_12P0_DIG Blanc 11 V_12P0_DIG BlancBroche P2 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Broches P3, P5, P8 et P9 des connecteurs d'alimentation en CC Broche P7 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC 12 +3,3 VCC Orange 13 +3,3 VCC/SE* Orange 14 -12 VCC Bleu 15 GND Noir 16 PWR_PS_ON Vert 17 GND Noir 18 GND Noir 19 GND Noir 20 NC NC 21 +5 VCC Rouge 22 +5 VCC Rouge 23 +5 VCC Rouge 24 GND Noir *Câble en option. Utilisez un câble 22 AWG au lieu de 18 AWG.  Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 GND Noir 2 GND Noir 3 +12 VACC Jaune 4 +12 VACC Jaune Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +3,3 VCC Orange 2 GND Noir 3 +5 VCC Rouge 4 GND Noir 5 +12 VBCC Blanc Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 22 AWG 1 +5 VCC Rouge 2 GND NoirBroche P10 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Retour à la page Contenu 3 GND Noir 4 +12 VCC Jaune Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +12 VBCC Blanc 2 GND Noir 3 GND Noir 4 +5 VCC RougeRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Haut-parleurs Haut-parleurs Installation d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Insérez le haut-parleur dans le châssis de l'ordinateur.  4. Raccordez les câbles à la carte mère.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retrait d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur.3. Débranchez les câbles de la carte mère.  4. Retirez le haut-parleur du châssis de l'ordinateur.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu  Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur mini-tour Guide d'utilisation Microprocesseur Type de microprocesseur Les processeurs suivants sont pris en charge : l Intel® Core™ 2 l Intel vPro™ l Intel Celeron® Mémoire cache interne L1 : jusqu'à 128 Ko ;  L2 : jusqu'à 8 Mo (selon votre processeur) Mémoire Type SDRAM DDR2 667 MHz ou 800 MHz Connecteurs de mémoire 4 Modules de mémoire pris en charge 512 Mo, 1 Go ou 2 Go non ECC Mémoire minimale Bicanal : 1 Go Monocanal : 512 Mo REMARQUE : 512 Mo est la configuration d'origine minimale. Mémoire maximale Système d'exploitation 64 bits : 8 Go Système d'exploitation 32 bits : 4 Go Adresse BIOS F0000h Informations concernant votre ordinateur Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Intel Q35 Express avec ICH9DO Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresse 32 bits Canaux DMA Huit Niveaux d'interruption 24 Puce du BIOS (NVRAM) 32 Mo NIC Interface réseau intégrée avec support ASF 1.03 et  2.0, conformément à la définition DMTF Communication 10/100/1000 possible iAMT 3.0 Vidéo Type Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 3100 ou carte d'extension DVI dans le logement PCI Express x16 ou carte graphique PCI Express x16 Audio Type Audio ADI 1984 haute définitionConversion stéréo 24 bits analogique à numérique et 24 bits numérique  à analogique Contrôleurs Lecteurs Quatre contrôleurs SATA et un contrôleur eSATA  prenant chacun en charge un périphérique Bus d'extension Type de bus PCI 2.3 PCI Express 1.0A SATA 1.0A et 2.0 USB 2.0 Vitesse du bus PCI : 133 Mo/s PCI Express x16 : vitesse bidirectionnelle de 8 Go/s PCI Express x1 : 5 Gb/s SATA : 1,5 Gb/s et 3,0 Gb/s USB : 480 Mb/s Cartes : Cartes pleine hauteur prises en charge PCI : Connecteurs Deux Taille du connecteur Deux connecteurs à 164 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 32 bits PCI Express : Connecteurs Un x1 et un x16 Alimentation 10 W (x1) et 75 W (x16) maximum Taille du connecteur 36 broches (x1) et 164 broches (x16) Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) Une voie PCI Express (x1) et 16 voies PCI Express (x16) Lecteurs Accessible de l'intérieur l Deux disques durs SATA (ATA série) l Un lecteur de disquette de 3,5 pouces ou un lecteur multimédia l Deux lecteurs optiques SATA Accessible de l'extérieur Un lecteur eSATA (en option) Connecteurs Connecteurs externes : Série Connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550C Parallèle Connecteur à 25 broches (bidirectionnel) Vidéo Connecteur VGA à 15 broches Carte réseau Connecteur RJ45 Connecteur PS/2 en option avec adaptateur de port série secondaire Deux connecteurs mini-DIN à 6 broches USB Deux connecteurs de panneau avant et six connecteurs de panneau arrière conformes à la  norme USB 2.0 Audio Deux connecteurs pour la ligne d'entrée/le  microphone et la ligne de sortie ; deux connecteurs en face avant pour le casque et le microphone Connecteurs sur la carte mère : SATA Quatre connecteurs à 7 broches eSATA Un connecteur à 7 broches Lecteur de disquette Connecteur à 34 brochesSérie Connecteur à 12 broches pour la carte port série  PS/2 secondaire en option Ventilateur Connecteur à 5 broches PCI 2.2 Trois connecteurs à 120 broches PCI Express Un connecteur à 120 broches (x16) Panneau avant Connecteur à 40 broches Combinaisons de touches Sous Microsoft® Windows® XP, affiche la fenêtre  Sécurité de Windows. En mode MS-DOS®, redémarre (réamorce) l'ordinateur.  ou  Démarre la configuration intégrée du système (au  démarrage uniquement). Démarre automatiquement l'ordinateur à partir de  l'environnement réseau spécifié par l'environnement  d'amorçage distant (PXE) plutôt qu'à partir d'un des  périphériques indiqués dans l'option Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) du programme de  configuration du système (utilisable pendant le  démarrage uniquement). ou Affiche un menu de périphérique d'amorçage qui  permet à l'utilisateur d'entrer un périphérique pour  un amorçage unique (au démarrage uniquement)  ainsi que des options permettant d'exécuter les  diagnostics sur le disque dur et sur le système.

Affiche l'écran des paramètres de l'interface  Management Engine BIOS Extension qui vous permet de modifier ces paramètres Contrôles et voyants Bouton d'alimentation Bouton poussoir Voyant d'alimentation Voyant vert — Vert clignotant en mode de mise en veille ; vert fixe à l'état de marche. Voyant orange — Orange clignotant indique un problème concernant un périphérique installé ;  orange fixe indique un problème d'alimentation  interne (reportez-vous à la section Problèmes  d'alimentation). Voyant d'accès au disque dur Vert Voyant de la liaison (à l'avant du châssis) Vert fixe en cas de connexion réseau Voyant d'intégrité de la liaison (sur la carte réseau  intégrée) Voyant vert pour une opération de 10 Mb ; voyant  orange pour une opération de 100 Mb ; voyant jaune  pour une opération de 1000 Mb (1 Gb) Voyant d'activité (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Voyant jaune clignotant Voyants de diagnostic Quatre voyants sur le panneau avant (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic). Voyant d'alimentation de veille AUX_PWR sur la carte mère Alimentation Bloc d'alimentation en CC : REMARQUE : La consommation électrique générée  par une source d'alimentation en CA peut être nulle  lorsque l'ordinateur est débranché de cette source  d'alimentation L'ordinateur tire cependant une quantité minimale d'énergie de la pile bouton interne,  même lorsqu'il ne tire pas d'énergie de la source  d'alimentation en CA. Consommation en watts 305 W Dissipation de chaleur 1041 BTU/h REMARQUE : La dissipation de chaleur est calculée  suivant la valeur nominale de la consommation du bloc d'alimentation.Retour à la page Contenu Tension Blocs d'alimentation à sélection manuelle—90 à 135 V  à 60 Hz ; 180 à 265 V à 50 Hz Pile de secours Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 41,4 cm (16,3 pouces) Largeur 18,5 cm (7,3 pouces) Profondeur 43,9 cm (17,3 pouces) Poids 12,34 kg (27,2 livres) Environnement Température : Fonctionnement 10 ° à 35 °C (50 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Humidité relative 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,25 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 0,5 octave/min Stockage 0,5 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 1 octave/min Chocs maximaux : Fonctionnement Demi-impulsion sinusoïdale inférieure avec une  modification de la vélocité de 50,8 cm/s (20 pouces/s) Stockage Onde carrée moyenne de 27 G avec un changement  de vitesse de 508 cm/s (200 pouces/s) Altitude : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)Retour à la page Contenu Fonctions Microsoft® Windows®  Guide d'utilisation Transfert d'informations à un nouvel ordinateur Configuration d'un réseau familial et d'entreprise Transfert d'informations à un nouvel ordinateur  Vous pouvez utiliser les « Assistants » de votre système d'exploitation pour transférer des fichiers et toutes autres données d'un ordinateur à l'autre, par  exemple d'un ancien ordinateur à un nouvel ordinateur. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la section suivante correspondant au système  d'exploitation fonctionnant sur votre ordinateur. Microsoft® Windows® XP L'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres du système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows XP permet de déplacer les données d'un ordinateur source à  un nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que : l Messages e-mail l Paramètres de la barre d'outils l Tailles de fenêtre l Signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données à un nouvel ordinateur en utilisant une connexion réseau ou série, ou les stocker sur un support amovible, comme un CD  inscriptible. Pour transférer des informations à un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez  utiliser le support Operating System en option ou créer un disque Assistant à l'aide de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le support Operating System  Pour préparer un nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers : 1. Ouvrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Accessoires® Outils système® Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2. Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur® Suivant. 4. Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD- ROM de Windows XP® Suivant. 5. Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce  moment. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1. Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le support Operating System pour Windows XP. 2. Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3. Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres® Suivant. 4. Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur® Suivant. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez transférer les informations d'un ancien ordinateur à un nouvel ordinateur en connectant directement un câble série aux ports  d'entrée/sortie (E/S) des deux ordinateurs. Pour le transfert de données par connexion série, vous devez accéder à l'utilitaire Connexions réseau depuis  le Panneau de configuration et passer par des étapes de configuration supplémentaires, comme le paramétrage d'une connexion avancée et la  désignation de l'ordinateur hôte et invité. Pour des instructions sur la configuration d'une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances de  Microsoft Article nº 305621, intitulé How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP (Comment configurer une connexion à  câble directe entre deux ordinateurs sous Windows XP). Ces informations peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. REMARQUE : Le support Operating system est requis. Toutefois, ce support est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les  ordinateurs.5. Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur le mode de transfert souhaité.  6. Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 7. Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données au nouvel ordinateur : 1. Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur du nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2. Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Une fois tous les paramètres et fichiers appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3. Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.  Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support Operating System  Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support Operating System, il faut créer un disque Assistant qui va permettre la création  d'un fichier d'image de sauvegarde pour supports amovibles. Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de Windows XP et suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Ouvrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Accessoires® Outils système® Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2. Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur® Suivant. 4. Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je souhaite créer un disque Assistant dans le lecteur suivant® Suivant. 5. Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'un CD inscriptible, puis cliquez sur OK. 6. Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant. 7. Allez à votre ancien ordinateur.  Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1. Insérez le disque Assistant dans l'ancien ordinateur.  2. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Exécuter. 3. Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz (pour le support amovible approprié) et cliquez sur OK. 4. Dans l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur® Suivant. 6. Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur le mode de transfert de votre choix. 7. Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Lorsque les informations sont copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8. Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1. Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur du nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2. Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Une fois tous les paramètres et fichiers appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3. Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.  Microsoft Windows Vista® 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista,  , puis sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres® Lancer le transfert de fichiers et de paramètres Windows.  2. Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur, cliquez sur Continuer. 3. Cliquez sur Lancer un nouveau transfert ou Continuer un transfert en cours. Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran par l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres Windows. Configuration d'un réseau familial et d'entreprise  Connexion à une carte réseau Pour connecter un câble de réseau : 1. Connectez le câble de réseau au connecteur de carte réseau à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  Insérez le câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez dessus doucement pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2. Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble de réseau sur un périphérique réseau.  Assistant Configuration réseau Windows XP L'Assistant Configuration réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP vous guide au cours de la procédure de partage des fichiers, des  imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre ordinateurs présents au sein d'un réseau familial ou d'une petite entreprise. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes® Accessoires® Communications, puis sur Assistant Configuration réseau. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, recherchez sur le site support.dell.com le document n° 154781 (What Are The Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™ Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System? (Quelles sont les différentes méthodes pour transférer des fichiers de mon ancien ordinateur à mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP ?)). REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base de connaissances Dell™. REMARQUE : Branchez le câble de réseau dans le connecteur de carte réseau du panneau arrière. Ne branchez pas le câble de réseau dans le  connecteur de modem du panneau arrière. Ne le branchez pas non plus dans une prise jack téléphonique murale.2. Sur l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Configuration réseau, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. 4. Terminez la liste de vérifications et les préparations requises.  5. Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Windows Vista Pour modifier votre configuration réseau sous Microsoft® Windows Vista® Vista : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista,  , puis sur Réseau® Centre de partage et réseau.  2. Cliquez sur Configurer une connexion ou un réseau. 3. Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau à établir et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  4. Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez la fenêtre Centre de partage et réseau.  Retour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet entraîne l'activation du pare-feu intégré  fourni avec Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) ou ultérieur.Retour à la page Contenu Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur Guide d'utilisation Ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau et compacts Ordinateurs ultra compacts Ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau et compacts 1. Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés et pliez-les de sorte qu'ils ne gênent pas.  Tirez doucement les câbles d'alimentation vers vous afin qu'ils ne restent pas bloqués sous les lecteurs. 2. Vérifiez que vous n'avez rien oublié à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  3. Pour remettre en place le capot : a. Alignez le bas du capot sur les languettes de charnière situées le long du bord inférieur de l'ordinateur.  b. Faites pivoter le capot vers le bas en utilisant les languettes de charnière comme leviers et fermez.  c. Enclenchez le capot en place en tirant vers l'arrière le loquet de fermeture du capot, puis en le relâchant, une fois le capot correctement installé.  d. Vérifiez que le capot est correctement installé avant de déplacer l'ordinateur.  4. Fixez le socle inclinable de l'ordinateur (le cas échéant). Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le socle.  5. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Après avoir retiré et remis en place le capot, le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis (en option sur certains ordinateurs), s'il a été installé et activé, fait  apparaître le message suivant à l'écran au prochain démarrage de l'ordinateur : ALERT! Cover was previously removed. (Alerte ! Le capot a déjà été retiré.) 6. Réinitialisez le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis sous Programme de configuration du système en passant le paramètre Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) sur On (Activé) ou On-Silent (Activé silencieux).  Ordinateurs ultra compacts 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le cache-câble, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la section Cache-câble (en option)). 3. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place : a. Tout en basculant légèrement le capot, alignez celui-ci sur la bande de retenue située à l'arrière du système.  b. Faites glisser le capot de l'ordinateur vers l'arrière jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si un mot de passe administrateur a été attribué par une autre personne, contactez votre administrateur réseau pour savoir comment  réinitialiser le détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Avant de toucher les composants situés à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, mettez-vous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte.  Pendant votre intervention, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui  pourrait endommager les composants internes.Retour à la page Contenu PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte graphique peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir assez longtemps avant de le toucher. 1 bouton de fermetureRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Cartes Cartes Votre ordinateur Dell™ prend en charge un adaptateur de port série PS/2 et fournit les connecteurs suivants pour les cartes PCI et PCI Express : l Un logement demi-hauteur pour carte PCI l Un logement demi-hauteur pour carte PCI Express x16 Cartes PCI Installation d'une carte PCI 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur et faites pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir l'homologation  de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussière et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de maintenir un flux d'air  qui refroidit votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur Dell n'utilise que des logements PCI et PCI Express. Les cartes ISA ne sont pas prises en charge. REMARQUE : Pour connaître les emplacements des cartes PCI, reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère.4. Si vous installez une nouvelle carte, retirez la plaque de recouvrement pour libérer un connecteur de carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 6. 5. Si vous remplacez une carte déjà installée dans l'ordinateur, retirez-la. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 6. 6. Préparez la carte à installer.  7. Placez la carte dans le connecteur, puis appuyez dessus fermement. Assurez-vous que la carte est bien engagée.  8. Avant de refermer le loquet de retenue de la carte, assurez-vous que : l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que le guide d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 9. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). 1 languette de retenue 2 loquet de retenue de carte 3 carte 4 connecteur de bord de carte 5 connecteur de carte PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur lorsqu'elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger  d'un choc électrique, assurez-vous de bien débrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'installer des cartes.  REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, la création de  connexions internes et la personnalisation de la carte pour l'ordinateur. 1 carte engagée 2 carte mal engagée  3 plaque dans le logement 4 plaque à l'extérieur du logement10. Branchez tout câble devant être connecté à la carte.  11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 12. Si vous avez installé une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated Audio (Audio intégré) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système. b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs de la carte son. Ne connectez pas les périphériques audio externes au connecteur  ligne d'entrée situé sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Connecteurs du panneau arrière). 13. Si vous avez installé une carte réseau et souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated NIC (Carte NIC intégrée) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Reliez le câble de réseau aux connecteurs de la carte réseau. Ne connectez pas le câble de réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau  arrière de l'ordinateur.  14. Installez les pilotes requis pour la carte en vous référant aux instructions de la documentation.  Retrait d'une carte PCI 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur et faites pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. 4. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte.  5. Saisissez la carte par ses angles supérieurs et retirez-la du connecteur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. REMARQUE : Consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte pour des informations sur le câblage approprié. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. AVIS : Si vous désactivez la carte réseau intégrée, vous ne disposerez pas de la fonctionnalité AMT. REMARQUE : Pour connaître les emplacements des cartes PCI, reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère.6. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture de connecteur de carte vide.  7. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 8. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi toutes les cartes restantes. 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 10. Désinstallez le pilote de la carte. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la carte.  11. Si vous avez retiré une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated Audio (Audio intégré) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs audio situés sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  12. Si vous avez retiré un connecteur de carte réseau :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated NIC (Carte NIC intégrée) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  Cartes PCI Express et DVI Votre ordinateur prend en charge une carte PCI Express x16 demi-hauteur. Si vous remplacez une carte PCI Express par un autre type de carte PCI Express, supprimez le pilote actuel de la carte du système d'exploitation. Consultez la  documentation livrée avec la carte pour des informations supplémentaires. Installation d'une carte PCI Express x16 ou DVI 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur et faites pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. 4. Si vous installez une nouvelle carte PCI Express x16 ou une nouvelle carte DVI, retirez la languette métallique pour libérer une ouverture du connecteur  de carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 5. 5. Si vous remplacez une carte PCI Express x16 ou DVI, retirez la carte (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'une carte PCI Express x16 ou DVI). Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 6. 6. Préparez la carte à installer.  1 languette de retenue 2 loquet de retenue de carte 3 carte PCI 4 connecteur de bord de carte 5 connecteur de carte REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte pour des informations sur le câblage approprié. REMARQUE : Pour connaître les emplacements des cartes PCI, reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère.7. Placez la carte dans le connecteur, puis appuyez dessus fermement. Assurez-vous que la carte est bien engagée.  PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur lorsqu'elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger  d'un choc électrique, assurez-vous de bien débrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'installer des cartes.  REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, la création de  connexions internes et la personnalisation de la carte pour l'ordinateur. 1 carte PCI Express x16 2 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 1 carte PCI Express x16 DVI 2 connecteur de carte DVI 3 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 1 carte engagée 2 carte mal engagée  3 plaque dans le logement 4 plaque à l'extérieur du logement8. Branchez tout câble devant être connecté à la carte.  9. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 10. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). 11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 12. Si vous avez installé une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated Audio (Audio intégré) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs de la carte son. Ne connectez pas les périphériques audio externes au connecteur  ligne d'entrée situé sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Connecteurs du panneau arrière). 13. Si vous avez installé une carte réseau et souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated NIC (Carte NIC intégrée) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur Off (Désactivé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Reliez le câble réseau aux connecteurs de la carte réseau. Ne connectez pas le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière  de l'ordinateur. 14. Installez les pilotes requis pour la carte en vous référant aux instructions de la documentation.  Retrait d'une carte PCI Express x16 ou DVI 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur et faites pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. 4. Si nécessaire, déconnectez tout câble relié à la carte.  5. Appuyez sur le levier avec le pouce afin de libérer la languette de fixation.  Si vous retirez une carte PCI Express x16, passez à l'étape 6. Si vous retirez une carte DVI, passez à l'étape 7. 6. Tout en appuyant sur le levier, tirez la carte vers le haut et retirez-la de son connecteur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. REMARQUE : Consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte pour des informations sur le câblage approprié. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur.7. Tout en appuyant sur le levier, tirez la languette de retrait amovible vers le haut et retirez la carte de son connecteur. 8. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture de connecteur de carte vide.  9. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 10. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi toutes les cartes restantes. 11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 1 carte PCI Express x16 2 levier 3 emplacement de fixation (uniquement sur certaines cartes) 4 languette de fixation 5 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 1 carte PCI Express x16 DVI 2 languette de retrait amovible 3 connecteur de carte DVI 4 levier 5 encoche de fixation 6 languette de fixation 7 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement.12. Désinstallez le pilote de la carte. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la carte.  13. Si vous avez retiré une carte son :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated Audio (Audio intégré) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez les périphériques audio externes aux connecteurs audio situés sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. 14. Si vous avez retiré un connecteur de carte réseau :  a. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Integrated NIC (Carte NIC intégrée) dans le groupe Onboard Devices (Périphériques intégrés), puis attribuez à ce paramètre la valeur On (Activé) (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). b. Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur réseau intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  Adaptateur de port série PS/2 Installation d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur et faites pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. 4. Retirez la plaque de recouvrement (le cas échéant).  5. Alignez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 sur le logement de retenue et appuyez fermement dessus. Vérifiez que l'adaptateur est inséré à  fond dans le logement. 6. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 7. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi la/les carte(s). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Consultez la documentation fournie avec l'adaptateur pour des informations sur la façon de configurer un adaptateur, d'établir les  connexions internes, ou de personnaliser l'adaptateur pour votre ordinateur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus des cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes peuvent empêcher la fermeture  correcte du capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement.8. Branchez le câble de l'adaptateur sur le connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 (PS2/SERIAL2) de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section  Composants de la carte mère). 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur. Retrait d'un adaptateur de port série PS/2  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez avec précaution la languette de retenue située sur le loquet de retenue de la carte depuis l'intérieur pour faire pivoter le loquet en position  ouverte. Faites pivoter le loquet jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position ouverte.  4. Débranchez le câble du port série PS/2 de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère). 5. Retirez le support de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 de son logement.  6. Si vous retirez définitivement l'adaptateur, installez une plaque de recouvrement dans l'ouverture du connecteur de carte vide.  7. Avant de fermer le mécanisme de retenue de la carte, vérifiez que :  l Les parties supérieures des cartes et les plaques de recouvrement sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. l L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la plaque s'adapte au guide d'alignement.  8. Fermez le loquet de retenue pour le remettre en place et fixer ainsi toutes les cartes restantes. 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). eSATA 1 languette de retenue 2 loquet de retenue de l'adaptateur 3 languette d'adaptateur de port série 4 connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série 5 connecteur de l'adaptateur de port série sur la carte mère  (PS2/SERIAL2) REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'adaptateur de port série PS/2 pour obtenir des informations sur le branchement des câbles. REMARQUE : L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir  l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. Ces plaques permettent d'éviter l'accumulation de poussières et de saletés sur votre ordinateur et de  maintenir un flux d'air qui refroidit votre ordinateur.eSATA permet des vitesses de transfert des données SATA intégrales (3 Go/sec) entre un lecteur et le jeu de puces, approximativement six fois le débit de  données de USB. eSATA sur votre ordinateur prend également en charge l'enfichage à chaud. L'enfichage à chaud permet la détection de périphériques sans arrêt de l'ordinateur  avant la connexion du périphérique à l'ordinateur. Une fois le périphérique connecté, le système d'exploitation reconnaît automatiquement la modification.  L'ordinateur doit cependant être éteint avant le retrait ou le remplacement. Installation d'un lecteur eSATA 1. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 2. Retirez le cache du logement de carte que vous utilisez pour le connecteur eSATA. 3. Insérez la plaque dans l'ouverture du connecteur eSATA.  4. Branchez l'extrémité libre du câble eSATA dans le connecteur eSATA de la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère). 5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 6. Démarrez votre ordinateur et ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). Utilisez l'option esata pour activer le lecteur eSATA. Retour à la page Contenu PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur.Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Processeur Processeur Retrait du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Desserrez les vis imperdables situées de chaque côté de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur.  4. Faites pivoter l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur vers le haut et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Posez le dissipateur de chaleur en plaçant la partie contenant  la pâte thermoconductible vers le haut.  5. Ouvrez le cache du processeur en faisant glisser le levier de dégagement depuis le dessous du loquet de fermeture central du support. Ensuite, tirez le  levier vers l'arrière pour libérer le processeur.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Malgré la présence d'un blindage en plastique, l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une  utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir avant de le manipuler. 1 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 2 vis imperdables dans logement (2) AVIS : À moins qu'un nouveau dissipateur de chaleur ne soit requis par le nouveau processeur, réutilisez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur initial  lorsque vous remplacez le processeur. 6. Retirez doucement le processeur de son support. Maintenez le levier de dégagement ouvert pour que le support puisse recevoir le nouveau processeur. Installation du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Déballez le nouveau processeur en prenant garde de ne pas toucher sa face inférieure.  4. Si le levier de dégagement du support n'est pas complètement ouvert, ouvrez-le. 5. Alignez les encoches avant et arrière du processeur sur les encoches correspondantes du support.  6. Alignez les angles de la broche 1 du processeur et du support. 1 loquet de fermeture central 2 cache du processeur 3 processeur 4 support 5 levier de dégagement AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. AVIS : Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. AVIS : Le processeur doit être correctement installé dans son support afin d'éviter de l'endommager de façon définitive ainsi que l'ordinateur lorsque  vous allumerez ce dernier.7. Placez doucement le processeur à l'intérieur du support et vérifiez qu'il est correctement positionné.  8. Une fois le processeur correctement installé dans le support, fermez le cache du processeur.  Vérifiez que la languette du cache du processeur est placée sous le loquet de fermeture central du support.  9. Faites pivoter le levier de dégagement du support en position de fermeture et enclenchez-le pour sécuriser le processeur.  10. Nettoyez la pâte thermoconductible au bas du dissipateur de chaleur.  11. Appliquez la nouvelle pâte thermoconductible au-dessus du processeur. 12. Installez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur : a. Placez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur sur le support de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur. b. Faites pivoter l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur vers la base de l'ordinateur et serrez les deux vis imperdables. 1 cache du processeur 6 levier de dégagement 2 languette 7 encoche d'alignement avant 3 processeur 8 support et indicateur de la broche 1 du processeur 4 support du processeur 9 encoche d'alignement arrière 5 loquet de fermeture central AVIS : Pour éviter tout dommage, assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement aligné sur le support et n'exercez pas une pression excessive  quand vous le mettez en place. AVIS : Veillez à appliquer une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible. Une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible est essentielle pour assurer un thermoliage  adéquat, ce qui est obligatoire pour un fonctionnement optimal du processeur. AVIS : Vérifiez que le dissipateur de chaleur est correctement installé.13. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retour à la page Contenu 1 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 2 support de l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 3 vis imperdables dans logement (2)Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Lecteurs Lecteurs Votre ordinateur prend en charge : l Un disque dur SATA (ATA série) l Un lecteur de disquette ou lecteur de carte multimédia ultramince l Un lecteur optique SATA ultramince l Un lecteur eSATA Consignes générales d'installation Les connecteurs SATA de la carte mère sont identifiés comme suit : SATA0 et SATA1. Les disques durs doivent être raccordés au connecteur SATA0. Les autres  périphériques SATA (lecteur optique par exemple) doivent être raccordés aux connecteurs SATA1. Par exemple, si vous disposez d'un disque dur SATA et d'un  lecteur optique SATA, raccordez le disque dur au connecteur SATA0 et le lecteur optique SATA au connecteur SATA1. (Reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère pour prendre connaissance de l'emplacement des connecteurs SATA sur la carte mère). Connexion des câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous installez un lecteur, vous raccordez deux câbles (un câble d'alimentation CC et un câble d'interface de données) à l'arrière du lecteur.  Connecteurs d'interface de données  1 baie de lecteur de 3,5 pouces pour lecteur de disquette ou lecteur de carte multimédia optionnel) 2 lecteur optique ultramince 3 unité de disque dur Connecteurs série ATA  (SATA)Connecteurs de câble d'alimentation  Connexion et déconnexion de câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous retirez un câble à l'aide d'une languette de retrait, saisissez la languette de retrait de couleur et tirez jusqu'à ce que le connecteur se libère. Lorsque vous connectez et déconnectez un câble de données SATA, tenez le câble par le connecteur noir de chaque côté. Disque dur Retrait d'un disque dur 1 connecteur du câble d'interface de données 2 connecteur d'interface de données 1 câble d'alimentation 2 connecteur d'entrée d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse.1. Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos fichiers avant de commencer cette procédure.  2. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier qu'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 4. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la carte mère soit dans la partie inférieure de l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  6. Appuyez sur les deux languettes de fixation bleues situées de chaque côté du disque dur et faites glisser le disque dur vers le haut pour le retirer de  l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez le lecteur de l'ordinateur sans tirer sur les câbles.  8. Déconnectez du lecteur le câble d'alimentation et de données.  9. Déconnectez le câble du ventilateur du disque dur de la carte mère.  AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble. 1 languettes de fixation (2) 2 unité de disque dur 1 câble d'alimentation 2 câble de données SATAInstallation d'un disque dur 1. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier qu'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  2. Déballez le nouveau disque dur et préparez-le pour l'installation. 3. Si votre disque dur de remplacement n'est pas équipé d'un support de direction en plastique, retirez le support du disque dur existant en le  décliquetant du disque dur.  4. Connectez le câble du ventilateur du disque dur sur la carte mère.  5. Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur.  6. Assurez-vous que tous les connecteurs sont correctement câblés et fermement fixés.  7. Positionnez le disque dur et faites-le glisser jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse. 1 languettes de retenue (2) 2 unité de disque dur 3 support du disque dur 1 câble d'alimentation 2 câble de données SATA8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 9. Si le lecteur que vous venez d'installer est le lecteur principal, insérez un support amorçable dans le lecteur d'amorçage.  10. Allumez l'ordinateur. 11. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et mettez à jour l'option du port SATA sous la liste d'options Drives (Lecteurs) (reportez-vous à la  section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système). 12. Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  13. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre lecteur. 14. Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 15. Installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur.  Remplacement d'un ventilateur de disque dur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un disque dur). 4. Retournez l'ordinateur de façon à ce que le ventilateur du disque dur soit visible en bas du support de lecteur.  5. Pour retirer le ventilateur du disque dur : a. Soulevez la languette de retenue située sur le panneau arrière du ventilateur.  b. Faites pivoter le ventilateur dans le sens opposé à celui indiqué par la flèche figurant sur le panneau arrière du ventilateur.  c. Retirez le ventilateur et son panneau arrière du support du disque dur.  1 languettes de retenue (2) 2 unité de disque dur REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation.6. Pour remettre le ventilateur du disque dur en place : a. Retournez le ventilateur de façon à avoir son panneau arrière vers le haut, puis alignez le triangle, situé sur le panneau arrière du ventilateur,  sur le triangle correspondant situé à l'arrière du support de disque dur.  b. Faites pivoter le ventilateur et son panneau arrière dans le sens indiqué par la flèche située sur le panneau arrière du ventilateur.  7. Installez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section Installation d'un disque dur). 8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Lecteur optique Retrait d'un lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la carte mère soit dans la partie inférieure de l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  4. Tirez vers le haut le loquet de fermeture du lecteur et faites glisser celui-ci vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Puis, soulevez le lecteur pour le retirer de  l'ordinateur. 1 languette de retenue du ventilateur 2 ventilateur avec panneau arrière 3 câble d'alimentation 4 support du disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble.5. Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation et de données de la partie arrière du lecteur.  6. Retirez le lecteur et remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Installation d'un lecteur optique 1. Déballez le lecteur et préparez-le pour l'installation. 2. Consultez la documentation fournie avec le lecteur pour vérifier si ce dernier est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 4. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Connectez le câble d'alimentation et de données au lecteur.  1 loquet de fermeture du lecteur 2 lecteur optique REMARQUE : La configuration des câbles de données et d'alimentation du lecteur optique slimline installé sur votre ordinateur se fait de l'une de  deux façons, tel qu'illustré ci-dessous. 1 lecteur optique 2 câble de données 3 câble d'alimentation REMARQUE : Les câbles de données et d'alimentation du lecteur optique slimline installé sur votre ordinateur sont configurés de l'une de deux  façons, tel qu'illustré ci-dessous.6. Positionnez le disque dur et faites-le glisser jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  7. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 8. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 9. Consultez la documentation de l'unité de disque dur pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour son fonctionnement.  10. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et sélectionnez la valeur appropriée pour l'option Drive (Lecteur) (reportez-vous à la section  Programme de configuration du système). 11. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics. Lecteur de disquette Retrait d'un lecteur de disquette 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la carte mère soit dans la partie inférieure de l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  4. Retirez le lecteur optique et mettez-le de côté (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 5. Si vous retirez un lecteur de disquette, tirez la languette de retenue du câble vers le haut pour le déverrouiller.  6. Soulevez avec précaution le câble de données pour le retirer du connecteur de bord du câble de données du lecteur de disquette.  1 lecteur optique 2 câble de données 3 câble d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble.7. Déconnectez le câble de données de la carte mère.  8. Tirez le loquet du lecteur vers le haut et faites glisser le lecteur de disquette ou le lecteur de carte multimédia vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Puis,  soulevez le lecteur pour le retirer. 9. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Installation d'un lecteur de disquette 1. Si vous : l installez un nouveau lecteur de disquette, retirez le cache du panneau des lecteurs l remplacez un lecteur, retirez le lecteur de disquette (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un lecteur de disquette). 2. Alignez les vis situées sur le lecteur sur les logements de support de l'ordinateur. Positionnez le lecteur et faites-le glisser jusqu'à ce que vous  entendiez un clic. 3. Insérez le câble de données dans la languette de retenue du câble du lecteur de disquette et appuyez sur la languette jusqu'à ce que le câble  s'enclenche en position. 4. Introduisez le câble de données dans le connecteur de la carte mère.  1 languette de retenue du câble 2 connecteur de bord du câble de données 1 lecteur de disquette 2 vis (3) 3 logements de support (3)5. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 6. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 7. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 8. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et utilisez l'option Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) pour activer votre nouveau lecteur de disquette (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système). Consultez la documentation de l'unité de disque dur pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour son fonctionnement. 9. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Lecteur de carte multimédia Retrait d'un lecteur de carte multimédia  1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la carte mère soit dans la partie inférieure de l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  3. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 4. Retirez le lecteur optique et mettez-le de côté (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 5. Retirez le câble du connecteur du lecteur de carte multimédia.  6. Retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un disque dur). 7. Débranchez le câble.  1 languette de retenue du câble 2 connecteur de bord du câble de données du lecteur de  disquette PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise secteur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Ne retirez pas le lecteur de l'ordinateur en tirant sur les câbles. Vous pourriez endommager les câbles et les connecteurs de câble.8. Tirez le loquet du lecteur vers le haut et faites glisser le lecteur de carte multimédia vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Soulevez ensuite le lecteur de carte  multimédia pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.  9. Remettez le disque dur en place (reportez-vous à la section Installation d'un disque dur). 10. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Remplacement d'un lecteur de carte multimédia  1. Si vous remplacez un lecteur de carte multimédia, retirez-le (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un lecteur de carte multimédia), et passez à l'étape 3. 2. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur de carte multimédia, effectuez les étapes suivantes avant de passer à l'étape 3: a. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. b. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). c. Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la carte mère soit dans la partie inférieure de l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  d. Retirez le cache du panneau des lecteurs 3. Alignez les vis, situées sur le lecteur de carte multimédia, sur les logements du support de l'ordinateur et positionnez avec précaution le lecteur dans la  baie jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. 1 câble de données du lecteur de carte multimédia 1 lecteur de carte multimédia 2 vis (3) 3 guides de support (3)4. Branchez le câble dans les connecteurs situés sur le lecteur de carte multimédia et la carte mère.  5. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur optique). 6. Vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles et enroulez et placez ces derniers de manière à permettre le passage du flux d'air en provenance du  ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 7. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 8. Consultez la documentation de l'unité de disque dur pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour son fonctionnement.  9. Vérifiez que votre ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Retour à la page Contenu 1 câble de données du lecteur de carte multimédiaRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Panneau d'E/S Panneau d'E/S Retrait du panneau d'E/S 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Le cas échéant, retirez le lecteur optique et le lecteur de disquette des baies d'unité (reportez-vous à la section Lecteurs). 4. Retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un disque dur). 5. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur (reportez-vous à la section Processeur). 6. Retirez la carte mère.  l Dévissez toutes les vis de retenue situées sur la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur compact). l Soulevez avec précaution la carte mère pour la retirer du châssis. 7. Retirez le ventilateur avant : Appuyez sur la languette qui fixe le ventilateur sur la base intérieure de l'ordinateur et soulevez le ventilateur pour le  retirer de l'ordinateur ; mettez le ventilateur de côté dans le châssis.  8. Retirez les câbles du panneau d'E/S.  Mémorisez bien la façon dont les câbles sont acheminés avant de les mettre de côté, de manière à pouvoir les remettre en place correctement. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : Vous devez également retirer la base du dissipateur de chaleur. 1 carte à DEL 2 capteur de température  de l'air9. Retirez les câbles de la carte mère.  10. Depuis l'intérieur du capot, retirez la vis de montage qui fixe le panneau d'E/S à l'ordinateur.  11. Bougez le panneau d'E/S vers l'avant et l'arrière pour dégager ses languettes circulaires des deux trous du châssis qui permettent de le fixer.  12. Retirez le panneau d'E/S de l'ordinateur. Remise en place du panneau d'E/S Pour remettre en place le panneau d'E/S, suivez la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. Retour à la page Contenu 3 connecteur du câble d'E/S 4 vis de montage 5 panneau d'E/S REMARQUE : Utilisez les guides situés sur le support du panneau d'E/S pour positionner correctement le panneau, puis l'encoche située sur le support  du panneau d'E/S pour installer la carte.Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Bloc d'alimentation Bloc d'alimentation Remplacement du bloc d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Le cas échéant, retirez le lecteur optique (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un lecteur optique). 4. Le cas échéant, retirez le lecteur de disquette ou le lecteur de carte multimédia (reportez-vous à la section Lecteur de disquette). 5. Débranchez les câbles d'alimentation en CC des lecteurs et de la carte mère.  6. Retirez les trois vis qui fixent le bloc d'alimentation au châssis de l'ordinateur.  7. Poussez le module d'alimentation sur environ 2,5 cm (1 pouce) vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. 8. Soulevez le bloc d'alimentation et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. 9. Faites glisser le nouveau bloc d'alimentation dans son emplacement. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Avant de débrancher les câbles de la carte mère et des lecteurs, mémorisez la façon dont ils sont acheminés sous les languettes du  cadre de l'ordinateur. Vous devrez acheminer ces câbles correctement lorsque vous les remettrez en place, pour éviter qu'ils ne se coincent ou  qu'ils ne soient mal positionnés. 1 bloc d'alimentation 2 vis de montage10. Remettez en place les quatre vis qui fixent le bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière du châssis de l'ordinateur.  11. Reconnectez les câbles d'alimentation en CC à la carte mère et aux lecteurs (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère pour prendre connaissance des emplacements des connecteurs). 12. Remettez le lecteur de disquette ou le lecteur de carte multimédia en place (reportez-vous à la section Installation d'un lecteur de disquette). 13. Remettez le lecteur optique en place (reportez-vous à la section Installation d'un lecteur optique). 14. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 15. Connectez le câble d'alimentation en CA au connecteur d'alimentation en CA du bloc d'alimentation.  16. Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Connecteurs d'alimentation en CC Broche P1 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC AVIS : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le bloc d'alimentation installé sur votre ordinateur est l'une des deux options, tel qu'illustré ci-dessous. Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +3,3 VCC Orange 2 +3,3 VCC Orange 3 GND Noir 4 VCC (+5 V) Rouge 5 GND Noir 6 VCC (+5 V) Rouge 7 GND Noir 8 PS_PWRGOOD* Gris 9 P5AUX Violet 10 V_12P0_DIG JauneBroche P2 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Broche P3 des connecteurs d'alimentation en CC Broche P5 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC 11 V_12P0_DIG Jaune 12 +3,3 V Orange 13 (en option) +3,3 V Orange 14 -12 V* Bleu 15 GND Noir 16 PWR_PS_ON Vert 17 GND Noir 18 GND Noir 19 GND Noir 20 NC NC 21 VCC (+5V) Rouge 22 VCC (+5V) Rouge 23 VCC (+5V) Rouge 24 GND Noir *Utilisez un câble 22 AWG au lieu de 18 AWG.  Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 GND Noir 2 GND Noir 3 +12 VCC Jaune 4 +12 VCC Jaune Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 18 AWG 1 +3,3 VCC Orange 2 GND Noir 3 +5 VCC Rouge 4 GND Noir 5 +12 VCC JauneBroche P6 du connecteur d'alimentation en CC Retour à la page Contenu Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 24 AWG 1 GND Noir 2 +5 VCC Rouge 3 S/O S/O 4 +3,3 VCC Orange Numéro de broche Nom du signal Câble 24 AWG 1 NC NC 2 +5 VCC Rouge 3 +5 VCC Rouge 4 NC NC 5 GND Noir 6 GND NoirRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Haut-parleurs Haut-parleurs Installation d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Insérez le haut-parleur dans le châssis de l'ordinateur.  4. Raccordez les câbles à la carte mère.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retrait d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez les câbles de la carte mère.  4. Retirez le haut-parleur du châssis de l'ordinateur.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur.5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur compact Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur compact  Microprocesseur Type de microprocesseur Les processeurs suivants sont pris en charge : l Intel® Core™ 2 l Intel vPro™ l Intel Celeron® Mémoire cache interne L1 : jusqu'à 128 Ko ;  L2 : jusqu'à 8 Mo (selon votre processeur) Mémoire Type SDRAM DDR2 667 MHz ou 800 MHz Connecteurs de mémoire 4 Modules de mémoire pris en charge 512 Mo, 1 Go ou 2 Go non ECC Mémoire minimale Bicanal : 1 Go ; Monocanal : 512 Mo Mémoire maximale Système d'exploitation 64 bits : 8 Go Système d'exploitation 32 bits : 4 Go Adresse BIOS F0000h Informations concernant votre ordinateur Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Intel Q35 Express avec ICH9DO Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresse 32 bits Canaux DMA Huit Niveaux d'interruption 24 Puce du BIOS (NVRAM) 32 Mo NIC Interface réseau intégrée avec support ASF 1.03 et  2.0, conformément à la définition DMTF Communication 10/100/1000 possible iAMT 3.0 Vidéo Type l Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 3100 (intégré  à la carte mère) l Le logement PCI Express x16 peut prendre en charge une carte graphique PCI Express ou DVI (pour la prise en charge de deux moniteurs)Audio Type Audio ADI 1984 haute définition Conversion stéréo 24 bits analogique à numérique et 24 bits numérique  à analogique Contrôleurs Lecteurs Deux contrôleurs SATA et un contrôleur eSATA  prenant chacun en charge un périphérique Bus d'extension Type de bus PCI 2.3 PCI Express 1.0A SATA 1.0A et 2.0 USB 2.0 Vitesse du bus PCI : 133 Mo/s PCI Express x16 : vitesse bidirectionnelle de 8 Go/s SATA : 1,5 Gb/s et 3,0 Gb/s USB : 480 Mb/s Cartes : Cartes demi-hauteur prises en charge PCI : Connecteur Un Taille du connecteur 120 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 32 bits PCI Express : Connecteur Un x16 Alimentation 25 W (maximum) Taille du connecteur 164 broches (x16) Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 16 voies PCI Express (x16) Lecteurs Accessible de l'extérieur Une baie pour lecteur de disquette ultramince ; une baie pour lecteur optique ultramince Accessible de l'intérieur Une baie de disque dur de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) Connecteurs Connecteurs externes : Série Connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550C Parallèle Connecteur à 25 broches (bidirectionnel) Connecteur PS/2 en option avec adaptateur de port série secondaire Deux connecteurs mini-DIN à 6 broches REMARQUE : Cette option utilise le logement PCI. Vidéo Connecteur VGA à 15 broches Carte réseau Connecteur RJ45 USB Deux connecteurs de panneau avant et six connecteurs de panneau arrière conformes à la  norme USB 2.0 Audio Deux connecteurs pour la ligne d'entrée/le  microphone et la ligne de sortie ; deux connecteurs en face avant pour le casque et le microphone Connecteurs sur la carte mère : USB interne Embase à 10 broches pour le lecteur de carte  multimédia en option (baie d'unité de 3,5 pouces) SATA Deux connecteurs à 7 brocheseSATA Un connecteur à 7 broches Lecteur de disquette Connecteur à 34 broches Série Connecteur à 12 broches pour la carte port série  secondaire en option Ventilateur Deux connecteurs à 5 broches PCI 2.3 Un connecteur à 120 broches PCI Express Un connecteur à 164 broches (x16) Panneau avant Connecteur à 40 broches Combinaisons de touches Sous Microsoft® Windows® XP, affiche la fenêtre  Sécurité de Windows ; en mode MS-DOS®, redémarre (réamorce) l'ordinateur.  ou  Démarre la configuration intégrée du système (au  démarrage uniquement) Démarre automatiquement l'ordinateur à partir de  l'environnement réseau spécifié par l'environnement  d'amorçage distant (PXE) plutôt qu'à partir d'un des  périphériques indiqués dans l'option Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) du programme de  configuration du système (utilisable au démarrage du  système uniquement) ou Affiche un menu de périphérique d'amorçage qui  permet à l'utilisateur d'entrer un périphérique pour  un amorçage ponctuel (utilisable au démarrage du  système uniquement) ainsi que des options  permettant d'exécuter les diagnostics sur le disque  dur et sur le système

Affiche l'écran des paramètres de l'interface  Management Engine BIOS Extension qui vous permet de modifier ces paramètres Contrôles et voyants Bouton d'alimentation Bouton poussoir Voyant d'alimentation Voyant vert — Vert clignotant en mode de veille ; vert fixe à l'état de marche. Voyant orange — Orange clignotant indique un problème concernant un périphérique installé ;  orange fixe indique un problème d'alimentation  interne (reportez-vous à la section Problèmes  d'alimentation.) Voyant d'accès au disque dur Vert Voyant de la liaison Vert fixe en cas de connexion réseau Voyant d'intégrité de la liaison (sur la carte réseau  intégrée) Voyant vert pour une opération de 10 Mb ; voyant  orange pour une opération de 100 Mb ; voyant jaune  pour une opération de 1000 Mb (1 Gb) Voyant d'activité (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Voyant jaune clignotant Voyants de diagnostic Quatre voyants sur le panneau avant (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Voyant d'alimentation de veille AUX_PWR sur la carte mère Alimentation  Bloc d'alimentation en CC : REMARQUE : La consommation électrique générée  par une source d'alimentation en CA peut être nulle  lorsque l'ordinateur est débranché de cette source  d'alimentation. L'ordinateur tire cependant une quantité minimale d'énergie de la pile bouton même  lorsqu'il ne tire pas d'énergie de la source  d'alimentation en CA. Consommation en watts 275 W Dissipation de chaleur 938 BTU/hRetour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : La dissipation de chaleur est calculée  suivant la valeur nominale de la consommation du bloc d'alimentation. Tension Blocs d'alimentation à sélection manuelle — 90 à 135  V à 50/60 Hz ; 180 à 265 V à 50/60 Hz Pile de secours Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 9,26 cm (3,65 pouces) Largeur 31,37 cm (12,35 pouces) Profondeur 34,03 cm (13,40 pouces) Poids 7,4 kg (16,4 livres) Environnement Température : Fonctionnement 10 ° à 35 °C (50 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Humidité relative 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,25 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 0,5 octave/min Stockage 0,5 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 1 octave/min Chocs maximaux : Fonctionnement Impulsion semi-sinusoïdale (partie inférieure) avec un  changement de vitesse de 50,8 cm/s (20 pouces/s) Stockage Onde carrée de 27 G avec un changement de vélocité  de 508 cm/s (200 pouces/s) Altitude : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)Dell™ OptiPlex™ 755 Guide d'utilisation Remarques, avis et précautions Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, OptiPlex, TravelLite, OpenManage et StrikeZone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, SpeedStep et Celeron sont des marques déposées et Core et vPro sont des marques d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows Vista et le bouton Démarrer de Windows  sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et  est utilisé par Dell Inc. sous licence. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En  tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell a fait en sorte que ce produit réponde aux normes de ce programme en matière de consommation énergétique. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèles: DCTR, DCNE, DCSM et DCCY Octobre 2007        Réf.: JN460        Rév. A01 Ordinateur compact À propos de votre ordinateur Recherche d'informations Ordinateur compact Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur compact  Fonctionnalités avancées  Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte Nettoyage de votre ordinateur Fonctions Microsoft® Windows® Dépannage Obtention d'aide Glossaire Garantie Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Retrait et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Cartes Lecteurs Processeur Panneau d'E/S Bloc d'alimentation Haut-parleurs Pile Remplacement de la carte mère  Mémoire Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour à la page Contenu Ordinateur compact Guide d'utilisation À propos de votre ordinateur compact Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur L'intérieur de votre ordinateur Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis Composants de la carte mère À propos de votre ordinateur compact  Vue frontale 1 connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'avant pour les périphériques  que vous connectez occasionnellement, comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo, ou pour les périphériques USB amorçables  (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système pour plus d'informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un périphérique  USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour  les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et le  clavier. 2 bouton d'alimentation Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour ne pas perdre de données, n'éteignez pas l'ordinateur en  appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du  système d'exploitation. Reportez-vous à la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur pour plus d'informations. AVIS : Si la fonctionnalité ACPI est activée sur votre système  d'exploitation, lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, l'ordinateur procède à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. 3 badge Dell Peut être tourné pour concorder avec l'orientation de votre ordinateur.  Pour le faire pivoter, placez vos doigts sur l'extérieur du badge,  appuyez fermement et faites tourner le badge. Vous pouvez également le faire pivoter à l'aide de l'encoche située vers le bas du  badge. 4 voyant LAN Indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau local) est établie. 5 voyants de diagnostic Ces voyants vous aident à résoudre les problèmes informatiques  d'après le code de diagnostic. Pour de plus amples informations,  reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. 6 voyant d'activité du  disque dur Ce voyant clignote rapidement lors de l'accès au disque dur. 7 voyant d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe, selon l'état  de fonctionnement : l Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint. l Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement.Vue arrière Connecteurs du panneau arrière l Vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie  d'énergie. l Orange clignotant ou fixe — Reportez-vous à la section  Problèmes d'alimentation. Pour quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le bouton  d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce périphérique est  configuré comme un périphérique de réveil dans le Gestionnaire de  périphériques Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes de  mise en veille et sur la façon de quitter un mode d'économie d'énergie,  reportez-vous à la section Gestion de l'alimentation sous Windows XP et Windows Vista. Reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux permettant de résoudre les problèmes  rencontrés sur votre ordinateur. 8 connecteur de casque Permet de connecter le casque et les haut-parleurs. 9 connecteur de microphone Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour brancher un microphone. 10 baie d'unité de  3,5 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur de disquette ultramince en option ou un lecteur de carte multimédia en option. 11 baie d'unité de  5,25 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur optique ultramince. Permet d'insérer un CD ou  un DVD (si cela est pris en charge). 1 logements de carte Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI ou  PCI Express installées, PS/2, eSATA, etc. 2 connecteurs du panneau arrière Branchez les périphériques série, USB et tout autre périphérique dans  les connecteurs appropriés (reportez-vous à la section Connecteurs du panneau arrière). 3 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez le câble d'alimentation. 4 sélecteur de  tension Votre ordinateur est muni d'un sélecteur de tension manuel. Pour ne  pas endommager un ordinateur doté d'un sélecteur de tension  manuel, réglez le commutateur sur la tension qui correspond le mieux  à l'alimentation en CA de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez : AVIS : Au Japon, le commutateur de sélection de tension doit être  réglé sur 115 V. Assurez-vous également que votre moniteur et tous ses  périphériques sont électriquement réglés pour fonctionner avec la  puissance en CA disponible dans votre zone géographique. 5 anneau pour cadenas Insérez un cadenas pour verrouiller le capot de l'ordinateur. 6 loquet de fermeture du capot Permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.1 connecteur parallèle Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une  imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à un  connecteur USB. REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est  automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte  installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la même  adresse. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la  section Options du programme de configuration du système. 2 voyant d'intégrité de  la liaison l Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau  10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le  réseau 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau  1 Gb/s (ou 1000 Gb/s) et l'ordinateur. l Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion  physique au réseau. 3 connecteur de carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large  bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une  prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large  bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de  carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un  déclic indique que le câble de réseau a été correctement installé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au  connecteur réseau. Pour que VPro fonctionne, le câble réseau doit être raccordé à la  carte NIC intégrée. Il est recommandé d'utiliser un câblage et des connecteurs de  catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de  catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s pour garantir un  fonctionnement fiable. 4 voyant d'activité  réseau Un voyant jaune clignote lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit  des données sur le réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut  donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 connecteur ligne de sortie Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie de couleur verte (disponible sur les ordinateurs avec système audio intégré) pour connecter  un casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs avec amplificateurs intégrés. 6 connecteur ligne d'entrée/microphone Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée/microphone (disponible sur  les ordinateurs ayant une carte son intégrée) pour raccorder un  appareil d'enregistrement/de lecture, tel qu'un lecteur de cassette, un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope ; ou un  microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée vocale  ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. 7 connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les  périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et  le clavier. 8 connecteur vidéo Branchez le câble du moniteur compatible VGA dans le connecteur  bleu. REMARQUE : Si vous avez acheté une carte graphique  optionnelle, ce connecteur sera recouvert d'un cache. Connectez votre moniteur au connecteur sur la carte graphique. Ne retirez pas le cache. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez une carte graphique capable de gérer deux moniteurs, utilisez le câble Y fourni avec l'ordinateur. 9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port série. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la section  Options du programme de configuration du système.Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Si vous avez installé un cadenas dans l'anneau prévu à cet effet sur le panneau arrière, retirez-le. 3. Repérez le loquet de fermeture du capot illustré ci-dessous. Puis, faites glisser le loquet vers l'arrière tout en levant le capot.  4. Prenez le capot de l'ordinateur par les côtés et faites-le pivoter vers le haut en utilisant les charnières inférieures comme leviers.  5. Retirez le capot des languettes des charnières et mettez-le de côté sur une surface douce non abrasive.  L'intérieur de votre ordinateur  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte graphique peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir assez longtemps avant de le toucher. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 loquet de fermeture du capot 3 capot de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur, prenez soin de ne pas déconnecter de câbles de la carte mère accidentellement.Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis  Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait d'un disque dur). 4. Débranchez le câble du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis de la carte mère. Pour ce faire, appuyez avec deux doigts sur le mécanisme de  déverrouillage situé sur le côté du connecteur et tirez pour débrancher le connecteur du câble.  5. Faites glisser le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis en dehors de son logement dans le support métallique, puis faites-le passer par le trou carré  du support pour retirer le commutateur et son câble de l'ordinateur.  1 loquet de fermeture du lecteur 4 disque dur 2 lecteur optique 5 carte mère 3 bloc d'alimentation et ventilateur 6 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis est installé en standard sur les ordinateurs ultra compacts mais est en option sur les  ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau et compacts ; il est possible qu'il ne soit pas présent sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez sentir une légère résistance lorsque vous faites glisser le commutateur en dehors de son logement.Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Insérez avec précaution le commutateur depuis le dessous du support métallique dans le trou carré du support, puis faites-le glisser dans son logement jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position.  2. Rebranchez le câble sur la carte mère.  3. Remettez le disque dur en place (reportez-vous à la section Installation d'un disque dur). 4. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 5. Si vous utilisez un socle inclinable, fixez-le à l'ordinateur.  Réinitialisation du détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®  s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Sélectionnez l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) et appuyez sur les touches fléchées gauche ou droite pour sélectionner Reset (Réinitialiser). Choisissez alors On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé silencieux) ou Disabled (Désactivé).  4. Enregistrez vos paramètres BIOS et quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Composants de la carte mère  REMARQUE : Le paramètre par défaut est On-Silent (Activé silencieux).Retour à la page Contenu 1 connecteur de haut-parleur interne (INT_SPKR) 12 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC (RTCRST) 2 connecteur du processeur (UC) 13 connecteur du commutateur d'intrusion (INTRUDER) 3 connecteur d'alimentation du processeur (12VPOWER) 14 support de pile (BATTERY) 4 connecteurs pour module de mémoire (DIMM_1, DIMM_2, DIMM_3, DIMM_4) 15 connecteur PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 5 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD) 16 connecteur PCI (SLOT2) 6 connecteurs SATA (SATA0, SATA1) 17 connecteur série (SERIAL2) 7 connecteur du panneau avant (FRONTPANEL) 18 haut-parleur de la carte mère (BEEP) 8 connecteur d'alimentation (POWER) 19 DEL d'alimentation auxiliaire (aux_LED) 9 connecteur du ventilateur (FAN_HDD) 20 connecteur du lecteur de disquette (DSKT) 10 connecteur eSATA (eSATA) 21 connecteur du ventilateur (FAN_CPU) 11 connecteur USB interne (INT_USB)Retour à la page Contenu  Remplacement de la carte mère  Guide d'utilisation Retrait de la carte mère : ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau, compacts et ultra compacts Remplacement de la carte mère : ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau, compacts et ultra compacts Retrait de la carte mère : ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau, compacts et ultra compacts 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 3. Retirez tous les composants qui limitent l'accès à la carte mère (lecteur[s] optique[s], lecteur de disquette, disque dur, panneau d'E/S, selon le cas).  4. Retirez le processeur et le module du dissipateur de chaleur : l Ordinateur mini-tour : reportez-vous à la section Processeur l Ordinateur de bureau : reportez-vous à la section Processeur l Ordinateur compact : reportez-vous à la section Processeur l Ordinateur ultra compact : reportez-vous à la section Processeur 5. Débranchez tous les câbles de la carte mère.  6. Retirez les vis de la carte mère.  l Ordinateur mini-tour : reportez-vous à la section Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur mini-tour l Ordinateur de bureau : reportez-vous à la section Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur de bureau l Ordinateur compact : reportez-vous à la section Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur compact l Ordinateur ultra compact : reportez-vous à la section Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur ultra compact 7. Faites glisser l'assemblage de la carte mère vers l'avant de l'ordinateur, puis soulevez-le pour le retirer. Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur mini-tour AVIS : Avant de toucher quoi que ce soit à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par  exemple la partie métallique à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre intervention, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte de  l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes.Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur de bureau Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur compact Vis de la carte mère de l'ordinateur ultra compact 1 carte mère de l'ordinateur mini-tour 2 vis (9) 1 carte mère de l'ordinateur de bureau 2 vis (9) 1 carte mère de l'ordinateur compact 2 vis (7)Placez l'assemblage de la carte mère que vous venez de retirer à côté de la nouvelle carte mère pour vous assurer que les deux éléments sont bien  identiques. Remplacement de la carte mère : ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau, compacts et ultra compacts 1. Alignez avec précaution la carte sur le châssis et faites-la glisser vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  2. Remettez les vis de la carte mère en place.  3. Remettez en place les composants et les câbles que vous aviez retirés de l'ancienne carte mère.  4. Rebranchez les câbles sur les connecteurs situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  5. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retour à la page Contenu 1 carte mère de l'ordinateur ultra compact 2 vis (10)Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Remarques, avis et précautions Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, OptiPlex, TravelLite, OpenManage et StrikeZone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, SpeedStep et Celeron sont des marques déposées et Core et vPro sont des marques d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows Vista et le bouton Démarrer de Windows  sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et  est utilisé par Dell Inc. sous licence. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En  tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell a fait en sorte que ce produit réponde aux normes de ce programme en matière de consommation énergétique. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Octobre 2007     Réf.: JN460     Rév. A01 Retour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour à la page Contenu Ordinateur mini-tour Guide d'utilisation À propos de votre ordinateur mini-tour Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur À l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis Composants de la carte mère À propos de votre ordinateur mini-tour Vue frontale 1 baie de lecteur de 5,25 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur optique. Permet d'insérer un CD ou un DVD (si  cela est pris en charge). 2 baie de lecteur de 5,25 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur optique. Permet d'insérer un CD ou un DVD (si  cela est pris en charge). 3 baie de lecteur de 3,5 pouces Peut contenir un lecteur de disquette optionnel ou un lecteur de carte multimédia optionnel. 4 connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB, situés à l'avant, pour connecter les  périphériques dont vous ne vous servez qu'occasionnellement, tels  qu'une manette de jeu ou une caméra, ou des périphériques USB  amorçables (reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation pour de plus amples informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour  les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et le  clavier. 5 voyant LAN Ce voyant indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau local) est établie. 6 voyants de diagnostic Ces voyants vous aident à résoudre les problèmes informatiques  d'après le code de diagnostic. Pour de plus amples informations,  reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. 7 bouton d'alimentation Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour ne pas perdre de données, n'éteignez pas l'ordinateur en  appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du  système d'exploitation. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-Vue arrière vous à la section Avant de commencer. AVIS : Si la fonctionnalité ACPI est activée sur votre système  d'exploitation, lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, l'ordinateur procède à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. 8 voyant d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe, selon le mode de fonctionnement : l Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint. l Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement. l Vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie  d'énergie. l Orange clignotant ou fixe — L'ordinateur est alimenté mais il  peut y avoir un problème d'alimentation interne (reportez-vous à la section Problèmes d'alimentation). Pour quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le bouton  d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce périphérique est  configuré comme un périphérique de réveil dans le Gestionnaire de  périphériques Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes de  mise en veille et le mode d'économie d'énergie, reportez-vous à la  section Fonctionnalités avancées. Reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux permettant de résoudre les problèmes  rencontrés sur votre ordinateur. 9 voyant d'activité  du disque dur Ce voyant clignote rapidement lors de l'accès au disque dur. 10 connecteur de casque Permet de connecter le casque et les haut-parleurs. 11 connecteur de microphone Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour brancher un microphone. 1 loquet de fermeture du capot Ce loquet permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 anneau pour cadenas Insérez un cadenas pour verrouiller le capot de l'ordinateur. 3 sélecteur de  tension Votre ordinateur est muni d'un sélecteur de tension manuel. Si vous  utilisez un sélecteur de tension manuel, réglez le sélecteur de tension  sur la tension la plus proche de l'alimentation en CA de votre région  afin d'éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur.connecteurs du panneau arrière Assurez-vous également que votre moniteur et tous ses  périphériques sont électriquement réglés pour fonctionner avec la  puissance en CA disponible dans votre zone géographique. AVIS : Au Japon, le commutateur de sélection de tension doit  être réglé sur 115 V. 4 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez le câble d'alimentation. 5 connecteurs du panneau arrière Permettent de connecter les périphériques série, USB et les autres  périphériques à leurs connecteurs respectifs. Reportez-vous à la  section connecteurs du panneau arrière. 6 logements de carte (4) Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI ou PCI  Express installées, connecteur PS/2, connecteur eSATA, etc. 1 connecteur parallèle Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une  imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à un  connecteur USB. REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est  automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte  installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la même  adresse. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la  section Options du programme de configuration du système. 2 voyant d'intégrité de  la liaison l Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau  10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le  réseau 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau  1 Gb/s (ou 1000 Gb/s) et l'ordinateur. l Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion  physique au réseau. 3 connecteur de carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large  bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une  prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large  bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de  carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un  déclic indique que le câble de réseau a été correctement installé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au  connecteur réseau. Pour que VPro fonctionne, le câble réseau doit être raccordé à la  carte NIC intégrée. Il est recommandé d'utiliser un câblage et des connecteurs de  catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de  catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s pour garantir un  fonctionnement fiable. 4 voyant d'activité  réseau Un voyant jaune clignote lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit  des données sur le réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut  donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 connecteur ligne de sortie Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs  intégrés. 6 connecteur ligne d'entrée/microphone Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée/microphone rose pour  raccorder un appareil d'enregistrement/de lecture, tel qu'un lecteur de cassette, un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope ; ou  un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté, comme indiqué sur l'illustration.  3. Repérez le loquet de fermeture du capot illustré ci-dessous. Puis, faites glisser le loquet vers l'arrière tout en levant le capot.  4. Prenez le capot de l'ordinateur par les côtés et faites-le pivoter vers le haut en utilisant les languettes des charnières comme leviers.  5. Retirez le capot des languettes des charnières et mettez-le de côté sur une surface douce non abrasive.  vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. 7 connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les  périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et  le clavier. 8 connecteur vidéo Branchez le câble du moniteur compatible VGA dans le connecteur  bleu. REMARQUE : Si vous avez acheté une carte graphique  optionnelle, ce connecteur sera recouvert d'un cache. Connectez votre moniteur au connecteur sur la carte graphique. Ne retirez pas le cache. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez une carte graphique capable de gérer deux moniteurs, utilisez le câble Y fourni avec l'ordinateur. 9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port série.  Les désignations par défaut sont COM1 pour le connecteur série  1 et COM2 pour le connecteur série 2. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la section  Options du programme de configuration du système. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant de retirer le capot de l'ordinateur.  PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte graphique peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir assez longtemps avant de le toucher. À l'intérieur de votre ordinateur  1 emplacement pour câble de  sécurité 2 loquet de fermeture du capot 3 anneau pour cadenas PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur.  AVIS : Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur, prenez soin de ne pas déconnecter de câbles de la carte mère accidentellement. 1 lecteur optique 2 lecteur de disque 3 bloc d'alimentation 4 commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis optionnel 5 carte mère 6 ensemble dissipateur de chaleur 7 unité de disque durCommutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis  Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez le câble du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis de la carte mère. Pour ce faire, appuyez avec deux doigts sur le mécanisme de  déverrouillage situé de chaque côté du connecteur et tirez pour débrancher le connecteur du câble.  4. Faites glisser le commutateur d'intrusion situé dans le châssis en dehors de son logement dans le support métallique, puis faites-le passer par le trou carré du support pour retirer le commutateur et son câble de l'ordinateur.  Remise en place du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Insérez avec précaution le commutateur depuis le dessous du support métallique dans le trou carré du support, puis faites-le glisser dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  2. Rebranchez le câble sur la carte mère.  3. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Réinitialisation du détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®  s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis est installé en standard sur les ordinateurs ultra compacts mais est en option sur les  ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau et compacts ; il est possible qu'il ne soit pas présent sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez sentir une légère résistance lorsque vous faites glisser le commutateur en dehors de son logement.3. Sélectionnez l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) et appuyez sur les touches fléchées gauche ou droite pour sélectionner Reset (Réinitialiser). Choisissez alors On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé silencieux) ou Disabled (Désactivé).  4. Enregistrez vos paramètres BIOS et quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Composants de la carte mère  Retour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : Le paramètre par défaut est On-Silent (Activé silencieux). 1 connecteur de haut-parleur (INT_SPKR) 12 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC (RTCRST) 2 ventilateur (FAN_CPU) 13 connecteur du commutateur d'intrusion (INTRUDER) 3 connecteur du processeur (CPU) 14 support de pile (BATTERY) 4 connecteur d'alimentation du processeur (12VPOWER) 15 connecteur PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 5 connecteurs pour module de mémoire (DIMM_1, DIMM_2, DIMM_3, DIMM_4) 16 connecteur PCI Express x1 (SLOT4) 6 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD) 17 connecteur PCI (SLOT2) 7 connecteurs de lecteur SATA (SATA0, SATA1, SATA2, SATA3) 18 connecteur PCI (SLOT3) 8 connecteur du panneau avant (FRONTPANEL) 19 connecteur série (SERIAL2)  9 connecteur d'alimentation (POWER) 20 haut-parleur de la carte mère (BEEP)  10 connecteur SATA externe (eSATA) 21 DEL d'alimentation auxiliaire (aux_LED) 11 USB interne (INT_USB) 22 connecteur du lecteur de disquette (DSKT)Retour à la page Contenu  Dépannage  Guide d'utilisation Voyants d'alimentation Voyants du système Voyants de diagnostic Codes sonores Messages système Dell Diagnostics Pilotes Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista® Restauration du système d'exploitation Suivez les conseils ci-dessous lorsque vous dépannez votre ordinateur : l Si vous avez ajouté ou retiré une pièce avant de rencontrer le problème, consultez les procédures d'installation et assurez-vous que la pièce est  correctement installée. l Si un périphérique ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez qu'il est correctement connecté. l Si un message d'erreur s'affiche à l'écran, notez sur un papier son intitulé exact. Ce message peut aider le personnel du support à diagnostiquer et  résoudre le(s) problème(s). l Si un message d'erreur apparaît dans un programme, reportez-vous à la documentation du programme en question. Problèmes de pile Remplacement de la pile — Si vous devez fréquemment réinitialiser les informations concernant l'heure et la date après avoir allumé l'ordinateur ou si l'heure  et la date affichées au démarrage sont incorrectes, remplacez la pile (reportez-vous à la section Remplacement de la pile). Si la pile ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Problèmes de carte Remplissez la Liste de vérification des diagnostics à mesure que vous effectuez les contrôles suivants. REMARQUE : Les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l'affichage par défaut de Windows. Par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas  fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell™ est réglé sur le mode d'affichage classique de Windows. PRÉCAUTION : Une nouvelle pile mal installée risque d'exploser. Remplacez la pile uniquement par une pile de type identique ou équivalent à  celui recommandé par le fabricant. Mettez les piles usagées au rebut selon les instructions du fabricant.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de suivre les instructions indiquées dans cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide  d´information sur le produit.  PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir le capot.  AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte de  l'ordinateur. Vérifiez l'insertion des cartes et les câbles — 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques, débranchez-les de leurs prises secteur, attendez entre 10 et 20 secondes, puis retirez le  capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur »). 2. Vérifiez que chaque carte est solidement logée dans son connecteur. Réinsérez les cartes lâches.  3. Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont correctement connectés à leurs connecteurs correspondants sur les cartes. Si des câbles semblent  être desserrés, reconnectez-les. Pour obtenir des instructions sur les câbles devant être connectés à des connecteurs spécifiques d'une carte, reportez-vous à la  documentation de la carte. 4. Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur, rebranchez votre ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Problèmes de lecteur Vérifiez que Microsoft® Windows® reconnaît le lecteur — Windows XP : l Cliquez sur Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Windows Vista® : l Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista  , puis sur Ordinateur. Si le lecteur n'est pas répertorié, effectuez une analyse complète avec votre logiciel antivirus pour rechercher d'éventuels virus et les supprimer. Les virus  empêchent parfois Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. Testez le lecteur — l Insérez un autre disque pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier disque soit défectueux. l Insérez une disquette d'amorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Nettoyez le lecteur ou le disque — Reportez-vous à la section Nettoyage de votre ordinateur. Vérifiez les connexions des câbles Exécutez le dépanneur des conflits matériels — Reportez-vous à la section Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation  Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®. Exécutez Dell Diagnostics — Reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics. Problèmes de lecteur optique  Réglez le contrôle de volume de Windows — l Cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Testez la carte graphique — 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques, débranchez-les de leurs prises secteur, attendez entre 10 et 20 secondes, puis retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur »). 2. Retirez toutes les cartes, sauf la carte graphique. Reportez-vous à la section « Cartes » conçue pour votre ordinateur.  Si votre unité de disque dur principale est connectée à une carte contrôleur d'unité et non pas à un des connecteurs IDE de la carte  mère, laissez la carte du contrôleur de lecteur installée dans l'ordinateur. 3. Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur), rebranchez votre ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 4. Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics. Testez les cartes — 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques, débranchez-les de leurs prises secteur, attendez entre 10 et 20 secondes, puis retirez le  capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur »). 2. Réinstallez l'une des cartes retirées précédemment. Reportez-vous à la section « Cartes » conçue pour votre ordinateur.  3. Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur, rebranchez votre ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 4. Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics. Si les tests échouent, la carte que vous venez de réinstaller est défectueuse et doit être remplacée. 5. Répétez ce processus jusqu'à ce que toutes les cartes soient réinstallées.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Il peut arriver que le lecteur optique haute vitesse vibre et produise du bruit. Cela ne signifie en aucun cas que le lecteur ou le support est défectueux. REMARQUE : En raison des différentes régions du monde entier et des différents formats de disque, certains titres DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans  certains lecteurs DVD.l Vérifiez que vous avez monté le volume en cliquant sur la barre coulissante et en la faisant glisser vers le haut. l Vérifiez que le son n'est pas en sourdine en cliquant sur les cases cochées. Inspectez les haut-parleurs et le caisson de basse — Reportez-vous à la section Problèmes liés au son et aux haut-parleurs. Problèmes d'écriture sur un lecteur optique  Fermez tous les programmes — Le lecteur optique doit recevoir un flux régulier de données pendant la gravure. Si ce flux est interrompu, une erreur se  produit. Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer l'écriture sur le lecteur optique. Désactivez le mode Veille dans Windows avant de lancer l'écriture sur un disque — Reportez-vous à la section Gestion de l'alimentation sous Windows XP et Windows Vista ou effectuez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans l'aide et le support de Windows pour obtenir des informations sur les modes d'économie d'énergie. Problèmes de disque dur  Lancez la commande Check Disk (Vérifier disque) — Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local C:. 3. Cliquez sur Propriétés® Outils® Contrôler maintenant. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher et tenter une récupération des secteurs défectueux, puis sur Démarrer. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur Ordinateur. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local C:. 3. Cliquez sur Propriétés® Outils® Contrôler maintenant. La fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur s'affiche. Si vous êtes un administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer ; sinon, contactez votre administrateur pour effectuer l'opération souhaitée. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet Vérifiez les paramètres de sécurité de Microsoft Outlook® Express — Si vous n'arrivez pas à ouvrir les pièces jointes à vos messages électroniques : 1. Dans Outlook Express, cliquez sur Outils® Options® Sécurité. 2. Cliquez sur Interdire les pièces jointes pour décocher cette option, le cas échéant.  Vérifiez la connexion de la ligne téléphonique Vérifiez la prise téléphonique Connectez le modem directement à la prise téléphonique murale Utilisez une ligne téléphonique différente — l Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est connectée à la prise jack du modem (la prise jack est reconnaissable à l'étiquette verte ou à l'icône en forme de  connecteur qui se trouve à côté d'elle). l Insérez le connecteur de ligne téléphonique dans le modem jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. l Déconnectez la ligne téléphonique du modem, connectez-la à un téléphone, puis attendez la tonalité. l Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, par exemple un répondeur téléphonique, un télécopieur, un parasurtenseur ou un  séparateur de ligne, contournez-les et connectez le modem directement à la prise jack téléphonique murale avec la ligne téléphonique. Si vous utilisez  un câble de 3 mètres (10 pieds) ou plus, essayez-en un plus court. Exécutez l'outil de diagnostic du modem — PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Connectez le modem uniquement à une prise téléphonique analogique. Le modem ne fonctionne pas s'il est connecté à un réseau  téléphonique numérique. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas de câble téléphonique dans le connecteur de carte réseau (reportez-vous aux informations sur les connecteurs d'E/S s'appliquant à votre ordinateur).Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Assistant du modem. 2. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour identifier et résoudre les problèmes de modem. L'Assistant du modem n'est pas disponible sur  certains ordinateurs. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Tous les programmes® Outil de diagnostic du modem. 2. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour identifier et résoudre les problèmes de modem. L'outil de diagnostic du modem n'est pas disponible  sur certains ordinateurs). Vérifiez que le modem communique avec Windows — Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Imprimantes et autres périphériques® Options de modem et de téléphonie® Modems. 2. Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem® Propriétés® Diagnostics® Interroger le modem pour vous assurer que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Matériel et son® Options de modem et de téléphonie® Modems. 2. Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem® Propriétés® Diagnostics® Interroger le modem pour vous assurer que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. Vérifiez que vous êtes connecté à Internet — Assurez-vous que vous êtes bien abonné auprès d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet. Une fois le programme de  messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si la case Travailler hors connexion est cochée, décochez-la, puis connectez-vous à  Internet. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. Messages d'erreur Si le message d'erreur n'est pas répertorié, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme en cours d'utilisation au moment où le  message est apparu. A filename cannot contain any of the following characters : \ / : * ? " < > | (Un nom de fichier ne peut contenir aucun des caractères suivants : \ / : * ? " <  > |) — N'utilisez pas ces caractères lorsque vous nommez un fichier. A required .DLL file was not found (Un fichier .DLL requis est introuvable) — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir. Pour supprimer, puis réinstaller le programme : Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Ajout/Suppression de programmes® Programmes et fonctionnalités. 2. Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer.  3. Cliquez sur Désinstaller. 4. Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation.  Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Programmes® Programmes et fonctionnalités. 2. Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer.  3. Cliquez sur Désinstaller. 4. Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation.  drive letter x:\ n'est pas accessible. The device is not ready (lettre de lecteur x:\ n'est pas accessible. Le périphérique n'est pas prêt) — Le lecteur ne peut pas lire le disque. Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. Insert bootable media (Introduisez un support amorçable) — Insérez une disquette, un CD ou un DVD amorçable. Non-system disk error (Erreur disque non système) — Retirez la disquette du lecteur de disquette et redémarrez votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Not enough memory or resources. Close some programs and try again (Mémoire ou ressources insuffisantes. Fermez certains programmes et réessayez) — Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme de votre choix. Dans certains cas, vous devrez peut-être redémarrer l'ordinateur pour restaurer ses  ressources. Si vous devez effectivement arrêter l'ordinateur, exécutez le programme de votre choix dès que le redémarrage est terminé. Operating system not found (Système d'exploitation introuvable) — Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Problèmes liés au clavier Vérifiez le câble du clavier — l Assurez-vous que le câble du clavier est fermement connecté à l'ordinateur. l Arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur), reconnectez le câble du clavier comme indiqué dans  le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. l Vérifiez que le câble n'est pas endommagé ni effiloché et que les broches de ses connecteurs ne sont pas pliées ou cassées. Redressez les broches  pliées. l Débranchez les câbles d'extension du clavier et connectez le clavier directement à l'ordinateur. Testez le clavier — Connectez un clavier en bon état de marche à l'ordinateur et essayez-le. Exécutez le dépanneur des conflits matériels — Reportez-vous à la section Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation  Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®. Problèmes de blocages et logiciels L'ordinateur ne démarre pas  Vérifiez les voyants de diagnostic — Reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché sur l'ordinateur et sur la prise secteur. L'ordinateur ne répond plus  Éteignez l'ordinateur — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le  bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes (jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne), puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Un programme ne répond plus  Fin du programme — 1. Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap> pour accéder au Gestionnaire des tâches.  2. Cliquez sur l'onglet Applications. 3. Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus.  4. Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. Un programme se bloque régulièrement  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Vous risquez de perdre des données si vous ne parvenez pas à arrêter le système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : La documentation, la disquette, le CD ou le DVD qui accompagne la plupart des logiciels inclut généralement des instructions d'installation.Consultez la documentation du logiciel — Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. Un programme est conçu pour une version antérieure d'un système d'exploitation Windows  Exécutez l'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes — Windows XP : L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement similaire aux environnements des systèmes  d'exploitation non XP. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Accessoires® Assistant Compatibilité des programmes® Suivant. 2. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Windows Vista : L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement similaire aux environnements des systèmes  d'exploitation non Windows Vista. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Programmes® Utiliser un programme plus ancien avec cette version de Windows. 2. Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Un écran bleu uni apparaît  Éteignez l'ordinateur — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation  et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes (jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne), puis redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Autres problèmes logiciels  Consultez la documentation du logiciel ou contactez le fabricant pour obtenir des informations de dépannage — l Assurez-vous que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur. l Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est conforme aux exigences matérielles requises pour que le logiciel fonctionne. Consultez la documentation du logiciel  pour de plus amples informations. l Assurez-vous que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. l Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. l Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. Sauvegardez immédiatement vos fichiers Utilisez un programme de recherche des virus pour vérifier le disque dur, les disquettes, les CD et les DVD. Enregistrez et quittez tous les programmes et les fichiers ouverts, puis arrêtez l'ordinateur via le menu Démarrer Problèmes de mémoire Si le message indiquant que la mémoire est insuffisante s'affiche — l Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution que vous n'utilisez pas pour voir si cela permet de  résoudre le problème. l Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour prendre connaissance des besoins en mémoire minimaux. Si nécessaire, installez de la mémoire  supplémentaire (reportez-vous à la section Installation de la mémoire). l Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section Mémoire) pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire. l Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Si vous rencontrez d'autres problèmes de mémoire — l Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section Mémoire) pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire. l Assurez-vous de bien suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire (reportez-vous à la section Installation de la mémoire). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. l Vérifiez que la mémoire que vous utilisez est prise en charge par votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par  votre ordinateur, reportez-vous aux caractéristiques de votre ordinateur. l Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). Problèmes liés à la souris  Vérifiez le câble de la souris — l Vérifiez que le câble n'est pas endommagé ni effiloché et que les broches de ses connecteurs ne sont pas pliées ou cassées. Redressez les broches  pliées. l Retirez les rallonges souris et branchez celle-ci directement à l'ordinateur. l Vérifiez que le câble de la souris est connecté comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur. Redémarrez l'ordinateur — 1. Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap> pour afficher le menu Démarrer. 2. Appuyez sur , puis sur les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance l'option Arrêter ou Éteindre, puis appuyez sur .  3. Après avoir éteint l'ordinateur, reconnectez le câble de la souris comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration.  4. Allumez l'ordinateur. Testez la souris — Connectez une souris en bon état de marche à l'ordinateur, puis essayez-la. Vérifiez les paramètres de la souris — Windows XP 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Souris. 2. Réglez les paramètres comme nécessaire.  Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Matériel et son® Souris. 2. Réglez les paramètres comme nécessaire.  Réinstallez le pilote de la souris — Reportez-vous à la section Pilotes. Exécutez le dépanneur des conflits matériels — Reportez-vous à la section Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation  Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®. Problèmes liés au réseau Vérifiez le connecteur du câble réseau — Assurez-vous que le câble réseau est correctement inséré dans le connecteur réseau situé à l'arrière de  l'ordinateur et dans la prise réseau. Vérifiez l'état des voyants réseau situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur — Si le voyant d'intégrité de la liaison est éteint (reportez-vous à la section Voyants du système), aucune communication réseau n'est établie. Remplacez le câble de réseau. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et reconnectez-vous au réseau Vérifiez les paramètres du réseau — Contactez l'administrateur de réseau pour qu'il vérifie vos paramètres et le fonctionnement du réseau. Exécutez le dépanneur des conflits matériels — Reportez-vous à la section Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation  Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Problèmes d'alimentation Dépannage des problèmes d'alimentation  Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert et que l'ordinateur ne répond plus — Reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode Veille. Pour revenir en mode normal, appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez  la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint ou n'est pas alimenté. l Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation dans le connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et dans la prise secteur. l Contournez les multiprises, les rallonges d'alimentation et les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous  tension. l Vérifiez que les multiprises utilisées sont branchées dans une prise secteur et qu'elles sont allumées. l Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. l Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation secteur et le câble du panneau avant sont correctement branchés sur la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section «  Composants de la carte mère » correspondant à votre système). l Effectuez l'autotest de bloc d'alimentation, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la section Autotest de bloc d'alimentation). Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange clignotant — L'ordinateur reçoit du courant mais un problème d'alimentation interne s'est peut-être produit. l Assurez-vous que le sélecteur de tension est bien réglé sur la tension secteur de votre région (le cas échéant). l Vérifiez que tous les composants et les câbles sont correctement installés et branchés sur la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section « Composants de la carte mère » correspondant à votre système). l Effectuez l'autotest de bloc d'alimentation, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la section Autotest de bloc d'alimentation). Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange fixe — Un périphérique peut être défaillant ou mal installé. l Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation du processeur est correctement branché sur le connecteur d'alimentation de la carte mère (POWER2) (reportez-vous à la section Composants de la carte mère correspondant à votre système). l Retirez puis réinstallez tous les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section Mémoire). l Retirez puis réinstallez les cartes d'extension, et notamment les cartes graphiques (reportez-vous à la section « Cartes » correspondant à votre  système). l Effectuez l'autotest de bloc d'alimentation, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la section Autotest de bloc d'alimentation). Éliminez les interférences — Les éventuelles causes d'interférences sont entre autres : l Les câbles d'extension du clavier, de la souris et de l'alimentation l Un trop grand nombre de périphériques raccordés à la même multiprise l Plusieurs multiprises connectées à la même prise secteur Autotest de bloc d'alimentation Si votre ordianteur mini-tour, de bureau ou compact est certifié ENERGY STAR® 4.0, votre bloc d'alimentation est équipé d'une fonction d'autotest qui vous  aidera à résoudre les problèmes d'alimentation. L'autotest peut être effectué que le bloc d'alimentation soit connecté aux périphériques de l'ordinateur ou  isolé. Le bouton de test et les DEL situés à l'arrière du bloc d'alimentation sont accessibles de l'extérieur (à l'emplacement de la prise secteur). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : L'autotest du bloc d'alimentation n'est disponible qu'avec les blocs d'alimentation ENERGY STAR 4.0. 1 bouton de test 2 DEL de testPour effectuer l'autotest de bloc d'alimentation. 1. Éteignez l'ordianteur et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Déconnectez les connecteurs du bloc d'alimentation de la carte mère et de tous les périphériques internes. La procédure de déconnexion des câbles du  bloc d'alimentation dépend du format de l'ordinateur :  l Pour un ordinateur mini-tour, reportez-vous à la section Bloc d'alimentation l Pour un ordinateur de bureau, reportez-vous à la section Bloc d'alimentation l Pour un ordinateur compact, reportez-vous à la section Bloc d'alimentation 3. Connectez votre ordinateur à une prise secteur qui fonctionne.  4. Appuyez sur le bouton de test du bloc d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé.  ¡ Si la DEL de test s'allume, le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne correctement. Reliez le connecteur du bloc d'alimentation en CC à la carte mère, puis  effectuez le test de nouveau. Connectez les périphériques (un à la fois) et effectuez l'autotest jusqu'à ce que la DEL de test ne s'allume plus et  qu'un périphérique défectueux soit identifié. Remplacez le périphérique/le composant défectueux ou contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section  Contacter Dell). ¡ Si la DEL de test ne s'allume pas, le bloc d'alimentation est défectueux. Remplacez le bloc d'alimentation ou contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la  section Contacter Dell). Problèmes liés à l'imprimante Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de  dépannage. Vérifiez que l'imprimante est allumée Vérifiez les connexions des câbles de l'imprimante — l Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. l Assurez-vous que les câbles de l'imprimante sont solidement connectés à l'imprimante et à l'ordinateur. Testez la prise secteur — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. Vérifiez que l'imprimante est reconnue par Windows — Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Imprimantes et autres périphériques® Afficher les imprimantes ou les imprimantes télécopieurs installés. 2. Si l'imprimante apparaît dans la liste, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône la représentant.  3. Cliquez sur Propriétés® Ports. Pour une imprimante parallèle, assurez-vous que le(s) port(s) d'impression est/sont défini(s) sur LPT1 (Port de l'imprimante). Pour une imprimante USB, vérifiez que le(s) port(s) d'impression est/sont défini(s) sur USB. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Matériel et son® Imprimante. 2. Si l'imprimante apparaît dans la liste, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône la représentant.  3. Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur Ports. 4. Réglez les paramètres comme nécessaire.  Réinstallation du pilote de l'imprimante — Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur l'installation du pilote de votre imprimante. Problèmes liés au scanner PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre imprimante, contactez le fabricant. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre scanner, contactez le fabricant du scanner.Consultez la documentation du scanner — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. Déverrouillez le scanner — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé (s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage). Redémarrez l'ordinateur et réessayez Vérifiez les connexions des câbles — l Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. l Assurez-vous que les câbles du scanner sont solidement connectés au scanner et à l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le scanner est reconnu par Microsoft Windows — Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Imprimantes et autres périphériques® Scanners et caméras. 2. Si votre scanner est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît.  Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Matériel et son®Scanners et caméras. 2. Si le scanner est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît.  Réinstallez le pilote du scanner — Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes liés au son et aux haut-parleurs Les haut-parleurs n'émettent aucun son  Vérifiez les connexions des câbles des haut-parleurs — Vérifiez que les haut-parleurs sont connectés comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration fourni  avec les haut-parleurs. Si vous disposez d'une carte son, assurez-vous que les haut-parleurs sont connectés à la carte. Assurez-vous que le caisson de basse et les haut-parleurs sont sous tension — Reportez-vous au schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vos haut-parleurs sont dotés de commandes du volume, réglez le volume, les basses ou les aigus pour éliminer les distorsions. Réglez le volume de Windows — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le  volume et que le son n'est pas en sourdine. Déconnectez le casque du connecteur de casque — Le son des haut-parleurs est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le casque est connecté au connecteur  de casque du panneau avant de l'ordinateur. Testez la prise secteur — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. Éliminez les sources potentielles d'interférences — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent  des interférences. Exécutez les diagnostics des haut-parleurs Réinstallez le pilote audio — Reportez-vous à la section Pilotes. Exécutez le dépanneur des conflits matériels — Reportez-vous à la section Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le réglage du volume des lecteurs MP3 et multimédia peut annuler le réglage du volume de Windows. Vérifiez toujours que le volume du  lecteur multimédia n'a pas été baissé ni éteint.Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®. Aucun son émis par le casque  Vérifiez la connexion des câbles du casque — Vérifiez que le câble du casque est correctement inséré dans le connecteur de casque (reportez-vous aux vues frontale et arrière de l'ordinateur). Réglez le contrôle de volume de Windows — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas en sourdine. Problèmes liés à la vidéo et au moniteur L'écran est vide  L'écran est difficile à lire  Vérifiez la connexion du câble du moniteur — l Vérifiez que le câble du moniteur est relié à la carte graphique appropriée (pour les configurations à deux cartes graphiques). l Si vous utilisez l'adaptateur DVI vers VGA, vérifiez que l'adaptateur est correctement relié à la carte graphique et au moniteur. l Vérifiez que le câble du moniteur est connecté comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur. l Retirez les rallonges vidéo et branchez le moniteur directement sur l'ordinateur. l Changez les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du moniteur pour déterminer si le câble d'alimentation du moniteur est défectueux. l Vérifiez que les broches des connecteurs ne sont pas pliées ni cassées (les connecteurs du câble du moniteur ont des broches manquantes, ce qui est  normal). Vérifiez le voyant d'alimentation du moniteur — l Si le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou clignote, le moniteur est sous tension. l Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint, appuyez fermement sur le bouton pour vous assurer que le moniteur est sous tension. l Si le voyant d'alimentation clignote, appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou déplacez la souris pour revenir en mode normal. Testez la prise secteur — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. Vérifiez les voyants de diagnostic — Reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. Vérifiez la configuration du moniteur — Reportez-vous à la documentation du moniteur pour les instructions concernant le réglage du contraste et de la  luminosité, la démagnétisation du moniteur et l'exécution de l'autotest du moniteur. Éloignez le caisson de basse externe du moniteur — Si votre système de haut-parleur comprend un caisson de basse, vérifiez que ce dernier se trouve à au  moins 60 centimètres (2 pieds) du moniteur. Éloignez le moniteur des sources d'alimentation électrique externes — Les ventilateurs, lampes fluorescentes, lampes halogènes et autres dispositifs  électriques sont susceptibles de faire trembler l'image. Éteignez les périphériques situés à proximité afin d'éviter les interférences. Faites pivoter le moniteur pour éliminer les reflets du soleil et toute interférence potentielle Réglez les paramètres d'affichage de Windows — Windows XP : PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Si votre ordinateur est livré avec une carte graphique PCI installée, vous n'avez pas besoin de retirer cette carte lorsque vous installez d'autres  cartes graphiques ; toutefois, cette carte est requise à des fins de dépannage. Si vous retirez cette carte, rangez-la dans un endroit sûr et sécurisé.  Pour obtenir des informations sur votre carte graphique, rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir les procédures de dépannage, consultez la documentation du moniteur.1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Apparence et thèmes. 2. Cliquez sur la zone que vous souhaitez modifier ou cliquez sur l'icône Écran/Affichage. 3. Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer ® Panneau de configuration® Matériel et son® Personnalisation® Paramètres d'affichage. 2. Réglez les paramètres Résolution et Couleurs comme nécessaire.  Mauvaise qualité de l'image 3D  Vérifiez la connexion du câble d'alimentation de la carte graphique — Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation de la carte graphique est correctement relié à la  carte. Vérifiez la configuration du moniteur — Reportez-vous à la documentation du moniteur pour les instructions concernant le réglage du contraste et de la  luminosité, la démagnétisation du moniteur et l'exécution de l'autotest du moniteur. Voyants d'alimentation Le voyant du bouton d'alimentation, situé sur la partie avant de l'ordinateur, s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe pour indiquer différents états : l Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert et que l'ordinateur ne répond plus, reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. l Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert clignotant, l'ordinateur est en mode veille. Pour revenir en mode normal, appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. l Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint, l'ordinateur n'est pas allumé ou n'est pas branché à une source d'alimentation. ¡ Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation dans le connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et dans la prise secteur. ¡ Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une multiprise, vérifiez qu'elle est branchée à une prise secteur et qu'elle est allumée. ¡ Contournez les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les multiprises et les rallonges d'alimentation pour vérifier que  l'ordinateur est sous tension. ¡ Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. ¡ Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation secteur et le câble du panneau avant sont correctement branchés sur la carte mère (reportez-vous à la  section « Composants de la carte mère » correspondant à votre système). l Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange clignotant, l'ordinateur est alimenté mais il peut y avoir un problème d'alimentation interne. ¡ Assurez-vous que le sélecteur de tension est bien réglé sur la tension secteur de votre région, le cas échéant. ¡ Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation du processeur est correctement branché sur la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section « Composants de la carte mère » correspondant à votre système). l Si le voyant est orange fixe, un périphérique fonctionne mal ou est incorrectement installé. ¡ Retirez puis réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section Mémoire). ¡ Retirez puis réinstallez les cartes (reportez-vous à la section « Cartes » correspondant à votre système). l Éliminez les interférences. Les éventuelles causes d'interférences sont entre autres : ¡ Les câbles d'extension du clavier, de la souris et de l'alimentation ¡ Un trop grand nombre de périphériques branchés sur une multiprise ¡ Plusieurs multiprises connectées à la même prise secteur Voyants du système  Les voyants du bouton d'alimentation et du disque dur peuvent indiquer un problème. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Voyant d'alimentation Description du problème Solution proposée Vert fixe L'ordinateur est allumé et fonctionne  normalement. Sur l'ordinateur de bureau, un voyant vert fixe indique une connexion Aucune action nécessaire.Voyants de diagnostic Afin de vous aider à résoudre les problèmes, votre ordinateur est équipé de quatre voyants : 1, 2, 3 et 4 situés sur le panneau avant. Lorsque l'ordinateur  démarre normalement, les voyants clignotent puis s'éteignent. Si l'ordinateur rencontre un problème, la séquence des voyants vous permet d'identifier la  nature de ce problème. réseau. Vert clignotant L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie  d'énergie. Pour réactiver l'ordinateur, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, déplacez  la souris ou appuyez sur une touche du clavier. Clignote vert plusieurs fois, puis s'éteint Il s'agit d'une erreur de configuration. Contrôlez les voyants de diagnostic pour savoir si le problème est identifié  (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic). Jaune fixe Dell Diagnostics exécute un test ou un  dispositif de la carte mère peut être  défectueux ou mal installé. Si Dell Diagnostics est en cours d'exécution, laissez-le s'achever. Si l'ordinateur ne s'amorce pas, contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Jaune clignotant Une panne d'électricité ou une défaillance  de la carte mère s'est produite. Reportez-vous à la section Problèmes d'alimentation. Vert fixe et code sonore durant le POST Un problème a été détecté pendant  l'exécution du BIOS. Pour des instructions sur le diagnostic du code sonore, reportez-vous à la  section Codes sonores. Contrôlez également les voyants de diagnostic  pour savoir si le problème est identifié (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic). Voyant d'alimentation vert fixe, aucun code sonore et aucune vidéo  durant le POST Le moniteur ou la carte graphique peut être défectueux ou mal installé. Contrôlez les voyants de diagnostic pour savoir si le problème est identifié  (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic). Reportez-vous à la section Problèmes liés à la vidéo et au moniteur. Voyant d'alimentation vert fixe et aucun code sonore, mais l'ordinateur se verrouille durant le POST Un dispositif de la carte mère peut être  défectueux. Contrôlez les voyants de diagnostic pour savoir si le problème est identifié  (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic). Si le problème n'est  pas identifié, contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique  (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Lorsque l'ordinateur a effectué l'auto-test de démarrage (POST), les quatre voyants s'éteignent avant l'amorçage du système  d'exploitation. Comportement des voyants  Description du problème Solution proposée L'ordinateur est éteint ou un incident s'est produit avant l'accès  au BIOS. Les voyants de diagnostic ne s'allument pas correctement après  le lancement correct du système  d'exploitation par le système. l Branchez l'ordinateur dans une prise secteur en bon état de marche (reportez-vous à la  section Problèmes d'alimentation). l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Une défaillance du processeur  semble s'être produite. l Réinstallez le processeur (reportez-vous aux informations sur le processeur correspondant à  votre ordinateur). l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Les modules de mémoire sont  détectés, mais une panne de  mémoire est survenue. l Si au moins deux modules de mémoire sont installés, retirez-les (reportez-vous à la section  Retrait de mémoire), puis réinstallez un module (reportez-vous à la section Installation de la mémoire) et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur démarre normalement, installez les  autres modules de mémoire (un à la fois) jusqu'à ce que vous ayez identifié un module  défectueux ou réinstallé tous les modules sans erreur. l Installez une mémoire en bon état de marche et du même type sur votre ordinateur, si  possible (reportez-vous à la section Installation de la mémoire). l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Une défaillance de la carte  graphique semble s'être produite. l Réinstallez les cartes graphiques installées (reportez-vous à la section « Cartes »  correspondant à votre ordinateur).  l Installez une carte graphique en bon état de marche sur votre ordinateur, si possible. l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Panne possible de lecteur de disquette ou de disque dur. Rebranchez tous les câbles d'alimentation et de données. Panne USB possible. Réinstallez tous les périphériques USB et vérifiez la connexion des câbles. Aucun module de mémoire n'a été  détecté. l Si au moins deux modules de mémoire sont installés, retirez-les (reportez-vous à la section  Retrait de mémoire), puis réinstallez un module (reportez-vous à la section Installation de la Codes sonores Votre ordinateur peut émettre une série de signaux sonores lors du démarrage si le moniteur ne peut pas afficher les erreurs ou les problèmes éventuels.  Cette série de signaux, appelés « codes sonores », permet d'identifier les problèmes de fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Par exemple, le code sonore 1-3-1 (un code sonore possible) est composé d'un signal, d'une série de trois signaux, puis d'un autre signal. Ce code sonore vous indique que l'ordinateur a rencontré  un problème de mémoire. La réinstallation des modules de mémoire peut permettre de corriger les erreurs signalées par les codes sonores suivants. Si le problème persiste, contactez  Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell) pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique. Si vous rencontrez les erreurs signalées par les codes sonores suivants, reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique. mémoire) et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur démarre normalement, installez les  autres modules de mémoire (un à la fois) jusqu'à ce que vous ayez identifié un module  défectueux ou réinstallé tous les modules sans erreur. l Installez une mémoire en bon état de marche et du même type sur votre ordinateur, si  possible (reportez-vous à la section Installation de la mémoire). l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Les modules de mémoire sont  détectés, mais une erreur de  configuration de mémoire ou de  compatibilité est survenue. l Vérifiez qu'aucune contrainte particulière ne doit être respectée pour l'installation des  modules de mémoire/connecteurs mémoire (reportez-vous à la section Mémoire). l Vérifiez que la mémoire que vous utilisez est prise en charge par votre ordinateur (reportezvous à la section « Caractéristiques » correspondant à votre ordinateur). l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Panne possible de carte d'extension. 1. Déterminez s'il existe un conflit en retirant une carte d'extension (pas une carte graphique)  et en redémarrant l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Cartes » correspondant à votre  ordinateur). 2. Si le problème persiste, réinstallez la carte que vous venez de retirer, retirez une autre carte,  puis redémarrez l'ordinateur.  3. Répétez ce processus pour chaque carte d'extension installée. Si l'ordinateur démarre  normalement, dépannez la dernière carte retirée de l'ordinateur pour résoudre les conflits de  ressources (reportez-vous à la section Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous  les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®). 4. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Autre panne possible. l Vérifiez que tous les câbles du disque dur et du lecteur optique sont correctement branchés  sur la carte mère (reportez-vous à la section « Composants de la carte mère » correspondant à votre ordinateur). l  Si un message d'erreur, signalant un problème lié à un périphérique (lecteur de disquette ou  disque dur par exemple), s'affiche à l'écran, vérifiez que le périphérique fonctionne  correctement. l  Si le système d'exploitation tente de démarrer à partir d'un périphérique (lecteur de  disquette ou lecteur optique par exemple), ouvrez le programme de configuration du système  (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système) pour vérifier que la  séquence d'amorçage définie pour les périphériques installés sur votre ordinateur est  correcte. l Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). Code Cause 1-3-1 à 2-4-4 La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée 4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh Code Cause 1-1-2 Panne de registre du microprocesseur 1-1-3 Erreur de lecture/écriture en NVRAM 1-1-4 Échec du total des vérifications BIOS ROM 1-2-1 Erreur du temporisateur d'intervalles programmable 1-2-2 Échec d'initialisation du DMA (accès direct à la mémoire) 1-2-3 Échec de lecture/écriture du registre des pages de DMA 1-3 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo 1-3-1 à 2-4-4 La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée 3-1-1 Échec de registre DMA esclave 3-1-2 Échec de registre DMA maître 3-1-3 Échec de registre de masque d'interruption maître 3-1-4 Échec de registre de masque d'interruption esclave 3-2-2 Échec de chargement du vecteur d'interruption 3-2-4 Échec du test de contrôleur de clavierMessages système  3-3-1 Perte d'alimentation de NVRAM 3-3-2 Configuration incorrecte de la NVRAM 3-3-4 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo 3-4-1 Échec d'initialisation de l'écran 3-4-2 Échec de retraçage de l'écran 3-4-3 Échec de recherche de ROM vidéo 4-2-1 Aucune impulsion d'horloge 4-2-2 Échec de l'arrêt 4-2-3 Échec de la porte A20 4-2-4 Interruption inattendue en mode protégé 4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Panne du compteur 2 de puce de l'horloge 4-3-4 Arrêt de l'horloge machine 4-4-1 Échec du test de port parallèle ou série 4-4-2 Échec de décompression de code dans la mémoire en double 4-4-3 Échec du test de coprocesseur mathématique 4-4-4 Échec du test de mémoire cache REMARQUE : Si le message que vous recevez n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du  programme en cours d'utilisation au moment où le message est apparu. Message Cause possible Action corrective 8042 Gate-A20 error Échec du test du  contrôleur du clavier. Si vous recevez ce message après  avoir apporté des changements dans  le programme de configuration du système, ouvrez le programme de  configuration du système et restaurez  les valeurs d'origine. Address Line Short! (Court-circuit de ligne d'adresse !) Erreur dans le circuit de décodage d'adresses de  la mémoire. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire  (reportez-vous à la section Mémoire). C: Drive Error (Erreur de lecteur) C: Drive Failure (Défaillance de  lecteur) Le disque dur ne fonctionne pas ou n'est pas correctement configuré. Vérifiez que le lecteur est  correctement installé dans l'ordinateur  (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs » correspondant à votre ordinateur) et  correctement défini dans le  programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section  Programme de configuration du système). Cache Memory Bad, Do Not Enable Cache (Mémoire cache  défectueuse, Ne pas  activer la mémoire  cache) La mémoire cache ne  fonctionne pas. Pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique, reportez-vous à  la section Contacter Dell. CH-2 Timer Error (Erreur de temporisateur) Erreur du temporisateur de la carte mère. Pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique, reportez-vous à  la section Contacter Dell. CMOS Battery State Low (État de la batterie  CMOS faible) CMOS Checksum Failure (Défaillance de somme  de contrôle CMOS) CMOS System Options Not Set (Options de système  CMOS non définies) CMOS Display Type Mismatch (Non correspondance de type d'affichage CMOS) CMOS Memory Size Mismatch (Non correspondance de type de mémoire CMOS) Les informations de configuration du système figurant dans le  programme de configuration ne sont pas correctes ou le niveau de charge de la batterie peut être faible. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la  section Programme de configuration du système), vérifiez la configuration  du système, puis redémarrez  l'ordinateur.Dell Diagnostics Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans cette section et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter  Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Il est recommandé d'imprimer ces procédures avant de commencer. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section Ouverture du programme de configuration du système), étudiez les informations  de configuration de votre ordinateur et assurez-vous que le périphérique que vous souhaitez tester s'affiche dans le programme de configuration du système  et qu'il est actif. Démarrez Dell Diagnostics à partir de votre disque dur ou à partir du support Drivers and Utilities (CD en option). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la  section Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur ou Lancement de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities (en option). CMOS Time and Date Not Set (Date et heure CMOS non définies) Diskette Boot Failure (Échec d'amorçage  disquette) Le lecteur A ou B est présent mais n'a pas  passé la séquence POST  du BIOS. Vérifiez que le lecteur est  correctement installé dans l'ordinateur  (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs » correspondant à votre ordinateur) et  correctement défini dans le  programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section  Programme de configuration du système). Vérifiez les deux extrémités  du câble d'interface. DMA Error (Erreur DMA) DMA 1 Error (Erreur DMA 1) DMA 2 Error (Erreur DMA 2) Erreur du contrôleur  DMA de la carte mère. Le clavier ou la carte mère doit peut- être être remplacée. FDD Controller Failure (Défaillance de  contrôleur FDD) HDD Controller Failure (Défaillance de  contrôleur HDD) Le BIOS ne peut pas communiquer avec le contrôleur du lecteur de  disquette ou du disque dur. Vérifiez que le lecteur de disquette ou  le disque dur est correctement installé  dans l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la  section « Lecteurs » correspondant à  votre système) et correctement défini  dans le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la  section Programme de configuration du système). Vérifiez les deux  extrémités du câble d'interface. INTR1 Error (Erreur INTR1) INTR2 Error (Erreur INTR2) Un canal d'interruption de la carte mère n'a pas  passé la séquence  POST. Le clavier ou la carte mère doit peut- être être remplacée. Invalid Boot Diskette (Disquette d'amorçage  incorrecte) Impossible de trouver le système d'exploitation  sur le lecteur A ou C. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la  section Programme de configuration du système) et vérifiez que le lecteur  A ou C est correctement identifié. Keyboard Error (Erreur de clavier) Le BIOS a détecté une  touche coincée. Vérifiez que rien ne repose sur le  clavier ; si une touche semble coincée,  essayez avec précaution de la  débloquer. Si le problème persiste,  vous devrez peut-être remplacer le  clavier. KB/Interface Error (Erreur de clavier/interface) Erreur du connecteur du clavier. Vérifiez que rien ne repose sur le  clavier ; si une touche semble coincée,  essayez avec précaution de la  débloquer. Si le problème persiste,  vous devrez peut-être remplacer le  clavier. No ROM Basic (Aucun basique ROM) Impossible de trouver le système d'exploitation  sur le lecteur A ou C. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la  section Programme de configuration du système) et vérifiez que le lecteur  A ou C est correctement identifié. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne que sur les ordinateurs Dell™.Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur  1. Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est connecté à une prise électrique qui fonctionne correctement.  2. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3. Lorsque le logo DELL s'affiche, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous avez attendu trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez que le bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis  arrêtez votre ordinateur et essayez à nouveau. 4. Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner Diagnostics dans le menu de démarrage, puis appuyez sur .  L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système de préamorçage (PSA) avec une série de diagnostics intégrés qui effectue, entre autres, un test préalable de  la carte mère, du clavier, du disque dur et de l'écran. l Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. l Si des défaillances sont détectées, prenez note par écrit du/des code(s) d'erreur et reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell. l Si l'évaluation de préamorçage du système se déroule sans problème, vous recevez le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. (Initialisation de la partition de l'utilitaire Dell Diagnostics. Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 5. Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de diagnostics du disque dur.  6. Appuyez sur pour sélectionner Test System (Tester le système), puis appuyez sur .  7. Dans le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics, cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris ou appuyez sur, puis sur , pour sélectionner le test à  effectuer (reportez-vous à la section Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics). 8. Une fois les tests terminés, fermez la fenêtre de test pour revenir au menu principal de Dell Diagnostics.  9. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran du menu principal.  Lancement de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities (en option)  1. Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities (en option). 2. Arrêtez l'ordinateur et redémarrez-le. Lorsque le logo DELL s'affiche, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre  ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez SATA CD-ROM Device (Périphérique de CD-ROM SATA) et appuyez sur .  4. Sélectionnez l'option SATA CD-ROM Device (Périphérique de CD-ROM SATA) à partir du menu d'initialisation du CD.  5. Sélectionnez l'option Amorcer à partir du CD-ROM dans le menu qui s'affiche. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur ne peut pas afficher une image à l'écran, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). REMARQUE : Une panne du clavier peut être due à une touche maintenue enfoncée pendant une période prolongée. Pour éviter ce genre de  problème, appuyez et relâchez la touche , à intervalles réguliers, jusqu'à ce que le menu du périphérique d'amorçage s'affiche. REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostic n'a été trouvée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du support Drivers and Utilities (reportez-vous à la section Lancement de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities (en option)). REMARQUE : Il vous est recommandé de sélectionner Test System pour exécuter un test complet sur votre ordinateur. La sélection de l'option  Test Memory (Tester la mémoire) lance le test de mémoire étendue, qui peut prendre trente minutes ou plus. À la fin du test, enregistrez les  résultats et appuyez sur une touche pour afficher le menu précédent. REMARQUE : Notez sur un papier les codes d'erreur et la description du problème tels qu'ils apparaissent et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent  à l'écran. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction  des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système.6. Tapez 1 pour lancer le menu du CD Drivers and Utilities. 7. Entrez 2 pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics.  8. Sélectionnez Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits depuis la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée  pour votre ordinateur. 9. Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics apparaît, sélectionnez le test à effectuer (reportez-vous à la section Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics). Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1. Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et l'écran du menu principal affiché, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant à l'option souhaitée.  2. Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la  description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran.  Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Contacter Dell). 3. Si vous effectuez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau  suivant pour en savoir plus. 4. Une fois les tests terminés, si vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, retirez le CD. 5. Fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran du menu principal. Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier par exemple. Tous les périphériques nécessitent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et tout autre programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique dispose de son propre jeu de commandes  spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. Option Fonction  Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de  votre part. Effectuez tout d'abord un Test rapide pour trouver le problème plus rapidement. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend une heure ou plus et exige que vous  répondiez régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du  problème. REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est situé en haut de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le support technique de  Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est indiqué dans l'option System Info (Infos système) du  programme de configuration du système. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système. Onglet Fonction Résultats Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Erreurs Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Aide Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient les informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la  mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des  périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à  celui-ci. Paramètres Permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.Lorsque Dell livre l'ordinateur, les pilotes requis sont déjà installés—aucune installation ou configuration supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. De nombreux pilotes, les pilotes de clavier par exemple, sont fournis avec votre système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows. Vous devez installer des pilotes si  vous : l mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation ; l réinstallez votre système d'exploitation ; l connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un périphérique, identifiez le pilote à l'origine du problème et mettez-le à niveau si nécessaire. Microsoft® Windows® XP 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration. 2. Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance, puis sur Système. 3. Dans la fenêtre Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. Microsoft Windows Vista®  1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista  , puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Ordinateur. 2. Cliquez sur Propriétés® Gestionnaire de périphériques. Faites défiler la liste pour rechercher des périphériques comportant un point d'exclamation (un cercle jaune et un [!]) sur l'icône du périphérique. Si vous voyez un point d'exclamation en regard du nom du périphérique, vous devrez peut-être réinstaller le pilote ou d'installer un nouveau pilote (reportezvous à la section Réinstallation des pilotes et des utilitaires). Réinstallation des pilotes et des utilitaires Utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows  Si un problème apparaît sur votre ordinateur après l'installation ou la mise à jour du pilote, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de  Windows pour remplacer le pilote par la version précédemment installée. Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Poste de travail® Propriétés® Matériel® Gestionnaire de périphériques. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes® Restauration des pilotes. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista  , puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Ordinateur. 2. Cliquez sur Propriétés® Gestionnaire de périphériques. AVIS : Le support Drivers and Utilities peut contenir des pilotes pour des systèmes d'exploitation qui ne sont pas installés sur votre ordinateur. Assurezvous que vous installez les logiciels appropriés à votre système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : La fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur s'affiche. Si vous êtes un administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer ; sinon, contactez votre administrateur pour continuer. AVIS : Vous trouverez les pilotes approuvés pour les ordinateurs Dell™ sur le site Web du service de support de Dell (support.dell.com) et votre support Drivers and Utilities. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d'autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 4. Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes® Restauration des pilotes. Si le programme Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne corrige pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la section  Restauration du système d'exploitation) pour remettre votre ordinateur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait avant l'installation du nouveau  pilote. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes  Après avoir extrait les fichiers de pilote sur votre disque dur comme décrit dans la section précédente : Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Poste de travail® Propriétés® Matériel® Gestionnaire de périphériques. 2. Double-cliquez sur le type de périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote (par exemple, Audio ou Vidéo). 3. Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote.  4. Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote® Mettre à jour le pilote. 5. Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (Avancé)® Suivant. 6. Cliquez sur Parcourir et placez-vous à l'endroit où vous avez copié les fichiers de pilote.  7. Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 8. Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista  , puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Ordinateur. 2. Cliquez sur Propriétés® Gestionnaire de périphériques. 3. Double-cliquez sur le type de périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote (par exemple, Audio ou Vidéo). 4. Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote.  5. Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote® Mettre à jour le pilote® Rechercher un programme pilote sur mon ordinateur. 6. Cliquez sur Parcourir et placez-vous à l'endroit où vous avez copié les fichiers de pilote.  7. Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié s'affiche, cliquez sur ce nom® OK® Suivant. 8. Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Dépannage des problèmes logiciels et matériels sous les systèmes d'exploitation  Microsoft® Windows® XP et Microsoft Windows Vista®  Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, utilisez le  Dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Pour lancer le Dépanneur des conflits matériels : Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Aide et support. REMARQUE : La fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur s'affiche. Si vous êtes un administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer ; sinon, contactez votre administrateur pour accéder au Gestionnaire de périphériques. REMARQUE : La fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur s'affiche. Si vous êtes un administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer ; sinon, contactez votre administrateur pour accéder au Gestionnaire de périphériques.2. Entrez Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ de recherche et appuyez sur  pour lancer la recherche.  3. Dans la section Corriger un problème, cliquez sur Dépanneur des conflits matériels. 4. Dans la liste Dépanneur des conflits matériels, sélectionnez l'option qui décrit le mieux le problème et cliquez sur Suivant pour poursuivre la procédure  de dépannage.  Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista  , puis sur Aide et support. 2. Entrez Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ de recherche et appuyez sur  pour lancer la recherche.  3. Dans les résultats de la recherche, sélectionnez l'option qui décrit le mieux le problème et terminez la procédure de dépannage.  Restauration du système d'exploitation  Plusieurs méthodes de restauration du système d'exploitation sont disponibles : l La fonction Restauration du système ramène votre ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur, sans affecter les fichiers de données. Commencez  par utiliser la fonction Restauration du système pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation et préserver vos fichiers de données. l Dell PC Restore de Symantec (disponible sous Windows XP) et Dell Factory Image Restore (disponible sous Windows Vista) ramènent votre disque dur  à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait au moment de l'achat. Ces logiciels suppriment de façon permanente toutes les données qui  figurent sur le disque dur et suppriment tous les programmes installés après réception de l'ordinateur. N'utilisez Dell PC Restore ou Dell Factory Image  Restore que dans le cas où la fonction Restauration du système ne vous a pas permis de résoudre le problème rencontré par le système d'exploitation. l Si vous avez reçu un disque Operating System (Système d'exploitation) avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l'utiliser pour restaurer votre système  d'exploitation. Toutefois, l'utilisation de ce disque entraîne la suppression de toutes les données présentes sur le disque dur. N'utilisez ce disque que si la Restauration du système n'a pas permis de résoudre le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows Le système d'exploitation Windows comporte l'option Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les  fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner  correctement. Les modifications apportées à votre ordinateur par la fonction Restauration du système sont complètement réversibles. Lancement de la Restauration du système  Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Accessoires® Outils système® Restauration du système. 2. Cliquez sur Restaurer mon ordinateur à une date antérieureou Créer un point de restauration. 3. Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les invites qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Dans la zone Lancer la recherche, entrez Restauration du système et appuyez sur .  3. Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les invites qui s'affichent à l'écran.  Si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème, vous pouvez annuler la dernière restauration du système. AVIS : Sauvegardez régulièrement vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne contrôle pas vos fichiers de données et ne permet  pas de les récupérer. REMARQUE : Les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l'affichage par défaut de Windows. Par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas  fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell™ est réglé sur le mode d'affichage classique de Windows. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours  d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas  terminée. REMARQUE : La fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur s'affiche. Si vous êtes un administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer ; sinon, contactez votre administrateur pour effectuer l'opération souhaitée.Annulation de la dernière restauration du système  Windows XP : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Tous les programmes® Accessoires® Outils système® Restauration du système. 2. Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Windows Vista : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Dans la zone Lancer la recherche, entrez Restauration du système et appuyez sur .  3. Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Activation de la Restauration du système  Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement  désactivée.  Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer® Panneau de configuration® Performances et maintenance® Système. 2. Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système et vérifiez que la case Désactiver la Restauration du système est décochée.  Utilisation de Dell™ PC Restore et de Dell Factory Image Restore N'utilisez Dell PC Restore (Windows XP) ou Dell Factory Image Restore (Windows Vista) qu'en dernier recours pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Ces  options restaurent votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait au moment de l'achat. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis  que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les documents, feuilles de calcul,  messages électroniques, photos numériques, fichiers de musique, etc. constituent les fichiers de données. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant  d'utiliser PC Restore ou Factory Image Restore. Windows XP : Dell PC Restore Utilisation de PC Restore : 1. Allumez l'ordinateur. Au cours du processus d'amorçage, une barre bleue portant la mention www.dell.com apparaît dans la partie supérieure de l'écran. 2. Dès que cette barre bleue s'affiche, appuyez sur .  Si vous n'appuyez pas sur  à temps, laissez l'ordinateur finir de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le de nouveau. 3. Cliquez sur Restaurer, puis sur Valider. AVIS : Avant d'annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours  d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas  terminée. REMARQUE : Windows Vista ne désactive pas la fonction Restauration du système même si l'espace disque disponible est faible. Par conséquent, la  procédure ci-dessous s'applique uniquement à Windows XP. AVIS : Dell PC Restore et Dell Factory Image Restore suppriment définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et suppriment tous les  programmes ou pilotes installés après réception de l'ordinateur. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant d'utiliser ces options. N'utilisez PC  Restore ou Dell Factory Image Restore que dans le cas où la fonction Restauration du système ne vous a pas permis de résoudre le problème rencontré  par le système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell PC Restore de Symantec et Dell Factory Image Restore peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays ou sur certains  ordinateurs. AVIS : Si vous ne souhaitez pas poursuivre l'utilisation de PC Restore, cliquez sur Redémarrer.La restauration prend environ de 6 à 10 minutes. 4. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l'ordinateur.  5. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Oui. L'ordinateur redémarre. Étant donné que l'ordinateur est restauré à son état de fonctionnement d'origine, les écrans qui apparaissent, tels que le  Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final sont identiques à ceux qui s'étaient affichés au premier démarrage de l'ordinateur.  6. Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre.  7. Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Suppression de PC Restore : L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Nous vous  recommandons de ne pas supprimer PC Restore de votre ordinateur, même s'il se révèle nécessaire de libérer de l'espace sur le disque dur. Une fois PC  Restore supprimé du disque dur, il est impossible de le rappeler et vous ne pourrez jamais utiliser PC Restore pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de  votre ordinateur à son état de fonctionnement d'origine. 1. Connectez-vous à l'ordinateur en tant qu'administrateur local.  2. Dans l'Explorateur de Microsoft Windows, rendez-vous sur c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3. Double-cliquez sur le nom de fichier DSRIRRemv2.exe. 4. Cliquez sur OK pour supprimer la partition PC Restore sur le disque dur. 5. Lorsqu'un message de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur Oui. La partition PC Restore est supprimée et l'espace disque ainsi libéré est ajouté à l'espace disque disponible sur le disque dur.  6. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local (C) dans l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur Propriétés, puis vérifiez que l'espace disque supplémentaire  est disponible tel qu'indiqué par la valeur plus élevée sous Espace disponible. 7. Cliquez sur Terminer pour fermer la fenêtre Suppression de PC Restore et redémarrer l'ordinateur.  Windows Vista : Dell Factory Image Restore 1. Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez plusieurs fois sur  pour accéder à la fenêtre Options avancées de démarrage de Vista. 2. Sélectionnez Réparer votre ordinateur. La fenêtre Options de restauration du système s'affiche. 3. Sélectionnez une configuration de clavier et cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Pour accéder aux options de restauration, connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur local. Pour accéder à l'invite de commande, entrez administrateur dans le champ Nom d'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur OK. 5. Cliquez sur Dell Factory Image Restore. REMARQUE : N'éteignez pas manuellement l'ordinateur. Cliquez sur Terminer et laissez l'ordinateur terminer le redémarrage. AVIS : La suppression de Dell PC Restore du disque dur supprime de manière permanente l'utilitaire PC Restore de votre ordinateur. Une fois Dell PC  Restore supprimé, vous ne pourrez plus l'utiliser pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous ne vous êtes pas connecté en tant qu'administrateur local, le message qui s'affiche vous invite à le faire. Cliquez sur Quitter et connectez-vous en tant qu'administrateur local. REMARQUE : Si la partition de PC Restore n'existe pas sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, un message indiquant qu'elle n'a pas été trouvée  apparaît. Cliquez sur Quitter ; il n'existe aucune partition à supprimer. REMARQUE : Selon votre configuration, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner Dell Factory Tools, puis Dell Factory Image Restore.L'écran d'accueil de Dell Factory Image Restore apparaît. 6. Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran de validation de la suppression des données apparaît.  AVIS : Si vous ne souhaitez pas continuer à utiliser Factory Image Restore, cliquez sur Annuler. 7. Cliquez sur la case à cocher pour confirmer votre souhait de reformater le disque dur et de restaurer les logiciels du système à leur état d'origine  (usine), puis cliquez sur Suivant. La restauration commence et peut prendre cinq minutes ou plus. Un message s'affiche lorsque le système d'exploitation et les applications installées en  usine ont été restaurés à leur état d'origine.  8. Cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l'ordinateur.  Utilisation du support Operating System Avant de commencer Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows pour corriger un problème lié à un nouveau pilote, utilisez tout d'abord la fonction  Restauration des pilotes de périphériques. Reportez-vous à la section Utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows. Si la Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système pour ramener l'ordinateur à l'état de  fonctionnement précédant l'installation du pilote. Reportez-vous à la section Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows. Pour réinstaller Windows, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : l Support Dell™ Operating System l Support Dell Drivers and Utilities Réinstallation de Windows XP ou Windows Vista  Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre de 1 à 2 heures. Après avoir réinstallé le système d'exploitation, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de  périphériques, le programme antivirus et d'autres logiciels. 1. Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation. 2. Insérez le disque Operating System. 3. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Installer Windows apparaît.  4. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.  Lorsque le logo DELL s'affiche, appuyez immédiatement sur . 5. Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, mettez en surbrillance CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW) et appuyez sur .  6. Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer à partir du CD. 7. Conformez-vous aux instructions affichées à l'écran pour terminer l'installation.  AVIS : Avant d'effectuer l'installation, sauvegardez tous les fichiers de données de votre disque dur principal. Pour les configurations de disque dur  conventionnelles, le disque dur principal correspond au premier disque dur détecté par l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le support Dell Drivers and Utilities contient les pilotes installés à l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez le support Dell Drivers and Utilities pour charger les pilotes requis. Selon la région dans laquelle vous avez commandé votre ordinateur et selon que vous avez demandé ou non les  supports, les supports Dell Drivers and Utilities et Operating System ne sont pas forcément livrés avec l'ordinateur. AVIS : Le support Operating System fournit des options de réinstallation du système d'exploitation Windows XP. Ces options peuvent remplacer des  fichiers installés et avoir des répercussions sur les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas Windows XP à moins  qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. REMARQUE : Si vous avez attendu trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez que le bureau de Microsoft®  Windows® s'affiche, puis arrêtez votre ordinateur et essayez à nouveau. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en  fonction des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système.Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Ordinateur ultra compact Guide d'utilisation À propos de votre ordinateur ultra compact Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur L'intérieur de votre ordinateur Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis Composants de la carte mère Connexion du bloc d'alimentation secteur Badge Dell À propos de votre ordinateur ultra compact  Vue frontale AVIS : Ne placez pas le moniteur sur l'ordinateur. Utilisez un socle inclinable. AVIS : Lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur, placez tous les câbles à l'arrière de la zone de travail pour éviter de tirer dessus, de les entortiller ou de  marcher dessus. REMARQUE : Si vous souhaitez placer votre ordinateur sous un bureau ou sur une surface murale, utilisez le support de fixation murale (en option). Pour commander ce support, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide). 1 connecteurs USB (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'avant pour les périphériques que vous connectez occasionnellement, comme les manettes de  jeu ou les caméras, ou pour les périphériques USB amorçables (reportez-vous à la section Programme de configuration du système pour plus d'informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme  l'imprimante et le clavier. 2 connecteur de casque Permet de connecter le casque et les haut-parleurs. 3 connecteur de microphone Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour brancher un microphone. 4 voyant d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste allumé, selon l'état : l Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint. l Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement. l Vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. l Jaune clignotant ou fixe — Reportez-vous à la section Problèmes d'alimentation. Pour quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce périphérique  est configuré comme un périphérique de réveil dans le Gestionnaire de périphériques Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les  modes de veille et sur la façon de quitter un mode d'économie d'énergie, reportez-vous à la section Gestion de l'alimentation sous Windows XP et Windows Vista. Reportez-vous à la section Voyants du système pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux permettant de résoudre les  problèmes rencontrés sur votre ordinateur. Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer l'ordinateur.Vue de côté Vue arrière Connecteurs du panneau arrière 5 bouton d'alimentation AVIS : Pour ne pas perdre de données, n'éteignez pas l'ordinateur en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation. Procédez plutôt  à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. Reportez-vous à la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur pour plus d'informations. 6 entrées d'air Les entrées d'air permettent d'éviter une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Afin de garantir une ventilation correcte, ne bloquez pas les  grilles de refroidissement. 7 baie modulaire Permet d'installer un lecteur optique « D module », un deuxième disque dur ou un lecteur de disquette. 8 voyant d'accès au  disque dur Le voyant d'accès au disque dur s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur le disque dur. Le voyant peut également  être allumé lorsque des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur de CD, fonctionnent. 9 entrées d'air Les entrées d'air permettent d'éviter une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Afin de garantir une ventilation correcte, ne bloquez pas les  grilles de refroidissement. 1 entrées d'air Les entrées d'air, situées de chaque côté de l'ordinateur, permettent d'éviter une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Afin de garantir une  ventilation correcte, ne bloquez pas les grilles de refroidissement. 2 trous de montage Pour le montage du socle inclinable en option. 1 voyants de diagnostic Pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux pouvant vous aider à résoudre les problèmes rencontrés avec votre  ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. 2 bouton de fermeture du capot de l'ordinateur Tournez ce bouton dans le sens horaire pour retirer le capot. 3 emplacement pour câble de  sécurité Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation du câble de sécurité, reportez-vous à la section Anneau du cadenas et emplacement pour câble de sécurité. 4 connecteurs du panneau arrière Reportez-vous à la section Connecteurs du panneau arrière pour obtenir une description des connecteurs de votre ordinateur. 5 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez la prise du bloc d'alimentation secteur. 6 entrées d'air Les entrées d'air permettent d'éviter une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Afin de garantir une ventilation correcte, ne  bloquez pas les grilles de refroidissement.Raccordement d'un moniteur VGA Si vous disposez d'un moniteur VGA, branchez le câble de l'adaptateur dans le connecteur vidéo DVI blanc situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur,  puis branchez le câble du moniteur dans le connecteur VGA de l'adaptateur. 1 connecteur parallèle Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à un  connecteur USB. 2 voyant d'intégrité  de la liaison l Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau 10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. l Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre le réseau 1000 Mb/s (1 Gb/s) et l'ordinateur. l Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion physique au réseau ou le contrôleur de réseau est désactivé dans le  programme de configuration du système. 3 carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une prise  réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de carte  réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le câble de réseau a été correctement installé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Il est recommandé d'utiliser un câblage et des connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de  catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable. 4 voyant d'activité  réseau Ce voyant clignote orange lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit des données sur le réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut  donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 connecteur de ligne de sortie Utilisez le connecteur de ligne de sortie de couleur verte pour connecter un ensemble de haut-parleurs avec amplificateur intégré. 6 connecteur de ligne d'entrée Utilisez le connecteur de ligne d'entrée bleu pour raccorder un appareil d'enregistrement/de lecture, tel qu'un lecteur de cassette,  un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope. 7 connecteurs USB (5) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et le clavier. 8 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, par exemple un ordinateur de poche, au connecteur série. 9 connecteur vidéo Si vous disposez d'un moniteur compatibleDVI, branchez le câble de votre moniteur dans le connecteur vidéo DVI blanc situé sur le  panneau arrière. Si vous disposez d'un moniteur VGA, reportez-vous à la section Raccordement d'un moniteur VGA. 10 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez la prise du bloc d'alimentation secteur. 11 voyants de diagnostic Pour obtenir une description des codes lumineux pouvant vous aider à résoudre les problèmes rencontrés avec votre ordinateur,  reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic. 1 adaptateur de câble Raccordement de deux moniteurs Utilisez l'adaptateur de câble pour raccorder un moniteur VGA et un moniteur DVI au connecteur DVI-I situé sur le panneau arrière. Lorsque vous raccordez deux moniteurs, le pilote vidéo détecte ce raccordement et active la fonctionnalité multimoniteur. Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Retirez le cache-câble, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la section Cache-câble (en option)). 4. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur : a. Tournez le bouton de fermeture du capot dans le sens horaire, comme illustré ci-dessous. b. Faites glisser le capot de l'ordinateur vers l'avant de 1 cm (½ pouce) ou jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête et soulevez le capot.  1 adaptateur de câble PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Avant de toucher les composants situés à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, mettez-vous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte.  Pendant votre intervention, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui  pourrait endommager les composants internes. PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte graphique peut énormément chauffer au cours d'une utilisation normale. Laissez-le refroidir assez longtemps avant de le toucher. L'intérieur de votre ordinateur  Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis  1 bouton de fermeture PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours le bloc d'alimentation secteur de votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir le capot de  l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 carénage du ventilateur/ dissipateur de chaleur 4 disque dur 2 haut-parleur (optionnel) 5 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 3 modules de mémoire (2) 6 commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis est installé en standard sur les ordinateurs ultra compacts mais est en option sur les  ordinateurs mini-tour, de bureau et compacts ; il est possible qu'il ne soit pas présent sur votre ordinateur.Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Débranchez le câble du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis de la carte mère. Pour ce faire, appuyez avec deux doigts sur le mécanisme de  déverrouillage situé de chaque côté du connecteur et tirez pour débrancher le connecteur du câble.  4. Faites glisser le commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis en dehors de son logement dans le support métallique, puis faites-le passer par le trou carré  du support pour retirer le commutateur et son câble de l'ordinateur.  Remplacement du commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Insérez avec précaution le commutateur depuis le dessous du support métallique dans le trou carré du support, puis faites-le glisser dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.  2. Rebranchez le câble sur la carte mère.  3. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 4. Si vous utilisez un socle inclinable, fixez-le à l'ordinateur.  Réinitialisation du détecteur d'intrusion dans le châssis 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .  Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®  s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Sélectionnez l'option Chassis Intrusion (Intrusion dans le châssis) et appuyez sur les touches fléchées gauche ou droite pour sélectionner Reset (Réinitialiser). Choisissez alors On (Activé), On-Silent (Activé silencieux) ou Disabled (Désactivé).  4. Enregistrez vos paramètres BIOS et quittez le programme de configuration du système.  Composants de la carte mère  REMARQUE : Vous pouvez sentir une légère résistance lorsque vous glissez le commutateur en dehors de son logement. REMARQUE : Le paramètre par défaut est On-Silent (Activé silencieux).Cache-câble (en option) Fixation du cache-câble  1. Vérifiez que tous les câbles de périphérique externe ont été passés par le trou du cache-câble.  2. Branchez tous les câbles de périphérique sur les connecteurs situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.  3. Tenez la partie inférieure du cache-câble et alignez les languettes sur les logements situés sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.  4. Insérez les languettes dans les logements et faites glisser le capot pour aligner les extrémités du capot sur les extrémités du châssis (reportez-vous à  l'illustration) jusqu'à ce que le cache-câble soit correctement positionné.  5. Installez un périphérique de sécurité dans l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité (en option).  1 connecteur de ventilateur (FAN_FRONT) 8 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD) 2 connecteur de haut-parleur interne (INT_SPKR) 9 connecteur du ventilateur du disque dur (FAN_HDD) 3 haut-parleur de la carte mère (BEEP) 10 cavalier d'effacement des paramètres CMOS (RTCRST) 4 connecteur mémoire canal B (DIMM_2) 11 connecteur d'alimentation de disque dur (SATA_PWR) 5 connecteur mémoire canal A (DIMM_1)  12 connecteur de ventilateur (FAN_REAR) 6 connecteur de câble de données SATA (SATA0) 13 connecteur du commutateur d'intrusion (INTRUDER) 7 pile (BATT) 14  processeur (CPU)Retrait du cache-câble  1. Si un périphérique de sécurité est installé dans l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité, retirez-le. 2. Faites glisser le bouton de dégagement, saisissez le cache-câble, faites glisser le cache sur le côté, comme illustré, puis soulevez-le pour le retirer. Connexion du bloc d'alimentation secteur 1. Connectez le bloc d'alimentation secteur au connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le loquet s'enclenche en position pour  une connexion sécurisée.  2. Raccordez l'une des extrémités du câble d'alimentation en CA au bloc d'alimentation.  3. Si le câble d'alimentation secteur est doté d'un fil de mise à la terre pour le raccordement à une prise secteur, raccordez le connecteur en métal de mise  à la terre à la source de mise à la terre (une vis souvent) située sur la prise (reportez-vous à l'illustration ci-dessous) : a. Desserrez la source de mise à la terre.  b. Faites glisser le connecteur en métal de mise à la terre derrière la source de mise à la terre et resserrez la source.  1 cache-câble 2 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 1 bouton d'éjection PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Si le câble du bloc d'alimentation est doté d'un fil de mise à la terre vert, ne mettez pas en contact le fil de mise à la terre vert et  les conducteurs d'alimentation car cela pourrait entraîner une décharge électrique, un incendie ou endommager votre ordinateur.4. Branchez le câble d'alimentation en AC à la prise électrique.  Le voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation secteur est éteint lorsque l'adaptateur n'est pas branché dans la prise électrique et il est vert ou orange selon  l'état : l voyant vert — vert fixe : le bloc d'alimentation est relié à une prise secteur et à l'ordinateur. l voyant orange — orange fixe : le bloc d'alimentation est relié à une prise secteur mais pas à l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur ne fonctionnera pas dans  cet état. Reliez le bloc d'alimentation secteur à l'ordinateur et/ou réinitialisez le bloc d'alimentation en le débranchant et en le rebranchant sur la  prise électrique. Badge Dell Vous pouvez faire pivoter le badge Dell, situé à l'avant de votre ordinateur. Pour ce faire : 1. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 2. Tirez le levier pour dégager la languette du logement.  3. Faites pivoter le badge jusqu'à la position souhaitée, en vérifiant que la languette est bien fixée dans le logement.  Retour à la page Contenu 1 source de mise à la terre (vis) 2 connecteur en métal de mise à la terre PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 levier de dégagement avec la languette dans le logement 2 logements (2)Retour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Baie modulaire Baie modulaire Vous pouvez installer un périphérique amovible Dell™, tel qu'un lecteur de disquette, un lecteur optique ou un deuxième disque dur, dans la baie modulaire.  Vous pouvez également installer un emplacement prédécoupé (cache de remplissage) dans la baie si vous ne comptez pas y installer de lecteur. Votre ordinateur Dell est livré avec un lecteur optique ou un emplacement prédécoupé installé dans la baie modulaire. L'emplacement prédécoupé n'est  maintenu dans la baie modulaire que par une vis de fixation. Vous pouvez fixer un lecteur optique de deux façons : l Loquet de verrouillage (accessible une fois le capot de l'ordinateur retiré) l Vis de fixation (conditionnée séparément) Pour plus d'informations sur la fixation d'un périphérique dans votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section Fixation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire. Installation d'un périphérique lorsque l'ordinateur est éteint Pour installer un périphérique dans la baie modulaire : 1. Retirez tous les périphériques installés de la baie. Si la baie modulaire contient un emplacement prédécoupé, retirez la vis de fixation et retirez  l'emplacement prédécoupé de la baie modulaire et passez à l'étape 5. 2. Si la baie modulaire contient un périphérique qui est verrouillé à l'aide du loquet de verrouillage, retirez le capot (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur), puis levez le loquet de verrouillage du module pour le déplacer vers la position Déverrouillé. Si une vis de fixation est également  utilisée, retirez-la. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les périphériques, rangez-les dans un endroit sec et sûr lorsqu'ils ne sont pas insérés dans l'ordinateur. Évitez  d'exercer une pression quelconque ou de placer des objets lourds sur ces derniers. 1 bas de l'ordinateur 2 vis de fixation3. Appuyez sur le loquet de fermeture du périphérique afin de le faire ressortir.  4. Tirez sur le loquet pour retirer le périphérique de la baie modulaire.  5. Faites glisser le nouveau périphérique dans la baie modulaire.  1 loquet de verrouillage du module 1 loquet de fermeture du périphérique AVIS : Ne placez pas d'objets lourds sur l'ordinateur. Cela pourrait tordre le châssis et gêner le retrait d'un périphérique du module. 1 loquet de fermeture6. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez verrouiller le nouveau périphérique dans la baie modulaire en plaçant le loquet de verrouillage du module sur la  position Verrouillé (vous devez retirer le capot de l'ordinateur pour pouvoir utiliser le loquet de verrouillage).  7. Si vous avez retiré le capot pour verrouiller le périphérique dans la baie modulaire, remettez-le en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Retrait et installation d'un périphérique sous Microsoft® Windows® 1. Pour retirer un périphérique installé dans la baie modulaire, double-cliquez sur l'icône Safely Remove Hardware (Supprimer le périphérique en toute  sécurité) de la barre des tâches.  2. Dans la liste des périphériques qui s'affiche à l'écran, cliquez sur le périphérique à éjecter.  3. Lorsqu'un message, indiquant que le périphérique peut être retiré, s'affiche, retirez le périphérique de la baie modulaire.  4. Faites glisser le nouveau périphérique dans la baie modulaire.  Fixation d'un périphérique dans la baie modulaire 1. Pour vous permettre de fixer un périphérique dans la baie modulaire, votre ordinateur est doté d'un loquet de verrouillage du module. Pour utiliser ce  loquet : a. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). b. Abaissez avec précaution le loquet de verrouillage du module jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en position.  c. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). Le module ne peut pas être retiré de l'ordinateur tant que vous n'avez pas levé le loquet de verrouillage pour le mettre en position Verrouillé. 2. Vous pouvez également fixer un périphérique dans la baie modulaire à l'aide d'une vis de fixation (conditionnée séparément), accessible depuis la partie  inférieure de l'ordinateur.  REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas retirer de périphérique si votre ordinateur est allumé et que le périphérique est verrouillé dans la baie  modulaire. Vous devez arrêter l'ordinateur et suivre la procédure indiquée dans la section pour pouvoir retirer un périphérique verrouillé  Installation d'un périphérique lorsque l'ordinateur est éteint. AVIS : Ne placez pas d'objets lourds sur l'ordinateur. Cela pourrait tordre le châssis et gêner le retrait d'un périphérique du module.Retour à la page Contenu 1 bas de l'ordinateur 2 vis de fixationRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Processeur Processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Soulevez le carénage du ventilateur et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur : a. Appuyez sur le levier de dégagement, situé sur le socle de retenue, jusqu'à ce que le dissipateur de chaleur soit dégagé.  PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot.  AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas la face inférieure du nouveau processeur. AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches. 1 carénage du ventilateur PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur peut devenir brûlant. Laissez-le refroidir assez longtemps avant de le toucher. b. Soulevez délicatement le dissipateur de chaleur pour l'extraire du processeur.  c. Posez le dissipateur de chaleur en plaçant la partie contenant la pâte thermoconductible vers le haut.  5. Tirez le levier de verrouillage vers le haut jusqu'à ce que le processeur soit dégagé, puis retirez le processeur de son support.  6. Déballez le nouveau processeur en prenant garde de ne pas toucher sa face inférieure.  7. Si le levier de dégagement du support n'est pas complètement ouvert, ouvrez-le. 8. Alignez les encoches avant et arrière du processeur sur celles du support.  1 dessus du dissipateur de chaleur 2 dissipateur de chaleur 3 socle de retenue 4 languette de retenue AVIS : À moins qu'un nouveau dissipateur de chaleur ne soit requis par le nouveau processeur, réutilisez l'ensemble dissipateur de chaleur initial  lorsque vous remplacez le processeur. 1 loquet de fermeture central 2 cache du processeur 3 processeur 4 support 5 levier de dégagement AVIS : Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le processeur, ne touchez pas les broches à l'intérieur du support et veillez à ce qu'aucun objet ne tombe sur ces  broches.9. Alignez les angles de la broche 1 du processeur et du support. 10. Placez doucement le processeur à l'intérieur du support et vérifiez qu'il est correctement positionné.  11. Lorsque le processeur est complètement installé dans le support, faites de nouveau pivoter le levier de dégagement vers le support jusqu'à ce qu'il  s'enclenche en place pour fixer le processeur. Si vous installez un kit de remplacement du processeur fourni par Dell, renvoyez le processeur à Dell dans l'emballage du kit de remplacement. 12. Nettoyez la pâte thermoconductible au bas du dissipateur de chaleur.  13. Appliquez la nouvelle pâte thermoconductible au-dessus du processeur. 14. Placez l'une des extrémités du dissipateur de chaleur sous la languette du socle de retenue du côté opposé au levier.  AVIS : Pour éviter tout dommage, assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement aligné sur le support et n'exercez pas une pression excessive  quand vous le mettez en place. 1 cache du processeur 6 levier de dégagement 2 languette 7 encoche d'alignement avant 3 processeur 8 support et indicateur de la broche 1 du processeur 4 support du processeur 9 encoche d'alignement arrière 5 loquet de fermeture central AVIS : Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Veillez à appliquer une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible. Une nouvelle pâte thermoconductible est essentielle pour assurer un thermoliage  adéquat, ce qui est obligatoire pour un fonctionnement optimal du processeur.15. Abaissez le dissipateur de chaleur sur le processeur à un angle de 45 degrés de façon à ce que l'une des extrémités du dissipateur de chaleur se fixe  sous la languette située en face de languette de retenue du socle de retenue.  16. Remontez le carénage.  17. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 18. Remettez le cache-câble en place, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la section Cache-câble (en option)). Retour à la page Contenu 1 dissipateur de chaleur 2 socle de retenue 3 levier de dégagementRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Lecteurs Lecteurs Votre ordinateur prend en charge : l Un disque dur SATA (ATA série) l Un lecteur optique D module de Dell en option, un deuxième disque dur ou un lecteur de disquette dans la baie modulaire (pour savoir comment  installer des périphériques dans la baie modulaire et en retirer, reportez-vous à la section Baie modulaire). Consignes générales d'installation Connexion des câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous installez un lecteur, vous raccordez deux câbles (un câble d'alimentation CC et un câble d'interface de données) à l'arrière du lecteur.  Connecteurs d'interface de données  Connecteurs de câble d'alimentation  REMARQUE : Pour des informations sur l'installation de lecteurs « D module », reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec votre périphérique  optionnel. Connecteur SATA 1 connecteur du câble d'interface de données 2 connecteur d'interface de donnéesConnexion et déconnexion de câbles de lecteur  Lorsque vous connectez et déconnectez un câble de données SATA, tenez le câble par le connecteur noir de chaque côté. Lorsque vous retirez un câble à  l'aide d'une languette de retrait, saisissez la languette de retrait de couleur et tirez jusqu'à ce que le connecteur se libère.  Disque dur Installation d'un disque dur 1. Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur au lieu d'en remplacer un, fixez les rails de lecteur, situés à l'intérieur du capot, sur le nouveau lecteur et passez à  l'étape 9. 2. Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos fichiers avant de commencer cette procédure.  3. Consultez la documentation du disque dur pour vérifier s'il est configuré pour votre ordinateur.  1 câble d'alimentation 2 connecteur d'entrée d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur du bloc d'alimentation avant de retirer le  disque dur. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le lecteur, ne le placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-le plutôt sur une surface qui le protégera, comme un tapis de  mousse. 1 lecteur 2 rails de lecteur (2) 3 vis (4)4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 5. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 6. Retirez le disque dur installé :  a. D'une main, appuyez sur les rails de lecteur de façon à pousser les deux rails l'un vers l'autre.  b. Faites glisser le lecteur légèrement vers l'avant, puis faites pivoter le disque dur vers le haut pour l'éloigner du support du disque dur.  7. Débranchez les câbles de données et d'alimentation des connecteurs de lecteur.  8. Retirez les quatre vis qui fixent les rails de lecteur sur le disque dur existant, puis fixez les rails sur le disque dur de remplacement. 9. Raccordez les câbles de données et d'alimentation aux connecteurs de disque dur en vous assurant que les connecteurs sont correctement orientés.  10. Faites glisser le disque dur dans son support. 1 unité de disque dur 2 rails de lecteur (2) 3 connecteur du câble de données 4 connecteur du câble d'alimentation 1 lecteur 2 rails de lecteur (2) 3 vis (4) AVIS : Les connecteurs de données et d'alimentation série ATA sont munis d'un détrompeur pour assurer une bonne insertion, c'est-à-dire qu'une encoche ou une broche manquante sur l'un des connecteurs correspond à une languette ou à un trou rempli sur l'autre. Lors du raccordement des  câbles à un lecteur, vérifiez que les connecteurs sont correctement orientés avant de raccorder les câbles au lecteur.11. Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur). 12. Remettez le cache-câble en place, le cas échéant.  Consultez la documentation de l'unité de disque dur pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour son fonctionnement.  13. Redémarrez l'ordinateur.  14. Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre lecteur avant de passer à l'étape suivante.  Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. 15. Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section Dell Diagnostics). 16. Installez votre système d'exploitation sur le disque dur.  Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. Remplacement d'un ventilateur de disque dur 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section Disque dur). 3. Retirez le ventilateur de disque dur : a. Retirez la vis de fixation de la languette de retenue du ventilateur au support du disque dur. b. Tout en appuyant sur la languette de retenue, faites glisser le ventilateur vers l'avant de l'ordinateur pour dégager les languettes latérales des  logements correspondants situés sur le support de disque dur.  c. Soulevez le ventilateur pour le retirer du support de disque dur. d. Débranchez le ventilateur. 4. Remettez le ventilateur de disque dur en place : a. Branchez le ventilateur sur l'ordinateur. b. Alignez ses quatre languettes latérales et la languette de retenue sur les cinq logements correspondants situés sur le support de disque dur.  c. Faites glisser la languette de retenue sous le revêtement métallique recouvrant son logement, puis faites glisser le ventilateur vers l'arrière de  l'ordinateur. d. Remettez la vis pour fixer la languette de retenue du ventilateur au support du disque dur. Retour à la page Contenu 1 support du disque dur 2 vis 3 languette de retenue du ventilateur 4 ventilateur 5 languette latéraleRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Haut-parleurs Haut-parleurs Installation d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). 3. Insérez le haut-parleur dans le châssis de l'ordinateur.  4. Raccordez les câbles à la carte mère.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retrait d'un haut-parleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant de commencer. 2. Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur). PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour empêcher les composants de l'ordinateur de subir des dégâts dus à l'électricité statique, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique  avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également faire ceci en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du  châssis de l'ordinateur.3. Débranchez les câbles de la carte mère.  4. Retirez le haut-parleur du châssis de l'ordinateur.  5. Remettez en place le capot de l'ordinateur. 6. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Guide d'utilisation Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur ultra compact Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur ultra compact  Microprocesseur Type de microprocesseur Les processeurs suivants sont pris en charge : l Intel® Core™ 2 l Intel vPro™ l Intel Celeron® Mémoire cache interne L1 : jusqu'à 64 Ko ;  L2 : jusqu'à 4 Mo (selon votre processeur) Mémoire Type SDRAM DDR2 667 MHz ou 800 MHz Connecteurs de mémoire 2 Modules de mémoire pris en charge 512 Mo, 1 Go ou 2 Go non ECC Mémoire minimale Bicanal : 1 Go ; Monocanal : 512 Mo Mémoire maximale 4 Go Adresse BIOS F0000h Informations concernant votre ordinateur Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Intel Q35 Express avec ICH9DO Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresse 32 bits Canaux DMA Huit Niveaux d'interruption 24 Puce du BIOS (NVRAM) 32 Mo NIC Interface réseau intégrée avec support ASF 1.03 et  2.0, conformément à la définition DMTF Communication 10/100/1000 possible iAMT 3.0 Vidéo Type Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 3100 avec DVI-I intégrée et prise en charge double moniteur Audio Type Audio ADI 1984 haute définition Conversion stéréo 24 bits analogique à numérique et 24 bits numérique  à analogiqueContrôleurs Lecteurs Un contrôleur ATA série prenant en charge un  périphérique Bus d'extension Type de bus SATA 1.0 et 2.0; USB 2.0 Vitesse du bus SATA : 1,5 et 3,0 Gb/s ; USB : 480 Mb/s Lecteurs Internes/externes Une baie « D module » pour un lecteur optique, un deuxième disque dur ou un lecteur de disquette Une baie de disque dur de 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces) Connecteurs Connecteurs externes : Série Connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550C Parallèle Connecteur à 25 broches (bidirectionnel) Vidéo Connecteur DVI à 28 broches Carte réseau Connecteur RJ45 USB Deux connecteurs conformes USB 2.0 sur le panneau avant et cinq sur le panneau arrière Audio Deux connecteurs pour la ligne d'entrée et la ligne de  sortie en face arrière ; deux connecteurs en face  avant pour le casque et le microphone Connecteurs sur la carte mère : SATA Connecteur à 7 broches Ventilateur Un connecteur à 3 broches et deux connecteurs à 5  broches Combinaisons de touches Sous Microsoft® Windows® XP, affiche la fenêtre  Sécurité de Windows ; sous MS-DOS®, redémarre  (réamorce) l'ordinateur.  ou  Démarre la configuration intégrée du système (au  démarrage uniquement). Démarre automatiquement l'ordinateur à partir de  l'environnement réseau spécifié par l'environnement  d'amorçage distant (PXE) plutôt qu'à partir d'un des  périphériques indiqués dans l'option Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) du programme de  configuration du système (utilisable pendant le  démarrage uniquement). ou Affiche un menu de périphérique d'amorçage qui  permet à l'utilisateur d'entrer un périphérique pour  un amorçage ponctuel (utilisable au démarrage du  système uniquement) ainsi que des options  permettant d'exécuter les diagnostics sur le disque  dur et sur le système.

Affiche l'écran des paramètres de l'interface  Management Engine BIOS Extension qui vous permet de modifier ces paramètresContrôles et voyants Bouton d'alimentation Bouton poussoir Voyant d'alimentation Voyant vert — Vert clignotant en mode de veille ; vert fixe à l'état de marche. Voyant orange — Orange clignotant indique un problème concernant un périphérique installé ;  orange fixe indique un problème d'alimentation  interne (reportez-vous à la section Problèmes  d'alimentation). Voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation Voyant vert — Vert fixe : le bloc d'alimentation est relié à une prise secteur et à l'ordinateur. Voyant orange — Orange fixe : le bloc d'alimentation est relié à une prise secteur mais pas à l'ordinateur. Voyant d'accès au disque dur Vert Voyant d'intégrité de la liaison (sur la carte réseau  intégrée) Voyant vert pour une opération de 10 Mb ; voyant  orange pour une opération de 100 Mb ; voyant jaune  pour une opération de 1000 Mb (1 Gb) Voyant d'activité (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Voyant jaune clignotant Voyants de diagnostic Quatre voyants sur le panneau avant (reportez-vous à la section Voyants de diagnostic). Voyant d'alimentation de veille AUX_PWR sur la carte mère Alimentation Bloc d'alimentation externe CC : REMARQUE : La consommation électrique générée  par une source d'alimentation en CA peut être nulle  lorsque l'ordinateur est débranché de cette source  d'alimentation. L'ordinateur tire cependant une quantité minimale d'énergie de la pile bouton interne,  même lorsqu'il ne tire pas d'énergie de la source  d'alimentation en CA. Consommation en watts 220 W Dissipation de chaleur 751 BTU/h REMARQUE : La dissipation de chaleur est calculée  suivant la valeur nominale de la consommation du bloc d'alimentation. Tension Blocs d'alimentation à détection automatique — 90 à  135 V à 50/60 Hz ; 180 à 265 V à 50/60 Hz Pile de secours Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium Caractéristiques physiques Sans cache-câble : Hauteur 26,4 cm (10,375 pouces) Largeur 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces) Profondeur 25,3 cm (9,95 pouces) Poids 4,5 kg (10 livres) Avec cache-câble standard : Hauteur 26,4 cm (10,375 pouces) Largeur 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces) Profondeur 33 cm (13 pouces) Poids 4,9 kg (10,8 livres) Avec cache-câble étendu : 12,34 kg (27,2 livres) Hauteur 26,4 cm (10,375 pouces) Largeur 8,9 cm (3,5 pouces) Profondeur 36,1 cm (14,2 pouces)Retour à la page Contenu Environnement Température : Fonctionnement 10 ° à 30 °C (50 ° à 86 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Humidité relative 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,25 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 0,5 octave/min Stockage 0,5 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 1 octave/min Chocs maximaux : Fonctionnement demi-impulsion sinusoïdale inférieure avec une  modification de la vélocité de 50,8 cm/s (20 pouces/s) Stockage onde carrée moyenne de 27 G avec un changement  de vitesse de 508 cm/s (200 pouces/s) Altitude : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)Dell™ OptiPlex™ 755 Guide d'utilisation Remarques, avis et précautions Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, OptiPlex, TravelLite, OpenManage et StrikeZone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, SpeedStep et Celeron sont des marques déposées et Core et vPro sont des marques d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows Vista et le bouton Démarrer de Windows  sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et  est utilisé par Dell Inc. sous licence. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En  tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell a fait en sorte que ce produit réponde aux normes de ce programme en matière de consommation énergétique. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèles: DCTR, DCNE, DCSM et DCCY Octobre 2007        Réf.: JN460        Rév. A01 Ordinateur ultra compact À propos de votre ordinateur Recherche d'informations Ordinateur ultra compact Caractéristiques de l'ordinateur ultra compact Fonctionnalités avancées Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte Nettoyage de votre ordinateur Fonctions Microsoft® Windows® Dépannage Obtention d'aide Glossaire Garantie Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Retrait et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Baie modulaire Lecteurs Processeur Haut-parleurs Pile Remplacement de la carte mère Mémoire Remise en place du capot de l'ordinateur REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour à la page Contenu Garantie Guide d'utilisation Dell Inc. (« Dell ») fabrique ses produits à partir de pièces et de composants neufs ou quasiment neufs conformément aux pratiques industrielles standard.  Pour des informations sur la garantie Dell de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide d'information sur le produit ou au document de garantie livré avec votre  ordinateur. Retour à la page Contenu Intel Active Management Technology v7.0 Guide de l'administrateur Présentation générale Présentation du produit Nouvelle expérience au déballage Modes opérationnels Présentation de la configuration et de l'installation Menus et paramètres par défaut Présentation des paramètres du MEBx Paramètres généraux ME Configuration AMT Intel Fast Call for Help (Appel pour rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide) Paramètres par défaut du MEBx Paramètres généraux ME Configuration AMT Installation et configuration Présentation des procédés Service de configuration - Utilisation d'un périphérique USB Service de configuration - Procédure pour périphérique USB Déploiement de système Pilotes du système d'exploitation Gestion Intel AMT Web GUI Redirection AMT (SOL/IDE-R) Présentation de la redirection AMT Application d'état de gestion et sécurité Intel) Application d'état de gestion et sécurité Intel) Dépannage Dépannage Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables à votre modèle. Les informations que contient le présent document sont sujettes à des modifications sans préavis. ©2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction du présent document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™, ExpressCharge™, Latitude™, Latitude ON™, OptiPlex™, Vostro™ et Wi-Fi Catcher™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino® et Celeron® sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™ et ATI FirePro™ sont des marques de Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, le bouton de démarrage Windows Vista et Office Outlook® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque appartenant à la Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) et elle est utilisée sous licence sur des disques ou des lecteurs. Le terme de Bluetooth® est une marque déposée et propriété du Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. et il est utilisé par Dell Inc. sous licence. Wi-Fi® est une marque déposée de Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc. Les autres marques et noms éventuellement utilisés dans ce document font référence aux entités propriétaires de ces marques ou aux noms des produits, et Dell Inc. réfute tout intérêt propriétaire dans les noms et marques autres que les siens propres. Mars 2011 Rév. A00Présentation du produit Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT) permet aux sociétés d'administrer aisément leurs ordinateurs en réseau. Détecter les ressources informatiques sur un réseau, que les ordinateurs soient sous ou hors tension – Intel AMT utilise les informations stockées en mémoire système non volatile pour accéder à l'ordinateur. Il est possible d'accéder à tous les ordinateurs, même s'il sont éteints (cette fonction est également appelée accès hors bande ou OOB). Réparer à distance les systèmes, même après des défaillances du système d'exploitation — Vous pouvez accéder à distance aux ordinateurs à des fins de réparation après un dysfonctionnement du logiciel ou une défaillance du système d'exploitation. Grâce aux journaux et aux alertes d'événements hors bande d'Intel AMT, les administrateurs IT peuvent également détecter aisément les éventuels problèmes des ordinateurs. Protéger les réseaux contre des menaces entrantes tout en tenant les logiciels et la protection anti-virus à jour dans l'ensemble du réseau. Support logiciel Plusieurs revendeurs indépendants de logiciels (ISV) créent des logiciels compatibles avec les fonctions d'Intel AMT. Les administrateurs IT disposent donc de nombreuses options d'administration à distance du parc informatique en réseau de leur société. Fonctions et avantages Intel AMT Caractéristiques Avantages Accès hors bande (OOB) Permet l'administration à distance des plates-formes, quels que soient l'alimentation du système et l'état du système d'exploitation Dépannage et restauration à distance Réduit de façon significative les déplacements des techniciens en informatique, ce qui accroît leur efficacité Alertes proactives Diminue le temps d'inactivité et réduit les temps de réparation. Nouvelles fonctions de vPro7 AMT7 Provisionnement basé sur l'hôte : déploiement aisé d'unités compatibles AMT par les clients. Prise en charge d'un proxy de communication : permet la communication AMT vers un réseau externe (par exemple : l'informatique externalisée hors site) Gestion Dell unique de la batterie (NB) et du BIOS (DT/NB) à distance via AMT Restauration MEFW Permet la mise à niveau inférieur de MEFW sur les systèmes vPro et permettrait aux projets d'intégration personnalisée en usine (Custom Factory Integration - CFI) et aux clients de verrouiller facilement les révisions du BIOS. AT-p 3.0 Prise en charge du réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) 3G pour AT-p (Ericsson sans fil uniquement sur NB) Commandes de suspension/reprise AT-p pour une désactivation temporaire Authentification AT-p sur reprise S3 (facultatif) Ajout de prise en charge pour les espaces de travail d'ordinateur de bureauAutres nouvelles fonctions (liées à MEFW) Prise en charge de LAN ARP ME répond à la demande de LAN ARP (IPV4) et des paquets de découverte de voisins (IPV6) en ne réveillant pas mais en notifiant le système de console dans Sx. Nouvelle configuration requise Win7 LAN Uniquement pour SKU 5Mo et dans la stratégie d'alimentation 2 Deep S4/S5 Automatiquement désactivé lorsque AMT est provisionné dans la stratégie d'alimentation 2. Intel IPT (Identify Protection Technology - Technologie de protection de l'identité) Permet une connexion sécurisée basée sur un OTP (One Time Password - mot de passe utilisable une seule fois) et des transactions Web via une authentification basée sur ME. Conditions requises de l'ordinateur client L'ordinateur client dont il est question dans ce document est basé sur la plate-forme Intel PCH/la famille des jeux de puces Intel 6 Series, et est administré par Intel Management Engine (Moteur de gestion Intel). Les configurations micrologicielles et logicielles suivantes sont requises pour l'installation et la configuration. Elles doivent être appliquées avant la configuration et l'exécution d'Intel Management Engine (Moteur de gestion Intel) sur l'ordinateur client. Un périphérique flash SPI programmé avec le BIOS intégrant le flashage d'image Intel AMT 6.0, Intel Management Engine et les images de composant GbE. Lorsque Intel AMT est activé dans le BIOS, il est possible d'accéder à la configuration MEBx à partir du menu F12. Pour activer toutes les fonctions d'Intel Management Engine (Moteur de gestion Intel) au sein du système d'exploitation Microsoft, les pilotes du périphérique (Intel MEI/SOL/LMS) doivent être installés et configurés sur l'ordinateur client. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel. REMARQUE : le MEBx (Intel Management Engine BIOS Extension) est un module ROM en option fourni à Dell™ par Intel ; ce module est inclus au BIOS Dell. Le MEBx a été personnalisé pour les ordinateurs Dell.Nouvelle expérience au déballage Les éléments suivants sont disponibles sur un ordinateur Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT) : Installation en usine Le modèle Intel AMT 7.0 est livré par les usines Dell configuré avec des valeurs par défaut. Guide de configuration et de référence rapide Présentation générale d'Intel AMT avec un lien au Guide technique Dell. Guide technique Dell Présentation, configuration, provisionnement et support technique de haut niveau d'Intel AMT. Support de sauvegarde Le micrologiciel et les pilotes essentiels sont disponibles sur le CD de Ressources. Voir le Guide de l'administrateur pour des informations plus détaillées sur Intel AMT disponibles sur le site Web support.dell.com\manuals.Modes opérationnels La version d'Intel AMT 5.0 et ses versions antérieures prenaient en charge deux modes de fonctionnement : Petite et moyenne entreprise (PME) et Entreprise. La fonctionnalité de ces modes a été intégrée aux versions Intel AMT 6.0 et AMT 7.0 qui offrent donc les fonctions du mode Entreprise précédent. Les nouvelles options de configuration sont les suivantes : Paramétrage et configuration manuelle (disponible pour les clients SMB) Paramétrage automatique Configuration Paramètre Intel AMT 5.0 et valeurs par défaut Intel AMT 6.0 / 7.0 (options Mode Entreprise Mode PME par défaut) Mode TLS Enabled (Activé) Disabled (Désactivé) Disabled (Désactivé), peut être activé ultérieurement Interface utilisateur Web Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) Enabled (Activé) Interface réseau de redirection IDER/SOL/CVS activée Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) si la fonction est activée dans Intel® MEBx Enabled (Activé), peut être désactivé ultérieurement Mode de redirection hérité (Contrôle l'écoute FW pour les connexions de redirection d'entrée) Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) si la fonction est activée dans Intel® MEBx Disabled (Désactivé) (définir sur Enabled (Activé) pour fonctionner avec les consoles SMB héritées) REMARQUE : les clients peuvent acheter TLS désactivé de manière permanente à partir de l'usine en raison des restrictions sur la technologie de cryptage dans leur pays de livraison, et ne peuvent par conséquent pas réactiver TLS. REMARQUE : CVS est uniquement pris en charge avec le CPU de carte graphique intégrée et le système doit être en mode de carte graphique intégrée. Une configuration manuelle peut être réalisée en effectuant les six étapes suivantes : 1. Flashez l'image à l'aide du BIOS du système et de FW. 2. Accédez à l'Intel MEBx via le menu , puis saisissez le mot de passe admin par défaut, puis modifiez le mot de passe. 3. Accédez au menu Intel ME General Setttings (Paramètres généraux Intel ME). 4. Sélectionnez Activate Network Access (Activer l'accès au réseau) 5. Sélectionnez Y (O) dans le message de confirmation. 6. Quittez le MEBx. REMARQUE : vous pouvez également réaliser l'activation par l'intermédiaire de moyens externes ou du système d'exploitation à l'aide de l'outil Intel Activator.Présentation de l'installation et de la configuration La liste ci-dessous comprend des termes importants concernant l'installation et la configuration d'Intel AMT. Configuration et installation — Processus d'entrée, dans les ordinateurs administrés par Intel AMT, de noms d'utilisateur, mots de passe et paramètres réseau permettant l'administration à distance de l'ordinateur. Service de configuration — Application tierce qui termine le provisionnement Intel AMT. WebGUI Intel AMT — Interface à base de navigateur Web assurant une administration à distance limitée des ordinateurs. Vous devez installer et configurer Intel AMT sur un ordinateur avant son utilisation. L'installation d'Intel AMT prépare l'ordinateur pour le mode Intel AMT et active la connectivité réseau. Cette installation ne s'effectue généralement qu'une seule fois au cours de la durée de vie d'un ordinateur. Une fois activé, Intel AMT peut être détecté par un logiciel de gestion sur un réseau. Une fois configuré en mode Entreprise, Intel AMT est prêt à initialiser la configuration de ses propres fonctions. Lorsque tous les éléments réseau obligatoires sont disponibles, il suffit de connecter l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation électrique et au réseau pour qu'Intel AMT initialise automatiquement sa propre configuration. Le service de configuration (une application tierce) termine le processus à votre place. Intel AMT est alors prêt pour la gestion à distance. Généralement, cette configuration ne prend que quelques secondes. Une fois Intel AMT installé et configuré, vous pouvez reconfigurer la technologie pour répondre aux besoins de votre environnement de travail. Une fois Intel AMT configuré en mode PME, l'ordinateur n'a pas à initialiser quelque configuration que ce soit sur le réseau. Elle est configurée manuellement et est prête à l'utilisation avec l'interface WebGUI d'Intel AMT. États d'installation et de configuration d'Intel AMT L'action d'installation et de configuration d'Intel AMT est également connue sous le nom de provisionnement. Un ordinateur sur lequel Intel AMT est activé peut être en l'un des trois états d'installation et de configuration : État Valeurs par défaut usine État Installation État Provisionné L'état des valeurs par défaut usine est un état totalement non configuré dans lequel les références de sécurité ne sont pas encore établies et les fonctions Intel AMT ne sont pas encore disponibles aux applications de gestion. Dans cet état, Intel AMT est doté des paramètres définis en usine. L'état Installation est un état partiellement configuré dans lequel Intel AMT a reçu des informations initiales de réseau et TLS (Transport Layer Security) : un mot de passe administrateur initial, l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS) et l'identificateur de provisionnement (PID). Après son installation, Intel AMT est prêt à recevoir, d'un service de configuration, les paramètres de configuration. L'état Provisionné est un état entièrement configuré dans lequel ME (Intel Management Engine) a été configuré à l'aide d'options d'alimentation et Intel AMT a été configuré avec ses paramètres de sécurité, ses certificats et les paramètres qui activent les fonctions Intel AMT. Les fonctions sont prêtes à interagir avec les applications de gestion dès qu'Intel AMT est configuré. Méthodes de provisionnement TLS-PKI TLS-PKI est également dénommé «Configuration à distance». Le SCS utilise des certificats TLS-PKI (Public Key Infrastructure -- Infrastructure de clé publique) pour se connecter de manière sécurisée à un ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. Ces certificats peuvent être générés de plusieurs manières : Le SCS peut se connecter à l'aide d'un des certificats par défaut pré-programmés sur l'ordinateur, comme détaillé dans la section sur l'interface MEBx de ce document. Le SCS peut créer un certificat personnalisé, qui peut être déployé sur l'ordinateur AMT, au moyen d'une visite en personne. avec une clé USB spécialement formatée comme détaillé dans la section Service de configuration de ce document. Le SCS peut utiliser un certificat personnalisé pré-programmé à l'usine Dell grâce au processus CFI (Custom Factory Integration - Intégration usine personnalisée).TLS-PSK TLS-PSK est également dénommé «Configuration en une touche». Le SCS utilise des PSK (clés prépartagées) pour établir une connexion sécurisée avec l'ordinateur AMT. Ces clés à 52 caractères peuvent être créées par le SCS, puis déployées sur l'ordinateur AMT lors d'une visite en personne de deux manières : La clé peut être manuellement entrée dans le MEBx. Le SCS peut créer une liste de clés personnalisées et les mettre sur une clé USB spécialement formatée. Chaque ordinateur AMT récupère ensuite une clé personnalisée depuis la clé USB spécialement formatée pendant le démarrage BIOS comme détaillé dans la section Service de configuration de ce document.Présentation des paramètres du MEBx Le MEBx (Intel Management Engine BIOS Extension) fournit des options de configuration au niveau de la plate-forme ; ces informations permettent de configurer le comportement de la plate-forme ME (Management Engine - Moteur de gestion). Ces options incluent l'activation et la désactivation de fonctionnalités particulières et la définition de configurations d'alimentation. Dans cette section, vous trouverez des informations détaillées sur les options de configuration MEBx et, le cas échéant, les restrictions. Accès à l'interface utilisateur de configuration MEBx Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour accéder à l'interface utilisateur de configuration MEBx sur un ordinateur : 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. À l'affichage du logo DELL™ bleu, appuyez immédiatement sur , puis sélectionnez MEBx. REMARQUE : si vous n'avez pas appuyé assez rapidement sur la touche, le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le bureau Microsoft Windows s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez l'ordinateur, puis réessayez. 3. Saisissez le mot de passe ME. Appuyez sur . Le mot de passe par défaut est «admin» et il peut être modifié par l'utilisateur. L'écran MEBx s'affiche tel qu'illustré ci-dessous. Le menu principal présente trois fonctions : Paramètres généraux Intel ME Configuration Intel AMT Quitter REMARQUE : Intel MEBx affiche uniquement les options détectées. Si une ou plusieurs de ces options ne s'affichent pas, vérifiez que la fonction manquante correspondante est prise en charge par le système. Modification du mot de passe Intel MELe mot de passe par défaut est admin ; ce mot de passe est le même pour toutes les plates-formes nouvellement déployées. Vous devez modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant de modifier les options de configuration des fonctions. Lorsqu'un administrateur IT accède pour la première fois au menu de configuration Intel MEBx à l'aide du mot de passe par défaut, il ou elle doit modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant d'utiliser quelque fonction que ce soit. Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants : Huit caractères, sans en dépasser 32 Une lettre majuscule Une lettre minuscule Un chiffre Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), par exemple !, $, ou ; à l'exclusion des caractères :, ", et ,. REMARQUE : le souligné ( _ ) et la barre d'espacement sont des caractères valides pour le mot de passe mais ces caractères ne rendent PAS le mot de passe plus complexe. REMARQUE : le mot de passe peut être peut être réinitialisé à la valeur par défaut (admin) en éteignant le système, retirant l'alimentation CA - CC et en utilisant un cavalier de réinitialisation. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel.Paramètres généraux ME Pour accéder à la page Intel Management Engine (ME) Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme ME (Intel Management Engine)), effectuez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu principal de MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension), sélectionnez Intel ME General Setttings (Paramètres généraux Intel ME). Appuyez sur . 2. Le message suivant apparaît : «Acquiring General Settings configuration» (Acquisition de la configuration des paramètres généraux) Le menu principal Intel MEBX laisse alors la place à la page Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plateforme ME (Intel Management Engine)). Celle-ci permet à l'administrateur IT de configurer les fonctionnalités spécifiques Intel ME, telles que le mot de passe, les options d'alimentation, etc. Les liens rapides vers les diverses sections sont les suivants. Modification du mot de passe Intel ME Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte Délai d'inactivité Menu précédent Menu précédent Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME REMARQUE : l'option de «Intel ME State Control» (Contrôle d'état d'Intel ME) qui apparaissait dans les versions antérieures du MEBx a été retirée afin d'éviter que les utilisateurs finaux désactivent Intel ME par inadvertance. Cette option est désormais fournie par le BIOS du système. Modification du mot de passe Intel ME 1. À l'invite de saisie du nouveau mot de passe Intel ME, saisissez votre nouveau mot de passe. (Les stratégies et restrictions de mot de passe sont disponibles ici). 2. À l'invite de Vérification du mot de passe, saisissez de nouveau votre nouveau mot de passe. Votre mot de passe estdésormais modifié. Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure Dans le menu Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME), sélectionnez Set PRC (Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure), puis appuyez sur . La plage de dates valide va du 1/1/2004 au 4/1/2021. La définition de la valeur des paramètres de date et d'heure sert àmaintenir virtuellement la date et l'heure lorsque l'état de mise hors tension (G3) est activé. Saisissez les paramètres de date et d'heure au format GMT (UTC) (AAAA:MM:JJ:HH:MM:SS), puis appuyez sur . Contrôle de l'alimentation Dans le menu Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME), sélectionnez Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation), puis appuyez sur . La page de contrôle de l'alimentation apparaît. Pour respecter les exigences ENERGY STAR* et EUP LOT6, Intel ME peut être désactivé en différents états de veille. Le menu de contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME configure les stratégies d'alimentation d'Intel ME. Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte Dans le menu Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME), sélectionnez Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte), puis appuyez sur . Sélectionnez la stratégie d'alimentation souhaitée à l'aide des flèches Haut/Bas, puis appuyez .L'utilisateur final administrateur peut choisir l'ensemble des options d'alimentation qu'il souhaite utiliser selon son utilisation du système. Dans Intel ME WoL, le système Intel ME reste dans l'état M-off tant qu'une commande n'est pas envoyée après l'expiration du temporisateur de délai d'expiration. Une fois cette commande envoyée, Intel ME passe à l'état M0 ou M3 et répond à la prochaine commande. Un ping envoyé fait également passer Intel ME à un état M0 ou M3. Un court délai est nécessaire au Intel ME pour passer de l'état M-off à M0 ou M3. Pendant ce temps, Intel AMT ne répond à aucune commande d'Intel ME. Une fois qu'Intel ME a atteint l'état M0 ou M3, le système répond aux commandes d'Intel ME. Le tableau suivant affiche les détails des ensembles d'options d'alimentation. Ensemble d'options d'alimentation 1 2 S0 ON (ACTIVÉ) ON (ACTIVÉ) S3 OFF (DÉSACTIVÉ) ON (ACTIVÉ)/ ME WoL S4/S5 DÉSACTIVÉ ON (ACTIVÉ)/ ME WoL Sélectionnez la stratégie d'alimentation de votre choix, puis appuyez sur . REMARQUE : mettre le système en état de provisionnement entraîne le passage à la stratégie d'alimentation PP2. Ceci peut être modifié ultérieurement à l'aide de WebUI, de la console de gestion ou bien du MEBx. Délai d'inactivité Dans le menu Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME), sélectionnez Idle Time Out (Délai d'inactivité), puis appuyez sur .Ce paramètre permet de paramétrer la valeur d'inactivité et de définir le délai d'inactivité Intel ME en état M3. La valeur saisie doit être en minutes. La valeur indique la période de temps pendant laquelle Intel ME peut rester en inactivité en M3 avant de passer en état M-off. REMARQUE : si Intel ME est en M0, il ne passera PAS à M-off. Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME apparaît. Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu principal apparaît. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel.Configuration AMT Après avoir configuré la fonction ME (Intel Management Engine), vous devez redémarrer avant de configurer Intel AMT en vue d'un démarrage système sans problème. L'image suivante illustre le menu Intel AMT configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT) une fois qu'un utilisateur a sélectionné l'option Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT) depuis le menu principal du MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension). Cette fonction permet de configurer un ordinateur compatible AMT de sorte qu'il prenne en charge les fonctionnalités d'administration Intel AMT. REMARQUE : vous devez connaître les principes de réseau et les termes informatiques de base, tels que TCP/IP, DHCP, VLAN, IDE, DNS, masque de sous-réseau, passerelle par défaut et nom de domaine. Ces termes ne sont pas expliqués dans ce document. Pour accéder à la page Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT), effectuez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu principal du MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension), sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT). Appuyez sur . La page de configuration d'Intel AMT apparaît. Les liens rapides affichés sur l'écran de configuration d'Intel AMT sont les suivants : Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité SOL/IDER/CVS Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe SOL IDER Mode de redirection hérité CVS Menu précédent Consentement utilisateur Liste d'inclusion utilisateur Liste d'inclusion configurable depuis IT à distance Menu précédent Stratégie de mot de passe Configuration du réseau Paramètres de nom de réseau Nom d'hôte Nom de domaine FQDN dédié/partagé Mise à jour du DNS Dynamique Intervalle de mise à jour périodique TTL Menu précédent Paramètres TCP/IP Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée Mode DHCP Adresse IPv4 Adresse de masque de sous-réseau Adresse de passerelle par défaut Adresse DNS privilégiée Adresse DNS alternative Menu précédent Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée Sélection de fonction IPv6 Type d'ID d'interface IPv6 Adresse IPv6 Routeur par défaut IPv6 Adresse DNS IPv6 privilégiée Adresse DNS IPv6 alternative Menu précédent Configuration LAN IPv6 sans-fil Sélection de fonction IPv6 Type d'ID d'interface IPv6 Menu précédent Menu précédent Menu précédent Activer l'accès au réseau Supprimer la configuration de l'accès au réseau Configuration et installation à distance Mode de provisionnement actuelEnregistrement de provisionnement RCFG Démarrer la configuration Menu précédent Serveur de provisionnement IPv4/IPv6 Serveur de provisionnement FQDN TLS PSK Définir les PID et les PPS Supprimer les PID et les PPS Menu précédent TLS PKI Configuration à distance Suffixe PKI DNS Gérer les hachages Ajout du hachage personnalisé Suppression d'un hachage Modification de l'état actif Affichage d'un hachage de certificat Menu précédent Menu précédent Menu précédent Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité 1. Dans le menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT), sélectionnez Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité), puis appuyez sur Entrée. 2. Un message de confirmation apparaît : [Caution] Disabling reset network settings including network ACLs to factory default. System resets on MEBx exit. Continue: (Y/N) ([Attention] Désactivation des paramètres réseau de réinitialisation y compris des ACL réseau aux paramètres par défaut. Le système se réinitialise sur l'exit du MEBx. Continuer : O/N) Appuyez sur Y (O) pour modifier le paramètre ou sur N pour annuler. Lorsque la sélection de la fonction de gérabilité est activée, le menu de fonction de gérabilité Intel ME apparaît. Si elle est désactivée, la fonction de gérabilité ME n'apparaît pas. SOL/IDER/CVSSur la page de configuration d'Intel AMT (avec Intel AMT activé) sélectionnez SOL/IDER/KVM (SOL/IDER/CVS), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration d'Intel AMT est remplacée par la page SOL/IDER. Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe Sur la page SOL/IDER, sélectionnez Username and Password (Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe), puis appuyez sur . Cette option fournit l'authentification utilisateur pour une session SOL/IDER. Si Kerberos* est utilisé, définissez cette option comme DISABLED (Désactivée). L'authentification d'utilisateur est gérée par l'intermédiaire de Kerberos. Si Kerberos n'est pas utilisé, l'administrateur IT peut choisir d'activer ou de désactiver l'authentification utilisateur pendant la session SOL/IDER. Option Description Enabled (Activé) Les nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe sont activés. Disabled (Désactivé) Les nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe sont désactivés. SOL Sur la page SOL/IDER, sélectionnez SOL, puis appuyez sur .SOL permet la redirection de l'entrée/sortie de la console d'un client géré par Intel AMT vers une console de serveur de gestion (si le système client prend en charge SOL). Si le système ne prend pas en charge SOL, cette valeur ne peut pas l'activer. Option Description Enabled (Activé) SOL est activé. Disabled (Désactivé) SOL est désactivé. REMARQUE : la désactivation de SOL n'entraîne pas la suppression de cette fonction mais empêche plutôt son utilisation. IDER Sur la page SOL/IDER, sélectionnez IDER, puis appuyez sur .IDER permet l'amorçage d'un client géré par Intel AMT par une console de gestion depuis une image de disque à distance. Si le système client ne prend pas en charge IDER, cette valeur ne peut pas l'activer. Option Description Enabled (Activé) IDER est activé. Disabled (Désactivé) IDER est désactivé. REMARQUE : la désactivation de IDER n'entraîne pas la suppression de cette fonction mais empêche plutôt son utilisation. Mode de redirection hérité Sur la page SOL/IDER, sélectionnez Legacy Redirection Mode (Mode de redirection hérité), puis appuyez sur .Le mode de redirection hérité contrôle le fonctionnement de la redirection. S'il est défini sur désactivé, la console doit ouvrir les ports de redirection avant chaque session. Ce mode est conçu pour les consoles d'entreprises et pour les nouvelles consoles SMB qui prennent en charge l'ouverture des ports de redirection. Les anciennes consoles SMB (avant Intel AMT 6.0) qui ne prennent pas en charge la fonction d'ouverture des ports de redirection doivent manuellement activer le port de redirection par l'intermédiaire de cette option Intel MEBx. Lors de la sélection du mode, le message suivant apparaît. Option DescriptionDisabled (Désactivé) Le mode de redirection hérité est désactivé. (Option par défaut) Enabled (Activé) Le port est laissé ouvert à tout moment où la redirection est activée dans Intel MEBx. Les consoles SMB antérieures à Intel AMT 6.0 requièrent ce mode activé pour les sessions de redirection. CVS (clavier/vidéo /souris) Sur la page SOL/IDER, sélectionnez KVM (CVS), puis appuyez sur . Option Description Disabled (Désactivé) La fonction CVS est désactivée Enabled (Activé) La fonction CVS est activée Menu précédent Sur la page SOL/IDER, sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page SOL/IDER est remplacée par la page Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT). Consentement utilisateur Sur la page de configuration d'Intel AMT, sélectionnez User Consent (Consentement utilisateur), puis appuyez sur . L'écran de configuration du consentement utilisateur apparaît. Détermine si le consentement de l'utilisateur local est requis avant que l'ordinateur distant puisse établir une session de contrôle à distance CVS avec l'ordinateur local. Détermine également si l'ordinateur distant peut configurer la politique d'inclusion CVS. Liste d'inclusion utilisateur Sur la page de configuration du consentement utilisateur, sélectionnez User Opt-in (Liste d'inclusion utilisateur), puis appuyez sur .Les options suivantes peuvent être sélectionnées : Option Description None (Aucune) Le consentement de l'utilisateur local n'est pas requis pour qu'un ordinateur distant établisse une session de contrôle à distance CVS. CVS (clavier/vidéo /souris) Le consentement de l'utilisateur local est requis pour qu'un ordinateur distant établisse une session de contrôle à distance CVS. All (toutes) Le consentement de l'utilisateur local est requis pour SOL, IDER et CVS. REMARQUE : lors du Provisionnement basé sur l'hôte, le mode Client prévaut sur ce paramètre et fonctionne comme si l'option «ALL» (toutes) avait été sélectionnée. Pour plus de détails sur le Provisionnement basé sur l'hôte et le Mode Client, consultez le Guide d'utilisation Activator++ et le Guide d'utilisation UCT (User Consent Tool) (Outil de consentement utilisateur) fournis dans le kit de développement. Liste d'inclusion configurable depuis IT à distance Sur la page de configuration d'ICVS, sélectionnez Opt-in Configurable from remote IT (Liste d'inclusion configurable depuis IT à distance), puis appuyez sur . Ce paramètre détermine si l'utilisateur d'un ordinateur distant peut configurer la politique d'inclusion lors de l'établissement d'une session de contrôle à distance CVS sur cet ordinateur.Option Description Disable Remote Control of KVM Opt-in Policy (Désactiver le contrôle à distance de la politique d'inclusion CVS) Ne permet pas à l'utilisateur distant de sélectionner la politique de OPT-IN (Liste d'inclusion) utilisateur. Dans ce cas seul l'utilisateur local peut contrôler la politique d'inclusion. Enable Remote Control of KVM Opt-in Policy (Activer le contrôle à distance de la politique d'inclusion CVS) Permet à l'utilisateur distant de sélectionner la politique de OPT-IN (Liste d'inclusion) utilisateur. Menu précédent Sur la page de configuration du consentement utilisateur, sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration d'Intel AMT apparaît. Stratégie de mot de passe Sur la page de configuration d'Intel AMT, sélectionnez Password Policy (Stratégie de mot de passe), puis appuyez sur . Cette option détermine quand l'utilisateur peut modifier le mot de passe MEBx via le réseau. Il existe deux mots de passe pour le micrologiciel. Le mot de passe du MEBX est le mot de passe saisi lorsqu'un utilisateur se trouve physiquement sur le système. Le mot de passe réseau est le mot de passe saisi lorsqu'on accède à un système compatible Intel ME via le réseau. REMARQUE : par défaut, ce sont les mêmes tant que le mot de passe réseau n'est pas modifié via le réseau. Une fois modifié via le réseau, le mot de passe réseau reste toujours séparé du mot de passe MEBx Intel local. Cette option détermine quand l'utilisateur peut modifier le mot de passe MEBx via le réseau. REMARQUE : le mot de passe MEBx peut être modifié via l'interface utilisateur MEBx.Les options sont les suivantes : Option Description Default Password Only (Mot de passe par défaut uniquement) Le mot de passe Intel MEBx peut être modifié à travers l'interface réseau si le mot de passe n'a pas encore été modifié. During Setup and Configuration (Durant l'installation et la configuration) Le mot de passe Intel MEBX peut être modifié via l'interface réseau pendant la procédure d'installation et de configuration mais à aucun autre moment. Une fois la procédure d'installation et de configuration complétée, le mot de passe MEBx ne peut pas être modifié via l'interface réseau. Anytime (À tout moment) Le mot de passe MEBX peut être modifié à travers l'interface réseau à tout moment. Configuration du réseau Dans le menu Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME), sélectionnez Network Setup (Configuration du réseau), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration du réseau Intel ME apparaît. Paramètres de nom de réseau Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), puis appuyez sur .1. Nom d'hôte Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Host Name (Nom d'hôte), puis appuyez sur . Un nom d'hôte peut être affecté à l'ordinateur Intel AMT. Il s'agit du nom d'hôte du système compatible Intel AMT. 2. Nom de domaineSous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Domain Name (Nom de domaine), puis appuyez sur . Un nom de domaine peut être affecté à l'ordinateur Intel AMT. 3. FQDN dédié/partagé Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Shared/Dedicated FQDN (FQDN dédié/partagé), puis appuyez sur .Ce paramètre détermine si le FQDN de Intel ME (Intel ME Fully Qualified Domain Name), c'est-à-dire, le «Nomd'hôte.Nom dedomaine», est partagé avec l'hôte et est identique au nom de l'ordinateur du système d'exploitation, ou bien s'il est dédié à Intel ME. Option Description Dédié Le nom de domaine FQDN est dédié à ME Partagé Le nom de domaine FQDN est partagé avec l'hôte 4. Mise à jour du DNS Dynamique Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Dynamic DNS Update (Mise à jour du DNS Dynamique), puis appuyez sur . Si la mise à jour du DNS Dynamique est activée, le micrologiciel tente activement d'enregistrer ses adresses IP et son FQDN dans le serveur DNS à l'aide du protocole de mise à jour du DNS Dynamique. Si la mise à jour du DNS Dynamique est désactivée, le micrologiciel ne tente pas de mettre à jour le serveur DNS à l'aide de l'option 81du protocole DHCP ou de la mise à jour DNS Dynamique. Si l'état de la mise à jour DNS Dynamique (Activé ou Désactivé) n'est pas du tout configuré par l'utilisateur, le micrologiciel assume alors son ancienne implémentation dans laquelle le micrologiciel utilisait l'option 81 du protocole DHCP pour l'enregistrement du serveur DNS sans mettre celui-ci directement à jour à l'aide du protocole de mise à jour DNS Dynamique. Les noms d'hôte et de domaine doivent être sélectionnés préalablement à la sélection de l'état «Enabled» (Activé) de la mise à jour du DNS Dynamique. Option Description Enabled (Activé) Le client de mise à jour du DNS Dynamique du micrologiciel est activé. Disabled (Désactivé) Le client de mise à jour du DNS Dynamique du micrologiciel est activé. 5. Intervalle de mise à jour périodique. Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Periodic Update Interval (Intervalle de mise à jour périodique), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'intervalle souhaité, puis appuyez sur .REMARQUE : l'option Periodic Update Interval (Intervalle de mise à jour périodique) est uniquement disponible lorsque la mise à jour du DNS Dynamique est activée. Elle définit l'intervalle selon lequel le client de mise à jour DNS Dynamique micrologicielle envoie des mises à jour périodiques. Elle doit être définie conformément à la politique de récupération DNS de l'entreprise. Les unités sont en minutes. La valeur 0 désactive la mise à jour périodique. La valeur doit être définie sur 20 minutes ou plus. La valeur par défaut de cette propriété est 24 heures - 1 440 minutes. 6. TTL Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez TTL, puis appuyez sur . Saisissez le temps souhaité (en secondes), puis appuyez sur .REMARQUE : l'option TTL est uniquement disponible lorsque la mise à jour du DNS Dynamique est activée. Elle permet de configurer le temps TTL en secondes. Ce nombre doit être supérieur à zéro. S'il est définit sur zéro, le micrologiciel utilise sa valeur par défaut interne, équivalant à 15 minutes ou un tiers du temps alloué pour le DHCP. 7. Menu précédent Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME) est remplacé par la page de configuration du réseau Intel. Paramètres TCP/IP Dans le menu Network Setup (Configuration du réseau), sélectionnez TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration du réseau Intel ME apparaît. Le menu Intel Network Setup (Configuration du réseau Intel) est remplacé par la page des paramètres TCP/IP. REMARQUE : Intel MEBx comprend des menus pour IPv6 sans-fil, mais ne comprend aucun menu pour IPv4 sans-fil. Au démarrage de Intel MEBx, celui-ci vérifie l'interface sans-fil afin de choisir d'afficher le menu IPv6 sans-fil ou non. Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée Sous TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP), sélectionnez Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration LAN IPv4 câblée apparaît.1. Mode DHCP Sous Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée), sélectionnez DHCP Mode (Mode DHCP), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration LAN IPv4 câblée apparaît. Option Description Disabled (Désactivé) Si le mode DHCP est désactivé, les paramètres TCP/IP statiques sont obligatoires pour Intel AMT. Si un système est en mode statique, il peut nécessiter une deuxième adresse IP. Cette adresse IP, souvent appelée l'adresse Intel IP ME, peut être différente de l'adresse IP de l'hôte. Enabled (Activé) Si le mode DHCP est activé, les paramètres TCP/IP seront configurés par un serveur DHCP. Mode DHCP activé.Mode DHCP désactivé. 2. Adresse IPv4 Sélectionnez IPv4 Address (Adresse IPv4), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse IPv4 dans la colonne d'adresse, puis appuyez sur .3. Adresse de masque de sous-réseau Sélectionnez Subnet Mask Address (Adresse de masque de sous-réseau), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse de masque de sous-réseau dans la colonne d'adresse, puis appuyez sur . 4. Adresse de passerelle par défautSélectionnez Default Gateway Address (Adresse de passerelle par défaut), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse de passerelle par défaut dans la colonne d'adresse, puis appuyez sur . 5. Adresse DNS privilégiée Sélectionnez Preferred DNS Address (Adresse DNS privilégiée), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse DNS privilégiée dans la colonne d'adresse, puis appuyez sur .6. Adresse DNS alternative Sélectionnez Alternate DNS Address (Adresse DNS alternative), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse DNS alternative dans la colonne d'adresse, puis appuyez sur . 7. Menu précédent Sous Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP) apparaît. Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée Sous TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP), sélectionnez Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration LAN IPv6 câblée apparaît. Les adresses IPv6 Intel ME sont dédiées et ne sont pas partagées avec le système d'exploitation hôte. Pour permettre l'enregistrement du serveur DNS dynamique pour les adresses IPv6, un FQDN dédié doit être configuré.REMARQUE : la pile de réseaux Intel ME prend en charge une interface IPv6 à emplacements multiples. Chaque interface de réseau peut être configurée avec les adresses IPv6 suivantes : 1. Une adresse auto-configurée locale lien 2. Trois adresses globales auto-configurées 3. Une adresse configurée DHCPv6 4. Une adresse IPv6 configurée de manière statique 1. Sélection de fonction IPv6 Sous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez IPv6 Feature Selection (Sélection de fonction IPv6), puis appuyez sur . DISABLED (DÉSACTIVÉE), sélectionnez «Disabled» (Désactivée), puis appuyez sur . La sélection de fonction IPv6 est désactivée.ENABLED (ACTIVÉE), sélectionnez «Enabled» (Activée), puis appuyez sur . La sélection de fonction IPv6 est activée et des configurations supplémentaires sont autorisées. 2. Type d'ID d'interface IPv6 Sous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez IPv6 Interface ID Type (Type d'ID d'interface IPv6), puis appuyez sur . L'adresse IPv6 auto-configurée comprend deux parties : le Préfixe IPv6 tel que défini par le routeur IPv6 et l'ID d'interface (chacun de 64 bits).Option Description ID aléatoire L'ID d'interface IPv6 est généré automatiquement à l'aide d'un numéro aléatoire tel que décrit sous RFC 3041. Il s'agit de l'option par défaut. ID Intel L'ID d'interface IPv6 est généré automatiquement à l'aide de l'adresse MAC. ID manuel L'ID d'interface IPv6 est configuré manuellement. Pour que vous puissiez sélectionner ce type, L'ID d'interface manuel doit être défini sur une valeur valide. Pour sélectionner l'ID manuel 1. Sélectionnez «Manual ID» (ID manuel). 2. Appuyez sur . Une nouvelle option de L'ID d'interface IPv6 apparaît en dessous du type d'ID d'interface IPV6. 3. Sélectionnez «IPV6 Interface ID» (ID de l'interface IPv6). 4. Appuyez sur . 5. l'ID manuel privilégié.3. Adresse IPv6 Sous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez IPv6 Address (Adresse IPv6), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse IPv6, puis appuyez sur . 4. Routeur par défaut IPv6Sous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez IPv6 Default Router (Routeur par défaut IPv6), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du routeur par défaut IPv6, puis appuyez sur . 5. Adresse DNS IPv6 privilégiée Sous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez Preferred DNS IPv6 Address (Adresse DNS IPv6 privilégiée), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse DNS IPv6 privilégiée, puis appuyez sur . 6. Adresse DNS IPv6 alternativeSous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez Alternate DNS IPv6 Address (Adresse DNS IPv6 alternative), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez l'adresse DNS IPv6 alternative, puis appuyez sur . 7. Menu précédent Sous Wired LAN IPv4 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP) apparaît. Configuration LAN IPv6 sans-fil Sous TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP), sélectionnez Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 sansfil), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration LAN IPv6 sans-fil apparaît.1. Sélection de fonction IPv6 Sous Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 sans-fil), sélectionnez IPv6 Feature Selection (Sélection de fonction IPv6), puis appuyez sur . 2. Type d'ID d'interface IPv6 Sous Wired LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée), sélectionnez IPv6 Interface ID Type (Type d'IDd'interface IPv6), puis appuyez sur . L'adresse IPv6 auto-configurée comporte deux parties : Le préfixe IPv6 (défini par le routeur IPv6) L'ID d'interface (64 bits chacun) Option Description ID aléatoire L'ID d'Interface IPv6 est généré automatiquement à l'aide d'un numéro aléatoire tel que décrit sous RFC 3041. Il s'agit de l'option par défaut. ID Intel L'ID d'interface IPv6 est généré automatiquement à l'aide de l'adresse MAC. ID manuel L'ID d'interface IPv6 est configuré manuellement. Pour que vous puissiez sélectionner ce type, L'ID d'interface manuel doit être défini sur une valeur valide. Pour sélectionner l'ID manuel : 1. Sélectionnez Manual ID (ID manuel). 2. Appuyez sur . Une nouvelle option de L'ID d'interface IPv6 apparaît en dessous du type d'ID d'interface IPV6. 3. Sélectionnez IPV6 Interface ID (ID de l'interface IPv6). 4. Appuyez sur . 5. Saisissez l'ID manuel préféré.3. Menu précédent Sous Wireless LAN IPv6 Configuration (Configuration LAN IPv6 sans-fil), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu TCP/IP Settings (Paramètres TCP/IP) apparaît. Menu précédent Dans le menu TCP/IP Setting (Paramètres TCP/IP), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu Intel ME Network Setup (Configuration du réseau Intel ME) apparaît. Menu précédent Sous Intel ME Network Name Settings (Paramètres de nom de réseau Intel ME), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu AMT Configuration (Configuration AMT) apparaît. Activer l'accès au réseau Sur la page de configuration Intel AMT, sélectionnez Activate Network Access (Activer l'accès au réseau), puis appuyez sur . Appuyez sur «'Y» (O) pour activer ou sur «N» pour annuler. Activer l'accès au réseau permet à Intel ME de transitionner à l'état de post-provisionnement si tous les paramètres requis sont configurés. Sans cette fonction, Intel ME ne peut pas se connecter au réseau.REMARQUE : si la stratégie d'alimentation est définie sur PP1, après l'activation, elle passe à PP2. Supprimer la configuration de l'accès au réseau Dans le menu Intel ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme Intel ME), sélectionnez Unconfigure Network Access (Supprimer la configuration de l'accès au réseau), puis appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Intel ME transitionne alors à l'état de pré-provisionnement. Sélectionnez Y (O) pour supprimer la configuration.Sélectionnez Full Unprovisioning (Dé-provisionnement complet), puis appuyez sur . Option Description Full Unprovision (Dé- provisionnement total) L'ID d'interface IPv6 est généré automatiquement à l'aide d'un numéro aléatoire tel que décrit sous RFC 3041. Il s'agit du comportement par défaut. Le dé-provisionnement total va dé-provisionner AMT et supprimer toutes les informations des PID et des PPS ou toute information alimentée relative à un nouveau certificat.Partial Unprovision (Dé- provisionnement partiel) L'ID d'interface IPv6 est généré automatiquement à l'aide de l'adresse MAC. Le dé-provisionnement partiel va dé-provisionner AMT mais conserver les informations des PID et des PPS saisies ainsi que toute information saisie relative à un nouveau certificat. Dé-provisionnement en cours. Configuration et installation à distance Dans le menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT), sélectionnez Remote Setup and Configuration (Configuration et installation à distance), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration et d'installation automatisée Intel apparaît.Mode de provisionnement actuel Sous Automated Setup and Configuration (Configuration et installation automatisée), sélectionnez Current Provisioning Mode (Mode de provisionnement actuel), puis appuyez sur . Current Provisioning Mode (Mode de provisionnement actuel) – Affiche le mode TLS de provisionnement actuel : None (Aucun), PKI ou PSK.Enregistrement de provisionnement Sous Automated Setup and Configuration (Configuration et installation automatisée), sélectionnez Current Provisioning Mode (Mode de provisionnement actuel), puis appuyez sur . Provisioning Record (Enregistrement de provisionnement) – Affiche les données d'enregistrement du mode PSK ou PKI de provisionnement du système. Si les données n'ont pas été saisies, le MEBx affiche un message indiquant que l'enregistrement de provisionnement est manquant : «Provision Record not present». Si les données sont saisies, l'enregistrement de provisionnement apparaît comme suit : Option Description Mode de provisionnement TLS Affiche le mode de configuration actuel du système : None (Aucun), PSK or PKI. IP de provisionnement Adresse IP de la configuration du serveur. Date de provisionnement Affiche la date et l'heure du provisionnement sous le format JJ/MM/AAAA à HH:MM. DNS Indique si le «Suffixe PKI DNS» a été configuré dans Intel MEBx avant la configuration à distance. La valeur 0 indique que le suffixe DNS n'a pas été configuré et que le micrologiciel se base alors sur l'option 15 du DHCP, puis compare ce suffixe au nom FQDN dans le certificat client du serveur de configuration. La valeur 1 indique que le suffixe DNS a été configuré et que le micrologiciel a pu vérifier qu'il correspondait au suffixe DNS situé dans le certificat client du serveur de configuration. Host Initiated (Initialisé par l'hôte) – Indique si le processus d'installation et de configuration a été initialisé par l'hôte : «No» (Non) indique qu'il n'a pas été initialisé par l'hôte ; «Yes» (Oui) indique le contraire (PKI uniquement). Données de hachage Affiche les données de hachage du certificat de 40 caractères (PKI uniquement). Algorithme de hachage Décrit le type de hachage. Seul SHA1 est actuellement pris en charge. (PKI uniquement). est par défaut Affiche «Yes» (Oui) si l'algorithme de hachage est l'algorithme par défaut choisi. Affiche «No» (Non) si l'algorithme de hachage n'est pas l'algorithme utilisé (PKI uniquement). FQDN FQDN du serveur de provisionnement mentionné dans le certificat (PKI uniquement).Numéro de série La chaîne de 32 caractères indique les numéros de série du Certificat d'autorisation. Durée de validité Indique si la durée de validité certificat a expiré. RCFG Dans le menu Intel Automated Remote Setup (Configuration et installation à distance automatisée Intel), sélectionnez RCFG, puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration à distance Intel apparaît. Démarrer la configuration Dans le menu Intel Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance Intel), sélectionnez Start Configuration (Démarrer la configuration), puis appuyez sur . Si la configuration à distance n'est pas activée, celle-ci ne peut se produire. Afin d'activer la configuration à distance, sélectionnez Y (O).Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance Intel), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration et d'installation automatisée Intel apparaît. Serveur de provisionnement IPv4/IPv6 Dans le menu Intel Automated Remote Setup (Configuration et installation à distance automatisée Intel), sélectionnez Provisioning Server IPv4/IPv6 (Serveur de provisionnement IPv4/IPv6), puis appuyez sur . 1. Saisissez l'adresse du serveur de provisionnement, puis appuyez sur .2. Saisissez le numéro de port du serveur de provisionnement, puis appuyez sur . Le numéro de port (0 - 65535) du serveur de provisionnement Intel AMT. Le numéro de port par défaut est 9971. Serveur de provisionnement FQDN Dans le menu Intel Automated Remote Setup (Configuration et installation à distance automatisée Intel), sélectionnez Serveur de provisionnement FQDN, puis appuyez sur . Saisissez le FQDN du serveur de provisionnement, puis appuyez sur .FQDN du serveur de provisionnement mentionné dans le certificat (PKI uniquement). Celui-ci correspond également au FQDN du serveur auquel AMT envoie des paquets «Bonjour» pour PSK et PKI. TLS PSK Dans le menu Intel Automated Remote Setup (Configuration et installation à distance automatisée Intel), sélectionnez TLS PSK, puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration TLS PSK Intel apparaît. Ce sous-menu contient les valeurs pour les paramètres de configuration TLS PSK.Définir les PID et les PPS Dans le menu Intel TLS PSK Configuration (Configuration TLS PSK Intel), sélectionnez Set PID and PPS (Définir les PID et les PPS), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez le PID, puis appuyez sur . Saisissez le PPS, puis appuyez sur . Définir les PID et les PPS résulte en un dé-provisionnement partiel si la configuration est «In-process» (En cours). Les PID et les PPS devrait être saisis au format dash (tiret). (par exemple : 1234-ABCD ; PPS : 1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD). REMARQUE : une valeur de PPS de «0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000» ne modifie pas l'état d'installation et de configuration. Si cette valeur est utilisée, l'état d'installation et de configuration reste «Not-started» (Non-initié). Si une entrée invalide est saisie, un message d'erreur apparaît : Supprimer les PID et les PPS Dans le menu Intel TLS PSK Configuration (Configuration TLS PSK Intel), sélectionnez Delete PID and PPS (Supprimer les PID et les PPS), puis appuyez sur . Cette option permet de supprimer les PID et les PPS actuels stockés dans Intel ME. Si les PID et les PPS n'ont pas été entrés antérieurement, Intel MEBx renvoie un message d'erreur. Afin de supprimer les entrées PID et PPS, sélectionnez Y (O), sinon sélectionnez N.Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel TLS PSK Configuration (Configuration TLS PSK Intel), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration et d'installation automatisée Intel apparaît. TLS PKI Dans le menu Intel Automated Remote Setup (Configuration et installation à distance automatisée Intel), sélectionnez TLS PKI, puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration à distance Intel apparaît. Configuration à distance Dans le menu Intel Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance Intel), sélectionnez Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance), puis appuyez sur . Activer/Désactiver la configuration à distance résulte en un dé-provisionnement partiel si le serveur d'installation et configuration est «In-process» (En cours). Option Description Disabled (Désactivée) La configuration à distance est désactivée. Seuls les éléments «Remote Configuration» (Configuration à distance) et «Previous Menu» (Menu précédent) sont visibles. Pour la désactiver, sélectionnez cette option, puis appuyez sur . Enabled (Activée) La configuration à distance est activée, permettant ainsi l'affichage de champs supplémentaires. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez cette option, puis appuyez sur .Suffixe PKI DNS Dans le menu Intel Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance Intel), sélectionnez PKI DNS Suffix (Suffixe PKI DNS), puis appuyez sur . Saisissez le suffixe PKI DNS, puis appuyez sur . La valeur clé est alors maintenue dans l'EPS. Gérer les hachagesDans le menu Intel Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance Intel), sélectionnez Manage Hashes (Gérer les hachages), puis appuyez sur . La sélection de cette option entraîne l'énumération des hachages du système et l'affichage du Nom du hachage, ainsi que son état actif et par défaut. Si le système ne contient pas encore de hachage, Intel MEBx affiche l'écran suivant. Si vous répondez «Yes» (Oui) le processus d'ajout de hachage personnalisé démarre. L'écran Gérer le certificat de hachage offre des commandes de clavier pour la gestion des hachages du système. Les touches suivantes sont valides à partir du menu Manage Certificate Hash (Gérer le hachage de certificat). Touche Description Échap Permet de quitter le menu. Insérer Permet d'ajouter un hachage de certificat personnalisé au système. Supprimer Permet de supprimer du système le hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné. + Permet de modifier l'état actif du hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné. Permet d'afficher les détails du hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné.Ajout du hachage personnalisé L'écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Insérer de l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Gérer le hachage de certificat). Pour ajouter un hachage de certificat personnalisé : saisissez le nom du hachage (jusqu'à 32 caractères). Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche , vous êtes invité à saisir la valeur du hachage de certificat utilisé pour le provisionnement PKI. Saisissez Y (O) si SHA1 est utilisé, sinon saisissez N.Les algorithmes de hachage pris en charge sont les suivants : 1. SHA1 2. SHA2-256 3. SHA2-384 Si SHA1 est sélectionné, vous êtes invité dans l'écran suivant à sélectionner l'option de l'algorithme SHA2 pris en charge. Saisissez Y (O) si SHA256 est utilisé, sinon saisissez N. Si SHA256 n'est pas sélectionné, dans l'écran suivant, saisissez Y (O) pour sélectionner SHA2-384.Si N est saisi, un message d'erreur apparaît pour inviter l'utilisateur à sélectionner un algorithme pris en charge. Une fois que l'algorithme de hachage souhaité est sélectionné, vous êtes invité à saisir la valeur de hachage de certificat. La valeur du hachage de certificat est un nombre hexadécimal (20 octets pour SHA-1, 32 octets pour SHA-2). Si la valeur n'est pas saisie au format adéquat, le message «Invalid Hash Certificate Entered - Try Again» (Hachage de certificat saisi non valide - Réessayez) apparaît. Lorsque vous appuyez sur , vous êtes invité à définir l'état actif du hachage.Votre réponse définit l'état actif du hachage personnalisé comme suit : Yes (Oui) – Le hachage personnalisé est marqué comme actif. No (Default) (Non (Par défaut)) – Le hachage personnalisé s'ajoute alors à l'EPS mais n'est pas actif. Suppression d'un hachage L'écran suivant apparaît lorsque la touche Delete (Suppr) de l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Gérer le hachage de certificat) est activée. REMARQUE : un hachage de certificat défini sur la valeur par défaut ne peut pas être supprimé.Cette option permet la suppression du hachage du certificat sélectionné. Yes (Oui) – Intel MEBx envoie au micrologiciel un message lui indiquant de supprimer le hachage sélectionné. No (Non) – Intel MEBx ne supprime pas le hachage sélectionné et revient à la Configuration à distance. Modification de l'état actif L'écran suivant apparaît lorsque la touche + de l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Gérer le hachage de certificat) est activée. Si vous répondez Y (O), l'état actif du hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné bascule. Définir un hachage en tant qu'actif indique qu'il est disponible pour l'utilisation lors du provisionnement PSK. Affichage d'un hachage de certificat L'écran suivant apparaît lorsque la touche de l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Gérer le hachage de certificat) est activée.Les détails du hachage de certificat sélectionné sont affichés, parmi lesquels : Nom du hachage Données du hachage de certificat États actif et par défaut Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance Intel), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration et d'installation automatisée Intel apparaît. Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel Automated Remote Setup (Configuration et installation à distance automatisée Intel), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . La page de configuration d'Intel AMT apparaît. Menu précédent Dans le menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration d'Intel AMT), sélectionnez Previous Menu (Menu précédent), puis appuyez sur . Le menu principal apparaît. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel.Appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide Intel Fast Call for help (Appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide) est une fonction disponible pour les unités de gestion des stocks (SKU) VPro. Une connexion Intel Fast Call for help permet à l'utilisateur final de demander une assistance si le système VPro se trouve en dehors du réseau de l'entreprise. REMARQUE : il est recommandé d'appuyer sur «F12», puis de sélectionner Fast Call for Help (Appel rapide pour obtenir de l'aide). Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si l'administrateur a configuré le système afin de la prendre en charge. Configuration requise Les paramètres système VPro suivants doivent être configurés avant l'établissement d'une connexion Intel Fast Call depuis le système d'exploitation : 1. Détection de l'environnement activée 2. Stratégie de connexion à distance 3. Management Presence Server (MPS - Serveur de présence de gestion) Sommaire Pour accéder à Intel Fast Call for help, le système doit être en mode provisionné. Si le système prend en charge Full VPro, la fonction d'appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide est disponible. Si le système prend uniquement en charge Intel Standard Manageability, la fonction d'appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide n'est pas activée. 1. Avant de démarrer Intel Fast Call for help, vous devez activer la détection de l'environnement. Ceci permet à Intel AMT de déterminer si le système fait partie du réseau de la société. Cette configuration est effectuée à travers une application ISV. 2. Une stratégie de connexion à distance doit être créée avant le lancement d'un Appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide. La stratégie pour l'appel initié par le BIOS n'a pas besoin d'être configurée, mais une autre stratégie doit exister avant le lancement d'un appel pour obtenir de l'aide depuis le BIOS. Le BIOS doit prendre en charge la touche rapide qui lance Intel Fast Call for help. 3. Un serveur de présence de gestion doit exister pour répondre aux appels rapides Intel pour obtenir de l'aide. Le serveur de présence de gestion réside dans la zone DMZ. Lorsque toutes ces conditions sont satisfaites, le système peut lancer Intel Fast Call for help. Lancement d'Intel Fast Call for Help Une fois la fonction entièrement configurée, il existe trois méthodes de lancement d'une session Intel Fast Call for help. Celles-ci sont les suivantes : Dans la page d'accueil Dell, appuyez sur . Dans la page d'accueil Dell, appuyez sur pour obtenir le menu de démarrage express unique. Sélectionnez la dernière option intitulée Intel Fast Call for Help. Depuis Windows : 1. Lancez l'icône de sécurité/application Intel AMT Intel Management Security Status (État de sécurité de la gestion Intel). 2. Passez à l'onglet Intel AMT. 3. Dans la zone Remote Connectivity (Connectivité à distance), cliquez sur Connect (Connecter).Paramètres généraux ME Le tableau suivant énumère les paramètres par défaut du MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) Intel figurant sur la page des paramètres généraux. Mot de passe Mot de passe admin Modification du mot de passe Intel ME Modification du mot de passe Intel ME vide Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure vide Contrôle de l'alimentation Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte Mobile : ACTIVÉ est S0 Mobile : ACTIVÉ est S0, ME Wake en S3, S4-5 (AC uniquement) * Délai d'inactivité 1 *Paramètre par défaut **Peut provoquer un dé-provisionnement partiel d'Intel AMT 1 Le contrôle de l'état de la plate-forme Intel ME est uniquement modifié pour le dépannage ME. 2 Le paramètre de dé-provisionnement est affiché uniquement si la zone est provisionnée.Configuration AMT Le tableau suivant énumère les paramètres par défaut du MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) Intel figurant sur la page de configuration AMT. Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité SOL/IDER Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) * SOL Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) * IDER Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) * Mode de redirection hérité Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) * KVM (CVS - clavier/vidéo/souris) Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) * Consentement utilisateur Liste d'inclusion utilisateur None (Aucune) KVM (CVS) - (clavier/vidéo/souris) * All (Toutes) Liste d'inclusion configurable depuis IT à distance Désactiver le contrôle à distance de la politique d'inclusion CVS Activé le contrôle à distance de la politique d'inclusion CVS * REMARQUE : pour que l'option CVS (clavier/vidéo/souris) fonctionne, la condition requise doit être un CPU Intel i3/i5/i7/Celeron/Pentium. Stratégie de mot de passe Stratégie de mot de passe Default Password Only (Mot de passe par défaut uniquement) * During Setup and Configuration (Lors de l'installation et de la configuration) Anytime (À tout moment) Configuration du réseau Paramètres de nom de réseau Nom d'hôte vide Nom de domaine vide Shared/Dedicated FQDN (FQDN dédié/partagé) Dedicated (Dédié) Shared (Partagé) * Mise à jour du DNS Dynamique Disabled (Désactivé) * Enabled (Activé) Paramètres TCP/IP Configuration LAN IPv4 câblée Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) *Mode DHCP La page configuration ci-dessous sera uniquement disponible si Enabled (Activé) est sélectionné IPv4 Address (Adresse IPv4) 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask Address (Adresse de masque de sous-réseau) 0.0.0.0 Default Gateway Address (Adresse de passerelle par défaut) 0.0.0.0 Preferred DNS Address (Adresse DNS privilégiée) 0.0.0.0 Alternate DNS Address (Adresse DNS alternative) 0.0.0.0 Configuration LAN IPv6 câblée Sélection de fonction IPv6 Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé) * La page configuration ci-dessous sera uniquement disponible si Enabled (Activée) est sélectionné Type d'ID d'interface IPv6 Random ID (ID aléatoire) * Intel ID (ID Intel) Manual ID (ID manuel) IPv6 Address (Adresse IPv6) vide IPv6 Default Router (Routeur par défaut IPv6) vide Preferred DNS IPv6 Address (Adresse DNS IPv6 privilégiée) vide Alternate DNS IPv6 Address (Adresse DNS IPv6 alternative) vide Activate Network Access (Activer l'accès au réseau) Y / N (O/N) Unconfigure Network Access (Supprimer la configuration de l'accès au réseau) Y / N (O/N) Installation et configuration à distance Mode de provisionnement actuel Enregistrement de provisionnement RCFG Démarrer la configuration Y / N (O/N) Serveur de provisionnement IPv4/IPv6 vide Serveur de provisionnement FQDN vide TLS PSK Set PID and PPS (Définir les PID et les PPS) videDelete PID and PPS (Supprimer les PID et les PPS) Y / N (O/N) TLS PKI Configuration à distance Désactivé Activé * Suffixe PKI DNS vide Gérer les hachages *Paramètre par défaut **Peut provoquer un dé-provisionnement partiel d'Intel AMT 1 Le contrôle de l'état de la plate-forme Intel ME n'est modifié que pour le dépannage ME. 2 En mode Entreprise, DHCP charge automatiquement le nom de domaine. 3 Le paramètre de dé-provisionnement affiché uniquement si la zone est provisionnée.Présentation des procédés Comme abordé dans la section Présentation de la configuration et de l'installation , l'ordinateur doit être configuré pour que les fonctions d'Intel AMT puissent interagir avec l'application de gestion. Il existe trois méthodes de réalisation du processus de provisionnement (de la moins complexe à la plus complexe) : Service de configuration — Un service de configuration permet de terminer le processus de provisionnement à partir d'une console GUI sur le serveur. Pour ce faire, une seule intervention sur chacun des ordinateurs sur lesquels Intel AMT est activé suffit. Les champs PPS et PID sont remplis à l'aide d'un fichier créé par le service de configuration enregistré sur un périphérique USB. Interface MEBx — L'administrateur IT configure manuellement les paramètres MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) sur chaque ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. Pour remplir les champs PPS et PID, il suffit de saisir les clés alphanumériques à 32 et à 8 caractères créées par le service de configuration dans l'interface MEBx. TLS-PKI — Communément appelé Configuration à distance (RCFG) ou Configuration sans intervention de l'utilisateur (ZTC). Ce processus utilise un certificat associé au ProvisionServer. Le hachage de certificat associé doit être répertorié dans Intel MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension). * TLS-PKI se rapporte à Transport Layer Security - Public Key Infrastructure (Sécurité de la couche transport - Infrastructure à clé publique)* La section suivante décrit davantage l'utilisation de ces diverses méthodes.Utilisation d'un périphérique USB Cette section traite de l'installation et de la configuration d'Intel AMT à l'aide d'un périphérique de stockage USB. Vous pouvez définir et configurer localement les informations de mot de passe, d'ID de provisionnement (PID), et d'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS) avec une clé USB. Cette opération est également appelée provisionnement USB. Le provisionnement USB vous permet de définir et de configurer manuellement des ordinateurs en évitant les problèmes associés à une saisie manuelle des entrées. REMARQUE : le provisionnement USB ne fonctionne que si le mot de passe MEBx est défini sur la valeur usine par défaut : admin. Si le mot de passe a été modifié, rétablissez sa valeur usine par défaut en effaçant le CMOS. Voici une procédure typique d'installation et de configuration à l'aide d'une clé USB. Pour une description détaillée de l'utilisation d'Altiris Dell Client Manager (DCM), reportez-vous à la page Procédure par périphérique USB. 1. Insérez une clé USB dans un ordinateur disposant d'une console de gestion. 2. Demandez les enregistrements locaux d'installation et de configuration à partir d'un serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) par l'intermédiaire de la console. 3. Le SCS effectue les tâches suivantes : 1. Génère les ensembles de mots de passe, d'ID de provisionnement (PID) et d'expressions de passe de provisionnement (PPS) appropriés. 2. Enregistre ces informations dans sa base de données. 3. Renvoie les informations à la console de gestion. 4. La console de gestion inscrit les ensembles de mots de passe, d'ID de provisionnement (PID), et d'expressions de passe de provisionnement (PPS) dans un fichier setup.bin sur la clé USB. 5. Amenez la clé USB à la zone de préparation où se trouvent les nouveaux ordinateurs compatibles Intel AMT. Procédez comme suit : 1. Déballez et connectez les ordinateurs le cas échéant. 2. Insérez la clé USB dans un ordinateur 3. Allumez cet ordinateur. 6. Le BIOS de l'ordinateur détecte la clé USB. Si elle est trouvée, le BIOS recherche un fichier setup.bin au début de la clé. Passez à l'étape 7. Si le BIOS ne trouve pas de clé USB ou de fichier setup.bin, redémarrez l'ordinateur. Ignorez les étapes restantes. 7. Le BIOS de l'ordinateur affiche un message indiquant que l'installation et la configuration automatiques vont avoir lieu. 1. Le premier enregistrement disponible du fichier setup.bin est lu en mémoire. Le processus effectue les tâches suivantes : Valide l'enregistrement d'en-tête de fichier. Recherche l'enregistrement disponible suivant. Si la procédure réussit, l'enregistrement actif est invalidé et il ne peut donc pas être réutilisé. 2. Le processus place l'adresse de mémoire dans le bloc de paramètre de MEBx. 3. Le processus appelle MEBx. 8. MEBx traite l'enregistrement. 9. MEBx affiche un message d'achèvement sur l'écran. 10. Éteignez l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur est à présent dans l'état d'installation et il est prêt à être distribué aux utilisateurs dans un environnement en mode Entreprise. 11. Répétez l'étape 5 si vous avez plusieurs ordinateurs. Consultez le fournisseur de la console de gestion pour en savoir plus concernant l'installation et la configuration avec une clé USB. Conditions requises de la clé USB La clé USB doit répondre aux exigences suivantes pour permettre l'installation et la configuration Intel AMT : Elle doit avoir une capacité supérieure à 16 Mo. Elle doit être formatée avec le système de fichiers FAT16 ou FAT32. La taille de secteur doit être de 1 Ko. La clé USB n'est pas amorçable. La clé de lecteur USB AMT sert au provisionnement seulement. La clé USB ne doit pas contenir d'autres fichiers, qu'ils soient masqués, supprimés ou autres. Le fichier setup.bin doit être le premier enregistré sur la clé USB (pour Legacy BIOS ou Wembley). Le fichier setup.bin doit se trouver dans le répertoire principal (pour UEFI BIOS ou RAM).Procédures pour le périphérique USB Le progiciel de console par défaut fourni est l'application DCM (Dell Client Management - Gestion de client Dell). Cette section présente la procédure d'installation et de configuration d'Intel AMT avec le progiciel DCM. Comme mentionné précédemment, plusieurs autres progiciels sont disponibles auprès de revendeurs tiers. Avant de commencer ce processus, assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est configuré et que le serveur DNS le voit. De plus, un périphérique de stockage USB est obligatoire et ce périphérique doit être conforme à la configuration requise indiquée dans la section Utilisation d'un périphérique USB. REMARQUE : le logiciel de gestion n'est pas toujours de nature dynamique ou ne fonctionne pas toujours en temps réel. Vous devrez parfois répéter une action plusieurs fois pour obtenir un résultat. 1. Formatez un périphérique de stockage USB avec le système de fichiers FAT16 et aucun libellé de volume, puis mettezle de côté. 2. Ouvrez l'application Altiris Dell Client Manager en double-cliquant sur l'icône du bureau ou via le menu Démarrer. 3. Sélectionnez AMT Quick Start (Démarrage rapide AMT) dans le menu de navigation à gauche pour ouvrir la console Altiris.4. Cliquez sur le signe plus <+> pour développer la section Intel AMT Getting Started (Mise en route d'Intel AMT).5. Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour développer la Section 1. Provisioning (Provisionnement).6. Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour développer la section Basic Provisioning (without TLS) (Provisionnement de base [sans TLS]).7. Sélectionnez l'étape 1. Configure DNS (Configurer le DNS). 8. Le serveur de notification sur lequel une solution de gestion hors bande est installée doit être enregistré dans DNS comme «Serveur de provisionnement».9. Cliquez sur Test dans l'écran DNS Configuration (Configuration DNS) pour vérifier que l'entrée ProvisionServer (Serveur de provisionnement) existe dans DNS et que DNS est associé au serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) correct.10. L'adresse IP du serveur de provisionnement et celle d'Intel SCS sont maintenant visibles.11. Sélectionnez l'étape 2. Discover Capabilities (Fonctions de détection).12. Vérifiez que le paramètre est Enabled (Activé). S'il est Disabled (Désactivé), cochez la case en regard de Disabled (Désactivé), puis cliquez sur Apply (Appliquer).13. Sélectionnez l'étape 3. View Intel AMT Capable Computers (Afficher les ordinateurs AMT).14. Tous les ordinateurs Intel AMT du réseau sont visibles dans cette liste.15. Sélectionnez l'étape 4. Create Profile (Créer un profil)16. Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour ajouter un nouveau profil.17. L'onglet General (Général) permet à l'administrateur de modifier le nom et la description du profil ainsi que le mot de passe. L'administrateur définit un mot de passe standard à des fins de maintenance aisée à l'avenir. Sélectionnez la case d'option manual (manuel), puis saisissez un nouveau mot de passe.18. L'onglet Network (Réseau) permet d'activer les réponses ping, VLAN, WebGUI, Serial over LAN, et la redirection IDE. Si vous configurez Intel AMT manuellement, tous ces paramètres sont également disponibles dans le MEBx. 19. L'onglet TLS (Transport Layer Security) permet d'activer TLS. S'il est activé, plusieurs autres informations sont obligatoires, notamment le nom de serveur de l'autorité de certificat (CA), le nom commun CA, le type de CA et le modèle de certificat.20. L'onglet ACL (access control list - liste de contrôle d'accès) sert à vérifier les utilisateurs déjà associés à ce profil et à ajouter de nouveaux utilisateurs. Cet onglet permet également de définir leurs privilèges d'accès. 21. L'onglet Power Policy (Mode d'alimentation) contient les options de configuration permettant de sélectionner les états de veille d'Intel AMT ainsi que le paramètre Idle Timeout (Délai d'inactivité). Pour des performances optimales, il est recommandé que le paramètre Délai d'inactivité soit toujours défini sur 1. REMARQUE : le paramètre de l'onglet Power Policy (Mode d'alimentation) peut affecter la conformité d'unordinateur aux normes E-Star 4.0. 22. Sélectionnez l'étape 5. Generate Security Keys (Générer des clés de sécurité)23. Sélectionnez l'icône avec une flèche pointant vers l'extérieur pour exporter les clés de sécurité vers la clé USB.24. Sélectionnez la case d'option Generate keys before export (Générer des clés avant l'exportation).25. Entrez le nombre de clés à générer (selon le nombre d'ordinateurs à provisionner). Le nombre par défaut est 50. 26. Le mot de passe par défaut ME est admin. Configurez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME pour l'environnement.27. Cliquez sur Generate (Générer). Une fois les clés créées, un lien apparaît à gauche du bouton Generate. 28. Insérez le périphérique USB précédemment formaté dans un connecteur USB sur le serveur de provisionnement.29. Cliquez sur le lien Download USB key file (Télécharger un fichier de clé USB) pour télécharger le fichier setup.bin sur le périphérique USB. Le périphérique est reconnu par défaut ; enregistrez le fichier sur le périphérique USB. REMARQUE : si, ultérieurement, des clés supplémentaires deviennent nécessaires, le périphérique USB doit être reformaté avant l'enregistrement du fichier setup.bin sur celui-ci. a. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) dans la boîte de dialogue File Download (Téléchargement de fichier). b. Assurez-vous que l'emplacement Save in: (Enregistrer dans :) pointe vers le périphérique USB. Cliquez sur Enregistrer.c. Cliquez sur Close (Fermer) dans la boîte de dialogue Download complete (Téléchargement terminé). 30. Le fichier setup.bin est désormais visible dans la fenêtre de l'explorateur de lecteur.31. Fermez la fenêtre Export Security Keys to USB Key (Exporter les clés de sécurité vers la clé USB) et la fenêtre de l'explorateur de lecteur pour revenir à la console Altiris. 32. Insérez le périphérique USB et allumez l'ordinateur. Le périphérique USB est immédiatement reconnu et le message suivant apparaît : Continue with Auto Provisioning (Y/N) (Poursuivre le provisionnement automatique (O/N)) 33. Appuyez sur (O). Press any key to continue with system boot.. (Appuyez sur une touche pour poursuivre le démarrage du système).34. Le démarrage terminé, éteignez l'ordinateur et revenez au serveur de gestion. 35. Sélectionnez l'étape 6. Configure Automatic Profile Assignments (Configurer les affectations de profil automatiques).36. Vérifiez que le paramètre est activé. Dans le menu déroulant Intel AMT 2.0+, sélectionnez le profil précédemment créé. Configurez les autres paramètres de l'environnement.37. Sélectionnez l'étape 7. Monitor Provisioning Process (Contrôler le processus de provisionnement).38. Les ordinateurs pour lesquels les clés ont été appliquées sont mis à jour dans la liste système. L'état qui tout d'abord est Unprovisioned (Non provisionné), passe à In provisioning (En cours de provisionnement), pour finalement se transformer en Provisioned (Provisionné) à la fin du processus.39. Sélectionnez l'étape 8. Monitor Profile Assignments (Affectations des profils de moniteur).40. Les ordinateurs pour lesquels des profils ont été affectés apparaissent dans la liste. Chaque ordinateur est identifié grâce aux colonnes FQDN, UUID, et Profile Name (Nom de profil).41. Dès qu'ils sont provisionnés, les ordinateurs sont visibles dans le dossier Collections sous All configured Intel AMT computers (Tous les ordinateurs Intel AMT configurés).Déploiement de système Lorsque vous êtes prêt à déployer un ordinateur pour un utilisateur, branchez l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation électrique et connectez-le au réseau. Utilisez la carte d'interface réseau (NIC) intégrée Intel 82566DM. La technologie Intel AMT (Active Management Technology - Technologie d'administration active) ne fonctionne avec aucune autre solution NIC. Une fois sous tension, l'ordinateur recherche immédiatement un serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS). S'il trouve le serveur, l'ordinateur activé AMT lui envoie un message Hello (Bonjour). REMARQUE : l'utilisateur doit d'abord activer l'accès réseau soit via le MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension), soit via l'utilitaire d'activation Intel Activator. DHCP et DNS doivent être disponibles pour que la recherche du serveur d'installation et de configuration réussisse automatiquement. Si DHCP et DNS ne sont pas disponibles, l'adresse IP du serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) doit être saisie manuellement dans le MEBx de l'ordinateur compatible AMT. Le message Hello contient les informations suivantes : ID de provisionnement (PID) Identificateur universellement unique (UUID - Universally Unique Identifier) Adresse IP Numéros de version de la mémoire ROM et du micrologiciel (FW) Le message Hello (Bonjour) est transparent à l'utilisateur final. 1. Dans AMT 7, dans le système d'exploitation, sélectionnez IMSS. 2. Dans l'onglet Advanced (Avancé), sélectionnez Extended System Details (Détails de système étendu). 3. Cliquez sur Intel ME Information (Informations ME Intel). Si le mode de provisionnement indique «In Provisioning» (En cours de provisionnement), les paquets «bonjour» sont envoyés vers le serveur de provision sur le réseau. Le SCS utilise les informations du message Hello (Bonjour) pour initialiser une connexion TLS (Transport Layer Security - Sécurité de couche de transport) à l'ordinateur activé Intel AMT utilisant une suite de chiffrement de clé pré-partagée TLS (PSK - Pre-Shared key), si TLS est pris en charge. Le SCS utilise le PID pour rechercher l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS) dans la base de données du serveur de provisionnement et utilise le PPS et le PID pour générer un secret pré-maître TLS. TLS est facultatif. Pour des transactions sécurisées et cryptées, utilisez TLS si l'infrastructure est disponible. Si vous n'utilisez pas TLS, HTTP Digest est utilisé à des fins d'authentification mutuelle. HTTP Digest n'est pas aussi sécurisé que TLS. Le SCS se connecte à l'ordinateur Intel AMT à l'aide du nom d'utilisateur et du mot de passe et provisionne les éléments de données obligatoires suivants : Nouveaux PPS et PID (pour une installation et une configuration ultérieures) Certificats TLS Clés privées Date et heure actuelles Coordonnées HTTP Digest Coordonnées de négociation HTTP L'ordinateur passe de l'état Installation à l'état provisionné, Intel AMT est alors entièrement opérationnel. Une fois provisionné, l'ordinateur peut être géré à distance.Pilotes du système d'exploitation Le pilote AMT Unified doit être installé au sein du système d'exploitation afin de supprimer tout périphérique inconnu du Gestionnaire de périphériques. Contrairement aux versions antérieures (3, 4 ou 5, dans lesquelles existaient deux pilotes distincts HECI et LMS/SOL du point de vue de la réinstallation du client), la version actuelle les fournit tous les deux dans un progiciel commun appelé AMT Unified Driver (Pilote AMT Unified). Une fois installé, le progiciel de pilotes unifiés gère les deux périphériques PCI dans le Gestionnaire de périphériques. Pilote AMT Unified Le pilote SOL (Intel AMT Serial-Over-LAN)/LMS (Local Manageability Service) est disponible sur support.dell.com ainsi que sur le CD ResourceCD sous Chipset Drivers (Pilotes de jeux de puces). Chipset Drivers (Pilotes de jeux de puces). Le pilote a pour nom Intel AMT SOL/LMS. Pour installer le pilote, double-cliquez sur le fichier d'installation. Une fois le pilote SOL/LMS installé, l'entrée PCI Serial Port (Port série PCI) devient Intel Active Management Technology - SOL (COM3). Le pilote Intel AMT HECI (Host Embedded Controller Interface - interface de contrôleur embarqué d'hôte) est disponible sur support.dell.com et sur le CD ResourceCD sous Chipset Drivers (Pilotes de jeux de puces). Le pilote a pour nom Intel AMT HECI. Pour installer le pilote, double-cliquez sur le fichier d'installation. Une fois les pilotes HECI installés, l'entrée PCI Simple Communications Controller (Contrôleur de communications simple PCI) devient Intel Management Engine Interface (Interface du moteur de gestion Intel).Intel AMT Web GUI Intel AMT WebUI est une interface basée sur un navigateur Web pour une gestion à distance limitée d'ordinateur. L'interface WebUI est souvent utilisée comme test pour déterminer si l'installation et la configuration AMT Intel a été effectuée correctement sur un ordinateur. Une bonne connexion à distance entre un ordinateur distant et l'ordinateur hôte exécutant WebGUI indique une installation et une configuration correctes d'Intel AMT sur l'ordinateur distant. Intel AMT WebUI est accessible depuis n'importe quel navigateur Web, tel que Internet Explorer ou Netscape. Une gestion à distance limitée d'ordinateur comprend les éléments suivants : l'inventaire du matériel, l'enregistrement des événements dans le journal, la réinitialisation de l'ordinateur distant, la modification des paramètres réseau, l'ajout de nouveaux utilisateurs. REMARQUE : vous trouverez des informations concernant l'utilisation de l'interface WebGUI sur le site Web Intel AMT. Effectuez les étapes suivantes pour vous connecter à Intel AMT WebGUI sur un ordinateur qui a été configuré et installé. 1. Allumez un ordinateur compatible AMT qui a terminé l'installation et la configuration AMT. 2. Démarrez un navigateur Web depuis un autre ordinateur, par exemple un ordinateur de gestion sur le même sousréseau que l'ordinateur Intel AMT. 3. Connectez-vous à l'adresse IP spécifiée dans le MEBx et au port de l'ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. (exemple : http://ip_address:16992 ou http://192.168.2.1:16992) Par défaut, le port est 16992. REMARQUE : utilisez le port 16993 et https:// pour vous connecter à Intel AMT WebGUI sur un ordinateur qui a été configuré et installé en mode Entreprise. En cas d'utilisation de DHCP, utilisez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) pour le ME. Le FQDN est la combinaison du nom d'hôte et du domaine. (exemple : http://host_name:16992 ou http://system1:16992) 4. L'ordinateur de gestion effectue une connexion TCP vers l'ordinateur compatible Intel AMT et accède à la page Web intégrée Intel AMT de premier niveau dans le moteur de gestion de l'ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. 5. Saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. Le nom d'utilisateur par défaut est admin et le mot de passe est celui défini durant l'installation d'Intel AMT dans le MEBx. 6. Examinez les informations de l'ordinateur et apportez les modifications nécessaires éventuelles. REMARQUE : vous pouvez changer le mot de passe MEBx pour l'ordinateur distant dans WebGUI. Une modification du mot de passe dans WebGUI ou une console distante donne deux mots de passe. Le nouveau mot de passe, connu sous le nom de mot de passe à distance du MEBx, fonctionne uniquement à distance avec WebGUI ou une console distante. Le mot de passe local du MEBx utilisé pour accéder localement au MEBx n'est pas modifié. Vous devez vous souvenir des mots de passe locaux et à distance du MEBx pour accéder au MEBx de l'ordinateur localement et à distance. Lorsque le mot de passe du MEBx est défini initialement dans l'installation d'Intel AMT, le mot de passe sert à la fois de mot de passe local et à distance. Si le mot de passe à distance est modifié, les mots de passe sont désynchronisés. 7. Sélectionnez Quitter.Présentation de la redirection AMT Intel AMT facilite la redirection des communications série et IDE d'un client géré à une console de gestion, quel que soit l'état de l'alimentation et du démarrage du client géré. Il suffit que le client soit doté de la fonction Intel AMT, d'une connexion à une source d'alimentation électrique et d'une connexion réseau. Intel AMT prend en charge Serial Over LAN (SOL, redirection texte/clavier) et la redirection IDE (IDER, redirection CD-ROM) sur TCP/IP. Présentation de Serial Over LAN Serial Over LAN (SOL) est une fonction permettant d'émuler une communication de port série par l'intermédiaire d'une connexion de réseau standard. SOL peut être utilisé pour la plupart des applications de gestion pour lesquelles une connexion de port série est normalement obligatoire. Lors de l'établissement d'une session SOL active entre un client sur lequel Intel AMT est activé et une console de gestion utilisant la bibliothèque de redirection d'Intel AMT, le trafic série du client est redirigé par l'intermédiaire d'Intel AMT sur la connexion LAN et mis à la disposition de la console de gestion. De façon similaire, la console de gestion peut envoyer des données série sur la connexion LAN qui semble être passée par le port série du client. Présentation de la redirection IDE La redirection IDE (IDER) peut émuler un lecteur de CD IDE ou une disquette héritée ou encore un lecteur LS-120 sur une connexion réseau standard. IDER permet à un ordinateur d'administration de relier un de ses lecteurs locaux à un client géré sur le réseau. Une fois la session IDER établie, le client géré peut utiliser le périphérique distant comme s'il était directement rattaché à l'un de ses propres canaux IDE. Ceci se révèle particulièrement utile pour démarrer à distance un ordinateur qui, autrement, ne répond pas. IDER ne prend pas en charge le format DVD. IDER peut servir, par exemple, à démarrer un client dont le système d'exploitation est corrompu. Un disque de démarrage valide est tout d'abord chargé dans le lecteur de la console de gestion. Ce lecteur est alors passé en tant qu'argument lorsque la console de gestion ouvre la session TCP IDER. Intel AMT enregistre le périphérique en tant que périphérique IDE virtuel sur le client, quel que soit son état d'alimentation ou de démarrage. SOL et IDER peuvent être utilisés conjointement car le BIOS du client peut devoir être configuré pour démarrer à partir du périphérique IDE virtuel.IMMS - Application d'état de gestion et sécurité Intel IMMS (Intel Management and Security Status - Application d'état de gestion et sécurité) est une application qui affiche les informations concernant Intel AMT (Intel Active Management Technology - Technologie de gestion active) d'une plate-forme et les services Intel Standard Manageability (Gérabilité standard). L'icône IMSS indique si Intel AMT et Intel Standard Manageability s'exécutent sur la même plate-forme. L'icône se trouve dans la zone de notification. Par défaut, l'icône de notification apparaît à chaque démarrage de Windows*. L'application IMSS présente une version séparée pour chaque génération Intel AMT (4.x, 5.x, 6.x). Ceci sert à décrire l'application IMSS pour la génération Intel AMT 6.x. REMARQUE : lors de la connexion de l'utilisateur à Windows, l'application IMSS peut démarrer automatiquement. L'icône est chargée dans la zone de notification uniquement si Intel AMT ou Intel Standard Manageability est activé sur la plate-forme. Si l'application IMSS est démarrée manuellement (via le menu Démarrer), tant que tous les pilotes ont été installés, l'icône est chargée même si aucune de ces technologies n'est activée. REMARQUE : les informations affichées dans l'IMSS n'apparaissent pas en temps réel. Les données sont rafraîchies à différents intervalles. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel.Dépannage Cette section présente quelques étapes de dépannage de base à effectuer en cas de problème lié à la configuration Intel AMT. Contrôlez le DSN pour d'autres options de dépannage. Rétablir les paramètres par défaut Le rétablissement des paramètres par défaut est également appelé dé-provisionnement. Un ordinateur installé et configuré pour Intel AMT peut être dé-provisionné à l'aide de l'option Unconfigure Network Access (Déconfiguration de l'accès réseau) à partir de l'écran Intel ME General Setttings (Paramètres généraux Intel ME). Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour dé-provisionner un ordinateur : 1. Sélectionnez Un-Provision (Dé-provisionner), puis Full Un-provision (Dé-provisionnement total). Cette option rétablit tous les paramètres usine par défaut de la configuration Intel AMT mais ne rétablit PAS les paramètres de configuration ni les mots de passe de la configuration ME. Un message de dé-provisionnement apparaît au bout d'une minute. Une fois le dé-provisionnement terminé, le contrôle revient à l'écran Intel ME General Setttings (Paramètres généraux Intel ME). 1. Sélectionnez Return to previous menu (Revenir au menu précédent). 2. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter), puis appuyez sur (o). L'ordinateur redémarre. Flash du micrologiciel Flashez le micrologiciel pour effectuer une mise à niveau à des versions ultérieures d'Intel AMT. La fonction de flash automatique peut être désactivée en sélectionnant Disabled (Désactivé) dans le paramètre Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel) de l'interface du MEBx Si ce paramètre est désactivé, un message d'erreur du micrologiciel apparaît lors du flashage du BIOS. Serial-Over-LAN (SOL) et IDE Redirection (Redirection IDE - IDE-R) Si vous ne pouvez pas utiliser IDE-R et SOL, suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. À l'écran de démarrage initial, appuyez sur

pour ouvrir les écrans MEBx. 2. Un message vous invite à saisir le mot de passe. Saisissez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME. 3. Sélectionnez Unconfigure Network Access (Déconfiguration de l'accès réseau). Appuyez sur . 4. Sélectionnez Y (O). Appuyez sur . 5. Sélectionnez Full Unprovision (Dé-provisionnement total). Appuyez sur . 6. Reconfigurez les paramètres affichés à l'option de menu AMT Configuration (Configuration AMT) illustrée ici. Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Remarques, avis et précautions Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Intel Corporation est une source ayant contribuée à ce document. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel et iAMT sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Les autres marques et noms de produits pouvant être utilisés dans ce document sont reconnus comme appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt  propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Octobre 2007 Rév. A00 A propos de la technologie Intel® Active Management Déploiement Présentation de l'installation et de la configuration de Intel AMT Utilisation de l'interface WebGUI de Intel AMT Extension Intel Management Engine BIOS (MEBx) Redirection des communications série et IDE Approvisionnement : Achèvement de l'installation et de la configuration Dépannage REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort.Retour à la page Contenu Déploiement Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Quand vous êtes prêt à déployer un ordinateur pour un utilisateur, branchez l'ordinateur sur une source d'alimentation et reliez-le au réseau. Utilisez la carte  réseau intégrée Intel® 82566MM. La technologie Intel iAMT® (Intel Active Management Technology) ne fonctionne pas avec toute autre carte réseau. Quand l'ordinateur est allumé, il recherche immédiatement un serveur SCS (setup and configuration server). S'il trouve ce serveur, l'ordinateur Intel AMT  envoie un message Hello au serveur. Les protocoles DHCP et DNS doivent être disponibles pour que la recherche du serveur d'installation et configuration réussisse automatiquement. Si DHCP et  DNS ne sont pas disponibles, l'adresse IP du serveur SCS doit être saisie manuellement dans l'extension MEBx de l'ordinateur Intel AMT. Le message Hello contient les informations suivantes : l ID d'approvisionnement (PID) l Identificateur universel unique (UUID) l Adresse IP l Numéros de version de ROM et de microcode (FW)  Le message Hello est transparent pour l'utilisateur final. Il n'y a pas de mécanisme d'interaction pour signaler que l'ordinateur envoie ce message. Le serveur  SCS utilise les informations du message Hello pour initier une connexion TLS (Transport Layer Security) vers l'ordinateur Intel AMT à l'aide de la suite de  chiffrement TLS PSK (Pre-Shared key) si TLS est pris en charge. Le serveur SCS utilise le PID pour rechercher la phrase de mot de passe d'approvisionnement (PPS) dans la base de données du serveur d'approvisionnement  et utilise les informations PPS et PID pour générer un Pre-Master Secret TLS. TLS est facultatif. Pour des transactions sécurisées et chiffrées, utilisez TLS si  cette infrastructure est disponible. Si vous n'utilisez pas TLS, c'est le HTTP Digest qui est utilisé pour l'identification mutuelle. HTTP Digest n'est pas aussi  sécurisé que TLS. Le serveur SCS ouvre une session sur l'ordinateur Intel AMT avec le nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe pour approvisionner les éléments de  données suivants : l Nouveaux PPS et PID (pour installation et configuration ultérieures)  l Certificats TLS l Clés privées  l Date et heure en cours l Pièces justificatives HTTP Digest  l Pièces justificatives de négociation HTTP  L'ordinateur passe alors de l'état installé dans l'état approvisionné, Intel AMT est alors totalement opérationnel. Une fois qu'il est dans l'état approvisionné,  l'ordinateur peut être administré à distance. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Extension Intel® Management Engine BIOS (MEBx) Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Présentation de Intel MEBx Configuration du moteur d'administration Intel ME (Management Engine) Configuration de votre ordinateur pour la prise en charge des fonctionnalités Intel AMT Paramètres par défaut MEBx Présentation de MEBx L'extension Intel® MEBx (Management Engine BIOS) propose des options de configuration au niveau de la plate-forme pour définir le comportement de la  plate-forme ME (Management Engine). Les options sont notamment l'activation et la désactivation individuelle des fonctions comme la définition des  configurations d'alimentation. Cette section donne plus de détails sur les options et contraintes éventuelles de la configuration de MEBx. Toutes les modifications de paramètres de configuration ME ne sont pas enregistrées en cache dans MEBx. Elles ne sont pas enregistrées en mémoire non  volatile ME (NVM) avant la sortie de MEBx. Donc en cas de blocage de MEBx, les modifications effectuées auparavant ne seront PAS validées dans la mémoire  non volatile ME. REMARQUE : Briscoe AMT est livré en mode entreprise par défaut.  Accès à l'interface utilisateur de configuration de MEBx L'interface utilisateur de configuration de MEBx est accessible sur un ordinateur comme suit : 1. Allumez votre ordinateur (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ s'affiche, appuyez immédiatement sur 

. Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau du système d'exploitation  Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Eteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Tapez le mot de passe ME. Appuyez sur .  L'écran MEBx apparaît comme indiqué ci-dessous. Le menu principal offre trois choix de fonction : l Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME) l Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) l Change Intel ME Password (Changement du mot de passe Intel ME) Les menus Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME) et Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) sont traités dans les sections ci-dessous. Vous devez d'abord changer le mot de passe avant de pouvoir accéder à ces menus. Changing the Intel ME Password (Changement du mot de passe Intel ME) Le mot de passe par défaut est admin, c'est le même sur toutes les plates-formes qui viennent d'être déployées. Vous devez changer le mot de passe par défaut avant de changer toute autre option de configuration de fonctionnalité. Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants : l Huit caractères  l Une lettre en majuscule l Une lettre en minuscule l Un nombre l Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), tel que !, $ ou ;, à l'exception des caractères :, " et ,.  Le tiret de soulignement ( _ ) et l'espace sont des caractères de mot de passe valides mais n'ajoute RIEN à la complexité du mot de passe.  Configuration du moteur d'administration Intel® ME (Management Engine) Pour atteindre la page Intel® Management Engine (ME) Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme de moteur d'administration Intel ME), procédez comme suit : 1. Sur le menu principal Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx), sélectionnez ME Configuration (Configuration ME). Appuyez sur .  2. Le message suivant s'affiche : System resets after configuration changes. Continue: (Y/N) (Réinitialisation du système après changement de configuration. Continuer :  (O/N)) 3. Appuyez sur . La page ME Platform Configuration (Configuration plate-forme ME) s'ouvre. Cette page permet de configurer les fonctions spécifiques du moteur ME telles  que fonctionnalités, options d'alimentation, etc. Voici des liens rapides vers les différentes sections. l Intel ME State Control (Contrôle d'état Intel ME) l Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode Intel ME) l Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctionnalités Intel ME) ¡ Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité d'administration) ¡ LAN Controller (Contrôleur réseau) l Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation Intel ME) ¡ Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME activé dans les états de mise en veille) Intel ME State Control (Contrôle d'état Intel ME) La sélection de l'option ME State Control (Contrôle d'état ME) dans le menu ME Platform Configuration (Configuration plate-forme ME), fait apparaître le  menu ME State Control (Contrôle d'état ME). Vous pouvez désactiver ME pour isoler l'ordinateur ME de la plate-forme principale jusqu'à la fin de la procédure  de débogage.L'activation de l'option ME State Control (Contrôle d'état ME) permet de désactiver ME pour isoler l'ordinateur ME de la plate-forme principale pendant le débogage d'un défaut de fonctionnement sur site. Le tableau ci-dessous illustre les détails de ces options. En fait ME n'est pas vraiment désactivé par l'option Disabled (Désactivé). Il est plutôt mis en pause très tôt dans son démarrage pour que l'ordinateur ne voie  aucun trafic provenant de ME sur un de ses bus, de façon à pouvoir déboguer un problème d'ordinateur sans s'inquiéter du rôle qu'aurait pu avoir ME dans  celui-ci. Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode ME) Cette option du menu ME Platform Configuration (Configuration plate-forme ME) définit la méthode de mise à jour locale de MEBx. Le paramètre par défaut  est Always Open (Toujours ouvert). Les autres paramètres disponibles sont Never Open (Jamais ouvert) et Restricted (Restreint). Pour faciliter la procédure de fabrication comme celle de mise à jour de microcode spécifique d'un fabricant OEM sur site, le microcode ME dispose d'une  capacité configurable par OEM permettant de laisser le canal local de mise à jour de microcode toujours ouvert quelle que soit la valeur sélectionnée pour  l'option ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode ME). L'option Always Open (Toujours ouvert) permet aux constructeurs OEM d'utiliser le canal de mise à jour local du microcode ME pour mettre à jour ce microcode  sans avoir à passer à chaque fois par MEBx. Si vous sélectionnez Always Open (Jamais ouvert), l'option ME FW Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode  ME) n'apparaît pas sous le menu de configuration ME. Le tableau ci-dessous illustre les détails de chaque option. ME Platform State Control (contrôle d'état ME)  Option Description Enabled (Activé) Activer le moteur Management Engine sur la plate-forme Disabled (Désactivé) Désactiver le moteur Management Engine sur la plate-formeAlways Open (Toujours ouvert) qualifie le compteur d'outrepassage et permet les mises à jour locales du microcode ME. Le compte d'outrepassage est une  valeur définie à l'usine qui autorise par défaut les mises à jour de microcode ME locales. Les options Never Open (Jamais ouvert) et Restricted (Restreint) disqualifient le compteur d'outrepassage et n'autorisent pas les mises à jour de microcode ME locales sauf autorisation explicite par l'option Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode ME). La sélection de l'option Never Open (Toujours ouvert) ou Restricted (Restreint) ajoute l'option Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode ME), qui peut avoir la valeur Enable (Activé) ou Disable (Désactivé). Par défaut elle est  Disabled (Désactivé). LAN Controller (Contrôleur réseau) Beaucoup de plates-formes de constructeurs OEM fournissent une option de configuration de BIOS permettant d'activer ou désactiver le contrôleur réseau  intégré. Dans un système d'exploitation ME avec capacité MAT ou ASF (Alert Standard Format), le contrôleur réseau est partagé entre ME et l'hôte et doit être  activé pour que AMT fonctionne correctement. La désactivation du contrôleur peut affecter par erreur la fonctionnalité du sous-système ME. C'est pourquoi  vous ne devez pas désactiver le contrôleur LAN tant que ME l'utilise pour AMT ou ASF. Mais si l'option du BIOS contrôleur LAN intégré est sur None (Aucun), l'option LAN Controller (Contrôleur réseau) du menu ME Platform Configuration (Configuration plate-forme ME) dispose des options Enabled (Activé) et  Disabled (Désactivé). Quand vous sélectionnez l'option LAN Controller (Contrôleur réseau) sur le menu ME Platform Configuration (Configuration plate-forme ME) et que la fonctionnalité ME (Intel AMT ou Intel QST) est sélectionnée, le message ci-dessous apparaît : Please set Manageability Feature to None before changing this option (Réglez la fonction d'administration sur Aucune avant de modifier cette option). Pour le client de plate-forme ME, le réglage par défaut pour LAN Controller (Contrôleur réseau) est Enabled (Activé). Option ME Firmware Local Update Option Description Always Open (Toujours ouvert) Le canal de mise à jour local du microcode ME est toujours activé. Un cycle de démarrage ne change pas  son activation ou désactivation. L'option ME FW Local Update (Mise à jour locale du microcode ME) peut  être ignorée. Never (Jamais) Le canal de mise à jour local de microcode ME est géré par l'option ME FW Local Update (Mise à jour  locale du microcode ME), qui peut être activée ou désactivée. Un cycle de démarrage fait passer l'option  de Enabled (Activé) à Disabled (Désactivé). Restricted (Restreint) Le canal de mise à jour local de microcode ME est toujours activé seulement si Intel AMT est dans un  état non approvisionné. Un cycle de démarrage ne change pas son activation ou désactivation.Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctionnalités Intel ME) Le menu ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctionnalités Intel ME) contient les choix de configuration ci-dessous. Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité d'administration) Quand vous sélectionnez Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité d'administration) sur le menu ME Features Control (Contrôle des  fonctionnalités ME), le menu ME Manageability Feature (Fonctionnalité d'administration ME) apparaît. Vous pouvez utiliser cette option pour déterminer les fonctionnalités d'administration activées. l ASF – Alert Standard Format. ASF est une technologie de gestion d'actifs d'entreprise normalisée. La plate-forme Intel ICH9 est compatible avec ASF spécification 2.0.  l Intel AMT – Intel Active Management Technology. Intel AMT est une technologie de gestion d'actifs d'entreprise améliorée. La plate-forme Intel ICH9 est compatible avec Intel AMT 2.6. Le tableau ci-dessous explique ces options. Option Management Feature Select Option Description None (Aucune) Fonctionnalité d'administration non sélectionnée Intel AMT Fonctionnalité d'administration AMT sélectionnée ASF Fonctionnalité d'administration ASF sélectionnéeQuand vous faites passer cette option de Intel AMT à None (Aucune), une boîte de dialogue d'avertissement apparaît automatiquement pour demander un  désapprovisionnement Intel si vous acceptez la modification. L'option None (Aucune) n'a pas de fonction d'administration assurée par le ME. Dans ce cas, le microcode doit être chargé (c'est-à-dire ME toujours activé),  mais les applications d'administration restent désactivées. Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation Intel ME) Le menu ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation ME) configure les options d'alimentation électrique associées à la plate-forme ME. Il contient les choix de configuration ci-dessous. ME On in Host Sleep States (ME activé dans les états de mise en veille) La sélection de ME ON in Host Sleep States (ME activé dans les états de mise en veille) sur le menu ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation ME) fait  charger le menu ME in Host Sleep States (ME dans les états de mise en veille). L'ensemble d'alimentation sélectionné détermine l'activation de ME. L'ensemble d'alimentation par défaut désactive ME dans tous les états Sx (S3/S4/S5). L'administrateur utilisateur final peut choisir l'ensemble d'alimentation voulu selon l'utilisation de l'ordinateur. La page de sélection inférieure d'alimentation  apparaît ci-dessous. * WoL = Wake on LAN (éveil réseau) Si l'ensemble d'alimentation sélectionné indique OFF After Power Loss (Eteint après perte d'alimentation), Intel ME reste inactif après retour d'une extinction  mécanique (G3). Si l'ensemble d'alimentation sélectionné n'indique PAS OFF After Power Loss (Eteint après perte d'alimentation), Intel ME coupe brièvement  l'ordinateur sur S0, puis éteint l'ordinateur (S5). Configuration de votre ordinateur pour la prise en charge des fonctionnalités Intel  AMT Management Après achèvement de la configuration de la fonctionnalité Intel® Management Engine (ME), vous devez redémarrer avant de configurer Intel AMT pour un  démarrage propre. L'image ci-dessous montre le menu Intel AMT configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) quand un utilisateur sélectionne l'option Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) dans le menu principal de l'Extension MEBx (Management Engine BIOS). Cette fonctionnalité permet de configurer  un ordinateur disposant de capacités ME pour la prise en charge des fonctionnalités d'administration Intel AMT. Vous devez disposer de connaissances de base sur les termes de mise en réseau et informatiques, par exemple TCP/IP, DHCP, VLAN, IDE, DNS, masque de  sous-réseau, passerelle par défaut et nom de domaine. L'explication de ces termes sortirait du cadre de ce document.  Ensembles d'alimentation pris en charge Ensemble d'alimentation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S0 (Ordinateur allumé) Actif Actif Actif Actif Actif Actif Actif S3 (Eteint sur RAM) Inactif Actif Actif ME WoL ME WoL Actif Actif S4/S5 (Suspension sur disque/extinction logicielle) Inactif Inactif Actif Actif ME WoL Actif ME WoL ME OFF After Power Loss (ME éteint après perte  d'alimentation) Non Non Non Non Non Oui OuiLa page Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) contient les options ci-dessous configurables par l'utilisateur. Pour des images de ces options de menu, voir Enterprise Mode (Mode entreprise) et Mode petite et moyenne entreprise SMB. Options de menu Host Name (Nom d'hôte) Il est possible d'affecter un nom d'hôte à un ordinateur disposant de capacités Intel AMT. C'est le nom d'hôte de l'ordinateur disposant de capacités Intel AMT.  Si Intel AMT a la valeur DHCP, le nom d'hôte DOIT être identique au nom de machine du système d'exploitation. TCP/IP Permet de modifier la configuration TCP/IP de Intel AMT. l Network interface (Interface réseau) – ENABLE** / DISABLED (ACTIVE/DESACTIVE) L'interface réseau est désactivée, tous les paramètres TCP/IP deviennent inutiles.  l DHCP Mode (Mode DHCP) – ENABLE** / DISABLED (ACTIVE/DESACTIVE) Si le mode DHCP est activé, les paramètres TCP/IP sont configurés par un serveur DHCP.  Si le mode DHCP est désactivé, les paramètres TCP/IP statiques ci-dessous sont nécessaires pour Intel AMT. Si un ordinateur est en mode statique, il doit  disposer d'une adresse MAC séparée pour le moteur Intel Management Engine. Cette adresse MAC supplémentaire est souvent appelée l'adresse MAC  d'administration (MNGMAC). Sans adresse MAC d'administration séparée, l'ordinateur ne peut PAS être configuré en mode statique. l IP address (Adresse IP) – Adresse Internet du moteur Intel Management Engine. l Subnet mask (Masque de sous-réseau) – Masque de sous-réseau utilisé pour déterminer à quel sous-réseau appartient l'adresse IP.  l Default Gateway address (Adresse de passerelle par défaut) – Passerelle par défaut du moteur Intel Management Engine.  l Preferred DNS address (Adresse DNS préférée) – Adresse de serveur de nom de domaine préféré.  l Preferred DNS address (Adresse DNS préférée) – Autre adresse de serveur de nom de domaine. l Domain name (Nom de domaine) – Nom de domaine du moteur Intel Management Engine. Provisioning Server (Approvisionnement du serveur) Définissez l'adresse IP et le numéro de port (0–65535) d'un serveur d'approvisionnement Intel AMT. Cette configuration n'apparaît que pour le modèle  d'approvisionnement entreprise. Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement) Les modèles d'approvisionnement ci-dessous sont disponibles : l Compatibility Mode (Mode de compatibilité) – Intel AMT 2.6** / Intel AMT 1.0 Le mode de compatibilité permet à l'utilisateur de passer de Intel AMT 2.6 à Intel AMT 1.0.  l Host Name (Nom d'hôte) l TCP/IP l Provisioning Server (Approvisionnement du serveur) l Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement) l Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS) l Un-Provision (Désapprovisionnement) l SOL/IDE-R l Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour du microcode sécurisée) l Set PRTC (Définir PRTC) l Idle Timeout (Délai d'attente d'inactivité)l Provisioning Mode (Mode d'approvisionnement) – Enterprise** / Small Business (Entreprise/PME) Ceci permet de sélectionner un des modes SMB ou entreprise. Le mode entreprise peut avoir des paramètres de sécurité différents du mode SMB. Du  fait de ces différences de paramètres de sécurité, chacun de ces modes nécessitent une procédure différente d'achèvement de l'installation de la  configuration. Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS) La définition ou la suppression des valeurs PID/PPS entraînent un désapprovisionnement partiel si l'installation et configuration est «en cours». l Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS) – Définit les valeurs PID et PPS. Entrez les valeurs PID et PPS au format séparé par des tirets. (Ex. PID : 1234- ABCD ; PPS : 1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD) Remarque - une valeur PPS «0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000» ne modifie pas l'état de configuration et d'installation. Cette valeur fait apparaître un état d'installation et configuration «Not-started» (non démarré).  Un-Provision (Désapprovisionnement) L'option Un-Provision (Désapprovisionnement) permet de réinitialiser la configuration Intel AMT aux valeurs par défaut d'usine. Il existe trois types de  désapprovisionnement : l Partial Un-provision (Désapprovisionnement partiel) – Cette option réinitialise tous les paramètres Intel AMT à leurs valeurs par défaut mais conserve  les valeurs PID/PPS. Le mot de passe MEBx n'est pas modifié.  l Full Un-provision (Désapprovisionnement complet) – Cette option réinitialise tous les paramètres Intel AMT à leurs valeurs par défaut. Si une valeur  PID/PPS existe, les deux valeurs sont perdues. Le mot de passe MEBx n'est pas modifié.  l CMOS clear (Effacer CMOS) – Cette option de désapprovisionnement n'est pas disponible dans MEBx. Cette option efface toutes les valeurs et les  remplace par les valeurs par défaut. Si une valeur PID/PPS existe, les deux valeurs sont perdues. Le mot de passe MEBx est réinitialisé à la valeur par  défaut (admin). Pour lancer cette option, il faut effacer la mémoire CMOS (c'est-à-dire utiliser le cavalier sur la carte mère).   SOL/IDE-Rl Username and Password (Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe) – DISABLED** / ENABLED (DESACTIVE/ACTIVE) Cette option assure l'identification de l'utilisateur pour la session SOL/IDER. Si le protocole Kerberos est utilisé, choisissez Disabled (Désactivé) pour  cette option pour faire effectuer l'identification de l'utilisateur par Kerberos. Si Kerberos n'est pas utilisé, il est possible d'activer ou désactiver  l'identification d'utilisateur sur la session SOL/IDER. l Serial-Over-LAN (SOL) (Redirection série (SOL)) – DISABLED** / ENABLED (DESACTIVE/ACTIVE) SOL permet de rediriger les entrées/sorties de la console cliente administrée par Intel AMT vers la console du serveur d'administration.  l IDE Redirection (IDE-R) (Redirection IDE) – DISABLED** / ENABLED (DESACTIVE/ACTIVE) IDE-R permet de faire démarrer le client administré par Intel AMT depuis des images disque distantes sur la console d'administration.  Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour du microcode sécurisée) Cette option permet d'activer ou désactiver les mises à jour de microcode sécurisées. Secure firmware update (Mise à jour du microcode sécurisée) nécessite  un nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe d'administrateur. A défaut de fourniture d'un nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe d'administrateur, la mise à jour du  microcode est impossible. Quand l'option secure firmware update (Mise à jour de microcode sécurisée) est activée, vous pouvez mettre à jour le microcode par la méthode sécurisée.  Les mises à jour du microcode sécurisées passent par le pilote LMS. Set PRTC (Définir PRTC) Entrez la valeur PRTC GMT (UTC) au format (AAAA:MM:JJ:HH:MM:SS). La plage de date valide va du 1/1/2004 – au 1/4/2021. La valeur PRTC sert à conserver  virtuellement l'heure pendant l'état d'extinction (G3). Cette configuration n'apparaît que pour le modèle d'approvisionnement entreprise.Idle Timeout (Délai d'attente d'inactivité) Ce paramètre définit le délai d'attente d'inactivité ME WoL. A l'expiration de ce délai, le système ME entre en état d'économie d'énergie. Ce délai d'attente  n'est pris en compte que quand une des stratégies d'alimentation ME WoL est sélectionnée. Entrez la valeur en minutes. Exemple de paramètres Intel AMT en mode DHCP Le tableau ci-dessous donne un exemple de réglages de base des champs pour la page de menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) quand l'ordinateur est en mode DHCP. Exemple de configuration Intel AMT en mode DHCP Paramètres de configuration Intel AMT Valeurs Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Sélectionnez et appuyez sur . Host Name (Nom d'hôte) Exemple : IntelAMT Identique au nom de machine du système d'exploitation.  TCP/IP Définissez les paramètres comme suit :  l Activez Network interface (Interface réseau)  l Activez DHCP Mode (Mode DHCP) l Définissez un nom de domaine (par exemple  amt.intel.com) Enregistrez et quittez MEBx puis redémarrez l'ordinateur avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Exemple de paramètres Intel AMT en mode statique Le tableau ci-dessous donne un exemple de réglages de base des champs pour la page de menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) quand l'ordinateur est en mode statique. L'ordinateur a besoin de deux adresses MAC (adresse MAC et adresse MAC d'administration) pour fonctionner en mode statique. S'il n'y a pas d'adresse MAC d'administration, Intel AMT ne peut pas être défini en mode statique. Enregistrez et quittez MEBx puis redémarrez l'ordinateur avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Paramètres par défaut MEBx Le tableau ci-dessous donne la liste de tous les paramètres par défaut de l'extension Intel® MEBx (Management Engine BIOS). Paramètres par défaut de configuration de plate-forme Intel ME Paramètres de configuration Intel AMT par défaut  Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement) l Intel AMT 2.6 Mode l Small Business (PME) SOL/IDE-R l Activez SOL l Activez IDE-R Remote FW Update (Mise à jour du microcode à  distance) Enabled (Activé) Exemple de configuration Intel AMT en mode statique Paramètres de configuration Intel AMT Valeurs Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Sélectionnez et appuyez sur . Host Name (Nom d'hôte) Exemple : IntelAMT TCP/IP Définissez les paramètres comme suit :  l Activez Network interface (Interface réseau)  l Désactivez DHCP Mode (Mode DHCP) l Définissez une adresse IP (par exemple 192.168.0.15)  l Définissez un masque de sous-réseau (par exemple  255.255.255.0) l L'adresse de passerelle par défaut est facultative  l L'adresse de DNS primaire est facultative l L'adresse de DNS secondaire est facultative l Définissez le nom de domaine (par exemple amt.intel.com)  Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement) l Intel AMT 2.6 Mode l Small Business (PME) SOL/IDE-R l Activez SOL l Activez IDE-R Remote FW Update (Mise à jour du microcode à  distance) Enabled (Activé) Mot de passe admin Intel ME Platform State Control (Contrôle d'état de plate-forme Intel ME)1 Enabled (Activé)* Disabled (Désactivé) Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale de microcode  Intel ME) Enabled (Activé) Disabled (Désactivé)* Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctionnalités Intel ME)      Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité  d'administration) None (Aucune) Intel AMT * ASF Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation Intel ME)      Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME activé dans les états de  mise en veille) Mobile : ON en S0* Mobile : ON en S0, S3/AC Mobile : ON en S0, S3/AC, S4-5/AC Mobile : ON en S0 ; ME WoL en S3/AC Mobile : ON en S0 ; ME WoL en S3/AC, S4-5/AC Host Name (Nom d'hôte) TCP/IP      Disable Network Interface? (Interface réseau désactivée) N      DHCP Enabled. Disable? (DHCP activé. Désactiver ?) N      Domain Name (Nom de domaine) vide2 Provisioning Server (Approvisionnement du serveur)      Provisioning Server Address (Adresse du serveur  d'approvisionnement) 0.0.0.0      Port Number (0-65535) (Numéro du port) 0 Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement)*Paramètre par défaut **Peut causer un approvisionnement Intel AMT partiel 1  Intel ME Platform State Control n'est modifié que pour dépannage du moteur ME (Management Engine). 2 En mode entreprise, DHCP charge automatiquement le nom de domaine. 3 L'option Un-provision n'apparaît que si la valeur est approvisionnée. Retour à la page Contenu      AMT 2.6 Mode N Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS)**      Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS)** PPS Format: 1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD Un-Provision (Désapprovisionnement)3 SOL/IDE-R      Username & Password (Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe) Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé)*      Serial Over LAN (Redirection série SOL) Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé)*      IDE Redirection (Redirection IDE) Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé)* Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour du microcode sécurisée) Disabled (Désactivé) Enabled (Activé)* Set PRTC (Définir PRTC) vide Idle Timeout (Délai d'attente d'inactivité)      Timeout Value (0x0-0xFFFF) (Valeur de délai d'attente) 1Retour à la page Contenu A propos de la technologie Intel® Active Management Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Intel® Active Management Technology (Intel AMT ou iAMT®) permet aux entreprises d'administrer facilement leurs ordinateurs en réseau. Les administrateurs  informatiques peuvent : l Découvrir les actifs informatiques sur un réseau que l'ordinateur soit allumé ou éteint – Intel AMT utilise les informations enregistrées en mémoire non  volatile pour accéder à l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur est même accessible quant il est éteint (cet accès est aussi appelé hors bande ou OOB : out-of-band). l Réparer à distance des ordinateurs même après panne du système d'exploitation – En cas de panne d'un logiciel ou du système d'exploitation, Intel  AMT permet d'accéder à distance à l'ordinateur pour le réparer. Les administrateurs informatiques peuvent aussi détecter facilement les problèmes sur  les ordinateurs grâce aux fonctions de journalisation d'événements et d'alerte hors bande de Intel AMT.  l Protéger les réseaux contre les menaces entrantes tout en assurant facilement une mise à jour des logiciels et protection contre les virus sur tout le  réseau.  Assistance logicielle Plusieurs fournisseurs indépendants de logiciels ou ISV (independent software vendors) ont conçu des produits capables de travailler avec les fonctionnalités  de Intel AMT. Ceci offre aux administrateurs informatiques beaucoup de choix pour l'administration à distance des actifs informatiques en réseau de leur  société. Caractéristiques et avantages L'extension Intel® Management Engine BIOS (MEBx) est un module ROM en option fourni à Dell par Intel et inclus dans le BIOS Dell. L'extension MEBx a été  personnalisée pour les ordinateurs Dell.  Retour à la page Contenu Intel AMT Fonctions Avantages Accès hors bande (OOB) Permet d'administrer les plates-formes à distance quel que soit leur état d'alimentation ou de système  d'exploitation Dépannage et récupération à distance Réduit notablement les visites sur place, pour augmenter l'efficacité des équipes techniques informatiques Alerte proactive Réduit l'indisponibilité et les temps de réparation Suivi à distance des actifs matériels et  logiciels Meilleure vitesse et précision que le suivi manuel d'inventaire, réduit les coûts de comptabilisation d'actifs Stockage non volatil tiers Meilleure vitesse et précision que le suivi manuel d'inventaire, réduit le coût de comptabilisation d'actifsRetour à la page Contenu Redirection des communications série et IDE Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Intel® AMT permet de rediriger les communications série et IDE depuis un client administré vers une console d'administration quel que soit l'état de démarrage  et d'alimentation du client administré. Le client n'a à disposer que de capacités Intel AMT, d'une connexion à une source d'alimentation et d'une connexion  réseau. Intel AMT est compatible avec les types de redirection SOL (Serial Over LAN, pour la redirection de texte et clavier) et IDE (IDER, redirection CD-ROM) de périphériques IDE sur TCP/IP. Vue générale de SOL (Serial Over LAN) La capacité SOL (Serial Over LAN) permet d'émuler des communications par port série sur une connexion réseau standard. SOL est utilisable pour la plupart  des applications d'administration qui exigent normalement une connexion par un port série local. Quand une session SOL active est établie entre un client activé Intel AMT et une console d'administration utilisant la bibliothèque de redirection Intel AMT, le  trafic série du client est redirigé par Intel AMT sur la connexion réseau et rendu disponible sur la console d'administration. De même, la console  d'administration peut envoyer des données série sur la connexion réseau, qui semble être passées par le port série du client. Vue générale de la redirection IDE La redirection IDE (IDER) permet d'émuler un lecteur de CD IDE ou un lecteur de disquette ou LS-120 ancien sur une connexion réseau standard. IDER permet  à la machine d'administration d'associer un de ses lecteurs locaux à un client administré sur le réseau. Dès qu'une session IDER est établie, le client administré  peut utiliser le périphérique distant comme s'il était relié directement à un de ses canaux IDE. Ceci peut être utile pour démarrer à distance un ordinateur qui  ne démarre pas autrement. IDER n'est pas compatible avec le format DVD. IDER peut par exemple être utilisé pour démarrer un client dont le système d'exploitation est endommagé. Il faut d'abord charger un disque d'amorçage valide  dans un lecteur de la console d'administration. Ce lecteur est ensuite transmis comme argument lors de l'ouverture de la session TCP IDER par la console d'administration. Intel AMT enregistre le périphérique comme périphérique IDE virtuel sur le client, quel que soit son état d'alimentation ou de démarrage. Les  deux protocoles SOL et IDER peuvent être utilisés ensemble puisque le BIOS du client peut nécessiter une configuration pour démarrer depuis le périphérique  IDE virtuel. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Présentation de l'installation et de la configuration Intel® AMT Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Termes Etat d'installation et de configuration Termes Voici une liste des termes importants associés à l'installation et à la configuration Intel® AMT : l Installation et configuration – Procédure de fourniture aux ordinateurs gérés par Intel AMT de noms d'utilisateur, mots de passe et paramètres réseau  permettant l'administration à distance de l'ordinateur.  l Approvisionnement – Installation et configuration complètes de Intel AMT.  l Service de configuration – Application tierse assurant l'approvisionnement de Intel AMT en mode opérationnel pour l'entreprise.  l Interface WebGUI Intel AMT – Interface basée sur un navigateur web permettant une administration à distance limitée de l'ordinateur.  l Modes de fonctionnement – Intel® AMT peut être installé pour utilisation en deux modes (aussi appelés modèles d'approvisionnement) : Mode entreprise (pour les grandes organisations) ou Small and Medium Business (mode pour petites et moyennes entreprises ou SMB). Le mode entreprise impose l'approvisionnement par un service de configuration ; le mode SMB est installé manuellement, ne nécessite pas autant d'infrastructures et  assure l'approvisionnement par l'extension Intel ME BIOS (MEBx). l Mode entreprise – Quand Intel AMT est installé en mode entreprise, il est prêt à démarrer la configuration de ses propres capacités. Quand tous les  éléments réseau nécessaires sont réunis, il suffit de brancher l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation et au réseau, et Intel AMT démarre  automatiquement sa propre configuration. Le service de configuration (application tierse) termine la procédure pour vous. Intel AMT est ensuite prêt  pour l'administration à distance. Cette configuration ne prend le plus souvent que quelques secondes. Quand Intel AMT est installé et configuré, vous  pouvez reconfigurer la technologie en fonction des besoins de votre environnement professionnel. l Mode SMB – Quand Intel AMT est installé an mode SMB, l'ordinateur n'a pas à initier de configuration sur le réseau. Il est installé manuellement et prêt  à utiliser avec l'interface WebGUI Intel AMT.  Vous devez installer et configurer Intel AMT dans un ordinateur avant de l'utiliser. L'installation de Intel AMT prépare l'ordinateur pour le mode Intel AMT et  active la connexion au réseau. Cette installation n'est généralement effectuée qu'une seule fois au cours de la vie d'un ordinateur. Quand Intel AMT est activé,  il peut être découvert par le logiciel d'administration sur un réseau. Etat d'installation et de configuration Un ordinateur doté de capacités Intel AMT peut être dans un des trois états d'installation et configuration : l Etat par défaut d'usine – L'état par défaut d'usine est un état totalement non configuré pour lequel les pièces justificatives de sécurité ne sont pas  encore définies et les capacités Intel AMT ne sont pas encore accessibles aux applications d'administration. Dans l'état par défaut d'usine, Intel AMT a  les paramètres définis en usine.  l Etat installé – L'état installé est un état partiellement configuré où Intel AMT a été installé avec des informations initiales de configuration réseau au  niveau de la couche sécurité de transport (TLS) : un mot de passe d'administrateur initial, la chaîne de mots de passe d'approvisionnement ou PPS  (provisioning passphrase) et l'identifiant de provisionnement ou PID (provisioning identifier). Quand Intel AMT a été installé, il est prêt à recevoir les  paramètres de configuration du mode entreprise depuis un service de configuration. l Etat approvisionné – L'état approvisionné est un état totalement configuré où le moteur Intel ME (Management Engine) a été configuré avec les options  d'alimentation et Intel AMT a été configuré avec les paramètres de sécurité, certificats et paramètres d'activiation des capacités de Intel AMT. Quand  Intel AMT a été configuré, ses fonctionnalités sont prêtes à interagir avec les applications d'administration.  Méthodes d'achèvement de la procédure d'approvisionnement L'ordinateur doit être configuré pour que les fonctionnalités de Intel AMT puissent interagir avec les applications d'administration. Il y a deux méthodes  d'achèvement de la procédure d'approvisionnement (de la moins complexe à la plus complexe) : l Service de configuration – Un service de configuration permet d'achever la procédure d'approvisionnement depuis une console graphique sur le  serveur en une seule opération sur chacun des ordinateurs disposant de capacité Intel AMT. Les champs PPS et PID sont remplis à partir d'un fichier  créé par le service de configuration et enregistré sur un périphérique USB.  l Interface MEBx – L'administrateur réseau configure manuellement les paramètres de l'extension MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) sur  chaque ordinateur disposant de capacités Intel AMT. Les champs PPS et PID sont remplis en tapant les clés sur 32 caractères et 8 caractères  alphanumériques créées par le service de configuration dans l'interface MEBx.  Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Approvisionnement : Achèvement de la procédure d'installation et  configuration Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Utilisation d'un service de configuration pour terminer l'approvisionnement Utilisation de l'interface MEBx pour terminer l'approvisionnement L'ordinateur doit être configuré pour que les fonctionnalités de Intel® AMT puissent interagir avec les applications d'administration. Il existe deux méthodes  d'achèvement de la procédure d'approvisionnement (de la moins complexe à la plus complexe) : l Service de configuration – Un service de configuration permet d'achever la procédure d'approvisionnement depuis une console graphique sur le  serveur en une seule opération sur chacun des ordinateurs disposant de capacités Intel AMT. Les champs PPS et PID sont remplis à partir d'un fichier  créé par le service de configuration et enregistré sur un périphérique de stockage de masse USB.  l Interface MEBx – L'administrateur réseau configure manuellement les paramètres de l'extension MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) sur  chaque ordinateur disposant de capacités Intel AMT. Les champs PPS et PID sont remplis en tapant les clés sur 32 caractères et 8 caractères  alphanumériques créées par le service de configuration dans l'interface MEBx.  Utilisation d'un service de configuration pour terminer l'approvisionnement Utilisation d'un périphérique de stockage USB Cette section traite de l'installation et de la configuration de Intel® AMT à l'aide d'un périphérique de stockage USB. Vous pouvez installer et configurer  localement le mot de passe, l'ID de provisionnement (PID) et la phrase de mot de passe de provisionnement (PPS) avec une clé lecteur USB. Cette méthode  est appelée Approvisionnement USB. L'approvisionnement USB permet d'installer et configurer manuellement des ordinateurs sans les problèmes associés à la  saisie manuelle des entrées. L'approvisionnement USB ne peut fonctionner que si le mot de passe MEBx a la valeur d'usine par défaut admin. Si le mot de passe a été modifié, réinitialisezle à la valeur par défaut d'usine en effaçant la mémoire CMOS. Pour des instructions, voir «Programme de configuration du système» dans le Guide de l'utilisateur de votre ordinateur. Voici une procédure courante d'installation et configuration depuis un périphérique de stockage de masse USB. Pour une explication pas à pas avec le client  Altiris® DCM (Dell™ Client Manager), voir Configuration de Intel AMT avec l'application d'administration client Dell. 1. Un technicien informatique insère une clé lecteur USB dans un ordinateur disposant d'une console d'administration.  2. Le technicien demande les enregistrements d'installation et configuration aupèrs d'un serveur SCS (setup and configuration server) par la console.  3. Le serveur SCS effectue les opérations suivantes :  ¡ Génère les jeux de mots de passe, PID et PPS appropriés  n Enregistre ces informations dans sa base de données  n Renvoie les informations à la console d'administration  4. La console d'administration écrit les ensembles de mots de passe, PID et PPS dans un fichier setup.bin sur la clé USB.  5. Le technicien emporte la clé USB sur le site de mise en place où se trouvent les ordinateurs disposant de capacités Intel AMT. Le technicien effectue  ensuite les opérations suivantes :  ¡ Si nécessaire, déballe et branche les ordinateurs  ¡ Insère la clé USB dans un ordinateur  ¡ Allume cet ordinateur 6. Le BIOS de l'ordinateur détecte la clé USB.  ¡ S'il détecte une clé, le BIOS recherche un fichier setup.bin au début de la clé. Passez à l'étape 7.  ¡ Si aucune clé USB ou fichier setup.bin n'a pu être trouvé, redémarrez l'ordinateur. Ignorez les étapes suivantes.  7. Le BIOS de l'ordinateur affiche un message signalant qu'une installation et configuration automatique va se produire. ¡ Le premier enregistrement disponible dans le fichier setup.bin est lu en mémoire. La procédure effectue les étapes suivantes :  n Valide l'enregistrement d'en-tête de fichier  n Trouve l'enregistrement disponible suivant n Si la procédure est réussie, l'enregistrement en cours est dévalidé pour interdire sa réutilisation  ¡ La procédure place l'adresse mémoire dans le bloc de paramètre MEBx.  ¡ La procédure appelle MEBx.  8. L'extension MEBx traite l'enregistrement. 9. L'extension MEBx affiche un message d'achèvement à l'écran.  10. Le technicien informatique éteint l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur est maintenant dans l'état installé et prêt à être distribué aux utilisateurs dans un  environnement en mode entreprise. 11. Répétez l'étape 5 s'il y a plus d'un ordinateur.  Consultez le fournisseur de la console d'administration pour plus d'informations sur l'installation et la configuration de la clé USB. Exigences sur la clé périphérique de stockage de masse USB La clé de stockage USB doit répondre aux exigences ci-dessous pour permettre l'installation et la configuration de Intel AMT : l Elle doit avoir une capacité supérieure à 16 Mo.  l Elle doit être formatée avec le système de fichier FAT16.  l La taille de secteur doit être 1 Ko.  l Le lecteur USB ne doit pas être amorçable.  l Le fichier setup.bin doit être le premier fichier accessible sur le lecteur USB. La clé USB ne doit contenir aucun autre fichier qu'il soit masqué, supprimé ou  autre. Configuration de Intel AMT avec l'application d'administration client Dell L'ensemble de console par défaut fourni est l'application DCM (Dell™ Client Management). Cette section donne une procédure d'installation et configuration de  Intel® AMT avec l'ensemble DCM. Comme mentionné précédement dans ce document, bien d'autres produits sont disponibles auprès d'autres fournisseurs.L'ordinateur doit être configuré et vu par le serveur DNS avant de démarrer cette procédure. Un périphérique de stockage USB est aussi indispensable et doit  être conforme aux exigences mentionnées ci-dessus. La nature du logiciel d'administration fait qu'il n'est pas toujours dymanique ou en temps réel. En fait, parfois si vous demandez à un ordinateur de faire  quelque chose, par exemple un redémarrage, vous devrez peut-être redémarrer à nouveau pour obtenir satisfaction.  Installation et configuration à l'aide d'un périphérique de stockage USB  1. Formatez un périphérique USB avec le système de fichier FAT16 sans nom de volume et mettez-le de côté.  2. Ouvrez l'application Altiris® Dell Client Manager par un double-clic sur l'icône du bureau ou par le menu Démarrer.  3. Sélectionnez AMT Quick Start (Démarrage rapide AMT) sur le menu de navigation à gauche pour ouvrir la console Altiris.  4. Cliquez sur le plus (+) pour développer la section Intel AMT Getting Started (Mise en route Intel AMT). 5. Cliquez sur le plus (+) pour développer la section Section 1. Provisioning (Section 1. Approvisionnement). 6. Cliquez sur le plus (+) pour développer la section Basic Provisioning (without TLS) [Approvisionnement de base (sans TLS)]. 7. Sélectionnez Step 1. Configure DNS (Etape 1. Configurer DNS). Le serveur de notification disposant d'une solution d'administration hors bande installé doit être enregistré auprès du serveur DNS comme «ProvisionServer». 8. Cliquez sur Test sur l'écran DNS Configuration (Configuration DNS) pour vérifier qu'il existe bien une entrée DNS ProvisionServer et qu'elle se résout en  l'adresse correcte du serveur d'installation et configuration Intel (SCS). L'adresse IP de ProvisionServer et Intel SCS sont maintenant visibles. 9. Sélectionnez Step 2. Discovery Capabilities (Etape 2. Capacités de découverte). 10. Vérifiez que la valeur est bien Enabled (Activé). Si elle affiche Disabled (Désactivé), cochez la case près de Disabled (Désactivé) et cliquez sur Apply (Appliquer). 11. Sélectionnez Step 3. View Intel AMT Capable Computers (Etape 3. Afficher les ordinateurs avec capacités Intel AMT). Tous les ordinateurs disposant de capacités Intel AMT sur le réseau apparaissent dans cette liste. 12. Sélectionnez Step 4. Create Profile (Etape 4. Créer un profil). 13. Cliquez sur le plus (+) pour ajouter un profil. 14. Sur l'onglet General (Général), l'administrateur peut modifier le nom de profil, la description et le mot de passe. L'administrateur définit un mot de passe  standard pour faciliter la maintenance à l'avenir. Sélectionnez le bouton radio manual (Manuel) et entrez un nouveau mot de passe. 15. L'onglet Network (Résseau) offre l'option d'activer la redirection des réponses aux ping, VLAN, WebUI, Serial over LAN (Mode série sur réseau) et IDE. Si  vous configurez manuellement Intel AMT, tous ces paramètres sont aussi disponibles dans l'extension MEBx.  16. L'onglet TLS (Transport Layer Security) offre la possibilité d'activer TLS. Si ce protocole est activé, d'autres informations sont nécessaires, notamment le  nom du serveur d'autorité de certification (CA), le nom usuel de l'autorité de certification, le type d'autorité de certification et le modèle de certificat.  17. L'onglet ACL (access control list) permet de consulter les utilisateurs déjà associés à ce profil comme d'ajouter des utilisateurs et de définir leurs droits  d'accès. 18. L'onglet Power Policy (Gestion d'alimentation) dispose d'options de configuration permettant de sélectionner les états de veille de Intel AMT et un  réglage Idle Timeout (Délai d'attente d'inactivité). Il est recommandé d'utiliser un délai d'attente Idle timeout toujours égal à 1 pour des performances optimales. 19. Sélectionnez Step 5. Generate Security Keys (Etape 5. Générer des clés de sécurité). 20. Sélectionnez l'icône dont la flèche pointe vers l'extérieur sur Export Security Keys to USB Key (Exporter les clés de sécurité sur la clé USB).  21. Sélectionnez le bouton radio Generate keys before export (Générer les clés avant exportation). 22. Entrez le nombre de clés à générer (dépend du nombre d'ordinateurs à approvisionner). La valeur par défaut est 50.  23. Le mot de passe Intel ME par défaut est admin. Configurez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME pour l'environnement. 24. Cliquez sur Generate (Générer). Quand les clés ont été créées, un lien apparaît à gauche du bouton Generate (Générer).  25. Insérez le périphérique USB formaté précédemment dans un connecteur du serveur ProvisioningServer.  26. Cliquez sur le lien Download USB key file (Télécharger le fichier sur la clé USB) pour télécharger le fichier setup.bin vers le périphérique USB. Le  périphérique USB est reconnu par défaut ; enregistrez le fichier sur le périphérique USB.  Si d'autres clés sont nécessaires à l'avenir, le périphérique USB doit être reformaté avant d'enregistrer le fichier setup.bin dessus. a. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) dans la boîte de dialogue File Download (Télécharger fichier).  b. Vérifiez que l'emplacement Save in: (Enregistrer dans) est bien dirigé vers le périphérique USB. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer). c. Cliquez sur Close (Fermer) dans la boîte de dialogue Download complete (Téléchargement terminé).  Le fichier setup.bin est maintenant visible dans la fenêtre de l'explorateur. 27. Fermez les fenêtres de l'explorateur et Export Security Keys to USB Key (Exporter les clés de sécurité de la clé USB) pour revenir à la console Altiris.  28. Emportez le périphérique USB vers l'ordinateur, insérez le périphérique et allumez l'ordinateur. Le périphérique USB est reconnu immédiatement et le  message ci-dessous apparaît :  Continue with Auto Provisioning (Y/N) (continuer avec l'approvisionnement auto, (O/N)) 29. Appuyez sur . 30. Press any key to continue with system boot... (Appuyez sur une touche pour poursuivre le démarrage du système...) 31. Après achèvement de l'opération, éteignez l'ordinateur et revenez au serveur d'administration.  32. Sélectionnez Step 6. Configure Automatic Profile Assignments (Etape 6. Configurer automatiquement l'affectation de profils). 33. Vérifiez que le réglage est activé. Dans la liste déroulante Intel AMT 2.0+, sélectionnez le profil créé précédemment. Configurez les autres paramètres  pour l'environnement. 34. Sélectionnez Step 7. Monitor Provisioning Process (Etape 7. Surveiller le processus d'approvisionnement). Les ordinateurs auxquels les clés seront appliquées commencent à apparaître dans la liste des systèmes. Au départ leur état est Unprovisioned (Non approvisionné), puis il passe à In provisioning (En cours d'approvisionnement), puis finalement passe à Provisioned (Approvisionné) à la fin de la procédure.35. Sélectionnez Step 8. Monitor Profile Assignments (Etape 8. Suivi d'affectation de profils). Les ordinateurs auxquels des profils ont été affectés apparaissent dans la liste. Chaque ordinateur est identifié par les colonnes FQDN, UUID et Profile Name (Nom de profil).Quand les ordinateurs sont approvisionnés, ils deviennent visibles dans le dossier Collections dans All configured Intel AMT computers (Tous les ordinateurs configurés Intel AMT). Utilisation de l'interface MEBx pour terminer l'approvisionnement Intel® AMT peut être installé dans les modes de fonctionnement (aussi appelés modèles d'approvisionnement) entreprise ou petite et moyenne entreprise  (SMB). Les deux modes de fonctionnement autorisent les réseaux à attribution dynamique ou statique d'adresses IP. Si vous utilisez des adresses IP dynamiques (DHCP), le nom d'hôte Intel AMT doit correspondre au nom d'hôte du système d'exploitation. Vous devez aussi  configurer à la fois le système d'exploitation et Intel AMT pour utiliser DHCP. Si vous utilisez des adresses IP statiques, l'adresse IP Intel AMT doit être différente de l'adresse IP du système d'exploitation. De plus, le nom d'hôte Intel AMT  doit être différent du nom d'hôte du système d'exploitation. l Mode entreprise – Ce mode convient aux grandes organisations. C'est un réseau avancé assurant la prise en charge de la sécurité TLS (Transport  Layer Security) qui nécessite un service de configuration. Le mode entreprise permet aux administrateurs informatiques d'installer et configurer Intel  AMT de façon sécurisée pour l'administration à distance. L'ordinateur Dell™ est par défaut en mode entreprise quand il quitte l'usine. Ce mode est  modifiable par la procédure d'installation et configuration.  l Mode petite et moyenne entreprise SMB (Small Medium Business) – Ce mode de fonctionnement simplifié n'assure pas la prise en charge de TLS et  n'impose pas d'application d'installation. Le mode SMB convient aux clients qui utilisent des consoles d'administration d'éditeurs de logiciel indépendants  (ISV) ou qui disposent des architectures réseau et de sécurité nécessaires pour assurer le chiffrement TLS. En mode SMB, l'installation et la  configuration de Intel AMT est une procédure manuelle effectuée par l'extension Intel MEBx (ME BIOS). Ce mode est le plus facile à mettre en  uvre car il a peu d'exigences d'infrastructure, mais le moins sécurisé car tout le trafic réseau n'est pas chiffré. La configuration Intel AMT installe les autres options Intel AMT non couvertes par l'installation de Intel AMT, par exemple l'activation d'un ordinateur pour la redirection des ports série SOL (Serial-Over-LAN) ou IDE-R (IDE-Redirect). Vous pouvez modifier plusieurs fois les paramètres modifiés dans la phase de configuration au cours de la vie d'un ordinateur. Ces modifications peuvent être  apportées à l'ordinateur localement ou par une console d'administration. Méthodes d'approvisionnement en mode entreprise Il existe deux méthodes d'approvisionnement d'un ordinateur en mode entreprise : l Legacy (hérité)  l IT TLS-PSK Legacy (hérité) Si vous voulez utiliser la sécurité TLS (Transport Layer Security), utilisez la méthode legacy (hérité) d'installation et configuration Intel AMT sur un réseau isolé  séparé du réseau d'entreprise. Un serveur d'installation et configuration SCS (setup and configuration server) a besoin d'une connexion réseau secondaire  vers une autorité de certification (entité capable d'émettre des certificats numériques) pour la configuration TLS. Au départ les ordinateurs sont livrés dans l'état par défaut d'usine avec Intel AMT prêt pour approvisionnement et configuration. Ces ordinateurs doivent subir  une installation de Intel AMT pour passer de l'état par défaut d'usine à l'état installé. Quand l'ordinateur est dans l'état installé, vous pouvez poursuivre  manuellement la configuration ou le connecter à un réseau où il se connectera à un serveur SCS pour devenir une configuration Intel AMT en mode entreprise. IT TLS-PSK L'installation et la configuration de Intel AMT en mode IT TLS-PSK s'effectue le plus souvent par le service informatique d'une entreprise. Les éléments suivants  sont nécessaires : l Serveur d'installation et de configuration l Infrastructure réseau et de sécurité  Les ordinateurs disposant de capacités Intel AMT dans l'état par défaut d'usine sont livrés au service informatique, responsable de l'installation et de la  configuration de Intel AMT. Le service informatique peut utiliser toute méthode pour saisir les informations d'installation Intel AMT, suite à quoi les ordinateurs  se trouvent en mode entreprise et dans la phase en cours d'installation. Un serveur SCS doit générer les jeux de PID et PPS. La configuration de Intel AMT doit s'effectuer par un réseau. Le trafic réseau peut être chiffré à l'aide du protocole TLS-PSK (Transport Layer Security PreShared Key). Dès que les ordinateurs se connectent à un serveur SCS, la configuration en mode entreprise peut s'effectuer. Enterprise Mode (Mode entreprise) L'extension Intel® MEBx (Management Engine BIOS) est un module ROM en option fourni à Dell™ par Intel pour inclusion dans le BIOS Dell. L'extension MEBx a  été personnalisée pour les ordinateurs Dell.  Le mode entreprise (pour les clients grands comptes) nécessite un serveur d'installation et de configuration SCS (setup and configuration server). Un serveur  SCS charge une application sur un réseau permettant d'effectuer l'installation et la configuration de Intel AMT. Le serveur SCS est aussi appelé serveur  d'approvisionnement vu depuis l'extension MEBx. Un serveur SCS est le plus souvent fourni par un éditeur de logiciel indépendant ou ISV (independent  software vendor) et intégré dans un produit de console d'administration de cet éditeur. Consultez le fournisseur de la console d'administration pour plus  d'informations. Pour installer et configurer un ordinateur en mode entreprise, vous devez activer le moteur d'administration pour le mode entreprise et configurer Intel AMT en mode entreprise. Pour des instructions, voir Configuration ME : Activation du moteur d'administration pour le mode entreprise et Configuration AMT : Activation de Intel AMT pour le mode entreprise. Configuration ME : Activation du moteur d'administration pour le mode entreprise Pour activer les paramètres de configuration Intel ME sur la plate-forme cible, procédez comme suit : 1. Allumez l'ordinateur et pendant la procédure de démarrage, appuyez sur 

 quand l'écran du logo Dell apparaît pour entrer dans l'application  MEBx. 2. Tapez admin dans le champ Intel ME Password (Mot de passe Intel ME). Appuyez sur . Les mots de passe font la distinction entre majuscules  et minuscules. Vous devez modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant de pouvoir modifier les options de MEBx. 3. Sélectionnez Change Intel ME Password (Changer le mot de passe Intel ME). Appuyez sur . Tapez le nouveau mot de passe deux fois pour  vérification.  Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants : l Huit caractères  l Une lettre en majuscule l Une lettre en minuscule l Un nombre l Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), tel que !, $ ou ;, à l'exception des caractères :, " et ,.  Le tiret de soulignement ( _ ) et l'espace sont des caractères de mot de passe valides mais n'ajoute RIEN à la complexité du mot de passe.  Changez le mot de passe pour définir la propriété Intel AMT. L'ordinateur passe de l'état par défaut d'usine à l'état installé. 4. Sélectionnez Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME). Appuyez sur .  L'option ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de plate-forme ME) permet aussi de configurer des fonctions du moteur d'administration telles que les options d'alimentation, capacités de mise à jour de microcode, etc.5. Le message suivant s'affiche : System resets after configuration change. Continue (Y/N) (Réinitialisation du système après changement de configuration. Continuer :  (O/N)) Appuyez sur . 6. L'option suivante est Intel ME State Control (Contrôle d'état Intel ME). La valeur par défaut de cette option est Enabled (Activé). Ne modifiez pas ce  paramètre en Disabled (Désactivé). Pour désactiver Intel AMT, passez l'option Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité  d'administration) à None (Aucun). 7. Sélectionnez Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale de microcode Intel ME). Appuyez sur .  8. Sélectionnez Always Open (Toujours ouvert). Appuyez sur . La valeur par défaut de cette option est Disabled (Désactivé).  9. Sélectionnez Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctionnalités Intel ME). Appuyez sur . 10. L'option suivante est Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité d'administration). Cette fonction définit le mode d'administration de  la plate-forme. La valeur par défaut est Intel AMT. La sélection de l'option None (Aucune) désactive toutes les capacités d'administration à distance. 11. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur . 12. Sélectionnez Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation Intel ME). Appuyez sur .  13. L'option suivante est Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME activé dans les états de mise en veille). Le paramètre par défaut est Mobile: ON in S0. 14. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur .  15. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur .  16. Quittez l'installation MEBx et enregistrez la configuration ME. L'ordinateur affiche le message Intel ME Configuration Complete (Configuration Intel ME terminée) et redémarre. Après l'achèvement de la configuration ME, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres Intel AMT. Pour des instructions, voir  Configuration Intel AMT : Activation de Intel AMT pour le mode entreprise. Configuration Intel AMT : Activation de Intel AMT pour le mode entreprise Pour activer les paramètres de configuration Intel AMT sur la plate-forme cible, procédez comme suit :  1. Allumez l'ordinateur et pendant la procédure de démarrage, appuyez sur 

 quand l'écran du logo Dell apparaît pour entrer dans l'application  MEBx. 2. Une invite de mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME.  3. Sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT). Appuyez sur . 4. Sélectionnez Host Name (Nom d'hôte). Appuyez sur . Tapez un nom unique pour cette machine Intel AMT. Appuyez sur .  Les espaces ne sont pas acceptés dans le nom d'hôte. Vérifiez qu'il n'existe pas de nom d'hôte en double sur le réseau. Les noms d'hôte peuvent être utilisés  à la place de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur pour toute application attendant une adresse IP.  5. Sélectionnez TCP/IP. Appuyez sur .  Les messages suivant apparaissent : l Disable Network Interface: (Y/N) (Désactiver l'interface réseau : (O/N))  Appuyez sur . Si le réseau est désactivé, toutes les autres capacités AMT à distance sont désactivées et les paramètres TCP/IP ne sont pas nécessaires. Cette option  est une bascule, lors du prochain accès vous serez invité à effectuer l'action contraire.l [DHCP Enable] Disable DHCP (Y/N) ([Activation DHCP] Désactiver DHCP (O/N))  Appuyez sur . l Domain Name (Nom de domaine) Tapez le nom de domaine dans le champ.6. Sélectionnez Provision Server (Serveur d'approvisionnement) sur le menu. Appuyez sur .  7. Tapez l'adresse IP du serveur d'approvisionnement dans le champ Provisioning server address et appuyez sur .8. Tapez le numéro de port dans le champ Port number et appuyez sur .  Le message suivant s'affiche : l [Intel (R) AMT 2.6 Mode] [Enterprise] change to Small Business: (Y/N) ([Entreprise] passer en mode PME O/N) Appuyez sur . 9. L'option suivante est Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS). Les valeurs PID et PPS peuvent être saisies manuellement ou à l'aide d'une clé USB quand  le serveur SCS génère les codes.  Cette option permet de saisir l'ID d'approvisionnement ou PID (provisioning ID) et la phrase de mot de passe d'approvisionnement PPS (provisioning passphrase). Les PID sont sur huit caractères et les PPS sur 32 caractères. Il y a des tirets entre chaque ensemble de quatre caractères, donc si on compte  les tirets, les chaînes de PID ont neuf caractères en tout et les chaînes de PPS 40 caractères. Un serveur SCS doit générer ces entrées. REMARQUE : La valeur par défaut est 0.0.0.0. Cette valeur par défaut ne fonctionne que si le serveur DNS dispose d'une entrée permettant de  résoudre le nom du serveur d'approvisionnement technique en l'adresse IP de ce serveur d'approvisionnement.  REMARQUE : La valeur par défaut 0. Si la valeur par défaut 0 est conservée, AMT tente de prendre contact avec le serveur d'approvisionnement sur le  port 9971. Si le serveur d'approvisionnement écoute sur un port différent, vous devez le saisir ici. 10. Sélectionnez SOL/IDE-R. Appuyez sur .  11. Le message ci-dessous apparaît et nécessite la réponse indiquée dans la liste ci-dessous : l [Caution] System resets after configuration changes. Continue: (Y/N) ([Attention] Réinitialisation du système après changement de  configuration. Continuer : (O/N))  Appuyez sur .l User name & Password (nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe) ¡ Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) et appuyez sur .  Cette option permet d'ajouter des utilisateurs et mots de passe depuis l'interface WebGUI. Si l'option est désactivée, seul l'administrateur a accès à  distance à l'extension MEBx. l Serial Over LAN (Mode série sur réseau)  Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) et appuyez sur . l IDE Redirection Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) et appuyez sur . 12. L'option suivante est Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour du microcode sécurisée). La valeur par défaut est Enabled (Activé). 13. Passez l'option Set PRTC (Définir PRTC).  14. L'option suivante est Idle Timeout (Délai d'attente d'inactivité). La valeur par défaut est 1. Ce délai d'attente n'est applicable que quand une option  d'éveil réseau WoL est sélectionnée dans l'étape 13 de la procédure pour activer ME pour le mode de fonctionnement d'entreprise.  le paramètre doit être utilisé dans l'étape 13.15. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur .  16. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter). Appuyez sur . 17. Le message suivant s'affiche : Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): (Etes-vous sûr de vouloir quitter ? (O/N))  Appuyez sur . 18. L'ordinateur redémarre. Eteignez l'ordinateur et débranchez le câble d'alimentation. L'ordinateur est maintenant dans l'état installé et prêt pour le  deploiement. L'extension Intel Mode petite et moyenne entreprise SMB ® MEBx (Management Engine BIOS) est un module ROM en option fourni à Dell™ par Intel pour inclusion dans le BIOS Dell. L'extension MEBx a  été personnalisée pour les ordinateurs Dell™.  Dell assure aussi la prise en charge de l'installation et de la configuration de Intel AMT dans le mode SMB (Small and Medium Business). Le seul paramètre non  obligatoire en mode SMB est l'option Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS). L'option Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement) a aussi la valeur Small Business plutôt que Enterprise. Pour installer et configurer un ordinateur en mode SMB, vous devez activer le moteur d'administration pour le mode SMB et configurer Intel AMT en mode SMB. Pour des instructions, voir Configuration ME : Activation du moteur d'administration pour le mode SMB et Configuration Intel AMT : Activation de Intel AMT pour le mode SMB. Configuration ME : Activation du moteur d'administration pour le mode SMB Pour activer les paramètres de configuration Intel ME sur la plate-forme cible, procédez comme suit :1. Allumez l'ordinateur et pendant la procédure de démarrage, appuyez sur 

 quand l'écran du logo Dell apparaît pour entrer dans l'application  MEBx. 2. Tapez admin dans le champ Intel ME Password (Mot de passe Intel ME). Appuyez sur .  Les mots de passe font la distinction entre majuscules et minuscules. Vous devez modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant de pouvoir modifier les options de  MEBx. 3. Sélectionnez Change Intel ME Password (Changer le mot de passe Intel ME). Appuyez sur . Tapez le nouveau mot de passe deux fois pour  vérification.  Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants : l Huit caractères  l Une lettre en majuscule l Une lettre en minuscule l Un nombre l Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), tel que !, $ ou ;, à l'exception des caractères :, " et ,.  Le tiret de soulignement ( _ ) et l'espace sont des caractères de mot de passe valides mais n'ajoute RIEN à la complexité du mot de passe.  Changez le mot de passe pour définir la propriété Intel AMT. L'ordinateur passe de l'état par défaut d'usine à l'état installé. 4. Sélectionnez Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME). Appuyez sur . L'option ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de plate-forme ME) permet aussi de configurer des fonctions du moteur d'administration telles que les options d'alimentation, capacités de mise à jour de microcode, etc. 5. Le message suivant s'affiche : System resets after configuration change. Continue (Y/N) (Réinitialisation du système après changement de configuration. Continuer : (O/N)) Appuyez sur . 6. L'option suivante est Intel ME State Control (Contrôle d'état Intel ME). La valeur par défaut de cette option est Enabled (Activé). Ne modifiez pas ce  paramètre en Disabled (Désactivé). Pour désactiver Intel AMT, passez l'option Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité  d'administration) à None (Aucune). 7. Sélectionnez Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale de microcode Intel ME). Appuyez sur .  8. Sélectionnez Disabled (Désactivé). Appuyez sur . La valeur par défaut de cette option est Disabled (Désactivé).  9. Sélectionnez Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctionnalités Intel ME). Appuyez sur . 10. L'option suivante est Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de fonctionnalité d'administration). Cette fonction définit le mode d'administration de  la plate-forme. La valeur par défaut est Intel AMT. La sélection de l'option None (Aucune) désactive toutes les capacités d'administration à distance.  11. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur . 12. Sélectionnez Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle d'alimentation Intel ME). Appuyez sur .  13. L'option suivante est Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME activé dans les états de mise en veille). Le paramètre par défaut est Mobile: ON in S0. 14. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur .  15. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur .  16. Quittez l'installation MEBx et enregistrez la configuration ME. L'ordinateur affiche le message Intel ME Configuration Complete (Configuration Intel ME terminée) et redémarre. Après l'achèvement de la configuration ME, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres Intel AMT.  Configuration Intel AMT : Activation de Intel AMT pour le mode SMB Pour activer les paramètres de configuration Intel AMT sur la plate-forme cible, procédez comme suit : 1. Allumez l'ordinateur et pendant la procédure de démarrage, appuyez sur 

 quand l'écran du logo Dell apparaît pour entrer dans l'application  MEBx. 2. Une invite de mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME.  3. Sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT). Appuyez sur . 4. Sélectionnez Host Name (Nom d'hôte). Appuyez sur .  5. Tapez un nom unique pour cette machine Intel AMT. Appuyez sur .  Les espaces ne sont pas acceptés dans le nom d'hôte. Vérifiez qu'il n'existe pas de nom d'hôte en double sur le réseau. Les noms d'hôte peuvent être  utilisés à la place de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur pour toute application nécessitant une adresse IP.  6. Sélectionnez TCP/IP. Appuyez sur .  7. Le message ci-dessous apparaît et nécessite la réponse indiquée dans la liste ci-dessous : l Disable Network Interface: (Y/N) (Désactiver l'interface réseau : (O/N)) Appuyez sur . Si le réseau est désactivé, toutes les autres capacités Intel AMT à distance sont désactivées et les paramètres TCP/IP ne sont pas nécessaires. Cette  option est une bascule, lors du prochain accès vous serez invité à effectuer l'action contraire.l [DHCP Enable] Disable DHCP (Y/N) ([Activation DHCP] Désactiver DHCP (O/N)) Appuyez sur . l Domain Name (Nom de domaine) Tapez le nom de domaine dans le champ.8. Sélectionnez Provision Model (Modèle d'approvisionnement) sur le menu. Appuyez sur .  9. Le message suivant s'affiche : Le message suivant s'affiche : l Change to Intel AMT 1.0 Mode: (Y/N) (Passer en mode Intel AMT 1.0 : (O/N)) Appuyez sur . 10. Evitez l'option Un-Provision (Désapprovisionnement). Cette option fait revenir l'ordinateur aux valeurs par défaut d'usine. Voir Revenir aux valeurs par défaut pour plus d'informations sur le désapprovisionnement.  11. Sélectionnez SOL/IDE-R. Appuyez sur .  12. Le message ci-dessous apparaît et nécessite la réponse indiquée dans la liste ci-dessous : l [Caution] System resets after configuration changes. Continue: (Y/N) ([Attention] Réinitialisation du système après changement de  configuration. Continuer : (O/N)) Appuyez sur .l User name & Password (nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe) Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) et appuyez sur . Cette option permet d'ajouter des utilisateurs et mots de passe depuis l'interface WebGUI. Si l'option est désactivée, seul l'administrateur a accès à  distance à l'extension MEBx. l Serial Over LAN (Mode série sur réseau)  Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) et appuyez sur .l IDE Redirection Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) et appuyez sur . 13. L'option suivante est Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour du microcode sécurisée). La valeur par défaut est Enabled (Activé). 14. Passez l'option Set PRTC (Définir PRTC).  15. L'option suivante est Idle Timeout (Délai d'attente d'inactivité). La valeur par défaut est 1. Ce délai d'attente n'est applicable que quand une option  d'éveil réseau WoL est sélectionnée dans l'étape 13 de la procédure pour activer ME pour le mode de fonctionnement SMB. 16. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent). Appuyez sur .  17. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter). Appuyez sur . 18. Le message suivant s'affiche : Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): (Etes-vous sûr de vouloir quitter ? (O/N))  Appuyez sur . 19. L'ordinateur redémarre. Eteignez l'ordinateur et débranchez le câble d'alimentation. L'ordinateur est maintenant dans l'état installé et prêt pour le  déploiement. Retour à la page ContenuRetour à la page Contenu Dépannage Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ Retour aux valeurs par défaut (désapprovisionnement) Flash du microcode Redirection SOL (Serial-Over-LAN) et IDE (IDE-R) Messages d'erreur Cette section décrit quelques méthodes de dépannage de base en cas de problème sur la configuration Intel® AMT. Retour aux valeurs par défaut (désapprovisionnement) Le retour aux valeurs par défaut est aussi appelé désapprovisionnement. Un ordinateur Intel AMT installé et configuré peut être désapprovisionné depuis  l'écran Intel AMT Configuration par l'option Un-Provision (Désapprovisionner). Procédez comme indiqué ci-dessous pour désapprovisionner un ordinateur : 1. Sélectionnez Un-Provision (Désapprovisionner) puis Full Un-provision (Désapprovisionnement complet).  L'option Full un-provision (Désapprovisionnement complet) est disponible pour les ordinateurs approvisionnés en mode SMB. Cette option ramène tous  les paramètres de configuration Intel AMT aux valeurs par défaut d'usine et ne réinitialise PAS les paramètres de configuration ou mots de passe ME. Un  désapprovisionnement complet et partiel est disponible pour les ordinateurs approvisionnés en mode entreprise. Le désapprovisionnement partiel  ramène tous les paramètres de configuration Intel AMT aux valeurs par défaut d'usine à l'exception des valeurs PID et PPS. Le désapprovisionnement  partiel ne réinitialise PAS les paramètres de configuration ou mots de passe ME. Un message de désapprovisionnement apparaît après environ 1 minute. Quand le désapprovisionnement est terminé, le contrôle est ramené à l'écran  de configuration Intel AMT. Les options Provisioning Server (Serveur d'approvisionnement), Set PID and PPS (Définir PID et PPS) et Set PRTC (Définir  PRTC) sont à nouveau disponibles parce que l'ordinateur est configuré dans le mode entreprise par défaut. 2. Sélectionnez Return to previous menu (Revenir au menu précédent).  3. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter) et appuyez sur . L'ordinateur redémarre.  Flash du microcode Le microcode peut être flashé pour une mise à niveau vers les versions plus récentes de Intel AMT. La fonction de flashage automatique peut être désactivée  en sélectionnant Disabled (Désactivé) pour le paramètre Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour de microcode sécurisée) de l'interface MEBx. Le code de flashage du microcode, dès qu'il est disponible, se trouve accessible en téléchargement sur le site support.dell.com. Le microcode NE PEUT PAS être flashé vers une version plus ancienne ni vers la version en cours. Le code flash du microcode est accessible en téléchargement  sur le site support.dell.com. Redirection SOL (Serial-Over-LAN) et IDE (IDE-R) Si vous ne pouvez pas utiliser IDE-R et SOL, procédez comme suit : 1. Sur l'écran de démarrage initial, appuyez sur 

 pour entrer dans les écrans MEBx.  2. Une invite de mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME.  3. Sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT). 4. Appuyez sur .  5. Sélectionnez Un-Provision (Désapprovisionner).  6. Appuyez sur .  7. Sélectionnez Full Unprovision (Désapprovisionnement complet).  8. Appuyez sur .  9. Reconfigurez les paramètres sur l'écran Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT). Messages d'erreur Not able to enter the MEBx on POST (Impossible d'entrer dans MEBx à l'autotest) L'extension MEBx impose que le logement DIMM A contienne de la mémoire, sinon le message ci-dessous apparaît lors de l'autotest au démarrage  (POST) et il est impossible d'entrer dans l'interface MEBx. Bad ME memory configuration. (Configuration mémoire ME incorrecte.) Retour à la page Contenu REMARQUE : Le connecteur DIMM A se trouve sous le clavier. Pour plus d'informations sur l'accès à ce connecteur, consultez votre Guide de l'utilisateur.Retour à la page Contenu Utilisation de l'interface WebGUI de Intel® AMT Guide de l'administrateur pour l'administration des systèmes Dell™ L'interface Intel® AMT WebGUI se base sur un navigateur web pour une administration limitée à distance de l'ordinateur. L'interface WebGUI est souvent  utilisée comme test pour vérifier si l'installation et la configuration Intel AMT a été effectuée correctement sur un ordinateur. Une connexion à distance réussie  entre un ordinateur à distance et l'ordinateur hôte utilisant l'interface WebGUI signale une installation et configuration correcte de Intel AMT sur l'ordinateur  distant. L'interface Intel AMT WebGUI est accessible depuis n'importe quel navigateur web, par exemple les applications Internet Explorer® ou Netscape®. Les capacités limitées d'administration à distance de l'ordinateur sont notamment : l Inventaire matériel  l Journalisation d'événements  l Réinitialisation à distance de l'ordinateur  l Modification des paramètres réseau  l Ajout de nouveaux utilisateurs La prise en charge de WebGUI est activée par défaut pour les ordinateurs installés et configurés en mode SMB. La prise en charge de WebGUI pour les  ordinateurs installés et configurés en mode entreprise est déterminée par le serveur d'installation et configuration.  Vous trouverez plus d'informations sur l'interface WebGUI sur le site web de Intel à l'adresse www.intel.com. Procédez comme indiqué ci-dessous pour vous connecter à l'interface Intel AMT WebGUI sur un ordinateur installé et configuré : 1. Allumez un ordinateur Intel AMT ayant terminé l'installation et la configuration de Intel AMT.  2. Lancez un navigateur web depuis un ordinateur séparé, par exemple un ordinateur d'administration sur le même sous-réseau que l'ordinateur Intel  AMT. 3. Connectez-vous à l'adresse IP et au port mentionnés dans l'interface MEBx de l'ordinateur Intel AMT. (exemple : http://ip_address:16992 ou http://192.168.2.1:16992) l Par défaut, le port est 16992. Utilisez le port 16993 et https:// pour vous connecter à l'interface Intel AMT WebGUI sur un ordinateur  configuré et installé en mode entreprise.  l En cas d'utilisation de DHCP, utilisez le nom de domaine totalement qualifié (FQDN) pour le moteur ME. Le nom totalement qualifié FQDN est  l'association du nom d'hôte et du domaine. (exemple : http://nom_hote:16992 ou http://systeme1:16992) L'ordinateur d'administration effectue une connexion TCP sur l'ordinateur Intel AMT et accède à la page web intégrée Intel AMT de premier niveau dans  le moteur d'administration de l'ordinateur Intel AMT. 4. Tapez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. Le nom d'utilisateur par défaut est admin et le mot de passe est celui qui a été défini pendant l'installation de Intel AMT dans l'extension MEBx.  5. Consultez les informations sur l'ordinateur et faites les modifications nécessaires.  Vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe MEBx de l'ordinateur distant dans l'interface WebGUI. La modification du mot de passe dans l'interface WebGUI ou sur une console distante conduit à deux mots de passe. Le nouveau mot de passe, appelé mot de passe MEBx à distance, ne fonctionne qu'à distance  avec l'interface WebGUI ou la console distante. Le mot de passe MEBx local utilisé pour l'accès local à l'interface MEBx n'est pas modifié. Vous devrez  vous rappeler à la fois le mot de passe local et MEBx distant pour accéder à l'interface MEBx de l'ordinateur en local et à distance. Quand le mot de  passe MEBx est défini à l'origine dans l'installation de Intel AMT, celui-ci sert à la fois de mot de passe local et distant. En cas de modification du mot de  passe distant, ces mots de passe sont désynchronisés.  6. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter). Retour à la page Contenu Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide This document describes the features and operation of your computer. This document is stored on your computer hard drive. For information on other documentation included with your computer, see "Finding Information for Your Computer." Information About Your Computer Finding Information for Your Computer Specifications Caring for Your Computer About Your Computer—Dell Precision 650 Front View Back View Inside Your Computer System Board Components About Your Computer—Dell Precision 450 Front View Back View Inside Your Computer System Board Components Advanced Features LegacySelect Technology Control Manageability Security Password Protection System Setup Jumper Settings Power Button TAPI Hyper-Threading IEEE 1394 U320 SCSI Controller Integrated Striping Removing and Installing Parts—Dell Precision 650 Opening the Computer Cover Memory Cards Drives Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Microprocessor VRM Battery Closing the Computer Cover Removing and Installing Parts—Dell Precision 450 Opening the Computer Cover Memory Cards Drives Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Microprocessor VRM Battery Closing the Computer Cover Solving Problems Troubleshooting Your Computer Battery Problems Card Problems Drive Problems Dropped or Damaged Computer E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems Error Messages General Problems IEEE 1394 Device Problems Keyboard Problems Memory Problems Microprocessor Problems Mouse Problems Network Problems Power Problems Printer Problems Serial or Parallel Device Problems Sound and Speaker Problems System Board Problems Video and Monitor Problems Advanced Troubleshooting Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes Dell Diagnostics Drivers Using System Restore Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Cleaning Your Computer Before Cleaning Your Computer Computer, Keyboard, and Monitor Mouse Floppy Drive CDs and DVDs Ergonomic Computing Habits Your Operating System Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP Reinstalling Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Features Regulatory Notices FCC Notices (U.S. Only) IC Notice (Canada Only) CE Notice (European Union) ENERGY STAR® Compliance Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) VCCI Notice (Japan Only) MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) NOM Information (Mexico Only) Warranty and Return Policy Getting Help Technical Assistance Problems With Your Order Product Information Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Before You Call Contacting Dell GlossaryFor a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary. If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Dell OpenManage, and Latitude are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks and Xeon is a trademark of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows NT, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; IBM and OS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Dell Computer Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Models: WHL and WHM April 2003     P/N 6T345     Rev. A03 NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page Advanced Troubleshooting Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes Dell Diagnostics Drivers Using System Restore Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Diagnostic Lights System Lights Located on the front of the computer, these lights can indicate a computer problem. Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer is equipped with four lights on the front panel labeled "A," "B," "C," and "D". These lights can be yellow or green. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, the lights remain green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem. Diagnostic Light Codes Before POST Power Light Hard- Drive Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green N/A Power is on, and the computer is operating normally. No corrective action is required. Blinking green Blank The computer is in the suspended state (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP). Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer. See "Power Button." Blinks green several times and then turns off N/A A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid yellow N/A The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly installed. If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "System Board Problems." If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance. Blinking yellow Blank A power supply or system board failure has occurred. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "Power Problems" and "System Board Problems." Blinking yellow Solid green A system board or VRM failure has occurred. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "System Board Problems." Solid green and a beep code during POST N/A A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing. See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid green power light and no beep code and no video during POST N/A The monitor or the graphics card may be faulty or incorrectly installed. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "Video and Monitor Problems." Solid green power light and no beep code but the computer locks up during POST N/A An integrated system board device may be faulty. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution No electrical power is supplied to the computer. Connect the computer to its electrical outlet. Ensure that the front-panel power light is on. If the power light is off, ensure that the computer is connected to a working electrical outlet Diagnostic Light Codes During POST and then press the power button. If the problem is still not resolved, contact Dell for technical assistance. The computer is in a normal off condition; the computer is connected to its electrical outlet. Press the power button to turn the computer on. If the computer does not turn on, ensure that the front-panel power light is on. If the power light is off, ensure that the computer is connected to a working electrical outlet and then press the power button. If the problem is still not resolved, contact Dell for technical assistance. The computer is in a reduced power or "sleep" state. Use one of the appropriate methods to "wake up" the computer. See "Advanced Features." If the problem is not resolved and you are trying to wake the computer with a USB mouse or keyboard, subsitute the mouse or keyboard with a working PS/2 mouse or keyboard and try to wake the computer. The BIOS is not executing. Ensure that the microprocessor is seated correctly and restart the computer. If the problem is still not resolved, contact Dell for technical assistance. A possible power supply or power cable failure has occurred. Perform the procedure in "Power Problems." If the problem is still not resolved, contact Dell for technical assistance. A possible system board failure has occured. Contact Dell for technical assistance. A microprocessor and/or VRM mismatch exists. Perform the procedure in "Microprocessor Problems." A possible VRM 0 failure has occurred. Contact Dell for technical assistance. A possible VRM 1 failure has occurred. Perform the procedure in "Microprocessor Problems." A possible VRM 0 and VRM 1 failure has occurred. Contact Dell for technical assistance. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution A possible BIOS failure has occurred; the computer is in the recovery mode. Run the BIOS Recovery Utility, wait for recovery completion, and then restart the computer. A possible microprocessor failure has Reinstall the microprocessor and restart the computer.occurred. Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. 1. Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory. 2. Restart the computer. 3. If the problem still exists, remove all the memory modules and install one memory module in memory module connector 4. 4. Restart the computer. The following message appears: Alert! Operating in Debug Mode. Please Populate Memory in Pairs for Normal Operation. 5. Press to boot to the operating system. 6. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 7. If the memory module passes, shut down the computer, remove the memory module, and repeat the process with the remaining memory modules until a memory error occurs during start-up or diagnostic testing. If the first memory module tested is defective, repeat the process with the remaining modules to ensure the remaining modules are not defective. 8. When the defective memory module is identified, contact Dell for a replacement. NOTE: If necessary, the computer can operate in debug mode until new memory modules are installed. A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not the video card) and then restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities"). 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible graphics card failure has occurred. Reinstall the graphics card and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart the computer. If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Check all power and data cable connections, and then restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. No memory modules are detected. 1. Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory. 2. Restart the computer. 3. If the problem still exists, remove all the memory modules and install one memory module in memory module connector 4. 4. Restart the computer. The following message appears: Alert! Operating in Debug Mode. Please Populate Memory in Pairs for Normal Operation. 5. Press to boot to the operating system. 6. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 7. If the memory module passes, shutdown the computer, remove the memory module, and repeat the process with the remaining memory modules until a memory error occurs during start-up or diagnostic testing. If the first memory module tested is defective, repeat the process with the remaining modules to ensure the remaining modules are not defective. 8. When the defective memory module is identified, contact Dell for a replacement. NOTE: If necessary, the computer can operate in debug mode until new memory modules are installed. System board failure has occurred. Perform the procedures in "System Board Problems." If the problem persists, contact Dell. Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility Ensure that there are no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements (see "Memory").Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps that identify a problem. One possible series (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This series tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. 1. Write the beep code down on the Diagnostic Checklist. 2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. 3. Contact Dell for technical assistance. error exists. Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer (see "Memory"). Reinstall the memory modules and then restart the computer. If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible system board resource and/or hardware failure has occurred. Perform the procedure in "System Board Problems" and see "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card and then restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities"). 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Other failure has occurred. Ensure that the cables are properly connected from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive to the system board. If the problem persists, contact Dell. The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. None. Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 DIMMs not being properly identified or used 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failureDell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Solving Problems" and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. Running the Dell Diagnostics may help you resolve the problem without contacting Dell. If you do contact Dell, the test results can provide important information for Dell's service and support personnel. The Dell Diagnostics allows you to: l Perform express, extended, or custom tests on one or all devices l Select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having l Choose how many times a test is run l Display test results l Suspend testing if an error is detected l Access online help information that describes the tests and devices l Receive status messages that tell you whether tests completed successfully l Receive error messages if problems are detected Starting the Dell Diagnostics It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. Enter system setup, review your computer's configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1. Shut down and restart the computer. 2. When the DELL® logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft® Windows® logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer through the Start menu and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities CD 1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the CD drive. 2. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL® logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer through the Start menu and try again. 4-2-1 No time tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failure NOTICE: Only use the Dell Diagnostics to test your Dell™ computer. Using this program with other computers can result in error messages.  NOTE: If you receive a message stating that no Diagnostics utility partition has been found, follow the instructions to run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press . 4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu. 5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. 6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. 7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your platform. 9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message displaying the error code and a description of the problem appear. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. 3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. Drivers What Is a Driver? A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard. All devices require a driver program. A driver acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Each device has its own set of specialized commands that only its driver recognizes. Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft® Windows® operating system. You may need to install drivers if: l You upgrade your operating system. l You reinstall your operating system. l You connect or install a new device. If you experience a problem with any device, perform the steps in the following sections to identify whether the driver is the source of your problem and if necessary, to update the driver. NOTE: This feature changes the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup. NOTE: The Service Tag number for your computer is located on the top of each test screen. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes an hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains your configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests and displays it in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.Identifying Drivers Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. In the Control Panel window, under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance. 3. In the Performance and Maintenance window, click System. 4. In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 5. Click Device Manager. 6. In the Device Manager window, scroll down the list to see if any device has an exclamation point (a yellow circle with a [!]) on the device icon. If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. In the Control Panel window, double-click System. 3. In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. In the Device Manager window, scroll down the list to see if any device has an exclamation point (a yellow circle with a [!]) on the device icon. If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver. Reinstalling Drivers 1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the CD drive. If this is your first time to use the Drivers and Utilities CD, the Installation window opens to inform you that the CD will begin the installation. Click OK, and respond to the installation program prompts to complete the installation. 2. Click Next at the Welcome Dell System Owner screen. 3. Choose the appropriate selections for System Model, Operating System, Device Type, and Topic. 4. Click My Drivers in the Topic drop-down menu. The Drivers and Utilities CD scans your computer's hardware and operating system and then displays a list of device drivers for your system configuration. 5. Click the appropriate driver and follow the instructions to download the driver for your computer. To view a list of all available drivers for your computer, click Drivers in the Topic drop-down menu. To access the Dell Drivers and Utilities CD Guide, click User's Guides in the Topic drop-down menu, and then click Dell Precision ResourceCD. Using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously installed version. To use Device Driver Rollback: 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. In the Control Panel window, under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance. 3. In the Performance and Maintenance window, click System. 4. In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 5. Click Device Manager. 6. In the Device Manager window, right-click the device for which the new driver was installed, and then click Properties. 7. Click the Drivers tab. 8. Click Roll Back Driver. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use Using System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new driver. NOTICE: The Dell Support website and your Dell Precision Drivers and Utilities CD provide approved drivers for Dell™ computers. If you install drivers  obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. NOTE: To access device drivers and user documentation, you must use the Drivers and Utilities CD while your computer is running Windows. Using System Restore The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. See Windows Help for information on using System Restore. Creating a Restore Point 1. Click the Start button. 2. Click Help and Support. 3. Click System Restore. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State If problems occur after installing a device driver, first try using Device Driver Rollback. If that is unsuccessful, then use System Restore. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs® Accessories® System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected, and then click Next. 3. Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in bold. 4. Select a restore point, and then click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you prefer. 5. Click Next. The Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data, and then the computer automatically restarts. 6. After the computer restarts, click OK. To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs ® Accessories ® System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Select Undo my last restoration and click Next. 3. Click Next. The System Restore screen appears, and then the computer automatically restarts. 4. After the computer restarts, click OK. Enabling System Restore If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. To see if System Restore is enabled: 1. Click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Performance and Maintenance. 3. Click System. 4. Click the System Restore tab. 5. Make sure that Turn off System Restore is unchecked. NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. NOTICE: Before restoring the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close all open files and close all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. NOTICE: Before undoing the last system restore, save and close all open files and close all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Windows XP Microsoft® Windows® XP IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. To check for conflicts on a computer running Windows XP: 1. Click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Performance and Maintenance, and then click System. 3. Click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager. 4. In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window to determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 6. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 7. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. 8. Resolve any IRQ conflicts, as described in step 5. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports the cards or devices that share the device's IRQ. To use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter: 1. Click the Start button, and then click Help and Support. 2. Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field, and then click the arrow to start the search. 3. Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. 4. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and then click Next. Windows 2000 To check for conflicts on a computer running Windows 2000: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. In the Control Panel window, double-click System. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click View, and then click Resources by connection. 6. Double-click Interrupt request (IRQ) to view the IRQ assignments. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 7. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window to determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 8. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 9. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. 10. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports the cards or devices that share the device's IRQ. Resolve the IRQ conflicts. To use the Windows 2000 Hardware Troubleshooter: 1. Click the Start button, and then click Help. 2. Click Troubleshooting and Maintenance on the Contents tab, click Windows 2000 troubleshooters, and then click Hardware. 3. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and then click Next. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Advanced Features Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide LegacySelect Technology Control Manageability Security Password Protection System Setup Jumper Settings Power Button TAPI Hyper-Threading IEEE 1394 U320 SCSI Controller Integrated Striping LegacySelect Technology Control LegacySelect technology control offers legacy-full, legacy-reduced, or legacy-free solutions based on common platforms, hard-drive images, and help desk procedures. Control is provided to the administrator through system setup, Dell OpenManage™ IT Assistant, or Dell™ custom factory integration. LegacySelect allows administrators to electronically activate or deactivate connectors and media devices that include serial and USB connectors, a parallel connector, a floppy drive, and a PS/2 mouse. Connectors and media devices that are deactivated make resources available. You must restart the computer for the changes to take effect. Manageability Alert Standard Format ASF is a DMTF management standard that specifies "pre-operating system" or "operating system-absent" alerting techniques. It is designed to generate an alert on potential security and fault conditions when the operating system is in a sleep state or the computer is powered down. ASF is designed to supersede previous operating system-absent alerting technologies. Your computer supports the following ASF alerts and remote capabilities: For more information about Dell's ASF implementation, see the ASF User's Guide and the ASF Administrator's Guide, available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Dell OpenManage IT Assistant IT Assistant configures, manages, and monitors computers and other devices on a corporate network. IT Assistant manages assets, configurations, events (alerts), and security for computers equipped with industry-standard management software. It supports instrumentation that conforms to SNMP, DMI, and CIM industry standards. Dell OpenManage Client instrumentation, which is based on DMI and CIM, is available for your computer. For information on IT Assistant, see the Dell OpenManage IT Assistant User's Guide available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation Alert Description Bad CPU The microprocessor has been unable to execute its first instructions. Chassis Intrusion/Chassis Intrusion Cleared The computer has been opened or the chassis intrusion alert has been cleared. Corrupt BIOS The BIOS is corrupted. Failure to Boot to BIOS The BIOS did not complete loading upon initiation. System Password Failure The system password is invalid (after 3 failed attempts). Entity Presence Periodic Heartbeats have been transmitted to verify computer presence. Temperature - Too High (critical) The computer temperature is out of limits. Voltage - Too Low Too High (critical) The computer voltage is out of limits. Cooling Device Limits The computer fan speed/rpm is out of limits. Ethernet Connectivity Enabled/Ethernet Connectivity Disabled The Ethernet connectivity is enabled or Ethernet connectivity is disabled. Power Supply A fan or voltage failure exists inside the power supply.Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation is software that enables remote management programs such as IT Assistant to do the following: l Access information about your computer, such as how many processors it has and what operating system it is running l Monitor the status of your computer, such as listening for thermal alerts from temperature probes or hard-drive failure alerts from storage devices l Change the state of your computer, such as updating its BIOS or shutting it down remotely A managed system is one that has Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation set up on a network that uses IT Assistant. For information about Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation, see the Dell OpenManage Client Instrumentation User's Guide available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Security Chassis Intrusion Detection This feature detects that the chassis was opened and alerts the user. To change the Chassis Intrusion setting: 1. Enter system setup. 2. Press the down-arrow keys to move to the System Security option. 3. Press to access the System Security option's pop-up menu. 4. Press the down-arrow key to move to the Chassis Intrusion setting. 5. Press the spacebar to select an option setting. 6. Exit system setup. Option Settings l Enabled — If the computer cover is opened, the setting changes to Detected, and the following alert message displays during the boot routine at the next computer start-up: Alert! Cover was previously removed. To reset the Detected setting, enter system setup. In the Chassis Intrusion option, press the left- or right-arrow key to select Reset, and then choose Enabled, Enabled-Silent, or Disabled. l Enabled-Silent (default) — If the computer cover is opened, the setting changes to Detected. No alert message appears during the boot sequence at the next computer start-up. l Disabled — No intrusion monitoring occurs and no messages appear. Padlock Ring and Security Cable Slot Use one of the following methods to secure your computer: l Use a padlock alone or a padlock and looped security cable with the padlock ring. A padlock alone prevents the computer from being opened. A security cable looped around a stationary object is used in conjunction with a padlock to prevent unauthorized movement of the computer. l Attach a commercially available antitheft device to the security cable slot on the back of the computer. Antitheft devices usually include a segment of metal-stranded cable with an attached locking device and key. A Kensington lock is recommended. The documentation that comes with the locking device contains instructions for installing it. Password Protection System Password NOTE: When the setup password is enabled, you must know the setup password before you can reset the Chassis Intrusion setting. NOTE: Before you purchase an antitheft device, ensure that it works with the security cable slot on your computer. NOTICE: Although passwords provide security for the data on your computer, they are not foolproof. If your data requires more security, it is your responsibility to obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs. NOTICE: If you leave your computer running and unattended without having a system password assigned, or if you leave your computer unlocked so that someone can disable the password by changing a jumper setting, anyone can access the data stored on your hard drive. Option Settings You cannot change or enter a new system password if either of the following two options is displayed: l Enabled — A system password is assigned. l Disabled — The system password is disabled by a jumper setting on the system board. You can only assign a system password when the following option is displayed: l Not Enabled — A system password has not been assigned and the password jumper on the system board is in the enabled position (the default). Assigning a System Password To escape from the field without assigning a system password, press or the key combination to move to another field, or press at any time before you complete step 5. 1. Enter system setup and verify that Password Status is set to Unlocked. 2. Highlight System Password and then press the left- or right-arrow key. The option heading changes to Enter Password, followed by an empty 32-character field in square brackets. 3. Type your new system password. You can use up to 32 characters. To erase a character when entering your password, press or the left-arrow key. The password is not case sensitive. Certain key combinations are not valid. If you enter one of these combinations, the speaker emits a beep. As you press each character key (or the spacebar for a blank space), a placeholder appears in the field. 4. Press . If the new system password is less than 32 characters, the whole field fills with placeholders. Then the option heading changes to Verify Password, followed by another empty 32-character field in square brackets. 5. To confirm your password, type it a second time and press . The password setting changes to Enabled. 6. Exit system setup. Password protection takes effect when you restart the computer. Typing Your System Password When you start or restart your computer, one of the following prompts appears on the screen. If Password Status is set to Unlocked: Type in the password and - press to leave password security enabled. - press to disable password security. Enter password: If Password Status is set to Locked: Type the password and press . If you have assigned a setup password, the computer accepts your setup password as an alternate system password. If you type a wrong or incomplete system password, the following message appears on the screen: ** Incorrect password. ** If you again type an incorrect or incomplete system password, the same message appears on the screen. The third and subsequent times you type an incorrect or incomplete system password, the computer displays the following message: ** Incorrect password. ** Number of unsuccessful password attempts: 3 System halted! Must power down. Even after your computer is turned off and on, the previous message is displayed each time you type an incorrect or incomplete system password.Deleting or Changing an Existing System Password 1. Enter system setup and verify that Password Status is set to Unlocked. 2. Restart your computer. 3. When prompted, type the system password. 4. Press to disable the existing system password. 5. Confirm that Not Enabled is displayed for the System Password option. If Not Enabled is displayed, the system password is deleted. If Not Enabled is not displayed, press to restart the computer, and then repeat step 3 through step 5. To assign a new password, follow the procedure in "Assigning a System Password." 6. Exit system setup. Setup Password Option Settings l Enabled — Does not allow assignment of setup passwords; you must enter a setup password to make changes to system setup. l Not Enabled — Allows assignment of setup passwords; password feature is enabled but no password is assigned. Assigning a Setup Password The setup password can be the same as the system password. 1. Enter system setup and verify that Setup Password is set to Not Enabled. 2. Highlight Setup Password and press the left- or right-arrow key. The computer prompts you to type and verify the password. If a character is not permitted, the computer emits a beep. 3. Type and then verify the password. After you verify the password, the Setup Password setting changes to Enabled. The next time you enter system setup, the computer prompts you for the setup password. 4. Exit system setup. A change to Setup Password becomes effective immediately (no need to restart the computer). Operating Your Computer With a Setup Password Enabled When you enter system setup, the Setup Password option is highlighted, prompting you to type the password. If you do not type the correct password, the computer lets you view, but not modify, system setup options. Deleting or Changing an Existing Setup Password To change an existing setup password, you must know the setup password. 1. Enter system setup. 2. Type the setup password at the prompt. 3. Highlight Setup Password and press the left- or right-arrow key to delete the existing setup password. The setting changes to Not Enabled. To assign a new setup password, perform the steps in "Assigning a System Password." 4. Exit system setup. Disabling a Forgotten Password and Setting a New Password NOTE: You can use Password Status in conjunction with System Password and Setup Password to further protect your computer from unauthorized changes. NOTE: If the two passwords are different, the setup password can be used as an alternate system password. However, the system password cannot be used in place of the setup password. NOTE: You can use password status in conjunction with setup password to protect the system password from unauthorized changes. NOTICE: This process erases both the system and setup passwords. 1. Open the computer cover. 2. Remove the jumper plug labeled "PSWD" from the jumper. See "Jumper Settings" to locate the password jumper. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Reconnect your computer and devices to electrical outlets and turn them on. This disables the existing password(s). 5. Enter system setup and verify that Setup Password is set to Disabled. 6. Exit system setup. 7. Open the computer cover. 8. Replace the PSWD jumper plug. 9. Close the computer cover and reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets and turn them on. This reenables the password feature. When you enter system setup, both password options appear as Not Enabled—the password feature is enabled but no password is assigned. 10. Assign a new system and/or setup password. System Setup Use system setup settings as follows: l To set user-selectable options such as date and time or system password l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed It is recommended that you print the system setup screens (by pressing ) or record the information for future reference. Before you use system setup, you must know the kind of floppy drive(s) and hard drive(s) installed in your computer. To confirm this information, see the Manufacturing Test Report that came with your computer, or find this information in the online Dell Accessories folder. Entering System Setup 1. Turn on or restart your computer. 2. When Press to Enter Setup appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft® Windows® logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens System setup screens display current configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is organized into four areas: l Title — The box at the top of all screens that lists the computer name l Computer data — Two boxes below the title box that display your computer processor, L2 cache, service tag, and the version number of the BIOS l Options — A scrollable box listing options that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features Fields to the right of the option titles contain settings or values. The fields that you can change appear bright on the screen. The fields that you cannot change (because they are set by the computer) appear less bright. When appears to the right of an option title, press to access a popup menu of additional options. l Key functions — A line of boxes across the bottom of all screens that lists keys and their functions within system setup ¡ — Access the System Setup Help ¡ — Exit System Setup System Setup Navigation Keys CAUTION: Before you open the computer cover, see the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. CAUTION: Before you open the computer cover, see the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTE: To ensure an orderly computer shutdown, consult the documentation that came with your operating system. Keys Action Moves to the next field.Boot Sequence This feature allows users to change the sequence of devices from which the computer boots. Option Settings l Normal — (Available only for the current boot process.) The computer attempts to boot from the sequence of devices specified in system setup. l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, or if no floppy disk is in the drive, the computer generates an error message. l Hard Disk Drive C: — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message. l Integrated NIC — As the computer boots, it prompts you to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. l USB Flash Device — Insert the key into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the key and adds the USB key option to the boot menu. Changing the Computer Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to tell the computer to boot from the CD drive so you can run the Dell Diagnostics, and specify that the computer boots from the hard drive when the diagnostic tests are complete. 1. Turn on or restart your computer. 2. When F2 = Setup appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. Moves to the previous field. Cycles through the options in a field. In many fields, you can also type the appropriate value. Scrolls through help information. Enters the selected field's pop-up options menu. spacebar or In the selected field's pop-up options menu, cycles through the options in a field. Exits system setup without restarting the computer and returns the computer to the boot routine. Exits system setup and restarts the computer, implementing any changes you have made. Resets the selected option to the default.The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1. Enter system setup. 2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the pop-up menu. 3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. System Setup Options NOTE: To ensure an orderly computer shutdown, consult the documentation that came with your operating system. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. Asset Tag — Displays the customer-programmable asset tag number for the computer if an asset tag number is assigned. Auto Power On — Sets time and days of week to turn on the computer automatically. Choices are every day or every Monday through Friday. Time is kept in a 24-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the start-up time by pressing the right- or left-arrow keys to increase or decrease the numbers or to type numbers in both the date and time fields. Disabled is the default. This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge protector. CPU Information l CPU Speed — Processor speed at which the computer boots Press the left- or right-arrow key to toggle the CPU Speed option between the resident microprocessor's rated speed (the default) and a lower compatibility speed. To toggle between the rated processor speed and the compatibility speed while the computer is running in real mode, press <\>. (For keyboards that do not use American English, press <#>.) l Bus Speed — Speed of the microprocessor's system bus l Processor ID — Manufacturer's identification code(s) for the installed microprocessor l Clock Speed — Core speed at which the microprocessor(s) operates l Cache Size — Size of the microprocessor's L2 cache l Hyper-Threading — Enables or disables Hyper-Threading technology for operating systems that support this feature. The default setting is Disabled. Diskette Drive A — Type of floppy drive(s) installed in the computer. With the standard cabling configuration, Diskette Drive A (the boot floppy drive) is the 3.5-inch floppy drive installed in the top externally accessible drive bay. The two options are 3.5 Inch, 1.44 MB, and Not Installed. Tape drives are not reflected in the Diskette Drive A option. For example, if a single floppy drive and a tape drive are attached to the floppy drive interface cable, set Diskette Drive A to 3.5 Inch, 1.44 MB. Hard-Disk Drive Sequence — Allows the selection specific drive devices for priority in boot. When this field is highlighted, press . A second dialog box appears with the list of devices that can be selected. Use the +/- keys to move the device highlighted up or down in the priority list. Fastboot l On (default) — Your computer boots faster by skipping certain configurations and tests. l Off — Your computer does not skip certain configurations and tests during the boot process. Integrated Devices — Configures the following devices integrated with the system board: l Sound — Settings are On (default) or Off. l USB Controller — Settings are On or Off. l Network Interface Controller — Settings are On (default), Off, or On w/ PXE. l Mouse Port — Settings are On or Off. l Serial Port 1 and Serial Port 2 — Settings are Off and Auto (default). Auto automatically configures a connector to a particular designation (COM1 or COM3 for Serial Port 1; COM2 or COM4 for Serial Port 2). If you set a serial connector to Auto and add a card containing a connector configured to the same designation, the computer automatically remaps the integrated port to the next available connector designation that shares the same IRQ setting as follows: ¡ COM1 (I/O address 3F8h), which shares IRQ4 with COM3, is remapped to COM3 (I/O address 3E8h). ¡ COM2 (I/O address 2F8h), which shares IRQ3 with COM4, is remapped to COM4 (I/O address 2E8h). NOTE: When two COM connectors share an IRQ setting, you can use either connector as necessary, but you may not be able to use them both at the same time. If you are running the Microsoft Windows 95 or IBM® OS/2® operating system, you cannot use both serial connectors at the same time. If the second connector (COM3 or COM4) is also in use, the integrated connector is turned off. l Parallel Port — The settings are Mode, I/O Address, and DMA Channel. Mode settings are PS/2, EPP, ECP, AT, or Off. Set the Mode option according to the type of device connected to the parallel connector. To determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. I/O Address settings are 378h (default), 278h, or 3BCh. The settings are not available when Mode is set to Off. NOTE: You cannot set the parallel connector to 3BCh if Mode is set to EPP. DMA Channel appears only when Mode is set to ECP. Settings are DMA 1, DMA 3, or Off. l IDE Drive Interface — The settings are Off and Auto (default). Auto turns off the IDE interface when necessary to accommodate a controller card installed in an expansion slot. l Diskette Interface — The settings are Auto (default), Read Only, and Off. Auto turns off the integrated floppy drive controller when necessary to accommodate a controller card installed in an expansion slot. Read Only prevents the computer's integrated floppy drive controller from writing to floppy drives and activates Auto. l USB Emulation — The settings are On and Off. l Primary Video Controller — The settings are Auto and AGP (default). Auto — If only an AGP card is installed, the computer uses the AGP card; if only a PCI card is installed, the computer uses the PCI card; if both AGP and PCI cards are installed, the computer uses the PCI card to boot. AGP (default) — The computer uses the AGP card. l Video DAC Snoop — The settings are Off (default) and On. On corrects video problems such as incorrect colors or blank windows that may occur when you use certain video cards. For the Dell Precision™ Workstation 650 only:  l 1394 Controller — Enabled is the default. l SCSI Controller — Disabled is the default. Keyboard NumLock — The settings are On and Off (does not apply to 84-key keyboards). On — Activates the rightmost bank of keys so they provide the mathematical and numeric functions shown at the top of each key. Off — Activates the rightmost bank of keys so they provide cursor-control functions shown by the label on the bottom of each key. Memory Information — Indicates amount of installed memory, computer memory speed, and AGP Aperture size PCI IRQ Assignment — Specifies which IRQ lines are assigned to the PCI devices installed in the computer Press and then select the device whose IRQ line you want to change, and press the plus (+) or minus (–) key to scroll through the available IRQ lines. Power Management — l Suspend Mode — Selects S1 or S3 (default) power management suspend mode l AC Power Recovery — Determines what happens when AC power is restored to the computer ¡ Off — The computer remains off when AC power is restored. ¡ On — The computer starts when AC power is restored. ¡ Last — The computer returns to the AC power state existing at the time that AC power was lost. l Low Power Mode — Selects the amount of power used when the computer is in hibernate mode or off. Disabled is the default. When Enabled, Remote Wake-Up events no longer start the computer from hibernate mode or off. Primary Drive n and Secondary Drive n — The settings are Auto (use this setting for all IDE devices from Dell) and Off. Primary Drive n — Identifies drives attached to the primary IDE interface connector (labeled "IDE1") on the system board. Secondary Drive n — Identifies drives connected to the secondary IDE interface connector (labeled "IDE2"). NOTE: You must have an IDE device connected to the primary IDE interface if you have an IDE device connected to the secondary IDE interface. If You Have a Problem If the computer generates a drive error message the first time you boot your computer after you install an IDE drive, your drive may not work with the automatic drive-type detect feature. Press in any hard drive field to set the hard drive autoconfiguration feature. During POST the computer scans the IDE channels for supported devices and generates a summary message. For example, if the computer detects that a hard drive is connected to the Primary channel and that a CD drive is connected to the Secondary channel, the computer generates the following message: Performing automatic IDE configuration... Primary Master: IDE Disk Drive Jumper Settings To change a jumper setting, pull the plug off its pin(s) and carefully fit it down onto the pin(s) indicated. Power Button You can use the ACPI feature to configure the function of the Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. Power Button Functions for Operating Systems With ACPI Enabled Secondary Master: CD-ROM Reader If the computer detects a device during the scan, it sets the device to Auto in system setup. If no device is listed, it sets the device setting to Off in system setup. If your computer does not reset after you perform these steps, enter system setup and reset the computer to its original factory settings: 1. Restart your computer. 2. As the computer restarts, press to enter system setup. 3. When the system setup screen appears, press to load the default settings. The computer beeps when the settings are restored. 4. Verify that the time, date, and year are correct and that the Secondary Drive 0 option is set to Auto. 5. Press and then press to save your changes and exit. The computer restarts. NOTICE: Ensure that your computer is turned off and unplugged before you change the jumper settings. Otherwise, damage to your computer or unpredictable results can occur. Jumper Setting Description PSWD (default) Password features are enabled. Password features are disabled. RTCRST Real-time clock reset    jumpered     unjumpered NOTICE: To turn off your computer, perform an orderly computer shutdown when possible. TAPI Your computer supports TAPI-compliant modem cards using the standard TAPI connector (the green connector labeled MODEM or TELEPHONY). If your modem supports voice features, you can connect your modem to the TAPI connector and then use your audio speakers and microphone as an answering machine or speakerphone. The microphone carries your voice into the computer and then through the TAPI system board connector to your modem card. The caller's voice enters through the modem card to the TAPI system board connector and then out to the speakers. You can also use this configuration to record and play audio files over the telephone by using third-party software. Installing a TAPI-Compliant Modem Card 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Install the TAPI-compliant modem card: a. Connect the 4-pin TAPI cable to the TAPI system board connector. To locate the TAPI connector on the system board, see the system board components illustration for your computer (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components"). b. Connect the other end of the cable to the TAPI connector on the modem card. To locate the TAPI connector on the card, see the documentation for the card. 8. Close the computer cover. 9. Reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 10. Install the appropriate modem driver and voice program. For more information, see the manufacturer's documentation and your Microsoft® Windows® documentation. Installing a TAPI Sound Card You can connect your modem to a TAPI-compliant sound card connector (typically labeled TAD) and then use the audio capabilities as a speakerphone. 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. Action Computer Turned On and ACPI Enabled Computer in Standby Mode Computer Turned Off Press power button Computer goes into standby mode or turns off (depending on the operating system setup) Computer turns on Boots and computer turns on Hold power button for 6 seconds Computer turns off Computer turns off Boots and computer turns on NOTE: Pressing or holding the power button to shut down the computer may result in data loss. Use the power button to shut down the computer only if the operating system is not responding. NOTE: See the documentation that came with the TAPI-compliant card for more information on using TAPI devices and to verify that the card works with your computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Install the TAPI-compliant sound card. 8. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or linein connectors on the front or back panel of your computer. 9. Connect the 4-pin TAPI cable to the TAPI sound card connector. To locate the TAPI connector on the sound card, see the documentation for the card. 10. Connect the other end of the cable to the TAPI connector on the modem card. To locate the TAPI connector on the card, see the documentation for the card. 11. Close the computer cover. 12. Reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 13. Enter system setup, go to Integrated Devices, and change the setting for Sound to Off. 14. Install the appropriate drivers for the new devices. For more information, see the manufacturer's documentation and your Windows documentation. Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading is an Intel® technology that can enhance overall performance by allowing one physical microprocessor to function as two logical microprocessors, capable of performing certain tasks simultaneously. It is recommended that you use the Windows XP operating system because Windows XP is optimized to take advantage of Hyper-Threading technology. While many programs can benefit from Hyper-Threading technology, some programs have not been optimized for Hyper-Threading and may require an update from the software manufacturer. Contact the software manufacturer for updates and information on using your software with Hyper-Threading. To determine if your computer is using Hyper-Threading technology: 1. Click the Start button, right-click My Computer, and then click Properties. 2. Click Hardware and click Device Manager. 3. In the Device Manager window, click the plus (+) sign next to the processor type. If Hyper-Threading is enabled, the processor is listed twice. You can enable or disable Hyper-Threading through system setup. For more information on Hyper-Threading, search the Knowledge Base on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 is a digital interface that can move large amounts of data between computers and peripheral devices. IEEE 1394 is ideal for use with multimedia devices because it speeds the transfer of data and large files, which enables a computer to connect directly to devices such as digital video cameras. The Dell Precision 650 computer provides a standard IEEE 1394 connector on both the front and back panels (see "About Your Computer—Dell Precision 650"). U320 SCSI Controller The U320 SCSI controller is PCI-X based and operates in a low voltage differential (LVD) mode while running at U320 (320 MBps) speeds. The bus is backward compatible and can run at U160 (160 MBps), Ultra2 (80 MBps), Ultra (40 MBps) speeds. If single-ended (SE)devices are connected to the same bus as the LVD devices (such as U320, U160, or Ultra2), the SCSI bus operates in SE mode and runs at maximum of Ultra (40 MBps) speed. For more information installing a SCSI device and SCSI ID settings for the Dell Precision 650, see "Drives." NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. Integrated Striping Your Dell Precision 650 computer supports integrated striping for a minimum of two hard drives to a maximum of four hard drives on the Integrated Ultra320 SCSI channel. Integrated striping writes data across multiple hard drives rather than writing to one hard drive by partitioning each hard drive's storage space into stripes. The stripe volume can be created and deleted through a SCSI BIOS configuration utility. Creating a Stripe Volume 1. Press during system start-up when the following message appears: Press Cntl-A to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility. 2. Select the drive controller and press . 3. Use the arrow keys to select Add RAID Array and press . 4. Use the <+> key to select YES for each drive that you want to be part of a stripe volume. Use the <-> key to select NO for each drive that you do not want to be part of a stripe volume. 5. Press to save the changes. 6. Press any key to continue. 7. If you do not want to create the stripe volume, select Discard Changes Then Exit this Menu. If you are ready to create the stripe volume, Select Save Changes Then Exit This Menu and press . While the configuration utility establishes the stripe volume, the following message appears: Processing...takes upto one minute. The main menu appears once the stripe volume is created. 8. Press , exit the configuration utility, and then press . The stripe volume can be used as a boot volume or as a data volume. For more information, see your operating system documentation. Deleting a Stripe Volume 1. Press during system start-up when the following message appears: Press Cntl-A to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility. 2. Select the drive controller and press . 3. Using the arrow keys, select Activate/Delete RAID Array and press . If more than one stripe volume is present on the controller, press any key to continue and press to return to the top menu. 4. Select Delete Array and press . 5. Press to delete the stripe volume. While the configuration utility deletes the stripe volume, the following message appears: Processing...takes upto one minute. The main menu appears once the stripe volume is deleted. Activating a Stripe Volume 1. Press during system start-up when the following message appears: Press Cntl-A to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility. NOTICE: Creating a stripe volume deletes all information that is currently on your hard drives. Save all data before you begin this procedure. NOTE: Key combinations for the utility are listed at the bottom of the configuration screen. NOTE: Multiple warning screens may appear if you have a valid partition on the drives selected or if the drives selected to be part of the stripe are different sizes. NOTE: If you choose unequal drive sizes to be part of the stripe volume, the available size of the stripe volume is equal to the number of drives in the volume multiplied by the smallest drive size in the volume. The unused space in the larger drive is unusable. NOTICE: Deleting stripe volume deletes all information that is currently on your stripe volume. Save all data before you begin this procedure. NOTE: Key combinations for the utility are listed at the bottom of the configuration screen. NOTE: A controller supports only one stripe volume. If more than one stripe volume is connected to a controller, you can activate the stripe volume you want to use through the configuration utility. NOTE: Key combinations for the utility are listed at the bottom of the configuration screen. 2. Select the drive controller and press . 3. Using the arrow keys, select Activate/Delete RAID Array and press . 4. Press any key to continue. 5. Use the or the keys to select the volume to be activated. 6. Press to return to the top menu. 7. Select Activate Array and press . 8. Press any key to continue. While the configuration utility activates the stripe volume and deactivates the other stripe volumes, the following message appears: Processing...takes upto one minute. The main menu appears once the stripe volume is activated. Troubleshooting the Stripe Volume NOTE: If a partial stripe volume is present and no longer part of a good array, the partial stripe volume can be deleted, see "Deleting a Stripe Volume." During installation, no SCSI drives are found — l Ensure that all devices are connected. l Ensure that each device has a unique SCSI ID, including the SCSI controller. l Ensure that the SCSI controller is enabled in the system BIOS. l Ensure that all devices can be seen in the Fusion-MPT SCSI BIOS display banner when the computer starts up. l Reset the Fusion-MPT SCSI BIOS setting to default. During installation blue screens occur and the message "inaccessible boot device" appears — This error may be caused by: l Not pressing at the correct time during the operating system installation Restart the computer and operating system installation. Press when prompted during the Microsoft Windows operating system installation to load the drivers using the driver diskette for the SCSI controller. NOTE: To create the driver diskette, use your Drivers and Utilities CD. l IRQ or I/O address conflict Remove any third party components that were added. l Boot order configuration Ensure that the SCSI is part of the boot order configuration in system setup. l Master Boot Record Infection Use a virus scanning program to determine if a virus has infected the master boot record of the boot device. For help resolving virus issues, see the Knowledge Base at support.dell.com. A hard drive is recognized as seven different devices when only one is physically connected to the SCSI bus — An older SCSI device may incorrectly indicate to the operating system that it supports multiple LUNs. Contact the device manufacturer for a firmware upgrade. Problems with certain SCSI devices when using an Ultra320 SCSI adapter — Some SCSI devices do not operate properly when the controller attempts to negotiate Ultra320 SCSI transfer rates. Lower the transfer speed setting with the Fusion-MPT SCSI BIOS Configuration Utility. Press during system start-up when the following message appears: Press Cntl-A to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility. The computer hangs at boot, has a long boot time, or a SCSI device is not available — Some older SCSI devices do not support Domain Validation operations, which is a feature of Ultra320 SCSI. When the computer boots, it performs Domain Validation to test the data integrity of the SCSI bus between the host adapter and each SCSI device. With some older SCSI devices, the Domain Validation operations can cause the device to stop responding to SCSI commands.Back to Contents Page Check all internal and external SCSI bus cable connections. If the problem continues, disable Domain Validation for a specific SCSI device. To disable Domain Validation for a specific SCSI device, use the Fusion-MPT SCSI BIOS Configuration Utility to set the Sync Rate to 0 (async) and the Data Width to 8. The SCSI device runs in async/narrow mode and no Domain Validation operations are performed on the SCSI device. The integrated stripe volume Fails — The POST displays Failed instead of Optimal. 1. Ensure that the SCSI cable is properly attached to each hard drive and to the system board. 2. Ensure that the power cable is connected to each hard drive. 3. Ensure that the stripe volume drives have not been moved. For additional assistance, contact Dell. If the integrated stripe volume contains the operating system and the computer does not boot: 1. Press during system startup when the following message appears: Press Cntl-A to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility. 2. Access the Array Disk menu 3. Delete the integrated stripe volume. If the BIOS recognizes all SCSI hard drives, enter the configuration utility and recreate the intergrate stripe volume. If one or more the hard drives is not recognized by the BIOS or is the configuration utility does not allow the selection of one or more of the hard drives: 1. Replace the defective hard drive(s). 2. Enter the configuration utility and recreate the integrated stripe volume. NOTICE: The following procedure may delete all the information that is currently on your hard drives. Back to Contents Page Battery Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide A coin-cell battery maintains computer configuration, date, and time information. The battery can last several years. The battery may need replacing if you have repeatedly reset the time and date information after turning on the computer or if one of the following messages appears: Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP program or Invalid configuration information - please run SETUP program or Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility To determine whether you need to replace the battery, reenter the time and date in system setup and exit the program to save the information. Turn off your computer and disconnect it from the electrical outlet for a few hours; then reconnect the computer, turn it on, and enter system setup. If the date and time are not correct in system setup, replace the battery. You can operate your computer without a battery; however, without a battery, the configuration information is erased if the computer is turned off or unplugged from the electrical outlet. In this case, you must enter system setup and reset the configuration options. To replace the battery: 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Locate the battery socket. For the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components" or see the system board label inside your computer.. 8. Remove the battery by carefully prying it out of its socket with your fingers or with a blunt, nonconducting object such as a plastic screwdriver. 9. Insert the new battery into the socket with the side labeled "+" facing up, and snap the battery into place. CAUTION: Before you begin this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. CAUTION: A new battery can explode if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: If you have not already done so, make a copy of your configuration information, found in system setup. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: If you pry the battery out of its socket with a blunt object, be careful not to touch the system board with the object. Ensure that the object is inserted between the battery and the socket before you attempt to pry out the battery. Otherwise, you may damage the system board by prying off the socket or by breaking circuit traces on the system board. 10. Close the computer cover, and plug your computer and devices into electrical outlets. 11. Enter system setup and restore the settings you recorded in step 1. 12. Properly dispose of the old battery. For more information see your System Information Guide. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Cards Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Installing a Card Removing a Card Your Dell™ computer provides slots for PCI/PCI-X and AGP cards. For more information, see "Specifications" or the system board components illustration for your computer. If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a Card." 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Installing a Card 1. Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. NOTE: To meet PC99 requirements, your Dell computer uses only PCI slots. ISA cards are not supported. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. 1 lever 2 retention arm 2. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 4. 3. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 4. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 5. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. If the card is full-length, insert the end of the card into the card guide bracket as you lower the card toward its connector on the system board. Insert the card firmly into the card connector on the system board. 6. Before you lower the retention arm, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide Press the arm into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 3 card bracket 4 card connector 5 card CAUTION: Some network connectors automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. Verify that the standby power light on the system board is off. To locate this light, see the system board illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see"System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components"). 1 fully seated card 2 not fully seated card 3 bracket within slot 4 bracket caught outside of slot7. If you are replacing an AGP card, align the AGP card guide with the base and press down on the indentation until the guide stops at the top of the AGP card. 8. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections. 9. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 10. If you installed a sound card: 1 filler bracket 2 alignment bar 3 alignment guide 4 retention arm 1 base 2 AGP retention spring 3 indentation NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. a. Enter system setup, select Integrated Devices, and change the setting for Sound to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Back View" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Back View"). 11. If you installed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated Devices, and change the setting for Network Interface Card to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network connector's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Removing a Card 1. Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm (see "Installing a Card"). 2. If you are removing an AGP card, press out on the release tabs and pull the AGP card guide up and off of the base. 3. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. 4. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell. 6. Lower the retention arm and press it into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 7. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 8. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 9. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated Devices, and change the setting for Sound to On. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. 1 base 2 release tabs (2) 3 AGP retention spring NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the computer back panel (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Back View" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Back View"). 10. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated Devices, and change the setting for Network Interface Card to On. 11. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the computer back panel (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Back View" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Back View"). Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Cleaning Your Computer Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Before Cleaning Your Computer Computer, Keyboard, and Monitor Mouse Floppy Drive CDs and DVDs Before Cleaning Your Computer 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. Computer, Keyboard, and Monitor l Use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to remove dust from the slots and holes on your computer and between the keys on the keyboard. l To clean your monitor screen, lightly dampen a soft, clean cloth with water. If possible, use a special screen-cleaning tissue or solution suitable for the monitor's antistatic coating. l Wipe the keyboard, computer, and plastic part of the monitor with a soft cleaning cloth moistened with a solution of three parts water and one part liquid dishwashing detergent. Wipe off stubborn stains with a cloth lightly moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Do not soak the cloth in the solution or let the solution drip inside your computer or keyboard. Mouse If your screen cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the mouse. To clean a non-optical mouse: 1. Turn the retainer ring on the underside of your mouse counterclockwise, and then remove the ball. 2. Wipe the ball with a clean, lint-free cloth. 3. Blow carefully into the ball cage to dislodge dust and lint. 4. If there is a buildup of dirt on the rollers inside the ball cage, clean the rollers with a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl alcohol. 5. Recenter the rollers in their channels if they are misaligned. Ensure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers. 6. Replace the ball and retainer ring. Turn the retainer ring clockwise until it clicks into place. Floppy Drive Clean your floppy drive using a commercially available cleaning kit. These kits contain pretreated floppy disks to remove contaminants that accumulate during normal operation. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. NOTICE: Do not wipe the monitor screen with any soap or alcohol solution. Doing so may damage the antiglare coating. NOTICE: Do not attempt to clean drive heads with a swab. You might accidentally misalign the heads, which prevents the drive from operating. CDs and DVDs 1. Hold the disc by its outer edge. It is okay to touch the inside edge of the center hole. 2. With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge of the disc. For stubborn dirt, try using water or a diluted solution of water and mild soap. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are safe to use on DVDs. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To prevent damaging the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc. Back to Contents Page Memory Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Memory Installation Guidelines Removing a Memory Module Adding a Memory Module You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. For information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see "Specifications." 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Memory Installation Guidelines l Memory module connectors must be upgraded in matched pairs. Memory module connectors 1 and 2 must contain modules of identical size, type, speed, and number of chips and memory module connectors 3 and 4 must contain modules of identical size, type, speed, and number of chips. To locate the memory sockets on the system board, see the system board components illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components") or the system board label inside your computer. l Before you install new memory modules, download the most recent BIOS for your computer from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Memory Module Label Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations Your computer supports a maximum of 4GB of memory when using four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP, can only utilize a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is slightly less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory. The following is a list of components that require memory address space: l System ROM l APIC(s) l Integrated PCI devices, such as network connector, SCSI controller, and IEEE 1394 controller l PCI and AGP cards l The AGP Aperture size specified in system setup CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. At start-up the BIOS identifies the components that require address space. The BIOS dynamically calculates the amount of reserved address space required. It then subtracts the reserved address space from 4 GB to determine the amount of usable space. l If the total installed computer memory is less than the usable space, all installed computer memory is available for use only by the operating system. l If the total installed computer memory is equal to or greater than the usable address space, a small portion of installed memory is available for use by the operating system. Removing a Memory Module 1. Press down and outward on the securing clips. 2. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. Adding a Memory Module 1. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 2. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. 3. Insert the module into the connector, ensuring that it fits into the guides at each end of the connector. Carefully press each end of the module into place. The memory module socket has alignment keys that allow the memory module to be installed in the socket only one way. 4. Pull up on the securing clips to lock the modules into place. 1 notch 2 memory module securing clips (2) 3 alignment keys 1 notch 2 memory module securing clips (2) 3 alignment keys If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. When the memory module is properly seated in the socket, the securing clips on the memory module socket should align with the securing clips on the other sockets with memory modules installed. 5. Close the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. The computer detects that the new memory does not match the existing configuration information and generates the following message: The amount of system memory has changed. Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility 7. Press to enter system setup and check the value for System Memory. The computer should have changed the value of System Memory to reflect the newly installed memory. Verify the new total. If it is correct, skip to step 10. 8. If the memory total is incorrect, turn off and disconnect your computer and devices from electrical outlets. 9. Open the computer cover and check the installed memory modules to ensure that they are seated properly in their sockets. Then repeat steps step 4 through step 7. 10. When the System Memory total is correct, press to exit system setup. 11. Run the Dell Diagnostics to verify that the memory modules are operating properly. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Getting Help Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Technical Assistance Problems With Your Order Product Information Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Before You Call Contacting Dell Technical Assistance If you need help with a technical problem, Dell is ready to assist you. 1. Complete the procedures in "Solving Problems." 2. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 3. Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and fill it out. 4. Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. 5. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, contact Dell. NOTE: Call technical support from a telephone near or at the computer so that technical support can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the technical support service, see "Technical Support Service." NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Online Services You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information. You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses: l World Wide Web www.dell.com/ www.dell.com/ap/ (Asian/Pacific countries only) www.euro.dell.com (Europe only) www.dell.com/la/ (Latin American countries) www.dell.ca (Canada only) l Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com/ Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. l Electronic Support Service mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only) support.euro.dell.com (Europe only) l Electronic Quote Service sales@dell.com CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer covers, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets.apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only) l Electronic Information Service info@dell.com AutoTech Service Dell's automated technical support service—AutoTech—provides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can also access this service through the technical support service. For the telephone  number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell™ products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Technical Support Service Dell's technical support service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our technical support staff uses  computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dell's technical support service, call the number for your country as listed in "Contacting Dell." Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call to speak to a sales specialist, see the contact numbers for your region. Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows: 1. Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. 2. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. 3. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics. 4. Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dell's receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell's automated- support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites: l www.dell.com l support.dell.com (technical support) l premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. Diagnostics Checklist Name: Date: Address: Phone number: Service Tag (bar code on the back of the computer): Express Service Code: Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician): Operating system and version: Devices: Expansion cards: Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network adapter: Programs and versions: See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system's start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code: Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed: Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Anguilla General Support toll-free: 800-335-0031 Antigua and Barbuda General Support 1-800-805-5924 Argentina (Buenos Aires) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 54 City Code: 11 Website: www.dell.com.ar Tech Support and Customer Care toll-free: 0-800-444-0733 Sales 0-810-444-3355 Tech Support Fax  11 4515 7139 Customer Care Fax  11 4515 7138 Aruba General Support toll-free: 800-1578 Australia (Sydney) International Access Code: 0011 Country Code: 61 City Code: 2 E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business 1-300-65-55-33 Government and Business toll-free: 1-800-633-559 Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) toll-free: 1-800-060-889 Customer Care toll-free: 1-800-819-339 Corporate Sales toll-free: 1-800-808-385 Transaction Sales toll-free: 1-800-808-312 Fax toll-free: 1-800-818-341 Austria (Vienna) International Access Code: 900 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Home/Small Business Sales 0820 240 530 00Country Code: 43 City Code: 1 Home/Small Business Fax 0820 240 530 49 Home/Small Business Customer Care 0820 240 530 14 Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care 0820 240 530 16 Home/Small Business Technical Support 0820 240 530 14 Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support 0660 8779 Switchboard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6818 Barbados General Support 1-800-534-3066 Belgium (Brussels) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 32 City Code: 2 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com E-mail for French Speaking Customers: support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Technical Support 02 481 92 88 Customer Care 02 481 91 19 Corporate Sales 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Switchboard 02 481 91 00 Bermuda General Support 1-800-342-0671 Bolivia General Support toll-free: 800-10-0238 Brazil International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 55 City Code: 51 Website: www.dell.com/br Customer Support, Technical Support 0800 90 3355 Tech Support Fax  51 481 5470 Customer Care Fax  51 481 5480 Sales 0800 90 3390 British Virgin Islands General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6820 Brunei Country Code: 673 Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4966 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4955 Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 Online Order Status: www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (automated technical support) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 TechFax toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 Customer Care (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Customer Care (med./large business, government) toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 Technical Support (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Technical Support (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5757 Sales (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 Sales (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5755 Spare Parts Sales & Extended Service Sales 1 866 440 3355 Cayman Islands General Support 1-800-805-7541 Chile (Santiago) Country Code: 56 City Code: 2 Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support toll-free: 1230-020-4823 China (Xiamen) Country Code: 86 City Code: 592 Tech Support website: support.ap.dell.com/china Tech Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com Tech Support Fax 818 1350 Home and Small Business Technical Support toll-free: 800 858 2437 Corporate Accounts Technical Support toll-free: 800 858 2333 Customer Experience toll-free: 800 858 2060 Home and Small Business toll-free: 800 858 2222 Preferred Accounts Division toll-free: 800 858 2062 Large Corporate Accounts GCP toll-free: 800 858 2055  Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts toll-free: 800 858 2628  Large Corporate Accounts North toll-free: 800 858 2999 Large Corporate Accounts North Government and Education toll-free: 800 858 2955 Large Corporate Accounts East toll-free: 800 858 2020 Large Corporate Accounts East Government and Education toll-free: 800 858 2669 Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team toll-free: 800 858 2572 Large Corporate Accounts South toll-free: 800 858 2355Large Corporate Accounts West toll-free: 800 858 2811  Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts toll-free: 800 858 2621 Colombia General Support 980-9-15-3978 Costa Rica General Support 0800-012-0435 Czech Republic (Prague) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 420 City Code: 2 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com Technical Support 02  2186 27 27 Customer Care 02  2186 27 11 Fax 02  2186 27 14 TechFax 02  2186 27 28 Switchboard 02  2186 27 11 Denmark (Copenhagen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 45 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers): den_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers): den_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers): Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support 7023 0182 Customer Care (Relational) 7023 0184 Home/Small Business Customer Care 3287 5505 Switchboard (Relational) 3287 1200 Fax Switchboard (Relational) 3287 1201 Switchboard (Home/Small Business) 3287 5000 Fax Switchboard (Home/Small Business) 3287 5001 Dominica General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6821 Dominican Republic General Support 1-800-148-0530 Ecuador General Support toll-free: 999-119 El Salvador General Support 01-899-753-0777 Finland (Helsinki) International Access Code: 990 Country Code: 358 City Code: 9 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: fin_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers): Nordic_support@dell.com Technical Support 09 253 313 60 Technical Support Fax 09 253 313 81 Relational Customer Care 09 253 313 38 Home/Small Business Customer Care 09 693 791 94 Fax 09 253 313 99 Switchboard 09 253 313 00 France (Paris) (Montpellier) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 33 City Codes: (1) (4) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Home and Small Business Technical Support 0825 387 270 Customer Care 0825 823 833 Switchboard 0825 004 700 Switchboard (calls from outside of France) 04 99 75 40 00 Sales 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (calls from outside of France) 04 99 75 40 01 Corporate Technical Support 0825 004 719 Customer Care 0825 338 339 Switchboard 01 55 94 71 00 Sales 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Germany (Langen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 49 City Code: 6103 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Technical Support 06103 766-7200 Home/Small Business Customer Care 0180-5-224400 Global Segment Customer Care 06103 766-9570 Preferred Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9420 Large Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9560 Public Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9555Switchboard 06103 766-7000 Greece International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 30 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Technical Support 080044149518 Gold Technical Support 08844140083 Switchboard 2108129800 Sales 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Grenada General Support toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala General Support 1-800-999-0136 Guyana General Support toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 Hong Kong International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 852 Website: support.ap.dell.com E-mail: ap_support@dell.com Technical Support (Dimension™ and Inspiron™) 296 93188 Technical Support (OptiPlex™, Latitude™, and Dell Precision™) 296 93191 Customer Service (non-technical, post-sales issues) 800 93 8291 Transaction Sales toll-free: 800 96 4109 Large Corporate Accounts HK toll-free: 800 96 4108 Large Corporate Accounts GCP HK toll-free: 800 90 3708 India Technical Support 1600 33 8045 Sales 1600 33 8044 Ireland (Cherrywood) International Access Code: 16 Country Code: 353 City Code: 1 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Ireland Technical Support 1850 543 543 U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) 0870 908 0800 Home User Customer Care 01 204 4014 Small Business Customer Care 01 204 4014 U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) 0870 906 0010 Corporate Customer Care 1850 200 982 Corporate Customer Care(dial within U.K. only) 0870 907 4499 Ireland Sales 01 204 4444 U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) 0870 907 4000 Fax/SalesFax 01 204 0103 Switchboard 01 204 4444 Italy (Milan) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 39 City Code: 02 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Home and Small Business Technical Support 02 577 826 90 Customer Care 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Switchboard 02 696 821 12 Corporate Technical Support 02 577 826 90 Customer Care 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Switchboard 02 577 821  Jamaica General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 1-800-682-3639 Japan (Kawasaki) International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 81 City Code: 44 Website: support.jp.dell.com Technical Support (servers) toll-free: 0120-198-498 Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) 81-44-556-4162 Technical Support (Dimension™ and Inspiron™) toll-free: 0120-198-226 Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Technical Support (Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, and Latitude™) toll-free:0120-198-433 Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Faxbox Service 044-556-3490 24-Hour Automated Order Service 044-556-3801 Customer Care 044-556-4240 Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) 044-556-1465 Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400 employees) 044-556-3433Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500 employees) 044-556-3430 Public Sales (government agencies, educational institutions, and medical institutions) 044-556-1469 Global Segment Japan 044-556-3469 Individual User 044-556-1760 Switchboard 044-556-4300 Korea (Seoul) International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 82 City Code: 2 Technical Support toll-free: 080-200-3800 Sales toll-free: 080-200-3600 Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) toll-free: 080-200-3800 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Fax 2194-6202 Switchboard 2194-6000 Latin America Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4093 Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-3619 Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service) (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-3883 Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4397 SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4600 or 512 728-3772 Luxembourg International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 352 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) 3420808075 Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) toll-free: 080016884 Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 91 00 Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 91 19 Fax (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 92 99 Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 91 00 Macao Country Code: 853 Technical Support toll-free: 0800 582 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Transaction Sales toll-free: 0800 581 Malaysia (Penang) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 60 City Code: 4 Technical Support toll-free: 1 800 888 298 Customer Service 04 633 4949 Transaction Sales toll-free: 1 800 888 202 Corporate Sales toll-free: 1 800 888 213 Mexico International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 52 Customer Technical Support 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 Sales 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 Customer Service 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 Main 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6822 Netherlands Antilles General Support 001-800-882-1519 Netherlands (Amsterdam) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 31 City Code: 20 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Technical Support): (Enterprise): nl_server_support@dell.com (Latitude): nl_latitude_support@dell.com (Inspiron): nl_inspiron_support@dell.com (Dimension): nl_dimension_support@dell.com (OptiPlex): nl_optiplex_support@dell.com (Dell Precision): nl_workstation_support@dell.com Technical Support 020 674 45 00 Technical Support Fax 020 674 47 66 Home/Small Business Customer Care 020 674 42 00Relational Customer Care  020 674 4325 Home/Small Business Sales 020 674 55 00 Relational Sales 020 674 50 00 Home/Small Business Sales Fax 020 674 47 75 Relational Sales Fax 020 674 47 50 Switchboard 020 674 50 00 Switchboard Fax 020 674 47 50 New Zealand International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 64 E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business 0800 446 255 Government and Business 0800 444 617 Sales 0800 441 567 Fax 0800 441 566 Nicaragua General Support 001-800-220-1006 Norway (Lysaker) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 47 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers): nor_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers): nor_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers): nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support 671 16882 Relational Customer Care 671 17514 Home/Small Business Customer Care 23162298 Switchboard 671 16800 Fax Switchboard 671 16865 Panama General Support 001-800-507-0962 Peru General Support 0800-50-669 Poland (Warsaw) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 48 City Code: 22 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Customer Service Phone  57 95 700 Customer Care  57 95  999 Sales  57 95 999 Customer Service Fax  57 95 806 Reception Desk Fax  57 95 998 Switchboard  57 95 999 Portugal International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 351 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Technical Support 707200149 Customer Care 800 300 413 Sales 800 300 410 or  800 300 411 or   800 300 412 or 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 Puerto Rico General Support 1-800-805-7545 St. Kitts and Nevis General Support toll-free: 1-877-441-4731 St. Lucia General Support 1-800-882-1521 St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 Singapore (Singapore) International Access Code: 005 Country Code: 65 Technical Support toll-free: 800 6011 051 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Transaction Sales toll-free: 800 6011 054 Corporate Sales toll-free: 800 6011 053 South Africa (Johannesburg) International Access Code: 09/091 Country Code: 27 City Code: 11 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Technical Support 011 709 7710 Customer Care 011 709 7707 Sales 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Switchboard 011 709 7700Southeast Asian and Pacific Countries Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and Sales (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4810 Spain (Madrid) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 34 City Code: 91 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Home and Small Business Technical Support 902 100 130 Customer Care 902 118 540 Sales 902 118 541 Switchboard 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Corporate Technical Support 902 100 130 Customer Care 902 118 546 Switchboard 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Sweden (Upplands Vasby) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 46 City Code: 8 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swe_support@dell.com E-mail Support for Latitude and Inspiron: Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for OptiPlex: Swe_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for Servers: Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support 08 590 05 199 Relational Customer Care 08 590 05 642 Home/Small Business Customer Care 08 587 70 527 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support 20 140 14 44 Fax Technical Support 08 590 05 594 Sales 08 590 05 185 Switzerland (Geneva) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 41 City Code: 22 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swisstech@dell.com E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate Customers: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Technical Support (Home and Small Business) 0844 811 411 Technical Support (Corporate) 0844 822 844 Customer Care (Home and Small Business) 0848 802 202 Customer Care (Corporate) 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Switchboard 022 799 01 01 Taiwan International Access Code: 002 Country Code: 886 Technical Support (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 00801 86 1011 Technical Support (servers) toll-free: 0080 60 1256 Transaction Sales toll-free: 0080 651 228 or 0800 33 556 Corporate Sales toll-free: 0080 651 227 or 0800 33 555 Thailand International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 66 Technical Support toll-free: 0880 060 07 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Sales toll-free: 0880 060 09 Trinidad/Tobago General Support 1-800-805-8035 Turks and Caicos Islands General Support toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 U.K. (Bracknell) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 44 City Code: 1344 Website: support.euro.dell.com Customer Care website: support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred Accounts/PAD [1000+ employees]) 0870 908 0500 Technical Support (direct/PAD and general) 0870 908 0800 Global Accounts Customer Care 01344 373 186 Home and Small Business Customer Care 0870 906 0010 Corporate Customer Care 01344 373 185 Preferred Accounts (500–5000 employees) Customer Care 0870 906 0010Back to Contents Page Central Government Customer Care 01344 373 193 Local Government & Education Customer Care 01344 373 199 Health Customer Care 01344 373 194 Home and Small Business Sales 0870 907 4000 Corporate/Public Sector Sales 01344 860 456 Uruguay General Support toll-free: 000-413-598-2521 U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Automated Order-Status Service toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 Consumer (Home and Home Office)   Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 Customer Service toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 DellNet™ Service and Support toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) toll-free: 1-800-283-2210 Business Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Projectors Technical Support toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 Public (government, education, and healthcare)  Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 Dell Sales toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-3355 Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 Software and Peripherals Sales toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 Spare Parts Sales toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 Extended Service and Warranty Sales toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 Fax toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Speech-Impaired toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) U.S. Virgin Islands General Support 1-877-673-3355 Venezuela General Support 8001-3605Back to Contents Page About Your Computer—Dell Precision 450 Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Front View Back View Inside Your Computer System Board Components Front View Back View 1 floppy-drive light button The floppy-drive light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the floppy drive. Wait until this light turns off before you remove the floppy disk from the drive. 2 hard-drive light The hard-drive light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as your CD player is operating. 3 CD/DVD drive Access the CD or DVD drive. 4 diagnostic lights (4) Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights." 5 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. 6 headphone connector Attach headphones. 7 power button Press this button to turn on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform a Microsoft® Windows®  shutdown. 8 power light The power light illuminates and blinks or remains solid to indicate the following different states: No light — The computer is in the off state. Steady green —The computer is in a normal operating state. Blinking green —The computer is in a power-saving state. To exit from a power-saving state, press the power button or use the keyboard or the mouse if it is configured as a wake device in the Windows Device Manager. For more information about sleep states and exiting from a power-saving state, see "Power Button." See "Diagnostic Lights" for a description of light codes that can help you troubleshoot problems with your computer.Back Panel Connectors 1 cover release latch Push the latch to the left to open the computer cover. 2 padlock ring Insert a padlock to lock the computer cover. 3 power connector Insert the power cable. 4 card slots (4) Access connectors for any installed PCI and AGP cards. 5 back panel connectors Plug serial, USB, and other devices into the appropriate connector. 1 parallel connector Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB connector. NOTE: The integrated parallel connector is automatically disabled if the computer detects an installed card containing a parallel connector configured to the same address. For more information, see "System Setup Options." 2 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and speakers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 3 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 4 mouse connector Plug a standard mouse into the green mouse connector. Turn off the computer and any attached devices before you connect a mouse to the computer. If you have a USB mouse, plug it into a USB connector. If your computer is running the Microsoft® Windows® 2000 or Windows XP operating system, the necessary mouse drivers have been installed on your hard drive. 5 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1 Gb (or 1000-Mbps) connection. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 6 network connector Attach the UTP cable to an RJ45 jack wall plate or to an RJ45 port on a UTP concentrator or hub and press the other end of the UTP cable into the network connector until the cable snaps securely into place. The use of Category 5 wiring and connectors is recommended for our customers' networks. If Category 3 wiring must be used, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. 7 network activity light The yellow light flashes when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state. 8 USB 2.0connectors (2) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. 9 USB 2.0 connectors Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. Inside Your Computer Cable Colors (2) It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. 10 keyboard connector If you have a standard keyboard, plug it into the purple keyboard connector. If you have a USB keyboard, plug it into a USB connector. 11 microphone connector Use the pink microphone connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, use the microphone connector on the card. 12 serial connector (COM 2) Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. The default designations are COM1 for serial connector 1 and COM2 for serial connector 2. For more information, see "System Setup Options." 13 serial connector (COM 1) Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. The default designations are COM1 for serial connector 1 and COM2 for serial connector 2. For more information, see "System Setup Options." CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. CAUTION: To avoid electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Be careful when opening the computer cover to ensure that you do not accidentally disconnect cables from the system board. 1 CD/DVD drive 6 microprocessor airflow shroud 2 floppy drive 7 security cable slot 3 hard drive 8 system board 4 power supply 9 chassis intrusion switch 5 padlock ring Device Cable Color Hard drive Blue pull tab Floppy drive Black pull tab CD/DVD drive Orange pull tabSystem Board Components Back to Contents Page I/O panel Yellow pull tab 1 CD/DVD drive connector (IDE2) 14 PCI card connectors (PCI1, PCI2 [32-bit connectors], and PCI3 [64-bit PCI-X connector]) 2 I/O panel (I/O PANEL) 15 telephony connector (MODEM) 3 floppy drive connector (DISKETTE) 16 AGP card connector (AGP) 4 memory module connectors (DIMM_1, DIMM_2, DIMM_3, DIMM_4) 17 VRM connector (VRM) (for a second microprocessor only) 5 suspend-to-RAM light (STR_LED) 18 microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_1) 6 power connector (POWER 2) 19 front-panel audio connector (FP2AUDIO) 7 power connector (POWER 1) 20 microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_0) 8 USB connector (USB) 21 microprocessor fan connector (FAN_P1) 9 hard-drive connector (IDE1) 22 microprocessor fan connector (FAN_P0)) 10 real-time clock reset jumper (RTCRST) 23 battery socket (BATTERY) 11 password jumper (PSWD) 24 internal speaker (SPKR) 12 auxiliary LED add-in storage adapter connector (AUX_LED) 25 CD drive audio cable connector (CD_IN)  13 standby power light (AUX_PWR_LED)Back to Contents Page Drives Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Overview Hard Drive Floppy Drive CD/DVD Drive Overview Your computer supports: l Two hard drives (Your computer supports SCSI with an add-in controller, IDE, and Serial ATA.) l One floppy drive l Two CD or DVD drives IDE Drive Addressing When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on the interface cable is the primary (master) or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the secondary (slave) device (drive 1). See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting. Since cable select is the default setting, any additional drives that are installed do not need to be set as a primary or secondary drive. Your computer supports up to two IDE devices. Hard drives should be connected to the connector labeled "IDE1," and CD/DVD drives should be connected to the connector labeled "IDE2." Connect serial ATA drives to the connectors labeled "SATA_0" or "SATA_1." Connecting Drive Cables When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and an interface cable—to the back of the drive. 1 hard drive(s) 2 floppy drive(s) 3 CD/DVD drives(s)Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the cable) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1" printed directly on the board or card. SCSI Device Installation Guidelines This section describes how to configure and install SCSI devices in your computer. SCSI ID Numbers Internal SCSI devices must have a unique SCSI ID number from 0 to 15. If you are using the SCSI connector on the system board and a SCSI controller card NOTICE: If your system was purchased with a Serial ATA hard drive, the system includes the newer style Serial ATA style power connector. If you are adding a Serial ATA hard drive to a system that was not originally equipped with one and the drive you are adding requires the new style Serial ATA power connector, you may need to obtain a power adapter cable from Dell. If you need a Serial ATA power adapter cable, see Contacting Dell for the number to call for assistance. IDE Drive Connector Serial ATA Connector 1 power cable 2 power input connector 1 interface connector 2 colored stripe on cable 3 interface cable NOTICE: When you connect an interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both. NOTE: The system board SCSI controller supports hard drives only. Do not connect CD or DVD drives, tape drives, DAT drives, and so on. installed in your computer, you have two separate SCSI buses operating. Each SCSI bus has a set of SCSI ID numbers from 0 to 15. When SCSI devices are shipped from the factory, the default SCSI ID numbers are assigned as follows: SCSI devices installed by Dell are configured correctly during the manufacturing process. You do not need to set the SCSI ID for these SCSI devices. If you attach additional optional SCSI devices, see the documentation for each device for information about setting the appropriate SCSI ID number. Device Termination SCSI logic requires that termination be enabled for the two devices at opposite ends of the SCSI chain and disabled for all devices in between. It is recommended that you use terminated cables and that you disable termination on all devices. See the documentation provided with any optional SCSI device you purchase for information on disabling termination on the device. General Guidelines Follow these general guidelines when installing SCSI devices in your computer: l Although you install SCSI devices essentially the same way as other devices, their configuration requirements are different. For details on configuring your particular SCSI subsystem, see the documentation for your SCSI devices and/or your host adapter card. l Configure the device for a SCSI ID number and disable termination, if necessary. l To use an external SCSI device, you must have a SCSI controller card installed in your computer. Connect one end of the external SCSI cable to the connector on the back of the SCSI device. Attach the other end of the external SCSI cable to the connector on the controller card installed in the computer. l After you install a SCSI hard drive, Primary Drive 0 and Primary Drive 1 should be set to None in system setup if no EIDE hard drives are installed. If you have any EIDE devices on the second EIDE channel, such as a CD or tape drive, Secondary Drive 0 and/or Secondary Drive 1 should be set to Auto. l You may need to use programs other than those provided with the operating system to partition and format SCSI hard drives. See the documentation that came with your SCSI software drivers for information on installing the appropriate drivers and preparing your SCSI hard drive for use. SCSI Cables Ultra 320 (optional on the Dell Precision 450 computer), Ultra 160/m and Ultra2/Wide LVD drives (typically hard drives) both use a 68-pin cable. One end of the cable attaches to the SCSI connector on the system board or the SCSI controller card installed in your computer. The remaining connectors on the cable attach to the various drives. Narrow SCSI drives (tape drives, CD drives, and some hard drives) use a 50-pin cable. One end of this cable attaches to the SCSI controller card. The remaining connectors on the cable attach to the various Narrow SCSI devices. Hard Drive 1. If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure. 2. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 3. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. System Board Controller Controller Card Device ID Device ID Controller 7 Controller 7 Boot hard drive 0 Boot hard drive 0 CD or DVD drive 5 tape or DAT drive 6 NOTE: There is no requirement that SCSI ID numbers be assigned sequentially or that devices be attached to the cable in order by ID number. If two or more devices use the same ID, your computer may hang during POST and in SCSI BIOS. NOTICE: Dell recommends that you use only SCSI cables purchased from Dell. Cables purchased elsewhere are not guaranteed to work with Dell computers. NOTICE: Dell recommends that you use only SCSI cables purchased from Dell. Cables purchased elsewhere are not guaranteed to work with Dell computers. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. 4. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 5. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 6. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 7. Open the computer cover. Removing a Hard Drive 1. Disconnect the power and hard-drive cables from the drive. IDE/SCSI Drive Serial ATA Drive NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 1 hard-drive cable 2 power cable2. Press in on the tabs on each side of the drive and slide the drive up and out. IDE/SCSI Drive Serial ATA Drive 1 power cable 2 serial ATA hard-drive cable 1 tab (2) 2 hard driveInstalling a Hard Drive 1. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 2. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 3. If your replacement hard drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket rails to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 4. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. IDE/SCSI Drive 1 tab (2) 2 hard drive 1 drive 2 bracket rails (2) 3 screws (4) NOTE: If you are installing a hard drive in the lower bay, the drive should be placed in the bay so that the power connector is on the left-hand side (opposite of the top hard drive). Serial ATA Drive 5. If you are installing a drive that has its own controller card, install the controller card in an expansion slot. See the documentation that accompanied the drive and controller card to verify that the configuration is correct for your computer. 6. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. IDE/SCSI Drive NOTICE: Match the colored strip on the cable with pin 1 on the drive (pin 1 is marked as "1"). Serial ATA Drive 7. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 8. Close the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 10. If the drive you just installed is the primary drive, insert a bootable floppy disk into drive A. 1 hard-drive cable 2 power cable 1 power cable 2 serial ATA hard-drive cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 11. Turn on the computer. 12. Enter system setup, and update the your drive configuration. 13. After you have updated the system settings, exit system setup, and restart the computer. 14. Partition and logically format your drive before you proceed to the next step. See the documentation for your operating system for instructions. 15. Test the hard drive by running the Dell Diagnostics. 16. If the drive you just installed is the primary drive, install your operating system on the hard drive. Floppy Drive 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Removing a Floppy Drive 1. Disconnect the power and floppy-drive cables from the back of the floppy drive. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 1 power cable 2 floppy-drive cable2. Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, slide the drive upward, and remove it from the floppy-drive bay. Installing a Floppy Drive 1. If you are replacing a drive and the the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 2. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 3 floppy-drive connector (DSKT) 1 tabs (2) 2 floppy drive 1 drive 2 bracket rails (2) 3 screws (4)3. Attach the power and floppy-drive cables to the floppy drive. 4. If you are installing a new floppy drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front- panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 5. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 6. Close the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 8. Enter system setup and update the appropriate Diskette Drive A option to reflect the size and capacity of your new floppy drive. 9. To verify that your computer works correctly, run the Dell Diagnostics. 1 power cable 2 floppy-drive cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CD/DVD Drive 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Disconnect the power and CD/DVD drive cables from the back of the drive. 2. Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, and then slide the drive upward and remove it from the drive bay. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 1 CD/DVD drive cable 2 power cableInstalling a CD/DVD Drive 1. If you are installing a new drive, unpack the drive and prepare it for installation. Check the documentation that accompanied the drive to verify that the drive is configured for your computer. If you are installing an IDE drive, configure the drive for the cable select setting. 2. Connect the new drive to the set of rails that are attached to the inside of the computer cover. If a set of rails is not attached inside the cover, see Contacting Dell for the number to call for assistance. 3. If you are installing a replacement drive and the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 4. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 1 tabs (2) 2 CD/DVD drive 1 drive 2 bracket rails (2) 3 screws (4)5. If you are installing a drive that has its own controller card, install the controller card in an expansion slot. See the documentation that accompanied the drive and controller card to verify that the configuration is correct for your computer. 6. Connect the power and CD/DVD drive cables to the drive. If you are adding a drive that has an audio cable, connect the audio cable to the audio connector on the system board. 7. If you are installing a new CD/DVD drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front-panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 1 audio cable (some drives do not have this cable) 2 CD/DVD drive cable 3 power cable8. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 9. Close the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 11. Update your configuration information by setting the appropriate Drive option (0 or 1) under Drives: Secondary to Auto. See "Primary Drive n and Secondary Drive n" for more information. 12. To verify that your computer works correctly, run the Dell Diagnostics Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Regulatory Notices Dell Precision™ Workstation 450 and Dell Precision Workstation 650 User's Guide Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computer systems, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer system has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: l Reorient the receiving antenna. l Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. l Move the computer away from the receiver. l Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Dell computer systems are designed, tested, and classified for their intended electromagnetic environment. These electromagnetic environment classifications generally refer to the following harmonized definitions: l Class A is typically for business or industrial environments. l Class B is typically for residential environments. Information Technology Equipment (ITE), including peripherals, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, that are integrated into or connected to the system should match the electromagnetic environment classification of the computer system. A Notice About Shielded Signal Cables: Use only shielded cables for connecting peripherals to any Dell device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio communications services. Using shielded cables ensures that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell on the World Wide Web at accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. Most Dell computer systems are classified for Class B environments. However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. To determine the electromagnetic classification for your system or device, refer to the following sections specific for each regulatory agency. Each section provides country-specific EMC/EMI or product safety information. FCC Notices (U.S. Only) Most Dell computer systems are classified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification applies to your computer system, examine all FCC registration labels located on the bottom or back panel of your computer, on card-mounting brackets, and on the cards themselves. If any one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire system is considered to be a Class A digital device. If all labels carry an FCC Class B rating as distinguished by either an FCC ID number or the FCC logo, ( ), your system is considered to be a Class B digital device. Once you have determined your system's FCC classification, read the appropriate FCC notice. Note that FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Class A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense. Class B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with FCC regulations: l Model numbers: WHL and WHMl Company name: Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA (512) 338-4400 IC Notice (Canada Only) Most Dell computer systems (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES- 003) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer system (or other Dell digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located on the bottom or the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus). A statement in the form of "IC Class A ICES-003" or "IC Class B ICES-003" will be located on one of these labels. Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. CE Notice (European Union) Marking by the symbol indicates compliance of this Dell computer to the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following technical standards: l EN 55022 — "Information Technology Equipment — Radio Disturbance Characteristics — Limits and Methods of Measurement." l EN 55024 — "Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement." l EN 61000-3-2 — "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Up to  and Including 16 A Per Phase)." l EN 61000-3-3 — "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up to and Including 16 A." l EN 60950 — "Safety of Information Technology Equipment." NOTE:EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications: l Class A is for typical commercial areas. If the label indicates a Class B rating, the following Class B statement applies to your computer: l Class B is for typical domestic areas. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine the system information/regulatory label located on the back, side, or bottom panel of the computer. This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment. A "Declaration of Conformity" in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is on file at Dell Computer Corporation Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland. ENERGY STAR® Compliance Certain configurations of Dell™ computers comply with the requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for energy-efficient computers. If the front panel of your computer bears the ENERGY STAR® Emblem, your original configuration complies with these requirements and all ENERGY STAR®  power management features of the computer are enabled. NOTE:Any Dell computer bearing the ENERGY STAR® Emblem is certified to comply with EPA ENERGY STAR® requirements as configured when shipped by Dell. Any changes you make to this configuration (such as installing additional expansion cards or drives) may increase the computer's power consumption beyond the limits set by the EPA's ENERGY STAR® Computers program. ENERGY STAR® Emblem The EPA's ENERGY STAR® Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers to reduce air pollution by promoting energyefficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR® computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. In turn, this reduction in electricity usage can reduce emissions of carbon dioxide, the gas primarily responsible for the greenhouse effect, and sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the primary causes of acid rain. You can also help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your computer when it is not in use for extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends.EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) VCCI Notice (Japan Only) Most Dell computer systems are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class B information technology equipment (ITE). However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. ITE, including peripherals, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, integrated into or connected to the system should match the electromagnetic environment classification (Class A or B) of the computer system. To determine which classification applies to your computer system, examine the regulatory labels/markings (see "VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark" and "VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark") located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer. Once you have determined your system's VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice. Class A ITE This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product: Class B ITE This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product: MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital device), examine the Republic of Korean Ministry of Information and Communications (MIC) registration labels located on your computer (or other Dell digital device). The MIC label may be located separately from the other regulatory marking applied to your product. Line two of the label identifies the emissions class for the product—"(A)" for Class A products or "(B)" for Class B products.NOTE: MIC emissions requirements provide for two classifications: l Class A devices are for business purposes. l Class B devices are for nonbusiness purposes. Class A Device Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a nonbusiness-purpose device. MIC Class A Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product: Class B Device Please note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any environment, including residential areas. MIC Class B Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product. Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice The equipment should draw power from a socket with an attached protection circuit (a three-prong socket). All equipment that works together (computer, monitor, printer, and so on) should have the same power supply source. The phasing conductor of the room's electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection device in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than 16 amperes (A). To completely switch off the equipment, the power supply cable must be removed from the power supply socket, which should be located near the equipment and easily accessible. A protection mark "B" confirms that the equipment is in compliance with the protection usage requirements of standards PN-93/T-42107 and PN-EN 55022: 1996.BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only)NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Back to Contents Page Exporter: Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importer: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Ship to: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peñon de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Model number: WHM and WHL Supply voltage: 115/230 VAC Frequency: 60–50 Hz Input current rating: 6.0/3.0 ABack to Contents Page Ergonomic Computing Habits Dell Precision™ Workstation 450 and Dell Precision Workstation 650 User's Guide For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your computer: l Position your computer so that the monitor and keyboard are directly in front of you as you work. Special shelves are available (from Dell and other sources) to help you correctly position your keyboard. l Set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance (usually 510 to 610 millimeters [20 to 24 inches] from your eyes). l Make sure the monitor screen is at eye level or slightly lower when you are sitting in front of the monitor. l Adjust the tilt of the monitor, its contrast and brightness settings, and the lighting around you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize reflections and glare on the monitor screen. l Use a chair that provides good lower back support. l Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position while using the keyboard or mouse. l Always leave space to rest your hands while using the keyboard or mouse. l Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides. l Sit erect, with your feet resting on the floor and your thighs level. l When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on your feet and not on the front of your chair seat. Adjust your chair's height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture. l Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work so that you do not have to type for extended periods of time. When you stop typing, try to do things that use both hands. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. 1 monitor screen at or below eye level 2 monitor and keyboard positioned directly in front of the user 3 monitor stand 4 feet flat on the floor 5 arms at desk level 6 wrists relaxed and flat Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts—Dell Precision 450 Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Opening the Computer Cover Memory Cards Drives Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Microprocessor VRM Battery Closing the Computer Cover Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Installing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1. Press the shroud release lever towards the front of the computer. 2. Lift the shroud up to disengage the anchors. 3. Once the shroud has been disengaged from the anchors, unplug the fan cables from their connectors on the system board. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the fan power cables, do not slide the shroud too quickly. 1 shroud release lever 2 anchor tabs 3 anchor slotsInstalling the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1. Attach both fan power cables to the connectors on the system board. 2. Align the anchor tabs with the securing slots. 3. Gently press the shroud until the anchor tabs snap securely into place. 4. Close the computer cover. 5. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Ergonomic Computing Habits Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your computer workstation: l Position your computer so that the monitor and keyboard are directly in front of you as you work. Special shelves are commercially available to help you correctly position your keyboard. l Set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance (usually 450 to 610 millimeters [18 to 24 inches] from your eyes). l Make sure the monitor screen is at eye level or slightly lower when you are sitting in front of the monitor. l Adjust the tilt of the monitor, its contrast and brightness settings, and the lighting around you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize reflections and glare on the monitor screen. l Use a chair that provides good lower back support. l Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position while using the keyboard or mouse. l Always leave space to rest your hands while using the keyboard or mouse. l Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides. l Ensure that your feet are resting flat on the floor. l When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on your feet and not on the front of your chair seat. Adjust your chair's height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture. l Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work so that you do not have to type for extended periods of time. When you stop typing, try to do things that use both hands. For more information about ergonomic computing habits, see the BSR/HFES 100 standard, which can be purchased on the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society (HFES) website at: www.hfes.org/publications/HFES100.html References: 1. American National Standards Institute. ANSI/HFES 100: American National Standards for Human Factors Engineering of Visual Display Terminal Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors Society, Inc., 1988. 2. Human Factors and Ergonomics Society. BSR/HFES 100 Draft standard for trial use: Human Factors Engineering of Computer Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. 1 monitor screen at or below eye level 4 feet flat on the floor 2 monitor and keyboard positioned directly in front of the user 5 wrists relaxed and flat 3 monitor standHuman Factors and Ergonomics Society, 2002. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO 9241 Ergonomics requirements for office work with visual display terminals (VDTs). Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1992. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Glossary Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide A B C D E F G H I K L M N P R S T U V W Z A AC — alternating current — The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable into an electrical outlet. ACPI — advanced configuration and power interface — A power management specification that enables Microsoft® Windows® operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP — accelerated graphics port — A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer memory. Antivirus software — A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. ASF — alert standards format — A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B Backup — A copy of a program or data file on a floppy disk, CD, or hard drive. As a precaution, back up the data files from your hard drive regularly. BIOS — basic input/output system — A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. Also referred to as the system setup program. Bit — The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. Boot sequence — Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. Bootable CD — A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or bootable disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities CD is a bootable CD. Bootable disk — A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable disk or bootable CD available. bps — bits per second — The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU — British thermal unit — A measurement of heat output. Bus — A communication pathway between the components in your computer. Bus speed — The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. Byte — The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C — Celsius — A temperature measurement system where 0° is the freezing point and 100° is the boiling point of water.  Cache — A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many microprocessor operations. L1 cache — Primary cache stored inside the microprocessor. L2 cache — Secondary cache which can either be external to the microprocessor or incorporated into the microprocessor architecture. CD — compact disc — An optical form of storage media, typically used for audio and software programs. CD drive — A drive that uses optical technology to read data from CDs. CD player — The software used to play music CDs. The CD player displays a window with buttons you use to play a CD. CD-R — CD recordable — A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW — CD rewritable — A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a CD-RW, and then erased and written over (rewritten). CD-RW drive — A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. Clock speed — The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. COA — Certificate of Authenticity — The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. You may need the COA to complete the operating system setup or reinstallation. Also referred to as the Product Key or Product ID. Control Panel — A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such as display settings. Controller — A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or between the microprocessor and devices. CRIMM — continuity rambus in-line memory module — A special module that has no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots. Cursor — The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow. D DDR SDRAM — double-data-rate SDRAM — A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. Device — Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your computer. Device driver — See driver. DIN connector — A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche Industrinorm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. Disk striping — A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width. DMA — direct memory access — A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the microprocessor. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — A consortium of hardware and software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise and Internet environments. DRAM — dynamic random-access memory — Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. Driver — Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — A technology that provides a constant, high-speed Internet connection through an analog telephone line. Dual display mode — A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD — digital versatile disc — A disc usually used to store movies. DVDs are double-sided, whereas CDs are single-sided. DVD drives read most CD media as well. DVD drive — A drive that uses optical technology to read data from DVDs and CDs. DVD player — The software used to watch DVD movies. The DVD player displays a window with buttons that you use to watch a movie. DVD+RW drive — A drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI — digital video interface — A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display; the DVI adapter works through the computer's integrated graphics. E ECC — error checking and correction — A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP — extended capabilities port — A parallel connector design that provides improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, it uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves performance. EIDE — enhanced integrated device electronics — An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives and CD drives. EMI — electromagnetic interference — Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR® — EPA requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP — enhanced parallel port — A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD — electrostatic discharge — A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. Expansion card — A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the computer's system board, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. Expansion slot — A connector on the computer's system board where you insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus. Express Service Code — A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell™ computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance.  Extended Display Mode — A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. Extended PC Card — A PC card that extends beyond the edge of the PC card slot when installed. F F — Fahrenheit — A temperature measurement system where 32° is the freezing point and 212° is the boiling point of water. FCC — Federal Communications Commission — A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-related regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. Floppy drive — A disk drive that can read and write to floppy disks. Folder — A place to organize and group files on a disk or drive. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. Format — The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB — front side bus — The data path and physical interface between the microprocessor and RAM. FTP — file transfer protocol — A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G — gravity — A measurement of weight and force. GB — gigabyte — For memory, a gigabyte is a unit of data that equals 1024 MB (1,073,741,824 bytes); for storage, a gigabyte equals 16 Mb, or 1 billion bytes. GHz — gigahertz — A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. Graphics mode — A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI — graphical user interface — Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Microsoft Windows operating systems are GUIs. H Hard drive — A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. Heat sink — A metal plate on some microprocessors that helps dissipate heat. Hibernate mode — A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTML — hypertext markup language — A set of codes inserted into an Internet web page intended for display on an Internet browser. HTTP — hypertext transfer protocol — A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. Hz — hertz — A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC — Industry Canada — The Canadian regulatory body responsible for regulating emissions from electronic equipment, much as the FCC does in the United States. IDE — integrated device electronics — An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — A high-performance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. Integrated — Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computer's system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O — input/output — An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices. I/O address — An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the microprocessor to communicate with that device. IRQ — interrupt request — An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the microprocessor. Each device connection must be assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP — Internet service provider — A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K Kb — kilobit — A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. KB — kilobyte — A unit of data that equals 1024 bits but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. kHz — kilohertz — A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN — local area network — A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance via telephone lines and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LED — light-emitting diode — An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. Local bus — A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the microprocessor. LPT — Line print terminal — The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M Mb — megabit — A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 KB. Mbps — megabits per second — One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB — megabyte — A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to mean 1,000,000 bytes. MB/sec — megabytes per second — One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for data transfer ratings. Memory — A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, Dell recommends that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM. Memory address — A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. Memory mapping — The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the microprocessor can access. MHz — megahertz — A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are typically measured in MHz. Microprocessor — A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the microprocessor is referred to as the processor or the CPU (central processing unit). Modem — A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange e-mail. Monitor — The high-resolution TV-like device that displays your computer's output. Mouse — A pointing device that controls the movement of the cursor on your screen. Typically you roll the mouse along a hard, flat surface to move the pointer or cursor on your screen. ms — millisecond — A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms. N Network adapter — A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface controller). NIC — See network adapter. Notification area — The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as system tray. ns — nanosecond — A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM — nonvolatile random access memory — A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set. P Parallel connector — An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to as an LPT port. Partition — A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PCI — peripheral component interconnect — PCI is a local bus that supports 32- and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the microprocessor and devices such as video, drives, and networks. PIO — programmed input/output — A method of transferring data between two devices through the microprocessor as part of the data path. Pixel — A single point on a display screen arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. Plug-and-Play — The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST — power-on self-test — Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up. Program — Any software that processes data for you, including spreadsheet, word processor, database, and game packages. Programs require an operating system to run. PS/2 — personal system/2 — A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or keypad. PXE — pre-boot execution environment — A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. R RAID — redundant array of independent disks — A system of two or more drives working together for performance and fault tolerance. RAID drives are typically used on servers and high-end PCs. The three most common RAID levels are 0, 3, and 5: l Level 0: Provides data striping but no redundancy. Level 0 improves performance but does not provide fault tolerance. l Level 3: Same as Level 0, but also reserves one dedicated drive for error correction data, providing good performance and some level of fault tolerance. l Level 5: Provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information, resulting in excellent performance and good fault tolerance. RAM — random-access memory — The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you turn off your computer. Readme file — A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. Read-Only — Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if: l It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk. l It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. Refresh rate — The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged (sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye. Resolution — The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI — radio frequency interference — Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations such as infrared and light. ROM — read-only memory — Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you turn off your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your computer reside in ROM. RPM — revolutions per minute — The number of rotations that occur per minute. RTC — real time clock — Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you turn off the computer. RTCRST — real time clock reset — A jumper on the system board that can often be used for troubleshooting problems. S ScanDisk — A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard drive's surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs after a lockup occurs. SDRAM — synchronous dynamic random-access memory — A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the microprocessor. Serial connector — An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. Service tag — A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer or technical support. Setup program — A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup program. Shortcut — An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and double-click the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. Shutdown — The process of closing windows and programs, exiting the operating system, and turning off your computer. You can lose data if you turn off your computer before completing a shutdown. Software — Anything that can be stored electronically, such as computer files or programs. Standby mode — A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. Surge protectors — Prevents voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. They do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC line voltage level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from the network connector during electrical storms. System board — The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. System setup program — A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. System tray — The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as notification area. T TAPI — telephony application programming interface — Enables Microsoft Windows program applications to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, video, and so on. Text editor — A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). U UPS — uninterruptible power supply — A backup power source used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB — universal serial bus — A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, or printer. Devices are plugged directly into a 4-pin socket on your computer or into a multi-port hub that plugs into your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP — unshielded twisted pair — a type of cable that consists of two unshielded wires twisted around each other. These cables are used for LANs and telephone connections. V Video controller — The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilities—in combination with the monitor—for your computer. Video memory — Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display. Video mode — A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as the Windows operating system, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. Video resolution — See resolution. Virus — A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another via an infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may replicate itself onto all of the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V — volt — The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W — watt — The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WHr — watt-hour — A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66 WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. Wallpaper — The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper. Write-Protected — Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To writeprotect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position. Z ZIF — zero insertion force — A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. Zip — A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of .exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. Zip drive — A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and they hold up to 100 MB of data. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Information About Your Computer Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Finding Information for Your Computer Specifications Caring for Your Computer Finding Information for Your Computer What Are You Looking For? Find it Here l A diagnostic program for my computer l Drivers for my computer l My User's Guide l My device documentation Drivers and Utilities CD (also know as the ResourceCD) You can use this CD to access documentation, reinstall drivers, or run diagnostics tools. l How to set up my computer l How to care for my computer l Troubleshooting information l How to open my computer cover l How to locate other documentation Setup and Quick Reference Guide l Express Service Code and Service Tag Number l Microsoft® Windows® License Label Express Service Code and Product Key Located on your computer. l System board connectors l Location of system board components System Information Label Located on the inside cover of your computer.l How to remove and replace parts l Technical specifications l How to configure system settings l How to troubleshoot and solve problems User's Guide Icon (Microsoft Windows 2000) Double-click the User's Guides icon on your desktop. Windows XP Help and Support Center 1. Click the Start button, and click Help and Support. 2. Click User's Guide. l Warranty Information System Information Guide l Latest drivers for my computer l Answers to technical service and support questions l Online discussions with other users and technical support l Documentation for my computer including the Service Manual Dell Support Website — support.dell.com The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including: l Knowledge Base — hints, tips, and online courses l Customer Forum — online discussion with other Dell customers l Upgrades — upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system l Customer Care — contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information l Downloads — drivers, patches, and software updates l Reference — computer documentation, product specifications, and white papers l Service call status and support history l Top technical issues for my computer l Frequently asked questions l File downloads l Details on my computer's configuration l Service contract for my computer Dell Premier Support Website — premiersupport.dell.com The Dell Premier Support website is customized for corporate, government, and education customers. This site may not be available in all regions. l How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD and Installation Guide After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. l How to use Windows XP l Documentation for my computer and devices Windows XP Help and Support Center 1. Click the Start button, and then click Help and Support. 2. Type a word or phrase that describes your problem, and then click the arrow icon. Specifications 3. Click the topic that describes your problem. 4. Follow the instructions shown on the screen. NOTE: For help using Windows 2000, click the Start button and click Help. Microprocessor Microprocessor type Intel® Xeon™ Level 1 (L1) cache 8 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 512-KB Memory Type PC2100 DDR Memory connectors four Memory capacities 256-, 512-MB, and 1-GB non-ECC or ECC Minimum memory 256 MB Maximum memory 4 GB BIOS address F0000h Computer Information Chip set Intel E7505 Data bus width 64 bits Address bus width 32 bits DMA channels 8 Interrupt levels 23 BIOS chip 4-Mb Memory speed 266 MHz DDR (PC 2100 DDR) NIC Gigabit integrated network interface with ASF support as defined by DMTF Capable of 10/100/1000 communication l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1 Gb (or 1000-Mbps) connection. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. SCSI controller Dell Precision 650 computer — Integrated U320 SCSI Dell Precision 450 computer — Optional add-in U320 SCSI FSB clock 400- or 533-MHz data rate Video Type Dell Precision 650 computer — AGP Pro 110 at 8x/4x/2x/1x (1.5 V) or PCI Dell Precision 450 computer — AGP Pro 50 at 8x/4x/2x/1x (1.5 V) or PCI Audio Type AC97, Sound Blaster emulation Audio controller Analog Devices Codec AD1981b Stereo conversion 16-bit analog-to-digital; 20-bit digital-to-analogExpansion Bus Bus type Dual PCI-X 1.0 (3.3 V only), PCI 2.2 (3.3 V/5.0 V) AGP Pro 3.0 (1.5 V only) Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz; PCI-X: 66/100 MHz AGP Pro: 66 MHz Expansion-card connectors: Dell Precision 650 computer — Three PCI-X connectors, two PCI slots, and one AGP 8x Pro110 connector Dell Precision 450 computer — One PCI-X connector, two PCI slots, and one AGP 8x Pro50 connector Drives Externally accessible: Dell Precision 650 computer one 3.5-inch drive bay three 5.25-inch drive bays Dell Precision 450 computer one 3.5-inch drive bay two 5.25-inch drive bays Internally accessible: Dell Precision 650 computer three bays for three 1-inch high or two 1.6-inch high hard drives NOTE: You can purchase a conversion bracket from Dell that allows you to use a 5.25-inch drive bay as an additional hard drive bay. Dell Precision 450 computer two bays for two 1-inch high or one 1.6-inch high hard drives Connectors External connectors: Serial two 9-pin connectors; 16550-compatible Parallel one 25-hole connector (bidirectional) IEEE 1394 Dell Precision 650 computer only — Two 6-pin serial connectors Video 15-hole connector (on add-in video card) Network connector RJ45 connector PS/2 (keyboard and mouse) 6-pin mini-DIN connector USB two USB 2.0-compliant connectors on the front panel; four USB 2.0-compliant connectors on the back panel Audio Dell Precision 650 computer— Three connectors for line-in, line-out, and microphone on back panel; one speaker/headphone and one microphone connector on the front panel Dell Precision 450 computer— Three connectors for line-in, line-out, and microphone on back panel; one speaker/headphone on the front panel System Board Connectors: Primary IDE channel 40-pin connector Secondary IDE channel 40-pin connector Floppy drive 34-pin connector SCSI 68-pin connector (Dell Precision 650 computer only) CD drive audio interface 4-pin connector Telephony (TAPI) 4-pin connector Fans (3) 3-pin connector I/O panel 34-pin connector USB/IEEE 1394 16-pin connector Key Combinations starts embedded system setup (during start-up only) changes boot sequence (during start-up only) launches the utility partition (if installed) during computer start-up disables computer password at start-up (after correct password is entered) Controls and Lights Power control push button Power light green light; blinking green in sleep state; dual-color for computer operations —green for power, yellow for diagnostics Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network connector) green light for 10-Mb operation; orange light for 100- Mb operation; yellow light for 1,000-Mb (1-Gb) operation Activity light (on integrated network connector) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights located on the front panel Power DC power supply: Wattage Dell Precision 650 computer: 460 W Dell Precision 450 computer: 360 W Heat dissipation Dell Precision 650 computer: 1000 BTU/hr Dell Precision 450 computer: 910 BTU/hr Voltage 90 to 135 V at 50/60 Hz; 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Dell Precision 650 computer Height 49.1 cm (19.3 inches) Width 22.2 cm (8.7 inches) Depth 48.8 cm (19.2 inches) Weight 19 kg (42 lbs) Dell Precision 450 computer Height 16.5–16.8 cm (6.5–6.6 inches) Width 44.7 cm (17.6 inches) Depth 44.5 cm (17.5 inches) Weight 18.6 kg (41 lbs) Supported monitor weight (in desktop orientation) 45.4 kg (100 lbs) Environmental Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) NOTE: At 35°C (95°F), the maximum operating  altitude is 914 m (3000 ft). Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 50.8 cm/sec (20 inches/sec) Storage Dell Precision 650 comptuer: nonoperating (half-sine pulse) 105 G, 2 ms nonoperating (faired-square wave) 27 G with a velocity change of 508 cm/sec (200 Caring for Your Computer To help maintain your computer, follow these suggestions: l To avoid losing or corrupting data, never turn off your computer when the hard drive light is on. l Schedule regular virus scans using virus software. l Manage hard drive space by periodically deleting unnecessary files and defragmenting the drive. l Back up files on a regular basis. l Periodically clean your monitor screen, mouse, and keyboard (see "Cleaning Your Computer"). Back to Contents Page inches/sec) Dell Precision 450 computer: nonoperating (half-sine pulse) 105 G, 2 ms nonoperating (faired-square wave) 32 G wtih a velocity change of 596 cm/sec (200 inches/sec) Altitude: Operating –15 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) NOTE: At 35°C (95°F), the maximum operating  altitude is 914 m (3000 ft). Storage –15 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page About Your Computer—Dell Precision 650 Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Front View Back View Inside Your Computer System Board Components Front View Front View of the Computer (Doors Open) 1 drive door Open the drive door to access the floppy and CD/DVD drives. 2 hard-drive light The hard-drive light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as your CD player is operating. 3 power button Press this button to turn on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform a Microsoft® Windows®  shutdown. 4 power light The power light illuminates and blinks or remains solid to indicate the following different states: No light — The computer is in the off state. Steady green — The computer is in a normal operating state. Blinking green — The computer is in a power-saving state. To exit from a power-saving state, press the power button or use the keyboard or the mouse if it is configured as a wake device in the Windows Device Manager. For more information about sleep states and exiting from a power-saving state, see "Power Button." See "Diagnostic Lights" for a description of light codes that can help you troubleshoot problems with your computer. 5 front-panel door Open the door to use the front-panel connectors.Opening the Drive Door 1 floppy drive Access the floppy drive. 2 headphone connector Attach headphones. 3 microphone connector Attach microphone. 4 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. 5 IEEE 1394 connector Attach high-speed serial multimedia devices, such as a digital video camera. 6 diagnostic lights (4) Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights." 7 externally accessible drives Access additional drives, such as a CD or DVD drive. Drive arrangement varies on computer configuration.Back View Back Panel Connectors 1 cover release latch Push the latch to the left to open the computer cover. 2 security cable slot Use a security cable with the slot to help secure your computer. 3 padlock ring Insert a padlock to lock the computer cover. 4 power connector Insert the power cable. 5 card slots (6) Access connectors for any installed PCI and AGP cards. 6 back panel connectors Plug serial, USB, and other devices into the appropriate connector. Inside Your Computer 1 parallel connector Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB connector. NOTE: The integrated parallel connector is automatically disabled if the computer detects an installed card containing a parallel connector configured to the same address. For more information, see "System Setup Options." 2 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and speakers). On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 3 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 4 mouse connector Plug a standard mouse into the green mouse connector. Turn off the computer and any attached devices before you connect a mouse to the computer. If you have a USB mouse, plug it into a USB connector. If your computer is running the Microsoft® Windows® 2000 or Windows XP operating system, the necessary mouse drivers have been installed on your hard drive. 5 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1-Gbps (or 1000-Mbps) connection. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 6 network connector Attach the UTP cable to an RJ45 jack wall plate or to an RJ45 port on a UTP concentrator or hub and press the other end of the UTP cable into the network connector until the cable snaps securely into place. The use of Category 5 wiring and connectors is recommended for our customers' networks. If Category 3 wiring must be used, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. 7 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state. 8 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. 9 IEEE 1394 connector Attach high-speed serial multimedia devices. 10 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. 11 keyboard connector If you have a standard keyboard, plug it into the purple keyboard connector. If you have a USB keyboard, plug it into a USB connector. 12 microphone connector Use the pink microphone connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, use the microphone connector on the card. 13 serial connector (COM 2) Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. The default designations are COM1 for serial connector 1 and COM2 for serial connector 2. For more information, see "System Setup Options." 14 serial connector (COM 1) Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. The default designations are COM1 for serial connector 1 and COM2 for serial connector 2. For more information, see "System Setup Options." CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. CAUTION: To avoid electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover.Cable Colors System Board Components NOTICE: Be careful when opening the computer cover to ensure that you do not accidentally disconnect cables from the system board. 1 floppy drive 5 padlock ring 2 CD/DVD drive 6 microprocessor airflow shroud 3 hard drive 7 system board 4 power supply 8 chassis intrusion switch Device Cable Color Hard drive Blue pull tab Floppy drive Black pull tab CD/DVD drive Orange pull tab I/O panel Yellow pull tabBack to Contents Page 1 CD/DVD drive connector (IDE2) 15 standby power light (AUX_PWR_LED) 2 I/O panel connector (I/O PANEL) 16 PCI card connectors (PCI1, PCI2 [32-bit connectors], PCI3 , PCI4, and PCI5 [64-bit PCI-X connectors]) 3 floppy-drive connector (DISKETTE) 17 telephony connector (MODEM) 4 memory module connectors (DIMM_1, DIMM_2, DIMM_3, DIMM_4) 18 AGP card connector (AGP) 5 suspend-to-RAM light (STR_LED) 19 VRM connector (VRM)(for a second microprocessor only) 6 power connector (POWER 2) 20 microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_1) 7 power connector (POWER 1) 21 front-panel audio connector (FP2AUDIO) 8 front-panel USB/IEEE 1394 connector (USB) 22 microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_0) 9 hard-drive connector (IDE1) 23 microprocessor fan connector (FAN_P1) 10 real-time clock reset jumper (RTCRST) 24 microprocessor fan connector (FAN_P0) 11 card fan connector (FAN) 25 battery socket (BATTERY) 12 SCSI drive connector (SCSI) 26 internal speaker (SPKR) 13 password jumper (PSWD) 27 CD drive audio cable connector (CD_IN) 14 auxiliary LED add-in storage adapter connector (AUX_LED)Back to Contents Page Closing the Computer Cover Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide 1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3. Close the computer cover: a. Pivot the cover down and into position. b. If your computer has a baffle, ensure that the baffle is correctly positioned by guiding it into place as you lower the cover. c. Press down on the cover to close it. d. Once the cover is closed, slide the release latch to the right until the latch clicks into place. Dell Precision 650 Dell Precision 450 1 cover release latch 2 security cable slot 3 padlock ring4. If you are using a padlock to secure your computer, install the padlock. 5. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page 1 cover release latch 2 padlock ring NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Opening the Computer Cover Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Lay the computer on its side as shown in the illustration. 7. Open the computer cover: a. Slide the cover release latch toward the top of the computer. b. Raise the cover, and pivot it toward the front of the computer. 8. Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer, such as the metal at the back of computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch any unpainted metal surface on the computer to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. Dell Precision 650 Dell Precision 450 CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to accommodate the open cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. 1 cover release latch 2 security cable slot 3 padlock ringBack to Contents Page 1 security cable slot 2 cover release latch 3 padlock ringBack to Contents Page Microprocessor Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Installation Guidelines Installing the Microprocessor Removing the Microprocessor Installation Guidelines l Your computer is designed for dual-processor operations. The heat sinks (CPU_0 and CPU_1) are keyed to fit their specific connector. l For single-processor operations, the processor must be installed in socket CPU_0. The VRM for the single processor is already installed and cannot be removed. Processor socket 1 and VRM connector 1 must be empty. To locate these components, see the system board components illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components") or the system board label inside your computer. l For dual-processor operations, both processor sockets and the VRM connector must be populated. To locate the VRM connector, see the system board components illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components")or the system board label inside your computer. l For dual-processor operations, the two processors and the VRMs must be identical. If the processors do not match, you receive a system message. If the processors voltage don't match or the VRM is not properly installed, the diagnostic lights indicate an error.. l If you are upgrading your microprocessor, keep your original microprocessor heat sink and securing clips for future troubleshooting. Installing the Microprocessor 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). If you are replacing a microprocessor, see "Removing the Microprocessor." 8. If the release lever is not extended to the release position, move it to that position. 9. Align pin-1 (the imprinted corner) of the microprocessor and pin-1 of the socket. 10. Carefully set the microprocessor in the socket and press it down lightly to seat it. 11. Rotate the release lever back toward the system board until it snaps into place, securing the microprocessor. CAUTION: The processor can get very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the processor has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: You must position the microprocessor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the microprocessor and the computer. NOTICE: Microprocessor pins are delicate. To avoid damage, ensure that the microprocessor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. 12. Remove the thermal grease protective cover and place the heat sink in the base. 13. Place one end of the heat sink under the tab on the retention module on the side opposite the lever. Lower the heat sink onto the microprocessor so that the heat sink fits securely under the tab on the other end of the retention module. 14. Replace the retention module clips. 15. If you installed a microprocessor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat sink assembly and microprocessor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 16. If you are installing a second microprocessor, install the VRM. 17. Replace the airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 18. Close the computer cover. 19. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Removing the Microprocessor 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 1 microprocessor pin-1 indicator 2 release lever 3 microprocessor 4 microprocessor socket 5 socket pin-1 indicator NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. NOTE: It is recommended that only a technically knowledgeable person perform this procedure. CAUTION: The processor can get very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the processor has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover.6. Open the computer cover. 7. Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 8. Remove the microprocessor heat sink: a. Remove the two retention module clips by pressing the tabs together and lifting the retention module clips up. b. Press the lever on the retention module until the heat sink is released. c. Gently lift the heat sink from the microprocessor. 9. Pull the release lever straight up until the microprocessor is released. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: If you are installing a microprocessor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat sink. If you are not installing a microprocessor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat sink when you install your new microprocessor. 1 retention module clips (2) 2 tabs (2 on each retention module clip) 3 heat sink 4 microprocessor socket 5 retention module 6 lever NOTICE: Be careful not to bend any of the pins when you remove the microprocessor from the socket. Bending the pins can permanently damage the microprocessor. 10. Remove the microprocessor from the socket. If you are replacing the microprocessor, leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new microprocessor and go to "Installing the Microprocessor." If you are removing a second microprocessor and not installing another one, remove the VRM and then continue with step 9. 11. Replace the airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 12. Close the computer cover. 13. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page 1 release lever 2 microprocessor 3 socket NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Drives Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Overview Hard Drive Floppy Drive CD/DVD Drive Overview Your computer supports: l Three hard drives (Your computer supports IDE, Serial ATA, and SCSI.) l One floppy drive l Three CD or DVD drives (One bay may be used for additional hard drive using an add-in bay bracket.) IDE Drive Addressing When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on the interface cable is the primary (master) or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the secondary (slave) device (drive 1). See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting. Since cable select is the default setting, any additional drives that are installed do not need to be set as a primary or secondary drive. Your computer supports up to two IDE devices. Hard drives should be connected to the connector labeled "IDE1," and CD/DVD drives should be connected to the connector labeled "IDE2." Connect serial ATA drives to the connectors labeled "SATA_0" or "SATA_1." Connecting Drive Cables When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and an interface cable—to the back of the drive. 1 floppy drive(s) 2 CD/DVD drive(s) 3 hard drive(s)Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the cable) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1" printed directly on the board or card. SCSI Device Installation Guidelines This section describes how to configure and install SCSI devices in your computer. To install a SCSI device, you can use one or both of the following SCSI controllers: l The SCSI connector on the system board. To locate the SCSI system board connector, see the system board illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components") or the interior service label. NOTICE: If your system was purchased with a Serial ATA hard drive, the system includes the newer style Serial ATA style power connector. If you are adding a Serial ATA hard drive to a system that was not originally equipped with one and the drive you are adding requires the new style Serial ATA power connector, you may need to obtain a power adapter cable from Dell. If you need a Serial ATA power adapter cable, see Contacting Dell. IDE Drive Connector Serial ATA Connector 1 power cable 2 power input connector 1 interface connector 2 colored stripe on cable 3 interface cable NOTICE: When you connect an interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both. NOTE: The system board SCSI controller supports hard drives only. Do not connect CD or DVD drives, tape drives, DAT drives, and so on. l A SCSI controller card installed in your computer. SCSI ID Numbers Internal SCSI devices must have a unique SCSI ID number from 0 to 15. If you are using the SCSI connector on the system board and a SCSI controller card installed in your computer, you have two separate SCSI buses operating. Each SCSI bus has a set of SCSI ID numbers from 0 to 15. When SCSI devices are shipped from the factory, the default SCSI ID numbers are assigned as follows: SCSI devices installed by Dell are configured correctly during the manufacturing process. You do not need to set the SCSI ID for these SCSI devices. If you attach additional optional SCSI devices, see the documentation for each device for information about setting the appropriate SCSI ID number. Device Termination SCSI logic requires that termination be enabled for the two devices at opposite ends of the SCSI chain and disabled for all devices in between. It is recommended that you use terminated cables and that you disable termination on all devices. See the documentation provided with any optional SCSI device you purchase for information on disabling termination on the device. General Guidelines Follow these general guidelines when installing SCSI devices in your computer: l Although you install SCSI devices essentially the same way as other devices, their configuration requirements are different. For details on configuring your particular SCSI subsystem, see the documentation for your SCSI devices and/or your host adapter card. l Configure the device for a SCSI ID number and disable termination, if necessary. l To use an external SCSI device, you must have a SCSI controller card installed in your computer. Connect one end of the external SCSI cable to the connector on the back of the SCSI device. Attach the other end of the external SCSI cable to the connector on the controller card installed in the computer. l After you install a SCSI hard drive, Primary Drive 0 and Primary Drive 1 should be set to None in system setup if no EIDE hard drives are installed. If you have any EIDE devices on the second EIDE channel, such as a CD or tape drive, Secondary Drive 0 and/or Secondary Drive 1 should be set to Auto. l You may need to use programs other than those provided with the operating system to partition and format SCSI hard drives. See the documentation that came with your SCSI software drivers for information on installing the appropriate drivers and preparing your SCSI hard drive for use. SCSI Cables Ultra 320, Ultra 160/m, and Ultra2/Wide LVD drives (typically hard drives) both use a 68-pin cable. One end of the cable attaches to the SCSI connector on the system board or the SCSI controller card installed in your computer. The remaining connectors on the cable attach to the various drives. Narrow SCSI drives (tape drives, CD drives, and some hard drives) use a 50-pin cable. One end of this cable attaches to the SCSI controller card. The remaining connectors on the cable attach to the various Narrow SCSI devices. Hard Drive 1. If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure. 2. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. System Board Controller Controller Card Device ID Device ID Controller 7 Controller 7 Boot hard drive 0 Boot hard drive 0 CD or DVD drive 5 tape or DAT drive 6 NOTE: There is no requirement that SCSI ID numbers be assigned sequentially or that devices be attached to the cable in order by ID number. If two or more devices use the same ID, your computer may hang during POST and in SCSI BIOS. NOTICE: Dell recommends that you use only SCSI cables purchased from Dell. Cables purchased elsewhere are not guaranteed to work with Dell computers. NOTICE: Dell recommends that you use only SCSI cables purchased from Dell. Cables purchased elsewhere are not guaranteed to work with Dell computers. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. 3. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 4. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 5. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 6. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 7. Open the computer cover. 8. Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer, such as the metal at the back of the computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. Removing a Hard Drive 1. Disconnect the power and hard-drive cables from the drive. IDE/SCSI Drive Serial ATA Drive NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 1 power cable 2 hard-drive cable2. Press in on the tabs on each side of the drive and slide the drive up and out. IDE/SCSI Drive Serial ATA Drive 1 power cable 2 serial ATA hard-drive cable 1 tab (2) 2 hard driveInstalling a Hard Drive 1. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 2. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 3. If your replacement hard drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket rails to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 4. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 5. If you are installing a hard drive in the lower bay, place the drive in the bay so that the power connector is on the left-hand side (opposite of the top hard drive). IDE/SCSI Drive 1 tab (2) 2 hard drive 1 drive 2 bracket rails (2) 3 screws (4)Serial ATA Drive 6. If you are installing a drive that has its own controller card, install the controller card in an expansion slot. See the documentation that accompanied the drive and controller card to verify that the configuration is correct for your computer. 7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. IDE/SCSI Drive NOTICE: Match the colored strip on the cable with pin 1 on the drive (pin 1 is marked as "1"). Serial ATA Drive 8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9. Close the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 1 power cable 2 hard-drive cable 1 power cable 2 serial ATA hard-drive cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 11. If the drive you just installed is the primary drive, insert a bootable floppy disk into drive A. 12. Turn on the computer. 13. Enter system setup, and update the your drive configuration. 14. After you have updated the system settings, exit system setup, and restart the computer. 15. Partition and logically format your drive before you proceed to the next step. See the documentation for your operating system for instructions. 16. Test the hard drive by running the Dell Diagnostics. 17. If the drive you just installed is the primary drive, install your operating system on the hard drive. Floppy Drive 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer, such as the metal at the back of the computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. Removing a Floppy Drive 1. Disconnect the power and floppy-drive cables from the back of the floppy drive. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 2. Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, slide the drive upward, and remove it from the floppy-drive bay. Installing a Floppy Drive 1 power cable 2 floppy-drive cable 1 tab (2) 2 floppy drive1. If you are replacing a drive and the the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 2. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 3. Attach the power and floppy-drive cables to the floppy drive. 1 drive 2 bracket rails (2) 3 screws (4)4. If you are installing a new floppy drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front- panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 5. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 6. Close the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 8. Enter system setup and update the appropriate Diskette Drive A option to reflect the size and capacity of your new floppy drive. 9. To verify that your computer works correctly, run the Dell Diagnostics. CD/DVD Drive 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 1 power cable 2 floppy-drive cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer, such as the metal at the back of the computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Disconnect the power and CD/DVD drive cables from the back of the drive. 2. Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, and then slide the drive upward and remove it from the drive bay. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. 1 power cable 2 CD/DVD drive cableInstalling a CD/DVD Drive 1. If you are installing a new drive, unpack the drive and prepare it for installation. Check the documentation that accompanied the drive to verify that the drive is configured for your computer. If you are installing an IDE drive, configure the drive for the cable select setting. 2. Connect the new drive to the set of rails that are attached to the inside of the cover. If a set of rails is not attached inside the computer cover, call Dell. See Contacting Dell. 3. If you are installing a replacement drive and the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 4. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 1 tab (2) 2 CD/DVD drive NOTE: A fourth hard drive can be added to a bay using an add-in bay bracket. To order a bracket, see Contacting Dell. 1 drive 2 bracket rails (2) 3 screws (4)5. If you are installing a drive that has its own controller card, install the controller card in an expansion slot. See the documentation that accompanied the drive and controller card to verify that the configuration is correct for your computer. 6. Connect the power and CD/DVD drive cables to the drive. If you are adding a drive that has an audio cable, connect the audio cable to the audio connector on the system board. 1 power cable 2 CD/DVD drive cable 3 audio cable (some drives 7. If you are installing a new CD/DVD drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front-panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 8. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 9. Close the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 11. Update your configuration information by setting the appropriate Drive option (0 or 1) under Drives: Secondary to Auto. See "Primary Drive n and Secondary Drive n" for more information. 12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Back to Contents Page do not have this cable) NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page VRM Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Installing a VRM Removing a VRM 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Installing a VRM 1. Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 2. Press the securing clips at each end of the VRM connector outward until they snap open. To locate the VRM connector, see the system board components illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components") or see the system board label inside your computer. NOTICE: A VRM must be installed to operate dual microprocessors. To locate the VRM connector, see the system board components illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components") or the system board label inside your computer. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. 1 VRM 2 securing clips (2)3. Align the notch on the bottom of the VRM with the ridges inside the connector. 4. Press the VRM straight down into the connector until the securing clips snap into place at the ends of the module. 5. Install the microprocessor airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 6. Close the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Removing a VRM 1. Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 2. Press the securing clips at each end of the connector outward simultaneously until the VRM slightly pops out from the connector. 3. Grasp the VRM by its top corners, and ease it out of the connector. 4. If you are installing a new VRM, see "Installing a VRM." If you are not installing a new VRM, continue with step 5. 5. Install the microprocessor airflow shroud (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Microprocessor Airflow Shroud"). 6. Close the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page 3 connector NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Memory Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Memory Installation Guidelines Removing a Memory Module Adding a Memory Module You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. For information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see "Specifications." 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. Memory Installation Guidelines l Memory module connectors must be upgraded in matched pairs. Memory module connectors 1 and 2 must contain modules of identical size, type, speed, and number of chips and memory module connectors 3 and 4 must contain modules of identical size, type, speed, and number of chips. To locate the memory sockets on the system board, see the system board components illustration (for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components") or the system board label inside your computer. l Before you install new memory modules, download the most recent BIOS for your computer from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Memory Module Label Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations Your computer supports a maximum of 4GB of memory when using four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP, can only utilize a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is slightly less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory. The following is a list of components that require memory address space: l System ROM l APIC(s) l Integrated PCI devices, such as network connector, SCSI controller, and IEEE 1394 controller l PCI and AGP cards l The AGP Aperture size specified in system setup CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. At start-up the BIOS identifies the components that require address space. The BIOS dynamically calculates the amount of reserved address space required. It then subtracts the reserved address space from 4 GB to determine the amount of usable space. l If the total installed computer memory is less than the usable space, all installed computer memory is available for use only by the operating system. l If the total installed computer memory is equal to or greater than the usable address space, a small portion of installed memory is available for use by the operating system. Removing a Memory Module 1. Press down and outward on the securing clips. 2. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. Adding a Memory Module 1. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 2. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. 3. Insert the module into the connector, ensuring that it fits into the guides at each end of the connector. Carefully press each end of the module into place. The memory module socket has alignment keys that allow the memory module to be installed in the socket only one way. 4. Pull up on the securing clips to lock the modules into place. 1 notch 2 memory module securing clips (2) 3 alignment keys 1 notch 2 memory module securing clips (2) 3 alignment keys If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. When the memory module is properly seated in the socket, the securing clips on the memory module socket should align with the securing clips on the other sockets with memory modules installed. 5. Close the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. The computer detects that the new memory does not match the existing configuration information and generates the following message: The amount of system memory has changed. Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility 7. Press to enter system setup and check the value for System Memory. The computer should have changed the value of System Memory to reflect the newly installed memory. Verify the new total. If it is correct, skip to step 10. 8. If the memory total is incorrect, turn off and disconnect your computer and devices from electrical outlets. 9. Open the computer cover and check the installed memory modules to ensure that they are seated properly in their sockets. Then repeat steps step 4 through step 7. 10. When the System Memory total is correct, press to exit system setup. 11. Run the Dell Diagnostics to verify that the memory modules are operating properly. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts—Dell Precision 650 Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Opening the Computer Cover Memory Cards Drives Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Microprocessor VRM Battery Closing the Computer Cover Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Installing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 6. Open the computer cover. 7. Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer, such as the metal at the back of the computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. 8. Press down and back on the indentations at the top corners of the shroud. The top anchor tabs disengage from the anchor slots. 9. Lift the airflow shroud out of the chassis. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. Installing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1. Insert the bottom anchor tabs into the anchor slots. 2. Align and insert the side anchor tabs into the anchor slots. 3. Press the indentations until the top anchor tabs on the shroud snap securely into place. 4. Close the computer cover. 5. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page 1 airflow shroud 2 indentations (2) 3 bottom anchor tabs (2) 4 side anchor tabs (2) 5 top anchor tabs (2) NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Regulatory Notices Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide FCC Notices (U.S. Only) IC Notice (Canada Only) CE Notice (European Union) ENERGY STAR® Compliance Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) VCCI Notice (Japan Only) MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) NOM Information (Mexico Only) Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computer systems, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer system has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: l Reorient the receiving antenna. l Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. l Move the computer away from the receiver. l Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Dell™ computer systems are designed, tested, and classified for their intended electromagnetic environment. These electromagnetic environment  classifications generally refer to the following harmonized definitions: l Class A is typically for business or industrial environments. l Class B is typically for residential environments. Information Technology Equipment (ITE), including peripherals, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, that are integrated into or connected to the system should match the electromagnetic environment classification of the computer system. A Notice About Shielded Signal Cables: Use only shielded cables for connecting peripherals to any Dell device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio communications services. Using shielded cables ensures that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell on the World Wide Web at accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. Most Dell computer systems are classified for Class B environments. However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. To determine the electromagnetic classification for your system or device, see the following sections specific for each regulatory agency. Each section provides country-specific EMC/EMI or product safety information. FCC Notices (U.S. Only) Most Dell computer systems are classified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification applies to your computer system, examine all FCC registration labels located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, on card-mounting brackets, and on the cards themselves. If any one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire system is considered to be a Class A digital device. If all labels carry an FCC Class B rating as distinguished by either an FCC ID number or the FCC logo, ( ), your system is considered to be a Class B digital device. Once you have determined your system's FCC classification, read the appropriate FCC notice. Note that FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Class A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense. Class BThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with FCC regulations: l Model number: WHL and WHM l Company name: Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA 512-338-4400 IC Notice (Canada Only) Most Dell computer systems (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES- 003) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer system (or other Dell digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located on the bottom, side, or the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus). A statement in the form of "IC Class A ICES- 003" or "IC Class B ICES-003" will be located on one of these labels. Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. CE Notice (European Union) Marking by the symbol indicates compliance of this Dell computer to the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following technical standards: l EN 55022 — "Information Technology Equipment — Radio Disturbance Characteristics — Limits and Methods of Measurement." l EN 55024 — "Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement." l EN 61000-3-2 — "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Up to  and Including 16 A Per Phase)." l EN 61000-3-3 — "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up to and Including 16 A." l EN 60950 — "Safety of Information Technology Equipment." l EN 55022 — "Information Technology Equipment — Radio Disturbance Characteristics — Limits and Methods of Measurement." l EN 50082-1 — "Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic Immunity Standard - Part 1: Residential, Commercial and Light Industry." l EN 50082-2 — "Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic Immunity Standard - Part 2: Industrial Environment." l EN 60950 — "Safety of Information Technology Equipment." NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications: l Class A is for typical commercial areas. l Class B is for typical domestic areas. This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment. A "Declaration of Conformity" in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is on file at Dell Computer Corporation Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland. ENERGY STAR® Compliance Certain configurations of Dell computers comply with the requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for energy-efficient computers. If the front panel of your computer bears the ENERGY STAR® Emblem, your original configuration complies with these requirements and all ENERGY STAR®  power management features of the computer are enabled. NOTE: Any Dell computer bearing the ENERGY STAR® Emblem is certified to comply with EPA ENERGY STAR® requirements as configured when shipped by Dell. Any changes you make to this configuration (such as installing additional expansion cards or drives) may increase the computer's power consumption beyond the limits set by the EPA's ENERGY STAR® Computers program. ENERGY STAR® Emblem The EPA's ENERGY STAR® Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers to reduce air pollution by promoting energyefficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR® computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. In turn, this reduction in electricity usage can reduce emissions of carbon dioxide, the gas primarily responsible for the greenhouse effect, and sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the primary causes of acid rain. You can also help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your computer when it is not in use for extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends. Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) On Class A systems, the following warning will appear near the regulatory label: Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) VCCI Notice (Japan Only) Most Dell computer systems are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class B information technology equipment (ITE). However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. ITE, including peripherals, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, integrated into or connected to the system should match the electromagnetic environment classification (Class A or B) of the computer system. To determine which classification applies to your computer system, examine the regulatory labels/markings (see "VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark" and "VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark") located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer. Once you have determined your system's VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice. Class A ITE This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:Class B ITE This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product: MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital device), examine the Republic of Korean Ministry of Information and Communications (MIC) registration labels located on your computer (or other Dell digital device). The MIC label may be located separately from the other regulatory marking applied to your product. Line two of the label identifies the emissions class for the product—"(A)" for Class A products or "(B)" for Class B products. NOTE: MIC emissions requirements provide for two classifications: l Class A devices are for business purposes. l Class B devices are for nonbusiness purposes. Class A Device Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a nonbusiness-purpose device. MIC Class A Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product: Class B DevicePlease note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any environment, including residential areas. MIC Class B Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product. Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice The equipment should draw power from a socket with an attached protection circuit (a 3-prong socket). All equipment that works together (computer, monitor, printer, and so on) should have the same power supply source. The phasing conductor of the room's electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection device in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than 16 amperes (A). To completely switch off the equipment, the power supply cable must be removed from the power supply socket, which should be located near the equipment and easily accessible. A protection mark "B" confirms that the equipment is in compliance with the protection usage requirements of standards PN-93/T-42107 and PN-EN 55022: 1996.BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) If you find a or mark on the regulatory label on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, the following section is applicable:NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Back to Contents Page Exporter: Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importer: Dell Computer de México,  S.A. de C.V.  Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso  Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F.  Ship to: Dell Computer de México,  S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne &  Nagel de México S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peñon de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Model number: WHL and WHM Supply voltage: 115/230 VAC Frequency: 60/50 Hz Input current rating: 6.0/3.0 ABack to Contents Page Solving Problems Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Troubleshooting Your Computer Battery Problems Card Problems Drive Problems Dropped or Damaged Computer E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems Error Messages General Problems IEEE 1394 Device Problems Keyboard Problems Memory Problems Microprocessor Problems Mouse Problems Network Problems Power Problems Printer Problems Serial or Parallel Device Problems Sound and Speaker Problems System Board Problems Video and Monitor Problems Troubleshooting Your Computer Follow these tips when troubleshooting your computer: l If you added or removed a computer part before the problem started, review the installation procedures and ensure that the part is correctly installed. l If a peripheral device does not work, ensure that the device is properly connected. l If an error message appears on the screen, write down the exact message. This message may help technical support diagnose and fix the problem(s). l If an error message occurs in a program, consult the program's documentation. Battery Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Card Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. CAUTION: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Replace the battery — If you have to repeatedly reset time and date information after turning on the computer, or if an incorrect time or date displays during start-up, replace the battery. If the battery still does not work properly, contact Dell. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Check the card seating and cable — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer cover. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Floppy drive problems 2. Ensure that each card is firmly seated in its connector. Reseat any loose cards. 3. Ensure that all cables are firmly connected to their corresponding connectors on the cards. If any cables appear loose, reconnect them. For instructions on which cables should be attached to specific connectors on a card, see the card's documentation. 4. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. Test the video card — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer cover. 2. Remove all cards except the video card. If your primary hard drive is connected to a drive controller card and not to one of the system board IDE connectors, leave the drive controller card installed in the computer. 3. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 4. Run the Dell Diagnostics. If any of the tests fail, contact Dell. Test the cards — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer cover. 2. Reinstall one of the cards that you removed previously. 3. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 4. Run the Dell Diagnostics. If any of the diagnostics tests fail, the card you just reinstalled is faulty and needs to be replaced. 5. Repeat this process until you have reinstalled all cards. If you have reinstalled all of the cards and the problem is not resolved, contact Dell. Ensure that Windows® recognizes the drive — Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the floppy drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Test the drive — l Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original floppy disk is defective. l Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart the computer. Ensure that the disk is not full or write-protected — Ensure that the disk has available space and that it is not write-protected (locked). See the following illustration. 1 back of floppy disk 2 write-protected 3 not write-protectedCD drive problems Problems writing to a CD-RW drive DVD drive problems Hard drive problems Test the floppy drive light — MS-DOS® Insert a floppy disk, type dir a: at the DOS prompt, and press . Microsoft Windows operating systems Insert a floppy disk, click the Start button, click My Computer, and then double-click the floppy drive icon. Run the Dell Diagnostics — If any of the tests fail, contact Dell. NOTICE: Do not attempt to clean drive heads with a swab. You may accidentally misalign the heads, which can render the drive inoperable. Clean the drive — Use a commercially available cleaning kit. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Remove and reinstall the floppy drive — For the Dell Precision™ 650 computer, see "Removing a Floppy Drive" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "Removing a Floppy Drive" for information on performing this procedure. If the computer displays a drive error message, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. NOTE: High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. This does not indicate a defect in the drive or the CD. Adjust the Windows volume control — Click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. l Ensure that the volume is turned up by clicking the slidebar and dragging it up. l Ensure that the sound is not muted by clicking any boxes that are checked. Test the drive with another CD — Insert another CD to eliminate the possibility that the original CD is defective. Check the speakers and subwoofer — See "Sound and Speaker Problems." Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive — Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the CD drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Clean the disc — Use a commercially available cleaning kit. Close other programs — The CD-RW drive must receive a steady stream of data when writing. If the stream is interrupted, an error occurs. Try closing all programs before writing to the CD-RW. NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. Test the drive with another DVD — Insert another DVD to eliminate the possibility that the original DVD is defective. Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive — Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the DVD drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Clean the disc — Use a commercially available cleaning kit. Check for interrupt request conflicts — See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." Run Check Disk — For Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click My Computer. 2. Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Tools tab. Dropped or Damaged Computer E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems 4. Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5. Click Start. For Windows 2000 1. Right-click My Computer on your desktop and click Manage. 2. Click Storage and click Disk Management. 3. Right-click the drive that you want to scan for errors and click Properties. 4. Select the Tools tabs and click Check Now. If the Tools tab isn't available or to further troubleshoot the drive, select the Hardware tab, click the drive you want to troubleshoot, and then click Troubleshoot. Run the Dell Diagnostics — If the tests indicate a faulty drive or drive controller, contact Dell. Check the cable connections — 1. Ensure that the DC power cables from the power supply are firmly connected to the connectors on each drive. 2. Verify that the interface cable for each drive is firmly connected to the drive and to the system board. 3. Ensure that the control panel cable is firmly connected to the system board. If the hard drive activity light does not blink during the boot routine, contact Dell. If a drive error message displays, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. If the primary hard drive that contains the operating system does not boot, files in the operating system might be corrupt. For more information, see your operating system documentation. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide.. Check the card and cable connections — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer cover. 2. Check all card connections in the computer, and reseat any loose cards. 3. Ensure that all cables are properly connected and that all components are properly seated in their connectors and sockets. 4. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 5. Run the Dell Diagnostics. If any of the diagnostics tests fail, contact Dell. Check the telephone line connection — Verify that the telephone line is connected to the jack on the modem. (The jack has either a green label or a connector-shaped icon next to it.) Ensure that you hear a click when you insert the telephone line connector into the modem. Check the telephone jack — Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack — If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. Use a different telephone line — If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one.  Run the Modem Helper diagnostics — Click the Start button, point to All Programs, and then click Modem Helper. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem problems. (Modem Helper is not available on all computers.) Verify that the modem is communicating with Windows® — 1. Click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3. Click Phone and Modem Options. 4. Click the Modems tab. 5. Click the COM port for your modem. 6. Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Turn off call waiting (catch-phone) — See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. 1. Click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, and then click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click your connection type to highlight it. 4. Click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit. 5. Click the To Disable Call Waiting box to place a checkmark in it. 6. Select the disable code from the drop-down menu (for example, *70). 7. Click Apply, and then click OK. Ensure that you are connected to the Internet — With the Outlook Express e-mail program open, click File. If Work Offline has a checkmark Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. next to it, click the checkmark to remove it and connect to the Internet. Ensure that you have subscribed to an Internet service provider — Contact an Internet service provider to subscribe. Contact your Internet service provider — Contact your Internet service provider for assistance. Check for interrupt request conflicts — See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." A filename cannot contain any of the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > | — Do not use these characters in filenames. A required .DLL file was not found — The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. To remove and then reinstall the program: 1. Click the Start button. 2. Click Control Panel. 3. Click Add or Remove Programs. 4. Select the program you want to remove. 5. Click the Change or Remove Program icon. 6. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Alert! Card Cage Fan Failure — The PCI card cooling fan is not installed, has failed, or is not properly connected to the system board. Ensure that an operational fan is properly installed and connected to the system board. For more information, see the Service Manual at support.dell.com. NOTE: This error message applies only to Dell Precision™ 650 computers.  Alert! Chipset Heatsink Not Detected — The heat sink is not properly installed on the system board. Reseat the heat sink on the system board. See the system board illustration for your computer (for the Dell Precision 650 computer, see "System Board Components" or for the Dell Precision 450 computer, see "System Board Components." Alert! Cover Was Previously Opened — The computer cover was opened. Enter system setup and reset the Chassis Intrusion option. Alert! CPU 0 Fan Failure — The cooling fan for microprocessor 0 is not installed, has failed, or is not properly connected to the system board. Ensure that the cooling fan is properly installed and working. Also, ensure that the microprocessor airflow shroud is properly installed. See "Microprocessor." Alert! CPU 1 Fan Failure — The cooling fan for microprocessor 1 is not installed, has failed, or is not properly connected to the system board. Ensure that the cooling fan is properly installed and working. Also, ensure that the microprocessor airflow shroud is properly installed. See "Microprocessor." Alert! Memory Population Mismatch. DIMM Slot 1 and DIMM Slot 3 Are Disabled and Performance Will be Degraded — The memory module connectors are not populated in matched pairs or there is a defective memory module in the computer. Ensure that memory modules of identical size, type, speed, and number of chips are installed in memory module connectors 1 and 2 and memory modules of identical size, type, speed, and number of chips are installed in memory module connectors 3 and 4 (if used). See "Memory." Alert! Operating in Debug Mode. Please Populate Memory in Pairs for Normal Operation — This message appears when one memory module is installed in memory module connector 4. This is a troubleshooting mode that allows you to isolate a defective memory module, see "Memory Problems." Alert! OS Install Mode Enabled — The OS Install Mode in system setup is set to On, which limits the amount of memory to 256 MB because some operating systems will not complete installation with more than 2 GB of memory. After you have installed the operating system, enter system setup and set the OS Install Mode to Off. Alert! Power Supply Fan Failure — The power supply fan has failed or is blocked. Ensure that the power supply airflow vents are not blocked. Alert! Previous Attempts at Booting This System Have Failed at Checkpoint [nnnn ]. For Help in Resolving This Problem, Please Note This Checkpoint and Contact Dell Technical Support — The computer failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive times for the same error. Contact Dell and report the checkpoint code (nnnn) to the support technician. Alert! Previous Fan Failures — The fan caused an error last time you used the computer. Ensure that nothing is blocking the airflow vents and that all the fans are properly installed and operating correctly. Alert! Previous Processor Thermal Failure — The microprocessor overheated the last time you used the computer. Ensure that nothing is blocking the airflow vents and that all the fans are properly installed and operating correctly. Also, ensure that the microprocessor heat sink is properly installed. Alert! Previous Reboot Was Due to Voltage Regulator Failure — The VRM failed the last time you used the computer. Contact Dell for assistance. Alert! Previous Shutdown Due to Thermal Event — The microprocessor overheated the last time you used the computer. Ensure that nothing is blocking the airflow vents and that all the fans are working correctly. Also, ensure that the microprocessor heat sink is properly installed. Alert! Previous Voltage Failure — Voltage used by the computer either exceeded or fell below acceptable thresholds. See "Power Problems" and "System Board Problems." Alert! Processor Cache Size Mistmatch. Install Like Processors or One Processor. System Halted! — Two processor with different cache sizes are installed. See "Microprocessor." Alert! Processor Speed Mismatch. Install Like Processors or One Processor. System Halted! — Two processor with different speeds are installed. See "Microprocessor." Alert! Processor Type Mismatch. Install Like Processors or One Processor. System Halted! — Two processor with different types are installed. See "Microprocessor." Alert! System Battery Voltage is Low — The computer battery is providing inadequate voltage. See "Battery." Alert! Unsupported High Power AGP Pro Video Adapter Detected. System Halted! — A high-power AGP Pro110 video adatper is installed. Replace the AGP Pro110 video adapter with an AGP Pro50 adapter. See "Cards." NOTE: This error message applies only to Dell Precision 450 computers. Alert! Unsupported Processor Type Detected. System Halted! — Replace the microprocessor. See "Microprocessor." Alert! Uncorrectable Memory Error Previously Detected... Address xxxxxxxxh — One or more memory modules may be improperly seated or faulty or the system board may be faulty. See "Memory Problems" and "System Board Problems." Attachment failed to respond — The floppy or hard drive controller cannot send data to the associated drive. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Bad command or file name — Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, have put spaces in the proper place, and have used the correct pathname. Bad error-correction code (ECC) on disk read — The floppy or hard drive controller detected an uncorrectable read error. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Controller has failed — The hard drive or the associated controller is defective. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Data error — The floppy or hard drive cannot read the data. l For the Microsoft® Windows® operating system, run the chkdsk utility to check the file structure of the floppy or hard drive. l For another operating system, run the appropriate corresponding utility. See your operating system documentation for information on running these utilities. Decreasing available memory — One or more memory modules might be faulty or improperly seated. l Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. l See "Memory Problems" for additional troubleshooting suggestions. Diskette drive 0 seek failure — A cable might be loose or the computer configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. See "Floppy drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Diskette read failure — The floppy disk may be defective or a cable might be loose. l If the drive access light turns on, try a different disk. l See "Floppy drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Diskette subsystem reset failed — The floppy drive controller might be faulty. Run the Dell Diagnostics. Diskette write protected — The floppy disk is write-protected. Slide the write-protect notch to the open position. Drive not ready — No floppy disk is in the drive. Put a floppy disk in the drive. Gate A20 failure — One or more memory modules might be faulty or improperly seated. l Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. l See "Memory Problems" for additional troubleshooting suggestions. Hard-disk configuration error — Hard-disk controller failure — Hard-disk drive failure — The hard drive failed initialization. l Run the Dell Diagnostics. l See "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Insert bootable media — The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. Invalid configuration information - please run SETUP program — The computer configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. Enter system setup and correct the computer configuration information. Keyboard Controller Failure — KeyBoard Stuck Key Failure — Keyboard failure — A cable or connector might be loose, or the keyboard or keyboard/mouse controller might be faulty. See "Keyboard Problems." Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value — A memory module might be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See "Memory Problems" for additional troubleshooting suggestions. Memory allocation error — The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. 1. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart the computer. 2. Try to run the program again. 3. If the error message appears again, see the software documentation for additional troubleshooting suggestions. Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value — Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value — Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value —Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value — A memory module might be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See "Memory Problems" for additional troubleshooting suggestions. Memory size in CMOS invalid — The amount of memory recorded in the computer configuration information does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error message appears again, contact Dell. See "Memory Problems" for additional troubleshooting suggestions. No boot device available — The computer cannot find the floppy disk or hard drive. l If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. l If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. l Enter system setup and ensure that the boot sequence information is correct. No boot sector on hard-disk drive — l The computer configuration information in system setup might be incorrect. Enter system setup and ensure that the computer configuration information for the hard drive is correct. l If the message continues to appear after you confirmed that the information in system setup is correct, the operating system might have been corrupted. Reinstall the operating system. See your operating system documentation for reinstallation information. No timer tick interrupt — A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning. Run the Dell Diagnostics. Non-system disk or disk error — The floppy disk in drive A or your hard drive does not have a bootable operating system installed on it. Either replace the floppy disk with one that has a bootable operating system, or remove the floppy disk from drive A and restart the computer. Not a boot diskette — The operating system is trying to boot to a floppy disk that does not have a bootable operating system installed on it. Insert a bootable floppy disk. Not enough memory or resources. Close some programs and try again — You have too many programs open. Close all windows and open the program that you want to use. In some cases, you might have to restart your computer to restore computer resources. If so, try running the program that you want to use first. Operating system not found — Contact Dell. Plug and Play Configuration Error — The computer encountered a problem while trying to configure one or more cards. 1. Turn your computer off, unplug it from the electrical outlet, and remove all but one of the cards. 2. Plug in your computer and restart it. 3. If the message reappears, the installed card might be malfunctioning. If the message does not reappear, turn off the computer and reinsert one of the other cards. 4. Repeat this process until you identify which card is malfunctioning. Read fault — The operating system cannot read from the floppy or hard drive, the computer could not find a particular sector on the disk, or the requested sector is defective. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Requested sector not found — The operating system cannot read from the floppy or hard drive, the computer could not find a particular sector on the disk, or the requested sector is defective. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Reset failed — The disk reset operation failed. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Sector not found — The operating system cannot locate a sector on the floppy or hard drive. l Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the floppy disk or hard drive. See Windows Help for instructions (see "Finding Information for Your Computer"). l If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the floppy disk or hard drive. Seek error — The operating system cannot find a specific track on the floppy disk or hard drive. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Shutdown failure — A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning. Run the Dell Diagnostics. The file being copied is too large for the destination drive — The file that you are trying to copy is too large to fit on the disk. Try copying the file to a blank disk or using a larger-capacity disk. Time-of-day clock stopped — The battery might be dead. Enter system setup and correct the date or time. If the problem persists, contact Dell. See "Battery Problems" for additional troubleshooting suggestions. Time-of-day not set — The time or date stored in system setup does not match the computer clock. Enter system setup and correct the Date and Time options. Timer chip counter 2 failed — A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning. Run the Dell Diagnostics. Unexpected interrupt in protected mode — The keyboard controller might be malfunctioning, or a memory module might be loose. Run the Dell Diagnostics. WARNING: Dell's Disk Monitoring System has detected that drive [0/1] on the [primary/secondary] EIDE controller is operating outside of normal specifications. It is advisable to immediately back up your data and replace your hard drive by calling your support desk or Dell — During initial start-up, the drive detected possible error conditions. l When your computer finishes booting, immediately back up your data and replace your hard drive. l If no replacement drive is immediately available and the drive is not the only bootable drive, enter system setup and change the appropriate drive setting to None. Then remove the drive from the computer. Write fault — The operating system cannot write to the floppy or hard drive. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. Write fault on selected drive — The operating system cannot write to the floppy or hard drive. See "Floppy drive problems" or "Hard drive problems" for troubleshooting suggestions. x:\ is not accessible. The device is not ready — The floppy drive cannot read the disk. Insert a floppy disk into the drive and try again. General Problems The computer stops responding A program stops responding A program crashes repeatedly A program is designed for an earlier Windows operating system A solid blue screen appears Other software problems Turn the computer off — If your computer locks up and you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Then press the power button again to turn on the computer. You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. If the computer locks up and the power button fails to function properly, unplug the power cable from the computer, wait for the computer to completely stop running, and plug in the power cable. If the computer does not restart, press the power button to restart the computer. End the program — Windows® XP, Windows 2000 1. Press simultaneously. 2. Click Applications. 3. Click the program that is no longer responding. 4. Click End Task. NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. Check the software documentation — Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. If You Are Using Windows XP, Run the Program Compatibility Wizard — Windows XP provides a Program Compatibility Wizard that configures a program so it runs in an environment similar to non-Windows XP operating system environments. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs® Accessories, and then click Program Compatibility Wizard. 2. In the welcome screen, click Next. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Turn the computer off — If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. The chkdsk program automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on the screen. Check the software documentation or contact the software manufacturer for troubleshooting information Back up your files immediately — If your computer has a CD-RW drive or a zip drive installed, see the drive's documentation for instructions. Ensure that you have not made an error while entering data — See the program documentation to make sure that the values or characters you are entering are valid. Check for viruses — Use a virus-scanning program to check the hard drive, floppy disks, or CDs. Restart the computer — Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down your computer through the Start menu instead of pressing the power button. Otherwise, you may lose data. Other technical problems General hardware problems If your computer exhibits one or more of the following symptoms, a device conflict may exist: l Your computer locks up, particularly while using a specific device. l A recently added device does not work. l Memory parity errors occur on parity-enabled computers. l A sound card emits noise or demonstrates other problems. l Unintelligible characters print from the printer. l The mouse pointer does not move or "stutters" when it moves. l Messages appear stating that the computer is not operating at maximum performance. l Errors occur and programs crash for no apparent reason. l Nothing displays on the monitor. IEEE 1394 Device Problems Keyboard Problems Check for compatibility — l Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer and that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. l If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program — See the software documentation for information. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. Run the Dell Diagnostics — If all tests run successfully, the error condition is related to a software problem. Check for device driver conflicts — l Verify that the program's device drivers do not conflict with certain programs. l Call the software manufacturer for technical assistance. Go to the Dell Support Website — Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions.The support website offers several different tools to help you such as Dell Forum — a chat room where you can communicate with other Dell customers about their computers and gain access to technical support through e-mail. See "Finding Information for Your Computer" for more about the Dell Support website. Call Dell — If you cannot solve your problem by using the Dell Support website, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Technical Support Service" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. Remove any recently added hardware to see if it resolves the conflict — If removing the hardware resolves the conflict, see the hardware documentation for configuration and troubleshooting instructions. If the problem persists, contact the hardware manufacturer for technical assistance. Check your operating system documentation for additional troubleshooting information Check for interrupt request conflicts — See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." NOTE: Check Windows Explorer to see if your device is listed as a drive. Check the IEEE 1394 device — Ensure that the IEEE 1394 device is properly inserted into the connector. Ensure that the IEEE 1394 device is recognized by Windows® — 1. Click the Start button. 2. Click Control Panel. 3. Click Printers and Other Hardware. If your IEEE 1394 device is listed, Windows recognizes the device. If you have problems with a Dell-provided IEEE 1394 device — Contact Dell. If you have problems with a IEEE 1394 device not provided by Dell — Contact the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Memory Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Microprocessor Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Restart the computer — l If the mouse is functioning, shut down the computer through the Start menu. After the computer shuts down, press the power button to restart the computer. l If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or the mouse, press the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. Check the keyboard cable — l Ensure that the keyboard cable is firmly connected to the computer. l Check the cable connector for bent or broken pins and for damaged or frayed cables. Straighten bent pins. l Remove keyboard extension cables and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. Test the keyboard — Connect a properly working keyboard to the computer, and try using the keyboard. If the new keyboard works, the original keyboard is faulty. Check the keyboard switch setting — Some keyboards have switch settings that are on the bottom of the keyboard, sometimes behind a panel. Ensure that the switch is set to PS/2, Enhanced XT/AT, or PC/AT. See the keyboard documentation for recommended settings. Run the Dell Diagnostics — Run the Dell Diagnostics. If any of the diagnostics tests fail, contact Dell. Check for interrupt request conflicts — See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. If you receive an insufficient memory message — 1. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using to see if that resolves the problem. 2. Confirm that the computer has sufficient memory to run your programs. See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If necessary, install additional memory. 3. Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory. 4. Restart the computer. 5. Run the Dell Diagnostics. If any of the diagnostics tests fail, contact Dell. If you experience other memory problems — 1. Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory. 2. Restart the computer. 3. If the problem still exists, remove all the memory modules and install one memory module in memory module connector 4. 4. Restart the computer. The following message appears: Alert! Operating in Debug Mode. Please Populate Memory in Pairs for Normal Operation. 5. Press to boot to the operating system. 6. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 7. If the memory module passes, shut down the computer, remove the memory module, and repeat the process with the remaining memory modules until a memory error occurs during start-up or diagnostic testing. If the first memory module tested is defective, repeat the process with the remaining modules to ensure that the remaining modules are not defective. 8. When the defective memory module is identified, contact Dell for a replacement. NOTE: If necessary, the computer can operate in debug mode until new memory modules are installed. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. If you receive an error message for the microprocessor — l If two microprocessors are installed, ensure that they are identical. If the microprocessors aren't identical, you may receive an error Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Network Problems message for the following: ¡ Different cache sizes ¡ Different speeds ¡ Different types Enter system setup and ensure that values for Processor 0 and Processor 1 under the CPU Information option are identical: l If two microprocessors are installed, ensure that a VRM is installed for the second microprocessor. l Remove and reinstall the microprocessor. l Run the System Board Devices and Processor Cache test groups in the Dell Diagnostics. Verify that the VRM is working: l If two microprocessors are installed, ensure that a VRM is properly installed for the second microprocessor. l Reseat the second VRM (see "VRM"). l Run the System Board Devices and Processor Cache test groups in the Dell Diagnostics. Restart the computer — 1. Simultaneously press to display the Start menu. 2. Type u, press the keyboard arrow keys to highlight Shut down or Turn Off, and then press . 3. After the computer turns off, press the power button to restart the computer. Check the mouse cable — l Check the cable connector for bent or broken pins and for damaged or frayed cables. Straighten bent pins. l Ensure that the cable is firmly connected to the computer. Test the mouse — Connect a properly working mouse to the computer, and try using the mouse. If the new mouse works, the original mouse was faulty. Check the mouse settings — Windows® XP 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. 2. Click Mouse. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. Try adjusting the settings. If you are using a PS/2 mouse 1. Enter system setup and ensure that Mouse Port under the Integrated Devices option is set to On. 2. Exit system setup and restart the computer. Reinstall the mouse driver — See "Reinstalling Drivers." Run the Dell Diagnostics — If any of the diagnostics tests fail, contact Dell. Check for interrupt request conflicts — See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." Check the network cable connector — Ensure that the network cable is firmly inserted into both the network connector on the back of the computer and the network jack. Check the network lights on the back of the computer — No light indicates that there is no network communication. Try replacing the network cable. Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Printer Problems 1 link integrity light 2 network activity light Restart the computer and try to log on to the network again Check your network settings — Contact your network administrator or the person who set up your network to verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. Check for interrupt request conflicts — See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities." CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Adjust the Power Properties — Your computer may be in standby or hibernate mode. For information on power conservation modes, see your operating system documentation. If the power light is green and the computer is not responding — See "Diagnostic Lights." If the power light is blinking green — The computer is in standby mode. Press a key on the keyboard or move the mouse to resume normal operation. If the power light is off — The computer is either turned off or is not receiving power. l Reseat the power cable into both the power connector on the back of the computer and the electrical outlet. l If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power strip is plugged into an electrical outlet and that the power strip is turned on. l Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. l Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on. l See "Diagnostic Lights." l If the problem persists, contact Dell. If the power light is steady amber — The computer is receiving electrical power, but an internal power problem might exist. l Ensure that the microprocessor power cable is securely connected to the system board. l See "Diagnostic Lights." l If the problem persists, contact Dell. If the power light is blinking amber — A device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed. l Remove and then reinstall the memory modules. l Remove and then reinstall any cards. l Remove and then reinstall the video card, if applicable. l See "Diagnostic Lights." l If the problem persists, contact Dell. Eliminate interference — Electrical appliances on the same circuit or operating near the computer can cause interference. Other causes of interference are: l Power extension cables l Keyboard and mouse extension cables l Too many devices on a power strip l Multiple power strips connected to the same electrical outlet NOTE: Dell does not cover the printer's warranty. If you need technical assistance for your printer, call the printer's manufacturer. See the printer documentation for the correct phone number. Check the printer documentation — See the printer documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. Ensure that the printer is turned on — See the printer documentation for power button information. Verify the printer cable connections — l See the printer documentation for cable connection information. l Ensure that the printer cables are securely connected to the printer and the computer. Serial or Parallel Device Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. No sound from speakers Test the electrical outlet — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Verify that the printer is recognized by Windows® — Windows XP 1. Click the Start button. 2. Click Control Panel. 3. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 4. Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon. 5. Click Properties, and then select the Ports tab. For a parallel printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). For a USB printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is USB. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon. 2. Click Properties, and then select the Ports tab. For a parallel printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). For a USB printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is USB. Reinstall the printer driver — See "Reinstalling Drivers." NOTE: If you are having a problem with a printer, see "Printer Problems." Check the documentation for the device — See the device's documentation for troubleshooting procedures. Ensure that the device is turned on — Firmly press the device's power button. Check the device cable connections — Check the connector for bent or broken pins. (It is normal for most device cable connectors to have missing pins.) Ensure that the device cable is firmly connected to the computer. Test the device cable — Swap the device's cable with a cable that works properly. Test the electrical outlet — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Eliminate interference — Relocate any electrical appliances on the same circuit or operating near the computer that might cause interference. Remove these other possible causes of interference: l Power extension cables l Keyboard and mouse extension cables l Too many devices on a power strip l Multiple power strips connected to the same electrical outlet Check the option setting — See the device's documentation for the recommended settings. Then enter system setup and go to the Integrated Devices option settings. Ensure that the Serial Port setting (for a serial device) or the Parallel Port setting (for a parallel device) matches the recommended settings. Check the software documentation — If the problem occurs with particular software, see the software documentation for the recommended serial or parallel port settings. Ensure that the port settings match the recommended settings. Run the Dell Diagnostics — If the tests do not complete, contact Dell. Test the device — Swap the device with a comparable device that works properly. NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows® volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, ensure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Check the speaker cable connections — Ensure that the speakers are connected as shown on the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. No sound from headphones System Board Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete the following checks. Ensure that the subwoofer and the speakers are turned on — See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If your speakers have volume controls, adjust the volume, bass, or treble to eliminate distortion. Adjust the Windows volume control — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Disconnect headphones from the headphone connector — Sound from the speakers is automatically disabled when headphones are connected to the computer's front-panel headphone connector. Test the electrical outlet — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Eliminate possible interference — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. Run the speaker diagnostics — Some speaker systems have self- diagnostics. See the speaker documentation for diagnostics instructions. Reinstall the audio (sound) driver — See "Reinstalling Drivers." Check the device option setting — Enter system setup and ensure that Sound under the Integrated Devices option is set to On. Exit system setup and restart the computer. Run the Dell Diagnostics — l If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. l If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. Check for interrupt request conflicts — See Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities. Check the headphone cable connection — Ensure that the headphone cable is securely inserted into the headphone connector. Adjust the Windows volume control — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Disable digital mode — Your headphones do not work if the CD drive is operating in digital mode. To disable digital mode: 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices. 2. Click Sounds and Audio Devices. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Double-click the name of your CD drive. 5. Click the Properties tab. 6. Uncheck the Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device box. Run the Dell Diagnostics — Restart the computer and run t the Dell Diagnostics. If any of the tests fail, contact Dell. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Check the power supply cable connections — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer cover. 2. Ensure that the power cables from the power supply are firmly connected to the connectors on the system board. 3. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Perform all checks in "Card Problems" Perform all checks in "Keyboard Problems" CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Reinstall the battery — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer. 2. Remove the battery, wait 5 minutes, and reinstall the battery. 3. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. If the problem still exists, contact Dell. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide.Video and Monitor Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the screen is blank If the screen is difficult to read Back to Contents Page Reseat the Memory Modules — 1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect them from electrical outlets, wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then open the computer cover. 2. Remove and replace the memory module(s). 3. Close the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 4. If the RAM count displayed does not correctly match the actual amount of memory installed in the computer, contact Dell. NOTE: See the monitor documentation for troubleshooting procedures. Check the monitor power light — If the power light is off, firmly press the button to ensure that the monitor is turned on. If the power light is lit or blinking, the monitor has power. If the power light is blinking, press a key on the keyboard or move the mouse. Check the monitor cable connection — Check the connector for bent or broken pins. (It is normal for monitor cable connectors to have missing pins.) Test the electrical outlet — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Swap the power cables — Swap the computer and monitor power cables to determine if the power cable is defective. Test the video extension cable (if used) — If you are using a video extension cable and removing the cable solves the problem, the cable is defective. Test another monitor — If another monitor is available, connect it to the computer. Check the diagnostic lights — See Diagnostic Lights. Check the card setting — Enter system setup and ensure that Primary Video Controller under the Integrated Devices option is set correctly. For an AGP card, set Primary Video Controller to AGP. For a PCI card, set Primary Video Controller to Auto. Exit system setup and restart the computer. Run the Dell Diagnostics — If any tests fail, contact Dell. Check the monitor settings — See the monitor documentation for instructions on adjusting the contrast and brightness, demagnetizing (degaussing) the monitor, and running the monitor self-test. Move the subwoofer away from the monitor — If your speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm  (2 ft) away from the monitor.  Move the monitor away from external power sources — Fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, and other electrical devices can cause the screen image to appear "shaky." Turn off nearby devices to check for interference. Adjust the Windows® display settings — Windows XP 1. Click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Themes. 3. Click Display, and then click the Settings tab. 4. Try different settings for Screen resolution and Color quality. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon, and then click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Screen area or Desktop area. Restore the recommended settings — Restore the original resolution and refresh rate settings. Restore the recommended settings — Restore the original resolution and refresh rate settings. See the Tell Me How help file for instructions. To access help files, see page 4.Back to Contents Page Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide This document describes the features and operation of your computer. This document is stored on your computer hard drive. For information on other documentation included with your computer, see "Finding Information for Your Computer." For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary. If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Dell OpenManage, and Latitude are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks and Xeon is a trademark of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows NT, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; IBM and OS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Dell Computer Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Models: WHL and WHM April 2003     P/N 6T345     Rev. A03 Back to Contents Page NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page Warranty and Return Policy Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Your Operating System Dell Precision™ Workstations 450 and 650 User's Guide Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP Reinstalling Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Features Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP Before You Reinstall If you are considering reinstalling the Windows XP operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. To reinstall Windows XP, you need the following items: l Dell Operating System CD l Dell Drivers and Utilities CD l Product Key (Product ID Number) ____________________ Reinstalling Windows XP To reinstall Windows XP, perform all the steps in the following sections in the order in which they are listed. The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. Booting From the Operating System CD 1. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2. Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3. Shut down the computer through the Start menu and restart the computer. 4. Press  immediately after the DELL™ logo appears.  If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5. Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press . 6. When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows XP Setup 1. When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press to select To set up Windows now. 2. Read the information on the Microsoft Windows Licensing Agreement screen, and press to accept the license agreement. 3. If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then remove the CD from the drive. NOTE: See "Advanced Troubleshooting" for information on identifying drivers, creating a restore point, and resolving software and hardware incompatibilities. NOTICE: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the first drive detected by the computer. NOTE: The Dell Drivers and Utilities CD contains drivers that were factory-installed during assembly of the computer. Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to load any required drivers, including those drivers required if your computer has a redundant array of independent disks (RAID) controller. NOTE: The Product Key is the bar code number on the sticker that is located on the external side cover of your computer. You may be prompted for the Product Key when using the Operating System CD under certain conditions. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. NOTICE: To prevent conflicts with Windows XP, disable any virus protection software installed on your computer before you reinstall Windows XP. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. 4. If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press to select that option. 5. Press to select the highlighted partition (recommended), and then follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears, and the operating system begins to copy files and install the devices. The computer automatically restarts multiple times. 6. When the Regional and Language Options screen appears, select the settings for your location, and then click Next. 7. Enter your name and organization (optional) in the Personalize Your Software screen and click Next. 8. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, at the What's your computer's name window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the name provided) and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, at the Computer Name and Administrator Password window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the one provided) and a password, and then click Next. 9. If the Modem Dialing Information screen appears, enter the requested information and click Next. 10. Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. 11. If the Networking Settings screen appears, click Typical and click Next. 12. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional and you are prompted to provide further information regarding your network configuration, enter your selections. If you are unsure of your settings, accept the default selections. Windows XP installs the operating system components and configures the computer. The computer automatically restarts. 13. When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click Next. 14. When the How will this computer connect to the Internet? message appears, click Skip. 15. When the Ready to register with Microsoft? screen appears, select No, not at this time and click Next. 16. When the Who will use this computer? screen appears, you can enter up to five users. Click Next. 17. Click Finish to complete the setup, and remove the CD from the drive. 18. Reinstall the appropriate drivers using the ResourceCD. 19. Reinstall your virus protection software. Reinstalling Microsoft Windows 2000 The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. 1. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2. Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3. Shut down the computer through the Start menu and restart the computer. 4. Press  immediately after the DELL™ logo appears.  If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5. Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press . 6. When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. 7. When the Windows 2000 Setup window appears, ensure that To setup Win2000 now, press ENTER is highlighted. Then press . 8. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window appears, press the arrow keys to select the Windows 2000 partition option that you want. Then press the key for the partition option you chose. 9. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window reappears, press the arrow keys to select the type of file system that you want Windows 2000 to use, and then press . 10. Press again to restart your computer. 11. Click Next when the Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears. 12. When the Regional Settings window appears, select your region, and then click Next. NOTE: The time required to complete the setup depends on the size of the hard drive and the speed of your computer. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows 2000. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows 2000 unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. 13. Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software window, and then click Next. 14. Enter the Windows product key, which is printed on the Microsoft label on your computer. Then click Next. 15. When the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears, enter a name for your computer and a password, if desired. Then click Next. 16. Enter the date and time in the Date and Time Settings window, and then click Next. Windows 2000 installs components and configures the computer. 17. When the Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears, remove the CD from the drive, and then click Finish. The computer automatically restarts. 18. Reinstall the appropriate drivers using the ResourceCD. 19. Reinstall your virus protection software. Microsoft Windows XP Features Transferring Information to a New Computer The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Files and Settings Transfer wizard to move data from the source computer to the new computer. You can move data such as: l E-mails l Toolbar settings l Window sizes l Internet bookmarks You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or serial connection, or you can store it on a removable medium, such as a writable CD or floppy disk. To prepare the new computer for the file transfer: 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs® Accessories® System Tools, and then click Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. 2. When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears, click Next. 3. On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer and click Next. 4. On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I will use the wizard from the Windows XP CD and click Next. 5. When the Now go to your old computer screen appears, go to your old or source computer. Do not click Next at this time. To copy data from the old computer: 1. On the old computer, insert the Windows XP Operating System CD. 2. On the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP screen, click Perform additional tasks. 3. Under What do you want to do?, click Transfer files and settings. 4. On the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen, click Next. 5. On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer and click Next. 6. On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you prefer. 7. On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to transfer and click Next. After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection Phase screen appears. 8. Click Finish. To transfer data to the new computer: 1. On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click Next. 2. On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your new computer. When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen appears. 3. Click Finished and restart the new computer. Switching to Classic View You can change the Control Panel, the Start menu, and the Microsoft® Windows® desktop so they look like they did in previous versions of the Windows NOTE: The procedures in this help file were written for the Windows default view, so the options might be different if you switch to the classic view. operating system. Control Panel 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Switch to Classic View or Switch to Category View in the upper-left area of the Control Panel window. Start Menu 1. Right-click an empty area on the taskbar. 2. Click Properties and click the Start Menu tab. 3. Click Classic Start Menu and click OK. Desktop Themes 1. Right-click anywhere on the main desktop screen and click Properties. 2. On the Themes tab, click Windows Classic in the drop-down menu. 3. To customize color, font, and other classic desktop options, click the Appearance tab and click Advanced. 4. When you have made your selections, click OK. Desktop Cleanup Wizard By default, the Desktop Cleanup Wizard moves desktop icons that are not frequently used from your desktop to a designated folder 7 days after you first start your computer and every 60 days after that. The appearance of the Start menu changes as desktop icons are moved. To turn off the Desktop Cleanup Wizard: 1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Run Desktop Cleanup Wizard every 60 days to remove the check mark. 4. Click OK. To run the Desktop Cleanup Wizard at any time: 1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Clean Desktop Now. 4. When the Desktop Cleanup Wizard screen appears, click Next. 5. To leave an icon on the desktop, click the icon name to remove the check mark, and then click Next. 6. Click Finish to remove the shortcuts and close the wizard. Internet Connection Firewall The Internet Connection Firewall provides basic protection from unauthorized access to the computer while the computer is connected to the Internet. The firewall is automatically enabled when you run the Network Setup Wizard. When the firewall is enabled for a network connection, the firewall icon appears with a red background in the Network Connections section of the Control Panel. Note that enabling the Internet Connection Firewall does not reduce the need for virus-checking software. For more information, see the Help and Support Center (Microsoft® Windows® XP). Setting Up a Home and Office Network Network Setup Wizard The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Network Setup Wizard to guide you through the process of sharing files, printers, or an Internet connection between computers in a home or small office. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs® Accessories® Communications, and then click Network Setup Wizard. 2. On the welcome screen, click Next. 3. Click Checklist for creating a network. 4. Complete the checklist and required preparations. 5. Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions on the screen. User Accounts and Fast User Switching NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP. Adding User Accounts After the Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system is installed, the administrator or a user with administrator rights can create additional user accounts. 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. In the Control Panel window, click User Accounts. 3. Under Pick a task, click Create a new account. 4. Under Name the new account, type the name of the new user and click Next. 5. Under Pick an account type, click one of the following options: l Computer administrator — You can change all computer settings. l Limited — You can change only your own personal settings, such as your password. You cannot install programs or use the Internet. 6. Click Create Account. Fast User Switching Fast User Switching allows multiple users to access one computer without requiring the previous user to log off. 1. Click the Start button and click Log Off. 2. In the Log Off Windows window, click Switch User. When you use Fast User Switching, programs that previous users were using remain running in the background, which might decrease your computer's response time. Also, multimedia programs, such as games and DVD software, might not work with Fast User Switching. For more information, see the Windows Help and Support Center. Back to Contents Page NOTE: Additional options may be available, depending on whether you are using Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional. Also, options available in Windows XP Professional vary depending on whether your computer is connected to a domain. NOTE: Fast User Switching is unavailable if your computer is running Windows XP Professional and is a member of a computer domain, or if your computer has less than 128 MB of memory. Systèmes Dell PowerEdge R320 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire: E18S Series Type réglementaire: E18S001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Boomi™, Dell Precision™ , OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation. 2012 - 10 Rev. A01Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: À propos du système.................................................................................................9 Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant...................................................................................................................9 Fonctionnalités de l'écran LCD...............................................................................................................................13 Écran d'accueil................................................................................................................................................14 Menu Configuration..........................................................................................................................................14 Menu Vue.........................................................................................................................................................15 Voyants de diagnostic............................................................................................................................................15 Codes des voyants des disques durs.....................................................................................................................17 Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière....................................................................................................18 Codes des voyants de carte réseau.......................................................................................................................20 Codes du voyant d'alimentation.............................................................................................................................20 Autres informations utiles.......................................................................................................................................21 Chapitre 2: Utilisation du gestionnaire de configuration du système et d'amorçage......23 Choix du mode d'amorçage du système.................................................................................................................23 Accès au programme de configuration du système...............................................................................................24 Réponse aux messages d'erreur.....................................................................................................................24 Utilisation des touches de navigation de la configuration du système...........................................................24 Options de configuration du système.....................................................................................................................25 Écran principal System Setup (Configuration du système)..............................................................................25 Écran System BIOS (BIOS du système)...........................................................................................................25 Écran System Information (Informations sur le système)................................................................................26 Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire)......................................................................................27 Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur)..................................................................................27 Écran SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA)........................................................................................................29 Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage)...............................................................................................30 Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés)........................................................................................30 Écran Serial Communications (Communications série)...................................................................................32 Écran System Profile Settings (Paramètres du profil du système)..................................................................32 Écran System Security (Sécurité du système).................................................................................................34 Miscellaneous Settings (Paramètres divers)...................................................................................................35 Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration..............................................36 Attribution d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration.......................................................................36 Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe de configuration..................................................................37 Protection du système à l'aide d'un mot de passe système............................................................................38Utilisation du système avec un mot de passe de configuration activé............................................................38 Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI...............................................................................................................38 Utilisation des touches de navigation du Gestionnaire d'amorçage...............................................................39 Écran Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage)............................................................................................39 Menu UEFI Boot (Amorçage UEFI)...................................................................................................................40 Gestion intégrée du système..................................................................................................................................40 Utilitaire iDRAC Settings.........................................................................................................................................41 Accès à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC......................................................................................................41 Chapitre 3: Installation des composants du système.............................................................43 Outils recommandés...............................................................................................................................................43 Cadre avant (en option)..........................................................................................................................................43 Installation du cadre avant...............................................................................................................................43 Retrait du cadre avant......................................................................................................................................44 Ouverture et fermeture du système........................................................................................................................44 Ouverture du système......................................................................................................................................44 Fermeture du système......................................................................................................................................45 À l'intérieur du système..........................................................................................................................................45 Carénage de refroidissement.................................................................................................................................47 Retrait du carénage de refroidissement..........................................................................................................47 Installation du carénage de refroidissement...................................................................................................48 Mémoire système...................................................................................................................................................49 Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire................................................................51 Consignes spécifiques à chaque mode...........................................................................................................51 Exemples de configurations de mémoire.........................................................................................................52 Retrait de barrettes de mémoire......................................................................................................................53 Installation de barrettes de mémoire...............................................................................................................54 Disques durs...........................................................................................................................................................55 Retrait d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 2,5 pouces............................................................................56 Installation d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 2,5 pouces.....................................................................56 Retrait d'un cache de disque dur de 3,5 pouces..............................................................................................57 Installation d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces.....................................................................57 Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud..................................................................................................57 Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud...........................................................................................58 Retrait d'un disque dur connecté par câble.....................................................................................................59 Installation d'un disque dur connecté par câble.............................................................................................60 Retrait d'un disque dur de 2,5 pouces depuis un adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces............................60 Installation d'un disque dur de 2,5 pouces dans un adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces........................61 Retrait d'un disque dur ou un adaptateur de disque dur depuis un support de disque dur............................61 Installation d'un disque dur ou un adaptateur de disque dur dans un support de disque dur........................64 Lecteur optique (en option).....................................................................................................................................65 Retrait d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs remplaçables à chaud..............................65Installation d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs remplaçables à chaud.......................66 Retrait d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs connectés par câble.................................66 Installation d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs connectés par câble..........................68 Ventilateurs.............................................................................................................................................................68 Retrait d'un ventilateur.....................................................................................................................................68 Installation d'un ventilateur..............................................................................................................................69 Clé de mémoire USB interne (en option)................................................................................................................70 Remplacement de la clé USB interne..............................................................................................................70 Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension.......................................................................71 Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension.............................................................................................71 Retrait d'une carte d'extension........................................................................................................................72 Installation d'une carte d'extension.................................................................................................................74 Retrait de cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension...................................................................................75 Installation des cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension..........................................................................77 Cartes de ports iDRAC (en option)..........................................................................................................................77 Retrait de la carte de ports iDRAC...................................................................................................................77 Installation de la carte de ports iDRAC............................................................................................................78 Carte SD vFlash.......................................................................................................................................................79 Remplacement de la carte SD vFlash..............................................................................................................79 Module SD interne double......................................................................................................................................80 Retrait du module SD interne double...............................................................................................................80 Installation du module SD interne double........................................................................................................81 Carte SD interne.....................................................................................................................................................82 Retrait d'une carte SD interne.........................................................................................................................82 Installation d'une carte SD interne..................................................................................................................82 Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée...................................................................................................................83 Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée........................................................................................83 Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée.................................................................................84 Processeur..............................................................................................................................................................85 Retrait d'un processeur....................................................................................................................................85 Installation d'un processeur............................................................................................................................87 Blocs d'alimentation...............................................................................................................................................88 Alimentation de rechange................................................................................................................................89 Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation redondant......................................................................................................89 Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation redondant..............................................................................................90 Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation non redondant...............................................................................................90 Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation non redondant.......................................................................................91 Retrait du cache de bloc d'alimentation..........................................................................................................92 Installation du cache de bloc d'alimentation...................................................................................................92 Pile du système.......................................................................................................................................................92 Remplacement de la pile du système...............................................................................................................93 Fond de panier des disques durs............................................................................................................................94Retrait du fond de panier des disques durs.....................................................................................................94 Installation du fond de panier des disques durs..............................................................................................98 Assemblage du panneau de commande................................................................................................................99 Retrait du panneau de commande...................................................................................................................99 Installation du panneau de commande..........................................................................................................100 Retrait du module du panneau de commande...............................................................................................101 Installation du module du panneau de commande........................................................................................104 Module VGA..........................................................................................................................................................105 Retrait du module VGA...................................................................................................................................105 Installation du module VGA............................................................................................................................106 Carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation............................................................................................106 Retrait du carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation.....................................................................106 Installation du carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation..............................................................107 Carte de distribution d'alimentation.....................................................................................................................108 Retrait de la carte de distribution d'alimentation...........................................................................................108 Installation de la carte de distribution d'alimentation...................................................................................109 Carte système.......................................................................................................................................................109 Retrait de la carte système............................................................................................................................109 Installation de la carte système.....................................................................................................................111 Chapitre 4: Dépannage du système........................................................................................113 La sécurité en priorité, pour vous et votre système.............................................................................................113 Dépannage des échecs de démarrage du système.............................................................................................113 Dépannage des connexions externes..................................................................................................................113 Dépannage du sous-système vidéo......................................................................................................................113 Dépannage d'un périphérique USB......................................................................................................................113 Dépannage d'un périphérique d'E/S série............................................................................................................114 Dépannage d'une carte réseau............................................................................................................................114 Dépannage d'un système mouillé.........................................................................................................................115 Dépannage d'un système endommagé................................................................................................................115 Dépannage de la pile du système.........................................................................................................................116 Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation...................................................................................................................116 Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement...................................................................................................117 Dépannage des ventilateurs de refroidissement.................................................................................................117 Dépannage de la mémoire système.....................................................................................................................117 Dépannage d'une clé USB interne.......................................................................................................................118 Dépannage d'une carte SD..................................................................................................................................119 Dépannage d'un lecteur optique..........................................................................................................................119 Dépannage d'une unité de sauvegarde sur bande..............................................................................................120 Dépannage d'un disque dur..................................................................................................................................120 Dépannage d'un contrôleur de stockage.............................................................................................................121 Dépannage des cartes d'extension......................................................................................................................122Dépannage des processeurs................................................................................................................................123 Chapitre 5: Utilisation des diagnostics du système..............................................................125 Dell Online Diagnostics.........................................................................................................................................125 Diagnostics du système intégré Dell....................................................................................................................125 Quand utiliser les diagnostics intégrés du système......................................................................................125 Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système............................................................................................125 Commandes du diagnostic du système..........................................................................................................126 Chapitre 6: Cavaliers et connecteurs......................................................................................127 Paramètres des cavaliers de la carte système....................................................................................................127 Connecteurs de la carte système.........................................................................................................................128 Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié...............................................................................................................129 Chapitre 7: Caractéristiques techniques................................................................................131 Chapitre 8: Messages système................................................................................................137 Messages LCD......................................................................................................................................................137 Affichage des messages sur l'écran LCD......................................................................................................137 Suppression des messages affichés sur l'écran LCD....................................................................................137 Messages d'erreur du système............................................................................................................................137 Messages d'avertissement..................................................................................................................................159 Messages de diagnostic.......................................................................................................................................159 Messages d'alerte................................................................................................................................................159 Chapitre 9: Obtention d'aide.....................................................................................................161 Contacter Dell.......................................................................................................................................................16181 À propos du système Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant Figure 1. Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant : système quatre disques durs de 3,5 pouces Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Voyant de mise sous tension, bouton d'alimentation Le voyant de mise sous tension s'allume lorsque le système est allumé. Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle l'alimentation fournie au système. REMARQUE : Si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation compatible ACPI en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. 2 Bouton NMI Ce bouton permet de résoudre les erreurs liées aux logiciels ou aux pilotes de périphériques rencontrées avec certains systèmes d'exploitation. Appuyez sur ce bouton à l'aide de la pointe d'un trombone. Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous indique de le faire ou si cela est indiqué dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. 3 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. Appuyez rapidement pour activer ou désactiver l'ID du système. En cas de blocage du système durant l'exécution de l'auto-test de démarrage, appuyez sur le bouton de l'ID du système pendant plus de 5 secondes pour accéder au mode d'avancement du BIOS. 9Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description Pour réinitialiser l'iDRAC (s'il n'a pas été désactivé au cours de la configuration iDRAC F2) appuyez sur le bouton et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de 15 secondes. 4 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur VGA au système. 5 Boutons de menu de l'écran LCD Permettent de naviguer dans le menu de l'écran LCD du panneau de commande. 6 Écran LCD Affiche l'ID du système, les informations d'état et les messages d'erreur du système. L'écran LCD est bleu lorsque le système fonctionne normalement. Il est orange lorsque le système nécessite une intervention. Il affiche alors un code d'erreur suivi d'un texte descriptif. REMARQUE : Si le système est connecté à l'alimentation secteur et si une erreur a été détectée, l'écran LCD est orange, que le système soit allumé ou non. 7 Connecteurs USB (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles USB 2.0. 8 Plaquette d'information Une étiquette amovible vous permet d'enregistrer les informations sur le système, telles que le code de service, la carte réseau et l'adresse MAC, etc. 9 Lecteur optique (en option) Un lecteur SATA DVD-ROM ou DVD+/-RW ultramince. 10 Disques durs Jusqu'à quatre disques durs remplaçables à chaud de 2,5 ou 3,5 pouces ou SSD. Figure 2. Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant : système de huit disques durs de 2,5 pouces Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Voyant de mise sous tension, bouton d'alimentation Le voyant de mise sous tension s'allume lorsque le système est allumé. Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle l'alimentation fournie au système. 10Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description REMARQUE : Si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation compatible ACPI en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. 2 Bouton NMI Ce bouton permet de résoudre les erreurs liées aux logiciels ou aux pilotes de périphériques rencontrées avec certains systèmes d'exploitation. Appuyez sur ce bouton à l'aide de la pointe d'un trombone. Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous indique de le faire ou si cela est indiqué dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. 3 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. Appuyez rapidement pour activer ou désactiver l'ID du système. En cas de blocage du système durant l'exécution de l'auto-test de démarrage appuyez sur le bouton de l'ID du système pendant plus de 5 secondes pour accéder au mode d'avancement du BIOS. Pour réinitialiser l'iDRAC (s'il n'a pas été désactivé au cours de la configuration iDRAC F2) appuyez sur le bouton et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de 15 secondes. 4 Connecteurs USB (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles USB 2.0. 5 Lecteur optique (en option) Un lecteur SATA DVD-ROM ou DVD+/-RW ultramince. 6 Boutons de menu de l'écran LCD Permettent de naviguer dans le menu de l'écran LCD du panneau de commande. 7 Écran LCD Affiche l'ID du système, les informations d'état et les messages d'erreur du système. L'écran LCD est bleu lorsque le système fonctionne normalement. Il est orange lorsque le système nécessite une intervention. Il affiche alors un code d'erreur suivi d'un texte descriptif. REMARQUE : Si le système est connecté à l'alimentation secteur et si une erreur a été détectée, l'écran LCD est orange, que le système soit allumé ou non. 8 Plaquette d'information Une étiquette amovible qui vous permet d'enregistrer des informations sur le système, telles que le code de service, la carte réseau et l'adresse MAC, etc. 11Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 9 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur VGA au système. 10 Disques durs Jusqu'à huit disques durs échangeables à chaud de 2,5 pouces. Figure 3. Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant : système quatre disques durs de 3,5 pouces Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Voyant de mise sous tension, bouton d'alimentation Le voyant de mise sous tension s'allume lorsque le système est allumé. Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle l'alimentation fournie au système. REMARQUE : Si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation compatible ACPI en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. 2 Bouton NMI Ce bouton permet de résoudre les erreurs liées aux logiciels ou aux pilotes de périphériques rencontrées avec certains systèmes d'exploitation. Appuyez sur ce bouton à l'aide de la pointe d'un trombone. Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous indique de le faire ou si cela est indiqué dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. 3 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification du système qui se trouvent sur les panneaux avants et arrières peuvent être utilisés pour localiser un système particulier dans un rack. Lorsque vous appuyez sur un de ces boutons, le voyant d'état de système qui se trouve à l'arrière clignote jusqu'à ce que vous appuyiez de nouveau sur un des boutons. Appuyez pour faire basculer l'ID du système. Si le système cesse de répondre pendant l'auto-test de démarrage, appuyez sur le bouton de l'ID du système et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de cinq secondes pour entrer en mode d'avancement du BIOS. Pour réinitialiser l'iDRAC (si non désactivé pendant la configuration iDRAC F2) appuyez sur le bouton et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de 15 secondes. 4 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur VGA au système. 12Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 5 Voyants de diagnostic Les voyants de diagnostic s'allument pour afficher l'état d'erreur. 6 Connecteurs USB (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles USB 2.0. 7 Plaquette d'information Une étiquette amovible vous permet d'enregistrer des informations sur le système, telles que le code de service, la carte réseau et l'adresse MAC, etc. 8 Lecteur optique (en option) Un lecteur SATA DVD-ROM ou DVD+/-RW ultramince. 9 Disques durs Jusqu'à quatre disques durs SATA de 3,5 pouces Fonctionnalités de l'écran LCD REMARQUE : La fonction de l'écran LCD n'est pas disponible dans un système de disque dur branché par câble. L'écran LCD du système affiche des informations et des messages indiquant si le système fonctionne correctement ou s'il requiert une intervention. Voir Messages d'erreur du système pour obtenir des informations sur des codes d'erreur spécifiques. • Le rétro-éclairage de l'écran LCD est de couleur bleue en fonctionnement normal et orange en cas d'erreur. • Lorsque le système est en mode veille, l'écran LCD n'est pas rétro-éclairé. Pour activer le rétroéclairage, appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner, Gauche ou Droite de l'écran LCD. • Le rétro-éclairage de l'écran LCD reste inactif si l'affichage de messages a été désactivé via l'utilitaire iDRAC, l'écran LCD ou d'autres outils. Figure 4. Fonctionnalités de l'écran LCD Élément Bouton Description 1 Gauche Fait revenir le curseur étape par étape. 2 Sélectionner Permet de sélectionner l'élément de menu mis en surbrillance à l'aide du curseur. 3 Droite Fait avancer le curseur étape par étape. Durant le défilement des messages : 13Élément Bouton Description • Appuyez une fois pour augmenter la vitesse de défilement. • Appuyez de nouveau pour arrêter le défilement. • Appuyez une nouvelle fois pour rétablir la vitesse de défilement par défaut. • Appuyez encore une fois pour répéter le cycle. Écran d'accueil L'écran d'accueil affiche des informations sur le système qui sont configurables par l'utilisateur. Cet écran est affiché lors d'un fonctionnement système normal quand il n'y a pas de messages d'état ou d'erreurs. Lorsque le système est en mode de veille, le rétro-éclairage LCD s'éteint après cinq minutes d'inactivité s'il n'y a pas de messages d'erreur. Appuyez sur l'un des trois boutons de navigation (sélectionner, gauche ou droit) pour afficher l'écran d'accueil. Pour retourner à l'écran d'accueil à partir d'un autre menu, continuez de sélectionner la flèche haut jusqu'à ce que l'icône Accueil soit affichée, puis sélectionnez l'icône Accueil. Sur l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner pour accéder au menu principal. Menu Configuration REMARQUE : Si vous sélectionnez une option dans le menu Setup (Configuration), vous devez confirmer l'option avant de passer à l'étape suivante. Option Description iDRAC Sélectionnez DHCP ou Static IP (IP statique) pour configurer le mode réseau. Si Static IP (IP statique) est sélectionné, les champs disponibles sont IP, Subnet (Sub) (sous-réseau) et Gateway (Gtw) (passerelle). Sélectionnez Setup DNS (configuration de DNS) pour activer une DNS et pour afficher les adresses de domaine. Deux entrées de DNS séparées sont disponibles. Set Error (Définition du mode d'erreur) Sélectionnez SEL pour afficher des messages d'erreur LCD dans un format qui correspond à la description IPMI dans le journal SEL. Il s'agit d'une méthode pratique lorsque vous essayez de faire correspondre un message LCD avec une entrée SEL. Sélectionnez Simple pour afficher des messages d'erreur LCD dans une description conviviale simplifiée. Référez-vous à la section Messages d'erreur système pour voir une liste de messages dans ce format. Set Home (Définition de l'écran d'accueil) Sélectionnez l'information par défaut que vous voulez afficher sur l'écran d'accueil LCD. Référez-vous à la section View Menu (Menu Vue) pour voir les options et les articles d'options qui peuvent être réglés par défaut sur l'écran d'accueil. 14Menu Vue REMARQUE : Si vous sélectionnez une option dans le menu View (Vue), vous devez confirmer l'option avant de passer à l'étape suivante. Option Description IP iDRAC Affiche les adresses IPv4 ou IPv6 de l'iDRAC7. Il s'agit de l'adresse DNS (principale et secondaire), de l'adresse de passerelle, de l'adresse IP et de l'adresse de sous-réseau (l'IPv6 ne comprend par de sous-réseau). MAC Affiche les adresses MAC des périphériques iDRAC, iSCSI ou réseau. Nom Affiche le nom d'hôte, le modèle ou une chaîne définie par l'utilisateur pour le système. Numéro Affiche le numéro d'inventaire ou le numéro de service du système. Alimentation Affiche la sortie d'alimentation du système en UET/h ou watts. Le format d'affichage peut être configuré dans le sous-menu Set home (Configurer accueil) du menu Setup (Configurer). Température Affiche la température du système en Celsius et Fahrenheit. Le format d'affichage peut être configuré dans le sous-menu Set home (Configurer accueil) du menu Setup (Configurer). Voyants de diagnostic Les voyants de diagnostic sur le panneau avant du système affichent l'état pendant le démarrage du système. REMARQUE : Aucun voyant de diagnostic n'est allumé lorsque le système est hors tension. Pour démarrer le système, branchez-le à une source d'alimentation et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. La section suivante décrit les conditions du système et les mesures correctives possibles associées à ces voyants : Voyant d'intégrité État Mesure corrective Si le système est sous tension et en bon état, le voyant s'allume en bleu. Aucune requise. L'indicateur clignote en orange si le système est victime d'une erreur (par exemple, un ventilateur ou un disque dur défaillant), qu'il soit sous tension ou en veille. Reportez-vous au journal des événements système ou aux messages du système pour le problème rencontré. Une configuration incorrecte de la mémoire peut provoquer un blocage au démarrage du système et une absence de sortie vidéo. Reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 15Voyant du disque dur État Mesure corrective Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer une activité du disque dur. Aucune requise. Voyant électrique État Mesure corrective Le voyant clignote en orange si le système rencontre une erreur électrique (par exemple, une tension en dehors des limites ou un bloc d'alimentation ou un régulateur de tension). Reportez-vous au journal des événements système ou aux messages du système pour le problème rencontré. S'il est provoqué par un problème du bloc d'alimentation, vérifiez le voyant sur le bloc d'alimentation. Réinstallez le bloc d'alimentation en le retirant puis en le réinstallant. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Voyant de température État Mesure corrective Le voyant clignote en orange si le système rencontre une erreur de température (par exemple, une température en dehors des limites ou un ventilateur défaillant). Assurez-vous qu'aucune des conditions suivantes n'existe : • Retrait ou panne de l'un des ventilateurs. • Retrait du capot du système, du carénage de refroidissement, de la plaque de recouvrement EMI, du cache de barrette de mémoire ou de plaque de recouvrement arrière. • La température ambiante est trop élevée. • La circulation de l'air extérieur est bloquée. Voir la section Obtention d'aide. Voyant de mémoire État Mesure corrective Le voyant clignote en orange si une Reportez-vous au journal des événements système ou aux messages du système pour trouver l'emplacement de la mémoire défaillante. 16Voyant de mémoire État Mesure corrective erreur de mémoire survient. Réinstallez le périphérique de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Voyant PCIe État Mesure corrective Le voyant clignote en orange si la carte PCIe rencontre une erreur. Redémarrez le système. Mettez à jour tous les pilotes requis pour la carte PCIe. Réinstallez la carte. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. Codes des voyants des disques durs Figure 5. Voyants de disque dur 1. voyant d'activité du disque dur (vert) 2. voyant d'état du disque dur (vert et orange) REMARQUE : Si le disque dur est en mode Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), le voyant de l'état (sur la droite) ne fonctionne pas et reste éteint. Codes des voyants d'état des disques (RAID uniquement) État Voyant vert clignotant deux fois par seconde Identification du disque/préparation au retrait Éteint Disque prêt pour insertion ou retrait 17Codes des voyants d'état des disques (RAID uniquement) État REMARQUE : Le voyant d'état des disques reste éteint jusqu'à ce que tous les disques soient initialisés après la mise sous tension du système. Il n'est pas possible d'insérer ou de retirer des disques au cours de cette période. Vert clignotant, puis orange, puis extinction Panne du lecteur prévisible Orange clignotant quatre fois par seconde Disque en panne Vert clignotant lentement Disque en cours de reconstruction Vert fixe Disque en ligne Voyant vert clignotant pendant trois secondes, orange pendant trois secondes et extinction pendant six secondes Reconstruction annulée Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière Figure 6. Voyants et fonctions du panneau arrière (avec des blocs d'alimentation redondants) Figure 7. Voyants et fonctions du panneau arrière (avec bloc d'alimentation non-redondant) 18Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Logement 1 de carte d'extension PCIe Vous permet de connecter une carte d'extension PCI Express mi-hauteur. 2 Logement de carte du support VFlash (en option) Vous permet d'insérer une carte de support vFlash en option. 3 Port iDRAC (en option) Port de gestion dédié sur la carte des ports iDRAC. 4 Connecteur série Permet de connecter un périphérique série au système. 5 Logement de la carte d'extension PCIe 2 Vous permet de connecter une carte d'extension PCI Express pleine hauteur. 6 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur VGA au système. 7 Connecteurs Ethernet (2) Deux connecteurs de cartes réseau intégrées 10/100/1000 Mbit/s. 8 Connecteurs USB (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles USB 2.0. 9 Connecteur d'identification du système Permet de connecter l'assemblage des voyants d'état du système en option au moyen du bras de gestion des câbles en option. 10 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Systèmes de disque dur remplaçable à chaud Si vous appuyez sur l'un de ces boutons, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent. Pour qu'ils arrêtent de clignoter, appuyez de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. Systèmes de disques durs connectés par câble Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, le voyant d'état du système situé sur le panneau arrière clignote jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. Appuyez rapidement pour activer ou désactiver l'ID du système. En cas de blocage du système durant l'exécution de l'auto-test de démarrage, appuyez sur le bouton de l'ID du système pendant plus de 5 secondes pour accéder au mode d'avancement du BIOS. Pour réinitialiser l'iDRAC (s'il n'a pas été désactivé au cours de la configuration iDRAC F2) appuyez sur le bouton et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de 15 secondes. 19Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 11 Alimentation (PSU1) 350 W et 550 W REMARQUE : Il n'y a qu'un support de bloc d'alimentation pour les blocs d'alimentation nonredondants. 12 Alimentation (PSU2) Codes des voyants de carte réseau Figure 8. Voyant de la carte réseau 1. voyant de liaison 2. voyant d'activité Voyant Code du voyant Les voyants de liaison et d'activité sont éteints La carte réseau n'est pas connectée au réseau. Le voyant de liaison est vert La carte réseau est connectée à un réseau valide à la vitesse de débit de port maximale (1 Gb/s ou 10 Gb/s). Le voyant de liaison est orange La carte réseau est connectée à un réseau valide à un débit moindre que son débit de port maximal. Le voyant d'activité clignote en vert. Des données réseau sont en cours d'envoi ou de réception. Codes du voyant d'alimentation Chaque bloc d'alimentation possède une poignée transparente lumineuse qui sert de voyant pour montrer si l'alimentation est présente ou non. 20Figure 9. Voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation 1. Voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation Comportement du voyant d'alimentation État Éteint Non connecté. Vert La poignée/le voyant s'allume en vert pour signaler qu'une source d'alimentation valide est connectée au bloc d'alimentation et que celui-ci est opérationnel. Orange clignotant Un voyant orange indique un problème lié au bloc d'alimentation. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous corrigez une non-correspondance de bloc d'alimentation, remplacez uniquement le bloc d'alimentation dont le voyant clignote. Si vous remplacez l'autre bloc d'alimentation pour créer une paire correspondante, une erreur peut se produire et le système peut s'éteindre de manière péremptoire. Pour modifier la configuration de tension de sortie haute en tension de sortie basse, et vice versa, vous devez éteindre le système. PRÉCAUTION : Les blocs d'alimentation en CA prennent en charge des tensions d'entrée de 220 V et 110 V. Lorsque deux blocs d'alimentation identiques reçoivent différentes tensions d'entrée, leur puissance de sortie peut être différente, ce qui occasionne une non-correspondance. PRÉCAUTION : Si deux blocs sont installés, ils doivent être du même type et disposer de la même puissance maximale de sortie. Vert clignotant Lorsque vous ajoutez un bloc d'alimentation à chaud, ce voyant indique que les deux blocs d'alimentation ne correspondent pas (en termes d'efficacité, de fonctions, d'état de santé et de tension prise en charge). Remplacez le bloc d'alimentation au voyant clignotant par un bloc d'alimentation aux capacités identiques à celles du bloc d'alimentation installé. Autres informations utiles AVERTISSEMENT : Reportez-vous aux informations concernant la sécurité et les réglementations qui accompagnent le système. Des informations sur la garantie peuvent être incluses à ce document ou à un document séparé. • Le Getting Started Guide (Guide de mise en route) présente l'installation de votre système et ses caractéristiques techniques. Ce document est disponible en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack, le cas échéant. 21• Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et des outils permettant de configurer et de gérer le système, notamment les supports du système d'exploitation, du logiciel de gestion du système, des mises à jour du système et des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. • Pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou connaître la signification d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire sur www.dell.com/support/manualss. REMARQUE : Vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations contenues dans les autres documents. 222 Utilisation du gestionnaire de configuration du système et d'amorçage La configuration du système vous permet de gérer le matériel du système et de définir les options au niveau du BIOS. Les touches suivantes permettent d'accéder à certaines fonctions au démarrage du système : Touche Description Permet d'accéder à la configuration du système. Permet d'entrer dans les Services système, ce qui ouvre le Dell Lifecycle Controller 2 (LC2). Le Dell LC2 prend en charge des fonctions de gestion du système telles que le déploiement du système d'exploitation, les diagnostics matériels, les mises à jour de plate-forme et la configuration de plate-forme, à l'aide de l'interface utilisateur graphique. L'ensemble des fonctions exactes du LC2 est déterminé par la licence iDRAC achetée. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la documentation Dell LC2. Permet d'accéder au gestionnaire d'amorçage BIOS ou UEFI selon la configuration de démarrage de votre système. Permet de lancer l'amorçage PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment). À partir de la configuration du système, vous pouvez effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Modifier les paramètres NVRAM après l'ajout ou la suppression de matériel • Afficher la configuration matérielle du système • Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • Définir les seuils de gestion de l'alimentation et des performances • Gérer la sécurité du système Vous pouvez accéder à la configuration du système à l'aide : • du navigateur graphique standard, activé par défaut • du navigateur de texte, activé à l'aide de Console Redirection (Redirection de la console) Pour activer Console Redirection (Redirection de la console), dans System Setup(Configuration du système), sélectionnez System BIOS (BIOS du système) → écran Serial Communication (Communications série)→ Serial Communication (Communications série), sélectionnez On with Console Redirection(Activé avec la console de redirection). REMARQUE : Par défaut, le texte d'aide pour le champ sélectionné est affiché dans le navigateur graphique. Pour afficher le texte d'aide dans le navigateur de texte, vous devez appuyer sur la touche . Choix du mode d'amorçage du système Le programme de configuration du système vous permet de spécifier le mode d'amorçage pour l'installation du système d'exploitation : 23• Le mode d'amorçage du BIOS (par défaut) est l'interface standard d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS. • Le mode d'amorçage de l'UEFI est une interface d'amorçage améliorée de 64 bits basée sur des spécifications UEFI et superposée au système du BIOS. Vous devez sélectionner le mode d'amorçage dans le champ Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) de l'écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) dans System Setup (Configuration du système). Une fois le mode d'amorçage spécifié, le système démarre dans le mode spécifié et vous pouvez procéder à l'installation de votre système d'exploitation depuis ce mode. Ensuite, vous devez redémarrer le système à l'aide du même mode d'amorçage (BIOS ou UEFI) pour accéder au système d'exploitation installé. Si vous essayez de démarrer le système à partir d'un autre mode d'amorçage, le système se bloquera au démarrage. REMARQUE : Les systèmes d'exploitation doivent être compatibles avec l'UEFI afin d'être installés en mode d'amorçage UEFI. Les systèmes d'exploitation DOS et 32 bits ne prennent pas en charge l'UEFI et ne peuvent être installés qu'à partir du mode d'amorçage BIOS. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir les dernières informations sur les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge, rendez-vous sur le site dell.com/ossupport. Accès au programme de configuration du système 1. Allumez ou redémarrez le système. 2. Appuyez sur dès que vous avez vu le message suivant : = System Setup (Configuration du système) Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez que le système finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez. Réponse aux messages d'erreur Si un message d'erreur s'affiche pendant que le système s'amorce, prenez en note le message. Pour en savoir plus, référez-vous à la section Messages d'erreur du système. REMARQUE : Il est normal qu'un message s'affiche lorsque vous redémarrez le système après avoir installé une mise à niveau de mémoire. Utilisation des touches de navigation de la configuration du système Touches Action Flèche vers le haut Permet de revenir au champ précédent. Flèche vers le bas Permet de passer au champ suivant. Vous permet de saisir une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (le cas échéant) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Permet d'étendre ou de réduire la liste déroulante, le cas échéant. Passe à l'objectif suivant. REMARQUE : Seulement pour le navigateur de graphiques standard. 24Touches Action <Échap> Permet de passer à la page précédente jusqu'à ce que vous voyiez l'écran principal. Appuyez sur <Échap> dans l'écran principal pour afficher un message qui vous invite à enregistrer toutes les modifications non enregistrées et pour redémarrer le système. Permet d'afficher le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options, les modifications effectuées sont enregistrées mais ne prennent effet qu'au redémarrage du système. Options de configuration du système Écran principal System Setup (Configuration du système) REMARQUE : Appuyez sur pour réinitialiser les paramètres du BIOS ou de l'UEFI à leur valeur par défaut. Élément de menu Description System BIOS (BIOS du système) Cette option est utilisée pour afficher et configurer les paramètres du BIOS. iDRAC Settings (Paramètres iDRAC) Cette option est utilisée pour afficher et configurer les paramètres iDRAC. Device Settings (Paramètres du périphérique) Cette option est utilisée pour afficher et configurer les paramètres du périphérique. Écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) REMARQUE : Les options de configuration du système varient en fonction de la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Les valeurs par défaut sont répertoriées sous l'option correspondante dans les sections suivantes, le cas échéant. Élément de menu Description Informations système Permet d'afficher les informations sur le système telles que le nom du modèle du système, la version du BIOS, numéro de service, etc. Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) Permet d'afficher les informations et les options relatives à la mémoire installée. Processor settings (Paramètres du processeur) Permet d'afficher les informations et les options relatives au processeur telles que la vitesse, la taille du cache, etc. SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA) Permet d'afficher les options permettant d'activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur et les ports SATA intégrés. 25Élément de menu Description Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) Permet d'afficher les options pour indiquer le mode d'amorçage (BIOS ou UEFI). Vous permet de modifier les paramètres d'amorçage UEFI et BIOS. Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) Permet d'afficher les options permettant d'activer ou de désactiver les ports et les contrôleurs de périphérique intégré et de spécifier les fonctionnalités et options associées. Serial Communication (Communications série) Permet d'afficher les options permettant d'activer ou de désactiver les ports série et de spécifier les fonctionnalités et options associées. System Profile Settings (Paramètres du profil du système) Permet d'afficher les options permettant de modifier les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation du processeur, la fréquence de la mémoire, etc. System Security (Sécurité du système) Permet d'afficher les options permettant de configurer les paramètres de sécurité du système tels que le mot de passe du système, le mot de passe de configuration, la sécurité TPM, etc. Cela permet également d'activer ou de désactiver les boutons d'alimentation et NMI du système. Miscellaneous Settings (Paramètres divers) Permet d'afficher les options permettant de modifier la date du système, l'heure, etc. Écran System Information (Informations sur le système) Élément de menu Description System Model Name (Nom du modèle du système) Affiche le nom du modèle du système. System BIOS Version (Version du BIOS du système) Affiche la version du BIOS installée sur le système. System Service Tag (Numéro de service du système) Affiche le numéro de service du système. System Manufacturer (Fabricant du système) Affiche le nom du fabricant du système. System Manufacturer Contact Information (Coordonnées du fabricant du système) Affiche les coordonnées du fabricant du système. 26Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) Élément de menu Description System Memory Size (Taille de la mémoire système) Indique la taille de la mémoire installée dans le système. System Memory Type (Type de mémoire système) Indique le type de mémoire installée dans le système. System Memory Speed (Vitesse de la mémoire système) Indique la vitesse de la mémoire système. System Memory Voltage (Tension de la mémoire système) Indique la tension de la mémoire système. Video Memory (Mémoire vidéo) Affiche la quantité de mémoire vidéo disponible. System Memory Testing (Test de la mémoire système) Indique si les tests de la mémoire système sont exécutés pendant l'amorçage du système. Les options sont Enabled (Activé) et Disabled (Désactivé).Par défaut, l'option System Memory Testing (Test de la mémoire système) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé). Memory Operating Mode (Mode de fonctionnement de la mémoire) Indique le mode de fonctionnement de la mémoire. Les options disponibles dépendant de la configuration de la mémoire du système sont Optimizer Mode (Mode optimisé), Advanced ECC Mode (Mode ECC avancé), Mirror Mode (Mode miroir), Spare Mode (Mode réserve) et Spare with Advanced ECC Mode (Mode réserve et ECC avancé). Par défaut, l'option Memory Operating Mode (Mode de fonctionnement de la mémoire) est réglée sur Optimizer Mode (Mode optimisé). REMARQUE : Le mode de fonctionnement de la mémoire peut avoir des paramètres par défaut et des options disponibles différents selon la configuration de la mémoire. Node Interleaving (Entrelacement de nœuds) Si ce champ est réglé sur Enabled (Activé), l'entrelacement de nœuds est pris en charge si une configuration de mémoire symétrique est installée. Si le champ est réglé sur Disabled (Désactivé), le système prend en charge des configurations de mémoire (asymétriques) d'architecture de la mémoire non uniforme (NUMA). Par défaut, l'option Node Interleaving (Entrelacement de nœuds) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé). Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) Élément de menu Description Logical Processor (Processeur logique) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les processeurs logiques et d'afficher le nombre de processeurs logiques. Si l'option Logical Processor (Processeur logique) est définie sur Enabled (Activé), le BIOS affiche tous les processeurs logiques. Si cette option est définie sur Disabled (Désactivé), le BIOS n'affiche qu'un processeur logique par cœur. Par défaut, l'option Logical Processor est définie sur Enabled (Activé). 27Élément de menu Description QPI Speed (Vitesse QPI) Vous permet de régler les paramètres de débit de données QuickPath Interconnect. Par défaut, l'option QPI Speed (Vitesse QPI) est définie sur Maximum data rate (Débit de données maximal). REMARQUE : L'option QPI Speed (Vitesse QPI) est affichée uniquement lorsque les deux processeurs sont installés. Alternate RTID (Requestor Transaction ID) Setting (Paramètre RTID alterné) Vous permet d'attribuer plus de RTID au support à distance augmentant ainsi la performance du cache entre les supports ou de travailler en mode normal pour NUMA. Par défaut, Alternate RTID (Requestor Transaction ID) Setting (Paramètre RTID alterné) est réglé sur Disabled (Désactivé). Technologie de virtualisation Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les capacités matérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie de virtualisation. Par défaut, l'option Virtualization Technology (Technologie de virtualisation) est définie sur Enabled (Désactivé). Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Prélecture de la ligne suivante du cache) Vous permet d'optimiser le système pour des applications nécessitant une utilisation élevée de l'accès séquentiel de la mémoire. Par défaut, l'option Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Prélecture de la ligne de mémoire cache adjacente) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). Vous pouvez désactiver cette option pour des applications nécessitant une utilisation élevée à un accès aléatoire à la mémoire. Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Prélecteur du matériel) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le prélecteur de matériel. Par défaut, l'option Hardware Prefetcher (Prélecteur de matériel) est définie sur Enabled (Activé). DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Prélecteur du flux DCU) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le prélecteur du dévideur d'antémémoire de données. Par défaut, l'option DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Prélecteur du dévideur d'antémémoire de données) est définie sur Enabled (Activé). Prélecteur d'IP DCU Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le prélecteur de l'adresse IP du dévideur d'antémémoire de données. Par défaut, l'option DCU IP Prefetcher (Prélecteur de l'adresse IP de l'antémémoire de données) est définie sur Enabled (Activé). Execute Disable (Désactivation de l'exécution) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie de protection mémoire de désactivation de l'exécution. Par défaut, l'option Execute Disable (Désactivation de l'exécution) est définie sur Enabled (Activé). Logical Processor Idling (Période d'inactivité de processeur logique) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction du SE afin de mettre les processeurs logiques en état d'inactivité pour réduire la consommation d'énergie. Par défaut, l'option est définie sur Disabled (Désactivé). Number of Cores per Processor (Nombre de cœurs par processeur) Vous permet de contrôler le nombre de cœurs disponibles pour chaque processeur. Par défaut, l'option Number of Cores per Processor (Nombre de cœurs par processeur) est réglée sur All (Tous). Processor 64-bit Support (Support des Indique si le ou les processeurs prennent en charge les extensions 64 bits. 28Élément de menu Description extensions 64 bits par les processeurs) Processor Core Speed (Vitesse du cœur du processeur) Affiche la fréquence maximale du cœur du processeur. Processor Bus Speed (Vitesse de bus du processeur) Affiche la vitesse de bus des processeurs. REMARQUE : L'option de la vitesse de bus du processeur s'affiche uniquement lorsque les deux processeurs sont installés. Processeur 1 REMARQUE : Les paramètres suivants s'affichent pour chaque processeur installé dans le système. Family-ModelStepping (FamilleModèle-Version) Affiche la famille, le modèle et la version du processeur tels que définis par Intel. Brand (Marque) Affiche le nom de la marque signalé par le processeur. Level 2 Cache (Cache de niveau 2) Affiche la taille de la mémoire cache L2. Level 3 Cache (Cache de niveau 3) Affiche la taille de la mémoire cache L3. Number of Cores (Nombre de cœurs) Indique le nombre de cœurs par processeur. Écran SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA) Élément de menu Description Embedded SATA (SATA intégré) Permet au disque SATA intégré d'être réglé sur les modes Off (Éteint), ATA, AHCI ou RAID. Par défaut, la fonction Embedded SATA (SATA intégré) est réglée sur AHCI Mode (Mode AHCI). Port A La fonction Auto permet au BIOS de prendre en charge le périphérique connecté au port SATA A. Par défaut, le port A est réglé sur Auto. Port B La fonction Auto permet au BIOS de prendre en charge le périphérique connecté au port SATA B. Par défaut, le port B est réglé sur Auto. Port C La fonction Auto permet au BIOS de prendre en charge le périphérique connecté au port SATA C. Par défaut, le port C est réglé sur Auto. Port D La fonction Auto permet au BIOS de prendre en charge le périphérique connecté au port SATA D. Par défaut, le port D est réglé sur Auto. Port E Active automatiquement la prise en charge du BIOS pour les périphériques reliés au port E SATA. Par défaut, le Port E est défini sur Auto. REMARQUE : Les ports A, B, C et D sont utilisés pour les lecteurs de fonds de panier et le port E pour le lecteur optique (CD/DVD). 29Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) Élément de menu Description Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) Vous permet de définir le mode d'amorçage du système. PRÉCAUTION : La permutation du mode d'amorçage peut empêcher le démarrage du système si le système d'exploitation n'a pas été installé selon le même mode d'amorçage. Si le système d'exploitation prend en charge l'UEFI, vous pouvez définir cette option sur UEFI. Le réglage de ce champ sur BIOS permet la compatibilité avec des systèmes d'exploitation non UEFI. Par défaut, l'option Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) est réglée sur BIOS. REMARQUE : Le réglage de ce champ sur UEFI désactive le menu BIOS Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage du BIOS). Le réglage de ce champ sur BIOS désactive le menu UEFI Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI). Boot Sequence Retry (Relancer la séquence d'amorçage) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction de réexécution de la séquence d'amorçage. Si ce champ est activé et que le système n'arrive pas à démarrer, ce dernier ré-exécute la séquence d'amorçage après 30 secondes. Par défaut, l'option Boot Sequence Retry (Relancer la séquence d'amorçage) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé). BIOS Boot Settings (Paramètres de démarrage du BIOS) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les options d'amorçage du BIOS. REMARQUE : Cette option est activée uniquement si le mode d'amorçage est le BIOS. Paramètres de démarrage du UEFI Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les options d'amorçage de l'UEFI. REMARQUE : Cette option est activée uniquement si le mode d'amorçage est l'UEFI. One-Time Boot (Démarrage unique) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'amorçage ponctuel depuis un périphérique sélectionné. Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) Élément de menu Description Integrated RAID Controller (Contrôleur RAID intégré) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur RAID intégré. Par option, l'option Integrated RAID Controller (Contrôleur RAID intégré) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). User Accessible USB Ports (Ports USB accessibles à l'utilisateur) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les ports USB accessibles à l'utilisateur. Si vous sélectionnez Only Back Ports On (Seuls les ports arrière sont activés) les ports USB avant seront désactivés, et si vous sélectionnez All ports Off (Tous les ports sont désactivés), les ports USB avant et arrière seront désactivés. Par défaut, l'option User Accessible USB Ports (Ports accessibles à l'utilisateur) est réglée sur All ports On (Tous les ports sont activés). Internat USB Port (Port USB interne) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le port interne USB. Par défaut, l'option Internal USB Port (Port USB interne) est réglée sur On (Activé). Internal SD Card Port (Port de carte SD interne) Active ou désactive le port de la carte SD interne du système. Par défaut, l'option Internal SD Card Port (Port de la carte SD interne du système) est réglée sur On (Activé). 30Élément de menu Description REMARQUE : Cette option s'affiche seulement si le IDSDM est installé sur la carte système. Internal SD Card Redundancy (Redondance de la carte SD interne) Lorsque l'option est réglée sur le mode Mirror (Miroir), les données sont écrites sur les deux cartes SD. Si l'une des cartes tombe en panne, les données sont écrites sur la carte SD active. Les données depuis cette carte sont copiées sur la carte SD de remplacement au prochain démarrage. Par défaut, l'option Internal SD Card Redundancy (Redondance de la carte SD interne) est définie sur Mirror (Miroir). REMARQUE : Cette option s'affiche seulement si le IDSDM est installé sur la carte système. Integrated Network Card 1 (Carte réseau intégrée 1) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la carte réseau intégrée 1. Par défaut, l'option Integrated Network Card 1 (Carte réseau intégrée 1) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). OS Watchdog Timer (Registre d'horloge de la surveillance du système d'exploitation) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le temporisateur de surveillance du système d'exploitation. Lorsque ce champ est activé, le système d'exploitation initialise le temporisateur et ce dernier aide à la récupération du système d'exploitation. Par défaut, l'option OS Watchdog Timer (Temporisateur de surveillance du système d'exploitation) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé). Embedded Video Controller (Contrôleur vidéo intégré) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver Embedded Video Controller (Contrôleur vidéo intégré). Par défaut, le contrôleur vidéo intégré est réglé sur Enabled (Activé). SR-IOV Global Enable (Activation des périphériques SR-IOV avec la commande globale) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la configuration du BIOS des périphériques SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization). Par défaut, l'option SR-IOV Global Enable (Activation des périphériques SR-IOV avec la commande globale) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé) Slot Disablement (Désactivation des logements) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver des logements PCIe disponibles sur votre système. La fonction Slot Disablement (Désactivation des logements) contrôle la configuration des cartes PCIe installées dans un logement spécifique. PRÉCAUTION : La désactivation de logement doit être utilisée seulement lorsque la carte périphérique installée empêche l'amorçage dans le système d'exploitation ou lorsqu'elle cause des délais lors du démarrage du système. Si le logement est désactivé, l'option ROM et le pilote UEFI sont aussi désactivés. E/S adressées de mémoire supérieures à 4Go Vous permet d'activer la prise en charge des périphériques PCIe qui exigent de grandes quantités de mémoire. Vous ne pouvez activer cette option que sur les systèmes d'exploitation 64 bits. Par défaut, cette option est définie sur Désactivé. 31Écran Serial Communications (Communications série) Élément de menu Description Serial Communication (Communications série) Vous permet de sélectionner des périphériques de communication série (Périphérique série 1 et Périphérique série 2) dans le BIOS. La redirection de la console BIOS peut aussi être activée et l'adresse du port utilisée peut être spécifiée. Par défaut, l'option Serial Communication (Communication série) est réglée sur On without Console Redirection (Activée sans redirection de console). Serial Port Address (Adresse de port série) Vous permet de définir l'adresse de port pour les périphériques série. Par défaut, l'option Serial Port Address (Adresse de port série) est réglée sur Serial Device 1=COM2, Serial Device 2=COM1 (périphérique série 1=COM2, périphérique série 2=COM1). REMARQUE : Seul le périphérique série 2 (Serial Device 2) peut être associé aux connectivités SOL (Serial Over LAN). Pour utiliser la redirection de console par SOL, configurez la même adresse de port pour la redirection de console et le périphérique série. External Serial Connector (Connecteur série externe) Vous permet d'associer le connecteur série externe au périphérique série 1, au périphérique série 2 ou au périphérique d'accès à distance. Par défaut, l'option External Serial Connector (Connecteur série externe) est réglée sur Serial Device1 (Périphérique série 1). REMARQUE : Seul le périphérique série 2 peut être associé aux connectivités SOL. Pour utiliser la redirection de console par SOL, configurez la même adresse de port pour la redirection de console et le périphérique série. Failsafe Baud Rate (Débit en bauds de la ligne de secours) Affiche le débit en bauds de la ligne de secours pour la redirection de console. Le BIOS tente de déterminer le débit en bauds automatiquement. Ce débit est utilisé uniquement si la tentative échoue et la valeur ne doit pas être modifiée. Par défaut, l'option Failsafe Baud Rate (Débit en bauds de la ligne de secours) est réglée sur 11520. Remote Terminal Type (Type du terminal distant) Vous permet de définir le type de terminal de console distant. Par défaut, l'option Remote Terminal Type (Type du terminal distant) est réglée sur VT 100/VT220. Redirection After Boot (Redirection après démarrage) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la redirection de console du BIOS lorsque le système d'exploitation est en cours de chargement. Par défaut, l'option Redirection After Boot (Redirection après démarrage) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). Écran System Profile Settings (Paramètres du profil du système) Élément de menu Description Profil système Vous permet de régler le profil du système. Si vous réglez l'option System Profile (Profil du système) sur un mode autre que Custom (Personnalisé), le BIOS définit automatiquement le reste des options. Vous ne pouvez que modifier le reste des options si le mode est réglé sur Custom (Personnalisé). Par défaut, l'option System Profile (Profil du système) est réglée sur Performance Per Watt Optimized (DAPC) [Performance par watt optimisée (DAPC)]. DAPC correspond à Dell Active Power Controller (Contrôleur de l'alimentation actif Dell). 32Élément de menu Description REMARQUE : Les paramètres suivants ne sont disponibles que lorsque System Profile (Profil du système) est réglé sur Custom (Personnalisé). Gestion de l'alimentation de l'UC Vous permet de régler la gestion de l'alimentation de l'UC. Par défaut, l'option CPU Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation de l'UC) est réglée sur System DBPM (DAPC) [Modulation biphasée différentielle du système (DAPC)]. DBPM correspond à Demand-Based Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation en fonction de la demande). Fréquence de la mémoire Vous permet de définir la fréquence de la mémoire. Par défaut, l'option Memory Frequency (Fréquence de la mémoire) est réglée sur Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Turbo Boost Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le processeur pour faire fonctionner le mode turbo boost. Par défaut, l'option Turbo Boost est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). C1E Vous permet d'activer et de désactiver le processeur pour basculer à un état de performances minimales lorsqu'il est inactif. Par défaut, l'option C1E est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). États C Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le processeur pour fonctionner avec tous les états d'alimentation disponibles. Par défaut, l'option C States (États C) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). Moniteur/Mwait Vous permet d'activer les instructions Monitor/Mwait (Moniteur/Mwait) dans le processeur. Par défaut, l'option Monitor/Mwait (Moniteur/Mwait) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé) pour tous les profils systèmes, sauf pour Custom (Personnalisé). REMARQUE : Cette option peut être désactivée uniquement si l'option C States (États C) en mode Custom (Personnalisé) est désactivée. REMARQUE : Lorsque C States (États C) est activée dans le mode Custom (Personnalisé), la modification du paramètres Monitor/Mwait n’a aucune incidence sur l’alimentation ou les performances du système. Memory Patrol Scrub Vous permet de définir la fréquence de vérification et de correction d'erreur de la mémoire. Par défaut, l'option Memory Patrol Scrub (Vérification et correction d'erreur de la mémoire) est réglée sur Standard. Fréquence d'actualisation de la mémoire Vous permet de régler le taux de rafraîchissement de la mémoire. Par défaut, l'option Memory Refresh Rate (Taux de rafraîchissement de la mémoire) est réglée sur 1x. Tension de fonctionnement de la mémoire Vous permet de régler la sélection de tension des barrettes DIMM. Lorsque l'option est réglée sur Auto, le système règle automatiquement la tension du système à un paramètre optimal basé sur la capacité des barrettes DIMM ainsi que le nombre de barrettes DIMM installées. Par défaut, l'option Memory Operating Voltage (Tension de fonctionnement de la mémoire) est réglée sur Auto. Contrôle de performance de l'UC collaborative Lorsqu'elle est définie sur Activé, la gestion de l'alimentation de l'UC est contrôlée par le DBPM SE et le DBPM (DAPC) du système. Par défaut, l'option est définie sur Disabled (Désactivé) 33Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) Élément de menu Description Intel AES-NI L'option Intel AES-NI améliore la vitesse des applications en réalisant un cryptage et un décryptage à l'aide de l'ensemble des consignes liées à la norme de cryptage avancé, et est réglée sur Enabled (Activé) par défaut. System Password Vous permet de définir le mot de passe système. Cette option est réglée sur Enabled (Activé) par défaut et est en lecture seule si le cavalier de mot de passe n'est pas installé dans le système. Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) Vous permet de définir le mot de passe de configuration. Cette option est en lecture seule si le cavalier du mot de passe n'est pas installé sur le système. Password Status (État du mot de passe) Vous permet de verrouiller le mot de passe du système. Par défaut, l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est réglée sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé). TPM Security Vous permet de contrôler le mode de signalement du module TPM (Trusted Platform Module). Par défaut, l'option TPM Security est réglée sur Off (Désactivé). Vous ne pouvez modifier TPM Status (État TPM), TPM Activation (Activation de la puce TPM) et les champs Intel TXT que si le champ TPM Status (État TPM) est réglé sur On with Pre-boot Measurements (Activé avec les mesures de pré-amorçage) ou On without Pre-boot Measurements (Activé sans mesures pré-amorçage). TPM Activation (Activation de la puce TPM) Vous permet de modifier l'état opérationnel du module TPM. Par défaut, l'option TPM Activation (Activation de la puce TPM) est réglée sur No Change (Aucun changement). TPM Status (État TPM) Affiche l'état du module TPM. TPM Clear (Effacement TPM) PRÉCAUTION : L'effacement du module TPM entraîne une perte de toutes les clés du module TPM. La perte des clés du module TPM peut affecter le démarrage du système d'exploitation. Vous permet d'effacer tous les contenus du module TPM. Par défaut, l'option TPM Clear (Effacement TPM) est réglée sur No (Non). Intel TXT Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie Intel Trusted Execution Technology. Pour activer Intel TXT, l'option Virtualization Technology (Technologie de virtualisation) doit être activée et l'option TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) doit être activée avec les mesures de pré- amorçage. Par défaut, l'option Intel TXT est réglée sur Off (Désactivé). BIOS Update Control (Contrôle de la mise à jour du BIOS) Vous permet de mettre à jour le BIOS en utilisant des utilitaires flash basés sur des environnements DOS ou UEFI. Pour les environnements ne nécessitant aucune mise à jour BIOS locale, il est recommandé de régler ce champ sur Limited (Limité). Par défaut, l'option Local BIOS Update Support (Prise en charge de la mise à jour du BIOS locale) est réglée sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé). 34Élément de menu Description REMARQUE : Les mises à jour du BIOS utilisant Dell Update Package ne sont pas concernées par cette option. Bouton d'alimentation Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le bouton d'alimentation sur l'avant du système. Par défaut l'option Power Button (Bouton d'alimentation) est réglée sur Enabled (Activé). NMI Button (Bouton INM) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le bouton INM sur l'avant du système. Par défaut l'option NMI Button (Bouton INM) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé). AC Power Recovery Delay (Délai de restauration de l'alimentation) Vous permet de définir le temps de réaction du système une fois l'alimentation restaurée dans le système. Par défaut, l'option AC Power Recovery (Restauration de l'alimentation) est réglée sur Last (Dernière). AC Power Recovery Delay (Délai de restauration de l'alimentation secteur) Vous permet de régler la façon dont le système prend en charge le décalage de mise sous tension après que le courant alternatif soit restauré dans le système. Par défaut, l'option AC Power Recovery Delay (Délai de restauration du courant alternatif) est réglée sur Immediate (Immédiat). User Defined Delay (60s to 240s) (Délai défini de l'utilisateur [60 à 240]) Vous permet de régler le paramètre User Defined Delay (Délai défini de l'utilisateur) lorsque l'option User Defined (Utilisateur défini) pour l’AC Power Recovery Delay (Délai de restauration du courant alternatif) est sélectionnée. Miscellaneous Settings (Paramètres divers) Élément de menu Description System Time (Heure système) Vous permet de régler l'heure sur le système. System Date (Date système) Vous permet de régler la date sur le système. Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire) Affiche le numéro d'inventaire et vous permet de le modifier à des fins de sécurité et de suivi. Keyboard NumLock (Touche Verr num) Vous permet de définir si le système démarre avec la fonction Verr Num activée ou désactivée. Par défaut, Keyboard NumLock (Verr Num clavier) est défini sur On (Activé). REMARQUE : Ce champ ne s'applique pas aux claviers à 84 touches. Report Keyboard Errors (Signaler les erreurs clavier) Vous permet de définir si les messages d'erreur de clavier sont signalés pendant le démarrage du système. Par défaut, le champ Report Keyboard Errors (Signaler les erreurs de clavier) est défini sur Report (Signaler). F1/F2 Prompt on Error (Invite F1/F2 en cas d'erreur) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'invite F1/F2 en cas d'erreur. Par défaut, F1/F2 Prompt on Error (Invite F1/F2 en cas d'erreur) est réglé sur Enabled (Activé). In-System Characterization Ce champ permet d'activer ou de désactiver In-System Characterization (Caractérisation intrasystème). Par défaut, In-System Characterization est défini sur Enabled (Activé). 35Élément de menu Description (Caractérisation intrasystème) Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration Vous pouvez créer un mot de passe du système et un mot de passe de configuration pour protéger le système. Pour activer la création du mot de passe du système et du mot de passe de configuration, le cavalier de mot de passe doit être activé. Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les paramètres du cavalier du mot de passe, reportez-vous à la section Paramètres du cavalier de la carte système. System Password (Mot de passe du système) Il s'agit du mot de passe que vous devez saisir pour ouvrir une session sur le système. Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) Il s'agit du mot de passe que vous devez saisir pour accéder et effectuer les modifications sur les paramètres du BIOS ou UEFI de votre système. PRÉCAUTION : Les fonctionnalités de mot de passe assurent la sécurité de base des données de votre système. PRÉCAUTION : N'importe qui peut accéder aux données enregistrées sur votre système si celui-ci est en cours de fonctionnement et sans surveillance. REMARQUE : Votre système est fourni avec la fonction de mot de passe du système et de configuration désactivée. Attribution d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration REMARQUE : Le cavalier de mot de passe active ou désactive les fonctions de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration. Pour obtenir des informations sur les paramètres du cavalier de mot de passe, reportezvous à la section Paramètres du cavalier de la carte système. Vous pouvez attribuer un nouveau System Password (Mot de passe du système) et/ou Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) ou modifier un System Password (Mot de passe du système) et/ou un Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) déjà existant lorsque le paramètre du cavalier du mot de passe est activé et que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est Unlocked (Déverrouillé). Si Password Status (État du mot de passe) est réglé sur Locked (Verrouillé), vous ne pouvez pas modifier le mot de passe du système et/ou le mot de passe de configuration. Si le paramètre du cavalier du mot de passe est désactivé, le mot de passe du système et le mot de passe de configuration existants sont supprimés et vous n'avez pas besoin de fournir au système un mot de passe du système pour ouvrir une session. Attribution d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration : 1. Pour accéder à la configuration du système, appuyez immédiatement après le démarrage ou le redémarrage sur la touche . 2. Dans System Setup Main Menu (Menu principal de la configuration du système), sélectionnez System BIOS (BIOS du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) s'affiche. 3. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système), sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . 36L'écran System Security (Sécurité du système) s'affiche. 4. Dans l'écran System Security (Sécurité du système), vérifiez que Password Status (État du mot de passe) est réglé sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé). 5. Sélectionnez System Password (Mot de passe du système), saisissez votre mot de passe du système, puis appuyez sur ou . Utilisez les consignes suivantes pour attribuer le mot de passe du système : – Un mot de passe peut contenir au maximum 32 caractères. – Le mot de passe peut contenir des chiffres allant de 0 à 9. – Seules les minuscules sont valides, les majuscules ne sont pas autorisées. – Les caractères spéciaux suivants sont autorisés : espace, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`). Un message vous invite à ressaisir le mot de passe du système. 6. Saisissez à nouveau le mot de passe du système entré précédemment puis cliquez sur OK. 7. Sélectionnez Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), saisissez votre mot de passe du système, puis appuyez sur ou . Un message vous invite à ressaisir le mot de passe de configuration. 8. Saisissez à nouveau le mot de passe de configuration entré précédemment puis cliquez sur OK. 9. Appuyez sur <Échap> pour revenir à l'écran du BIOS du système. Appuyez de nouveau sur <Échap> pour faire apparaître une invite d'enregistrement des modifications. REMARQUE : La protection par mot de passe ne prend effet que lorsque vous redémarrez le système. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe de configuration Assurez-vous que le cavalier de mot de passe est activé et que Password Status (État du mot de passe) est réglé sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé) avant d'essayer de supprimer ou de modifier le mot de passe du système et/ou de configuration. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou modifier un mot de passe du système existant si Password Status (État du mot de passe) est réglé sur Locked (Verrouillé). Pour supprimer ou modifier le mot de passe du système et/ou de configuration : 1. Pour accéder à la configuration du système, appuyez immédiatement après le démarrage ou le redémarrage sur la touche . 2. Dans System Setup Main Menu (Menu principal de la configuration du système), sélectionnez System BIOS (BIOS du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) s'affiche. 3. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système), sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security (Sécurité du système) s'affiche. 4. Dans l'écran System Security (Sécurité du système), vérifiez que Password Status (État du mot de passe) est réglé sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé). 5. Sélectionnez System Password (Mot de passe du système), modifiez ou supprimer le mot de passe du système existant et appuyez sur ou . 6. Sélectionnez Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), modifiez ou supprimer le mot de passe de configuration existant et appuyez sur ou . REMARQUE : Si vous modifiez le mot de passe du système et/ou de configuration, un message vous invite à ressaisir le nouveau mot de passe. Si vous supprimer le mot de passe du système et/ou de configuration, un message vous invite à confirmer la suppression. 377. Appuyez sur <Échap> pour revenir à l'écran du BIOS du système. Appuyez de nouveau sur <Échap> pour faire apparaître une invite d'enregistrement des modifications. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez désactiver la sécurité du mot de passe tout en vous connectant au système. Pour ce faire, démarrez ou redémarrez le système, saisissez votre mot de passe puis appuyez sur . Protection du système à l'aide d'un mot de passe système REMARQUE : Si vous avez attribué un mot de passe de configuration, le système l'accepte également comme mot de passe du système alternatif. 1. Allumez ou redémarrez le système. 2. Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur . Si Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Locked (Verrouillé), vous devez saisir le mot de passe, puis appuyer sur lorsque le système vous y invite au redémarrage. Si un mot de passe du système incorrect est saisi, le système affiche un message et vous invite à saisir de nouveau votre mot de passe. Vous disposez de trois tentatives pour saisir le bon mot de passe. Après la troisième tentative infructueuse, le système affiche un message d'erreur indiquant que le système s'est arrêté et qu'il doit être éteint. Même après l'arrêt et le redémarrage du système, le message d'erreur continue à s'afficher tant que vous n'avez pas entré le mot de passe approprié. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) conjointement avec les options System Password (Mot de passe du système) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour mieux protéger le système contre toute modification non autorisée. Utilisation du système avec un mot de passe de configuration activé Si l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Enabled (Activé), saisissez ce mot de passe avant de modifier la plupart des options de configuration du système. Si vous ne saisissez pas le bon mot de passe au bout de trois tentatives, le système affiche le message Invalid Password! Number of unsuccessful password attempts: System Halted! Must power down. (Mot de passe incorrect ! Nombre d'essai Système arrêté ! Redémarrez le système.) Même après l'arrêt et le redémarrage du système, le message d'erreur continue à s'afficher tant que vous n'avez pas entré le mot de passe approprié. Les options suivantes font office d'exceptions : • Si l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) n'est ni définie sur Enabled (Activé) ni verrouillée via l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe), vous pouvez attribuer un mot de passe du système. • Vous ne pouvez ni désactiver ni changer un mot de passe système existant. REMARQUE : Il est possible de combiner l'utilisation des options Password Status (État du mot de passe) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour empêcher toute modification non autorisée du mot de passe système. Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI REMARQUE : Les systèmes d'exploitation doivent être compatibles avec une version UEFI 64 bits (comme par exemple Microsoft Windows Server 2008 version x64) pour pouvoir être installés à partir du mode d'amorçage UEFI. L'installation des systèmes d'exploitation DOS et 32 bits est possible uniquement à partir du mode d'amorçage sur le BIOS. 38Le Gestionnaire d'amorçage permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Ajouter, supprimer et organiser les options d'amorçage • Accéder à la configuration du système et aux options d'amorçage BIOS sans nécessiter de redémarrage Pour accéder au Gestionnaire d'amorçage : 1. Allumez ou redémarrez le système. 2. Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du message suivant : = UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez que le système finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez. Utilisation des touches de navigation du Gestionnaire d'amorçage Touche Description Flèche vers le haut Permet de revenir au champ précédent. Flèche vers le bas Permet de passer au champ suivant. Vous permet de saisir une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (le cas échéant) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Permet d'étendre ou de réduire la liste déroulante, le cas échéant. Passe à l'objectif suivant. REMARQUE : Pour le navigateur de graphiques standard seulement. <Échap> Passe à la page précédente jusqu'à ce que vous aperceviez l'écran principal. En appuyant sur la touche <Échap> dans l'écran principal, vous quitterez le gestionnaire d'amorçage et démarrerez le système. Permet d'afficher le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options, les modifications effectuées sont enregistrées mais ne prennent effet qu'au redémarrage du système. Écran Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage) Élément de menu Description Continue Normal Boot (Poursuivre le démarrage normal) Le système tente d'effectuer successivement l'amorçage sur différents périphériques en commençant par le premier dans l'ordre d'amorçage. En cas d'échec de l'amorçage, le système passe au périphérique suivant dans l'ordre d'amorçage jusqu'à ce que le démarrage réussisse ou qu'aucune autre option ne soit disponible. Menu BIOS Boot (Amorçage BIOS) Affiche la liste des options d'amorçage BIOS disponibles (marquées par des astérisques). Choisissez l'option d'amorçage de votre choix, puis appuyez sur . Menu UEFI Boot (Amorçage UEFI) Affiche la liste des options d'amorçage UEFI disponibles (marquées par des astérisques). Choisissez l'option d'amorçage de votre choix, puis appuyez sur . Le menu UEFI Boot (Amorçage UEFI) vous permet d'utiliser les options suivantes : Add Boot Option (Ajouter une 39Élément de menu Description option d'amorçage), Delete Boot Option (Supprimer une option d'amorçage) ou Boot From File (Amorçage à partir d'un fichier). Menu Driver Health (Intégrité du pilote) Affiche une liste des pilotes installés sur le système ainsi que leur état d'intégrité. Launch System Setup (Démarrer la configuration du système) Vous permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système. System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) Vous permet d'accéder à l'explorateur de fichier de mise à jour du BIOS, d'exécuter le programme Dell Diagnostics et de redémarrer le système. Menu UEFI Boot (Amorçage UEFI) Élément de menu Description Select UEFI Boot Option (Sélectionner une option d'amorçage UEFI) Affiche la liste des options d'amorçage UEFI disponibles (marquées par des astérisques), choisissez l'option d'amorçage de votre choix, puis appuyez sur . Add Boot Option (Ajouter une option d'amorçage) Ajoute une nouvelle option d'amorçage. Delete Boot Option (Supprimer une option d'amorçage) Supprime une option d'amorçage existante. Boot From File (Amorçage à partir d'un fichier) Définit une option d'amorçage utilisable une seule fois qui ne figure pas dans la liste des options d'amorçage. Gestion intégrée du système Le Dell Lifecycle Controller offre une gestion avancée des systèmes intégrés tout au long du cycle de vie du serveur. Le Lifecycle Controller peut être démarré pendant la séquence d'amorçage et peut fonctionner indépendamment du système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Certaines configurations de plate-forme peuvent ne pas prendre en charge l'ensemble des fonctionnalités de Lifecycle Controller. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration du Lifecycle Controller, la configuration du matériel et du micrologiciel et le déploiement du système d'exploitation, reportez-vous à la documentation relative à Lifecycle Controller, disponible à l'adresse dell.com/support/manuals. 40Utilitaire iDRAC Settings L'utilitaire iDRAC Settings (Paramètres d'iDRAC) est une interface permettant d'installer et de configurer les paramètres d'iDRAC à l'aide de UEFI. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver de nombreux paramètres iDRAC à l'aide de l'utilitaire iDRAC Settings. REMARQUE : L'accès à certaines fonctions de l'utilitaire iDRAC Settings exige la mise à niveau de la licence iDRAC7 Enterprise. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation d'iDRAC, reportez-vous au iDRAC7 User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation iDRAC7) sous Software → Systems Management → Dell Remote Access Controllers (Logiciel, Gestion des systèmes, Contrôleurs d'accès à distance Dell) à l'adresse suivante : dell.com/support/manuals. Accès à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC 1. Activez ou redémarrez le système géré. 2. Appuyez sur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage (POST). 3. Sur la page System Setup Main Menu (Menu principal du système de configuration), cliquez sur iDRAC Settings (Paramètres iDRAC). La page iDRAC Settings (Paramètres iDRAC) s'affiche. 41423 Installation des composants du système Outils recommandés Vous pouvez avoir besoin des outils suivants pour réaliser les procédures décrites dans cette section : • Clé du verrouillage à clé du système • Tournevis cruciforme n°2 • Tournevis Torx T10 et T15 • Bracelet antistatique connecté à une prise de terre Cadre avant (en option) Installation du cadre avant 1. Accrochez l'extrémité droite du cadre au châssis. 2. Fixez l'extrémité libre du cadre sur le système. 3. Fixez le cadre à l'aide du verrouillage à clé. Figure 10. Installation et retrait du cadre avant 1. Loquet de dégagement 2. Verrou 3. Cadre avant 4. Crochet de verrouillage 43Retrait du cadre avant 1. Ouvrez le verrou situé à l'extrémité gauche du cadre. 2. Soulevez le loquet d'éjection situé près du verrou. 3. Faites pivoter l'extrémité gauche du cadre pour écarter celui-ci du panneau avant. 4. Décrochez la partie droite du cadre et retirez le cadre du système. Ouverture et fermeture du système AVERTISSEMENT : Chaque fois que vous devez soulever le système, demandez de l'aide. Pour éviter les blessures, ne tentez pas de soulever le système par vous-même. AVERTISSEMENT : Ouvrir ou retirer le capot du système lorsque celui-ci est sous tension est dangereux. Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique. PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Ne pas faire fonctionner le système sans le capot pour une durée dépassant cinq minutes. Ouverture du système REMARQUE : L'utilisation systématique d'un tapis et d'un bracelet antistatiques est recommandée pour manipuler les composants internes du système. 1. Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2. Tournez le verrou du loquet de dégagement dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour le déverrouiller. 3. Soulevez le loquet situé sur la partie supérieure du système, puis faites glisser le capot vers l'arrière. 4. Saisissez le capot de chaque côté, puis soulevez-le avec précaution pour le retirer du système. 44Figure 11. Ouverture et fermeture du système 1. Capot du système 2. Loquet 3. Verrou du loquet de dégagement Fermeture du système 1. Relevez le loquet situé sur le capot. 2. Placez le capot sur le châssis et décalez-le légèrement vers l'arrière pour le dégager des crochets du châssis, de sorte qu'il repose totalement à plat sur ce dernier. 3. Rabattez le loquet pour faire pivoter le capot en position fermée. 4. Tournez le verrou du loquet de dégagement dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour fermer le capot. 5. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. À l'intérieur du système PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Les composants remplaçables à chaud sont indiqués en orange et les ergots sur les composants sont indiqués en bleu. 45Figure 12. À l'intérieur du système : avec des blocs d'alimentation redondants 1. Carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation 2. Carénage de refroidissement 3. Blocs d'alimentation (2) 4. Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée 5. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 6. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 7. Support de carte d'extension 8. Dissipateur de chaleur du processeur 9. Barrettes de mémoire DIMM (6) 10. Ventilateurs (5) 11. Disques durs (8) 12. Carte du panneau de commande 13. Fond de panier des disques durs 14. Loquet d'acheminement de câbles 15. Carte de distribution d'alimentation 46Figure 13. À l'intérieur du système : avec un bloc d'alimentation non-redondant 1. Carénage de refroidissement 2. Bloc d'alimentation 3. Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée 4. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 5. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 6. Support de carte d'extension 7. Dissipateur de chaleur du processeur 8. Barrettes de mémoire DIMM (6) 9. Ventilateurs (4) 10. Disques durs (4) 11. Carte du panneau de commande 12. Loquet d'acheminement de câbles Carénage de refroidissement Retrait du carénage de refroidissement PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Ne mettez jamais sous tension un système sans le carénage de refroidissement. Le système peut surchauffer, ce qui pourrait entraîner une perte de performances. 471. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Soulevez le carénage de refroidissement pour le dégager du système. Figure 14. Retrait et installation du carénage de refroidissement 1. Carénage de refroidissement 2. Pattes du carénage de refroidissement (4) 3. Support du ventilateur Installation du carénage de refroidissement PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Pour une installation du carénage de refroidissement du châssis, assurez-vous que les câbles à l'intérieur du système sont acheminés via le loquet de fixation de câbles. 1. Alignez le carénage de refroidissement en utilisant les baies de ventilateurs numérotées comme repère. 2. Abaissez le carénage de refroidissement dans le châssis afin que les quatre pattes du carénage de refroidissement reposent sur le support de ventilateur. Une fois correctement installé, les numéros de supports de mémoire sur le carénage de refroidissement sont alignés avec les supports de mémoire respectifs. 483. Refermez le système. 4. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Mémoire système Votre système prend en charge des barrettes de mémoire DIMM ECC DDR3 sans tampon (ECC UDIMM) et des barrettes de mémoire DIMM à registres (RDIMM). Il prend en charge les spécifications de tension DDR3 et DDR3L. REMARQUE : MT/s indique la vitesse de la barrette DIMM en méga-transferts par seconde. La fréquence de fonctionnement de bus mémoire peut être de 1 600 MT/s, 1 333 MT/s, 1 066 MT/s ou 800 MT/s selon : • le type de barrette DIMM (UDIMM ou RDIMM) • la configuration de la barrette DIMM (nombre de rangées) ; • la fréquence maximale des barrettes DIMM • le nombre de barrettes DIMM installées par canal • la tension de fonctionnement de la barrette DIMM • le profil système sélectionné (par exemple, Performance Optimized [Performance optimisée], Custom [Personnalisé] ou Dense Configuration Optimized [Configuration dense optimisée]) • la fréquence maximale de la barrette DIMM prise en charge du processeur Le système contient six supports de mémoire organisés dans trois canaux. Dans chaque canal, les leviers d'éjection du premier support sont marqués en blancs et ceux du deuxième support en noir. 49Figure 15. Emplacement des supports de mémoire Les canaux de mémoire sont répartis comme suit : Canal 0 : supports de barrettes de mémoire A1 et A4 Canal 1 : supports de barrettes de mémoire A2 et A5 Canal 2 : supports de barrettes de mémoire A3 et A6 Le tableau suivant présente les installations de mémoire et les fréquences de fonctionnement pour les configurations prises en charge. Type de barrette de mémoire Barrettes installées/canal Fréquence de fonctionnement (en MT/s) Rangées de barrettes DIMM maximales/canal 1,5 V 1,35 V ECC UDIMM 1 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 333, 1 066 et 800 Double rangée 2 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 066 et 800 Double rangée 50Type de barrette de mémoire Barrettes installées/canal Fréquence de fonctionnement (en MT/s) Rangées de barrettes DIMM maximales/canal 1,5 V 1,35 V Barrette RDIMM 1 1 600, 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 066 et 800 Double rangée Quadruple rangée 2 1 600, 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 066 et 800 1 333, 1 066 et 800 1 066 et 800 Double rangée Quadruple rangée Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire REMARQUE : Les configurations de mémoire qui ne respectent pas ces consignes peuvent empêcher le système de démarrer, la manipulation au cours de la configuration de la mémoire ou le fonctionnement avec une mémoire réduite. Ce système prend en charge la configuration de mémoire flexible, permettant une configuration et une exécution du système depuis n'importe quelle configuration architecturale d'un jeu de puces valide. Ci-dessous se trouvent les consignes recommandées pour obtenir des performances optimales : • Les barrettes UDIMM et RDIMM ne doivent pas être mélangées. • Les barrettes DIMM DRAM x4 et x8 peuvent être combinées. Pour obtenir plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux consignes spécifiques à chaque mode. • Deux barrettes UDIMM maximum peuvent être installées dans un canal. • Deux barrettes RDIMM à rangée unique ou à double rangée maximum peuvent être installées dans un canal. • Remplissez d'abord tous les supports avec les pattes de dégagement blanches puis avec les noires. • Remplissez les supports par le nombre de rangées le plus élevé dans l'ordre suivant : tout d'abord les supports avec les pattes de dégagement blanches, puis avec les noires. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez mélanger des barrettes DIMM à quatre rangées et à double rangée, installez les barrettes DIMM à quatre rangées dans les supports avec pattes de dégagement blanches et les barrettes à double rangée dans les supports avec pattes de dégagement noires. • Des barrettes de mémoire de différentes tailles peuvent être combinées tant que les autres règles de population de mémoire sont respectées (par exemple, les barrettes de mémoire de 2 Go et de 4 Go peuvent être mélangées). • Selon les consignes spécifiques à chaque mode, remplissez deux ou trois barrettes de mémoire DIMM par processeur (une barrette DIMM par canal) à la fois pour maximiser les performances. Pour obtenir plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux consignes spécifiques à chaque mode. • Si les barrettes de mémoire avec différentes vitesses sont installées, elles fonctionneront à la vitesse de la/les barrette(s) de mémoire installée(s) la/les plus lente(s) ou plus lentement selon la configuration des barrettes DIMM sur le système. Consignes spécifiques à chaque mode Les configurations disponibles dépendent du mode de mémoire sélectionné. REMARQUE : Les barrettes DIMM DRAM de largeur x4 et x8 peuvent être mélangées pour offrir une prise en charge des fonctionnalités RAS. Toutefois, toutes les recommandations pour des fonctionnalités RAS spécifiques doivent être respectées. Les barrettes DIMM DRAM de largeur x4 conservent la correction SDDC (Single Device Data Correction) dans le mode d'optimisation de la mémoire (canal indépendant). Les barrettes DIMM DRAM de largeur x8 nécessitent le mode Fonctions ECC avancées pour profiter de la correction SDDC. Les sections suivantes offrent des recommandations supplémentaires relatives au remplissage de logements pour chaque mode. 51Fonctions ECC avancées (Lockstep) Le mode Advanced ECC (Fonctions avancées) permet d'étendre la SDDC des barrettes DIMM DRAM de largeur x4 aux DRAM de largeur x4 et x8. Ce mode permet de protéger le système contre les échecs de puce DRAM seule au cours du fonctionnement normal. Les supports de mémoire A1 et A4 sont désactivés et vous pouvez remplir les supports de barrettes mémoire DIMM dans les supports de mémoire A2, A3, A5 et A6. REMARQUE : Les fonctions ECC avancées avec mise en miroir ne sont pas prises en charge. Mode Memory Optimized (Independent Channel) [Optimisation de la mémoire (canal indépendant)] Ce mode prend en charge la SDDC uniquement pour les barrettes de mémoire qui utilisent une largeur de périphérique x4 et qui n'imposent aucune exigence spécifique relative à la population d'emplacements. Memory Sparing (Mémoire de réserve) REMARQUE : Afin d'utiliser la mémoire de réserve, cette fonction doit être activée dans la configuration du système. Dans ce mode, une rangée par canal est réservée. Dans le cas où des erreurs corrigibles persistantes sont détectées sur une rangée, les données de cette rangée sont copiées sur la rangée de réserve et la rangée défaillante est désactivée. Lorsque la mémoire de réserve est activée, la mémoire système disponible du système d'exploitation est réduite d'une rangée par canal. Par exemple, dans un système à trois barrettes de mémoire DIMM double rangée de 8 Go, la mémoire système disponible est : 1/2 (rangées/canal) × 3 (barrettes de mémoire DIMM) × 8 Go = 12 Go et non pas 3 (barrettes de mémoire) × 8 Go = 24 Go. REMARQUE : La mémoire de réserve n'offre aucune protection contre une erreur non corrigible sur plusieurs bits. REMARQUE : Les modes Fonctions ECC avancées/Lockstep et Optimisation prennent en charge la mémoire de réserve. Memory Mirroring (Mise en miroir de la mémoire) La mise en miroir de la mémoire offre le mode disposant de la plus forte fiabilité des barrettes DIMM comparativement aux autres modes. En effet, il offre une protection contre les incidents non corrigibles sur plusieurs bits. Dans une configuration mise en miroir, la mémoire système totale disponible correspond à la moitié du total de la mémoire physique installée. La moitié de la mémoire installée est utilisée pour mettre en miroir les barrettes DIMM actives. Dans le cas d'une erreur non corrigible, le système bascule sur la copie mis en miroir. Cela garantie la SDDC et la protection sur plusieurs bits. Consignes d'installation de la mémoire : • Les supports de mémoire A1 et A4 sont désactivés et vous pouvez remplir les supports de barrettes mémoire DIMM dans les supports de mémoire A2, A3, A5 et A6. • Les barrettes de mémoire DIMM installées dans les logements de mémoire avec des pattes de dégagement blanches doivent être identiques et la même règle doit s'appliquer pour les logements avec les pattes de dégagement noires. Par exemple, les barrettes de mémoire DIMM installées dans les logements A1, A2 et A3 doivent être identiques. Exemples de configurations de mémoire Les tableaux suivants présentent des exemples de configurations de mémoire conformes aux consignes énoncées dans cette section. 52REMARQUE : Les barrettes RDIMM à quatre rangées de 16 Go ne sont pas prises en charge. REMARQUE : Les sigles 1R et 2R utilisés dans les tableaux ci-dessous correspondent à des barrettes DIMM à rangée simple et double. Tableau 1. Configurations de mémoire Capacité du système (en Go) Taille des barrettes de mémoire DIMM (en Go) Nombre de barrettes de mémoire DIMM Rangée, organisation et fréquence des barrettes de mémoire DIMM Remplissage des logements de barrettes de mémoire DIMM 2 2 1 1R, x8, 1 333 MT/s, A1 1R, x8, 1 600 MT/s 4 2 2 1R, x8, 1 333 MT/s, A1, A2 1R, x8, 1 600 MT/s 8 2 4 1R, x8, 1 333 MT/s, A1, A2, A3, A4 1R, x8, 1 600 MT/s 12 4 3 2R, x8, 1 333 MT/s, A1, A2, A3 2R, x8, 1 600 MT/s 24 8 3 2R, x4, 1 333 MT/s, A1, A2, A3 2R, x4, 1 600 MT/s 48 16 3 2R, x4, 1 333 MT/s, A1, A2, A3 2R, x4, 1 600 MT/s 96 16 6 2R, x4, 1 333 MT/s, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6 2R, x4, 1 600 MT/s Retrait de barrettes de mémoire AVERTISSEMENT : Les barrettes de mémoire restent chaudes au toucher quelques temps après l'arrêt du système. Laissez refroidir les barrettes avant de les manipuler. Manipulez les barrettes par les bords de la carte et évitez de toucher leurs composants. PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer le bon refroidissement du système, des barrettes neutres doivent être installées dans tout logement de barrette inoccupé. Retirez les barrettes neutres uniquement si vous avez l'intention d'utiliser des barrettes de mémoire dans ces logements. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. 534. Localisez le(s) support(s) de barrettes de mémoire appropriés. PRÉCAUTION : Tenez chaque barrette par les bords, en veillant à ne pas toucher la partie centrale. 5. Exercez une pression vers le bas puis vers l'extérieur sur les dispositifs d'éjection situés de part et d'autre du support afin d'extraire la barrette de mémoire. Figure 16. Retrait et installation d'une barrette de mémoire 1. barrette de mémoire 2. pattes d'éjection du support de barrette de mémoire (2) 3. repère d'alignement 6. Installez les caches du module de mémoire dans le ou les supports du module de mémoire vides afin de garantir le refroidissement correct du système. 7. Installez le carénage de refroidissement. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Installation de barrettes de mémoire AVERTISSEMENT : Les barrettes de mémoire restent chaudes au toucher quelques temps après l'arrêt du système. Laissez refroidir les barrettes avant de les manipuler. Manipulez les barrettes par les bords de la carte et évitez de toucher leurs composants. PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer le bon refroidissement du système, des barrettes neutres doivent être installées dans tout logement de barrette inoccupé. Retirez les barrettes neutres uniquement si vous avez l'intention d'utiliser des barrettes de mémoire dans ces logements. 541. Éteignez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et déconnectez-le des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. 4. Identifiez les supports de barrettes de mémoire. 5. Appuyez sur les éjecteurs qui se trouvent sur le support du module de mémoire et relâchez-les afin de permettre au module de mémoire de s'insérer dans le support. Si un cache de module de mémoire est installé dans le support, enlevez-le. REMARQUE : Conservez le ou les caches de module de mémoire pour une utilisation ultérieure. PRÉCAUTION : Tenez chaque barrette par les bords, en veillant à ne pas toucher la partie centrale. 6. Alignez le connecteur de bord de la barrette de mémoire sur le repère du support, puis insérez la barrette dans le support. REMARQUE : Le détrompeur du logement de la barrette mémoire permet de garantir que la barrette est insérée dans le bon sens. 7. Appuyez sur la barrette de mémoire avec les pouces jusqu'à verrouillage du loquet des leviers du support. Si la barrette de mémoire est installée correctement, les leviers s'alignent sur ceux des autres connecteurs équipés de barrettes. 8. Répétez les étapes 4 à 7 de cette procédure pour installer les barrettes de mémoire restantes. 9. Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. 10. Refermez le système. 11. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 12. Appuyez sur pour accéder à la Configuration système, puis vérifiez les paramètres de la mémoire. Le système doit normalement avoir déjà modifié la valeur pour prendre en compte la mémoire qui vient d'être installée. 13. Si la valeur est incorrecte, un ou plusieurs module de mémoire peuvent ne pas être installés correctement. Répétez les étapes 4 à 7 de cette procédure, en vous assurant bien que les modules de mémoire sont fermement positionnés dans leurs supports. 14. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Disques durs Selon la configuration, votre système prend en charge l'un des éléments suivants : Systèmes à quatre disques durs Jusqu'à quatre disques durs connectés par câble de 3,5 pouces ou Jusqu'à quatre disques durs SAS, SATA ou Nearline SAS de 3,5 pouces, remplaçables à chaud ou Jusqu'à quatre disques durs SAS, SATA, SAS SSD, SATA SSD ou Nearline SAS de 2,5 pouces, remplaçables à chaud Systèmes à huit disques durs Jusqu'à huit disques durs SAS, SATA, SAS SSD, SATA SSD ou Nearline SAS de 2,5 pouces, remplaçables à chaud REMARQUE : Des disques durs SSD/SAS/SATA ne peuvent pas être mélangés dans un système. 55Les disques durs remplaçables à chaud se connectent au système grâce au fond de panier de disques durs. Les disques durs remplaçables à chaud sont fournis dans des supports de disques durs remplaçables à chaud qui s'insèrent dans les logements de disques durs. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de retirer ou d'installer un disque dur remplaçable à chaud pendant que le système est en cours de fonctionnement, reportez-vous à la documentation relative à la carte contrôleur de stockage pour vérifier que la configuration de l'adaptateur hôte lui permet de prendre en charge le retrait et l'insertion de disques durs remplaçables à chaud. PRÉCAUTION : N'éteignez pas votre système et ne le redémarrez pas pendant que le disque dur est en train de se formater. Cela pourrait causer une panne du disque dur. REMARQUE : Utilisez uniquement des disques durs testés et homologués pour l'utilisation avec le fond de panier de disque dur. Lorsque vous formatez un disque dur, prévoyez assez de temps pour terminer le formatage. Souvenez-vous que des disques durs à capacité élevée peuvent prendre des heures pour se formater. Retrait d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 2,5 pouces PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache de disque dur dans toutes les baies de disque dur vacantes. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton de dégagement et extrayez le cache hors du logement de disque. Figure 17. Retrait et installation d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 2,5 pouces 1. cache de disque dur 2. bouton de dégagement Installation d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 2,5 pouces 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Insérez le cache de disque dur dans le logement de disque dur jusqu'à ce que le bouton de dégagement s'enclenche. 3. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 56Retrait d'un cache de disque dur de 3,5 pouces PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache dans tous les logements de disque dur vacants. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Saisissez l'avant du cache de disque dur, appuyez sur le bouton de dégagement et extrayez le cache hors du logement de disque. Figure 18. Retrait et installation d'un cache de disque dur de 3,5 pouces 1. Cache de disque dur 2. Bouton de dégagement Installation d'un cache de lecteur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Insérez le cache de disque dur dans le logement de disque dur jusqu'à ce que le bouton de dégagement s'enclenche. 3. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter toute perte de données, veillez à ce que le remplacement de lecteurs à chaud soit pris en charge. Consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. 1. À partir du logiciel de gestion, préparez le retrait du disque dur. Attendez que les indicateurs du support de disque dur signalent qu'il peut être retiré en toute sécurité. Pour de plus amples informations, consultez la documentation du contrôleur de stockage. Si le disque dur est en ligne, l'indicateur d'activité/de panne clignote en vert lorsque le disque dur est mis hors tension. Une fois les indicateurs du disque dur éteints, celui-ci est prêt à être retiré. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton de dégagement pour ouvrir la poignée de dégagement du support du disque. 3. Retirez le support de disque dur de la baie de disque. 57PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache de disque dur dans toutes les baies de disque dur vacantes. 4. Insérez un cache de lecteur dans la baie de disque dur vacante. Figure 19. Retrait et installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud 1. bouton de dégagement 2. disque dur 3. poignée du support de disque dur Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez uniquement des disques durs testés et homologués pour l'utilisation avec le fond de panier de disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : La prise en charge de la combinaison lecteurs SAS et SATA dans le même volume RAID n'est pas assurée. PRÉCAUTION : Lors de l'installation d'un disque dur, assurez-vous que les lecteurs adjacents sont pleinement installés. Si vous essayez d'insérer un support de disque dur et de verrouiller sa poignée en regard d'un support partiellement installé, vous risquez d'endommager le ressort du carénage du support partiellement installé et de le rendre inutilisable. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter toute perte de données, veillez à ce que le remplacement de lecteurs à chaud soit pris en charge. Consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsqu'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud est installé et que le système est mis sous tension, le disque dur commence automatiquement à se reconstruire. Veillez strictement à ce que le disque dur de remplacement soit vierge ou contienne des données que vous souhaitez écraser. Les éventuelles données présentes sur le disque dur de remplacement sont immédiatement perdues après l'installation du disque. 581. Si un cache de disque dur est installé dans le logement de disque dur, retirez-le. 2. Installez le disque dur dans le support de disque dur. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton de dégagement situé à l'avant du support de disque dur puis tournez la poignée. 4. Insérez le support de disque dur dans le logement de disque dur jusqu'à ce que le support se connecte au fond de panier. 5. Fermez la poignée du support de disque dur afin de verrouiller le lecteur. Retrait d'un disque dur connecté par câble PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, débranchez le système de la prise secteur, puis déconnectez-le de tous les périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Déconnectez les câbles de données et d'alimentation du disque dur. 5. Appuyez sur la patte de dégagement située sur le support de disque dur et extrayez le disque dur de la baie de disques durs. PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache sur tous les logements de disque dur vacants. 6. Insérez un cache sur le logement de disque dur vacant. Figure 20. Retrait et installation d'un disque dur connecté par câble 1. Disque dur 2. Câble d'alimentation/de données 3. Languette de dégagement 4. Support de disque dur 59Installation d'un disque dur connecté par câble PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, débranchez le système de la prise secteur, puis déconnectez-le de tous les périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Appuyez sur la patte de dégagement située sur le support de disque dur, puis extrayez le lecteur du système. 5. Insérez le disque dur dans son support. 6. Insérez le cache de disque dur dans le logement de disque dur jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 7. Branchez le câble d'alimentation/de données au disque dur. – Pour relier le disque dur au contrôleur SATA intégré (disques durs SATA seulement), branchez le câble de données SATA sur le connecteur SATA_A-D de la carte système. – Pour relier le disque dur à une carte contrôleur SAS RAID (disques durs SAS ou SATA), branchez le câble de données sur le connecteur situé sur le bord de la carte. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés. 10. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le contrôleur de disque dur est activé. 11. Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez le système. 12. Installez les logiciels requis pour le fonctionnement du disque dur comme décrit dans la documentation du disque dur. Retrait d'un disque dur de 2,5 pouces depuis un adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces REMARQUE : Un disque dur de 2,5 pouces est installé dans un adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces, qui est installé dans le support de disque dur de 3,5 pouces. Cela s'applique à un système à quatre disques durs avec disques durs remplaçables à chaud. 1. Retirez les deux vis du côté de l'adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces. 2. Faites glissez le disque dur depuis l'adaptateur de disque dur. 60Figure 21. Retrait et installation d'un disque dur de 2,5 pouces dans un adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces 1. Vis (2) 2. Adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces 3. Disque dur de 2,5 pouces Installation d'un disque dur de 2,5 pouces dans un adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Alignez les trous de vis sur le disque dur de 2,5 pouces avec les trous de vis de l'adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces. 2. Installez les vis qui fixent le disque dur à l'adaptateur. Retrait d'un disque dur ou un adaptateur de disque dur depuis un support de disque dur 1. Retirez les vis des rails coulissants du support de disque dur. 2. Extrayez le disque dur/l'adaptateur de disque dur du support de disque dur. 61Figure 22. Retrait ou installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud dans un support de disque dur 1. Support de disque dur 2. Vis (4) 3. Disque dur 4. Trous de vis (4) 62Figure 23. Retrait et installation d'un adaptateur de disque dur avec un disque dur de 2,5 pouces remplaçables à chaud dans un support de disque dur de 3,5 pouces 1. Support de disque dur 2. Vis (5) 3. Adaptateur de disque dur de 3,5 pouces 4. Disques durs de 2,5 pouces 63Figure 24. Retrait et installation d'un disque dur connecté par câble dans un support 1. Vis (4) 2. Disque dur 3. Trous de vis (4) 4. Support de disque dur Installation d'un disque dur ou un adaptateur de disque dur dans un support de disque dur PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Insérez le disque dur/l'adaptateur de disque dur dans le support de disque dur avec l'extrémité du connecteur du disque dur vers l'arrière. 2. Alignez les trous de vis du disque dur sur ceux de l'arrière du support. Si la position est correcte, l'arrière du disque dur s'aligne sur l'arrière du support. 3. Fixez le disque dur sur le support à l'aide des vis. 64Lecteur optique (en option) Retrait d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs remplaçables à chaud PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation/ de données de l'arrière du lecteur optique. Notez l'acheminement des câbles d'alimentation/de données du système lorsque vous les retirez de la carte système et du lecteur optique. Vous devrez ensuite reproduire la même disposition pour éviter que les câbles ne soient coincés ou écrasés. 5. Pour libérer le lecteur optique, appuyez puis enfoncez la patte d'éjection vers l'avant du système. 6. Extrayez le lecteur optique en le faisant glisser hors de son logement. 7. Si vous n'envisagez pas d'installer un nouveau lecteur optique, installez un cache. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 10. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. Figure 25. Retrait et installation d'un lecteur optique (dans des systèmes de disques durs remplaçables à chaud) 1. Lecteur optique 2. Câble de données 3. Câble d'alimentation 654. Languette de dégagement Installation d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs remplaçables à chaud PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise de courant. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Pour retirer le cache du lecteur optique, appuyez sur la patte d'éjection de couleur bleue située à l'arrière du cache, puis exercez une pression pour l'extraire du système. 5. Alignez le lecteur optique avec le logement de lecteur optique situé à l'avant du châssis. 6. Faites glisser le lecteur optique dans le logement jusqu'à ce que le loquet s'enclenche. 7. Branchez le câble d'alimentation/de données situé à l'arrière du lecteur. 8. Acheminez le câble d'alimentation/de données sous le câble acheminant le loquet au système. 9. Branchez le câble d'alimentation/de données aux connecteurs de la carte système. 10. Refermez le système. 11. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 12. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Retrait d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs connectés par câble PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation/de données de l'arrière du lecteur optique. Notez l'acheminement des câbles d'alimentation/de données lorsque vous les retirez de la carte système et du lecteur optique. Vous devrez ensuite reproduire la même disposition pour éviter que les câbles ne soient coincés ou écrasés. 5. Tirez sur le loquet de dégagement et désengagez le lecteur optique des encoches des picots métalliques. 6. Soulevez le lecteur optique pour le sortir du système. 7. Si vous n'envisagez pas d'installer un nouveau lecteur optique, installez un cache. 8. Refermez le système. 669. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 10. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. Figure 26. Retrait et installation d'un lecteur optique (dans des systèmes de disques durs connectés par câble) 1. Câble de données 2. Câble d'alimentation 3. Lecteur optique 4. Loquet de dégagement 5. Picots en métal (4) 6. Encoches (2) 67Installation d'un lecteur optique dans des systèmes de disques durs connectés par câble PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise de courant. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Alignez les deux encoches des picots métalliques avec les logements sur le côté du lecteur optique. 5. Insérez le lecteur optique dans les encoches jusqu'à ce qu'il soit en place et que le loquet de dégagement s'enclenche. 6. Branchez le câble d'alimentation. 7. Raccordez le câble de données à l'arrière du lecteur et au connecteur SATA de la carte système. REMARQUE : Acheminez et fixez les câbles à l'aide du loquet d'acheminement du câble sur le châssis du système pour empêcher qu'ils ne soient pincés ou coincés. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 10. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Ventilateurs Votre système prend en charge les éléments suivants : • Quatre ventilateurs dans une configuration de bloc d'alimentation non-redondant. • Cinq ventilateurs dans une configuration de bloc d'alimentation redondant. REMARQUE : Le ventilateur 1 doit être installé dans une configuration de bloc d'alimentation redondante. REMARQUE : Le retrait et l'installation à chaud des ventilateurs ne sont pas pris en charge. REMARQUE : En cas de problème dû à un ventilateur spécifique, le logiciel de gestion du système référence les numéros des ventilateurs. Ceci facilite l'identification et le remplacement d'un ventilateur défectueux au sein du carénage de refroidissement. Retrait d'un ventilateur AVERTISSEMENT : Ouvrez ou retirez le capot du système lorsque celui-ci est sous tension est dangereux. Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique. Manipulez avec précaution les ventilateurs lorsque vous les retirez ou les installez. PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 68PRÉCAUTION : Ne faites pas fonctionner le système si le capot est retiré pour une durée supérieure à cinq minutes. REMARQUE : La procédure de retrait pour chaque ventilateur est identique. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise de courant. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement ou le carénage de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation, selon le cas. 4. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur qui est enfichée dans le connecteur du câble d'alimentation sur la carte système ou la carte de distribution de l'alimentation. 5. Soulevez le ventilateur pour l'extraire du support du ventilateur de refroidissement. Figure 27. Retrait et installation d'un ventilateur de refroidissement 1. Ventilateur 2. Connecteur du câble d'alimentation 3. Support du ventilateur Installation d'un ventilateur PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise de courant. 2. Ouvrez le système. 693. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement ou le carénage de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation, selon le cas. 4. En vous plaçant face au système, abaissez le ventilateur dans le support du ventilateur de refroidissement. REMARQUE : Lorsqu'il est aligné correctement, le câble du ventilateur se trouve sur la gauche du ventilateur. 5. Branchez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur au connecteur du câble d'alimentation sur la carte système ou la carte de distribution de l'alimentation. 6. Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement ou le carénage de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation, selon le cas. 7. Refermez le système. 8. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Clé de mémoire USB interne (en option) Une clé de mémoire USB en option installée à l'intérieur du système peut servir de périphérique d'amorçage, de clé de sécurité ou de périphérique de stockage de masse. Le connecteur USB doit être activé à l'aide de l'option Internal USB Port (Port USB interne) de l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) du programme de configuration du système. Pour pouvoir démarrer le système à partir de la clé de mémoire USB, configurez cette dernière avec une image d'amorçage, puis ajoutez la clé à la séquence d'amorçage définie dans le programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Le connecteur USB interne (INT_USB) est situé sur la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2. Remplacement de la clé USB interne PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Localisez le connecteur USB (INT_USB) sur la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2. 4. Le cas échéant, retirez la clé USB. 5. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le connecteur USB. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 8. Accédez à la configuration du système et vérifiez que la clé USB a été détectée par le système. 70Figure 28. Remplacement de la clé USB interne 1. Clé de mémoire USB 2. Connecteur de clé de mémoire USB Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension REMARQUE : Une carte de montage pour cartes d'extension manquante ou non prise en charge créé un événement dans le journal des événements système. Cela n'empêche pas votre système d'être mis sous tension et aucun message de l'auto-test de démarrage du BIOS ni de pause F1/F2 n'est affiché. Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension Votre système prend en charge les deux cartes d'extension PCI Express. Les cartes d'extension PCI Express de 2ème et de 3ème génération sont prises en charge. Tableau 2. Cartes d'extension prises en charge Carte de montage Logement PCIe Génération Hauteur Longueur Largeur du lien Largeur du logement 1 1 2 Demi-hauteur Demi-longueur x4 x8 2 2 3 Taille standard Demi-longueur x16 x16 REMARQUE : Les logements de carte d'extension ne sont pas remplaçables à chaud. Le tableau suivant présente des consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension afin d'assurer une installation et un refroidissement corrects. Il convient d'installer d'abord, dans le logement indiqué, les cartes d'extension dont le niveau de priorité est le plus élevé. Toutes les autres cartes d'extension doivent être installées selon leur ordre de priorité en suivant celui des logements. Tableau 3. Ordre d'installation des cartes d'extension Priorité de la carte Type de carte Hauteur Priorité du logement Max autorisé par logement 1 RAID intégré Logement intégré 1 2 RAID Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 71Priorité de la carte Type de carte Hauteur Priorité du logement Max autorisé par logement 3 Adaptateurs réseau de convergence (CNA) Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 Demi-hauteur Logement 1 (Carte de montage 1) 1 4 Cartes réseau 10 Gb Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 Demi-hauteur Logement 1 (Carte de montage 1) 1 5 HBA FC8 Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 Demi-hauteur Logement 1 (Carte de montage 1) 1 6 FC4 HBA Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 7 Cartes réseau 1 Gb Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 Demi-hauteur Logement 1 (Carte de montage 1) 1 8 Non-Raid Taille standard Logement 2 (Carte de montage 2) 1 Retrait d'une carte d'extension PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Débranchez tous les câbles connectés à la carte d'extension ou à la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension. 4. Soulevez le loquet de la carte d'extension. 5. Pour retirer une carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2, faites glisser le support de carte d'extension en appuyant sur la patte. 6. En prenant en charge la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension par les ergots, maintenez la carte d'extension par les bords et retirez-la du connecteur pour cartes d'extension sur la carte de montage. 7. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement métallique sur l'emplacement non utilisé, puis refermez le loquet de la carte d'extension. 72REMARQUE : Vous devez installer une plaque de recouvrement sur un logement d'expansion vide pour conserver la certification FCC (Federal Communications Commission) du système. Les plaques empêchent également la pénétration de poussières et d'impuretés dans le système et favorisent le refroidissement et la circulation d'air dans le système. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Figure 29. Retrait et installation de la carte d'extension dans la carte de montage 1 1. Carte d'extension 2. Loquet de carte d'extension 3. Ergots de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 4. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 73Figure 30. Retrait et installation de la carte d'extension dans la carte de montage 2 1. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 2. Ergots de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 3. Loquet de carte d'extension 4. Carte d'extension 5. Support de carte d'extension 6. Patte Installation d'une carte d'extension PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Déballez la carte d'extension, puis préparez-la en vue de son installation. Pour des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Repérez le connecteur de la carte d'extension sur la carte de montage. 5. Ouvrez le loquet de la carte d'extension, puis retirez la plaque de recouvrement. 6. En tenant la carte par les bords, positionnez-la en alignant son connecteur latéral avec le connecteur de la carte d'extension. 7. Alignez le support de la carte d'extension sur les fentes situées sur le châssis. 748. Insérez le connecteur du bord de la carte dans le connecteur de carte d'extension, jusqu'à ce que la carte soit en place. REMARQUE : Assurez-vus que la carte d'extension est correctement installée le long du châssis afin que le loquet de la carte d'extension puisse être fermé. 9. Extrayez le support de la carte d'extension en appuyant sur l'onglet, afin de prendre en charge la carte d'extension sur la carte de montage 2. 10. Remettez en place le loquet de la carte d'extension. 11. Branchez les câbles à la carte d'extension, le cas échéant. 12. Refermez le système. 13. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 14. Installez tous les pilotes de périphérique requis pour la carte, comme indiqué dans la documentation de celle-ci. Retrait de cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Retirez la carte d'extension de la carte de montage, si elle est installée. Retirez la carte de ports iDRAC de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1. 4. En maintenant les ergots, soulevez la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension hors du connecteur de carte de montage sur la carte système. 75Figure 31. Retrait et installation de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 1. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 2. Ergots de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension (2) 3. Broches de guidage (2) 4. Connecteur de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 Figure 32. Retrait et installation de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 1. Commutateur d'intrusion dans le châssis 2. Ergots de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension (2) 3. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 764. Connecteur de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 5. Broches de guidage (2) 5. Réinstallez la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension. 6. Installez une carte d'extension, le cas échéant. Installation la carte de ports iDRAC sur la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1, le cas échéant. 7. Refermez le système. 8. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Installation des cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Alignez la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension avec les broches de guidage sur la carte système. 2. Abaissez la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement enclenchée dans son connecteur. 3. Réinstallez la carte d'extension dans la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension, le cas échéant. 4. Refermez le système. 5. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 6. Installez tous les pilotes de périphérique requis pour la carte, comme indiqué dans la documentation de celle-ci. Cartes de ports iDRAC (en option) La carte de ports iDRAC prend en charge les éléments suivants : • un port Ethernet 1 GbE • carte SD vFlash Retrait de la carte de ports iDRAC PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Débranchez tous les câbles connectés à la carte de ports iDRAC. 4. Soulevez le loquet de la carte d'extension. 5. Si elle est installée, retirez la carte d'extension de la carte de montage 1. 776. En prenant en charge la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension par les ergots, maintenez la carte de ports iDRAC par les bords et retirez-la du connecteur pour carte de ports iDRAC sur la carte de montage. 7. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement métallique sur l'emplacement non utilisé, puis refermez le loquet. REMARQUE : Vous devez installer une plaque de recouvrement sur un logement d'expansion vide pour conserver la certification FCC (Federal Communications Commission) du système. Les plaques empêchent également la pénétration de poussières et d'impuretés dans le système et favorisent le refroidissement et la circulation d'air dans le système. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Figure 33. Retrait et installation de la carte de ports iDRAC 1. Loquet de carte d'extension 2. Ergots de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension (2) 3. Carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1 4. Connecteur de la carte de ports iDRAC 5. Logement de carte SD 6. Port Ethernet RJ-45 7. Carte de ports iDRAC Installation de la carte de ports iDRAC PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Déballez la carte de ports iDRAC, puis préparez-la en vue de son installation. Pour des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 783. Ouvrez le système. 4. Localisez le connecteur de carte de ports iDRAC sur la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 1. 5. Ouvrez le loquet de la carte d'extension, puis retirez la plaque de recouvrement. 6. En tenant la carte par les bords, positionnez-la en alignant son connecteur latéral avec le connecteur de la carte de ports iDRAC. 7. Alignez le support de la carte de ports iDRAC avec les crochets sur le châssis. 8. Insérez fermement le connecteur du bord de la carte dans le connecteur de carte de ports iDRAC jusqu'à ce que la carte soit en place. 9. Remettez en place le loquet de la carte d'extension. 10. Connectez les câbles à la carte de ports iDRAC, le cas échéant. 11. Refermez le système. 12. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 13. Installez tous les pilotes de périphérique requis pour la carte, comme indiqué dans la documentation de celle-ci. Carte SD vFlash Une carte SD vFlash est une carte numérique sécurisée qui se connecte dans un logement de carte SD vFlash sur le système. Elle offre des capacités de stockage local permanent à la demande et un environnement de déploiement personnalisé qui permet l'automatisation de la configuration des serveurs, des scripts et de l'imagerie. Elle émule les périphériques USB. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le iDRAC7 User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation iDRAC7) sous Software → Systems Management→ Dell Remote Access Controllers (Logiciel) (Gestion des systèmes) (Contrôleurs d'accès à distance Dell) à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Remplacement de la carte SD vFlash 1. Localisez le logement du support vFlash sur la carte de ports iDRAC. 2. Pour retirer la carte SD vFlash, appuyez dessus pour la libérer, puis retirez-la de son logement. Figure 34. Remplacement de la carte SD vFlash 1. Carte SD vFlash 2. Logement pour carte SD vFlash 3. Pour installer la carte SD vFlash, insérez l'extrémité de la broche de contact de la carte SD (étiquette vers le haut) dans le logement de carte du module. REMARQUE : Le logement est muni d'un repère qui permet d'insérer la carte dans le bon sens. 794. Appuyez sur la carte pour qu'elle s'enclenche dans son logement. Module SD interne double REMARQUE : Lorsque l'option Redundancy (Redondance) est définie sur Mirror Mode (Mode miroir) dans l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés), l'information est répliquée d'une carte SD à l'autre. Retrait du module SD interne double PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Repérez le module SD interne double sur le connecteur IDSDM de la carte système. Reportez-vous à la section Connecteurs de la carte système 4. Le cas échéant, retirez la ou les cartes SD. 5. Maintenez la patte puis retirez le module SD double de la carte système. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 80Figure 35. Retrait et installation du module SD interne double 1. Languette de retrait bleue 2. Carte SD 1 3. Carte SD 2 4. Module SD double 5. Connecteur de la carte système Installation du module SD interne double PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Repérez le connecteur IDSDM sur la carte système. 4. Alignez les connecteurs sur la carte système et le module SD double. 5. Appuyez sur le module SD double jusqu'à ce qu'il soit fermement installé sur la carte système. 816. Refermez le système. 7. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Carte SD interne Retrait d'une carte SD interne PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Repérez l'emplacement du logement de la carte SD sur le module SD interne double. Exercez une pression sur la carte afin de la libérer, puis retirez-la de son logement. 4. Refermez le système. 5. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Installation d'une carte SD interne PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous qu’Internal SD Card Port (Port interne de la carte SD) soit activé dans la configuration du système. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Localisez le connecteur de carte SD sur le module SD double interne puis, l'étiquette vers le haut, insérez l'extrémité de la broche de contact de la carte dans le logement. REMARQUE : Le logement est muni d'un repère qui permet d'insérer la carte dans le bon sens. 4. Exercez une pression sur la carte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se mette en place. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 82Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée Votre système comprend un logement de carte d'extension dédié sur la carte système pour une carte contrôleur intégrée qui fournit le sous-système de stockage intégré pour les disques durs internes de votre système. Le contrôleur prend en charge les disques durs SAS et SATA et vous permet également d'installer des disques durs en configuration RAID comme pris en charge par la version du contrôleur de stockage incluse dans votre système. Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de retirer la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 avant de retirer la carte du contrôleur de stockage. 3. Appuyez sur les deux leviers d'éjection situés sur le bord de la carte pour libérer la carte du connecteur. 4. Déverrouillez la carte du support de carte du contrôleur de stockage de la carte système. 5. Retirez la carte. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 83Figure 36. Retrait et installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée 1. Ergots (2) 2. Carte contrôleur de stockage 3. Support de la carte contrôleur de stockage 4. Leviers de dégagement (2) 5. Connecteur de la carte du contrôleur de stockage Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Alignez l'une des extrémités de la carte avec le support de carte sur la carte système. 844. Abaissez l'autre extrémité de la carte dans le support de carte du contrôleur de stockage sur la carte système. 5. Appuyez sur les ergots de la carte et poussez la carte jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche. Lorsque la carte est en place, les leviers d'éjection se referment sur la carte. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Processeur Retrait d'un processeur PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Avant de mettre à niveau votre système, téléchargez la dernière version du BIOS du système à partir du site support.dell.com. Suivez ensuite les instructions contenues dans le fichier de téléchargement compressé pour installer la mise à jour. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez mettre à jour le BIOS du système à l'aide de Lifecycle Controller. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. Une fois le système débranché de l'alimentation en CA, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 3 secondes afin de décharger complètement le système avant d'en retirer le capot. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. AVERTISSEMENT : Le radiateur et le processeur restent chauds au toucher pendant quelques temps après l'arrêt du système. Laissez refroidir le radiateur et le processeur avant de les manipuler. PRÉCAUTION : Ne retirez jamais le dissipateur de chaleur d'un processeur, sauf si vous souhaitez retirer également le processeur. Le dissipateur de chaleur est essentiel au maintien de bonnes conditions thermiques. 5. Desserrez les supports de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. 6. Soulevez le dissipateur de chaleur pour le dégager du processeur, puis mettez-le de côté. 85Figure 37. Retrait et installation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur 1. Support de fixation (4) 2. Dissipateur de chaleur 3. Vis de fixation (4) PRÉCAUTION : La pression exercée pour maintenir le processeur dans son support est très forte. Si vous ne maintenez pas fermement le levier de dégagement, il risque de se redresser brusquement. 7. Avec le pouce, appuyez fermement sur le levier de dégagement du support du processeur, puis déverrouillez-le en exerçant une pression pour l'extraire de dessous la patte. Faites pivoter le levier vers le haut. 8. Faites pivoter le cadre de protection du processeur vers le haut pour le dégager. PRÉCAUTION : Les broches du support sont fragiles et peuvent être endommagées. Faites attention à ne pas plier les broches lorsque vous retirez le processeur de son support. 9. Extrayez le processeur de son support et laissez le levier d'éjection ouvert en vue de l'installation du nouveau processeur. 86Figure 38. Retrait et installation d'un processeur 1. Processeur 2. Cadre de protection du processeur 3. Encoches du processeur (2) REMARQUE : Une fois le processeur retiré, placez-le dans un conteneur antistatique pour une utilisation ultérieure, un retour ou pour un stockage temporaire. Ne touchez pas le bas du processeur. Touchez uniquement les extrémités de ses côtés. Installation d'un processeur PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Avant de mettre à niveau votre système, téléchargez la dernière version du BIOS du système à partir du site support.dell.com. Suivez ensuite les instructions contenues dans le fichier de téléchargement compressé pour installer la mise à jour. 87REMARQUE : Vous pouvez mettre à jour le BIOS du système à l'aide de Lifecycle Controller. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. Une fois ce dernier débranché de la source d'alimentation, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant trois secondes afin de décharger complètement le système, avant d'en retirer le capot. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. AVERTISSEMENT : Le radiateur et le processeur restent chauds au toucher pendant quelques temps après l'arrêt du système. Laissez refroidir le radiateur et le processeur avant de les manipuler. PRÉCAUTION : Ne retirez jamais le dissipateur de chaleur d'un processeur, sauf si vous souhaitez retirer également le processeur. Le dissipateur de chaleur est essentiel au maintien de bonnes conditions thermiques. 5. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur et le processeur. 6. Déballez le nouveau processeur. 7. Alignez le processeur sur les détrompeurs du support ZIF. PRÉCAUTION : Si le processeur n'est pas positionné correctement, il risque d'être endommagé ou d'endommager la carte système de manière permanente. Faites attention à ne pas plier les broches du support. PRÉCAUTION : Ne forcez pas l'installation du processeur. Lorsqu'il est positionné correctement, celui-ci s'enclenche facilement dans le support. 8. Mettez les leviers de dégagement du support de processeur en position ouverte, puis alignez la broche du processeur, à l'aide du guide de positionnement de la broche du support comme référence, puis installez avec précaution le processeur dans son support. 9. Fermez le cadre de protection du processeur. 10. À l'aide d'un chiffon propre et non pelucheux, essuyez la pâte thermique du dissipateur de chaleur. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous appliquez trop de pâte thermique, celle-ci risque d'atteindre et de contaminer le support de processeur. 11. Ouvrez le paquet de pâte thermique fourni avec le kit du processeur, puis appliquez-en tout le contenu sur le centre de la face supérieure du nouveau processeur. 12. Placez le dissipateur de chaleur sur le processeur. 13. À l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme n°2, serrez les supports de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. 14. Installez le carénage de refroidissement. 15. Refermez le système. 16. Rebranchez le système et les périphériques aux prises secteur, puis mettez le système sous tension. 17. Appuyez sur pour accéder à la configuration du système, et vérifiez que les informations relatives au processeur correspondent bien à la nouvelle configuration. 18. Lancez les diagnostics du système pour vérifier que le nouveau processeur fonctionne correctement. Blocs d'alimentation Le système prend en charge les blocs d'alimentation suivants : • 350 W (redondant ou non redondant) • 550 W (redondant) Lorsque deux blocs d'alimentation identiques sont installés, la configuration de l'alimentation est redondante (1 + 1). En mode redondant, l'alimentation est fournie au système de façon égale à partir des deux blocs d'alimentation, ceci pour une plus grande efficacité. 88Si un seul bloc d'alimentation est installé, la configuration est non redondante (1 + 0). L'alimentation est fournie au système uniquement par le bloc d'alimentation unique. REMARQUE : Si deux blocs sont installés, ils doivent être du même type et disposer de la même puissance maximale de sortie. Alimentation de rechange Votre système prend en charge la fonction d'alimentation de rechange, qui permet de réduire considérablement la surcharge d'alimentation associée à la redondance de blocs d'alimentation. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, un bloc d'alimentation redondant passe en état de veille. Le bloc d'alimentation actif prend en charge 100 % de la charge et fonctionne donc de façon plus efficace. Le bloc d'alimentation redondant en état de veille surveille la tension de sortie du bloc d'alimentation actif. Si celle-ci chute, il revient à l'état actif. Le bloc d'alimentation actif peut également activer un bloc d'alimentation en veille, lorsqu'il devient plus efficace d'avoir les deux blocs activés. Les valeurs par défaut des blocs d'alimentation activent les deux blocs si la charge sur le bloc d'alimentation actif est supérieure à 50 %, et mettent en veille le bloc redondant si la charge descend en dessous de 20 %. Vous pouvez configurer la fonction d'alimentation de rechange via les paramètres iDRAC. Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres iDRAC, consultez le iDRAC7 User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation iDRAC7) sous Software → Systems Management→ Dell Remote Access Controllers (Logiciel) (Gestion des systèmes) (Contrôleurs d'accès à distance Dell) à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation redondant PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Le système exige un bloc d'alimentation pour un fonctionnement normal. Sur les systèmes redondants, retirez et remplacez un seul bloc d'alimentation à la fois lorsque le système est sous tension. 1. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la source d'alimentation électrique. 2. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation et retirez les bandes Velcro utilisées pour attacher les câbles du système. REMARQUE : Vous devrez peut-être détacher et soulever le bras de retenue optionnel du câble s'il empêche le retrait du bloc d'alimentation. Pour de plus amples informations sur le bras de retenue du câble, reportezvous à la documentation de rack du système. 3. Appuyez sur la patte de dégagement et tirez le bloc d'alimentation vers l'extérieur pour le libérer de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation et du châssis. 89Figure 39. Retrait et installation d'un bloc d'alimentation redondant 1. Bloc d'alimentation redondant 2. Loquet de dégagement 3. Poignée du bloc d'alimentation Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation redondant 1. Vérifiez que les blocs d'alimentation sont de même type et qu'ils ont la même puissance maximale de sortie. REMARQUE : La puissance maximale (en watts) est indiquée sur l'étiquette du bloc d'alimentation. 2. Le cas échéant, retirez le cache du bloc d'alimentation. 3. Faites glisser le bloc d'alimentation dans le châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il s'emboîte complètement et que le loquet de dégagement s'enclenche. REMARQUE : Si vous avez déverrouillé le bras de gestion de câbles au cours de l'étape 2 de la procédure précédente, verrouillez-le à nouveau. Pour obtenir des informations sur le bras de gestion des câbles, reportez-vous à la documentation du rack du système. 4. Branchez le câble d'alimentation sur le bloc d'alimentation et branchez son autre extrémité sur une prise électrique. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation, fixez-le à l'aide de la bande. REMARQUE : Lors de l'installation, du remplacement à chaud ou de l'ajout à chaud d'un bloc d'alimentation sur un système qui en comporte deux, attendez quelques secondes pour que le système reconnaisse le bloc d'alimentation et détermine son état. Le voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation s'allume en vert pour indiquer que le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne correctement. Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation non redondant PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 901. Mettez le système hors tension, y compris les périphériques connectés. 2. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la source d'alimentation électrique. 3. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation et retirez les bandes Velcro utilisées pour attacher les câbles du système. REMARQUE : Vous devrez peut-être détacher et soulever le bras de retenue optionnel du câble s'il empêche le retrait du bloc d'alimentation. Pour de plus amples informations sur le bras de retenue du câble, reportezvous à la documentation de rack du système. 4. Ouvrez le système. 5. Débranchez tous les câbles d'alimentation reliant le bloc d'alimentation à la carte système, aux disques durs et au lecteur optique. 6. Retirez la vis fixant le bloc d'alimentation au châssis, puis faites glisser puis soulevez le bloc d'alimentation pour l'extraire du châssis. Figure 40. Retrait et installation d'un bloc d'alimentation non redondant 1. Bloc d'alimentation 2. Vis 3. Câble d'alimentation à 24 broches 4. Câble d'alimentation à 8 broches 5. Picot de fixation 6. Câble d'alimentation SATA Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation non redondant REMARQUE : Un bloc d'alimentation non redondant remplaçable à chaud doit être installé dans le logement 1 de la baie d'alimentation. 911. Ouvrez le système. 2. Alignez les trous de fixation des vis situés sur le bloc d'alimentation avec les picots de fixation du châssis. 3. Serrez la vis pour fixer le bloc d'alimentation au châssis. 4. Branchez tous les câbles d'alimentation de la carte système, des disques durs et du lecteur optique. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Branchez le câble d'alimentation sur le bloc d'alimentation et branchez son autre extrémité sur une prise électrique. Retrait du cache de bloc d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer un refroidissement du système correct, il est nécessaire d'installer le cache du bloc d'alimentation dans la deuxième baie d'alimentation dans le cas d'une configuration non redondante. Retirez le cache du bloc d'alimentation uniquement si vous installez un deuxième bloc d'alimentation. Si vous installez un bloc d'alimentation secondaire, tirez sur le cache placé sur la baie vers l'extérieur pour l'extraire. Figure 41. Retrait et installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation 1. Cache de bloc d'alimentation Installation du cache de bloc d'alimentation REMARQUE : Le cache de bloc d'alimentation ne doit être installé que sur la seconde baie d'alimentation. Pour installer le cache de bloc d'alimentation, alignez-le sur la baie d'alimentation, puis insérez-le dans le châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il se mette en place en émettant un déclic. Pile du système 92Remplacement de la pile du système AVERTISSEMENT : Il existe un risque d'explosion d'une nouvelle batterie si elle n'est pas correctement installée. Remplacez la batterie par une batterie identique ou équivalente recommandée par le fabricant. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les informations de sécurité. PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. 4. Localisez le support de pile. PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas endommager le connecteur de la pile, vous devez le maintenir fermement en place lorsque vous installez ou retirez une pile. 5. Pour retirer la pile, maintenez son connecteur en place en appuyant fermement sur le pôle positif de ce dernier. Figure 42. Remplacement de la pile du système 1. Pôle positif du connecteur de pile 2. Pile du système 3. Pôle négatif du connecteur de pile 6. Soulevez la pile hors des pattes de fixation situées sur le pôle négatif du connecteur. 7. Pour installer une nouvelle pile, maintenez son connecteur en place en appuyant fermement sur le pôle positif de ce dernier. 8. Tenez la pile, pôle positif «+» vers le haut, puis glissez-la sous les pattes de fixation du pôle positif du connecteur. 9. Appuyez sur la pile pour l'enclencher dans le connecteur. 10. Installez le carénage de refroidissement. 11. Refermez le système. 12. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 9313. Accédez à la configuration du système et vérifiez que la pile fonctionne correctement. 14. Entrez l'heure et la date exactes dans les champs Time (Heure) et Date du programme de configuration du système. 15. Quittez la configuration du système. Fond de panier des disques durs Votre système prend en charge les éléments suivants : • Fond de panier de quatre disques durs • Fond de panier de huit disques durs Retrait du fond de panier des disques durs PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager les disques durs et le fond de panier, retirez du système les disques durs avant d'enlever le fond de panier. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de retirer chaque disque dur, notez son numéro d'emplacement et étiquetez-le temporairement afin de pouvoir ensuite le réinstaller au même endroit. 4. Retirez tous les disques durs. 5. Débranchez le(s) câble(s) de données SAS/SATA/SSD, de transmission et d'alimentation du fond de panier. 6. Appuyez les pattes de dégagement et faites glisser le fond de panier vers le haut pour le retirer. Figure 43. Vue frontale du fond de panier de quatre disques durs 1. Connecteurs de disques durs (4) 2. Connecteur SAS 3. Câble d'alimentation pour lecteur optique 94Figure 44. Vue arrière du fond de panier de quatre disques durs 1. Fond de panier de disques durs 2. Connecteur de signal du fond de panier 3. Connecteur d'alimentation du fond de panier Figure 45. Retrait et installation du fond de panier de quatre disques durs 1. Pattes de dégagement (2) 2. Fond de panier de disques durs 3. Broches de guidage (2) 4. Crochets du châssis (4) 95Figure 46. Schéma de câblage : fond de panier de quatre disques durs 1. Carte système 2. Fond de panier de disques durs 3. Connecteur de câble SAS 4. Guide de trajet des câbles 5. Connecteur du câble de signal 6. Connecteur du câble d'alimentation 7. Loquet d'acheminement de câbles 8. Carte de distribution d'alimentation 9. Loquet de fixation des câbles Figure 47. Vue frontale du fond de panier de huit disques durs 1. Connecteurs de disques durs (8) 96Figure 48. Vue arrière du fond de panier de huit disques durs 1. Connecteur SAS B 2. Connecteur SAS A 3. Connecteur d'alimentation du fond de panier 4. Connecteur de signal du fond de panier Figure 49. Retrait et installation du fond de panier de huit disques durs 1. Fond de panier de disques durs 2. Pattes de dégagement (2) 3. Crochets du châssis (4) 97Figure 50. Schéma de câblage : fond de panier de huit disques durs 1. Carte système 2. Fond de panier de disques durs 3. Connecteur de câble SAS B 4. Connecteur de câble SAS A 5. Connecteur du câble d'alimentation 6. Connecteur du câble de signal 7. Loquet d'acheminement de câbles 8. Carte de distribution d'alimentation 9. Loquet de fixation des câbles Installation du fond de panier des disques durs PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Utilisez les crochets à la base du châssis comme guide pour aligner le fond de panier des disques durs. 2. Enfoncez le fond de panier des disques durs jusqu'à ce que les pattes de dégagement s'enclenchent. 3. Branchez le(s) câble(s) de données SAS/SATA/SSD, de transmission et d'alimentation au fond de panier. 4. Installez les disques durs à leur emplacement d'origine. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 7. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 98Assemblage du panneau de commande Retrait du panneau de commande PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. PRÉCAUTION : Ne forcez pas lorsque vous retirez le panneau de commande, vous pourriez endommager les connecteurs. 4. Libérez les pattes de verrouillage du panneau de commande en inclinant vers le haut et vers l'extérieur du système. Pour un système de disques durs remplaçables à chaud de 2,5 pouces, retirez la vis (située en bas du châssis) qui fixe le panneau de commande au châssis. Figure 51. Retrait et installation du panneau de commande : système de quatre disques durs 1. Encoches (6) 992. Pattes de verrouillage (6) 3. Panneau de commande Figure 52. Retrait et installation du panneau de commande : système de huit disques durs 1. Panneau de commande 2. Encoches (4) 3. Câble du connecteur LCD 4. Vis 5. Pattes de verrouillage (4) Installation du panneau de commande PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Insérez le câble du panneau de commande à travers l'e logement du châssis, le cas échéant. 100PRÉCAUTION : Afin d'éviter d'endommager le voyant d'alimentation, ne forcez pas outre mesure. 2. Alignez les pattes de verrouillage du panneau de commande avec les encoches du châssis puis inclinez le panneau de commande jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. S'il est correctement installé, le panneau de commande est au même niveau que le panneau avant. REMARQUE : Pour un système de huit disques durs de 2,5 pouces, serrez la vis qui fixe le panneau de commande au bas du châssis. 3. Refermez le système. 4. Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. 5. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. Retrait du module du panneau de commande PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Retirez le panneau de commande du châssis. 5. Retirez la ou les vis fixant le panneau de commande au châssis. 6. Pour un système de disques durs de 3,5 pouces connectés par câble : a) Retirez la ou les vis fixant le panneau à voyants au châssis. b) Retirez le panneau à voyants. PRÉCAUTION : Ne forcez pas lorsque vous retirez le panneau de commande, vous pourriez endommager les connecteurs. 7. Retirez tous les câbles connectant le module du panneau de commande au châssis. 101Figure 53. Retrait et installation du module du panneau de commande : système de disques durs de 3,5 pouces connectés par câble 1. Module du panneau de commande 2. Vis du module du panneau de commande (2) 3. Câble du connecteur du module du panneau de commande 4. Câble du connecteur USB 5. Panneau de commande 6. Vis du panneau à voyants (2) 7. Panneau à voyants 102Figure 54. Retrait et installation du module du panneau de commande : système de disques durs de 3,5 pouces enfichables à chaud 1. Module du panneau de commande 2. Vis (2) 3. Câble du connecteur du module du panneau de commande 4. Câble du connecteur USB 5. Panneau de commande 103Figure 55. Retrait et installation du module du panneau de commande : système de disques durs de 2,5 pouces 1. Module du panneau de commande 2. Vis (2) 3. Câble du connecteur du module du panneau de commande 4. Câble du connecteur LCD 5. Panneau de commande Installation du module du panneau de commande PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Pour un système de disques durs de 3,5 pouces connectés par câble : a) Insérez le panneau à voyant dans le logement correspondant du châssis. b) Fixez le panneau à voyants à l'aide des vis. 2. Insérez le module du panneau de commande dans le logement du châssis et alignez les deux trous du module du panneau de commande avec les trous correspondants sur le châssis. 3. Fixez le module du panneau de commande à l'aide des vis. 4. Branchez tous les câbles applicables à l'ensemble du module panneau de commande. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Installez le panneau de commande. 7. Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. 8. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 104Module VGA REMARQUE : Le système à 8 disques durs est le seul à posséder un module VGA sur le panneau avant. Retrait du module VGA PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Cette procédure s'applique seulement au système 8 disques durs. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et déconnectez-le des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. PRÉCAUTION : Le connecteur du module d'affichage est un connecteur ZIF (force d'insertion nulle). Assurezvous que l'onglet de verouillage sur le connecteur est relâché avant le retrait et l'insertion. L'onglet de verrouillage doit être engagé après l'insertion. 4. Débranchez le câble du module d'affichage de la carte du panneau de commande. 5. Retirez le panneau de commande. 6. Déconnectez le câble du module VGA du module VGA. 7. À l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme No. 2, retirez la vis qui fixe le module VGA au châssis. 8. Faites glisser le module VGA en dehors du châssis. Figure 56. Retrait et installation du module VGA 1051. panneau de commande 2. câble du module d'affichage 3. vis (haut) 4. câble du module VGA 5. vis (bas) 6. module VGA Installation du module VGA REMARQUE : Cette procédure s'applique seulement au système 8 disques durs. PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Poussez le module VGA en position dans le châssis et alignez le trou de vis fileté du module VGA sur le trou de vis du châssis. 2. À l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme no. 2, replacez la vis (au bas du châssis) qui fixe le module VGA au châssis. 3. Réinstallez le panneau de commande. 4. Connectez le câble du module VGA au module VGA. PRÉCAUTION : Le connecteur du module d'affichage est un connecteur ZIF (force d'insertion nulle). Assurezvous que l'onglet de verouillage sur le connecteur est relâché avant le retrait et l'insertion. L'onglet de verrouillage doit être engagé après l'insertion. 5. Branchez le câble du module d'affichage sur la carte du panneau de commande. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 8. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation Retrait du carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Ne mettez jamais sous tension un système à deux processeurs sans un carénage de carte d'alimentation. Le système peut surchauffer, ce qui pourrait entraîner une perte de performances. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Extrayez la carte de distribution d'alimentation (PDB) du système. 106Figure 57. Retrait et installation du carénage PDB 1. Support du ventilateur 2. Pattes du carénage PDB (2) 3. Carénage PDB 4. Flèche sur le carénage PDB Installation du carénage de la carte de distribution d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Pour une installation du carénage de distribution d'alimentation dans le châssis, assurez-vous que les câbles à l'intérieur du système sont acheminés via le loquet de fixation de câbles. 1. Alignez le carénage PDB avec la baie de ventilateur numéroté et la flèche comme guide. 2. Abaissez le carénage PDB dans le châssis afin que les deux pattes du carénage PDB reposent sur le support de ventilateur. Lorsqu'il est correctement installé, le carénage PDB est au même niveau que le support du bloc d'alimentation et la flèche du carénage s'aligne avec la flèche du support du bloc d'alimentation. 3. Refermez le système. 4. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 107Carte de distribution d'alimentation Retrait de la carte de distribution d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : La carte de distribution d'alimentation est présente uniquement sur les systèmes prenant en charge les blocs d'alimentation redondants. 1. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Retirez les blocs d'alimentation du système. 5. Retirez le carénage PDB. 6. Débranchez de la carte système les câbles de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation. 7. Débranchez le câble du ventilateur. 8. Retirez les deux vis fixant la carte de distribution d'alimentation au châssis, puis extrayez la carte. Figure 58. Retrait et installation de la carte de distribution d'alimentation 1081. Vis (2) 2. Câbles du bloc d'alimentation vers la carte système (3) 3. Câble du bloc d'alimentation vers le fond de panier de disques durs 4. Picots (2) 5. Carte de distribution d'alimentation 6. Connecteur du câble de ventilateur Installation de la carte de distribution d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Alignez la carte de distribution d'alimentation avec les picots du châssis. 2. Insérez les deux vis qui fixent la carte de distribution d'alimentation au châssis. 3. Branchez les câbles de distribution d'alimentation à la carte système et le connecteur du câble du ventilateur à la carte de distribution d'alimentation. 4. Installez le carénage PDB. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Carte système Retrait de la carte système PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous utilisez le module TPM (Trusted Program Module) avec une clé de cryptage, il est possible que vous soyez invité à créer une clé de restauration lors de l'installation du système ou d'un programme. Assurezvous de créer et stocker de manière sûre cette clé de restauration Si vous remplacez cette carte système, vous devrez fournir la clé de restauration lorsque vous redémarrerez le système ou le programme avant de pouvoir accéder aux données cryptées de vos disques durs. 1. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2. Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Retirez les composants suivants : a) Carénage de refroidissement b) Carénage PDB 109AVERTISSEMENT : Les barrettes de mémoire restent chaudes au toucher quelque temps après l'arrêt du système. Laisser refroidir les barrettes avant de les manipuler. Manipulez les barrettes par les bords de la carte et évitez de toucher leurs composants. c) Barrettes de mémoire d) Câbles du ventilateur e) Toutes les cartes d'extension et les cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension f) Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée AVERTISSEMENT : Le dissipateur de chaleur reste chaud un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Veillez à ne pas toucher le dissipateur de chaleur lors du retrait de la carte système. g) Dissipateur de chaleur et processeur h) Module SD interne double REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de supprimer la carte de distribution d'alimentation avant de retirer la carte système du châssis. 5. Débranchez tous les câbles de la carte système. PRÉCAUTION : Veillez à ne pas endommager le bouton d'identification du système en retirant la carte système du châssis. 6. Retirez le neuf vis de la carte système et faites glisser la carte système vers l'avant du système. 7. Maintenez la carte système par les bords et extrayez la carte système du châssis. PRÉCAUTION : Ne vous servez pas d'une barrette de mémoire, d'un processeur ou de tout autre composant pour soulever l'assemblage de la carte système. Figure 59. Retrait et installation de la carte système 1. Vis (9) 2. Carte système 110Installation de la carte système PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Déballez le nouvel assemblage de la carte système. PRÉCAUTION : Ne vous servez pas d'une barrette de mémoire, d'un processeur ou de tout autre composant pour soulever l'assemblage de la carte système. PRÉCAUTION : Veillez à ne pas endommager le bouton d'identification du système lors de la remise en place de la carte système dans le châssis. 2. Maintenez la carte système par les bords et inclinez-la vers l'arrière du châssis. 3. Abaissez la carte système dans le châssis jusqu'à ce que les connecteurs de l'arrière de la carte système s'alignent avec les logements de la paroi arrière du châssis et les trous des vis de la carte système avec les picots du châssis. 4. Serrez les neuf vis qui fixent la carte système au châssis de l'ordinateur. 5. Réinstallez les éléments suivants : a) Module SD interne double b) Dissipateur de chaleur/cache de dissipateur de chaleur et processeur/cache de processeur c) Cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension d) Toutes les cartes d'extension et la carte du contrôleur de stockage intégrée e) Câbles du ventilateur f) Barrettes de mémoire g) Carénage PDB h) Carénage de refroidissement 6. Rebranchez tous les câbles à la carte système. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous que les câbles à l'intérieur du système soient acheminés à travers le loquet d'acheminement des câbles. 7. Refermez le système. 8. Le cas échéant, installez le cadre avant. 9. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 10. Importez votre licence iDRAC Enterprise (nouvelle et déjà existante). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au iDRAC7 User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation iDRAC7) sous Software → Systems Management→ Dell Remote Access Controllers , (Logiciel) (Gestion de systèmes) (Contrôleurs d'accès à distance Dell) à l'adresse support.dell.com/ manuals. 1111124 Dépannage du système La sécurité en priorité, pour vous et votre système PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. Dépannage des échecs de démarrage du système Si vous démarrez le système en mode de démarrage BIOS après l'installation du système d'exploitation à partir du Gestionnaire de démarrage UEFI, le système se bloquera. L'inverse est également vrai. Vous devez démarrer en utilisant le même mode de démarrage que celui avec lequel vous avez installé le système d'exploitation. Pour tous les autres problèmes de démarrage, notez les messages du système qui apparaissent à l'écran. Dépannage des connexions externes Avant de procéder au dépannage de tout périphérique externe, assurez-vous que tous les câbles externes sont correctement fixés aux connecteurs externes de votre système. Dépannage du sous-système vidéo 1. Vérifiez les branchements du moniteur (prise secteur et raccordement au système). 2. Vérifiez le câblage de l'interface vidéo entre le système et le moniteur. 3. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Si les tests aboutissent, le problème n'est pas lié au matériel vidéo. Si les tests échouent, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un périphérique USB Effectuez les étapes suivantes pour dépanner un clavier/une souris USB. Pour tous les autres périphériques USB, passez à l'étape 7. 1. Débranchez un court instant du système les câbles du clavier ou de la souris, puis reconnectez-les. 2. Connectez le clavier ou la souris aux ports USB situés sur le côté opposé du système. 3. Si l'incident est résolu, redémarrez le système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les ports USB défectueux sont activés. 4. Remplacez le clavier ou la souris par un périphérique équivalent en état de marche. 5. Si le problème est résolu, remplacez le périphérique (clavier ou souris) défectueux. 1136. Si le problème persiste, passez à l'étape suivante pour dépanner les autres périphériques USB reliés au système. 7. Mettez hors tension tous les périphériques USB et déconnectez-les du système. 8. Redémarrez le système et, si votre clavier fonctionne, entrez dans le programme de configuration du système. Vérifiez que tous les ports USB sont activés dans l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés), dans les options du programme de configuration du système. Si votre clavier ne fonctionne pas, vous pouvez également utiliser l'accès distant. Si le système n'est pas accessible, réinitialisez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR à l'intérieur de votre système et restaurez les paramètres par défaut du BIOS. 9. Reconnectez et remettez sous tension les périphériques USB un par un. 10. Si un périphérique provoque un problème similaire, mettez-le hors tension, remplacez le câble USB si nécessaire, puis remettez le périphérique sous tension. Si toutes les tentatives de dépannage échouent, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un périphérique d'E/S série 1. Mettez hors tension le système et les périphériques connectés au port série. 2. Remplacez le câble d'interface série par un câble fiable, puis mettez le système et le périphérique série sous tension. Si vous avez résolu le problème, remplacez le câble d'interface par un câble réputé fiable. 3. Mettez hors tension le système et le périphérique série, puis remplacez ce dernier par un périphérique similaire. 4. Mettez sous tension le système et le périphérique série. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'une carte réseau 1. Lancez les tests de diagnostic adéquats. Reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système pour connaître les tests de diagnostic disponibles. 2. Redémarrez le système et consultez les messages éventuels concernant le contrôleur de carte réseau. 3. Vérifiez le voyant approprié du connecteur de carte réseau : – Si le voyant de liaison ne s'allume pas, vérifiez tous les branchements. – Si le voyant d'activité ne s'allume pas, les fichiers des pilotes réseau sont peut-être endommagés ou manquants. Retirez et réinstallez les pilotes, le cas échéant. Reportez-vous à la documentation de votre carte réseau. – Le cas échéant, modifiez le paramètre d'autonégociation. – Utilisez un autre connecteur sur le commutateur ou le concentrateur. 4. Assurez-vous que les pilotes appropriés sont installés et que les protocoles sont liés. Reportez-vous à documentation de votre carte réseau. 5. Entrez dans le programme de configuration du système, et confirmez que les ports de la carte réseau sont activés dans l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés). 6. Assurez-vous que les cartes réseau, les concentrateurs et les commutateurs du réseau sont tous configurés sur la même vitesse de transmission de données et en recto-verso. Reportez-vous à la documentation de chaque périphérique réseau. 7. Vérifiez que tous les câbles réseau sont du type approprié et qu'ils ne dépassent pas la longueur maximale. Si toutes les tentatives de dépannage échouent, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 114Dépannage d'un système mouillé PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Désassemblez les composants du système : – Disques durs – Fond de panier des disques durs – clé de mémoire USB – Carénage de refroidissement – Cartes de montage de carte d'extension (le cas échéant) – Cartes d'extension – Bloc)s) d'alimentation – Module de ventilation, le cas échéant – Ventilateurs de refroidissement – Processeur(s) et dissipateur(s) de chaleur – Barrettes de mémoire 4. Laissez sécher le système pendant au moins 24 heures. 5. Réinstallez les composants retirés à l'étape 3. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Mettez sous tension le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Si le système ne démarre pas normalement, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 8. Si le système démarre normalement, arrêtez-le et réinstallez les cartes d'extension que vous avez retirées. 9. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si les tests échouent, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un système endommagé PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Assurez-vous que les composants suivants sont correctement installés : 115– Carénage de refroidissement – Cartes de montage de carte d'extension (le cas échéant) – Cartes d'extension – Bloc)s) d'alimentation – Module de ventilation, le cas échéant – Ventilateurs de refroidissement – Processeur(s) et dissipateur(s) de chaleur – Barrettes de mémoire – Supports de disque dur – Fond de panier des disques durs 4. Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés correctement. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si les tests échouent, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage de la pile du système PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Si le système est hors tension pendant une longue période (des semaines ou des mois), la NVRAM peut perdre ses informations de configuration du système. Cette situation est provoquée par une pile défectueuse. 1. Entrez de nouveau l'heure et la date dans le programme de configuration du système. 2. Mettez le système hors tension et débranchez-le de la prise secteur pendant au moins une heure. 3. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension. 4. Accédez à la configuration du système. Si la date et l'heure sont incorrectes dans la configuration du système, vérifiez si le SEL affiche des messages de pile système. Si le problème n'est pas résolu, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. REMARQUE : Il se peut que certains logiciels fassent accélérer ou ralentir l'heure du système. Si le système semble fonctionner normalement hormis l'heure se trouvant dans la configuration du système, le problème provient peut-être du logiciel plutôt que d'une batterie défectueuse. Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Réinstallez le bloc d'alimentation en procédant d'abord à son retrait, puis à sa réinstallation. 116REMARQUE : Après avoir installé un bloc d'alimentation, patientez quelques secondes pour laisser au système le temps de le reconnaître et de déterminer s'il fonctionne correctement. 2. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. Assurez-vous qu'aucune des conditions suivantes n'existe : • Retrait du capot du système, du carénage de refroidissement, de la plaque de recouvrement EMI, du cache de barrette de mémoire ou de plaque de recouvrement arrière. • La température ambiante est trop élevée. • La circulation de l'air extérieur est bloquée. • Retrait ou panne de l'un des ventilateurs de refroidissement. • Les consignes d'installation de la carte d'extension n'ont pas été respectées. Dépannage des ventilateurs de refroidissement PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Ouvrez le système. 2. Remettez en place le ventilateur ou le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur. 3. Si le ventilateur fonctionne correctement, fermez le système. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage de la mémoire système PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Si le système est opérationnel, lancez les tests de diagnostic adéquats. Reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système pour connaître les tests de diagnostic disponibles. Si les diagnostics indiquent une panne, suivez les instructions fournies par le programme de diagnostic. 2. Si le système n'est pas opérationnel, mettez-le hors tension ainsi que ses périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de sa source d'alimentation. Patientez au moins 10 secondes, puis reconnectez le système à sa source d'alimentation. 3. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés sous tension, puis notez les messages qui s'affichent à l'écran. 117Si un message d'erreur indiquant une panne de module de mémoire s'affiche, passez à l'étape 12. 4. Entrez dans le programme de configuration du système et vérifiez les paramètres de mémoire du système. Modifiez-les si nécessaire. Si un problème persiste, bien que les paramètres de la mémoire correspondent à la mémoire installée, passez à l'étape 12. 5. Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 6. Ouvrez le système. 7. Vérifiez les canaux de mémoire et assurez-vous que l'installation des barrettes est correcte. 8. Remboîtez les barrettes de mémoire dans leurs supports. 9. Refermez le système. 10. Accédez à la configuration du système et vérifiez le paramètre de la mémoire système. Si le problème persiste, passez à l'étape suivante. 11. Ouvrez le système. 12. Si un test de diagnostic ou un message d'erreur indique une panne d'un module de mémoire spécifique, installez un module qui fonctionne à la place du module défectueux. 13. Pour dépanner une barrette de mémoire défectueuse non identifiée, remplacez la barrette du premier logement de barrette DIMM par une autre de même type et de même capacité. Si un message d'erreur s'affiche à l'écran, il peut s'agir d'un problème lié au type des DIMM installées, d'une installation incorrecte des DIMM ou de DIMM défectueuse(s). Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour résoudre le problème. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous aux consignes générales d'installation des modules de mémoire. 14. Refermez le système. 15. Pendant l'amorçage du système, observez les voyants de diagnostic du panneau avant et les messages d'erreur qui s'affichent. 16. Si le problème de mémoire est toujours indiqué, répétez les étapes 12 à 15 pour chaque module de mémoire installé. Si le problème persiste alors que vous avez vérifié toutes les barrettes de mémoire, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'une clé USB interne PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Entrez dans le programme de configuration du système et assurez-vous que le Port de clé USB est activé depuis l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés). 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Identifiez la clé USB et remettez-la en place. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés sous tension, puis vérifiez que la clé USB fonctionne correctement. 7. Si le problème persiste, répétez les étapes 2 et 3. 1188. Insérez une autre clé USB en état de marche. 9. Refermez le système. Si le problème n'est pas résolu, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'une carte SD PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Certaines cartes SD sont équipées d'un commutateur physique de protection contre écriture. Si le commutateur de protection contre écriture est allumé, il est impossible d'écrire sur la carte SD. 1. Accédez à la configuration du système et vérifiez qu'Internal SD Card Port (Port de la carte SD interne) est activé. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. PRÉCAUTION : Si l'option Internal SD Card Redundancy (Redondance de la carte SD interne) est réglée sur le mode Mirror (Miroir) dans l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) de la configuration du système, vous devez suivre les instructions décrites aux étapes 4 à 7 pour éviter toute perte de données. REMARQUE : Lorsqu'une panne de carte SD survient, le contrôleur de module SD interne double la signale au système. Lors du redémarrage suivant, le système affiche un message indiquant la panne. 4. Si l'option Internal SD Card Redundancy (Redondance de la carte SD interne) est réglée sur Disabled (Désactivé), remplacez la carte SD défectueuse par une nouvelle. 5. Si la carte SD 1 a échoué, retirez la carte du logement de carte SD 1. Si la carte SD 2 a échoué, installez une nouvelle carte SD dans le logement de carte SD 2, puis passez à l'étape 7. 6. Retirez la carte se trouvant dans le logement de carte SD 2 et insérez-la dans le logement de carte SD 1. 7. Insérez la nouvelle carte SD dans le logement de carte SD 2. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 10. Accédez à la configuration du système et assurez-vous que les modes Internal SD Card Port (Port de carte SD interne) et Internal SD Card Redundancy (Redondance de la carte SD interne) sont activés. 11. Vérifiez que la carte SD fonctionne correctement. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un lecteur optique PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1191. Utilisez un autre CD ou DVD. 2. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le contrôleur SATA intégré et le port du lecteur SATA sont activés. 3. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. 4. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 5. Ouvrez le système. 6. Retirez le cadre avant. 7. Vérifiez que le câble d'interface est correctement branché sur le lecteur optique et le contrôleur. 8. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien connecté au lecteur. 9. Refermez le système. Si le problème n'est pas résolu, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'une unité de sauvegarde sur bande PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Essayez d'utiliser une autre cartouche de bande. 2. Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique de l'unité de sauvegarde sur bande sont correctement installés et configurés. Consultez la documentation du lecteur de bande pour plus d'informations à propos des pilotes de périphérique. 3. Réinstallez le logiciel de sauvegarde sur bande en suivant la procédure indiquée dans sa documentation. 4. Vérifiez que le câble d'interface du lecteur de bande est correctement branché au port externe de la carte contrôleur. 5. Assurez-vous que la carte contrôleur est correctement installée : a) Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. b) Ouvrez le système. c) Repositionnez la carte contrôleur dans le logement de carte d'extension. d) Refermez le système. e) Mettez sous tension le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 6. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un disque dur PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 120PRÉCAUTION : Cette procédure de dépannage peut détruire les données stockées sur le disque dur. Avant de poursuivre, sauvegardez tous les fichiers présents sur le disque dur. 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Selon les résultats du test de diagnostic, effectuez les étapes appropriées de la procédure ci-dessous. 2. Si le système est doté d'un contrôleur RAID et si les disques durs sont configurés dans une matrice RAID, procédez comme suit : a) Redémarrez le système et appuyez sur la touche durant le redémarrage du système pour exécuter le Lifecycle Controller, exécutez ensuite l'assistant de configuration de matériel pour vérifier la configuration RAID. Reportez-vous à la documentation du Lifecycle Controller ou à l'aide en ligne pour des informations sur la configuration RAID. b) Assurez-vous que les disques durs ont été correctement configurés pour la matrice RAID. c) Mettez le disque dur hors ligne, puis réinsérez-le. d) Quittez l'utilitaire de configuration et laissez le système d'exploitation démarrer. 3. Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique pour votre carte contrôleur sont correctement installés et configurés. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la documentation sur le système d'exploitation. 4. Redémarrez le système et accédez au programme de configuration du système. 5. Vérifiez que le contrôleur est activé et que les lecteurs apparaissent dans le programme de configuration du système. Si le problème persiste, essayez de dépanner les cartes d'expansion ou reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un contrôleur de stockage PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Pour dépanner un contrôleur SAS ou PERC, reportez-vous à sa documentation et à celle du système d'exploitation. 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Vérifiez que les cartes d'extension installées sont conformes aux consignes d'installation correspondantes. 5. Vérifiez que chaque carte d'extension est correctement insérée dans son connecteur. 6. Refermez le système. 7. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 8. Si le problème n'est pas résolu, éteignez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 9. Ouvrez le système. 10. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du système. 11. Refermez le système. 12112. Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 13. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si le test échoue, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 14. Pour chaque carte d'extension retirée à l'étape 10, effectuez les opérations suivantes : a. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. b. Ouvrez le système. c. Réinstallez une des cartes d'extension. d. Refermez le système. e. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si les tests échouent, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des cartes d'extension PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : Pour dépanner une carte d'extension, consultez sa documentation et celle du système d'exploitation. 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Vérifiez que chaque carte d'extension est correctement insérée dans son connecteur. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Si le problème n'est pas résolu, éteignez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 7. Ouvrez le système. 8. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du système. 9. Refermez le système. 10. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si les tests échouent, reportez-vous à la section « Obtention d'aide ». 11. Pour chaque carte d'extension retirée à l'étape 8, effectuez les opérations suivantes : a) Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. b) Ouvrez le système. c) Réinstallez une des cartes d'extension. d) Refermez le système. e) Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si un problème est toujours signalé, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 122Dépannage des processeurs PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1. Effectuez le test de diagnostic approprié. Reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système pour voir les tests de diagnostic disponibles. 2. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. 4. Vérifiez que le processeur et le dissipateur de chaleur sont correctement installés. 5. Refermez le système. 6. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Utilisation des diagnostics système. Si un problème est toujours signalé, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide . 1231245 Utilisation des diagnostics du système Si vous rencontrez un problème avec le système, exécutez les diagnostics du système avant de contacter l'assistance technique de Dell. L'exécution des diagnostics du système permet de tester le matériel du système sans équipement supplémentaire ou risque de perte de données. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre vous-même le problème, le personnel de maintenance ou d'assistance peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous aider à résoudre le problème. Dell Online Diagnostics Dell Online Diagnostics est une suite autonome de programmes de diagnostic ou de modules de tests qui vous permet d'exécuter des tests de diagnostic sur des systèmes Dell dans un environnement de production tout en optimisant le temps de disponibilité de vos systèmes. Online Diagnostics vous permet d'exécuter des tests de diagnostic sur les châssis et les composants de stockage tels que les disques durs, la mémoire physique et les cartes d'interface réseau. Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface utilisateur graphique (IUG) ou l'interface de ligne de commande (CLI) pour exécuter des tests de diagnostic sur le matériel découvert par Online Diagnostics sur votre système. Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des diagnostics, reportez-vous au Dell Online PowerEdge Diagnostics User’s Guide (Guide d'utilisation de Dell PowerEdge Diagnostics) sous Software→ Serviceability Tools (Outils de services logiciels) à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Diagnostics du système intégré Dell REMARQUE : Également connu sous le nom de diagnostics ePSA (Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment). Les diagnostics du système intégré offrent un ensemble d'options pour des périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques particuliers, vous permettant : • d'exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif • de répéter des tests • d'afficher ou d'enregistrer les résultats des tests • d'exécutez des tests complets pour introduire des options de test supplémentaires afin d'offrir des informations supplémentaires sur le ou les périphériques déféctueux • d'afficher des messages d'état vous indiquant si les tests ont réussi • d'afficher les messages d'erreur indiquant les problèmes rencontrés au cours des tests Quand utiliser les diagnostics intégrés du système Si un composant ou un périphérique important dans le système ne fonctionne pas correctement, l'exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système peut indiquer un dysfonctionnement du composant. Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système Le programme de diagnostics intégrés du système s'exécute à partir de l'écran Dell Lifecycle Controller. 125PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics intégrés du système pour tester uniquement votre système. L'utilisation de ce programme avec d'autres systèmes peut entraîner des résultats invalides ou des messages d'erreur. 1. Au démarrage du système, appuyez sur . 2. Utilisez les touches fléchées vers le haut et vers le bas pour sélectionner System Utilities (Utilitaires système) → Launch Dell Diagnostics (Lancer les diagnostics Dell). La fenêtre ePSA Pre-boot System Assessment (Évaluation du système au pré-amorçage ePSA) s'affiche, répertoriant tous les périphériques détectés dans le système. Le diagnostic démarre l'exécution des tests sur tous les périphériques détectés. Commandes du diagnostic du système Menu Description Configuration Affiche la configuration et les informations relatives à la condition de tous les périphériques détectés. Résultats Affiche les résultats de tous les tests exécutés. Intégrité du système Propose un aperçu de la performance du système actuel. Journal d'événements Affiche un journal daté des résultats de tous les tests exécutés sur le système. Il est affiché si au moins une description d'un évènement est enregistrée. Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les diagnostics intégrés du système, reportez-vous au Dell Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment User Guide (Guide de l'utilisateur de l'évaluation améliorée du système de pré-amorçage Dell) à l'adresse dell.com/support/manuals. 1266 Cavaliers et connecteurs Paramètres des cavaliers de la carte système Pour obtenir des informations sur la réinitialisation du cavalier du mot de passe afin de désactiver un mot de passe, reportez-vous à la section Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié. Tableau 4. Paramètres des cavaliers de la carte système Cavalier Réglage Description PWRD_EN (par défaut) La fonction de mot de passe est activée (broches 2–4). La fonction de mot de passe est désactivée (broches 4-6). L'accès local à la carte iDRAC sera déverrouillé lors du prochain cycle de mise sous tension CA. NVRAM_CLR (par défaut) Les paramètres de configuration sont conservés au démarrage du système (broches 3-5). Les paramètres de configuration sont effacés au prochain démarrage du système (broches 1-3). 127Connecteurs de la carte système Figure 60. Connecteurs et cavaliers de la carte système Élément Connecteur Description 1 INT_STORAGE Connecteur de la carte du contrôleur de stockage intégré 2 ID_BTN Bouton d'identification du système 3 CMA_JACK Connecteur d'identification du système 4 USB 2 Connecteur USB 5 USB 1 Connecteur USB 6 IO_RISER2 Connecteur de la carte de montage 2 7 NIC 2 Connecteur Ethernet 8 NIC 1 Connecteur Ethernet 9 VGA Connecteur vidéo 10 COM Connecteur série 11 IO_RISER1 Connecteur de la carte de montage 1 12 FAN5 Connecteur du ventilateur de refroidissement 13 FAN4 Connecteur du ventilateur de refroidissement 128Élément Connecteur Description 14 FAN3 Connecteur du ventilateur de refroidissement 15 PWR_CONN_1 Connecteur d'alimentation 16 FAN2 Connecteur du ventilateur de refroidissement 17 A1, A4, A2, A5, A3, A6 Supports de barrette de mémoire 18 BP_SIG Connecteur de signal du fond de panier 19 PWR_CONN_2 Connecteur d'alimentation 20 CPU1 Support du processeur 21 PDB_CONN Connecteur de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation 22 BATTERY Connecteur de la batterie 23 CTRL_PNL_MB Connecteur d'interface du panneau de commande 24 SATA_A-D Connecteur SAS 25 SATA_E Connecteur SATA du lecteur optique 26 SAS_A Connecteur SAS 27 (FP_USB) Connecteur USB du panneau avant 28 IDSDM Double module SD interne 29 SAS_B Connecteur SAS Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié Les fonctionnalités logicielles de protection du système comprennent un mot de passe du système et un mot de passe de configuration. Le cavalier de mot de passe permet d'activer ou de désactiver ces mots de passe et d'effacer le(s) mot(s) de passe utilisé(s). PRÉCAUTION : Reportez-vous à la section «Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques» des consignes de sécurité livrées avec votre système. 1. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. 3. Retirez la fiche du cavalier de mot de passe. 4. Refermez le système. Les mots de passe existants ne sont pas désactivés (effacés) tant que le système démarre avec les mots de passe supprimés. Toutefois, avant d'attribuer un nouveau mot de passe du système et/ou de configuration, vous devez installer la fiche du cavalier. REMARQUE : Si vous attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration alors que la fiche du cavalier est retirée, le système désactive les nouveaux mots de passe lors du prochain démarrage. 5. Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 6. Ouvrez le système. 1297. Installez la fiche de cavalier sur le cavalier du mot de passe. 8. Refermez le système. 9. Attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. 1307 Caractéristiques techniques Processeur Type de processeur Famille de produits du processeur Intel Xeon E5-2400 Processeur Intel Xeon E5-1410 Famille de produits du processeur Intel Pentium 1400 Bus d’extension Type de bus Carte PCI Express 2ème et 3ème génération Logements d'extension dotés de cartes de montage : Carte de montage 1 (Logement 1) Une liaison x 4 demi-hauteur, demilongueur Carte de montage 2 (Logement 2) Une liaison x16 pleine hauteur, demilongueur Mémoire Architecture Barrettes DIMM ECC à registres, sans tampon, de 800 MT/s, 1 066 MT/s, 1 333 MT/s ou 1 600 MT/s Supports de barrette de mémoire Six de 240 broches Capacités de la barrette de mémoire Barrette RDIMM 2 Go (simple rangée), 4 Go (simple et double rangée), 8 Go (double rangée) et 16 Go (double rangée) UDIMM 2 Go (simple rangée) et 4 Go (double rangée) RAM minimale 2 Go RAM maximale 96 Go Disques Disques durs Systèmes à quatre disques durs Jusqu'à quatre disques durs connectés par câble de 3,5 pouces ou Jusqu'à quatre disques durs SAS, SATA ou Nearline SAS de 3,5 pouces, remplaçables à chaud ou Jusqu'à quatre disques durs SAS, SATA, SAS SSD, SATA SSD ou Nearline SAS de 2,5 pouces, remplaçables à chaud 131Disques REMARQUE : Les systèmes à quatre disques durs prennent en charge le logiciel RAID. Pour en savoir plus sur le logiciel RAID, reportez-vous à la documentation du PERC (Contrôleur RAID Dell PowerEdge) à l'adresse suivante : support.dell.com/ manuals. Systèmes à huit disques durs Jusqu'à huit disques durs SAS, SATA, SAS SSD, SATA SSD ou Nearline SAS de 2,5 pouces, remplaçables à chaud Lecteur optique Systèmes à quatre disques durs Un lecteur de DV-DROM ou DVD+/-RW SATA en option REMARQUE : Les périphériques DVD sont uniquement des périphériques de données. Systèmes à huit disques durs Un lecteur de DV-DROM ou DVD+/-RW SATA ultra-mince en option REMARQUE : Les périphériques DVD sont uniquement des périphériques de données. Connecteurs Arrière Carte réseau Deux 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Série Connecteur DTE à 9 broches, compatible 16550 USB Deux connecteurs à 4 broches, compatibles USB 2.0 Vidéo Connecteur VGA à 15 broches iDRAC7 Une carte Ethernet 1 GbE en option Carte vFlash externe Une carte mémoire vFlash en option REMARQUE : Le logement de la carte est disponible uniquement si la licence iDRAC7 Enterprise est installée sur votre système. Avant USB Deux connecteurs à 4 broches, compatibles USB 2.0 Vidéo Connecteur VGA à 15 broches Interne USB Un connecteur à 4 broches, compatible USB 2.0 Module SD interne double (en option) Deux logements pour carte mémoire flash, en option, avec le module interne SD 132Connecteurs REMARQUE : Un logement de carte est réservé à la redondance. Vidéo Type de vidéo Matrox G200 intégré Mémoire vidéo 16 Mo partagés Fonctionnement dans la plage de température étendue REMARQUE : Lorsque le système fonctionne dans la plage de température étendue, ses performances peuvent s'en voir affectées. REMARQUE : En cas de fonctionnement dans la plage de température étendue, des avertissements de température ambiante peuvent être reportés sur l'écran LCD et dans le journal des événements système. <10 % des heures de fonctionnement annuelles De 5 °C à 40 °C entre 5 et 85 % d'humidité relative, avec un point de condensation de 26 °C. REMARQUE : Si le système se trouve hors de la plage de températures de fonctionnement standard (10 °C à 35 °C), il peut réduire sa température de fonctionnement à 5 °C ou l'augmenter jusqu'à 40 °C pendant un maximum de 10 % de ses heures de fonctionnement annuelles. Pour les températures comprises entre 35 °C et 40 °C, la réduction maximale autorisée de la température sèche est de 1 °C tous les 175 m au-dessus de 950 m (1 °F tous les 319 pieds). <1 % des heures de fonctionnement annuelles De -5 à 45 °C entre 5 et 90 % d'humidité relative, avec un point de condensation de 26 °C. REMARQUE : Si le système se trouve hors de la plage de températures de fonctionnement standard (10 à 35 °C), il peut réduire sa température de fonctionnement à -5 °C ou l'augmenter jusqu'à 45 °C pendant un maximum de 1 % de ses heures de fonctionnement annuelles. Pour les températures comprises entre 40 et 45 °C, la réduction maximale autorisée de la température sèche est de 1 °C par 125 m au-dessus de 950 m (1 °F tous les 228 pieds). Restrictions de la température étendue de fonctionnement • N'effectuez pas de démarrage à froid en dessous de 5 °C. • Autorisez la dégradation des performances du processeur. • Les blocs d'alimentation non redondants ne sont pas pris en charge. 133Fonctionnement dans la plage de température étendue • Les cartes de périphériques non qualifiées par Dell et/ou les cartes de périphériques ne sont pas prises en charge. Conditions environnementales REMARQUE : Pour en savoir plus sur les mesures d'exploitation liées à différentes configurations particulières, rendez-vous sur dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Température Gradient de température maximal (pour l'exploitation et le stockage) 20 °C/h (36 °F/h) Limites des températures de stockage De –40° C à 65° C (de –40° F à 149° F) Température (Exploitation continue) Plages de température (pour une altitude de moins de 950 mètres ou 3117 pieds) De 10 °C à 35 °C (de 50 °F à 95 °F) sans lumière directe du soleil sur l'équipement. Plage de pourcentages d'humidité 10% à 80% d'humidité relative et point de condensation maximal de 26 °C (78.8 °F). Humidité relative Stockage 5% à 95% de RH et point de condensation maximal de 33 °C (91 °F). L'atmosphère doit être en permanence sans condensation. Tolérance maximale aux vibrations En fonctionnement 0,26 Grms de 5 à 350 Hz (toutes orientations de fonctionnement). Stockage 1,87 Grms de 10 à 500 Hz pendant 15 min (les six côtés testés). Choc maximal En fonctionnement Un choc de 31 G pendant 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) pour un système installé dans la position de fonctionnement Stockage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Altitude maximale En fonctionnement 3048 mètres (10 000 pieds). Stockage 12 000 m ( 39 370 pieds). Déclassement de l'altitude d'exploitation Jusqu'à 35 °C (95 °F) La température maximale est réduite de 1 °C/300 m (1 °F/547 pieds) au-delà de 950 m (3 117 pieds). 134Conditions environnementales De 35 °C à 40 °C (de 95 °F à 104 °F) La température maximale est réduite de 1 °C/175 m (1 °F/319 pieds) au-delà de 950 m (3 117 pieds). De 40 °C à 45 °C (de 104 °F à 113 °F) La température maximale est réduite de 1 °C/125 m (1 °F/228 pieds) au-delà de 950 m (3 117 pieds). Contamination particulaire REMARQUE : Cette section définit les limites de prévention des dommages causés aux équipements IT et/ou des malfonctions issus de contaminations particulaires ou gazeuses. S'il est établi que les niveaux de pollution particulaire ou gazeuse dépassent les limites spécifiées ci-dessous et qu'ils sont la cause des dommages et/ou pannes de votre équipement, il vous faudra peut-être modifier les conditions environnementales qui causent ces dommages et/ou malfonctions. La modification de ces conditions environnementales reste la responsabilité du client. Filtration d'air REMARQUE : S'applique uniquement aux environnements de data center. Les exigences de filtration d'air ne s'appliquent pas aux équipements IT conçus pour être utilisés endehors d'un data center, dans des environnements tels qu'un bureau ou en usine. La filtration d'air de data center telle que définie par ISO Classe 8 d'après ISO 14644-1 avec une limite de confiance maximale de 95%. REMARQUE : L'air qui entre dans le data center doit avoir une filtration MERV11 ou MERV13. Poussières conductrices REMARQUE : S'applique aux environnements avec et sans data center. L'air doit être dépourvu de poussières conductrices, barbes de zinc, ou autres particules conductrices. Poussières corrosives REMARQUE : S'applique aux environnements avec et sans data center. • L'air doit être dépourvu de poussières corrosives. • Les poussières résiduelles présentes dans l'air doivent avoir un point déliquescent inférieur à une humidité relative de 60%. Contamination gazeuse REMARQUE : Niveaux de contaminants corrosifs maximaux mesurés à ≤50% d'humidité relative. Vitesse de corrosion d'éprouvette de cuivre <300 Å/mois d'après la Classe G1 telle que définie par ANSI/ISA71.04-1985. Vitesse de corrosion d'éprouvette d'argent <200 Å/mois telle que définie par AHSRAE TC9.9. 1351368 Messages système Messages LCD REMARQUE : Seulement applicable si votre système a un affichage d'écran LCD. Les messages affichés sur l'écran LCD sont des messages textes brefs qui renvoient à des événements enregistrés dans le journal des événements système (SEL). Pour plus d'informations sur le SEL et sur les paramètres de configuration de la gestion du système, reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel de gestion des systèmes. REMARQUE : Si votre système ne démarre pas, maintenez le bouton de l'ID système enfoncé pendant au moins 5 secondes jusqu'à ce que le code d'erreur s'affiche sur l'écran LCD. Prenez le code en note, puis consultez la section Messages d'erreur du système. Affichage des messages sur l'écran LCD Si une erreur du système survient, l'écran LCD devient orange. Appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner pour afficher une liste des messages d'erreur ou de conditions. Utilisez les boutons de gauche et de droite pour surligner un numéro d'erreur, puis appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner pour afficher l'erreur. Suppression des messages affichés sur l'écran LCD Pour les pannes associées aux capteurs, telles que la température, la tension, les ventilateurs, etc. le message affiché sur l'écran LCD est automatiquement supprimé lorsque le capteur retourne à un état normal. Pour les autres types de pannes, vous devez supprimer le message affiché sur l'écran : • Clear the SEL (Effacer le journal d'événements système) : vous pouvez effectuer cette tâche à distance, mais vous perdrez alors la totalité de l'historique des événements système. • Power cycle (Cycle d'alimentation) : mettez le système hors tension et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. Attendez environ 10 secondes, puis rebranchez le câble d'alimentation et redémarrez le système. Messages d'erreur du système Le système affiche des messages d'erreur pour informer l'utilisateur qu'un incident s'est produit. Les messages qui s'affichent sur cet écran se rapportent aux événements consignés dans le journal d'événements du système (SEL).Pour plus d'informations sur ce journal et sur la configuration des paramètres de gestion du système, consultez la documentation du logiciel de gestion des systèmes. Certains messages sont également affichés sous une forme abrégée sur l'écran LCD du système, si le système comprend cette fonctionnalité. REMARQUE : Les messages d'erreur LCD suivants s'affichent sous format simple. Reportez-vous à la section Menu de configuration pour sélectionner le format dans lequel les messages sont affichés. 137REMARQUE : Si vous recevez du système un message qui n'est pas répertorié dans la liste ci-dessous, vérifiez la documentation de l'application que vous utilisiez au moment où le message est apparu. Vous pouvez aussi vous reporter à la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir une explication du message et l'action conseillée. REMARQUE : Dans certains messages, un composant système particulier est identifié par nom (« »), numéro de composant (« ») or emplacement (« baie »). Code d'erreur Informations des messages AMP0302 Message The system board current is greater than the upper warning threshold. (Le courant de la carte système est supérieur au seuil d'avertissement maximal.) Détails Le courant de la carte système ne se trouve pas dans les limites optimales. Action 1. Vérifiez la règle d'alimentation du système. 2. Vérifiez les pannes liées à l'alimentation dans les journaux du système. 3. Vérifiez les modifications de configuration du système. 4. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. AMP0303 Message The system board current is greater than the upper critical threshold. (Le courant de la carte système est supérieur au seuil critique maximal.) Message sur l'écran LCD System board current is outside of range. (Le courant de la carte système ne se trouve pas dans les limites.) Détails Le courant de la carte système ne se trouve pas dans les limites optimales. Action 1. Vérifiez la règle d'alimentation du système. 2. Vérifiez les pannes liées à l'alimentation dans les journaux du système. 3. Vérifiez les modifications de configuration du système. 4. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. ASR0000 Message The watchdog timer expired. (Le registre d'horloge de la surveillance a expiré.) Détails Le système d'exploitation ou une application n'a pas réussi à communiquer au cours du délai imparti. 138Code d'erreur Informations des messages Action Vérifiez le journal des événements du système d'exploitation, de l'application, du matériel et du système pour trouver des événements de l'exception. ASR0001 Message The watchdog timer reset the system. (Le registre d'horloge de la surveillance a réinitialisé le système.) Détails Le système d'exploitation ou une application n'a pas réussi à communiquer au cours du délai imparti. Le système a été réinitialisé. Action Vérifiez le journal des événements du système d'exploitation, de l'application, du matériel et du système pour trouver des événements de l'exception. ASR0002 Message The watchdog timer powered off the system. (Le registre d'horloge de la surveillance a mis le système hors tension.) Détails Le système d'exploitation ou une application n'a pas réussi à communiquer au cours du délai imparti. Le système a été mis hors tension. Action Vérifiez le journal des événements du système d'exploitation, de l'application, du matériel et du système pour trouver des événements de l'exception. ASR0003 Message The watchdog timer power cycled the system. (Le registre d'horloge de la surveillance a coupé puis rétabli l'alimentation du système.) Détails Le système d'exploitation ou une application n'a pas réussi à communiquer au cours du délai imparti. L'alimentation du système a été coupée puis rétablie. Action Vérifiez le journal des événements du système d'exploitation, de l'application, du matériel et du système pour trouver des événements de l'exception. BAT0002 Message The system board battery has failed. (Défaillance de la pile de la carte système.) Message sur l'écran LCD The system board battery has failed. Check battery. (La pile de la carte système est défectueuse. Vérifiez la pile.) Détails La pile de la carte système est manquante ou défectueuse. Action Reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. BAT0017 Message The battery has failed. (Défaillance de la batterie .) 139Code d'erreur Informations des messages Message sur l'écran LCD The battery has failed. Check battery. (La batterie est défaillante. Vérifiez la batterie.) Détails La batterie est soit manquante, défectueuse ou incapable de charger suite à des problèmes thermiques. Action Vérifiez les ventilateurs du système. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0000 Message CPU has an internal error (IERR). (L'UC est confrontée à une erreur interne (IERR).) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU has an internal error (IERR). (L'UC est confrontée à une erreur interne (IERR).) Détails Le journal des événements système et les journaux du système d'exploitation peuvent indiquer que l'exception est externe au processeur. Action Examinez le journal des événements système et les journaux du système d'exploitation. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0001 Message CPU has a thermal trip (over-temperature) event. (Événement de déclenchement thermique de l'UC (surchauffe).) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU has a thermal trip. Check CPU heat sink. (Déclenchement thermique de l'UC . Vérifiez le dissipateur de chaleur de l'UC.) Détails La température du processeur a augmenté au delà des limites opérationnelles. Action Cherchez une panne de ventilateur dans les journaux. Si aucune panne de ventilateur n'est détectée, vérifiez la température d'entrée (si elle est disponible) et réinstallez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0005 Message CPU configuration is unsupported. (Configuration de l'UC non prise en charge.) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU configuration is unsupported. Check CPU or BIOS revision. (Configuration de l'UC non prise en charge. Vérifiez l'UC ou la révision du BIOS.) Détails Le système est incapable de démarrer ou risque de fonctionner dans un état dégradé. 140Code d'erreur Informations des messages Action Examinez les caractéristiques techniques des types de processeurs pris en charge. CPU0010 Message CPU is throttled. (Les performances de l'UC sont réduites.) Détails Les performances de l'UC sont réduites suite à des conditions thermiques ou d'alimentation. Action Examinez les journaux système pour détecter des exceptions d'alimentation ou thermiques. CPU0023 Message CPU is absent. (L'UC est absente.) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU is absent. Check CPU. (L'UC est absente.Vérifiez l'UC.) Action Vérifiez l'installation du processeur. Réinsérez le processeur, si ce dernier est présent. CPU0204 Message CPU voltage is outside of range. (La tension de l'UC ne se trouve pas dans les limites.) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU voltage is outside of range. Re-seat CPU. (La tension de l'UC ne se trouve pas dans les limites.) Détails Les tensions ne se trouvant pas dans les limites autorisées peuvent endommager les composants électroniques ou provoquer la mise hors tension du système. Action 1. Mettez le système hors tension puis supprimez l'alimentation d'entrée pendant une minute. 2. Vérifiez que le processeur est correctement inséré. 3. Réappliquez la puissance d'entrée et allumez le système. 4. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0700 Message CPU initialization error detected. (Détection d'une erreur d'initialisation de l'UC .) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU initialization error detected. Power cycle system. (Détection d'une erreur d'initialisation de l'UC . Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails Le BIOS du système n'a pas réussi à initialiser le processeur. Action 1. Mettez le système hors tension puis supprimez l'alimentation d'entrée pendant une minute. 141Code d'erreur Informations des messages 2. Vérifiez que le processeur est correctement inséré. 3. Réappliquez la puissance d'entrée et allumez le système. 4. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0701 Message CPU protocol error detected. (Détection d'une erreur de protocole de l'UC .) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU protocol error detected. Power cycle system. (Détection d'une erreur de protocole de l'UC . Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails Le journal des événements système et les journaux du système d'exploitation peuvent indiquer que l'exception est externe au processeur. Action 1. Contrôlez les journaux du système et du système d'exploitation pour détecter des exceptions. Si aucune exception n'est détectée, continuez. 2. Mettez le système hors tension puis supprimez l'alimentation d'entrée pendant une minute. 3. Vérifiez que le processeur est correctement inséré. 4. Réappliquez la puissance d'entrée et allumez le système. 5. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0702 Message CPU bus parity error detected. (Détection d'une erreur de parité du bus de l'UC.) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU bus parity error detected. Power cycle system. (Détection d'une erreur de parité du bus de l'UC. Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails Le journal des événements système et les journaux du système d'exploitation peuvent indiquer que l'exception est externe au processeur. Action 1. Contrôlez les journaux du système et du système d'exploitation pour détecter des exceptions. Si aucune exception n'est détectée, continuez. 2. Mettez le système hors tension puis supprimez l'alimentation d'entrée pendant une minute. 3. Vérifiez que le processeur est correctement inséré. 4. Réappliquez la puissance d'entrée et allumez le système. 5. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 142Code d'erreur Informations des messages CPU0703 Message CPU bus initialization error detected. (Détection d'une erreur d'initialisation du bus de l'UC.) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU bus initialization error detected. Power cycle system. (Détection d'une erreur d'initialisation du bus de l'UC. Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails Le journal des événements système et les journaux du système d'exploitation peuvent indiquer que l'exception est externe au processeur. Action 1. Contrôlez les journaux du système et du système d'exploitation pour détecter des exceptions. Si aucune exception n'est détectée, continuez. 2. Mettez le système hors tension puis supprimez l'alimentation d'entrée pendant une minute. 3. Vérifiez que le processeur est correctement inséré. 4. Réappliquez la puissance d'entrée et allumez le système. 5. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. CPU0704 Message CPU machine check error detected. (Détection d'une erreur de vérification de l'ordinateur de l'UC .) Message sur l'écran LCD CPU machine check error detected. Power cycle system. (Détection d'une erreur de vérification de l'ordinateur de l'UC . Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails Le journal des événements système et les journaux du système d'exploitation peuvent indiquer que l'exception est externe au processeur. Action 1. Contrôlez les journaux du système et du système d'exploitation pour détecter des exceptions. Si aucune exception n'est détectée, continuez. 2. Mettez le système hors tension puis supprimez l'alimentation d'entrée pendant une minute. 3. Vérifiez que le processeur est correctement inséré. 4. Réappliquez la puissance d'entrée et allumez le système. 5. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. VENTILATEUR0000 Message CPU temperature is less than the lower warning threshold. (La température de l'UC est inférieure au seuil d'avertissement minimal.) Détails La vitesse du ventilateur en fonction est hors d'atteinte. 143Code d'erreur Informations des messages Action Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. VENTILATEUR0001 Message CPU temperature is less than the lower warning threshold. (La température de l'UC est inférieure au seuil d'avertissement minimal.) Message sur l'écran LCD Les rotations par minute du ventilateur sont hors d'atteinte. Vérifiez le ventilateur. Détails La vitesse du ventilateur en fonction est hors d'atteinte. Action Retirez puis installez de nouveau le ventilateur. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. VENTILATEUR1201 Message La redondance du ventilateur est perdue. Message sur l'écran LCD La redondance du ventilateur est perdue. Vérifiez les ventilateurs. Détails Le ventilateur est tombé en panne. Action Enlevez et réinstallez les ventilateurs qui sont en panne ou installez des ventilateurs supplémentaires. HWC1001 Message The is absent. ( est manquant.) Message sur l'écran LCD The is absent. Check hardware. ( est manquant. Vérifiez le matériel.) Détails Le périphérique manquant peut être nécessaire pour un fonctionnement correct. Les fonctionnalités du système peuvent être dégradées. Action Réinstallez ou rebranchez le matériel. HWC2003 Message Le câble de stockage nom n'est pas branché, ou n'est pas branché correctement. Message sur l'écran LCD Câble de stockage ou panne d'interconnexion. Vérifiez la connexion. Détails Le câble peut être nécessaire pour un fonctionnement correct. Les fonctionnalités du système peuvent être dégradées. Action Vérifiez si le câble est présent, ensuite réinstallez-le ou reconnectezle. HWC2005 Message Le câble de la carte système n'est pas connecté ou n'est pas correctement connecté. 144Code d'erreur Informations des messages Message sur l'écran LCD La connexion du câble de la carte système est en panne. Vérifiez la connexion. Détails Le câble peut être nécessaire pour un fonctionnement correct. Les fonctionnalités du système peuvent être dégradées. Action Vérifiez si le câble est présent, ensuite réinstallez-le ou reconnectezle. MEM0000 Message Persistent correctable memory errors detected on a memory device at location(s) . (Détection d'erreurs de la mémoire permanente corrigibles sur un périphérique mémoire de l'emplacement .) Détails Il s'agit d'un premier indicateur d'une éventuelle erreur non corrigible future. Action Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. MEM0001 Message Multi-bit memory errors detected on a memory device at location(s) . (Détection d'erreurs de mémoire multi-bits sur un périphérique mémoire de l'emplacement .) Message sur l'écran LCD Multi-bit memory error on . Re-seat memory. (Erreur de mémoire multi-bits sur .) Détails La barrette de mémoire a été victime d'une erreur non corrigible. Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées. Par conséquent, le système d'exploitation et/ou les applications peuvent tomber en panne. Action Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. MEM0007 Message Unsupported memory configuration; check memory device at location . (Configuration de mémoire non prise en charge, vérifiez le périphérique mémoire à l'emplacement .) Message sur l'écran LCD Unsupported memory configuration. Check memory . (Configuration de mémoire non prise en charge. Vérifiez la mémoire de .) Détails La mémoire n'est peut-être pas insérée ou configurée correctement ou est défectueuse. La taille de la mémoire est réduite. Action Vérifiez la configuration de la mémoire. Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 145Code d'erreur Informations des messages MEM0701 Message Correctable memory error rate exceeded for . (Seuil d'erreurs de mémoire corrigibles dépassé pour .) Détails La mémoire peut ne pas être opérationnelle. Il s'agit d'un premier indicateur d'une éventuelle erreur non corrigible future. Action Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide . MEM0702 Message Correctable memory error rate exceeded for . (Seuil d'erreurs de mémoire corrigibles dépassé pour .) Message sur l'écran LCD Correctable memory error rate exceeded for . Re-seat memory. (Seuil d'erreurs de mémoire corrigibles dépassé pour . Réinsérez la mémoire.) Détails La mémoire peut ne pas être opérationnelle. Il s'agit d'un premier indicateur d'une éventuelle erreur non corrigible future. Action Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. MEM1205 Message Memory mirror redundancy is lost. Check memory device at location(s) . (La redondance de la mise en miroir de la mémoire est perdue. Vérifiez les périphériques mémoire sur .) Message sur l'écran LCD Memory mirror lost on . Power cycle system. (La mise en miroir de la mémoire est perdue sur . Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails La mémoire peut être mal insérée, mal configurée ou défectueuse. Action Vérifiez la configuration de la mémoire. Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. MEM1208 Message Memory spare redundancy is lost. Check memory device at location . (La redondance de la mémoire de secours est perdue. Vérifiez les périphériques mémoire sur .) Message sur l'écran LCD Memory spare lost on . Power cycle system. (La mémoire de secours est perdue sur . Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système.) Détails La mémoire de secours n'est plus disponible. Action Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. 146Code d'erreur Informations des messages MEM8000 Message Correctable memory error logging disabled for a memory device at location . (Désactivation de la journalisation des erreurs de la mémoire permanente corrigeable pour un périphérique mémoire de l'emplacement .) Message sur l'écran LCD SBE log disabled on . Re-seat memory. (Désactivation du journal des erreurs portant sur un seul bit sur . Réinsérez la mémoire.) Détails Les erreurs sont corrigées mais ne sont plus reportées dans le journal. Action Examinez les journaux du système pour détecter les exceptions de mémoire. Réinstallez la mémoire sur l'emplacement . PCI1302 Message A bus time-out was detected on a component at bus devicefunction . (Détection d'une expiration du délai du bus sur un composant du bus du périphérique de la fonction .) Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées. Le périphérique ne répond pas à une transaction. Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PCI1304 Message An I/O channel check error was detected. (Détection d'une erreur de vérification du canal d'E/S.) Message sur l'écran LCD I/O channel check error detected. Power cycle system. (Détection d'une erreur de vérification du canal d'E/S. Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation système.) Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PCI1308 Message A PCI parity error was detected on a component at bus devicefunction . (Détection d'une erreur de parité PCI sur un composant du bus du périphérique de la fonction .) Message sur l'écran LCD PCI parity error on bus device function . Power cycle system. (Erreur de parité PCI sur le bus le périphérique la fonction .) Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées, le périphérique PCI ou le système peut ne pas fonctionner. 147Code d'erreur Informations des messages Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PCI1320 Message A bus fatal error was detected on a component at bus devicefunction . (Détection d'une erreur fatale de bus sur un composant du bus du périphérique de la fonction .) Message sur l'écran LCD Bus fatal error on bus device function . Power cycle system. (Erreur fatale de bus sur le bus le périphérique la fonction .) Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées ou le système peut ne pas fonctionner. Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PCI1342 Message A bus time-out was detected on a component at slot . (Détection d'une expiration de délai de bus sur un composant du logement .) Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées ou le système peut ne pas fonctionner. Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PCI1348 Message A PCI parity error was detected on a component at slot . (Détection d'une erreur de parité PCI sur un composant du logement .) Message sur l'écran LCD PCI parity error on slot . Re-seat PCI card. (Erreur de parité PCI du logement . Réinsérez le PCI.) Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées ou le système peut ne pas fonctionner. Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PCI1360 Message A bus fatal error was detected on a component at slot . (Détection d'une erreur fatale de bus sur un composant du logement .) 148Code d'erreur Informations des messages Message sur l'écran LCD Bus fatal error on slot . Re-seat PCI card. (Erreur fatale de bus du logement . Réinsérez la carte PCI.) Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées ou le système peut ne pas fonctionner. Action Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation, mettez à jour les pilotes du composant. Si le périphérique est amovible, réinstallez le périphérique. PDR0001 Message Fault detected on drive . (Panne détectée dans le lecteur .) Message sur l'écran LCD Fault detected on drive . Check drive. (Panne détectée dans le lecteur . Vérifiez le lecteur.) Détails Le contrôleur a détecté une panne du disque et a mis le disque hors ligne. Action Retirez puis réinsérez le disque en panne. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PDR1016 Message Drive is removed from disk drive bay . (Retrait du lecteur de la baie de lecteur de disque dur .) Message sur l'écran LCD Drive removed from disk drive bay . Check drive. (Retrait du lecteur de la baie de lecteur de disque dur . Vérifiez le lecteur.) Détails Le contrôleur a détecté que le lecteur avait été retiré. Action Vérifiez l'installation du lecteur. Réinsérez le lecteur défectueux. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à Obtention d'aide. PST0128 Message No memory is detected. (Pas de mémoire détectée.) Message sur l'écran LCD No memory is detected. Inspect memory devices. (Pas de mémoire détectée. Contrôlez les périphériques mémoire.) Détails Le BIOS du système n'a pas été capable de détecter la mémoire dans le système. Action Réinsérez les barrettes de mémoire. Si le problème persiste, reportezvous à la section Obtention d'aide. PST0129 Message Memory is detected, but is not configurable. (Mémoire détectée, mais non configurable.) Message sur l'écran LCD Memory is detected, but is not configurable. Check memory devices. (Mémoire détectée, mais non configurable. Vérifiez les périphériques mémoire.) 149Code d'erreur Informations des messages Détails Le BIOS du système a détecté la mémoire mais a été incapable de configurer la mémoire pour le fonctionnement du système. Action Comparez l'installation de la mémoire du système avec les configurations de mémoire du système prises en charge. PSU0001 Message Power supply failed. (Panne du bloc d'alimentation .) Message sur l'écran LCD PSU failed. Check PSU. (Panne du bloc d'alimentation . Vérifiez le bloc d'alimentation.) Action Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU0002 Message A predictive failure detected on power supply . (Détection d'une panne prévisible sur le bloc d'alimentation .) Message sur l'écran LCD Predictive failure on PSU . Check PSU. (Panne prévisible sur le bloc d'alimentation . Vérifiez le bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Les performances du système et la redondance de l'alimentation peuvent être dégradées ou perdues. Action Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation lors du prochain entretien. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU0003 Message The power input for power supply is lost. (Perte de l'entrée d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation .) Message sur l'écran LCD Power input for PSU is lost. Check PSU cables. (Perte de l'entrée d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation . Vérifiez le bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Le bloc d'alimentation est installé correctement mais une source d'alimentation n'est pas connectée ou n'est pas fonctionnelle. Action Vérifiez que la source d'alimentation est liée au bloc d'alimentation. Vérifiez que la source d'alimentation est conforme aux spécifications de fonctionnement du bloc d'alimentation. PSU0006 Message Power supply type mismatch. (Non correspondance du type de bloc d'alimentation .) Message sur l'écran LCD Power supply is incorrectly configured. Check PSU. (Le bloc d'alimentation n'est pas configuré correctement. Vérifiez le bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Les blocs d'alimentation doivent être de même type d'alimentation et de puissance. 150Code d'erreur Informations des messages Action Installez des blocs d'alimentation correspondants et vérifiez la configuration à utiliser dans ce manuel. PSU0016 Message Power supply is absent. (Le bloc d'alimentation est manquant.) Message sur l'écran LCD PSU is absent. Check PSU. (Le bloc d'alimentation est manquant. Vérifiez le bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Le bloc d'alimentation a été retiré ou est défectueux. Action 1. Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. 2. Vérifiez que les câbles et les composants du sous-système ne sont pas endommagés. 3. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU0031 Message Cannot communicate with power supply . (Impossible de communiquer avec le bloc d'alimentation .) Message sur l'écran LCD Cannot communicate with PSU . Re-seat PSU. (Impossible de communiquer avec le bloc d'alimentation . Réinsérez le bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Le bloc d'alimentation peut fonctionner, toutefois le contrôle du bloc d'alimentation sera dégradé. Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées. Action Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU0032 Message The temperature for power supply is in a warning range. (La température pour l'alimentation est dans une plage d'avertissement). Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées. Action Vérifiez l'environnement de fonctionnement système, notamment le débit d'air et la température d'entrée. Vérifiez les journaux du système pour les pannes de température et de composant thermique. PSU0033 Message The temperature for power supply is outside of the allowable range. (La température pour l'alimentation est en dehors de la plage autorisée). Message sur l'écran LCD PSU temperature outside of range. Check PSU. (La température du PSU est en dehors de la plage. Vérifiez le PSU). 151Code d'erreur Informations des messages Détails Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées. Action Vérifiez l'environnement de fonctionnement système, notamment le débit d'air et la température d'entrée. Recherchez une panne de température et de composant thermique dans les journaux du système. PSU0034 Message An under voltage fault detected on power supply . (Un défaut de sous-tension a été détecté sur l'alimentation ). Message sur l'écran LCD An under voltage fault detected on PSU . Check power source. (Un défaut de sous-tension a été détecté sur le PSU . Vérifiez l'alimentation.) Détails Cette panne peut être le résultat d'un problème électrique lié aux câbles ou aux composants d'un sous-système dans le système. Action 1. Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. 2. Vérifiez que les câbles et les composants du sous-système ne sont pas endommagés. 3. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à Getting Help (Obtention d'aide). PSU0035 Message An over voltage fault detected on power supply . (Un défaut de surtension a été détecté sur l'alimentation ). Message sur l'écran LCD Over voltage fault on PSU . Check PSU. (Un défaut de surtension sur le PSU . Vérifiez le PSU). Action Vérifiez l'alimentation. Installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU0036 Message An over current fault detected on power supply . (Un défaut de surintensité a été détecté sur l'alimentation ). Message sur l'écran LCD An over current fault detected on PSU . Check PSU. (Un défaut de surintensité a été détecté sur le PSU . Vérifiez le PSU). Détails Cette panne peut être le résultat d'un problème électrique lié aux câbles ou aux composants d'un sous-système dans le système. Action 1. Retirez puis installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. 2. Vérifiez que les câbles et les composants du sous-système ne sont pas endommagés. 3. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 152Code d'erreur Informations des messages PSU0037 Message Fan failure detected on power supply . (Une panne de ventilateur a été détectée sur l'alimentation .) Message sur l'écran LCD Fan failure detected on PSU . Check PSU. (Une panne de ventilateur a été détectée sur le . Vérifiez le PSU). Action Vérifiez s'il y a un blocage de ventilateur. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU0076 Message A power supply wattage mismatch is detected; power supply is rated for watts. (Un déséquilibre de la puissance d'alimentation a été détecté ; l'alimentation est évaluée pour watts.) Message sur l'écran LCD PSU wattage mismatch; PSU = watts (Déséquilibre de puissance du PSU ; PSU = watts) Détails Les blocs d'alimentation doivent être de même type d'alimentation et de puissance. Action Installez les alimentations appariées et révisez ce manuel pour une configuration correcte. PSU1201 Message Power supply redundancy is lost. (Perte de la redondance du bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Le bloc d'alimentation tentera de fonctionner dans un état dégradé. Les performances du système et la redondance de l'alimentation peuvent être dégradées ou perdues. Action Vérifiez l'alimentation. Installez de nouveau le bloc d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. PSU1204 Message The power supplies are not redundant. Insufficient resources to maintain normal operations. (Les blocs d'alimentation ne sont pas redondants. Il n'y a pas suffisamment de ressources pour conserver un fonctionnement normal.) Message sur l'écran LCD PSU redundancy degraded. Check PSU cables. (Dégradation de la redondance du bloc d'alimentation. Vérifiez les câbles du bloc d'alimentation.) Détails Le mode de fonctionnement de l'alimentation n'est pas redondant à cause d'une exception de bloc d'alimentation, d'un changement de bloc d'alimentation ou d'alimentation du système. Action Examinez le journal des événements pour détecter des pannes de bloc d'alimentation. Vérifiez la configuration du système et la consommation électrique. 153Code d'erreur Informations des messages PWR1004 Message The system performance degraded because power capacity has changed. (Dégradation des performances du système à cause d'une modification des capacités d'alimentation.) Détails Le système peut s'éteindre ou fonctionner dans un état dégradé. Action Examinez le journal des événements pour détecter des pannes de blocs d'alimentation. Vérifiez la configuration du système et la consommation électrique puis mettez à niveau ou installez les blocs d'alimentation en conséquence. PWR1005 Message The system performance degraded because the user-defined power capacity has changed. (Dégradation des performances du système à cause de la modification des capacités d'alimentation définies par l'utilisateur.) Détails Les paramètres d'alimentation définis par l'utilisateur ont affecté le fonctionnement du système. Action Si cela n'est pas prévu, vérifiez les modifications de configuration du système et les politiques d'alimentation. PWR1006 Message The system halted because system power exceeds capacity. (Arrêt du système car la puissance du système dépasse la capacité.) Message sur l'écran LCD System power demand exceeds capacity. System halted. (La demande de puissance du système dépasse la capacité. Arrêt du système.) Détails Arrêt du système car la puissance du système dépasse la capacité. Action Vérifiez la configuration du système, mettez à niveau les blocs d'alimentation ou réduisez la consommation de la puissance du système. RFM1008 Message Failure detected on Removable Flash Media . (Détection d'une erreur sur le support flash amovible .) Message sur l'écran LCD Removable Flash Media failed. Check SD Card. (Panne du support flash amovible . Vérifiez la carte SD). Détails Une erreur est signalée au cours d'une lecture ou écriture de la carte SD. Action Réinitialisez le support flash. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. RFM1014 Message Removable Flash Media is write protected. (Le support flash amovible est protégé en écriture.) 154Code d'erreur Informations des messages Message sur l'écran LCD Removable Flash Media is write protected. Check SD Card. (Le support flash amovible est protégé en écriture. Vérifiez la carte SD.) Détails La carte est protégée en écriture par un loquet sur la carte SD. Une carte protégée en écriture ne peut pas être utilisée. Action Si cela n'est pas prévu, retirez le support et désactivez la protection en écriture. RFM1201 Message Internal Dual SD Module redundancy lost. (Perte de la redondance du module SD double interne.) Message sur l'écran LCD Internal Dual SD Module redundancy is lost. Check SD Card. (Perte de la redondance du module SD double interne. Vérifiez la carte SD.) Détails Une ou les deux cartes SD ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Action Reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. RFM2001 Message Internal Dual SD Module is absent. (Le module SD double interne est manquant.) Message sur l'écran LCD Internal Dual SD Module is absent. Check SD Card. (Le module SD double interne est manquant. Vérifiez la carte SD.) Détails Le module de la carte SD n'est pas détecté ou n'est pas installé. Action Si cela n'est pas prévu, réinstallez le module de la carte SD. RFM2002 Message Internal Dual SD Module is offline. (Le module SD double interne est hors ligne.) Détails Le module de la carte SD est installé mais peut être mal installé ou mal configuré. Action Réinstallez le module de la carte SD. RFM2004 Message Failure detected on Internal Dual SD Module . (Détection d'une panne sur le module SD double interne .) Message sur l'écran LCD Internal Dual SD Module is failed. Check SD Card. (Panne du module SD double interne . Vérifiez la carte SD.) Détails Le module de la carte SD est installé mais n'est pas correctement configuré ou ne réussit pas à s'initialiser. Action Réinstallez le module de la carte SD et retirez puis réinstallez les cartes SD. 155Code d'erreur Informations des messages RFM2006 Message Internal Dual SD Module is write protected. (Le module SD double interne est protégé en écriture.) Détails Le module est protégé en écriture. Les modifications ne peuvent être écrites sur le support. Action Si cela n'est pas prévu, retirez le support et désactivez la protection en écriture. SEC0031 Message The chassis is open while the power is on. (Le châssis est ouvert alors que le système est sous tension.) Message sur l'écran LCD Intrusion detected. Check chassis cover. (Intrusion détectée. Vérifiez le capot du châssis.) Détails Le châssis est ouvert. Les performances du système peuvent être dégradées et la sécurité compromise. Action Fermez le châssis. Vérifiez les journaux système. SEC0033 Message The chassis is open while the power is off. (Le châssis est ouvert alors que le système est hors tension.) Message sur l'écran LCD Intrusion detected. Check chassis cover. (Intrusion détectée. Vérifiez le capot du châssis.) Détails Le châssis a été ouvert alors que le système est hors tension. La sécurité du système peut avoir été compromise. Action Fermez le châssis et vérifiez l'inventaire du matériel. Vérifiez les journaux système. SEL0006 Message All event logging is disabled. (Désactivation de la journalisation de tous les événements.) Détails Ce message s'affiche lorsque la journalisation de tous les événements a été désactivée par l'utilisateur. Action Si cela n'est pas prévu, activez de nouveau la journalisation. SEL0008 Message Log is full. (Le journal est plein.) Détails Lorsque le journal est plein, les événements supplémentaires ne sont pas écrits dans le journal. Les événements plus anciens peuvent être écrasés et perdus. Ce message peut également s'afficher si l'utilisateur désactive la journalisation des événements. Action Sauvegardez et effacez le journal. 156Code d'erreur Informations des messages SEL0012 Message Could not create or initialize the system event log. (Impossible de créer ou d'initialiser le journal des événements système.) Détails Si le journal des événements système n'arrive pas à s'initialiser, l'état de la plateforme et les événements ne peuvent pas être enregistrés. Certains logiciels de gestion ne rapportent pas les exceptions de plateforme. Action Redémarrez le contrôleur de gestion ou le contrôleur iDRAC. Coupez puis rétablissez l'alimentation du système. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service d'assistance. SEL1204 Message An unknown system hardware failure detected. (Détection d'une panne d'un matériel du système inconnue.) Message sur l'écran LCD Unknown system hardware failure. (Panne d'un matériel du système inconnue.) Détails Si le journal des événements système n'arrive pas à s'initialiser, l'état de la plateforme et les événements ne peuvent pas être enregistrés. Certains logiciels de gestion ne rapportent pas les exceptions de plateforme. Action Configurez à nouveau le système sur la configuration minimale prise en charge. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service d'assistance. TMP0118 Message The system inlet temperature is less than the lower warning threshold. (La température d'entrée du système est inférieure au seuil d'avertissement minimal.) Message sur l'écran LCD System inlet temperature is outside of range. (La température d'entrée du système ne se trouve pas dans les limites.) Détails La température de l'air ambiant est trop froide. Action Vérifiez l'environnement du système d'exploitation. TMP0119 Message The system inlet temperature is less than the lower critical threshold. (La température d'entrée du système est inférieure au seuil critique minimal.) Message sur l'écran LCD System inlet temperature is outside of range. (La température d'entrée du système ne se trouve pas dans les limites.) Détails La température de l'air ambiant est trop froide. Action Vérifiez l'environnement du système d'exploitation. 157Code d'erreur Informations des messages TMP0120 Message The system inlet temperature is greater than the upper warning threshold. (La température d'entrée du système est supérieure au seuil d'avertissement maximal.) Message sur l'écran LCD System inlet temperature is outside of range. (La température d'entrée du système ne se trouve pas dans les limites.) Détails La température de l'air ambiant est trop chaude ou un ou plusieurs ventilateurs sont en panne. Action Vérifiez l'environnement du système d'exploitation et examinez le journal des événements pour détecter des pannes de ventilateur. TMP0121 Message The system inlet temperature is greater than the upper critical threshold. (La température d'entrée du système est supérieure au seuil critique maximal.) Message sur l'écran LCD System inlet temperature is outside of range. Check Fans. (La température d'entrée du système ne se trouve pas dans les limites. Vérifiez les ventilateurs.) Détails La température de l'air ambiant est trop chaude ou un ou plusieurs ventilateurs sont en panne. Action Vérifiez l'environnement du système d'exploitation et examinez le journal des événements pour détecter des pannes de ventilateur. VLT0204 Message The system board voltage is outside of the allowable range. (La tension de la carte système se trouve en dehors des limites autorisées.) Message sur l'écran LCD System board voltage is outside of range. (La tension de la carte système se trouve en dehors des limites.) Détails Le matériel du système a détecté une surtension ou une soustension. Si des exceptions de tension multiple surviennent de manière consécutive, le système peut s'arrêter en mode de prévention de défaillance. Action 1. Examinez les journaux des événements pour détecter des exceptions d'alimentation. 2. Configurez à nouveau le système sur la configuration minimale, configurez puis réinstallez les câbles du système. 3. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. 158Messages d'avertissement Un message d'avertissement vous alerte des éventuels problèmes et invites auxquels vous devez répondre avant que le système ne poursuive sa tâche. Par exemple, avant de formater un disque dur, un message vous avertit que vous pouvez perdre toutes les données se trouvant sur le disque dur. Les messages d'avertissement interrompent généralement la tâche et demande que vous répondiez en saisissez o (oui) ou n (non). REMARQUE : Les messages d'avertissement sont générés par l'application ou par le système d'exploitation. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation ou l'application. Messages de diagnostic Les utilitaires de diagnostic du système peuvent créer des messages si vous exécutez des tests de diagnostic sur le système. Reportez-vous à Running The Embedded System Diagnostics (Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système) pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les diagnostics du système. Messages d'alerte Le logiciel de gestion des systèmes génère des messages d'alertes pour votre système. Les messages d'alerte comprennent des messages d'informations, d'états, d'avertissements et de panne relatifs à l'état du lecteur, de la température, du ventilateur et de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir plus d'information, reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel de gestion des systèmes. 1591609 Obtention d'aide Contacter Dell REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet, les informations de contact figurent sur la facture d'achat, le borderau de colisage, la facture le catalogue des produits Dell. Dell propose diverses options d'assistance et de maintenance en ligne et téléphonique. Ces options varient en fonction du pays et du produit et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre région Pour contacter le service commercial, technique ou client de Dell : 1. Rendez-vous sur le site www.dell.com/support. 2. Sélectionnez la catégorie d'assistance. 3. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Country/Region (Pays/Région) situé en haut de la page. 4. Sélectionnez le lien de service ou d'assistance approprié. 161 Cable Management Arm Installation WARNING: This is a condensed reference. Read the safety instructions in your Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information booklet before you begin. WARNING: Only trained service technicians are authorized to remove the system cover and access any of the components inside the system. Before you begin, review the safety instructions that came with the system. NOTE: The illustrations in this document do not represent a specific system. AVERTISSEMENT : Ce document est uniquement un condensé. Veuillez lire les instructions de sécurité dans le livret relatif à la sécurité, l’environnement et les réglementations avant de commencer. AVERTISSEMENT : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes. Veuillez lire les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système avant de commencer. REMARQUE : Les illustrations figurant dans ce document ne représentent pas de système spécifique. WARNUNG: Dieses Dokument stellt eine Kurzanleitung dar. Bevor Sie mit der Montage beginnen, lesen Sie bitte die Sicherheitshinweise in der Broschüre Sicherheits-, Umgebungs- und Betriebsbestimmungen. WARNUNG: Nur zugelassene Servicetechniker dürfen die Gehäuseabdeckung entfernen und auf die Komponenten im Innern des Systems zugreifen. Bevor Sie beginnen, lesen Sie die Sicherheitshinweise, die Sie zusammen mit Ihrem System erhalten haben. ANMERKUNG: Die Abbildungen in diesem Dokument stellen kein spezifisches System dar. 警告: 本書は要約版です。 作業を開始する前に、『Safety,Environmental, and Regulatory Information』(安全、環境、および認可機関に関する情報)という小冊子に書かれている安全にお使いいただくための注意 をお読みください。 警告:システムのカバーを取り外して内部の部品に手を触れる作業は、トレーニングを受けたサービス技術者のみが行ってください。 作業を開始する前に、システムに付属しているガイドの安全にお使いいただく ための注意を参照してください。 メモ:本書のイラストは特定のシステムを指すものではありません。 AVISO: Este documento es una referencia resumida. Lea las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en el folleto Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information (Información sobre seguridad, medio ambiente y normativas) antes de empezar. AVISO: Los técnicos de servicio especializados son las únicas personas autorizadas para retirar las cubiertas y acceder a los componentes internos del sistema. Antes de empezar, revise las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas con el sistema. NOTA: Las ilustraciones de este documento no representan un sistema específico. 2 Installing and Removing the CMA Tray NOTE: The CMA tray provides support and acts as a retainer for the CMA. Align and engage each side of the tray with the receiver brackets on the inner edges of the rails. Push the tray forward until it clicks into place (1). To remove the tray, squeeze the latch-release buttons toward the center and pull the tray out of the receiver brackets (2). Installation et retrait du plateau du passe-câbles REMARQUE : Le plateau est un dispositif sur lequel repose le passe-câbles et le maintient en place. Alignez et engagez chaque côté du plateau à l’aide des supports situés sur les bords internes des rails. Poussez le plateau jusqu’à ce qu’il s’enclenche (1). Pour retirer le plateau, pincez les loquets de dégagement pour les ramener vers l’intérieur et sortez le plateau des supports (2). Installieren und Entfernen der Auflage des Kabelführungsarms ANMERKUNG: Die Auflage des Kabelführungsarms dient als Unterstützung und als Rückhaltemechanismus für den Kabelführungsarm. Führen Sie die Seiten der Auflage in die Aufnahmen auf den inneren Seiten der Schienen ein. Drücken Sie die Auflage bis zum Einrasten nach vorn (1). Um die Auflage zu entfernen, schieben Sie die Sperrklinken zur Mitte hin und ziehen Sie die Auflage aus den Aufnahmen (2). CMA トレイの取り付けと取り外し メモ: CMA トレイは CMA を支え、CMA のリテイナとして機能します。 トレイの両側をレールの内側の端にあるレシーバブラケットに合わせます。 カチッと音がして 固定されるまで、トレイを押し 込みます(1)。 トレイを取り外すには、ラッチリリースボタンを中央方向に押し、トレイを引いてレシーバブラケットから外し ます(2)。 Instalación y extracción de la bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables NOTA: La bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables actúa como pieza de soporte y de retención para el brazo para tendido de cables. Alinee y encaje cada lado de la bandeja con las guías en los extremos interiores de los rieles. Empuje hacia delante hasta que la bandeja encaje en su lugar (1). Para extraer la bandeja, apriete los botones de liberación del pestillo hacia el centro y tire de la bandeja para extraerla de las guías (2). 1 Identifying the Cable Management Arm Kit Contents Locate the components for installing the Cable Management Arm (CMA) assembly: • CMA tray (1) • CMA (2) • Nylon cable tie wraps (3) • CMA attachment brackets (4) • Status indicator cable (5) NOTE: To secure the CMA for shipment in the rack, loop the tie wraps around both the baskets and the tray and cinch them firmly. Securing the CMA in this manner secures your system in unstable environments. Identification des composants du kit de passe-câbles Identifiez les composants de l’assemblage de passe-câbles à installer : • Plateau (1) • Passe-câbles (2) • Fixe-câbles en nylon (3) • Fixations pour passe-câbles (4) • Câble du voyant d’état (5) REMARQUE : Si vous devez expédier le rack avec le passe-câbles, fixez le passe-câbles en introduisant les fixe-câbles à la fois dans les paniers et dans le plateau, puis sanglez-les. Ceci permettra également de stabiliser le système si celui-ci se trouve dans un environnement instable. Bestandteile des Kits für den Kabelführungsarm Identifizieren Sie die Komponenten für die Installation des Kabelführungsarms: • Kabelführungsarm-Auflage (1) • Kabelführungsarm (2) • Kabelbinder aus Kunststoff (3) • Halterungsklammern für den Kabelführungsarm (4) • Kabel für Statusanzeige (5) ANMERKUNG: Um den Kabelführungsarm für den Transport am Rack zu sichern, ziehen Sie die Kabelbinder um beide Kabeltunnel und die Auflage. Ein derart gesicherter Kabelführungsarm schützt das System in instabilen Umgebungen. ケーブルマネージメントアームキットの内容の確認 ケーブルマネージメントアーム(CMA)アセンブリの取り付けに必要なコンポーネントは次のとおりです。 • CMA トレイ(1) • CMA(2) • ナイロン製ケーブルタイラップ(3) • CMA 取り付けブラケット(4) • ステータスインジケータケーブル(5) メモ: ラックに取り付けた状態で搬送するために CMA を固定するには、タイラップをバスケットとトレイの両方に巻き付 け、しっかりと締めます。 CMA をこのように固定することで、不安定な環境に設置されているシステムが安定します。 Identificación del contenido del kit del brazo para tendido de cables Localice los componentes para instalar el conjunto de brazo para tendido de cables: • Bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables (1) • Brazo para tendido de cables (2) • Abrazaderas de cable de nylon (3) • Soportes de fijación del brazo para tendido de cables (4) • Cable de indicador de estado (5) NOTA: Para fijar el brazo para tendido de cables para transportarlo con el rack, pase las abrazaderas alrededor de los soportes y la bandeja y apriételas con fuerza. Si fija el brazo para tendido de cables de este modo, el sistema quedará sujeto en entornos inestables. 1 2 3 Installing the CMA Attachment Brackets NOTE: Depending on the cable routing from the system, attach the CMA to either the right or left mounting rail. It is recommended that you mount the CMA on the side opposite of the power supplies (SIDE A). Mounting to SIDE B requires the CMA to be disconnected in order to remove the outer power supply. Always remove the tray before removing the power supplies. Select the appropriate CMA attachment bracket based on the side you mount the CMA (either SIDE A or SIDE B). Install the CMA attachment bracket at the back of the slide rail with the corresponding SIDE A or SIDE B marking. Align the holes on the bracket with the pins on the slide rail and push the bracket downward until it locks into place. Installation des fixations pour passe-câbles REMARQUE : Selon l’acheminement des câbles depuis le système, fixez le passe-câbles sur le rail de fixation droite ou gauche. Il est recommandé de fixer le passe-câbles sur le côté opposé aux blocs d’alimentation (CÔTÉ A). Une fixation sur le CÔTÉ B nécessite de débrancher le passe-câbles afin de retirer le bloc d’alimentation externe. Veuillez toujours retirer le plateau avant de retirer les blocs d’alimentation. Sélectionnez la fixation pour passe-câbles appropriée selon le côté où vous fixez le passe-câbles (CÔTÉ A ou CÔTÉ B). Installez la fixation pour passe-câbles à l’arrière du rail glissant avec la marque CÔTÉ A ou CÔTÉ B correspondante. Alignez les trous de la fixation aux broches du rail latéral, puis poussez la fixation vers le bas jusqu’à son enclenchement. Installation der Halterungsklammern für den Kabelführungsarm ANMERKUNG: Befestigen Sie den Kabelführungsarm je nach der Kabelverlegung im System an der rechten oder der linken Montageschiene. Es wird empfohlen, den Kabelführungsarm auf der den Netzteilen gegenüberliegenden Seite montieren (SEITE A). Bei einer Montage auf SEITE B muss zum Entfernen des äußeren Netzteils der Kabelführungsarm abgenommen werden. Sie müssen vor dem Entfernen der Netzteile immer die Auflage entfernen. Wählen Sie abhängig von der Seite, auf der Sie den Kabelführungsarm montieren (entweder SEITE A oder SEITE B), die entsprechende Halterungsklammer für den Kabelführungsarm aus. Installieren Sie die Halterungsklammer für den Kabelführungsarm an der Rückseite der Gleitschiene mit der entsprechenden Markierung SEITE A oder SEITE B. Richten Sie die Löcher in der Klammer mit den Stiften auf der Führungsschiene aus und drücken Sie die Klammer nach unten, bis sie einrastet. CMA 取り付けブラケットの取り付け メモ:システムからのケーブル配線に応じて、CMA を左右のマウントレールのどちらに取り付けるかを決めてくださ い。 CMA は電源ユニットの反対側(A 側)に取り付けることをお勧めします。 B 側に取り付けると、外部電源ユニットを 取り外す際に CMA を外さなければならなくなります。 電源ユニットを取り外す前に必ずトレイを取り外してくだ さい。 CMA を A / B のどちら側に取り付けるかに応じて、適切な CMA 取り付けブラケットを選択してください。 する A また は B の刻印があるスライドレールの後部に CMA 取り付けブラケットを取り付けます。 ブラケットの穴をスライドレー ルのピンに合わせ、ブラケットを押し下げて所定の位置にロックします。 Instalación de los soportes de fijación del brazo para tendido de cables NOTA: En función de la colocación de los cables desde el sistema, conecte el brazo para tendido de cables al riel de montaje derecho o izquierdo. Se recomienda instalar el brazo para tendido de cables en el lado opuesto a las fuentes de alimentación (LADO A). De lo contrario deberá desconectarse para poder extraer la fuente de alimentación externa. Retire siempre la bandeja antes de extraer las fuentes de alimentación. Seleccione el soporte de fijación adecuado del brazo para tendido de cables según el lado en el que haya instalado el brazo (LADO A o LADO B). Instale el soporte de fijación del brazo para tendido de cables en la parte posterior del riel deslizante con la marca LADO A o LADO B correspondiente. Alinee los orificios del soporte con los pasadores del riel deslizante y empuje el soporte hacia abajo hasta que encaje en su lugar. 2 4 5 3 1 Installation du passe-câbles | Installation des Kabelführungsarms | ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け | Instalación del brazo para tendido de cablesCable Management Arm Installation (continued) CMA Installation Instructions Notes, Cautions and Warnings A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury or death. Remarques, précautions et avertissements Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous permettent de mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque d’endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non respect des instructions. Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d’endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Anmerkungen, Vorsichtshinweise und Warnungen Eine ANMERKUNG macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, mit denen Sie das System besser einsetzen können. Ein VORSICHTSHINWEIS macht darauf aufmerksam, dass bei Nichtbefolgung von Anweisungen eine mögliche Beschädigung der Hardware oder ein Verlust von Daten droht. Durch eine WARNUNG werden Sie auf Gefahrenquellen hingewiesen, die materielle Schäden, Verletzungen oder sogar den Tod von Personen zur Folge haben können. メモ、注意、警告 メモ:コンピュータを使いやすくするための重要な情報を説明しています。 注意:手順に従わないと、ハードウェアの損傷やデータの損失につながる可能性があることを示しています。 警告:物的損害、けが、または死亡の原因となる可能性があることを示しています。 Notas, precauciones y avisos Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. Un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o la pérdida de datos si no se siguen las instrucciones. Un mensaje de AVISO indica el riesgo de daños materiales, lesiones o incluso la muerte. Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly prohibited. Dell™ and the DELL Logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. Dell Inc. disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. 2011 - 07 Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l’autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Dell™ et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. Dell Inc. ne revendique aucun intérêt dans l’utilisation des marques et des noms de marque ne lui appartenant pas. 07 - 2011 Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2011 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Eine Vervielfältigung oder Wiedergabe dieser Materialien in jeglicher Weise ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. ist strengstens untersagt. Dell™ und das DELL-Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc. Dell erhebt keinen Anspruch auf die Marken und Handelsnamen anderer Hersteller. 07 - 2011 本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。 © 2011 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。 Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。 Dell™ および Dell ロゴ は Dell Inc. の商標で す。本書内では、Dell 以外の商標や会社名が使用されている場合がありますが、それらの商標や会社名は、一切 Dell Inc. に帰属するもので はありません。 2011 - 07 La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este material en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Dell™ y el logotipo de DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres de terceros. 07 - 2011 Printed in Taiwan. Imprimé à Taïwan. Gedruckt in Taiwan. Impreso en Taiwán. Instructions d’installation du passe-câbles Installationsanweisungen für den Kabelführungsarm CMA の取り付け手 Instrucciones de instalación del brazo para tendido de cables WARNING: This is a condensed reference. Read the safety instructions that ship with your system before you begin. AVERTISSEMENT : Ce document est uniquement un condensé. Veuillez lire les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système avant de commencer. WARNUNG: Dieses Dokument stellt eine Kurzanleitung dar. Before Sie anfangen, lesen Sie die Sicherheitshinweise, die Ihrem System beiliegen. 警告: 本書は要約版です。 作業を開始する前に、システムに付属している ガイドの安全にお使いいただくための注意をお読みください。 AVISO: Este documento es una referencia resumida. Lea las instrucciones de seguridad suministradas con el sistema antes de empezar. 5 Moving the CMA Away From the CMA Tray The CMA can be rotated away from the system for access and service (service position). At the hinged end, lift the CMA away from the tray to unseat it (1). After it is unseated from the tray, swing the CMA away from the system (2). Retrait du passe-câbles du plateau Le passe-câbles peut être retiré en le pivotant du système en cas d’intervention (position de maintenance). Sur la charnière, soulevez le passe-câbles du plateau pour le dégager (1). Une fois le passe-câbles dégagé du plateau, faites-le pivoter pour l’éloigner du système (2). Wegführen des Kabelführungsarms von der Auflage Um an den Kabelführungsarm gelangen und ihn warten zu können, kann der Kabelführungsarm vom System weggeführt werden (Wartungsposition). Um den Kabelführungsarm zu lösen, heben Sie ihn am Gelenkende von der Auflage weg (1). Sobald der Kabelführungsarm von der Auflage genommen ist, können Sie ihn vom System weg schwenken (2). CMA を開く方法 システム内部の作業を行うには、CMA をシステムから離れる方向に開きます(サービスポジション)。 蝶番の部分で CMA を持ち上げてトレイから外します(1)。 トレイから外れたら、CMA をシステムから離れる方向に開きます(2)。 Separación del brazo para tendido de cables y la bandeja del brazo para tendido de cables Se puede extraer el brazo para tendido de cables del sistema para permitir el acceso y el mantenimiento (posición de mantenimiento). Desde el extremo con bisagra, levante el brazo para tendido de cables de la bandeja para desencajarlo (1). Una vez desencajado de la bandeja, haga rotar el brazo para tendido de cables para alejarlo del sistema (2). 2 1 6 Cabling the System Using the CMA CAUTION: To avoid potential damage from protruding cables, secure any slack in the status indicator cable after routing this cable through the CMA. Using the tie wraps provided, bundle the cables together as they enter and exit the baskets so they do not interfere with adjacent systems (1). With the CMA in the service position, route the cable bundle through the inner and outer baskets (2). Use the preinstalled hook and loop straps on either end of the baskets to secure the cables (3). Swing the CMA back into place on the tray (4). Install the status indicator cable at the back of the system and secure the cable by routing it through the CMA. Attach the other end of this cable to the corner of the outer CMA basket (5). Carefully cycle the system in the rack to verify that the cables have sufficient slack and are not binding. Câblage du système à l’aide du passe-câbles PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout dommage dû à des câbles dépassant du système, le câble du voyant d’état ne doit pas présenter de mou après son acheminement via le passe-câbles. À l’aide des fixe-câbles, regroupez les câbles et faites-les passer dans les paniers afin qu’ils n’interfèrent pas avec les systèmes adjacents (1). Mettez le passe-câbles en position de service, puis faites passer le faisceau de câbles dans les paniers interne et externe (2). À l’aide des sangles à boucle et des crochets préinstallés sur l’une ou l’autre extrémité des paniers, fixez les câbles (3). Faites pivoter le passe-câbles pour le replacer dans le fixe-câbles (4). Installez le câble du voyant d’état à l’arrière du système et sécurisez-le en le glissant dans le passe-câbles. Fixez l’autre extrémité de câble au coin du panier externe du passe-câbles (5). Effectuez un cycle du système dans le rack pour vérifiez que les câbles disposent de suffisamment de mou et ne se plient pas. Verkabeln des Systems mit dem Kabelführungsarm VORSICHTSHINWEIS: Um mögliche Schäden an vorstehenden Kabeln zu vermeiden, sichern Sie eine etwaige Überlänge des Statusanzeigekabels, nachdem Sie dieses Kabel im Kabelführungsarm verlegt haben. Bündeln Sie mit den Kabelbindern die Kabel beim Eintritt und Austritt an den Kabeltunneln, damit sie nicht mit benachbarten Systemen in Konflikt geraten (1). Verlegen Sie Kabel durch den inneren und äußeren Kabeltunnel, wobei sich der Kabelführungsarm in der Wartungsposition befindet (2). Sichern Sie die Kabel mit den vorinstallierten Kletthaltern an den Enden der Kabeltunnel (3). Schwenken Sie den Kabelführungsarm zurück auf die Auflage (4). Installieren Sie das Statusanzeigekabel auf der Systemrückseite und sichern Sie das Kabel, indem Sie es im Kabelführungsarm verlegen. Befestigen Sie das andere Ende des Kabels an der Ecke des äußeren Kabelführungstunnels (5). Drehen Sie das System vorsichtig im Rack und vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Kabel genügend Spiel haben und nicht eingeklemmt sind. CMA を使用したシステムのケーブル接続 注意: ケーブルの飛び出しが原因で損傷が生じないように、このケーブルを CMA に配線した後でステータスインジケータ ケーブルのたるみを固定します。 隣接するシステムの邪魔にならないように、付属のタイラップを使用してバスケットの入口と出口の部分でケーブルを束ねます (1)。 CMA をサービスポジションに動かして、ケーブルの束を内側と外側のバスケットに通します(2)。 取り付け済みのループス トラップをバスケットのいずれかの側で使用して、ケーブルを固定します(3)。 CMA をトレイの元の位置に戻します(4)。 ステー タスインジケータケーブルをシステムの背面に取り付け、CMA に通してケーブルを固定します。 このケーブルのもう一方の端を 外側の CMA バスケットの角に取り付けます(5)。 システムをラックに慎重に戻し、ケーブルに十分なゆとりがあり、絡んでいないことを確認します。 Cableado del sistema mediante el brazo para tendido de cables PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar posibles daños debidos a cables que sobresalen, ajuste la holgura del cable de indicador de estado después de pasar este cable por el brazo para tendido de cables. Mediante las abrazaderas proporcionadas, agrupe los cables que entran y salen de los soportes de modo que no interfieran con los sistemas adyacentes (1). Con el brazo para tendido de cables en la posición de mantenimiento, pase el grupo de cables por los soportes interno y externo (2). Utilice las correas preinstaladas en cada extremo de los soportes para fijar los cables (3). Vuelva a girar el brazo para tendido de cables para que encaje en la bandeja (4). Instale el cable de indicador de estado en la parte posterior del sistema y fíjelo pasándolo por el brazo para tendido de cables. Fije el otro extremo de este cable a la esquina del soporte externo del brazo para tendido de cables (5). Saque y vuelva a meter el sistema en el rack para comprobar que los cables tengan suficiente holgura y no se enreden. 4 Installing and Removing the CMA At the back of the system, fit the latch on the front end of the CMA on the innermost bracket of the slide assembly until the latch engages (1). Fit the other latch on the end of the outermost bracket until the latch engages (2). To remove the CMA, disengage both latches by pressing the CMA release buttons on the top of the inner and outer latch housings (3). Installation et retrait du passe-câbles À l’arrière du système, placez le loquet situé sur la partie avant du passe-câbles sur le support interne du rail coulissant jusqu’à ce que le loquet s’enclenche (1). Placez l’autre loquet sur l’extrémité du support externe jusqu’à ce que le loquet s’enclenche (2). Pour retirer le passe-câbles, dégagez les deux loquets en appuyant sur les boutons de dégagement du passe-câbles situés en haut des logements des loquets interne et externe (3). Installieren und Entfernen des Kabelführungsarms Befestigen Sie auf der Systemrückseite die Raste am vorderen Ende des Kabelführungsarms an der inneren Halterung des Schienensatzes und lassen Sie die Verbindung einrasten (1). Befestigen Sie die andere Raste am Ende der äußeren Halterung und lassen Sie die Verbindung einrasten (2). Um den Kabelführungsarm zu entfernen, lösen Sie beide Verbindungen, indem Sie auf die Sperrklinken auf der Oberseite der inneren und äußeren Halterungsabdeckung drücken (3). CMA の取り付けと取り外し システムの背面で、CMA 前端部のラッチをスライドアセンブリ最深部のブラケットにはめ込み、ラッチが固定される まで押し込みます(1)。 もう一方のラッチを最も外側のブラケットにはめ込み、ラッチが固定されるまで押し込み ます(2)。 CMA を取り外すには、内側と外側のラッチハウジングの上部にある CMA リリースボタンを押して、両方の ラッチを外します(3)。 Instalación y extracción del brazo para tendido de cables En la parte posterior del sistema, encaje el pestillo del extremo frontal del brazo para tendido de cables en el soporte más interno del conjunto deslizante (1). Encaje el otro pestillo en el extremo del soporte más externo (2). Para extraer el brazo para tendido de cables, desenganche los dos pestillos presionando los botones de liberación del brazo para tendido de cables en la parte superior de los alojamientos de pestillo interno y externo (3). 1 2 3 2 4 5 1 3 Installation du passe-câbles (suite) | Installation des Kabelführungsarms (fortgesetzt) | ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け(続き)| Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables (continuación) www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Precision™ Workstation System Information Guide Guide d'informations du système Guía de información del sistema Models WHL, DHS, DHM, and WHMwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Precision™ Workstation System Information GuideNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2001–2002 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Precision are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. July 2002 P/N 88HYD Rev. A04Contents 3 Contents Dell Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Your Dell Precision Workstation User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . 5 Additional Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CAUTION: Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 When Using Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 When Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ergonomic Computing Habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 NOM Information (Mexico Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Limited Warranties and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Limited Warranty for the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . 16 Limited Warranty for Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 One-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Intel® Warranty Statement for Pentium® and Celeron® Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only). . . . . . . . 234 ContentsSystem Information Guide 5 Dell Documentation This document contains safety, regulatory, and warranty information about your Dell Precision™ Workstation. It also provides information about the additional documentation for your computer. Your Dell Precision Workstation User’s Guide Your User’s Guide is installed on your hard drive and includes descriptions of computer features, instructions for removing and installing parts, information on using system setup, diagnostic and troubleshooting information, and technical specifications. To access the User’s Guide, follow the instructions for your operating system. NOTE: Your User’s Guide and other computer documentation is also located on the Dell Precision ResourceCD and the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. If you are using Microsoft ® Windows® 2000 — Double-click the User’s Guides icon located on your desktop. Clicking the icon launches your Dell Document Viewer and allows you to view system and peripheral documentation. If you are using Windows XP — Click the Start button and click Help and Support. Additional Documentation You may receive the following documents with your computer: • The Setup and Quick Reference Guide, which provides instructions for setting up your computer, a detailed list of available resources and documentation for your computer, instructions on using the Dell Precision ResourceCD that came with your computer, and diagnostic and troubleshooting information. • Operating system installation guide, which provides information for reinstalling your operating system. • Documentation included with any options you purchased separately for your computer. • Dell documentation updates, which are usually located on your hard drive. Read these documents first because they may contain information that supersedes information in other documents.6 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com CAUTION: Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to help ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your computer and working environment from potential damage. General • Do not attempt to service the computer yourself unless you are a trained service technician. Always follow installation instructions closely. • To help prevent electric shock, plug the computer and device power cables into properly grounded electrical outlets. These cables are equipped with 3-prong plugs to help ensure proper grounding. Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from a cable. If you must use an extension cable, use a 3-wire cable with properly grounded plugs. • To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not use your computer during an electrical storm. • To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. • If your computer includes a modem, the cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge (AWG) and an FCC-compliant RJ-11 modular plug. • Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances. • To help avoid possible damage to the system board, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before disconnecting a device from the computer.System Information Guide 7 • To avoid shorting out your computer when disconnecting a network cable, first unplug the cable from the network adapter on the back of your computer, and then from the network jack. When reconnecting a network cable to your computer, first plug the cable into the network jack, and then into the network adapter. • To help protect your computer from sudden, transient increases and decreases in electrical power, use a surge suppressor, line conditioner, or uninterruptible power supply (UPS). • Ensure that nothing rests on your computer’s cables and that the cables are not located where they can be stepped on or tripped over. • Do not push any objects into the openings of your computer. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. • Keep your computer away from radiators and heat sources. Also, do not block cooling vents. Avoid placing loose papers underneath your computer; do not place your computer in a closed-in wall unit or on a bed, sofa, or rug. • Do not spill food or liquids on your computer. If the computer gets wet, consult the User’s Guide. CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued)8 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com When Using Your Computer As you use your computer, observe the following safe-handling guidelines. CAUTION: Do not operate your computer with any cover(s) (including computer covers, bezels, filler brackets, front-panel inserts, and so on) removed. • Your computer is equipped with one of the following: – A fixed-voltage power supply — Computers with a fixed-voltage power supply do not have a voltage selection switch on the back panel and operate at only one voltage (see the regulatory label on the outside of the computer for its operating voltage). – An auto-sensing voltage circuit — Computers with an auto-sensing voltage circuit do not have a voltage selection switch on the back panel and automatically detect the correct operating voltage. – A manual voltage selection switch — Computers with a voltage selection switch on the back panel must be manually set to operate at the correct operating voltage. To help avoid damaging a computer with a manual voltage selection switch, set the switch for the voltage that most closely matches the AC power available in your location. NOTICE: The voltage selection switch must be set to the 115-V position even though the AC power available in Japan is 100 V. Also, ensure that your monitor and attached devices are electrically rated to operate with the AC power available in your location. • Before working inside the computer, unplug the computer to help prevent electric shock or system board damage. Certain system board components continue to receive power any time the computer is connected to AC power.System Information Guide 9 When Working Inside Your Computer Before you open the computer cover, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated. CAUTION: Do not attempt to service the computer yourself, except as explained in your online Dell™ documentation or in instructions otherwise provided to you by Dell. Always follow installation and service instructions closely. NOTICE: To help avoid possible damage to the system board, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before removing a component from the system board or disconnecting a device from the computer. 1 Perform an orderly computer shutdown using the operating system menu. 2 Turn off your computer and any devices connected to the computer. 3 Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the chassis, such as the metal around the card-slot openings at the back of the computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. 4 Disconnect your computer and devices, including the monitor, from their electrical outlets. Also, disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. Doing so reduces the potential for personal injury or shock. In addition, take note of these safety guidelines when appropriate: • When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before disconnecting the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. When Using Your Computer (continued)10 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor chip by its edges, not by its pins. CAUTION: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as the microprocessor. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to remove any static charge your body may have accumulated. You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD): • Do not remove components from their antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, discharge static electricity from your body. • When transporting an electrostatic sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging. • Handle all electrostatic sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the ergonomic guidelines in the User’s Guide when setting up and using your computer. When Using Your Computer (continued)System Information Guide 11 Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computer systems, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer system has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient the receiving antenna. • Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. • Move the computer away from the receiver. Battery Disposal Your computer uses a lithium coin-cell battery. The lithium coin-cell battery is a long-life battery, and it is very possible that you will never need to replace it. However, should you need to replace it, see the User’s Guide. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. When Using Your Computer (continued)12 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. For additional regulatory information, see your User’s Guide. NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Exporter: Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importer: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Ship to: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peñon de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Model number — Input current rating: WHM — 6.0/3.0 A WHL — 6.0/3.0 A DHS—2.0/1.0 A DHM—3.0/1.5 A Supply voltage: 115/230 VAC Frequency: 60–50 HzSystem Information Guide 13 Limited Warranties and Return Policy Dell-branded hardware products purchased in the U.S. or Canada come with either a 90-day, one-year, two-year, three-year, or four-year (U.S. only) limited warranty. To determine which warranty you purchased, see the Dell invoice that accompanied your computer. The following sections describe the limited warranties for the U.S., the Return Policy for the U.S., the limited warranties for Canada, and the manufacturer guarantee for Latin America and the Caribbean. Limited Warranty for the U.S. What is covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in your—our end-user customer's—Dellbranded hardware products, including Dell-branded monitors, keyboards, and pointing devices (mice). What is not covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty does not cover: • Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, third-party software, or the reloading of software • Non-Dell-branded products and accessories • Problems that result from: – External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power – Servicing not authorized by us – Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions – Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance – Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by us • Products with missing or altered service tags or serial numbers • Products for which we have not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCITONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN TIME TO THE TERM OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR INVOICE. NO WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD HAS EXPIRED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILTY FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE.14 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last? This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only one year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-branded projectors last only ninety days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive. What do I do if I need warranty service? Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell service tag number or order number available. What will Dell do? During the first 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: For the first 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions). Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. Individual Home Consumers: Technical Support 800 624 9896 Customer Service 800 624 9897 Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program: Technical Support and Customer Service 800 822 8965 Home and Small Business Commercial Customers: Technical Support and Customer Service 800 456 3355 Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customers, Healthcare Customers, and Value Added Resellers (VARs): Technical Support and Customer Service 800 822 8965 Government and Education Customers: Technical Support and Customer Service 800 234 1490 Dell-branded memory 888 363 5150System Information Guide 15 If we determine that the product is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary, or personal information and removable media such as diskettes, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary, or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years: For the remaining period of the limited warranty, we will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within thirty days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within thirty days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions). Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract? If your on-site service contract is with Dell, on-site service will be provided to you under the terms of the on-site service agreement. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product? We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought.16 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com What do I do if I am not satisfied? We pride ourselves on our great customer service. If you are not satisfied with the service you receive under this limited warranty, please let us know. We have found that the best way to resolve issues regarding our limited warranty is to work together. If, after those discussion, you are still not satisfied, we believe arbitration is the most expeditious way to resolve your concerns. Therefore, ANY CLAIM, DISPUTE, OR CONTROVERSY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, WHETHER PREEXISTING, PRESENT, OR FUTURE, AND INCLUDING STATUTORY, COMMON LAW, INTENTIONAL TORT, AND EQUITABLE CLAIMS) AGAINST DELL arising from or relating to this limited warranty, its interpretation, or the breach, termination, or validity thereof, the relationships which result from this limited warranty (including, to the full extent permitted by applicable law, relationships with third parties), Dell's advertising, or any related purchase SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY AND FINALLY BY BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE NATIONAL ARBITRATION FORUM (NAF) under its Code of Procedure then in effect (available via the Internet at http://www.arb-forum.com/ or via telephone at 1-800-474-2371). The arbitration will be limited solely to the dispute or controversy between you and Dell. Any award of the arbitrator(s) shall be final and binding on each of the parties, and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction. Information may be obtained and claims may be filed with the NAF at P.O. Box 50191, Minneapolis, MN 55405. This provision applies only to individual home consumers and consumers who purchased through an employee purchase program. It does not apply to small, medium, large, and global commercial customers or government, education, and healthcare customers. May I transfer the limited warranty? Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell's website: • If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to http://www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm • If you are a Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to http://www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_015_ccare.htm • If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Consumer who purchased through an employee purchase program, go to http://www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, please call your customer care representative or call 1-800-624-9897. "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) We value our relationship with you and want to make sure that you're satisfied with your purchases. That's why we offer a "Total Satisfaction" return policy for most products that you—the end-user customer—purchase directly from Dell. Under this policy, you may return to Dell products that you purchased directly from Dell for a credit or a refund of the purchase price paid, less shipping and handling and applicable restocking fees as follows: • New Hardware Products and Accessories — All new hardware, accessories, parts, and unopened software still in its sealed package, excluding the products listed below, may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date. To return applications software or an operating system that has been installed by Dell, you must return the entire computer. A different return policy applies to nondefective products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division by customers of our Small and Medium Business divisions. Those products may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date, but a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee will be deducted from any refund or credit. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy and Software and Peripherals division return policy are not available for Dell | EMC storage products, EMC-branded products, or enterprise software.System Information Guide 17 • Reconditioned or Refurbished Dell-Branded Hardware Products and Parts — All reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded server and storage products may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date. All other reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded hardware products and parts may be returned within fourteen days of the invoice date. To return products, call Dell customer service to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number within the return policy period applicable to the product you want to return. You must obtain a Credit Return Authorization Number in order to return the product. See "Getting Help" or "Contacting Dell" in your computer's documentation to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. You must ship the products to Dell within five days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also return the products to Dell in their original packaging, in as-new condition along with any media, documentation, and all other items that were included in the original shipment, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Limited Warranty for Canada One-Year Limited Warranty (Canada Only) Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware products it manufactures will be free from defects in materials and workmanship. The limited warranty term is one year beginning on the date of invoice, as further described in the following text. Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered under this limited warranty. Otherwise, this limited warranty does not cover damage due to external causes, including accident, abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts and components not supplied by Dell. This limited warranty does not cover any items that are in one or more of the following categories: software; external devices (except as specifically noted); accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added to a Dell system through Dell’s system integration department; accessories or parts that are not installed in the Dell factory; or Dell Software and Peripherals products. Monitors, keyboards, and mice that are Dell-branded or that are included on Dell’s standard price list are covered under this limited warranty; all other monitors, keyboards, and mice (including those sold through the Dell Software and Peripherals program) are not covered. Dell will repair or replace products covered under this limited warranty that are returned to Dell’s facility. To request warranty service, you must contact Dell’s Customer Technical Support within the warranty period. See "Contacting Dell" in your User’s Guide to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. If warranty service is required, Dell will issue a Return Material Authorization Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or replacement products to you (freight prepaid) if you use an address in Canada, where applicable. Shipments to other locations will be made freight collect. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. Dell does not accept liability for lost data or software. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended.18 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES (OR JURISDICTIONS) DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. DELL’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE. SOME STATES (OR JURISDICTIONS) DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. These provisions apply to Dell’s one-year limited warranty only. For provisions of any service contract covering your system, see your invoice or the separate service contract that you will receive. If Dell elects to exchange a product or portion of a product, the exchange will be made in accordance with Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange. In any instance in which Dell issues a Return Material Authorization Number, Dell must receive the product(s) for repair prior to the expiration of the warranty period in order for the repair(s) to be covered by the limited warranty. Two-Year Limited Warranty (Canada Only) Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware products it manufactures will be free from defects in materials and workmanship. The warranty term is two years beginning on the date of invoice, as described in the following text. Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered under this limited warranty. Otherwise, this limited warranty does not cover damage due to external causes, including accident, abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts and components not supplied by Dell. This limited warranty does not cover any items that are in one or more of the following categories: software; external devices (except as specifically noted); accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added to a Dell system through Dell’s system integration department; accessories or parts that are not installed in the Dell factory; or Dell Software and Peripherals products. Monitors, keyboards, and mice that are Dell-branded or that are included on Dell’s standard price list are covered under this limited warranty; all other monitors, keyboards, and mice (including those sold through the Dell Software and Peripherals program) are not covered. Batteries for portable computers are covered only during the initial one-year period of this limited warranty.System Information Guide 19 Limited Warranty Coverage During Year One During the one-year period beginning on the invoice date, Dell will repair or replace products covered under this limited warranty that are returned to Dell's facility. To request warranty service, you must contact Dell’s Customer Technical Support within the warranty period. See "Contacting Dell" in your User’s Guide to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. If warranty service is required, Dell will issue a Return Material Authorization Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or replacement products to you freight prepaid if you use an address in Canada, where applicable. Shipments to other locations will be made freight collect. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. Dell does not accept liability for lost data or software. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended. Limited Warranty Coverage During Year Two During the second year of this limited warranty, Dell will provide, on an exchange basis and subject to Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange, replacement parts for the Dell hardware product(s) covered under this limited warranty when a part requires replacement. You must report each instance of hardware failure to Dell’s Customer Technical Support in advance to obtain Dell’s concurrence that a part should be replaced and to have Dell ship the replacement part. Dell will ship parts (freight prepaid) if you use an address in Canada, where applicable. Shipments to other locations will be made freight collect. Dell will include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to Dell. Replacement parts are new or reconditioned. Dell may provide replacement parts made by various manufacturers when supplying parts to you. The warranty term for a replacement part is the remainder of the limited warranty term. You will pay Dell for replacement parts if the replaced part is not returned to Dell. The process for returning replaced parts, and your obligation to pay for replacement parts if you do not return the replaced parts to Dell, will be in accordance with Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange. You accept full responsibility for your software and data. Dell is not required to advise or remind you of appropriate backup and other procedures. General Provisions DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES (OR JURISDICTIONS) DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE.20 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com SOME STATES (OR JURISDICTIONS) DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. These provisions apply to Dell’s two-year limited warranty only. For provisions of any service contract covering your system, see your invoice or the separate service contract that you will receive. If Dell elects to exchange a system or component, the exchange will be made in accordance with Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange. In any instance in which Dell issues a Return Material Authorization Number, Dell must receive the product(s) for repair prior to the expiration of the warranty period in order for the repair(s) to be covered by the limited warranty. Three-Year Limited Warranty (Canada Only) Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. Dell warrants that the hardware products it manufactures will be free from defects in materials and workmanship. The warranty term is three years beginning on the date of invoice, as described in the following text. Damage due to shipping the products to you is covered under this limited warranty. Otherwise, this limited warranty does not cover damage due to external causes, including accident, abuse, misuse, problems with electrical power, servicing not authorized by Dell, usage not in accordance with product instructions, failure to perform required preventive maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts and components not supplied by Dell. This limited warranty does not cover any items that are in one or more of the following categories: software; external devices (except as specifically noted); accessories or parts added to a Dell system after the system is shipped from Dell; accessories or parts added to a Dell system through Dell’s system integration department; accessories or parts that are not installed in the Dell factory; or Dell Software and Peripherals products. Monitors, keyboards, and mice that are Dell-branded or that are included on Dell’s standard price list are covered under this limited warranty; all other monitors, keyboards, and mice (including those sold through the Dell Software and Peripherals program) are not covered. Batteries for portable computers are covered only during the initial one-year period of this limited warranty. Limited Warranty Coverage During Year One During the one-year period beginning on the invoice date, Dell will repair or replace products covered under this limited warranty that are returned to Dell’s facility. To request warranty service, you must contact Dell’s Customer Technical Support within the warranty period. To request warranty service, you must contact Dell’s Customer Technical Support within the warranty period. See "Contacting Dell" in your User’s Guide to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. If warranty service is required, Dell will issue a Return Material Authorization Number. You must ship the products back to Dell in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Dell will ship the repaired or replacement products to you freight prepaid if you use an address in Canada, where applicable. Shipments to other locations will be made freight collect. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to Dell, back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. Dell does not accept liability for lost data or software. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and building replacement products. If Dell repairs or replaces a product, its warranty term is not extended.System Information Guide 21 Limited Warranty Coverage During Years Two and Three During the second and third years of this limited warranty, Dell will provide, on an exchange basis and subject to Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange, replacement parts for the Dell hardware product(s) covered under this limited warranty when a part requires replacement. You must report each instance of hardware failure to Dell’s Customer Technical Support in advance to obtain Dell’s concurrence that a part should be replaced and to have Dell ship the replacement part. Dell will ship parts (freight prepaid) if you use an address in Canada, where applicable. Shipments to other locations will be made freight collect. Dell will include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to Dell. Replacement parts are new or reconditioned. Dell may provide replacement parts made by various manufacturers when supplying parts to you. The warranty term for a replacement part is the remainder of the limited warranty term. You will pay Dell for replacement parts if the replaced part is not returned to Dell. The process for returning replaced parts, and your obligation to pay for replacement parts if you do not return the replaced parts to Dell, will be in accordance with Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange. You accept full responsibility for your software and data. Dell is not required to advise or remind you of appropriate backup and other procedures. General Provisions DELL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS BEYOND THOSE STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT. DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES (OR JURISDICTIONS) DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. DELL’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LIABILITY FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE OR FOR LOST DATA OR SOFTWARE. SOME STATES (OR JURISDICTIONS) DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE PRECEDING EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. These provisions apply to Dell’s three-year limited warranty only. For provisions of any service contract covering your system, see your invoice or the separate service contract that you will receive. If Dell elects to exchange a system or component, the exchange will be made in accordance with Dell’s Exchange Policy in effect on the date of the exchange. In any instance in which Dell issues a Return Material Authorization Number, Dell must receive the product(s) for repair prior to the expiration of the warranty period in order for the repair(s) to be covered by the limited warranty.22 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com One-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only) Guarantee Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") warrants to the end user in accordance with the following provisions that its branded hardware products, purchased by the end user from a Dell company or an authorized Dell distributor in Latin America or the Caribbean, will be free from defects in materials, workmanship, and design affecting normal use, for a period of one year from the original purchase date. Products for which proper claims are made will, at Dell’s option, be repaired or replaced at Dell’s expense. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing repairs and building replacement products. Exclusions This Guarantee does not apply to defects resulting from: improper or inadequate installation, use, or maintenance; actions or modifications by unauthorized third parties or the end user; accidental or willful damage; or normal wear and tear. Making a Claim Claims must be made in Latin America or the Caribbean by contacting the Dell point of sale within the guarantee period. The end user must always supply proof of purchase, indicating name and address of the seller, date of purchase, model and serial number, name and address of the customer, and details of symptoms and configuration at the time of malfunction, including peripherals and software used. Otherwise, Dell may refuse the guarantee claim. Upon diagnosis of a warranted defect, Dell will make arrangements and pay for ground freight and insurance to and from Dell’s repair/replacement center. The end user must ensure that the defective product is available for collection properly packed in original or equally protective packaging together with the details listed above and the return number provided to the end user by Dell. Limitation and Statutory Rights Dell makes no other warranty, guarantee or like statement other than as explicitly stated above, and this Guarantee is given in place of all other guarantees whatsoever, to the fullest extent permitted by law. In the absence of applicable legislation, this Guarantee will be the end user’s sole and exclusive remedy against Dell or any of its affiliates, and neither Dell nor any of its affiliates shall be liable for loss of profit or contracts, or any other indirect or consequential loss arising from negligence, breach of contract, or howsoever. This Guarantee does not impair or affect mandatory statutory rights of the end user against and/or any rights resulting from other contracts concluded by the end user with Dell and/or any other seller. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/ Dell Commercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul – RS - Brasil Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - ChileSystem Information Guide 23 Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogota, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Intel® Warranty Statement for Pentium® and Celeron® Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only)24 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Station de travail Dell Precision™ Guide d'informations du systèmeRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indiques des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel, de blessure ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 20012002 Dell Computer Corporation. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction, sous quelque forme que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Computer Corporation, est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce texte : Dell, le logo DELL et Dell Precision sont des marques de Dell Computer Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Intel, Pentium et Celeron sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Computer Corporation dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Juillet 2002 P/N 88HYD Rev. A04Table de matières 27 Table de matières Documentation Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Le Guide d'utilisation de votre station de travail Dell Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Documentation supplémentaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Interventions à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques . . . . . . . . . 34 Conseils en ergonomie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Mise au rebut des piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Avis réglementaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Informations sur les NOM (Mexique uniquement) . . . . . . . . 37 Garanties limitées et règles de retour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Garantie limitée pour le Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Déclaration de garantie Intel® pour les processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® uniquement (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) . . . . 4428 Table de matièresGuide d'informations du système 29 Documentation Dell Ce document contient des informations sur la sécurité, la réglementation et la garantie concernant votre station de travail Dell Precision™. Il fournit aussi des informations sur les autres documents concernant votre ordinateur. Le Guide d'utilisation de votre station de travail Dell Precision Le Guide d'utilisation est installé sur votre disque dur et comprend des descriptions des caractéristiques de l'ordinateur, des instructions sur le retrait et l'installation de pièces, des informations sur l'utilisation du programme de configuration du système, des informations sur les diagnostics et le dépannage, et des spécifications techniques. Pour accéder au Guide d'utilisation, suivez les instructions de votre système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Votre Guide d'utilisation et les autres documents concernant votre ordinateur se trouvent également sur le CD Dell Precision ResourceCD et sur le site Web du support Dell à support.dell.com. Si vous utilisez Microsoft ® Windows® 2000 : double-cliquez sur l'icône User’s Guides (Guide d'utilisation) situé sur votre bureau. Le fait de cliquer sur l'icône a pour effet de lancer votre afficheur de documents Dell et vous permet d'afficher la documentation du système et des périphériques. Si vous utilisez Windows XP : cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer) et cliquez sur Help and Support (Aide et support). Documentation supplémentaire Il est possible que vous receviez les documents suivants avec votre ordinateur : • Le Guide de configuration et de référence rapide, qui fournit des instructions sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, une liste détaillée des ressources et de la documentation disponibles à propos de votre ordinateur, des instructions sur l'utilisation du CD Dell Precision ResourceCD livré avec votre ordinateur, et des informations sur les diagnostics et le dépannage. • Un guide d'installation du système d'exploitation, qui fournit des informations sur la réinstallation de votre système d'exploitation.30 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com • La documentation fournie avec toutes les options achetées à part pour votre ordinateur. • Les mises à jour de la documentation Dell, qui sont habituellement situées sur votre disque dur. Lisez ces documents d'abord car ils peuvent contenir des informations qui supplantent les informations des autres documents. PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes afin d’assurer votre propre sécurité et de protéger votre ordinateur et votre environnement de travail contre d'éventuels dommages. Généralités • N'essayez pas de réviser votre ordinateur vous-même si vous n'êtes pas un technicien de service qualifié. Suivez toujours les instructions d'installation à la lettre. • Pour éviter les décharges électriques, branchez les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et des périphériques dans des prises de terre. Ces câbles sont équipés de prises à trois broches pour assurer une bonne mise à la terre. N'utilisez pas de connecteur adapteur et ne retirez pas la broche de mise à la terre d'un câble. Si vous devez utiliser une rallonge, utilisez une rallonge à 3 fils avec prises de terre. • Pour éliminer les risques de décharge électrique, n'utilisez pas votre ordinateur pendant un orage. • Pour éliminer les risques de décharge électrique, ne branchez et ne débranchez aucun câble, et ne procédez pas à l'entretien ou à la reconfiguration de ce produit pendant un orage. • Si votre ordinateur comporte un modem, le câble utilisé avec le modem doit être fabriqué avec un fil de calibre de 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge [norme américaine des dimensions de fils]) minimal et une prise modulaire RJ-11 conforme aux normes FCC.Guide d'informations du système 31 • Avant de nettoyer votre ordinateur, débranchez-le de sa prise de courant. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un chiffon légèrement humide. N'utilisez pas de nettoyant liquide ou en bombe, car il pourrait contenir des produits inflammables. • Pour ne pas endommager la carte système, patientez 5 secondes après avoir éteint l'ordinateur avant de déconnecter un périphérique de l'ordinateur. • Pour éviter de court-circuiter votre ordinateur en débranchant un câble de réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de la carte réseau à l'arrière de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise de réseau. Pour rebrancher un câble de réseau à votre ordinateur, branchez d'abord le câble à la prise du réseau, puis dans la carte réseau. • Afin de protéger votre ordinateur des augmentations et diminutions soudaines et passagères de courant, utilisez un limiteur de surtension, un onduleur ou un UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [système d'alimentation sans coupure]). • Ne posez rien sur les câbles de votre ordinateur et placez les câbles de telle sorte que l'on ne puisse pas marcher ou trébucher dessus. • N’insérez pas d’objets dans les ouvertures de votre ordinateur. Cela pourrait courtcircuiter les composants et provoquer un incendie ou une décharge électrique. • Placez l'ordinateur à l'écart des radiateurs et autres sources de chaleur. Ne bloquez pas les ouvertures de refroidissement. Évitez de mettre des feuilles de papier sous votre ordinateur ; ne mettez pas votre ordinateur dans une enceinte murale fermée, ni sur un lit, un canapé ou un tapis. • Ne renversez ni aliments ni liquides sur votre ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur est mouillé, consultez le Guide d'utilisation. PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité (suite)32 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur Lorsque vous utilisez votre ordinateur, respectez les consignes de manipulation sans danger suivantes. PRÉCAUTION : N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur si l'un des panneaux (y compris les capots de l'ordinateur, les cadres, les languettes métalliques, les caches du panneau avant, etc.) est retiré. • Votre ordinateur est équipé d'un des éléments suivants : – Un bloc d'alimentation à tension fixe : les ordinateurs dotés d'un bloc d'alimentation à tension fixe n'ont pas de sélecteur de tension sur le panneau arrière et ne fonctionnent qu'à une tension (consultez l'étiquette réglementaire à l'extérieur de l'ordinateur pour connaître sa tension de fonctionnement). – Un circuit de tension à sélection automatique : les ordinateurs qui ont un circuit de tension à sélection automatique n'ont pas de sélecteur de tension sur le panneau arrière et détectent automatiquement la tension de fonctionnement correcte. – Un sélecteur de tension manuel : les ordinateurs équipés d'un sélecteur de tension sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur doivent être réglés manuellement pour fonctionner à la tension de fonctionnement adéquate. Pour éviter d'endommager un ordinateur muni d'un sélecteur de tension manuel, réglez le sélecteur sur la tension qui se rapproche le plus de l'alimentation en CA disponible là où vous vous trouvez. AVIS : Au Japon, le sélecteur de tension doit être réglé sur 115 V bien que la tension du CA soit de 100 V. Assurez-vous aussi que votre moniteur et les périphériques connectés sont approuvés pour fonctionner avec le CA disponible là où vous vous trouvez. • Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, débranchez l'ordinateur pour éviter les décharges électriques et ne pas endommager la carte système. Certains composants de la carte système continuent à être alimentés tant que l'ordinateur est connecté à l'alimentation en CA.Guide d'informations du système 33 Interventions à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur Avant d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur, suivez ces étapes dans l'ordre indiqué. PRÉCAUTION : Ne tentez pas de réviser votre ordinateur vous-même, sauf si les explications nécessaires se trouvent dans la documentation en ligne de Dell™ ou si des instructions particulières vous sont fournies d'une autre façon par Dell. Suivez toujours les instructions d'installation et d'entretien à la lettre. AVIS : Pour ne pas endommager la carte système, patientez 5 secondes après avoir éteint l'ordinateur avant de retirer un composant de la carte système ou de déconnecter un périphérique de l'ordinateur. 1 Exécutez un arrêt normal de l'ordinateur en utilisant le menu du système d'exploitation. 2 Éteignez votre ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont raccordés. 3 Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte du châssis, comme le métal autour des ouvertures de connecteur de cartes à l'arrière de l'ordinateur, avant de toucher quoi que ce soit à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Pendant que vous travaillez, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur pour dissiper l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes. 4 Débranchez votre ordinateur et ses périphériques, y compris le moniteur, de leurs prises de courant. Déconnectez également tous les fils de téléphone et de télécommunication de l’ordinateur. Ceci diminue le risque de blessure corporelle ou d'électrocution. De plus, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité suivantes qui s'appliquent à votre cas : • Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur son connecteur ou sur sa boucle de serrage, et non pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis d'un connecteur à languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage avant de déconnecter le câble. Lorsque vous séparez des connecteurs, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas tordre leurs broches. De même, avant de raccorder un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés. • Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les composants ou les contacts d’une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la patte de montage métallique. Tenez un composant comme un puce de microprocesseur par les bords, et non pas par les broches. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur (suite)34 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com PRÉCAUTION : Une nouvelle pile mal installée risque d'exploser. Remplacez la pile par une pile de type identique ou d'un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant. Ne jetez pas la pile avec les ordures ménagères. Contactez le service de ramassage des ordures local pour trouver le lieu de dépôt des piles le plus proche. Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques L'électricité statique est susceptible d'endommager les composants internes sensibles. Pour éviter les dommages électrostatiques, déchargez l'électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher des composants électroniques de votre ordinateur, comme le microprocesseur, par exemple. Pour cela, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre travail à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte, pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait s'être accumulée sur votre corps. Vous pouvez aussi prendre les mesures suivantes pour éviter les dommages liés aux ESD (ElectroStatic Discharges [décharges électrostatiques]) : • Ne sortez pas les composants de leur emballage antistatique tant que vous n'êtes pas prêt à les installer dans l'ordinateur. Juste avant de déballer l'emballage antistatique, déchargez bien l'électricité statique de votre corps. • Pour transporter un composant électrostatique sensible, mettez-le dans une boîte ou un emballage antistatique. • Manipulez les composants électrostatiques sensibles dans une zone protégée contre l'électricité statique. Si possible, utilisez des tapis de sol et des revêtements de plan de travail antistatiques. Conseils en ergonomie PRÉCAUTION : Une mauvaise utilisation ou une utilisation prolongée du clavier peut provoquer des blessures. PRÉCAUTION : Le fait de regarder l’écran de votre moniteur pendant de longues périodes peut provoquer une fatigue oculaire. Pour un maximum de confort et d'efficacité, suivez les conseils d'ordre ergonomique du Guide d'utilisation lors de l'installation et de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur (suite)Guide d'informations du système 35 Avis réglementaires Les EMI (ElectroMagnetic Interference [perturbations électromagnétiques]) correspondent aux signaux et aux émissions, transmis dans l'espace libre ou par conduction sur les câbles d'alimentation ou de signalisation, susceptibles de nuire au fonctionnement du service de radionavigation ou de tout autre service de sécurité, ou encore de dégrader, d'entraver ou d'interrompre de façon répétée le service autorisé des radiocommunications. Les services de radiocommunication comprennent, entre autres, la radiodiffusion commerciale AM/FM, la diffusion télévisée, la téléphonie cellulaire, le radar, le contrôle du trafic aérien, la télémessagerie et les PCS (Personal Communication Services [services de communication personnelle]). Ces services dûment autorisés, au même titre que les émetteurs non intentionnels tels que les appareils numériques, y compris les systèmes informatiques, contribuent à l'environnement électromagnétique. La compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) correspond à la capacité des éléments d'un équipement électronique de fonctionner correctement ensemble dans un environnement électronique. Bien que ce système informatique ait été conçu et construit pour être conforme aux restrictions relatives aux EMI édictées par les organismes de réglementation, il n'existe aucune garantie que ces perturbations ne se produiront pas dans le cadre d'une installation particulière. Si cet équipement perturbe les services de Mise au rebut des piles Votre ordinateur utiliser une pile-bouton au lithium. La pile-bouton au lithium est une pile longue durée, et il est très possible que vous n'ayez jamais besoin de la remplacer.Toutefois, si vous avez besoin de remplacer la pile, consultez le Guide d'utilisation. Ne jetez pas la pile avec les ordures ménagères. Contactez le service de ramassage des ordures local pour trouver le lieu de dépôt des piles le plus proche. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur (suite)36 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com radiocommunication, ce qui peut être déterminé en l'éteignant puis en le rallumant, vous devriez essayer de corriger ces perturbations en appliquant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : • Réorientez l'antenne de réception. • Déplacez l'ordinateur par rapport au récepteur. • Éloignez l'ordinateur du récepteur. • Branchez l'ordinateur dans une prise différente afin que ce dernier et le récepteur soient sur des circuits de dérivation d'alimentation différents. Au besoin, consultez un représentant du support technique de Dell ou un technicien de radiotélévision qualifié pour obtenir des suggestions supplémentaires. Pour des informations supplémentaires sur la réglementation, consultez votre Guide d'utilisation.Guide d'informations du système 37 Informations sur les NOM (Mexique uniquement) Les informations suivantes sont inscrites sur le ou les appareils décrits dans ce document conformément aux exigences des normes officielles mexicaines (NOM) : Exportateur : Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importateur : Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Envoyer à : Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peñon de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Numéro de modèle : Consommation de courant : WHM : 6,0/3,0 A WHL : 6,0/3,0 A DHS : 2,0/1,0 A DHM : 3,0/1,5 A Tension d'alimentation : 115/230 VCA Fréquence : 60–50 Hz38 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.comGuide d'informations du système 39 Garanties limitées et règles de retour Le matériel Dell acheté aux États-Unis ou au Canada est couvert par une garantie limitée de 90 jours, d'un an, de deux ans, de trois ans ou de quatre ans (États-Unis uniquement). Pour déterminer quelle garantie vous avez acheté, reportez-vous à la facture Dell qui a été fournie avec votre ordinateur. Les sections suivantes décrivent les garanties limitées aux États-Unis, les règles de retour aux États-Unis, les garanties limitées au Canada et la garantie du fabricant en Amérique latine et aux Caraïbes. Garantie limitée pour le Canada Garantie limitée d'un an (Canada) Dell Computer Corporation (« Dell ») fabrique ses produits matériels à partir de pièces et de composants neufs ou comme neufs conformément aux normes en vigueur dans l'industrie. Dell garantit les produits matériels qu’il fabrique contre tout défaut matériel et de fabrication. La garantie limitée est valable pendant un an à compter de la date de facturation, comme cela est décrit en détail dans le texte qui suit. Les dommages survenus en cours de livraison sont couverts par cette garantie limitée. Ceci mis à part, cette garantie limitée ne couvre pas les dommages dus à des causes externes, y compris les accidents, les abus, les problèmes d’électricité, les interventions non autorisées par Dell, une utilisation non conforme aux instructions du produit, le fait de ne pas effectuer les révisions exigées et les problèmes dus à l’utilisation de pièces ou de composants non fournis par Dell. Cette garantie limitée ne couvre aucun des articles faisant partie des rubriques suivantes : logiciels ; périphériques externes (sauf si cela est spécifiquement mentionné) ; accessoires ou pièces ajoutés à un système Dell après qu'il ait été livré ; accessoires ou pièces ajoutés à un système Dell par le département d'intégration de systèmes de Dell ; accessoires ou pièces qui ne sont pas installés par Dell ; ou produits Dell Software and Peripherals. Les moniteurs, les claviers et les souris de marque Dell ou qui font partie de la liste de prix standard de Dell sont couverts par cette garantie limitée ; tous les autres moniteurs, claviers et souris (notamment ceux qui sont vendus par le programme Dell Software and Peripherals) ne sont pas couverts. Dell réparera ou remplacera les produits couverts par cette garantie limitée s'ils sont renvoyés à l'atelier Dell. Pour obtenir un dépannage sous garantie, vous devez contacter le support technique clientèle de Dell pendant la période de garantie. Consultez la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide d'utilisation pour trouver les informations de contact appropriées pour obtenir un service clientèle. Si une réparation sous garantie est nécessaire, Dell vous fournira un numéro d’autorisation de retour de matériel. Vous devez renvoyer les produits à Dell dans leur emballage d’origine ou dans un emballage équivalent, payer les frais d’expédition à l’avance, et assurer l’envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant le transport. Dans la mesure du possible, Dell vous renverra (à ses frais) le produit réparé ou un remplacement si vous utilisez une adresse au Canada. Les frais d'envoi seront payés à la réception pour les autres adresses. REMARQUE : Avant d'envoyer le ou les produits à Dell, sauvegardez les données des disques durs et des autres dispositifs de stockage des produits. Retirez les médias amovibles comme les disquettes, les CD et les cartes PC. Dell ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données ou de logiciels. Dell est propriétaire de toutes les pièces retirées des produits réparés. Dell utilise des pièces neuves ou remises à neuf provenant de divers fabricants pour les réparations sous garantie et pour la fabrication des produits de remplacement. Quand Dell répare ou remplace un produit, le terme de sa garantie n'est pas prorogé.40 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com DELL NE FOURNIT AUCUNE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPLICITE AU-DELÀ DE CELLES EXPRIMÉES DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE.DELL REFUSE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS, EXPLICITES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE À UN USAGE PARTICULIER.DANS LES ÉTATS (OU JURIDICTIONS) QUI N'AUTORISENT PAS DE LIMITATION SUR LES GARANTIES OU CONDITIONS TACITES, CETTE LIMITATION NE S'APPLIQUE PAS. LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL POUR LE FONCTIONNEMENT DÉFECTUEUX ET LES DÉFAUTS DU MATÉRIEL SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT COMME INDIQUÉ DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE.CES GARANTIES VOUS DONNENT DES DROITS SPÉCIFIQUES ET VOUS POUVEZ AVOIR D'AUTRES DROITS QUI VARIENT D'ÉTAT EN ÉTAT (OU DE JURIDICTION EN JURIDICTION). DELL NE PEUT ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE AU-DELÀ DES REMÈDES INDIQUÉS DANS CETTE DÉCLARATION DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, OU EN CAS DE DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, PARTICULIERS, PUNITIFS OU INDUITS Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, EN CAS DE NON-DISPONIBILITÉ D'UN PRODUIT OU DE PERTE DE DONNÉES OU DE LOGICIEL. DANS LES ÉTATS (OU JURIDICTIONS) QUI NE PERMETTENT PAS D'EXCLUSION OU DE LIMITES AUX DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, PARTICULIERS, PUNITIFS OU INDUITS, L'EXCLUSION OU LES LIMITES PRÉCÉDENTES NE S'APPLIQUENT PAS. Ces conditions ne s'appliquent qu'à la garantie limitée d'un an de Dell. Pour les conditions concernant les contrats de service couvrant votre système, reportez-vous à votre facture ou au contrat de service que vous recevrez séparément. Si Dell choisit d'échanger un produit ou une partie d'un produit, l’échange se fera en conformité aux règles d’échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l'échange. Au cas où Dell émet un numéro d’autorisation de retour du matériel, Dell doit recevoir le ou les produits à réparer avant l’expiration de la garantie afin que la réparation soit couverte par la garantie limitée. Garantie limitée de deux ans (Canada uniquement) Dell Computer Corporation (« Dell ») fabrique ses produits matériels à partir de pièces et de composants neufs ou comme neufs conformément aux normes en vigueur dans l'industrie. Dell garantit les produits matériels qu’il fabrique contre tout défaut matériel et de fabrication. La garantie est valable pendant deux ans à compter de la date de facturation, comme le décrit le texte qui suit. Les dommages survenus en cours de livraison sont couverts par cette garantie limitée. Ceci mis à part, cette garantie limitée ne couvre pas les dommages dus à des causes externes, y compris les accidents, les abus, les problèmes d’électricité, les interventions non autorisées par Dell, une utilisation non conforme aux instructions du produit, le fait de ne pas effectuer les révisions exigées et les problèmes dus à l’utilisation de pièces ou de composants non fournis par Dell. Cette garantie limitée ne couvre aucun des articles faisant partie des rubriques suivantes : logiciels ; périphériques externes (sauf si cela est spécifiquement mentionné) ; accessoires ou pièces ajoutés à un système Dell après qu'il ait été livré ; accessoires ou pièces ajoutés à un système Dell par le département d'intégration de systèmes de Dell ; accessoires ou pièces qui ne sont pas installés par Dell ; ou produits Dell Software and Peripherals. Les moniteurs, les claviers et les souris de marque Dell ou qui font partie de la liste de prix standard de Dell sont couverts par cette garantie limitée ; tous les autres moniteurs, claviers et souris (notamment ceux qui sont vendus par le programme Dell Software and Peripherals) ne sont pas couverts. Les batteries pour ordinateurs portables ne sont couvertes que pendant la première année de cette garantie limitée.Guide d'informations du système 41 Première année de la garantie limitée Pendant la première année à partir de la date de facturation, Dell réparera ou remplacera les produits couverts par cette garantie limitée qui sont retournés à l'atelier de Dell. Pour obtenir un dépannage sous garantie, vous devez contacter le support technique clientèle de Dell pendant la période de garantie. Consultez la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide d'utilisation pour trouver les informations de contact appropriées pour obtenir un service clientèle. Si une réparation sous garantie est nécessaire, Dell vous fournira un numéro d’autorisation de retour de matériel. Vous devez renvoyer les produits à Dell dans leur emballage d’origine ou dans un emballage équivalent, payer les frais d’expédition à l’avance, et assurer l’envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant le transport. Dans la mesure du possible, Dell vous renverra à ses frais le produit réparé ou un remplacement si vous utilisez une adresse au Canada. Les frais d'envoi seront payés à la réception pour les autres adresses. REMARQUE : Avant d'envoyer le ou les produits à Dell, sauvegardez les données des disques durs et des autres dispositifs de stockage des produits. Retirez les médias amovibles comme les disquettes, les CD et les cartes PC. Dell ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données ou de logiciels. Dell est propriétaire de toutes les pièces retirées des produits réparés. Dell utilise des pièces neuves ou remises à neuf provenant de divers fabricants pour les réparations sous garantie et pour la fabrication des produits de remplacement. Quand Dell répare ou remplace un produit, le terme de sa garantie n'est pas prorogé. Deuxième année de la garantie limitée Pendant la deuxième année de cette garantie limitée, Dell fournira, sur une base d’échange et conformément aux règles d'échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l'échange, des pièces de remplacement si des pièces doivent être remplacées dans un produit matériel Dell couvert par cette garantie limitée. Vous devez signaler chaque panne de matériel au support technique clientèle de Dell pour que Dell convienne que la pièce doit être remplacée et expédie la pièce de remplacement. Dans la mesure du possible, Dell expédiera les pièces à ses frais si vous utilisez une adresse au Canada. Les frais d'envoi seront payés à la réception pour les autres adresses. Dell inclura un emballage affranchi avec chaque pièce de remplacement pour que vous renvoyiez la pièce remplacée à Dell. Les pièces de remplacement sont neuves ou remises à neuf. Dell peut fournir des pièces de remplacement provenant de divers fabricants. La pièce de remplacement est couverte par la garantie pendant le reste de la période de garantie limitée. Vous paierez les pièces de remplacement à Dell si la pièce remplacée n’est pas renvoyée à Dell. Le renvoi des pièces remplacées et votre obligation de payer les pièces de remplacement si vous ne renvoyez pas les pièces remplacées à Dell seront conformes aux règles d’échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l’échange. Vous êtes pleinement responsable de vos logiciels et de vos données. Dell n’a pas à vous indiquer ou à vous rappeler les procédures de sauvegarde et les autres procédures appropriées. Conditions générales DELL NE FOURNIT AUCUNE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPLICITE AU-DELÀ DE CELLES EXPRIMÉES DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE.DELL REFUSE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS, EXPLICITES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE À UN USAGE PARTICULIER.DANS LES ÉTATS (OU JURIDICTIONS) QUI N'AUTORISENT PAS DE LIMITATION SUR LES GARANTIES OU CONDITIONS TACITES, CETTE LIMITATION NE S'APPLIQUE PAS. LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL POUR LE FONCTIONNEMENT DÉFECTUEUX ET LES DÉFAUTS DU MATÉRIEL SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT COMME INDIQUÉ DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE.CES GARANTIES VOUS DONNENT DES DROITS SPÉCIFIQUES ET VOUS POUVEZ AVOIR D'AUTRES DROITS QUI VARIENT D'ÉTAT EN ÉTAT (OU DE JURIDICTION EN JURIDICTION).42 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com DELL NE PEUT ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE AU-DELÀ DES REMÈDES INDIQUÉS DANS CETTE DÉCLARATION DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, OU EN CAS DE DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, PARTICULIERS, PUNITIFS OU INDUITS Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, EN CAS DE NON-DISPONIBILITÉ D'UN PRODUIT OU DE PERTE DE DONNÉES OU DE LOGICIEL. DANS LES ÉTATS (OU JURIDICTIONS) QUI NE PERMETTENT PAS D'EXCLUSION OU DE LIMITES AUX DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, PARTICULIERS, PUNITIFS OU INDUITS, L'EXCLUSION OU LES LIMITES PRÉCÉDENTES NE S'APPLIQUENT PAS. Ces conditions ne s'appliquent qu'à la garantie limitée de deux ans de Dell. Pour les conditions concernant les contrats de service couvrant votre système, reportez-vous à votre facture ou au contrat de service que vous recevrez séparément. Si Dell choisit d'échanger un système ou un composant, l’échange se fera en conformité aux règles d’échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l'échange. Au cas où Dell émet un numéro d’autorisation de retour du matériel, Dell doit recevoir le ou les produits à réparer avant l’expiration de la garantie afin que la réparation soit couverte par la garantie limitée. Garantie limitée de trois ans (Canada) Dell Computer Corporation (« Dell ») fabrique ses produits matériels à partir de pièces et de composants neufs ou comme neufs conformément aux normes en vigueur dans l'industrie. Dell garantit les produits matériels qu’il fabrique contre tout défaut matériel et de fabrication. La garantie est valable pendant trois ans à compter de la date de facturation, comme le décrit le texte qui suit. Les dommages survenus en cours de livraison sont couverts par cette garantie limitée. Ceci mis à part, cette garantie limitée ne couvre pas les dommages dus à des causes externes, y compris les accidents, les abus, les problèmes d’électricité, les interventions non autorisées par Dell, une utilisation non conforme aux instructions du produit, le fait de ne pas effectuer les révisions exigées et les problèmes dus à l’utilisation de pièces ou de composants non fournis par Dell. Cette garantie limitée ne couvre aucun des articles faisant partie des rubriques suivantes : logiciels ; périphériques externes (sauf si cela est spécifiquement mentionné) ; accessoires ou pièces ajoutés à un système Dell après qu'il ait été livré ; accessoires ou pièces ajoutés à un système Dell par le département d'intégration de systèmes de Dell ; accessoires ou pièces qui ne sont pas installés par Dell ; ou produits Dell Software and Peripherals. Les moniteurs, les claviers et les souris de marque Dell ou qui font partie de la liste de prix standard de Dell sont couverts par cette garantie limitée ; tous les autres moniteurs, claviers et souris (notamment ceux qui sont vendus par le programme Dell Software and Peripherals) ne sont pas couverts. Les batteries pour ordinateurs portables ne sont couvertes que pendant la première année de cette garantie limitée. Première année de la garantie limitée Pendant la première année à partir de la date de facturation, Dell réparera ou remplacera les produits couverts par cette garantie limitée qui sont retournés à l'atelier de Dell. Pour obtenir un dépannage sous garantie, vous devez contacter le support technique clientèle de Dell pendant la période de garantie. Pour obtenir un dépannage sous garantie, vous devez contacter le support technique clientèle de Dell pendant la période de garantie. Consultez la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide d'utilisation pour trouver les informations de contact appropriées pour obtenir un service clientèle. Si une réparation sous garantie est nécessaire, Dell vous fournira un numéro d’autorisation de retour de matériel. Vous devez renvoyer les produits à Dell dans leur emballage d’origine ou dans un emballage équivalent, payer les frais d’expédition à l’avance, et assurer l’envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant le transport. Dans la mesure du possible, Dell vous renverra à ses frais le produit réparé ou un remplacement si vous utilisez une adresse au Canada. Les frais d'envoi seront payés à la réception pour les autres adresses.Guide d'informations du système 43 REMARQUE : Avant d'envoyer le ou les produits à Dell, sauvegardez les données des disques durs et des autres dispositifs de stockage des produits. Retirez les médias amovibles comme les disquettes, les CD et les cartes PC. Dell ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données ou de logiciels. Dell est propriétaire de toutes les pièces retirées des produits réparés. Dell utilise des pièces neuves ou remises à neuf provenant de divers fabricants pour les réparations sous garantie et pour la fabrication des produits de remplacement. Quand Dell répare ou remplace un produit, le terme de sa garantie n'est pas prorogé. Pendant les deuxième et troisième années de la garantie limitée Pendant les deuxième et troisième années de cette garantie limitée, Dell fournira, sur une base d’échange et conformément aux règles d'échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l'échange, des pièces de remplacement si des pièces doivent être remplacées dans un produit matériel Dell couvert par cette garantie limitée. Vous devez signaler chaque panne de matériel au support technique clientèle de Dell pour que Dell convienne que la pièce doit être remplacée et expédie la pièce de remplacement. Dans la mesure du possible, Dell expédiera les pièces à ses frais si vous utilisez une adresse au Canada. Les frais d'envoi seront payés à la réception pour les autres adresses. Dell inclura un emballage affranchi avec chaque pièce de remplacement pour que vous renvoyiez la pièce remplacée à Dell. Les pièces de remplacement sont neuves ou remises à neuf. Dell peut fournir des pièces de remplacement provenant de divers fabricants. La pièce de remplacement est couverte par la garantie pendant le reste de la période de garantie limitée. Vous paierez les pièces de remplacement à Dell si la pièce remplacée n’est pas renvoyée à Dell. Le renvoi des pièces remplacées et votre obligation de payer les pièces de remplacement si vous ne renvoyez pas les pièces remplacées à Dell seront conformes aux règles d’échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l’échange. Vous êtes pleinement responsable de vos logiciels et de vos données. Dell n’a pas à vous indiquer ou à vous rappeler les procédures de sauvegarde et les autres procédures appropriées. Conditions générales DELL NE FOURNIT AUCUNE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPLICITE AU-DELÀ DE CELLES EXPRIMÉES DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE.DELL REFUSE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS, EXPLICITES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE À UN USAGE PARTICULIER.DANS LES ÉTATS (OU JURIDICTIONS) QUI N'AUTORISENT PAS DE LIMITATION SUR LES GARANTIES OU CONDITIONS TACITES, CETTE LIMITATION NE S'APPLIQUE PAS. LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL POUR LE FONCTIONNEMENT DÉFECTUEUX ET LES DÉFAUTS DU MATÉRIEL SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT COMME INDIQUÉ DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE.CES GARANTIES VOUS DONNENT DES DROITS SPÉCIFIQUES ET VOUS POUVEZ AVOIR D'AUTRES DROITS QUI VARIENT D'ÉTAT EN ÉTAT (OU DE JURIDICTION EN JURIDICTION). DELL NE PEUT ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE AU-DELÀ DES REMÈDES INDIQUÉS DANS CETTE DÉCLARATION DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, OU EN CAS DE DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, PARTICULIERS, PUNITIFS OU INDUITS Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, EN CAS DE NON-DISPONIBILITÉ D'UN PRODUIT OU DE PERTE DE DONNÉES OU DE LOGICIEL. DANS LES ÉTATS (OU JURIDICTIONS) QUI NE PERMETTENT PAS D'EXCLUSION OU DE LIMITES AUX DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, PARTICULIERS, PUNITIFS OU INDUITS, L'EXCLUSION OU LES LIMITES PRÉCÉDENTES NE S'APPLIQUENT PAS. Ces conditions ne s'appliquent qu'à la garantie limitée de trois ans de Dell. Pour les conditions concernant les contrats de service couvrant votre système, reportez-vous à votre facture ou au contrat de service que vous recevrez séparément.44 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Si Dell choisit d'échanger un système ou un composant, l’échange se fera en conformité aux règles d’échange de Dell en vigueur à la date de l'échange. Au cas où Dell émet un numéro d’autorisation de retour du matériel, Dell doit recevoir le ou les produits à réparer avant l’expiration de la garantie afin que la réparation soit couverte par la garantie limitée. Déclaration de garantie Intel® pour les processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® uniquement (États-Unis et Canada uniquement)Guide d'informations du système 4546 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Precision™ Workstation Guía de información del sistemaNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA indica información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de una mejor manera. AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños al hardware o pérdida de datos y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un peligro potencial de que se produzcan daños en la propiedad, lesiones personales o la muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede ser modificada sin previo aviso. © 2001–2002 Dell Computer Corporation. Reservados todos los derechos. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Computer Corporation. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell el logotipo DELL y Dell Precision son marcas comerciales de Dell Computer Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Computer Corporation renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Julio de 2002 P/N 88HYD Rev. A04Contenido 49 Contenido Documentación de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Guía del usuario de Dell Precision Workstation . . . . . . . . . 51 Documentación adicional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 PRECAUCIÓN: Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Al usar su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Al trabajar en el interior de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Protección contra descargas electrostáticas . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Hábitos de ergonomía con su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Desecho de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Notificaciones reglamentarias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Información para NOM (únicamente para México) . . . . . . . 59 Garantías limitadas y política de devoluciones . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Garantía del fabricante para el usuario final por un año (únicamente Latinoamérica y el Caribe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6150 ContenidoGuía de información del sistema 51 Documentación de Dell Este documento contiene información de seguridad, regulaciones y garantía acerca de su equipo Dell Precision™ WorkStation. También proporciona información acerca de la documentación adicional para el equipo. Guía del usuario de Dell Precision Workstation La Guía del usuario viene instalada en la unidad de disco duro e incluye descripciones de los componentes del equipo, instrucciones para desmontar e instalar piezas, información sobre cómo usar la configuración del sistema, información de diagnósticos y solución de problemas y especificaciones técnicas. Para acceder a la Guía del usuario, siga las instrucciones para su sistema operativo. NOTA: La Guía del usuario y otros documentos del equipo también se encuentra en el CD Dell Precision ResourceCD y en el sitio web de asistencia Dell, en la dirección support.dell.com. Si utiliza Microsoft ® Windows® 2000, haga doble clic en el icono User’s Guides (Guías del usuario) que se localiza en la pantalla. Si hace clic sobre el icono, se lanzará el visor de documentos Dell, que le permite ver la documentación del sistema y la de otros periféricos. Si utiliza Windows XP, haga clic en el botón Start (Inicio) y haga clic en Help and Support (Ayuda y asistencia). Documentación adicional Es posible que reciba los siguientes documentos con el equipo: • La Guía de instalación y referencia rápida, que proporciona instrucciones para instalar el equipo, una lista detallada de los recursos y la documentación disponible para su equipo, instrucciones sobre cómo usar el CD Dell Precision ResourceCD incluido con el equipo, e información de diagnósticos y solución de problemas. • La guía de instalación del sistema operativo, que proporciona información necesaria para volver a instalar el sistema operativo. • Cualquier documentación que venga incluida con cualquiera de las opciones que haya comprado de manera separada para el equipo. 52 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Actualizaciones a la documentación de Dell, que normalmente se encuentran en la unidad de disco duro. Lea primero estos documentos ya que es posible que contengan información que substituya la información contenida en otros documentos. PRECAUCIÓN: Instrucciones de seguridad Utilice las pautas de seguridad siguientes para ayudar a garantizar su seguridad personal y ayudar a proteger su equipo y el ambiente de trabajo contra un daño potencial. General • No trate de dar servicio al equipo usted mismo, a menos que sea un técnico capacitado de servicio. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación al pie de la letra. • Para prevenir choques eléctricos, conecte el equipo y los cables de alimentación del dispositivo a sus enchufes eléctricos con conexión apropiada a tierra. Estos cables están equipados con 3 enchufes de clavijas que ayudan a garantizar una conexión a tierra correcta. No utilice enchufes adaptadores ni retire la clavija de conexión a tierra de ningún cable. Si necesita utilizar un cable de extensión, utilice un cable de 3 líneas con enchufes adecuadamente conectados a tierra. • Para ayudar a prevenir descargas eléctricas potenciales, no use el equipo durante tormentas eléctricas. • Para ayudar a prevenir descargas eléctricas potenciales, no conecte ni desconecte los cables, ni realice mantenimiento o reconfiguración de este producto durante una tormenta eléctrica.Guía de información del sistema 53 • Si su equipo incluye un módem, el cable que se utilice con el módem debe estar fabricado con un cable que tenga una medida mínima de 26 AWG (American wire gauge [Medida estadounidense de cables]) y un conector modular RJ-11 compatible con las especificaciones de la FCC. • Antes de limpiar el equipo, desconéctelo del enchufe eléctrico. Limpie el equipo con un paño suave humedecido con agua. No use limpiadores líquidos o en aerosol que puedan contener sustancias inflamables. • Para evitar posibles daños a la placa base, espere 5 segundos una vez apagado el equipo antes de desconectar un dispositivo del equipo. • Para evitar cortocircuitos en el equipo al momento de desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del adaptador de red de la parte posterior del equipo y luego del enchufe de la red. Cuando vuelva a conectar el cable de red al equipo, conecte primero el cable al enchufe de la red y después al adaptador de red. • Para ayudar a proteger su equipo contra altas y bajas de energía eléctrica transitorias y bruscas, utilice un protector contra voltajes extremos, un acondicionador de línea, o un UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [sistema de energía ininterrumpida]). • Asegúrese de que no haya ningún objeto encima de los cables del equipo y de que éstos estén en un lugar en que no puedan pisarse y no se pueda tropezar con ellos. • No inserte ningún objeto en las aberturas del equipo. Puede ocasionar un incendio o sufrir un choque eléctrico al provocar un cortocircuito entre los componentes internos. • Mantenga al equipo alejado de radiadores y fuentes de calor. Asimismo, no obstruya las rendijas de ventilación. Evite colocar papeles sueltos debajo del equipo; no coloque el equipo en una unidad limitada por paredes cerradas o una cama, un sofá o una alfombra. • No derrame comida o líquido sobre el equipo. Si el equipo se moja, consulte la Guía del usuario. PRECAUCIÓN: Instrucciones de seguridad (continuación)54 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Al usar su equipo Cuando utilice el equipo, respete las siguientes pautas de seguridad. PRECAUCIÓN: No permita el funcionamiento del equipo si ha retirado alguna cubierta(s) (incluyendo cubiertas de la PC, biseles, soportes de relleno, carátulas del panel anterior, etc.). • Su equipo está provisto de uno de los siguientes elementos: – Un suministro de energía de voltaje fijo: Los equipos con suministro de energía de voltaje fijo no tienen un interruptor para la selección de voltaje en el panel posterior y funcionan solamente con un voltaje (consulte la etiqueta reglamentaria en el exterior del equipo para saber cuál es su voltaje de operación). – Un circuito de detección automática de voltaje: Los equipos con circuito de detección automática de voltaje no tienen un interruptor para la selección de voltaje en el panel posterior y automáticamente detectan el voltaje de operación correcto. – Un interruptor manual para la selección de voltaje: Los equipos con un interruptor para la selección de voltaje en el panel posterior se deben ajustar manualmente para que funcionen con el voltaje de operación correcto. Para ayudar a prevenir daños a un equipo con un interruptor manual para la selección de voltaje, coloque el interruptor en la posición de voltaje que mejor coincida con la corriente alterna disponible en su localidad. AVISO: El conmutador de selección de voltaje debe marcar la posición 115V incluso si el suministro de corriente alterna disponible en Japón es de 100 V. También asegúrese de que el monitor y los dispositivos conectados estén clasificados eléctricamente para operar con la alimentación de corriente alterna disponible en su localidad. • Antes de trabajar en el interior de la PC, desenchufe el equipo para ayudar a evitar descargas eléctricas o daños a la placa base. Algunos componentes de la placa base reciben energía constantemente siempre que el equipo esté conectado a la corriente alterna.Guía de información del sistema 55 Al trabajar en el interior de su equipo Antes de abrir la cubierta de la PC, realice los siguientes pasos en el orden indicado. PRECAUCIÓN: No intente realizar por sí mismo las operaciones de mantenimiento del equipo, excepto aquéllas que se explican en la documentación en línea Dell™ o en instrucciones que se le hayan por parte de Dell. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación y servicio al pie de la letra. AVISO: Con el fin de prevenir un posible daño a la placa base, espere cinco segundos después de apagar el equipo para desmontar un componente de la placa base o desconectar un dispositivo del equipo. 1 Realice un apagado ordenado del equipo utilizando el menú del sistema operativo. 2 Apague el equipo y los dispositivos conectados al mismo. 3 Conéctese a tierra tocando una superficie metálica sin pintura en el chasis, tal como el metal alrededor de las aberturas de ranuras para tarjetas en la parte posterior del equipo, antes de tocar algún objeto en su interior. Conforme trabaje, toque periódicamente una superficie metálica sin pintura en el chasis del equipo para disipar la electricidad estática que podría dañar los componentes internos. 4 Desconecte el equipo y los dispositivos, incluyendo el monitor, de los enchufes eléctricos. Asimismo, desconecte las líneas de teléfono o de telecomunicaciones conectadas al equipo. Al hacerlo, reduce la posibilidad de lesiones físicas o choques eléctricos. Asimismo, preste atención a las pautas de seguridad correspondientes: • Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión y no del cable mismo. Algunos cables tienen un conector con lengüetas de seguro; si va a desconectar este tipo de cable, oprima las lengüetas hacia adentro antes de desconectarlo. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas de conexión. Asimismo, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. • Maneje con cuidado los componentes y las tarjetas. No toque los componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sujete las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete componentes tales como un chip microprocesador por sus bordes y no por sus patas. Al usar su equipo (continuación)56 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com PRECAUCIÓN: Existe el peligro de que una nueva batería explote si no se instala correctamente. Reemplace la batería únicamente con otra del mismo tipo o su equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. No deseche la batería junto con los desechos domésticos. Comuníquese con su agencia de desechos local para obtener la dirección del depósito de baterías más cercano. Protección contra descargas electrostáticas La electricidad estática puede dañar componentes delicados al interior de su equipo. Para prevenir daños electrostáticos, descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo antes de tocar cualquiera de los componentes electrónicos del equipo, tal como el microprocesador. Puede hacer esto tocando una superficie metálica sin pintura en el chasis del equipo. Mientras continúe trabajando en el interior del equipo, toque periódicamente una superficie metálica sin pintura para eliminar cualquier carga electrostática que su cuerpo pudiera haber acumulado. Usted también puede realizar los pasos siguientes para prevenir un daño causado por descargas electrostáticas: • No saque los componentes de su material de envoltura antiestático hasta que esté listo para instalar el componente en el equipo. Justo antes de retirar el material de envoltura antiestático, descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. • Al trasladar un componente sensible a la electricidad estática, colóquelo primero en un recipiente o material de envoltura antiestático. • Maneje todos los componentes sensibles a la electricidad estática en un área protegida contra electricidad estática. Si es posible, utilice tapetes en el piso y almohadillas para el lugar de trabajo antiestáticos Hábitos de ergonomía con su equipo PRECAUCIÓN: La utilización inapropiada o prolongada del teclado puede ocasionarle una lesión. PRECAUCIÓN: Si mira la pantalla del monitor durante períodos extensos puede lesionar sus ojos. Para trabajar con comodidad y eficiencia, respete las directrices ergonómicas incluidas en la Guía del usuario al configurar y utilizar el equipo. Al usar su equipo (continuación)Guía de información del sistema 57 Notificaciones reglamentarias La EMI (Electromagnetic Interference [interferencia electromagnética]) es cualquier señal o emisión, irradiada en el espacio o conducida mediante cables de alimentación o de señales, que pone en peligro el funcionamiento de dispositivos de navegación por radio u otros dispositivos de seguridad o que degrada seriamente, obstruye o interrumpe repetidamente un servicio de radiocomunicaciones con licencia. Los servicios de radiocomunicaciones incluyen, entre otros, la radiodifusión comercial de AM/FM, la televisión, los servicios de telefonía celular, los radares, el control de tráfico aéreo, los localizadores y los servicios de comunicación personal. Estos servicios con licencia, además de radiadores accidentales como dispositivos digitales, incluidos los equipos computacionales, contribuyen a crear un ambiente electromagnético. La EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility [compatibilidad electromagnética]) es la capacidad de los componentes de equipos electrónicos para funcionar apropiadamente en el ambiente electrónico. Aunque este equipo está diseñado para cumplir con los límites de agencias de reguladoras relativas a la EMI (y se ha determinado que cumple con las mismas), no hay garantía de que no ocurrirán interferencias en una instalación específica. Si este equipo ocasiona una interferencia con los Desecho de la batería El equipo utiliza una batería de célula tipo moneda, de litio. Dicha batería es de larga duración y es muy probable que nunca sea necesario reemplazarla. Sin embargo, en caso que necesite reemplazarla, consulte la Guía del usuario. No deseche la batería junto con los desechos domésticos. Comuníquese con su agencia de desechos local para obtener la dirección del depósito de baterías más cercano. Al usar su equipo (continuación)58 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com servicios de radiocomunicaciones, lo cual puede determinarse apagando y volviendo a encender el equipo, se le sugiere intentar corregir la interferencia mediante uno de los métodos siguientes: • Vuelva a orientar la antena receptora. • Cambie de lugar el equipo con respecto al receptor. • Aleje el equipo del receptor. • Conecte el equipo a un enchufe diferente de manera que el equipo y el receptor estén en circuitos ramales diferentes. Si es necesario, consulte a un representante de Asistencia técnica de Dell o a un técnico de radio/televisión con experiencia para solicitar sugerencias adicionales. Para obtener información reglamentaria adicional, consulte la Guía del usuario.Guía de información del sistema 59 Información para NOM (únicamente para México) La información siguiente se proporciona en el dispositivo o en los dispositivos descritos en este documento, en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Exportador: Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importador: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Enviar a: Dell de México, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.I. Avenida Soles N°. 55 Col. Peñón de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Número de modelo: Rango de corriente de entrada WHM — 6,0/3,0 A WHL — 6,0/3,0 A DHS—2,0/1,0 A DHM—3,0/1,5 A Tensión de alimentación: 115/230 VCA Frecuencia: 60-50 Hz60 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.comGuía de información del sistema 61 Garantías limitadas y política de devoluciones Los productos de la marca Dell que se adquieren en los EE.UU. o Canadá tienen garantía limitada de 90 días, un año, tres años o cuatro años (únicamente en los EE.UU.). Para determinar qué tipo de garantía adquirió, consulte el recibo de Dell que viene con el equipo. Las secciones siguientes describen las garantías limitadas y la política de devoluciones para los EE.UU., las garantías limitadas para Canadá y la garantía del fabricante para Latinoamérica y el Caribe. Garantía del fabricante para el usuario final por un año (únicamente Latinoamérica y el Caribe) Garantía del fabricante Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) garantiza al usuario en acuerdo con las siguientes provisiones que los productos de hardware que llevan su marca, adquiridos por el usuario por medio de una compañía de Dell o un distribuidor de Dell autorizado en Latinoamérica o el Caribe, estarán libres de defectos en materiales, mano de obra y diseño que puedan afectar su uso normal por un periodo de un año a partir de la fecha original de compra. Los productos para los cuales se haga una debida reclamación serán, según la decisión de Dell, reparados o reemplazados a cuenta de Dell. Todas las piezas desmontadas de los equipos reparados son propiedad de Dell. Dell utiliza piezas nuevas y reacondicionadas hechas por varios fabricantes cuando hace reparaciones y en la fabricación de productos de reemplazo. Exclusiones Esta garantía no cubre defectos causados por: instalación, uso o mantenimiento inadecuado o incorrecto; acciones o modificaciones por terceras personas no autorizadas o por el usuario final; daños accidentales o intencionales; o por el desgaste normal. Cómo realizar una reclamación Las reclamaciones deben ser hechas en Latinoamérica o el Caribe poniéndose en contacto con el lugar de ventas de Dell dentro del periodo de garantía. El usuario siempre debe proporcionar un comprobante de adquisición, indicando el nombre y la dirección del vendedor, la fecha de adquisición, números de serie y de modelo, nombre y dirección del cliente, y los detalles de los síntomas y de la configuración al momento en el que ocurrió la falla, incluyendo los dispositivos periféricos y el software que se estaban utilizando. De lo contrario, Dell puede rehusar la demanda. Una vez diagnosticado un defecto bajo la garantía, Dell se encargará del problema y pagará el envío por tierra, así como el seguro de ida y venida al centro de reparación y reemplazo Dell. El usuario se debe encargar de que el producto defectuoso esté disponible para ser recogido debidamente empacado en la caja original o en una caja protectora similar junto con los detalles que se mencionan anteriormente y el número de devolución proporcionado al usuario por Dell. Limitación y derechos legales Dell no hace ninguna otra garantía o declaración similar fuera de la que se menciona anteriormente y esta garantía reemplaza cualquier otra garantía para lo máximo que permita la ley. En la ausencia de leyes aplicables esta garantía será el único y exclusivo recurso del usuario en contra de Dell o cualquiera de sus socios, y ni Dell ni cualquiera de sus socios serán responsables por la pérdida de ganancias o contratos, o cualquier otra pérdida indirecta o consecuente que resulte de la negligencia, incumplimiento de contrato o cualquier otra circunstancia. Esta garantía no perjudica o afecta los derechos estatutarios obligatorios del usuario en contra y/o cualesquiera otros derechos que resulten de otros contratos entre el usuario y Dell y/o cualquier otro vendedor.62 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/ Dell Commercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul – RS - Brasil Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogotá, Colombia Dell Computer de México SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F.www.dell.com | support.dell.com 088HYDA04 Printed in the U.S.A. Imprimé aux U.S.A. Impreso en los EE.UU. P/N 88HYD Rev. A04 Dell Precision™ Mobile Workstation M40 Service Manual  Before You Begin Preparing to Work Inside the Computer Recommended Tools Screw Identification Removing and Replacing Parts System Components Hard Drive Fixed Optical Drive Memory Module Mini PCI Card Assembly Keyboard Assembly Display and Bezel Assemblies Microprocessor Thermal Cooling Assembly Microprocessor Module Video Graphics Board Palmrest Assembly Reserve Battery System Board Assembly Battery and Modular Bay Latch Assemblies Battery Charger Board LED Board Fan Assembly RJ-11/RJ-45 Board Notes, Notices, and Cautions Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2001 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Precision are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. September  2001  NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Back to Contents Page Before You Begin Dell Precision™ Mobile Workstation M40 Service Manual  Preparing to Work Inside the Computer Recommended Tools Screw Identification Preparing to Work Inside the Computer 1. Make sure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save any work in progress and close all open application programs. 3. Turn off the computer and all attached devices. 4. Make sure the computer is undocked. 5. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 6. To avoid possible damage to the system board, wait 10 to 20 seconds and then disconnect any attached devices. 7. Disconnect all other external cables from the computer. 8. Remove any installed PC Cards or plastic blanks from the PC Card slot. 9. Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a flat work surface. 10. Remove the battery from the battery bay. 11. Remove any device installed in the modular bay. 12. To dissipate static electricity while you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 13. Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Recommended Tools The procedures in this manual require the following tools: l #1 magnetized Phillips screwdriver l Small flat-blade screwdriver l Small plastic scribe l Microprocessor extractor l Nonmarring tool l Flash BIOS upgrade program diskette or CD (provided when needed to upgrade the system BIOS) System Orientation NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer: NOTE: Before turning off the computer, make sure the computer is not in a power-management mode. NOTICE: To avoid component damage, always remove any installed batteries before you service the computer. Screw Identification When you are removing and replacing components, photocopy the placemat as a tool to lay out and keep track of the component screws.The placemat provides the number of screws and the sizes. Screw Identification NOTICE: When reinstalling a screw, you must use a screw of the correct diameter and length. Make sure that the screw is properly aligned with its corresponding hole, and avoid overtightening. Screw Placement Map Hard Drive Door Security: M3.0 x 5 mm (1 each) Keyboard to Bottom Case Assembly: M2.5 x 20 mm (4 each; one in memory door and one in mini-PCI door) Display to Base: M2.5 x 6 mm (3 each; 2 at back of system; 1 at flex cable strain relief) Display Bezel: Rubber screw covers (4 each) Plastic screw covers (2 each) M2.5 x 4 mm (6 each) Display Panel to Display Mounting Bracket: M2.0 x 3 mm(6 each) Flex Cable Mounting Bracket to Top Cover: M2.5 x 4 mm (1 each) Video Graphics Board: M2.5 x 8 (3 each) Palmrest to Bottom Case Assembly: M2.5 x 20 mm (9 each) System Board: M2.5 x 4 mm captive washer (3 each) LED Board: M2.0 x 4 mm (2 each)Back to Contents Page Palmrest Bracket: M2.5 x 4 mm (2 each) M2.5 x 20 mm (1 each) Fan Assembly: M2.0 x 4 mm (3 each) RJ-11/RJ-45 Board Assembly: M2.5 x 4 mm (1 each)Back to Contents Page Removing and Replacing Parts Dell Precision™ Mobile Workstation M40 Service Manual  System Components Exploded View Hard Drive System Components Hard Drive Fixed Optical Drive Memory Module Mini PCI Card Assembly Keyboard Assembly Display and Bezel Assemblies Microprocessor Thermal Cooling Assembly Microprocessor Module Video Graphics Board Palmrest Assembly Reserve Battery System Board Assembly Battery and Modular Bay Latch Assemblies Battery Charger Board LED Board Fan Assembly RJ-11/RJ-45 Board NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: Unless otherwise noted, each procedure in this manual assumes that a part can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from the electrical outlet and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: The hard drive is very sensitive to shock. Handle it by its edges (do not squeeze the top of the case), and avoid dropping it. Hard Drive Removing the Hard Drive 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the drive door screw. 3. Pull the hard drive out. Replacing the Hard Drive 1. Gently push the hard drive into the drive bay until the drive door is flush with the computer case. 2. Push down on the drive until it snaps into place. 3. Replace the screw in the hard drive door. Fixed Optical Drive Fixed Optical Drive Removing the Fixed Optical Drive 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom of the computer. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from the electrical outlet and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. 3. Turn the computer over, pull out the pull tab, and use the pull tab to remove the fixed optical drive. Memory Module Removing the Memory Module Cover Memory Module Cover 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the screw. 3. Disengage the metal tabs at the opposite end of the cover. Memory Modules Removing the Memory Modules 1. Remove the memory module cover. 2. To release a memory module from its socket, spread apart the tabs at each side of the module until the module pops up slightly. NOTICE: To keep the pull tab from catching on the captive screw, turn the computer over before removing the fixed optical drive. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and any attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. 3. Lift the memory module out of its socket. Replacing the Memory Modules 1. If you only have one memory module, install it in the socket labeled "DIMM A." Install a second memory module in the socket labeled "DIMM B." 2. Insert the memory module's edge connector into the socket slot at a 45-degree angle and press the module firmly into the slot. 3. Pivot the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not hear a click, remove the module and reinstall it. 4. Insert the metal tabs on the memory module cover into the bottom case assembly, rotate the cover down, and replace the screw. Mini PCI Card Assembly You must remove the Mini PCI Card assembly before the system board assembly can be removed. A Mini PCI Card assembly consists of a modem and NIC combination. A NIC combination must be connected to the wiring harness as appropriate. Mini PCI Card Cover Removing the Mini PCI Card Assembly 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the Mini PCI Card cover. 3. To release the Mini PCI Card assembly, spread the metal securing tabs until the assembly pops up slightly. 4. Disconnect the assembly from the wiring harness. 5. Lift out the assembly and disconnect any attached cables. Replacing the Mini PCI Card Assembly 1. Align the Mini PCI Card assembly with the socket at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI Card into the socket. 2. Connect the wiring harness to the Mini PCI Card assembly. Mini PCI Card Assembly Wiring Harness NOTE: Memory modules are keyed to fit into their sockets in only one direction. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed for correct insertion; do not force the connections. 3. Pivot the Mini PCI Card assembly down until it clicks into place. 4. Replace the Mini PCI Card assembly cover. Keyboard Assembly Keyboard Screws Removing the Keyboard Assembly 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Turn the computer over and remove the four screws labeled with a "circle K." 3. Turn the computer over and open the display. 4. Use a nonmarring tool under the blank key to pry up the keyboard. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: Be careful when handling the keyboard. The keycaps are fragile, easily dislodged, and time-consuming to replace. Keyboard Removal 5. Lift the right end of the keyboard and slide it slightly toward the right side of the computer to disengage the tabs at the left end. 6. Pivot the keyboard and balance it upright on the left side of the computer. Keyboard Cable 7. Disconnect the keyboard cable and lay the keyboard assembly aside. Replacing the Keyboard Assembly 1. While bracing the keyboard assembly upright on its left end, connect the keyboard cable to the interface connector on the system board. 2. Insert the metal tabs at the left end of the keyboard under the edge of the bottom case assembly, and fit the keyboard into place. 3. Check that the keyboard is correctly installed. The keys should be flush with the left and right surfaces of the palmrest. 4. Reinstall the four screws in the holes labeled "circle K." Display and Bezel Assemblies NOTICE: Position the keyboard/track stick flex cable so it is not pinched when you replace the keyboard in the bottom case assembly. Display Assembly Removing the Hinge Cover Hinge Cover 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Use a nonmarring tool to loosen the hinge cover at the back and at each side of the computer. 3. Open the display and lift off the hinge cover. Removing the Display Assembly Display Assembly NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. 1. Remove the hinge cover. Flex Cable 2. Remove the 6-mm screw that secures the display flex cable to the strain relief, and then use the pull loop to remove the display flex cable from the graphics card. 3. Open the display and, from the back of the computer, remove the two screws labeled with a "circle D" that secure the display assembly to the bottom case assembly. 4. With the display in an upright position, lift the display assembly from the bottom case assembly. Display Assembly Bezel and Panel NOTICE: Make sure you remove the flex cable before you remove the display assembly. NOTICE: When reconnecting the flex cable, press down on both ends of the connector, not in the middle. Pressing the middle of the connector can damage fragile components. Removing the Display Assembly Bezel 1. Use a scribe to pry out the four rubber screw covers located across the top of the bezel. 2. Remove the four 4-mm screws located across the top of the bezel. 3. Use a scribe at the indentations to pry out the two plastic screw covers located at the bottom of the bezel. 4. Remove the two 4-mm screws located at the bottom of the bezel. 5. Separate the bezel from the display-assembly top cover. The bezel is secured to the display-assembly top cover with plastic tabs around the sides. Use a plastic scribe to help separate the bezel from the top cover. Removing the Display Panel 1. Remove the hinge cover. 2. Detach the display flex cable from the strain relief and the graphics card. 3. Remove the display assembly bezel. 4. Remove the 4-mm screw securing the plastic flex cable mounting bracket to the top cover assembly. 5. Remove the six 3-mm screws (three on each side) from the right and left sides of the panel. 6. Lift the display panel and flex cable out of the top cover assembly. 7. Disconnect the flex cable from the two connectors (a ZIF and a standard connector) on the display panel assembly. Flex Cable Connectors on Display Panel Replacing the Display Panel 1. Connect the flex cable to the two connectors on the back of the display panel. 2. Place the display panel assembly in the top cover, taking care that the flex cable is in place and is not crushed or crimped. 3. Reinstall the 4-mm screw that secures the flex cable mounting bracket to the top cover. 4. Starting on the left side, use a magnetic screwdriver to reinstall the six 3-mm screws that secure the display panel in the top cover. 5. Reinstall the display flex cable strain-relief screw and reconnect the flex cable to the graphics card. 6. Reinstall the display assembly bezel. Removing the Display Latch Removing the Display Latch 1. Remove the hinge cover. 2. Detach the display flex cable from the strain relief and the graphics card. 3. Remove the display assembly bezel. 4. Remove the display panel from the top cover. 5. Remove the display latch by unsnapping the latch and captive spring. NOTE: Use a magnetic screwdriver to reassemble the display panel in the display. Microprocessor Thermal Cooling Assembly Retaining Clip Removing the Microprocessor Thermal Cooling Assembly 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the keyboard. 3. Remove the hinge cover. 4. Insert a nonmarring flat-blade screwdriver into the latch mechanism at the left side of the microprocessor retaining clip. Pry open the clip by pivoting the top of the screwdriver toward the right side of the computer. Microprocessor Thermal Cooling Assembly 5. Lift out the thermal cooling assembly. Microprocessor Module NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: To ensure maximum cooling for the microprocessor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the microprocessor thermal cooling assembly. The oils in your skin reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal pads. Microprocessor Module Removing the Microprocessor Module 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the keyboard. 3. Remove the hinge cover. 4. Remove the microprocessor thermal cooling assembly. 5. Remove the microprocessor module. a. Loosen the microprocessor socket cam lock screw. The location of the screw and the rotation direction may vary with the socket manufacturer; look for small icons indicating open and locked positions. Microprocessor Cam Lock Screw (Example) b. Use the microprocessor extraction tool to remove the microprocessor module. Replacing the Microprocessor Module NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: To ensure maximum cooling for the microprocessor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the thermal cooling assembly. The oils in your skin reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal pads. NOTICE: When removing the microprocessor module, pull the module straight up. Do not bend the pins. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the microprocessor, hold the screwdriver so that it is perpendicular to the microprocessor when removing the cam lock screw (see "Microprocessor Cam Lock Screw"). NOTICE: Hold the microprocessor down while turning the cam lock screw to prevent intermittent contact between the cam lock screw and microprocessor. NOTICE: If you received a flash BIOS update program diskette or CD with the replacement microprocessor, you must update the BIOS after replacing the microprocessor module. For instructions on updating or reflashing the BIOS, see the Dell Portable Computer BIOS Update Guide. 1. Align the pin-1 triangle on the microprocessor toward the pin-1 triangle in the socket, insert the microprocessor into the socket, and move it around slightly until you feel it settle into the socket. When the microprocessor module is correctly seated, all four corners are aligned to the same height. If one or more corners of the module are higher than the others, the module is not seated correctly. 2. Tighten the cam lock screw. 3. Replace the microprocessor thermal cooling assembly. Closing the Microprocessor Retaining Clip 4. While pressing lightly down on the center of the retaining clip, insert a nonmarring screwdriver into the latch mechanism and pivot the top of the screwdriver away from the clip to close the latch. Video Graphics Board Video Graphics Board NOTICE: Proper seating of the microprocessor module does not require force. NOTICE: A microprocessor module that is not properly seated can result in an intermittent connection and subsequent failures. NOTICE: Hold the microprocessor down while turning the cam lock screw to prevent intermittent contact between the cam lock screw and microprocessor (see "Microprocessor Cam Lock Screw"). NOTICE: Do not over- or under-tighten the screw. Tighten it until the screw indicator points to the "closed" or "locked" indicator on the socket. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. Removing the Video Graphics Board 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the keyboard. 3. Remove the hinge cover. 4. Detach the display flex cable from the strain relief and the graphics card. 5. Remove the three 8-mm screws that secure the video graphics board. 6. Separate the video graphics board from the system board connector. Replacing the Video Graphics Board 1. Align the three screw holes and press down firmly to seat the board in its connector. 2. Replace the three screws. Palmrest Assembly Palmrest Assembly Removing the Palmrest Assembly 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the hard drive and the fixed optical drive. 3. Remove the keyboard. 4. Remove the hinge cover. 5. Remove the display assembly. 6. Turn the computer over. 7. Remove the nine 20-mm screws (labeled with a "circle P") that secure the palmrest to the computer. NOTICE: Make sure the board is correctly and firmly seated before continuing. Failure to do so will cause intermittent video failures. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: The reserve battery provides power to the computer's time RTC and NVRAM when the computer is turned off. Removing the palmrest disconnects the reserve battery and causes the computer to lose the date and time information as well as all user-specified parameters in NVRAM. If possible, make a copy of this information before you disconnect the reserve battery. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the palmrest assembly, you must first remove the display assembly. Palmrest Screws 8. Turn the computer over. 9. Use the pull loop to disconnect the palmrest flex cable from the touch-pad connector on the system board. 10. Carefully lift out the palmrest assembly. Reserve Battery Reserve Battery Removing the Reserve Battery 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the keyboard. 3. Remove the hinge cover. 4. Remove the display assembly. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: The reserve battery provides power to the computer's RTC and NVRAM when the computer is turned off. Removing the battery causes the computer to lose the date and time information as well as all user-specified parameters in NVRAM. If possible, make a copy of this information before you remove the reserve battery. 5. Remove the palmrest assembly. 6. On the underside of the palmrest, disconnect the flex cable from the ZIF connector. Palmrest Flex Cable and Bracket 7. Remove the two 4-mm screws securing the palmrest bracket. 8. While supporting the palmrest flex cable, lift out the palmrest bracket and turn it over. 9. Disconnect the reserve battery cable. 10. Remove the reserve battery: a. Pry the reserve battery free from the metal palmrest bracket. b. Remove the foam-pad remnants from the palmrest bracket. Replacing the Reserve Battery 1. Seat the reserve battery and press it into place. 2. Connect the reserve battery cable. 3. Place the palmrest bracket loosely in the palmrest, and connect the palmrest flex cable to the ZIF connector. 4. Replace the two 4-mm screws that secure the palmrest bracket to the palmrest. System Board Assembly System Board Screws NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. The system board's BIOS chip contains the system service tag number, which is also visible on a bar-code label on the bottom of the computer. The replacement kit for the system board assembly includes a diskette or CD that provides a utility for transferring the service tag number to the replacement system board assembly. Removing the System Board 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the hard drive and the fixed optical drive. 3. Remove any installed Mini PCI Cards. 4. If migrating the memory, remove all installed memory modules. 5. Remove the keyboard. 6. Remove the hinge cover. 7. Remove the display assembly. 8. Remove the palmrest assembly. 9. Remove the video graphics board. 10. Remove the microprocessor thermal cooling assembly. 11. If migrating the microprocessor, remove the microprocessor module. 12. Remove the three 4-mm captive-washer screws from the system board. 13. Remove the 20-mm screw from the center of the LED board. 14. Lift the front of the system board and work it out of the back panel. System Board NOTICE: If you received a flash BIOS update program diskette or CD with the replacement microprocessor, you must update the BIOS after replacing the microprocessor module. For instructions on updating or reflashing the BIOS, see the Dell Portable Computer BIOS Update Guide. Battery and Modular Bay Latch Assemblies Battery and Modular Bay Latch Assemblies Removing and Replacing the Battery and Modular Bay Latch Assemblies 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the keyboard. 3. Remove the hinge cover. 4. Remove the display assembly. 5. Remove the palmrest assembly. 6. Remove a latch button from the bottom case assembly by squeezing the snap tabs in the center of the latch. Apply downward pressure to the tabs while squeezing them together (tweezers work well) to eject the latch button from the bottom of the case without loosening the upper latch assembly (spring and slider). If the upper latch assembly does come loose: a. Reinsert the spring onto the slider, and reinstall both pieces in the latch housing on the inside of the case. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. b. Ensure that the slider is inserted so that the side with the two bumps is facing the back of the case, and the surface with the wear ribs is facing the bottom of the case. 7. Hold the upper latch assembly in place while you snap the new latch button in from underneath the base, making certain the snap tabs are fully engaged in the slider. 8. Ensure that the newly installed latch assembly moves smoothly and freely when pushed and released. Battery Charger Board Battery Charger Board Removing the Battery Charger Board 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the keyboard. 3. Remove the hinge cover. 4. Remove the display assembly. 5. Remove the palmrest assembly. 6. Remove the video graphics board. 7. Lift the battery charger board out of the system board connector. Replacing the Battery Charger Board Align the screw holes on the battery charger board with the screw holes on the bottom case assembly (see Battery Charger Board), and then press the battery charger board down into its connector. LED Board LED Board NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. Removing the LED Board 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the hinge cover. 3. Remove the two 4-mm screws. 4. Lift the LED board away from its connector. Replacing the LED Board 1. Align the two screw holes with the two mounting holes on the bottom case assembly, and press the board into its connector. 2. Replace the two 4-mm screws. Fan Assembly Fan Assembly Removing the Fan Assembly 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the system board. 3. Remove the three 4-mm screws from the fan assembly. 4. Disconnect the two fan cables from the system board. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. 5. Pull the fan assembly away from the back-panel bracket. RJ-11/RJ-45 Board RJ-11 and RJ-45 Connector Covers Removing the Protective Covers From the RJ-11 and RJ-45 Connectors Remove a plastic connector cover (if necessary) by slipping a nonmarring tool into the cutout at the top and pivoting the tool up to disengage the inner securing tab. To replace a connector cover, orient the cover notch-side-up and snap it into the connector cutout. RJ-11/RJ-45 Board Removing the RJ-11/RJ-45 Board 1. Follow the instructions in "Preparing to Work Inside the Computer." 2. Remove the system board. 3. Remove the 4-mm screw from the RJ-11/RJ-45 board. 4. Reach into the enclosure and, while pulling the tall plastic tab away from the board assembly to release it, lift out the assembly. When replacing the RJ-11/RJ-45 board assembly, protect the wiring harness by routing it between the plastic posts. NOTICE: When reconnecting the fan cables, connect the shorter cable to the connector closest to the fan assembly. Route both cables so that they will not be pinched by the thermal cooling assembly. NOTICE: Disconnect the computer and attached devices from electrical outlets and remove any installed batteries. NOTICE: To avoid ESD, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching unpainted metal on the computer. NOTICE: The plastic tab is fragile; pull it back only far enough to remove the board assembly. RJ-11/RJ-45 Board Harness Routing Back to Contents Page Technologie Intel® Active Management v5.0 Guide de l'administrateur Présentation Présentation du produit Modes opérationnels Présentation de l'installation et de la configuration Méthodes de provisionnement Gestion Intel AMT Web GUI Menus et paramètres par défaut Présentation des paramètres du MEBx Menu de configuration ME Menu de configuration d'AMT Appel rapide pour obtenir de l'aide Paramètres par défaut du MEBx Redirection AMT (SOL/IDE-R) Présentation de la redirection AMT Installation et configuration Présentation des méthodes Service de configuration -- Utilisation d'un périphérique USB Service de configuration -- Procédure pour périphérique USB Interface MEBx -- mode Entreprise MEBx Interface -- mode PME Déploiement Pilotes du système d'exploitation Dépannage Dépannage Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2008 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, Latitude, et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel est une marque déposée d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Les autres marques et noms de produits pouvant être utilisés dans ce document sont reconnus comme appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans l'utilisation des marques déposées et des noms de marques ne lui appartenant pas. Octobre 2008 Rév. A00Retour à la page du sommaire Présentation Intel® Active Management Technology (Intel AMT) permet aux sociétés d'administrer aisément leurs ordinateurs en réseau. Les techniciens en informatique peuvent : Détecter les ressources informatiques sur un réseau, que les ordinateurs soient sous ou hors tension – Intel AMT utilise les informations stockées en mémoire système non volatile pour accéder à l'ordinateur. Il est possible d'accéder à tous les ordinateurs, même s'il sont éteints (cette fonction est également appelée accès hors bande ou OOB). Réparer à distance les systèmes, même après des défaillances du système d'exploitation – Vous pouvez accéder à distance aux ordinateurs à des fins de réparation après un dysfonctionnement du logiciel ou une défaillance du système d'exploitation. Grâce aux journaux et aux alertes d'événements hors bande d'Intel AMT, les administrateurs IT peuvent également détecter aisément les éventuels problèmes des ordinateurs. Protéger les réseaux des menaces extérieures tout en gardant à jour la protection des logiciels contre les virus, sur tout le réseau. Support logiciel Plusieurs revendeurs indépendants de logiciels (ISV) créent des logiciels compatibles avec les fonctions d'Intel AMT. Les administrateurs IT disposent donc de nombreuses options d'administration à distance du parc informatique en réseau de leur société. Fonctions et avantages Intel AMT Caractéristiques Avantages Accès hors bande (OOB) Permet l'administration à distance des plates-formes, quels que soient l'alimentation du système et l'état du système d'exploitation Dépannage et restauration à distance Réduit de façon significative les déplacements des techniciens en informatique, ce qui accroît leur efficacité Alertes proactives Diminue le temps d'inactivité et réduit le temps de réparation Suivi à distance du matériel et des logiciels Accroît la vitesse et la précision par rapport au suivi manuel de l'inventaire, ce qui réduit les frais associés à la comptabilité Stockage tiers non volatile Accroît la vitesse et la précision par rapport au suivi manuel de l'inventaire, ce qui réduit les frais associés à la comptabilité * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel. Le MEBx (Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension) est un module ROM en option fourni à Dell™ par Intel ; ce module est inclus au BIOS Dell. Le MEBx a été personnalisé pour les ordinateurs Dell. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Modes opérationnels Intel® AMT peut être configuré en mode opérationnel Entreprise ou PME (PME - Petites et Moyennes Entreprises) (également appelés modèles de provisionnement). Ces deux modes opérationnels prennent en charge la mise en réseau IP dynamique et statique. Si vous utilisez la mise en réseau IP dynamique (DHCP), le nom d'hôte Intel AMT et le nom d'hôte du système d'exploitation doivent correspondre. Vous devez également configurer le système d'exploitation et Intel AMT de sorte à aussi utiliser DHCP. Si vous utilisez la mise en réseau IP statique, l'adresse IP Intel AMT doit être différente de l'adresse IP du système d'exploitation. De plus, le nom d'hôte Intel AMT doit être différent du nom d'hôte du système d'exploitation. Mode Entreprise – Ce mode est conçu pour les organismes de grande taille. Il s'agit d'un mode de mise en réseau avancé qui prend en charge TLS (Transport Layer Security) et exige un service de configuration. Ce mode permet aux administrateurs IT d'installer et de configurer Intel AMT de façon sécurisée pour la gestion à distance. Par défaut, les ordinateurs Dell™ sont configurés sur le mode Entreprise. Ce mode peut être modifié au cours de l'installation et de la configuration. Small Medium Business (SMB) mode (Mode PME) – Ce mode opérationnel simplifié ne prend pas en charge TLS et n'exige pas d'application d'installation. Le mode PME est conçu pour les clients sans console de gestion ISV (independent software vendor - revendeur de logiciels indépendant) et qui ne disposent pas des infrastructures de réseau et de sécurité nécessaires pour utiliser TLS crypté. En mode PME, l'installation et la configuration Intel AMT est un processus manuel exécuté par l'intermédiaire du MEBx (Intel ME BIOS Extension). Ce mode est le plus facile à mettre en œuvre car il exige une infrastructure minimale, mais il est également le mode le moins sécurisé car tout le trafic réseau n'est pas crypté. La configuration Intel AMT définit toutes les autres options Intel AMT non couvertes dans l'installation Intel AMT, telles que l'activation de l'ordinateur pour Serial-Over-LAN (SOL) ou IDE-Redirect (IDE-R). Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres modifiés au cours de la configuration à de nombreuses reprises au cours de la durée de vie de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez apporter des modifications à l'ordinateur localement ou par l'intermédiaire d'une console de gestion. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Présentation de l'installation et de la configuration La liste ci-dessous comprend des termes importants concernant l'installation et la configuration d'Intel® AMT. Installation et configuration – Processus d'entrée, dans les ordinateurs administrés par Intel AMT, de noms d'utilisateur, mots de passe et paramètres réseau permettant l'administration à distance de l'ordinateur. Provisionnement – Opération d'installation et de configuration totale d'Intel AMT. Service de configuration – Application tierce qui termine le provisionnement Intel AMT. WebGUI Intel AMT – Interface à base de navigateur Web assurant une administration à distance limitée des ordinateurs. Vous devez installer et configurer Intel AMT sur un ordinateur avant son utilisation. L'installation d'Intel AMT prépare l'ordinateur pour le mode Intel AMT et active la connectivité réseau. Cette installation ne s'effectue généralement qu'une seule fois au cours de la durée de vie d'un ordinateur. Une fois activé, Intel AMT peut être détecté par un logiciel de gestion sur un réseau. Une fois configuré en mode Entreprise, Intel AMT est prêt à initialiser la configuration de ses propres fonctions. Lorsque tous les éléments réseau obligatoires sont disponibles, il suffit de connecter l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation électrique et au réseau pour qu'Intel AMT initialise automatiquement sa propre configuration. Le service de configuration (une application tierce) termine le processus à votre place. Intel AMT est alors prêt pour la gestion à distance. Habituellement, cette configuration ne prend que quelques secondes. Une fois Intel AMT installé et configuré, vous pouvez reconfigurer la technologie pour répondre aux besoins de votre environnement de travail. Une fois Intel AMT configuré en mode PME, l'ordinateur n'a pas à initialiser quelque configuration que ce soit sur le réseau. Elle est configurée manuellement et est prête à l'utilisation avec l'interface WebGUI d'Intel AMT. États d'installation et de configuration d'Intel AMT L'action d'installation et de configuration d'Intel® AMT est également connue sous le nom de provisionnement. Un ordinateur sur lequel Intel AMT est activé peut être en l'un des trois états d'installation et de configuration : État des valeurs par défaut usine État d'installation État provisionné L'état des valeurs par défaut usine est un état totalement non configuré dans lequel les références de sécurité ne sont pas encore établies et les fonctions Intel AMT ne sont pas encore disponibles aux applications de gestion. Dans cet état, Intel AMT est doté des paramètres définis en usine. L'état d'installation est un état partiellement configuré dans lequel Intel AMT a reçu des informations initiales de réseau et TLS (Transport Layer Security) : un mot de passe administrateur initial, l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS) et l'identificateur de provisionnement (PID). Après son installation, Intel AMT est prêt à recevoir d'un service de configuration les paramètres de configuration . L'état provisionné est un état entièrement configuré dans lequel ME (Intel Management Engine) a été configuré à l'aide d'options d'alimentation et Intel AMT a été configuré avec ses paramètres de sécurité, ses certificats et les paramètres qui activent les fonctions Intel AMT. Les fonctions sont prêtes à interagir avec les applications de gestion dès qu'Intel AMT est configuré. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Méthodes de provisionnement L'opération d'installation et de configuration d'Intel® AMT est connue sous le nom de provisionnement. Il existe trois méthodes de provisionnement d'un ordinateur : Small Business (PME) Enterprise TLS-PKI Enterprise TLS-PSK TLS (Transport Layer Security) est un protocole qui fournit des communications sécurisées sur Internet pour effectuer, entre autres, les opérations suivantes : recherche sur le Web, envoi et réception d'e-mail, de fax et de messages instantanés sur Internet et autres transferts de données. TLS était une méthode héritée de configuration d'Intel AMT sur un réseau isolé séparé du réseau de la société. Un serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) nécessite une connexion réseau secondaire à une autorité de certification (une entité qui émet des certificats numériques) pour la configuration TLS. Initialement, les ordinateurs sont livrés dotés des paramètres usine par défaut avec Intel AMT, prêts pour la configuration et le provisionnement. L'installation Intel AMT doit être exécutée sur ces ordinateurs pour qu'ils passent de l'état paramètres usine par défaut à l'état d'installation. Une fois l'ordinateur en état d'installation, vous pouvez procéder à la configuration manuelle ou vous pouvez le connecter à un réseau où il se connecte avec un SCS et entreprend la configuration Intel AMT en mode Entreprise. Mode PME Le mode PME n'a pas changé depuis AMT v3.0 et signifie en gros aucune sécurité. La configuration PME consiste seulement de trois étapes : 1. Définition du nom d'hôte 2. Configuration des paramètres TCP/IP 3. Définissez le mode de provisionnement sur « PME » Mode Enterprise L'installation et la configuration Intel AMT TLS-PSI et TLS-PSK est habituellement effectuée au sein d'un service IT de société. Les éléments suivants sont obligatoires : Serveur d'installation et de configuration Infrastructure réseau et de sécurité Les ordinateurs Intel AMT en état usine par défaut sont confiés au service IT, qui est responsable de l'installation et de la configuration d'Intel AMT. Le service IT peut utiliser les méthodes décrites ci-dessous pour entrer les informations d'installation Intel AMT, après quoi les ordinateurs sont en mode Enterprise et dans la phase En-installation. Un SCS doit générer des ensembles PID et PPS. La configuration Intel AMT doit s'effectuer sur un réseau. Le réseau peut être crypté à l'aide du protocole TLS-PSK (Transport Layer Security Pre-Shared Key). La configuration du mode Entreprise s'effectue lorsque les ordinateurs se connectent à un SCS. Enterprise TLS-PKI Enterprise TLS-PKI est également dénommé « Configuration à distance ». Le SCS utilise des certificats TLS-PKI (Public Key Infrastructure -- Infrastructure de clé publique) pour se connecter de manière sécurisée à un ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. Ces certificats peuvent être générés de plusieurs manières : Le SCS peut se connecter à l'aide d'un des certificats par défaut pré-programmés sur l'ordinateur, comme détaillé dans la section sur l'interface MEBx de ce document. Le SCS peut créer un certificat personnalisé, qui peut être déployé sur l'ordinateur AMT au moyen d'une visite en personne avec une clé USB spécialement formatée comme détaillé dans la section Configuration Service (Service de configuration) de ce document. Le SCS peut utiliser un certificat personnalisé pré-programmé dans l'usine Dell grâce au processus Custom Factory Integration (CFI -- Intégration usine personnalisée).Enterprise TLS-PSK Enterprise TLS-PSK est également dénommé « Configuration en une touche ». Le SCS utilise les PSK (Pre-Shared Keys -- Clés pré-établies) pour établir une connexion sécurisée avec l'ordinateur AMT. Ces clés à 52 caractères peuvent être créées par le SCS, et puis déployées sur l' ordinateur AMT lors d'une visite en personne de deux manières : La clé peut être manuellement entrée dans le MEBx. Le SCS peut créer une liste de clés personnalisées et les mettre sur une clé USB spécialement formatée. Chaque ordinateur AMT récupère ensuite une clé personnalisée depuis la clé USB spécialement formatée pendant le démarrage BIOS comme détaillé dans la section Configuration Service (Service de configuration) de ce document. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Intel AMT WebGUI Intel® AMT WebGUI est une interface à base de navigateur Web pour une gestion à distance limitée d'ordinateur. WebGUI est souvent utilisé comme test pour déterminer si l'installation et la configuration Intel AMT a été effectuée correctement sur un ordinateur. Une bonne connexion à distance entre un ordinateur distant et l'ordinateur hôte exécutant WebGUI indique une bonne installation et configuration d'Intel AMT sur l'ordinateur distant. Intel AMT WebGUI est accessible depuis n'importe quel navigateur Web, comme Internet Explorer® ou Netscape®. Une gestion à distance limitée d'ordinateur comprend : l'inventaire du matériel l'enregistrement des événements dans le journal la réinitialisation de l'ordinateur distant la modification des paramètres réseau l'ajout de nouveaux utilisateurs La prise en charge de WebGUI est activée par défaut pour les ordinateurs à installation et configuration PME. La prise en charge de WebGUI pour les ordinateurs à installation et configuration Entreprise est déterminée par le serveur d'installation et de configuration. Vous trouverez des informations concernant l'utilisation de l'interface de WebGUI sur le site Web Intel AMT. Une version plus ancienne de l'interface de WebGUI est disponible sur le Guide de l'administrateur Intel AMT Petite Entreprise à la rubrique Utilisation de l'interface du navigateur Web. Procédez comme suit pour connecter Intel AMT WebGUI sur un ordinateur qui a été configuré et installé : 1. Allumez un ordinateur compatible AMT qui a terminé l'installation et la configuration AMT. 2. Démarrez un navigateur Web depuis un autre ordinateur, par exemple un ordinateur de gestion sur le même sousréseau que l'ordinateur Intel AMT. 3. Connectez-vous à l'adresse IP spécifiée dans le MEBx et au port de l'ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. (exemple : http://adresse_ip:16992 ou http://192.168.2.1:16992) Par défaut, le port est 16992. Utilisez le port 16993 et https:// pour vous connecter à Intel AMT WebGUI sur un ordinateur qui a été configuré et installé en mode Entreprise. En cas d'utilisation de DHCP, utilisez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) pour le ME. Le FQDN est la combinaison du nom d'hôte et du domaine. (exemple : http://host_name:16992 ou http://system1:16992) L'ordinateur de gestion effectue une connexion TCP vers l'ordinateur compatible Intel AMT et accède à la page Web intégrée Intel AMT de premier niveau dans le moteur de gestion de l'ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. 4. Saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. Le nom d'utilisateur par défaut est admin et le mot de passe est celui défini durant l'installation d'Intel AMT dans le MEBx. 5. Examinez les informations de l'ordinateur et apportez les modifications nécessaires éventuelles. Vous pouvez changer le mot de passe MEBx pour l'ordinateur distant dans WebGUI. Une modification du mot de passe dans WebGUI ou une console distante donne deux mots de passe. Le nouveau mot de passe, connu sous le nom de mot de passe à distance du MEBx, fonctionne uniquement à distance avec WebGUI ou une console distante. Le mot de passe local du MEBx utilisé pour accéder localement au MEBx n'est pas modifié. Vous devez vous souvenir des mots de passe locaux et à distance du MEBx pour accéder au MEBx de l'ordinateur localement et à distance. Lorsque le mot de passe du MEBx est défini initialement dans l'installation d'Intel AMT, le mot de passe sert à la fois de mot de passe local et à distance. Si le mot de passe à distance est modifié, les mots de passe sont désynchronisés. 6. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter). Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Présentation de paramètres du MEBx Le MEBx (Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension) fournit des options de configuration au niveau de la plate-forme ; ces informations permettent de configurer le comportement de la plate-forme ME (Management Engine - Moteur de gestion). Ces options incluent l'activation et la désactivation de fonctionnalités particulières et la définition de configurations d'alimentation. Dans cette section, vous trouverez des informations détaillées sur les options de configuration MEBx et, le cas échéant, les restrictions. Certaines modifications des paramètres de configuration ME ne sont pas mises en cache dans le MEBx. Elles ne sont pas consignées dans la mémoire non volatile (NVM) ME tant que vous ne quittez pas MEBx. Ainsi, si le MEBx se bloque, les modifications effectuées jusqu'à ce point ne sont PAS consignées dans la NVM ME. Accès à l'interface utilisateur de configuration MEBx Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour accéder à l'interface utilisateur de configuration MEBx sur un ordinateur : 1. Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur

. Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3. Saisissez le mot de passe ME. Appuyez sur . L'écran MEBx s'affiche tel qu'illustré ci-dessous. Le menu principal présente trois fonctions : Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME)Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Change Intel ME Password (Modification du mot de passe Intel ME) Les sections ci-après contiennent la description des menus Intel ME Configuration et Intel AMT Configuration. Avant même d'utiliser ces menus, vous devez modifier le mot de passe. Modification du mot de passe Intel ME Le mot de passe par défaut est admin ; ce mot de passe est le même pour toutes les plates-formes nouvellement déployées. Vous devez modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant de modifier les options de configuration des fonctions. Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants : Huit caractères, pas plus de 32 Une lettre majuscule Une lettre minuscule Un chiffre Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), par exemple !, $, ou ; à l'exclusion des caractères :, ", et ,. Le souligné ( _ ) et la barre d'espacement sont des caractères valides pour le mot de passe mais ces caractères ne rendent PAS le mot de passe plus complexe. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Menu de configuration ME Pour accéder à la page de configuration de la plate-forme ME (Intel® Management Engine (ME) Platform Configuration), effectuez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu principal de MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension), sélectionnez ME Configuration (Configuration ME). Appuyez sur . 2. Le message suivant s'affiche : System resets after configuration changes. Continue: (Y/N) ([Attention] Le système se réinitialise après des modifications de la configuration. Continuer : O/N) 3. Appuyez sur (O). La page de ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme ME) s'ouvre. Cette page permet de configurer les fonctions particulières du ME telles que les caractéristiques, les options d'alimentation, etc. Voici des liens rapides vers les diverses sections. Intel ME State Control (Contrôle de l'état du ME d'Intel) Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale du micrologiciel Intel ME) Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctions Intel ME) Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité) Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME) Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte) Intel ME State Control (Contrôle de l'état d'Intel ME) Lorsque l'option ME State Control est sélectionnée dans le menu ME Platform Configuration, le menu ME State Control s'affiche. Vous pouvez désactiver le ME pour isoler l'ordinateur ME de la plate-forme principale jusqu'à la fin du processus de débogage.Lorsqu'elle est activée, l'option ME State Control permet de désactiver le ME pour isoler l'ordinateur ME de la plate-forme principale pendant le débogage d'un dysfonctionnement. Le tableau ci-dessous illustre les options en détail. ME Platform State Control (Contrôle de l'état de la plate-forme ME) Option Description Enabled (Activé) Active le ME (Management Engine - Moteur de gestion) sur la plate-forme Disabled (Désactivé) Désactive le ME (Management Engine - Moteur de gestion) sur la plateforme En fait, le ME n'est pas vraiment désactivé à l'aide de l'option Disabled (Désactivé). Il est plutôt mis en pause au tout début de son démarrage de sorte à ne générer aucun trafic pour les bus de l'ordinateur. Ceci garantit que vous pouvez déboguer un problème informatique sans vous inquiéter du rôle que le ME aurait pu y jouer. Option Intel ME Firmware Local Update (Mise à jour locale de micrologiciels Intel ME) Cette option du menu ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme ME) définit la politique de mise à jour locale du MEBx. Le paramètre par défaut est Always Open (Toujours ouvert). Les autres paramètres disponibles sont Never Open (Jamais ouvert) et Restricted (Limité).Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctions Intel ME) Le menu ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctions Intel ME) contient la sélection de configuration suivante. Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité) Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité) du menu ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctions de gérabilité), le menu ME Manageability Feature (Fonction de gérabilité ME) apparaît.Utilisez cette option pour déterminer la fonction de gérabilité activée. None (Aucun (e)) – Cette option détermine que la gérabilité ne sera pas activée . Intel AMT/Intel Standard Manageability (Gérabilité standard Intel/Intel AMT) – Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT). Si le système ne satisfait pas aux conditions minimales requises pour Intel AMT, seule l'option Intel Standard Manageability peut être sélectionnée. Le tableau ci-dessous illustre les options en détail. Option Management Feature Select (Sélection de fonction de gestion) Option Description None (Aucune) La fonction de gérabilité n'est pas sélectionnée Intel AMT La fonction de gérabilité Intel AMT est sélectionnée Lorsque l'option passe d'Intel AMT à None (Aucun (e)), un message d'alerte d'affiche. Si l'utilisateur accepte le passage d'Intel AMT à None, Intel AMT subira un déprovisionnement complet. Si l'option None est sélectionnée, aucune fonction de gérabilité n'est fournie par le système Intel ME, les applications de gestion ne pourront donc pas utiliser ME Intel. Cependant, l'option Intel ME est toujours activée (le micrologiciel ME Intel fonctionne toujours). Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME) Pour se conformer aux exigences ENERGY STAR, Intel Management Engine peut être désactivé dans divers modes de veille. Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME) permet de configurer les options concernant l'alimentation de la plate-forme ME. ME ON in Host Sleep States (ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte)Lorsque l'option ME ON in Host Sleep States est sélectionnée dans le menu ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation ME), le menu ME in Host Sleep States se charge. L'ensemble d'options d'alimentation sélectionné détermine le moment où le ME est ACTIVÉ. L'ensemble d'options d'alimentation par défaut est Mobile: ON in S0 (Mobile : Activé en S0). Selon l'utilisation prévue de l'ordinateur, l'administrateur utilisateur final peut choisir l'ensemble d'options d'alimentation à utiliser. La page de sélection de cet ensemble est illustrée ci-dessus. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Menu de configuration d'AMT Après avoir complètement configuré la fonction ME (Intel® Management Engine), vous devez redémarrer avant de configurer Intel AMT en vue d'un démarrage système sans problème. L'image ci-dessous montre le menu de configuration Intel AMT lorsqu'un utilisateur a sélectionné l'option Intel AMT Configuration (configuration Intel AMT) dans le menu principal de Management Engine BIOS Extension (MEBx). Cette fonction permet de configurer un ordinateur compatible AMT de sorte qu'il prenne en charge les fonctionnalités d'administration Intel AMT. Vous devez posséder une compréhension de base des principes de réseau et des termes informatiques tels que TCP/IP, DHCP, VLAN, IDE, DNS, masque de sous-réseau, passerelle par défaut et nom de domaine. L'explication de ces termes n'entre pas dans la portée de ce document. La page configuration d'Intel AMT contient les options configurables indiquées ci-dessous. Pour des images de ces options de menu, reportez-vous aux pages « Installation du mode Entreprise » et « Installation du mode PME » de ce document. Options de menu Host Name (Nom d'hôte) TCP/IP Modèle de provisionnement Setup and Configuration (Installation et configuration) Un-Provision (Dé-provisionnement) SOL/IDE-R Password Policy (Stratégie de mot de passe) Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel) Set PRTC (Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure) Idle Timeout (Délai d'inactivité) :Host Name (Nom d'hôte) Un nom d'hôte peut être affecté à l'ordinateur compatible AMT. Il s'agit du nom d'hôte de l'ordinateur sur lequel Intel AMT est activé. Si Intel AMT est défini sur DHCP, le nom d'hôte DOIT être identique au nom de l'ordinateur du système d'exploitation. TCP/IP Permet de modifier la configuration TCP/IP suivante d'Intel AMT. DHCP Mode – ENABLE** / DISABLED (Mode DHCP - ACTIVER** / DÉSACTIVÉ) Si le mode DHCP est activé, les paramètres TCP/IP sont configurés par un serveur DHCP. Si un système est en mode statique, il peut nécessiter une deuxième adresse IP. Cette adresse IP, souvent appelée l'adresse IP ME, peut être différente de l'adresse IP de l'hôte. IP address (Adresse IP) – Adresse Internet d'Intel Management Engine (moteur d'administration Intel). Subnet mask (Masque de sous-réseau) – Le masque de sous-réseau sert à déterminer à quel sous-réseau appartient l'adresse IP. Default Gateway address (Passerelle par défaut) – Passerelle par défaut du moteur de gestion Intel. Preferred DNS address (Adresse du DNS préféré) – Adresse du serveur préféré de nom de domaine. Alternate DNS address (Adresse du DNS alternatif ) – Adresse du serveur alternatif de nom de domaine. Domain name (Nom de domaine) – Nom de domaine du ME Intel (moteur d'administration Intel). Modèle de provisionnement Les modèles de provisionnement suivants sont disponibles : Provisioning Mode – Enterprise** / Small Business (Mode de provisionnement) - Entreprise/PME Ce mode permet la sélection du mode Entreprise ou du mode PME. Le mode Entreprise peut comporter des paramètres de sécurité différents de ceux du mode PME. En raison de ces différences, chacun de ces modes exige un processus d'installation et de configuration différent. Setup and Configuration (Installation et configuration) Le menu contient les paramètres du serveur d'installation et de configuration. Ce menu contient également les paramètres de sécurité des configurations PSK et PKI.Current Provisioning Mode (Mode de provisionnement actuel) – Affiche le mode TLS de provisionnement actuel : None, PKI, or PSK. (Aucun, PKI ou PSK). Cette configuration n'est illustrée que sur le modèle de provisionnement d'entreprise. Provisioning Record (Enregistrement de provisionnement) – Affiche les données de l'enregistrement de provisionnement PSK/PKI. Si les données n'ont pas été entrées, le MEBx affiche un message indiquant « Provision Record not present » (L'enregistrement du provisionnement est manquant). Si les données sont entrées, l'enregistrement de provisionnement affiche les informations suivantes : TLS provisioning mode (Mode de provisionnement TLS) – Affiche le mode de configuration actuel de l'ordinateur : None, PSK or PKI (Aucun, PSK ou PKI). Provisioning IP (IP de provisionnement) – IP du serveur d'installation et de configuration. Date of Provision (Date de provisionnement) – Affiche la date et l'heure du provisionnement au format MM/JJ/AAAA à HH:MM. DNS – Indique si Secure DNS (DNS sécurisé) est utilisé ou non. 0 indique que le DNS n'est pas en cours d'utilisation, 1 indique que le DNS sécurisé est en cours d'utilisation (PKI uniquement). Host Initiated (Initialisé par l'hôte) – Indique si le processus d'installation et de configuration a été initialisé par l'hôte : « No » (Non) indique qu'il n'a pas été initialisé par l'hôte ; « Yes » (Oui) indique le contraire (PKI uniquement). Hash Data (données de hachage) – Affiche les données de hachage du certificat comportant 40 caractères (PKI uniquement). Hash Algorithm (Algorithme de hachage) – Décrit le type de hachage. À l'heure actuelle, seul est pris en charge SHA1 (PKI uniquement). IsDefault (Est valeur par défaut) – Affiche « Yes » (Oui) si l'algorithme de hachage est l'algorithme par défaut sélectionné. Affiche « No » (Non) si l'algorithme de hachage n'est pas l'algorithme utilisé (PKI uniquement). FQDN - (Fully Qualified Domain Name – Nom de Domaine Entièrement Qualifié) du serveur de provisionnement mentionné dans le certificat (PKI uniquement). Serial Number (Numéro de série) – Les 32 caractères indiquant les numéros de série de l'Autorité de certificat. Time Validity Pass (Réussite de validité horaire) – Indique si le certificat a réussi à la vérification de validité de l'heure. Provisioning Server (serveur de provisionnement) – Adresse IP et numéro de port (0 à 65 535) d'un serveur de provisionnement Intel AMT. Cette configuration n'est illustrée que pour le modèle de provisionnement d'entreprise. Le numéro de port par défaut est 9971. TLS PSK – Contient les valeurs des paramètres de configuration TLS PSK. Set PID and PPS (Définir les PID et PPS) – Définit l'identificateur de provisionnement (PID) et l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS - provisioning passphrase). Entrez les PID et PPS au format dash (Dell AdvancedSCSI Host [hôte SCSI avancé Dell]). (Ex. PID : 1234-ABCD ; PPS : 1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234- ABCD) REMARQUE - Une valeur PPS de ' '0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000' ne modifie pas l'état d'installation et de configuration. Lorsque cette valeur est utilisée, l'état d'installation et de configuration reste « Not-started (Non démarré) ». Delete PID and PPS – (Supprimer les PID et PPS) – Supprime les PID et PPS stockés dans ME. En l'absence de PID et PPS, le MEBX renvoie un message d'erreur. Cette option ne définit PAS le paramètre de processus d'installation et de configuration sur « Non démarré. » Cette option définit le paramètre de processus d'installation et de configuration sur « In Process » (En cours). TLS PKI – Contient les valeurs des paramètres de configuration TLS PKI. Remote Configuration Enable/Disable (Configuration à distance Activer/Désactiver) – Active ou désactive la configuration à distance. La configuration à distance ne peut pas s'effectuer lorsque cette option est désactivée. Manage Certificate Hashes (Administration des hachages de certificat) – Affiche la liste des hachages actuellement stockés et leur état actuel. Pour modifier l'état actif du certificat, appuyez sur la touche <+>. Pour supprimer le hachage, appuyez sur la touche (). Pour ajouter une autre touche, appuyez sur la touche . Set FQDN (Définir FQDN) – Définit le nom de domaine entièrement qualifié (fully qualified domain name) de l'ordinateur. Set PKI DNS suffix (Définir le suffixe DNS PKI) – Définit le suffixe DNS PKI. TLS PSK Le sous-menu contient les valeurs des paramètres de configuration TLS PSK. La configuration ou la suppression du PID/PPS entraîne un dé-provisionnement partiel si la valeur d'installation et de configuration est « In-process » (En cours). Set PID and PPS (Définir les PID et PPS) – Définit l'identificateur de provisionnement (PID) et l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS). Entrez les PID et PPS au format dash (Dell Advanced SCSI Host [hôte SCSI avancé Dell]). (Ex. PID : 1234-ABCD ; PPS : 1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD-1234-ABCD) Une valeur de PPS de '0000-0000- 0000-0000-0000-0000-0000-0000' ne modifie pas l'état d'installation et de configuration. Lorsque cette valeur est utilisée, l'état d'installation et de configuration reste « Not-started (Non démarré) ». Delete PID and PPS (Supprimer les PID et PPS) – Supprime les PID et PPS stockés dans ME. En l'absence de PID et PPS, le MEBX renvoie un message d'erreur.TLS PKI – Remote Configuration Settings (Paramètres de configuration à distance) Le sous-menu TLS PKI contient les options de configuration à distance. Il existe quatre éléments de configuration à distance : Remote Configuration Enable/Disable (Configuration à distance Activer/Désactiver) Manage Certificate Hashes (Administration des hachages de certificat) Set FQDN (Définir FQDN) Set PKI DNS Suffix (Définir le suffixe DNS PKI) Remote Configuration Enable/Disable (Configuration à distance Activer/Désactiver) Les options sélectionnables sont Enable (Activer) et Disable (Désactiver). Si Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance) est désactivé, les options de menu s'affichent quand même dessous, mais elles ne sont pas utilisées tant que l'option Remote Configuration n'est pas activée. Il est impossible de modifier cette option une fois le processus d'installation et de configuration lancé. Ce paramètre ne peut être modifié que lorsque l'ordinateur est en état non provisionné ou usine par défaut. L'activation ou la désactivation de la configuration à distance entraîne un dé-provisionnement partiel si la valeur d'installation et de configuration est « In-process » (En cours). Manage Certificate Hashes (Administration des hachages de certificat) Sélectionnez l'option Manage Certificate Hashes (Administrer les hachages de certificat) du menu Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance) pour afficher le menu Manage Certificate Hashes (Gérer les hachages de certificat). Cinq hachages par défaut sont disponibles en usine. Les hachages peuvent être supprimés ou ajoutés au besoin.L'écran Manage Certificate Hash propose plusieurs options de contrôle du clavier permettant d'administrer les hachages sur l'ordinateur. Les touches suivantes sont valides à partir du menu Manage Certificate Hash : Touche Échapper – Permet de quitter le menu Touche Insérer – Permet d'ajouter un hachage de certificat personnalisé à l'ordinateur Touche Supprimer – Permet de supprimer de l'ordinateur le hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné Touche <+> – Modifie l'état actif du hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné Touche Entrée – Permet d'afficher les détails du hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné Ajout d'un hachage personnalisé 1. Appuyez sur dans l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Administrer le hachage de certificat). Une zone de texte vous invitant à saisir le nom de hachage s'affiche. 2. Vous devez obligatoirement le saisir. Ce nom ne peut comporter plus de 32 caractères. Lorsque vous appuyez sur (Entrée), vous êtes invité à entrer la valeur de hachage du certificat. 3. Cette valeur est un nombre hexadécimal à 20 octets. Vous devez entrer les données de hachage au format correct, sinon le message suivant s'affiche : Invalid Hash Certificate Entered - Try Again (Hachage de certificat non valide - Réessayez). Lorsque vous appuyez sur (Entrée) vous êtes invité à définir l'état actif du hachage. 4. Cette requête vous permet de définir l'état actif du hachage personnalisé. Yes (Oui) – Le hachage personnalisé doit être marqué comme actif. No (Non) (Valeur par défaut) – VA_Hash doit être maintenu dans les limites d'EPS. Suppression d'un hachage 1. Appuyez sur (Supprimer) à l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Administrer le hachage de certificat) pour afficher le message Delete this certificate hash? (Supprimer ce hachage de certificat ?) [Y/N] ([O/N]). 2. Cette option permet la suppression du hachage du certificat sélectionné. Yes (Oui) – MEBx enverra au micrologiciel le message indiquant de supprimer le hachage sélectionné. No Le MEBx ne supprimera pas le hachage sélectionné et revient à la Configuration à distance. Modification de l'état actifAppuyez sur la touche <+> de l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Administrer le hachage de certificat) pour afficher le message Change the active state of this hash? (Y/N) (Modifier l'état actif de ce hachage ? (O/N)) [Y/N] ([O/N]) Une réponse affirmative à cette question fait basculer l'état actif du hachage du certificat actuellement sélectionné. Définir un hachage en tant qu'actif indique qu'il est disponible pour l'utilisation lors du provisionnement PSK. Affichage d'un hachage de certificat Appuyez sur (Entrée) dans l'écran Manage Certificate Hash (Administrer le hachage de certificat). Les détails du hachage de certificat actuellement sélectionné incluent : le nom du hachage, les données de hachage du certificat, l'état actif et l'état par défaut. Set PKI DNS Suffix (Définir le suffixe DNS PKI) Lorsque l'option Set PKI DNS Suffix (Définir le serveur de nom de domaine PKI) est sélectionnée dans le menu Remote Configuration (Configuration à distance), vous êtes invité à entrer le PKI DNS Suffix (suffixe DNS PKI) du serveur de provisionnement. La valeur de clé est conservée dans EPS. Un-Provision (Dé-provisionnement) L'option Un-Provision permet de restaurer les valeurs par défaut de la configuration Intel AMT. Il existe trois types de dé- provisionnement : Partial Un-provision (Dé-provisionnement partiel) – Cette option redéfinit tous les paramètres Intel AMT sur leurs valeurs par défaut, mais il ne changera pas le PID/PPS ou le mot de passe MEBx. Full Un-provision (Dé-provisionnement total) – Cette option permet de restaurer les valeurs par défaut de tous les paramètres Intel AMT. Si une valeur PID/PPS est présente, les deux valeurs sont perdues. Le mot de passe MEBx n'est pas changé. CMOS clear (Effacer CMOS) – Cette option de dé-provisionnement n'est pas disponible dans le MEBx. Cette option efface toutes les valeurs et restaure les valeurs par défaut. Si un PID/PPS est présent, les deux valeurs sont perdues.Le mot de passe MEBx est réinitialisé à la valeur par défaut (admin). Pour appeler cette option, vous devez effacer le CMOS (par exemple, le cavalier de carte mère) SOL/IDE-R Username and Password – DISABLED** / ENABLED (Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe - DÉSACTIVÉ/ACTIVÉ) Cette option fournit l'authentification utilisateur pour une session SOL/IDER. Si le protocole Kerberos est utilisé, définissez cette option sur Disabled (Désactivé) et définissez l'authentification utilisateur par l'intermédiaire de Kerberos. Si Kerberos n'est pas utilisé, vous pouvez choisir d'activer ou de désactiver l'authentification utilisateur pendant la session SOL/IDER. Serial-Over-LAN (SOL) – DISABLED** / ENABLED (SOL - DÉSACTIVÉ/ACTIVÉ) SOL permet à l'entrée/sortie de la console de client gérée Intel AMT d'être redirigée vers la console de serveur de gestion (si le système client prend en charge SOL). Si le système ne prend pas en charge SOL, cette valeur ne peut pas l'activer. IDE Redirection (IDE-R) – DISABLED** / ENABLED (Redirection IDE DÉSACTIVÉ/ACTIVÉ) IDE-R permet le démarrage du client administré Intel AMT, à partir d'images de disque à distance, à la console d'administration. Si le système client ne prend pas en charge IDE-R, cette valeur ne peut pas l'activer.Password Policy (Stratégie de mot de passe) Cette option détermine quand l'utilisateur peut changer le mot de passe MEBx à travers le réseau. Remarque : le mot de passe MEBx peut toujours être changé via l'interface utilisateur MEBx. Les options sont : Default Password Only (Mot de passe par défaut uniquement) – Le mot de passe MEBx peut être changé à travers l'interface réseau si le mot de passe par défaut n'a pas encore été changé. During Setup and Configuration (Pendant l'installation et configuration) – Le mot de passe MEBX peut être changé à travers l'interface réseau pendant la procédure d'installation et de configuration mais à aucun autre moment. Une fois la procédure d'installation et de configuration complétée, le mot de passe MEBx ne peut pas être changé via l'interface réseau. Anytime (À tout moment) – Le mot de passe MEBX peut être changé à travers l'interface réseau à tout moment.Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel) Cette option permet d'activer/désactiver les mises à jour micrologicielles sécurisées. Les mises à jour micrologicielles sécurisées exigent l'entrée d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un mot de passe administrateur. Le micrologiciel ne peut pas être mis à jour si le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe administrateur ne sont pas fournis. La fonction secure firmware update doit être activée préalablement à la mise à jour du micrologiciel à l'aide de la méthode sécurisée. Les mises à jour micrologicielles passent par le pilote LMS. Si la mise à jour sécurisée et locale des micrologiciels est désactivée, l'utilisateur doit activer l'option Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel ou Mise à jour locale de micrologiciel pour permettre les mises à jour des micrologiciels.Set PRTC (Définir les paramètres de date et d'heure) Entrez les paramètres de date et d'heure au format GMT (UTC) (AAAA:MM:JJ:HH:MM:SS). La plage de dates valide va du 1/1/2004 au 4/1/2021. La définition de la valeur des paramètres de date et d'heure sert à maintenir virtuellement la date et l'heure lorsque l'état de mise hors tension (G3) est activé. Cette configuration n'est affichée que pour le modèle de provisionnement d'entreprise.Idle Timeout (Délai d'inactivité) Ce paramètre permet d'activer la fonction Wake sur LAN ME Intel et de définir le délai avant déconnexion ME Intel en état M1. La valeur doit être en minutes. La valeur indique la période de temps que ME Intel peut rester en inactivité en M1 avant de transitionner en état M-off. Si le ME Intel est M0, il ne transitionnera pas à M-off.Exemple de paramètres du mode DHCP d'Intel AMT Vous trouverez dans le tableau ci-dessous un exemple des paramètres de champ de base du menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) permettant de configurer l'ordinateur en mode DHCP. Exemple de configurations Intel AMT en mode DHCP Paramètres de configuration Intel AMT Valeurs Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Effectuez une sélection et appuyez sur (Entrée). Host Name (Nom d'hôte) Exemple : IntelAMT Ce nom est identique au nom de l'ordinateur du système d'exploitation. TCP/IP Définissez les paramètres de la façon suivante : Activez Network interface Activez DHCP Mode Définissez un nom de domaine (par exemple, amt.intel.com) Modèle de provisionnement Intel AMT 4.0 Mode (Mode Intel AMT 4.0) Small Business (PME) SOL/IDE-R Activez SOL. Activez IDE-R Remote FW Update (Mise à jour du micrologiciel à distance) Enabled (Activé) Enregistrez et quittez MEBx, puis démarrez l'ordinateur sur le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®.Exemple de paramètres du mode statique d'Intel AMT Vous trouverez dans le tableau ci-dessous un exemple des paramètres de champ de base du menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) permettant de configurer l'ordinateur en mode statique. Pour fonctionner en mode statique, l'ordinateur nécessite deux adresses MAC (adresse MAC GBE et adresse MAC d'administration). En l'absence d'une adresse MAC d'administration, Intel AMT ne peut pas être défini sur le mode statique. Exemple de configurations Intel AMT en mode statique Paramètres de configuration Intel AMT Valeurs Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Effectuez une sélection et appuyez sur . Host Name (Nom d'hôte) Exemple : IntelAMT TCP/IP Définissez les paramètres de la façon suivante : Activez Network interface Désactivez DHCP Mode Définissez une adresse IP (par exemple, 192.168.0.15) Définissez un masque de sous-réseau, par exemple, 255.255.255.0 L'adresse de la passerelle par défaut est facultative L'adresse du DNS préféré est facultative L'adresse du DNS alternatif est facultative Définissez le nom de domaine, par exemple amt.intel.com Modèle de provisionnement Intel AMT 4.0 Mode (Mode Intel AMT 4.0) Small Business (PME) SOL/IDE-R Activez SOL. Activez IDE-R Remote FW Update (Mise à jour du micrologiciel à distance) Enabled (Activé) Enregistrez et quittez MEBx, puis démarrez l'ordinateur sur le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Intel® Fast Call (Appel rapide Intel®) Intel® Fast Call for help (Appel rapide Intel® pour obtenir de l'aide) est une fonctionnalité disponible pour les unités de gestion des stocks (SKU) VPro. Grâce à une connexion Intel Fast Call pour obtenir de l'aide l'utilisateur final peut demander une assistance si le système VPro est en-dehors du réseau de l'entreprise. Si le BIOS permet la connexion Intel Fast Call for help, l'utilisateur peut lancer une telle connexion en appuyant sur la touche rapide/la touche () pendant que le système démarre. Configuration requise Les paramètres système VPro suivants doivent être configurés avant l'établissement d'une connexion Intel Fast Call depuis le système d'exploitation : 1. Détection de l'environnement activée 2. Stratégie de connexion à distance 3. Management Presence Server (MPS -- Serveur de présence de gestion) Sommaire Il n'existe aucun paramètre dans le MEBX permettant d'activer/désactiver Intel Fast Call for help. Si le système prend en charge Full VPro, Intel Fast Call for help sera disponible à l'utilisation. Si le système ne prend en charge qu'Intel Standard Manageability, Intel Fast call for help n'est pas activé. 1. Avant de démarrer Intel Fast Call for help, vous devez activer la détection de l'environnement. Ceci permet à Intel AMT de déterminer si le système fait partie du réseau de la société. Cette configuration est effectuée à travers une application ISV. 2. Une stratégie de connexion à distance doit être créée avant le lancement d'un Appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide. La stratégie pour l'appel initié par le BIOS n'a pas besoin d'être configurée, mais une autre stratégie doit exister avant le lancement d'un appel pour obtenir de l'aide depuis le BIOS. Le BIOS doit prendre en charge la touche rapide qui lance l'appel rapide Intel pour obtenir de l'aide. 3. Un serveur de présence de gestion doit exister pour répondre aux appels rapides Intel pour obtenir de l'aide. Le serveur de présence de gestion réside dans la zone DMZ. Le serveur de présence de gestion. Lorsque toutes ces conditions sont satisfaites, le système peut lancer des appels rapides Intel pour obtenir de l'aide. Lancement d'Intel Fast Call for Help Une fois la fonction totalement configurée, il existe trois méthodes de lancement d'une session Intel Fast Call for help. Parmi celles-ci : À la page d'accueil Dell, appuyez sur . À la page d'accueil Dell, appuyez sur pour obtenir le menu Démarrage express ponctuel. Sélectionnez la dernière option intitulée Intel Fast Call for Help. Depuis Windows : 1. Lancez l'icône de sécurité/application Intel AMT Intel Management Security Status (État de sécurité de la gestion Intel). 2. Basculez vers l'onglet Intel AMT. 3. Dans la zone Remote Connectivity (Connectivité à distance), cliquez sur Connect (Connecter). * Informations de cette page fournies par Intel. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Présentation de la redirection AMT Intel® AMT facilite la redirection des communications série et IDE d'un client géré à une console de gestion, quel que soit l'état de l'alimentation et du démarrage du client géré. Il suffit que le client soit doté de la fonction Intel AMT, d'une connexion à une source d'alimentation électrique et d'une connexion réseau. Intel AMT prend en charge Serial Over LAN (SOL, redirection texte/clavier) et la redirection IDE (IDER, redirection CD-ROM) sur TCP/IP. Présentation de Serial Over LAN Serial Over LAN (SOL) est une fonction permettant d'émuler une communication de port série par l'intermédiaire d'une connexion de réseau standard. SOL peut être utilisé pour la plupart des applications de gestion pour lesquelles une connexion de port série est normalement obligatoire. Lors de l'établissement d'une session SOL active entre un client sur lequel Intel AMT est activé et une console de gestion utilisant la bibliothèque de redirection d'Intel AMT, le trafic série du client est redirigé par l'intermédiaire d'Intel AMT sur la connexion LAN et mis à la disposition de la console de gestion. De façon similaire, la console de gestion peut envoyer des données série sur la connexion LAN qui semble être passée par le port série du client. Présentation de la redirection IDE La redirection IDE (IDER) peut émuler un lecteur de CD IDE ou une disquette héritée ou encore un lecteur LS-120 sur une connexion réseau standard. IDER permet à un ordinateur d'administration de relier un des ses lecteurs locaux à un client géré sur le réseau. Une fois la session IDER établie, le client géré peut utiliser le périphérique distant comme s'il était directement rattaché à l'un de ses propres canaux IDE. Ceci se révèle particulièrement utile pour démarrer à distance un ordinateur qui, autrement, ne répond pas. IDER ne prend pas en charge le format DVD. IDER peut servir, par exemple, à démarrer un client dont le système d'exploitation est corrompu. Un disque de démarrage valide est tout d'abord chargé dans le lecteur de la console de gestion. Ce lecteur est alors passé en tant qu'argument lorsque la console de gestion ouvre la session TCP IDER. Intel AMT enregistre le périphérique en tant que périphérique IDE virtuel sur le client, quel que soit son état d'alimentation ou de démarrage. SOL et IDER peuvent être utilisés conjointement car le BIOS du client peut devoir être configuré pour démarrer à partir du périphérique IDE virtuel. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Présentation des méthodes d'installation et de configuration Comme abordé dans la section Présentation de l'installation et de la configuration, l'ordinateur doit être configuré avant que les fonctions d'Intel AMT puissent interagir avec l'application de gestion. Il existe deux méthodes pour effectuer le processus de provisionnement (du moins complexe au plus complexe) : Service de configuration – Un service de configuration permet de terminer le processus de provisionnement à partir d'une console GUI sur le serveur. Pour ce faire, une seule intervention sur chacun des ordinateurs sur lesquels Intel AMT est activé suffit. Les champs PPS et PID sont remplis à l'aide d'un fichier créé par le service de configuration enregistré sur un périphérique USB. Interface MEBx – L'administrateur IT configure manuellement les paramètres MEBx (Management Engine BIOS Extension) sur chaque ordinateur compatible Intel AMT. Pour remplir les champs PPS et PID, il suffit de saisir les clés alphanumériques à 32 caractères et à 8 caractères créées par le service de configuration dans l'interface MEBx. Davantage de détails sur ces diverses méthodes se trouvent dans les quelques sections suivantes. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Service de configuration--Utilisation d'un périphérique USB Cette section traite de l'installation et de la configuration d'Intel® AMT à l'aide d'un périphérique de stockage USB. Vous pouvez définir et configurer localement les informations de mot de passe, d'ID de provisionnement (PID), et d'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS) avec une clé USB. Cette opération est également appelée provisionnement USB. Le provisionnement USB vous permet de définir et de configurer manuellement des ordinateurs en évitant les problèmes associés à une saisie manuelle des entrées. Le provisionnement USB ne fonctionne que si le mot de passe MEBx est défini sur la valeur usine par défaut : admin. Si le mot de passe a été modifié, ramenez-le à la valeur usine par défaut en effaçant le CMOS. Voici une procédure typique d'installation et de configuration à l'aide d'une clé USB. Pour une description détaillée de l'utilisation d'Altiris® Dell™ Client Manager (DCM), reportez-vous à la page Procédure par périphérique USB. 1. Un technicien informatique insère une clé USB dans un ordinateur disposant d'une console de gestion. 2. Le technicien demande les enregistrements locaux d'installation et de configuration à partir d'un serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) par l'intermédiaire de la console. 3. Le SCS effectue les tâches suivantes : 1. Génère les ensembles de mots de passe, d'ID de provisionnement (PID) et d'expressions de passe de provisionnement (PPS) appropriés 2. Enregistre ces informations dans sa base de données 3. Renvoie les informations à la console de gestion 4. La console de gestion inscrit les ensembles de mots de passe, d'ID de provisionnement (PID), et d'expressions de passe de provisionnement (PPS) dans un fichier setup.bin sur la clé USB. 5. Le technicien amène la clé USB à la zone de préparation où se trouvent les nouveaux ordinateurs compatibles Intel AMT. Le technicien effectue ensuite les tâches suivantes : 1. Si nécessaire, il déballe et connecte les ordinateurs 2. Il insère la clé USB dans un Ordinateur 3. Il allume cet ordinateur 6. Le BIOS de l'ordinateur détecte la clé USB. Si elle est trouvée, le BIOS recherche un fichier setup.bin au début de la clé. Passez à l'étape 7. Si le BIOS ne trouve pas de clé USB ou de fichier setup.bin, redémarrez l'ordinateur. Ignorez les étapes restantes. 7. Le BIOS de l'ordinateur affiche un message indiquant que l'installation et la configuration automatiques vont avoir lieu. 1. Le premier enregistrement disponible du fichier setup.bin est lu en mémoire. Le processus effectue les tâches suivantes : Valide l'enregistrement d'en-tête de fichier Recherche l'enregistrement disponible suivant Si la procédure réussit, l'enregistrement actif est invalidé et il ne peut donc pas être réutilisé 2. Le processus place l'adresse de mémoire dans le bloc de paramètre de MEBx. 3. Le processus appelle MEBx. 8. MEBx traite l'enregistrement. 9. MEBx affiche un message d'achèvement sur l'écran. 10. Le technicien informatique éteint l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur est à présent dans l'état d'installation et il est prêt à être distribué aux utilisateurs dans un environnement en mode Entreprise. 11. Répétez l'étape 5 si vous avez plusieurs ordinateurs. Consultez le fournisseur de la console de gestion pour en savoir plus concernant l'installation et la configuration avec une clé USB. Exigences de la clé USB La clé USB doit répondre aux exigences suivantes pour permettre l'installation et la configuration Intel AMT : Elle doit avoir une capacité supérieure à 16 Mo. Elle doit être formatée avec le système de fichiers FAT16. La taille de secteur doit être de 1 Ko. La clé USB n'est pas démarrable. Le fichier setup.bin doit être le premier fichier déposé sur la clé USB. La clé USB ne doit pas contenir d'autres fichiers, qu'ils soient masqués, supprimés ou autres. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Procédures pour le périphérique USB Le package de console par défaut fourni est l'application DCM (Dell™ Client Management). Cette section présente la procédure d'installation et de configuration d'Intel® AMT avec le package DCM. Comme mentionné plus haut, plusieurs autres packages sont disponibles auprès de revendeurs tiers. Avant de commencer ce processus, assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est configuré et que le serveur DNS le voit. De plus, un périphérique de stockage USB est obligatoire et ce périphérique doit être conforme à la configuration requise indiquée dans la section Service de configuration - Utilisation d'un périphérique USB. Le logiciel de gestion n'est pas toujours de nature dynamique ou ne fonctionne pas toujours en temps réel. En fait, lorsque vous indiquez à un ordinateur d'effectuer une opération, par exemple redémarrer, vous devez parfois redémarrer de nouveau pour que l'ordinateur fonctionne. 1. Formatez un périphérique de stockage USB avec le système de fichiers FAT16 et aucun libellé de volume, puis mettezle de côté. 2. Ouvrez l'application Altiris® Dell Client Manager en double-cliquant sur l'icône du bureau ou en utilisant le menu Démarrer. 3. Pour ouvrir la console Altiris, sélectionnez AMT Quick Start (Démarrage rapide AMT) dans le menu de navigation à gauche.4. Cliquez sur le signe plus <+> pour développer la section Intel AMT Getting Started (Mise en route d'Intel AMT).5. Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour développer la Section 1. Provisioning (Provisionnement).6. Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour développer la section Basic Provisioning (without TLS) (Provisionnement de base [sans TLS]).7. Sélectionnez l'étape 1. Configurer le DNS. Le serveur de notification sur lequel une solution de gestion hors bande est installée doit être enregistré dans DNS comme « Serveur de provisionnement ».8. Cliquez sur Test dans l'écran DNS Configuration (Configuration DNS) pour vérifier que l'entrée ProvisionServer (Serveur de provisionnement) existe dans DNS et que DNS est associé au serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) correct.L'adresse IP du serveur de provisionnement et celle d'Intel SCS sont maintenant visibles.9. Sélectionnez l'étape 2. Fonctions de détection.10. Vérifiez que le paramètre est Enabled (Activé). S'il est Disabled (Désactivé), cochez la case à côté de Disabled (Désactivé) et cliquez sur Apply (Appliquer).11. Sélectionnez l'étape 3. Afficher les ordinateurs AMT.Tous les ordinateurs Intel AMT du réseau sont visibles dans cette liste.12. Sélectionnez l'étape 4. Créer un profil.13. Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour ajouter un nouveau profil.L'onglet General (Général) permet à l'administrateur de modifier le nom et la description du profil ainsi que le mot de passe. L'administrateur définit un mot de passe standard à des fins de maintenance aisée ultérieure. Sélectionnez le bouton radio manual (manuel) et entrez un nouveau mot de passe.L'onglet Network (Réseau) permet d'activer les réponses ping, VLAN, WebGUI, Serial over LAN, et la redirection IDE. Si vous configurez Intel AMT manuellement, tous ces paramètres sont également disponibles dans le MEBx. L'onglet TLS (Transport Layer Security) permet d'activer TLS. S'il est activé, plusieurs autres informations sont obligatoires, notamment le nom de serveur de l'autorité de certificat (CA), le nom commun CA, le type de CA et le modèle de certificat. L'onglet ACL (access control list - liste de contrôle d'accès) sert à vérifier les utilisateurs déjà associés à ce profil et à ajouter de nouveaux utilisateurs. Cet onglet permet également de définir leurs privilèges d'accès.L'onglet Power Policy (Mode d'alimentation) contient les options de configuration permettant de sélectionner les états de veille d'Intel AMT ainsi que le paramètre Idle Timeout (Délai d'inactivité) du disque dur. Pour des performances optimales, il est recommandé que le paramètre Délai d'inactivité soit toujours défini sur 1. Le paramètre de l'onglet Power Policy peut affecter la conformité d'un ordinateur aux normes E-Star 4.0. 14. Sélectionnez l'étape 5. Générer des clés de sécurité.15. Sélectionnez l'icône avec une flèche pointant vers l'extérieur pour exporter les clés de sécurité à la clé USB.16. Sélectionnez la case d'option Generate keys before export (Générer des clés avant l'exportation).17. Entrez le nombre de clés à générer (selon le nombre d'ordinateurs à provisionner). Le nombre par défaut est 50. 18. Le mot de passe par défaut ME est admin. Configurez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME pour l'environnement. 19. Cliquez sur Generate (Générer). Une fois les clés créées, un lien apparaît à gauche du bouton Generate.20. Insérez le périphérique USB précédemment formaté dans un connecteur USB sur le serveur de provisionnement. 21. Cliquez sur la touche Dowload USB key file (Télécharger le fichier de clé USB) pour télécharger le fichier setup.bin sur le périphérique USB. Le périphérique est reconnu par défaut ; enregistrez le fichier sur le périphérique USB. Si, ultérieurement, des clés supplémentaires deviennent nécessaires, le périphérique USB doit être reformaté avant l'enregistrement du fichier setup.bin sur celui-ci.a. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) dans la boîte de dialogue File Download (Téléchargement de fichier). b. Assurez-vous que l'emplacement Save in: (Enregistrer dans :) pointe vers le périphérique USB. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer). c. Cliquez sur Close (Fermer) dans la boîte de dialogue Download complete (Téléchargement complet). Le fichier setup.bin est désormais visible dans la fenêtre Explorer du lecteur.22. Fermez la fenêtre Export Security Keys to USB Key (Exporter les clés de sécurité vers la clé USB) et la fenêtre de l'explorateur de lecteur pour revenir à la console Altiris. 23. Insérez le périphérique USB dans l'ordinateur et allumez l'ordinateur. Le périphérique USB est immédiatement reconnu et le message suivant s'affiche : Continue with Auto Provisioning (Y/N) (Poursuivre le provisionnement automatique (O/N)) Appuyez sur (o). Appuyez sur une touche pour poursuivre le démarrage du système.24. Le démarrage terminé, éteignez l'ordinateur et revenez au serveur de gestion. 25. Sélectionnez l'étape 6. Configurer les affectations de profil automatiques.26. Vérifiez que le paramètre est activé. Dans le menu déroulant Intel AMT 2.0+, sélectionnez le profil précédemment créé. Configurez les autres paramètres de l'environnement.27. Sélectionnez l'étape 7. Processus de provisionnement du moniteur.Les ordinateurs pour lesquels les clés ont été appliquées commencent à apparaître dans la liste système. L'état qui tout d'abord est Unprovisioned (Non provisionné), passe à In provisioning (En cours de provisionnement), pour finalement se transformer en Provisioned (Provisionné) à la fin du processus.28. Sélectionnez l'étape 8. Affectations des profils de moniteur.Les ordinateurs pour lesquels des profils ont été affectés apparaissent dans la liste. Chaque ordinateur est identifié grâce aux colonnes FQDN, UUID, et Profile Name (Nom de profil).Une fois les ordinateurs provisionnés, ils sont visibles dans le dossier Collections dans All configured Intel AMT computers (Tous les ordinateurs Intel AMT configurés).Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Interface MEBx (mode Entreprise) Le MEBx (Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension) est un module ROM optionnel fourni par Intel à Dell™ à des fins d'inclusion dans le BIOS Dell. Le MEBx a été personnalisé pour les ordinateurs Dell. Le mode Entreprise (pour les grandes entreprises) exige un serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS). Le SCS exécute sur un réseau une application qui effectue l'installation et la configuration Intel AMT. Le SCS est également appelé serveur de provisionnement tel que dans le MEBx. Un SCS est habituellement fourni par les ISV (independent software vendors - revendeurs de logiciels indépendants) et est inclus avec le produit de console de gestion du ISV. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le fournisseur de la console de gestion. Pour installer et configurer un ordinateur en mode Entreprise, procédez comme suit. Configuration ME Pour activer les paramètres de configuration Intel ME sur la plate-forme cible, effectuez les étapes suivantes : 1. Pour ouvrir l'application MEBx, appuyez sur

lorsque l'écran du logo Dell apparaît. 2. Saisissez admin dans le champ Intel ME Password (Mot de passe Intel ME) . Appuyez sur . La différence entre majuscules et minuscules est prise en compte. Vous devez modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant de modifier les options MEBx. 3. Sélectionnez Change Intel ME Password (Modifier le mot de passe Intel ME). Appuyez sur . Saisissez le nouveau mot de passe à deux reprises pour le confirmer. Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants :Huit caractères Une lettre majuscule Une lettre minuscule Un chiffre Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), par exemple !, $, ou ; à l'exclusion des caractères :, ", et ,. Le souligné ( _ ) et la barre d'espacement sont des caractères valides pour le mot de passe mais ces caractères ne rendent PAS le mot de passe plus complexe. 4. Modifiez le mot de passe pour établir un droit de propriété Intel AMT. L'ordinateur passe alors de l'état par défaut à l'état d'installation. 5. Sélectionnez Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME) et appuyez sur . La fonction ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme ME) permet de configurer les fonctions ME telles que les options d'alimentation, les fonctionnalités de mise à jour du micrologiciel, etc.6. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : System resets after configuration change. Continue: (Y/N) (Le système se réinitialise après des modifications de la configuration. Continuer : O/N)Intel ME State Control (Contrôle de l'état Intel ME) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut de cette option est Enabled (Activé). Ne changez pas ce paramètre en Disabled (Désactivé). Si vous souhaitez désactiver Intel AMT, définissez l'option Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité) sur None (Aucune) à l'étape 9.7. Sélectionnez Intel ME Firmware Local Update Qualifier (Qualificatif de mise à jour locale du micrologiciel Intel ME). Appuyez sur . 8. Puis sélectionnez soit Always Open (Toujours ouvert), Never Open (Jamais ouvert) ou Restricted (Limité). Appuyez sur . Le paramètre par défaut de cette option est Always Open (Toujours ouvert).9. Sélectionnez Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctions Intel ME), puis appuyez sur .L'option suivante est Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité). Cette fonction définit le mode de gestion de la plate-forme. Le paramètre par défaut est Intel AMT. La sélection de l'option None (Aucune) entraîne la désactivation de toutes les fonctions de gestion à distance.10. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent) et appuyez sur .11. Sélectionnez Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME), puis appuyez sur .Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est Mobile: ON in S0 (Mobile : Activé en S0).12. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent), puis appuyez sur .13. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent), puis appuyez sur .14. Quittez l'installation MEBx et enregistrez la configuration ME. L'ordinateur affiche le message Intel ME Configuration Complete (Configuration Intel ME terminée), puis il redémarre. Après avoir terminé la configuration ME, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres Intel AMT. Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Pour activer les paramètres de configuration Intel AMT sur la plate-forme cible, effectuez les étapes suivantes : 1. À l'écran de démarrage initial, appuyez sur

pour ré-entrer les écrans MEBx comme vu dans l'étape 1 de « Enabling Management Engine for Enterprise Mode » (Activation du moteur de gestion pour le mode Enterprise). 2. Un message vous invite à saisir le mot de passe. Saisissez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME. 3. Sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT), puis appuyez sur .4. Sélectionnez Host Name (Nom d'hôte) et appuyez sur . 5. Ensuite, saisissez un nom unique pour cet ordinateur Intel AMT. Appuyez sur . Les espaces ne sont pas acceptables dans le nom d'hôte. Assurez-vous que le nom d'hôte n'est pas en double sur le réseau. Les noms d'hôte peuvent être utilisés à la place de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur pour toutes les applications nécessitant l'adresse IP.6. Sélectionnez TCP/IP, puis appuyez sur . 7. Appuyez sur lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : [DHCP Enable] Disable DHCP (Y/N) ([Activer DHCP] Désactiver DHCP (O/N))8. Saisissez le nom de domaine dans le champ Domain name (Nom de domaine).9. Sélectionnez Provision Model (Modèle de provisionnement) dans le menu. Appuyez sur . 10. Choisissez entre une configuration Enterprise ou PMR. Le paramètre par défaut est Enterprise.11. Dans le menu, sélectionnez Setup and Configuration (Installation et configuration). Appuyez sur .12. Sélectionnez Current Provisioning Mode (Mode de provisionnement actuel) pour afficher le mode actuel. Appuyez sur . Le mode de provisionnement actuel s'affiche. Appuyez sur ou <Échap> pour quitter.13. Sélectionnez Provisioning Record (Enregistrement de provisionnement) dans le menu et appuyez sur . L'écran affiche les données de l'enregistrement de provisionnement PSK/PKI de l'ordinateur. Si les données n'ont pas été entrées, le MEBx affiche un message indiquant que l'enregistrement de provisionnement est manquant : Provision Record not present Si les données sont entrées, le Provision Record (Enregistrement de provisionnement) affiche un de plusieurs messages.14. Sélectionnez Provisioning Server (Serveur de provisionnement) dans le menu, puis appuyez sur .15. Entrez l'IP du serveur de provisionnement dans le champ de Provisioning server address (Adresse du serveur de provisionnement) et appuyez sur . Le paramètre par défaut est 0.0.0.0. Ce paramètre par défaut ne fonctionne que si le serveur DNS a une entrée qui peut résoudre le serveur de provision à l'IP du serveur de provisionnement.16. Saisissez le port dans le champ Port number (Numéro de port) et appuyez sur . Le paramètre par défaut est 0. Si le paramètre reste défini sur la valeur par défaut qui est 0, Intel AMT tente de contacter le serveur de provisionnement sur le port 9971. Si ce serveur écoute sur un port différent, saisissez-le ici.17. Sélectionnez Provisioning Server FQDN (FQDN du serveur de provisionnement) dans le menu et appuyez sur .18. Entrez le FQDN (nom de domaine entièrement qualifié) pour le serveur de provisionnement et appuyez sur .19. Sélectionnez TLS-PSK dans le menu et appuyez sur .20. Set PID and PPS (Définir les PID et PPS) est l'option suivante. Les PID et PPS peuvent être entrées manuellement ou à l'aide d'une clé USB, une fois les codes générés par le SCS. Cette option sert à saisir l'ID de provisionnement (PID) et l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS). Les PID comportent huit caractères alors que les PPS en comportent 32. Comme les groupes de quatre caractères sont séparés par des tirets, les PID comportent neuf caractères et les PPS en comportent 40. Un SCS doit générer ces entrées.Ignorez l'option Delete PID and PPS (Supprimer les PID et PPS). Cette option restaure les paramètres usine de l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Return to Default » (Retour aux valeurs par défaut) pour plus d'informations à propos du dé-provisionnement. 21. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent) et appuyez sur .22. Sélectionnez TLS-PKI dans le menu, puis appuyez sur .23. Dans le menu, sélectionnez Remote Configuration Enable/Disable (Configuration à distance Activer/Désactiver) et appuyez sur . Cette option est Enabled (Activée) par défaut et peut être Disabled (Désactivée) si l'infrastructure du réseau ne prend pas en charge une Certificate Authority (CA -- Autorité de certificat).Manage Certificate Hashes (Administration des hachages de certificat) est l'option suivante. Par défaut, quatre hachages sont configurés. Des hachages peuvent être supprimés ou ajoutés selon les besoins du client.24. Dans le menu, sélectionnez Set PKI DNS Suffix (Définir le suffixe DNS PKI). Appuyez sur . 25. Saisissez le suffixe PKI DNS dans la zone de texte et appuyez sur .26. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent) et appuyez sur .27. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent) et appuyez sur . Le menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) s'affiche de nouveau.Ignorez l'option Un-Provision (Dé-provisionner). Cette option restaure les paramètres usine de l'ordinateur. Reportezvous à la section « Return to Default » (Retour aux valeurs par défaut) pour plus d'informations à propos du dé- provisionnement.28. Sélectionnez SOL/IDE-R, puis appuyez sur .29. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : [Caution] System resets after configuration changes. Continue: (Y/N) ([Attention] Le système se réinitialise après des modifications de la configuration. Continuer : O/N)Pour User Name & Password (Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe), sélectionnez Enabled (Activé), puis appuyez sur . Cette option permet d'ajouter des utilisateurs et des mots de passe à partir de l'interface WebGUI. Si cette option est désactivée, seul l'administrateur peut accéder à distance au MEBx.Pour Serial Over LAN (SOL/IDE-R), sélectionnez Enabled (Activé), puis appuyez sur .Pour IDE Redirection (Rediection IDE), sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) , puis appuyez sur .Password Policy (Stratégie de mot de passe) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est Default Password Only (Mot de passe par défaut seulement).Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est Enabled (Activé).Ignorez Set PRTC (Définir PRTC).Idle Timeout (Délai d'inactivité) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est 1. Ce délai n'est applicable que lorsqu'une option WoL est sélectionnée à l'étape 13 du processus afin d'activer ME pour le mode opérationnel Entreprise.30. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent), puis appuyez sur .31. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter), puis appuyez sur .32. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : Are you sure you want to exit? (Voulez-vous vraiment quitter ?) (Y/N) (O/N) :L'ordinateur redémarre. 33. Éteignez l'ordinateur et débranchez le câble d'alimentation. L'ordinateur est à présent en état d'installation et prêt pour le déploiement. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Interface MEBx (mode PME) Le MEBx (Intel® Management Engine BIOS Extension) est un module ROM optionnel fourni par Intel à Dell™ à des fins d'inclusion dans le BIOS Dell. Le MEBx a été personnalisé pour les ordinateurs Dell. Dell prend également en charge l'installation et la configuration d'Intel AMT en mode PME (SMB - Small and Medium Business). Le seul paramètre non obligatoire en mode PME est l'option Set PID and PPS (Définir les PID et PPD). De plus, l'option Provision Model (Modèle de provisionnement) est définie sur Small Business (PME) au lieu d'Enterprise (Entreprise). Pour installer et configurer un ordinateur pour le mode PME, procédez comme suit. Configuration ME Pour activer le moteur de gestion Intel ME sur la plate-forme cible, effectuez les étapes suivantes : 1. Pour ouvrir l'application MEBx, appuyez sur

lorsque l'écran du logo Dell apparaît. 2. Saisissez admin dans le champ Intel ME Password (Mot de passe Intel ME). Appuyez sur . La différence entre majuscules et minuscules est prise en compte. Vous devez modifier le mot de passe par défaut avant de modifier les options MEBx. 3. Sélectionnez Change Intel ME Password (Modifer le mot de passe Intel ME), puis appuyez sur . 4. Saisissez le nouveau mot de passe à deux reprises pour le confirmer. Le nouveau mot de passe doit inclure les éléments suivants : Huit caractèresUne lettre majuscule Une lettre minuscule Un chiffre Un caractère spécial (non alphanumérique), par exemple !, $, ou ; à l'exclusion des caractères :, ", et ,.) Le souligné ( _ ) et la barre d'espacement sont des caractères valides pour le mot de passe mais ces caractères ne rendent PAS le mot de passe plus complexe. 5. Modifiez le mot de passe pour établir un droit de propriété Intel AMT. L'ordinateur passe alors de l'état par défaut à l'état d'installation. 6. Sélectionnez Intel ME Configuration (Configuration Intel ME), puis appuyez sur . La fonction ME Platform Configuration (Configuration de la plate-forme ME) permet de configurer les fonctions ME telles que les options d'alimentation, les fonctionnalités de mise à jour du micrologiciel, etc.7. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : System resets after configuration change. Continue: (Y/N) (Le système se réinitialise après des modifications de la configuration. Continuer : O/N)Intel ME State Control (Contrôle de l'état Intel ME) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut de cette option est Enabled (Activé). Ne changez pas ce paramètre en Disabled (Désactivé). Si vous souhaitez désactiver Intel AMT, définissez l'option Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité) sur None (Aucune) plus tard pendant cette procédure.8. Sélectionnez Intel ME Firmware Local Update (mise à jour locale du micrologiciel Intel ME), puis appuyez sur . 9. Sélectionnez Always Open, Never Openou Restricted, (Toujours ouvert, Jamais ouvert, ou Limité), puis appuyez sur . Le paramètre par défaut de cette option est Disabled (Désactivé).10. Sélectionnez Intel ME Features Control (Contrôle des fonctions Intel ME) et appuyez sur .L'option suivante est Manageability Feature Selection (Sélection de la fonction de gérabilité). Cette fonction définit le mode de gestion de la plate-forme. Le paramètre par défaut est Intel AMT. La sélection de l'option None (Aucune) entraîne la désactivation de toutes les fonctions de gestion à distance.11. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent), puis appuyez sur .12. Sélectionnez Intel ME Power Control (Contrôle de l'alimentation Intel ME) et appuyez sur .Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est Mobile: ON in S0 (Mobile : Activé en S0).13. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent) et appuyez sur .14. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent), puis appuyez sur .15. Quittez l'installation MEBx et enregistrez la configuration ME. L'ordinateur affiche le message Intel ME Configuration Complete (Configuration Intel ME terminée), puis il redémarre. Après avoir terminé la configuration ME, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres Intel AMT. Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) Activation d'Intel AMT pour le mode PME 1. À l'écran de démarrage initial, appuyez sur

pour ouvrir à nouveau les écrans MEBx. 2. Un message vous invite à saisir le mot de passe. Saisissez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME. 3. Sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT), puis appuyez sur .4. Sélectionnez Host Name (Nom d'hôte) et appuyez sur . 5. Ensuite, saisissez un nom unique pour cet ordinateur Intel AMT. Appuyez sur . Les espaces ne sont pas acceptables dans le nom d'hôte. Assurez-vous que le nom d'hôte n'est pas en double sur le réseau. Des noms d'hôte peuvent être utilisés à la place de l'IP de l'ordinateur pour toutes les applications nécessitant l'adresse IP.6. Sélectionnez TCP/IP, puis appuyez sur . 7. Appuyez sur lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : [DHCP Enable] Disable DHCP (Y/N) ([Activer DHCP] Désactiver DHCP (O/N))8. Saisissez le nom de domaine dans le champ.9. Sélectionnez Provision Model (Modèle de provisionnement) dans le menu. Appuyez sur . Ceci vous permet de choisir entre une configuration Enterprise ou Small Business. Le paramètre par défaut est Enterprise. 10. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche :11. Ignorez l'option Un-Provision (Dé-provisionner). Cette option restaure les paramètres usine de l'ordinateur. Reportezvous à la section « Return to Default » (Retour aux valeurs par défaut) pour plus d'informations sur le déprovisionnement. 12. Sélectionnez SOL/IDE-R. Appuyez sur .13. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : [Caution] System resets after configuration changes. Continue: (Y/N) ([Attention] Le système se réinitialise après des modifications de la configuration. Continuer : O/N)14. Sélectionnez Enabled (Activé) pour Username & Password (Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe), puis appuyez sur . Cette option permet d'ajouter des utilisateurs et des mots de passe à partir de l'interface WebGUI. Si cette option est désactivée, seul l'administrateur peut accéder à distance au MEBx.15. Pour Serial Over LAN (Série sur LAN), sélectionnez Enabled (Activé), puis appuyez sur .16. Pour IDE Redirection (Redirection IDE), sélectionnez Enabled (Activé), puis appuyez sur .17. Pour Password Policy (Stratégie du mot de passe), sélectionnez Enabled (Activé), puis appuyez sur .Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est Enabled (Activé).18. Ignorez Set PRTC (Définir PRTC).Idle Timeout (Délai d'inactivité) est l'option suivante. Le paramètre par défaut est 1. Ce délai n'est applicable que lorsqu'une option WoL est sélectionnée pour l'écran Intel ME ON in Host Sleep States (Intel ME ACTIVÉ dans les états de veille de l'hôte) du processus permettant d'activer ME pour le mode de fonctionnement Entreprise.19. Sélectionnez Return to Previous Menu (Revenir au menu précédent) et appuyez sur .20. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter), puis appuyez sur .21. Appuyez sur (o) lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : Are you sure you want to exit? (Voulez-vous vraiment quitter ?) (Y/N) (O/N) :22. Après redémarrage de l'ordinateur, éteignez l'ordinateur et débranchez le câble d'alimentation. L'ordinateur est à présent en état d'installation et prêt pour le déploiement. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Déploiement Lorsque vous êtes prêt à déployer un ordinateur pour un utilisateur, branchez l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation électrique et connectez-le au réseau. Utilisez la carte NIC 82566DM d'Intel®. La technologie Intel AMT (Active Management Technology - Technologie d'administration active) ne fonctionne avec aucune autre solution NIC. Une fois sous tension, l'ordinateur recherche immédiatement un serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS). S'il trouve le serveur, l'ordinateur activé AMT lui envoie un message Hello. DHCP et DNS doivent être disponibles pour que la recherche du serveur d'installation et de configuration réussisse automatiquement. Si DHCP et DNS ne sont pas disponibles, l'adresse IP du serveur d'installation et de configuration (SCS) doit être entrée manuellement dans le MEBx de l'ordinateur compatible AMT. Le message Hello contient les informations suivantes : ID de provisionnement (PID) Identificateur universellement unique (UUID - Universally Unique Identifier) Adresse IP Numéros de version de la mémoire ROM et du micrologiciel (FW) Le message Hello est transparent à l'utilisateur final. Il n'existe aucun mécanisme d'information pour vous indiquer que l'ordinateur diffuse le message. Le SCS utilise les informations du message Hello pour initialiser une connexion TLS (Transport Layer Security - Sécurité de couche de transport) à l'ordinateur activé Intel AMT utilisant une suite de chiffrement de clé pré-partagée TLS (PSK - Pre-Shared key), si TLS est pris en charge. Le SCS utilise le PID pour rechercher l'expression de passe de provisionnement (PPS) dans la base de données du serveur de provisionnement et utilise le PPS et le PID pour générer un secret pré-maître TLS. TLS est facultatif. Pour des transactions sécurisées et cryptées, utilisez TLS si l'infrastructure est disponible. Si vous n'utilisez pas TLS, HTTP Digest est utilisé à des fins d'authentification mutuelle. HTTP Digest n'est pas aussi sécurisé que TLS. Le SCS se connecte à l'ordinateur Intel AMT à l'aide du nom d'utilisateur et du mot de passe et provisionne les éléments de données obligatoires suivants : Nouveaux PPS et PID (pour installation et configuration ultérieures) Certificats TLS Clés privées Date et heure actuelles Références HTTP Digest Références de négociation HTTP L'ordinateur passe de l'état d'installation à l'état provisionné, Intel AMT est alors complètement opérationnel. Une fois provisionné, l'ordinateur peut être géré à distance. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Pilotes du système d'exploitation Dans le système d'exploitation, il faut installer deux pilotes pour supprimer les périphériques inconnus du Gestionnaire de périphériques. Ces pilotes sont abordés ci-dessous. Pilote SOL/LMS Le pilote Intel® AMT Serial-Over-LAN (SOL) / Local Manageability Service (LMS) est disponible à l'adresse support.dell.com et sur le CD ResourceCD sous la rubrique Chipset Drivers (Pilotes de chipset). Le pilote est intitulé Intel AMT SOL/LMS. Une fois le pilote trouvé, exécutez le fichier ; il se décompresse et invite l'utilisateur à poursuivre le processus d'installation. Une fois le pilote SOL/LMS installé, l'entrée PCI Serial Port (Port série PCI) devient Intel Active Management Technology - SOL (COM3). Pilote HECI Le pilote Intel AMT HECI (interface de contrôleur embarqué d'hôte - Host Embedded Controller Interface) est disponible sur support.dell.com et sur le CD ResourceCD dans la section Chipset Drivers (pilotes de chipset). Le pilote est intitulé Intel AMT HECI. Une fois le pilote trouvé, exécutez le fichier ; il se décompresse et invite l'utilisateur à poursuivre le processus d'installation. Une fois les pilotes HECI installés, l'entrée PCI Simple Communications Controller (Contrôleur de communications simple PCI) devient Intel Management Engine Interface (Interface du moteur de gestion Intel). Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Dépannage Cette section présente quelques étapes basiques de dépannage à effectuer si des problèmes liés à la configuration Intel® AMT surviennent. N'oubliez pas de toujours contrôler DSN pour d'autres options de dépannage. Rétablir les paramètres par défaut Le rétablissement des paramètres par défaut est également appelé dé-provisionnement. Pour dé-provisionner un ordinateur installé et configuré pour Intel AMT, utilisez l'écran de configuration d'Intel AMT et l'option Un-Provision (Dé-provisionner). Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour dé-provisionner un ordinateur : 1. Sélectionnez Un-Provision (Dé-provisionner), puis Full Un-provision (Dé-provisionnement total). Le dé-provisionnement total est disponible pour les ordinateurs provisionnés en mode PME. Cette option rétablit tous les paramètres usine par défaut de la configuration Intel AMT mais ne rétablit PAS les paramètres de configuration ni les mots de passe de la configuration ME. Un dé-provisionnement total ou partiel peut être effectué pour les ordinateurs provisionnés en mode Entreprise. Le dé-provisionnement partiel rétablit les valeurs usine par défaut des paramètres de configuration Intel AMT, à l'exception des PID et PPS. Le dé-provisionnement partiel ne rétablit PAS les paramètres et les mots de passe de configuration ME. Un message de dé-provisionnement s'affiche au bout d'une minute. Une fois le dé-provisionnement terminé, le contrôle revient à l'écran de configuration Intel AMT. Les options Provisioning Server (Serveur de provisionnement), Set PID and PPS, (Définir les PID et PPS) et Set PRTC (Définir PRTC) sont de nouveau disponibles car l'ordinateur est configuré sur le mode Entreprise par défaut. 2. Sélectionnez Return to previous menu (Revenir au menu précédent). 3. Sélectionnez Exit (Quitter), puis appuyez sur (o). L'ordinateur redémarre. Flash du micrologiciel Flashez le micrologiciel pour effectuer une mise à niveau à des versions ultérieures d'Intel AMT. La fonction de flash automatique peut être désactivée en sélectionnant Disabled (Désactivé) dans le paramètre Secure Firmware Update (Mise à jour sécurisée du micrologiciel) de l'interface du MEBx. Si ce paramètre est désactivé, un message d'erreur du micrologiciel apparaît lors du flash du BIOS. Il est IMPOSSIBLE d'effectuer un flash du micrologiciel à une version antérieure ou à la version actuellement installée. Le flash du micrologiciel est disponible pour téléchargement sur le site support.dell.com. Serial-Over-LAN (SOL) et IDE Redirection (Redirection IDE - IDE-R) Si vous ne pouvez pas utiliser IDE-R et SOL, suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. À l'écran de démarrage initial, appuyez sur

pour ouvrir les écrans MEBx. 2. Un message vous invite à saisir le mot de passe. Saisissez le nouveau mot de passe Intel ME. 3. Sélectionnez Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT), puis appuyez sur . 4. Sélectionnez Un-Provision (Dé-provisionner), puis appuyez sur . 5. Sélectionnez Full Unprovision (Dé-provisionnement total), puis appuyez sur . 6. Reconfigurez les paramètres affichés à l'option de menu Intel AMT Configuration (Configuration Intel AMT) illustrée ici.Retour à la page du sommaire www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ ATG E6400 Guide de configuration et de référence rapide Ce guide présente les fonctionnalités et caractéristiques de l’ordinateur et propose des informations en matière d’installation rapide, de logiciels et de dépannage. Pour plus d’informations sur votre système d’exploitation, les périphériques et technologies, voir leGuide technologique Dell sur le site support.dell.com. Modèle PP27LRemarques, Avis et Précautions REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Caractéristiques Macrovision Ce produit intègre une technologie de protection des droits d’auteur qui est protégée par des revendications de méthode de certains brevets américains et d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle détenus par Macrovision Corporation ainsi que par d’autres détenteurs de droits. L’utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d’auteur est soumise à l’autorisation de Macrovision Corporation ; elle est destinée exclusivement à une utilisation domestique et à des opérations limitées de visualisation, sauf autorisation particulière de Macrovision Corporation. L’ingénierie inverse et le désassemblage sont interdits. ____________________ Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2008 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l’autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, DellConnect, Latitude, Wi-Fi Catcher, ExpressCharge, Dell MediaDirect et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Bluetooth est une marque déposée appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc., et utilisée par Dell Inc. sous licence ; Intel est une marque déposée et Core est une marque Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays ; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et le logo du bouton de démarrage de Windows Vista sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays ; TouchStrip est une marque de UPEK, Inc. Les autres marques et noms de produits pouvant être utilisés dans ce document sont reconnus comme appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP27L Mai 2008 Réf. C110C Rév. A00Sommaire 3 Sommaire 1 À propos de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vue avant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Vue de dessous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Retrait de la batterie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Commutateur sans fil et détecteur de réseau Dell™ Wi-Fi Catcher™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2 Configuration de votre ordinateur. . . . . . 13 Configuration rapide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connexion à Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Configuration de votre connexion Internet. . . . . 16 Transfert d’informations vers un nouvel ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Système d’exploitation Microsoft® Windows Vista® . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 MicrosoftWindows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3 Caractéristiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Sommaire 4 Dépannage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Outils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Voyants d’alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Messages d’erreur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Résolution des problèmes matériels et logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conseils de dépannage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Problèmes d’alimentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Problèmes de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Problèmes de blocage et problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Service Dell Technical Update . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Dell Support Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 5 Réinstallation du logiciel . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Réinstallation de pilotes et d’utilitaires. . . . . . . 54 Restauration du système d’exploitation . . . . . . . . . 56 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . 57 Utilisation de Dell™ Factory Image Restore . . . . 59 Utilisation du support Operating System . . . . . . 60Sommaire 5 6 Recherche d’informations . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7 Obtention d’aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Obtention d’aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Support technique et service clientèle. . . . . . . 66 DellConnect™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Services en ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Service AutoTech. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Service automatisé de consultation de l’état des commandes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Problèmes de commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Informations sur les produits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Retour d’articles pour réparation ou avoir dans le cadre de la garantie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Avant d’appeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Pour prendre contact avec Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 SommaireÀ propos de votre ordinateur 7 À propos de votre ordinateur Vue avant 1 Microphone (en option) 2 Voyant de la caméra (en option) 3 Caméra (en option) 4 Loquet de l’écran 3 6 4 25 1 7 13 16 17 18 21 26 10 11 24 23 8 5 27 14 9 12 15 19 20 2 228 À propos de votre ordinateur 5 Écran et écran tactile (en option) 6 Voyants d’état du clavier 7 Boutons de contrôle du volume 8 Bouton d’alimentation 9 Connecteurs USB (2) 10 Détecteur de réseau DELL Wi-Fi Catcher™ 11 Commutateur sans fil 12 Connecteurs audio (2) 13 Haut-parleur droit 14 Baie de média (avec lecteur optique) 15 Lecteur d’empreintes digitales (en option) 16 Emplacement de carte PC Card 17 Connecteur IEEE 1394a 18 Lecteur de cartes à puce sans contact 19 Lecteur de carte mémoire Secure Digital (SD) 20 Tablette tactile 21 Loquet de fermeture de l’écran 22 Boutons de la tablette tactile/de l’ergot de pointage 23 Haut-parleur gauche 24 Ergot de pointage 25 Clavier 26 Voyants d’état de l’appareil 27 Capteur de lumière ambianteÀ propos de votre ordinateur 9 Vue arrière PRÉCAUTION : n’obstruez pas les entrées d’air de l’ordinateur et n’insérez pas d’objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas votre ordinateur Dell™ dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu’une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Ceci risque d’endommager l’ordinateur ou de provoquer un incendie. Le ventilateur se met en marche lorsque l’ordinateur chauffe. Il se peut que le ventilateur fasse du bruit ; cela est tout à fait normal et ne signifie en aucun cas que le ventilateur ou l’ordinateur est défectueux. 1 Connecteur RJ-11 (en option) 2 Connecteur RJ-45 3 Voyants d’alimentation/de batterie 4 DisplayPort multimode 5 Adaptateur de CA 6 Fente pour câble de sécurité 7 Connecteur vidéo 8 Connecteur eSATA/USB 9 Connecteur USB PowerShare 10 Lecteur de cartes à puce 1 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 8 310 À propos de votre ordinateur Vue de dessous Retrait de la batterie PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : l’utilisation d’une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d’incendie ou d’explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell. N’utilisez pas de batterie provenant d’un autre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : avant de retirer ou de remplacer la batterie, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez l’adaptateur de CA de la prise secteur et de l’ordinateur, débranchez le modem de la prise murale et de l’ordinateur et retirez les autres câbles externes de l’ordinateur. 1 Indicateur de charge de la batterie 2 Entrées d’air 3 Dispositif d’extraction de la baie de batterie 4 Batterie 5 Connecteur de la station d’accueil REMARQUE : retirez le panneau de protection recouvrant le connecteur de la station d’accueil avant d’amarrer l’ordinateur. 2 4 5 1 3À propos de votre ordinateur 11 Commutateur sans fil et détecteur de réseau Dell™ Wi-Fi Catcher™ Utilisez le commutateur sans fil pour activer ou désactiver les périphériques réseau sans fil. Utilisez le détecteur de réseau Wi-Fi Catcher Locator pour localiser les réseaux. Pour plus d’informations sur la connexion à Internet, voir « Connexion à Internet » à la page 16. Icône du commutateur sans fil Icône du détecteur de réseau Dell Wi-Fi Catcher12 À propos de votre ordinateurConfiguration de votre ordinateur 13 Configuration de votre ordinateur Configuration rapide PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : l’adaptateur de CA est compatible avec les prises secteur du monde entier. Cependant, les connecteurs et barrettes d’alimentation varient selon les pays. L’utilisation d’un câble non compatible ou la connexion incorrecte du câble à la barrette d’alimentation ou à la prise secteur peut provoquer un incendie ou endommager l’équipement. AVIS : lorsque vous déconnectez l’adaptateur de CA de l’ordinateur, saisissez le connecteur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d’éviter d’endommager le câble. Lorsque vous enroulez le câble de l’adaptateur de CA, assurez-vous de suivre l’angle du connecteur de l’adaptateur pour éviter d’endommager le câble. REMARQUE : certains périphériques mentionnés dans les étapes suivantes peuvent être disponibles en option. 1 Reliez le connecteur de l’adaptateur de CA à l’ordinateur et à la prise secteur.14 Configuration de votre ordinateur 2 Connectez le câble réseau. 3 Connectez les périphériques USB, tels qu’une souris ou un clavier. 4 Connectez les périphériques IEEE 1394, tels qu’un lecteur de DVD. 5 Ouvrez l’écran et appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation pour mettre l’ordinateur sous tension.Configuration de votre ordinateur 15 REMARQUE : il est recommandé de mettre l’ordinateur sous tension, puis de le mettre hors tension au moins une fois avant d’installer toute carte ou de connecter l’ordinateur à une station d’accueil ou à un autre périphérique externe, tel qu’une imprimante. 6 Connectez-vous à Internet. Pour plus d’informations, voir « Connexion à Internet » à la page 16. 1 Service Internet 2 Modem câble ou DSL 3 Routeur sans fil 4 Ordinateur portable avec connexion câblée 5 Ordinateur portable avec connexion sans fil 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 516 Configuration de votre ordinateur Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : les fournisseurs d’accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d’un modem ou d’une connexion réseau et d’un fournisseur d’accès à Internet (FAI). Si vous utilisez une connexion d’accès à distance, connectez un cordon téléphonique au connecteur du modem de l’ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion DSL ou modem câble/satellite, contactez votre FAI ou opérateur de téléphonie cellulaire pour obtenir des instructions de configuration. Configuration de votre connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l’aide d’un raccourci de bureau fourni par votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’icône du fournisseur d’accès à Internet sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer la configuration. Si vous ne disposez pas d’une icône de raccourci vers votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre fournisseur, suivez la procédure présentée dans la section ci-dessous. REMARQUE : si vous ne réussissez pas à vous connecter à Internet, consultez le Guide technologique Dell. Si vous avez réussi à vous connecter auparavant, il est possible que le service du fournisseur d’accès à Internet soit interrompu. Contactez-le pour vérifier l’état du service ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. REMARQUE : assurez-vous de disposer des informations fournies par votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet (FAI). Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d’accès à Internet, consultez l’Assistant Connexion à Internet.Configuration de votre ordinateur 17 Système d’exploitation Microsoft® Windows Vista® 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista → Panneau de configuration. 3 Sous Réseau et Internet, cliquez sur Se connecter à Internet. 4 Dans la fenêtre Se connecter à Internet, cliquez sur Haut débit (PPPoE) ou Accès à distance, selon la façon dont vous souhaitez vous connecter : • Choisissez Haut débit si vous comptez utiliser une connexion DSL, modem par satellite ou par cable, ou via la technologie sans fil Bluetooth. • Choisissez Accès à distance si vous utilisez un modem à numérotation automatique ou une connexion RNIS. REMARQUE : si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion choisir, cliquez sur Comment choisir ? ou prenez contact avec votre FAI. 5 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran et terminez la configuration à l’aide des informations de configuration fournies par votre FAI. MicrosoftWindows® XP 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Internet Explorer→ Se connecter à Internet. 3 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l’option appropriée : • Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d’accès à Internet, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet. • Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous disposez d’un CD de configuration, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous avez sélectionné Configurer ma connexion manuellement à l’étape 3, passez à l’étape 5. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer la configuration.18 Configuration de votre ordinateur REMARQUE : si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet. 5 Cliquez sur l’option appropriée sous Comment voulez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Utilisez les informations de configuration fournies par votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet pour terminer la configuration. Transfert d’informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Système d’exploitation Microsoft® Windows Vista® 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis cliquez sur Transfert de fichiers et paramètres Windows→ Démarrer l’Assistant Easy Tranfer de Windows. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur, cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Cliquez sur Démarrer un nouveau transfert ou Continuer un transfert en cours. 4 Suivez les instructions fournies à l’écran par l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et paramètres Windows. MicrosoftWindows® XP Windows XP propose un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de déplacer les données d’un ordinateur source vers un nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur via une connexion réseau ou série, ou les enregistrer sur un support amovible, tel qu’un CD inscriptible, pour les transférer vers le nouvel ordinateur. REMARQUE : vous pouvez transférer des informations d’un ancien ordinateur au vers un nouvel ordinateur en connectant directement un câble série aux ports d’entrée/sortie (E/S) des deux ordinateurs. Pour obtenir des instructions sur la configuration d’une connexion par câble directe entre deux ordinateurs, reportez-vous à l’article 305621 de la base de connaissances de Microsoft, intitulé COMMENT FAIRE : Pour installer une connexion par câble entre deux ordinateurs Windows XP. Ces informations peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays.Configuration de votre ordinateur 19 Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Exécution de l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et paramètres avec le support Operating System REMARQUE : cette procédure nécessite le support Operating System. Ce support est en option et peut ne pas être fourni avec tous les ordinateurs. Pour préparer le nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers : 1 Démarrez l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→ Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l’écran de bienvenue de l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l’écran De quel ordinateur s’agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur→ Suivant. 4 Dans l’écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J’utiliserai l’Assistant du CD-ROM Windows XP→ Suivant. 5 Lorsque l’écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur apparaît, passez à votre ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment. Pour copier les données à partir de l’ancien ordinateur : 1 Sur l’ancien ordinateur, insérez le support Operating System de Windows XP. 2 Dans l’écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres→ Suivant. 4 Dans l’écran De quel ordinateur s’agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur→ Suivant. 5 Dans l’écran, Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de votre choix.20 Configuration de votre ordinateur 6 Dans l’écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Après la copie des informations, l’écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 7 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l’écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l’écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L’assistant applique les fichiers collectés et les paramètres au nouvel ordinateur. 3 Dans l’écran Terminé, cliquez sur Terminé, puis redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Exécution de l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et paramètres avec le support Operating System Pour exécuter l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support Operating System, il faut créer un disque assistant qui permettra la création d’un fichier d’image de sauvegarde pour supports amovibles. Pour créer un disque assistant, effectuez les opérations suivantes sur votre nouvel ordinateur sous Windows XP : 1 Démarrez l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→ Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l’écran de bienvenue de l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l’écran De quel ordinateur s’agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur→ Suivant. 4 Dans l’écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je veux créer une disquette de l’Assistant dans le lecteur suivant→ Suivant. 5 Insérez le support amovible, par exemple un CD inscriptible, puis cliquez sur OK.Configuration de votre ordinateur 21 6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et lorsque le message Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant pour l’instant. 7 Accédez à l’ancien ordinateur. Pour copier les données à partir de l’ancien ordinateur : 1 Insérez le disque assistant dans l’ancien ordinateur et cliquez sur Démarrer→ Exécuter. 2 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin d’accès de fastwiz (sur le support amovible approprié) puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Dans l’écran de bienvenue de l’Assistant Transfert de fichiers et paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Dans l’écran De quel ordinateur s’agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur→ Suivant. 5 Dans l’écran, Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de votre choix. 6 Dans l’écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Après la copie des informations, l’écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 7 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l’écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur du nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l’écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?,sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. L’assistant lit les fichiers et paramètres recueillis et les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres ont été appliqués et les fichiers transférés, l’écran Terminé apparaît. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.22 Configuration de votre ordinateur REMARQUE : pour plus d’informations sur cette procédure, recherchez le document n° 154781 (What Are The Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™ Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System? (Différentes méthodes de transfert des fichiers de mon ancien ordinateur vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell Windows XP)) sur le site support.dell.com. REMARQUE : ce document de la base de connaissances Dell™ peut ne pas être accessible dans certains pays.Caractéristiques 23 Caractéristiques REMARQUE : les offres peuvent varier d’une région à l’autre. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Aide et support et sélectionnez l’option qui permet de consulter les informations sur votre ordinateur. Processeur Type de processeur Intel® Core™ 2 Duo Mémoire cache L1 32 Ko par instruction, mémoire cache de données de 32 Ko par cœur Mémoire cache L2 3 Mo ou 6 Mo partagés Fréquence de bus (FSB) 1067 MHz Informations sur le système Jeu de puces Intel GM45 Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM 64 bits Largeur du bus d’adresses du processeur 36 bits EPROM flash SPI 32 Mbits Carte PC Card REMARQUE : l’emplacement de carte PC Card est conçu exclusivement pour des cartes PC Card. Il ne prend PAS en charge les cartes ExpressCard. Contrôleur CardBus Ricoh R5C847 Connecteur de carte PC Card Un (pour cartes de type I ou de type II) Cartes prises en charge 3,3 V et 5 V Taille du connecteur de carte PC Card 80 broches24 Caractéristiques Lecteur de carte mémoire Secure Digital (SD) Cartes prises en charge SD, SDIO, SD HC, Mini SD (avec adaptateur) MMC, MMC+, Mini MMC (avec adaptateur) Mémoire Connecteur du module de mémoire Deux supports de module de mémoire DIMM Capacités du module de mémoire 512 Mo (un module de mémoire DIMM) 1 Go (un ou deux module(s) de mémoire DIMM) 2 Go (un ou deux module(s) de mémoire DIMM) 3 Go (deux modules de mémoire DIMM) 4 Go (un ou deux module(s) de mémoire DIMM) 8 Go (deux modules de mémoire DIMM, nécessite un système d’exploitation Windows XP ou Windows Vista 64 bits) Type de mémoire DDR2 800 MHz (si prise en charge par le jeu de puces et/ou le processeur) ; mémoire non ECC uniquement Mémoire minimale 512 Go Mémoire maximale 8 Go (nécessite un système d’exploitation Windows XP ou Windows Vista 64 bits) REMARQUE : pour tirer parti des capacités de bande passante sur deux canaux, les deux supports de mémoire doivent être occupés par des mémoires de même capacité. REMARQUE : la mémoire disponible affichée ne correspond pas à la mémoire maximale installée parce qu’une partie de la mémoire est réservée pour les fichiers système. REMARQUE : pour activer la technologie Intel® Active Management Technology (iAMT), un module de mémoire DIMM doit occuper le connecteur de mémoire « A ». Pour plus d’informations sur le connecteur de mémoire, reportez-vous au Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com. Pour plus d’informations sur la technologie iAMT, reportez-vous au Dell™ Systems Management Administrator’s Guide (Guide de l’administrateur systèmes Dell™) sur le site support.dell.com.Caractéristiques 25 Ports et connecteurs Audio Connecteur de microphone et connecteur de casque/haut-parleurs stéréo IEEE 1394a Connecteur à 4 broches Prise en charge des mini-cartes (emplacements pour extension interne) Un emplacement de mini-carte mi-hauteur dédié à la connectivité WLAN Un emplacement de mini-carte pleine hauteur dédié à la connectivité WWAN (haut débit mobile) Un emplacement de mini-carte pleine hauteur dédié à la connectivité WPAN (technologie sans fil Bluetooth® ou Ultra Wideband [UWB]) REMARQUE : vous pouvez également utiliser l’emplacement de mini-carte pleine hauteur WWAN ou WPAN pour le cache flash Intel®. Modem Connecteur RJ-11 Carte réseau Connecteur RJ-45 USB, USB PowerShare, eSATA Quatre connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme USB 2.0 REMARQUE : votre ordinateur peut prendre en charge jusqu’à quatre périphériques USB. Un des connecteurs USB est un connecteur USB PowerShare transmettant de l’énergie à des périphériques tiers (par exemple, un téléphone portable). Vous pouvez également utiliser un autre connecteur USB tel qu’un connecteur eSATA. eSATA Connecteur USB eSATA/PowerShare Vidéo Connecteur VGA DisplayPort multimode26 Caractéristiques Communications Modem Modem interne en option Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 sur la carte système Sans fil Mini-carte mi-hauteur WLAN et mini-carte pleine hauteur WWAN et WPAN Technologie sans fil Bluetooth® Technologie UWB Haut débit mobile Mini-carte pleine hauteur GPS Pris en charge par les mini-cartes pleine hauteur haut débit mobile Vidéo Type de vidéo Intégrée sur la carte système, avec accélération matérielle Bus de données Vidéo intégrée Contrôleur vidéo Vidéo intégrée : Intel Graphics Media Accelerator X4500 HD Mémoire vidéo : Mémoire graphique totale : Windows XP : Jusqu’à 512 Mo maximum (dont 1 Go à < 1,5 Go de la mémoire totale du système) Jusqu’à 768 Mo maximum (dont 1,5 Go à < 2 Go de la mémoire totale du système) Jusqu’à 1 Go maximum (dont 2 Go ou plus de la mémoire totale du système) Windows Vista : Jusqu’à 253 Mo maximum (dont 1 Go de la mémoire totale du système) Jusqu’à 552 Mo maximum (dont 1,5 Go de la mémoire totale du système) Jusqu’à 808 Mo maximum (dont 2 Go de la mémoire totale du système)Caractéristiques 27 Jusqu’à 1 320 Mo maximum (dont 3 Go de la mémoire totale du système) Jusqu’à 1 832 Mo maximum (dont 4 Go de la mémoire totale du système) Sortie vidéo DisplayPort multimode et VGA Audio Type Son haute définition bicanal Contrôleur audio IDT 92HD71B Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interfaces : Interne Codec audio haute définition Externe Connecteur de microphone (entrée) et connecteurs de casque/haut-parleurs stéréo Haut-parleurs Deux haut-parleurs 1 watt, 4 ohms Amplificateur intégré pour haut-parleurs 1 watt par canal, 4 ohms Microphone interne Microphone numérique unique Contrôle du volume Boutons de contrôle du volume et menus du programme Écran Type (matrice active TFT) WXGA X/Y actif 303,36 x 189,6 Dimensions : Hauteur 207 mm (8,15 pouces) Largeur 320 mm (12,6 pouces) Diagonale 358,14 mm (14,1 pouces) Vidéo (suite)28 Caractéristiques Résolution maximale : WXGA 1280 x 800 pixels Taux de rafraîchissement 32 Go Angle de fonctionnement 0° (fermé) à 160° (sauf en position amarrage) Angles de vue : Horizontal 40/40° Vertical 15/30° Taille du pixel : WXGA 0,2370 x 0,2370 Consommation électrique type (écran avec rétro-éclairage) : WXGA 10,05 W maximum Clavier Nombre de touches 83 (États-Unis et Canada) ; 84 (Europe) ; 87 (Japon) Disposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Dimension Taille standard (taille de touche 19 mm) Tablette tactile Résolution de la position X/Y (mode de table graphique) 240 cpi Dimension : Largeur Zone sensible de 73 mm (2,9 po) Hauteur Rectangle de 42,9 mm (1,7 po) Écran (suite)Caractéristiques 29 Batterie Type « Smart » au lithium ion à couche prismatique 12 éléments (84 Wh) « Smart » au lithium ion 9 éléments (85 Wh) « Smart » au lithium ion 6 éléments (56 Wh) « Smart » au lithium ion 4 éléments (35 Wh) Dimensions : Batteries au lithium ion 4 et 6 éléments : Profondeur 206 mm (8,11 pouces) Hauteur 19,8 mm (0,78 pouce) Largeur 47 mm (1,85 pouce) Batteries au lithium ion 9 éléments : Profondeur 208 mm (8,67 pouces) Hauteur 22,3 mm (0,88 pouce) Largeur 68,98 mm (2,7 pouces) Batteries au lithium-ion à couche 12 éléments : Profondeur 14,48 mm Hauteur 217,24 mm Largeur 322,17 mm Poids : Batterie principale 4 éléments 0,24 kg (0,53 lb) Batterie principale 6 éléments 0,33 kg (0,73 lb) Batterie haute capacité 9 éléments 0,51 kg (1,12 lb) Batterie à couche 12 éléments 0,85 kg (1,87 lb) Tension : Batterie 4 éléments 14,8 VCC Batterie 6 et 9 éléments 11,1 VCC Batterie à couche 12 éléments 14,8 VCC REMARQUE : l’autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l’utilisation et peut être considérablement réduite en cas d’utilisation intensive.30 Caractéristiques Temps de charge : Environ 1 heure pour 80 % en mode de charge standard Ordinateur éteint Environ 4 heures pour 100 % en mode Dell™ ExpressCharge™ Durée de vie (environ) 1 an Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 40° C (32° à 104° F) Stockage –10° à 65° C (–14° à 149° F) Pile bouton CR-2032 Adaptateur de CA Tension d’entrée 100–240 VCA Courant d’entrée (maximal) 1,5 A Fréquence d’entrée 50–60 Hz Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32 ° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Adaptateur de CA de voyage PA-12 65 W : Tension de sortie 19,5 V CC Courant de sortie 3,34 A Hauteur 15 mm (0,6 pouce) Largeur 66 mm (2,6 pouces) Profondeur 127 mm (5 pouces) Poids 0,29 kg (0,64 lb) Batterie (suite)Caractéristiques 31 Adaptateur de CA PA-10 série D 90 W : Tension de sortie 19,5 V CC Courant de sortie 4,62 A Hauteur 32 mm (1,3 pouce) Largeur 60 mm (2,4 pouces) Profondeur 140 mm (5,5 pouces) Poids 0,425 kg (0,9 lb) Adaptateur de CA PA-3E 90 série E : Tension de sortie 19,5 V CC Courant de sortie 4,62 A Hauteur 15 mm (0,6 pouce) Largeur 70 mm (2,8 pouces) Longueur 147 mm (5,8 pouces) Poids 0,345 kg (0,76 lb) Lecteur d’empreintes digitales (en option) Type Capteur par bande UPEK TCS3 TouchStrip™ utilisant la technologie de détection capacitive active des pixels CMOS Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 40,5 mm (1,594 pouces) Largeur 342 mm (13,464 pouces) Profondeur 251,7 mm (9,909 pouces) Poids 2,78 kg (6,12 lb) avec carte graphique UMA, batterie 6 éléments, cache de port et lecteur optique 2,65 kg (5,84 lb) avec carte graphique UMA, batterie à 6 éléments, cache de port et emplacement prédécoupé Adaptateur de CA (suite)32 Caractéristiques Environnement Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32 ° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Humidité relative (maximale) : Fonctionnement 10 à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration maximale (simulant un environnement utilisateur à l’aide d’un spectre de vibration aléatoire) : Fonctionnement 0,66 geff Stockage 1,3 geff Choc maximal (mesuré avec le disque dur en fonctionnement sur une impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms en fonctionnement ; également mesuré en position de repos des têtes du disque dur et impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms pour le stockage) : Fonctionnement 143 g Stockage 163 g Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3 048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 3 048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Caméra (en option) Résolution 640 x 480 pixels (VGA)Dépannage 33 Dépannage PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter tout choc électrique, toute lacération causée par des pales de ventilateur en mouvement et toute autre blessure, débranchez toujours l’ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d’ouvrir le capot. PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Outils Voyants d’alimentation Le voyant d’alimentation bicolore à l’avant de l’ordinateur s’allume et clignote ou reste allumé, selon l’état : • Si le voyant d’alimentation est éteint, l’ordinateur est éteint ou n’est pas alimenté. • Si le voyant d’alimentation est bleu fixe et si l’ordinateur ne répond pas, vérifiez que l’écran est connecté et sous tension. • Si le voyant est bleu clignotant, l’ordinateur est en mode veille. Appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation pour revenir au fonctionnement normal. Si le voyant d’alimentation est orange clignotant, l’ordinateur est alimenté, mais un périphérique tel qu’un module de mémoire ou une carte graphique peut mal fonctionner ou être mal installé. • Si le voyant est orange fixe, il se peut que l’ordinateur connaisse un problème d’alimentation ou qu’un périphérique interne fonctionne mal. Codes sonores Votre ordinateur peut émettre une série de signaux sonores lors du démarrage si le moniteur ne peut pas afficher les erreurs ou les problèmes éventuels. Cette série de signaux, appelée « code sonore », permet d’identifier les problèmes. Un de ces codes sonores consiste en trois signaux courts répétitifs. Celui-ci indique que l’ordinateur a rencontré une panne éventuelle de la carte système.34 Dépannage Si l’ordinateur émet un signal lors du démarrage, procédez comme suit : 1 Notez le code sonore. 2 Exécutez Dell™ Diagnostics pour identifier une cause plus sérieuse (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). Code (signaux courts répétitifs) Description Remède suggéré 1 Échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS. Défaillance possible de la carte système. Contactez Dell. 2 Aucun module de mémoire détecté 1 Si au moins deux modules de mémoire sont installés, retirez-les, réinstallez-en un (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com), puis redémarrez l’ordinateur. Si l’ordinateur démarre normalement, réinstallez un autre module. Poursuivez jusqu’à ce que le module défectueux soit identifié ou, en l’absence d’erreur, jusqu’à ce que tous les modules soient réinstallés. 2 Si vous disposez d’une mémoire fiable du même type, installez-la dans votre ordinateur. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com. 3 Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. 3 Défaillance possible de la carte système Contactez Dell. 4 Défaillance de lecture/écriture en mémoire vive 1 Assurez-vous qu’il n’existe aucune exigence spéciale d’emplacement de connecteur de mémoire/de module de mémoire (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). 2 Vérifiez que les modules de mémoire que vous installez sont compatibles avec l’ordinateur (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). 3 Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell.Dépannage 35 Messages d’erreur PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Si le message ne figure pas dans la liste, consultez la documentation du système d’exploitation ou du programme en cours d’utilisation au moment où le message est apparu. AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D’UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE AUXILIAIRE) — La tablette tactile ou la souris externe sont peut-être défectueuses. Dans le cas d’une souris externe, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Activez l’option Pointing Device (Dispositif de pointage) dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME (COMMANDE O U NOM D E FICHIER INCORRECT) — Vérifiez que vous avez bien orthographié la commande, mis des espaces à bon escient et utilisé le chemin d’accès approprié. CACHE DISABLED DUE T O FAILURE (CACHE DÉSACTIVÉ EN RAISON D’UNE DÉFAILLANCE) — Le cache interne principal du microprocesseur ne fonctionne pas correctement. Contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D U CONTRÔLEUR D U LECTEUR D E CD) — Le lecteur de CD ne répond pas aux commandes de l’ordinateur. 5 Défaillance de l’horloge temps réel. Défaillance possible de la batterie ou de la carte système. 1 Remplacez la batterie (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). 2 Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. 6 Échec du test de BIOS vidéo. Contactez Dell. 7 Échec du test de cache processeur Contactez Dell. Code (signaux courts répétitifs) Description Remède suggéré36 Dépannage DATA ERROR (ERREUR D E DONNÉES) — Le disque dur ne peut pas lire les données. DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY (MÉMOIRE DISPONIBLE RÉDUITE) — Un ou plusieurs modules de mémoire peuvent être défectueux ou mal fixés. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION (ÉCHEC D E L’INITIALISATION D U DISQUE C:) — L’initialisation du disque dur a échoué. Exécutez les tests de disque dur de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). DRIVE NOT READY (LE LECTEUR N’EST PAS PRÊT) — L’opération requiert la présence d’un disque dur dans la baie pour pouvoir continuer. Installez un disque dur dans la baie de disque dur. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. ERROR READING PCMCIA CARD (ERREUR LORS D E L A LECTURE D E L A CARTE PCMCIA) — L’ordinateur ne peut pas identifier la carte ExpressCard. Réinsérez la carte ou essayez une autre carte. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED (LA TAILLE D E L A MÉMOIRE ÉTENDUE A CHANGÉ) — La quantité de mémoire enregistrée dans la mémoire non volatile (NVRAM) ne correspond pas à la mémoire installée sur l’ordinateur. Redémarrez l’ordinateur. Si l’erreur apparaît de nouveau, contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE (LE FICHIER EN COURS D E COPIE EST TROP VOLUMINEUX POUR L E LECTEUR D E DESTINATION) — Le fichier que vous essayez de copier est trop volumineux pour le disque ou le disque est plein. Essayez de copier le fichier sur un autre disque ou utilisez un disque de capacité plus élevée. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: (UN NOM DE FICHIER NE PEUT CONTENIR AUCUN DES CARACTÈRES SUIVANTS :) \ / : * ? “ < > | — N’utilisez pas ces caractères dans les noms de fichiers. GATE A20 FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D E L A VOIE D’ACCÈS A20) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. Dépannage 37 GENERAL FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE GÉNÉRALE) — Le système d’exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la commande. Ce message est généralement suivi d’informations spécifiques telles que Printer out of paper (Plus de papier dans l’imprimante). Effectuez l’action corrective appropriée. HARD-DISK CONFIGURATION ERROR (ERREUR D E CONFIGURATION D U DISQUE DUR) — L’ordinateur ne peut pas identifier le type de disque. Arrêtez l’ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com), puis démarrez l’ordinateur à partir d’un CD. Ensuite, arrêtz l’ordinateur, réinstallez le disque dur et redémarrez. Exécutez les tests de disque dur de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0 (DÉFAILLANCE D U CONTRÔLEUR D E DISQUE DUR 0) — Le disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l’ordinateur. Arrêtez l’ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com), puis démarrez l’ordinateur à partir d’un CD. Ensuite, arrêtz l’ordinateur, réinstallez le disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, essayez avec un autre disque. Exécutez les tests de disque dur de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D U DISQUE DUR) — Le disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l’ordinateur. Arrêtez l’ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com), puis démarrez l’ordinateur à partir d’un CD. Ensuite, arrêtz l’ordinateur, réinstallez le disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, essayez avec un autre disque. Exécutez les tests de disque dur de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D U DISQUE DUR) — Le disque dur est peut-être défectueux. Arrêtez l’ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com), puis démarrez l’ordinateur à partir d’un CD. Ensuite, arrêtz l’ordinateur, réinstallez le disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, essayez avec un autre disque. Exécutez les tests de disque dur de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA (INTRODUISEZ UN SUPPORT AMORÇABLE) — Le système d’exploitation tente de démarrer un support non amorçable, tel qu’une disquette ou un CD. Introduisez un support amorçable.38 Dépannage INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (INFORMATIONS D E CONFIGURATION NON VALIDES. EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — Les informations de configuration du système ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle. C’est après l’installation d’un module de mémoire que ce message est le plus susceptible d’apparaître. Corrigez les options appropriées dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L A LIGNE D E L’HORLOGE CLAVIER) — Dans le cas de claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test du contrôleur de clavier de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D U CONTRÔLEUR D E CLAVIER) — Dans le cas de claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l’ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou la souris durant la procédure d’amorçage. Exécutez le test du contrôleur de clavier de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E DONNÉES D U CLAVIER) — Dans le cas de claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test du contrôleur de clavier de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE (TOUCHE D U CLAVIER BLOQUÉE) — Dans le cas de pavés numériques et de claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l’ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou les touches durant la procédure d’amorçage. Exécutez le test Stuck Key (Touche bloquée) de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). LICENSED CONTENT I S NOT ACCESSIBLE IN MEDIADIRECT (DU CONTENU SOUS LICENCE N’EST PAS ACCESSIBLE DANS MEDIADIRECT) — Dell™ MediaDirect™ ne peut pas vérifier restrictions appliquées au fichier en matière de gestion des droits numériques (DRM) ; le fichier ne peut donc pas être lu (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D’ADRESSE MÉMOIRE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. Dépannage 39 MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR (ERREUR D’ALLOCATION D E MÉMOIRE) — Le logiciel que vous voulez utiliser entre en conflit avec le système d’exploitation ou un autre programme ou utilitaire. Arrêtez l’ordinateur, patientez 30 secondes, puis redémarrez-le. Essayez à nouveau d’utiliser le programme. Si le message d’erreur réapparaît, consultez la documentation du logiciel. MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E DONNÉES À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LOGIQUE DOUBLE MOT À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LOGIQUE PAIR/IMPAIR À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE/ÉCRITURE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les le cas échéant. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D’AMORÇAGE N’EST DISPONIBLE) — L’ordinateur ne détecte pas le disque dur. Si le disque dur est votre périphérique d’amorçage, assurez-vous qu’il est installé, bien en place et partitionné comme périphérique d’amorçage. NO BOOT SECTOR ON HARD DRIVE (AUCUN SECTEUR D’AMORÇAGE SUR L E DISQUE DUR) — Le système d’exploitation est peut-être endommagé. Contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D’HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). 40 Dépannage NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN (MÉMOIRE O U RESSOURCES INSUFFISANTES. FERMEZ DES PROGRAMMES E T RÉESSAYEZ) — Trop de programmes sont ouverts. Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme que vous souhaitez utiliser. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND (SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATION INTROUVABLE) — Réinstallez le disque dur (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM (SOMME D E CONTRÔLE D E L A MÉMOIRE MORTE EN OPTION ERRONÉE) — La mémoire morte en option est défectueuse. Contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND (UN FICHIER .DLL REQUIS EST INTROUVABLE) — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d’ouvrir. Supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. Microsoft® Windows Vista® : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista → Panneau de configuration→ Programmes→ Programmes et fonctionnalités. 2 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur Désinstaller. 4 Consultez la documentation du programme pour obtenir des instructions d’installation. Microsoft Windows® XP: 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Ajout/suppression de programmes→ Modifier ou supprimer des programmes. 2 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur Désinstaller. 4 Consultez la documentation du programme pour obtenir des instructions d’installation. SECTOR NOT FOUND (SECTEUR INTROUVABLE) — Le système d’exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver un secteur sur le disque dur. Votre disque dur contient probablement un secteur défectueux ou une table d’allocation de fichiers (FAT) endommagée. Exécutez l’utilitaire de vérification des erreurs Windows pour vérifier la structure des fichiers du disque dur. Reportez-vous à la rubrique Aide et support de Windows pour obtenir des instructions (cliquez sur Démarrer→ Aide et support). Si un grand nombre de secteurs sont défectueux, sauvegardez les données (si vous le pouvez), puis reformatez le disque dur.Dépannage 41 SEEK ERROR (ERREUR D E RECHERCHE) — Le système d’exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver une piste particulière sur le disque dur. SHUTDOWN FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L’ARRÊT) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER (PERTE D’ALIMENTATION D E L’HORLOGE MACHINE) — Les paramètres de configuration du système sont corrompus. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, essayez de restaurer les données en ouvrant le programme de configuration du système, puis en quittant immédiatement le programme (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). Si le message réapparaît, contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK STOPPED (ARRÊT D E L’HORLOGE MACHINE) — La batterie de réserve qui alimente les paramètres de configuration du système doit peut- être être rechargée. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71). TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (L’HEURE N’EST PAS CONFIGURÉE. EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — L’heure ou la date du programme de configuration du système ne correspond pas à celle de l’horloge du système. Corrigez les paramètres des options Date et Heure. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour plus d’informations. TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED (ÉCHEC D U COMPTEUR 2 D E LA PUCE D’HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE (INTERRUPTION INATTENDUE EN MODE PROTÉGÉ) — Le contrôleur du clavier présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement ou un module de mémoire est mal fixé. Exécutez les tests System Memory (mémoire système) de Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY (X:\ N’EST PAS ACCESSIBLE. LE PÉRIPHÉRIQUE N’EST PAS PRÊT) — Insérez un disque dans le lecteur et réessayez.42 Dépannage WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW (AVERTISSEMENT : L E NIVEAU D E CHARGE D E L A BATTERIE EST CRITIQUE) — La batterie est pratiquement déchargée. Remplacez la batterie ou branchez l’ordinateur à une prise secteur ; sinon, activez le mode de mise en veille prolongée ou arrêtez l’ordinateur. Messages système REMARQUE : si le message affiché par l’ordinateur ne figure pas dans la liste suivante, reportez-vous à la documentation du système d’exploitation ou du programme qui était en cours d’exécution lorsque l’incident s’est produit. ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T CHECKPOINT [NNNN]. FO R HELP IN RESOLVING THIS PROBLEM, PLEASE NOTE THIS CHECKPOINT AND CONTACT DELL TECHNICAL SUPPORT (ALERTE! LE S TENTATIVES D E DÉPANNAGE ONT ÉCHOUÉ A U POINT D E CONTRÔLE [NNNN]. POUR VOUS AIDER À RÉSOUDRE C E PROBLÈME, NOTEZ C E POINT D E CONTRÔLE E T CONTACTEZ L E SUPPORT TECHNIQUE DELL). — L’ordinateur n’a pas réussi la procédure d’amorçage trois fois de suite à cause de la même erreur (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71 pour de l’aide). CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR (ERREUR D E SOMME D E CONTRÔLE CMOS) — Possible system board failure or RTC battery low (Défaillance possible de la carte système ou batterie RTC déchargée) Remplacez la batterie. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com ou reportez-vous à la section « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71 pour de l’aide. CPU FAN FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D U VENTILATEUR D U PROCESSEUR) — Défaillance du ventilateur du processeur. Remplacez le ventilateur du processeur. Voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com. HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D U DISQUE DUR) — Défaillance possible du disque dur au cours de l’auto-test de démarrage du disque dur. Vérifiez les câbles, échangez les disques durs ou voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71 pour obtenir de l’aide. HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D U DISQUE DUR) — Défaillance possible du disque dur au cours du test de démarrage du disque dur (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71 pour obtenir de l’aide). KEYBOARD FAILURE (DÉFAILLANCE D U CLAVIER) — Défaillance du clavier ou câble du clavier mal branché.Dépannage 43 NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D’AMORÇAGE N’EST DISPONIBLE) — Pas de partition d’amorçage sur le disque dur, ou le câble du disque dur est mal connecté, ou aucun périphérique amorçable n’est utilisé. • Si le disque dur est le périphérique d’amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles sont branchés, et que le disque est installé et partitionné comme périphérique d’amorçage. • Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les informations de séquence d’amorçage sont correctes (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D’HORLOGE) — • Une puce de la carte système présente un dysfonctionnement ou la carte système est défectueuse (voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71 pour obtenir de l’aide). USB OVER CURRENT ERROR (ERREUR D E SURINTENSITÉ USB) — • Déconnectez le périphérique USB. Utilisez une source d’alimentation externe pour le périphérique USB. NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE. DELL RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY. A PARAMETER OUT O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM (AVIS – LE SYSTÈME D E SURVEILLANCE AUTOMATIQUE D U DISQUE DUR SIGNALE Q U’UN PARAMÈTRE A DÉPASSÉ S A PLAGE D’UTILISATION NORMALE. DELL RECOMMANDE D E SAUVEGARDER RÉGULIÈREMENT VOS DONNÉES. UN PARAMÈTRE HORS PLAGE PEUT SIGNALER O U NON UN PROBLÈME POTENTIEL SUR L E DISQUE DUR). — • Erreur SMART, défaillance possible du disque dur. Cette fonction peut être activée ou désactivée dans le programme de configuration du système. Résolution des problèmes matériels et logiciels Si un périphérique n’est pas détecté lors de la configuration du système d’exploitation ou s’il est détecté mais pas correctement configuré, vous pouvez utiliser le dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité.44 Dépannage Pour démarrer le dépanneur des conflits matériels : Windows Vista : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Aide et support. 2 Entrez Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ de recherche puis appuyez sur pour lancer la recherche. 3 Dans les résultats de recherche, sélectionnez l’option décrivant le mieux le problème et suivez les étapes suivantes de dépannage. Windows XP: 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Aide et support. 2 Entrez Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ de recherche puis appuyez sur pour lancer la recherche. 3 Dans la section Résolution d’un problème, cliquez sur Dépanneur des conflits matériels. 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur des conflits matériels, sélectionnez l’option décrivant le mieux le problème puis cliquez sur Suivant pour accéder aux étapes suivantes de dépannage. Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la section Problèmes de blocage et problèmes logiciels (voir « Problèmes de blocage et problèmes logiciels » à la page 49) et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Il est recommandé d’imprimer ces procédures avant de commencer. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne que sur les ordinateurs Dell. REMARQUE : le support Dell Drivers and Utilities est en option et n’est pas obligatoirement fourni avec tous les ordinateurs.Dépannage 45 Reportez-vous au Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com pour consulter les informations de configuration de votre ordinateur, puis vérifiez que le périphérique à tester s’affiche dans le programme de configuration du système et est actif. Démarrez Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur ou du support Drivers and Utilities de Dell. Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur REMARQUE : si aucune image ne s’affiche, voir « Pour prendre contact avec Dell » à la page 71. 1 Vérifiez que l’ordinateur est relié à une prise secteur dont le fonctionnement a été vérifié. 2 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Sélectionnez Diagnostics dans le menu d’amorçage et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : si vous attendez trop longtemps et si le logo du système d’exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu’à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s’affiche ; arrêtez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. REMARQUE : si un message apparaît pour indiquer qu’aucune partition de diagnostic n’a été trouvée, lancez Dell Diagnostics depuis le support Drivers and Utilities. 4 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de l’utilitaire de diagnostics de votre disque dur, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du support Drivers and Utilities de Dell 1 Insérez le support Drivers and Utilities. 2 Arrêtez puis redémarrez l’ordinateur. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : si vous attendez trop longtemps et si le logo du système d’exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu’à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s’affiche ; arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative.46 Dépannage REMARQUE : la procédure ci-dessous modifie la séquence d’amorçage pour un seul démarrage. Au démarrage suivant, l’ordinateur traitera l’ordre des périphériques d’amorçage comme indiqué dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Quand la liste des périphériques d’amorçage apparaît, sélectionnez CD/DVD/CD-RW et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l’option Boot from CD-ROM (Démarrer à partir du CDROM) sur le menu qui apparaît et appuyez sur . 5 Tapez 1 pour démarrer le menu du CD et appuyez sur pour poursuivre. 6 Sélectionnez Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits) dans la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions figurent dans la liste, sélectionnez la version appropriée pour votre ordinateur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics apparaît, sélectionnez le test à exécuter, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Conseils de dépannage Lorsque vous dépannez votre ordinateur, suivez les conseils ci-dessous : • Si vous avez ajouté ou retiré une pièce avant que le problème ne survienne, consultez la procédure d’installation et vérifiez que la pièce est correctement installée (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). • Si un périphérique ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez qu’il est correctement connecté. • Si un message d’erreur apparaît à l’écran, notez-le mot pour mot. Ce message peut aider le personnel du support à diagnostiquer et à résoudre le ou les problèmes. • Si un message d’erreur apparaît dans un programme, consultez la documentation de ce programme. REMARQUE : les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l’affichage par défaut de Windows, par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell est réglé sur le mode d’affichage classique de Windows.Dépannage 47 Problèmes d’alimentation PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, respectez les informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. SI L E VOYANT D’ALIMENTATION EST ÉTEINT — L’ordinateur est éteint ou n’est pas alimenté. • Reconnectez le cordon d’alimentation au connecteur situé à l’arrière de l’ordinateur et à la prise secteur. • Supprimez les barrettes d’alimentation, rallonges de câble et autres dispositifs de protection d’alimentation pour vérifier que l’ordinateur s’allume normalement. • Vérifiez que les barrettes d’alimentation utilisées sont branchées sur une prise secteur et allumées. • Vérifiez que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, telle une lampe, par exemple. • Vérifiez que le câble d’alimentation principal et que le câble du panneau avant sont fermement connectés à la carte système (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). SI L E VOYANT D’ALIMENTATION EST BLEU E T SI L’ORDINATEUR N E RÉPOND PAS — • Vérifiez que l’écran est connecté et sous tension. • Si l’écran est connecté et sous tension, voir « Codes sonores » à la page 33. SI L E VOYANT D’ALIMENTATION EST BLEU CLIGNOTANT — L’ordinateur est en mode veille. Appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation pour revenir au fonctionnement normal. SI L E VOYANT D’ALIMENTATION EST ORANGE CLIGNOTANT — L’ordinateur est alimenté, il se peut qu’un périphérique fonctionne mal ou soit mal installé. • Retirez, puis réinstallez tous les modules de mémoire (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). • Retirez et réinstallez toutes les cartes d’extension, y compris les cartes graphiques (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com).48 Dépannage SI L E VOYANT D’ALIMENTATION EST ORANGE FIXE — Il y a un problème d’alimentation ; il se peut qu’un périphérique fonctionne mal ou soit mal installé. • Vérifiez que le câble d’alimentation du processeur est fermement connecté au connecteur d’alimentation de la carte système (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). • Vérifiez que le câble d’alimentation principal et que le câble du panneau avant sont fermement connectés au connecteur de la carte système (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). ÉLIMINEZ LES INTERFÉRENCES — Les interférences peuvent être dues à divers facteurs : • Rallonges pour le câble d’alimentation, le câble du clavier et celui de la souris • Trop de périphériques connectés à une même barrette d’alimentation • Plusieurs barrettes d’alimentation raccordées à la même prise secteur Problèmes de mémoire PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, respectez les informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. SI UN MESSAGE D E MÉMOIRE INSUFFISANTE S’AFFICHE — • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes que vous n’utilisez pas pour vérifier si cela permet de résoudre le problème. • Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel pour connaître la mémoire minimale requise. Le cas échéant, installez davantage de mémoire (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com) pour vérifier que votre ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). SI VOUS RENCONTREZ D’AUTRES PROBLÈMES D E MÉMOIRE — • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com) pour vérifier que votre ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire.Dépannage 49 • Veillez à suivre les consignes d’installation de la mémoire (voir votre Guide technique sur le site support.dell.com). • Vérifiez que la mémoire utilisée est compatible avec votre ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, voir « Mémoire » à la page 24. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 44). Problèmes de blocage et problèmes logiciels PRÉCAUTION : avant de commencer une procédure de cette section, respectez les informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. L’ordinateur ne démarre pas VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E CÂBLE D’ALIMENTATION EST BIEN CONNECTÉ À L’ORDINATEUR E T À LA PRISE SECTEUR. L’ordinateur ne répond plus AVIS : vous pouvez perdre des données si vous n’arrivez pas à arrêter correctement le système d’exploitation. ÉTEIGNEZ L’ORDINATEUR — Si vous n’obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes (jusqu’à ce que l’ordinateur s’éteigne), puis redémarrez votre ordinateur. Un programme ne répond plus ARRÊTEZ L E PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur pour accéder au Gestionnaire de tâches et cliquez sur l’onglet Applications. 2 Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus, puis sur Fin de tâche. Un programme se bloque fréquemment REMARQUE : les logiciels sont généralement fournis avec des instructions d’installation contenues dans la documentation, sur disquette, sur CD ou sur DVD. CONSULTEZ LA DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL — Le cas échéant, désinstallez, puis réinstallez le programme.50 Dépannage Un programme est conçu pour une version antérieure du système d’exploitation Microsoft® Windows® EXÉCUTEZ L’ASSISTANT COMPATIBILITÉ DES PROGRAMMES — Windows Vista : L’Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu’il fonctionne dans un environnement voisin des environnements des systèmes d’exploitation non Windows Vista. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration→ Programmes→ Utiliser un programme plus ancien avec cette version de Windows. 2 Dans l’écran d’accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Windows XP: L’Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu’il fonctionne dans un environnement voisin des environnements des systèmes d’exploitation non XP. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Assistant Compatibilité des programmes→ Suivant. 2 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Un écran bleu apparaît ÉTEIGNEZ L’ORDINATEUR — Si vous n’obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes (jusqu’à ce que l’ordinateur s’éteigne), puis redémarrez votre ordinateur. Autres incidents logiciels CONSULTEZ LA DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL O U CONTACTEZ L E FABRICANT POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS D E DÉPANNAGE — • Vérifiez que le programme est compatible avec le système d’exploitation installé sur l’ordinateur. • Vérifiez que l’ordinateur possède la configuration matérielle minimale requise par le logiciel. Voir la documentation du logiciel pour plus d’informations.Dépannage 51 • Vérifiez que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. • Vérifiez que les pilotes de périphériques n’entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. • Le cas échéant, désinstallez, puis réinstallez le programme. SAUVEGARDEZ VOS FICHIERS IMMÉDIATEMENT • Utilisez un programme de recherche des virus pour vérifier le disque dur, les disquettes, les CD ou DVD. • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ou programmes ouverts, puis arrêtez l’ordinateur à l’aide du menu Démarrer. Service Dell Technical Update Le service Dell Technical Update fournit une notification proactive par courrier électronique des mises à jour matérielles et logicielles pour votre ordinateur. Ce service gratuit est personnalisable en termes de contenu, de format et de fréquence de réception des notifications. Pour vous abonner au service Dell Technical Update, visitez le site Web suivant : support.dell.com/technicalupdate. Dell Support Utility Le programme Dell Support Utility installé sur votre ordinateur est accessible en cliquant sur l’icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du bouton Démarrer. Ce programme permet d’obtenir des informations d’auto-assistance, des mises à jour de logiciels et des contrôles de bon fonctionnement de votre environnement informatique. Accès à Dell Support Utility Accédez à Dell Support Utility en cliquant sur l’icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du menu Démarrer. Si l’icône Dell Support n’apparaît pas dans la barre des tâches : 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Dell Support→ Paramètres de support Dell. 2 Vérifiez que l’option Afficher l’icône dans la barre des tâches est cochée. REMARQUE : si Dell Support Utility n’est pas accessible depuis le menu Démarrer, consultez le site support.dell.com pour télécharger le logiciel. 52 Dépannage Le programme Dell Support Utility est personnalisé pour votre environnement informatique. L’icône figurant dans la barre des tâches fonctionne différemment lorsque vous cliquez, double-cliquez ou cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit. Clic sur l’icône Dell Support Un clic ou un clic droit sur l’icône permet d’effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Contrôle de votre environnement informatique. • Consultation des paramètres de Dell Support Utility. • Accès au fichier d’aide de Dell Support Utility. • Consultation des questions les plus courantes. • Approfondissement de Dell Support Utility. • Désactivation de Dell Support Utility. Double-clic sur l’icône Dell Support Un double-clic sur l’icône permet de vérifier manuellement votre environnement informatique, de consulter les questions les plus fréquentes, d’accéder au fichier d’aide de Dell Support Utility et de consulter les paramètres de support Dell. Pour plus d’informations sur Dell Support Utility, cliquez sur le point d’interrogation (?) en haut de l’écran Dell™ Support.Réinstallation du logiciel 53 Réinstallation du logiciel Pilotes Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un périphérique, identifiez le pilote à l’origine de l’incident et mettez-le à jour, le cas échéant. Microsoft® Windows Vista® : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista™ et cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés→ Gestionnaire de périphériques. REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur peut apparaître. Si vous êtes administrateur de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer; sinon, prenez contact avec votre administrateur pour poursuivre. Microsoft Windows® XP: 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance, puis sur Système. 3 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel et sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. Faites défiler la liste pour voir si l’icône des périphériques comporte un point d’exclamation (un cercle jaune et un [!]). Lorsqu’un point d’exclamation se trouve en regard du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau (voir « Réinstallation de pilotes et d’utilitaires » à la page 54).54 Réinstallation du logiciel Réinstallation de pilotes et d’utilitaires AVIS : le site web de support technique Dell accessible sur le site support.dell.com et votre support Drivers and Utilities fournissent des pilotes approuvés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d’autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Retour à une version antérieure du pilote de périphérique Windows Vista : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista et cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés→ Gestionnaire de périphériques. REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur peut apparaître. Si vous êtes administrateur de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer; sinon, prenez contact avec votre administrateur pour accéder au gestionnaire de périphériques. 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Pilote→ Version précédente. Windows XP: 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Poste de travail→ Propriétés→ Matériel→ Gestionnaire de périphériques. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Pilote→ Revenir à la version précédente. Si le retour à la version précédente du pilote ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (voir « Restauration du système d’exploitation » à la page 56) pour que votre ordinateur revienne à l’état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait avant que vous n’installiez le nouveau pilote.Réinstallation du logiciel 55 Utilisation du support Drivers and Utilities Si le retour à la version précédente du pilote ou la Restauration du système (voir « Restauration du système d’exploitation » à la page 56) ne résolvent pas le problème, réinstallez le pilote depuis le support Drivers and Utilities. 1 Affichez le bureau Windows et insérez votre support F. Si vous utilisez le support Drivers and Utilities pour la première fois, passez à l’étape 2. Sinon, passez à l’étape 5. 2 Lorsque le programme d’installation du support Drivers and Utilities démarre, suivez les invites à l’écran. REMARQUE : dans la plupart des cas, le programme Drivers and Utilities démarre automatiquement. Si ce n’est pas le cas, démarrez l’explorateur Windows, cliquez sur le répertoire du lecteur pour afficher le contenu du support, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier autorcd.exe. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre InstallShield Wizard Complete (Fin de l’Assistant InstallShield) apparaît, retirez le support Drivers and Utilities et cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l’ordinateur. 4 Une fois le bureau Windows affiché, réinsérez le support Drivers and Utilities. 5 Sur l’écran Welcome Dell System Owner (Bienvenue au propriétaire du système Dell), cliquez sur Next (Suivant). REMARQUE : le programme Drivers and Utilities n’affiche des pilotes que pour le matériel installé sur votre ordinateur. Si vous avez installé du matériel supplémentaire, les pilotes de ce nouveau matériel peuvent ne pas être affichés. Si ces pilotes n’apparaissent pas, quittez le programme Drivers and Utilities. Pour plus d’informations sur les pilotes, voir la documentation fournie avec le périphérique. Un message indiquant que le support Resource (Ressources) a détecté un nouveau matériel sur votre ordinateur s’affiche. Les pilotes utilisés par votre ordinateur apparaissent automatiquement dans la fenêtre My Drivers—The ResourceCD has identified these components in your system (Mes pilotes - le CD ResourceCD a identifié ces composants sur votre système). 6 Cliquez sur le pilote à réinstaller et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Si un pilote particulier n’apparaît pas, c’est qu’il n’est pas nécessaire pour votre système d’exploitation.56 Réinstallation du logiciel Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes Après avoir extrait les pilotes sur votre disque dur comme indiqué dans la section ci-dessus : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista et cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés→ Gestionnaire de périphériques. REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur peut apparaître. Si vous êtes administrateur de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer; sinon, prenez contact avec votre administrateur pour accéder au gestionnaire de périphériques. 3 Double-cliquez sur le type du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote (par exemple, Audio ou Vidéo). 4 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Pilote→ Mettre à jour le pilote→ Rechercher un pilote logiciel sur mon ordinateur. 6 Cliquez sur Parcourir et accéder à l’endroit où vous avez précédemment copié les pilotes. 7 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez dessus→ OK→ Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l’ordinateur. Restauration du système d’exploitation Pour restaurer le système d’exploitation, vous disposez de plusieurs méthodes : • La fonction Restauration du système de Windows ramène votre ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur, sans affecter les fichiers de données. Utilisez-la en priorité pour restaurer le système d’exploitation et préserver les fichiers de données. • Dell Factory Image Restore (disponible sous Windows Vista) permet de ramener votre disque dur à l’état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l’ordinateur. Ce programme supprime définitivement toutes les données du disque dur et tous les programmes installés après réception de l’ordinateur. N’utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore que si la fonction Restauration du système n’a pas résolu le problème de votre système d’exploitation.Réinstallation du logiciel 57 • Si vous avez reçu le support Operating System avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l’utiliser pour restaurer votre système d’exploitation. Toutefois, l’utilisation du support Operating System supprime aussi toutes les données du disque dur. N’utilisez ce support que si la Restauration du système n’a pas résolu le problème de votre système d’exploitation. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® Le système d’exploitation Windows propose la fonction Restauration du système, qui permet de restaurer l’ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si des modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l’ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Toute modification apportée à votre ordinateur par la fonction Restauration du système est complètement réversible. AVIS : sauvegardez régulièrement vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne permet ni de les surveiller ni de les récupérer. REMARQUE : les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l’affichage par défaut de Windows. Par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell™ est réglé sur le mode d’affichage classique de Windows. REMARQUE : paramétrez votre ordinateur Dell™ sur l’affichage classique de Windows. Lancement de la fonction Restauration du système Windows Vista : 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2 Dans la case Rechercher, tapez Restauration du système et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur peut apparaître. Si vous êtes administrateur de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer; sinon, prenez contact avec votre administrateur pour poursuivre l’action souhaitée. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les invites à l’écran. Si la fonction Restauration du système n’a pas résolu le problème, vous pouvez annuler la dernière restauration du système (voir « Annulation de la dernière restauration du système » à la page 58).58 Réinstallation du logiciel Windows XP: AVIS : avant de restaurer l’ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes en cours d’exécution. Vous ne devez en aucun cas modifier, ouvrir ou supprimer des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n’est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→ Restauration du système. 2 Cliquez soit sur Restaurer mon ordinateur à un état antérieur, soit sur Créer un point de restauration. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les invites à l’écran. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : avant d’annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes en cours d’exécution. Vous ne devez en aucun cas modifier, ouvrir ou supprimer des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n’est pas terminée. Windows Vista : 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2 Dans la case Rechercher, tapez Restauration du système et appuyez sur . 3 Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration puis sur Suivant. Windows XP: 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→ Restauration du système. 2 Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration puis sur Suivant. Activation de la Restauration du système REMARQUE : Windows Vista ne désactive pas la restauration du système, quel que soit l’espace disque disponible. Les étapes suivantes ne sont donc applicables qu’à Windows XP. Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d’espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Réinstallation du logiciel 59 Pour voir si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Performances et maintenance→ Système. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Restauration du système et vérifiez que l’option Désactiver la Restauration du système n’est pas cochée. Utilisation de Dell™ Factory Image Restore AVIS : Dell Factory Image Restore supprime définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur ainsi que tous les programmes et tous les pilotes installés après que vous avez reçu l’ordinateur. Dans la mesure du possible, sauvegardez toutes vos données avant d’utiliser cette option. N’utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore que si la fonction Restauration du système n’a pas résolu le problème de votre système d’exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell Factory Image Restore peut ne pas être disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. N’utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore (Windows Vista) qu’en dernier recours pour restaurer le système d’exploitation. Cette option restaure le disque dur à l’état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l’ordinateur. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les documents, feuilles de calcul, messages électroniques, photos numériques et fichiers de musique sont des exemples de fichiers de données. Dans la mesure du possible, sauvegardez toutes vos données avant d’utiliser Factory Image Restore. Windows Vista : Dell Factory Image Restore 1 Mettez l’ordinateur sous tension. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez plusieurs fois sur afin d’accéder à la fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées de Vista. 2 Sélectionnez Réparer votre ordinateur. La fenêtre Options de récupération système apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez une disposition de clavier, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Pour accéder aux options de réparation, ouvrez une session en tant qu’utilisateur local. Pour accéder à l’invite de commandes, tapez administrateur dans le champ Nom d’utilisateur, puis cliquez sur OK.60 Réinstallation du logiciel 5 Cliquez sur Dell Factory Image Restore. REMARQUE : selon votre configuration, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner Dell Factory Tools (Outils d’usine Dell), puis Dell Factory Image Restore (Restauration d’image d’usine Dell). L’écran de bienvenue de Dell Factory Image Restore apparaît. 6 Cliquez sur Suivant. L’écran Confirm Data Deletion (Confirmer la suppression des données) apparaît. AVIS : si vous ne souhaitez pas effectuer la restauration d’image d’usine, cliquez sur Cancel (Annuler). 7 Cochez la case pour confirmer que vous souhaitez poursuivre le reformatage du disque dur et la restauration du logiciel système à l’état d’origine, puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant). La procédure de restauration démarre ; elle peut prendre 5 minutes ou plus. Un message apparaît lorsque le système d’exploitation et les applications pré-installées en usine ont été restaurés à leur état de sortie d’usine. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer votre ordinateur. Utilisation du support Operating System Avant de commencer Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le système d’exploitation Windows pour corriger un problème avec un nouveau pilote, commencez par utiliser la fonction de retour à une version précédente du pilote de Windows. Voir « Retour à une version antérieure du pilote de périphérique » à la page 54. Si la fonction de retour à une version précédente du pilote ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows pour que votre système d’exploitation revienne à l’état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait avant l’installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Voir « Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® » à la page 57. AVIS : avant de commencer l’installation, sauvegardez tous les fichiers de données se trouvant sur le disque dur principal. Pour les configurations de disque dur conventionnelles, le disque dur principal correspond au premier disque dur détecté par l’ordinateur.Réinstallation du logiciel 61 Pour réinstaller Windows, vous avez besoin des supports Operating System et Drivers and Utilities de Dell™.

Adresses complètes sur CD ROM,  téléphone, Fax, emails, nom du dirigeant, etc. Exports illimités ! CLIQUEZ ICI